AI Tipiṭaka Translations
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Khuddasikkhā-mūlasikkhā
Khuddasikkhā-mūlasikkhā
Khuddasikkhā
Khuddasikkhā
Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory verses
(Ka)
(Ka)
Ādito upasampanna-sikkhitabbaṃ samātikaṃ;
Having paid homage to the Triple Gem, I will explain Khuddasikkha which should be learned by one who is newly ordained, along with its summary.
Tatrāyaṃ mātikā–
Here is the summary—
(Kha)
(Kha)
Pārājikā ca cattāro, garukā nava cīvaraṃ;
The four Pārājikas, the nine weighty Saṅghādisesas, robes, dyes, bowl, and trays, and invitation.
(Ga)
(Ga)
Kālikā ca paṭiggāho, maṃsesu ca akappiyaṃ;
The Kālikas, acceptance, what is Unallowable in meats, Nissaggiyas Pācittiyas, grounds suitable for a Samaṇa.
(Gha)
(Gha)
Upajjhācariyavattāni, vaccappassāvaṭhānikaṃ;
The duties to preceptor and teacher, the location of urine and excrement, asking permission, going naked, allowable bathing, and not venerating.
(Ṅa)
(Ṅa)
Cammaṃ upāhanā ceva, anolokiyamañjanī;
Leather and shoes, not looking, collyrium, unallowable beds, and also sitting together.
(Ca)
(Ca)
Asaṃvāsiko ca kammaṃ, micchājīvavivajjanā;
Non-cohabitation, abstaining from wrong livelihood, duties and disallowing, dependence and the waistband.
(Cha)
(Cha)
Pathavī ca parikkhāro, bhesajjuggahadūsanaṃ;
Earth and requisites, rejecting medicine and defilement, Vassūpanāyikā and A গুরুত্বপূর্ণbhaṅgiyaṃ, miscellaneous matters.
(Ja)
(Ja)
Desanā chandadānādi, uposathappavāraṇā;
Preaching, giving consent, etc., Uposatha and Pavāraṇā; restraint, purity, contentment and the four preservations, Vipassanā.
1. Pārājikaniddeso
1. Explanation of the Pārājikas
Pārājikā ca cattāroti –
The four Pārājikas –
1.
1.
Maggattaye anikkhittasikkho santhatasanthate;
Without abandoning the training in the act of sexual intercourse, even if it is the size of a sesame seed, with the intention attached to the path to sexual intercourse, in a covered place or an open place.
2.
2.
Asanthatamupādiṇṇaṃ, pavesanto cutotha vā;
If he touches what is not covered, while entering, dying or moving; one who is successful at the moment of entering, staying, lifting, and entering.
3.
3.
Ādiyeyya hareyyāvahareyya iriyāpathaṃ;
Should he cause to take, cause to steal, cause to remove, concerning deportment; should he enrage, should he drive out of the place, should he violate the agreement.
4.
4.
Adinnaṃ theyyacittena, bhave pārājikotha vā;
If he commits theft with the intention of stealing, it becomes Pārājika; taking by theft, force, trickery, concealment or contrivance; the decision here depends on the value, time and place of the goods.
5.
5.
Manussaviggahaṃ cicca, jīvitā vā viyojaye;
Intentionally depriving a human being of life, or setting up a weapon with the intention of causing death.
6.
6.
Gāheyya maraṇūpāyaṃ, vadeyya maraṇe guṇaṃ;
Should he use a means of death, should he speak of the qualities of death; death by effort, by his own hand, by abandonment, by impermanence, by stability.
7.
7.
Iddhivijjāmayā kālavatthāvudhiriyāpathā;
Psychic power, knowledge, the right time, matter, weapon, deportment; specific action, opportunity, six commands, regulatory.
8.
8.
Jhānādibheda nosantamattanattupanāyikaṃ;
The kinds of Jhāna and so on, not being, or being, he applies it to himself; making each like a storehouse, relying on the present existence.
9.
9.
Aññāpadesarahitaṃ, dīpentonadhimāniko;
Without indirect speech, boasting of being a discoverer of the undying; through bodily or verbal intimation, when understood, he is fallen.
10.
10.
Pārājikete cattāro, asaṃvāsā yathā pure;
These four Pārājikas, like before, are non-cohabitation; incapable of being a bhikkhu, like one whose head is cut off, incapable of living.
11.
11.
Pariyāyo ca āṇatti, tatiye dutiye pana;
Pariyāyo and Āṇatti in the third, and in the second; only Āṇatti in the remaining, these two are not obtained.
12.
12.
Sevetukāmatācittaṃ, magge maggappavesanaṃ;
The intention of wanting to engage, entering the path to the path; wise men say that these are the two factors of sexual intercourse.
13.
13.
Manussasaṃ tathāsaññī, theyyacittañca vatthuno;
A human being, likewise perception of a human being, and the intention of stealing the object; heaviness and removal, are the causes for taking what is not given.
14.
14.
Pāṇo mānussako pāṇa-saññitā ghātacetanā;
A being, perception of a human being, intention of killing; effort and death from that, these five are the causes of killing.
15.
15.
Asantatā attani pāpamicchatā-
Without being, desiring evil in himself— That avowal, that being of human birth; No indirect speech, and knowing just that, These five are the factors in avowing non-being.
16.
16.
Asādhāraṇā cattāro, bhikkhunīnamabhabbakā;
Four are not shared, incapable for bhikkhunīs; also eleven confused, bhikkhunī Mudupiṭṭhiko.
17.
17.
Lambī mukhena gaṇhanto, aṅgajātaṃ parassa ca;
Holding the sexual organ of another with the mouth, and sitting down just there; these four are in accordance.
18.
18.
Magge maggappavesanā, methunassa idhāgatā;
Entering the path to the path, here included in sexual intercourse; the reconciliation of these twenty-four, are the Pārājikas.
2. Saṅghādisesaniddeso
2. Explanation of the Saṅghādisesas
Garukānavāti –
The nine weighty offences–
19.
19.
Mocetukāmatā sukka-ssupakkamma vimocayaṃ;
Wanting to ejaculate semen, approaching and ejaculating; other than by involuntary emission in a dream, a Samaṇa incurs a weighty offence by touching.
20.
20.
Itthisaññī manussitthiṃ, kāyasaṃsaggarāgavā;
Perceiving it as a woman, a human woman, with lustful bodily contact; approaching and touching, a Samaṇa incurs a weighty offence by touching.
21.
21.
Tathā suṇantiṃ viññuñca, maggaṃ vārabbha methunaṃ;
Likewise, to one who is listening and understanding, concerning the path to sexual intercourse; having spoken with corrupting words, a Samaṇa incurs a weighty offence.
22.
22.
Vatvāttakāmupaṭṭhāna-vaṇṇaṃ methunarāgino;
Having spoken of the advantages of attending on oneself, with sexual desire; using words connected with sexual intercourse, a weighty offence when asking for sexual intercourse.
23.
23.
Paṭiggahetvā sandesaṃ, itthiyā purisassa vā;
Having accepted a message, from a woman or a man; having reflected and carried it back, a Samaṇa incurs a weighty offence.
24.
24.
Saṃyācitaparikkhāraṃ, katvādesitavatthukaṃ;
Having requested materials, having made an indicated site; building a hut exceeding the standard, for his own sake, he incurs a weighty offence.
25.
25.
Mahallakaṃ vihāraṃ vā, katvādesitavatthukaṃ;
Making a large monastery, having made an indicated site; for his own dwelling, a Samaṇa incurs a weighty offence.
26.
26.
Amūlakena codento, codāpentova vatthunā;
Accusing without basis, or causing to accuse with a reason; and in order to remove him with a final reason, while he is listening, he incurs a weighty offence.
27.
27.
Aññassa kiriyaṃ disvā, tena lesena codayaṃ;
Having seen another's action, accusing him with that pretext; with a final reason, in order to remove another, he incurs a weighty offence.
28.
28.
Chādeti jānamāpannaṃ, parivaseyya tāvatā;
He conceals knowing he has fallen, he should live under probation for that long; he should conduct himself in the Saṅgha under Mānatta, having lived under probation for six nights.
Ciṇṇamānattamabbheyya, taṃ saṅgho vīsatīgaṇo.
The Saṅgha of twenty or more bhikkhus should reinstate him, having performed Mānatta.
29.
29.
Āpattinukkhittamanantarāya
Non-interruption of the offence, Ability, and perceiving it as such; Desiring to conceal, and also concealment, In ten ways it is concealed, at the rising of the dawn.
3. Cīvaraniddeso
3. Explanation of Robes
Cīvaranti –
Robe –
30.
30.
Khomakoseyyakappāsa-sāṇabhaṅgāni kambalaṃ;
Khoma, Koseyya, Kappaāsa, Sāṇa, Bhaṅga, and Kambala; these six are allowable, according to their origin.
31.
31.
Dukūlañceva paṭṭuṇṇa-paṭaṃ somāracīnajaṃ;
Dukūla, Paṭṭuṇṇa-paṭa, Somāra and Chinese cloth; Iddhijaṃ, Deva-dinna, is suitable for each.
32.
32.
Ticīvaraṃ parikkhāra-coḷaṃ vassikasāṭikaṃ;
The three robes, Parikkhāra-coḷa, and Vassikasāṭika; one should not disallow without resolving, the face-wiper and the sitting cloth.
33.
33.
Paccattharaṇakaṃ kaṇḍu-cchādimettha ticīvaraṃ;
Paccattharaṇaka, Kaṇḍu-cchādi and here the three robes; one should not dwell without them for one night, the sitting cloth for four months.
34.
34.
‘‘Imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃdhiṭṭhāmi’’, saṅghāṭimiccadhiṭṭhaye;
‘‘I resolve this Saṅghāṭi,’’ he should resolve the Saṅghāṭi thus; it is not beyond the hand, this is the method also for the rest.
35.
35.
Adhiṭṭhahanto saṅghāṭi-ppabhutiṃ pubbacīvaraṃ;
While resolving the Saṅghāṭi, and so on, he should resolve it having withdrawn the previous robe; likewise when resolving the bowl.
36.
36.
Etaṃ imaṃ va saṅghāṭiṃ, saṃse paccuddharāmiti;
Saying, "I withdraw this very Saṅghāṭi"; thus the wise one should withdraw all by name.
37.
37.
Saṅghāṭi pacchimantena, dīghaso muṭṭhipañcako;
The Saṅghāṭi, with five fists in length on the west end; even less than the Sugata's robe is suitable on the north end.
38.
38.
Muṭṭhittikañca tiriyaṃ, tathā ekaṃsikassapi;
Three fists in width, likewise for the upper robe; and also the under robe, five fists in length; one and a half or two hands, is suitable in width.
39.
39.
Nisīdanassa dīghena, vidatthi dve visālato;
The sitting cloth, two spans in length, in width; one and a half spans, ten spans by the Sugata's span.
40.
40.
Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādikassa, tiriyaṃ dve vidatthiyo;
The Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādika, two spans in width; four in length, by the Sugata's span.
41.
41.
Vassikasāṭikāyāpi, dīghaso cha vidatthiyo;
Also for the Vassikasāṭika, six spans in length; one and a half spans in width, by the Sugata's span.
42.
42.
Ettha chedanapācitti, karontassa taduttari;
Here, there is a Pācittiya for cutting, and further than that for making; the Paccattharaṇa and face-wiper, are of a desirable standard.
43.
43.
Parikkhāracoḷe gaṇanā, pamāṇaṃ vā na dīpitaṃ;
There is no reckoning or measure declared for the Parikkhāra-coḷa; likewise, having said, he should resolve it, and disallow the bag, etc.
44.
44.
Ahatāhatakappānaṃ, saṅghāṭi diguṇā siyā;
For uncut and allowable robes, the Saṅghāṭi should be double; the Ekacciyottarāsaṅgo, likewise the under robe.
45.
45.
Utuddhaṭāna dussānaṃ, saṅghāṭi ca catugguṇā;
For robes taken up from the dust heap, the Saṅghāṭi should be fourfold; the rest should be twofold, as desired in Paṃsukūla.
46.
46.
Tīsu dve vāpi ekaṃ vā, chinditabbaṃ pahoti yaṃ;
He should cut two or one out of three, whichever is sufficient; if all are insufficient, he should take an additional one; he should not wear the three robes, if they are uncut and untaken.
47.
47.
Gāme nivesane uddo-sitapāsādahammiye;
In a village, settlement, raised platform, palace, mansion; boat, Aṭṭamāḷa, Ārāma, Satthakhetta, threshing floor, tree.
48.
48.
Ajjhokāse vihāre vā, nikkhipitvā ticīvaraṃ;
In the open, or in a monastery, having put down the three robes; it is not suitable to be separated, except by agreement of the bhikkhus.
49.
49.
Rogavassānapariyantā, kaṇḍucchādikasāṭikā;
As far as illness and the rainy season, the Kaṇḍucchādika-sāṭikā; after that he should disallow it, the rest are without limit.
50.
50.
Paccattharaṇa parikkhāra-mukhapuñchanacoḷakaṃ;
The Paccattharaṇa, Parikkhāra, face-wiper, Coḷaka; Nisīdana is allowable if it is ten Pyarattas or more and has been taken.
51.
51.
Adasaṃ rajitaṃyeva, sesacīvarapañcakaṃ;
The remaining five robes are allowable only if they have not been dyed; the Nisīdana is allowable whether it has been dyed or not.
52.
52.
Anadhiṭṭhitanissaṭṭhaṃ, kappetvā paribhuñjaye;
He should make allowable and use what has not been resolved and set aside; a hand's length and half of that in width, should be disallowed.
53.
53.
Ticīvarassa bhikkhussa, sabbametaṃ pakāsitaṃ;
All this has been declared for a bhikkhu with three robes; the Parikkhāra-coḷiyo, he resolves everything thus having said it.
54.
54.
Acchedavissajjanagāhavibbhamā,
Cutting, giving up, taking, confusion, Withdrawal, death, indication, training; Are the causes of separation from the resolutions in all, And a torn hole in the three robes.
55.
55.
Kusavākaphalakāni, kambalaṃ kesavālajaṃ;
It is a Thullaccaya to wear Kusavāka and Phalakāni, Kambala made from hair; to throw away the owl's wings and hide.
56.
56.
Kadalerakakkadusse, potthake cāpi dukkaṭaṃ;
Dukkaṭa for Kadaleraka-cloth, also Kakkadussa, Potthaka; in all blue, Mañjeṭṭha, yellow, red, and black robes.
57.
57.
Mahāraṅgamahānāma-raṅgaratte tirīṭake;
In Mahāraṅga, Mahānāma, Tirīṭaka dyed in red; in uncut robes for ten days, likewise in ten fruits and flowers; in a jacket, wrapping, everything is obtained in an uncut robe.
4. Rajananiddeso
4. Explanation of Dyes
Rajanāni cāti –
And dyes –
58.
58.
Mūlakkhandhatacapatta-phalapupphappabhedato;
By way of roots, stems, bark, leaves, fruits and flowers; dyes are of six kinds, allowed by the Teacher.
59.
59.
Mūle haliddiṃ khandhe ca, mañjeṭṭha tuṅgahārake;
Turmeric in the roots, Mañjeṭṭha and Tuṅgahāraka in the stems; Alli and blue in the leaves, Lodda and Kaṇḍula in the bark; Kusumbha and Kiṃsuka in the flowers, everything is obtained avoiding it.
5. Pattaniddeso
5. Explanation of the Bowl
Pattocāti –
And the bowl –
60.
60.
Ayopatto bhūmipatto, jātiyā kappiyā duve;
An iron bowl and an earthen bowl, these two are allowable by origin; Ukkaṭṭha, Majjhima, and Omaka by measure.
61.
61.
Ukkaṭṭho magadhe nāḷi-dvayataṇḍulasādhitaṃ;
The Ukkaṭṭha holds two nāḷis of cooked rice in Magadha; it holds cooked rice, soup, and curry as appropriate.
62.
62.
Majjhimo tassupaḍḍhova, tatopaḍḍhova omako;
The medium one is half of that, and the inferior one is half of that; the best is the best, the inferior is not the most inferior.
63.
63.
Atirekapatto dhāreyyo, dasāhaparamaṃ sako;
An extra bowl should be kept, at most for ten days, it becomes subject to relinquishment (nissaggiya) when that time has passed.
64.
64.
Acchedadānagāhehi, vibbhamā maraṇuddhaṭā;
Due to taking unpermitted gifts, confusion, and being overwhelmed by death; due to a break in the precepts or the monastic status, the bowl's determination is nullified.
65.
65.
Pattaṃ na paṭisāmeyya, sodakaṃ na ca otape;
One should not store the bowl away wet, nor heat it over a fire; one should not place it on hot ground, nor lean it against anything, nor hang it up.
66.
66.
Miḍḍhante paribhaṇḍante, aṅke vā ātapattake;
It is not proper to place it in a soiled area, among miscellaneous items, on one's lap, or under a sunshade; or at one's feet, or on a bed or seat.
67.
67.
Na nīhareyya ucchiṭṭho-dakañca calakaṭṭhikaṃ;
One should not empty leftover water or food scraps, nor a spittoon with the bowl; one should not use the bowl or the hand holding the bowl to push open a door.
68.
68.
Bhūmiādhārake dārudaṇḍādhāre susajjite;
On a ground stand or a well-arranged wooden-pole stand; one may place two bowls, one overturned on the ground.
69.
69.
Dārurūpiyasovaṇṇa-maṇiveḷuriyāmayā;
Bowls made of wood, silver, gold, precious stones, bamboo, crystal;
70.
70.
Chavasīsamayo cāpi, ghaṭītumbakaṭāhajā;
Brass, glass, tin, lead, crystal, copper, or iron, or made of a corpse's head, or shaped like a pot or a broken pot; all these bowls are unacceptable, it is said, and are grounds for a dukkaṭa offense.
6. Thālakaniddeso
6. Explanation of Dishes
Thālakā cāti –
Dishes (Thālakā) are –
71.
71.
Kappiyā thālakā tisso, tambāyomattikāmayā;
Three types of dishes are allowable: those made of copper, iron, or clay; those made of wood, gold, silver, precious stones, or crystal.
72.
72.
Akappā phalikākācakaṃsajā gihisantakā;
Dishes made of crystal, glass, or brass that belong to laypeople are not allowable; those that belong to the Sangha, and those made of gourds or broken pots, are allowable temporarily.
7. Pavāraṇāniddeso
7. Explanation of Invitation
Pavāraṇāti –
Invitation (Pavāraṇā) is –
73.
73.
Yenīriyāpathenāyaṃ, bhuñjamāno pavārito;
Having been invited in whatever manner, if one eats something different thereafter, there is a pācittiya offense for excess.
74.
74.
Asanaṃ bhojanañceva, abhihāro samīpatā;
Eating, food, bringing near, proximity; rejection by body or speech, these five factors constitute invitation.
75.
75.
Odano sattu kummāso, maccho maṃsañca bhojanaṃ;
Cooked rice, barley flour, porridge, fish, and meat are food; sāli, vīhi, barley, kaṅgu, kudrūsava, varagodhumā; cooked rice and broth made from these seven grains are food.
76.
76.
Sāmākāditiṇaṃ kudrūsake varakacorako;
Sāmāka and other grasses, kudrūsaka, varaka, coraka; varake, sāli, and wild rice are included by implication.
77.
77.
Bhaṭṭhadhaññamayo sattu, kummāso yavasambhavo;
Barley flour is made from roasted grains, porridge is made from barley; meat is said to be allowable, and fish comes from water.
78.
78.
Bhuñjanto bhojanaṃ kappa-makappaṃ vā nisedhayaṃ;
While eating, refusing allowable or unallowable food; one should invite with brought food that is allowable, saying "this is named this" or "this is this."
79.
79.
Lājā taṃsattubhattāni, goraso suddhakhajjako;
Fried grains, roasted barley flour and cooked rice, milk products, pure solid food; rice, roasted flour, flattened rice, and bamboo shoots, etc.
80.
80.
Bhattaṃ vuttāvasesānaṃ, rasayāgu rasopi ca;
Cooked rice, the remaining flavors that have been mentioned, flavored broth, and also plain broth; pure broth and fruits, etc., do not create invitation.
81.
81.
Pavāritena vuṭṭhāya, abhuttena ca bhojanaṃ;
Having risen after being invited, and not having eaten the food; additional food should not be prepared beyond what was previously made.
82.
82.
Kappiyaṃ gahitañcevu-ccāritaṃ hatthapāsagaṃ;
If allowable food is received, announced, and within arm's reach; while preparing additional food, one should say, "Enough, stop."
83.
83.
Na karenupasampanna-hatthagaṃ pesayitvāpi;
One should not prepare it oneself, nor send it in the hand of one who is not fully ordained; it is permissible for everyone to have it prepared and to eat it, without doing it themselves.
8. Kālikaniddeso
8. Explanation of Time-Limited Requisites
Kālikācāti –
Time-limited requisites (Kālikā) are –
84.
84.
Paṭiggahitā cattāro, kālikā yāvakālikaṃ;
There are four time-limited requisites that one may receive: those allowable until the end of the day (yāvakālika), those allowable for a watch of the night (yāmakālika), those allowable for a week (sattāhakālika), and those allowable for life (yāvajīvika).
85.
85.
Piṭṭhaṃ mūlaṃ phalaṃ khajjaṃ, goraso dhaññabhojanaṃ;
Flour, roots, fruits, solid food, milk products, grain foods; broth and soup, etc., these are allowable until the end of the day.
86.
86.
Madhumuddikasālūka-cocamocambajambujaṃ;
Honey, grapes, water lilies, plantain, mango, jambuja fruits;
87.
87.
Sānulomāni dhaññāni, ṭhapetvā phalajo raso;
Phārusa fruit, naggisantatta, drinks allowable for a watch of the night; grains with the husk removed, fruit juice that is kept; except for madhūka flower, all flower juice also.
88.
88.
Sabbapattaraso ceva, ṭhapetvā pakkaḍākajaṃ;
All leaf juice, except juice from the pakkaḍā creeper that is kept; cold water, mashed water, or boiled water are allowable for a watch of the night.
89.
89.
Sappinonītatelāni, madhuphāṇitameva ca;
Ghee, fresh butter, oil, honey, and molasses; ghee is allowable for a week, for those whose meat is not forbidden.
90.
90.
Telaṃ tilavaseraṇḍa-madhusāsapasambhavaṃ;
Oil is derived from sesame, castor bean, or mustard seed; honey is made by small bees, bumblebees, or honeybees; rasādi is sugar cane juice, cooked or uncooked molasses.
91.
91.
Savatthupakkā sāmaṃ vā, vasā kāle amānusā;
Cooked with substance, or by oneself, fat is allowable in time of need; one should not cook substance for others, from items allowable until the end of the day.
92.
92.
Haliddiṃ siṅgiverañca, vacattaṃ lasuṇaṃ vacā;
Turmeric, ginger, vacatta, garlic, vacā; usīra, bhaddamutta, ātivisā, kaṭurohiṇī; the five roots, etc., these roots are allowable for life.
93.
93.
Biḷaṅgaṃ maricaṃ goṭṭha-phalaṃ pipphali rājikā;
Biḷaṅga, pepper, goṭṭha fruit, long pepper, rājikā; the three fruits (Triphala), castor seeds, etc., these fruits are allowable for life.
94.
94.
Kappāsanimbakuṭajapaṭolasulasādinaṃ;
Kappāsa, nimba, kuṭaja, paṭola, sulasā, etc.; except for pot herbs, these leaves are allowable for life.
95.
95.
Ṭhapetvā ucchuniyyāsaṃ,
Except for sugar cane juice that is kept, juicy juice from sugar cane; juice and all bark, salt, metal, and stone.
96.
96.
Suddhasitthañca sevālo, yañca kiñci sujhāpitaṃ;
Pure wax and algae, and whatever is thoroughly extracted; different kinds of vikaṭādi, should be known as allowable for life.
97.
97.
Mūlaṃ sāraṃ taco pheggu, paṇṇaṃ pupphaṃ phalaṃ latā;
Root, heartwood, bark, sapwood, leaf, flower, fruit, and creeper; anything that is not prepared for the purpose of nourishment, all that is allowable for life.
98.
98.
Sabbakālikasambhogo, kāle sabbassa kappati;
Using all time-limited requisites is allowable at the proper time; when there is a reason, the three time-limited requisites are allowable at the wrong time.
99.
99.
Kālayāmamatikkantā, pācittiṃ janayantubho;
Those that exceed the time period generate a pācittiya offense for both; both generate it: dwelling together and storing up.
100.
100.
Sattāhakālike satta, ahāni atināmite;
In the case of things allowable for a week, when seven days have passed; a pācittiya offense according to the Pāḷi, but a dukkaṭa offense in the case of ghee, etc.
101.
101.
Nissaṭṭhaladdhaṃ makkheyya, naṅgaṃ najjhohareyya ca;
One should anoint with what is relinquished and received back, and one should not let it flow away into water; for a novice who gives up the determination of what is being used within the week;
102.
102.
Yāvakālikaādīni, saṃsaṭṭhāni sahattanā;
The requisites allowable until the end of the day, etc., are mixed together and are held together; they all cause that state, therefore it is said like this.
103.
103.
Pure paṭiggahitañca, sattāhaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ;
What was previously received, if it is allowable for a week or for life; if it is mixed with other time-limited requisites, there is a pācittiya offense for using it.
104.
104.
Yāvakālikasammissaṃ, itaraṃ kālikattayaṃ;
The three other time-limited requisites, when mixed with requisites allowable until the end of the day; when received, should be used on that very day.
105.
105.
Yāmakālikasammissaṃ, sesamevaṃ vijāniyaṃ;
When mixed with requisites allowable for a watch of the night, the rest should be known in this way; when mixed with requisites allowable for a week, it is allowable for a week.
9. Paṭiggāhaniddeso
9. Explanation of Receiving
Paṭiggāhoti –
Receiving (Paṭiggāho) is –
106.
106.
Dātukāmābhihāro ca, hatthapāseraṇakkhamaṃ;
The desire of the giver to give, being within arm's reach, and being capable of receiving; giving is threefold, taking is twofold, thus receiving is fivefold.
107.
107.
Asaṃhāriye tatthajāte, sukhume ciñcaādinaṃ;
In the case of things that cannot be accumulated, things that grow there, minute things, tamarind, etc.; leaves, or things that are overwhelmingly heavy, receiving does not take place.
108.
108.
Sikkhāmaraṇaliṅgehi, anapekkhavisaggato;
From training, death, the monastic status, indifference, or giving up; severance, non-ordination, giving, taking, agreement.
109.
109.
Appaṭiggahitaṃ sabbaṃ, pācitti paribhuñjato;
If one uses anything that has not been received, there is a pācittiya offense; pure water, if it is not too thick, is allowable in that way.
110.
110.
Aṅgalaggamavicchinnaṃ, dantakkhikaṇṇagūthakaṃ;
Snot that is stuck to the body, tooth-cleaning sticks, earwax, excrement;
111.
111.
Gūthamattikamuttāni, chārikañca tathāvidhe;
Excrement, soil, urine, ashes in the same condition; one may take and use them oneself, in the absence of a competent person.
112.
112.
Durūpaciṇṇe rajokiṇṇe, athuggahappaṭiggahe;
In the case of things that have been poorly collected and are covered with dust, or where receiving has been begun and stopped; what is stored inside, what is cooked by oneself, and what is cooked inside also, there is a dukkaṭa offense.
10. Akappiyamaṃsaniddeso
10. Explanation of Unallowable Meat
Maṃsesu ca akappiyanti –
And unallowable among meats (Maṃsesu ca akappiya) are –
113.
113.
Manussahatthiassānaṃ, maṃsaṃ sunakhadīpinaṃ;
The meat of humans, elephants, horses, dogs, leopards;
114.
114.
Uddissakatamaṃsañca, yañca appaṭivekkhitaṃ;
Meat killed specifically for oneself, and meat that has not been inspected; what is a grave offense for humans, and a dukkaṭa offense for the remaining meats.
115.
115.
Aṭṭhīpi lohitaṃ cammaṃ, lomamesaṃ na kappati;
Bones, blood, skin, and hair are not allowable; what is intentional is like what is killed specifically for oneself, the rest is unintentional.
11. Nissaggiyaniddeso
11. Explanation of Forfeiture
Nissaggiyānīti –
Things subject to forfeiture (Nissaggiyānī) are –
116.
116.
Arūpiyaṃ rūpiyena, rūpiyaṃ itarena ca;
Exchanging something immaterial for money, exchanging money for something else; exchanging money for money, in this case, the money is subject to forfeiture.
117.
117.
Kahāpaṇo sajjhu siṅgī, vohārūpagamāsakaṃ;
A kahāpaṇa, a piece of cloth, a horn, a māsaka used in trade; cloth and so on are something else, an allowable thing and grounds for a dukkaṭa offense.
118.
118.
‘‘Imaṃ gahetvā bhutvā vā, imaṃ dehi karānaya;
"Take this, and after eating it, give me this in return; or I will give it," when this is completed, it is subject to forfeiture, a purchase and sale.
119.
119.
Attano aññato lābhaṃ, saṅghassaññassa vā nataṃ;
Transferring one's own gain or someone else's gain, to the Sangha or someone else; is subject to forfeiture, a pācittiya offense and also a dukkaṭa offense.
120.
120.
Anissajjitvā nissaggiṃ, paribhuñje na deyya vā;
Without relinquishing what is subject to forfeiture, one should not use it or give it away; if it is relinquished with one's own recognition, there is a dukkaṭa offense, otherwise there is no offense.
12. Pācittiyaniddeso
12. Explanation of Pācittiya
Pācittīti –
Pācittī is –
121.
121.
Musāvādomasāvāde, pesuññaharaṇe tathā;
False speech, diminished speech, tale-bearing, and stealing;
122.
122.
Talasattianādarakukkuccuppādanesu ca;
Rooting out words of the Dhamma, a storehouse, and disdainfully criticizing.
123.
123.
Anuddharitvā gamane, seyyaṃ senāsanāni vā;
Not removing, going, a bed or lodgings; traveling on the road with a woman, or sitting down with a woman alone.
124.
124.
Bhīsāpanākoṭanaaññavāde,
Frightening, striking, another's speech,
Troubling, offensive exposure, concealing;
Laughter, water, spitting, monasteries,
Pācitti is said regarding secondary food and beds.
13. Samaṇakappaniddeso
13. Explanation of What is Allowable for Ascetics
Samaṇakappāti –
What is allowable for ascetics (Samaṇakappā) is –
125.
125.
Bhūtagāmasamārambhe, pācitti katakappiyaṃ;
In the case of initiating growth from living things, there is a pācittiya offense; what is made allowable is allowable for ascetics.
126.
126.
Sa mūlakhandhabījagga-phaḷubījappabhāvito;
That is grown from a root, stem, seed, shoot, joint, or seed-like thing; at the start, there is a dukkaṭa offense, when the seed is separated from the living plant.
127.
127.
Nibbaṭṭabījaṃ nobīja-makatañcāpi kappati;
A seed that has ceased to grow, a non-seed, and what is unsprouted are allowable; seeds confined in a pot, or having it done outside.
128.
128.
Ekābaddhesu bījesu, bhājane vāpi bhūmiyaṃ;
In the case of seeds sown together, in a container or in the ground; when it has been made allowable in one case, it is considered done in all cases.
129.
129.
Nikkhitte kappiyaṃ katvā, mūlapaṇṇāni jāyaruṃ;
Having cast it away and made it allowable, the roots and leaves grow; one should make it allowable again, for then it is a living plant.
130.
130.
Sapaṇṇo vā apaṇṇo vā, sevālodakasambhavo;
Whether algae is leafy or leafless, it originates from water; algae in shrines, etc., whose seeds have ceased to grow, with two sprouts or leaves;
131.
131.
Ghaṭādipiṭṭhe sevālo, makuḷaṃ ahichattakaṃ;
Moss on a pot or dais, a mushroom, a hichattaka;
Things that are difficult to obtain, unusable flowers.
132.
132.
Lākhāniyyāsachattāni, allarukkhe vikopiya;
Lac, exudate, mushrooms, having damaged a raw tree;
There is a pācittiya for taking it, or even breaking a letter.
133.
133.
Pīḷetuṃ nāḷikerādiṃ, dārumakkaṭakādinā;
To press coconuts, etc., with a wooden monkey, etc.;
It is not allowable to cut, make a knot, or tie grass, etc.
134.
134.
Bhūtagāmaṃ va bījaṃ vā, chinda bhindocināhi vā;
A living organism, or a seed, cut, break, or gather;
Split, pierce, or cook it, without designating or speaking.
135.
135.
Imaṃ karohi kappiyaṃ, imaṃ gaṇhedamāhara;
"Make this allowable, take this, bring this;
Give this, purify this," it is allowable to speak thus.
14. Bhūminiddeso
14. Explanation of Grounds
Bhūmiyoti –
Grounds:
136.
136.
Sammutussāvanantā ca, gonisādī gahāpati;
Sammuti's proclamation, gonisāda, householder;
Allowable grounds are those in which dwelling and cooking are allowable.
137.
137.
Vāsatthāya kate gehe, saṅghike vekasantake;
In a dwelling made for residence, belonging to the Sangha, vacant;
An allowable hut is to be obtained, adequate for bedding.
138.
138.
Gehe saṅghassa vekassa, karamānevamīrayaṃ;
In a dwelling of the Sangha, vacant, when doing or saying this;
"ssāvanantikā";
"We will make an allowable hut, we will make an allowable hut."
139.
139.
Yebhuyyenāparikkhitto, ārāmo sakalopi vā;
A monastery mostly unenclosed, or the whole;
"gonisādī", "sammutī" is approved by the Sangha.
140.
140.
Bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā aññehi, dinno tesaṃva santako;
Having established a bhikkhu, given by others, belonging only to them;
Is considered a "gahapati".
141.
141.
Akappakuṭiyā vutthasappiādīhi missitaṃ;
Mixed with ghee, etc., having dwelt in an unallowable hut;
One should avoid dwelling inside, the former two-times allowable.
142.
142.
Teheva bhikkhunā pakkaṃ, kappate yāvajīvikaṃ;
Cooked by those bhikkhus, it is allowable for as long as life lasts;
Without meat for a week, with meat, self-cooked.
143.
143.
Ussāvanantikā yehi, thambhādīhi adhiṭṭhitā;
A ussāvanantikā that is established by any posts, etc.;
When those are removed, it remains even in other places.
144.
144.
Sabbesu apanītesu, bhave jahitavatthukā;
When all are removed, it becomes with abandoned property;
A gonisādi is enclosed, the rest are roof-disturbing.
15. Upajjhācariyavattaniddeso
15. Explanation of the Duties to Preceptors and Teachers
Upajjhācariyavattānīti –
Duties to Preceptors and Teachers:
145.
145.
Nissāyupajjhācariye, vasamāno supesalo;
Living in dependence on a preceptor or teacher, being very amiable;
A tooth stick, a seat, water, and gruel, he should always give at the right time.
146.
146.
Patte vattaṃ care gāma-ppavese gamanāgame;
Service with the bowl, going into the village, in going and coming;
With the seat, footstool, mat, shoes, and robe.
147.
147.
Paribhojanīyapānīya-vaccappassāvaṭhānisu;
Drinking water for use, at the toilet and places for urine;
Service in cleaning the monastery, and again in announcing.
148.
148.
Na papphoṭeyya sodhento, paṭivāte ca saṅgaṇe;
He should not flap while cleaning, against the wind and in a crowd;
The bhikkhu should clean the monastery, the drinking water, and the bedding.
149.
149.
Nhāne nhātassa kātabbe, raṅgapāke ca dhovane;
At the bath, what is to be done for one who has bathed, in dyeing and washing;
In sewing the robe or mending it, while dyeing, he should not avoid standing.
150.
150.
Ekaccassa anāpucchā, pattaṃ vā cīvarāni vā;
Without asking one individual, a bowl or robes;
He should not give or take, or any requisite.
151.
151.
Ekaccaṃ pacchato kātuṃ, gantuṃ vā tassa pacchato;
To do an individual's work later, or to go behind him;
To pour out almsfood, to remove it for oneself.
152.
152.
Kiccayaṃ parikammaṃ vā, kesacchedañca attano;
To have an individual's work or service done, or a haircut;
It is not allowable to have it done or to do it without asking.
153.
153.
Gāmaṃ susānaṃ nissīmaṃ, disaṃ vā gantumicchato;
Wishing to go to a village, cemetery, boundary, or direction;
Or even for one's own work, it is not allowable without asking.
154.
154.
Uppannaṃ aratiṃ diṭṭhiṃ, kukkuccaṃ vā vinodaye;
Having arisen, he should dispel discontent, wrong view, or worry;
Or he should be zealous in matters under the Sangha's control.
155.
155.
Gilānesu upaṭṭheyya, vuṭṭhānaṃ nesamāgame;
He should attend to the sick, in their recovery or when they arrive;
Everywhere, by difference in duty, through lack of respect, there is a dukkata.
16. Vaccapassāvaṭṭhānikaniddeso
16. Explanation of the Toilet and Urinal
Vaccapassāvaṭṭhānikanti –
Toilet and urinal:
156.
156.
Na kareyya yathāvuḍḍhaṃ, vaccaṃ yātānupubbiyā;
One should not do it without regard to seniority, in order of arrival;
Toilet and urinals, and bathing places, are to be obtained.
157.
157.
Paviseyyubbhajitvā no, sahasā paviseyya ca;
One should enter having cleared one's throat, not enter suddenly;
Having coughed, he should clear his throat, standing in his sandals.
158.
158.
Na kare nitthunaṃ vaccaṃ, dantakaṭṭhañca khādayaṃ;
One should not make a snapping sound at stool, or chew a tooth stick;
One should not do either outside the toilet and urinal trough.
159.
159.
Kūpe kaṭṭhaṃ na pāteyya, kheḷaṃ passāvadoṇiyā;
One should not throw wood into the well, or saliva into the urinal;
One should not scratch roughly, and one should wash it if it is soiled.
160.
160.
Na nikkhameyya sahasā-vubbhajitvā na nikkhame;
One should not leave suddenly, not leave without clearing one's throat;
One should not smack his lips, and he should cleanse the filth.
17. Āpucchakaraṇaniddeso
17. Explanation of Asking Permission
Āpucchakaraṇanti –
Asking Permission:
161.
161.
Anajjhiṭṭhova therena, pātimokkhaṃ na uddise;
Without being requested by a Thera, he should not recite the Pātimokkha;
He should not speak Dhamma, not ask a question, and not answer.
162.
162.
Āpucchitvā kathentassa, puna vuḍḍhatarāgame;
For one who speaks having asked permission, when an elder comes again;
There is no further asking permission, or when he approves in the refectory.
163.
163.
Vasanto ca anāpucchā, vuḍḍhenekavihārake;
While dwelling, without asking, in the same monastery as an elder;
He should not rehearse the recitation, and he should not give explanations.
164.
164.
Dhammaṃ na bhāsaye dīpaṃ, na kare na ca vijjhape;
He should not speak Dhamma, not make a lamp, and not have one made;
He should open or close a window or door.
165.
165.
Caṅkame caṅkamantopi, vuḍḍhena parivattaye;
Even while walking on the walkway, he should turn aside for an elder;
The elder should not brush against him with the edge of his Sanghati robe.
18. Nagganiddeso
18. Explanation of Nakedness
Naggoti –
Naked:
166.
166.
Naggo maggaṃ vaje bhuñje, pive khāde na sāyaye;
Naked, he should not go on the road, eat, drink, chew, or taste;
He should not take, not give, not venerate, or cause to be venerated.
167.
167.
Parikammaṃ na kāreyya, na kare paṭichādisu;
He should not do service, not make coverings;
In service, two robe-coverings are always allowable.
19. Nhānakappaniddeso
19. Explanation of Allowable Bathing
Nhānakappoti –
Allowable Bathing:
168.
168.
Na ca nhāyeyya therānaṃ, puratopari vā tathā;
He should not bathe in front of or above the Theras;
He should give way to those descending, he himself ascending.
169.
169.
Kuṭṭatthambhataruṭṭāne, nhāyamāno na ghaṃsaye;
While bathing, he should not rub against a wall, post, or tree trunk;
The body with a "perfumed hand," or with kuruvindaka powder.
170.
170.
Mallakenāññamaññaṃ vā, sarīrena na ghaṃsaye;
He should not rub each other with a potsherd or body;
A potsherd, brick fragment, or cloth swab is allowable.
171.
171.
Sabbesaṃ puthupāṇī cā-kallassākatamallakaṃ;
For all, a wide hand, for one who is sick, an unmade potsherd;
Stone, foam, and bark are allowable for rubbing the feet.
20. Avandiyaniddeso
20. Explanation of Who Should Not Be Venerated
Avandiyoti –
Who Should Not Be Venerated:
172.
172.
Ukkhittānupasampanna-nānāsaṃvāsaitthiyo;
An expelled one, one not fully ordained, one of different association, women;
A novice, one under grave penalty, and a eunuch should not be venerated.
21. Cammaniddeso
21. Explanation of Hides
Cammanti –
Hide:
173.
173.
Migājeḷakacammāni, kappanti paribhuñjituṃ;
Hides of deer and goats are allowable to use;
The rohita, eṇi, sada, and kurunga are kinds of deer.
174.
174.
Anuññātattayā aññaṃ, cammaṃ dukkaṭavatthukaṃ;
Other hides, not permitted, are grounds for a dukkata;
All leather for bags and shoes is allowable for humans.
22. Upāhananiddeso
22. Explanation of Shoes
Upāhanā cevāti –
Shoes:
175.
175.
Majjhadese na kappanti, gaṇaṅgaṇūpāhanā navā;
In the Middle Country, new shoes with ornamental knobs are not allowable;
In the monastery it is allowable for everyone, and everywhere for the sick.
176.
176.
Sabbanīlakaodātapītalohitakaṇhakā;
Shoes that are all blue, white, yellow, red, black;
Dyed in mahāraṅga, mahānāma, raṅga color.
177.
177.
Sabbamañjeṭṭhikā citrā, nīlapītādivaddhikā;
All mañjeṭṭhikā, variegated, with blue, yellow, etc. additions;
Added with partridge-wing patterns, ram's-horn, goat's-horn.
178.
178.
Khallabaddhā puṭabaddhā, tūlapuṇṇā cupāhanā;
Shoes tied with straps, tied with coverings, filled with cotton;
Lined with pāliguṇṭhi, stitched around with peacock feathers.
179.
179.
Vicchikāḷikatā sīhabyagghuddājinadīpinaṃ;
Sandals decorated with scorpions, lions, tigers, otters, leopards;
Bound around with the hides of cats, weasels, owls;
Footwear for walking about: should anyone wear them, there is a dukkata.
180.
180.
Nīlādivaṇṇaṃ sakalaṃ, puñchitvā vekadesakaṃ;
Having erased all blue, etc. color, in one spot;
One should turn the shoe, remove the straps, etc.
23. Anolokiyaniddeso
23. Explanation of Looking
Anolokiyanti –
Looking:
181.
181.
Sāratto itthiyā yoniṃ, mukhaṃ vā bhikkhadāyiyā;
Being passionate, at a woman's vagina, or the face of a giver of almsfood;
Or thinking of another's bowl, his own face;
Looking into a mirror or bowl of water, there is a dukkata.
24. Añjanīniddeso
24. Explanation of Needle Cases
Añjanīti –
Needle Case:
182.
182.
Vaṭṭāṭṭhasoḷasaṃsā vā, maṭṭhā vaṭṭati añjanī;
Round, eight, or sixteen seams, smooth, a needle case is allowable;
Even with three lines at the base of the neck, it is allowable to tie one.
183.
183.
Yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ mālādikammaṃ makaradantakaṃ;
Whatever kind of decoration, garland work, crocodile teeth;
Decorations of cow-horn, half-moon, etc., are not allowable here.
184.
184.
Labbhekavaṇṇasuttena, sibbituṃ thavikā tathā;
It is allowable to sew a bag with a single-colored thread;
A quiver, key case, and plain bodkin are allowable.
185.
185.
Saṅkhanābhivisāṇaṭṭhi-naḷadantamayā tathā;
Made of conch, navel, horn, bone, reed, or ivory;
Made of plank, wood, bamboo, lac, or iron.
186.
186.
Añjaniyo salākāyo, dhūmanettā ca labbhare;
Needle cases, bodkins, and eye medicine holders are to be obtained;
So are knife handles and snuff boxes made of that material.
25. Akappiyasayananiddeso
25. Explanation of Unallowable Beds
Akappiyasayanānīti –
Unallowable Beds:
187.
187.
Āsandī tūlī pallaṅko, paṭikaṃ gonacittakaṃ;
A chair, a cotton-filled couch, a bed, a patchwork quilt;
A covering, a figured rug, a woollen rug, a single-fleeced rug.
188.
188.
Kuttaṃ koseyyaṃ kaṭṭissaṃ, hatthiassarathattharā;
A rug of cut hair, a silk rug, a rug of sheared wool, elephant, horse, or chariot coverings;
Coverings of lion-skin, tiger-skin, or deer-skin.
189.
189.
Salohitavitānañcu-bhatorattūpadhānakaṃ;
A canopy with bloodstains, and a red pillow for the underside of the body;
These are unallowable, there is a dukkata for using them.
190.
190.
Āsandādittayā sese, labbhate gihisantake;
Except for three, chairs, etc., are to be obtained in a householder's possession;
In a Dhamma seat, and in the refectory, and in a house it is allowable to sit;
As a makeshift ground covering, it is also allowable to lie down.
191.
191.
Caturaṃsapīṭhā sattaṅgā, pañcaṅgā uccapādakā;
Square stools, seven-membered, five-membered, with high legs;
Cotton-filled couches and seats are for sitting in a house.
192.
192.
Coḷavākuṇṇapaṇṇānaṃ, tiṇānañceva pūritā;
Filled with bark, leaves, grass;
Five robe cloths, cushions are allowable everywhere.
193.
193.
Tūlattayaṃ bhisigabbho, lomāni migapakkhinaṃ;
Three kinds of cotton, the inside of a cushion, hairs of animals or birds;
Are allowed as stuffing, except for cotton, lentils.
194.
194.
Manussalomamuṇṇāyaṃ, paṇṇe pupphaṃ tamālakaṃ;
Human hair or wool, leaves, flowers, tamālaka;
A pure seat is allowable without examination.
26. Samānāsanikaniddeso
26. Explanation of Sitting on the Same Seat
Samānāsanikopicāti –
Also, sitting on the same seat:
195.
195.
Tivassantarānuññātaṃ, bhikkhūnamekamāsanaṃ;
For bhikkhus, a seat permitted for three years;
Is for sitting five years with seven years, three years.
196.
196.
Ṭhapetvā paṇḍakaṃ itthiṃ, ubhatobyañjanaṃ muni;
Having excluded a eunuch, a woman, one with both sets of organs, the Sage;
Allowed everyone to sit on a long seat.
197.
197.
Antaṃ dīghāsanaṃ tiṇṇaṃ, yaṃ pahoti nisīdituṃ;
The end of a long seat is enough for three to sit;
On a couch or stool, it is allowable for two to sit.
27. Asaṃvāsikaniddeso
27. Explanation of One Who Does Not Live in Association
Asaṃvāsiko cāti –
Asaṃvāsiko cāti –
198.
198.
Ukkhittonupasampanno, bhikkhunī chinnamūlako;
One who is expelled and not yet re-ordained, a nun and one with severed roots;
One separated by differing associations, boundary, standing in the sky;
And eleven kinds of those incapable: these are declared as not living in association.
28. Kammaniddeso
28. Explanation of Procedures
Kammañcāti –
Kammañcāti –
199.
199.
Vaggena adhammakammaṃ, samaggena adhammikaṃ;
A procedure that is unlawful by a faction, unlawful by the entire Sangha;
A procedure that is lawful by a faction, and lawful by the entire Sangha;
Only the fourth is allowable, and a dukaṭa for the remaining procedures.
200.
200.
Catuvaggo pañcavaggo, dasavīsativaggiko;
A group of four, a group of five, a group of ten, a group of twenty;
A group exceeding twenty: these five Sanghas are distinguished.
201.
201.
Catuvaggettha abbhānu-pasampadāpavāraṇā;
In a group of four, there is invitation, ordination, and pavāraṇā;
A group of five is for invitation and ordination in the Middle Country.
202.
202.
Dasavaggo ca abbhānaṃ, ṭhapetvā sabbakammiko;
A group of ten is for invitation and all procedures except expulsion;
The rest are qualified for all procedures: thus, it is declared regarding eligibility for procedures.
203.
203.
Catuvaggena kattabbe, cattāro pakatattakā;
To be done by a group of four, there are four whose nature is established;
The rest are eligible for procedures, without requiring consent; this is the same principle.
204.
204.
Catuvaggādikattabbaṃ, asaṃvāsakammāraha;
To be done by a group of four or more, one who is fit for the procedure of non-association;
Having committed one of the serious offenses, completing the quorum;
A procedure such as parivāsa that is done incorrectly incurs a dukaṭa.
205.
205.
Adhammakammaṃ vāreyya, antarāye duve tayo;
One should object to an unlawful procedure, two or three times in the midst of an interruption;
Having seen this one basis, those who object are more than that from then on.
206.
206.
Kammārahā asaṃvāsā, khittacittadukhaṭṭitā;
Those eligible for procedures, those not living in association, those of deranged mind, those in distress;
The objection of these in the midst of the Sangha does not stand.
207.
207.
Pakatattekasīmaṭṭha-samasaṃvāsabhikkhuno;
The objection of a monk of established nature, abiding within a single boundary, of equal association;
Even to the slightest interruption, it stands.
208.
208.
Kopetuṃ dhammikaṃ kammaṃ, paṭikkoseyya sammukhā;
To ruin a lawful procedure, one should refuse openly;
Secretly destroying the unity of the body, not giving consent incurs a dukaṭa.
29. Micchājīvavivajjanāniddeso
29. Explanation of Avoiding Wrong Livelihood
Micchājīvavivajjanāti –
Micchājīvavivajjanāti –
209.
209.
Dāruṃ veḷuṃ phalaṃ pupphaṃ, cuṇṇaṃ nhānamukhodakaṃ;
Wood, bamboo, fruit, flowers, powder, bathing and face-washing water;
Clay, tooth-wood, and so on, one should not give for the sake of currying favor with families.
210.
210.
Pāribhaṭakatāmugga-sūpyatāvatthuvijjayā;
Acting as a go-between, exaggeration, being a supplier of requisites;
By undertaking missions and errands, or by acting as a messenger.
211.
211.
Anuppadānappaṭipiṇḍa-vejjakammena vā pana;
By giving in anticipation of a return gift, or by practicing medicine;
Or by any other means that the Buddha has rejected, one should not make a living.
212.
212.
Viññattinesanābhūtullapanākuhanādihi;
By hints, quests, simulated praise, deception, and so on;
One should avoid the conditions that arise from corrupting families.
30. Vattaniddeso
30. Explanation of Observances
Vattanti –
Vattanti –
213.
213.
Āgantuko na ārāmaṃ, pavise saupāhano;
A visiting monk should not enter the monastery wearing shoes;
Nor with an umbrella or head covered, nor having made a wrap with the robe.
214.
214.
Pānīyena na dhoveyya, pāde vuḍḍhatarepi ca;
He should not wash his feet with drinking water, even for an elder;
He should greet the resident monks and inquire about lodging.
215.
215.
Gamiko paṭisāmetvā, dārumattikabhaṇḍakaṃ;
A departing monk, having returned the wooden and clay utensils;
Having swept the monastery, he should take leave of his lodging.
216.
216.
Āpucchitabbe asati, saṃgopetvāna sādhukaṃ;
In the absence of those to be asked, having carefully stored them away;
He should depart, otherwise it is not proper for him to depart.
217.
217.
Āvāsiko paññāpeyya, vuḍḍhāgantussa āsanaṃ;
The resident monk should provide a seat for the visiting elder;
He should set out foot-washing water and so forth, and the bowl and robes.
218.
218.
Paccuggantvāna gaṇheyya, pānīyena ca pucchaye;
Having gone to greet him, he should take them and inquire about water;
He should greet the visiting monks and provide lodging.
219.
219.
Ajjhāvutthamavutthaṃ vā, gocarāgocaraṃ vade;
He should declare what is dwelt in and not dwelt in, the range and out-of-bounds;
The places for urination and defecation, and the established Sekha rules.
220.
220.
Pavesanikkhame kālaṃ, paribhojiyapāniyaṃ;
The time for entering and leaving, and the water for drinking;
Having sat down, he should explain all of this to the new monk.
31. Vikappanāniddeso
31. Explanation of Relinquishment
Vikappanācevāti –
Vikappanācevati –
221.
221.
Sammukhā parammukhāti, duve vuttā vikappanā;
Relinquishment is said to be of two kinds: in one's presence and in one's absence;
When relinquishing in one's presence, in the presence of an articulate individual;
He should say, "I relinquish this robe to you."
222.
222.
Ettāvatā nidhetuṃva, kappatī na ca kappati;
To this extent, it is allowable only to store it away, but it is not allowable
To use it and so forth, due to it not yet being withdrawn.
223.‘‘Mayhaṃ santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti –
223.‘‘Mayhaṃ santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti – You may use what belongs to me, or dispose of it, or do with it as you please –
Tena paccuddhaṭeyeva, paribhogādi kappati.
Only then, when it has been withdrawn, is it allowable to use it and so forth.
224.
224.
Aparā sammukhāvekā, bhikkhussekassa santike;
Another relinquishment in one's presence, in the presence of a monk;
Having taken the name of one individual, among five fellow practitioners.
225.‘‘Imaṃ cīvaraṃ tissassa bhikkhuno, tissāya bhikkhuniyā, tissassa sāmaṇerassa, tissāya sāmaṇeriyā, tissāya sikkhamānāya vikappemī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
225.‘‘Imaṃ cīvaraṃ tissassa bhikkhuno, tissāya bhikkhuniyā, tissassa sāmaṇerassa, tissāya sāmaṇeriyā, tissāya sikkhamānāya vikappemī’’ti vattabbaṃ. – It should be said, "I relinquish this robe to the monk Tissa, to the nun Tissa, to the novice Tissa, to the female novice Tissa, to the trainee Tissa."
Tena bhikkhunā ‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno, tissāya bhikkhuniyā, tissassa sāmaṇerassa, tissāya sāmaṇeriyā, tissāya sikkhamānāya santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
Tena bhikkhunā ‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno, tissāya bhikkhuniyā, tissassa sāmaṇerassa, tissāya sāmaṇeriyā, tissāya sikkhamānāya santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti vattabbaṃ. – It should be said by that monk, "You may use what belongs to the monk Tissa, to the nun Tissa, to the novice Tissa, to the female novice Tissa, to the trainee Tissa, or dispose of it, or do with it as you please."
226.
226.
Parammukhāvikappane-kassantikevamīraye;
In relinquishment in one's absence, one should say this in the presence of an individual;
"I give you this robe for the purpose of relinquishment."
227.Tena vattabbo ‘‘ko te mitto vā sandiṭṭho vā’’ti. Itarena cevaṃ vattabbaṃ ‘‘tisso bhikkhū’’ti vā ‘‘tissā bhikkhunī’’ti vā ‘‘tisso sāmaṇero’’ti vā ‘‘tissā sāmaṇerī’’ti vā ‘‘tissā sikkhamānā’’ti vā.
227.Tena vattabbo ‘‘ko te mitto vā sandiṭṭho vā’’ti. Itarena cevaṃ vattabbaṃ ‘‘tisso bhikkhū’’ti vā ‘‘tissā bhikkhunī’’ti vā ‘‘tisso sāmaṇero’’ti vā ‘‘tissā sāmaṇerī’’ti vā ‘‘tissā sikkhamānā’’ti vā. – He should be asked, "Who is your friend or acquaintance?" And it should be said by the other, "The monk Tissa," or "The nun Tissa," or "The novice Tissa," or "The female novice Tissa," or "The trainee Tissa."
Puna tena ‘‘ahaṃ tissassa tissāya vā dammī’’ti vikappetvā teneva ‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno, tissāya bhikkhuniyā, tissassa sāmaṇerassa, tissāya sāmaṇeriyā, tissāya sikkhamānāya santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti paccuddharitabbaṃ.
Puna tena ‘‘ahaṃ tissassa tissāya vā dammī’’ti vikappetvā teneva ‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno, tissāya bhikkhuniyā, tissassa sāmaṇerassa, tissāya sāmaṇeriyā, tissāya sikkhamānāya santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti paccuddharitabbaṃ. – Again, having relinquished, "I give to Tissa or to Tissa," it should be withdrawn by him with, "You may use what belongs to the monk Tissa, to the nun Tissa, to the novice Tissa, to the female novice Tissa, to the trainee Tissa, or dispose of it, or do with it as you please."
228.
228.
Dūrasantikattekattabahubhāvaṃ vijāniya;
Having understood distance, proximity, singularity, plurality;
One should apply "This to this," "These to these" here.
229.
229.
Dasāhaṃ māsamekaṃ vā, pañca vā kathinatthate;
Ten days, one month, or five for those who need a kathina robe;
For the sake of its completion, if there is anticipation of a month for the first one;
One does not incur forfeiture if it is not designated and relinquished.
32. Nissayaniddeso
32. Explanation of Dependence
Nissayoti –
Nissayoti –
230.
230.
Byattassa pañcavassassa, natthi nissaya kāriyaṃ;
For an articulate individual of five years, there is no need to take dependence;
Even for a lifetime, an inarticulate individual lives in dependence.
231.
231.
Ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā, paggaṇhitvāna añjaliṃ;
Having arranged the robe over one shoulder, having raised the joined palms;
Having sat squatting, he should say up to three times;
"May you be my preceptor, venerable sir,
I will live in dependence on the venerable one."
232.
232.
Pakkante pakkhasaṅkante, vibbhante vāpi nissayo;
Dependence ceases when the preceptor departs, goes abroad, or becomes insane;
It ends with death, non-arising, or reconciliation with the preceptor.
233.
233.
Nissāya na vaselajjiṃ, apubbaṃ ṭhānamāgato;
He should not live in dependence, being ashamed, having come to a place previously unknown;
He should approach four or five days later, to learn the customs of the Sangha.
234.
234.
Addhikassa gilānassa, gilānupaṭṭhakassa ca;
For a traveler, for a sick person, and for one who attends to the sick;
Having requested it, or in the wilderness, if he can find comfortable lodging;
It is allowable to live in a suitable place with donors for that long.
33. Kāyabandhananiddeso
33. Explanation of the Body-Band
Kāyabandhananti –
Kāyabandhananti –
235.
235.
Akāyabandhano gāmaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ paviseyya ce;
If one without a body-band should enter a village, it is a dukaṭa;
He should tie it wherever he remembers, even having gone without it.
236.
236.
Paṭṭikā sūkarantanti, duvidhaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ;
The paṭṭikā and the "pig's tooth" are the two kinds of body-bands;
A cloth strip and a string, and one that is similar to that.
237.
237.
Macchakaṇṭakakhajjūrī-pattā maṭṭhā ca paṭṭikā;
Fish spine, date palm leaf, and smooth are the paṭṭikās;
They can be ten or four fingers wide, with double thread at the ends.
238.
238.
Mālādiṃ kakkaṭacchādiṃ, dassetvā guṇasuttaka;
Having shown the string with designs such as garlands or crab coverings;
Paṭṭikās with designs of pounded or elephant coverings are not allowable.
239.
239.
Ghaṭakaṃ makaramukhādiṃ, na kappanti dasāmukhe;
Ornaments such as pots or crocodile faces are not allowable on the ends;
Pots, lines, drawings, or other figures are allowable on both ends.
240.
240.
Deḍḍubhakañca murajaṃ, maddavīṇaṃ kalābukaṃ;
Small drums, muraja drums, soft lutes, or kalābuka gourds;
Are not allowable on the ends, but are allowable only in the middle.
241.
241.
Veḷudantavisāṇaṭṭhikaṭṭhalākhāphalāmayā;
Those made of bamboo, ivory, horn, bone, wood, lac, or fruit;
Or made of conch, gutta-percha, string, reed, or iron;
These kinds are allowable, and knots made of those materials are also allowable.
Paṭhamabhāṇavāraṃ niṭṭhitaṃ.
The First Recitation Section is Complete.
34. Pathavīniddeso
34. Explanation of Earth
Pathavī cāti –
Pathavī cāti –
242.
242.
Jātājātāti duvidhā, suddhamattikapaṃsukā;
There are two kinds: cultivated and uncultivated, pure clay and dust;
Cultivated and burnt earth, and abundant clay and dust;
And a pile of dust and clay that is more than four months' worth.
243.
243.
Suddhasakkharapāsāṇamarumbakathalavālukā;
Pure gravel, stones, coarse gravel, potsherds, sand;
Burnt ground and ground with abundant gravel and so forth;
The second pile mentioned above is for one with more than four months' worth.
244.
244.
Dve bhāgā tīsu bhāgesu, mattikā yassa bhūmiyā;
If two parts out of three parts of the ground are clay;
This is mostly clay, and this principle applies to the rest as well.
245.
245.
Pācitti khaṇane jāte, jātasaññissa dukkaṭaṃ;
A pācittiya occurs when digging, and a dukaṭa for one with the perception of cultivated ground;
A dukaṭa for one with the perception of uncultivated ground, and no offense for lawful use.
246.
246.
Pahāre pahārāpatti, khaṇamānassa attanā;
An offense occurs with each strike for one who is digging himself;
One offense for one order, and different offenses for different orders.
247.
247.
‘‘Imaṃ ṭhānamimaṃ kandamidha vāpiṃ khaṇettha ca;
It is not proper to direct, "Dig this place, this hole, dig a well here;
Light a fire," imposing a restriction.
248.
248.
‘‘Thambhassimassāvāṭaṃ vā, mattikaṃ jāna māhara;
"Know whether the clay for this pillar or drain is cultivated, and then bring it;
Do what is allowable," such a statement is proper.
249.
249.
Asambaddhaṃ pathaviyā, sukkhakaddamaādikaṃ;
One may ruin mud that is not connected to the earth, dried mud, and so forth;
Thin mud and mud that can be poured out.
250.
250.
Gaṇḍuppādaṃ upacikāmattikaṃ mūsikukkiraṃ;
One should not ruin earthworms, upacikā clay, mouse mounds;
A pile more than four months old, or lumps of earth.
251.
251.
Patite vāpiādīnaṃ, kūle udakasantike;
On the banks of rivers and so forth that have fallen, near the water;
On stones and dust that is stuck, or fallen on new embankments.
252.
252.
Vammike mattikākuṭṭe, abbhokāsuṭṭhite tathā;
On anthills, clay walls, and similarly on those raised in the open air;
In a place with abundant potsherds, or a wall made of potsherds that is standing.
253.
253.
Thambhādiṃ gaṇhituṃ bhūmiṃ, sañcāletvā vikopayaṃ;
To move the ground and ruin it in order to secure pillars and so forth;
To break the ground with a stream of water, or to make what is uneven even.
254.
254.
Sammuñjanīhi ghaṃsituṃ, kaṇṭakādiṃ pavesituṃ;
To rub with brooms, to insert thorns and so forth;
Breaking the ground to show it, or to walk on it.
255.
255.
Ghaṃsituṃ aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ, kaṇḍurogī taṭādisu;
It is not proper to rub one's limbs and extremities due to skin disease on embankments and so forth;
Or to wash one's hands on the ground, or to rub it.
256.
256.
Thambhādiujukuddhāro, pāsāṇādipavaṭṭanaṃ;
The straight removal of pillars and so forth, the rolling of stones and so forth;
The pulling of branches and so forth, and the cutting and splitting of trees and vines.
257.
257.
Seko passāvaādīnaṃ, suddhacittassa vaṭṭati;
Sprinkling water, urine, and so forth, is allowable for one with a pure mind;
And after placing a wet hand, one may gather dust from the ground.
258.
258.
Aggissa anupādāne, kapāle iṭṭhakāya vā;
Without fuel, it is allowable to place fire in a potsherd or brick;
Or to drop fire on the ground, if there is no grass.
35. Parikkhāraniddeso
35. Explanation of Requisites
Parikkhāroti –
Parikkhāroti –
259.
259.
Pañcavaṇṇehi suttehi, anto bahi ca sibbituṃ;
To sew with threads of five colors, inside and out;
To cut (shapes like) mountain peaks, half-moons, etc., on the umbrella and the fan.
260.
260.
Ghaṭakaṃ vāḷarūpaṃ vā, daṇḍe lekhā na vaṭṭati;
A pot shape or a lion shape, lines on the handle are not allowed;
It is allowed on the handle's knob, similar to an ahicchattaka.
261.
261.
Sibbituṃ ekavaṇṇena, pañjaraṃ vā vinandhituṃ;
To sew with one color, or to make a cage pattern;
For stability on the umbrella, lines like writing on the handle are allowed to be tied.
262.
262.
Ante paṭṭamukhe vāpi, veṇi saṅkhalikāpi vā;
A hem at the edge, or a braid or chain pattern;
Or any needlework decoration is not suitable on the robe;
Even a dot-like decoration, or a pāḷikaṇṇika, etc.
263.
263.
Gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭāpi, catukkoṇāva agghiyaṃ;
Knotted straps or bands, or a four-cornered embellishment are excessive;
A mallet, crab-shell cover, or similar decorations are not allowed here.
264.
264.
Koṇasuttā ca pīḷakā, duviññeyyāva kappare;
Corner threads and padding, both should be carefully discerned for the cloth;
Do not put scent, oil, or lac into the dye.
265.
265.
Rattaṃ saṅkhena maṇinā, ghaṭṭeyyaññena vā na ca;
Red color with lac, with jewels, or with other (agents), one should not rub;
One should grind it in a trough, but not with blows from the fist.
266.
266.
Kaṇṇakoṇakasuttāni, ratte chindeyya cīvare;
Cut the corner threads on the edge, in the red-dyed robe;
Lines are not allowed in making a dhamma (robe), nor on the umbrella’s edge.
267.
267.
Lekhaṃ ṭhapetvā maṇikā, pīḷakā kuñcikāya ca;
Having placed the line, for jewels, padding and for the key;
A dividing line on the pepper fruit and on the handle is allowed.
268.
268.
Mālādyaraṇiyaṃ patta-maṇḍale bhittikamma ca;
Garlands and other adornments, a circular pattern of leaves and mural work;
Two lines below and above, similar to an ahicchattaka.
269.
269.
Hitvā kattarayaṭṭhimhi, sūcisaṇḍāsakepi ca;
Except on the handle of scissors and on the needle case;
Any color decoration like mountain peaks etc., is not allowed.
270.
270.
Bimbohane bhisimañca-pīṭhādisayanāsane;
On a footstool, a lotus-fiber mat, a seat, and a bed;
In a broom, a trash receptacle, and a dye pot.
271.
271.
Pānīyabhājane pāda-pīṭhe kathalikāya ca;
In a water pot, a footrest, and a small container;
On pot-lids, and fans, and hand fans;
Any flower work and other decorations are unprohibited.
272.
272.
Senāsane pana dvārakavāṭādippabhedane;
However, on a seat, a door, and various types of gates;
When gold work is allowed, what to say of color decorations?
273.
273.
Visāṇanāḷilābvādippabhede telabhājane;
In various types of horn pipes, gourd pipes, and oil pots;
Color decoration without male or female figures is unprohibited.
36. Bhesajjaniddeso
36. Explanation of Medicine
Bhesajjanti –
Medicine means –
274.
274.
Janassa kātuṃ bhesajjaṃ, dātuṃ vattuṃ na labbhati;
To make medicine for a person, to give, to say, is not permissible;
Begging is permissible for a co-religionist who is an ācariya.
275.
275.
Pitūnaṃ tadupaṭṭhākabhikkhunissitabhaṇḍunaṃ;
For one’s fathers, for a monk attending on him, for goods dependent (on him);
Making medicine is allowed for one who does work on his behalf.
276.
276.
Mahācūḷapitāmātābhātābhaginiādinaṃ;
For a great-grandfather, grandmother, father, mother, brother, sister, etc.;
It should be given to them from one’s own resources temporarily.
277.
277.
Kuladūsanaviññatti, bhesajjakaraṇādi hi;
Begging that is a cause for family disgrace, making medicine, etc.;
Is not fitting with one's mothers, fathers, and relatives.
278.
278.
Piṇḍapāto anāmaṭṭho, mātādīnamavārito;
Unrequested alms food is unprohibited for mothers and others;
Also for the six, a woodsman, a thief, and an independent person.
279.
279.
Tesaṃ suttodakeheva, parittaṃ kayirā nattano;
For them, with thread and water alone, one should make a paritta for oneself;
It should be said, having it spoken, a paritta infused with the Teaching.
280.
280.
Sīlaṃ dhammaṃ parittaṃ vā, āgantvā detu bhāsatu;
Let him come and give or speak of morality, the Teaching, or a paritta;
It is permissible to give and to speak, having sent someone to go.
37. Uggahaniddeso
37. Explanation of Acceptance
Uggahoti –
Acceptance means –
281.
281.
Kammacetiyasaṅghañña-puggalatthaṃ gaṇassa ca;
For the sake of a work-shrine, the Saṅgha, relatives, individuals, and the community;
For all ten types of valuables, there is a dukkata for one who accepts.
282.
282.
Nissaggi tesu attatthaṃ, dvīsu sesesu dukkaṭaṃ;
For one’s own sake, for those, there is a nissaggiya, and for the remaining two, a dukkata;
But having said it without requesting, for the community, the Saṅgha, and the individual.
283.
283.
‘‘Cetyassa navakammassa, dammī’’ti na paṭikkhipe;
One should not refuse, saying, "I will give for the shrine's renovation";
One should say to those doing what is allowable, "Let these speak thus."
284.
284.
Khettaṃ vatthuṃ taḷākaṃ vā, dente dāsapasvādikaṃ;
When giving a field, property, or pond, slaves, cattle, etc.;
Having refused, one should accept it, according to what is allowable and proper;
Regarding fields etc., for the monastery, it is allowable to say "I will give."
285.
285.
Navamātikakedāra-taḷākakiriyānave;
Newly made raised beds, fields, and ponds;
Digging earth, building a dam, making it stable, and irrigation channels.
286.
286.
Tirekabhāgagahaṇaṃ, kedāre anave nave;
Taking an extra share, in a field that is not new;
In an undefined area of crops, saying "Give this much";
And arranging for money, all of this is unallowable.
287.
287.
Avatvā kasa vappiccādettikāya ca bhūmiyā;
Without saying, "Plow, sow," etc., for land given as payment;
Or establishing a land, (saying) "The share should be this much."
288.
288.
Bhūmibhāge kataṃ sassaṃ, ettake gaṇhathettakaṃ;
Crops grown on a plot of land, taking this much for that much;
Speaking thus for the purpose of taking, measuring with sticks and ropes.
289.
289.
Minane rakkhaṇe ṭhatvā, khale taṃnīharāpane;
Standing at the measuring and guarding, at the threshing floor, at the winnowing;
At the storage in a barn etc., all this is unallowable for him.
290.
290.
Paṭisāmeyya pācitti, yaṃ kiñci gihisantakaṃ;
He should take care of a pācittiya, whatever belongs to a householder;
Even if it belongs to one’s father, under the supervision of the storekeeper.
291.
291.
Pitūnaṃ kappiyaṃ vatthuṃ, avassaṃ paṭisāmiyaṃ;
One should definitely take care of allowable items belonging to one's fathers;
Having made it one's own property, it is allowable to take care of it.
292.
292.
Dehīti paṭisāmetvā, vutte cāpi paṭikkhipe;
Having taken care of it, saying "Give it," and then refusing;
Having dropped it and gone, it is allowable to protect it as an encumbrance.
293.
293.
Kammaṃ karonto ārāme, sakaṃ vaḍḍhakiādayo;
While doing work in the monastery, one’s own carpenters, etc.;
And requisites, bedding, or goods dear to the king.
294.
294.
Dehīti paṭisāmetvā, vadanti yadi chandato;
Having taken care of it, saying "Give it," if they say it willingly;
One should not do it out of fear, it is allowable to show a safe place.
295.
295.
Balakkārena pātetvā, gatesu paṭisāmituṃ;
Having forcibly dropped it and gone, to take care of it;
Monks think of people, when the property is lost in such a way.
296.
296.
Vihārāvasathassanto, ratanaṃ ratnasammataṃ;
Inside the monastery residence, a valuable considered valuable;
One should put it away, having taken it, even on another path like that;
Having known that the owners have not come, a suitable action should be done.
38. Kuladūsananiddeso
38. Explanation of Family Disgrace
Dūsananti –
Disgrace means –
297.
297.
Pupphaṃ veḷuṃ phalaṃ cuṇṇaṃ, dantakaṭṭhañca mattikaṃ;
Flowers, bamboo, fruits, powder, tooth sticks, and clay;
Giving for the purpose of collecting, it is a kuladūsana-dukkata.
298.
298.
Thullaccayaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, issarenettha saṅghikaṃ;
A thullaccaya for giving heavy goods, that is the Saṅgha's property, under one’s control;
Dukkaṭas and others for stealing, belonging to the Saṅgha and relatives.
299.
299.
Kulasaṅgahā ropetuṃ, ropāpetuñca sabbathā;
To plant for the benefit of the family, and to have (others) plant in every way;
A tree that bears fruits and flowers, it is not allowable to tend it.
300.
300.
Nimittobhāsato kappavohārapariyāyato;
By indication, hint, allowable expression, or implication;
Planting etc., for the purpose of one's own use, is permitted.
301.
301.
Vuttāva vejjikā jaṅghapesane gihikammasu;
It has been said (to be allowable) to visit physicians, in leg massage and in lay activities;
Except for one's fathers, goods, and one’s own attendant.
302.
302.
Dukkaṭaṃ padavārena, haraṇe dūtasāsanaṃ;
A dukkata for going by foot, for a messenger's message;
Even without taking the message, first saying (something), then again.
303.
303.
Uppannapaccayā evaṃ, pañcannampi akappiyā;
Thus, because of arising conditions, the following five are unallowable;
Unfounded accusations, deceitful speech, bartering, accepting, etc.
304.
304.
Harāpetvā haritvāpi, pitūnaṃ sesañātinaṃ;
Having had (someone) bring or having brought, for one’s fathers and remaining relatives;
It is allowable to give flowers for the purpose of bowls, cloths and worship;
And for decoration and worshiping the liṅga, etc., it is not allowable.
305.
305.
Tathā phalaṃ gilānānaṃ, sampattissariyassa ca;
Likewise, it is allowable to give fruit to the sick, to those who are prosperous and independent;
And to those without expenses, with the owner's permission.
306.
306.
Bhājente phalapupphamhi, deyyaṃ pattassa kassaci;
When distributing fruits and flowers, some should be given to someone’s bowl;
Having sought agreement, and having looked around, it should be given to others.
307.
307.
Vihāre vā paricchijja, katvāna katikaṃ tato;
Or, having defined (an amount) in the monastery, and then made an agreement;
It should be given according to the defined amount, to the sick or to others;
Having asked, the agreement should be stated, and the trees should be shown.
308.
308.
Sirīsakasavādīnaṃ, cuṇṇe sese ca nicchayo;
The decision is the same for powder from sirisa (neem) and kasa plants, and for remnants;
The same method as stated above applies here for leaves as well.
39. Vassūpanāyikaniddeso
39. Explanation of Entering Vassa
Vassūpanāyikā cevāti –
Entering the Rains, and also –
309.
309.
Purimikā pacchimikā, duve vassūpanāyikā;
The earlier and the later, there are two ways of entering the Rains;
There, attachment to the dwelling, and difference in speech are as follows.
310.
310.
‘‘Imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ, temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemi;
"In this monastery, for this three months, I enter the Rains;
Here, I enter the Rains," here, the attachment is the arising of thought.
311.
311.
Nopetukāmo āvāsaṃ, tadahūtikkameyya vā;
Not wanting to enter the dwelling, or if he exceeds that day;
There would be an offense of dukkata, knowingly, for not approaching.
312.
312.
Dutiyaṃ upagaccheyya, chinnavassonupāgato;
He should approach a second (dwelling), having had his Rains cut off and not approaching (elsewhere);
He should not depart for three months, without having stayed, and without wandering.
313.
313.
Mātāpitūnamatthāya, pañcannaṃ sahadhamminaṃ;
For the sake of mothers and fathers, for the five co-religionists;
For the sick, their attendants, for food, the seeking of alms, and medicine.
314.
314.
Pucchissāmi upaṭṭhissaṃ, gantvānabhirataṃ ahaṃ;
"I will ask, I will attend, having gone, I will not be delighted;
I will remove remorse, a serious wrong view, etc."
315.
315.
Karissaṃ vāpi kāressaṃ, vinodanaṃ vivecanaṃ;
"Or I will do or have done, settling and sorting out;
Or striving for departure," with the intention of going, etc.;
It is allowable with a seven-day reason, whether sent or not sent.
316.
316.
Saṅghakamme vaje dhamma-ssavanatthaṃ nimantito;
If he goes for Saṅgha business, for the sake of hearing the Dhamma, invited;
Or sent by superiors, or even to see superiors.
317.
317.
Na bhaṇḍadhovanuddesa-ñātupaṭṭhākadassane;
It is not allowable for washing robes, giving instructions, or seeing relatives;
It is not allowable if he will not reach (his destination) that day, or is going far away.
318.
318.
Sesañātīhi pahite, bhikkhunissitakena ca;
Sent by remaining relatives, or by a monk's dependent;
By a male or female lay follower, having specified it when sending.
319.
319.
Vassacchede anāpatti, antarāye satattano;
There is no offense if the Rains are broken, or because of one's own danger;
Or because of the Saṅgha's unity; otherwise, having had the Rains cut off, he should invite (for pavāraṇā).
320.
320.
Ajjhokāse ca rukkhassa, susire viṭapepi vā;
In the open air, and in a tree's hollow or branch;
In a charnel ground, hut, umbrella, shed—it is not allowable to go.
321.
321.
Asenāsanikenāpi, upagantuṃ na labbhati;
It is not allowable to go even to a non-residence;
And it is allowable to invite (for pavāraṇā), but not having gone for a dwelling.
40. Avebhaṅgiyaniddeso
40. Explanation of Inseparable (Items)
Avebhaṅgiyanti –
Inseparable means –
322.
322.
Ārāmārāmavatthūni, vihāro tassa vatthu ca;
Monasteries and monastery grounds, a residence and its land;
A cot, a chair, a cushion, and bedding such as a headrest.
323.
323.
Lohakumbhī kaṭāho ca,
A metal pot and a cauldron,
A metal bowl stand;
An ax, an adze, a hatchet,
A hoe, and a digging tool.
324.
324.
Valli veḷu tiṇaṃ paṇṇaṃ, muñjapabbajamattikā;
Vines, bamboo, grass, leaves, muñja grass, reeds, and clay;
Wooden and clay containers, these five are indivisible.
325.
325.
Thullaccayaṃ bhājayato, bhājitāpi abhājitā;
There is a thullaccaya for dividing, and even if divided, it is undivided;
Heavy goods are said (to be indivisible), and also those that are disposable.
326.
326.
Valliḍḍhabāhumattāpi, veḷu aṭṭhaṅgulāyato;
Even the size of a strong bull's penis, or a bamboo eight finger-breadths long; A handful of grass or leaves, or even a single clod of earth.
327.
327.
Pākatā pañcavaṇṇā vā, sudhākaṅguṭṭha ādikā;
Cooked items of five colors, or white rice the size of a thumb; Even the size of a ripe palmyra fruit, if given or produced there.
328.
328.
Rakkhitā saṅghikā rajju-yottādīpi abhājiyā;
Ropes, tethers, etc., kept for the Sangha are indivisible; When the work is completed, they are divisible for the Sangha or a Cetiya.
329.
329.
Pattādi bhikkhusāruppaṃ, tathā vippakatākataṃ;
Bowls and other items suitable for a bhikkhu, whether unfinished or finished; Divisible are metal bowls, stands, and foot-wipers.
330.
330.
Veḷumhi bhājiyā tela-nāḷi kattaradaṇḍako;
Divisible in bamboo are oil measures, razor handles; Umbrella handles and ribs, as well as shoe handles.
331.
331.
Anuññātavāsidaṇḍo, karaṇḍo pādagaṇhako;
An allowed walking stick, a box, a foot-wiper; A fire-drill, ointment horn, etc., likewise, bhikkhu's equipment.
332.
332.
Tacchitāniṭṭhitaṃ dārubhaṇḍaṃ dantañca bhājiyaṃ;
Carved and uncarved wooden items and ivory are divisible; Among a bhikkhu's equipment is a foot-support made of clay.
333.
333.
Bhājiyaṃ kappiyaṃ cammaṃ, eḷacammamabhājiyaṃ;
Prepared leather is divisible, but goat skin is not; Heavy items go with heavy, and immovable with immovable.
334.
334.
Thāvaraṃ parivatteyya, tathā katvā ca bhuñjatu;
One may exchange immovable property and use it accordingly; Vines, etc., may be taken with the phāṭika process, the remainder is indivisible.
41. Pakiṇṇakaniddeso
41. Miscellaneous Items
Pakiṇṇakanti –
Miscellaneous:–
335.
335.
Sadvārabandhane ṭhāne, sodukkhalakapāsake;
At a place with a door frame, having a socket and hinge; By himself, during the day, he should close the revolving door.
336.
336.
Sante viññumhi purise, ābhogo cāpi kappati;
If there is an intelligent person present, seeking permission is appropriate; Without that, doing it on his own incurs a dukkata.
337.
337.
Ratanānitthirūpāni, dhaññamitthipasādhanaṃ;
Gold, silver, and pearls, grain, women's ornaments; Musical instruments and weapons, touching them incurs a dukkata.
338.
338.
Sitthatelodatelehi, phaṇahatthaphaṇehi vā;
With lacquer, oil, or sesame oil, or with a fan or the hand; Applying oil to the hair with a comb incurs a dukkata.
339.
339.
Nekapāvuraṇā ekattharaṇā vā tuvaṭṭayuṃ;
Several robes, or one spread, may be quickly mended; Likewise, they may eat on one bed or in one bowl.
340.
340.
Caturaṅgulato ūnamadhikaṭṭhaṅgulaṃ tathā;
Less than four finger-breadths, or more than eight aṅgulas; One should not chew a toothpick, nor garlic if one is not sick.
341.
341.
Hīnukkaṭṭhehi ukkaṭṭhaṃ, hīnaṃ vā jātiādihi;
To call a superior inferior, or an inferior superior, by birth, etc.; To speak falsely with an ulterior motive, giving a wrong interpretation.
342.
342.
Dīghe nakhe ca kese ca, nāsalome na dhāraye;
One should not keep long nails and hair, or nose hair; Hair removal is not allowed except in a crowded space of twenty-eight.
343.
343.
Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ na bādheyya, saṅghuddiṭṭhaṃva saṅghikaṃ;
One should not inconvenience elders, nor what the Sangha has designated as belonging to the Sangha; One should not step onto a bed or seat with unwashed or wet feet; Nor with well-washed feet, if wearing shoes.
344.
344.
Saṅghāṭiyā na pallatthe, bhittādiṃ na apassaye;
One should not recline on the Sanghaṭi, nor lean against walls, etc.; If there is a prepared place, one should not rinse one's mouth in the water.
345.
345.
Akappiyasamādāne, davā silāpavijjhane;
For inappropriate acceptance, giving a stone pestle; For teaching to a compatible assembly, or for obvious work, a dukkata.
346.
346.
Paṭissavavisaṃvāde, suddhacittassa dukkaṭaṃ;
Breaking a promise incurs a dukkata for one of pure intent; At the moment of breaking the promise, a pācittiya for the other.
347.
347.
Na rukkhamabhirūheyya, sati kicceva porisaṃ;
One should not climb a tree; if there is an important reason, a man may; In emergencies, it is allowed to climb as one pleases.
348.
348.
Vināddhānaṃ vajantassa, dukkaṭaṃ parisāvanaṃ;
A dukkata for going without an addhāṇa, and for using a filter; A dukkata for not giving when asked for an addhāṇa.
349.
349.
Thullaccayaṃ phuse aṅgajātacchedena dukkaṭaṃ;
One incurs a thullaccaya for cutting off one's genitals, and a dukkata; For suicide involving other body parts, except due to illness.
350.
350.
Cittapotthakarūpāni, na kare na ca kāraye;
One should not make or have made paintings of figures; One should not interrupt a meal in monasteries or forest dwellings.
351.
351.
Yānāni pumayuttāni, sivikaṃ hatthavaṭṭakaṃ;
Vehicles drawn by men, a palanquin, a hand-carried chair; And a stretcher, it is allowed for the sick to ride in.
352.
352.
Buddhaṃ dhammañca saṅghañca, ārabbha karaṇe davaṃ;
Regarding the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Sangha, giving rise to anger; A dukkata for deriding the assembly or another person.
353.
353.
Kāyaṃ ūruṃ nimittaṃ vā, bhikkhunīnaṃ na dassaye;
One should not show one's body, thighs, or private parts to bhikkhunis; One should not sprinkle them with water or mud after uncovering.
354.
354.
Na gaṇhato ca ovādaṃ, na paccāharatopi ca;
A dukkata for not taking advice from one who gives it, or from one who rejects it; Excluding children, the sick, or those on a journey.
355.
355.
Lokāyataṃ na vāceyya, palitaṃ na ca gāhaye;
One should not recite worldly lore, nor engage in fortune-telling; One should not eat from a container, nor play any games.
356.
356.
Pārupe na nivāseyya, gihipārutanivāsanaṃ;
One should not wear a robe in the manner of a householder; One should wear it folded, and not smear it with dye.
357.
357.
Vaḍḍhiṃ payojaye yāce, noññātakappavārite;
One may invest interest and request it, but not if it's unapproved or forbidden; What is given for one's own use, one should not give to another; Having taken the best part and eaten, one may give the rest after a few days.
358.
358.
Uddissa yācane rakkhaṃ, ñatvāñatvā va daṇḍinaṃ;
Knowing that one is protecting something by requesting, knowing the penalty for theft; The penalty is on the neck of the one penalized, but for ordering the penalty oneself; The pārājika and other penalties should be understood according to the value of the stolen goods.
359.
359.
Harantesu parikkhāraṃ, ‘‘coro coro’’ti bhāsite;
If someone says "Thief, thief!" while others are stealing requisites; For taking it for their ruin, the penalty is on the neck for that amount.
360.
360.
Vighāsuccārasaṅkāra-muttaṃ chaḍḍeyya dukkaṭaṃ;
A dukkata for throwing away remnants of food, urine, or feces; Outside the walls and enclosures, without looking around; Or on green crops, such as rice seedlings or coconut seedlings.
361.
361.
Yojāpetuṃ payojetuṃ, payuttāni ca passituṃ;
It is not allowed to commission, encourage, or watch dancers, singers, and musicians; Or to accept when told, "Let us make an offering."
362.
362.
Rājāgāraṃ pokkharaṇiṃ, uyyānaṃ cittagārakaṃ;
A dukkata is incurred for going to see a royal palace, a pond, a park, a picture gallery; Or a pleasure garden.
363.
363.
Nave na paṭibāheyyā-sanenuṇhe na cīvaraṃ;
One should not refuse a new seat or hot water; One should not discard a robe, and should ask forgiveness when honored by a superior.
364.
364.
Akkosane parammukhā, āpattīhi ca sattahi;
Turning away during abuse, and from seven kinds of offenses; A dukkata for a bhikkhu, a lay follower, or anyone else.
365.
365.
Na labbhaṃ vinipātetuṃ, saddhādeyyañca cīvaraṃ;
It is not allowed to destroy a robe given in faith; It is allowed for one's parents, but not for other relatives.
366.
366.
Vassaṃvutthoññatoññatra, bhāgaṃ gaṇheyya dukkaṭaṃ;
A dukkata for taking a share elsewhere than where one has spent the rains; One should return it if it is lost or worn out; One should not give the value of the robe when accused; The one who bears the burden is the one who sets the value of the goods.
367.
367.
Na santaruttaro gāmaṃ, kallo vā saupāhano;
One who is not ill should not enter a village with both upper and lower robes off, or wearing shoes; One should not carry a yak-tail fan or a fly whisk.
368.
368.
Agilāno na chindeyya, kese kattariyā bahi;
One who is not ill should not cut one's hair outside the monastery with scissors; One should not carry an umbrella from the monastery, but it is allowed for protection.
369.
369.
Gāheyya nubhatokājaṃ, ekantarikakājakaṃ;
One may take nubhatoka grass or ekantarika grass; Loads on the head, shoulders, waist, or hand are allowed.
370.
370.
Āpattiyā anokāsa-kataṃ codeyya dukkaṭaṃ;
A dukkata is incurred for accusing someone of an offense for which no opportunity was given; And for accusing an innocent person, or for a valid reason.
371.
371.
Aṭṭhaṅgulādhikaṃ mañcapaṭipādaṃ na dhāraye;
One should not keep bed legs higher than eight aṅgulas; Or a high-legged bed more than seven pakataṅgulas.
372.
372.
Mūgabbatādiṃ gaṇheyya, dukkaṭaṃ titthiyabbataṃ;
One incurs a dukkata for taking a vow of silence or other heretical vows; One should avoid a razor case, likewise, one who was formerly a barber.
373.
373.
Yaṃ kiñci yācituṃ hatthakammaṃ tadanusārato;
Whatever manual labor is required to request something, according to that; It is allowed to take what is obtained or crafted without requesting; To have someone make or bring anything belonging to another.
374.
374.
Gihīnaṃ gopake dente, gahetuṃ deti yattakaṃ;
As much as is given to the householders' watchman, it is allowed to take; According to the prescribed limit, for properties belonging to the Sangha or a Cetiya.
375.
375.
Dvīhāpajjeyya āpattiṃ, kāyavācāhi vā chahi;
One may incur two offenses, or six with body and speech; Shamelessness, ignorance, scruples, and intentionality are like a flood of mindfulness; Whether something is allowable or unallowable, perceiving it as allowable or unallowable.
376.
376.
Alajjiññāṇatāpattiṃ, kāyavācāhi chādaye;
One may conceal an offense due to shamelessness and ignorance with body and speech; The arising of an offense is fourfold: in a person, a Sangha, a group, or individually.
377.
377.
Parikathobhāsaviññatti, na labbhā paccayadvaye;
Parikatha, obhāsa, and viññatti are not allowed for two requisites; Only viññatti is allowed for the third, and everything is allowed for the rest.
378.
378.
Na rūhataccaye dānaṃ, pañcannaṃ sahadhamminaṃ;
Giving does not increase in value at death for five co-religionists; It belongs only to the Sangha, but it increases in value for laypeople.
379.
379.
Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vā, kālaṃ kayirāthūpassaye;
If a bhikkhu or a sāmaṇera dies in a residence; The Bhikkhu Sangha is the heir, and the same principle applies to the remainder.
380.
380.
Purimassevimaṃ dinnaṃ, dehi netvāsukassati;
"Give what was given to the former one, take it to so-and-so"; Knowing this rule, that "I will give it to the latter one"; One may take it with confidence or dispose of the deceased's robe.
381.
381.
Lohabhaṇḍe paharaṇiṃ, dārubhaṇḍe ca dārujaṃ;
In metal bowls, a hammer; in wooden items, a wooden one; A bowl, a slipper, a bed, a chair, and clay items; Having placed them, everything is allowable, according to the potter's craft.
42. Desanāniddeso
42. Disclosure
Desanāti –
Disclosure:–
382.
382.
Cāgo yo bhikkhubhāvassa, sā pārājikadesanā;
Abandonment of the state of a bhikkhu is disclosure of a pārājika; Rising from it as stated is disclosure of a serious offense.
383.
383.
Ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā, paggaṇhitvāna añjaliṃ;
Sitting in the squatting position, raising the joined palms; One should disclose a thullaccaya, etc., in this way to one person.
384.‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ thullaccayāpattiṃ āpajjiṃ, taṃ tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti vatvā tena ‘‘passasi, āvuso, taṃ āpatti’’nti vutte ‘‘āma, bhante, passāmī’’ti vatvā puna tena ‘‘āyatiṃ, āvuso, saṃvareyyāsī’’ti vutte ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu, bhante, saṃvarissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, dve thullaccayāpattiyo āpajjiṃ, ahaṃ bhante sambahulā thullaccayāpattiyo āpajjiṃ, tā tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
384. "Venerable Sir, I have committed a thullaccaya offense; I confess it at your feet." Having said this, if he is asked, "Do you see that offense, friend?" and he replies, "Yes, Venerable Sir, I see it," then he should be asked again, "In the future, friend, will you restrain yourself?" and he should reply, "Yes, Venerable Sir, I will restrain myself well." "Venerable Sir, I have committed two thullaccaya offenses; Venerable Sir, I have committed many thullaccaya offenses; I confess them at your feet," should be said.
Nissaggiyesu pana ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ dasāhātikkantaṃ nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ āyasmato nissajjāmī’’ti. ‘‘Imāni me, bhante, cīvarāni…pe… etaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ…pe… etāni me, bhante, cīvarāni dasāhātikkantāni nissaggiyāni, etānāhaṃ āyasmato nissajjāmī’’ti.
But in the case of Nissaggiya offenses, one says, "Venerable Sir, this robe of mine has exceeded ten days and is subject to forfeiture; I forfeit it to the venerable one." "Venerable Sir, these robes of mine... Venerable Sir, this robe of mine... Venerable Sir, these robes of mine have exceeded ten days and are subject to forfeiture; I forfeit these to the venerable one."
385.
385.
Nissajjitvāna deseyya, āpattiṃ tena bhikkhunā;
Having forfeited it, the bhikkhu should disclose the offense; Having accepted the offense, the forfeited robe should be given.
‘‘Imaṃ, imāni, etaṃ, etāni cīvarāni āyasmato dammī’’ti.
"I give this robe, these robes, this one, these robes to the venerable one."
386.(Ka) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ rattivippavutthaṃ aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā nissaggiyaṃ.
386.(Ka) Venerable Sir, this robe of mine has been separated overnight without the agreement of the bhikkhus, and is subject to forfeiture.
(Kha) idaṃ me, bhante, akālacīvaraṃ māsātikkantaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Kha) Venerable Sir, this robe of mine is an unseasonal robe that has exceeded a month and is subject to forfeiture.
(Ga) idaṃ me, bhante, purāṇacīvaraṃ aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā dhovāpitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ga) Venerable Sir, this old robe of mine has been washed by a bhikkhuni who is not a relative and is subject to forfeiture.
(Gha) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato paṭiggahitaṃ aññatra pārivattakā nissaggiyaṃ.
(Gha) Bhante, this robe is received by me from the hand of a bhikkhuni who is not a relative; it is to be forfeited, except in exchange.
(Ṅa) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ aññātakaṃ gahapatikaṃ aññatra samayā viññāpitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ṅa) Bhante, this robe is requested by me from a householder who is not a relative, other than at the proper time; it is to be forfeited.
(Ca) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ aññātakaṃ gahapatikaṃ tatuttari viññāpitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ca) Bhante, this robe is requested by me to a greater extent from a householder who is not a relative; it is to be forfeited.
(Cha) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ pubbe appavārito aññātakaṃ gahapatikaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vikappaṃ āpannaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Cha) Bhante, this robe, for which I had not previously invited, approaching a householder who is not a relative, has become subject to a vikappa; it is to be forfeited.
(Ja) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ pubbe appavārito aññātake gahapatike upasaṅkamitvā vikappaṃ āpannaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ja) Bhante, this robe, for which I had not previously invited, approaching householders who are not relatives, has become subject to a vikappa; it is to be forfeited.
(Jha) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ atirekatikkhattuṃ codanāya atirekachakkhattuṃ ṭhānena abhinipphāditaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Jha) Bhante, this robe is made beyond three times by urging, beyond six times by pressure; it is to be forfeited.
(Ña) idaṃ me, bhante, kosiyamissakaṃ santhataṃ kārāpitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ña) Bhante, this blanket interwoven with kosiya silk is made by me; it is to be forfeited.
(Ṭa) idaṃ me, bhante, suddhakāḷakānaṃ eḷakalomānaṃ santhataṃ kārāpitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ṭa) Bhante, this blanket is made by me entirely of black goat's wool; it is to be forfeited.
(Ṭha) idaṃ me, bhante, santhataṃ anādiyitvā tulaṃ odātānaṃ tulaṃ gocariyānaṃ kārāpitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ṭha) Bhante, this blanket is made by me, without using the old blanket, of one part white and one part of the common kind; it is to be forfeited.
(Ḍa) idaṃ me, bhante, santhataṃ ūnakachabbassāni kārāpitaṃ aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ḍa) Bhante, this blanket is made by me in less than six years, except with the agreement of the Sangha; it is to be forfeited.
(Ḍha) idaṃ me, bhante, nisīdanasanthataṃ anādiyitvā purāṇasanthatassa sāmantā sugatavidatthiṃ kārāpitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ḍha) Bhante, this sitting-cloth is made by me, without using the old sitting-cloth, with a sugatavidatthi measure of the border of the old blanket; it is to be forfeited.
(Ṇa) imāni me, bhante, eḷakalomāni tiyojanaparamaṃ atikkāmitāni nissaggiyāni.
(Ṇa) Bhante, this goat's wool is kept by me beyond the maximum of three yojanas; it is to be forfeited.
(Ta) imāni me, bhante, eḷakalomāni aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā dhovāpitāni nissaggiyāni.
(Ta) Bhante, this goat's wool is caused to be washed by me by a bhikkhuni who is not a relative; it is to be forfeited.
(Tha) ahaṃ, bhante, rūpiyaṃ paṭiggahesiṃ, idaṃ me, bhante, nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ saṅghassa nissajjāmi.
(Tha) Bhante, I have accepted silver; bhante, this is to be forfeited; I forfeit this to the Sangha.
(Da) ahaṃ, bhante, nānappakārakaṃ rūpiyasaṃvohāraṃ samāpajjiṃ, idaṃ me, bhante, nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ saṅghassa nissajjāmīti.
(Da) Bhante, I have engaged in various kinds of transactions with silver; bhante, this is to be forfeited; I forfeit this to the Sangha.
387.
387.
Nissajjitvāna āpattiṃ, deseyyātha gihiṃ vade;
Having forfeited the offense, he should declare it, and speak to a layperson;
“Know this,” by this, he should say, “What shall I bring?”
388.
388.
Avatvāmanti telādiṃ, vade bhikkhūna kappiyaṃ;
Without saying "Do not say," oil and so on, he should say what is allowable to the bhikkhus;
With what he brings, having exchanged, is allowable.
389.
389.
Labbhaṃ ṭhapetvā dvepete, sesehi paribhuñjituṃ;
Having kept what is obtainable, these two, it is proper to use the rest;
Even if a share is obtained by another than that, it is not proper for them.
390.
390.
Rukkhacchāyāpyantamaso, tannibbattā na kappati;
The shadow of a tree, and also darkness, what arises from that is not proper;
What is forfeited, even if recovered, likewise the three blankets from the beginning.
391.
391.
No ce labhetha evaṃ so, imaṃ chaḍḍehi saṃsiyo;
If he does not obtain it thus, he should abandon this, being doubtful;
Even thus, a bhikkhu should abandon it, if he does not obtain agreement.
392.
392.
Etāni dutiyo patto, saṅghe sesāni labbhare;
These are the second bowl, the rest are obtainable in the Sangha;
It is obtainable to speak in the Sangha, in a group, even in another language.
393.(Ka) ahaṃ, bhante, nānappakārakaṃ kayavikkayaṃ samāpajjiṃ, idaṃ me, bhante, nissaggiyaṃ.
393.(Ka) Bhante, I have engaged in various kinds of buying and selling; bhante, this is to be forfeited.
(Kha) ayaṃ me, bhante, patto dasāhātikkanto nissaggiyo.
(Kha) Bhante, this bowl is past ten days; it is to be forfeited.
(Ga) ayaṃ me, bhante, patto ūnapañcabandhanena pattena cetāpito nissaggiyo, imāhaṃ saṅghassa nissajjāmīti.
(Ga) Bhante, this bowl is bought with a bowl having less than five repairs; it is to be forfeited; I forfeit this to the Sangha.
394.
394.
Nissajjitvāna deseyya, āpattiṃ pattagāhakaṃ;
Having forfeited, he should declare the offense to the bowl-taker;
Having agreed, he should give that bowl to him from the Sangha.
395.(Ka) idaṃ me, bhante, bhesajjaṃ sattāhātikkantaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
395.(Ka) Bhante, this medicine is past seven days; it is to be forfeited.
(Kha) idaṃ me, bhante, vassikasāṭikacīvaraṃ atirekamāse sese gimhāne pariyiṭṭhaṃ, atirekaḍḍhamāse sese gimhāne katvā paridahitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Kha) Bhante, this rains-bathing cloth is sought for me in the last month of the hot season, made and worn in the last half-month of the hot season; it is to be forfeited.
(Ga) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ bhikkhussa sāmaṃ datvā acchinnaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ga) Bhante, this robe, having given it myself to a bhikkhu, is taken back; it is to be forfeited.
(Gha) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ sāmaṃ suttaṃ viññāpetvā tantavāyehi vāyāpitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Gha) Bhante, this robe, having requested the thread myself, is woven by weavers; it is to be forfeited.
(Ṅa) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ pubbe appavārito aññātakassa gahapatikassa tantavāye upasaṅkamitvā vikappaṃ āpannaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ṅa) Bhante, this robe, for which I had not previously invited, approaching a weaver who is a householder who is not a relative, has become subject to a vikappa; it is to be forfeited.
(Ca) idaṃ me, bhante, accekacīvaraṃ cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ.
(Ca) Bhante, this emergency robe is past the robe-season; it is to be forfeited.
(Cha) idaṃ me, bhante, cīvaraṃ atirekachārattaṃ vippavutthaṃ aññatra bhikkhusammutiyā nissaggiyaṃ.
(Cha) Bhante, this robe is dwelling away from the bowl for more than six nights, except with the agreement of the bhikkhus; it is to be forfeited.
(Ja) idaṃ me, bhante, jānaṃ saṅghikaṃ lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ attano pariṇāmitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ, imāhaṃ āyasmato nissajjāmīti.
(Ja) Bhante, knowing that a gain belonging to the Sangha has been transformed, I have transformed it for myself; it is to be forfeited; I forfeit this to the venerable one.
396.Sesaṃ sabbaṃ yathāyogaṃ, ādimhi viya yojaye.
396.The rest, all according to appropriateness, should be applied as in the beginning.
397.(Ka) ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ pācittiyāpattiṃ āpajjiṃ. Dve sambahulā pācittiyāpattiyo āpajjiṃ.
397.(Ka) Bhante, I have committed one pācittiya offense. I have committed two or many pācittiya offenses.
(Kha) gārayhaṃ, bhante, dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemīti. Tena ‘‘passasi, āvuso, taṃ dhamma’’nti vattabbaṃ.
(Kha) Bhante, I have committed a blameworthy dhamma, an unsuitable pāṭidesanīya, I declare it. Then it should be said, "Do you see, friend, that dhamma?"
(Ga) ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ dukkaṭāpattiṃ āpajjiṃ. Dve sambahulā dukkaṭāpattiyo āpajjiṃ.
(Ga) Bhante, I have committed one dukkaṭa offense. I have committed two or many dukkaṭa offenses.
(Gha) ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ dubbhāsitāpattiṃ āpajjiṃ. Dve sambahulā dubbhāsitāpattiyo āpajjiṃ. Tā tumhamūle paṭidesemīti.
(Gha) Bhante, I have committed one dubbhāsita offense. I have committed two or many dubbhāsita offenses. I declare those at your feet.
(Ṅa) ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, dve nānāvatthukā thullaccayāpattiyo āpajjiṃ. Sambahulā nānāvatthukā thullaccayāpattiyo āpajjiṃ, tā tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti vatvā tena ‘‘passasi, āvuso, tā āpattiyo’’ti vutte ‘‘āma, bhante, passāmī’’ti vatvā puna tena ‘‘āyatiṃ, āvuso, saṃvareyyāsī’’ti vutte ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu, bhante, saṃvarissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
(Ṅa) "Bhante, I have committed two thullaccaya offenses with different grounds. I have committed many thullaccaya offenses with different grounds, I declare those at your feet," having said this, then it should be said, "Do you see, friend, those offenses?" When he has said, "Yes, Bhante, I see," again it should be said by him, "In the future, friend, may you restrain yourself." He should say, "Good, very good, Bhante, I will restrain myself."
398.
398.
Adesanāgāminiyaṃ, anāpattiñca desitaṃ;
In what goes to non-declaration, and what is not an offense, and what is declared;
By four or five who are different, living apart, without boundaries;
To those who are of one mind, he does not declare many.
43. Chandadānaniddeso
43. Guidance on Giving Consent
Chandadānādīti –
Giving Consent, etc. –
399.
399.
Bheriṃ ghaṇṭiṃ patāḷetvā, kammappatte samāgate;
Having beaten a drum, a bell, having arrived at the occasion for a kamma;
In the Sangha, he should convey consent, or purity, or invitation.
400.
400.
Ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ upaggamma, nisīditvā ukkuṭikaṃ;
Approaching one bhikkhu, sitting down squatting;
Having raised the joined palms, the wise one should give consent.
401.(Ka) ‘‘chandaṃ dammi, chandaṃ me hara, chandaṃ me ārocehī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
401.(Ka) "I give consent, carry my consent, announce my consent," should be said.
(Kha) pārisuddhiṃ dentena ‘‘pārisuddhiṃ dammi, pārisuddhiṃ me hara, pārisuddhiṃ me ārocehī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
(Kha) Giving purity, "I give purity, carry my purity, announce my purity," should be said.
402.
402.
Pārisuddhippadānena, sampādeti uposathaṃ;
By giving purity, he completes the Uposatha;
He obstructs the remaining kammas of the Sangha and also of himself.
403.
403.
Chandadānena saṅghassa, dvayaṃ sādheti nattano;
By giving consent, he accomplishes two things for the Sangha, not for himself;
Therefore, giving consent, purity should be given.
404.
404.
Hareyyeko bahūnampi, paramparā na hāraye;
One may carry for many, he should not cause a succession to carry;
Consent and purity brought in succession do not go.
405.Sabbūpacāraṃ katvāna, evaṃ deyyā pavāraṇā. ‘‘Pavāraṇaṃ dammi, pavāraṇaṃ me hara, pavāraṇaṃ me ārocehi, mamatthāya pavārehī’’ti.
405.Having done all the services, invitation should be given thus. "I give invitation, carry my invitation, announce my invitation, invite on my behalf."
406.Ārocetvātha so saṅghaṃ, pavāreyyevamāgato. ‘‘Itthannāmo, bhante, saṅghaṃ pavāreti diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu taṃ saṅgho anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissatī’’ti.
406.Having announced to the Sangha, he should invite thus, having come. "So-and-so, Bhante, invites the Sangha in what is seen or heard or suspected, may the Sangha speak to him, taking compassion, seeing he will set it right."
407.
407.
Gahetvā pārisuddhiṃ vā, chandaṃ vāpi pavāraṇaṃ;
Having taken purity, or consent, or also invitation;
The carrier, not reaching the Sangha, is disturbed or dies.
408.
408.
Sāmaṇerādibhāvaṃ vā,
The state of being a novice, etc.,
He acknowledges what is not brought;
Having reached the Sangha, it is thus,
The carrier is what is brought.
409.
409.
Saṅghappatto pamatto vā, sutto nārocayeyya vā;
Having reached the Sangha, being negligent, or sleeping, he does not announce;
Without offense, if intentionally, there is a dukkaṭa for not announcing.
44. Uposathaniddeso
44. Guidance on the Uposatha
Uposathoti –
The Uposatha –
410.
410.
Duve uposathā cātu-ddaso pannaraso iti;
There are two Uposathas, the fourteenth and fifteenth;
Based on reciting the sutta, on determination, on purity, there are three.
411.
411.
Suttuddesova saṅghassa, adhiṭṭhānauposatho;
Reciting the sutta is only for the Sangha, the Uposatha of determination;
For individuals only, the rest is the Uposatha of purity.
412.
412.
Pubbakicce ca karaṇe, pattakalle samānite;
In doing the preliminary duties, with the bowl standing by;
The Sangha recites the sutta, it is distinguished in five ways.
413.
413.
Vināntarāyaṃ saṅkhepe-nuddeso vinivārito;
Without obstruction, the concise recitation is not allowed;
"The elder is in charge of two, here in the recitations, or three;
In different places," because it is said, even if not saying, it is proper.
414.
414.
Āgaccheyyuṃ yadi samā, uddisante va thokikā;
If they should come together, while reciting, even a few;
What is recited is well recited, the remainder should be heard.
415.
415.
Uddiṭṭhamatte sakalā-yekaccāyuṭṭhitāya vā;
At the moment of reciting, all or some having risen;
He should make purity for them, if there are many nearby;
Having made all the alternatives, he should recite the preliminary duties again.
416.
416.
Pannarasovāsikānaṃ, itarānaṃ sacetaro;
For those observing the fifteenth, for the others if it is the other;
Those who are equal should follow, if the former ones are more;
The former ones should follow, the rest is the same way for them.
417.
417.
Pāṭipadovāsikānaṃ, itarānaṃ uposatho;
For those observing the pāṭipada, for the others is the Uposatha;
For those who are calm, they should give harmony at will, being rooted.
418.
418.
Bahi gantvāna kātabbo, no ce denti uposatho;
Having gone outside, it should be done, otherwise they do not give the Uposatha;
Harmony should be given unwillingly, in many, or he may go outside.
419.
419.
Pāṭipadegantukānaṃ, evameva ayaṃ nayo;
For those coming on the pāṭipada, the way is just the same;
He should intentionally make the sutta heard, for not making it heard, there is a dukkaṭa.
420.
420.
Sammajjituṃ padīpetuṃ, paññāpetuṃ dakāsanaṃ;
To sweep, to light a lamp, to set out a seat;
He should not do it thus, being able, sent by the senior elder.
421.Sammajjitvā padīpetvā, paṭṭhapetvā dakāsanaṃ. Gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvevaṃ, kattabbo tīhuposatho. ‘‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā, ajjuposatho pannaraso, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, mayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyyāmā’’ti.
421.Having swept, having lit a lamp, having set up a seat. Having established the gaṇañatti, the three Uposathas should be done thus. "May the venerable ones listen to me, today is the fifteenth Uposatha, when it is convenient for the venerable ones, may we do the Uposatha of purity with each other."
422.Ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā, nisīditvā ukkuṭikaṃ,. Therena añjaliṃ tevaṃ, paggayha samudīriyā. ‘‘Parisuddho ahaṃ āvuso, parisuddhoti maṃ dhārethā’’ti, vade yāvatatīyakaṃ.
422.Having put the robe on one shoulder, having sat down squatting. By the elder thus, having raised the joined palms, he should speak. "I am pure, friend, may you hold me as pure," he should say up to three times.
423.Samattapubbārambhena, te navenevamīriyā. ‘‘Parisuddho ahaṃ bhante, parisuddhoti maṃ dhārethā’’ti, vade yāvatatīyakaṃ.
423.With the former beginning completed, the new one should speak thus. "I am pure, Bhante, may you hold me as pure," he should say up to three times.
424.Dvīsu therena kattabbaṃ, katvevamīriyo navo. ‘‘Parisuddho ahaṃ āvuso, parisuddhoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vattabbo.
424.For two, it should be done by the elder, having done so the new one should speak. "I am pure, friend, may you hold me as pure," he should be told three times.
425.
425.
Navena thero tikkhattuṃ, evamassa udīriyo;
By the new one, the elder should speak thus to him three times;
"I am pure, Bhante, may you hold me as pure."
426.Pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvā, adhiṭṭheyyevamekako. ‘‘Ajja me uposatho pannarasoti vā cātuddasoti vā adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ, no cedhiṭṭheyya dukkaṭaṃ.
426.Having completed the preliminary duties, he should determine alone thus. "Today is my Uposatha, the fifteenth or the fourteenth, I determine," should be said, if he does not determine, there is a dukkaṭa.
427.
427.
Yattha vasanti cattāro, tayo vā yadi vā duve;
Where four dwell, or three, or even two;
Having carried purity, by one to the other;
They should do that Uposatha, there would be a dukkaṭa offense.
428.
428.
Vagge samagge vaggoti, saññino vimatissa vā;
In a faction, in harmony, as a faction, thinking or disagreeing;
There is a dukkaṭa for doing, a thullaccaya with the intention of dividing;
In a faction, in harmony, there is an offense, thinking "in harmony."
429.
429.
Ukkhittassa gahaṭṭhassa, sesānaṃ sahadhamminaṃ;
Of one who is suspended, of a householder, of the others who are co-religionists;
Of a pārājika, of one who is incapable, and of one who has renounced the training.
430.
430.
Nisinnaparisāyañca, sabhāgāpattiko tathā;
And in an assembly that is sitting, likewise one who is subject to the same offense;
With consent, or one who has been living apart, he should not recite the Pātimokkha.
431.
431.
Adesayitvānāpannaṃ, nāvikatvāna vematiṃ;
Having directed (another monk), he is not subject to an offense; being a navigator, he has doubt; even without the Uposatha day, it is not proper to perform the Uposatha.
432.
432.
Aṭṭhitoposathāvāsā, na vaje tadahū vinā;
Having resided observing the Uposatha, he should not go away that day without setting aside the boundary, fearing an obstruction or the Sangha.
45. Pavāraṇāniddeso
45. Explanation of Pavāraṇā
Pavāraṇāti –
Pavāraṇā means –
433.
433.
Dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ catunnañca, aññamaññappavāraṇā;
Mutual Pavāraṇā among two, three, or four (monks); the setting aside (of residence) by one (monk); the rest is Sangha’s Pavāraṇā.
434.
434.
Pubbakicce ca karaṇe, pattakalle samānite;
When the preliminary duties are done, and the bowl is brought forth, the Pavāraṇā should be done by the Sangha after setting aside the ñatti motion, thus:
‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti.
"May the Sangha, venerable sirs, listen to me. Today is the Pavāraṇā day, the fifteenth. If it is the Sangha's time, may the Sangha perform Pavāraṇā."
435.
435.
Ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā, nisīditvā ukkuṭikaṃ;
Having arranged the upper robe over one shoulder, having sat down squatting, the elder monk, raising his joined hands, should proclaim to the Sangha.
436.‘‘Saṅghaṃ, āvuso, pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi, āvuso, saṅghaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti.
436.“Venerable sirs, I invite the Sangha to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends. For the second time…pe… For the third time, venerable sirs, I invite the Sangha to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends.”
437.
437.
Pavārentesu theresu, nisajjukkuṭikaṃ navo;
While the elder monks are performing Pavāraṇā, the new monk, sitting squatting, should perform Pavāraṇā himself, remaining squatting.
438.Pubbārambhaṃ samāpetvā, navo saṅghamudīraye.
438.Having completed the initial procedure, the new monk should proclaim to the Sangha.
439.‘‘Saṅghaṃ, bhante, pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi, bhante, saṅghaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti.
439.“Venerable sirs, I invite the Sangha to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends. For the second time…pe… For the third time, venerable sirs, I invite the Sangha to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends.”
440.
440.
Dānena dhammasākacchā, kalahehi ca rattiyā;
Because the night was spent with the giving of alms, discussion of the Dhamma, and quarrels; or when there is an opportunity for a three-utterance Pavāraṇā; due to ten kinds of dangers, having spoken the appropriate ñatti motion.
441.‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, manussehi dānaṃ dentehi, dvīhi bhikkhūhi dhammaṃ sākacchantehi, kalahaṃ karontehi yebhuyyena ratti khepitā. Sace saṅgho tevācikaṃ pavāressati, appavāritova saṅgho bhavissati, athāyaṃ ratti vibhāyissati. Ayaṃ rājantarāyo, ayaṃ corantarāyo, ayaṃ agyantarāyo, ayaṃ udakantarāyo, ayaṃ manussantarāyo, ayaṃ amanussantarāyo, ayaṃ vāḷantarāyo, ayaṃ sarīsapantarāyo, ayaṃ jīvitantarāyo, ayaṃ brahmacariyantarāyo. Sace saṅgho tevācikaṃ pavāressati, appavāritova saṅgho bhavissati, athāyaṃ brahmacariyantarāyo bhavissati. Yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho dvevācikaṃ, ekavācikaṃ, samānavassikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti.
441.“May the Sangha, venerable sirs, listen to me. The night has been mostly spent by people giving alms, by two monks discussing the Dhamma, and by quarreling. If the Sangha performs a three-utterance Pavāraṇā, the Sangha will be as if it has not performed Pavāraṇā, and this night will dawn. This is a danger from kings, this is a danger from thieves, this is a danger from fire, this is a danger from water, this is a danger from human beings, this is a danger from non-human beings, this is a danger from wild animals, this is a danger from reptiles, this is a danger to life, this is a danger to the holy life. If the Sangha performs a three-utterance Pavāraṇā, the Sangha will be as if it has not performed Pavāraṇā, and this will be a danger to the holy life. If it is the Sangha's time, may the Sangha perform a two-utterance Pavāraṇā, a one-utterance Pavāraṇā, or a Pavāraṇā among those of equal years in the Order."
442.
442.
Pavāreyyānurūpena, yathāṭhapitañattiyā;
One should perform Pavāraṇā according to the appropriate ñatti motion that has been established; if they come together equally, the senior monks should bring (the matter) to attention here.
443.Evaṃ ticatuvaggo ca, ñattiṃ vatvā pavāraye. ‘‘Suṇantu me āyasmantā, ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, mayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pavāreyyāmā’’ti.
443.Thus, with a group of three or four, having spoken the ñatti motion, one should perform Pavāraṇā. “May the venerable ones listen to me. Today is the Pavāraṇā day, the fifteenth. If it is the venerable ones’ time, may we perform Pavāraṇā to one another.”
444.
444.
Ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā, nisīditvā ukkuṭikaṃ;
Having arranged the upper robe over one shoulder, having sat down squatting; in that way, the elder monk, raising his joined hands, should proclaim.
445.‘‘Ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmantā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmantā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti.
445.“Venerable sir, I invite the venerable one to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends. For the second time…pe… For the third time, venerable sir, I invite the venerable one to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends.”
Navenāpi ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmantā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi ahaṃ, bhante, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmantā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti.
Even the new monk (should say): “Venerable sir, I invite the venerable one to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends. For the second time…pe… For the third time, venerable sir, I invite the venerable one to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable ones speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends.”
446.Dvīsu therena kattabbaṃ, navo katvevamīriyo.
446.The Pavāraṇā should be done by the elder monk to two (monks), and the new monk should speak in this way.
447.‘‘Ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ āyasmā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ āyasmā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti.
447.“Venerable sir, I invite the venerable one to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable one speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends. For the second time…pe… For the third time, venerable sir, I invite the venerable one to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable one speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends.”
Navenāpi ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ āyasmā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmi. Dutiyampi…pe… tatiyampi ahaṃ, bhante, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ āyasmā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti.
Even the new monk (should say): “Venerable sir, I invite the venerable one to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable one speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends. For the second time…pe… For the third time, venerable sir, I invite the venerable one to speak, whether by what has been seen, or by what has been heard, or by suspicion. May the venerable one speak to me out of compassion; seeing (a fault), I will make amends.”
448.Pubbakiccaṃ samāpetvā, adhiṭṭheyyevamekako. ‘‘Ajja me pavāraṇā cātuddasīti vā pannarasīti vā adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
448.Having completed the preliminary duties, a single monk should set aside (the residence) himself. He should say, "Today is my Pavāraṇā, either the fourteenth or the fifteenth, I set it aside."
449.
449.
Yasmiṃ vasanti vā pañca, cattāro vā tayo duve;
In whichever place five, four, three, or two monks dwell; having taken the Pavāraṇā from each other, they should perform it reciprocally.
450.
450.
Taṃ taṃ pavāraṇaṃ kayiruṃ,
They should do that Pavāraṇā. If there is an offense, it is a dukkaṭa. The rest has been said in the Uposatha section. Here are some verses from there.
451.
451.
Pavāriteva saṅghamhi, pārisuddhiuposathaṃ;
Even when the Sangha has performed Pavāraṇā, he may perform the Pārisuddhi Uposatha; (he is one) with cut Vassa robes, or not having resided (during Vassa), or not having approached (the Sangha).
452.
452.
Cātumāsiniyā cāpi, kate saṅghenuposathe;
Even in the four-month period, when the Sangha has performed the Uposatha, those who have resided during the Vassa may perform Pavāraṇā if they are fewer (in number).
46. Saṃvaraniddeso
46. Explanation of Restraint (Saṃvara)
Saṃvaroti –
Saṃvaro means –
453.
453.
Cakkhusotādibhedehi, rūpasaddādigocare;
With the different senses such as the eye and ear, in the sphere of forms, sounds, etc., he should prevent the arising of covetousness and displeasure, etc.
454.
454.
Niggaṇheyya sakaṃ cittaṃ, kiṭṭhādiṃ viya duppasuṃ;
One should restrain one’s own mind, like a badly trained calf, with mindfulness and clear comprehension, he should conduct himself in all postures.
47. Suddhiniddeso
47. Explanation of Purification (Suddhi)
Suddhīti –
Suddhī means –
455.
455.
Desanā saṃvaro eṭṭhipaccavekkhaṇa bhedato;
Through the difference of confession, restraint, striving, and reflection, purification is fourfold, and the confession purification is considered consent with Pātimokkhasaṃvara.
456.
456.
‘‘Na punevaṃ karissa’’nti, cittādhiṭṭhānasaṃvarā;
"I will not do this again," (is) the restraint of mind-determination; restraint purification is so-called purification of sense-restraint.
457.
457.
Pahāyānesanaṃ dhammenuppādentassa eṭṭhiyā;
Abandoning wrong livelihood, while producing livelihood by Dhamma, it is said to be striving purification and is dependent on right livelihood.
458.
458.
Yoniso paṭisaṅkhāya, cīvaraṃ paṭisevati;
Wisely reflecting, one makes use of the robe; the purification of reflecting properly, as stated in this way, is called reflection purification and is said to be dependent on the requisites.
48. Santosaniddeso
48. Explanation of Contentment (Santosa)
Santosoti –
Santoso means –
459.
459.
Appena anavajjena, santuṭṭho sulabhena ca;
Content with little, with blamelessness, and with what is easily obtained, being moderate in eating, easy to support, he should conduct himself with respect for the Good Dhamma.
460.
460.
Atītaṃ nānusocanto, nappajappamanāgataṃ;
Not grieving over the past, not longing for the future; is said to be content.
49. Caturārakkhaniddeso
49. Explanation of Four Protections (Caturārakkha)
Caturakkhāti –
Caturakkhā means –
461.
461.
Buddhānussati mettā ca, asubhaṃ maraṇassati;
Mindfulness of the Buddha, loving-kindness, foulness, and mindfulness of death; are worthy of protection, and the right practice is from the Buddha.
462.
462.
Sammāsambuddhaiti vānussati yā punappunaṃ;
Repeatedly recollecting the qualities of the Sammāsambuddha is mindfulness of the Buddha.
463.
463.
Sīmaṭṭhasaṅghe sīmaṭṭhadevatāsu ca issare;
In those who dwell within the boundary, in the deities who dwell within the boundary, and in the powerful ones; in people, in the village where one goes for alms, in human beings, taking (these) as the basis.
464.
464.
Sabbasattesu sukhitā, hontāverātiādinā;
"May all beings be happy, free from enmity," etc., (is) loving-kindness meditation.
465.
465.
Vaṇṇasaṇṭhānaokāsa-disato paricchedato;
Distinguishing the parts such as hair, etc., in due order, by color, shape, location, and direction.
466.
466.
Nātisīghañca saṇikaṃ, vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhayaṃ;
Not too quickly, and not too slowly, repelling distraction; not transgressing the concept, releasing (the parts) in due order.
467.
467.
Vaṇṇaāsayasaṇṭhāna-gandhokāsehi bhāvanā;
Meditation with color, basis, shape, smell, and location; taking the parts as repulsive, in the objects beginning with a bloated corpse, the meditation that proceeds in the form of foulness is foulness meditation.
468.
468.
‘‘Maraṇaṃ me bhavissati, jīvitaṃ ucchijjissati;
"Death will occur to me, life will be cut off; death, death," thus, wisely contemplating.
469.
469.
Vadhakassevupaṭṭhānā, sampattīnaṃ vipattito;
Because of the appearance like an executioner, from the loss of attainments; similarly, associating with the body that has many common (characteristics).
470.
470.
Āyudubbalato kālavavatthānassabhāvato;
From the weakness of life, from the nature of the inevitability of time; is mindfulness of death.
50. Vipassanāniddeso
50. Explanation of Insight (Vipassanā)
Vipassanāti –
Vipassanā means –
471.
471.
Nāmarūpaṃ pariggayha, tato tassa ca paccayaṃ;
Having grasped name and form, then its cause; (recognizing) impermanence, origination and cessation, oppression.
472.
472.
Dukkhāavasavattittā,anattāti tilakkhaṇaṃ;
Suffering because of being unsubstantial, non-self because of (lacking) independent control, imposing the three characteristics; repeatedly contemplating the formations; one should gradually attain the destruction of all fetters.
Nigamanakathā
Concluding Talk
473.
473.
Adhisīlādhicittānaṃ, adhipaññāya sikkhanā;
The training in higher morality, higher mind, and higher wisdom; the duties of a bhikkhu, therefore, are summarized in the Khuddasikkhā.
474.
474.
Mahato kittisaddassa, yassa lokavicārino;
For him, the one with great fame, who investigates the world; exertion does not arise, just like the wind, constantly.
475.
475.
dhammasirīkena,tambapaṇṇiyaketunā;
By Dhammasiri, the standard-bearer of Tambapaṇṇi; this was composed by the Thera, praised by those who know the Dhamma and Vinaya.
476.
476.
Ettāvatāyaṃ niṭṭhānaṃ, khuddasikkhā upāgatā;
To this extent, the Khuddasikkhā has come to an end; its extent (is) about five hundred verses.
Khuddasikkhā niṭṭhitā.
Khuddasikkhā is completed.
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Homage to that Blessed One, Worthy One, Perfectly Self-Enlightened One
Khuddasikkhā-purāṇaṭīkā
Khuddasikkhā-Purāṇaṭīkā
Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory Talk
Yo ciraṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ, viditvā dukkhitaṃ janaṃ;
He who, having known for a long time the suffering people; yet, being urged by compassion, (they) do not understand.
Bodhāya paṇidhiṃ katvā, patto sambodhimuttamaṃ;
Having made the aspiration for enlightenment, attained the supreme enlightenment; having paid homage to his feet, the Dhamma, and the Sangha well.
Pubbācariyapādesu, ṭhapetvā sīsamattano;
Having placed my own head at the feet of the former teachers; the Khuddasikkhā that was done by Dhammasiri, of firm virtue.
‘‘Ādito upasampannasikkhitabba’’ntiādinā;
"From the beginning, what should be learned by one who is newly ordained," etc.; I will write the meaning and decision of that Khuddasikkhā briefly.
Likhissāmi hitatthāya, ādikammikabhikkhunaṃ;
For the benefit of the new bhikkhus; therein, what is suitable should be taken, and what is unsuitable should be rejected.
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Introductory Talk
(Ka) etthāha – katamā khuddasikkhā, kathaṃ sikkhitabbā, kasmā sikkhitabbā, ke sikkhanti, ke sikkhitasikkhāti? Vuccate – adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāvasena tisso sikkhā, ganthavasenettha saṅkhipitvā vuttattā taddīpano gantho ‘‘khuddasikkhā’’ti vuccati, atha vā ‘‘khuddaṃ anelakaṃ madhupaṭala’’ntiādīni viya sikkhākāmānaṃ madhuratāya khuddā ca tā sikkhā cāti khuddasikkhā, atha vā ‘‘khuddaputtamhi samaṇa posa ma’’ntiādīsu viya bahuvidhattāpi khuddā ca tā sikkhitabbato sikkhā cāti khuddasikkhā. Adhisīlasikkhā panettha cārittavārittavasena duvidhampi sīlaṃ yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamānena tappaṭipakkhe kilese tadaṅgappahānavasena pajahantena sikkhitabbā, adhicittasikkhā pana yathāvuttesu ārammaṇesu abhiyogakaraṇavasena jhānappaṭipakkhānaṃ nīvaraṇagaṇānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ kurumānena sikkhitabbā, adhipaññāsikkhā pana yathānurūpaṃ samucchedavasena sānusaye kilese samucchindantena sikkhitabbā.
(Ka) Herein it is said: What is the Minor Training? How should it be trained? Why should it be trained? Who trains? Who has completed the training? It is said: The three trainings, namely, the training in higher morality (adhisīla), the training in higher mind (adhicitta), and the training in higher wisdom (adhipaññā), are collectively referred to as "Minor Training" (khuddasikkhā) because they are briefly stated in terms of classifications. Alternatively, like "small, smooth honey," the Minor Training is so-called because it is both minor and a training, due to its sweetness for those who desire training. Or, as in "a small son, a true ascetic," it is called Minor Training because it is both minor and a training due to its multifaceted nature and the fact that it must be trained in. Herein, the training in higher morality should be trained by adhering to the precepts as instructed, both in terms of what should be done (cāritta) and what should be avoided (vāritta), and by abandoning the opposing defilements through abandonment by suppression (tadaṅgappahāna). The training in higher mind, however, should be trained by making effort on the aforementioned objects, thereby suppressing the hindrances (nīvaraṇa) that oppose jhāna through overcoming abandonment (vikkhambhanappahāna). The training in higher wisdom, however, should be trained by cutting off the underlying defilements along with their latent tendencies (anusaya) in accordance with what is appropriate, through eradication (samuccheda).
Kasmā sikkhitabbāti ettha –
Why should it be trained? Here:
Jātiādīhi dukkhehi, anekehi upaddutaṃ;
Oppressed by many sufferings, such as birth,
Having abandoned the world of aggregates (khandha), to attain the secure, auspicious city (puraṃ sivaṃ).
Kalyāṇaputhujjanena saha satta sekkhā sikkhanti. Arahanto sikkhitasikkhā.
A virtuous worldling (kalyāṇaputhujjana) together with the seven trainees (sekkhā) trains. The arahants have completed the training.
Ye vītamohā munipuṅgavassa;
Those who are free from delusion,
Chiefs among the sages,
Praised by the sage,
Have completed the three trainings;
Beyond them, who has completed the training?
Āditoti ettha ādimhiyevāti attho, ādito paṭṭhāyāti vā. Upasampannena ca upasampannāya ca sikkhitabbaṃupasampannasikkhitabbaṃ. Saha mātikāyasamātikaṃ. Pubbe vuttappakāraṃ khuddasikkhaṃ pavakkhāmi ādarena, pakārena vā vakkhāmi ratanattayaṃ vanditvāti attho. Apica theroāditoti vacanena saddhāpabbajitānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ ālasiyadosena appaṭipajjantānaṃ aññāṇadosena aññathā paṭipajjantānaṃ saṃvegaṃ janeti. Kathaṃ? Atidullabhaṃ khaṇasamavāyaṃ paṭilabhitvā taṅkhaṇaṃ na kusītena vā niratthakakathāpasutena vā vītināmetabbaṃ, kiṃ kātabbaṃ? Ādito paṭṭhāya nirantarameva tīsu sikkhāsu ādaro janetabboti. Etthāha – kiṃ taṃ ratanattayaṃ nāma, yaṃ vanditvā thero khuddasikkhaṃ pavakkhatīti? Vuccate – buddharatanaṃ dhammaratanaṃ saṅgharatananti imāni tīṇi ratanāni. Tāni hi ratijananaṭṭhena ‘‘ratanānī’’ti vuccanti. Apica –
Here, Ādito means "at the very beginning," or "from the outset." The training should be undertaken by one who is fully ordained (upasampanna) (upasampannasikkhitabbaṃ). Together with the outline (samātikaṃ). I will declare the Minor Training (khuddasikkhaṃ) in the manner previously stated, with care or method, having venerated the Triple Gem. Furthermore, the Elder, by the word ādito, generates a sense of urgency in sons of good families who have gone forth in faith, who do not practice due to the fault of laziness, or who practice incorrectly due to the fault of ignorance. How? Having obtained a rare opportunity, that moment should not be wasted through laziness or indulgence in idle talk. What should be done? From the outset, continuously, diligence should be cultivated in the three trainings. Here someone might ask: What is that Triple Gem, having venerated which the Elder will declare the Minor Training? It is said: The Buddha-jewel, the Dhamma-jewel, the Sangha-jewel—these are the three jewels. They are called "jewels" (ratanāni) because they generate delight (rati). Moreover:
‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ;
"Made of precious metals, of great value, incomparable, rare to see,
Enjoyed by distinguished beings; therefore, it is called a jewel." (dī. nī. aṭṭha. 2.33; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.223; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6.3; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226; mahāni. aṭṭha. 50; udā. aṭṭha. 45) –
Imissā gāthāya vasena ratanattho veditabbo.
Based on this verse, the meaning of "jewel" should be understood.
Mātikāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Outline (Mātikāvaṇṇanā)
‘‘pārājikā ca cattāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Sabbasikkhānaṃ pana mūlabhūtattā adhisīlasikkhāva paṭhamaṃ vuttā. ‘‘Sīle patiṭṭhāyā’’ti (suṃ. ni. 1.1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.1.9) hi vuttaṃ. Tatrāpi mahāsāvajjattā, mūlacchejjavasena pavattanato ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ jānitabbāti pārājikāva paṭhamaṃ vuttāti. Idāni yathānikkhittāni mātikāpadāni paṭipāṭiyā vitthāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘pārājikā ca cattāro’’ti paṭhamapadaṃ uddhaṭaṃ, tassāyamattho –pārājikāti parājitā parājayamāpannā, sikkhāpadaṃ atikkamitvā teneva āpattiṃ āpajjitvā, tāya vā parājayamāpāditānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ, te pana cattāroti vuttaṃ hoti.
‘‘pārājikā ca cattāro’’tiādi (The four Pārājikas...) is the beginning. However, the training in higher morality (adhisīlasikkhā) is mentioned first because it is fundamental to all trainings. For it is said, "Established in morality" (sīle patiṭṭhāyā’’ti) (suṃ. ni. 1.1.23, 192; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.1.9). Even within that, the Pārājikas are mentioned first because they are the most blameworthy and because they lead to the cutting off of the root and should be known first of all. Now, in order to show the outline topics as they were laid down, expanding them in order, the first topic, "The four Pārājikas," is extracted. Its meaning is this: pārājikā means "defeated," those who have suffered defeat, having transgressed a training rule and incurred an offense thereby, or this is a designation for those who have been defeated by it; these, however, are four, it is said.
1. Pārājikaniddesavaṇṇanā
1. Explanation of the Pārājika Analysis
1-2.Idāni te dassetuṃ‘‘maggattaye’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha manussāmanussatiracchānagatānaṃ vasena tisso itthiyo, tayo ubhatobyañjanakā, tayo paṇḍakā, tayo purisāti pārājikavatthubhūtānaṃ nimittānaṃ nissayā dvādasamattā honti, tesaṃ vaccamaggappassāvamaggamukhamaggavasena tayo maggā. Tattha manussitthiyā tayo, amanussitthiyā tayo, tiracchānagatitthiyā tayoti nava, tathā manussaubhatobyañjanakādīnaṃ. Manussapaṇḍakādīnaṃ pana vaccamaggamukhamaggavasena dve dve katvā cha, tathā manussapurisādīnanti sabbesaṃ vasena tiṃsa maggā honti. Te sabbe pariggahetvā idha‘‘maggattaye’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ maggattayeti attho.Anikkhittasikkhoti bhikkhubhāvato cavitukāmatācittena yathālakkhaṇaṃ apaccakkhātasikkhoti attho.Santhatasanthateti vatthādīsu yena kenaci santhate vā asanthate vā.Allokāseti maggattayassa pakativātena asamphuṭṭhappadese.Nimittanti aṅgajātaṃ.Saṃsanthataṃ vā asanthataṃ vāti attano aṅgajātaṃ vatthādīnaṃ aññatarena paṭicchannaṃ vā appaṭicchannaṃ vā.Upādiṇṇanti anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ. Vuttappakāre maggattaye pavesanto cuto pārājikoti sambandho. Naṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ pana pīḷakaṃ vā cammakhilaṃ vā lomaṃ vā pavesantassa dukkaṭaṃ, manussānaṃ pana jīvamānakasarīre akkhināsākaṇṇacchiddavatthikosesu satthakādīhi katavaṇe vā methunarāgena tilabījamattampi aṅgajātaṃ pavesantassa thullaccayaṃ, avasesasarīresu upakacchakādīsu ca dukkaṭaṃ. Tiracchānagatānaṃ hatthiassagoṇagadrabhaoṭṭhamahiṃsādīnaṃ nāsāya thullaccayaṃ, tathā tesaṃ vatthikosesu. Sabbesampi tiracchānagatānaṃ akkhikaṇṇavaṇesu dukkaṭaṃ, tathā tesaṃ avasesasarīresupi.
1-2.Now, to show them, ‘‘maggattaye’’tiādi (in three orifices...) is begun. Here, in terms of human, non-human, and animal females, there are three women, three intersex individuals (ubhatobyañjanaka), three eunuchs (paṇḍaka), and three men, so the bases (nissaya) for the Pārājika objects are twelve in total; they have three orifices: the excrement orifice (vaccamagga), the urine orifice (passāvamagga), and the mouth orifice (mukhamagga). There are three for a human female, three for a non-human female, three for an animal female—nine in all; likewise for human intersex individuals, etc. For human eunuchs, etc., there are two each for the excrement orifice and the mouth orifice, making six; likewise for human males, etc. So in total there are thirty orifices. Having included all of these, here it is said ‘‘maggattaye’’, meaning in those three orifices. Anikkhittasikkho means one who has not relinquished the training, with the intention of falling away from the state of a bhikkhu, according to the characteristics. Santhatasanthate means whether covered or uncovered by anything such as cloth. Allokāse means in a place not touched by the natural wind. Nimitta means the sexual organ. Saṃsanthataṃ vā asanthataṃ vā means one's own sexual organ, whether covered or uncovered by one of the cloths, etc. Upādiṇṇa means the pleasantness of the body that is not destroyed. The connection is that one who inserts into the aforementioned three orifices is defeated (pārājiko). However, for one who inserts into the destroyed pleasantness of the body, such as a wart, a callus, or a hair, there is a dukkata offense; but for humans, if one inserts a sexual organ even as small as a sesame seed with sexual desire into a wound made by a knife, etc., in a living body, in the eye, nose, ear canal, or scrotum, there is a thullaccaya offense; in the remaining parts of the body, such as the armpit, etc., there is a dukkata offense. For animals such as elephants, horses, cattle, donkeys, camels, and buffalo, there is a thullaccaya offense in the nose, and likewise in their scrotums. For all animals, there is a dukkata offense in the eye and ear wounds, and likewise in their remaining bodies.
‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yo bhikkhu pavesanapaviṭṭhaṭhitauddhāraṇakkhaṇesu sādiyati, tasmiṃ khaṇe sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhapeti, sopi pārājiko hoti. Yo pana bhikkhu sabbaso asādiyanto āsīvisamukhaṃ aṅgārakāsuñca paviṭṭhaṃ viya maññati, so nipparādho hoti. Ettha ṭhitaṃ nāma sukkavissaṭṭhisamayappavatti.
‘‘atha vā’’tiādi (or if...) is said. Its meaning is: that bhikkhu who enjoys the moments of insertion, entry, staying, and withdrawal, and who establishes a mind of engagement at that moment, he too is defeated (pārājiko). But that bhikkhu who does not enjoy it at all, thinking it is like entering the mouth of a venomous snake or a pit of embers, he is blameless. Here, "staying" (ṭhitaṃ) means the activity at the time of semen emission.
Paṭhamaṃ.
First.
3-4.Idāni dutiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ādiyeyyā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Ādiyeyyā’’tiādīnaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘adinnaṃ theyyacittena bhave pārājiko’’ti iminā sambandho.Ādiyeyyāti ārāmādiṃ abhiyuñjitvā yo bhikkhu gaṇheyya, so bhave pārājikoti attho. Evaṃ sesesupi.Hareyyāti vetanena vā mittabhāvena vā aññassa bhaṇḍaṃ haranto puna theyyacitte uppanne ‘‘sīse bhāraṃ theyyacitto āmasatī’’tiādinā gaṇheyyāti attho.Avahareyyāti ‘‘upanikkhittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ‘dehi me bhaṇḍa’nti vuccamāno ‘nāhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’tiādinā avahareyya.Iriyāpathaṃ kopeyyāti ‘‘sahabhaṇḍahārakaṃ nessāmī’’ti teneva purisena taṃ netuṃ tassa gamanapathaṃ vāretvā aññena maggena taṃ santajjetvā neti, evaṃ nentassa tassa purisassa paṭhamapāde thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapāduddhāre pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Thalaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto āmasatī’’tiādināṭhānā cāveyya. Parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ vā suṅkaghātaṃ vā atikkāmentosaṅketaṃ vītināmeyya. Yaṃ kiñci parapariggahitaṃ sassāmikaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ tehi sāmikehi kāyena vā vācāya vā na dinnantiadinnaṃ.
3-4.Now, to show the second, ‘‘ādiyeyyā’’tiādi (if he should take...) is said. The connection of the words ‘‘ādiyeyyā’’tiādi is with "one who steals with the intention to thieve is defeated" (adinnaṃ theyyacittena bhave pārājiko). Ādiyeyyā means if a bhikkhu should take something after making a claim to a monastery, etc., he is defeated. Thus, also in the remaining cases. Hareyyā means if one takes another's goods with payment or friendship, then, when the intention to thieve arises, one should take it as in "he touches the burden on his head with the intention to thieve." Avahareyyā means "when being told 'give me the goods' concerning goods deposited, he says 'I am not taking them'," and thereby denies taking it. Iriyāpathaṃ kopeyyā means "I will lead away one who is carrying goods together," having prevented that person's path of travel to lead it, threatening that person along another path; thus, for that person leading in this way, there is a thullaccaya offense for the first footstep, and a pārājika offense when lifting the second foot. Ṭhānā cāveyya means "he touches the goods on the land with the intention to thieve." Saṅketaṃ vītināmeyya means one crosses over a designated place or a customs barrier. Adinnaṃ means whatever belongs to another that has an owner, which has not been given by those owners by body or speech.
‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Theyyāvahārako ca balāvahārako ca kusāvahārako ca paṭicchannāvahārako ca parikappāvahārako ca bhave pārājikoti sambandho. Tatthatheyyāvahāronāma sandhicchedādīhi vā kaṃsakūṭamānakūṭatulākūṭādīhi vā vañcetvā gahaṇaṃ. Pasayhāvahārobalāvahāro. Kusasaṅkamanaṃ katvā parakoṭṭhāsaggahaṇaṃkusāvahāro. Parabhaṇḍaṃ paṃsuādinā paṭicchādetvā sāmikesu apassitvā gatesu paccāgantvā gahaṇaṃpaṭicchannāvahāro. Parikappāvahāropana duvidho bhaṇḍokāsavasena. Tattha ‘‘sāṭako ce, gaṇhissāmi, suttañce, na gaṇhissāmī’’ti bhaṇḍaṃ parikappetvā andhakāre pasibbakaṃ gaṇhāti. Tattha ce sāṭako hoti, uddhāreyeva pārājikaṃ. Sace suttaṃ hoti, rakkhati, puna ‘‘sutta’’nti ñatvāpi ‘‘yaṃ laddhaṃ, taṃ gahetabba’’nti uggaṇhanto uddhāreyeva pārājikaṃ, ayaṃbhaṇḍaparikappo. Okāsaparikappo gabbhadvārappamukhavihārādīnaṃ vasena paricchedaṃ karoti ‘‘sace maṃ etthantare passanti, dassāmi, no ce passanti, gaṇhitvā gacchāmī’’ti, tassa taṃ parikappitaparicchedaṃ atikkamantassa padavārena pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ, ayaṃokāsaparikappo.
‘‘atha vā’’tiādi (or if...) is said. One who steals by deceit (theyyāvahārako), one who steals by force (balāvahārako), one who steals by straw-transfer (kusāvahārako), one who steals by concealing (paṭicchannāvahārako), and one who steals by prearrangement (parikappāvahārako), is defeated. Here, theyyāvahāro means taking something by deceiving with burglary, or with counterfeit bronze weights, measures, or scales. balāvahāro means forcibly taking it. kusāvahāro means taking another's share by making a straw transfer. paṭicchannāvahāro means taking another's goods after covering them with dust, etc., and, when the owners have gone away without seeing it, returning. Parikappāvahāro, however, is of two kinds, in terms of goods and location. Here, regarding goods, one prearranges, "if it is a cloak, I will take it; if it is thread, I will not take it," and takes a bag in the dark. If there is a cloak there, then one is defeated at the moment of lifting it. If it is thread, one protects it; again, even knowing it is "thread," if one takes it thinking, "what has been obtained should be taken," one is defeated at the moment of picking it up; this is prearrangement of goods (bhaṇḍaparikappo). Prearrangement of location involves making a boundary in terms of the door of a lying-in room or a monastery, etc., "if they see me within this space, I will give it back; if they do not see me, I will take it and go," for him, exceeding that prearranged boundary must be understood as resulting in a pārājika offense with each step; this is prearrangement of location (okāsaparikappo).
‘‘bhaṇḍakālagghadesehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.Etthāti adinnādāne.Nicchayoti vinicchayo kātabboti attho. Tattha kenaci bhikkhunā ‘‘mayā idaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacittena gahita’’nti vutte vinayadharena sahasāva taṃ āpattiṃ anāropetvā tassa bhaṇḍassa sāmikaassāmikabhāvaṃ upaparikkhitvā yadi sassāmikaṃ, tassa bhaṇḍassa agghavasena āpattiyā kāretabbo. Sace nirālayakāle gahitaṃ, pārājikena na kāretabbo, ayaṃ bhaṇḍavasena vinicchayo.
‘‘bhaṇḍakālagghadesehī’’tiādi (goods, time, value, place...) is said. Etthā means in theft. Nicchayo means a judgment must be made. Here, when a certain bhikkhu says, "I took such-and-such goods with the intention to thieve," the Vinaya-holder, without immediately imputing that offense, should investigate whether those goods have an owner or not; if they have an owner, he should have him dealt with for the offense according to the value of those goods. If they were taken at a time when there was no shelter (nirālaya), he should not have him dealt with for a pārājika offense; this is the judgment in terms of goods.
Kāloti avahārakālo. Tadeva hi bhaṇḍaṃ kadāci mahagghaṃ hoti, kadāci appagghaṃ, tasmā yasmiṃ kāle avahaṭaṃ, tasmiṃ kāle yo tassa aggho, tena agghena āpattiyā kāretabbo, ayaṃ kālavasena vinicchayo.
Kālo means the time of theft. The same goods are sometimes of great value, sometimes of little value; therefore, at whatever time they were stolen, he should be dealt with for the offense according to the value at that time; this is the judgment in terms of time.
Agghoti bhaṇḍaggho. Navabhaṇḍassa hi yo aggho, so pacchā parihāyati, tasmā sabbadā bhaṇḍaṃ pakatiagghavaseneva na kāretabbaṃ, ayaṃ agghavasena vinicchayo.Desoti avahāradeso. Bhaṇḍuṭṭhānadese hi bhaṇḍaṃ appagghaṃ hoti, aññattha mahagghaṃ, tasmā yasmiṃ dese bhaṇḍaṃ avahaṭaṃ, tasmiṃyeva dese agghena kāretabbo, ayaṃ desavasena vinicchayo.
Aggho means the value of the goods. The value of new goods diminishes later; therefore, one should not always be dealt with according to the natural value of the goods; this is the judgment in terms of value. Deso means the place of theft. In the place where the goods originate, the goods have little value, but elsewhere they have great value; therefore, he should be dealt with according to the value in whatever place the goods were stolen; this is the judgment in terms of place.
Paribhogenapi sāṭakādikassa bhaṇḍassa aggho parihāyati, tasmā tassa paribhogavasena parihīnāparihīnabhāvo upaparikkhitabbo, ayaṃ paribhogavasena vinicchayo.
The value of goods such as cloaks also diminishes with use; therefore, one should investigate the state of being diminished or not diminished in terms of its use; this is the judgment in terms of use.
Dutiyaṃ.
Second.
5.Idāni tatiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘manussaviggaha’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthamanussaviggahanti paṭisandhiviññāṇena saddhiṃ uppannaṃ kalalarūpaṃ ādiṃ katvā pakatiyā vīsativassasatāyukassa sattassa yāva maraṇakālā etthantare anupubbena vuddhippatto attabhāvo, eso manussaviggaho nāma, evarūpaṃ manussaviggahanti attho.Ciccāti vadhakacetanāvasena sañcetetvā pakappetvā abhivitaritvā vītikkamoti attho.Jīvitā vā viyojayeti vuttappakāraṃ manussaviggahaṃ kalalakālepi tāpanamaddanehi vā bhesajjasampadānena vā tato vā uddhampi tadanurūpena upakkamena santativikopanavasena yo jīvitā viyojeyya, so cuto bhaveti sambandho. Kiñca bhiyyo –‘‘satthahārakaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha haratīti hārakaṃ, kiṃ harati? Jīvitaṃ, haritabbanti vā hārakaṃ, upanikkhipitabbanti attho, satthañca taṃ hārakañcātisatthahārakaṃ. Assāti manussaviggahassa. Yathā manussaviggaho icchiticchitakkhaṇe taṃ asiādisatthaṃ paṭilabhati, tathā sayaṃmaraṇacetanomaraṇādhippāyo hutvā upanikkhipeyya. Sopi cuto bhaveti attho. Etena thāvarappayogaṃ dasseti.
5.Now, to show the third, ‘‘manussaviggaha’’ntiādi (a human being...) is begun. Here, manussaviggaha means the continuous succession of aggregates (attabhāvo) that gradually increases from the moment of conception (kalalarūpa) arising together with the consciousness of rebirth (paṭisandhiviññāṇa) until the time of death, for a being whose natural lifespan is one hundred and twenty years; this is what is called a human being; that is the meaning of "a human being." Ciccā means having intentionally thought, planned, and resolved with the intention to kill (vadhakacetanā), it is a transgression. Jīvitā vā viyojaye means whoever deprives of life (jīvitā viyojaye) a human being as described above, even in the embryonic stage, by means of heating or crushing, or by providing medicine, or even after that, by means of a corresponding effort, disrupting the continuum (santati), that one is cut off; this is the connection. Moreover, ‘‘satthahārakaṃ vā’’tiādi (or gives a weapon...) is said. Here, harati means "one who brings"; what does one bring? Life, or "what should be brought" is hārakaṃ, meaning "what should be presented"; satthañca taṃ hārakañcāti satthahārakaṃ. Assā means to the human being. Just as a human being obtains that sword (asi), etc., at the moment one wishes for it, so too, maraṇacetano, being of the intention to die, may offer it. That one is also cut off; that is the meaning. With this, it shows fixed effort (thāvarappayogaṃ).
6-7.Idāni ‘‘maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’tiādividhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘gāheyya maraṇūpāyaṃ, vadeyya maraṇe guṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘satthaṃ vā āhara, visaṃ vā khāda, rajjuyā vā ubbandhitvā kālaṃ karohī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇatthāya upāyaṃ gāheyya. Maraṇasaṃvaṇṇanā panettha bahuvidhā ‘‘kāyena saṃvaṇṇeti, vācāya kāyavācāya dūtena lekhāya vā saṃvaṇṇetī’’ti vuttattā. Tatthakāyena saṃvaṇṇetināma kāyena viññāpeti. ‘‘Yo papāte papatanādīni katvā marati, so dhanaṃ vā labhati, yasaṃ vā labhati, saggaṃ vā gacchatī’’tiādinā nayena saṃvaṇṇeti, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Tassa vacanaṃ sutvā koci ‘‘marissāmī’’ti dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ uppādeti, thullaccayaṃ. Marati ce, pārājikaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi.Dūtena saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃpana dūtassa sāsanaṃ ārocāpeti ‘‘evaṃ ārocehī’’ti, ‘‘yo evaṃ marati, so dhanaṃ vā labhatī’’ti sabbaṃ purimasadisameva.Lekhāya saṃvaṇṇetināma giripabbatapurāṇādilekhaṃ likhati, ‘‘yo evaṃ maratī’’tiādi vuttanayameva. Etthāpi yo maraṇūpāyaṃ vā gāheyya, maraṇe vā guṇaṃ vadeyya, so cuto bhaveti sambandho.
6-7. Now, to show the rule beginning with "one should praise death or incite to it," it is said, "One should take a means to death, one should speak of the qualities of death." There, one should take a means for death in the manner of, "Take a weapon, eat poison, or hang yourself and die." Here, inciting to death is of various kinds, because it is said, "One incites by body, by speech, by body and speech, by messenger, or by letter." Among them, incites by body means makes known by body. If one incites in the manner of, "He who dies by falling off a cliff gains wealth, gains fame, or goes to heaven," the offense is dukkata. If someone, having heard that speech, produces painful feeling, thinking "I will die," the offense is thullaccaya. If he dies, it is pārājika. Thus, also in the remaining cases. However, in inciting by messenger, one causes a message to be announced by a messenger, "Announce thus," "He who dies thus gains wealth," everything is just as before. Incites by letter means one writes a letter about a mountain, cliff, or ancient story, in the manner said before, "He who dies thus..." Here too, the connection is that whoever takes a means to death or speaks of the qualities of death, is defeated.
‘‘payogā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Sāhatthikanissaggikaāṇattikathāvaraiddhimayavijjāmayānaṃ vasena tassa manussaviggahassa chappayogāti adhippāyo. Tatthasāhatthikoti sayaṃ mārentassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā paharaṇaṃ.Nissaggikoti dūre ṭhitaṃ māretukāmassa kāyādīhi ususattiyantapāsāṇādīnaṃ nissajjanaṃ.Āṇattikoti ‘‘asukaṃ nāma mārehī’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpentassa āṇāpanaṃ.Thāvaroti opātakkhaṇanaṃ, apassenasaṃvidhānaṃ, asiādīnaṃ upanikkhipanaṃ, taḷākādīsu visasampayojanaṃ, rūpūpahāroti evamādi. Kammavipākajāya iddhiyā payojanaṃiddhipayogaṃ. Māraṇatthāya vijjānaṃ parijappanaṃvijjāmayoti.
"By means of application," and so on, is begun. The meaning is that there are six applications in the case of that human being, in terms of self-inflicted, emissive, commanded, fixed, psychic power-made, and mantra-made. Among them, self-inflicted means striking with one's own body or with a weapon attached to the body, when killing oneself. Emissive means the sending forth of arrows, weapons, machines, stones, etc., from the body, etc., when desiring to kill one who is standing far away. Commanded means the commanding of another, "Kill so-and-so." Fixed means digging a pit, arranging a trap, placing a sword, adding poison to a pond, destroying appearance, and so forth. Psychic power-application is the application of psychic power born of the result of karma. Mantra-made is the mumbling of mantras for the purpose of killing.
‘‘kālavatthāvudhiriyāpathā’’tiādimāha. Tatthakāloti pubbaṇhasāyanhādikālo ca yobbanathāvariyādikālopi ca. Imesu yaṃ kiñci kālaṃ niyametvā ‘‘imasmiṃ nāma kāle mārehī’’ti āṇatto sace tasmiṃyeva kāle māreti, āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ. Sace niyamitakālato pure vā pacchā vā māreti, āṇāpako muccati.Vatthūti māretabbo puggalo. Sace āṇatto tameva māreti, āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ. Atha aññaṃ māreti, āṇāpako muccati. Evaṃ sesesupi vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabbo.Āvudhanti asiādi.Iriyāpathoti māretabbassa gamanaṃ vā nisajjā vāti evamādiko.Kiriyāvisesoti vijjhanaṃ vā chedanaṃ vā bhedanaṃ vā sūlāropanaṃ vāti evamādiko.Okāsoti gāmo vā vanaṃ vā gehaṃ vāti evamādiko. Imesu yathā yathā vadhako āṇatto, tathā tathā kate āṇāpakassa āpatti, aññathā kate visaṅketo hoti. Āṇattiyaṃ pana ayaṃ viseso ‘‘adhiṭṭhāyāti adhiṭṭhahitvā āṇāpeti ‘evaṃ vijjha, evaṃ pahara, evaṃ ghātehī’’ti vuttāya pāḷiyā labbhatīti ñātabbo.
He says, "Time, object, weapon, posture," and so on. There, time means both time such as forenoon or afternoon, and time such as youth or old age. Having specified any time among these, if one commands, "Kill him at such-and-such time," and if he kills him at that very time, it is pārājika at the moment of the command. If he kills him before or after the specified time, the commander is acquitted. Object means the person to be killed. If the one commanded kills that very person, it is pārājika for the commander at the moment of the command. But if he kills another, the commander is acquitted. Thus, in the remaining cases too, the judgment should be understood in the manner stated. Weapon means a sword, etc. Posture means the posture of the one to be killed, such as walking or sitting. Specific action means a specific action such as piercing, cutting, breaking, or impaling. Place means a place such as a village, forest, or house. In these, according to how the killer is commanded, the commander incurs an offense when it is done accordingly, otherwise he is acquitted. However, this is a distinction in the command: it should be known that the phrase "having determined" is obtained from the statement "having determined, he commands, 'Pierce thus, strike thus, kill thus.'"
Tatiyaṃ.
Third.
8-9.Idāni catutthaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘jhānādibheda’’ntiādimāha. Tassattho – ‘‘jhānaṃ vimokkho samādhi samāpatti ñāṇadassanaṃ maggabhāvanā phalasacchikiriyā kilesappahānaṃ vinīvaraṇatā cittassa suññāgāre abhiratī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ attani natthitāya nosantaṃ ‘‘mayi atthī’’ti attani vā taṃ ‘‘ahaṃ ettha sandissāmī’’ti attānaṃ vā tattha upanetvā dīpento cuto bhave.Koṭṭhāsaṃ vāti ettha ‘‘jhānalābhī, vimokkhalābhī, samādhilābhī, samāpattilābhīmhī’’ti evamādinā nayena koṭṭhāsato vāti attho.Ekekaṃ vāti ‘‘paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī, dutiyassa jhānassa lābhīmhī’’ti evamādinā nayena ekekaṃ vāti attho. ‘‘Atītabhave sotāpannomhī’’ti vadato atītabhavaṃ sandhāya kathitattā pārājikaṃ natthi, tasmā‘‘paccuppannabhavassita’’nti vuttaṃ, tassa paccuppannabhavanissitaṃ katvāti attho.Aññāpadesarahitanti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasati, so bhikkhu paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī’’tiādinā nayena aññāpadesaṃ vināti attho. Evaṃ dīpento hi thullaccayamāpajjati.Dīpentoti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjiṃ, samāpajjāmi, samāpanno, paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhīmhi, vasīmhi, sacchikataṃ assā’’ti evamādinā nayena dīpentoti attho. ‘‘Adhigato’’ti māno adhimāno, so yassa natthi, soanadhimāniko. Kena evaṃ dīpentoti ce? Taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘kāyena vācā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, kāyena vā vācāya vā tadubhayena vāti attho.Viññattipatheti yattha ṭhito manussajātiko gahaṭṭho vā pabbajito vā tassa vacanaṃ pakatisotena sutvā samanantarameva ‘‘imaṃ nāma esa vadatī’’ti jānāti, tattha ṭhatvā dīpento cuto bhave, na devabrahmādīsu aññatarena ñāteti attho.
8-9. Now, to show the fourth, he says, "Kinds of jhāna, etc." Its meaning is this: "Jhāna, liberation, concentration, attainment, knowledge and vision, path, development, fruition, abandonment of defilements, freedom from hindrances, delight of the mind in an empty dwelling"—thus, if one, not possessing such higher human states in oneself, declares, "I have them," or brings that to oneself, saying "I will appear in this," is defeated. Or a category: here, the meaning is by way of category in the manner of "I am a gainer of jhāna, a gainer of liberation, a gainer of concentration, a gainer of attainment." Or individually: the meaning is individually in the manner of "I am a gainer of the first jhāna, a gainer of the second jhāna." There is no pārājika for one who says "In a past life, I was a stream-enterer," because it is said with reference to a past life, therefore "referring to the present life" is said, its meaning is having made it dependent on the present life. Without indirect reference means without indirect reference in the manner of "The bhikkhu who lives in your monastery is a gainer of the first jhāna." For indeed, while declaring thus, he incurs a thullaccaya. Declaring means declaring in the manner of "I attained the first jhāna, I attain, I have attained, I am a gainer of the first jhāna, I am skilled, I have realized it." Non-conceited is one who does not have conceit or excessive conceit. If one asks, "By what does he declare thus?" to show that, "by body, by speech" and so on, is said, its meaning is by body or by speech or by both. In a perceptible place means that a person, whether householder or renunciant, standing where the utterance is heard by normal hearing, knows immediately "This one is saying this," declaring while standing there is defeated, not when known by a deva, Brahma, or another.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth.
10.Idāni catunnampi sādhāraṇavinicchayaṃ vattuṃ‘‘pārājikete cattāro’’tiādimāha. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepo –cattāropietepārājikā ‘‘ekakammaṃ ekuddeso samasikkhatā’’ti evaṃ vuttasaṃvāsassa abhabbatāyaasaṃvāsā, yathāpurepubbe gihikāle ca anupasampannakāle ca asaṃvāsikā, evaṃ pacchā pārājikaṃ āpannāpi asaṃvāsāti. Kiñca bhiyyo –abhabbā bhikkhubhāvāyapuna tena attabhāvena upasampadāya avatthutāya upasampannā bhavitumpi abhabbāti attho. Kiṃ viyāti ce?Sīsacchinnova jīvituṃ,yathāpi sīsacchinno tena attabhāvena puna jīvituṃ abhabbo, evamime cattāroti adhippāyo.
10. Now, to state a common judgment for all four, he says, "These four pārājikas," and so on. Here is the summary: these four pārājikas too are not in association because of unsuitability for cohabitation stated as "one action, one recitation, equal training," and as before, just as in the former lay life and during the time before ordination they were not in association, so too, having incurred a pārājika afterwards, they are not in association. Moreover, even more so—incapable of bhikkhu-existence means that they are also incapable of becoming ordained again in that same existence, because the basis for ordination is lacking. Like what? Like one with severed head to live: just as one with severed head is incapable of living again in that same existence, so are these four, is the meaning.
11.Idāni imesu catūsu pārājikesu ye pariyāyāṇattīhi sambhavanti, te dassetuṃ‘‘pariyāyo cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthapariyāyoti maraṇādhippāyassa kāyapayogo vā vacīpayogo vā. Tasmā ‘‘yo īdise muhutte satthaṃ vā āharitvā visaṃ vā khāditvā sobbhādīsu vā papatitvā marati, so dhanaṃ vā labhati, yasaṃ vā labhatī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇaṃ abhinandanto ‘‘idaṃ sutvā yo koci maratū’’ti yo pariyāyena vadati, taṃ sutvā sace koci tathā marati, pārājikaṃ. Niyamitena pana yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tasseva maraṇe pārājikaṃ.Āṇattipana vuttatthāyeva.Tatiyemanussaviggahapārājike labbhatīti sambandho.Dutiye panaadinnādāne āṇatti eva labbhati, na pariyāyoti attho. Kasmā naṃ pariyāyena nāpajjatīti? Yathā manussaviggahe ‘‘maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti vuttaṃ, tathā idha adinnādāne ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti avuttattā.Sesesūti paṭhamacatutthesu pariyāyāṇattidvayaṃ na labbhatīti attho.
11. Now, to show those possibilities among these four pārājikas that occur through incitement and command, "Incitement and" so on, is said. There, incitement means bodily application or verbal application with the intention of death. Therefore, if one, approving of death in the manner of "He who dies at such a time, either taking a weapon, or eating poison, or falling into a pit, gains wealth, gains fame," says by way of incitement, "May anyone die having heard this," and if someone dies thus having heard that, it is pārājika. However, pārājika occurs when that very one dies whom one meant by the specification. Command, however, is of the meaning stated already. The connection is that it is in the third pārājika regarding human beings that it is obtained. However, in the second, the command about taking what is not given is indeed obtained, not incitement, is the meaning. Why does he not incur it by incitement? Because just as it is said regarding human beings "one should praise death," so here in taking what is not given it is not said "one should praise." In the remainder means that the pair of incitement and command are not obtained in the first and fourth, is the meaning.
12.Idāni catūsupi yathāsambhavaṃ aṅgabhedaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sevetukāmatācitta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthamethunadhammassāti methunadhammapārājikassa.Budhāti vinayadharā.
12. Now, to show the difference in factors as appropriate in all four, "Intention to enjoy," and so on, is said. There, of sexual intercourse is of the sexual intercourse pārājika. Those skilled means the Vinaya-holders.
13.Manussasanti manussasantakatā. Etena petatiracchānagatapariggahesu anāpattīti dīpitaṃ hoti.Tathāsaññīti manussasantakavasena parapariggahitasaññīti attho.Vatthuno garutāti pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā tadagghanakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ vā hotīti attho.Avahāro cāti pañcavīsatiyā avahāresu yena kenaci avahāro hotīti attho.Adinnādānahetuyoti adinnādānapārājikassa etāni pañca aṅgānīti adhippāyo.
13. Human means belonging to a human being. By this, it is shown that there is no offense in possessions belonging to ghosts or animals. Perceiving as such means perceiving as belonging to a human being, as belonging to another. Weight of the object means the object is five māsakas or more than five māsakas, or something of that value. And the removal means the removal occurs by any of the twenty-five kinds of removal. Because of taking what is not given means these five are the factors of the pārājika of taking what is not given, is the meaning.
14.Pāṇo mānussakoti manussajātikapāṇo. Tasmiṃ pāṇepāṇasaññitā. Ghātacetanāti vadhakacetanā.Payogoti taṃsamuṭṭhito sāhatthikādīnaṃ channaṃ payogānaṃ aññatarapayogo.Tenapayogena maraṇaṃ.Pañcete vadhahetuyoti manussaviggahapārājikassa pañca aṅgānīti attho.
14. Life, human means life of the human kind. In that life, perception of life. Intention to kill means the intention to slay. Application means one of the six applications of self-inflicted and so on, arisen together with that. Death by that application. These five are causes for killing means these five are the factors of the pārājika of killing a human being, is the meaning.
15.Asantatāti uttarimanussadhammassa attani asantatā cāti attho.Pāpamicchatāyārocanāti iminā yo kevalaṃ pāpamicchataṃ vinā mandattā momūhattā bhaṇati, tassa anāpattīti dīpitaṃ hoti.Tassāti yassa āroceti, tassa manussajātitā ca. ‘‘Yo te vihāre vasati, so bhikkhu arahā’’tiādinā (pari. 160, 336)nāññāpadeso ca. Tadevāti tadā eva taṅkhaṇeyeva jānanaṃ.Asantadīpaneti uttarimanussadhammārocanapārājiketi attho.
15. Non-existence means the non-existence of higher human states in oneself, and that too. Declaring with evil intention means by this it is shown that there is no offense for one who speaks only with evil intention, without dullness or delusion. Of that means that one to whom he declares is of the human kind. And no indirect reference, in the manner of "The bhikkhu who lives in your monastery is an arahant" (pari. 160, 336). Immediately means knowing at that very moment, at that very instant. In declaring non-existent means in the pārājika of declaring higher human states, is the meaning.
16.Idāni ‘‘pārājikā ca cattāro’’ti ettha ca-saddena saṅgahitehi saddhiṃ samodhānetvā dassetuṃ‘‘asādhāraṇā cattāro’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā vajjappaṭicchādikā ukkhittānuvattikā aṭṭhavatthukāti ime cattāro bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇā nāma. Etāsuubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikānāma yā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutā teneva rāgena avassutassa manussapurisassa akkhakānaṃ adho, jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ kapparānañca upari yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena āmasanādiṃ sādiyati, tassā adhivacanaṃ. Yā pana bhikkhunī aññissā bhikkhuniyā pārājikasaṅkhātaṃ vajjaṃ jānaṃ paṭicchādeti, sāvajjappaṭicchādikānāma. Samaggena pana saṅghena ukkhittaṃ bhikkhuṃ yā bhikkhunī yaṃdiṭṭhiko so hoti, tassā diṭṭhiyā gahaṇavasena anuvattati, sāukkhittānuvattikānāma. Yā pana kāyasaṃsaggarāgena tintā tathāvidhasseva purisassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyati, kāyasaṃsaggasaṅkhātassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya purisassa hatthapāse santiṭṭhati vā, tattha ṭhatvā sallapati vā, saṅketaṃ vā gacchati, purisassa āgamanaṃ vā sādiyati, kenaci vā paṭicchannokāsaṃ pavisati, hatthapāse ṭhatvā kāyaṃ upasaṃharati, ayaṃaṭṭhavatthukānāmāti veditabbā.
16. Now, to show together with what is included by the word "and" in "and there are four pārājikas," "Four unshared," and so on, is said. There, ubhajāṇumaṇḍalikā, vajjapaṭicchādikā, ukkhittānuvattikā, and aṭṭhavatthukā—these four are unshared by bhikkhunīs with bhikkhus. Among these, ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā means the name for her who, with lustful passion for bodily contact, enjoys touching, etc., with some bodily part above the ankles and below the knees and kneecaps of a male human being who is also overcome by that same passion. Vajjapaṭicchādikā means the bhikkhunī who, knowing an offense of another bhikkhunī that is counted as a pārājika, conceals it. Ukkhittānuvattikā means the bhikkhunī who follows a bhikkhu who has been suspended by the Saṅgha as a whole, by way of adopting his view, whatever view he may have. Aṭṭhavatthukā means she who, saturated with lustful passion for bodily contact, enjoys taking the hand or grasping the edge of the outer robe of such a man, or stands in the vicinity of the man in order to engage in the unrighteous practice of bodily contact, or talks there, or makes a signal, or enjoys the arrival of the man, or enters a concealed place with anyone, or draws the body near while standing in his vicinity; this should be understood as aṭṭhavatthukā.
Abhabbakāekādasāti ettha paṇḍako theyyasaṃvāsako titthiyapakkantako tiracchānagato mātughātako pitughātako arahantaghātako bhikkhunidūsako saṅghabhedako lohituppādako ubhatobyañjanakoti ime ekādasa abhabbapuggalā nāma.Vibbhantā bhikkhunīti yadā bhikkhunī vibbhamitukāmā hutvā setavatthaṃ vā kāsāyameva vā gihinivāsanākārena nivāseti, tadā pārājikamāpannā nāma hoti, puna upasampadaṃ na labhati, sā ca pārājikāti attho.Mudupiṭṭhikonāma kataparikammāya mudukāya piṭṭhiyā samannāgato. So ettāvatā na pārājiko, atha kho yadā anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhamaggavaccamaggesu aññataraṃ paveseti, tadā pārājiko hoti.
Eleven incapable: here, paṇḍaka, theyyasaṃvāsaka, titthiyapakkantaka, tiracchānagata, mātughātako, pitughātako, arahantaghātako, bhikkhunidūsako, saṅghabhedako, lohituppādako, and ubhatobyañjanaka—these eleven are called incapable persons. A bewildered bhikkhunī: when a bhikkhunī, desiring to be bewildered, dresses in white cloth or even in dyed cloth in the manner of a laywoman, she incurs a pārājika, and she does not receive ordination again; that is a pārājika, is the meaning. Mudupiṭṭhiko means one endowed with a soft back due to having undergone preparation. He is not pārājika just by that; but when, afflicted by discontent, he inserts his genital organ into one of his own mouth, anus, or vagina, then he is pārājika.
17-18.Lambīti aṅgajātassa dīghattā evaṃ vutto. Sopi yadā anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhe vā vaccamagge vā paveseti, tadā pārājiko hoti.Mukhena gaṇhantoti ettha yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa suttassa vā pamattassa vā aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhena gaṇhāti, so cāti attho.Tatthevāti parassa aṅgajātevāti attho. Yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa aṅgajātaṃ kammaniyaṃ disvā attano vaccamaggena tassa upari nisīdati, taṃ attano vaccamaggaṃ paveseti, so cāti attho. Ete cattāro anulomikā methunassāti sambandho. Kathamiti ce? Magge maggappavesanasadisatāya, na ubhinnaṃ rāgavasena sadisabhāvūpagatānaṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattisadisatāya.Idhāgatā cattāroti methunadhammādivasena pārājikā cattāro cāti evaṃ samodhānato catuvīsati pārājikāti attho.
17-18. Lambī is so called because of the length of his genital organ. He too, when afflicted by discontent, inserts his genital organ into his own mouth or anus, then he is pārājika. Taking with the mouth: here, the meaning is that he too who, afflicted by discontent, takes the genital organ of another who is asleep or heedless with his own mouth. There itself means on the genital organ of another. He too who, afflicted by discontent, seeing the suitable genital organ of another, sits upon it with his own anus, inserts his own anus into it. These four are in accordance with sexual intercourse. How so? Because of the similarity to inserting one path into another, and because of the similarity to the dual union of those who have attained similarity of nature due to passion in both. These four included here means the four pārājikas beginning with sexual intercourse, and thus there are twenty-four pārājikas by way of combination, is the meaning.
Etthāha – mātughātakapitughātakaarahantaghātakā tatiyapārājikaṃ āpannā, bhikkhunidūsako lambīādayo cattāro paṭhamapārājikaṃ āpannāyevāti katvā kuto catuvīsatīti? Adhippāyo panettha atthi, mātughātakādayo hi cattāro idha anupasampannāyeva adhippetā, lambīādayo cattāro kiñcāpi paṭhamapārājikena saṅgahitā, yasmā ekena pariyāyena methunadhammaṃ appaṭisevinopi honti, tasmā visuṃ vuttāti. Pārājikavinicchayo.
Here someone might say: "Those who kill their mother, kill their father, or kill an arahant, incur the third pārājika. Those who corrupt a bhikkhuni, such as Lambā, incur the first pārājika. So, how can there be twenty-four?" The intention here is that the four—mother-killers, etc.—are considered unordained in this context. Although the four—Lambā, etc.—are included in the first pārājika, because in one sense they might not engage in sexual intercourse, they are mentioned separately. End of Pārājika Decisions.
Pārājikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Pārājika Section is Complete.
2. Saṅghādisesaniddesavaṇṇanā
2. Description of the Saṅghādisesa Section
19.Idāni saṅghādisesaṃ pakāsetuṃ‘‘garukā navā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.Garukāti saṅghādisesā idha adhippetā, aññattha pana pārājikāpi saṅgayhanti. Kasmā ‘‘terasā’’ti avatvā ‘‘navā’’ti vuttanti ce? Vītikkamakkhaṇeyeva āpajjitabbattā paṭhamāpattikā vuttā, yāvatatiyakā pana cattāro saṅghādisesā saṅghāyattattā cirena āpajjantīti na vuttā. Tatthamocetukāmatāti mocetukāmatāyāti attho ‘‘alajjitā’’tiādīsu viya. Iminā pana nayena mocanassādo muccanassādo muttassādo methunassādo phassassādo kaṇḍūvanassādo dassanassādo nisajjanassādo vācassādo gehasitapemaṃ vanabhaṅgiyanti ekādasa assādā vuttā, tesu ekaṃyeva mocanassādaṃ gahetvā sesā paṭikkhittā honti.
19. Now, to explain the saṅghādisesa, the text beginning with "garukā navā" is introduced. Here, "garukā" refers to the saṅghādisesas; elsewhere, it can also include the pārājikas. Why are they called "nine" instead of "thirteen"? Because the first offense is incurred at the very moment of transgression, the first offenses are mentioned. However, the four saṅghādisesas that require action by the Sangha are incurred slowly, so they are not mentioned. Here, mocetukāmatā means "with the desire to emit," similar to "alajjitā" and others. In this context, eleven kinds of "assāda" (satisfaction) are mentioned: mocanassāda (satisfaction of emitting), muccanassāda (satisfaction of being emitted), muttassāda (satisfaction of having emitted), methunassāda (satisfaction of sexual intercourse), phassassāda (satisfaction of touch), kaṇḍūvanassāda (satisfaction of scratching), dassanassāda (satisfaction of seeing), nisajjanassāda (satisfaction of sitting), vācassāda (satisfaction of speech), gehasitapemaṃ (home-based affection), and vanabhaṅgiyanti (breaking of vegetation). Only one, mocanassāda, is taken, while the rest are rejected.
mocanassādo. Mocanassādacetanāya nimitte upakkamati, muccati, saṅghādiseso. Na muccati ce, thullaccayaṃ.Muccanassādesace attano dhammatāya muccamānaṃ assādeti, na upakkamati, anāpatti. Sace muccamānaṃ assādento upakkamitvā moceti, saṅghādisesova. Attano dhammatāya mutte assādomuttassādo. Etthāpi upakkamassa natthitāya anāpatti. Evaṃ sabbattha. Methunassādena itthiṃ gaṇhantassa muttepi anāpatti, ayaṃmethunassādo. Phassassādoduvidho ajjhattiko bāhiro cāti. Tattha ajjhattike tāva attano nimittaṃ ‘‘thaddhaṃ mudukanti jānissāmī’’ti vā lolabhāvena vā kīḷāpayato sace muccati, anāpatti. Bāhiraphassassāde kāyasaṃsaggarāgena mātugāmaṃ phusato āliṅgato ca mutte anāpatti.Kaṇḍūvanassādedaddukacchādīnaṃ vasena khajjamānaṃ nimittaṃ kaṇḍūvanassādena kaṇḍūvato muttepi anāpatti.Dassanassādemātugāmassa anokāsaṃ upanijjhāyato muttepi anāpatti.Nisajjanassādemātugāmena saddhiṃ raho nisinnassa muttepi anāpatti. Vācāya assādovācassādo. Tena assādena mātugāmaṃ methunappaṭisaṃyuttāhi vācāhi obhāsantassa muttepi anāpatti.Gehasitapememātādīnaṃ mātādipemena āliṅganādiṃ karontassa muttepi anāpatti.Vanabhaṅge casanthavakaraṇatthāya itthiyā pesitaṃ pupphādivanabhaṅgasaññitaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ ‘‘itthannāmāya nāma idaṃ me pesita’’nti assādena āmasantassa muttepi anāpatti. Etesu pana mocanassādavaseneva upakkamantassa āpatti, sesānaṃ vasena anāpattīti veditabbaṃ.
mocanassādo: With the intention of mocanassāda, he initiates action on the object, and emission occurs; this is a saṅghādisesa. If emission does not occur, it is a thullaccaya. Muccanassāde: If he enjoys the sensation of natural emission without initiating action, there is no offense (anāpatti). If, while enjoying the sensation of being emitted, he initiates action and causes emission, it is a saṅghādisesa. The satisfaction in naturally emitted is muttassādo. Here too, there is no offense because there is no initiating action. The same applies everywhere. When grasping a woman with methunassāda, there is no offense even if emission occurs; this is methunassādo. Phassassādo is of two kinds: internal and external. In the internal case, if he plays with his own sexual organ, thinking, "I will know if it is stiff or soft," or out of craving, and emission occurs, there is no offense. In external phassassāda, if he touches or embraces a woman with lustful bodily contact and emission occurs, there is no offense. In Kaṇḍūvanassāde, if, due to conditions like ringworm, the sexual organ is scratched with the satisfaction of scratching, and emission occurs, there is no offense. In Dassanassāde, if emission occurs while closely scrutinizing a woman in an inappropriate place, there is no offense. In Nisajjanassāde, if emission occurs while sitting in private with a woman, there is no offense. The satisfaction in speech is vācassādo. If emission occurs while arousing a woman with words related to sexual intercourse with that satisfaction, there is no offense. In Gehasitapeme, if emission occurs while engaging in embraces, etc., with affection towards one's mother, etc., there is no offense. Vanabhaṅge ca: If emission occurs while enjoying handling a gift of flowers, etc., sent by a woman for the purpose of creating intimacy, recognizing it as "This was sent to me by so-and-so," there is no offense. However, it should be understood that an offense occurs when initiating action only in the case of mocanassāda; in the other cases, there is no offense.
Sukkassāti ‘‘nīlaṃ pītakaṃ lohitakaṃ odātaṃ takkavaṇṇaṃ dakavaṇṇaṃ telavaṇṇaṃ khīravaṇṇaṃ dadhivaṇṇaṃ sappivaṇṇa’’nti (pārā. 237) evaṃ āgatesu dasasu vaṇṇesu yassa kassaci sukkassāti adhippāyo.Upakkammāti ‘‘ajjhattarūpe moceti, bahiddhārūpe moceti, ajjhattabahiddhārūpe moceti, ākāse kaṭiṃ kampento mocetī’’ti (pārā. 237) evaṃ vuttesu catūsu upāyesu aññatarena upāyena ‘‘rāgūpatthambhe moceti, vaccūpatthambhe moceti, passāvūpatthambhe moceti, vātūpatthambhe moceti, uccāliṅgapāṇakadaṭṭhūpatthambhe mocetī’’ti evaṃ vuttesu pañcasu kālesu kismiñci kāle aṅgajāte kammaniyaṃ patte ‘‘ārogyatthāya moceti, sukhatthāya moceti, bhesajjatthāya, dānatthāya, puññatthāya, yaññatthāya, saggatthāya, bījatthāya, vīmaṃsatthāya, davatthāya mocetī’’ti (pārā. 237) evaṃ vuttesu dasasu adhippāyesu yena kenaci adhippāyena hatthādīsu yena kenaci upakkamitvāti attho.Vimocayanti antamaso yaṃ ekā khuddakamakkhikā piveyya, tattakampi mocentoti attho.Aññatra supinantenāti yā supinante sukkavissaṭṭhi hoti, taṃ ṭhapetvāti attho.Samaṇoti yo koci upasampanno.Garukanti saṅghādisesaṃ.Phuseti āpajjeyyāti attho.
Sukkassā: The intention is any one of the ten colors that are mentioned: "blue, yellow, red, white, takkavaṇṇa (color of buttermilk), dakavaṇṇa (color of water), telavaṇṇa (color of oil), khīravaṇṇa (color of milk), dadhivaṇṇa (color of curd), sappivaṇṇa (color of ghee)" (pārā. 237). Upakkammā: By any one of the four means mentioned: "He emits in an internal form, he emits in an external form, he emits in both internal and external forms, he emits while shaking his waist in the air" (pārā. 237), at any time among the five times mentioned: "He emits supported by lust, he emits supported by feces, he emits supported by urine, he emits supported by wind, he emits supported by a leech or a creature biting the sexual organ," when the sexual organ is ready for action, with any intention among the ten intentions mentioned: "He emits for health, he emits for pleasure, he emits for medicine, for giving, for merit, for sacrifice, for heaven, for seed, for investigation, for destroying (davatthāya)," (pārā. 237) by initiating action with the hand or other means. Vimocaya: Meaning that he causes emission of even so much as a tiny fly might drink. Aññatra supinantenā: Except for the emission that occurs in a dream. Samaṇo: Any ordained bhikkhu. Garuka: Saṅghādisesa. Phuse: He incurs the offense.
Sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadaṃ paṭhamaṃ.
The First Training Rule on Deliberate Emission of Semen
20.Idāni kāyasaṃsaggaṃ dīpetuṃ‘‘itthisaññī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthaitthisaññīti tadahujātāyapi manussitthiyā itthisaññīyeva hutvāti attho. Sace tattha vematiko vā paṇḍakapurisatiracchānagatasaññī vā hoti, thullaccayaṃ, tathā itthiyā kāyena kāyappaṭibaddhāmasane ca kāyappaṭibaddhena kāyāmasane ca yakkhīpetīpaṇḍakānaṃ kāyena kāyāmasane ca. Purisatiracchānagatitthīnaṃ pana kāyena kāyāmasanepi dukkaṭaṃ, tathā yakkhīādīnaṃ kāyena kāyappaṭibaddhādīsu ca. Matitthiyā pana thullaccayaṃ.Kāyasaṃsaggarāgavāti iminā mātupemādiṃ mokkhādhippāyañca paṭikkhipati.Samphusantoti kāyasaṃsaggarāgena upakkamma antamaso lomenapi manussitthiṃ samphusantoti atthasambandho. Iminā yo itthiyā āliṅgatopi kāyena na vāyamati, kevalaṃ phassaṃyeva anubhavati, tassa anāpattīti dīpitaṃ hoti.
20. Now, to explain bodily contact, the text beginning with "itthisaññī" is introduced. Here, "itthisaññī" means being aware that it is a human female, even if she was just born. If there is doubt about it, or if he perceives it as a hermaphrodite, a neuter, or an animal, it is a thullaccaya, as well as in the case of bodily contact with a woman or touching something attached to a woman's body with one's body, or touching one's body with something attached to her body, or bodily contact with the body of a yakkhi, a petī, or a neuter. However, in the case of bodily contact with the body of a female animal, it is a dukkaṭa, as well as in the case of touching something attached to the body of a yakkhi, etc., with one's body. In the case of a dead woman, it is a thullaccaya. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgavā: This rejects maternal affection and the intention for liberation. Samphusanto: The connection is that, out of lust for bodily contact, he touches a human female, even with a single hair. This shows that there is no offense for one who, even while embracing a woman, does not exert himself with his body, but merely experiences the touch.
Kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadaṃ dutiyaṃ.
The Second Training Rule on Bodily Contact
21.Idāni duṭṭhullavācaṃ pakāsetuṃ‘‘tathā suṇanti’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthatathāti itthisaññī. Manussitthiṃ suṇantinti sambandho.Suṇantinti iminā paṭibalāyapi itthiyā aviññattipathe ṭhitāya dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocentassa duṭṭhullavācāpattina hotīti dīpitaṃ hoti.Viññuñcāti iminā yā mahallikāpi bālāpi eḷamūgāpi asaddhammappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ kathaṃ na jānāti, sā idha nādhippetāti dasseti. Vaccamaggapassāvamaggānaṃ vasena maggaṃ vā methunaṃ vā ārabbhāti sambandho. Duṭṭhullavācāya rāgo duṭṭhullavācārāgo, tenaduṭṭhullavācārāgena. Taṃ assādentoobhāsetvāduruttavacanaṃ vatvā garukaṃ phuseti attho.
21. Now, to explain offensive speech, the text beginning with "tathā suṇanti" is introduced. Here, "tathā" means being aware that it is a woman. The connection is "he speaks to a human female who can understand." Suṇanti: By this, it is shown that if he sends a message through a messenger or a letter to a woman who is capable but standing outside the range of communication, there is no offense of offensive speech. Viññuñcā: By this, he shows that an old woman, a young girl, a deaf-mute, or someone who does not understand talk connected with unrighteousness are not meant here. The connection is beginning with the path of excrement, the path of urine, or sexual intercourse. Lust for offensive speech is duṭṭhullavācārāgo; with that duṭṭhullavācārāgena, obhāsetvā: Meaning that enjoying that, uttering coarse words, he touches a garuka offense.
Kathaṃ dve magge ārabbha pasaṃsati garahati? Tattha pasaṃsāyapi tāva ‘‘itthilakkhaṇena subhalakkhaṇena samannāgatāsī’’ti vadati, na tāvasīsaṃ eti. ‘‘Tava vaccamaggo ca passāvamaggo ca subho susaṇṭhāno dassanīyo, īdisena nāma itthilakkhaṇena subhalakkhaṇena samannāgatāsī’’ti vadati, sīsaṃ eti, saṅghādiseso hotīti attho. Garahaṇe pana ‘‘sikharaṇīsi, sambhinnāsi, ubhatobyañjanāsī’’ti imāni tīṇi suddhāniyeva sīsaṃ enti vaccamaggapassāvamaggānaṃ niyatavacanattā accoḷārikattā ca. Aññāni pana ‘‘animittāsi, nimittamattāsī’’tiādīni maggānaṃ aniyatavacanattā methunena ghaṭetvā vuttāni eva sīsaṃ enti. Methunappaṭisaṃyutte ‘‘dehi me, arahasi me dātu’’ntiādīhi pana sīsaṃ na eti, ‘‘methunadhammaṃ dehī’’tiādinā methunadhamme ghaṭiteyeva saṅghādiseso. Itthiyā vaccamaggapassāvamagge ṭhapetvā adhakkhakaṃ ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ ādissa vaṇṇādibhaṇane thullaccayaṃ, tathā yakkhīpetīpaṇḍakesu vaccamaggapassāvamagge methunepi. Imesaṃ pana yakkhīādīnaṃ adhakkhakādike vuttappakāre padese duṃkkaṭaṃ, tathā itthiyādīnaṃ ubbhakkhake adhojāṇumaṇḍale kāyappaṭibaddhe cāti.
How does he praise or criticize regarding the two paths? In praising, even if he says, "You are endowed with auspicious female characteristics," it does not reach the head (sīsaṃ eti). But if he says, "Your path of excrement and path of urine are beautiful, well-formed, and attractive; you are endowed with such auspicious female characteristics," it reaches the head, and it is a saṅghādisesa. In criticizing, the three phrases "You are a sikharaṇī (a woman with prominent breasts), you are mixed (sambhinnāsi), you are ubhatobyañjanāsi (a hermaphrodite)" themselves reach the head, because they are definite terms for the path of excrement and the path of urine, and because they are very coarse. However, others, such as "You are animittāsi (without a female organ), you are nimittamattāsī (only having a female organ)," reach the head only when combined with sexual intercourse, because they are indefinite terms for the paths. In phrases connected with sexual intercourse, such as "Give to me, you ought to give to me," it does not reach the head; it is a saṅghādisesa only when combined with sexual intercourse, as in "Give me sexual intercourse." If, setting aside the path of excrement and the path of urine of a woman, he speaks about the color, etc., referring to the adhakkhaka (area above the knee) or the knee joint, it is a thullaccaya, as well as with the path of excrement and the path of urine or with sexual intercourse in the case of a yakkhi, petī, or neuter. However, regarding the adhakkhaka, etc., in the manner described in the case of these yakkhi, etc., it is a dukkaṭa, as well as above the khakkhaka or below the knee joint of a woman, etc., or something attached to her body.
Duṭṭhullavācāsikkhāpadaṃ tatiyaṃ.
The Third Training Rule on Offensive Speech
22.Idāni attakāmapāricariyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘vatvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthavatvāti duṭṭhullobhāsane vuttappakāraṃ itthiṃ itthisaññīyeva hutvā vatvāti attho.Attakāmupaṭṭhānavaṇṇanti ettha methunadhammasaṅkhātena kāmena upaṭṭhānaṃ kāmupaṭṭhānaṃ, attano atthāya kāmupaṭṭhānaṃ attakāmupaṭṭhānaṃ, attanā vā kāmitaṃ icchitanti attakāmaṃ, sayaṃ methunarāgavasena patthitanti attho, attakāmañca taṃ upaṭṭhānañcāti attakāmupaṭṭhānaṃ, tassa vaṇṇo attakāmupaṭṭhānavaṇṇo, taṃ attakāmupaṭṭhānavaṇṇaṃ. ‘‘Etadaggaṃ, bhagini, pāricariyānaṃ yā mādisaṃ sīlavantaṃ kalyāṇadhammaṃ brahmacāriṃ etena dhammena paricareyyā’’ti evaṃ vatvāti sambandho.Methunarāginoti iminā gilānapaccayādīhi upaṭṭhānassa vaṇṇaṃ bhaṇato anāpattīti dīpitaṃ hoti.Vācā methunayuttenāti ettha methunayutteneva vācāya methunayācane garukaṃ hoti, na aññathāti adhippāyo.
22. Now, to show performing services for one's own pleasure, the text beginning with "vatvā" is stated. Here, "vatvā" means having spoken to a woman of the type mentioned in the offensive speech, being aware that she is a woman. Attakāmupaṭṭhānavaṇṇanti: Here, upaṭṭhānaṃ (service) through kāma (sensual pleasure) is kāmupaṭṭhānaṃ (service through sensual pleasure); service for one's own sake through sensual pleasure is attakāmupaṭṭhānaṃ. Or, attakāmaṃ means desired or wished for by oneself, desired by oneself due to sexual desire. Attakāmañca taṃ upaṭṭhānañcāti attakāmupaṭṭhānaṃ, the praise of that attakāmupaṭṭhāna is attakāmupaṭṭhānavaṇṇo, that attakāmupaṭṭhānavaṇṇo. The connection is "Saying such words as, 'This is the foremost of services, if she would attend to a virtuous, Kalyāṇadhamma, celibate one like me with this practice.'" Methunarāgino: By this, it is shown that there is no offense for one who praises service due to reasons of sickness, etc. Vācā methunayuttenā: Here, the intention is that it is a garuka offense only when requesting sexual intercourse with words combined with sexual intercourse, not otherwise.
Attakāmapāricariyasikkhāpadaṃ catutthaṃ.
The Fourth Training Rule on Performing Services for One's Own Pleasure
23.Idāni sañcarittaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘paṭiggahetvā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthapaṭiggahetvāti itthiyā vā purisena vā ubhinnaṃ mātādīhi vā ‘‘bhante, itthannāmaṃ itthiṃ vā purisaṃ vā evaṃ bhaṇāhī’’ti vutto tesaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘sādhū’’ti vā ‘‘hotū’’ti vā ‘‘bhaṇāmī’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena vacībhedaṃ katvā, sīsakampanādīhi vā sampaṭicchitvāti attho.Sandesanti ettha pana itthī dasavidhā māturakkhitā piturakkhitā mātāpiturakkhitā bhāturakkhitā bhaginirakkhitā ñātirakkhitā gottarakkhitā dhammarakkhitā sārakkhā saparidaṇḍāti. Dasa bhariyāyo dhanakkītā chandavāsinī bhogavāsinī paṭavāsinī odapattakinī obhaṭacumbaṭakā dāsī ca bhariyā ca kammakārī ca bhariyā ca dhajāhaṭā muhuttikā cāti.
23. Now, to show acting as a go-between, the text beginning with "paṭiggahetvā" is introduced. Here, "paṭiggahetvā" means that when told by a woman or a man, or by the mothers, etc., of both, "Bhante, speak to so-and-so woman or man in this way," having accepted their words by making a change of speech in some way, such as "Sādhu," or "Let it be," or "I will speak," or by nodding the head, etc. Sandesanti: Here, women are of ten kinds: protected by their mother, protected by their father, protected by their mother and father, protected by their brother, protected by their sister, protected by their relatives, protected by their clan, protected by Dhamma, those under protection (sārakkhā), and those with a penalty (saparidaṇḍā). Wives are of ten kinds: bought with wealth (dhanakkītā), living by consent (chandavāsinī), living on payment (bhogavāsinī), living with a cloth (paṭavāsinī), water-pot taker (odapattakinī), obhaṭacumbaṭakā, a slave as well as a wife, a worker as well as a wife, brought as a flag (dhajāhaṭā), and momentary (muhuttikā).
Tāsu māturakkhitā bhikkhuṃ pahiṇati ‘‘gaccha, bhante, itthannāmaṃ brūhi ‘homi itthannāmassa bhariyā dhanakkītā…pe… muhuttikā cā’’ti, ayaṃ itthiyā sandeso nāma. Sace māturakkhitāya mātāpitābhātābhaginiādayo bhikkhuṃ pahiṇanti ‘‘gaccha, bhante, itthannāmaṃ brūhi ‘hotu itthannāmassa bhariyā dhanakkītā…pe… muhuttikā cā’’ti, ayampi itthiyā sandesoyeva nāma. Evaṃ piturakkhitādīsupi nayo netabbo. Puriso bhikkhuṃ pahiṇati ‘‘gaccha, bhante, itthannāmaṃ māturakkhitaṃ brūhi…pe… saparidaṇḍaṃ brūhi ‘hotu kira itthannāmassa bhariyā dhanakkītā…pe… muhuttikā cā’’ti, ayaṃ purisassa sandeso nāma. Sace purisassa mātāpitābhātābhaginiādayo bhikkhuṃ pahiṇanti ‘‘gaccha, bhante, itthannāmaṃ māturakkhitaṃ brūhi…pe… saparidaṇḍaṃ brūhi ‘hotu itthannāmassa bhariyā dhanakkītā…pe… muhuttikā cā’’ti, ayampi purisassa sandesoyeva nāma, āṇāpananti attho.
Among them, a mother-protected woman sends a message to a bhikkhu: "Go, Bhante, and say to so-and-so, 'I am so-and-so's wife, bought with wealth…pe… momentary.'" This is called a woman's message. If the mother, father, brother, sister, etc., of a mother-protected woman send a bhikkhu: "Go, Bhante, and say to so-and-so, 'Let her be so-and-so's wife, bought with wealth…pe… momentary,'" this too is called a woman's message. The same method should be applied to those protected by their father, etc. A man sends a bhikkhu: "Go, Bhante, and say to so-and-so, a mother-protected woman…pe… a woman with a penalty, 'Let her be so-and-so's wife, bought with wealth…pe… momentary,'" this is called a man's message. If the mother, father, brother, sister, etc., of a man send a bhikkhu: "Go, Bhante, and say to so-and-so, a mother-protected woman…pe… a woman with a penalty, 'Let her be so-and-so's wife, bought with wealth…pe… momentary,'" this too is called a man's message, meaning giving a command.
Vīmaṃsitvāti ettha vuttappakārena sāsanaṃ gahetvā tassā itthiyā vā purisassa vā tesaṃ avassārocanakānaṃ mātāpitābhātābhaginiādīnaṃ vā ārocetvāti attho.Haranti yattha pahito, tattha gantvā tassā itthiyā vā purisassa vā āroceti, sā itthī vā puriso vā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchatu vā, mā vā, lajjāya vā tuṇhī hotu, puna āgantvā tassā itthiyā vā purisassa vā haranto garukaṃ phuseti sambandho. Ettāvatā ‘‘paṭiggaṇhati vīmaṃsati paccāharatī’’ti vuttaṃ aṅgattayaṃ sampāditaṃ hoti. Imāya tivaṅgasampattiyā saṅghādiseso, ito yehi kehici dvīhi aṅgehi thullaccayaṃ, ekena dukkaṭaṃ. Yakkhīpetīpaṇḍakesu aṅgattayenapi thullaccayameva, ekena vā dvīhi vā dukkaṭanti.
Vīmaṃsitvā: Here, having taken the message in the manner described, having informed that woman or man, or the mothers, fathers, brothers, sisters, etc., of those who must be informed. Haranti: Going to where he was sent, he informs that woman or man; whether that woman or man accepts it with "Sādhu" or not, or remains silent out of shame, the connection is "returning again, carrying (the message) to that woman or man, he touches a garuka offense." Thus, the three factors mentioned, "accepts, investigates, conveys back," are accomplished. With this accomplishment of three factors, it is a saṅghādisesa; with any two of these factors, it is a thullaccaya; with one, it is a dukkaṭa. In the case of yakkhi, petī, or neuter, even with the three factors, it is only a thullaccaya; with one or two, it is a dukkaṭa.
Sañcarittasikkhāpadaṃ pañcamaṃ.
The Fifth Training Rule on Acting as a Go-Between
24.Idāni kuṭikārasikkhāpadaṃ āvi kātuṃ‘‘saṃyācitaparikkhāra’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – ‘‘vāsiṃ detha, pharasuṃ dethā’’tiādinā sayaṃ pavattitayācanāya gahitaparikkhāraṃsaṃyācitaparikkhāraṃpadabhājane vuttanayena saṅghaṃ tikkhattuṃ yācitvā laddhabhikkhūhi vā saṅgheneva vā tattha gantvā sārambhānārambhasaparikkamanāparikkamanabhāvaṃ ñatvāadesitavatthukaṃ‘‘kuṭi nāma ullittā vā hoti avalittā vā ullittāvalittā vā’’ti (pārā. 349) evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇaṃkuṭiṃ. ‘‘Tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ, dīghaso dvādasa vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ sattantarā’’ti (pārā. 348) evaṃvuttapamāṇātikkantaṃ,‘‘mayhaṃ vāsāgāraṃ esā’’ti evaṃ attā uddeso etissāti attuddesā, taṃattuddesaṃkatvāgaruṃsaṅghādisesaṃ phuseti sambandho. Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – adesitavatthukaṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ kunthakipillikādīnaṃ āsaye katattā sārambhaṃ dvīhi balībaddehi yuttena sakaṭena gantuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya aparikkamanaṃ ullittādibhedaṃ kuṭiṃ attano vasanatthāya karonto vā kārāpento vā ‘‘idāni niṭṭhānaṃ gamissatī’’ti paṭhamapiṇḍadāne thullaccayaṃ, dutiyapiṇḍadānena lepe ghaṭite dve ca saṅghādisese dve ca dukkaṭāni, sace desitavatthukāyeva vā pamāṇātikkantāyeva vā hoti, ekaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ dve ca dukkaṭāni āpajjatīti.
24. Now, to reveal the Kuṭikāra-sikkhāpada, the passage beginning with "saṃyācitaparikkhāra" has been introduced. Here is the summary of its meaning: saṃyācitaparikkhāra means requisites obtained through self-initiated requests, such as "Give a hatchet, give an axe," etc. Adesitavatthukaṃ kuṭiṃ means a kuṭi (hut) whose site has not been designated, and which possesses the characteristics described as, "A kuṭi is either plastered, unplastered, or plastered and unplastered" (pārā. 349). Knowing whether it involves construction with or without intention, and whether it is easily accessible or not, a vuttapamāṇātikkantaṃ means exceeding the dimensions that have been stated as, "Here is the measure: in length, twelve sugata-vidatthi spans; in width, seven internal spans" (pārā. 348). Attuddesaṃ means making it with oneself as the reference, in the sense of "this is my dwelling." The connection is that having made it garuṃ, one touches a Saṅghādisesa. Here is the interpretation in this case: If one is constructing or having constructed a kuṭi that is undesignated, exceeds the prescribed dimensions, involves intentional construction because it is built as a dwelling for insects and ants, and is inaccessible because it cannot be reached by a cart pulled by two strong oxen, whether it is plastered or of another kind, for one's own dwelling, then upon the first offering of food with the thought, "now it will reach completion," there is a thullaccaya; with the second offering of food, when the plaster is applied, there are two Saṅghādisesas and two dukkaṭas. But if it is constructed on a designated site, even if it exceeds the prescribed dimensions, one incurs one Saṅghādisesa and two dukkaṭas.
Kuṭikārasikkhāpadaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ.
The Sixth Kuṭikārasikkhāpada.
25.Idāni vihārakārasikkhāpadaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘mahallaka’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthamahallakanti sassāmikabhāvena saṃyācitakuṭito mahantabhāvo etassa atthi, yasmā vā vatthuṃ desāpetvā pamāṇātikkamenāpi kātuṃ vaṭṭati, tasmā pamāṇamahantatāyapi mahallako, taṃ mahallakaṃ vihāraṃ vā katvāti attho. Ettha pana adesitavatthukabhāvena eko saṅghādiseso, sesaṃ anantarasadisameva. Idha ca tattha ca vāsāgāraṃ ṭhapetvā uposathāgāraṃ vā jantāgharaṃ vā aggisālaṃ vā bhavissatīti evamādinā nayena karontassa anāpatti.
25. Now, to show the Vihārakāra-sikkhāpada, the passage beginning with "mahallaka" has been introduced. Here, mahallaka means it possesses a greater status than a kuṭi obtained through requesting, due to the fact of being owned, or because it is permissible to build it even exceeding the prescribed dimensions after having the site designated. Therefore, mahallaka also means great in dimension. The meaning is, having made that mahallaka vihāra. Here, due to it being undesignated, there is one Saṅghādisesa; the rest is similar to what has just been said. Here and there, there is no offense for one constructing it with the intention that, after setting up a dwelling, it will become an Uposatha hall, a bathhouse, or a fire hall, etc.
Vihārakārasikkhāpadaṃ sattamaṃ.
The Seventh Vihārakārasikkhāpada.
26.Idāni amūlakasikkhāpadaṃ pakāsetuṃ‘‘amūlakenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthaamūlakenāti yaṃ codakena cuditakamhi puggale adiṭṭhaṃ asutaṃ aparisaṅkitaṃ, idaṃ etesaṃ dassanasavanaparisaṅkāsaṅkhātānaṃ mūlānaṃ abhāvato amūlakaṃ, tena amūlakena vatthunāti sambandho. Tatthaadiṭṭhaṃnāma attano pasādacakkhunā vā dibbacakkhunā vā adiṭṭhaṃ.Asutaṃnāma tatheva kenaci vuccamānaṃ na sutaṃ.Aparisaṅkitaṃnāma cittena aparisaṅkitaṃ, taṃ pana diṭṭhasutamutavasena tividhaṃ. Tattha bhikkhuñca mātugāmañca tathārūpe ṭhāne disvā ‘‘addhā imehi kata’’nti vā ‘‘karissantī’’ti vā parisaṅkati, idaṃdiṭṭhaparisaṅkitaṃnāma. Andhakāre paṭicchannokāse vā bhikkhussa ca mātugāmassa ca vacanaṃ sutvā dutiyassa atthibhāvaṃ ajānanto pubbe vuttanayena parisaṅkati, idaṃsutaparisaṅkitaṃnāma. Dhuttehi itthīhi saddhiṃ paccantavihāresu pupphagandhasurādīhi anubhavitvā gataṭṭhānaṃ disvā ‘‘kena nu kho idaṃ kata’’nti vīmaṃsanto tatra kenaci bhikkhunā gandhādīhi pūjā katā hoti, bhesajjatthāya ariṭṭhaṃ vā pītaṃ, so tassa gandhaṃ ghāyitvā ‘‘ayaṃ so bhavissatī’’ti parisaṅkati, idaṃmutaparisaṅkitaṃnāma. Evaṃ tividhāya parisaṅkāya abhāvena aparisaṅkitanti attho.
26. Now, to reveal the Amūlaka-sikkhāpada, the passage beginning with "amūlakena" has been introduced. Here, amūlakena means that which is unseen, unheard, or unthought of by the accuser regarding the person being accused. This is amūlaka because of the absence of roots consisting of seeing, hearing, and thinking. The connection is, with that amūlaka vatthu. Here, adiṭṭhaṃ means not seen with one's own physical eye or with the divine eye. Asutaṃ means not heard when someone is speaking. Aparisaṅkitaṃ means not thought of by the mind, and that is of three kinds: based on seeing, hearing, and experiencing. Here, upon seeing a bhikkhu and a woman in a compromising place, one thinks, "surely they have done it" or "they will do it"; this is called diṭṭhaparisaṅkitaṃ. In the darkness or in a hidden place, upon hearing the speech of a bhikkhu and a woman, not knowing of the existence of a second person, one thinks in the way previously described; this is called sutaparisaṅkitaṃ. Having experienced scents of flowers and liquor in remote monasteries with cunning women and seen the place where they have gone, while wondering, "who has done this?", it happens that a bhikkhu has performed worship with scents etc., or has drunk ariṭṭha for medicinal purposes. Smelling that scent, one thinks, "this must be him"; this is called mutaparisaṅkitaṃ. Thus, aparisaṅkitaṃ means the absence of these three kinds of suspicion.
Codentoti ‘‘pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannosi, assamaṇosi, asakyaputtiyosī’’tiādīhi vacanehi sayaṃ codentoti attho. Evaṃ codentassa vācāya vācāya saṅghādiseso.Codāpento vāti attanā tassa samīpe ṭhatvā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetvā codāpento tassa āṇattassa vācāya vācāya garuṃ phuseti attho. Atha sopi cāvanādhippāyena ‘‘mayāpi diṭṭhaṃ atthī’’tiādinā nayena codeti, dvinnampi vācāya āpatti.Vatthunā antimena cāti bhikkhuno anurūpesu ekūnavīsatiyā pārājikesu aññatarenāti attho.Cāvetunti brahmacariyā cāvetuṃ, yo suddhaṃ vā asuddhaṃ vā katūpasampadaṃ puggalaṃ suddhadiṭṭhiko samāno cāvanādhippāyena codeti vā codāpeti vā, tassa saṅghādisesoti adhippāyo.Suṇamānanti iminā parammukhā dūtena vā paṇṇena vā codeti. Codentassa na ruhatīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Parammukhā pana sattahi āpattikkhandhehi vadantassa dukkaṭaṃ.
Codento means accusing oneself with words such as, "You have committed a Pārājika Dhamma, you are not a samaṇa, you are not a son of the Sakyans," etc. For each utterance of one who accuses in this way, there is a Saṅghādisesa. Codāpento vā means standing near that bhikkhu and ordering another bhikkhu to accuse; for each utterance of the one who is ordered, one touches a garu, a serious offense. But if that bhikkhu also accuses with the intention of expulsion, saying, "I too have seen," etc., there is an offense for each utterance of both. Vatthunā antimena ca means with one of the nineteen Pārājikas suitable for a bhikkhu. Cāvetuṃ means to expel from the holy life. The idea is that if one, being of pure view, accuses or causes to be accused a person who is purely ordained or impurely ordained, with the intention of expulsion, there is a Saṅghādisesa. Suṇamāna indicates that one accuses indirectly through a messenger or a letter. It is indicated that the accusation of the accuser does not prosper. However, for one speaking indirectly with seven groups of offenses, there is a dukkaṭa.
Amūlakasikkhāpadaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ.
The Eighth Amūlakasikkhāpada.
27.Idāni aññabhāgiyasikkhāpadaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘aññassa kiriya’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaaññassa kiriyanti aññassa khattiyādijātikassa pārājikassa vītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ kiriyaṃ disvāti sambandho.Tena lesenāti ‘‘dasa lesā jātileso nāmaleso gottaleso liṅgaleso āpattileso pattaleso cīvaraleso upajjhāyaleso ācariyaleso senāsanaleso’’ti (pārā. 394) evaṃ vuttesu dasasu lesesu yo tasmiṃ puggale dissati, tena lesena tadaññaṃ puggalaṃ brahmacariyā cāvetuṃ antimavatthunā codento garukaṃ phuseti attho. Tattha aññampi vatthuṃ lissati silissati vohāramatteneva īsakaṃ allīyatīti leso, jātiyeva lesojātileso. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Lesena codento kathaṃ codeti? Añño khattiyajātiko iminā codakena pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpajjanto diṭṭho hoti, so aññaṃ attano veriṃ khattiyajātikaṃ bhikkhuṃ passitvā taṃ khattiyajātilesaṃ gahetvā evaṃ codeti ‘‘khattiyo mayā diṭṭho pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpajjanto, tvampi khattiyo pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannosī’’ti vā ‘‘so tvaṃ khattiyo, nāñño, pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpannosī’’ti vā codeti. Evaṃ nāmalesādayopi veditabbā.
27. Now, to show the Aññabhāgiya-sikkhāpada, the passage beginning with "aññassa kiriya" is stated. Here, aññassa kiriya means having seen the action of another person of Khattiya or other birth, which is the transgression known as a Pārājika. Tena lesena means with that trace (lesa) which is seen in that person, out of the ten traces that have been described: "birth trace, name trace, clan trace, sign trace, offense trace, bowl trace, robe trace, preceptor trace, teacher trace, lodging trace" (pārā. 394). The meaning is that by accusing another person with the intention of expelling him from the holy life with the ultimate offense, one touches a garukaṃ, a serious offense. Here, lesa means that another thing clings slightly, adheres with the mere use of language. Jātiyeva leso means the trace is simply birth, hence jātileso. This method should be understood in the remaining terms as well. How does one accuse with a trace? Another Khattiya by birth is seen by this accuser committing a Pārājika Dhamma. Seeing another bhikkhu of Khattiya birth who is his enemy, taking that Khattiya-birth trace, he accuses him thus: "A Khattiya was seen by me committing a Pārājika Dhamma, you too are a Khattiya who has committed a Pārājika Dhamma," or "You are that Khattiya, not another, you have committed a Pārājika Dhamma." In this way, name-trace, etc., should also be understood.
Aññabhāgiyasikkhāpadaṃ navamaṃ.
The Ninth Aññabhāgiyasikkhāpada.
28.Ettāvatā ‘‘garukā navā’’ti uddiṭṭhe vitthārato dassetvā idāni tesu āpannesu paṭipajjanākāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘chādeti jānamāpanna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassāyaṃ piṇḍattho – yo bhikkhu ‘‘ayaṃ itthannāmā āpattī’’ti āpattivasena vā ‘‘idaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti evaṃ vatthuvasena vājānamāpannaṃāpattiṃ yāvachādeti, tāva tenabhikkhunā akāmāparivāsovasitabboti.Careyyāti mānattaṃ samādāya vaseyya. Kittakaṃ divasanti ce? Cha rattiyo. Mānattavāso pana saṅgheyeva, na gaṇe, na puggale, tena vuttaṃ‘‘saṅghe’’ti.Parivutthoti ‘‘tayo kho upāli pārivāsikassa bhikkhuno ratticchedā sahavāso vippavāso anārocanā’’ti (cūḷava. 83) evaṃ vuttaṃ ratticchedaṃ akatvā parivutthoti attho. Tatthasahavāsoti pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne udakapātaṭṭhānabbhantare vāso.Vippavāsonāma aññaṃ pakatattaṃ bhikkhuṃ vinā vāso.Anārocanāti āgantukādīnaṃ anārocanā. Etesu tīsu ekenāpi ratticchedo hoti eva. Ettha pana upacārasīmagatānaṃ ārocetabbaṃ, na bahi ṭhitānaṃ, bahi ṭhitānampi sace saddaṃ suṇāti, passati, dūraṃ vā gantvā ārocetabbameva, anārocentassa ratticchedo ceva vattabhede dukkaṭañca hoti. Ajānantasseva upacārasīmaṃ pavisitvā gacchanti ce, ratticchedova hoti, na vattabhedo.
28. Having thus shown in detail the nine serious offenses that were stated in summary, now to show the manner of dealing with those who have committed these offenses, the passage beginning with "chādeti jānamāpanna" is stated. Here is its condensed meaning: The parivāso (probation) must be lived unwillingly by that bhikkhu for as long as he chādeti (conceals) the offense jānamāpannaṃ (knowing that he has committed) an offense, either in terms of the offense, saying "this is such-and-such offense," or in terms of the object, saying "this is not allowed for bhikkhus." Careyya means he should live observing mānatta. How many days? Six nights. However, mānatta-vāsa (observance of penance) is only in the Saṅgha, not in a group or an individual. Therefore, it is said "saṅghe." Parivuttho means having lived without breaking the night as stated: "These three, Upāli, are night-breaks for a bhikkhu undergoing probation: cohabitation, separation, and non-reporting" (cūḷava. 83). Here, sahavāso means dwelling under the same roof or within the same water-pouring place with a bhikkhu who is of restored status. Vippavāso means dwelling without another bhikkhu of restored status. Anārocanā means not reporting to newcomers, etc. With any one of these three, there is a break of night. Here, it should be reported to those within the boundary of the monastery, not to those standing outside. If those standing outside hear the sound or see, it should be reported even after going a distance. For one not reporting, there is a break of night and a dukkaṭa due to breach of duty. If those who do not know enter the monastery boundary and depart, there is only a break of night, not a breach of duty.
Ciṇṇamānattanti ‘‘cattāro kho, upāli, mānattacārikassa bhikkhuno ratticchedā sahavāso vippavāso anārocanā ūne gaṇe caraṇa’’nti (cūḷava. 92) evaṃ vuttaṃ ratticchedaṃ akatvā ciṇṇamānattaṃ pariniṭṭhitamānattanti attho. Ettha pana sahavāsādayo parivāse vuttappakārā eva. ‘‘Ūne gaṇe caraṇa’’nti ettha gaṇo cattāro vā atirekā vā bhikkhū, tasmā sacepi tīhi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ vasati, ratticchedo hotiyeva, ‘‘sace pana tena tesaṃ atthibhāvaṃ disvā ārocite pakkamanti, ūne gaṇe caraṇadoso na hotī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 97)aṭṭhakathāsuvuttaṃ kira.Abbheyyāti taṃ bhikkhuṃ vīsatigaṇo saṅgho abbheyya sampaṭiccheyya, abbhānakammavasena osāreyyāti attho. Sace ekenapi ūno vīsatigaṇo bhikkhusaṅgho taṃ bhikkhuṃ abbheyya, so ca bhikkhu na abbhito, te ca bhikkhū gārayhā, dukkaṭaṃ āpajjantīti attho.
Ciṇṇamānatta means having completed mānatta, the penance is finished without breaking the night as stated: "These four, Upāli, are night-breaks for a bhikkhu observing mānatta: cohabitation, separation, non-reporting, and wandering in an incomplete group" (cūḷava. 92). Here, cohabitation, etc., are of the same kind as described in parivāsa. In "wandering in an incomplete group," a group is four or more bhikkhus. Therefore, even if one dwells with three bhikkhus, there is a break of night. It is said in the aṭṭhakathāsu (commentaries) that "if, having seen their existence, he reports and they leave, there is no fault of wandering in an incomplete group" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 97). Abbheyyā means a Saṅgha of twenty should abbheyya, accept, remove that bhikkhu through the action of absolution. If a Saṅgha of less than twenty bhikkhus absolves that bhikkhu with even one missing, that bhikkhu is not absolved, and those bhikkhus are blameworthy and incur a dukkaṭa.
29.Idāni yathā chāditā āpatti channā hoti, taṃ pakāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘āpattī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ padayojanā – āpattitā ca anukkhittatā ca anantarāyatā ca pahuttatā ca āpattinukkhittaanantarāyapahuttatāyo, etāsu catūsu tathāsaññitā ca chādetukāmo hutvā chādanā cāti evaṃ dasahaṅgehi aruṇuggamamhi channā hotīti. Ettha pana āpattiādīsu catūsu āpattisaññitā ca anukkhittasaññitā ca anantarāyasaññitā ca pahuttasaññitā cāti evaṃ saññāvasena yojetvā aṭṭhaṅgāni gahetabbāni,chādetukāmoti idamekaṃ,chādanāti idamekanti evaṃ dasa.
29. Now, to show how a concealed offense remains concealed, the passage beginning with "āpattī" is stated. Here is the word arrangement: āpatti + tā ca, anukkhittatā ca, anantarāyatā ca, pahuttatā ca = āpattinukkhittaanantarāyapahuttatāyo (the states of offense, non-expulsion, non-interruption, and capability), and among these four, tathāsaññitā ca (being conscious in that way) + chādetukāmo (desiring to conceal) + hutvā chādanā ca (and concealing), thus, with these ten factors, it remains concealed at the rising of the dawn. Here, among āpatti etc., in the four, āpattisaññitā ca, anukkhittasaññitā ca, anantarāyasaññitā ca, pahuttasaññitā ca (being conscious of offense, non-expulsion, non-interruption and capability) – thus, eight factors should be taken in terms of consciousness. Chādetukāmo is one, chādanā is one – thus, ten.
Anantarāyikoti yassa dasasu rājacoraaggiudakamanussāmanussavāḷasarīsapajīvitabrahmacariyantarāyesupi ekopi natthi, so ce anantarāyikasaññī hutvā chādeti, channā hoti. Sace so andhakārabhīruko anantarāye eva vāḷādiantarāyasaññī hutvā chādeti, acchannāva hoti.Pahūti yo sakkoti sabhāgabhikkhuno samīpaṃ gantuñceva ārocituñca, so ce pahusaññī hutvā chādeti, channā hoti. Yo pana apahu hutvā pahusaññī, pahu vā apahusaññī hutvā chādeti, acchannāva hotīti.
Anantarāyiko means one who has no interruption among the ten interruptions of kings, thieves, fire, water, humans, non-humans, wild animals, reptiles, livelihood, and the holy life. If one, being conscious of non-interruption, conceals, it remains concealed. But if he is afraid of the dark and conceals being conscious of the interruption of wild animals etc. only in a situation of non-interruption, it does not remain concealed. Pahū means one who is capable of both going to and reporting to a bhikkhu of the same category. If one, being conscious of capability, conceals, it remains concealed. But if one is incapable but conscious of capability, or capable but conscious of incapability and conceals, it does not remain concealed.
Aruṇuggamamhīti ettha purebhattaṃ vā āpattiṃ āpanno hoti pacchābhattaṃ vā, yāva aruṇaṃ na uggacchati, tāva ārocetabbā. Sace pana aruṇabbhantare satakkhattumpi chādetukāmatā uppajjati, acchannāva hoti. Ārocento pana sabhāgasaṅghādisesaṃ āpannassa ārocetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace āroceti, āpatti pana āvikatā hoti, ārocanapaccayā pana aññaṃ dukkaṭaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati. Iminā aññampi vatthusabhāgāpattiṃ ārocetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpito hoti. Ārocentena pana ‘‘ahaṃ tava santike ekaṃ āpattiṃ āvi karomī’’ti vā ‘‘ācikkhāmī’’ti vā ‘‘ārocemī’’ti vā ‘‘ekaṃ āpattiṃ āpannabhāvaṃ jānāhī’’ti vā ‘‘ekaṃ garukāpattiṃ āvi karomī’’ti vā ādinā nayena vattabbaṃ, ettāvatā acchannāva hoti. Sace ‘‘lahukāpattiṃ ārocemī’’ti vadati, channāva hotīti. Saṅghādisesavinicchayo.
Aruṇuggamamhī (at the rising of dawn): here, whether one has committed an offense before the meal or after the meal, it should be reported before dawn rises. But if the desire to conceal arises even a hundred times within the dawn, it does not remain concealed. However, one who has committed a Saṅghādisesa should not report to a bhikkhu of the same category. If he reports, the offense becomes revealed, but due to the reason of reporting, he incurs another dukkaṭa offense. By this, it is indicated that it is not permissible to report to another offense of the same category of object. However, one who is reporting should say in this way: "I will reveal an offense to you" or "I will confess" or "I will report" or "Know that I have committed an offense" or "I will reveal a serious offense," etc. Only then it does not remain concealed. If he says, "I will report a light offense," it remains concealed. This is the interpretation of Saṅghādisesa.
Saṅghādisesaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Saṅghādisesa-niddesa is Finished.
3. Cīvaraniddesavaṇṇanā
3. The Commentary on the Cīvara-niddesa
30.Evaṃ garuke sikkhitabbākāraṃ dassetvā idāni cīvaresu dassetuṃ‘‘cīvara’’nti uddhaṭaṃ. Tattha jātito cha cīvarāni (mahāva. 339; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.462-463; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), tāni kānīti ce, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘khomā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthakhomaṃnāma khomavākasuttehi kataṃ vatthaṃ.Sāṇaṃnāma sāṇavākehi kataṃ vatthaṃ.Bhaṅgaṃnāma khomasuttādīhi pañcahi missetvā kataṃ vatthaṃ. Pāṭekkaṃ vākamayameva vāti vadanti.Kambalaṃnāma manussalomaṃ vāḷalomaṃ ṭhapetvā lomehi vāyitvā kataṃ vatthaṃ.Chaḷetānīti cha etāni. Saha anulomehītisānulomāni. Jātito pana kappiyāni cha cīvarānīti vuttaṃ hoti.
30. Having thus shown the way to train in serious offenses, now, to show regarding robes, "cīvara" is mentioned. Here, there are six kinds of robes by origin (mahāva. 339; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.462-463; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā). What are they? To show that, the passage beginning with "khomā" is introduced. Here, khomaṃ means cloth made of flax fibers. Sāṇaṃ means cloth made of hemp fibers. Bhaṅgaṃ means cloth made by mixing five things, starting with flax fibers. Some say it is made entirely of individual fibers. Kambalaṃ means cloth woven from animal hair, setting aside human hair or tail hair. Chaḷetānī means these six. Sānulomāni means together with suitable kinds. It is said that by origin, there are six robes permissible.
31.Idāni tesaṃ anulomāni dassetuṃ‘‘dukūla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha (mahāva. aṭṭha. 305)dukūlaṃsāṇassa anulomaṃ vākamayattā.Paṭṭuṇṇanti paṭṭuṇṇadese pāṇakehi sañjātavatthaṃ. Somāradese, cīnadese jātaṃsomāracīnajaṃpaṭanti sambandho. Imāni tīṇipi koseyyassa anulomāni pāṇakehi katasuttamayattā.Iddhijanti ehibhikkhūnaṃ puññiddhiyā nibbattacīvaraṃ. Taṃ pana khomādīnaṃ aññataraṃ hoti. Kapparukkhehi nibbattaṃ jāliniyā devakaññāya anuruddhattherassa dinnavatthādikaṃdevadinnaṃ. Tampi khomādīhi nibbattavatthasadisattā channampi anulomaṃ hotiyeva kappāsikassa vā, iddhijampi tatheva veditabbaṃ.Tassa tassāti khomādikassa.Anulomikanti anurūpaṃ.
31. Now, to show what is suitable for them, "dukūla" etc., was said. Therein, dukūlaṃ is suitable for hemp cloth because it is made of fiber. Paṭṭuṇṇa means cloth produced by weavers in the Paṭṭuṇṇa country. Somāracīnajaṃ, if related, means produced in the Somāra country and China. These three are suitable for silk because they are made of thread produced by weavers. Iddhijaṃ means a robe produced by the power of merit of the ehi-bhikkhus. That, however, is one of the hemp cloths, etc. Devadinnaṃ means cloth, etc., given to Anuruddha Thera by a divine maiden named Jālinī, produced by wishing trees. That too is suitable for all six because it is similar to cloth made of hemp, etc., or for cotton, and the same should be understood for iddhija. Tassa tassa means of hemp, etc. Anulomikaṃ means suitable.
32-33.Evaṃ jātito sānulomāni cha cīvarāni dassetvā idāni tesu adhiṭṭhānādikaṃ vidhānaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ticīvara’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kathinasikakhāpadavaṇṇanā; mahāva. 358) dhiṭṭhānato pubbe ticīvaraṃ nāma pāṭekkaṃ natthi saṅghāṭiādippahonakassa paccattharaṇādivasenāpi adhiṭṭhātuṃ anuññātattā. Tasmā‘‘ticīvaraṃ adhiṭṭheyya na vikappeyyā’’ti ettha ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭi’’nti evaṃ nāme gahite ‘‘adhiṭṭhāna’’micceva vattabbaṃ, ‘‘vikappemī’’ti pana na vattabbanti adhippāyo. Evaṃ sesesupi. Mukhapuñchanañca nisīdanañcamukhapuñchananisīdanaṃ. Kaṇḍucchādinti kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ adhiṭṭheyya, na vikappeyyāti sambandho.Etthāti imesu navasu cīvaresu.Ticīvaranti ticīvarādhiṭṭhānanayena adhiṭṭhitaticīvaraṃ.Vināaladdhasammutiko bhikkhu avippavāsasammutialaddhaṭṭhāne ekāhampi hatthapāsaṃ vijahitvā na vaseyyāti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave cātumāsaṃ nisīdanena vippavasitabbaṃ, yo vippavaseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tikhuddakakkhandhake(cūḷava. 263) vuttattā cātumāsaṃ nisīdanaṃ vinā na vaseyyāti attho.
32-33. Having thus shown the six kinds of robes that are suitable by origin, now, to show the procedure for undertaking, etc., of them, "ticīvara" etc., was said. Here, before the undertaking, there is no separate thing called ticīvara, because even robes suitable as saṅghāṭi, etc., are allowed to be undertaken as a paccattharaṇa, etc. Therefore, in "ticīvaraṃ adhiṭṭheyya na vikappeyyā", when a name is taken, such as "this is a saṅghāṭi," only "adhiṭṭhāna" (undertaking) should be said, but the meaning is that "I renounce" should not be said. The same is true for the rest. Mukhapuñchananisīdanaṃ means face-wiping cloth and sitting cloth. The meaning of Kaṇḍucchādiṃ is that one should undertake a cloth for covering sores, but should not renounce it. Ettha means among these nine robes. Ticīvaraṃ means a ticīvara that has been undertaken according to the method of undertaking a ticīvara. Vinā, a bhikkhu who has not obtained the permission of non-separation should not live even for one night, abandoning the hand-reach distance in a place where he has not obtained the permission. Since it was said in the Khuddakakkhandhaka(cūḷava. 263) that "Monks, one should not be separated for four months with a sitting cloth. Whoever separates, there is an offense of dukkata," the meaning is that one should not live for four months without a sitting cloth.
34.Idāni adhiṭṭhānavidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthamiccadhiṭṭhayeti iti adhiṭṭhaye, ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti evaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhayeti attho.Ahatthapāsametanti dūre ṭhitaṃ pana ṭhapitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā sace ekaṃ, ‘‘eta’’nti, bahūni ce, ‘‘etānī’’ti vatvā adhiṭṭhayeti atthasambandho.Sesesupi ayaṃ nayoti yathā ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘imaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ, imaṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti evaṃ attano nāmeneva vatvā sammukhāpi parammukhāpi vuttanayena adhiṭṭhātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
34. Now, to show the method of undertaking, "imaṃ saṅghāṭi" etc., was said. Therein, miccadhiṭṭhaye means he should undertake it thus, the meaning is that he should undertake the saṅghāṭi saying, "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" (I undertake this saṅghāṭi). Ahatthapāsametaṃ means, however, considering a suitable place where it is placed at a distance, if it is one, he should say "etaṃ" (this), and if there are many, he should say "etānī" (these), the connection of meaning is that he should undertake. Sesesupi ayaṃ nayo means just as it was said "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī," so too, it is said that one should undertake, saying "imaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ, imaṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" (I undertake this upper robe, I undertake this cloth for covering sores), etc., with one's own name, either in front or behind, according to the method stated.
35.Idāni sace pubbe adhiṭṭhitaṃ ticīvaraṃ nisīdanaṃ vassikasāṭikaṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādīti imesu chasu cīvaresu aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ atthi, puna tathāvidhaṃ cīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā pariharituṃ icchantena ‘‘dve pana na vaṭṭantī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttattā pubbe adhiṭṭhitaṃ paccuddharitvā adhiṭṭhātabbanti dassetuṃ‘‘adhiṭṭhahanto’’tiādi vuttaṃ, taṃ uttānameva.Pattādhiṭṭhahane tathāti ‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ, etaṃ patta’’nti evaṃ nāmamattameva viseso. Sesaṃ tādisamevāti attho.
35. Now, if among these six robes—ticīvara, sitting cloth, rain-bathing cloth, and cloth for covering sores—there is one robe that was previously undertaken, and one wishes to undertake and use a similar robe again, then, since it was said "dve pana na vaṭṭantī" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), to show that one should undertake it after disendowing the previously undertaken robe, "adhiṭṭhahanto" etc., was said, that is obvious. Pattādhiṭṭhahane tathā means in undertaking a bowl, only the name is different, such as "imaṃ pattaṃ, etaṃ pattaṃ" (this bowl, that bowl). The rest is just the same, is the meaning.
36.Etaṃ imaṃ va saṅghāṭiṃ saṃseti ettha sace antogabbhe vā sāmantavihāre vā hoti, ṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vācā bhinditabbā, sace hatthapāse hoti, ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭi’’nti tesaṃ tesaṃ nāmavasena vācā bhinditabbāti attho. Paccuddhārepi eseva nayo. Ettha pana ‘‘dve cīvarassa adhiṭṭhānā kāyena vā adhiṭṭheti, vācāya vā adhiṭṭhetī’’ti (pari. 322) vuttattā saṅghāṭiādikaṃ hatthena gahetvā ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādinā nayena cittena ābhogaṃ katvā kāyavikāraṃ karontena kāyena adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ, yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena aphusantassa na vaṭṭati. Vācāya adhiṭṭhahantena vacībhedaṃ katvāva adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Tathā pattepi.Vidūti paṇḍito.
36. Etaṃ imaṃ va saṅghāṭiṃ saṃse means here, if it is inside the dwelling or in the surrounding monastery, having considered the place where it is placed, the verbal declaration "etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" should be made, and if it is within hand's reach, the meaning is that the verbal declaration should be made by the name of each of them, such as "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ". This same method applies to disendowment as well. Here, however, since it was said that "dve cīvarassa adhiṭṭhānā kāyena vā adhiṭṭheti, vācāya vā adhiṭṭhetī" (pari. 322), the saṅghāṭi, etc., should be undertaken by body, having taken the saṅghāṭi, etc., with the hand and making a mental effort according to the method "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" (I undertake this saṅghāṭi), etc., while making a bodily change; it is not valid if one does not touch it with any part of the body. One undertaking by speech should undertake only after making a verbal declaration. The same applies to the bowl. Vidū means wise.
37-8.Idāni tesaṃ pamāṇaparicchedaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘saṅghāṭi pacchimantenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha dīghato muṭṭhipañcakato (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) paṭṭhāya ‘‘tatridaṃ sugatassa sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ, dīghaso nava vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ cha vidatthiyo’’ti (pāci. 548) evaṃ vuttasugatacīvarūnāpi vaṭṭati. Tiriyaṃ pana muṭṭhittikaṃ. Ca-saddena atirekampi vaṭṭatīti attho. Uttarāsaṅgassapi etadeva pamāṇanti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘tathā ekaṃsikassāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Antaravāsakassa pana ‘‘pārupanenapi hi sakkā nābhiṃ paṭicchādetu’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469)aṭṭhakathāvacanato‘‘dvihattho vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
37-8. Now, to show the determination of their measure, "saṅghāṭi pacchimantenā" etc., was said. Therein, starting from five fists in length (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), even what is less than the robe measure of the Sugata, which was said as "tatridaṃ sugatassa sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ, dīghaso nava vidatthiyo sugatavidatthiyā, tiriyaṃ cha vidatthiyo" (pāci. 548), is valid. But in width, three fists. The meaning is that even more is valid, with the word "ca". To show that the same measure applies to the upper robe, "tathā ekaṃsikassāpī" was said. However, regarding the undergarment, "dvihattho vā" was said, according to the aṭṭhakathāvacanato (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469), because "pārupanenapi hi sakkā nābhiṃ paṭicchādetu".
39.Nisīdanassadīghenāti ettha (pāci. 531 ādayo; pāci. aṭṭha. 531; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā)nisīdananti santhatasadisaṃ santharitvā ekasmiṃ ante vuttappamāṇena dvīsu ṭhānesu phāletvā katāhi tīhi dasāhi yuttassa parikkhārassetaṃ nāmaṃ.
39. Nisīdanassadīghenāti, here (pāci. 531 ādayo; pāci. aṭṭha. 531; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nisīdanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), nisīdana means this is the name for a piece of equipment similar to a mat, which is spread out and split at two places with the stated measure at one end, and which is fitted with three borders and ten fringes.
40.Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi(pāci. 538; mahāva. 354; pāci. aṭṭha. 537; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kaṇḍuppaṭicchādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) nāma yassa adhonābhiubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ kaṇḍu vā piḷakā vā assāvo vā thullakacchu vā ābādho, tassa paṭicchādanatthāya anuññātaṃ cīvaraṃ. Gāthāyo suviññeyyāva.
40. Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi(pāci. 538; mahāva. 354; pāci. aṭṭha. 537; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kaṇḍuppaṭicchādisikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) is the name of the robe allowed for the purpose of covering sores, such as scabs, pimples, pus, or thick scabies, for one whose area below the navel and above the knees has such afflictions. The verses are easy to understand.
41.Aḍḍhateyyāvāti (pāci. 544) ettha tato uddhaṃ na vaṭṭatīti attho.
41. Aḍḍhateyyāvāti (pāci. 544), here, the meaning is that it is not valid above that.
42.Etthāti saṅghāṭito paṭṭhāya yāva vassikasāṭikā, tāva dassitacīvaresūti attho.Taduttarinti tato tesaṃ cīvarānaṃ vuttappamāṇato uttariṃ karontassa chedanapācitti hotīti pāṭhaseso, taṃ atirekaṃ chinditvā puna pācittiyaṃ desetabbanti attho.Paccattharaṇamukhacoḷāti ettha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāva mahantaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ ākaṅkhati, tāva mahantaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ kātu’’nti (mahāva. 353) vuttattā paccattharaṇassa pamāṇaparicchedo natthi,. Mukhapuñchanacoḷassa pana ukkaṭṭhavasena vā antimavasena vā pamāṇaparicchedo na vutto, tasmā tampi appamāṇikaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘ākaṅkhitappamāṇikā’’ti, icchitappamāṇikāti attho. Yāva ekaṃ dhovīyati, tāva aññaṃ paribhogatthāya icchitabbanti dvepi vaṭṭanti.
42. Etthā means among the robes shown from the saṅghāṭi up to the rain-bathing cloth. Taduttari means, the remainder of the text is that there is a pācittiya offense for one who makes them larger than the stated measure of those robes, the meaning is that one should cut off the excess and confess the pācittiya again. Paccattharaṇamukhacoḷāti, here, since it was said that "anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yāva mahantaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ ākaṅkhati, tāva mahantaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ kātu" (mahāva. 353), there is no determination of the measure for the paccattharaṇa. However, the determination of the measure for the face-wiping cloth was not stated in terms of the highest or the lowest measure, therefore that too is unmeasurable. Therefore, it was said ‘‘ākaṅkhitappamāṇikā’’, the meaning is according to the desired measure. Both are valid: one that is desired for use until one is being washed.
43.Nadīpitanti kattha na dīpitaṃ? Aṭṭhakathāsu. Kasmāti ce? ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti ticīvaraṃ, attho ca hoti parissāvanehipi thavikāhipi. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, parikkhāracoḷaka’’nti (mahāva. 357) bahūnaṃ pattathavikaparissāvanādīnaṃ saṅgahavasena vuttattā pāṭekkaṃ nidhānamukhanti. Yasmā pana bhagavatā ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ labbhati, taṃ taṃ iminā vidhānena adhiṭṭhahitvā puna yena yena parissāvanādinā attho hoti, taṃ taṃ katvā gaṇhantū’’ti anukampāya anuññātaṃ, tasmā vikappanupagapacchimacīvarappamāṇaṃ thavikampi paṭaparissāvanampi bahūnipi ekato katvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni parikkhāracoḷāni adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vatvā adhiṭṭhātumpi vaṭṭatiyeva. Tasmā vuttaṃ‘‘tathā vatvā’’ti, ‘‘parikkhāracoḷa’’nti vatvāti attho.Vikappiyanti vikappanupagaṃ.
43. Nadīpitaṃ means where was it not shown? In the commentaries. Why is that? Because "Tena kho pana samayena bhikkhūnaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ hoti ticīvaraṃ, attho ca hoti parissāvanehipi thavikāhipi. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, parikkhāracoḷaka" (mahāva. 357) was said in terms of including many things such as bowl bags and strainers, the individual details are a source. Since the Blessed One, out of compassion, allowed, "Whatever is obtained, let them take it after undertaking it according to this method, and then doing whatever is needed with the strainer, etc.," even a bag of the measure of a renounced second robe and cloth strainer, etc., can all be put together and one can say "imāni cīvarāni parikkhāracoḷāni adhiṭṭhāmī" (I undertake these robes as requisites), and it is valid to undertake. Therefore, it was said ‘‘tathā vatvā’’, the meaning is, having said "parikkhāracoḷa". Vikappiya means having renounced.
44.Ahatakappānanti (mahāva. 348) ekavāraṃ dhovitakānaṃ.
44. Ahatakappānanti (mahāva. 348) means those that have been washed once.
45.Utuddhaṭānanti ututo dīghakālato uddhaṭānaṃ, katavatthakiccānaṃ pilotikānanti vuttaṃ hoti.Sesāti uttarāsaṅgaantaravāsakā. Paṃsu viya kucchitabhāvaṃ paṭikkūlabhāvaṃ ulati gacchatīti paṃsukūlaṃ, coḷakhaṇḍānametaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmiṃpaṃsukūleyathārucīti attho. Kasmāti ce? ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ahatānaṃ dussānaṃ ahatakappānaṃ diguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ ekacciyaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ ekacciyaṃ antaravāsakaṃ, utuddhaṭānaṃ dussānaṃ catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ diguṇaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ diguṇaṃ antaravāsakaṃ, paṃsukūle yāvadatthaṃ, pāpaṇike ussāho karaṇīyo’’ti vuttattā, tasmā susānādīsu patitapaṃsukūle ca antarāpaṇe patitapilotikacīvare ca paṭaparicchedo natthi, paṭasatampi vaṭṭatīti siddhaṃ.
45. Utuddhaṭānanti means those that have been taken up from the season for a long time, meaning rags that have had their cloth work done. Sesā means the upper robe and undergarment. Paṃsukūlaṃ is the name for pieces of cloth, because it goes to a despicable state like dust, it goes to a repulsive state, in that paṃsukūle, it is according to one's liking, is the meaning. Why is that? Because it was said, "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ahatānaṃ dussānaṃ ahatakappānaṃ diguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ ekacciyaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ ekacciyaṃ antaravāsakaṃ, utuddhaṭānaṃ dussānaṃ catugguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ diguṇaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ diguṇaṃ antaravāsakaṃ, paṃsukūle yāvadatthaṃ, pāpaṇike ussāho karaṇīyo", therefore, it is established that there is no restriction on cloth in paṃsukūla found in cemeteries, etc., and in rag robes found in shops; even a hundred pieces are valid.
46.Idāni ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, chinnakaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ chinnakaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ chinnakaṃ antaravāsaka’’nti (mahāva. 345) vatvā puna ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno ticīvare kayiramāne sabbaṃ chinnakaṃ nappahoti. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve chinnakāni ekaṃ acchinnakanti. Dve chinnakāni ekaṃ acchinnakaṃ nappahoti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve acchinnakāni ekaṃ chinnakanti. Ekaṃ chinnakaṃ nappahoti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, anvādhikampi āropetuṃ. Na ca, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ acchinnakaṃ dhāretabbaṃ, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 360) evaṃ vuttavidhānaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘tīsū’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tassa attho – tīsu cīvaresu yaṃ chinditvā sibbituṃ sabbapacchimappamāṇaṃ pahoti, taṃ chinditabbaṃ. Sabbesu pana appahontesu anvādhikaṃ ādiyeyyāti. Tatthaanvādhināma anuvātaṃ viya saṃharitvā cīvarassa upari saṅghāṭiākārena āropetabbaṃ. Āgantukapattantipi vadanti. Idaṃ pana appahonake anuññātaṃ. Sace pahoti, na vaṭṭanti, chinditabbameva.Anādiṇṇanti anāropitaṃ anvādhikaṃ.Na dhāreyyāti ticīvarādhiṭṭhānavasena adhiṭṭhahitvā na dhāretabbanti adhippāyo.
46. Now, having said, "anujānāmi, bhikkhave, chinnakaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ chinnakaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ chinnakaṃ antaravāsaka" (mahāva. 345), again, "tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa bhikkhuno ticīvare kayiramāne sabbaṃ chinnakaṃ nappahoti. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve chinnakāni ekaṃ acchinnakanti. Dve chinnakāni ekaṃ acchinnakaṃ nappahoti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve acchinnakāni ekaṃ chinnakanti. Ekaṃ chinnakaṃ nappahoti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, anvādhikampi āropetuṃ. Na ca, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ acchinnakaṃ dhāretabbaṃ, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (mahāva. 360), to show the procedure said thus, "tīsū" etc., was begun. Its meaning is: among the three robes, whatever is enough to be cut and sewn to the final measure, that should be cut. If all are not enough, then one should take additional pieces. Therein, anvādhi means that which is to be attached on top of the robe in the manner of a saṅghāṭi, gathering it like the wind. Some say it is a traveling patch. This, however, is allowed when it is not enough. If it is enough, it is not valid, it should be cut. Anādiṇṇa means an anvādhi that has not been attached. Na dhāreyyā means one should not wear it after undertaking it in the way of undertaking the ticīvara.
47-8.Idāni udositasikkhāpadanayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘gāme’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha pana sace gāmo (pārā. 478; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.477-478; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. udositasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ekassa rañño vā bhojakassa vā vasena ekakulassa hoti, pākārādinā parikkhittattā ekūpacāro ca, evarūpe gāme cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā tasmiṃ gāme yathārucitaṭṭhāne vasituṃ labbhati. Sace so gāmo aparikkhitto, yasmiṃ ghare cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ ghare vasitabbaṃ, tassa vā gharassa samantato hatthapāsā na vijahitabbaṃ.
47-8. Now, to show the rule of the udosita training rule, "gāme" etc., was said. Here, however, if the village (pārā. 478; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.477-478; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. udositasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) belongs to one family under the authority of one king or headman, and is enclosed by walls, etc., and is of one territory, in such a village, it is permissible to live in a place as one likes, having deposited the robe. If that village is not enclosed, then one should live in the house where the robe is deposited, or the hand-reach distance around that house should not be abandoned.
Sace so gāmo vesālikusinārādayo viya nānārājūnaṃ vā bhojakānaṃ vā hoti, vuttappakārena parikkhitto ca, evarūpe gāme yasmiṃ ghare cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ, tasmiṃ ghare vā vatthabbaṃ. Yassā vīthiyā taṃ gharaṃ hoti, tassā vīthiyā tassa gharassa sammukhāṭṭhāne sabhāye vā nagaradvāre vā vatthabbaṃ, tesaṃ sabhāyadvārānaṃ hatthapāsā vā na vijahitabbaṃ. Sace aparikkhitto, yasmiṃ ghare nikkhittaṃ, tattha vā tassa hatthapāse vā vatthabbaṃ.
If that village is like Vesālī, Kusinārā, etc., belonging to many kings or headmen, and is enclosed in the manner described above, in such a village, one should live in the house where the robe is deposited. Or, one should live in front of that house on the street where that house is located, in a public hall, or at the city gate, or the hand-reach distance from those public halls or gates should not be abandoned. If it is unenclosed, one should live either where it is deposited or within hand's reach of it.
pāḷiyaṃ(pārā. 478 ādayo) attho vibhatto, na gāmavasena. Udositavinicchaye ayaṃ nayo vuttoyeva.
In the Pali (e.g., Pārā. 478), the meaning is divided by sense, not by village. This method has already been stated in the Udositavinicchaya.
Nivesaneti ettha sace ekakulassa nivesanaṃ hoti parikkhittañca, antonivesane cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā antonivesane vatthabbaṃ. Aparikkhittañce hoti, yasmiṃ gabbhe cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ, tasmiṃ vatthabbaṃ, tassa gabbhassa hatthapāsā vā na vijahitabbaṃ. Sace nānākulassa hoti parikkhittañca, yasmiṃ gabbhe cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ, tasmiṃ gabbhe vatthabbaṃ, sabbesaṃ sādhāraṇadvāramūle vā tesaṃ gabbhadvāramūle vā tesaṃ gabbhadvāramūlānaṃ vā hatthapāsā na vijahitabbaṃ. Aparikkhittañce hoti, yasmiṃ gabbhe cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ, tasmiṃ gabbhe vatthabbaṃ, hatthapāsā vā na vijahitabbaṃ.
Nivesana: Here, if a nivesana belongs to one family and is enclosed, a bhikkhu should place his robe inside and dwell inside the nivesana. If it is unenclosed, he should dwell in the room where the robe is placed, and the hatthapāsa of that room should not be abandoned. If it belongs to many families and is enclosed, he should dwell in the room where the robe is placed, or at the common doorway for all, or at the doorway of those rooms, and the hatthapāsa of those doorways should not be abandoned. If it is unenclosed, he should dwell in the room where the robe is placed, and the hatthapāsa should not be abandoned.
Udositoti yānādīnaṃ bhaṇḍānaṃ sālā.Pāsādoti dīghapāsādo.Hammiyanti muṇḍacchadanapāsādo.Nāvāpana thalaṃ āropetvā nikkhittāpi hoti, samudde ṭhitāpi. Sace ekakulassa nāvā hoti, antonāvāya cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā antonāvāya vatthabbaṃ. Nānākulassa nāvā hoti nānāgabbhā nānāovarakā, yasmiṃ ovarake cīvaraṃ nikkhittaṃ, tasmiṃ vatthabbaṃ, cīvarassa hatthapāsā vā na vijahitabbaṃ.
Udosita means a hall for goods like carriages. Pāsāda means a long pāsāda. Hammiya means a pāsāda with a roof of bare earth. Nāvā can be one that has been brought ashore and placed there, or one standing in the sea. If a nāvā belongs to one family, a bhikkhu should place his robe inside and dwell inside it. If a nāvā belongs to many families, with various compartments and cabins, he should dwell in the cabin where the robe is placed, and the hatthapāsa of the robe should not be abandoned.
Aṭṭoti paṭirājādīnaṃ paṭibāhanatthaṃ iṭṭhakāhi kato bahalabhittiko catupañcabhūmiko patissayaviseso.Māḷoti ekakūṭasaṅgahito caturassapāsādo. Imesu pana udositādīsu māḷapariyosānesu nivesane vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabbo. Nivesananti pana udositādīnaṃ vasena akatāya patissayavikatiyā adhivacanaṃ.
Aṭṭo means a special kind of shelter with thick brick walls and four or five stories, built to repel enemy kings, etc. Māḷa means a square pāsāda with a single roof. In these cases of udosita, etc., up to māḷa, the decision should be understood in the same way as stated for nivesana. Nivesana, however, is a term for a kind of shelter not made in the manner of an udosita, etc.
Ārāmonāma pupphārāmaphalārāmādiko. Sace ekakulassa ārāmo hoti parikkhitto ca, antoārāme cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā antoārāme vatthabbaṃ. Sace aparikkhitto, cīvarassa hatthapāsā na vijahitabbaṃ. Sace nānākulassa ārāmo hoti parikkhitto ca, dvāramūle vā vatthabbaṃ, dvāramūlassa hatthapāsā vā na vijahitabbaṃ. Aparikkhitto ce, cīvarassa hatthapāsā na vijahitabbaṃ.
Ārāma means a flower garden, fruit garden, etc. If an ārāma belongs to one family and is enclosed, a bhikkhu should place his robe inside the ārāma and dwell inside it. If it is unenclosed, the hatthapāsa of the robe should not be abandoned. If an ārāma belongs to many families and is enclosed, he should dwell at the doorway, or the hatthapāsa of the doorway should not be abandoned. If it is unenclosed, the hatthapāsa of the robe should not be abandoned.
Satthonāma jaṅghasatthasakaṭasatthānamaññataro. Sace ekakulassa sattho hoti, satthe cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā purato vā pacchato vā sattabbhantarā na vijahitabbā, passato abbhantaraṃ na vijahitabbaṃ.Abbhantaraṃnāma aṭṭhavīsatihatthaṃ hoti. Sace gacchanto sattho sakaṭe vā bhagge, goṇe vā naṭṭhe antarā chijjati, yasmiṃ koṭṭhāse cīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ, tattha vasitabbaṃ. Sace nānākulassa hoti, satthe cīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā cīvarassa hatthapāsā na vijahitabbaṃ.
Sattho means one of the following: a caravan on foot, a cart caravan, etc. If a sattho belongs to one family, the space in front or behind should not be abandoned, nor should the interior be abandoned. Abbhantara means twenty-eight hattha. If a moving sattho is broken down due to a cart breaking or a pack animal dying in between, one should dwell where the robe is placed. If it belongs to many families, after placing the robe in the sattho, the hatthapāsa of the robe should not be abandoned.
Khettakhalesu ārāme vuttasadisova vinicchayo.Dumeti rukkhamūle. Sace ekakulassa rukkhamūlaṃ hoti, yaṃ majjhanhikakāle samantā chāyā pharati, tasmiṃ ṭhāne aviraḷe padese tassa chāyāya phuṭṭhokāsassa anto eva nikkhipitabbaṃ. Sace viraḷasākhassa pana rukkhassa ātapena phuṭṭhokāse ṭhapeti, aruṇuggamane sace so bhikkhu tassa hatthapāse na hoti, aññasmiṃ vā ṭhāne tassa chāyāyapi hoti, nissaggiyaṃ hotiyeva. Nānākulassa ce hoti, cīvarassa hatthapāsā na vijahitabbaṃ.
In Khettakhala, the decision is similar to that stated for ārāma. Dume means at the foot of a tree. If the root of a tree belongs to one family, in an uncrowded place within the area where the shade spreads all around at midday, it should be placed within the area touched by that shade. But if he places it in an area touched by the sun of a sparsely branched tree, if that bhikkhu is not within hatthapāsa of it at sunrise, or even if he is in the shade of that tree in another place, it becomes nissaggiya. If it belongs to many families, the hatthapāsa of the robe should not be abandoned.
Ajjhokāsepana viñjhāṭavīādīsu araññesupi samuddamajjhe macchabandhānaṃ agamanapathesu dīpakesupi cīvaraṃ ṭhapetvā tato samantā sattabbhantare padese yattha katthaci vasitabbaṃ. Sace sattabbhantarato kesaggamattampi atikkamitvā aruṇaṃ uṭṭhapeti, nissaggiyaṃ hoti.
In Ajjhokāsa, in remote forests like the Viñjhāṭavī, etc., even in the middle of the sea, on islands in paths frequented by fishermen, after placing the robe, one should dwell anywhere within seven abbhantara all around. If he lets the dawn break having gone even a hair's breadth beyond seven abbhantara, it becomes nissaggiya.
pāḷiyaṃ‘‘gāmo ekūpacāro nānūpacāro’’tiādinā (pārā. 477) avisesena mātikaṃ nikkhipitvāpi gāmanivesanaudositakhettadhaññakaraṇaārāmavihārānaṃ ekūpacāranānūpacāratā ‘‘gāmo ekūpacāro nāma ekakulassa gāmo hoti parikkhitto ca aparikkhitto cā’’tiādinā (pārā. 478) parikkhittāparikkhittavasena vibhattā. Aṭṭamāḷapāsādahammiyanāvāsattharukkhamūlaajjhokāsānampi evaṃ avatvā ‘‘ekakulassa aṭṭo hoti, nānākulassa aṭṭo hotī’’tiādinā (pārā. 484) nayena ekakulanānākulavasena ca ante ‘‘ajjhokāso ekūpacāro nāma agāmake araññe samantā sattabbhantarā ekūpacāro, tato paraṃ nānūpacāro’’ti (pārā. 494) ca evaṃ ekūpacāranānūpacāratā vibhattā. Tasmā gāmādīsu parikkhittaṃ ekūpacāraṃ, aparikkhittaṃ nānūpacāranti ca aṭṭādīsu yaṃ ekakulassa, taṃ ekūpacāraṃ nānākulassa nānūpacāranti ca gahetabbaṃ. Ajjhokāsapade vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ.
In the Pali, having laid down the general category without distinction, with ‘‘a village is either single-fenced or multiple-fenced,’’ etc. (Pārā. 477), the single-fenced or multiple-fenced nature of villages, nivesana, udosita, fields, granaries, work areas, ārāma, and vihāra is divided according to whether they are enclosed or unenclosed, with ‘‘a village is called single-fenced when the village belongs to one family and is either enclosed or unenclosed,’’ etc. (Pārā. 478). However, without saying this about aṭṭa, māḷa, pāsāda, hammiya, nāvā, sattha, tree root, and ajjhokāsa, the single-family or multiple-family nature is stated, with ‘‘an aṭṭa belongs to one family, an aṭṭa belongs to many families,’’ etc. (Pārā. 484). And at the end, ‘‘ajjhokāsa is called single-fenced when, in a forest not near a village, seven abbhantara all around is single-fenced; beyond that, it is multiple-fenced’’ (Pārā. 494), thus the single-fenced or multiple-fenced nature is divided. Therefore, one should take it that in villages, etc., what is enclosed is single-fenced and what is unenclosed is multiple-fenced, and in aṭṭa, etc., what belongs to one family is single-fenced and what belongs to many families is multiple-fenced. In the case of ajjhokāsa, it should be taken in the way stated.
Bhikkhusammutiyāññatrāti yaṃ gilānassa bhikkhuno cīvaraṃ ādāya pakkamituṃ asakkontassa ñattidutiyena kammena avippavāsasammuti dīyati, taṃ ṭhapetvāti attho. Laddhasammutikassa pana yāva rogo na vūpasammati, tasmiṃ vūpasante añño vā kuppati, anāpattiyeva.
Bhikkhusammutiyāññatra: Except for the sammuti for non-separation that is given with a motion and announcement to a sick bhikkhu who is unable to leave, taking his robe with him; that is the meaning. But for one who has received the sammuti, there is no offense as long as the sickness has not subsided, or if another arises when that one subsides.
49.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ yāva ābādhā adhiṭṭhātuṃ, tato paraṃ vikappetuṃ. Vassikasāṭikaṃ vassānaṃ cātumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ, tato paraṃ vikappetu’’nti (mahāva. 358) vuttattā rogapariyantā kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, vassānapariyantā vassikasāṭikāti attho.Sesāti ticīvarādayo kālavasenaapariyantikāti attho.
49.Because it was said, "I allow, monks, a cloth for covering sores to be kept as long as there is illness, and to be given away after that. A rains-cloth may be kept for the four months of the rains, and given away after that" (Mahāva. 358), the meaning is that the cloth for covering sores lasts until the end of the illness, and the rains-cloth lasts until the end of the rains. Sesā means the remaining ones, such as the three robes, etc. Apariyantikā means without time limit.
50.Paccattharaṇādittayaṃ sadasampi adasampi rattampi arattampi ādiṇṇakappampi anādiṇṇakappampi labbhatīti attho.Nisīdananti nisīdanañca rattaṃ anādiṇṇakappañca labbhatīti adhippāyo. Paccattharaṇaparikkhāramukhapuñchanacoḷāni pana nīlampi pītakampi lohitakampi pupphadasādikampi vaṭṭanti, tasmā‘‘sadasampī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evarūpaṃ pana nivāsetuṃ vā pārupituṃ vā na vaṭṭati, kevalaṃ paccattharaṇādivasena adhiṭṭhānamattaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
50.The meaning is that the three, including the seat-cloth, are available whether or not they are the correct color, whether or not they have the spots that indicate it is a robe, or not. Nisīdana means that a nisīdana is available, whether or not it is the correct color, or has the spots that indicate it is a robe. But seat-cloths, belt cloths, and face towels can be blue, yellow, crimson, or with patterns of flowers, etc., therefore ‘‘sadasampī’’ etc. was stated. But it is not allowable to wear or wrap oneself in such a thing; it is only allowable to make an act of determination for the purpose of a seat-cloth, etc.
51.Ticīvaraṃ kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi vassikasāṭikāti idaṃ panasesacīvarapañcakaṃadasaṃ rajitaṃyeva kappati, tañca ādiṇṇakappamevāti attho.Sadasaṃva nisīdananti idaṃ pana pubbe ‘‘sadasampī’’ti ettha vuttattā adasampi nisīdanaṃ vaṭṭatīti sammohanivāraṇatthaṃ vuttanti vadanti.
51.But this remaining set of five robes: the three robes, the cloth for covering sores, and the rains-cloth, are allowable only if they are not the correct color and are dyed, and they must have the spots that indicate it is a robe. Sadasaṃva nisīdana was said to prevent confusion, because it was said previously in ‘‘sadasampī’’ that a nisīdana is allowable even if it is not the correct color.
52.Anadhiṭṭhitanti ticīvarādivasena anadhiṭṭhitaṃ.Anissaṭṭhaṃnāma aññesaṃ avissajjitaṃ, taṃ pana vikappetvā paribhuñjitabbanti attho.
52.Anadhiṭṭhita means not determined as one of the three robes, etc. Anissaṭṭhaṃ means not given away to others; but it is allowable to give it away and use it.
‘‘hatthadīgha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āyāmena aṭṭhaṅgulaṃ sugataṅgulena caturaṅgulavitthataṃ pacchimaṃ cīvaraṃ vikappetu’’nti (mahāva. 358) vuttattā dīghato ekahatthaṃ puthulato upaḍḍhahatthaṃ vikappetabbanti adhippāyo.
He said, ‘‘hatthadīgha’’, etc. Therein, because it was said, "I allow, monks, a patch of cloth at the back of the robe, eight aṅgula long by the Sugata's aṅgula, four aṅgula wide, to be given away" (Mahāva. 358), the meaning is that it is allowable to give away a piece of cloth one hattha long and half a hattha wide.
53.Ticīvarassāti vinayaticīvarassa, na dhutaṅgaticīvarassa. Tassa pana imesu navasu cīvarattayameva labbhati, na aññaṃ labbhati.Sabbametanti sabbaṃ adhiṭṭhānavidhānañca pariharaṇavidhānañcāti attho.Parikkhāracoḷiyo sabbanti ticīvarādikaṃ navavidhampi cīvaraṃ.Tathā vatvāti ‘‘parikkhāracoḷa’’nti vatvā.Adhiṭṭhatīti adhiṭṭhāti. Kiṃ pana ticīvaraṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭatīti? Āma vaṭṭati, ‘‘parikkhāracoḷaṃ nāma pāṭekkaṃ nidhānamukhametanti ticīvaraṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Udositasikkhāpade pana ticīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā pariharantassa parihāro vutto’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469) vuttaṃ, tasmā ticīvaraṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhahantena paccuddharitvā puna adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ.
53.Ticīvarassa: Of the Vinaya three robes, not the Dhutaṅga three robes. But for that, only these nine types of robes are available, nothing else is available. Sabbametaṃ: All of this means both the method of determination and the method of use. Parikkhāracoḷiyo sabbaṃ: All nine types of robes, starting with the three robes. Tathā vatvā: Having said ‘‘parikkhāracoḷaṃ’’. Adhiṭṭhatī: He determines. But is it allowable to determine the three robes as a parikkhāracoḷa? Yes, it is allowable, because in the Aṭṭhakathā it was said, ‘‘parikkhāracoḷa means that this is the means of keeping things separately; it is allowable to determine the three robes as parikkhāracoḷa and use them. But in the Udositasikkhāpada, the way to use the three robes after determining them is stated’’ (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.469). Therefore, one who is determining the three robes as parikkhāracoḷa must withdraw it and then determine it again.
54.Idāni etesaṃ adhiṭṭhānavijahanākāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘acchedavissajjanagāhavibbhamā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaacchedoti corādīhi acchindanaṃ.Vissajjananti aññesaṃ dānaṃ. Kathaṃ pana dinnaṃ, kathaṃ gahitaṃ sudinnaṃ suggahitañca hotīti? Sace ‘‘idaṃ tuyhaṃ demi dadāmi dajjāmi oṇojemi pariccajāmi nissajjāmi vissajjāmī’’ti vā ‘‘itthannāmassa demi…pe… vissajjāmī’’ti vā vadati, sammukhāpi parammukhāpi dinnaṃyeva hoti. ‘‘Tuyhaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vutte ‘‘mayhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti vadati, sudinnaṃ suggahitañca. ‘‘Tava santakaṃ karohi, tava santakaṃ hotu, tava santakaṃ karissatī’’ti vutte ‘‘mamasantakaṃ karomi, mama santakaṃ hotu, mama santakaṃ karissāmī’’ti vadati, duddinnaṃ duggahitañca. Sace pana ‘‘tava santakaṃ karohī’’ti vutte ‘‘sādhu, bhante, mayhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti gaṇhāti, suggahitaṃ.
54.Now, to show the manner of determining and relinquishing these, he said ‘‘acchedavissajjanagāhavibbhamā’’, etc. Therein, acchedo means being cut off by thieves, etc. Vissajjanaṃ means giving to others. But how is it that what is given and taken is well given and well taken? If he says, "I give this to you, I am giving, I will give, I bestow, I relinquish, I give away, I release," or "I give… to so-and-so… I release," then it is given whether face to face or behind one's back. If, when told "Take it for yourself," he says "I take it for myself," then it is well given and well taken. If, when told "Make it yours, let it be yours, it will be yours," he says "I will make it mine, let it be mine, it will be mine," then it is badly given and badly taken. But if, when told "Make it yours," he takes it saying "Good, Bhante, I take it for myself," then it is well taken.
Gāhoti vissāsaggāho (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.131). So pana evaṃ veditabbo – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi samannāgatassa vissāsaṃ gahetuṃ. Sandiṭṭho ca hoti, sambhatto ca, ālapito ca, jīvati ca, jānāti ca ‘gahite me attamano bhavissatī’’’ti (mahāva. 356). Tatthasandiṭṭhoti diṭṭhamattakamitto.Sambhattoti daḷhamitto.Ālapitoti ‘‘mama santakaṃ yaṃ icchasi, taṃ gaṇheyyāsi, āpucchitvā gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthī’’ti vutto.Jīvatīti anuṭṭhānaseyyāya sayitopi yāva jīvitindriyupacchedaṃ na pāpuṇāti.Gahite ca attamanoti gahite ca tuṭṭhacitto. Evarūpassa santakaṃ ‘‘gahite me attamano bhavissatī’’ti jānantena gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Anavasesapariyādānavasena cetāni pañca aṅgāni vuttāni, vissāsaggāho pana tīhi aṅgehi ruhati. Kathaṃ? Sandiṭṭho jīvati gahite attamano, sambhatto jīvati gahite attamano, ālapito jīvati gahite attamanoti evaṃ.
Gāho means taking on trust (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 1.131). But that should be understood in this way: "I allow, monks, trust to be taken in one who has five qualities. He is well-known, intimate, has been spoken to, is alive, and knows 'he will be pleased that I have taken it'" (Mahāva. 356). Therein, sandiṭṭho means a friend who has been seen just once. Sambhatto means a close friend. Ālapito means one who has been told, "You may take whatever of my possessions you wish; there is no reason to ask permission when taking it." Jīvatī means that even if he is lying down on his deathbed, he has not yet reached the cessation of the life force. Gahite ca attamano means delighted when it is taken. It is allowable to take the possessions of such a person, knowing "he will be pleased that I have taken it." These five qualities are stated in the sense of complete and exhaustive enumeration, but taking on trust can succeed with three qualities. How? He is well-known, alive, and pleased when it is taken; he is intimate, alive, and pleased when it is taken; he has been spoken to, alive, and pleased when it is taken, thus it is.
Yo pana jīvati, na ca gahite attamano hoti, tassa santakaṃ vissāsabhāvena gahitampi puna dātabbaṃ. Dadantena matakadhanaṃ tāva ye tassa dhane issarā gahaṭṭhā vā pabbajitā vā, tesaṃ dātabbaṃ. Yo pana paṭhamaṃyeva ‘‘suṭṭhu kataṃ tayā mama santakaṃ gaṇhantenā’’ti vacībhedena vā cittuppādamattena vā anumoditvā pacchā kenaci kāraṇena kupito, so paccāharāpetuṃ na labhati. Yopi adātukāmo, cittena pana adhivāseti, na kiñci vadati, sopi puna paccāharāpetuṃ na labhati. Yo pana ‘‘mayā tumhākaṃ santakaṃ gahita’’nti vā ‘‘paribhutta’’nti vā vutte nādhivāseti, ‘‘paṭidehī’’ti bhaṇati, so paccāharāpetuṃ labhati.
But if he is alive and not pleased when it is taken, what has been taken in a trusting manner must be given back. When giving back property of the deceased, it should be given to those laypeople or renunciates who have authority over that property. But one who has approved of it, either with a statement or just with a thought, saying "You did well to take my property," and is later angry for some reason, is not allowed to demand it back. And one who does not want to give it away, but acquiesces in his mind and says nothing, is also not allowed to demand it back. But one who, when told "Your property was taken by me" or "used," does not acquiesce and says "Give it back," is allowed to demand it back.
Vibbhamāti iminā bhikkhuniyāyeva adhiṭṭhānavijahanaṃ gahitaṃ hoti. Sā pana yadā vibbhamati, tadā assamaṇī hoti. Bhikkhu pana vibbhamantopi yāva sikkhaṃ na paccakkhāti, tāva bhikkhuyevāti adhiṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatīti.Liṅgasikkhāti liṅgaparivattanañca sikkhāpaccakkhānañcāti attho.Sabbesūti navasu cīvaresu.Adhiṭṭhānaviyogakāraṇāti adhiṭṭhānavijahanakāraṇā, imesu aññatarena adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahatīti attho.
Vibbhamā: With this, the relinquishing of determination is taken as applying to a bhikkhunī only. But when she becomes deranged, she is no longer a samaṇī. But even if a bhikkhu is deranged, as long as he has not renounced the training, he is still a bhikkhu, so the determination is not relinquished. Liṅgasikkhā: The changing of gender and the renunciation of the training; that is the meaning. Sabbesū: In all nine robes. Adhiṭṭhānaviyogakāraṇā: The causes for relinquishing the determination; the meaning is that he relinquishes the determination with any one of these.
Kiñca bhiyyo (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469) – ticīvarassa pana vinibbiddhachiddañca adhiṭṭhānavijahanaṃ karotīti attho. Tattha saṅghāṭiuttarāsaṅgānaṃ dīghantato vidatthippamāṇassa tiriyantato aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇassa padesassa orato kaniṭṭhaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhippamāṇakaṃ chiddaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhindati. Antaravāsakassa dīghantato vidatthippamāṇasseva tiriyantato caturaṅgulappamāṇassa padesassa orato chiddaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhindati, parato pana na bhindati. Tasmā chidde jāte ticīvaraṃ atirekacīvaraṃ hoti, sūcikammaṃ katvā puna adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Itaresaṃ pana chiddena vijahanaṃ nāma natthi. Yo pana ticīvarepi dubbalaṭṭhāne paṭhamaṃ aggaḷaṃ datvā pacchā dubbalaṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā apaneti, adhiṭṭhānaṃ na bhijjati. Maṇḍalaparivattanepi eseva nayo. Yo pana ubho koṭiyo majjhe karonto sace paṭhamaṃ chinditvā pacchā ghaṭeti, adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahati, atha ghaṭetvā chindati, na vijahati. Rajakehi dhovāpetvā setakaṃ karontassāpi na vijahati eva.
Furthermore (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469): It means making a torn hole in the three robes and abandoning the determination. Here, for the Saṅghāṭi and Uttarāsaṅga, if a hole the size of a span lengthwise and eight finger-breadths across occurs within the lower part of an area the size of the back of the smallest fingernail, it breaks the determination. For the Antaravāsaka, if a hole the size of a span lengthwise and four finger-breadths across occurs within the lower part, it breaks the determination, but not if it's in the upper part. Therefore, when a hole occurs, the three robes become extra robes; having done needlework, it should be re-determined. But for the others, there is no abandonment due to a hole. However, if, even in the three robes, one first places a bar at a weak spot and then cuts and removes the weak spot, the determination is not broken. The same method applies to turning the border. If one joins the two edges in the middle, and if one first cuts and then joins, the determination is broken; but if one joins and then cuts, it is not broken. Even if the robes are whitened by having them washed by dyers, it does not break the determination.
55.Idāni akappiyacīvarāni dassetuṃ‘‘kusavākaphalakānī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthakusacīraṃ(mahāva. 371; mahāva. aṭṭha. ) nāma kuse ganthetvā katacīvaraṃ.Vākacīraṃnāma tāpasānaṃ vakkalaṃ.Phalakacīraṃnāma phalakāni sibbitvā katacīvaraṃ.Kesakambalanti kesehi tantaṃ vāyitvā katakambalaṃ.Vālakambalanti camaravālehi vāyitvā katakambalaṃ.Ulūkapakkhanti ulūkasakuṇassa pakkhehi katanivāsanaṃ.Ajinakkhipanti salomaṃ sakhuraṃ ajinamigacammaṃ. Imesu sattasu vatthesu yaṃ kiñci dhārayato thullaccayanti attho. Yathā imesu thullaccayaṃ, tathā akkanāḷaṃ nivāsentassa.Akkanāḷaṃnāma akkadaṇḍe vākādīhi ganthetvā katacīvaraṃ. ‘‘Na bhikkhave akkanāḷaṃ nivāsetabbaṃ, yo nivāseyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 371) hi vuttaṃ.
55. Now, to show what are unsuitable robes, the passage beginning with "kusavākaphalakānī" is commenced. Here, kusacīraṃ (mahāva. 371; mahāva. aṭṭha.) means a robe made by weaving kusa grass. Vākacīraṃ means bark cloth for ascetics. Phalakacīraṃ means a robe made by sewing together wooden boards. Kesakambalanti is a blanket made by weaving thread from hair. Vālakambalanti is a blanket made by weaving from the tails of yaks. Ulūkapakkhanti is clothing made from the feathers of owls. Ajinakkhipanti is a deer hide or animal skin with fur and hooves. Wearing any of these seven types of clothing incurs a thullaccaya offense, it means. Just as a thullaccaya offense is incurred for these, so it is for wearing an akkanāḷa. Akkanāḷaṃ means a robe made by weaving together strips of bark, etc., on an akka stalk. "Monks, an akkanāḷa should not be worn; whoever wears it incurs a thullaccaya offense" (mahāva. 371) was indeed said.
56.Kadalerakakkadusse potthake cāpīti ettha kadalierakaakkamakacivākehi katāni vatthāni evaṃ vuttānīti veditabbāni. Etesu potthakoyevapāḷiyaṃāgato, itarāni taggatikattāaṭṭhakathāsupaṭikkhittāni. Imesu catūsupi dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Na bhikkhave naggiyaṃ titthiyasamādānaṃ samādiyitabbaṃ, yo samādiyeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 370) vuttattā naggiyampi na kappati eva. Sabbameva nīlakaṃsabbanīlakaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Etthanīlaṃumāpupphavaṇṇaṃ hoti.Mañjeṭṭhakaṃmañjeṭṭhakavaṇṇameva.Pītakaṃkaṇikārapupphavaṇṇaṃ.Lohitakaṃjayasumanapupphavaṇṇaṃ.Kaṇhakaṃaddāriṭṭhakavaṇṇaṃ.
56. Kadalerakakkadusse potthake cāpīti: Here, it should be understood that cloths made of kadali eraka akka makaci and vāka are what is being referred to. Among these, only the potthaka appears in the Pāḷi, while the others are prohibited in the Aṭṭhakathās because they fall into the same category. For all four of these, it is only a dukkaṭa offense. Since it was said, "Monks, the practice of nakedness, a Titthiya observance, should not be undertaken; whoever undertakes it incurs a thullaccaya offense" (mahāva. 370), nakedness is also unsuitable. All that is blue is sabbanīlakaṃ, entirely blue. The same applies to the rest. Here, nīlaṃ is the color of the flax flower. Mañjeṭṭhakaṃ is the color of the madder root itself. Pītakaṃ is the color of the kanikāra flower. Lohitakaṃ is the color of the jayasumana flower. Kaṇhakaṃ is the color of the addāriṭṭha fruit.
57.Mahāraṅgaṃnāma satapadipiṭṭhivaṇṇaṃ.Mahānāmaṃnāma rattasambhinnavaṇṇaṃ hoti. Padumapupphavaṇṇantipi vuttaṃ, mandarattanti attho.Tirīṭaketi rukkhatace.Acchinnadīghadasaketi sabbaso acchinnadasake ca majjhe chinnadasake cāti attho. Aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbitvā katadasaṃphaladasaṃnāma. Ketakapupphādipupphasadisāhi dasāhi yuttaṃpupphadasaṃnāma. Etesupi ‘‘potthake cāpī’’ti ettha vuttaapi-saddena dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ.Tathāti yathā etesu kadalidussādīsu pupphadasāvasānesu dukkaṭaṃ, tathā kañcukaveṭhanesupi yaṃ kiñci dhārentassa dukkaṭanti attho.
57. Mahāraṅgaṃ means the color of a centipede's back. Mahānāmaṃ means a color mixed with red. It is also said to be the color of a lotus flower, meaning reddish. Tirīṭaketi means tree bark. Acchinnadīghadasaketi means both entirely uncut fringes and fringes cut in the middle. Phaladasaṃ nāma is fringes made by sewing together different materials. Pupphadasaṃ nāma is fringes adorned with fringes resembling ketaka flowers and other flowers. For these too, it should be understood from the api in "potthake cāpī" that it is a dukkaṭa offense. Tathāti just as for these kadali cloths and so on, up to flower fringes, there is a dukkaṭa offense, so too for anyone wearing anything resembling bodice wrappings, there is a dukkaṭa offense, it means.
Sabbanti imaṃ vuttappakāraṃ kusacīrādikaṃ akappiyacīvaraṃ acchinnacīvaro labhatīti attho. Vuttampi cetaṃparivāre.
Sabbanti, it means the monk with uncut robes obtains all the aforementioned types of unsuitable robes beginning with kusacīra. This was also stated in the Parivāra.
‘‘Akappakataṃ nāpi rajanāya rattaṃ,
"What is unallowable, not dyed with dye,
Clothed with which one may go as one wishes;
And there is no offense for him,
This Dhamma was taught by the Sugata;
These questions are thought over by the skillful." (pari. 481)
Ayañhi pañho acchinnacīvarabhikkhuṃ sandhāya vutto, tasmā hi yaṃ kiñci akappiyacīvaraṃ nivāsetvā vā pārupitvā vā acchinnacīvarakena aññaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘idha pana, bhikkhave, manussā nissīmagatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ cīvaraṃ denti ‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ itthannāmassa demā’ti, anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sādituṃ, na tāva taṃ gaṇanūpagaṃ, yāva na hatthaṃ gacchatī’’ti (mahāva. 259) vuttattā yāva āharitvā taṃ na dinnaṃ, ‘‘tumhākaṃ, bhante, cīvaraṃ uppanna’’nti pahiṇitvā vā nārocitaṃ, tāva gaṇanaṃ na upeti, anadhiṭṭhitaṃ vaṭṭati. Pattepi eseva nayo. Ānetvā dinne vā ārocite vā parihāro natthi, dasāhaṃ adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Cīvaravinicchayo.
This question was asked with reference to a bhikkhu with uncut robes; therefore, whatever unsuitable robe is worn or put on, the bhikkhu with uncut robes should seek another. But here, since it was said, "Here, monks, people give robes to monks who have gone beyond the boundary, saying, 'We give this robe to such-and-such a one'; I allow, monks, it to be accepted, but it does not enter into the reckoning until it comes into the hand" (mahāva. 259), it does not enter into the reckoning until it is brought and given to him, or it is sent or announced, "Venerable, a robe has arisen for you," and it is fitting to use it without determining it. The same method applies to the bowl. Once it has been brought and given or announced, there is no exception; it must be determined within ten days. The decision on robes.
Cīvaraniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Robe Section is Finished.
4. Rajananiddesavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Section on Dyes
58.Idāni tesaṃ cīvarānaṃ rajanavidhānaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘rajanāni cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, cha rajanāni mūlarajanaṃ khandharajanaṃ tacarajanaṃ pattarajanaṃ puppharajanaṃ phalarajana’’nti (mahāva. 344) evaṃ bhagavatā anuññātattā‘‘chappakārāni anuññātāni satthunā’’ti vuttaṃ.
58. Now, to show the method of dyeing those robes, "rajanāni cā" is stated. There, since it was allowed by the Blessed One, "I allow, monks, six dyes: root dye, trunk dye, bark dye, leaf dye, flower dye, fruit dye" (mahāva. 344), therefore it was said, "chappakārāni anuññātāni satthunā".
59.Tatthamūleti mūlarajaneti attho. Haliddiṃ vivajjiya sabbaṃ labbhanti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesupi.Tuṅgahārakonāma eko sakaṇṭakarukkho, tassa haritālavaṇṇaṃ khandharajanaṃ hoti. Gihiparibhuttaṃ pana allipattena ekavāraṃ rajituṃ vaṭṭati. Phalarajane akappiyaṃ nāma natthi, sabbaṃ vaṭṭatīti. Rajanavinicchayo.
59. There, mūleti means root dye. Everything except turmeric is obtainable; this is the connection. The same applies to the rest. Tuṅgahārako nāma is a thorny tree; its trunk dye is the color of orpiment. But it is permissible to dye once with allipatta used by laypeople. There is nothing unallowable in fruit dye; everything is suitable. The decision on dyes.
Rajananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Dyes is Finished.
5. Pattaniddesavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Section on Bowls
60.Idāni bhājanavikatiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘patto cā’’ti uddhaṭaṃ. Ettha pana paṭhamagāthā suviññeyyā.
60. Now, to show the modification of vessels, "patto cā" is extracted. Here, however, the first verse is easily understood.
61.Dutiye ‘‘magadhanāḷidvayataṇḍulasādhita’’nti vattabbe vibhattilopaṃ akatvā gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ‘‘magadhe nāḷidvayataṇḍulasādhita’’nti vuttaṃ, pacitanti attho. Ettha (pārā. 602; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. pattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā)magadhanāḷināma aḍḍhaterasapalaṃ gaṇhāti.Odananti ettha sabbappakārasampannaṃ avassāvitodanaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Odanassa catutthabhāgappamāṇaṃ nātighanaṃ nātitanukaṃ hatthahāriyamuggasūpañca ālopassa ālopassa anurūpaṃ yāva carimakālopappahonakaṃ macchamaṃsādibyañjanañca yo patto gaṇhāti, so ukkaṭṭho nāmāti attho. Sappitelatakkarasakañjikādīni pana gaṇanūpagāni na honti, tāni hi odanagatikāneva honti, neva hāpetuṃ, na vaḍḍhetuṃ sakkonti. Evametaṃ sabbaṃ pakkhittaṃ sace pattassa heṭṭhimarājisamaṃ tiṭṭhati, suttena vā hīrena vā chindantassa suttassa vā hīrassa vā heṭṭhimantaṃ phusati, ayaṃukkaṭṭhonāma patto. Sace taṃ rājiṃ atikkamitvā thūpīkataṃ tiṭṭhati, ayaṃukkaṭṭhomakonāma patto. Sace taṃ rājiṃ na sampāpuṇāti, antogatameva hoti, ayaṃukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhonāma patto.
61. In the second, instead of saying "magadhanāḷidvayataṇḍulasādhita," the inflectional ending is omitted for the sake of ease of versification, and it is said "magadhe nāḷidvayataṇḍulasādhita", meaning cooked. Here (pārā. 602; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.602; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. pattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), a magadhanāḷi nāma holds one and a half palas. Odananti, here, fully prepared cooked rice that has not been drained should be taken. A bowl that can hold cooked rice equal to one-fourth of the rice, mung bean soup that is neither too thick nor too thin, and that can be carried by hand, and relish such as fish and meat in accordance with each mouthful, enough to last until the last mouthful, is called an ukkaṭṭha, it means. But sappi, oil, clarified butter, juice, kanjika, and so on, do not enter into the calculation; these are of the same nature as the rice; they can neither reduce nor increase the amount. If all of this is placed in the bowl and it stands level with the lower ridge of the bowl, and if a thread or string being cut touches the lower edge of the thread or string, this is called an ukkaṭṭho nāma bowl. If it stands piled up, exceeding that ridge, this is called an ukkaṭṭhomako nāma bowl. If it does not reach that ridge, but remains within, this is called an ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho nāma bowl.
62.‘‘Majjhimo nāma patto nāḷikodanaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti vuttattā‘‘majjhimo tassupaḍḍho vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etthāpi vuttappakārena majjhimo majjhimomako majjhimukkaṭṭhoti pattattikaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Omako nāma patto patthodanaṃ gaṇhātī’’ti (pārā. 602) vacanato‘‘tatopaḍḍho’’ti vuttaṃ. Magadhanāḷiyā upaḍḍhanāḷikodanañca tadūpiyaṃ sūpaṃ byañjanañca gaṇhāti, soomakonāma. Idhāpi omako omakomako omakukkaṭṭhoti pattattikaṃ veditabbaṃ. Imesu pana navasu pattesu ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho ca omakomako ca apatto. Etesu adhiṭṭhātabbakiccaṃ natthi, sesā satta pattā adhiṭṭhātabbā, vikappetabbā cāti attho.
62. Since it was said, "A majjhima bowl holds one nāḷi of cooked rice," therefore it was said "majjhimo tassupaḍḍho vā". Here too, a triple of bowls should be understood in the manner described: majjhima, majjhimomaka, majjhimukkaṭṭha. From the saying, "An omaka bowl holds one pattha of cooked rice" (pārā. 602), "tatopaḍḍho" was said. A bowl that holds half a nāḷi of cooked rice by Magadha measure, together with soup and relish appropriate to it, is called omako nāma. Here too, a triple of bowls should be understood: omako, omakomaka, omakukkaṭṭha. But among these nine bowls, the ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭha and omakomaka are not bowls [permitted for use]. There is no need for determination for these; the remaining seven bowls must be determined and disowned, it means.
63.Atirekapattoti (pārā. 601) anadhiṭṭhito avikappito.Sakoti sasantako.Kappoti kappiyo. Ayamevettha saṅkhepo – yo patto kākaṇikamattassāpi mūlassa dātabbassa natthitāya sako. Ayopatto pañcahi pākehi mattikāpatto dvīhi pākehi pakkattā kappo. So dasāhaparamaṃ kālaṃ anadhiṭṭhito avikappito dhāreyyoti.
63. Atirekapattoti (pārā. 601) means undetermined and undisowned. Sakoti means with an owner. Kappoti means allowable. Here, this is the summary: a bowl that has an owner because there is no possibility of giving even the value of a kākaṇi coin. An iron bowl is allowable because it is baked with five bakings, and a clay bowl because it is baked with two bakings. This can be kept for a maximum of ten days without being determined or disowned.
64.Acchedādayo cīvare vuttappabhedāyeva.Chiddenāti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. pattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ettha yassa pattassa mukhavaṭṭito heṭṭhā dvaṅgulappadese yena chiddena kaṅgusitthaṃ nikkhamati, tattakena chiddena bhijjati. Tasmiṃ pana ayacuṇṇādīhi paṭipākatike kate dasāhabbhantare puna adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ.Pattādhiṭṭhānamujjhatīti patto adhiṭṭhānaṃ ujjhati.
64. Acchedādayo are of the same types as described for robes. Chiddenāti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.608; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. pattasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) here, a bowl is broken by a hole through which kaṅgu grits can pass, if that hole is in an area two finger-breadths below the rim of the bowl. But if a repair is made to it with iron filings, etc., it must be re-determined within ten days. Pattādhiṭṭhānamujjhatīti the bowl gives up its determination.
65.Idāni pariharaṇavidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pattaṃ na paṭisāmeyya sodaka’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Sodakaṃ (cūḷava. 254) pattaṃ na paṭisāmeyya, ātape ca sodakaṃ pattaṃ na otapeti adhippāyo.Na nidaheti nirudakaṃ katvāpi atikālaṃ na nidaheti adhippāyo.Bhumyāti bhūmiyaṃ.Na ṭhapeti taṭṭikācammakhaṇḍādīsu yena kenaci anatthatāya paṃsusakkharamissāya bhūmiyā na ṭhapeyyāti attho.No ca laggayeti etthapi nāgadantādīsu (cūḷava. 254) yattha katthaci laggantassa dukkaṭameva.
65. Now, to show the method of using it, the passage beginning "pattaṃ na paṭisāmeyya sodaka" is commenced. One should not store away a bowl containing water (sodakaṃ) (cūḷava. 254), nor should one place a bowl containing water in the sun; this is the intention. Na nidaheti even after emptying it of water, one should not store it away for too long; this is the intention. Bhumyāti on the ground. Na ṭhapeti one should not place it on the ground, mixed with dust and gravel, for no reason, on a mat, a piece of leather, etc.; this is the meaning. No ca laggayeti here too, there is a dukkaṭa offense for hanging it anywhere, such as on a nagadanta (coat-hook) (cūḷava. 254).
66.Miḍḍhanteti (cūḷava. 254; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 254) miḍḍhapariyante. Sace pana parivattetvā tattheva patiṭṭhāti, evarūpāya vitthiṇṇāya miḍḍhiyā abbhantaraparicchede ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati, na pariyante.Paribhaṇḍanteti bāhirapasse katāya tanukamiḍḍhiyā anteti attho.Aṅke vāti (cūḷava. 254) dvinnaṃ ūrūnaṃ majjhe. Ettha pana aṃsabaddhake aṃsakūṭe laggetvā aṅke ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati, na itarathā.Ātapattaketi chatte. Ettha bhattapūropi aṃsakūṭe laggitapattopi ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati.
66. Miḍḍhanteti (cūḷava. 254; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 254) means at the edge of a refuse heap. But if it stands there after being turned over, it is permissible to place it within the boundary of such a wide refuse heap, but not at the edge. Paribhaṇḍanteti means on the inside of a thin refuse heap made on the outer side. Aṅke vāti (cūḷava. 254) means in the space between the two thighs. Here, however, it is permissible to place it in the lap by hooking it onto a shoulder-strap support, but not otherwise. Ātapattaketi means on an umbrella. Here, even a bowl filled with food, or a bowl hooked onto a shoulder-strap support, should not be placed there.
67.Ucchiṭṭhodakaṃ(cūḷava. 255; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 255) nāma mukhavikkhālanodakaṃ, taṃ patte niṭṭhubhitvā pattena na nīhareyyāti attho. Calakañca aṭṭhikañcacalakaṭṭhikaṃ. Etesu yaṃ kiñci pattena nīharantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Pattaṃ paṭiggahaṃ katvā hatthaṃ dhovitumpi na labhati. Hatthadhovitavatthadhovitaudakampi patte ākiritvā nīharituṃ na vaṭṭati. Anucchiṭṭhapattaṃ ucchiṭṭhahatthena gahetumpi na vaṭṭati. Hatthaṃ pana bahi dhovitvā gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Macchamaṃsaphalāphalādīni khādanto yaṃ mukhena luñcitvā luñcitvā khādati, taṃ vā tesaṃ aṭṭhiādikaṃ vā mukhato nīhaṭaṃ puna akhāditukāmo chaḍḍetukāmo patte ṭhapetuṃ na labhati. Siṅgiveranāḷikerakhaṇḍādīni khādantehi ḍaṃsitvā ḍaṃsitvā puna ṭhapetuṃ labhati. ‘‘Na bhikkhave pattahatthena kavāṭaṃ paṇāmetabbaṃ, yo paṇāmeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 255) vuttattā yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena pattaṃ gahetvā ṭhito yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena kavāṭaṃ paṇāmetuṃ na labhati, tasmā‘‘pattahatthovā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṃsakūṭe laggitvā ṭhitassa vaṭṭati.
67. Ucchiṭṭhodakaṃ(cūḷava. 255; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 255) nāma means water for rinsing the mouth; it means one should not spit that into the bowl and then remove it with the bowl. Calakañca aṭṭhikañca means fragments and bones. A dukkaṭa offense is incurred for removing any of these with the bowl. One is not allowed to wash one's hands after using the bowl for receiving alms. One is not allowed to pour out water used for washing one's hands or robes into the bowl and remove it. One is not allowed to take a clean bowl with a soiled hand. But it is permissible to wash one's hand outside and then take it. When eating fish, meat, fruits, and so on, one should not place what one has bitten off with one's mouth and wants to discard, or their bones, etc., that have been removed from the mouth, into the bowl if one does not want to eat it again. When eating pieces of ginger, coconut, etc., it is permissible for those who have bitten into them to put them back again. Since it was said, "Monks, a door should not be pushed with a bowl in hand; whoever pushes it incurs a dukkaṭa offense" (cūḷava. 255), it is not permissible to push a door with any part of one's body while holding the bowl with any part of one's body; therefore, "pattahatthovā" was said. It is permissible for one standing with it hooked onto a shoulder-strap support.
68.Bhūmiādhāraketi ettha dantavallivettavākādīhi kate valayādhārake.Dārudaṇḍādhāreti ekadārunā kataādhārake ca bahūhi daṇḍehi kataādhārake cāti attho. Tidaṇḍe na vaṭṭati. Etesu pana susajjitesu ekaṃ pattaṃ ṭhapetvāva tassupari ekaṃ ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati, tayo pana na vaṭṭanti.Ekaṃ nikkujjitvāva bhūmiyanti ettha bhūmiyaṃ kaṭasārakādīsu aññataraṃ pattharitvā tassupari nikkujjitvā vā ukkujjitvā vā ekaṃ ṭhapeyya, dve ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Dve pana ṭhapentena upari ṭhapitapattaṃ ekena passena bhūmiyaṃ phusāpetvā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti.
68. Bhūmiādhārake: Here, valayādhārake made of dantavalli, vetta, vāka, etc. Dārudaṇḍādhāre: means an ādhārake made of a single piece of wood, or one made of many pieces of wood. A three-legged stand is not allowed. However, among these well-arranged stands, it is permissible to place one bowl, and then another on top of that one, but three are not allowed. Ekaṃ nikkujjitvāva bhūmiyaṃ: Here, spreading out one of kaṭasāraka etc., on the ground, one may place one bowl either upside down or right-side up on top of it; the intention is that it is not permissible to place two. However, some say that if one places two, it is permissible to place the bowl on top so that one side touches the ground.
69-70.Idāni akappiyapatte dassetuṃ‘‘dārurūpiyasovaṇṇā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthamaṇiveḷuriyāmayāti (cūḷava. 252; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 252)maṇīti indanīlakabarakatādi. Sace gahaṭṭhā bhattagge suvaṇṇarūpiyataṭṭakādīsu sūpabyañjanaṃ katvā upanāmenti, āmasitumpi na vaṭṭati. Ghaṭikaṭāhajā (cūḷava. 255; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 255) ca tumbakaṭāhajā caghaṭitumbakaṭāhajā. Etthatumbakaṭāhajānāma alābu. Pattavinicchayo.
69-70.Now, to show what bowls are not allowable, the passage beginning with ‘‘dārurūpiyasovaṇṇā’’ is introduced. Here, maṇiveḷuriyāmayā: maṇī means indanīla, barakata, etc. If householders prepare soup and curry in gold or silver serving dishes in the refectory and offer it, it is not even allowed to touch them. Ghaṭikaṭāhajā and tumbakaṭāhajā are ghaṭitumbakaṭāhajā. Here, tumbakaṭāhajā means lābu (bottle gourd). The decision regarding bowls.
Pattaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the bowl designation is complete.
6. Thālakaniddesavaṇṇanā
6. Explanation of the Designation of Trays
71-2.Idāni thālakesu kappiyākappiyavidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘thālakā cā’’ti padaṃ uddhaṭaṃ. Tatthaakappāti dārumayādayo thālakā akappiyāti attho. Phalikathālakādayo (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 252) gihisantakā vā saṅghasantakā vā kappiyā.Ghaṭitumbakaṭāhajā(cūḷava. 255) tāvakālikā, tāsu bhuñjitvā chaḍḍetabbā, na pariharitabbāti adhippāyo. Thālakavinicchayo.
71-2.Now, to show the allowable and unallowable regarding trays, the word ‘‘thālakā cā’’ is cited. Here, akappā means trays made of wood, etc., are not allowable. Trays made of crystal, etc. (phalikathālakādayo), whether belonging to laypeople or the Saṅgha, are allowable. Ghaṭitumbakaṭāhajā are temporary; after eating from them, they should be discarded, not kept. This is the intention. The decision regarding trays.
Thālakaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the tray designation is complete.
7. Pavāraṇāniddesavaṇṇanā
7. Explanation of the Invitation Designation
73.Idāni pavāraṇāvidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pavāraṇā’’ti (pāci. 238-239; pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) padaṃ uddhaṭaṃ. Tatthairiyāpathenāti ṭhānagamanasayananisajjānaṃ aññatarena iriyāpathenāti attho. Tato iriyāpathato aññena iriyāpathena anatirittakaṃ paribhuñjeyya ce, pācittiyanti attho.Pācittinatirittakanti pācitti anatirittakaṃ.
73.Now, to show the procedure for pavāraṇā, the word ‘‘pavāraṇā’’ is cited. Here, iriyāpathenā means with one posture among standing, walking, lying down, or sitting. The meaning is, if one partakes of an excess while in a different posture from that, it is pācittiya. Pācittinatirittakaṃ means a pācitti for the excess.
74.Idāni yehi aṅgehi pavāraṇā hoti, tāni aṅgāni dassetuṃ‘‘asana’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaasananti etena avippakatabhojanatā vuttā, bhuñjamāno ca so puggalo hotīti attho.Bhojanañcevāti yaṃ bhuñjanto pavāreti, taṃ odano kummāso sattu maccho maṃsanti imesu aññataraṃ hotīti attho.Abhihāroti dāyako tassa taṃ bhattaṃ kāyena abhiharatīti attho, vācābhihāro pana na gahetabbo.Samīpatāti dāyako pavāraṇappahonakabhojanaṃ gahetvā aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇe okāse hotīti attho.Kāyavācāpaṭikkhepoti hatthapāse ṭhitena abhihaṭaṃ bhikkhaṃ kāyena vā vācāya vā paṭikkhipeyyāti attho. Ettha pana sace bhikkhu nisinno hoti, ānisadassa pārimantato paṭṭhāya, sace ṭhito, paṇhiantato paṭṭhāya, sace nipanno, yena passena nipanno, tassa pārimantato paṭṭhāya dāyakassāpi tathāvidhassa ṭhapetvā pasāritahatthaṃ yaṃ tassa āsannataraṃ aṅgaṃ, tassa vasena paricchedo kātabbo.Pañca aṅgā pavāraṇāti ‘‘asanaṃ paññāyati, bhojanaṃ paññāyati, hatthapāse ṭhito abhiharati, paṭikkhepo paññāyatī’’ti (pāci. 239; pari. 428)pāḷiyaṃvuttehi imehi pañcahi aṅgehi pavāraṇā hotīti attho.
74.Now, to show the factors by which pavāraṇā occurs, he said, beginning with ‘‘asana’’. Here, asanaṃ indicates that there is uninterrupted eating, meaning that the person is eating. Bhojanañcevā means that what one invites with while eating is one among rice, kummāsa, sattu, fish, or meat. Abhihāro means the donor offers that food with his body; offering by speech is not to be taken into account. Samīpatā means the donor, having taken food sufficient for pavāraṇā, is within a space of one and a half cubits. Kāyavācāpaṭikkhepo means that one should reject the alms offered by hand, either by body or by speech. Here, if the bhikkhu is sitting, the measurement is to be made starting from the edge of the mat; if standing, from the heel; if lying down, from the edge of the side he is lying on. For the donor as well, placing (the food) in a similar manner, the measurement should be determined by whichever of his limbs is closest to the outstretched hand. Pañca aṅgā pavāraṇā means that pavāraṇā occurs with these five factors mentioned in the Pāḷi, "eating is evident, food is evident, standing within arm's reach he offers, rejection is evident."
75.Idāni etesu pañcasu bhojanaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘odano’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idāni odanādayo imehi nibbattāti dassetuṃ‘‘sālī’’tiādimāha. Tattha setarattakāḷabhedā sabbāpi kaṅgujātiyokaṅgūti gahetabbā. Kāḷasetākudrūsavarakā. Imesaṃ sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ odano ca bhojjayāgu ca odano nāmāti attho.
75.Now, to show food among these five, he said beginning with ‘‘odano’’. Now, to show that rice etc., are produced from these, he said beginning with ‘‘sālī’’. Here, all types of kaṅgu grains, whether white, red, or black, are to be included in kaṅgū. Kudrūsavarakā are black and white. The meaning is that rice and boiled rice gruel of these seven grains are called rice.
76.Sāmākāditiṇaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239) kudrūsake saṅgahaṃ gatanti attho. Varakacorako varake saṅgahaṃ gato, sāliyañceva nīvāro saṅgahaṃ gato setattāti vadanti. Imesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ sānulomānaṃ sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ taṇḍule gahetvā ‘‘yāguṃ pacissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘bhattaṃ pacissāmā’’ti vā yaṃ kiñci sandhāya pacanti, sace uṇhaṃ vā sītalaṃ vā bhuñjantānaṃ bhojanakāle gahitagahitaṭṭhāne odhi paññāyati, ayaṃ odano nāma, pavāraṇaṃ janeti. Yopi pāyāso vā ambilayāgu vā uddhanato otāritamattā abbhuṇhā āvijjhitvā pivituṃ sakkā, gahitokāsepi odhiṃ na dasseti, ayaṃ pavāraṇaṃ na janeti. Usumāya pana vigatāya ghanabhāvaṃ gacchati, odhi paññāyati, puna pavāraṇaṃ janeti, pubbe tanukabhāvo na rakkhati. Bhatte pana udakakañjikakhīrādīni ākiritvā ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadanti, kiñcāpi tanukā hoti, pavāraṇaṃ janetiyeva tasmiṃ yāguyā natthibhāvato. Sace pana pakkuthitesu udakādīsu pakkhipitvā pacitvā denti, yāgusaṅgahameva gacchati.
76.Sāmāka etc. (sāmākāditiṇaṃ) are included in kudrūsaka. Varakacoraka is included in varaka, sāli and nīvāra are included in white. It is said. Taking the grains of these seven grains, consistent with what has been said, if they cook intending, "we will cook gruel," or "we will cook rice," if warmth or coolness, i.e., odhi, is evident in the place where (the food) is taken at the time of eating, this is called rice, it generates pavāraṇā. Even the rice cooked with milk or sour gruel, which is so hot immediately after being taken from the pot that it can be poured and drunk, does not show odhi in the place where it is taken, this does not generate pavāraṇā. However, when the heat is gone, it becomes dense, odhi is evident, and it generates pavāraṇā again; its former thin state does not hold. In rice, however, if water, sour gruel, or milk are added and they say, "take gruel," even though it is thin, it still generates pavāraṇā because the gruel does not exist in it (as a separate entity). However, if they put water etc., into cooked grains and cook it, and then give it, it goes into the category of gruel.
77.Bhaṭṭhadhaññamayoti sattavidhānipi dhaññāni gahetvā kharapākabhajjitānaṃ tesaṃ taṇḍule koṭṭetvā katacuṇṇakuṇḍakānisattunāma. Samapākabhajjitānaṃ pana ātapasukkhānaṃ vā taṇḍulānaṃ cuṇṇakuṇḍakāni sattusaṅkhyaṃ na gacchanti.Yavasambhavoti aññehi pana muggādīhi katakummāsona pavāretīti adhippāyo.Udakasambhavoti iminā kakkaṭakasippikasambukādayopi saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Sace yāgupānakāle ekasmiṃ bhājane ṭhapetvā macchamaṃsaṃ vā khādanti, te ce akhādanto aññaṃ pavāraṇappahonakaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti. Khāditepi sace mukhe avasiṭṭhaṃ natthi, tadā paṭikkhipantopi na pavāretiyeva. Sace patte avasiṭṭhaṃ atthi, mukhe natthi, tañce akhāditukāmo hoti, aññattha vā gantvā khāditukāmo, tasmiṃ khaṇe paṭikkhipantopi na pavāretiyeva.
77.Bhaṭṭhadhaññamayo means that the flour cakes made by taking the grains of the seven kinds of grains, grinding the grains after they have been roasted to a crisp, are called sattu. However, flour cakes of grains that have been roasted evenly or dried in the sun do not fall into the category of sattu. Yavasambhavo means that kummāso made from other things such as mugga beans does not invite pavāraṇā. Udakasambhavo means that crabs, oysters, shellfish, etc., are also included by this. If they place fish or meat in one dish while drinking gruel or beverage, and if he rejects another food sufficient for pavāraṇā without eating that, he does not invite pavāraṇā. Even if it is eaten, if there is nothing remaining in the mouth, then even if he rejects (the food), he still does not invite pavāraṇā. If there is something remaining in the bowl, but nothing in the mouth, and if he does not want to eat it, or wants to go somewhere else and eat it, even if he rejects (the food) at that moment, he still does not invite pavāraṇā.
78.Bhojananti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239) pañcasu bhojanesu yaṃ kiñci bhojanaṃ. Kappiyaṃ vā akappiyaṃ vā bhuñjantoti sambandho.Nisedhayanti kāyenābhihaṭaṃ aṅgulicalanādinā vā bhamukavikārena vā kuddhabhāvena olokena vā paṭikkhipanto kāyena vā ‘‘ala’’nti vā ‘‘na gaṇhāmī’’ti vā ‘‘mā ākirā’’ti vā ‘‘apagacchā’’ti vā ādinā nayena paṭikkhipanto vācāya vā nisedhayantoti attho.Kappanti kappiyabhojanameva paṭikkhipanto so pavāreti, akappiyamaṃsaṃ vā bhojanaṃ vā paṭikkhipanto na pavāreti. Kasmā? Tassa paṭikkhipitabbaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā. Sace kappiyabhojanaṃ bhuñjamāno akappiyaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti. Kasmā? Tassa paṭikkhipitabbato. Idāni missakanayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘tannāmenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ piṇḍattho – tannāmena vā imanti vā abhihaṭaṃ kappiyaṃ nisedhayaṃ pavāreyyāti. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yo pana macchamaṃsamissaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā; pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239) yāguṃ byañjanaṃ vā āharitvā ‘‘macchaṃ gaṇhatha, maṃsaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti. Sace ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhatha, rasabyañjanaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadati, taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā na hoti. Kasmā? Tassāpi atthitāya. Sace ‘‘imaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti savatthukaṃ katvā deti, taṃ paṭikkhipato pavāraṇā hoti. Bhattamissakepi eseva nayo. Sace aññassa abhihaṭaṃ paṭikkhipati, pavāraṇā natthiyeva.
78.Bhojanaṃ means whatever food from the five foods. The connection is that one is eating allowable or unallowable food. Nisedhayaṃ means one rejects what is offered by body by moving the fingers etc., or by a frown, by an angry look, or one rejects it by speech saying, "enough," or "I will not take it," or "do not pour," or "go away." Kappaṃ means he invites pavāraṇā by rejecting only allowable food, he does not invite pavāraṇā by rejecting unallowable meat or food. Why? Because it is in a place where it should be rejected. If one eats allowable food and rejects unallowable food, he does not invite pavāraṇā. Why? Because it should be rejected. Now, to show the mixed method, he said beginning with ‘‘tannāmenā’’. Here, this is the condensed meaning: He would invite pavāraṇā by rejecting allowable food offered by that name or by "this." What is said? However, if one brings gruel or curry mixed with fish or meat and says, "take fish, take meat," pavāraṇā occurs by rejecting that. If he says, "take gruel, take tasty curry," pavāraṇā does not occur by rejecting that. Why? Because that is also present. If he gives it making it inclusive by saying, "take this," pavāraṇā occurs by rejecting that. The same method applies to rice mixtures as well. If he rejects what is offered to another, there is no pavāraṇā at all.
79-80.Idāni pavāraṇaṃ ajanente dassetuṃ‘‘lājā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Etthalājā taṃsattubhattānīti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapavāraṇāsikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) lājā ca lājehi katasattubhattāni cāti attho. Macchamaṃsapūvesu pana pavāraṇā hoti, tasmā‘‘suddhakhajjako’’ti vuttaṃ.Bhaṭṭhapiṭṭhanti pubbe āmakaṃ pacchā bhajjitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Veḷuādīnaṃ vuttāvasesānaṃ bhattanti sambandho.Rasayāgu rasopakkayāgu. Maṃsādīhi amissitāsuddhayāgu. Puthukāmayaṃ pana yaṃ kiñci pavāraṇaṃ na janeti.
79-80.Now, to show those who do not invite pavāraṇā, he said beginning with ‘‘lājā’’. Here, lājā taṃsattubhattānī means parched grain and rice flour made of parched grain. However, pavāraṇā occurs with fish, meat, and cakes, therefore he said ‘‘suddhakhajjako’’. Bhaṭṭhapiṭṭhaṃ means it was uncooked before and fried later. The connection is that what remains of the veḷuā etc., is rice. Rasayāgu is gruel with flavor; suddhayāgu is plain gruel unmixed with meat, etc. However, whatever is made of puthuka does not generate pavāraṇā.
81.Vuṭṭhāyāti (pāci. aṭṭha. 238-239) āsanā uṭṭhāya atirittaṃ na kātabbanti sambandho. Sace pavāretvā āsanā na vuṭṭhāti bhikkhu, tassāpi atirittaṃ kātuṃ labhati.Abhuttena ca bhojananti yena pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ bhojanaṃ antamaso kusaggenāpi na bhuttaṃ, tenāpi atirittaṃ na kātabbanti attho. Yena pana aruṇuggamepi bhuttaṃ hoti, so ce apavārito āsanā vuṭṭhitopi majjhanhikasamayepi puna kiñci abhutvāpi kātuṃ labhati.Yena yaṃ vāpure katanti yena yaṃ vā pubbe kataṃ, tena tampi pacchā na kātabbaṃ. Aññena pana taṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti.
81.Vuṭṭhāyā means one should not partake of an excess after getting up from the seat. If a bhikkhu does not get up from his seat after inviting, he can still partake of an excess. Abhuttena ca bhojanaṃ means that one should not partake of an excess with any of the five foods that have not been eaten, even with the tip of a kusa grass blade. However, one who has eaten even at dawn, if he has not invited and gets up from his seat, can still partake of something again at midday even without eating anything. Yena yaṃ vā pure kataṃ means whatever was done before by someone, that should not be done later. However, others say that it is permissible for someone else to do that.
82.Yaṃ phalaṃ vā kandamūlaṃ vā pañcahi samaṇakappehi katakappiyaṃ aññampi kappiyabhojanaṃ vā kappiyamaṃsaṃ vā, idaṃ kappiyaṃ nāma, vuttappakāraviparītaṃ akappiyaṃ nāma, tasmiṃ atirittakaraṇaṃ na ruhati, yañca paṭiggahetvā na gahitaṃ, tasmimpi na ruhati, tena vuttaṃ‘‘kappiyaṃ gahitañcevā’’ti.Uccāritanti kappiyaṃ kāretuṃ āgatena bhikkhunā īsakampi ukkhittaṃ vā apanamitaṃ vāti attho. Hatthapāsato bahi ṭhitaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, tena vuttaṃ‘‘hatthapāsaga’’nti.Atirittaṃ karontevanti atirittaṃ karonto‘‘alametaṃsabba’’nti vacībhedaṃ katvāevaṃ bhāsatūti attho. ‘‘Alametaṃ sabba’’nti tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ, ayaṃ kira āciṇṇo. Vinayadharā kira pana ‘‘sakiṃ eva vattabba’’nti vadanti.Alametaṃ sabbanti idampi vo adhikaṃ, ito aññaṃ na lacchasīti attho.
82.Whatever fruit or root or tuber, or other allowable food made allowable with the five requisites for a renunciant, or allowable meat, this is called allowable, and what is contrary to what has been said is called unallowable; partaking of an excess in that is not suitable, and also (partaking of an excess) in what has been received but not taken is not suitable, therefore he said ‘‘kappiyaṃ gahitañcevā’’. Uccāritaṃ means even a little bit lifted up or moved away by a bhikkhu who has come to make something allowable. It is not permissible to make (the food) stand outside of arm's reach, therefore he said ‘‘hatthapāsagaṃ’’. Atirittaṃ karonteva means one who is partaking of an excess should speak this way having made a break in speech, ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’. It is said that "alametaṃ sabba" should be said three times; this is the custom. However, those who uphold the Vinaya say that it should be said only once. Alametaṃ sabba means this is enough for you, you will not get anything else from this.
83.Anupasampannahatthaganti kappiyaṃ karontena pana anupasampannassa hatthe ṭhitaṃyeva na kātabbaṃ, taṃ pana aññena bhikkhunā paṭiggahāpetvā tassa hatthe ṭhitaṃ atirittaṃ katvā anupasampannassa dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Attanā āgantvā aññassa hatthe capesayitvāpi kāretuṃ labbhateti attho.Taṃpana atirittakārakaṃ ṭhapetvā aññosabbopavāritopi appavāritopibhuñjituṃlabhatīti attho. Sace pavārito paribhuñjati, yathā akatena missaṃ na hoti, tathā mukhañca hatthañca suddhaṃ katvā bhuñjitabbaṃ. Gilānassa bhuttāvasesampi tassa ‘‘ajja vā sve vā khādissatī’’ti āhaṭampi anatirittakataṃ bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti. Pavāraṇāvinicchayo.
83.Anupasampannahatthagaṃ means when making something allowable, it should not be done while it is in the hand of one who is not fully ordained; however, it is permissible to have it received by another bhikkhu and, after making an excess of what is in his hand, give it to one who is not fully ordained. It means that one can come himself and have it done by someone else or send (someone else). Taṃ means that, leaving aside the one who made the excess, sabbo, everyone else, whether he has invited or not, bhuñjituṃ can partake of it. If one who has invited partakes of it, he should eat after cleaning his mouth and hand so that it is not mixed with what has not been done. It is permissible to eat what remains of the food of a sick person, even what has been brought for him saying, "he will eat it today or tomorrow," and has not been made an excess. The decision regarding pavāraṇā.
Pavāraṇāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the invitation designation is complete.
8. Kālikaniddesavaṇṇanā
8. Explanation of the Timely Designation
84.Idāni ye te cattāro kālikā muninā vuttā ‘‘yāvakālikaṃ yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvika’’nti, te dassetuṃ‘‘kālikā cā’’ti padaṃ uddhaṭaṃ. Tattha (pāci. 254-256; pāci. aṭṭha. 253-256) katame te kālikāti ce, te dassetuṃ‘‘yāvakālika’’ntiādimāha. Tesu aruṇuggamanato yāva ṭhitamajjhanhikā bhuñjitabbatoyāvakālikaṃ. Aruṇuggamanato yāva yāmāvasānā pipāsāya sati pipāsacchedanatthaṃ pātabbato yāmo kālo assātiyāmakālikaṃ. Tena upasametabbe ābādhe sati yāva sattāhā paribhuñjitabbatosattāhakālikaṃ. Ābādhe sati yāvajīvaṃ pariharitvā bhuñjitabbatoyāvajīvikaṃ.
84.Now, to show those four kālikas said by the Sage, "the yāvakālika, the yāmakālika, the sattāhakālika, the yāvajīvika," the word ‘‘kālikā cā’’ is cited. Here, if (asked) what are those kālikas, to show them, he said beginning with ‘‘yāvakālika’’. Among them, yāvakālikaṃ (means) from sunrise until midday when it is time to eat, is allowable to eat. Yāmakālikaṃ (means) from sunrise until the end of the yāma, because yāma is the time for drinking to cut off thirst when there is thirst. Sattāhakālikaṃ (means) allowable to partake of for up to seven days when there is an illness that needs to be treated. Yāvajīvikaṃ (means) allowable to keep and eat for as long as one lives when there is an illness.
85.Tesu yāvakālikaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘piṭṭhaṃ mūlaṃ phalaṃ khajja’’ntiādimāha. Ettha (pāci. 248-250; pāci. aṭṭha. 248-249)piṭṭhakhādanīyaṃnāma sattannaṃ tāva dhaññānaṃ dhaññānulomānaṃ aparaṇṇānañca piṭṭhaṃ panasapiṭṭhaṃ labujapiṭṭhaṃ ambāṭakapiṭṭhaṃ sālapiṭṭhaṃ dhotakatālapiṭṭhaṃ khīravallipiṭṭhañcāti evamādīni tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena manussānaṃ khādanīyatthañca bhojanīyatthañca pharaṇakāni piṭṭhāni yāvakālikāni. Imināva lakkhaṇenamūlakhādanīyādīsupi yāvakālikalakkhaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, ativitthārabhayena saṃkhittaṃ.Gorasonāma khīradadhitakkaraso.Dhaññabhojananti sānulomāni sattadhaññāni ca pañcavidhabhojanañcāti attho.Yāgusūpappabhutayoti ettha pabhuti-saddena kandakhādanīyaṃ muḷālakhādanīyaṃ matthakakhādanīyaṃ khandhakhādanīyaṃ tacakhādanīyaṃ pattakhādanīyaṃ pupphakhādanīyaṃ aṭṭhikhādanīyaṃ niyyāsakhādanīyanti imāni saṅgahitānīti veditabbāni.
85. In order to show what is allowable until the next day, he said, "flour, root, fruit, hard food," etc. Here, flour-food (pāci. 248-250; pāci. aṭṭha. 248-249) refers to flour made from the seven grains, things that go along with grains, and other kinds of flour, such as jackfruit flour, pumpkin flour, mango flour, sāla flour, dhotaka-tāla flour, khīravallī flour, and so on. These flours, which are staple foods for people in various regions, are suitable as food and nourishment, and are allowable until the next day. The characteristic of being allowable until the next day should also be understood in the same way for root-foods and the others; it is concise due to fear of excessive detail. Gorasa means milk, yogurt, and buttermilk. Grain food means the seven grains and the five kinds of food that go along with them. Yāgu, soup, and so forth: Here, it should be understood that the word "etcetera" includes root-foods, lotus-stalk foods, marrow foods, stem foods, bark foods, leaf foods, flower foods, pit foods and sap foods.
kandakhādanīyaṃ. Padumamuḷālādayomuḷālakhādanīyaṃ. Tālahintālakuntālaketakanāḷikerapūgarukkhakhajjūrīādīnaṃ kaḷīrasaṅkhātā matthakāmatthakakhādanīyaṃ. Ucchukhandho nīluppalarattuppalakumudasogandhikānaṃ pupphadaṇḍakānīti evamādikhandhakhādanīyaṃ. Tacakhādanīyaṃucchutaco eva eko yāvakāliko, sopi saraso. Mūlakaṃ khārako caccu tambuko taṇḍuleyyakoti evamādipattakhādanīyaṃ. Mūlakapupphaṃ khārakapupphaṃ caccupupphaṃ tambukapupphanti evamādipupphakhādanīyaṃ,asokapupphaṃ pana yāvajīvikaṃ. Labujapanasaṭṭhiādiaṭṭhikhādanīyaṃ. Niyyāsakhādanīyeyāvakālikaṃ natthi. Ete vuttappakārā yāvakālikā hontīti attho.
Root-food: Lotus stalks and so on are stalk-food. The marrow of palm, hintālaka, kuntālaka, ketaka, coconut, areca palm, date palm, etc., are marrow-food. Sugarcane stalks, the stems of blue lotus, red lotus, kumuda, and sogandhika lotuses, etc., are stem-food. Bark-food: Sugarcane bark alone is allowable until the next day, and that too with its juice. Radish, khāraka, caccu, betel, taṇḍuleyya, etc., are leaf-food. Radish flowers, khāraka flowers, caccu flowers, betel flowers, etc., are flower-food; however, asoka flowers are allowable for life. Labuja, jackfruit, aṭṭhi, etc., are pit-food. In sap-food there is nothing allowable until the next day. These, stated in the manner described, are allowable until the next day.
86.Idāni ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, aṭṭha pānāni ambapānaṃ jambupānaṃ cocapānaṃ mocapānaṃ madhukapānaṃ muddikapānaṃ sālūkapānaṃ phārusakapāna’’nti (mahāva. 300) evaṃ vuttaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ pānakaṃ yāmakālikaṃ nāmāti dassetuṃ‘‘madhū’’tiādimāha. Tattha (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300) madhujaṃ muddikajaṃ sālūkajaṃ cocajaṃ mocajaṃ ambujaṃ jambujañcāti evamattho gahetabbo. Etthamadhujaṃnāma madhukānaṃ jātirasena kataṃ, taṃ pana udakasambhinnameva vaṭṭati, suddhaṃ na vaṭṭati.Muddikapānaṃnāma muddikā udake madditvā parissāvetvā gahitaṃ.Sālūkapānaṃnāma rattuppalanīluppalādīnaṃ kiñjakkharehi kataṃ. Sesāni pākaṭāneva. Ettha pana sace sayaṃ etāni yāvakālikavatthūni paṭiggahetvā udake madditvā ātape ādiccapākena pacitvā parissāvetvā pānakaṃ karoti, taṃ purebhattameva kappati. Sace anupasampannena kataṃ labhati, tadahupurebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭati, pacchābhattaṃ nirāmisaparibhogena yāva aruṇuggamanā vaṭṭati. Imāni aṭṭha pānāni sītānipi ādiccapākānipi vaṭṭanti, aggipākāni pana na vaṭṭanti, tasmā‘‘naggisantatta’’nti vuttaṃ.
86. Now, to show that the eight kinds of drinks mentioned as "I allow, monks, eight drinks: mango drink, jambu drink, coca drink, banana drink, madhuka drink, grape drink, sālūka drink, phārusaka drink" (mahāva. 300) are allowable for a watch, he says, "honey," etc. Here (mahāva. aṭṭha. 300), the meaning should be taken as drinks made from honey, grapes, sālūka, coca, banana, mango, and jambu. Here, honey-drink means that made with the juice of madhuka; however, it is only suitable mixed with water, and not pure. Grape drink means that taken by squeezing grapes in water and straining it. Sālūka drink means that made with the stamens of red lotus, blue lotus, etc. The rest are clear. Here, if one personally receives these things allowable until the next day, crushes them in water, cooks them with sunshine, and strains them to make a drink, that is allowable before the meal. If it is made by one who is not fully ordained, it is suitable with or without meat before the meal that day, and after the meal, it is suitable with non-meat items until sunrise with non-meat items. These eight drinks are suitable both cold and sun-cooked, but not fire-cooked, therefore it is said, "not heated by fire."
87.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ phalarasaṃ ṭhapetvā dhaññaphalarasa’’nti (mahāva. 300) vuttattā dhaññaphalaraso pana na vaṭṭati, tena vuttaṃ‘‘sānulomāni dhaññāni ṭhapetvā’’ti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ puppharasaṃ ṭhapetvā madhukapuppharasa’’nti vuttattā madhukapuppharaso ādiccapāko vā hotu aggipāko vā, pacchābhattaṃ na vaṭṭati, tena vuttaṃ‘‘madhukapupphamaññatrā’’ti.
87. Because it was said, "I allow, monks, all fruit juice except grain fruit juice" (mahāva. 300), grain fruit juice is not suitable, therefore it was said, "except grains and what goes along with them." Because it was said, "I allow, monks, all flower juice except madhuka flower juice," madhuka flower juice, whether sun-cooked or fire-cooked, is not suitable after the meal, therefore it was said, "except madhuka flowers."
88.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbaṃ pattarasaṃ ṭhapetvā ḍākarasa’’nti vuttattā udakena pakkānampi yāvakālikapattānaṃ raso purebhattameva vaṭṭati, sītodakena madditānaṃ raso yāmakālikaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘ṭhapetvā pakkaḍākaja’’nti. Yāvajīvikapaṇṇassa udakena pakkassa raso yāvajīviko hoti.
88. Because it was said, "I allow, monks, all leaf juice except ḍāka juice," the juice of leaves allowable until the next day that are cooked with water is only suitable before the meal; the juice of those crushed with cold water is allowable for a watch. Therefore, it was said, "except cooked ḍāka." The juice of a leaf allowable for life that is cooked with water is allowable for life.
89.Idāni sattāhakālike dassetuṃ‘‘sappī’’tiādimāha. Ettha (mahāva. 260) pana –
89. Now, to show what is allowable for seven days, he says, "butter oil," etc. Here (mahāva. 260), however -
‘‘Sappinonītatelāni, madhuphāṇitameva ca;
"Butter oil, fresh butter, and oils,
honey and molasses too;
pāḷiyaṃvitthāritattā. Evaṃ pana aggahetvā vasā ca ‘‘madhuphāṇita’’nti pāṭhe gahite yāvakālikabhūtā vasā sattāhakālikāti āpajjeyya, ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni gilānānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṃ – sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇita’’nti (pārā. 622) evaṃ pañceva bhagavatā sattāhakālikabhesajjāni anuññātāni, tato uttari chaṭṭhassa sattāhakālikabhesajjassa atthitāpi āpajjati,bhesajjakkhandhakepibhagavatā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sūkaravasaṃ gadrabhavasaṃ kāle paṭiggahitaṃ kāle nippakkaṃ kāle saṃsaṭṭhaṃ telaparibhogena paribhuñjitu’’nti (mahāva. 262) evaṃ sattāhakālikavasena vasaṃ ananujānitvā tato nibbattatelameva anuññātaṃ, tasmā ‘‘madhuphāṇitameva cā’’ti pāṭhe aggahite pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca virujjhati. Therena pana uttaravihāravāsīnaṃ khuddasikkhāya āgatanayena vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ pana –
Butter oil is allowable for seven days, for whom meat is not prohibited." -
‘‘Sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ, madhu phāṇitapañcamaṃ;
is explained in the Pali. But if one does not accept it in this way and includes lard in the reading "honey and molasses," it would follow that lard, which is allowable until the next day, would be allowable for seven days. And since the Blessed One has allowed only five medicines allowable for seven days, saying, "I allow, monks, medicines suitable for sick monks, namely: butter oil, fresh butter, oil, honey, and molasses" (pārā. 622), it would also follow that there is a sixth medicine allowable for seven days in addition to those five. Also, in the chapter on medicines, the Blessed One, without allowing lard as allowable for seven days, said, "I allow, monks, medicinal lards—bear lard, fish lard, porpoise lard, pig lard, donkey lard—received at the right time, well-prepared at the right time, mixed at the right time, to be used with the use of oil" (mahāva. 262), and only allowed oil produced from it. Therefore, if the reading "honey and molasses too" is not accepted, it contradicts both the Pali and the Commentary. However, it was stated by the Elder in accordance with the way it comes in the Khuddasikkhā of those residing in the Northern Monastery. For them -
Evamāgataṃ. Amhākaṃ pana visuṃ sattāhakālike āgataṭṭhānaṃ natthīti vadanti, upaparikkhitabbaṃ.
"Butter oil, fresh butter, oil,
honey, with molasses as the fifth;
‘‘yesaṃ maṃsapavārita’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sappināma gosappi vā ajikāsappi vā mahiṃ sasappi vā. Yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappi, navanītaṃ nāma tesaṃyeva navanīta’’nti (pārā. 623; pāci. 260)pāḷiyaṃvuttattā navanītaṃ pana gahitanti na vitthāritaṃ, sappi pana purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ tadahu purebhattaṃ sāmisampinirāmisampi vaṭṭati. Pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya sattāhaṃ nirāmisaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Sattāhātikkame sace ekabhājane ṭhapitaṃ, ekaṃ nissaggiyaṃ. Sace bahūsu, vatthugaṇanāya nissaggiyapācittiyāni. Pacchābhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ sattāhaṃ nirāmisameva vaṭṭati. Sappi tāpentassa sāmaṃpāko na hoti, ‘‘navanītaṃ pana tāpentassa hi sāmaṃpāko na hoti, sāmaṃpakkena pana tena saddhiṃ āmisaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti ca ‘‘sace anupasampanno purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitanavanītena sappiṃ katvā deti, purebhattaṃ sāmisaṃ vaṭṭati. Sace sayaṃ karoti, sattāhaṃ nirāmisameva vaṭṭatī’’ti casamantapāsādikāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622) navanītamhiyeva sāmaṃpākatā vuttā, na sappimhi. Yaṃ panakaṅkhāvitaraṇiyaṃvuttaṃ ‘‘nibbattitasappi vā navanītaṃ vā pacituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti, ‘‘taṃ pana tadahu purebhattampi sāmisaṃ paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ca, tattha yāvakālikavatthunā asammissaṃ sudhotaṃ navanītaṃ sandhāya ‘‘pacituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sayaṃpacitasattāhakālikena saddhiṃ yadi āmisaṃ bhuñjati, taṃ āmisaṃ sayaṃpakkasattāhakālikena missitaṃ attano yāvakālikabhāvaṃ sattāhakālikena gaṇhāpeti, tathā ca sati yāvakālikaṃ apakkampi sayaṃpakkabhāvaṃ upagacchatīti ‘‘sāmisaṃ paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā sayaṃpakkasattāhakālikavasātelaṃ sayaṃbhajjitasāsapādiyāvajīvikavatthūnaṃ telañca sāmisaṃ tadahu purebhattampi na vaṭṭati, tathā navanītasappīti veditabbaṃ. Vakkhati ca ācariyo –
Bear lard, fish lard, etc.,
are allowable for seven days." -
‘‘Yāvakālikaādīni, saṃsaṭṭhāni sahattanā. Gāhāpayanti sabbhāva’’nti ca,
It comes in this way. But we say that there is no place where it comes separately as allowable for seven days. It should be examined.
‘‘Teheva bhikkhunā pakkaṃ, kappate yāvajīvikaṃ;
"For whom meat is not prohibited" was said. Because it was said in the Pali, "Butter oil is cow's butter oil, goat's butter oil, or buffalo's butter oil. For whom meat is suitable, their butter oil [is suitable]; fresh butter is their fresh butter" (pārā. 623; pāci. 260), fresh butter was not explained as it was already included. However, butter oil received before the meal is suitable with or without meat before the meal that day. From after the meal onwards, it should be consumed without meat for seven days. If it is kept in one container after seven days, there is one nissaggiya. If in many, there are nissaggiya-pācittiya according to the number of items. If received after the meal, it is only suitable without meat for seven days. For one heating butter oil, there is no self-cooking. "However, for one heating fresh butter, there is no self-cooking; but meat is not suitable with that which is self-cooked," and in the Samantapāsādikā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622), self-cooking is only mentioned for fresh butter, not for butter oil: "If a non-fully ordained person makes butter oil with fresh butter received before the meal, it is suitable with meat before the meal. If one makes it oneself, it is only suitable without meat for seven days." That which was said in the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī, "It is suitable to cook butter oil or fresh butter," and "However, it is not suitable to consume it with meat even before the meal that day" (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), there, "it is suitable to cook" was said referring to well-washed fresh butter that is not mixed with anything allowable until the next day. If one eats meat with self-cooked items allowable for seven days, that meat, mixed with the self-cooked item allowable for seven days, causes its own state of being allowable until the next day to be taken over by that allowable for seven days, and in that case, that which is allowable until the next day, even though uncooked, takes on the state of being self-cooked, therefore it was said, "it is not suitable to consume it with meat." Just as oil from self-cooked lard or the oil from sesame seeds, etc., that are fried by oneself is not suitable with meat even before the meal that day, so should fresh butter and butter oil be understood. And the teacher will say -
samantapāsādikāyaṃnavanītamhi sāmaṃpākatā vuttā, sā takkādisammissaṃ adhotanavanītaṃ sandhāya vuttā. Tasmā viññūnaṃ samantapāsādikāpi kaṅkhāvitaraṇīpi samenti, taṃ navanītaṃ sandhāya vuttanti ācariyā vadanti. Idameva yuttaṃ. Yadi sappimhi sāmaṃpākatā hoti, avassaṃyeva samantapāsādikāyaṃ vucceyya, tattha pana ‘‘sappi tāva purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ, tadahu purebhattaṃ sāmisampi nirāmisampi paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622) hi vuttaṃ, na pacanavidhānaṃ. Manussasappinavanītānaṃ, aññesampi hatthiassādīnaṃ akappiyamaṃsasappinavanītānaṃ sattāhātikkame dukkaṭaṃ. Kiṃ pana taṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti? Āma vaṭṭati. Kasmā? Paṭikkhepābhāvā ca sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu anuññātattā ca. ‘‘Yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappi, navanīta’’nti (pārā. 623) idaṃ pana nissaggiyavatthuṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ, na aññesaṃ vāraṇatthāya.
"Things allowable until the next day, etc., when mixed, take on the state [of the other]."
"Cooked by them, the bhikkhu is allowed to have what is allowable for life;
Without meat for seven days, with meat if self-cooked."
90.Idāni telaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘telaṃ tilavaseraṇḍamadhusāsapasambhava’’ntiādimāha. Ettha tilādīhi sambhavaṃ nibbattaṃ telanti sambandho. Ettha (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100) pana purebhattaṃ tile paṭiggahetvā katatelaṃ purebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭati, pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya savatthukappaṭiggahitattā anajjhoharaṇīyaṃ. Pacchābhattaṃ paṭiggahetvā katatelaṃ anajjhoharaṇīyaṃ, sīsamakkhanādīsu upanetabbaṃ. Eraṇḍamadhukasāsapaṭṭhīni paṭiggahetvā sace tāni bhajjitvā telaṃ karoti, tadahu purebhattampi sāmisaṃ na vaṭṭati, sāmaṃpākatā hoti. Sace abhajjitvā karoti, tadahu purebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭati, pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya nirāmisameva vaṭṭati, paribhuñjitabbavatthūnaṃ yāvajīvikattā savatthukappaṭiggahaṇe doso natthīti. Telaggahaṇatthāya eraṇḍakaṭṭhiādīni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ atikkāmayato dukkaṭaṃ. Tathā pāḷiyaṃ anāgatāni adassitāni kosambakakusumbhādīnaṃ telāni.
In the Samantapāsādikā, self-cooking is mentioned for fresh butter, and that was said referring to unwashed fresh butter mixed with buttermilk, etc. Therefore, the wise reconcile the Samantapāsādikā and the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī; the teachers say that it was said referring to that fresh butter. This alone is correct. If self-cooking existed for butter oil, it would definitely be mentioned in the Samantapāsādikā; there, however, it was said, "Butter oil, received before the meal, is suitable to consume with or without meat before the meal that day" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.622), but not the method of cooking. For butter oil and fresh butter from humans and for the butter oil and fresh butter from unacceptable meat such as elephants and horses, there is a dukkata after seven days. But is it suitable to consume that? Yes, it is suitable. Why? Because there is no prohibition and because it is allowed in all the Commentaries. However, "For whom meat is suitable, their butter oil [is suitable], fresh butter" (pārā. 623) was said to show the item involving forfeiture, not to prohibit others.
‘‘khuddābhamaramadhukari-makkhikāhi kata’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623)khuddāti khuddamakkhikā.Bhamarāti mahābhamaramakkhikā. Daṇḍakesu madhukarāmadhukarimakkhikānāma. Etāhi tīhi makkhikāhi kataṃ madhu nāmāti attho. ‘‘Madhu nāma makkhikāmadhū’’tipāḷiyaṃ(pārā. 623; pāci. 260) vuttattā aññehi tumbaṭakādīhi kataṃ sattāhakālikaṃ na hotīti veditabbaṃ.
90. Now, to show oil, he says, "oil derived from sesame, castor, eraṇḍa, madhu, mustard," etc. Here, the connection is that oil derived or produced from sesame, etc. Here (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.100), if one receives sesame before the meal and makes oil, that oil is suitable with meat before the meal; from after the meal onwards, it is not to be consumed because it was received with the ingredient at the wrong time. Oil made after receiving it after the meal is not to be consumed; it should be used for anointing the head, etc. If, after receiving eraṇḍa, madhuka, mustard seeds, etc., one fries them and makes oil, it is not suitable with meat even before the meal that day, because there is self-cooking. If one makes it without frying, it is suitable with meat before the meal that day, and from after the meal onwards, it is only suitable without meat, because the things to be consumed are allowable for life and there is no fault in receiving with the ingredient at the wrong time. There is a dukkata for one who, having received eraṇḍa sticks, etc., for the purpose of obtaining oil, lets seven days pass. Similarly, the oils of kosambaka, kusumbha, etc., that have not come in the Pali are not shown.
‘‘rasādiucchuvikati, pakkāpakkā ca phāṇita’’nti āha. Pakkā ca apakkā ca rasādiucchuvikati phāṇitanti attho. Madhukapupphaphāṇitaṃ purebhattaṃ sāmisaṃ vaṭṭati, pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya sattāhaṃ nirāmisameva vaṭṭati. Tassa sattāhātikkame dukkaṭaṃ. Ciñcaphāṇitañca ambaphāṇitañca yāvakālikameva.
"Made by small bees, bhamara bees, honey-bees" was said. There (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623), "khuddā" means small bees. "Bhamarā" means large bhamara bees. Madhukara bees in nests are called honey-bees. The meaning is that honey made by these three kinds of bees is called honey. Because it was said in the Pali, "Honey is bee honey" (pārā. 623; pāci. 260), it should be understood that what is made by others such as tumbaṭaka is not allowable for seven days.
91.Idāni etesu vasātelassa odissa anuññātattā taṃ visuṃ uddharitvā dassetuṃ‘‘savatthupakkā sāmaṃ vā’’tiādimāha. Sattavidhañhi (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623) odissaṃ nāma byādhodissaṃ puggalodissaṃ kālodissaṃ samayodissaṃ desodissaṃ vasodissaṃ bhesajjodissanti.
"Juice, sugarcane product, cooked and uncooked molasses" was said. Cooked and uncooked molasses is a sugarcane product. Madhuka flower molasses is suitable with meat before the meal; from after the meal onwards, it is only suitable without meat for seven days. There is a dukkata for its passing seven days. Tamarind molasses and mango molasses are only allowable until the next day.
byādhodissaṃnāma. Ettha pana kālepi vikālepi kappiyākappiyamaṃsalohitaṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, romanthakassa romanthana’’nti (cūḷava. 273) evaṃ anuññātaṃpuggalodissaṃnāma. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, cattāri mahāvikaṭāni dātuṃ gūthaṃ muttaṃ chārikaṃ mattika’’nti (mahāva. 268) evaṃ sappadaṭṭhakāle appaṭiggahitakaṃ anuññātaṃkālodissaṃnāma. Gaṇabhojanādisamayodissaṃnāma. Gaṇaṅgaṇūpāhanānidesodissaṃnāma.Vasodissaṃnāma ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vasāni bhesajjānī’’ti (mahāva. 262) evaṃ vasānāmena anuññātaṃ. Taṃ ṭhapetvā manussavasaṃ sabbesaṃ kappiyākappiyavasānaṃ telaṃ taṃtadatthikānaṃ telaparibhogena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.Bhesajjodissaṃnāma ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tāni pañca bhesajjānī’’ti (mahāva. 261) evaṃ bhesajjanāmena vuttāni sappiādīni pañca.
named byādhodissaṃ. Here, flesh and blood that are allowable or unallowable are permitted, both at the proper time and at the improper time. That which is allowed with the words, "I allow, monks, the rumination of a ruminant animal" (cūḷava. 273) is named puggalodissaṃ. That which is allowed without having been received at the time of a snake bite with the words, "I allow, monks, that the four great abominations be given: excrement, urine, ashes, and clay" (mahāva. 268), is named kālodissaṃ. The group meal, etc., is named samayodissaṃ. The group, foot covering is named desodissaṃ. Vasodissaṃ is that which is allowed by naming the fat, with the words, "I allow, monks, fats as medicine" (mahāva. 262). Except for that, in the case of human fat, oil made from any allowable or unallowable fat is permitted for those who need it, to be used by consuming the oil. Bhesajjodissaṃ is the five, such as ghee, etc., that are mentioned by naming the medicine, with the words, "I allow, monks, those five medicines" (mahāva. 261).
Yathā pana khīradadhiādīhi pakkatelaṃ pacchābhattaṃ na vaṭṭati, na evamidaṃ. Idaṃ pana telaṃ savatthukapakkampi vaṭṭati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘savatthupakkā sāmaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vasaṃ oloketvā ‘‘savatthupakkā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sāmaṃ pakkā vāti attho. Yathā savatthukappaṭiggahitattā sāmaṃpakkattā dadhiādīhi pakkatelaṃ attanā kataṃ purebhattampi na vaṭṭati, na evamidaṃ. Idaṃ pana attanā savatthukapakkampi purebhattampi pacchābhattampi vaṭṭatīti attho. Ettha pana kāraṇūpacārena vasātelaṃ ‘‘vasā’’ti vuttaṃ.
However, this is not like oil cooked with milk, yogurt, etc., which is not allowed after the meal. But this oil, even when cooked with ingredients, is allowed, to show that, it is said, "or cooked with ingredients oneself." "Cooked with ingredients" is said in reference to the fat. It means cooked oneself. Just as oil cooked with yogurt, etc., which has been received with ingredients and is cooked oneself, is not allowed even before the meal if done by oneself, this is not so. But this means that even oil cooked with ingredients by oneself is allowed both before and after the meal. Here, by way of metaphorical designation, fat oil is called "fat."
Kāleti purebhattakāle parehi vā attanā vā pakkāti attho. Pacchābhattaṃ pana pacituṃ na vaṭṭati ‘‘kāle paṭiggahitaṃ kāle nippakkaṃ kāle saṃsaṭṭha’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā. Tasmā ‘‘kāle’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo pana vikāle paṭiggahetvā vikāle pacitvā vikāle parissāvetvā paribhuñjati, so tīṇi dukkaṭāni āpajjati.
Kāle means cooked at the proper time, either by others or by oneself. But it is not allowed to cook after the meal, because it is said, "received at the proper time, cooked at the proper time, mixed at the proper time" (mahāva. 262). Therefore, "at the proper time" is said. But whoever receives at the improper time, cooks at the improper time, strains at the improper time, and consumes it, incurs three dukkaṭas.
Amānusāti ettha (mahāva. 262) pana acchavasādīnaṃ anuññātattā ṭhapetvā manussavasaṃ sabbesaṃ akappiyamaṃsānaṃ vasā anuññātāti veditabbā. Maṃsesu hi manussahatthimaṃsādīni dasa maṃsāni paṭikkhittāni, vasā pana ekā manussavasā eva.
Amānusā—here (mahāva. 262), since fats such as bear fat have been allowed, it should be understood that, except for human fat, the fat of all unallowable flesh is allowed. For among meats, ten meats, such as human flesh and elephant flesh, etc., are prohibited, but of fats, only human fat is.
Aññesanti sappiādīnaṃ.Vatthunti yāvakālikabhūtaṃ vatthuṃ. Yāvakālikavatthūnaṃ vatthuṃ na paceti sambandho.
Aññesaṃ—of ghee, etc. Vatthuṃ—an ingredient that is yāvakālika. The connection is that one does not cook an ingredient with yāvakālika ingredients.
92.Idāni yāvajīvikavikatiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘haliddī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāyamanuttānapadattho (mahāva. 263; pāci. aṭṭha. 248-249) –pañcamūlādikañcāpīti ettha dvipañcamūlena saddhiṃ aññānipi taggatikāni mūlabhesajjāni gahitānīti ñātabbaṃ.
92. Now, to show the yāvajīvika vikati, the passage beginning with "haliddī" is stated. There, this is the meaning of the passage, which is not expanded (mahāva. 263; pāci. aṭṭha. 248-249): "pañcamūlādikañcāpī"—here, it should be understood that, along with the dvipañcamūla, other root medicines of that category are also included.
93-5.Biḷaṅgādīni phalabhesajjāni. Tattha (mahāva. 263)goṭṭhaphalanti madanaphalanti vadanti. Kappāsādīnaṃ paṇṇanti sambandho. Ime pana vuttappakārā mūlabhesajjaphalabhesajjapaṇṇabhesajjavasena vuttā sabbe kappiyā. Imesaṃ pupphaphalapaṇṇamūlā sabbepi kappiyā yāvajīvikāyeva. Ṭhapetvā ucchuniyyāsaṃ sabbo ca niyyāso sarasañca ucchujaṃ tacaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbo ca tacoti sambandho.
93-5. Biḷaṅga, etc., are fruit medicines. There (mahāva. 263), goṭṭhaphala is said to be madanaphala. The connection is the leaves of cotton, etc. But all of these that are mentioned in the manner described, in terms of root medicine, fruit medicine, and leaf medicine, are allowable. All of these—flowers, fruits, leaves, and roots—are allowable, being yāvajīvika. Except for sugarcane juice, all juice, and sugarcane-derived products containing juice, and except for bark, all bark is allowed, is the connection.
96.Madhunā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623) amakkhitaṃsuddhasitthañca. Madhumakkhitaṃ pana sattāhakālikameva.Yañca kiñcīti odanaṃ maṃsaṃ aṭṭhiādīnīti attho.
96. suddhasitthañca—and pure mustard without honey (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.623). But that which is smeared with honey is only sattāhakālika. Yañca kiñcī—means rice, meat, bones, etc.
97.‘‘Yāni vā panaññānipi atthi neva khādanīye khādanīyatthaṃ pharanti, na bhojanīye bhojanīyatthaṃ pharanti, tāni paṭiggahetvā yāvajīvaṃ pariharituṃ, sati paccaye paribhuñjituṃ, asati paccaye paribhuñjantassa āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 263) vuttattā‘‘āhāratthamasādhentaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ yāvajīvika’’nti vuttaṃ.
97. Because it is said, "Whatever else there is that neither affects edibility in the edible nor affects palatability in the palatable, having received it, one may keep it for life, and may consume it when there is a reason, but if one consumes it when there is no reason, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (mahāva. 263), "āhāratthamasādhentaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ yāvajīvika" is said.
98.Sabbassāti gilānassāpi agilānassapīti attho.Kālikattayanti yāvakālikaṃ vajjetvā avasesaṃ sati paccaye vikāle kappatīti attho.
98. Sabbassāti—even for the sick and the healthy. Kālikattayanti—except for the yāvakālika, the remainder is allowable at the improper time when there is a reason.
99.Janayantubhoti janayanti ubho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yāvakālikayāmakālikasaṅkhātā ubho kālikā attano kālamatikkamitvā paribhuttā pācittiṃ janayantīti attho. Kiñca bhiyyo (mahāva. 274; mahāva. aṭṭha. 274; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) – ubhopi panete akappiyakuṭiyaṃ vuttā antovutthaṃ dukkaṭañca, punadivase paribhuñjato sannidhiṃ pācittiyañca janayantīti attho.
99. Janayantubhoti—they both generate. What is said is this? Both kālikas, namely, the yāvakālika and yāmakālika, having been consumed after their time has passed, generate a pācitti. Moreover (mahāva. 274; mahāva. aṭṭha. 274; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā)—both of these, having been mentioned in connection with an unallowable dwelling, generate a dukkaṭa for dwelling inside, and for consuming the stored item on the following day, they generate a pācittiya.
100.Anāruḷheti pāḷiyaṃ anāgate manussasappiādimhīti attho.
100. Anāruḷheti—in the pāḷi, it means that which has not yet risen in the case of human ghee, etc.
101.Nissaṭṭhaladdhanti (pārā. 624) vinayakammaṃ katvā puna laddhanti attho.Vikappentassa sattāheti sattāhabbhantare sāmaṇerassa ‘‘idaṃ sappiṃ tela’’ntiādinā nayena nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’ti vā ‘‘itthannāmassa vikappemī’’ti vā sammukhāpi vā parammukhāpi vā vikappentassa anāpattīti sambandho.Pāḷiyaṃpana ‘‘anāpatti antosattāhe adhiṭṭheti, vissajjeti, nassati, vinassati, ḍayhati, acchinditvā gaṇhanti, vissāsaṃ gaṇhantī’’ti (pārā. 625) ettakameva vuttaṃ, ‘‘vikappemī’’ti idaṃ pana natthi. Kiñcāpi natthi, atha kho ‘‘anadhiṭṭhite adhiṭṭhitasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, avikappite vikappitasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti (pārā. 624)āpattivāreāgatattā therena dassitaṃ. Taṃ dassentenāpi sace upasampannassa vikappeti, attano eva santakaṃ hoti, paṭiggahaṇampi na vijahati, tasmā upasampannavasena adassetvā anupasampannavasena dassitaṃ. Tassa hi vikappite paṭiggahaṇampi vijahati, āpattipi na hotīti.Adhiṭṭhatoti abbhañjanādīni adhiṭṭhahantassa anāpattīti attho. Sace pana sattāhabbhantare nirapekkho hutvā anupasampannassa pariccajati, pariccattattā anāpatti, itarassa ca appaṭiggahitattā ubhinnampi kāyikaparibhogo vaṭṭati. Anissaggiyattā pana bāhiraparibhogena vaṭṭati. ‘‘Tāni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbānī’’ti (pārā. 623) evaṃ niyametvā anuññātattā vuttaṃ‘‘aññassa dadatopi ca anāpattī’’ti.
101. Nissaṭṭhaladdhanti (pārā. 624)—means that which is obtained again after performing an act of Vinaya. Vikappentassa sattāheti—for one who, within seven days, with the novice's name having been taken, in the manner of "this is ghee, this is oil," etc., says, "I release it to you," or "I release it to so-and-so," whether in his presence or in his absence, there is no offense, is the connection. But in the pāḷi, only this much is said: "There is no offense if he determines it within seven days, relinquishes it, it is destroyed, it perishes, it burns, they take it away without asking, they take it on trust" (pārā. 625). But this, "I release it," is not there. Although it is not there, nevertheless, because it has come up in the āpattivāre that "for that which is undetermined, one who perceives it as determined commits a nissaggiya pācittiya; for that which is unreleased, one who perceives it as released commits a nissaggiya pācittiya" (pārā. 624), it was shown by the Elder. Even by the one showing that, if he releases it to an ordained monk, it belongs to himself, and the receiving is not relinquished, therefore, it was shown in terms of one who is not ordained, not in terms of one who is ordained. For in the case of the one not ordained, upon its being released, the receiving is also relinquished, and there is no offense. Adhiṭṭhatoti—for one who is determining it for smearing, etc., there is no offense. But if, within seven days, having become disinterested, he gives it away to one who is not ordained, because it is given away, there is no offense, and for the other person, because it has not been received, bodily use is allowable for both. But because it has not been forfeited, external use is allowable. Because it was allowed after having been stipulated that "having received them, they should be consumed with a storing period of seven days at most" (pārā. 623), it is said, "aññassa dadatopi ca anāpattī".
102.Sabbhāvanti attano sabhāvaṃ. Yasmā gāhāpayanti, tasmā evamudīritanti vuttanti attho. Idāni vakkhamānaṃ sandhāya‘‘eva’’nti vuttaṃ.
102. Sabbhāvanti—its own nature. Because they cause him to grasp, therefore, the meaning is that it was said thus. Now, in reference to what will be said, "eva" is said.
103-5.Sattāhaṃ yāvajīvikanti (mahāva. 305; mahāva. aṭṭha. kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) sattāhakālikañca yāvajīvikañcāti attho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Sattāhakālikayāvajīvikadvayaṃ sesakālikasammissaṃ sambhinnarasaṃ katvā paribhuñjato sannidhipācitti hotīti udīritanti. Tadahu paṭiggahitaṃ tadahevāti attho.Sesanti sattāhakālikayāvajīvikadvayaṃ.Itaranti yāvajīvikaṃ. Pure paṭiggahitaṃ vā hotu, tadahu vā paṭiggahitaṃ, yāvajīvikaṃ sattāhakālikena sattāhaṃ kappatīti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Yāvakālikena, bhikkhave, yāmakālikaṃ, sattāhakālikaṃ, yāvajīvikaṃ tadahu paṭiggahitaṃ kāle kappati, no vikāle. Yāmakālikena, bhikkhave, sattāhakālikaṃ, yāvajīvikaṃ tadahu paṭiggahitaṃ yāme kappati, yāmātikkante na kappati. Sattāhakālikena, bhikkhave, yāvajīvikaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ sattāhaṃ kappati, sattāhātikkante na kappatī’’ti hibhesajjakkhandhake(mahāva. 305) vuttaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘tadahu paṭiggahita’’nti visesavacanassa natthitāya pure paṭiggahitampi vaṭṭatīti siddhanti. Kālikavinicchayo.
103-5. Sattāhaṃ yāvajīvikanti (mahāva. 305; mahāva. aṭṭha. kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā)—means that which is sattāhakālika and that which is yāvajīvika. What is said is this? It is said that for one who consumes the two kālikas, sattāhakālika and yāvajīvika, having made them into a mixture with the remaining kālikas and into a mixed flavor, there is a storing pācitti. That which is received on that day is [consumed] on that very day, is the meaning. Sesanti—the two kālikas, sattāhakālika and yāvajīvika. Itaranti—the yāvajīvika. Whether it was received earlier or received on that day, the yāvajīvika is allowable for seven days with the sattāhakālika. Because in the Bhesajjakkhandhaka it is said, "A yāmakālika, sattāhakālika, and yāvajīvika are allowable at the proper time, but not at the improper time, with a yāvakālika, monks, having been received on that day. A sattāhakālika and yāvajīvika are allowable during the day, but not after the day has passed, with a yāmakālika, monks, having been received on that day. A yāvajīvika is allowable for seven days, but not after seven days have passed, with a sattāhakālika, monks" (mahāva. 305). Here, because there is no specifying statement, "received on that day," it is established that even that which was received earlier is allowable. This is the determination of kālikas.
Kālikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Kālikaniddesa is Finished.
9. Paṭiggāhaniddesavaṇṇanā
9. Explanation of the Paṭiggāhaniddesa
106.Idāni ‘‘paṭiggāho’’ti padaṃ vitthāretuṃ‘‘dātukāmābhihāro cā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha dātukāmassa abhihārodātukāmābhihāro. Etena aññassa patte pakkhipituṃ ālulentassa phusitāni uṭṭhahitvā aññassa patte sace patanti, paṭiggahaṇaṃ na ruhatīti dīpitaṃ hoti.Eraṇakkhamanti thāmamajjhimena purisena ukkhipanakkhamaṃ, tato mahante paṭiggahaṇaṃ na ruhati.Tidhā denteti kāyakāyappaṭibaddhanissaggiyānaṃ vasena tidhā dente. Tassa bhikkhuno kāyakāyappaṭibaddhehidvidhā gāhoti attho. Pañcaṅgo evaṃpañcaṅgevaṃ. Dātukāmābhihāro ekaṃ, hatthapāso ekaṃ, eraṇakkhamatā ekaṃ, devamanussatiracchānagatesu ekena tidhā dānamekaṃ, dvidhā gāho ekanti evaṃ pañcaṅgāni honti.
106. Now, in order to expand the term "paṭiggāho," the passage beginning with "dātukāmābhihāro cā" is begun. There, the offer of one who desires to give is dātukāmābhihāro. By this, it is shown that if, while sifting into another's bowl, what splashes up and falls into another's bowl does not become received. Eraṇakkhamanti—capable of being lifted by a man of medium strength; if it is larger than that, the receiving does not take effect. Tidhā denteti—in giving in three ways in terms of the body, things attached to the body, and that which must be forfeited. For that monk, there is dvidhā gāho by things attached to the body. Thus, with five factors pañcaṅgevaṃ. The offer of one who desires to give is one, being within arm's reach is one, being capable of being lifted is one, giving in three ways, by one of beings in the realms of gods, humans, and animals is one, receiving in two ways is one; thus, there are five factors.
107.Idāni yena kāyappaṭibaddhena paṭiggahaṇaṃ na ruhati, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘asaṃhāriye’’tiādimāha. Khāṇuke (pāci. aṭṭha. 265) bandhitvā ṭhapitamañcādimhi vā phalake vā pāsāṇe vā asaṃhāriye na ruhatīti attho.Tatthajātepaduminipaṇṇe vā kiṃsukapaṇṇādimhi vā na vaṭṭati,sukhume ciñcaādīnaṃ paṇṇevā na ruhati, yañca majjhimapuriso sandhāretuṃ na sakkoti, tasmiṃasayhabhāre ca paṭiggaho na ruhatīti attho.
107. Now, to show that by which, being attached to the body, the receiving does not take effect, he says the passage beginning with "asaṃhāriye". It means that it does not take effect on an immovable platform or plank or stone, etc., that is fastened to a stump (pāci. aṭṭha. 265). It is not allowed on a tatthajāte—on a lotus leaf or kiṃsuka leaf, etc.; it is not allowed sukhume ciñcaādīnaṃ paṇṇe—on a fine tamarind leaf, etc.; and it means that asayhabhāre ca paṭiggaho na ruhatī—the receiving does not take effect in an unsupportable load, which a man of medium strength cannot support.
108.Idāni paṭiggahaṇavijahanaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sikkhāmaraṇaliṅgehī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ piṇḍattho – sikkhāpaccakkhānena ca maraṇena ca liṅgaparivattanena ca ‘‘na taṃ dāni paribhuñjissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘na puna paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjissāmī’’ti vā evaṃ anapekkhavissajjanena ca corādīhi vā acchedā ca anupasampannassa dānā cagāhopaṭiggāhoupasammativijahatīti. Bhikkhuniyā pana sikkhāpaccakkhānassa abhāvā vibbhamanena ca vijahatīti gahetabbaṃ.
108. Now, to show the cessation of receiving, the passage beginning with "sikkhāmaraṇaliṅgehī" is begun. There, this is the gist: by renunciation of the training, by death, by change of gender, by giving up hope with the thought, "I will not consume that now," or "I will never again receive and consume it," and by severance by thieves, etc., and by giving to one who is not ordained, the gāho—receiving—upasammati—ceases. But for a nun, because there is no renunciation of the training, it should be taken that it ceases by disgust.
109-110
109-110
.Idāni paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘appaṭiggahitaṃ sabba’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dantaponasikkhāpada) – catukālikapariyāpannaṃ antamaso rajareṇumpi appaṭiggahetvā sabbaṃ paribhuñjato pācitti. Idāni appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘suddhañca nātibahala’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthasuddhañcāti aññesaṃ rasena asammissaṃ. Himodakasamuddodakādīsu paṭiggahaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Loṇañca assu caloṇassu. Ettha loṇaṃ nāma sarīre uṭṭhitaṃ. Etāni pana sabbāni avicchinnāneva kappanti, netarāni.
. Now, to show that which, having been received, should be consumed, the passage beginning with "appaṭiggahitaṃ sabba" is stated. Its meaning (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dantaponasikkhāpada) is that for one who consumes anything encompassed by the four kālikas—even so much as dust particles—without receiving it, there is a pācitti. Now, to show that which should be consumed without being received, the passage beginning with "suddhañca nātibahala" is stated. There, suddhañcāti—unmixed with the flavor of others. There is no need for receiving in the case of cold water, ocean water, etc. loṇassu—salt and tears. Here, loṇa means that which arises on the body. But all of these are allowable only if they are continuous, not otherwise.
111.Idāni anaṅgalaggānipi dassetuṃ‘‘gūthamattikamuttānī’’tiādimāha.Tathāvidheti tathāvidhe kāle, sappadaṭṭhakāleti attho. Aññesaṃ pana appaṭiggahitaṃ anaṅgalaggaṃ na vaṭṭati. Kasmā? ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yaṃ karonto paṭiggaṇhāti, sveva paṭiggaho kato, na puna paṭiggahetabbo’’ti (mahāva. 268) vuttattā.
111. Now, to show that which cannot be touched without receiving, he says the passage beginning with "gūthamattikamuttānī". Tathāvidheti—at such a time, at the time of a snake bite, is the meaning. But for others, that which cannot be touched without being received is not allowable. Why? Because it is said, "I allow, monks, that while one is doing [that act], the receiving is already done; it should not be received again" (mahāva. 268).
112.Durūpaciṇṇeti dupparāmaṭṭhe phalikarukkhavalliādiṃ cālentassa vā āmisabharitabhājanaṃ appaṭiggahitaṃ parāmasantassa vā durūpaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho.Rajokiṇṇeti bhikkhāya carantassa patte patitarajaṃ appaṭiggahetvā puna bhikkhaṃ gaṇhato vinayadukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho.Athuggahappaṭiggaheti atha uggahappaṭiggahe, attanā eva uggahetvā gahiteti attho. Akappiyakuṭiyaṃ antovutthe ca yattha katthaci bhikkhunā sayaṃpakke ca attanā vā parena vā akappiyakuṭiyaṃ antopakke cāti sabbattha dukkaṭanti adhippāyo. Paṭiggāhavinicchayo.
112. Durūpaciṇṇeti—for one who moves a difficult-to-approach fruiting tree or vine, etc., or for one who touches a bowl filled with meat, etc., without receiving it, there is a dukkaṭa for difficult-to-approach, is the meaning. Rajokiṇṇeti—for one who, while wandering for alms, gathers alms again without receiving the dust that has fallen into the bowl, there is a vinaya dukkaṭa, is the meaning. Athuggahappaṭiggaheti—then in the case of taking and receiving, after having taken it oneself, is the meaning. It is intended that in all cases—both for one dwelling inside an unallowable dwelling and for that which is cooked by a monk himself anywhere and for that which is cooked inside an unallowable dwelling by himself or by another—there is a dukkaṭa. This is the Determination of Receiving.
Paṭiggāhaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Paṭiggāhaniddesa is Finished.
10. Akappiyamaṃsaniddesavaṇṇanā
10. Explanation of Unallowable Flesh
113.Idāni maṃsesu paṭipajjitabbākāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘maṃsesu ca akappiya’’nti uddhaṭaṃ. Akappiyamaṃsamhi dassite kappiyamaṃsaṃ dassitameva hoti pārisesanayena.Uragassa cāti ettha sabbopi urago na kappati.
113. Now, to show the manner in which one should conduct oneself with regard to meats, "maṃsesu ca akappiya" is excerpted. When unallowable flesh is shown, allowable flesh is shown by implication. Uragassa cāti—here, all snakes are unallowable.
114.Ettāvatā jātivasena dasavidhampi akappiyamaṃsaṃ dassetvā idāni kappiyamaṃsesupi akappiyavidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘uddissakatamaṃsañca, yañca appaṭivekkhita’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha pañcasu sahadhammikesu yassa kassaci yaṃ kiñci uddissa kataṃuddissakataṃnāma, taṃ pana jānitvā paribhuñjituṃ sabbesampi na vaṭṭati, ajānantānaṃ anāpatti. Macchesupi eseva nayo.Appaṭivekkhitanti anupaparikkhitaṃ, anāpucchitanti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave appaṭivekkhitvā maṃsaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ, yo paribhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 281) vuttaṃ. Macchesu pana āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi akappiyamacchānaṃ natthitāyāti vadanti. Idāni etesu āpattibhedaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘thullaccaya’’ntiādimāha. Taṃ sabbaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) uttānameva.
114. Having thus shown the ten types of meat that are unsuitable due to their origin, now to show the rule of unsuitability even in suitable meats, it is said, "meat killed for oneself, and that which is uninspected." Here, killed for oneself means something killed specifically for any of the five co-residents; but knowing it, it is not proper for all to consume; there is no offense for those who do not know. The same method applies to fish. Uninspected means unexamined, unasked about. It is said, "Monks, meat should not be consumed without inspection; whoever consumes it, there is an offense of dukkata" (mahāva. 281). But in the case of fish, there is no need for asking, as there is no such thing as unsuitable fish, some say. Now, to show the distinction of offenses in these, he said, "thullaccaya" and so on. All that is obvious (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā).
115.Idāni na kevalaṃ imesaṃ manussādīnaṃ maṃsameva akappiyaṃ, aṭṭhiādīnipi akappiyānīti dassetuṃ‘‘aṭṭhīpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha (mahāva. aṭṭha 281)lomampesanti lomampi esaṃ akappiyamaṃsavatthūnanti attho.Sacittakaṃ vāti etesu pana uddissakatameva sacittakaṃ, sesā acittakāti. Akappiyamaṃsavinicchayo.
115. Now, to show that not only the meat of these beings such as humans is unsuitable, but also bones and so on are unsuitable, it is said, "bones also" and so on. There (mahāva. aṭṭha 281) "even hair" means even hair is among those things whose meat is unsuitable. "Or animate" means that among these, only that killed for oneself is animate, the rest are inanimate. The determination of unsuitable meat.
Akappiyamaṃsaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the designation of unsuitable meat is finished.
11. Nissaggiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of the Designation of Expiation
116-7.Idāni accoḷārikānaṃ vasena dassetuṃ‘‘arūpiya’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Aññathāpi yutti pariyesitabbā. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho (pārā. 591; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.589; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. jātarupasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) – yo rūpiyena arūpiyañca parivatteyya, yo ca itarena ca arūpiyena rūpiyaṃ parivatteyya, tassa nissaggiyaṃ hotīti.
116-7. Now, to begin with, to show in terms of very coarse things, "non-material" and so on is begun. A different justification should also be sought. Here is the condensed meaning (pārā. 591; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.589; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. jātarupasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) – whoever exchanges material for non-material, and whoever exchanges non-material for material, for him there is expiation.
‘‘idha rūpiya’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Ettha (pārā. 589; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. jātarupasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā)sajjhu siṅgītisajjhūti rajataṃ.Siṅgīti suvaṇṇaṃ. Tambalohādīhi vā dārūhi vā paṇṇehi vā lākhāya vā rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā vā asamuṭṭhāpetvā vā kataṃ cammabījamayampiyaṃ yaṃ dese vohāraṃ gacchati, idaṃvohārūpagamāsakaṃnāma. Idamidha rūpiyanti adhippetaṃ. Vatthādi ca muttādi cavatthamuttādi. Itaranti arūpiyaṃ kappiyavatthuñca dukkaṭavatthuñca. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Vatthaṃ suttaṃ phālo paṭako kappāso anekappakāraṃ aparaṇṇaṃ sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitādibhesajjañcāti idaṃkappiyavatthunāma. Muttā maṇi veḷuriyo saṅkhosilā pavāḷaṃ lohitaṅgo masāragallaṃ satta dhaññāni dāsī dāso khettaṃ vatthu pupphārāmaphalārāmādayoti idaṃdukkaṭavatthunāma, tadubhayaṃ arūpiyaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti.
"Here, material" and so on is begun. Here (pārā. 589; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. jātarupasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), sajjhu siṅgī means sajjhū is silver. Siṅgī is gold. Or, having created a form with copper alloys or wood or leaves or lac, whether or not a form is produced, whatever seed-shaped coin made of skin is current in the country, this is called commonly used currency. This is what is meant here by material. Cloth and pearls and so on are cloth, pearls, and so on. Other means non-material, both suitable and wrong livelihood items. What is said? Cloth, thread, a piece of cloth, a cloak, cotton, various kinds of grains, ghee, fresh butter, oil, honey, molasses and other medicines – this is called suitable item. Pearls, gems, beryl, conch, stone, coral, ruby, agate, the seven grains, female slaves, male slaves, fields, building sites, flower gardens, fruit gardens, and so on – this is called wrong livelihood item, both of which are called non-material.
118.Ettāvatā rūpiyasaṃvohāraṃ dassetvā idāni kayavikkayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘imaṃ gahetvā’’tiādimāha. Tatthaimanti taṇḍulādikaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍaṃgahetvāvā odanādiṃbhutvā vā ‘‘imaṃvatthādikaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍaṃdehi, imaṃrajanapacanādikaṃkara,rajanakaṭṭhādimānaya, imaṃvā tavademi,tvaṃ pana imañca imañca āhara,kara, dehī’’ti evaṃkayavikkaye samāpanne nissaggīti sambandho.
118. Having thus shown the exchange of material, now, to show buying and selling, he said, "having taken this" and so on. There, this means a suitable item such as rice. Having taken or having eaten food and so on, saying, "Give me this suitable item such as cloth, do this such as dyeing and cooking, bring this such as dyeing wood, or I will give this to you, you, however, bring this and this, do, give," thus, when buying and selling is completed, there is expiation, is the connection.
119.Idāni pariṇāmavasena āpattibhedaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘attano’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ piṇḍattho (pārā. 659; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.658; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. pariṇatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) – saṅghassa vā aññassa vā nataṃ pariṇataṃ lābhaṃ labhitabbaṃ cīvarādipaccayaṃ attano vā aññassa vā pariṇāmeyya, nissaggiyaādīni hontīti. Kathaṃ? Yo pana mātusantakampi saṅghassa pariṇataṃ attano pariṇāmeti, nissaggiyaṃ. Aññassa puggalassa pariṇāmeti, suddhikapācittiyaṃ. Aññassa saṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā pariṇāmeti, dukkaṭaṃ. Yo pana aññapuggalassa vā cetiyassa vā pariṇataṃ attano vā aññapuggalassa vā saṅghassa vā aññacetiyassa vā pariṇāmeti, tassāpi dukkaṭamevāti.
119. Now, to show the distinction of offenses in terms of transformation, "one's own" and so on is begun. Here is the summary meaning (pārā. 659; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.658; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. pariṇatasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) – any gain transformed for the Saṅgha or another, the requisites such as robes that should be obtained, if one transforms for oneself or another, there are expiations and so on. How? If one transforms for oneself what is transformed for the Saṅgha, even if it belongs to one's mother, there is expiation. If one transforms it for another individual, there is purification and pācittiya. If one transforms it for another Saṅgha or a shrine, there is dukkata. If one transforms what is transformed for another individual or a shrine for oneself or another individual or the Saṅgha or another shrine, there is only dukkata for him.
120.Yo pananissaggiṃnissajjitabbaṃanissajjitvāvinayakammaṃ akatvā paribhuñjeyya, tassadukkaṭaṃ. Yo vā parena vinayakammatthāyanissaṭṭhaṃ sakasaññāyana dadeyya, tassāpidukkaṭaṃ. Aññathetaranti etthaaññathāti theyyasaññāya sace na dadeyya,itaraṃtassa agghavasena pārājikañca thullaccayañca dukkaṭañca hotīti attho. Nissaggiyavinicchayo.
120. Whoever, however, consumes what should be expiated without expiating what is to be relinquished without performing the vinaya act, there is dukkata for him. Or whoever, for the sake of a vinaya act, does not give what is relinquished intentionally, there is dukkata for him. Otherwise than that means, here, otherwise means if he does not give it with the intention of theft, that other means according to its value, there is a pārājika, thullaccaya, and dukkata.
Nissaggiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the designation of expiation is finished.
12. Pācittiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of the Designation of Pācittiya
121.Idāni pācittiyāni dassetuṃ ‘‘pācittī’’ti mātikāpadaṃ uddharitvā‘‘musāvādomasāvāde, pesuññaharaṇe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha musāvāde ca omasavāde ca pesuññaharaṇe ca pācitti vuttāti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesupi. Ettha pana ‘‘adiṭṭhaṃ, asutaṃ, amutaṃ, aviññātaṃ, diṭṭhaṃ, sutaṃ, mutaṃ, viññāta’’nti (pāci. 3; pāci. aṭṭha. 3) pubbepi ‘‘musā bhaṇissāmī’’ti cetetvā vacanakkhaṇeva ‘‘musā bhaṇāmī’’ti jānitvā jānantasseva musābhaṇane pācitti nāma āpatti hotīti attho. Yassa bhaṇati, so taṃ na suṇāti, āpatti na hoti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā).
121. Now, to show the pācittiyas, having extracted the matrix term "pācittī," "false speech in false speech, tale-bearing" and so on is said. There, it is connected that in false speech, in offensive speech, and in tale-bearing, pācitti is said. Thus, in the rest also. Here, however, even before "unseen, unheard, unfelt, unknown, seen, heard, felt, known" (pāci. 3; pāci. aṭṭha. 3), having intended "I will speak falsely," at the very moment of speaking, knowing "I am speaking falsely," for one who knows and speaks falsely, the offense called pācitti occurs. If the one to whom he speaks does not hear it, there is no offense (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. musāvādasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā).
‘‘Omasavādonāma dasahi ākārehi omasati jātiyāpi nāmenapi gottenapi kammenapi sippenapi ābādhenapi liṅgenapi kilesenapi āpattiyāpi akkosenapī’’ti (pāci. 15) evaṃ vuttehi dasahi ākārehi upasampannaṃ yo khuṃseti vambheti, ayaṃ omasati nāma, tassa pācittīti attho. Parammukhā bhaṇantassa dukkaṭaṃ, tathā pāḷiyaṃ anāgatehi ‘‘coro’’ti vā ‘‘gaṇṭhibhedako’’ti vā ādīhi bhaṇantassa. ‘‘Santi idhekacce khattiyā brāhmaṇā caṇḍālā’’tiādinā pariyāyena bhaṇantassa ca anupasampannaṃ bhaṇantassa ca sabbatthapi dukkaṭameva.
"Offensive speech means one offends in ten ways: by birth, by name, by clan, by work, by craft, by disease, by gender, by defilement, by offense, and by abuse" (pāci. 15). Thus, if one reviles and disparages an ordained person in these ten ways, this is called offending, there is pācitti for him. If he speaks behind his back, there is dukkata, likewise, in the Pāli, speaking with future terms such as "thief" or "cutpurse." For one who speaks in a circumlocutory way such as, "There are some khattiyas, brahmins, caṇḍālas here," and for one who speaks to an unordained person, there is dukkata in all cases.
pesuññaharaṇaṃnāma. Etthāpi pariyāyavacanena ca anupasampannassa upasaṃharaṇena ca dukkaṭameva.
Tale-bearing Here too, there is dukkata by circumlocutory speech and by addressing an unordained person.
Padasodhammoti ettha‘‘dhammonāma buddhabhāsito sāvakabhāsito isibhāsito devatābhāsito atthūpasaṃhito dhammūpasaṃhito’’ti (pāci. 46) evaṃ vuttaṃ saṅgītittayamāruḷhaṃ tipiṭakadhammaṃ padaanupadaanvakkharaanubyañjanavasena bhikkhuñca bhikkhuniñca ṭhapetvā anupasampannaṃ ekato vācentassa pācitti hotīti attho.
Padasodhammo here, "dhamma means the Dhamma spoken by the Buddha, spoken by a disciple, spoken by a seer, spoken by a deity, connected with meaning, connected with the Dhamma" (pāci. 46), thus, having established the Tipiṭaka Dhamma that is arranged in the three collections in terms of word by word, letter by letter, and phrase by phrase, except for a bhikkhu and a bhikkhuni, there is pācitti for one who causes an unordained person to recite it together.
Sāgāreti yaṃ pana sabbantimena pariyāyena diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhena pākārādinā parikkhittattā sabbaparicchinnañca yena kenaci vitānādinā antamaso vatthenapi channattā sabbacchannañca senāsanaṃ, tathārūpe senāsane ekūpacāraṭṭhāne anupasampannena saha vasantassa catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya nipajjanagaṇanāya ca anupasampannagaṇanāya ca devasikaṃ pācitti hotīti attho.
Sāgāre means, that lodging which is completely enclosed by a wall or similar that is at most two and a half hatthas in height, and which is completely covered by some kind of covering, even if it is only a cloth; in such a lodging, if one stays with an unordained person within the upacāra area, from the fourth day onwards, counting both the days and the unordained persons, there is pācitti for each day.
Ujjhāpanakakhiyyaneti ettha yo upasampannaṃ saṅghena sammataṃ senāsanapaññāpakaṃ vā bhattuddesakaṃ vā yāgubhājakaṃ vā phalabhājakaṃ vā khajjabhājakaṃ vā appamattakavissajjakaṃ vā maṅkukattukāmo chandena ‘‘itthannāmo senāsanaṃ paññāpeti, bhattāni ca uddisatī’’ti vā vadanto aññaṃ upasampannaṃ ujjhāpeti tena avajānāpeti, yo pana tatheva vadanto upasampannassa santike tassa ayasaṃ pakāsento khīyati, tasmiṃ ujjhāpanake ca khīyanake ca pācittidvayanti veditabbaṃ.
Ujjhāpanakakhiyyane here, whoever, wishing to make light of an ordained person who is approved by the Saṅgha as a lodging allocator or a food distributor or a gruel distributor or a fruit distributor or a snack distributor or a distributor of small items, saying with desire, "So-and-so allocates lodgings, and distributes food," causes another ordained person to scorn him; whoever, while saying the same, depreciates him in the presence of the ordained person, in that disparaging and depreciating, two pācittis should be known.
122.Talasattianādara-kukkuccuppādanesucāti ettha yo bhikkhu upasampannassa paharaṇākāraṃ dassento kāyaṃ vā kāyappaṭibaddhaṃ vā uccāreti, tassa pācittiyaṃ. Sace viraddho pahāraṃ deti, appaharitukāmatāya dukkaṭaṃ, tathā anupasampannesupi dukkaṭameva.
122.Talasattianādara-kukkuccuppādanesucāti here, the bhikkhu, while showing the manner of striking an ordained person, raises a hand or something connected with the body, there is pācittiya for him. If, being provoked, he strikes, there is dukkata because he does not wish to strike, likewise, there is dukkata even for unordained persons.
Upasampannena paññattena vuccamāno taṃ asikkhitukāmatāya vā tassa vacanaṃ asotukāmatāya vā yo anādariyaṃ karoti, tassa anādarakaraṇe pācittiyanti attho. Apaññattena vuccamānassa ca anupasampannena paññattena vā apaññattena vā vuccamānassa dukkaṭaṃ.
If an ordained person, being told by one who is appointed, shows disrespect, either because he does not wish to train in that or because he does not wish to hear his words, there is pācittiya for showing disrespect. There is dukkata for one who is being told by one who is not appointed, and for one who is being told by an unordained person whether appointed or unappointed.
Upasampannassa ‘‘ūnavīsativasso maññe tvaṃ upasampanno, vikāle maññe tayā bhutta’’ntiādinā nayena sañcicca kukkuccaṃ uppādentassa pācittiyaṃ. Anupasampannassa uppādane dukkaṭaṃ.
For an ordained person, deliberately causing worry to an ordained person by saying in the manner of, "I think you were ordained when you were under twenty years old, I think you ate at the wrong time," there is pācittiya. There is dukkata for causing it to an unordained person.
Gāmappavesanāpucchāti ettha pana majjhanhikātikkamanato paṭṭhāya yāva aruṇuggamanāvikālonāma, etthantare sace sambahulā kenaci kammena gāmaṃ pavisanti, ‘‘vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmā’’ti sabbehipi aññamaññaṃ āpucchitabbaṃ. Sace anāpucchā parikkhittassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa upacāraṃ atikkamanti, paṭhamapāde dukkaṭaṃ, dutiyapāduddhāre pācittiyaṃ. Āpadāsu anāpatti.
Gāmappavesanāpucchāti here, from the time of the passing of midday until sunrise, is called wrong time. Within this time, if many enter a village for some business, all should ask each other, "Let us ask permission to enter the village at the wrong time." If, without asking permission, they cross the boundary of what is enclosed, or the upacāra of what is unenclosed, there is dukkata for the first step, and pācittiya for the second step. There is no offense in emergencies.
Bhojane ca paramparāti paramparabhojane ca pācittiyanti attho. Ettha pana pañcasu bhojanesu aññataraṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā ‘‘odanena vā sattunā vā kummāsena vā maṃsena vā macchena vā nimantemī’’tiādinā nayena, yena kenaci vevacanena vā akappiyanimantanāya nimantitassa yena yena paṭhamaṃ nimantito, tassa tassa bhojanaṃ ṭhapetvā uppaṭipāṭiyā, avikappetvā vā paṭhamanimantanaṃ parassa parassa kulassa pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ paribhuñjantassa paramparabhojane pācitti hoti. Gilānacīvaradānacīvarakālasamayesu anāpatti, tathā pañca bhojanāni ṭhapetvā sabbattha.
Bhojane ca paramparāti in consecutive eating also, there is pācittiya. Here, having taken one of the five foods, in the manner of, "I invite you with rice or barley-groats or kummāsa or meat or fish," by whatever indirect expression, if one who has been invited by an unsuitable invitation, having set aside the food of whoever invited him first, eats in reverse order, or without allocating the first invitation to another and another family, one of the five foods, there is pācitti for eating consecutively. There is no offense at the times of being sick, robe-giving, and robe-making, likewise, having set aside the five foods, in all cases.
123.Anuddharitvā gamane seyyanti ettha dasavidhā seyyā bhisi cimilikā uttarattharaṇaṃ bhūmattharaṇaṃ taṭṭikā cammakhaṇḍo nisīdanaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāroti. Etesu yaṃ kiñci saṅghike vihāre guttasenāsane attano vassaggena gahitaṃ attanā vā santharitvā, anupasampannena vā santharāpetvā taṃ divasaṃ gamikavasena pakkamanto neva sayaṃ uddhareyya na aññaṃ uddharāpeyya, yathā upacikādīhi na khajjeyya, evaṃ na ṭhapeyya, aññena vā na uddharāpeyya, patirūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ vā sāmaṇeraṃ vā ārāmikameva vā anāpucchā vā gaccheyya, tassa parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa dve leḍḍupāte atikkamantassa pācittiyaṃ. Maṇḍaparukkhamūlādiaguttasenāsane santharitvā gacchantassa dukkaṭaṃ, tathā mañcapīṭhabhisikocchakesu, guttasenāsanepi dukkaṭameva.
123.Anuddharitvā gamane seyyanti here, there are ten kinds of bedding: cushion, bedspread, upper covering, ground covering, mat, piece of hide, sitting cloth, spread, grass bed, and leaf bed. Among these, whatever is taken in a Saṅgha lodging, in a guarded lodging, for one's rainy season residence, having either spread it himself or having caused an unordained person to spread it, when departing that day due to travel, he should neither remove it himself nor cause another to remove it, so that it is not eaten by insects and so on, he should not leave it thus, nor cause another to remove it, if he goes without asking permission from a suitable bhikkhu or a novice or even an ārāmika, for a lodging that is enclosed, crossing the enclosure, for one that is unenclosed, crossing two leḍḍupātas, there is pācittiya. There is dukkata for one who spreads it under a maṇḍa tree or at the foot of a tree or in an unguarded lodging and goes away, likewise, on chairs, benches, and cushions, there is dukkata even in a guarded lodging.
Senāsanāni vāti ettha anuddharitvā gamaneti sambandho. Ettha pana mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi kocchakanti catubbidhampi senāsanaṃ vassānahemantānaṃ aṭṭhasu māsesu ajjhokāse vā ovassakamaṇḍape vā rukkhamūle vā sayaṃ santharitvā vā anupasampannena santharāpetvā vā taṃ anuddharitvā vā anuddharāpetvā vā tassa senāsanassa dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ atikkamane pācittiyaṃ. Sammuñjanīyādi sesaparikkhāresu dukkaṭaṃ.
Senāsanāni vāti here, it is connected with going away without removing it. Here, the four kinds of lodging—chair, bench, cushion, and mattress—either having spread it himself or having caused an unordained person to spread it in the open air or in a covered pavilion or at the foot of a tree during the eight months of the rainy and cold seasons, without removing it or without causing it to be removed, crossing two leḍḍupātas from that lodging, there is pācittiya. There is dukkata for the remaining requisites such as a broom.
Itthiyāddhānagamaneti ettha mātugāmena ‘‘gacchāma bhagini, gacchāma ayyā’’ti evaṃ saṃvidahitvā ‘‘ajja vā sve vā parasuve vā’’ti niyamitakālaṃ visaṅketaṃ akatvā dvāravisaṅketaṃ maggavisaṅketaṃ katvāpi gacchato gāmantare gāmantare pācittiyaṃ. Agāmake araññe addhayojane addhayojane āpatti.
Itthiyāddhānagamaneti here, if a woman, having arranged with a bhikkhu, saying, "Let's go, sister, let's go, venerable one," having made an unannounced agreement, having made the door unannounced and the path unannounced, goes to another village, there is pācittiya at each village. In a forest without villages, there is an offense at every half-yojana.
Ekekāya nisīdaneti ettha eko ekāya itthiyā nisīdaneti attho.
Ekekāya nisīdaneti here, sitting one by one with a woman is the meaning.
124.Bhiṃsāpaneti ettha upasampanno upasampannaṃ bhiṃsāpetukāmo corakantāravāḷakantārādīni ācikkhati, bhayānakaṃ vā rūpasaddādiṃ dasseti, so bhāyatu vā mā vā, tassa payoge payoge pācittiyaṃ. Anupasampanne dukkaṭaṃ.
124.Bhiṃsāpaneti here, an ordained person, wishing to frighten an ordained person, tells about bandit-infested wildernesses and wild animal-infested wildernesses, or shows a frightening sight, sound, and so on, whether he is frightened or not, there is pācittiya for each attempt. There is dukkata for an unordained person.
Ākoṭaneti pahāradāne. Upasampanno upasampannassa anattamano hutvā sace uppalapattenapi pahāraṃ deti, pācittiyaṃ. Anupasampannassa gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā itthiyā vā purisassa vā antamaso tiracchānagatassāpi pahāraṃ deti, dukkaṭameva.
Ākoṭaneti giving a blow. If an ordained person, being displeased, strikes an ordained person even with a lotus leaf, there is pācittiya. If he strikes an unordained person, whether a householder or a renunciate, a woman or a man, even an animal, there is only dukkata.
aññavādakeca kañci vītikkamaṃ disvā ‘‘āvuso, idaṃ nāma tayā kata’’nti vutte taṃ na kathetukāmo tuṇhībhūtova saṅghaṃ vihesatīti saṅghavihesako, tasmiṃvihesakeca pācitti hotīti attho. Idha pana ñattidutiyena kammena aññavādake ca vihesake ca āropite puna aññaṃ bhaṇantassa, vihesantassa pācitti. Anāropite dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ.
And if, upon seeing any transgression in another speaker (aññavādaka), one says, "Friend, this was done by you," and that person, not wanting to admit it, remains silent and harasses the Sangha—he is a Sangha-harasser (saṅghavihesaka), and there is a pācitti for harassing him. Here, however, if a pācitti is imposed by a formal act with declaration as the second act on another speaker and a harasser, then a pācitti applies to one who speaks differently or harasses again. It should be understood that if it is not imposed, there is a dukkaṭa.
Duṭṭhullapakāsachādeti ettha kiñcāpi ‘‘duṭṭhullā nāma āpatti cattāri ca pārājikāni terasa ca saṅghādisesā’’ti (pāci. 399) vuttā, tathāpi idha saṅghādisesāva adhippetā. Tasmā saṅghasammutiṃ vinā bhikkhussa duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ ‘‘ayaṃ asuciṃ mocetvā saṅghādisesaṃ āpanno’’tiādinā nayena vatthunā saddhiṃ āpattiṃ ghaṭetvā bhikkhuñca bhikkhuniñca ṭhapetvā yassa kassaci anupasampannassa ārocentassa pācittiyaṃ. Thullaccayādiaduṭṭhullārocane dukkaṭaṃ. Duṭṭhullacchādanepi saṅghādisesova adhippeto. Yo pana bhikkhu bhikkhussa duṭṭhullaṃ āpattiṃ sayaṃ vā jānitvā aññesaṃ vā sutvā ‘‘imaṃ jānitvā codessanti sāressanti maṅkuṃ karissanti, nārocissāmī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, tassa pācittiyaṃ. Dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā pacchā ārocitepi na rakkhati eva.
Regarding duṭṭhullapakāsachāde, although it is said that "duṭṭhulla offenses are the four pārājikās and the thirteen saṅghādisesas" (pāci. 399), in this context, only saṅghādisesas are intended. Therefore, without the Sangha's consent, revealing a duṭṭhulla offense of a bhikkhu to any unordained person—by connecting the offense with the incident in a way such as, "This one, having emitted semen, has incurred a saṅghādisesa offense," keeping the bhikkhu and bhikkhuni aside— incurs a pācittiya. For revealing a thullaccaya or other duṭṭhulla offense, there is a dukkaṭa. Concealing a duṭṭhulla also refers to a saṅghādisesa. But if a bhikkhu, having known an offense of duṭṭhulla of another bhikkhu himself or having heard it from others, undertakes the responsibility, thinking, "Knowing this, they will accuse, remind, or humiliate him; I will not reveal it," for him, there is a pācittiya. Even if he reveals it later after undertaking the responsibility, it is not saved.
Hāsodaketi aṅgulipatodakena hāso ca udake hāso cāti evamattho veditabbo. Upasampanno upasampannaṃ hasādhippāyo kāyena kāyaṃ āmasati, āpatti pācittiyassa, ko pana vādo upakacchakādīsu ghaṭṭane. Anupasampanne dukkaṭaṃ, tathā bhikkhussa kāyappaṭibaddhāmasane ca nissaggiyena kāyappaṭibaddhāmasane ca. Ettha bhikkhunīpi anupasampannaṭṭhāne ṭhitā.Udake hasanadhammonāma uparigopphake udake kīḷādhippāyassa nimmujjanaummujjanaplavanādikaṃ. Idhahāsonāma kīḷā vuccati.
Hāsodake should be understood as laughter caused by poking with a finger and laughter in the water. If an ordained bhikkhu touches the body of another ordained bhikkhu with the intention of causing laughter, there is an offense of pācittiya, what to say of touching the armpits, etc. For an unordained person, there is a dukkaṭa, and similarly, for touching something attached to the body of a bhikkhu with the intention of laughter, and for touching something attached to the body with expiation. Here, a bhikkhuni is also considered to be in the position of an unordained person. Udake hasanadhammo means immersing, emerging, floating, etc., in water up to the upper ankles with the intention of playing. Here, hāso means play.
Nicchubhane vihārāti saṅghikā vihārā nikkaḍḍhaneti attho. Ettha pana yo kuddho hutvā upasampannaṃ hatthādīsu gahetvā vā ‘‘nikkhamā’’ti vatvā vā yattakāni dvārāni ekena payogena atikkāmeti, tattha dvāragaṇanāya āpattiṃ aggahetvā payogassa ekattā ekā eva gahetabbā. Sace nānāpayogehi atikkāmeti, tattha dvāragaṇanāya gahetabbaṃ. Tassa parikkhāranikkaḍḍhane dukkaṭaṃ, tathā anupasampanne, tassa parikkhāranikkaḍḍhane ca. Alajjiādīsu pana anāpatti.
Nicchubhane vihārā means evicting from a Sangha-owned vihāra. Here, if someone, being angry, grabs an ordained person by the hands, etc., or says, "Get out!" and crosses a number of doorways with one effort, one should take only one offense, not counting the number of doorways, because the effort is one. If he crosses with various efforts, then it should be taken by counting the number of doorways. For evicting his belongings, there is a dukkaṭa, and similarly for an unordained person and for evicting his belongings. However, there is no offense for one who is shameless, etc.
Anupakhajja sayaneti saṅghike vihāre ‘‘vuḍḍho’’ti vā ‘‘gilāno’’ti vā ‘‘saṅghena dinno’’ti vā jānitvā mañcassa vā pīṭhassa vā pavisantassa vā nikkhamantassa vā upacāre seyyaṃ santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā ‘‘yassa sambādho bhavissati, so pakkamissatī’’ti adhippāyena abhinisīdantassa ca abhinipajjantassa ca payogagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pācittiyavinicchayo.
Anupakhajja sayane means, in a Sangha-owned vihāra, knowing that one is "old," "sick," or "given by the Sangha," if one spreads out or has spread out bedding in the vicinity of the bed or seat when one is entering or leaving, thinking, "Whoever is crowded will leave," one incurs a pācittiya for each effort when sitting down or lying down. This is the judgment on pācittiyas.
Pācittiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the Pācittiya chapter is complete.
13. Samaṇakappaniddesavaṇṇanā
13. Description of Rules Regarding What is Allowable
125.Bhūtānaṃ jātānaṃ nibbattānaṃ gāmo bhūtagāmo (pāci. 91; pāci. aṭṭha. 91; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā). Samārambhoti chedanaphālanapacanādi, tasmiṃbhūtagāmasamārambhebhūtagāmasamārambhahetupācittihotīti attho.Katakappiyaṃ(kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) pana samaṇakappiyaṃ bhaveti sambandho. Samaṇānaṃ kappiyaṃsamaṇakappiyaṃ. Idāni yena kataṃ kappiyaṃ samaṇakappiyaṃ hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘nakhena vā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ, aggiparijitaṃ satthaparijitaṃ nakhaparijitaṃ abījaṃ nibbaṭṭabījaññeva pañcama’’nti (cūḷava. 250) hi vuttaṃ.
125. Bhūtagāmo is a village (gāmo) of beings (bhūtānaṃ), things that have come into existence (jātānaṃ), things that have been produced (nibbattānaṃ) (pāci. 91; pāci. aṭṭha. 91; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā). Samārambho means cutting, splitting, cooking, etc.; in this bhūtagāmasamārambhe, for the cause of interfering with plant life, there is a pācitti, that is the meaning. Katakappiyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhūtagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), however, should be rendered allowable for a monk (samaṇakappiyaṃ), that is the connection. Samaṇakappiyaṃ is what is allowable (kappiyaṃ) for monks (samaṇānaṃ). Now, to show what act makes something allowable for monks, he says ‘‘nakhena vā’’ (with a nail, or...). Indeed, it was said, "I allow, monks, to consume fruits with five allowable means: that which is avoided by fire, that which is avoided by a knife, that which is avoided by a nail, that which is seedless, and the fifth, that which has the seed removed" (cūḷava. 250).
126.Idāni taṃ bhūtagāmaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘samūlā’’tiādimāha. Tattha (pāci. 91; pāci. aṭṭha. 91)sa-iti so bhūtagāmo nāmāti attho, mūlabījādīhi pañcahi bījehi pabhāvito hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatthamūlabījaṃnāma haliddisiṅgiverādi.Khandhabījaṃnāma assattho nigrodhoti evamādi.Aggabījaṃnāma ajjukaphaṇijjakādi.Phaḷubījaṃnāma ucchuveḷunaḷādi.‘‘Bījabījaṃnāma pubbaṇṇaṃ aparaṇṇaṃ, yāni vā panaññānipi atthi bīje jāyanti bīje sañjāyanti, etaṃ bījabījaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni ‘‘bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirato hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.10, 195; ma. ni. 1.293, 411; 2.11; a. ni. 10.99; pu. pa. 179) vuttattā dhammānulomena āgataṃ bījagāmasamārambhaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ārambhe dukkaṭa’’ntiādimāha. Tasmā etaṃ paṭhamaṃ ‘‘kappiyaṃ karohī’’ti bhūtagāmaparimocanaṃ kāretvā bījagāmaparimocanatthaṃ puna kappiyaṃ kāretabbaṃ.
126.Now, to show that bhūtagāma, he says ‘‘samūlā’’ (with roots, or...). There (pāci. 91; pāci. aṭṭha. 91), sa- means that it is called bhūtagāmo, that it is brought forth by five seeds, namely roots, seeds, etc., that is what is said. There, mūlabījaṃ is turmeric, ginger, etc. Khandhabījaṃ is the assattha tree, the nigrodha tree, and so on. Aggabījaṃ is the ajjuka, phaṇijjaka, etc. Phaḷubījaṃ is sugarcane, bamboo, reeds, etc. ‘‘Bījabījaṃ is earlier grains, later grains, or whatever else is born from seeds, arises from seeds; this is called bījabīja." Now, since it is said, "He abstains from interfering with seed-life and plant-life" (dī. ni. 1.10, 195; ma. ni. 1.293, 411; 2.11; a. ni. 10.99; pu. pa. 179), to show the interference with seed-life that comes in accordance with the Dhamma, he says ‘‘ārambhe dukkaṭa’’ (at the start, there is a dukkaṭa), etc. Therefore, first, having had the freeing of plant-life done by saying, "Make it allowable," then again, for the purpose of freeing seed-life, one should have it made allowable.
127.Nibbaṭṭabījaṃ(pāci. aṭṭha. 92; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhutagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) nāma ambapanasādi.Nobījaṃnāma taruṇambaphalādi, etaṃ pana sabbaṃ akappiyampi vaṭṭatīti attho.Kaṭāhabaddhabījānikapitthaphalādīni.Bahiddhā vāpi kārayeti kapālepi kātuṃ vaṭṭati, sace ekābaddhānīti attho. Kaṭāhamuttaṃ pana bhinditvā kāretabbaṃ.
127.Nibbaṭṭabījaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 92; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhutagāmasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) is mango, jackfruit, etc. Nobījaṃ is young mango fruit, etc.; this, however, is entirely allowable even if it is not allowable, that is the meaning. Kaṭāhabaddhabījāni are wood-apple fruits, etc. Bahiddhā vāpi kāraye means it is also allowable to do it in a potsherd, provided they are bound together, that is the meaning. That which is unbound from the potsherd, however, should be made allowable after breaking it.
128.Bhājane vā bhūmiyaṃ vā ekābaddhesu bījesu ekasmiṃ bīje kappiye kate sabbesveva kataṃ bhaveti attho. Yathā ca bīje, evaṃ rukkhasahassaṃ vā ucchusahassaṃ vā chinditvā ekābaddhe katepi vinicchayo veditabbo.
128.Among seeds bound together in a container or on the ground, if allowance is made for one seed, it is considered done for all of them. Just as with seeds, the judgment should be understood even if a thousand trees or a thousand sugarcanes are cut and bound together.
129.Kappiyaṃ katvā nikkhitte bījagāme puna mūlapaṇṇāni sace jāyaruṃ, puna kappiyaṃ kāreyyāti attho.Tadāti mūle ca aṅkure ca jāteti attho.
129.In a collection of seeds that have been made allowable and set aside, if roots or shoots arise again, one should make it allowable again, that is the meaning. Tadā means when roots and sprouts have arisen.
130.Udakasambhavoti udakajāto.Cetiyādīsūti etthaādi-saddena gehappamukhapākāravedikādīsu nibbattā gahitā. Nibbattadvattipattako bhūtagāmova, anibbattako aggabīje saṅgahaṃ gacchati. Bījampi yāva mūlaṃ vā paṇṇaṃ vā na nikkhamati, tāva bījagāmova, mūle ca nikkhante paṇṇe ca harite jāte bhūtagāmova hotīti attho.
130.Udakasambhavo means born of water. Cetiyādīsū: here, by the word ādi, those that arise in houses, walls, fences, etc., are included. A shoot that has emerged is plant-life, one that has not emerged falls into the category of bud-seed. Seeds are seed-life as long as roots or shoots have not come out; when roots have come out and green shoots have arisen, it becomes plant-life, that is the meaning.
131.Makuḷanti aphullaṃ.Ahichattakaṃnāma rukkhe jātaṃ ahichattakaṃ.
131.Makuḷa means unopened bud. Ahichattakaṃ is a mushroom grown on a tree.
132.Allarukkhe gaṇhatoti sambandho.Tatthāti allarukkhe chindato vāpīti sambandho.
132.He takes from a fresh tree, that is the connection. Tatthā means while cutting a fresh tree, that is the connection.
134.‘‘Imaṃ rukkhaṃ, imaṃ lataṃ, imaṃ kandaṃ chinda, bhindā’’tiādinā nayena niyametvā bhāsituṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Idaṃ, eta’’nti avatvā kevalaṃ ‘‘rukkhaṃ chindā’’tiādinā (pāci. aṭṭha. 92; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhūtagāmahikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) nayena vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Samaṇakappavinicchayo.
134.It is not allowable to speak by specifying in a way such as, "Cut this tree, this vine, this tuber, split it, break it." It is allowable to speak in a way such as simply saying, "Cut a tree," etc. (pāci. aṭṭha. 92; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhūtagāmahikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), without saying, "This one, that one." This is the judgment on what is allowable for monks.
Samaṇakappaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of rules regarding what is allowable is complete.
14. Bhūminiddesavaṇṇanā
14. Description of Grounds
136.Idāni ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, catasso kappiyabhūmiyo ussāvanantikaṃ gonisādikaṃ gahapatiṃ sammuti’’nti (mahāva. 295) evaṃ vuttā catasso kappiyabhūmiyo dassetuṃ‘‘sammutussāvanantā cā’’tiādimāha.Yāsūti kappiyabhūmīsu (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā).
136.Now, to show the four allowable grounds that were spoken of in this way, "I allow, monks, four allowable grounds: the border that has been proclaimed, one that has grass mats, a householder, an agreement" (mahāva. 295), he says ‘‘sammutussāvanantā cā’’ (and one that is proclaimed with agreement), etc. Yāsū means among the allowable grounds (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. sannidhikārakasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā).
137.Idāni yattha kappiyakuṭi icchitabbā, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘vāsatthāyā’’tiādimāha.Vāsatthāyāti iminā koṭṭhāgārabhattasālācetiyagharasammuñjanīmāḷakādi yaṃ yaṃ aññampi vāsatthāya karīyati, tattha tattha kappiyakuṭikaraṇakiccaṃ natthīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Bhojanasālā pana senāsanameva, tasmā tattha kātabbā evāti vadanti.Saṅghikevekasantaketi ettha ekasantako upasampannasantakova veditabbo.
137.Now, to show where an allowable hut should be desired, he says ‘‘vāsatthāyā’’ (for a dwelling), etc. By vāsatthāyā, it is shown that there is no need to make an allowable hut in any other place that is made for dwelling, such as a storehouse, refectory, shrine room, sweeping area, pavilion, etc. But the refectory is just a lodging place, so it should definitely be made there, some say. Saṅghikevekasantake: here, ekasantako should be understood as belonging to an ordained person only.
138.Idāni kattabbākāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘gehe’’tiādimāha. Tattha saṅghassa vā ekassa vā gehe vihāre kariyamāne evaṃīrayaṃ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karoma, kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti vā ‘‘kappiyakuṭi kappiyakuṭī’’ti vā vadanto paṭhamiṭṭhakatthambhādiṃ ṭhapeyya, evaṃ katāussāvanantikānāma, evaṃ udāharitavacanantikāti attho.
138.Now, to show the manner in which it should be done, he says ‘‘gehe’’ (in a house), etc. There, when doing it in a house or vihāra belonging to the Sangha or an individual, he should place the first brick or pillar, declaring in this way, īrayaṃ, "We are making an allowable hut, we are making an allowable hut," or "Allowable hut, allowable hut." This is called ussāvanantikā, meaning the end is by uttering such a declaration.
139.Yebhuyyena vā aparikkhitto, sakalopi vā aparikkhitto ārāmo‘‘gonisādī’’ti vuccatīti sambandho. Ettha pana senāsanesu parikkhittesupi ārāme aparikkhitte kappiyakuṭikaraṇakiccaṃ natthi. Sammutiṃ karontehi kataṃ pariyositaṃ ‘‘imaṃ vihāraṃ aḍḍhayogaṃ pāsādaṃ hammiyaṃ guhaṃ tiṇakuṭikaṃ maṇḍapa’’nti tesaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā tassā kuṭiyā hatthapāse vā ṭhatvā, tassā anto vā pavisitvā vuttanayeneva ñattidutiyakammavācāya sammannitabbaṃ.
139.A ārāma that is mostly or entirely unenclosed is called ‘‘gonisādī’’, that is the connection. Here, however, even if the lodging places are enclosed, there is no need to make an allowable hut in an ārāma that is unenclosed. When making an agreement, those making the agreement should take the name of that hut, such as, "This vihāra, aḍḍhayoga, pāsāda, hammiya, cave, grass hut, pavilion," that has been done and completed, and standing within arm's reach of that hut or entering inside it, it should be agreed upon with the declaration as the second act, in the manner that has been said.
140.‘‘Bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā aññehī’’ti vacanato sesasahadhammikehipi devamanussehipi aññehi kappiyakuṭiyā atthāya dinno vā tesaṃ santako vā geho‘‘gahapatī’’timatoñātoti attho, saṅghasantakañca bhikkhusantakañca ṭhapetvā sabbesaṃ geho gahapatīti adhippāyo.
140.From the statement, "Except for a bhikkhu, by others," a house given by or belonging to others, including fellow Dhamma practitioners, gods, and humans, for the purpose of an allowable hut is ‘‘gahapatī’’mato—known, that is the meaning; the intent is that the house of everyone except that of the Sangha and a bhikkhu is a gahapatī.
141.Sappiādīhimissitanti sappiādīhi pañcahi ca haliddisiṅgiverādiyāvajīvikena cāti attho.Vajeyya antovutthattanti ettha yāvakālikayāmakālikasaṅkhātaṃ purimakālikadvayaṃ saṅghikaṃ vā bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vā santakaṃ sayaṃ kappiyakuṭiyā vutthampi itarehi akappiyakuṭiyā vutthehi missitaṃ antovutthabhāvaṃ āgaccheyyāti attho.
141.Sappiādīhimissitaṃ means mixed with ghee, etc., the five, and with turmeric, ginger, etc., for as long as one lives, that is the meaning. Vajeyya antovutthattaṃ: here, the two kinds of earlier allowable food, namely food allowable for a limited time and food allowable for a watch, belonging to the Sangha or a bhikkhu or bhikkhuni, having been consumed by oneself in an allowable hut, should come to be mixed into an unallowable state by others having consumed it in an unallowable hut, that is the meaning.
142.Tehevāti akappiyakuṭiyaṃ vutthasappitelādīhi.Sāmapākatanti sāmaṃpakkabhāvaṃ gacchatīti attho.
142.Tehevā means with ghee, oil, etc., consumed in an unallowable hut. Sāmapākataṃ means it goes to a state of being self-cooked, that is the meaning.
143-4.Imā pana kappiyakuṭiyo yadā jahitavatthukā honti, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ussāvanantikā’’tiādimāha. Sace thambhe vā bhittipāde vā parivattenti, yo yo ṭhito, tattha tattha patiṭṭhāti, etenupāyena sabbesu parivattesupi na vijahitavatthukāva hotīti attho.Parikkhitte gonisādivijahitavatthukā.Sesā chadanavibbhamāti chadanavināsā jahitavatthukā hontīti adhippāyo. Bhūmivinicchayo.
143-4.Now, to show when these allowable huts are objects that have been abandoned, he says ‘‘ussāvanantikā’’ (one that is proclaimed), etc. If they turn around a pillar or a wall base, it stands wherever it is, and in this way, it is always an object that has not been abandoned even in all the turnings, that is the meaning. Parikkhitte gonisādi is an object that has been abandoned. Sesā chadanavibbhamā (the rest are disturbances of the roof): the meaning is that they are objects that have been abandoned due to the destruction of the roof. This is the judgment on grounds.
Bhūminiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of grounds is complete.
15. Upajjhācariyavattaniddesavaṇṇanā
15. Description of the Observances Toward a Preceptor and Teacher
145.Upajjhācariyeti ettha (mahāva. 64, 67, 74, 78-79; cūḷava. 375, 377; 379-382; mahāva. aṭṭha. 64, 67, 75, 76, 77)ācariyonāma nissayācariyo pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo dhammācariyoti catubbidho. Etesu hi nissayantevāsikena yāva ācariyaṃ nissāya vasati, tāva sabbamācariyavattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Pabbajjāupasampadādhammantevāsikehi pana nissayamuttakehipi ādito paṭṭhāya yāva cīvararajanaṃ, tāva vattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Anāpucchitvā pattadānādimhi pana etesaṃ anāpatti. Etesu ca pabbajjantevāsiko ca upasampadantevāsiko ca ācariyassa yāvajīvaṃ bhāro, nissayantevāsiko ca dhammantevāsiko ca yāva samīpe vasati, tāvadeva. Suṭṭhu piyasīlosupesalo,sikkhākāmoti attho.Dantakaṭṭhaṃdentena ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā mahantaṃ majjhimaṃ khuddakanti tīṇi dantakaṭṭhāni upanetabbāni. Tesu yaṃ tīṇi divasāni gaṇhāti, taṃ sallakkhetvā catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya tādisaṃyeva sammā ubhohi hatthehi dātabbaṃ. Sace yaṃ vā taṃ vā gaṇhāti, yathāladdhaṃ upanetabbaṃ.Toyanti sītañca uṇhañca udakaṃ upanetvā yaṃ tīṇi divasāni vaḷañjeti, catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya tādisaṃ upanetabbaṃ. Sace dvepi vaḷañjeti, duvidhampi upanetabbaṃ. Sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṃ dhovitvā upanetabbaṃ.
145.Upajjhācariye: here (mahāva. 64, 67, 74, 78-79; cūḷava. 375, 377; 379-382; mahāva. aṭṭha. 64, 67, 75, 76, 77), ācariyo (teacher) is fourfold: the teacher who gives dependence, the teacher who gives ordination, the teacher who gives higher ordination, and the Dhamma teacher. Among these, the novice who depends on the teacher should perform all the duties toward the teacher as long as he lives depending on the teacher. However, for the novice ordained or given higher ordination or taught the Dhamma, even if he is freed from dependence, he should perform the observances from the beginning up to the dyeing of the robes. However, there is no offense for these in giving alms-bowls, etc., without asking permission. Among these, the novice ordained and the novice given higher ordination are a burden on the teacher for life, and the novice who gives dependence and the Dhamma novice are so only as long as they live nearby. One with very loving conduct is supesalo, meaning one who desires training. Dantakaṭṭhaṃ: having arranged the upper robe over one shoulder with the teeth, three tooth sticks—large, medium, and small—should be brought. Among them, having noticed which one he takes for three days, from the fourth day onward, one should give exactly the same one properly with both hands. If he takes whichever one he likes, it should be brought as it is obtained. Toyaṃ: having brought cold and hot water, one should bring the same kind that he rinses with for three days from the fourth day onward. If he rinses with both, both kinds should be brought. If there is rice gruel, the bowl should be washed and brought.
146.Patte vattaṃ careti ‘‘yāguṃ pītassa udakaṃ datvā bhājanaṃ paṭiggahetvā nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ aparighaṃsantena dhovitvā paṭisāmetabba’’nti (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) vuttaṃ patte vattaṃ careti attho. Gāmappavese vattaṃ careti evaṃ sabbattha. ‘‘Sace upajjhāyo vā ācariyo vā gāmaṃ pavisitukāmo hoti, nivāsanaṃ dātabbaṃ, paṭinivāsanaṃ paṭiggahetabbaṃ, kāyabandhanaṃ dātabbaṃ, saguṇaṃ katvā saṅghāṭiyo dātabbā, dhovitvā patto sodako dātabbo’’ti (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) idaṃgāmappavesane vattaṃnāma. ‘‘Sace upajjhāyo vā ācariyo vā pacchāsamaṇaṃ ākaṅkhati, timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā saguṇaṃ katvā saṅghāṭiyo pārupitvā gaṇṭhikaṃ paṭimuñcitvā dhovitvā pattaṃ gahetvā upajjhāyassa vā ācariyassa vā pacchāsamaṇena hotabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) nayena vuttaṃgamane vattaṃnāma. ‘‘Nivattantena paṭhamataraṃ āgantvā āsanaṃ paññāpetabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) nayena vuttaṃāgame vattaṃnāma. ‘‘Upajjhāyamhi vuṭṭhite āsanaṃ uddharitabbaṃ, pādodakaṃ pādapīṭhaṃ pādakathalikaṃ paṭisāmetabba’’nti (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) evaṃ vuttaṃāsanādīsu vattaṃnāma.Upāhanāya vattaṃnāma ‘‘upāhanā puñchitabbā, upāhanā puñchantena paṭhamaṃ sukkhena coḷakena puñchitabbā, pacchā allenā’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 357, 359) vuttaṃ.Cīvare vattaṃnāma ‘‘sace cīvaraṃ sinnaṃ hoti, muhuttaṃ uṇhe otāpetabbaṃ, na ca uṇhe cīvaraṃ nidahitabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) vuttaṃ.
146.Patte vattaṃ care: "Having given water to one who has drunk the rice-gruel, having received the bowl, holding it low, washing it carefully without making noise, it should be returned" (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380)—patte vattaṃ care means this. Gāmappavese vattaṃ care likewise applies in all instances. "If the preceptor or teacher wishes to enter the village, the lower robe should be given, the returned lower robe should be received, the waistband should be given, the double robe should be folded well and given, and a bowl, washed and with water, should be given" (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380)—this is called vattaṃ concerning entering the village. "If the preceptor or teacher expects a junior monk to be following behind, having covered himself with the triple robe, having dressed in a rounded manner, having tied the waistband, having folded the double robe well and worn it, having fastened the buckle, having taken a washed bowl, he should be the junior monk behind the preceptor or teacher"—that which is stated in this way (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) is called vattaṃ concerning going. "When returning, having arrived earlier, the seat should be prepared"—that which is stated in this way (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) is called vattaṃ concerning arrival. "When the preceptor has risen, the seat should be removed, the water for the feet, the footstool, and the foot-wiper should be put away" (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380)—that which is stated in this way is called vattaṃ concerning the seat and so on. Vattaṃ concerning shoes: "The shoes should be wiped; when wiping the shoes, first they should be wiped with a dry cloth, then with a damp one" (cūḷava. 357, 359)—that which is stated in this way. Vattaṃ concerning the robe: "If the robe is wet, it should be exposed to warmth for a moment, but the robe should not be left in the heat" (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380)—that which is stated in this way.
147.Paribhojanīyapānīya-vaccappassāvaṭhānisūti ettha sace pānīyaṃ na hoti, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ. Sace paribhojanīyaṃ na hoti, paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ. Sace vaccakuṭi uklāpā hoti, vaccakuṭi sammajjitabbā.Tathāpassāvaṭṭhāne evaṃvattaṃcaritabbanti attho. ‘‘Vihāraṃ sodhentena paṭhamaṃ pattacīvaraṃ nīharitvā ekamantaṃ nikkhipitabba’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃvihārasodhane vattaṃnāma. ‘‘Bhūmattharaṇaṃ otāpetvā sodhetvā papphoṭetvā atiharitvā yathāpaññattaṃ paññāpetabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) vuttaṃ punapaññāpane vattaṃnāma.
147.Paribhojanīyapānīya-vaccappassāvaṭhānisū: Here, if there is no drinking water, drinking water should be provided. If there is no food, food should be provided. If the toilet is untidy, the toilet should be swept. Likewise, such vattaṃ should be practiced in the urinal, is the meaning. "When cleaning the monastery, first the bowl and robe should be taken out and placed to one side"—that which is stated in this way is called vattaṃ concerning cleaning the monastery. "Having aired the ground covering, having cleaned it, having shaken it, having beaten it, having spread it out properly"—that which is stated in this way (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) is called vattaṃ concerning re-spreading.
148.Idāni vihāraṃ sodhentena evaṃ sodhetabbanti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘na papphoṭeyyā’’tiādimāha. Tassattho – vihāraṃ sodhento bhikkhu bhūmattharaṇādisayanāsanaṃ paṭivāte vā paṅgaṇe vā pānīyasāmantā vā na papphoṭeyyāti.Paṅgaṇeti bahūnaṃ sannipāte ṭhāne.
148.Now, to show that when cleaning the monastery, one should clean it in this way, he said "na papphoṭeyyā" [one should not flap it] and so on. Its meaning is: a bhikkhu cleaning the monastery should not flap the ground covering and so on, the bedding, or seat in the path of the wind, or in the courtyard, or near the drinking water. Paṅgaṇe: at a place where many gather.
149.Nhāneti ‘‘sace upajjhāyo nahāyitukāmo hoti, nahānaṃ paṭiyādetabbaṃ. Sace sītena attho hoti, sītaṃ paṭiyādetabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 66; cūḷava. 376) vuttaṃnahāne vattaṃnāma, ‘‘upajjhāyassa gattato udakaṃ sammajjitabbaṃ, nivāsanaṃ dātabba’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 66; cūḷava. 376) vuttaṃnahātassa kātabbaṃnāma.Raṅgapāketi ‘‘sace upajjhāyassa ācariyassa rajanaṃ pacitabbaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena antevāsikena pacitabba’’nti (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) vuttaṃ.Dhovaneti ‘‘sace upajjhāyassa ācariyassa cīvaraṃ dhovitabbaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena antevāsikena dhovitabbaṃ, ussukkaṃ vā kātabba’’nti (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) vuttaṃ.Sibbaneti ‘‘sace upajjhāyena ācariyena cīvaraṃ kātabbaṃ hoti, saddhivihārikena antevāsikena kātabba’’nti (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) vuttaṃ. Cīvare theve ṭhite rajanto na vaje na pakkameyyāti attho. ‘‘Cīvaraṃ rajantena sādhukaṃ samparivattakaṃ samparivattakaṃ rajitabbaṃ, na ca acchinne theve pakkamitabba’’nti (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380) hi vuttaṃ.
149.Nhāne: "If the preceptor wants to bathe, the bathing place should be prepared. If he needs cold water, cold water should be prepared" (mahāva. 66; cūḷava. 376)—that which is stated in this way is called vattaṃ concerning bathing; "Water should be wiped from the preceptor's body, the lower robe should be given" (mahāva. 66; cūḷava. 376)—that which is stated in this way is called what should be done for one who has bathed. Raṅgapāke: "If the preceptor or teacher needs to have dye cooked, it should be cooked by the pupil or student" (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380)—that which is stated in this way. Dhovane: "If the preceptor or teacher needs to have a robe washed, it should be washed by the pupil or student, or effort should be made" (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380)—that which is stated in this way. Sibbane: "If the preceptor or teacher needs to have a robe made, it should be made by the pupil or student" (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380)—that which is stated in this way. When the dye is standing in the trough, he should not leave without coloring, is the meaning. "When dyeing the robe, it should be dyed well, turning it around and around; and one should not leave when the trough is not finished" (mahāva. 66, 78; cūḷava. 376, 380)—for it was stated.
150.Ekaccassāti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ visabhāgassa anatthakāmassa veripuggalassa.Anāpucchāti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ anārocetvā.Kiñcananti yaṃ kiñci.
150.Ekaccassā: of a teacher or preceptor who is dissimilar, who does not desire benefit, who is a hostile person. Anāpucchā: without informing the teacher or preceptor. Kiñcana: anything whatsoever.
151-2.Tassāti ekaccassa.Ninnetunti nīharituṃ.Kiccayaṃ parikammaṃ vāti veyyāvaccaṃ vā piṭṭhiparikammādiparikammaṃ vā attanā tassa kātuṃ vā tena attano kārāpetuṃ vāti evamattho veditabbo.
151-2.Tassā: of that certain person. Ninnetuṃ: to take out. Kiccayaṃ parikammaṃ vā: either service or tending, such as service or back-rubbing; this meaning should be understood as either doing it himself for him or causing him to do it for himself.
153.Sace ācariyupajjhāyā aññattha gatā honti, pariveṇaṃ gantvā apassantehi gāmaṃ pavisituṃ vaṭṭati. Gāmaṃ pavisanto sace passati, āpucchitabbamevāti vadanti. ‘‘Upajjhāyaṃ anāpucchā na disā pakkamitabbā’’ti (mahāva. 66, cūḷava. 376) hi vuttaṃ. Attanokiccayaṃnāma antovihārepi attano pattapacanacīvarakammakesacchedanādi.
153.If the teachers or preceptors have gone elsewhere, it is permissible to enter the village not seeing them, having gone to the enclosure. If he sees them when entering the village, he must ask permission, they say. For it was stated, "Without asking permission of the preceptor, one should not depart in any direction" (mahāva. 66, cūḷava. 376). Kiccayaṃ of oneself is called even within the monastery, one's own work of cooking food in the bowl, robe-making, hair-cutting, and so on.
154.Saṅghāyattakammānināma parivāsamānattaabbhānatajjanīyaniyassapabbājanīyapaṭisāraṇīyaukkhepanādayo.
154.Saṅghāyattakammāni are called parivāsa, mānatta, abbhāna, tajjanīya, niyassa, pabbājanīya, paṭisāraṇīya, ukkhepana, and so on.
155.Vuṭṭhānaṃ nesamāgameti ‘‘sace upajjhāyo vā ācariyo vā gilāno hoti, yāvajīvaṃ upaṭṭhātabbo, vuṭṭhānamassa āgametabba’’nti (mahāva. 66; cūḷava. 376) hi vuttaṃ. Upajjhācariyavattavinicchayo.
155.Vuṭṭhānaṃ nesamāgame: "If the preceptor or teacher is ill, he should be attended to as long as he lives, and his recovery should be awaited" (mahāva. 66; cūḷava. 376)—for it was stated. The decision on the duties to the preceptor and teacher.
Upajjhācariyavattaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Section on the Duties to the Preceptor and Teacher is Finished.
16. Vaccappassāvaṭṭhānikaniddesavaṇṇanā
16. The Commentary on the Section on the Toilet and Urinal
156.Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ na kareyya vaccanti sambandho. Yathānupubbiyā labbhatīti sambandho. Imesu pana tīsu ṭhānesu yo yo paṭhamaṃ āgacchati vuḍḍho vā navo vā, so so āgatapaṭipāṭiyā kātuñca nahāyituñca labbhatīti adhippāyo.
156.Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ na kareyya vaccanti [one should not relieve oneself according to seniority] is the connection. Yathānupubbiyā labbhatīti [it is obtained in sequence] is the connection. But in these three places, whoever comes first, whether senior or junior, each is allowed to do it and bathe in the order of arrival, is the meaning.
157.Ubbhajitvāti (cūḷava. 373, 374) nivāsanaṃ dūratova ukkhipitvā no paviseyya. Sahasā ca no paviseyyāti sambandho. ‘‘Bahi ṭhitena ukkāsitabba’’nti ca ‘‘sādhukaṃ ataramānena vaccakuṭi pavisitabbā’’ti ca vuttattā ukkāsitvāva ataramāno paviseyyāti attho. ‘‘Na ubbhajitvā pavisitabbā, vaccapādukāya ṭhitena ubbhajitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 374) vacanato‘‘ubbhajeyya pādukāsveva saṇṭhito’’ti vuttaṃ.
157.Ubbhajitvā: (cūḷava. 373, 374) having lifted up the lower robe from afar, one should not enter. And one should not enter suddenly, is the connection. Since it was stated, "Having stood outside, one should cough," and "The toilet should be entered carefully, not rushing," having coughed, he should enter without rushing, is the meaning. Because of the statement, "It should not be entered having lifted up the robe; it should be lifted up standing in the toilet sandals" (cūḷava. 374), "ubbhajeyya pādukāsveva saṇṭhito" [he should lift up the robe while standing on the sandals] was said.
158.Na kareyya ubhayaṃna kareyyubhayaṃ.
158.Na kareyya ubhayaṃ, na kareyyubhayaṃ [one should not do both, one should not do both].
159.Kūpeti (cūḷava. 374) vaccakūpe.Kaṭṭhanti avalekhanakaṭṭhaṃ. Passāvadoṇiyā kheḷaṃ na kātabbanti attho.Nāvalekheyya pharusenāti phālitakaṭṭhena vā kharena vā gaṇṭhikena vā kaṇṭakena vā susirena vā pūtinā vā nāvalekhitabbanti attho.Uhatañcāpīti gūthamakkhitampi dhovaye attanā vā parena vā katanti adhippāyo.
159.Kūpe: (cūḷava. 374) in the toilet pit. Kaṭṭhaṃ: the cleaning stick. One should not spit phlegm in the urinal trough, is the meaning. Nāvalekheyya pharusenā: one should not scrape with split wood, or with a rough or knotted piece of wood, or with a thorn, or with a hollow or rotten piece of wood, is the meaning. Uhatañcāpī: even if it is smeared with excrement, he should wash it, whether done by himself or by another, is the meaning.
160.Ubbhajitvā na nikkhameti ettha ‘‘vaccapādukāya ṭhitena paṭicchādetabba’’nti (cūḷava. 374) hi vuttaṃ, puna ‘‘ācamanapādukāyaṃ ṭhitena ubbhajitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 374) ca vuttaṃ. ‘‘Capu capū’’ti saddaṃ katvā nācameyyāti attho. Vaccappassāvaṭṭhānikavinicchayo.
160.Ubbhajitvā na nikkhame: Here, "Having stood in the toilet sandals, it should be covered" (cūḷava. 374)—for it was stated, and again it was stated, "Having stood in the washing sandals, it should be lifted up" (cūḷava. 374). He should not wash making a "chapu chapū" sound, is the meaning. The decision on the toilet and urinal.
Vaccappassāvaṭṭhānikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Section on the Toilet and Urinal is Finished.
17. Āpucchakaraṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
17. The Commentary on the Section on Asking Permission
161.Therenāti saṅghattherena.
161.Therenā: by the Sangha elder.
162.Tattha tattha sannipatitānaṃ sabbesaṃ vuḍḍho vuḍḍhataro, tasmiṃvuḍḍhatarāgamepuna āpucchanaṃ natthi.Bhattagge cānumodatoti ettha dānapatinā yācitena daharena vuḍḍhena anāpucchitvā kathetuṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti.
162.Among all those gathered there, the senior is the most senior; in vuḍḍhatarāgame [the arrival of the most senior] there is no further asking of permission. Bhattagge cānumodato: Here, if requested by the donor, a junior is allowed to speak without asking permission of a senior, they say.
163.Ekavihāraketi ekovarake vuḍḍhena vasanto anāpucchā na sajjhāyeyyāti attho.Uddesaṃ paripucchañca no dadeti uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā no dadeyya.
163.Ekavihārake: living in the same dwelling, a senior should not recite without asking permission, is the meaning. Uddesaṃ paripucchañca no dade: he should not give the lesson or the question.
164.Na vivareyya na thakeyya cāti sambandho. Dvāraṃ nāma mahāvaḷañjaṃ, tattha āpucchanakiccaṃ natthi.
164.Na vivareyya na thakeyya cāti [one should not open, and one should not block] is the connection. Dvāraṃ [door] is called the large valve; there is no need for asking permission there.
165.Vuḍḍhena caṅkame caṅkamantopi yena vuḍḍho, tena parivattayeti sambandho. Āpucchakaraṇavinicchayo.
165.Even while walking on the walkway, the senior should turn around towards the one who is senior to him, is the connection. The decision on asking permission.
Āpucchakaraṇaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Section on Asking Permission is Finished.
18. Nagganiddesavaṇṇanā
18. The Section on Nudity
166.‘‘Na tveva naggena āgantabbaṃ, yo āgaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 517) vuttattā (cūḷava. 261;)‘‘naggo maggaṃ na vaje’’ti vuttaṃ.
166.Because it was stated, "One should certainly not come naked; whoever should come, there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (pārā. 517) (cūḷava. 261;), "naggo maggaṃ na vaje" [one should not go on the road naked] was stated.
167.Paṭicchādisūti ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhikkhū jantāgharepi udakepi parikammaṃ kātuṃ kukkuccāyanti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tisso paṭicchādiyo jantāgharappaṭicchādiṃ udakappaṭicchādiṃ vatthappaṭicchādi’’nti evaṃ vuttāsu tīsu paṭicchādīsūti attho.Duveti etāsu tīsu paṭicchādīsu udakajantāgharappaṭicchādiyo parikamme kappantīti adhippāyo.Vatthacchādīti vatthappaṭicchādi.Sabbatthāti khādanīyasāyanīyādīsu sabbakammesu kappiyāti attho. Naggavinicchayo.
167.Paṭicchādisū: "At that time, bhikkhus were scrupulous about doing bodily practices even in the bathhouse and in the water. I allow, monks, three coverings: a bathhouse covering, a water covering, and a cloth covering"—the meaning is in these three coverings that were stated in this way. Duve: among these three coverings, the water and bathhouse coverings are suitable for bodily practices, is the meaning. Vatthacchādī: the cloth covering. Sabbatthā: it is suitable in all activities, such as edibles and savorables, is the meaning. The decision on nudity.
Nagganiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Section on Nudity is Finished.
19. Nhānakappaniddesavaṇṇanā
19. The Section on the Permissibility of Bathing
168.Puratoti (cūḷava. 372) therānaṃ purato upari vā na ca nhāyeyyāti attho.
168.Purato: (cūḷava. 372) he should not bathe in front of the elders, or above them, is the meaning.
169-171.Kuṭṭatthambhataruṭṭāneti ettha (cūḷava. 243; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 243) kuṭṭe vā thambhe vā tarumhi vā aṭṭānaphalake vā kāyaṃ na ghaṃsayeti attho.Gandhabbahatthonāma makkaṭahatthasadiso dāruādimayo.Kuruvindakasuttiyāti kuruvindasuttiyā. Mallakena vā aññamaññaṃ vā. ‘‘Na bhikkhave viggayha parikammaṃ kārāpetabbaṃ. Yo kārāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 243) evaṃ vuttaṃ viggahaparikammaṃ sandhāya‘‘aññamaññaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
169-171.Kuṭṭatthambhataruṭṭāne: Here (cūḷava. 243; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 243), he should not rub the body on the wall, pillar, tree, or rubbing-plank. Gandhabbahattho is the name of a wooden or other kind of hand-like device similar to a monkey's hand. Kuruvindakasuttiyā: with a kuruvindaka cloth. Either with a pot or mutually. "Na bhikkhave viggayha parikammaṃ kārāpetabbaṃ. Yo kārāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" ["Monks, bodily practices should not be done contentiously. Whoever should do it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa"] (cūḷava. 243)—having in mind bodily practices done contentiously, "aññamaññaṃ vā" [or mutually] was said.
‘‘kapāliṭṭhakakhaṇḍānī’’tiādimāha. Sabbesaṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Gilānassapi (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 243) agilānassapi imāni kapāliṭṭhakakhaṇḍādīni kāyaghaṃsane vaṭṭanti.Puthupāṇīti (cūḷava. 244) hatthaparikammaṃ vuccati. Tasmā sabbesaṃ hatthena piṭṭhiparikammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Akatamallakaṃnāma ekadāṭhimaṃ paricchinditvā kataṃ. Pāsāṇādayo pādaghaṃsane eva kappiyā. Nhānakappavinicchayo.
"kapāliṭṭhakakhaṇḍānī" [potsherds, brick fragments] and so on was said. It is suitable for everyone, is the connection. These potsherds, brick fragments, and so on are suitable for rubbing the body for both the sick (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 243) and the healthy. Puthupāṇī: (cūḷava. 244) refers to hand massage. Therefore, it is suitable for everyone to do back massage with the hand. Akatamallakaṃ: is called having cut off one tusk and made it. Stones and so on are only suitable for rubbing the feet. The decision on the permissibility of bathing.
Nhānakappaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Section on the Permissibility of Bathing is Finished.
20. Avandiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
20. The Section on Non-Veneration
172.‘‘Nānāsaṃvāsako vuḍḍhataro adhammavādī avandiyo’’ti (cūḷava. 312; pari. 467) evaṃ vuttattā laddhinānāsaṃvāsako idhanānāsaṃvāsako. Pārivāsiyamūlāyapaṭikassanārahamānattārahamānattacāriabbhānārahāgarukaṭṭhāti idha gahitā. Ime pana aññamaññaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vandanādīni labhanti, pakatattena avandanīyāti adhippāyo. Avandanīyavinicchayo.
172.Because it was stated, "A senior of different association who is a speaker of what is not the Dhamma is not to be venerated" (cūḷava. 312; pari. 467), a person of different association by conviction is here nānāsaṃvāsako. Those who are not worthy of parivāsa, of being drawn back to the root, worthy of mānatta, practicing mānatta, not worthy of abbhāna are here taken as garukaṭṭhā. But these obtain the duties of veneration and so on from each other according to seniority; they are not to be venerated due to their condition, is the meaning. The decision on who is not to be venerated.
Avandiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Section on Non-Veneration is Finished.
21. Cammaniddesavaṇṇanā
21. The Section on Hides
173.Idāni ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbapaccantimesu janapadesu cammāni attharaṇāni eḷakacammaṃ ajacammaṃ migacamma’’nti (mahāva. 259) evaṃ vuttacammāni dassetuṃ‘‘migājeḷakacammānī’’tiādimāha.Paribhuñjitunti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 262) mañcādīsu yattha katthaci attharitvā nipajjituṃ vā nisīdituṃ vā vaṭṭantīti attho. Rohiteṇīpasadā ca kuruṅgā ca ca-saddena aññepi vāḷamigā migamātukādayopi migajātikā evāti adhippāyo.
173.Now, to show the hides that were stated in this way, "I allow, monks, in all border regions, hides for spreading out: goat hide, sheep hide, deer hide" (mahāva. 259), he said "migājeḷakacammānī" [deer, sheep hides] and so on. Paribhuñjituṃ: (mahāva. aṭṭha. 262) it is suitable to lie down or sit down having spread it out on the bed and so on wherever, is the meaning. Roe deer, spotted deer, and kuruṅga, and with the "ca" even other wild animals, female deer, and so on are all kinds of deer, is the meaning.
174.Anuññātattayā aññanti–
174. Because it is allowed, others—
‘‘Makkaṭo kāḷasīho ca, sarabho kadalīmigo;
"Monkey, black lion, sarabha, and kadalimiga;
And whatever other wild animals there are, their hides are not allowed." –
vāḷamigaggahaṇena vuttāvasesā antamaso gomahiṃsādayo gahitāti veditabbā.Thavikāti upāhanakosakasatthakosakakuñcikakosakāti veditabbā, na pattatthavikādayo. Cammavinicchayo.
By the inclusion of wild animals, it should be understood that those remaining unmentioned, even buffalo and cattle, are included. Thavikā means coverings for shoes, knife sheaths, and key cases; not leaf-cases, etc. This is the ruling on hides.
Cammaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Hides Discourse is complete.
22. Upāhananiddesavaṇṇanā
22. Explanation of the Shoes Discourse
175.Guṇaṅguṇūpāhanāti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 245) catupaṭalato paṭṭhāya vuccati, na ekadvitipaṭalato paṭṭhāya ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ekapalāsikaṃ upāhanaṃ, na bhikkhave diguṇā upāhanā dhāretabbā, na tiguṇā upāhanā dhāretabbā, na guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā dhāretabbā, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 245) vuttattā. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, omukkaṃ guṇaṅguṇūpāhanaṃ, na bhikkhave navā guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā dhāretabbā, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 247) vuttattā‘‘navā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbatthāpi majjhimadese gilānopi navaṃ guṇaṅguṇūpāhanaṃ na labhati, ekavārampi aññehi paribhuttaṃ omukkaupāhanasaṅkhātaṃ labhati, paccantimesu janapadesu gilāno navampi labhatīti veditabbaṃ ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sabbapaccantimesu janapadesu guṇaṅguṇūpāhana’’nti (mahāva. 259) avisesena vuttattā.
175. Shoes with many layers (guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā) are said to be those starting from four layers, not from one, two, or three layers, because it was said, "I allow, monks, shoes with one layer. Shoes with two layers should not be worn, shoes with three layers should not be worn, shoes with many layers should not be worn. Whoever wears them incurs an offense of wrong-doing." (dukkaṭa) (mahāva. 245). It was said, "I allow, monks, shoes with many layers that can be removed easily (omukkaṃ guṇaṅguṇūpāhanaṃ), but new shoes with many layers should not be worn. Whoever wears them incurs an offense of wrong-doing" (mahāva. 247); hence, "new" is stated. Everywhere in the Middle Country, even a sick monk cannot obtain new shoes with many layers; he can obtain removable shoes with many layers (omukkaupāhana) that have been used by others at least once. In the border regions, even a sick monk can obtain new ones, because it was stated without distinction, "I allow, monks, shoes with many layers in all the border regions" (mahāva. 259).
Sabbassāti gilānassāpi agilānassāpīti attho. Majjhimadesepi paccantimadesepi ārāme ārāmūpacāre gilānassāpi agilānassāpi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ajjhārāme upāhanaṃ dhāretu’’nti (mahāva. 249) vuttattā kappiyanti attho.Sabbatthāti ārāmepi gāmepi.Akallakassāti gilānassa. Ettha pana majjhimadese gilānassa guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā paribhuttāva ārāmepi gāmepi vaṭṭati, paccantimadese aparibhuttāpi. Majjhimadesepi paccantimadesepi bhagavatā gilānasseva upāhanā anuññātā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yassa pādā vā dukkhā, pādā vā phalitā, pādakhilo vā ābādho, upāhanaṃ dhāretu’’nti (mahāva. 249) ca ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānena bhikkhunā saupāhanena gāmaṃ pavisitu’’nti (mahāva. 256) vuttattā ca. Majjhimadese ca gilāno navaṃ guṇaṅguṇūpāhanaṃ dhāretuṃ yadi labhati, kathaṃ padesapaññatti hotīti? Sabbattha pana bhagavatā gilānasseva upāhanā anuññātā, tasmā majjhimadese gilāno navaṃ guṇaṅguṇūpāhanaṃ labhatīti gahetabbanti vadanti.
For all means for both the sick and the healthy. In both the Middle Country and the border regions, in the monastery and in the vicinity of the monastery, for both the sick and the healthy, it is allowable because it was stated, "I allow, monks, wearing shoes within the monastery" (mahāva. 249). Everywhere means in the monastery and in the village. For one who is not well means for the sick monk. Here, however, in the Middle Country, used shoes with many layers are allowable for a sick monk in both the monastery and the village, but in the border regions, even unused ones are allowable. In both the Middle Country and the border regions, shoes are allowed by the Blessed One only for the sick, because it was said, "I allow, monks, one whose feet are painful, whose feet are cracked, or who has a disease of the foot, to wear shoes" (mahāva. 249), and "I allow, monks, a sick monk to enter the village with shoes on" (mahāva. 256). If a sick monk in the Middle Country can obtain new shoes with many layers, how can there be a regional regulation? However, everywhere shoes are allowed by the Blessed One only for the sick; therefore, it should be understood that a sick monk in the Middle Country can obtain new shoes with many layers, some say.
176-9.Sabbāva nīlakā (mahāva. 246; mahāva. aṭṭha. 246)sabbanīlakā. Esa nayo sabbatthaodātakādīsupi. Odātaṃ pana neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhittaṃ, anulomavasena pana idha paṭikkhittanti veditabbaṃ.Mahāraṅgarattāsatapadipiṭṭhivaṇṇā.Mahānāmaraṅgarattāmandarattā.Mañjeṭṭhikākaṇaverapupphavaṇṇā. Pupphalatādīhi vicittācitrā. Nīlapītādivaddhikāti etthaādi-saddena odātalohitamañjeṭṭhikamahāraṅgamahānāmaraṅgarattādivasena vaddhikā gahitā. Sīhabyagghuddājinadīpīnaṃ cammehi cāti sambandho.Kocīti gilānopi agilānopi.
176-9.All that are dark blue (mahāva. 246; mahāva. aṭṭha. 246) are completely dark blue. This method applies to all, including white, etc. However, white is neither prohibited in the Pali nor in the Commentary; it should be understood that it is prohibited here by way of implication. Deep red is the color of a centipede's back. Mahānāma red is mandaratta red. Madder-dyed is the color of a kaṇavera flower. Decorated with flower vines, etc., is variegated. Increased by dark blue, yellow, etc. here, with the word "etc.", those increased by white, red, madder-dyed, deep red, mahānāma red, etc., are included. It should be connected as "and with the hides of lions, tigers, otters, and leopards." Someone or other means both the sick and the healthy.
180.Sakalaṃ vā ekadesakaṃ vā rajanaṃ coḷena (mahāva. aṭṭha. 246) puñchitvā vaḷañjeyyāti attho. Khallakādikaṃ pana sabbaṃ hāritvā vaḷañjetabbaṃ. Upāhanavinicchayo.
180.One should wipe off all or part of the dye with a cloth (mahāva. aṭṭha. 246) and then fold it. However, all dirt and such should be removed before folding. This is the ruling on shoes.
Upāhananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Shoes Discourse is complete.
23. Anolokiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
23. Explanation of the Looking-Glass Discourse
181.Itthiyāti tadahujātāyapi dārikāya. Ādāse (cūḷava. 247) vā udakapatte vā attano mukhaṃ avalokeyya, assa dukkaṭanti sambandho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ābādhapaccayā ādāse vā udakapatte vā mukhanimittaṃ oloketu’’nti (cūḷava. 247) vuttattāvaṇādīni vā ‘‘jiṇṇo nu khomhi, no vā’’ti evaṃ āyusaṅkhāraṃ vā oloketuṃ vaṭṭati. Anolokiyavinicchayo.
181.A woman means even a girl who has just been born. If he looks at his face in a mirror (cūḷava. 247) or in a bowl of water, there is a wrong-doing (dukkaṭa), is the connection. Because it was said, "I allow, monks, due to sickness, to look at the features of the face in a mirror or in a bowl of water" (cūḷava. 247), it is allowable to look at blemishes or at one's age and condition, thinking, "Am I getting old or not?" This is the ruling on looking-glasses.
Anolokiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Looking-Glass Discourse is complete.
24. Añjanīniddesavaṇṇanā
24. Explanation of the Anointing-Tube Discourse
182.Vaṭṭā vā aṭṭhasoḷasaṃsā vā maṭṭhā pupphalatādīhi acittakā añjanī vaṭṭatīti attho.Tissopivaṭṭanti, ekāya vā dvīsu vā kathā eva natthīti adhippāyo.Lekhāti vaṭṭalekhā.Bandhitunti pidhānakabandhanatthaṃ.
182.A round or octagonal or sixteen-sided smooth anointing-tube that is undecorated with flower vines, etc., is allowable. All three are allowable; the idea is that there is no question about one or two. Lines means round lines. To tie means for tying the lid.
183.Rūpanti sakuṇarūpādi. Yadi ca edisaṃ aññehi kataṃ labhati, ghaṃsitvā vā chinditvā vā yathā vā na paññāyati, tathā suttena veṭhetvā vaḷañjetabbaṃ.
183.Form means a form of a bird, etc. If one obtains something like this made by others, one should rub it or cut it off, or wrap it with thread so that it is not recognizable, and then fold it.
184.Thavikāti añjanithavikā. Añjanisalākāpi labbhatīti sambandho.
184.Thavikā means an anointing-tube container. An anointing-stick can also be obtained, is the connection.
185-6.Aṭṭhīti (mahāva. 266; mahāva. aṭṭha. 264) manussaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṭṭhi. Visāṇadantesu akappiyaṃ nāma natthi. Āmalakakakkādīhi katāphalamayā. Tammayāti idha vutteheva nibbattā. Añjanīvinicchayo.
185-6.Bones (mahāva. 266; mahāva. aṭṭha. 264) means bones other than human bones. There is nothing impermissible among ivory and teeth. Made of fruit means made of āmalaka, kakka, etc. Made of that means made of the things mentioned here. This is the ruling on anointing-tubes.
Añjanīniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Anointing-Tube Discourse is complete.
25. Akappiyasayananiddesavaṇṇanā
25. Explanation of the Impermissible Bed Discourse
187-9.‘‘Uccako āsandiko uppanno hoti, anujānāmi bhikkhave uccakampi āsandika’’nti (cūḷava. 297) vacanato mañcassa upaḍḍhabhāgappamāṇena ekatobhāgena dīghampi sugataṅgulena atirekaṭṭhaṅgulapādakaṃ idhaāsandīti adhippetaṃ, caturaṃsāsandiko pana pamāṇātikkantakopi vaṭṭati.Tūlīti pakatitūlikā.Pallaṅkonāma āharimehi vāḷehi katoti vutto. Tattheva ‘‘sīharūpādiṃ dassetvā kato pana vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti.Paṭikanti setattharaṇaṃ.Gonacittakanti ettha caturaṅgulādhikalomo kojavo‘‘gonako’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kojava’’nti (mahāva. 337)cīvarakkhandhakevuttattā caturaṅgulalomakaṃ pakatikojavaṃ vaṭṭati. Ratanacittaṃ cittakaṃ na vaṭṭati.Paṭalīti ghanapuppharattaattharaṇaṃ.Vikatīti sīhabyagghādirūpavicitto uṇṇāmayattharaṇako.Uddalomīti ekatouggatapupphaṃ.Ekantalomikāti ubhatouggatapupphaṃ.
187-9.Because of the statement, "A high chair has arisen; I allow, monks, even a high chair" (cūḷava. 297), a seat that is half the size of a bed and long on one side, with legs more than eight fingerbreadths long by the Sugata's finger measurement, is here intended as a chair (āsandī); however, a square chair, even if it exceeds the prescribed measure, is allowable. Tūlī means a natural cotton mattress. A couch (pallaṅko) is said to be one made with imported reeds. There, some say, "However, one made showing the form of a lion, etc., is allowable." Paṭika means a white covering. Here, in Gonacittaka, a kojavo with hair more than four fingerbreadths long is called "gonako." Because it was stated, "I allow, monks, a kojava" (mahāva. 337) in the section on robes (cīvarakkhandhake), a natural kojava with hair four fingerbreadths long is allowable. A jewel-figured figured-cloth is not allowable. Paṭalī means a dense flower-red covering. Vikatī means a woolen covering decorated with various forms of lions, tigers, etc. Uddalomī means with flowers raised on one side. Ekantalomikā means with flowers raised on both sides.
Kuttanti soḷasannaṃ nāṭakitthīnaṃ ṭhatvā naccanayoggaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ.Koseyyanti ratanaparisibbitaṃ koseyyasuttamayaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ.Kaṭṭissanti ratanaparisibbitaṃ koseyyakaṭṭissamayaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ. Koseyyañca kaṭṭissañca ratanaparisibbitāneva na vaṭṭanti, suddhāni vaṭṭanti.Hatthiassarathattharātesaṃ upari attharaṇakaattharaṇāva.Ajinappaveṇīti ajinacammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇī, tena ca kadalīmigacammaṃ setavatthassa upari pattharitvā sibbitvā kataṃ pavarappaccattharaṇaṃ kadalīmigappavarappaccattharaṇaṃ, tena ca atthataṃajinappaveṇīkadalīmigappavarappaccattharaṇatthataṃ.
Kutta means a woolen covering suitable for sixteen dancing girls to stand and dance on. Koseyya means a spread made of silk threads embroidered with jewels. Kaṭṭissa means a spread made of koseyya-kaṭṭissa embroidered with jewels. Koseyya and kaṭṭissa are not allowable only when embroidered with jewels; plain ones are allowable. Hatthiassarathattharā are coverings spread over elephants, horses, and chariots. Ajinappaveṇī means a mat made by sewing together hides to the size of a bed; a fine spread made by spreading a kadalimiga hide over a white cloth and sewing it together, is a kadalimiga fine spread, and being spread with that, it is covered with a hide mat and a kadalimiga fine spread.
Setavitānampi heṭṭhā akappiyappaccattharaṇe sati na vaṭṭati, kappiyappaccattharaṇe sati vaṭṭati, rattavitānassa heṭṭhā kappiyappaccattharaṇe satipi na vaṭṭati eva. Sīsūpadhānaṃ pādūpadhānanti mañcassa ubhatolohitakaṃ upadhānaṃ na vaṭṭati. Yaṃ pana ekameva upadhānaṃ hoti, ubhosu antesu rattaṃ vā padumavaṇṇaṃ vā cittaṃ vā, sace pamāṇayuttaṃ, vaṭṭati, mahāupadhānaṃ pana paṭikkhittaṃ.
Even a white canopy is not allowable if there is an impermissible spread underneath; it is allowable if there is a permissible spread. A red canopy is not allowable even if there is a permissible spread underneath. A head cushion and a foot cushion mean cushions on both ends of the bed that are red are not allowable. However, if there is only one cushion, with red or lotus-colored figures or designs on both ends, if it is of the proper size, it is allowable, but a large cushion is prohibited.
190.Āsandādittayāti āsandī tūlī pallaṅkoti idaṃ tayaṃ nāmaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ṭhapetvā tīṇi āsandiṃ pallaṅkaṃ tūlikaṃ sesakaṃ gihivikaṭaṃ abhinisīdituṃ, na tveva abhinipajjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 314) hi vuttaṃ. Sese gihisantake nisīdituṃ labbhatīti attho. Yadi dhammāsane saṅghikampi gonakādiṃ bhikkhūhi anāṇattā ārāmikādayo sayameva paññapenti ceva nīharanti ca, etaṃgihivikaṭanīhāraṃnāma, iminā gihivikaṭanīhārena vaṭṭati.Bhattaggaṃnāma vihāre eva dānaṭṭhānaṃ.
190.The triad, beginning with chairs means the three names: chair, mattress, and couch. Indeed, it was said, "I allow, monks, having set aside these three—a chair, a couch, and a mattress—to sit, but certainly not to lie down, on the remaining property of laypeople" (cūḷava. 314). The meaning is that it is permissible to sit on the property of laypeople that remains. If, on a seat for the Dhamma, even a monastery attendant or others place and remove a gonaka etc., belonging to the Saṅgha, on their own without being instructed by the monks, this is called removal of what belongs to laypeople; it is allowable by this removal of what belongs to laypeople. Bhattagga means the place for giving alms within the monastery.
191.Catunnaṃ pādānaṃ, tīsu passesu apassayānañca vasenasattaṅgo. Ekapassena yuttopañcaṅgo. Ime pana sattaṅgapañcaṅgā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, uccakampi sattaṅga’’nti (cūḷava. 294) vuttattā pamāṇātikkantāpi vaṭṭanti. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘uccapādakā’’ti. Tūlonaddhā mañcapīṭhā ghareyeva nisīdituṃ kappantīti sambandho.
191.With four legs and support on three sides, it is seven-membered. Endowed with support on one side, it is five-membered. However, these seven-membered and five-membered ones, even if they exceed the prescribed measure, are allowable because it was said, "I allow, monks, even a high seven-membered one" (cūḷava. 294). Therefore, it was said "with high legs." A bed or seat stuffed with cotton is allowable only for sitting in a house, is the connection.
192.Cīvaracchaviyoti channaṃ cīvarānaṃ, channaṃ anulomacīvarānañca aññataracīvaracchaviyoti attho.Sabbatthāti mañcepi pīṭhepi bhattaggepi antaragharepīti attho. Imāsaṃ pana bhisīnaṃ pamāṇaparicchedopi natthi, mañcapīṭhādīnaṃ vasena anurūpaṃ sallakkhetvā pamāṇaṃ kātabbaṃ.
192.Cloth-covers for robes means cloth-covers for any of the six robes or the six allowable robes. Everywhere means on the bed, on the seat, in the dining hall, and inside the house. However, there is no prescribed measure for these mats; a suitable measure should be determined in accordance with the bed, seat, etc.
193.‘‘Tūlikā uppannā hoti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vijaṭetvā bimbohanaṃ kātuṃ, tīṇi tūlāni rukkhatūlaṃ latātūlaṃ poṭakitūla’’nti (cūḷava. 297) vuttattā tūlattayañca (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. tūlonandasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) bimbohane vaṭṭati. Imehi tīhi tūlehi sabbesaṃ rukkhalatātiṇānaṃ tūlaṃ anuññātanti veditabbaṃ. Bhisiyaṃ pana kiñci tūlaṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva.Bhisigabbhoti bhisiyā vuttaṃ coḷādipañcakaṃ bimbohane anuññātanti sambandho.Migapakkhinanti sīhādīnaṃ sabbacatuppadānaṃ haṃsamorādīnaṃ sabbapakkhīnaṃ lomāni kappanti. Masūrake anuññātanti sambandho.
193.Because it was said, "A mattress has arisen. I allow, monks, having carded the cotton, to make stuffing. These three kinds of cotton—tree cotton, vine cotton, and poṭaki cotton" (cūḷava. 297), these three kinds of cotton (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. tūlonandasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) are allowable for stuffing. It should be understood that with these three kinds of cotton, the cotton of all trees, vines, and grasses is allowed. However, no cotton at all is allowable in a mat. Bhisigabbho means that the five things beginning with cloth, which were mentioned for the mat, are allowable for stuffing, is the connection. Animals and birds means the fur of all quadrupeds, such as lions, and the feathers of all birds, such as geese and peacocks, are allowable. It should be connected as "is allowable for stuffing."
194.Idāni bhisiyaṃ kappiyākappiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘manussaloma’’ntiādimāha.Uṇṇāyanti (cūḷava. 297; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297) uṇṇābhisiyaṃ manussalomaṃ na labbhatīti attho. Uṇṇābhisiyampi manussalomaṃ ṭhapetvā yesaṃ kesañci pakkhicatuppadānaṃ lomaṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.Paṇṇeti paṇṇabhisiyañca pupphañca suddhaṃ tamālapattañca na labbhaṃ, avasesaṃ yaṃ kiñci paṇṇaṃ labbhatīti attho. Tamālapattakampi aññehi missaṃ vaṭṭatīti. Coḷavākatiṇesu akappiyaṃ nāma natthi.Āsanañceva appaṭivekkhitaṃ na labbhanti āsanasāmaññato pasaṅgena vuttaṃ. Akappiyasayanavinicchayo.
194.Now, in order to show what is allowable and unallowable in a mat, he said, "Human hair," etc. Uṇṇāya (cūḷava. 297; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297) means that human hair is not allowable in a woolen mat. It means that in a woolen mat, the fur of any bird or quadruped whatsoever is allowable, except for human hair. Paṇṇe means that in a leaf mat, pure tamāla leaves and flowers are not obtainable, but any other kind of leaf is obtainable. Even tamāla leaves mixed with other things are allowable. There is nothing impermissible in cloth, bark, and grass. And a seat that has not been inspected is not obtainable is said in connection with the general term "seat." This is the ruling on impermissible beds.
Akappiyasayananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Impermissible Bed Discourse is complete.
26. Samānāsanikaniddesavaṇṇanā
26. Explanation of the Equal Seating Discourse
195.Tiṇṇaṃ vassānaṃ antaraṃtivassantaraṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tivassantarena saha nisīditu’’nti (cūḷava. 320) hi vuttaṃ. Yo dvīhi vassehi (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320) vuḍḍho vā navo vā, so tivassantaro nāma.
195.An interval of three years is a three-year interval. Indeed, it was said, "I allow, monks, to sit together after an interval of three years" (cūḷava. 320). One who is older or newer by two years (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320) is called a "three-year interval."
196.Munīti buddhamuni.Sabbehevāti anupasampannehipi.
196.Muni means the Buddha Muni. With all means even with those who are not fully ordained.
197.Antanti pacchimaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pahoti, ettakaṃ pacchimaṃ dīghāsana’’nti (cūḷava. 320) vuttattā yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pahoti, etaṃ saṃhārimaṃ vā hotu asaṃhārimaṃ vā, tathārūpesu phalakakhaṇḍesupi nisīdituṃ vaṭṭati.Dvinnanti dvinnaṃ samānāsanikānaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, duvaggassa mañcaṃ duvaggassa pīṭha’’nti (cuḷava. 320) vuttattā dve samānāsanikā saha nisīdituṃ labhanti. Aññehi asamānāsanikehi, anupasampannādīhi vā dve hutvāpi nisīdituṃ na labhanti. Samānāsanikavinicchayo.
197.End means the farthest end. Because it was said, "I allow, monks, a long seat at the far end that suffices for three" (cūḷava. 320), it is allowable to sit even on pieces of wood of that kind that are removable or irremovable, if it suffices for three. Of two means of two who are equally seated. Because it was said, "I allow, monks, a bed for two, a seat for two" (cuḷava. 320), two who are equally seated are able to sit together. Two who are not equally seated, or even two who are not fully ordained, etc., are not able to sit together. This is the ruling on equal seating.
Samānāsanikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Equal Seating Discourse is complete.
27. Asaṃvāsikaniddesavaṇṇanā
27. Explanation of the Section on Non-Association
198.Ukkhittoti āpattiyā adassane, appaṭikamme, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge vā ukkhittakoti tividhopi idha ukkhitto gahito.Anupasampannoti iminā sikkhamānasāmaṇerasāmaṇerīsikkhāpaccakkhātakā gahitāti veditabbā.Chinnamūlakonāma antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpannako.Nānāsaṃvāsoti laddhinānāsaṃvāsako. ‘‘Nānāsīmāya ṭhitacatuttho kammaṃ kareyya, iddhiyā vehāse ṭhitacatuttho kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’nti hi vuttattā imepi ‘‘asaṃvāsikā’’ti vuttā. Etesu pana ukkhittakehi saddhiṃ uposathādīni karonto pācittiyaṃ āpajjati. Nissīmaṭṭhavehāsaṭṭhehi karontassa kammaṃ kuppati, dukkaṭañca hoti, itarehi dukkaṭaṃ. Asaṃvāsikavinicchayo.
198. Ukkhitto: Here, ukkhitto is taken to mean any of the three types of ukkhitto: one who has been suspended for not admitting an offense, for not making amends, or for not relinquishing a wrong view. Anupasampanno: With this term, it should be understood that sikkhamānās, sāmaṇeras, sāmaṇerīs, and those who have renounced the training are included. Chinnamūlako means one who has fallen into the final ground (of defeat). Nānāsaṃvāso: is one who has a different association in terms of doctrine. Because it was said, "If a fourth person standing outside the boundary were to perform the act, or if a fourth person standing in the sky by means of psychic power were to perform the act, it is not an act and should not be done," these, too, are called "non-associates." However, one who performs Uposatha, etc., with these ukkhittas incurs a pācittiya offense. For one performing an act with those standing outside the boundary or in the sky, the act is invalid and there is a dukkaṭa offense; with the others, there is a dukkaṭa offense. This is the judgment on non-associates.
Asaṃvāsikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Non-Association is complete.
28. Kammaniddesavaṇṇanā
28. Explanation of the Section on Acts
199.Adhammakammanti ettha kathaṃ adhammakammaṃ hotīti ce? Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘katamañca, bhikkhave, adhammakammaṃ? Ñattidutiye ce, bhikkhave, kamme ekāya ñattiyā kammaṃ karoti, na ca kammavācaṃ anussāveti, adhammakammaṃ. Dvīhi ñattīhi kammaṃ karoti, na ca kammavācaṃ anussāveti, adhammakammaṃ. Ekāya kammavācāya kammaṃ karoti, na ca ñattiṃ ṭhapeti, adhammakammaṃ. Dvīhi kammavācāhi kammaṃ karoti, na ca ñattiṃ ṭhapeti, adhammakamma’’nti (mahāva. 387). Iminā nayena sesakammesupi vuttappakārena akatvā aññathā karaṇaṃ adhammakammanti veditabbaṃ.
199. Adhammakamma: Here, how does an act become an adhammakamma? This was stated by the Blessed One: "And what, monks, is an adhammakamma? If, monks, in a ñattidutiya act, one performs the act with one motion of announcement (ñatti) and does not recite the announcement of the act (kammavācā), it is an adhammakamma. If one performs the act with two motions of announcement and does not recite the announcement of the act, it is an adhammakamma. If one performs the act with one recital of the act and does not establish the motion of announcement, it is an adhammakamma. If one performs the act with two recitals of the act and does not establish the motion of announcement, it is an adhammakamma" (mahāva. 387). In this way, it should be understood that in the remaining acts as well, doing them differently instead of in the manner described is an adhammakamma.
Vaggenāti vaggena saṅghena. Kathañca vaggaṃ hotīti ce? Yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā, te anāgatā honti, chandārahānaṃ chando anāhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā paṭikkosanti, vaggakammanti imesu yena kenaci ekenapi aṅgena vaggaṃ hoti.
Vaggena: By a divided Sangha. And how is it divided? It is divided if as many monks as are eligible to participate in the act are absent, or the consent of those entitled to give consent has not been obtained, or those present object. In these cases, it is divided by any one of these factors.
Samaggenāti samaggena saṅghena. Kathaṃ samaggaṃ hotīti ce? Yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā, te āgatā honti, chandārahānaṃ chando āhaṭo hoti, sammukhībhūtā nappaṭikkosanti, samaggakammanti evaṃ.
Samaggena: By a united Sangha. And how is it united? It is united if as many monks as are eligible to participate in the act are present, or the consent of those entitled to give consent has been obtained, and those present do not object. Thus, it is a united act.
Catutthanti samaggena dhammikaṃ. Ettāvatā ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, kammāni, adhammena vaggakammaṃ, adhammena samaggakammaṃ, dhammena vaggakammaṃ, dhammena samaggakamma’’nti (mahāva. 384) evaṃ vuttāni cattāri kammāni pariggahitāni hontīti veditabbāni.
Catuttha: Unitedly, according to the Dhamma. Thus, it should be understood that the four acts that were stated, "These four acts, monks, are: an adhamma act by a divided Sangha, an adhamma act by a united Sangha, a dhamma act by a divided Sangha, a dhamma act by a united Sangha" (mahāva. 384), are included.
200-202.Dasavaggiko (mahāva. 388; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā) vīsativaggiko cadasavīsativaggiko. Abbhānopasampadāppavāraṇā ṭhapetvā sabbakammesu kammappattoti sambandho. Evaṃ sesesupi.Itaroti vīsativaggo ca atirekavīsativaggo ca.
200-202.Dasavīsativaggiko: of ten or twenty. The connection is that it is valid for all acts, except for the acceptance-ordination (abbhānopasampadā) and invitation (pavāraṇā), for which more are required. The same method applies to the remaining cases as well. Itaro: The other is of twenty or more than twenty.
203.Idāni kammappatte ca chandārahe ca dassetuṃ‘‘catuvaggenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha (pari. 488, 497; pari. 487-488)pakatattānāma ye pārājikaukkhittaladdhinānāsaṃvāsakā na honti.Pareti ekasīmaṭṭhā pakatattā bhikkhū. Yadi pakatattā bhikkhūpi aññataraṃ gāmasīmaṃ vā nadīsamuddajātassarakhaṇḍasīmāsu vā aññataraṃ pavisitvā ṭhitā honti, neva kammappattā, na chandārahā. Na hi tesaṃ chando vā pārisuddhi vā āgacchati aññasīmāyaṃ ṭhitattā.Sesepīti pañcavaggādikaraṇīyepīti attho.
203.Now, in order to show who are eligible to participate in the act and who are entitled to give consent, ‘‘catuvaggenā’’ etc., was stated. There, pakatattā means those who are not defeated (pārājika), suspended (ukkhitta), or having different doctrines or different associations. Pare: the monks who are of normal status (pakatattā) and residing within the same boundary. If even monks of normal status are residing having entered another village boundary, or another boundary defined by a river, sea, naturally formed area or grove, they are neither eligible to participate in the act nor entitled to give consent. This is because their consent or declaration of purity does not reach (the assembly), since they are residing in another boundary. Sesepī: The meaning is also in the acts to be done by a group of five, etc.
204.Asaṃvāsagaṇapūraṃ vā katvā kataṃ kammaṃ kuppañca hoti, kārakānañca dukkaṭanti attho. ‘‘Yassa saṅgho kammaṃ karoti, taṃcatuttho kammaṃ kareyya, akammaṃ na ca karaṇīya’’nti (mahāva. 389) vuttattā‘‘kammārahagaṇapūraṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni parivāsādikammānaṃyeva parisato vipattiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘garukaṭṭhagaṇapūraṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tampi anikkhittavattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nikkhittavatto pana sabbattha gaṇapūrako hoti eva.
204.An act done by completing the quorum with a non-associate is invalid, and there is a dukkaṭa offense for those who perform it. Because it was said, "The fourth person related to the one for whom the Sangha is performing the act should be present, and the act should not be done if this is not so" (mahāva. 389), ‘‘kammārahagaṇapūraṃ vā’’ was stated. Now, in order to show the failure of the assembly only for parivāsa etc., ‘‘garukaṭṭhagaṇapūraṃ vā’’ was stated. That, too, was stated in reference to one who has not relinquished the duties. However, one who has relinquished the duties is always one who completes the quorum everywhere.
205.Vāreyyāti paṭikkhipeyya. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, adhammakamme kayiramāne paṭikkositu’’nti (mahāva. 154) hi vuttaṃ.Antarāyesatīti attho. ‘‘Adhammakammaṃ idaṃ, na metaṃ khamatī’’ti evaṃ dve tayo aññamaññaṃ diṭṭhiṃ āvi kareyyunti attho. Yadi eko hoti, ‘‘na metaṃ khamatī’’ti evaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ kareyyāti attho. Ettāvatā ete nirāpattikā honti, antarāyā ca muccanti, kammaṃ pana adhammattā kuppameva.Vārenteva tatodhikāti ettha ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, catūhi pañcahi paṭikkosituṃ, dvīhi tīhi diṭṭhiṃ āvi kātuṃ, ekena adhiṭṭhātuṃ, ‘‘na metaṃ khamatī’’ti (mahāva. 154) vuttattā cattāro vā pañca vā vārenti evāti attho.
205.Vāreyyā: should object. Because it was said, "I allow, monks, to object when an adhamma act is being done" (mahāva. 154), Antarāye sati: when there is an obstruction. The meaning is that two or three should reveal their view to each other, saying, "This is an adhamma act; this is not pleasing to me." If there is only one, the meaning is that they should make a determination, saying, "This is not pleasing to me." To this extent, these are free from offense and are released from the obstruction, but the act is still invalid because it is adhamma. Vārenteva tatodhikā: Here, because it was said, "I allow, monks, to object with four or five, to reveal one's view with two or three, to determine with one, 'This is not pleasing to me'" (mahāva. 154), the meaning is that four or five should object.
206.Idāni yehi paṭikkhittaṃ hoti, te dassetuṃ‘‘kammārahā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthakhittacitta-ggahaṇena ummattakopi gahitova.Etesanti ye vuttappakārā, tesaṃ paṭikkhepo na ruhatīti attho.
206.Now, in order to show who are those by whom it has been objected, ‘‘kammārahā’’ etc., was stated. There, with the inclusion of khittacitta, the insane are also included. Etesaṃ: the meaning is that the objection of those mentioned in the manner described is not valid.
207.Idāni yassa paṭikkhepo ruhati, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pakatattekasīmaṭṭha-samasaṃvāsabhikkhuno’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassattho (mahāva. 394) – evarūpassa bhikkhuno paṭikkosanā antamaso ānantarassāpi ārocentassa ruhatīti. ‘‘Bhikkhussa, bhikkhave, pakatattassa samānasaṃvāsikassa samānasīmāyaṃ ṭhitassa antamaso ānantarikassapi bhikkhuno viññāpentassa saṅghamajjhe paṭikkosanā ruhatī’’ti (mahāva. 394) vuttaṃ.
207.Now, in order to show whose objection is valid, ‘‘pakatattekasīmaṭṭha-samasaṃvāsabhikkhuno’’ was stated. The meaning of that (mahāva. 394) is that the objection of a monk of such a nature is valid, even if they are announcing to an immediate neighbor. "The objection, monks, of a monk who is of normal status (pakatatta), of the same association, residing within the same boundary, is valid, even if they are making it known to an immediate neighbor in the middle of the Sangha" (mahāva. 394).
208.Sammukhā yadi paṭikkoseyyāti attho.Tirokkhāti parammukhā. Kāyasāmaggiṃ vā chandaṃ vā no dadeyya, dukkaṭanti attho. Kammavinicchayo.
208.The meaning is if they object in person. Tirokkhā: behind one's back. They should not give bodily agreement or consent; there is a dukkaṭa offense. This is the judgment on acts.
Kammaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Acts is complete.
29. Micchājīvavivajjanāniddesavaṇṇanā
29. Explanation of the Section on Avoiding Wrong Livelihood
209.Cuṇṇanti sirīsacuṇṇādikanti attho.Mattikāti pakatimattikā vā pañcavaṇṇā vā suddhā kuṅkuṭṭhaādikā vā.Kulasaṅgahāti etehi saṅgahitānaṃ santike lābhāsāya kulasaṅgahatthanti attho. Ettha pana imehi saṅgahitānaṃ santike ‘‘kiñci labhissāmī’’ti saṅghikaṃ vā puggalikaṃ vā dātuṃ na vaṭṭati eva. Iminā pana nayena laddhaṃ pañcannampi sahadhammikānaṃ na vaṭṭati, micchājīvañca hoti.
209. Cuṇṇa: The meaning is powder of sirīsa, etc. Mattikā: The meaning is natural clay, or five-colored clay, or pure kuṅkuṭṭha, etc. Kulasaṅgahā: The meaning is intending to gain offerings from those gathered by these means. Here, it is not proper to give anything belonging to the Sangha or to an individual to those gathered by these means, intending, "I will gain something." In this way, it is not proper for any of the five co-religionists to receive what is obtained, and it becomes wrong livelihood.
210-211.Lābhāsāya dāyakānaṃ dārake ukkhipitvā paribhaṭabhāvopāribhaṭakatā,tāya pāribhaṭakatāya na jīvayeti sambandho. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Khettādīsu pesitassa gamanaṃpaheṇakammaṃ. Sāsanappaṭisāsanaharaṇaṃdūtakammaṃ. Pesitassa gehato gehagamanaṃjaṅghapesaniyaṃ. Lābhāsāya lañjadānamanuppadānaṃ. Aññena vāpīti aṅgavijjādinā.
210-211.Pāribhaṭakatā, in that pāribhaṭakatā one does not live by, in that having lifted up the children of the donors with the intention of gaining offerings, the relationship. The same method applies to the remaining cases as well. Paheṇakammaṃ is the going to a place to which one has been sent in fields, etc. Dūtakammaṃ is carrying messages to and from the Dispensation. Jaṅghapesaniyaṃ is going from house to house to which one has been sent. Anuppadānaṃ is giving bribes with the intention of gaining offerings. Aññena vāpī by means of astrology, etc.
212.Viññattīti (pārā. 515 ādayo; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.515 ādayo) aññātakaviññatti.Anesanāti pubbe vuttena pupphadānādinā paccayesanā.Kuhanādīhīti (vibha. 861; vibha. aṭṭha. 861; mahāni. 87) kuhanā lapanā nemittakatā nippesikatā lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatāti imehi pañcahi vatthūhīti attho. Micchājīvavinicchayo.
212.Viññattī: (pārā. 515 ff.; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.515 ff.) is an unknown request. Anesanā: is seeking requisites by means of giving flowers, etc., as previously stated. Kuhanādīhī: (vibha. 861; vibha. aṭṭha. 861; mahāni. 87) means by these five things: deception (kuhanā), flattery (lapanā), hinting (nemittakatā), belittling (nippesikatā), and seeking gain with gain (lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatā). This is the judgment on wrong livelihood.
Micchājīvavivajjanāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Avoiding Wrong Livelihood is complete.
30. Vattaniddesavaṇṇanā
30. Explanation of the Section on Observances
213.Idāni āgantukavattādīni dassetuṃ‘‘vatta’’nti mātikāpadaṃ uddhaṭaṃ. Parikkhittassa (cūḷava. 356 ādayo; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357 ādayo) vihārassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa dvīhi leḍḍupātehi paricchinnaṭṭhānaṃ patvā upāhanaṃ omuñcitvā nīcaṃ katvā papphoṭetvā upāhanaṃ daṇḍakena gahetvā chattaṃ apanāmetvā sīsaṃ vivaritvā sīse cīvaraṃ khandhe karitvā sādhukaṃ ataramānena ārāmo pavisitabboti attho.
213.Now, in order to show the observances for a newcomer, etc., ‘‘vatta’’ is extracted as a heading. Having reached the boundary of a monastery that has been defined (cūḷava. 356 ff.; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 357 ff.), or, for one that has not been defined, the area marked off by two clods of earth, the meaning is that one should remove one's shoes, lower them, shake them out, take the shoes with a stick, remove the umbrella, uncover one's head, place the robe on one's shoulder, and enter the monastery carefully without hurrying.
214.Puccheyyasayanāsananti ‘‘katamaṃ me senāsanaṃ pāpuṇāti, kiṃ ajjhāvutthaṃ vā anajjhāvutthaṃ vā’’ti evaṃ pucchitabbanti attho.
214.Puccheyya sayanāsanaṃ: The meaning is that one should ask, "Which lodging is available to me, whether it is occupied or unoccupied?"
215-6.Mañcapīṭhādidārubhaṇḍañca (cūḷava. 360; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 360) rajanabhājanādimattikābhaṇḍañca.Āpucchāti bhikkhussa vā sāmaṇerassa vā ārāmikassa vā ‘‘āvuso imaṃ jaggāhī’’ti ārocetvāti attho.Aññathāti evaṃ akatvāti attho.
215-6.Furniture made of wood, such as couches and chairs (cūḷava. 360; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 360), and earthenware vessels such as dye pots. Āpucchā: The meaning is having informed a monk, a novice, or a monastery attendant, saying, "Friend, please take care of this." Aññathā: The meaning is if one does otherwise.
217-8.Vuḍḍhāgantukassāti ettha (cūḷava. 358 ādayo; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 359 ādayo) dūratova disvā yadi ‘‘vuḍḍho’’ti jānāti, tasmiṃ anāgate eva āsanapaññāpanādivattaṃ kātabbanti attho.Pādodappabhutinti pādodakaṃ pādapīṭhaṃ pādakathalikaṃ upanikkhipitabbanti attho. Pānīyena āpucchantena sace sakiṃ ānītaṃ pānīyaṃ sabbaṃ pivati, punapi āpucchitabbo eva.Paññapeti ‘‘etaṃ tumhākaṃ senāsanaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti evaṃ ācikkhitabbanti attho.
217-8.Vuḍḍhāgantukassa: Here, the meaning is that if one recognizes from afar that he is "old" (cūḷava. 358 ff.; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 359 ff.), one should perform the observances such as preparing a seat even before he arrives. Pādodappabhuti: The meaning is that one should provide foot-washing water, a footstool, and a footrest. When asking for drinking water, if he drinks all the water that was brought at one time, he should be asked again. Paññape: The meaning is that one should announce, "This lodging is available to you."
219-20.‘‘Bhikkhācāragāmo ito dūre’’ti vā ‘‘santike’’ti vā ‘‘kālasseva piṇḍāya caritabba’’nti vā ‘‘upaṭṭhāke caritabba’’nti vā gocaro ācikkhitabbo.Agocaroti micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ vā gāmo, paricchinnabhikkhako vā gāmo, yattha ekassa vā dvinnaṃ vā bhikkhā dīyati, so ācikkhitabboti attho.Katikanti saṅghassa katikaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Imaṃ kālaṃ pavisitabbaṃ, imaṃ kālaṃ nikkhamitabba’’nti evaṃ pavesananikkhamanakālaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Kesuci ṭhānesu amanussā vā vāḷā vā honti, tasmā evaṃ ācikkhitabbameva.Nisinnovāti idaṃ āpattiabhāvamattadīpakaṃ, uṭṭhahitvāpi sabbaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭateva. Vattavinicchayo.
219-20.One should point out the alms-gathering village, saying, "The alms-gathering village is far from here," or "It is nearby," or "One should go for alms early," or "One should go to the supporters." Agocaro: The meaning is that one should point out a village of wrong-view holders, or a village with a limited number of monks, or a village where alms are given to only one or two monks. Katikaṃ: The place where the Sangha has an agreement. One should announce the time of entry and exit, saying, "One should enter at this time and exit at this time." In some places there are non-human beings or wild animals, therefore, one should announce this. Nisinnovā: This is merely indicative of the absence of an offense; one is allowed to do everything even after rising. This is the judgment on observances.
Vattaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Observances is complete.
31. Vikappanāniddesavaṇṇanā
31. Explanation of the Section on Reversions
221.Sammukhāyāti (pāci. 374; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) sammukhe ṭhitassāti attho.Byattassāti vikappanavidhānaṃ paccuddharaṇādividhānañca jānantassa. Abyatto pana ‘‘iminā mayhaṃ dinna’’nti gahetvāpi gaccheyyāti attho.Ekassāti ekassa bhikkhussa.
221.Sammukhāyā: (pāci. 374; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. vikappanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) The meaning is to one who is standing in one's presence. Byattassā: To one who knows the method of reversion and the method of renunciation, etc. However, one who is ignorant might take it and go away, thinking, "This was given to me." Ekassā: To one monk.
222.Nidhetuṃvāti nidhetuṃ eva, nissaggiyaṃ na hotīti attho. Paribhuñjituṃ vā vissajjetuṃ vā adhiṭṭhātuṃ vā na vaṭṭatīti attho.
222.Nidhetuṃvā: The meaning is only to store it; it does not become forfeitable. The meaning is that it is not allowed to use it, give it away, or keep it.
224-5.Aparā sammukhā vāti sammukhā vikappanā evāti attho. Imā dve vikappanā attanā eva vikappetvā parena paccuddharāpitattā sammukhā vikappanā evāti vuttā.
224-5.Aparā sammukhā vā: The meaning is that the reversion is in person. These two reversions are said to be in person because they are reverted by another after being reverted by oneself.
227.Mittoti daḷhamitto.Sandiṭṭhoti diṭṭhamatto nātidaḷhamitto. ‘‘Itarena ca pubbe vuttanayena ‘tisso bhikkhū’ti vā ‘tissā bhikkhunī’ti vā vattabbaṃ. Puna tena ‘ahaṃ tissassa bhikkhuno, tissāya bhikkhuniyā vā dammī’ti vikappetvā teneva ‘tissassa bhikkhuno, tissāya bhikkhuniyā santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’ti paccuddharitabba’’nti evaṃ pāṭho gahetabbo.
227.Mitto: A close friend. Sandiṭṭho: One who has merely been seen, not a very close friend. "And it should be said to the other in the manner previously stated, 'Three monks,' or 'Three nuns.' Then, after reverting, 'I give this to such-and-such monk or such-and-such nun,' it should be renounced by that same person, 'Use, give away, or do as you see fit with what belongs to such-and-such monk or such-and-such nun.'" This is how the text should be understood.
228.Dūrasantikattekatta-bahubhāvaṃ vijāniyāti ettha dūrattañca santikattañca ekattañca bahubhāvañca vijānitvāti attho.
228.Dūrasantikattekatta-bahubhāvaṃ vijāniyā: Here, the meaning is having known the distance, proximity, singularity, and multiplicity.
229.‘‘Dasāhaparamaṃ atirekacīvaraṃ dhāretabba’’nti (pārā. 462) vuttattā‘‘dasāhaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cīvarakālasamayo nāma anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimo māso, atthate kathine pañca māsā’’ti (pārā. 649) vuttattā‘‘māsamekaṃ vā pañca vā’’ti vuttaṃ, māsaṃ vā ekaṃ pañca vā māseti attho. ‘‘Bhikkhuno paneva akālacīvaraṃ uppajjeyya, ākaṅkhamānena bhikkhunā paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Paṭiggahetvā khippameva kāretabbaṃ. No cassa pāripūri, māsaparamaṃ tena bhikkhunā taṃ cīvaraṃ nikkhipitabbaṃ ūnassa pāripūriyā satiyā paccāsāyā’’ti (pārā. 499) vuttattā‘‘paccāsā sati māsaka’’nti vuttaṃ.Nuppādayatīti anadhiṭṭhitaṃ avikappitaṃ nissaggiṃ na janayatīti attho. Vikappanāvinicchayo.
229.Because it was said, "An extra robe should be kept for a maximum of ten days" (pārā. 462), ‘‘dasāhaṃ vā’’ was stated. Because it was said, "The robe-making season is the last month of the rains when the kathina is not laid down, and five months when the kathina is laid down" (pārā. 649), ‘‘māsamekaṃ vā pañca vā’’ was stated; the meaning is one month or five months. Because it was said, "If a monk should have an untimely robe arise, it should be accepted by the monk if he wishes. Having accepted it, it should be made quickly. If it is not completed, that robe should be kept by that monk for a maximum of one month, in expectation of completion when there is a deficiency" (pārā. 499), ‘‘paccāsā sati māsaka’’ was stated. Nuppādayatī: The meaning is that it does not generate a forfeitable offense if it is not kept without being determined or reverted. This is the judgment on reversions.
Vikappanāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of specifying alternatives is finished.
32. Nissayaniddesavaṇṇanā
32. Explanation of Specifying Dependence
230.Byattassāti ettha kittāvatā byatto hotīti ce? Nissayamuccanakena pana sabbantimena dhammaparicchedena atthato ca byañjanato ca dve mātikā paguṇā vācuggatā kātabbā, pakkhadivasesu dhammassāvanatthāya suttantato cattāro bhāṇavārā, sampattānaṃ parisānaṃ parikathanatthāya andhakavindamahārāhulovādadhammakkhandhasadiso eko kathāmaggo, saṅghabhattamaṅgalāmaṅgalesu anumodanatthāya tisso anumodanā, uposathappavāraṇādivijānanatthaṃ kammākammavinicchayo, samaṇadhammakaraṇatthaṃ samādhivasena vā vipassanāvasena vā arahattapariyosānaṃ ekaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ettakaṃ uggahetabbaṃ. Ettāvatā byatto nāma hoti cātudiso, itarathā abyatto.
230.Here, regarding "competent," how competent is one considered to be? With the last classification of Dhamma by way of relinquishing dependence, two mātikās should be mastered and recited, four bhāṇavāras from the Suttanta for hearing the Dhamma on fortnight days, one talk similar to Andhakavinda, Mahārāhulovāda-dhammakhandha for speaking to the assembled groups, three benedictions for approval at Saṅghabhatta, auspicious ceremonies, and inauspicious ceremonies, discrimination between permissible and impermissible actions for knowing the uposatha and pavāraṇā, and one meditation subject ending in Arahantship, either in terms of samādhi or in terms of vipassanā, should be learned. To this extent, one is called competent and has the four directions, otherwise, incompetent.
231.Idāni nissayaggahaṇākāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ekaṃsa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha (mahāva. 103)āyasmatoti āyasmantaṃ.
231.Now, to show the manner of taking dependence, "certainly" etc., is said. Here, "of venerable one" (mahāva. 103) means of the venerable one.
232.Idāni paṭippassaddhividhānaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pakkante’’tiādi vuttaṃ, ‘‘pañcimā, bhikkhave, nissayappaṭippassaddhiyo upajjhāyamhā. Upajjhāyo pakkanto vā hoti vibbhanto vā kālakato vā pakkhasaṅkanto vā āṇattiyeva pañcamī’’ti (mahāva. 83), ‘‘chayimā, bhikkhave, nissayappaṭippassaddhiyo ācariyamhā. Ācariyo pakkanto vā hoti vibbhanto vā kālakato vā pakkhasaṅkanto vā āṇattiyeva pañcamī, upajjhāyena vā samodhānagato hotī’’ti idaṃ pana ubhayaṃ idha dassitaṃ. Sace ācariyupajjhāyā sāmantavihāresupi aparikkhittesu leḍḍupātadvayabbhantare vasanti, nissayo na paṭippassambhati. Parikkhittesupi na paṭippassambhatīti eke. Ācariyā pana na icchanti. Kasmāti ce? Nissayaggahaṇappaṭippassaddhīnaṃ upacārasīmāya paricchinnattā. Leḍḍupātena upacārasīmāparicchedo pana aparikkhittesu eva labbhati, na parikkhittesu. Tasmā ācariyānaṃ vinicchayeva ṭhātabbaṃ.
232.Now, to show the method of relinquishing dependence, "having departed" etc., is said, "Monks, these five are the ways of relinquishing dependence on the preceptor. The preceptor has departed, or has become deranged, or has died, or has gone to another community, or only by command is the fifth" (mahāva. 83), "Monks, these six are the ways of relinquishing dependence on the teacher. The teacher has departed, or has become deranged, or has died, or has gone to another community, or only by command is the fifth, or he has come to an agreement with the preceptor." But both of these are shown here. If the teachers and preceptors live in nearby monasteries, even without a defined boundary within the range of two leḍḍupāta throws, dependence is not relinquished. According to some, it is not relinquished even within defined boundaries. But the teachers do not want that. Why? Because the acceptance and relinquishing of dependence are defined by the boundary of the area of attention (upacārasīmā). However, the defining of the area of attention by a leḍḍupāta throw is obtained only in undefined areas, not in defined ones. Therefore, the teachers' decision should be adhered to.
Pakkanteti ettha (mahāva. aṭṭha. 83) sace ācariyo antevāsikaṃ anāmantetvāva upacārasīmaṃ atikkamati, nissayo paṭippassambhati. Sace upacārasīmaṃ anatikkamitvāva nivattati, na paṭippassambhati. Ācariyaṃ anāmantetvā antevāsikassa gamanepi eseva nayo. Sace ācariyo katthaci gantukāmo antevāsikaṃ āpucchati, antevāsikopi ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchati, taṅkhaṇe eva paṭippassambhati. Evaṃ ācariyaṃ āpucchitvā antevāsikassa gamanepi. Dvīsupi antovihāreyeva ṭhitesu ācariyo vā antevāsikaṃ, antevāsiko vā ācariyaṃ anāpucchitvāva sace dve leḍḍupāte atikkamati, paṭippassambhati. Pakkhasaṅkante vā vibbhante vā kālakate vā taṅkhaṇeyeva paṭippassambhati.Āṇattināma nissayappaṇāmanā. Dassanasavanavasena duvidhaṃsamodhānaṃ.
Here, regarding "having departed" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 83), if the teacher, without informing the pupil, crosses the area of attention, dependence is relinquished. If he returns without crossing the area of attention, it is not relinquished. The same method applies to the pupil's departure without informing the teacher. If the teacher, wishing to go somewhere, asks the pupil, and the pupil agrees with "good, good," it is relinquished at that very moment. Similarly, it applies to the pupil's departure after asking the teacher. Even when both are staying within the same monastery, if either the teacher or the pupil, without informing the other, crosses two leḍḍupātas, it is relinquished. If one has gone to another community, or has become deranged, or has died, it is relinquished at that very moment. Command means relinquishing dependence. Agreement is of two kinds by way of seeing and hearing.
233.Alajjinti ettha –
233.Here, regarding "shameless" –
‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati;
"Intentionally commits an offense;
Evaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na bhikkhave alajjinaṃ nissāya vatthabbaṃ. Yo vaseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 120) hi vuttaṃ.
Conceals the offense;
234.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, addhānamaggappaṭipannena bhikkhunā nissayaṃ alabhamānena anissitena vatthu’’nti (mahāva. 121) vuttattā‘‘addhikassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Gilānupaṭṭhākassa ca yācitassāti sambandho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānupaṭṭhākena bhikkhunā nissayaṃ alabhamānena yāciyamānena anissitena vatthu’’nti (mahāva. 121) hi vuttaṃ.Sallakkhentena phāsukanti phāsuvihāraṃ sallakkhentena. Idaṃ pana parihāraṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 121) sotāpannādiariyasāvako vā thāmagatasamathavipassanālābhī vā bālaputhujjano vā na labhati. Yassa kho pana samathavipassanā taruṇā hoti, na thāmagatā, ayaṃ labhati. Asante nissayadāyake ‘‘yadā paṭirūpo nissayadāyako āgacchissati, tadā tassa nissāya vasissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā yāva āsāḷhīpuṇṇamā, tāva vasituṃ labhati. Sace pana āsāḷhīmāse nissayadāyakaṃ na labhati, yattha atthi, tattha gantabbaṃ. Antovasse pana anissitena vatthuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sabhāge dāyake asante vasituṃ labbhatīti sabbapadesu yojanā kātabbā. Nissayavinicchayo.
Goes to a state of bias;
Nissayaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Such a person is called shameless." (pari. 359) –
33. Kāyabandhananiddesavaṇṇanā
Thus, it is said. Indeed, it is said, "Monks, one should not live in dependence on the shameless. Whoever lives so, incurs an offense of wrong-doing" (mahāva. 120).
235.Akāyabandhanoti kāyabandhanaṃ abandhitvāti attho. Tato paṭṭhāya cīvaraṃ pārupitabbaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya eva kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Na bhikkhave akāyabandhanena gāmo pavisitabbo. Yo paviseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 278) hi vuttaṃ.Tatthevāsatiyā gatoti asatiyā gato yattha sarati, tattheva bandhitabbaṃ. Saritvā pana yāva na bandhati, tāva piṇḍāya carituṃ na vaṭṭati. Yadi antogāme sarati, kāyabandhane sati ekamante ṭhatvā bandhitabbaṃ, asati ce nikkhamitvā bandhitvā puna piṇḍāya pavisitabbanti vadanti.
234.Because it was said, "I allow, monks, a monk traveling on a journey to live without dependence when he cannot obtain dependence" (mahāva. 121), "for a traveler" is said. And it is connected to "of one requesting, who attends to the sick." Indeed, it was said, "I allow, monks, a monk who attends to the sick to live without dependence when he cannot obtain dependence and is being requested" (mahāva. 121). "Considering comfortable" means considering a comfortable dwelling. However, this dispensation (mahāva. aṭṭha. 121) is not obtained by a Stream-enterer and other noble disciples, nor by a strong person who has gained samatha and vipassanā, nor by a childish worldling. But one whose samatha and vipassanā are young, not strong, obtains it. When there is no one to give dependence, one may live until the Āsāḷhī full moon, having made the intention that "when a suitable giver of dependence comes, then I will live in dependence on him." But if one does not obtain a giver of dependence in the month of Āsāḷhī, one should go where there is one. However, during the rains retreat, it is not proper to live without dependence. It should be applied in all places that it is permissible to live without dependence when there is no one of the same fraternity to give dependence. The decision on dependence.
236.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dve kāyabandhanāni paṭṭikaṃ sūkarantaka’’nti (cūḷava. 278) vuttattā‘‘duvidha’’nti vuttaṃ. Tatthasūkarantaṃnāma kuñcikākosakā viya ante susiraṃ katvā koṭṭitaṃ.Rajju ca ekāti ekavaṭṭā rajju ca.Tadanulomikāti tesaṃ dvinnaṃ anulomikā.
Explanation of specifying dependence is finished.
237.Macchakaṇḍakakhajjurī-pattā maṭṭhā ca paṭṭikāti ettha (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278) ete macchakaṇṭakādayo maṭṭhā vikārarahitā paṭṭikā ca tadantogadhāti adhippāyo.Labbhā dasā catassoti ekāya vā dvīsu vā tīsu vā kathā eva natthīti adhippāyo, tato paraṃ na vaṭṭati.Antesūti ubhosu antesu.Guṇasuttakanti diguṇasuttakaṃ.
33. Explanation of Specifying the Body-band
239.Makaramukhādintiādi-saddena deḍḍubhasīsaṃ gahitaṃ.Ubhanteti ubhosu antesu. Kassāti? Vidhassa.Ghaṭakāti ghaṭakato.Lekhāti lekhāya. Ghaṭakato ca lekhāya ca aññaṃ cittakaṃ na kappatīti attho.
235."Without a body-band" means without tying a body-band. From then on, the robe should be worn, and from then on, the body-band should be tied. Indeed, it was said, "Monks, one should not enter a village without a body-band. Whoever enters, incurs an offense of wrong-doing" (cūḷava. 278). "Gone to where one remembers in that very place" means one should tie it right there where one remembers, having gone to a place without mindfulness. But having remembered, one should not go for alms until one ties it. If one remembers inside the village, one should stand to one side where there is a body-band and tie it, but if there is not one, one should go out and tie it and then enter again for alms, some say.
240.Deḍḍubhakanti (cūḷava. 278; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278) udakasappasirasadisaṃ.Murajanti bahurajjuke ekato saṅkaḍḍhitvā ekāya rajjuyā paliveṭhetvā katarajju.Maddavīṇanti pāmaṅgasadisaṃ.Kalābukanti anekavaṭṭaṃ. Etāni pana sabbāni na kappanti.Dasāsu dve majjhimāti murajaṃ maddavīṇanti dve majjhimā eva.Kappareti kappantīti attho.
236.Because it was said, "I allow, monks, two kinds of body-bands: a strip of cloth and a boar's tusk" (cūḷava. 278), "two kinds" is said. There, "boar's tusk" means, having made it hollow inside like a key case, it is fitted.
241.Gaṇṭhiyocāpīti (cūḷava. 279) cīvaragaṇṭhiyopi. Veḷuādimayā kappantīti pasaṅgena vuttaṃ. Kāyabandhanavinicchayo.
237."And one rope" means and one round rope. "Corresponding to that" means corresponding to those two.
Kāyabandhananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
237."Fish-spine, date-palm leaf, and smooth strip of cloth" Here, (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278) these fish-spine etc., smooth, without defects, and strip of cloth are included within that, is the meaning. "Four, ten are obtainable" means there is no discussion even in one or two or three, is the meaning; it is not proper beyond that. "At the ends" means at both ends. "Guṇa thread" means double thread.
Paṭhamabhāṇavāraṃ.
239."Makara-mouth etc." With the word "etc." a water-snake head is taken. "Both ends" means at both ends. Whose? Of the needle-case. "Ghaṭakā" means made of ghaṭaka. "Lekhā" means by a lekhā. It means that another design other than that made of ghaṭaka and by a lekhā is not allowable.
34. Pathavīniddesavaṇṇanā
240."Water-snake" (cūḷava. 278; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278) means similar to the head of a water snake. "Muraja" means many ropes, having drawn them together, is a rope that ties around. "Maddavīṇa" means similar to a lute. "Kalābuka" means many rounds. However, all of these are not allowable. "Two middle ones in the ten" means only the two middle ones, muraja and maddavīṇa. "Kappare" means they are allowable.
242.Jātā (pāci. 86; pāci. aṭṭha. 86-88; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ajātāti duvidhā pathavīti attho. Idāni tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘suddhamattikapaṃsukā’’tiādimāha. Tattha suddhamattikapaṃsukā ca adaḍḍhā ca bahumattikapaṃsukā ca cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhapaṃsumattikarāsi ca jātapathavīti sambandho. Ettha panaadaḍḍhāti uddhanapacanakumbhakārāvāpabhājanapacanādivasena tathā tathā adaḍḍhā. Ayaṃ pana visuṃ natthi, suddhapaṃsuādīsu aññatarāva veditabbā. Suddhapaṃsu suddhamattikā yebhuyyenapaṃsu yebhuyyenamattikā atirekacātumāsādhikovaṭṭhamattikāpaṃsupuñjā ca adaḍḍhā cāti ayaṃ sabbāpijātapathavīti veditabbā.
241."Knots and bows" (cūḷava. 279) means even the robe knot. It is said in passing that those made of bamboo etc., are allowable. The decision on the body-band.
243.Dutiyāti ajātapathavīti attho.Vuttarāsīti mattikarāsi ca paṃsurāsi ca cātumāsomavaṭṭhakoajātapathavīti attho.
Explanation of specifying the body-band is finished.
244.Idāni yebhuyyenamattikā yebhuyyenapaṃsukā yebhuyyenasakkharāti evaṃ vuttāsu kittāvatā yebhuyyatā hotīti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘dve bhāgā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tīsu bhāgesu dve bhāgā mattikā yassā bhūmiyā, esā yebhuyyamattikāti sambandho. Upaḍḍhapaṃsuādayopi kappiyā eva akappiyabhāgassa anatirekato. ‘‘Yebhuyyenamattikā yebhuyyenapaṃsukā’’ti (pāci. 86) hi vuttaṃ, na ‘‘upaḍḍhamattikā, upaḍḍhapaṃsukā’’ti.Sesesupīti yebhuyyapaṃsukādīsupi.
The first recitation section.
245.Jātasaññissa pācittīti sambandho. Dveḷhassa vimatissa dukkaṭaṃ. Jāte ajātasaññissa anāpatti.
34. Explanation of Specifying Earth
246.Ekāyāṇattiyā ekāti sace sakiṃ āṇatto divasampi khaṇati, āṇāpakassa ekā evāti attho.Vācasoti vācāya vācāyāti attho.
242.Earth is of two kinds, born (pāci. 86; pāci. aṭṭha. 86-88; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. pathavīkhaṇanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) and unborn. Now, to show both of those, he said "pure clay and dust" etc. There, pure clay and dust, and unbaked, and abundant clay and dust, and a heap of clay and dust that has been rained on for more than four months, are connected to born earth. Here, "unbaked" means unbaked in various ways, such as by means of digging, cooking, potter's kiln, baking vessels, etc. But this does not exist separately; it should be understood as one of the pure dust etc. Pure dust, pure clay, mostly dust, mostly clay, and a heap of clay and dust that has been rained on for more than four months, and unbaked – all of this should be understood as born earth.
247.Ettha ‘‘jālehi aggi’’nti vā vattuṃ na vaṭṭati. Aniyametvā pana ‘‘pokkharaṇiṃ khaṇa, pathaviṃ khaṇa, vāpiṃ khaṇa, āvāṭaṃ khaṇa, kandaṃ khaṇā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
243."The second" means unborn earth. "Heap that is said" means a heap of clay and a heap of dust, and a mass rained on for four months is unborn earth.
248.Edisanti ettha aññampi evarūpaṃ kappiyavohāravacanaṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.
244.Now, to show how much "mostly" there is in what was said thus, "mostly clay," "mostly dust," "mostly gravel," he said "two parts" etc. There, that land in which two parts of three parts is clay, is connected to "mostly clay." Those with half dust etc., are also allowable, because the unallowable part does not exceed it. Indeed, it was said, "Mostly clay, mostly dust" (pāci. 86), not "half clay, half dust." "In the remaining" means in mostly dust etc.
249.Kopetuṃ labbhanti sambandho, ghaṭādīhi gahetuṃ sakkuṇeyyakaṃussiñcanīyakaddamaṃ.
245.For one with the perception of born, there is a pācittiya offense. For one who is doubtful, or uncertain, there is a wrong-doing offense. For one with the perception of unborn in what is born, there is no offense.
251-2.Udakasantike patiteti sambandho. Udake patitaṃ pana sabbakālaṃ kappiyameva, tasmā akappiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘udakasantike’’ti vuttaṃ. Pāsāṇe lagge raje ca navasoṇḍiyā patite raje cāti sambandho. Abbhokāsuṭṭhite vammike ca mattikākuṭṭe cāti attho, tathā etepi sabbe cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhā na kopetabbāti attho.
246."One order, one" means if, having been ordered once, he digs even for a day, there is only one offense for the one who gave the order. "By speech" means by speech after speech.
253-5.Bhūmiṃ vikopayaṃ thambhādiṃ gaṇhituṃ na ca kappatīti sambandho.Dhārāyāti passāvadhārāya. Padaṃ dassessāmīti sambandho.
247.Here, one should not say "fire with nets." But without specifying, it is proper to say "dig a pond, dig earth, dig a well, dig a pit, dig a tuber."
257.Sekoti siñcanaṃ. Bhūmiyā allahatthaṃ ṭhapetvāti sambandho.
248.Here, regarding "such," it means that another such allowable customary word is suitable.
258.Avase satīti hatthadāhādīsu āpadāsūti attho. Pathavīvinicchayo.
249.It is connected to "it is permissible to stir up," ooze that can be scooped up that can be taken with pots etc.
Pathavīniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
251-2.It is connected to "fallen near water." But that which has fallen into water is always allowable, therefore, to show what is unallowable, "near water" is said. It is connected to "stuck to a stone" and "dust fallen on a new dustpan." It means a termite mound arisen in the open air and a mud wall; thus, it means that all of these that have been rained on for more than four months should not be stirred up.
35. Parikkhāraniddesavaṇṇanā
253-5.It is connected to "while stirring up the ground, it is not allowable to take a pillar etc." "By a stream" means by a stream of urine. It is connected to "I will show the place."
259-260.Girikūṭanti makaradantakaṃ. Sibbituñca chindituñca na vaṭṭatīti sabbattha yojanā.Daṇḍeti chattadaṇḍe.
257."Seko" means sprinkling. It is connected to "having placed a wet hand on the ground."
261.Sibbituṃ vā pañjaraṃ vinandhituṃ vā thiratthaṃ chatte bandhituṃ daṇḍe lekhā vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Sace vuttappakāraṃ akappiyachattaṃ labhati, ghaṭakampi vāḷarūpampi chinditvā dhāretabbaṃ, lekhāpi ghaṃsetvā apanetabbā, suttakena vā daṇḍo veṭhetabbo.
258."When there is no way out" means in times of distress, such as being burned by the hand. The decision on earth.
262.Anuvātaṃ sandhāya‘‘ante vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dvinnaṃ paṭṭānaṃ saṅghaṭitaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya‘‘paṭṭamukhe vāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Varakasīsākārena sibbanaṃ sandhāya‘‘veṇikā’’ti ca satapadākārena sibbanaṃ sandhāya‘‘saṅkhalikāpi vā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Satapadisadisaṃ aññaṃ vā sūcivikāraṃ na kappati, pakatisūcikammameva vaṭṭatīti attho. Pāḷikaṇṇikaādikaṃ cīvare na ca kappatīti sambandho.
Explanation of specifying earth is finished.
263-4.Catukoṇāva (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) kappareti sambandho.Agghikanti agghiyaṃ cetiyasadisaṃ.Etthāti gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭe.Koṇasuttā ca pīḷakāti na kevalaṃ catukoṇā gaṇṭhikapāsakapaṭṭāva kappanti, atha kho duviññeyyā koṇasuttapīḷakā ca kappareti attho.Gandhaṃ telaṃ vāti gandhaṃ vā telaṃ vā.
35. Explanation of Specifying Requisites
265.Rattanti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) rajitaṃ.Aññena vāti muggarādinā vā.Katvāti ṭhapetvā.Pahāre na ca muṭṭhināti muṭṭhinā na pahāreyyāti attho.
265. Rattanti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) means reddened. Aññena vāti or by other means such as a hammer. Katvāti means having placed. Pahāre na ca muṭṭhināti means one should not strike with a fist.
266-7.Chattavaṭṭiyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) lekhaṃ ṭhapetvā dhammakaraṇe lekhā na vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Kuñcikāya ca pipphale ca maṇikā ca pīḷakā ca na vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Tatthamaṇikāti ekā eva vaṭṭamaṇikā.Pīḷakāmuttarājisadisā bahū.
266-7. Regarding the umbrella handle (chattavaṭṭiyaṃ) (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85), the connection is that having placed a design, a design is not suitable in a dhammakaraṇa. The connection is that a key, long pepper (pipphale), a gem (maṇikā), and a small seat (pīḷakā) are not suitable. Here, maṇikāti means just one round gem. Pīḷakā means many like a bedbug.
268-9.Mālādyaraṇiyanti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) araṇiyaṃ mālādi vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Tipusīsamaye pattamaṇḍale bhittikammañca na vaṭṭatīti attho.Hitvāti ṭhapetvā.Sūcisaṇḍāsako(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) nāma sūciṃ ḍaṃsāpetvā ghaṃsituṃ kato dārumayo. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, makaradantakaṃ chinditu’’nti (cūḷava. 253) vuttattā pattamaṇḍale makaradantakaṃ vaṭṭati, aññaṃ bhittikammādivikārameva na vaṭṭati, tasmā girikūṭaṃ pattamaṇḍale ṭhapetvā avasese na vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.
268-9. Mālādyaraṇiyanti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85), the connection is that an adornment (araṇiyaṃ) like a garland (mālā) or something colorful is not suitable. Thus, it should be understood everywhere. At the time of the triphusīsa, a bowl stand, or wall work is not suitable. Hitvāti means having left or placed. Sūcisaṇḍāsako(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) is a wooden tool made for clamping and grinding a needle. Because it was said, “I allow, monks, to cut the makaradantaka” (cūḷava. 253), a makaradantaka is suitable in a bowl stand, but other decorations like wall work are not suitable. Therefore, it should be understood that having placed a mountain peak in a bowl stand, it is not suitable in the rest.
272.Senāsaneti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) pāsādādisenāsaneti attho.
272. Senāsaneti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) means in a dwelling (senāsana) such as a palace.
273.Pumitthirūparahitanti purisarūpaitthirūparahitanti attho. Parikkhāravinicchayo.
273. Pumitthirūparahitanti means devoid of the form of a man or the form of a woman. This is the decision on requisites.
Parikkhāraniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Requisite section is finished.
36. Bhesajjaniddesavaṇṇanā
36. Explanation of the Section on Medicine
274-5.Sahadhamminaṃ labbhaṃ bhesajjakaraṇanti sambandho. Na kevalaṃ pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃyeva bhikkhācariyaviññattisakehi bhesajjakaraṇaṃ labbhati, atha kho aparesampi pañcannaṃ labbhati, te dassento‘‘pitūna’’ntiādimāha.Pitūnanti mātāpitūnanti attho. Ye mātāpitaro jagganti upaṭṭhahanti, tetadupaṭṭhākānāma. Bhikkhuṃ eva nissāya jīvantobhikkhunissitakonāma. Pabbajjāpekkho‘‘bhaṇḍū’’ti vuccati.
274-5. The connection is that obtaining medicine is allowable for a co-religionist. Not only for five co-religionists can medicine be made using alms-begging or informing, but also for others. Showing those five, he said, ‘‘pitūna’’nti, etc. Pitūnanti means for the mother and father. Those who look after and attend to their mother and father are called tadupaṭṭhākā. One who lives dependent solely on a bhikkhu is called bhikkhunissitako. One who is seeking ordination is called ‘‘bhaṇḍū’’.
276.Aparesampi dasannaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, te dassetuṃ‘‘mahācūḷapitā’’tiādimāha. Ettha (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.185-187) pana mahāpitā cūḷapitā mahāmātā cūḷamātā mahābhātā cūḷabhātā mahābhaginī cūḷabhaginīti imehiaṭṭhahiādi-saddena pitubhaginiñca mātubhātikañca gahetvā dasa. Etesaṃ pana sakena bhesajjena kātabbaṃ.Attaniyeca asatīti pāṭhaseso.
276. It is allowable to do for ten others as well. To show them, he said, ‘‘mahācūḷapitā’’ti, etc. Here (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.185-187), mahāpitā, cūḷapitā, mahāmātā, cūḷamātā, mahābhātā, cūḷabhātā, mahābhaginī, cūḷabhaginī—these eight, taking with the word "ādi" the father's sister (pitubhaginiñca) and the mother's brother (mātubhātikañca), make ten. But for these, it should be done with one’s own medicine. Attaniyeca asatīti is the remainder of the reading.
277.Na kevalañca etesaṃ dasannaṃ, imehi sambandhānaṃ puttanattādīnaṃ yāvasattamā kulaparivaṭṭā kātuṃ vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ‘‘kuladūsanā’’tiādimāha. Aññopi (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.285-287) yo āgantuko vā coro vā yuddhaparājito vā issaro ñātakehi pariccatto vā gamiyamanusso vā gilāno hutvā vihāraṃ pavisati, sabbesampi apaccāsīsantena bhesajjaṃ kātabbaṃ.
277. Not only for these ten, but to show that it is allowable to do for relatives such as sons and grandsons for seven generations, he said, ‘‘kuladūsanā’’ti, etc. Furthermore (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.285-287), whoever comes as a visitor, a thief, one defeated in battle, a lord abandoned by relatives, or a person being taken away, or one who enters the monastery sick, medicine should be made for all of them without expectation of anything in return.
278.Mātā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.185-187) pitā tadupaṭṭhāko bhikkhunissitako paṇḍupalāso veyyāvaccakaroti imesaṃ channaṃ anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapāto avāritoti attho. Kiñca bhiyyo – dāmarikacorassa ca issariyassa ca dātumavāritoti attho.
278. For these six—mother (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.185-187), father, one who attends to them, one dependent on a bhikkhu, a paṇḍupalāsa, and a servant—unsolicited almsfood is unrestricted. Moreover, it is unrestricted to give to a dāmarika thief and a lord.
279.Tesanti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.185-187) gahaṭṭhānaṃ.Sāsanogadhanti ratanaparittaāṭānāṭiyaparittādiparittaṃ bhaṇitabbanti attho.
279. Tesanti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.185-187) means for the laypeople. Sāsanogadhanti means having recited a protective text (paritta) such as the Ratanaparitta, Āṭānāṭiyaparitta, etc.
280.‘‘Āgantvā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.185-187) sīlaṃ detu, dhammañca parittañca bhāsatū’’ti kenaci pesitoti sambandho.Dātuṃ vattunti sīlaṃ dātuṃ, dhammañca parittañca vattuṃ labbhatīti attho. Bhesajjavinicchayo.
280. The connection is that someone is sent, saying, "Having come (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.185-187), give the sīla, and speak the Dhamma and the paritta." Dātuṃ vattunti means it is allowable to give the sīla and to speak the Dhamma and the paritta. This is the decision on medicine.
Bhesajjaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Medicine section is finished.
37. Uggahaniddesavaṇṇanā
37. Explanation of the Section on Taking Up
281.Dasabhedampīti sace kenaci heṭṭhā dassitaṃ dasavidhaṃ ratanaṃ ānetvā ‘‘idaṃ saṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā navakammassa vā aññapuggalassa vā suttantikagaṇassa vā dammī’’ti vutte ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchantassa dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho.
281. Dasabhedampīti means if someone brings the ten kinds of gems shown below and says, "I will give this to the Saṅgha or the cetiya or for construction or to another individual or to the Suttanta group," then for one who accepts saying "sādhu," there is a dukkaṭa.
282-3.Tesu dasavidhesu ratanesūti attho.Dvīsūti rajatajātarūpesu. Gaṇasaṅghapuggale (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539) anāmasitvā ‘‘idaṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇaṃ cetiyassa dammi, navakammassa dammī’’ti vutte na paṭikkhipeti attho. Kiṃ kātabbanti ce? Taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘vade’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ime evaṃ vadantī’’ti kappiyakārānaṃ ācikkhitabbanti attho.
282-3. This means among those ten kinds of gems. Dvīsūti means in silver and gold. Without addressing the group (gaṇasaṅghapuggale) (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.538-539), if it is said, "I will give this silver and gold to the cetiya, I will give it for construction," it is not to be refused. If asked, "What should be done?" to show that, ‘‘vade’’tiādi was said. This means the kappiyakāras should be told, "These are saying thus."
284.Na kevalaṃ hiraññasuvaṇṇādikameva, aññampi khettavatthādikaṃ akappiyaṃ na sampaṭicchitabbanti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘khettaṃ vatthu’’ntiādimāha. Dāsapasuādikaṃdāsapasvādikaṃ. Sace hi koci ‘‘mayhaṃ sassasampādakaṃ mahātaḷākaṃ atthi, taṃ saṅghassa dammī’’ti vadati, tañce saṅgho sampaṭicchati. Paṭiggahaṇepi paribhogepi āpattiyeva. Evaṃ sesesupi.
284. Not only gold and silver, but to show that other unsuitable things such as fields and land should not be accepted, he said, ‘‘khettaṃ vatthu’’nti, etc. Dāsapasuādikaṃ means dāsapasvādikaṃ. If someone says, "I have a large pond that produces crops for me, I will give it to the Saṅgha," and if the Saṅgha accepts it, there is an offense in accepting and using it. Thus, also in the rest.
‘‘paṭikkhipitvā gaṇheyyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
‘‘paṭikkhipitvā gaṇheyyā’’ti was said.
285-6.Navamātikakedārataḷākakiriyā(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.238-239)ca anavepubbe kappiyavohārena paṭikkhipitvā gahitataḷākemattikuddharaṇañca bhinnaṭṭhāne pāḷibandhoca dubbalaṭṭhāneāḷiyā thirakāro ca anavekedāre purāṇabhāgatoatirekabhāgaggahaṇañcanavekedāreaparicchinnabhāge ‘‘sasse detha ettake’’tikahāpaṇuṭṭhāpanañcāpīti idaṃ sabbaṃ bhikkhussa kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace karoti, evamādikaṃsabbesampi akappiyanti attho.
285-6. Navamātikakedārataḷākakiriyā(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.238-239)ca anave means the newly made actions of creating rice fields (kedāra) and ponds (taḷāka). Without having refused it with allowable language beforehand, in a pond taken after refusing, mattikuddharaṇañca means removing soil; bhinnaṭṭhāne pāḷibandhoca means binding the embankment in a broken place; dubbalaṭṭhāneāḷiyā thirakāro ca anave means making the rampart firm in a weak place; kedāre purāṇabhāgatoatirekabhāgaggahaṇañca means taking an extra share from an old rice field; navekedāreaparicchinnabhāge ‘‘sasse detha ettake’’tikahāpaṇuṭṭhāpanañcāpīti means establishing kahāpaṇas in a new rice field in an undefined area, saying, "Give this much grain." All of this is not allowable for a bhikkhu to do. If he does, sabbesampi akappiyanti means everything like this is unsuitable.
287-9.Idāni taṃyeva akappiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘avatvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.238-239) – yo pana ‘‘kasa, vappa’’ iccādikaṃ avatvā ‘‘ettikāya bhūmiyā ettako bhāgo deyyo’’ti bhūmiṃ vā patiṭṭhāpeti, ‘‘ettake bhūmibhāge sassaṃ kataṃ, ettakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti kassake vadante pamāṇagaṇhanatthaṃ daṇḍarajjubhi minati, khale ṭhatvā rakkhaṇādīni karoti, tasseva akappiyanti.
287-9. Now, to show that very unsuitability, ‘‘avatvā’’tiādi was said. Its meaning (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.238-239) is—if someone, without saying "plow, sow," etc., establishes the land saying, "So much of this land is to be given," or when farmers say, "Grain has been grown in so much of this land, take this much," measures with rods and ropes for the purpose of calculating the amount, or standing at the threshing floor, does guarding, etc., that is unsuitable.
290.Bhaṇḍāgārikasīsena pitusantakampi sace paṭisāmeyya, pācittiyanti attho.
290. If, at the instigation of the storekeeper, he accepts even what belongs to his parents, there is a pācittiya.
291-2.Pitūnanti mātāpitūnaṃ. Sāṭakādikappiyaṃvatthuṃ. ‘‘Paṭisāmetvā dehī’’ti vutteti sambandho. Pātetvāna gate yasmāajjhārāmasikkhāpadavasena (pāci. 505-506) palibodho, tasmā gopituṃ labbhanti attho.
291-2. Pitūnanti means of the mother and father. Vatthuṃ means a garment or other allowable item. The connection is that it was said, "Having returned it, give it." Because there is an impediment due to the ajjhārāmasikkhāpada (pāci. 505-506) after one has gone having thrown it down, it is allowable to guard it.
293-4.Sakaṃvāsiādiparikkhāranti attho. Idaṃ ṭhānaṃ guttanti dassetabbaṃ. ‘‘Ettha ṭhapethā’’ti pana na vattabbaṃ.
293-4. Sakaṃ means one’s own bowl and other requisites. It should be shown that this place is safe. But it should not be said, "Place it here."
295.Ettha ‘‘añño koci na pavisati, bhikkhūhi vā sāmaṇerehi vā gahitaṃ bhavissatī’’tisaṅkantīti attho.Vatthumhīti alaṅkārādivatthumhīti attho.Tādiseti yādise vatthumhi naṭṭhe āsaṅkā hoti, tādise vatthumhi naṭṭheti sambandho.
295. Here, saṅkantīti means the idea that "no one else will enter, it will be taken by monks or novices." Vatthumhīti means in an item such as an ornament. Tādiseti the connection is that it is lost in such an item in which there is suspicion of loss.
296.Idāni asaṅkitabbaṭṭhānaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘vihārāvasathassanto’’tiādimāha. Vihārassa ca gharassa cāti attho.Ratananti dasavidhaṃ ratanaṃ.Ratnasammatanti sāṭakaveṭhanādikaṃ.Gahetvānāti kappiyakārake asati attanāpi gahetvāna nikkhipeyyāti attho.Maggeraññepīti maggepi araññepi.Tādiseti ‘‘bhikkhūhi gahitaṃ bhavissatī’’ti āsaṅkitabbaṭṭhāne.Patirūpaṃ karīyatīti magge vā araññe vā tādisaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ passitvā maggā okkamma nisīditabbaṃ, sāmikesu āgatesu taṃ ṭhānaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Sace sāmike na passati, ratanasammataṃ paṃsukūlaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Ratanañce hoti, tuṇhībhūtena gantabbanti attho. Ayaṃ maggāraññakesu paṭipatti. Vihārāvasathānaṃ pana anto tādisaṃ disvā bhaṇḍakaṃ muñcitvā ‘‘ettha ettakā kahāpaṇā’’tiādinā nayena rūpena vā lañchanāya vā pilotikāya vā saññāṇaṃ katvā nikkhipitabbaṃ, tato pakkamantena patirūpānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ. Uggahavinicchayo.
296. Now, to show a place where there is no need to suspect, he said, ‘‘vihārāvasathassanto’’ti, etc. This means inside the monastery and the dwelling. Ratananti means the ten kinds of gems. Ratnasammatanti means a wrapping cloth for gems, etc. Gahetvānāti means, if there is no kappiyakāra, having taken it oneself, one should put it down. Maggeraññepīti means even on the road or in the forest. Tādiseti means in a place where there is suspicion that "it will be taken by monks." Patirūpaṃ karīyatīti means having seen such an item on the road or in the forest, one should sit down off the road and tell the place to the owners when they come. If one does not see the owners, a ratanasammata or a paṃsukūla should be taken. If it is a gem, one should go silently. This is the practice in roads and forests. But inside monasteries and dwellings, having seen such a thing, one should drop the item and put down a sign by way of a shape or mark with the idea that "there are so many kahāpaṇas here," etc., and having left from there, one should tell suitable monks. This is the decision on taking up.
Uggahaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Section on Taking Up is finished.
38. Kuladūsananiddesavaṇṇanā
38. Explanation of the Section on Corrupting Families
297.‘‘Kulāni dūseti pupphena vā phalena vā cuṇṇena vā mattikāya vā dantakaṭṭhena vā veḷuyā vā vejjikāya vā jaṅghapesaniyena vā’’ti (pārā. 437) vuttattā tāni aṭṭha vatthūni dassetuṃ‘‘puppha’’ntiādimāha. Imāya micchāpaṭipattiyā kulānaṃ aññesu sīlavantesu pasādaṃ dūseti vināsetītikuladūsanaṃ dukkaṭaṃāpajjati. Taṃ pana attano santake ca parasantake ca veditabbaṃ.
297. Because it was said, "He corrupts families with flowers or fruit or powder or clay or a toothpick or bamboo or a vejjikā or a footstool" (pārā. 437), to show those eight things, he said, ‘‘puppha’’nti, etc. By this wrong practice, one commits a dukkaṭa of corrupting families (kuladūsanaṃ) because it corrupts and destroys the families' confidence in other virtuous ones. But that should be understood as in one's own property and in another's property.
298.Idāni imesu vatthūsu na kevalaṃ kuladūsanadukkaṭameva āpajjati, thullaccayādīnipi āpajjatīti dassetuṃ‘‘thullaccaya’’ntiādimāha. Saṅghikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ issarena dentassa thullaccayanti sambandho. Senāsanatthāya niyamitaṃ pana pupphādi garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Saṅghassa vā aññassa vā santakaṃ theyyacittena dentassa dukkaṭādīni hontīti pāṭhaseso, tassa bhaṇḍassa agghavasena dukkaṭathullaccayapārājikāni hontīti attho.
298. Now, to show that not only a dukkaṭa of corrupting families is committed in these things, but also thullaccayas, etc., he said, ‘‘thullaccaya’’nti, etc. The connection is that there is a thullaccaya for a lord giving heavy Saṅghika property. But a flower, etc., dedicated for a dwelling is heavy property. The remainder of the reading is that there are dukkaṭas, etc., for one giving what belongs to the Saṅgha or another with the intention of theft, meaning there are dukkaṭas, thullaccayas, and pārājikas depending on the value of that property.
299-300.Sabbathāti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431) kappiyavohāraakappiyavohārapariyāyaobhāsanimittakammādīhi na vaṭṭatīti attho. Vatiādīni katvājaggituñca. Attano paribhogatthanti phalaparibhogatthaṃ.Ropanādīnīti ropāpanādīni.Ādi-saddena siñcāpanaocināpanādīni gahitāni. Kuddālakhaṇittivāsipharasuudakabhājanādīni āharitvā samīpe ṭhapanavasena nimittato ca kuddālakhaṇittādīni ca mālāvacche ca gahetvā ṭhite ‘‘sāmaṇerādayo disvā ‘thero kārāpetukāmo’ti āgantvā karontī’’ti saññāya obhāsato ca ‘‘imaṃ rukkhaṃ jāna, imaṃ āvāṭaṃ jānā’’tiādikappiyavohārato ca ‘‘paṇḍitena mālāvacchādayo ropāpetabbā, na cirasseva upakārāya saṃvattantī’’tiādipariyāyato ca ropanādīni labbhareti sambandho.
299-300. Sabbathāti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.431) means it is not allowable by means of allowable language, unsuitable language, roundabout talk, suggestive behavior, action, etc. Jaggituñca means also to tend to after making fences, etc. Attano paribhogatthanti means for the purpose of using the fruits. Ropanādīnīti means causing to plant, etc. With the word ādi, causing to water, causing to pluck, etc., are included. The connection is that the act of obtaining planting, etc., is done by bringing hoes, axes, hatchets, water containers, etc., and placing them nearby as a suggestion, by taking hoes, axes, etc., and flower gardens and standing there from action, by indicating with allowable language such as, "Know this tree, know this ditch," by roundabout talk such as, "Wise people should have flower gardens planted; before long they will turn out to be helpful."
301-2.Idāni aṭṭhasu vatthūsu avasesāni dve vatthūni dassetuṃ‘‘vuttāva vejjikā jaṅghapesane’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthavejjikāpubbevuttāva,idāni jaṅghapesanādivinicchayaṃ vakkhāmīti attho.Pitaroti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437) mātāpitaro.Bhaṇḍunti pabbajjāpekkhaṃ. Bhikkhussa sakaṃ veyyāvaccakarañcāti ete ṭhapetvā kasivāṇijjādigihikammesu dūtasāsanaṃ haraṇe dukkaṭanti attho. Paṭhamaṃ sāsanaṃ aggahetvā puna taṃ disvā vā tassa santikaṃ gantvā vā vadatopi dukkaṭamevāti attho. Sāsanaṃ aggahetvā āgatānaṃ pana ‘‘bhante, tasmiṃ gāme itthannāmassa kā pavattī’’ti pucchiyamāne kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Pucchitapañhe doso natthi.
301-2. Now, to show the remaining two things out of the eight things, ‘‘vuttāva vejjikā jaṅghapesane’’ti was said. There, vejjikā has already been said; now, I will speak of the decision on the footstool, etc. Pitaroti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437) means the mother and father. Bhaṇḍunti means one who is seeking ordination. Except for these—one’s own servant and the person doing service—there is a dukkaṭa in household activities such as farming and trading, and in carrying a messenger’s message. It also means that there is still a dukkaṭa for one who speaks after not accepting the first message or after seeing it again or after going to his presence. But when those who have come without a message are asked, "Bhante, what is the news in that village for so-and-so?" it is allowable to speak. There is no fault in an asked question.
303.Evaṃkuladūsanenauppannapaccayā. ‘‘Pañcannampī’’ti vuttattā anupasampannena katampi edisaṃ na vaṭṭati eva micchājīvattā.Ātumāvatthu(mahāva. 303) cettha nidassanaṃ. Kiṃ viyāti ce, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘abhūtārocanārūpa-sabyohāruggahādisā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthauggahādisāti etehi uppannapaccayasadisāti attho.
303. Evaṃ means such a cause arisen by corrupting families. Because ‘‘Pañcannampī’’ti was said, even such a thing done by one who is not fully ordained is not allowable, and it is wrong livelihood. Ātumāvatthu(mahāva. 303) is an example here. If asked what it is like, to show that, ‘‘abhūtārocanārūpa-sabyohāruggahādisā’’ti was said. There, uggahādisāti means similar to causes arisen by these.
304.Idāni pupphādīni kesaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭanti, kesaṃ dātuṃ na vaṭṭantīti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘harāpetvā’’tiādimāha. Pitūnaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437) dātuṃ labbhatīti sambandho. Sesañātīnaṃ pattānaṃ eva.Liṅganti sivaliṅgaṃ.
304. Now, to show to whom it is allowable to give flowers, etc., and to whom it is not allowable to give them, he said, ‘‘harāpetvā’’ti, etc. The connection is that it is allowable to give to the parents (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437). Only bowls are for the remaining relatives. Liṅganti means a sivaliṅga.
305.Tathāphalanti phalampi mātāpitūnaṃ haritvāpi harāpetvāpi dātuṃ labbhatīti attho. Na kevalaṃ mātāpitūnaṃyeva, aññesampi dātuṃ labbhatīti dassetuṃ‘‘gilānāna’’ntiādimāha.Saparasantakanti etthaparoti attano vissāsaññātako eva adhippeto.
305. Tathā phalanti: "Likewise, the fruit" means the fruit can be given to parents even after taking it or having it taken. To show that it is not only for parents but can also be given to others, he said, "gilānāna" (to the sick) etc. Saparasantakanti: Here, paro (another) refers only to a trusted acquaintance.
306.Bhājenteti saṅghassa phalapupphamhi bhājiyamāne sammatena deyyanti sambandho. Itarena asammatena apaloketvā dātabbanti attho.
306. Bhājenteti: "When distributing" means it should be given with the approval of the Saṅgha when distributing fruit and flowers. Otherwise, it should be given after seeking permission, without approval.
307.Paricchijjāti āgatānaṃ dātabbanti phalavasena vā rukkhavasena vā paricchinditvāti attho.Itarassāti issarādikassa.Katikaṃ vatvāti ‘‘imasmiṃ rukkhe ettakāni phalāni labbhantī’’ti evaṃ vatvā.
307. Paricchijjāti: "Having allocated" means having allocated it based on the fruit or the trees, intending it to be given to those who come. Itarassāti: To the ruler etc. Katikaṃ vatvāti: "Having made an agreement" means saying, "So many fruits are available on this tree," in this way.
308.Seseti mattikādantakaṭṭhaveḷumhi (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437).Yathāvuttanayo evāti ettha attano ca parassa ca santakaṃ kulasaṅgahatthāya dadato dukkaṭantiādinā heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva vinicchayo veditabboti attho.Paṇṇampīti kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ paṇṇadānaṃ na vuttaṃ, tathāpi kuladūsane pavesayeti attho. Kuladūsanavinicchayo.
308. Seseti: "In the remainder" refers to clay, tooth-sticks and bamboo (pāci. 239). Yathāvuttanayo evāti: "The method as stated before" means the judgment should be understood in the same way as stated below, starting with "giving one's own or another's property for the sake of family support is a dukkaṭa offense". Paṇṇampīti: "Even leaves" means, although giving leaves is not mentioned in the Pāli, it involves causing disrepute to the family. Conclusion on causing disrepute to the family.
Kuladūsananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Causing Disrepute to the Family is Complete.
39. Vassūpanāyikaniddesavaṇṇanā
39. Explanation of the Section on Entering the Rainy Season Residence
309-310.Idāni vassūpagamanaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘purimikā’’tiādimāha. Tattha purimikā pacchimikā (mahāva. 184; mahāva. aṭṭha. 185) ceti dve vassūpanāyikāti attho. Ālayapariggāho vā vacībhedo vā vassūpanāyikāti pāṭhaseso. Idāni vattabbaṃ sandhāya‘‘ediso’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idha vassaṃ vasissāmī’’ticittuppādettha ālayo(mahāva. aṭṭha. 203). Ālayapariggāho pana vaje vā satthe vā nāvāya vā vassaṃ upagantukāmassa tattha senāsanaṃ alabhantassa labbhati, satthādīsu pana vassaṃ upagantuṃ na vaṭṭatīti katvā. Yadi satthādīsu kavāṭabandhaṃ senāsanaṃ labbhati, tattha upagantabbaṃ. Upagacchantena ca ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ. Vihāre pana vacībhedo vā kātabbo. Sace ‘‘idha vassaṃ vasissāmī’’ti ālayo atthi, asatiyā pana vassaṃ na upeti, chinnavasso na hoti, pavāretuñca labhati eva.
309-310. Now, to show the entering into the rains, he said, ‘‘purimikā’’tiādi: "the earlier" etc. Here, there are two vassūpanāyikā: the earlier and the later (mahāva. 184; mahāva. aṭṭha. 185). Ālayapariggāho vā vacībhedo vā vassūpanāyikāti is a variant reading. Now, with reference to what is to be said, ‘‘ediso’’ti vuttaṃ: "such" is said. cittuppādettha ālayo: Here, ālaya is the thought (mahāva. aṭṭha. 203) "I will dwell here during the rains". However, the acceptance of ālaya is valid for one intending to enter the rains in a cart, caravan, or boat, if he cannot find lodging there; but it is not proper to enter the rains in a caravan, etc. If lodging with a closed door is available in a caravan, etc., one should enter there. And the one entering should say three times, "I enter the rains here". In a monastery, however, a verbal declaration should be made. If there is an ālaya with the thought, "I will dwell here during the rains," but one does not enter the rains, he is not considered to have broken the rains (chinnavasso), and he is still allowed to invite (to the Pavāraṇā ceremony).
311.Nopetukāmo āvāsaṃ, tadahūtikkameyya vāti pāṭhe (mahāva. 186) atikkamantassa āvāsaṃ tadahu vassūpanāyikātipi attho. Āvāsaṃ atikkameyya vāti sambandho.Jānaṃ vānupagacchatoti ettha vihāre nisīditvāpi anupagacchato dukkaṭāpatti hotīti adhippāyo.
311. Nopetukāmo āvāsaṃ, tadahūtikkameyya vāti pāṭhe: In the reading "If he does not want to enter the dwelling, or if he passes that day" (mahāva. 186), "passes the dwelling on that day" means it is the day for entering the rains. Āvāsaṃ atikkameyya vāti sambandho: "He should pass the dwelling," is the connection. Jānaṃ vānupagacchatoti: "Even if one knows and does not enter," here, the meaning is that if one sits in a monastery and still does not enter, an offense of dukkaṭa occurs.
312.Chinnavasso (vajira. ṭī. mahāvagga 208) vā kenaci antarāyena paṭhamaṃ anupagato (mahāva. 185-186) vā dutiyaṃ upagaccheyyāti sambandho.Temāsanti purimaṃ vā temāsaṃ pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ. ‘‘Na bhikkhave vassaṃ upagantvā purimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ avasitvā cārikā pakkamitabbā. Yo pakkameyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 185) hi vuttaṃ.
312. Chinnavasso (vajira. ṭī. mahāvagga 208) vā kenaci antarāyena paṭhamaṃ anupagato (mahāva. 185-186) vā dutiyaṃ upagaccheyyāti sambandho: "One who has broken the rains or one who has not entered the first time due to some obstacle may enter the second time," is the connection. Temāsanti: "Three months" refers to either the first three months or the last three months. "Monks, having entered the rains, it is not allowed to leave on a journey without spending either the first three months or the last three months. Whoever leaves incurs an offense of dukkaṭa” (mahāva. 185), it was said.
313-5.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sattannaṃ sattāhakaraṇīyena appahitepi gantuṃ, pageva pahite, ‘bhikkhussa bhikkhuniyā sikkhamānāya sāmaṇerassa sāmaṇeriyā mātuyā ca pitussa ca, gilānabhattaṃ vā pariyesissāmi, gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ vā pariyesissāmi, gilānabhesajjaṃ vā pariyesissāmi, pucchissāmi vā upaṭṭhahissāmi vā’ti sattāhaṃ sannivatto kātabbo’’ti (mahāva. 198) vuttattā‘‘mātāpitūnamatthāya…pe… upaṭṭhissa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepo – ‘‘mātādīnaṃ gilānabhattaṃ vā tadupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ vā gilānānaṃ osadhaṃ vā esissaṃ pariyesissa’’nti vā ‘‘te gilāne gantvā pucchissāmī’’ti vā ‘‘upaṭṭhissa’’nti vā pahitepi appahitepi sattāhakiccena gantuṃ labhati.
313-5.‘‘mātāpitūnamatthāya…pe… upaṭṭhissa’’nti vuttaṃ: "For the sake of mother and father…pe… I will attend," was said because it was said, "I allow, monks, to go even without being sent, for seven reasons, but preferably when sent, ‘I will seek sick-food for a monk, a nun, a female trainee, a novice, a female novice, a mother, or a father, or I will seek food for an attendant of the sick, or I will seek medicine for the sick, or I will ask or attend,’ a seven-day return should be made" (mahāva. 198). Tatthāyaṃ saṅkhepo: Here is the summary – “I will seek or search for sick-food or attendant-food or medicine for the sick for mother etc.” or “I will go and ask those sick” or “I will attend,” one may go for a seven-day task even when sent or not sent.
‘‘anabhirata’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Visabhāgarūpaṃ disvā anabhirati, tato vūpakāsissaṃ, taṃ gahetvā aññattha gamissa’’nti adhippāyena gantumpi labbhatīti attho. Kukkuccaṃ vinodanañca diṭṭhiṃ vivecanañca ahaṃ vā kareyyaṃ aññehi vā kāreyyanti sambandho. Parivāsamānattaādīhi vuṭṭhānaṃ vā garukā.Ādi-saddena sace saṅghena kammaṃ kataṃ hoti, tassa paṭippassaddhiyā anussāvanakaraṇādīsu ussukkaṃ kareyyanti gantuṃ labbhatīti attho.Sattāhakiccenāti sattāhakaraṇīyena.
‘‘anabhirata’’ntiādi vuttaṃ: "Discontented" etc., was said. The meaning is that it is also allowed to go with the intention, "Having seen an unsuitable form, I am discontented; therefore, I will leave, taking it elsewhere." Kukkuccaṃ vinodanañca diṭṭhiṃ vivecanañca ahaṃ vā kareyyaṃ aññehi vā kāreyyanti sambandho: "I myself will dispel remorse, purify views, or I will have others do it," is the connection. Parivāsamānattaādīhi vuṭṭhānaṃ vā garukā: "Or to rise from parivāsa, mānatta, etc., or garukā." Ādi-saddena: With the word ādi (etc.), "if a kamma has been done by the Saṅgha, one may be eager for the announcement of its suspension, etc.,” the meaning is that it is allowed to go. Sattāhakiccenāti: "For a seven-day task" means for a task requiring seven days.
316.Dhammasavanatthaṃ nimantito evaṃ vajeti attho.Garūnāma ācariyupajjhāyā, tehi bhaṇḍadhovanakiccena pahitassa gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.
316. Dhammasavanatthaṃ nimantito evaṃ vajeti: "Being invited for hearing the Dhamma, one may go," is the meaning. Garūnāma ācariyupajjhāyā, tehi bhaṇḍadhovanakiccena pahitassa gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho: Garū (gurus) are teachers and preceptors; the meaning is that it is proper to go when sent by them for the task of washing robes.
317.Na bhaṇḍadhovana…pe… dassaneti ettha (mahāva. aṭṭha. 199) etesupi na vajeti sambandho.Labbhanti ettha ‘‘ajjeva āgamissa’’nti adūrago yadi na pāpuṇeyya, labbhanti sambandho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? ‘‘Ajjeva āgamissāmī’’ti sāmantavihāraṃ gantvā puna āgacchantassa antarāmagge sace aruṇuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, vassacchedopi na hoti, ratticchedena dukkaṭampi nāpajjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
317. Na bhaṇḍadhovana…pe… dassaneti ettha: "Not for washing robes…pe… for seeing," here (mahāva. aṭṭha. 199), the connection is that it is not allowed to go for these reasons either. Labbhanti ettha: "Is obtainable," here, if one who is not going far, thinking, "I will return today," cannot reach, "it is obtainable," is the connection. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? What is said? If one goes to a nearby monastery thinking, "I will return today," but sunrise occurs on the way back, there is neither a break in the rains nor an offense of dukkaṭa due to the breaking of the night.
318.Sesañātihīti bhātubhaginīādīhi. Bhikkhunissitakena ca pahiteti sambandho.Niddisitvāti ‘‘āgacchantu bhadantā, icchāmi dānañca dātuṃ dhammañca sotuṃ bhikkhuñca passitu’’ntiādinā yaṃ kiñci niddisitvāva pesite gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Kevalaṃ ‘‘āgacchantu bhikkhū, icchāmi bhikkhūnaṃ āgamana’’nti evaṃ aniddisitvā vutte gantuṃ na labbhatīti attho.
318. Sesañātihīti: "By remaining relatives" means by brothers, sisters, etc. Bhikkhunissitakena ca pahiteti sambandho: "And sent by one who is dependent on nuns," is the connection. Niddisitvāti: "Having specified" means it is proper to go when sent having specified something like, "May the venerable ones come; I wish to give a gift, hear the Dhamma, and see the monks." Kevalaṃ ‘‘āgacchantu bhikkhū, icchāmi bhikkhūnaṃ āgamana’’nti evaṃ aniddisitvā vutte gantuṃ na labbhatīti attho: However, if one says without specifying, "May the monks come; I desire the coming of the monks," it is not allowed to go, is the meaning.
319.Accharāye satattanoti dasavidhesu antarāyesu ekasmimpi antarāye attano satīti attho. Saṅghasāmaggiyā vā vassacchede anāpattīti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘idha pana, bhikkhave, vassūpagato bhikkhu passati sambahule bhikkhū saṅghabhedāya parakkamante. Tatra ce bhikkhuno evaṃ hoti, ‘garuko kho saṅghabhedo vutto bhagavatā. Mā mayi sammukhībhūte saṅgho bhijjī’ti pakkamitabbaṃ, anāpatti vassacchedassā’’ti (mahāva. 202). Evaṃ chinnavasso no pavārayeti attho.
319. Accharāye satattanoti: "When one is in danger" means when one is in danger from one of the ten types of dangers. Saṅghasāmaggiyā vā vassacchede anāpattīti attho: Or, for the sake of the Saṅgha's unity, there is no offense for breaking the rains, is the meaning. Vuttañhetaṃ: For it was said, "Here, monks, a monk who has entered the rains sees many monks striving for a schism in the Saṅgha. If it occurs to the monk, 'A schism in the Saṅgha is said to be serious by the Blessed One. Lest the Saṅgha split while I am present,' he may leave; there is no offense for breaking the rains" (mahāva. 202). Evaṃ chinnavasso no pavārayeti attho: Thus, one who has broken the rains does not invite, is the meaning.
320.Rukkhassa susireti ettha (mahāva. 204; mahāva. aṭṭha. 203) pana suddhe rukkhasusire eva na vaṭṭati, mahantassa pana susirassa anto padaracchadanaṃ kuṭikaṃ katvā pavisanadvāraṃ yojetvā upagantuṃ vaṭṭati.Rukkhassa viṭapeti etthāpi suddhaviṭapamatte na vaṭṭati, mahāviṭape pana aṭṭakaṃ bandhitvā vuttanayena kuṭikaṃ katvā upagantuṃ vaṭṭati.Chavakuṭināma pāsāṇakuṭikanti vadanti. Tīsu passesu pāsāṇe ussāpetvā upari pāsāṇena paṭicchannā.
320. Rukkhassa susireti ettha: "In the hollow of a tree" here (mahāva. 204; mahāva. aṭṭha. 203), it is not proper in a pure tree hollow, but it is proper to enter a large hollow after making a small hut inside the hollow with coverings of leaves, and attaching a door for entering. Rukkhassa viṭapeti etthāpi: "In the branch of a tree" here also, it is not proper on a mere branch, but it is proper to make a raised platform on a large branch and make a small hut in the manner described, and then enter. Chavakuṭināma pāsāṇakuṭikanti vadanti: Chavakuṭi (a charnel house) is called a stone hut. It is covered with stones on top after raising stones on three sides.
321.Nāvādīsu pana upagato pavāretuñca labbhatīti sambandho. Vassūpanāyikavinicchayo.
321. Nāvādīsu pana upagato pavāretuñca labbhatīti sambandho: "However, one who has entered in a boat etc., is allowed to invite to the Pavāraṇā ceremony," is the connection. Vassūpanāyikavinicchayo: Conclusion of the section on entering the rainy season residence.
Vassūpanāyikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Entering the Rainy Season Residence is Complete.
40. Avebhaṅgiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
40. Explanation of the Section on Non-Divisible Properties
322-4.Ārāmārāmavatthūnīti ettha (cūḷava. 321; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321)ārāmonāma pupphārāmo vā phalārāmo vā. Mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bibbohanādisayanāsanaṃ.Lohakumbhīādayo kāḷalohatambalohādimayā.Bhāṇakoudakacāṭi.Pañcete avibhājiyāti bhājetvā na gahetabbā, gahitāpi saṅghasantakā evāti attho. Ettha pana ārāmo ārāmavatthūti paṭhamaṃ, vihāro vihāravatthūti dutiyaṃ, mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bibbohananti tatiyaṃ, lohakumbhī…pe… nikhādananti catutthaṃ, valli…pe… dārubhaṇḍaṃ mattikabhaṇḍanti pañcamanti evaṃ imāni rāsivasena pañca honti, sarupavasena anekāni honti. Honti cettha –
322-4. Ārāmārāmavatthūnīti ettha: "Parks and park grounds" here (cūḷava. 321; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321), ārāmonāma pupphārāmo vā phalārāmo vā: ārāmo (park) means either a flower park or a fruit park. Mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bibbohanādisayanāsanaṃ: A couch, a chair, a cushion, and sleeping and seating places such as a bolster. Lohakumbhīādayo kāḷalohatambalohādimayā: Lohakumbhī (metal pots) and so on are made of black iron, copper, etc. Bhāṇakoudakacāṭi: Bhāṇako (water pot) is a water bowl. Pañcete avibhājiyāti: "These five are indivisible" means they should not be taken by dividing; even if taken, they belong to the Saṅgha, is the meaning. Here, ārāmo ārāmavatthūti (parks and park grounds) is the first; vihāro vihāravatthūti (monasteries and monastery grounds) is the second; mañco pīṭhaṃ bhisi bibbohananti (couch, chair, cushion, bolster) is the third; lohakumbhī…pe… nikhādananti (metal pots…pe… digging tools) is the fourth; valli…pe… dārubhaṇḍaṃ mattikabhaṇḍanti (creepers…pe… wooden and clay utensils) is the fifth; thus, these are five in terms of groups and many in terms of specific items. Here are some:
‘‘Dvisaṅgahāni dve honti, tatiyaṃ catusaṅgahaṃ;
‘‘Dvisaṅgahāni dve honti, tatiyaṃ catusaṅgahaṃ;
Catutthaṃ navakoṭṭhāsaṃ, pañcamaṃ aṭṭhabhedana’’nti. (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321);
325.‘‘Pañcimāni, bhikkhave, avissajjiyāni na vissajjetabbāni saṅghena vā gaṇena vā puggalena vā, vissajjitānipi avissajjitāni honti. Yo vissajjeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (cūḷava. 321) vuttattā‘‘bhājitāpi abhājitā’’ti vuttaṃ.Eteti vuttappakārā pañcapi ‘‘garubhaṇḍānī’’ti ca ‘‘avissajjiyānī’’ti ca ca-saddena ‘‘avebhaṅgiyānī’’ti ca vuccantīti attho.
325.‘‘bhājitāpi abhājitā’’ti vuttaṃ: "Even if divided, they are not divided," was said because it was said, "Monks, these five are inalienable; they should not be alienated by the Saṅgha, a group, or an individual; even if alienated, they are inalienable. Whoever alienates incurs an offense of thullaccaya” (cūḷava. 321). Eteti: "These" means the five mentioned above are called "heavy goods", "inalienable," and also, with the word ca (and), "non-divisible," is the meaning.
326-8.Idāni purimesu tīsu rāsīsu sabbassa garubhaṇḍattā te anāmasitvā pacchimesu dvīsu rāsīsu ekaccassa agarubhaṇḍassāpi atthitāya taṃ dassetuṃ ārabhantopi tesu dvīsu bahuvisayaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘valliḍḍhabāhumattāpī’’tiādimāhāti ñātabbaṃ. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepo (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) – valli aḍḍhabāhumattāpi veḷu aṭṭhaṅgulāyatopitiṇādi muṭṭhimattampīti etthaādi-saddena muñjapabbajaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, paṇṇaṃ ekampi mattikā pākatā vā pañcavaṇṇā vāsudhākaṅguṭṭhaādikātiādi-saddena sajjulasajātihiṅgulakādi vā tālapakkappamāṇāpi yehi kehici saṅghassa dinnā vā saṅghike tiṇakhettādimhi jātā vā rakkhitagopitabhūmibhāge uppannā tatthajātakā vā saṅghikā rakkhitā eva abhājiyāti attho.
326-8.Idāni purimesu tīsu rāsīsu sabbassa garubhaṇḍattā te anāmasitvā pacchimesu dvīsu rāsīsu ekaccassa agarubhaṇḍassāpi atthitāya taṃ dassetuṃ ārabhantopi tesu dvīsu bahuvisayaṃ paṭhamaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘valliḍḍhabāhumattāpī’’tiādimāhāti ñātabbaṃ: Now, since all of the first three groups are heavy goods, without mentioning them, and since there are also some light goods in the last two groups, to show that, one should know that he begins by first showing the extensive scope within those two groups with ‘‘valliḍḍhabāhumattāpī’’tiādi "even a creeper that is half an arm’s length" etc. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepo (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321): Here is the summary – even a creeper that is half an arm’s length, even a bamboo that is eight finger-breadths long, tiṇādi muṭṭhimattampīti ettha: "even grass etc. that is a handful," here, ādi-saddena: with the word ādi (etc.) includes muñja grass and pabbaja grass; even a single leaf; even clay that is natural or five-colored; sudhākaṅguṭṭhaādikāti: ādi-saddena: "lime, charcoal, etc.," with the word ādi (etc.) includes sajjula, sajāti, hiṅgulaka, etc., even the size of a palm fruit, whatever is given to the Saṅgha by anyone, or grown in Saṅghika grass fields etc., or produced in a protected and guarded area, whatever is born there and belongs to the Saṅgha, is protected and is indeed indivisible, is the meaning.
‘‘niṭṭhite’’tiādimāha, saṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā kamme niṭṭhite bhājiyāti adhippāyo. Ettha pana yaṃ kiñci valliveḷutiṇapaṇṇamattikādi saṅghassa dinnaṃ vā saṅghike tiṇakhettādimhi jātakaṃ vā rakkhitagopitaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, taṃ saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca niṭṭhite avasesaṃ puggalikakammepi dātuṃ vaṭṭati, agarubhaṇḍattā bhājitumpi labbhati. Senāsanatthāya rakkhitagopitameva garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, na itaraṃ. Sīhaḷadīpe tumūlasomavihāre saṅghassa pākavattampi tālapaṇṇaṃ vikkiṇitvā karīyati. Kasmā? Na hi tattha paṇṇena attho atthi, sabbepi iṭṭhakacchannā pāsādādayoti. Evaṃ aññatthāpi karīyati evāti vadanti.
‘‘niṭṭhite’’tiādimāha: "When completed," etc., he said, meaning it may be divided when a work for the Saṅgha or a cetiya is completed. Ettha pana yaṃ kiñci valliveḷutiṇapaṇṇamattikādi saṅghassa dinnaṃ vā saṅghike tiṇakhettādimhi jātakaṃ vā rakkhitagopitaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, taṃ saṅghakamme ca cetiyakamme ca niṭṭhite avasesaṃ puggalikakammepi dātuṃ vaṭṭati, agarubhaṇḍattā bhājitumpi labbhati: Here, whatever creeper, bamboo, grass, leaf, clay, etc., is given to the Saṅgha, or born in Saṅghika grass fields, etc., or protected and guarded as heavy goods, when the Saṅgha's work or the cetiya's work is completed, the remainder may be given even for individual work because it is light goods and it is also allowed to be divided. Senāsanatthāya rakkhitagopitameva garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti, na itaraṃ: Only what is protected and guarded for lodging is heavy goods, not the rest. Sīhaḷadīpe tumūlasomavihāre saṅghassa pākavattampi tālapaṇṇaṃ vikkiṇitvā karīyati: In Tumūlasoma Monastery in Sri Lanka, even palm leaves, which are used for cooking for the Saṅgha, are sold and used for other purposes. Kasmā? Why? Na hi tattha paṇṇena attho atthi, sabbepi iṭṭhakacchannā pāsādādayoti: Because there is no need for leaves there, as all the buildings etc. are covered with bricks. Evaṃ aññatthāpi karīyati evāti vadanti: Thus, they say it is done elsewhere as well.
329.Idāni lohabhaṇḍādīsu ekantabhājetabbabhaṇḍaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pattādī’’tiādimāha. Ettha (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 221) panaādi-saddena lohathālakatamba kuṇḍikā kaṭacchu saraka añjani añjanisalākākaṇṇamalaharaṇīsūcisaṇḍāsakattarayaṭṭhiādīni gahitāneva.Tathāti bhājiyamevāti attho. Vippakatañca avippakatañca.Pādagaṇhakanti magadhanāḷiyā pañcanāḷiyā gaṇhanaṃ.
329.Idāni lohabhaṇḍādīsu ekantabhājetabbabhaṇḍaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pattādī’’tiādimāha: Now, to show goods that are entirely divisible among metal goods etc., he said, ‘‘pattādī’’tiādi "bowls etc.". Ettha pana ādi-saddena lohathālakatamba kuṇḍikā kaṭacchu saraka añjani añjanisalākākaṇṇamalaharaṇīsūcisaṇḍāsakattarayaṭṭhiādīni gahitāneva: Here, with the word ādi (etc.) includes metal plates, copper pots, ladles, saucers, collyrium boxes, collyrium sticks, earwax removers, needles, tongs, knives, staffs, etc. Tathāti bhājiyamevāti attho: Tathā (likewise) means they are indeed divisible. Vippakatañca avippakatañca: Both finished and unfinished. Pādagaṇhakanti magadhanāḷiyā pañcanāḷiyā gaṇhanaṃ: Pādagaṇhaka (measuring bowl) means measuring with a magadhanāḷi or five nāḷis.
331-2.Anuññātavāsiyaṃ sakkā sipāṭikāya pakkhipitvā pariharitunti vuttā.Tacchitāniṭṭhitanti vippakataṃ. Yadi tacchitaṃ, garubhaṇḍameva.Dantaṃpana atacchitañca aniṭṭhitañca bhājiyameva. Aniṭṭhitaṃ mañcapādādikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ. Idāni mattikabhaṇḍaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘bhikkhūpakaraṇe’’tiādimāha. Pattathālakakuṇḍikādibhikkhūpakaraṇe ca.Pādaghaṭakoti pādagaṇhanako ghaṭako ca mattikāmayo bhājiyo bhājetabboti attho. Saṅkhathālakampi bhājiyameva.
331-2.Anuññātavāsiyaṃ sakkā sipāṭikāya pakkhipitvā pariharitunti vuttā: Anuññātavāsi (permitted dwelling) it was said, may be carried around after putting it in a bag. Tacchitāniṭṭhitanti vippakataṃ: Tacchitāniṭṭhita (hewn but unfinished) means unfinished. Yadi tacchitaṃ, garubhaṇḍameva: If it is hewn, it is heavy goods. Dantaṃpana atacchitañca aniṭṭhitañca bhājiyameva: However, dantaṃ (ivory) that is unhewn and unfinished is indeed divisible. Aniṭṭhitaṃ mañcapādādikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ: Unfinished items such as couch legs are heavy goods. Idāni mattikabhaṇḍaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhikkhūpakaraṇe’’tiādimāha: Now, to show clay utensils, he said, ‘‘bhikkhūpakaraṇe’’tiādi "monk's equipment" etc. Pattathālakakuṇḍikādibhikkhūpakaraṇe ca: And monk's equipment such as bowls, plates, pots, etc. Pādaghaṭakoti pādagaṇhanako ghaṭako ca mattikāmayo bhājiyo bhājetabboti attho: Pādaghaṭako (foot-washing pot) means a clay pot for washing feet is divisible, should be divided, is the meaning. Saṅkhathālakampi bhājiyameva: A conch plate is also indeed divisible.
333-4.Migacammādikaṃ kappiyacammaṃ bhājiyaṃ, sīhacammādikaṃ akappiyacammaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ. Taṃ pana bhūmattharaṇaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Eḷacammaṃpana paccattharaṇagatikattā garubhaṇḍaṃ hoti. Idāni imāni pana pañca cīvarapiṇḍapātabhesajjānaṃ atthāya parivattetuṃ na vaṭṭati, garubhaṇḍena pana garubhaṇḍañca thāvarañca thāvarena thāvarameva parivattetvā paribhuñjitabbānīti dassetuṃ‘‘garunā’’tiādimāha. Tattha (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321)garunāti garubhaṇḍena garubhaṇḍañca thāvarañca parivatteyyāti sambandho.Thāvarena cathāvarameva parivatteyya, na garubhaṇḍanti adhippāyo. Pañcasu koṭṭhāsesu pacchimattayaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ, purimadvayaṃ thāvaranti veditabbaṃ.Tathā katvā ca bhuñjatūti evaṃ parivattetvā tato ābhataṃ kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ paribhuñjatūti attho. Kathaṃ ñāyatīti ce? Vuttañhetaṃparivāre-
333-4. Deer hide and the like are allowable leather that can be shared; lion hide and the like are unallowable leather and heavy items. However, it is permissible to use it as a ground covering. Eḷaka hide (goat hide), however, being something to spread to sit upon, is a heavy item. Now, these five should not be exchanged for the sake of robes, alms food, or medicine; but heavy items should be exchanged for heavy items, and immovable items for immovable items, and then used, to show this, he said, starting with "garunā" (with a heavy item). Therein, "garunā" (with a heavy item) means that a heavy item may be exchanged for a heavy item or for an immovable item. "Thāvarena ca" (and with an immovable item) means that an immovable item should only be exchanged for an immovable item, not for a heavy item. Among the five categories (of allowable items), the last three are heavy items, and the first two are immovable items. "Tathā katvā ca bhuñjatū" (and having done so, may he use it) means having exchanged in this way, may he then use the allowable item that has been brought. How is this known? Because it was said in the Parivāra:
‘‘Avissajjiyaṃ avebhaṅgiyaṃ, pañca vuttā mahesinā;
"That which is not to be given away, not to be broken up, the five were declared by the great seer;
For one who gives away and uses (them), there is no offense,
These questions have been considered by the skilled." (pari. 479);
Sesanti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) ārāmādi abhājiyanti attho. Avebhaṅgiyavinicchayo.
Sesaṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321) means that monasteries and the like are not to be shared. This is the decision on what is not to be broken up.
Avebhaṅgiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Avebhaṅgiya Niddesa is complete.
41. Pakiṇṇakaniddesavaṇṇanā
41. Pakiṇṇaka Niddesa Explanation
335-6.Sadvārabandhane ṭhāne…pe… sayanto dukkaṭaṃ phuseti evarūpe ṭhāne divā sayantenāti sambandho.Sadvārabandhane(pārā. 77; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.77) panaṭhāneyena kenaci parikkhitte abbhokāsepi rukkhamūlepi antamaso iminā lakkhaṇena yutte ākāsaṅgaṇepi sayantena dvāraṃ bandhitabbameva.Viññumhi puriseti bhikkhumhi vā sāmaṇere vā antamaso upāsakaārāmikesupi aññatarasmiṃ satīti attho. ‘‘Esa jaggissatī’’tiābhogo cāpi kappatīti kevalaṃ bhikkhuniṃ vā mātugāmaṃ vā āpucchituṃ na vaṭṭati.Savaseti attano vase, abahusādhāraṇaṭṭhāneti attho.Taṃ vinākāranti taṃ pubbe vuttappakāraṃ dvārathakanaābhogakaraṇasaṅkhātaṃ ākāraṃ vināti attho. Acittakāpattikiriyāyaṃ saṅkhepo.
335-6. "Sadvārabandhane ṭhāne…pe… sayanto dukkaṭaṃ phuse" (In a place with a door that can be closed…pe… one who lies down incurs a dukkaṭa) means in such a place, relating to one who lies down during the day. "Sadvārabandhane ṭhāne" (in a place with a door that can be closed) (pārā. 77; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.77) means in any enclosed space, even in an open space, at the foot of a tree, at least if it has this characteristic, even in an open courtyard, the door must be closed when lying down. "Viññumhi purise" (when there is a sensible person) means when there is a bhikkhu or a sāmaṇera, or even one of the male lay followers or monastery attendants. "Ābhogo cāpi kappatī" (an announcement is also allowable) means it is not permissible to ask only a bhikkhunī or a woman. "Savase" (in one's own control) means in one's own control, not in a place that is largely shared. "Taṃ vinākāraṃ" (without that manner) means without that previously mentioned manner, which is the closing of the door, the propping of the door, and the making of an announcement. This is a summary regarding offenses of unintentional action.
337.Ratanānīti muttādidasavidharatanāni.Dhaññanti sattavidhaṃ dhaññaṃ.
337. "Ratanāni" (gems) means various kinds of gems, such as pearls and the like. "Dhaññaṃ" (grain) means the seven kinds of grain.
338.Sitthatelodatelehīti ettha (cūḷava. 246; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 246) pana yo madhusitthakatelena vā udakamissakatelena vā aññena kenaci vikārena vā kese osaṇṭheti, dantamayādīsu yena kenaci phaṇena vā kocchena vā hatthena vā phaṇakiccaṃ karonto aṅgulīhi vā osaṇṭheti, tassa dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho.
338. "Sitthatelodatelehī" (with residual oil or water-mixed oil) Here (cūḷava. 246; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 246), if one anoints the hair with residual honey oil or water-mixed oil or any other variation, or one does the work of combing with anything made of ivory or the like, with a comb or with the hand, or one anoints with the fingers, one incurs a dukkaṭa.
339.Nekapāvuraṇāti (cūḷava. 264) na ekapāvuraṇā.Tuvaṭṭayunti nipajjeyyuṃ. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yadi ekapāvuraṇā vā ekattharaṇā vā ekamañce vā tuvaṭṭeyyuṃ, na vaṭṭati, dukkaṭaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekamhi (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 264) vā bhājane na bhuñjeyyunti sambandho.
339. "Nekapāvuraṇā" (with more than one covering) (cūḷava. 264) means not with one covering. "Tuvaṭṭayuṃ" (should lie down) means they should lie down. What is said? If they lie down with one covering or one spread or on one bed, it is not allowed, they incur a dukkaṭa. "Ekamhi (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 264) vā bhājane na bhuñjeyyuṃ" (or in one dish they should not eat) is the connection.
340.Caturaṅgulato (cūḷava. 282; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 282) ūnaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ na khādeyyāti sambandho.Adhikaṭṭhaṅgulanti aṭṭhaṅgulato adhikaṃ.Tathāti na khādeyyāti attho. Akallako (cūḷava. 289) lasuṇaṃ na khādeyya.
340. "Caturaṅgulato" (cūḷava. 282; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 282) ūnaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ na khādeyya (a toothpick less than four fingerbreadths should not be chewed) is the connection. "Adhikaṭṭhaṅgulaṃ" (more than eight fingerbreadths) means more than eight fingerbreadths. "Tathā" (likewise) means should not be chewed. Akallako (cūḷava. 289) lasuṇaṃ na khādeyya (a sick person should not eat garlic).
341.Hīnehi (pāci. 31 ādayo) vā ukkaṭṭhehi vā jātiādīhi eva ukkaṭṭhaṃ vā hīnaṃ vā ‘‘caṇḍālosī’’tiādinā nayenaujuṃ vā‘‘santi vā idhekacce caṇḍālā, venā, nesādā’’tiādinā nayenaaññāpadesenavā upasampannaṃ vā anupasampannaṃ vā akkosādhippāyaṃ vinā kevalaṃdavādhippāyenavade, dubbhāsitanti attho.
341. "Hīnehi (pāci. 31 ādayo) vā ukkaṭṭhehi vā jātiādīhi" (with low or high birth, etc.) either high or low, in the manner of "caṇḍālosī" (you are an outcast), or "ujuṃ vā" (directly), or in the manner of "santi vā idhekacce caṇḍālā, venā, nesādā" (there are some outcasts, hunters, and trappers here), or "aññāpadesena" (indirectly), to one who is ordained or not ordained, without the intention of insult, only with the intention of "dava" (playfulness), "vade, dubbhāsitaṃ" (if one speaks, it is a dubbhāsita) is the meaning.
342.Nakhe vā kese vā nāsalome (cūḷava. 275) vā dīghe na dhārayeti sambandho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, maṃsappamāṇena nakhe chinditu’’nti (cūḷava. 274) ca ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dumāsikaṃ vā duvaṅgulaṃ vā’’ti (cūḷava. 246) ca vuttaṃ.Na labbhaṃ vīsatimaṭṭhanti ettha ekanakhampi maṭṭhaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati eva. ‘‘Na bhikkhave vīsatimaṭṭhaṃ kārāpetabbaṃ. Yo kārāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa (cūḷava. 274). Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, malamattaṃ apakaḍḍhitu’’nti (cūḷava. 274) hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā nakhato malamattaṃ apakaḍḍhituṃ vaṭṭati.Sambādhe lomahāraṇanti etthasambādhonāma ubho upakacchakā muttakaraṇañca. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ābādhapaccayā sambādhe lomaṃ saṃharāpetu’’nti (cūḷava. 275) hi vuttaṃ.
342. "Nakhe vā kese vā nāsalome" (cūḷava. 275) vā dīghe na dhārayeti (one should not keep long nails, hair, or nose hairs) is the connection. "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, maṃsappamāṇena nakhe chinditu" (cūḷava. 274) ca "I allow, monks, to cut the nails to the size of a grain of meat," and "anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dumāsikaṃ vā duvaṅgulaṃ vā" (cūḷava. 246) ca vuttaṃ (and it was said, "I allow, monks, two months or two fingerbreadths"). "Na labbhaṃ vīsatimaṭṭhaṃ" (it is not permissible to make twenty smooth) means it is not permissible to make even one nail smooth. "Na bhikkhave vīsatimaṭṭhaṃ kārāpetabbaṃ. Yo kārāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa (cūḷava. 274). Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, malamattaṃ apakaḍḍhituṃ" (cūḷava. 274) hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā nakhato malamattaṃ apakaḍḍhituṃ vaṭṭati. (Therefore, it is permissible to remove only the amount of dirt from the nails). "Sambādhe lomahāraṇaṃ" (removal of hair in a crowded place) Here, "sambādho" (a crowded place) means both armpits and the pubic area. "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ābādhapaccayā sambādhe lomaṃ saṃharāpetuṃ" (cūḷava. 275) hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "I allow, monks, due to illness, to have hair removed from a crowded place").
343.Yathāvuḍḍhanti vuḍḍhapaṭipāṭiyā laddhabbaṃ.Na bādheyyāti na vāreyya.Saṅghuddiṭṭhaṃvāti upāsakādīhi yathāvuḍḍhaṃ ‘‘ayyā paribhuñjantū’’ti nissajjitvāva dinnaṃ senāsanādi. ‘‘Na bhikkhave uddissakatampi yathāvuḍḍhaṃ paṭibāhitabbaṃ. Yo paṭibāheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 313) hi vuttaṃ. Adhotapādehi (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 324) vā allapādehi vā nakkameti sambandho.Sudhotapādakaṃ vāpīti dhotapādeheva akkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ.Tathevāti nakkameyya saupāhanoti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave adhotehi pādehi, allehi pādehi, saupāhanena senāsanaṃ akkamitabbaṃ. Yo akkameyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 324), hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paccattharitvā nipajjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 324) vuttattā paribhaṇḍakataṃ bhūmiṃ vā bhūmattharaṇasenāsanaṃ vā saṅghikaṃ mañcapīṭhaṃ vā attano santakena paccattharaṇena paccattharitvāva nipajjitabbaṃ.
343. "Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ" (according to seniority) means that which is to be received according to seniority. "Na bādheyyā" (should not hinder) means should not prevent. "Saṅghuddiṭṭhaṃvā" (or designated by the Saṅgha) means resting places, etc., given by male lay followers and others, after declaring, "May the venerable ones use this according to seniority." "Na bhikkhave uddissakatampi yathāvuḍḍhaṃ paṭibāhitabbaṃ. Yo paṭibāheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (cūḷava. 313) hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, even that which is designated should not be refused according to seniority. Whoever refuses incurs a dukkaṭa"). Adhotapādehi (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 324) vā allapādehi vā nakkameyya (should not step with unwashed feet or wet feet) is the connection. "Sudhotapādakaṃ vāpī" (or even with well-washed feet) means a place that is to be stepped on only with washed feet. "Tathevā" (just so) means should not step with shoes on. "Na bhikkhave adhotehi pādehi, allehi pādehi, saupāhanena senāsanaṃ akkamitabbaṃ. Yo akkameyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (cūḷava. 324), hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, a resting place should not be stepped on with unwashed feet, with wet feet, or with shoes on. Whoever steps on it incurs a dukkaṭa"). "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, paccattharitvā nipajjituṃ" (cūḷava. 324) vuttattā (because it was said, "I allow, monks, to lie down after spreading a covering"), a ground that has been prepared, or a ground covering in the resting place, or a Saṅghika bed or bench, should be lied down on only after spreading one's own spread.
344.Saṅghāṭiyāna pallattheti adhiṭṭhitacīvarena vihāre vā antaraghare vā pallatthikā na kātabbāti attho. Parikammakataṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 324)bhittiādiṃna apassaye. ‘‘Na bhikkhave parikammakatā bhitti apassetabbā. Yo apasseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 324) hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā setabhitti vā cittakammakatā vā bhitti na apassayitabbā. Na kevalaṃ bhittiyeva, parikammakatā dvārakavāṭavātapānatthambhādayopi na apassayitabbā. Etthapi lomagaṇanāya eva āpattiyo veditabbā.Sante udake no na ācameti (cūḷava. 373; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 373) no na ācametuṃ, udakasuddhiṃ akātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti attho.Santeti vacanena asante anāpattīti dīpeti.
344. "Saṅghāṭiyā na pallatthe" (with the Saṅghāṭī, one should not sit cross-legged) means one should not sit cross-legged with an allocated robe in the monastery or in an inner room. Parikammakataṃ (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 324) bhittiādiṃ na apassaye (should not lean against a wall that has been prepared, etc.). "Na bhikkhave parikammakatā bhitti apassetabbā. Yo apasseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (cūḷava. 324) hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, a wall that has been prepared should not be leaned against. Whoever leans against it incurs a dukkaṭa"). Therefore, a white wall or a wall with paintings should not be leaned against. Not only a wall, but also doors, door panels, windows, pillars, etc., that have been prepared, should not be leaned against. Here too, the offenses should be understood in terms of counting hairs. "Sante udake no na ācame" (cūḷava. 373; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 373) means no na ācametuṃ (should not not rinse the mouth), it is not permissible not to purify the water. "Sante" (when there is) indicates that there is no offense when there is none.
345.Akappiyasamādāneti bhikkhuṃ vā sāmaṇerādike sesasahadhammike vā akappiye niyojentassa dukkaṭameva. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, pabbajitena akappiye samādapetabbaṃ. Yo samādapeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 303) hi vuttaṃ. Sabhāgāya (mahāva. aṭṭha. 169) āpattiyā desanāyāti attho. Vatthusabhāgatā idha adhippetā, na āpattisabhāgatā. ‘‘Na bhikkhave sabhāgā āpatti desetabbā. Yo deseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 169) ca ‘‘na bhikkhave sabhāgā āpatti paṭiggahetabbā. Yo paṭiggaṇheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 169) ca vuttaṃ. Vatthusabhāgaṃ āpattiṃ āvi kātumpi na vaṭṭati, tena vuttaṃ‘‘āvikamme ca dukkaṭa’’nti. ‘‘Ahaṃ, āvuso, itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ, taṃ ito vuṭṭhahitvā paṭikarissāmī’’ti aññassa vacanaṃ āvikammaṃnāma.
345. "Akappiyasamādāne" (in undertaking what is unallowable) means if one engages a bhikkhu or a sāmaṇera or other co-religionists in what is unallowable, it is a dukkaṭa. "Na, bhikkhave, pabbajitena akappiye samādapetabbaṃ. Yo samādapeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (mahāva. 303) hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, a renunciate should not engage (others) in what is unallowable. Whoever engages (others) incurs a dukkaṭa"). Sabhāgāya (mahāva. aṭṭha. 169) āpattiyā desanāyāti attho (means the declaration of an offense of the same class). "Vatthusabhāgatā" (similarity of the object) is meant here, not "āpattisabhāgatā" (similarity of the offense). "Na bhikkhave sabhāgā āpatti desetabbā. Yo deseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (mahāva. 169) ca "na bhikkhave sabhāgā āpatti paṭiggahetabbā. Yo paṭiggaṇheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (mahāva. 169) ca vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, an offense of the same class should not be declared. Whoever declares (it) incurs a dukkaṭa," and "Monks, an offense of the same class should not be accepted. Whoever accepts (it) incurs a dukkaṭa"). It is not permissible to reveal an offense of the same object, therefore it was said, "āvikamme ca dukkaṭaṃ" (and in revealing, there is a dukkaṭa). "Ahaṃ, āvuso, itthannāmaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjiṃ, taṃ ito vuṭṭhahitvā paṭikarissāmī" (I, friend, committed such-and-such an offense, I will remedy it after leaving here") is called "āvikammaṃ" (revealing).
346.Itarassatūti asuddhacittassa.
346. "Itarassa tū" (to the other, indeed) means to one whose mind is impure.
347.Porisanti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 284) purisappamāṇaṃ abhiruhituṃ vaṭṭatīti attho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sati karaṇīye porisaṃ rukkhaṃ abhiruhituṃ, āpadāsu yāvadattha’’nti (cūḷava. 284) hi vuttaṃ.
347. "Porisaṃ" (a man's height) (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 284) means it is permissible to climb up to the height of a man. "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, sati karaṇīye porisaṃ rukkhaṃ abhiruhituṃ, āpadāsu yāvadatthaṃ" (cūḷava. 284) hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "I allow, monks, when there is a need, to climb a tree to the height of a man, as needed in emergencies").
348.Parissāvanaṃ (cūḷava. 259; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 259) vinā aḍḍhayojanaṃ gacchantassa dukkaṭanti sambandho. ‘‘Addhānagamanasamayo nāma aḍḍhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabba’’nti (pāci. 218) vuttaṃ, tasmā aḍḍhayojanameva antimaṃ addhānanti veditabbaṃ. Bhikkhuniyā ca mātugāmena casaṃvidhānasikkhāpade‘‘ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya, antamaso gāmantarampī’’ti (pāci. 182, 413) evaṃ visesetvā vuttattā ‘‘kukkuṭasampāte gāme gāmantare gāmantare āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 183, 414) vuttaṃ, na addhānalakkhaṇena. Yadi gāmantaraparicchedena addhānaṃ vuccati, gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadepi ‘‘addhānagamanasamayo nāma gāmantarampi gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabba’’nti vadeyya, na ca vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘na bhikkhave aparissāvanakena addhāno paṭipajjitabbo. Yo paṭipajjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Sace na hoti parissāvanaṃ vā dhammakaraṇo vā, saṅghāṭikaṇṇopi adhiṭṭhātabbo iminā parissāvetvā pivissāmī’’ti vuttaṭṭhānepi aḍḍhayojanavaseneva addhānaparicchedo veditabbo. Abhayagirivāsīnaṃ pana ‘‘dvigāvutavasena addhānaparicchedo’’ti pāḷiyaṃ eva atthi.Yācamānassāti yācantassa. ‘‘Na ca bhikkhave addhānappaṭipannena bhikkhunā parissāvanaṃ yāciyamānena na dātabbaṃ. Yo na dadeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
348. "Parissāvanaṃ (cūḷava. 259; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 259) vinā aḍḍhayojanaṃ gacchantassa dukkaṭaṃ" (for one who travels half a yojana without a filter, there is a dukkaṭa) is the connection. "Addhānagamanasamayo nāma aḍḍhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabbaṃ" (pāci. 218) vuttaṃ, tasmā aḍḍhayojanameva antimaṃ addhānanti veditabbaṃ (it was said, "The time for traveling a journey means one should eat intending to go half a yojana," therefore, half a yojana should be understood as the final journey). For bhikkhunīs and women, in the saṃvidhānasikkhāpada (training rule on agreement), it was specified that "ekaddhānamaggaṃ paṭipajjeyya, antamaso gāmantarampī" (pāci. 182, 413) (one should undertake a single journey, at least to another village), therefore it was said "kukkuṭasampāte gāme gāmantare gāmantare āpatti pācittiyassā" (pāci. 183, 414) (at a village where a chicken can fly, in village after village, there is an offense of pācittiya), not by the characteristic of a journey. If a journey is defined by the boundary of another village, then in the gaṇabhojanasikkhāpada (training rule on group meals) it would say "addhānagamanasamayo nāma gāmantarampi gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabbaṃ" (the time for traveling a journey means one should eat intending to go to another village), but it was not said. Therefore, in the place where it was said, "na bhikkhave aparissāvanakena addhāno paṭipajjitabbo. Yo paṭipajjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Sace na hoti parissāvanaṃ vā dhammakaraṇo vā, saṅghāṭikaṇṇopi adhiṭṭhātabbo iminā parissāvetvā pivissāmī" (monks, a journey should not be undertaken without a filter. Whoever undertakes (it) incurs a dukkaṭa. If there is no filter or knife, even the corner of the Saṅghāṭī should be designated (saying) 'I will filter and drink with this'), the limit of the journey should be understood only in terms of half a yojana. However, for those residing at Abhayagiri, there is a passage in the Pāḷi itself stating "the limit of the journey is in terms of two gāvutas." "Yācamānassa" (to one who asks) means to one who asks. "Na ca bhikkhave addhānappaṭipannena bhikkhunā parissāvanaṃ yāciyamānena na dātabbaṃ. Yo na dadeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, a filter should not be refused by a bhikkhu who has undertaken a journey when it is requested. Whoever does not give (it) incurs a dukkaṭa").
349.Aññatra ābādhappaccayā kaṇṇanāsādike sesaṅge dukkaṭanti sambandho. Ābādhe sati aṅguliādīni chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Aṅgajātaṃ vā bījāni vā chindituṃ na vaṭṭati eva. Attaghātane ca dukkaṭanti sambandho. ‘‘Na ca bhikkhave attānaṃ ghātetabbaṃ. Yo ghāteyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
349. "Aññatra ābādhappaccayā" (except due to illness) to the ears, nose, etc., in the remaining limbs, there is a dukkaṭa. If there is an illness, it is permissible to cut the fingers, etc. It is not at all permissible to cut off a limb or testicles. "Attaghātane ca dukkaṭaṃ" (and in suicide, there is a dukkaṭa) is the connection. "Na ca bhikkhave attānaṃ ghātetabbaṃ. Yo ghāteyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, one should not kill oneself. Whoever kills (oneself) incurs a dukkaṭa").
350.‘‘Na ca bhikkhave paṭibhānacittaṃ kārāpetabbaṃ itthirūpakaṃ purisarūpakaṃ. Yo kārāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mālākammaṃ latākammaṃ makaradantakaṃ pañcapaṭika’’nti (cūḷava. 299) vuttattā‘‘cittapotthakarūpāni, na kare na ca kāraye’’ti vuttaṃ.Bhuñjantanti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 316) vippakatabhojanaṃ. ‘‘Na bhikkhave vippakatabhojano bhikkhu vuṭṭhāpetabbo. Yo vuṭṭhāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 316) hi vuttaṃ.
350. "Na ca bhikkhave paṭibhānacittaṃ kārāpetabbaṃ itthirūpakaṃ purisarūpakaṃ. Yo kārāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mālākammaṃ latākammaṃ makaradantakaṃ pañcapaṭikaṃ" (cūḷava. 299) vuttattā (because it was said, "Monks, a clever painting should not be made, depicting a woman or a man. Whoever has (it) made incurs a dukkaṭa. I allow, monks, floral work, creeper work, crocodile teeth, and five panels"), "cittapotthakarūpāni, na kare na ca kāraye" (paintings and book forms, one should not do, nor have done), it was said. "Bhuñjantaṃ" (one who is eating) (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 316) means interrupted food. "Na bhikkhave vippakatabhojano bhikkhu vuṭṭhāpetabbo. Yo vuṭṭhāpeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (cūḷava. 316) hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, a bhikkhu who is eating interrupted food should not be made to get up. Whoever makes (him) get up incurs a dukkaṭa").
351.Yānānīti vayhaṃ ratho sakaṭaṃ sandamānikādīni gilānassa abhiruhituṃ kappanti, siviko ca kappati. Evaṃ sabbattha. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa yānaṃ, purisayuttaṃ hatthavaṭṭakaṃ, sivikaṃ pāṭaṅki’’nti (mahāva. 253) hi vuttaṃ.
351. "Yānāni" (vehicles) means a palanquin, cart, wagon, sedan chair, etc., are allowable for a sick person to ride in, and a litter is also allowable. Thus, everywhere. "Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa yānaṃ, purisayuttaṃ hatthavaṭṭakaṃ, sivikaṃ pāṭaṅkiṃ" (mahāva. 253) hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "I allow, monks, for the sick, a vehicle, a hand cart drawn by men, a litter, and a palanquin").
352.Davanti keḷiṃ. ‘‘Na bhikkhave buddhaṃ vā dhammaṃ vā saṅghaṃ vā ārabbha davo kātabbo. Yo kareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 627) hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘kiṃ buddho silakabuddho, udāhu paṭibuddho’’ti vā ‘‘kiṃ dhammo godhammo ajadhammo’’ti vā ‘‘kiṃ saṅgho ajasaṅgho migasaṅgho’’ti vā evamādinā nayena yo davaṃ karoti, tassa dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ cīvaraṃ dassāma, pattaṃ dassāmā’’tiādinā nayena sāmaṇeraṃ vā upasampannaṃ vā aññassa antamaso dussīlassāpi parisabhūtaṃ attano upaṭṭhākakaraṇatthaṃ upalāḷane dukkaṭanti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave aññassa parisā apalāḷetabbā. Yo apalāḷeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
352. "Davaṃ" (playfulness) means joking. "Na bhikkhave buddhaṃ vā dhammaṃ vā saṅghaṃ vā ārabbha davo kātabbo. Yo kareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" (pāci. 627) hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, joking should not be done concerning the Buddha, the Dhamma, or the Saṅgha. Whoever does (it) incurs a dukkaṭa"). Therefore, "kiṃ buddho silakabuddho, udāhu paṭibuddho" (is the Buddha a stone Buddha or a replica Buddha?), or "kiṃ dhammo godhammo ajadhammo" (is the Dhamma cow-Dhamma or goat-Dhamma?), or "kiṃ saṅgho ajasaṅgho migasaṅgho" (is the Saṅgha goat-Saṅgha or deer-Saṅgha?), in this way, whoever makes a joke incurs a dukkaṭa. "Tumhākaṃ cīvaraṃ dassāma, pattaṃ dassāmā" (we will give you a robe, we will give you a bowl), in this way, flattering a sāmaṇera or an ordained person or another, even if they are immoral, who is an assembly member, to make them one's attendant, incurs a dukkaṭa. "Na bhikkhave aññassa parisā apalāḷetabbā. Yo apalāḷeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā" hi vuttaṃ (it was said, "Monks, the assembly of another should not be flattered. Whoever flatters (them) incurs a dukkaṭa").
353.Kāyaṃ (cūḷava. 411) vā ūruṃ vā nimittaṃ vā vivaritvā bhikkhunīnaṃ na dassayeti sambandho. Kaddamudakādinā tā bhikkhuniyo na siñceyyāti attho. Na kevalaṃ kaddamudakādikeneva, vippasannaudakarajanakaddamādīsupi yena kenaci osiñcantassa dukkaṭameva.
353. "Kāyaṃ (cūḷava. 411) vā ūruṃ vā nimittaṃ vā vivaritvā bhikkhunīnaṃ na dassayeti" (should not expose the body, thighs, or genitals to bhikkhunīs) is the connection. Those bhikkhunīs should not be sprinkled with mud, water, etc. Not only with mud, water, etc., but whoever sprinkles with clear water, dye, mud, etc., incurs a dukkaṭa.
354.Bālanti etthabālonāma yo ovādaṃ gahetvā pātimokkhuddesakassa ārocetvā pāṭipade paccāharitabbanti na jānāti.Gilānonāma yo ovādaṃ gahetvā uposathaggaṃ gantvā ārocetuñca paccāharituñca na sakkoti.Gamiyonāma yo paṭidesaṃ gantukāmo.
354. Here, bāla (foolish) means one who, upon receiving the instruction (ovāda), does not know how to announce it to the Pātimokkha reciter and how to retract the observance on the following day. Gilāna (sick) means one who, upon receiving the instruction, is unable to go to the Uposatha hall to announce it and to retract the observance. Gamiyo (going) means one who intends to go away requiring a paṭidesanā.
‘‘Na bhikkhave ovādo na gahetabbo. Yo na gaṇheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 414) ca ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ṭhapetvā bālaṃ, ṭhapetvā gilānaṃ, ṭhapetvā gamikaṃ, avasesehi ovādaṃ gahetu’’nti (cūḷava. 414) ca ‘‘na bhikkhave ovādo na paccāharitabbo. Yo na paccāhareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pāci. 415) ca vuttattā bhikkhunīhi terasiyaṃ vā cātuddasiyaṃ vā āgantvā ‘‘ayaṃ uposatho cātuddaso’’ti vā ‘‘pannaraso’’ti vā ‘‘kadā ayya uposatho’’ti vā pucchite ‘‘cātuddaso’’ti vā ‘‘pannaraso’’ti vā ‘‘sve bhagini uposatho’’ti vā ācikkhitabbaṃ. Tāhi bhikkhunīhi uposathadivase āgantvā ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho ayya bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira ayya bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti evaṃ yācitabbaṃ, taṃ vacanaṃ paṭiggahetvā uposathagge pātimokkhuddesakassa ‘‘bhikkhunisaṅgho, bhante, bhikkhusaṅghassa pāde vandati, ovādūpasaṅkamanañca yācati, labhatu kira, bhante, bhikkhunisaṅgho ovādūpasaṅkamana’’nti ācikkhitabbaṃ. Pātimokkhuddesakenāpi sace tattha bhikkhunovādako atthi, ‘‘itthannāmo bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, taṃ bhikkhunisaṅgho upasaṅkamatū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sace natthi, ‘‘ko āyasmā ussahati bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’nti pucchitvā sace atthi aṭṭhahaṅgehi samannāgato bhikkhu, taṃ tattheva sammannitvā vuttanayeneva ovādappaṭiggāhakassa ārocetabbaṃ. Yadi natthi koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, ‘‘pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho sampādetū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tena bhikkhunā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā pāṭipade bhikkhunīnaṃ ‘‘natthi koci bhikkhu bhikkhunovādako sammato, pāsādikena bhikkhunisaṅgho sampādetū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tāhipi ‘‘sādhu ayyā’’ti sampaṭicchitabbaṃ. Iminā nayena gaṇapuggalesupi vacanabhedo veditabbo.
Because it is said, "Monks, the ovāda should not be received. Whoever does not receive it incurs a dukkaṭa offense" (cūḷava. 414); and "I allow, monks, except for the foolish (bāla), except for the sick (gilāna), except for the one who is going away (gamika), the ovāda should be received by the rest" (cūḷava. 414); and "Monks, the ovāda should not be retracted. Whoever does not retract it incurs a dukkaṭa offense" (pāci. 415), when nuns come on the thirteenth or fourteenth day (of the lunar cycle) and are asked, "Is this Uposatha the fourteenth?" or "the fifteenth?" or "When is the Uposatha, Ayya?", it should be announced, "It is the fourteenth" or "the fifteenth" or "Tomorrow, sister, is the Uposatha." On the Uposatha day, those nuns should come and request, "The Bhikkhuni Sangha pays homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, and requests the approaching for instruction (ovādūpasaṅkamana); may the Bhikkhuni Sangha obtain the approaching for instruction, Ayya." Having accepted that statement, it should be announced to the Pātimokkha reciter in the Uposatha hall, "The Bhikkhuni Sangha, Bhante, pays homage at the feet of the Bhikkhu Sangha, and requests the approaching for instruction; may the Bhikkhuni Sangha obtain the approaching for instruction, Bhante." The Pātimokkha reciter, if there is a bhikkhu authorized to instruct the nuns (bhikkhunovādaka), should say, "The bhikkhu named so-and-so is authorized to instruct the nuns; let the Bhikkhuni Sangha approach him." If there is none, having asked, "Who here is able to instruct the nuns?", if there is a bhikkhu endowed with eight qualities, having authorized him right there, it should be announced to the one who receives the instruction in the manner stated above. If there is no bhikkhu authorized to instruct the nuns, it should be said, "Let the Bhikkhuni Sangha be satisfied with edification (pāsādikena)." That bhikkhu, having agreed with "Good," should say to the nuns on the following day, "There is no bhikkhu authorized to instruct the nuns; let the Bhikkhuni Sangha be satisfied with edification." Those nuns, too, should agree with "Good, Ayya." In this way, the difference in the statement should be understood even in the case of groups and individuals.
355.Lokāyataṃ(cūḷava. 286; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 286) nāma vitaṇḍasatthaṃ. ‘‘Na bhikkhave āsittakūpadhāne bhuñjitabbaṃ. Yo bhuñjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 264) vuttattā‘‘peḷāyapi na bhuñjeyyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
355.Lokāyata (cūḷava. 286; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 286) means sophistry. Because it is said, "Monks, one should not eat (while leaning) on a cushion filled with stuffing. Whoever should eat (while leaning), there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (cūḷava. 264), it is said, "one should not eat even on a box."
356.Gihipārutaṃ na pārupeyya, gihinivāsanaṃ na nivāseyyāti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave gihinivatthaṃ nivāsetabbaṃ hatthisoṇḍakaṃ macchavāḷakaṃ catukaṇṇakaṃ tālavaṇṭakaṃ satavalikaṃ. Yo nivāseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 280) hi vuttaṃ. Parimaṇḍalato aññathā pārupanaṃ, sabbametaṃgihipārutaṃnāma. Taṃ pana na pārupetabbanti attho.Saṃvelliyanti ettha kacchaṃ bandhitvā na nivāseyyāti attho.Dāyanti (cūḷava. 283; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 283) araññaṃ. Nālimpayeyyāti sambandho.
356.One should not wear what is worn by laypeople; one should not wear what is worn by laywomen, is the meaning. For it is said, "Monks, lay clothing should not be worn: (clothing in the shape of) an elephant's trunk, a fish's tail, four-cornered, palm-leaf shaped, with a hundred folds. Whoever wears (such clothing), there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (cūḷava. 280). Any wearing of clothes that is different from the parimaṇḍala, all of that is called what is worn by laypeople. But that should not be worn, is the meaning. Here, in saṃvelliya, the meaning is that one should not wear it having tied it at the hip. Dāya (cūḷava. 283; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 283) means forest. One should not smear, is the connection.
357.Vaḍḍhiñca na payojaye, noñātake nappavārite na yāceti attho.Aññassāti ettha (cūḷava. 420; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 420) ‘‘tumhe paribhuñjathā’’ti niyametvā dinnaṃ sahadhammikānampi dātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Aggaṃ gahetvā vā katipāhaṃ bhutvā vā puna dadeyyāti attho.
357.One should not invest at interest; he should not ask an uninvited relative who has not been prevented. Here, in aññassa (cūḷava. 420; cūḷava. aṭṭha. 420), it is not proper to give even to co-religionists what has been given with the stipulation, "You should use this." The meaning is that having taken the best part or having eaten for a few days, he may give it back again.
358.Uddissa yācaneti ettha (pāci. aṭṭha. 679) ‘‘amhākaṃ vihāre itthannāmena idañcidañca kata’’nti vā ‘‘karissantī’’ti vā evaṃ uddissa rakkhaṃ yācaneti attho.Ñatvāñatvā vāti evaṃ ‘‘amhehi yāciyamānā imesaṃ daṇḍessantī’’ti tesaṃ daṇḍinaṃ ñatvā vā añatvā vāti attho. Tehi panadaṇḍite so daṇḍouddissa yācantānaṃgīvāvabhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hoti evāti attho. ‘‘Iminā ca iminā ca idañca idañca kataṃ, ettakaṃ daṇḍaṃ gaṇhathā’’tisayaṃ daṇḍāpane panaassa daṇḍassa agghabhedena pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭā ñeyyāti attho.
358.Here, in uddissa yācane (pāci. aṭṭha. 679), the meaning is that one asks for protection by specifying, "So-and-so has done such-and-such in our monastery" or "they will do." Ñatvāñatvā vā means having known or not known those who inflict punishment, thinking, "Being asked by us, they will punish these people." But if punishment is inflicted by them, that punishment is like the neck itself for those who ask by specifying, in that the goods must be given. But in personally imposing punishment saying, "Because of this and this, this and this has been done, take this much fine," it should be understood that the fine varies according to its value, (resulting in offenses ranging from) pārājika, thullaccaya, or dukkaṭa.
359.Anatthāya assa corassa bhāsiteti sambandho. Rājarājamahāmattādīhitassa corassa daṇḍaṃ gaṇhante assabhikkhussatattakaṃgīvāti attho.
359.The connection is that it was spoken for the detriment of that thief. When kings, high ministers, and others take a fine from that thief, for that bhikkhu it is like that much (on his) neck.
360.Vighāsaṃ (pāci. 825-826) vā uccāraṃ vā saṅkāraṃ vā muttaṃ vā pākārakuṭṭānaṃ bahi chaḍḍeyya, dukkaṭanti attho.Vaḷañje nāvalokiyāti imināva avaḷañjanakāle nāvaloketvā chaḍḍetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Na kevalaṃ tattheva, atha kho harite vāpi vīhādināḷikerādiropime chaḍḍentassa dukkaṭamevāti attho.
360.The meaning is that one should throw out remnants of food (vighāsaṃ) (pāci. 825-826) or excrement or rubbish or urine outside the walls of the enclosure; there is a dukkaṭa. By this (statement), "one should not look down in a pit," it indicates that it is allowable to throw (them out) without looking down during the time when there is no pit. Not only there, but indeed there is a dukkaṭa even for one who throws (them out) in a green place where rice plants, coconut trees, and the like are planted.
361.‘‘Upahāraṃ karomā’’ti vutteti pucchiteti adhippāyo.
361.When it is said, "Let us make an offering," the implication is that he asked.
362.Kīḷatthaṃ (pāci. 979; pāci. aṭṭha. 978) kataṃ rājāgāraṃ vā pokkharaṇiṃ vā uyyānaṃ vā cittāgāraṃ vā ārāmaṃ vā daṭṭhuṃ gacchato pade pade dukkaṭanti attho.
362.For one who goes to see a royal building or a pond or a park or a picture gallery or a monastery made for amusement (kīḷatthaṃ) (pāci. 979; pāci. aṭṭha. 978), there is a dukkaṭa at every step.
363.Āsanena (cūḷava. 364) nave na paṭibāheyya, uṇhe (mahāva. 67, 78, 79; cūḷava. 376, 378, 380, 382) cīvaraṃ na nidaheyya.Gurunāti ācariyādinā paṇāmito khamāpeyyāti sambandho.
363.One should not refuse a new (arrival) with a seat (āsana) (cūḷava. 364); one should not put down robes in a hot (place) (mahāva. 67, 78, 79; cūḷava. 376, 378, 380, 382). The connection is that he should ask forgiveness if he is sent away by the teacher or the like.
364.Āpattīhi ca sattahīti (vajira. ṭī. pācittiya 26) sattahi āpattīhi bhikkhuṃ parammukhā akkosanena ca ‘‘assaddho appasanno bījabhojī’’tiādinā aññeneva vā akkosanena ca dukkaṭanti adhippāyo.
364.And by seven offenses (āpattīhi ca sattahī) (vajira. ṭī. pācittiya 26), the implication is that there is a dukkaṭa for scolding a bhikkhu in his absence with seven offenses and for scolding him with "faithless, displeased, eating seeds," and so on, or with another (form of scolding).
365.Saddhādeyyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 361) cīvaraṃ vā piṇḍapātaṃ vāti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave saddhādeyyaṃ vinipātetabbaṃ. Yo vinipāteyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 361) hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, mātāpitūnaṃ dātu’’nti (mahāva. 361) vuttattā‘‘labbhaṃ pitūna’’nti vuttaṃ.
365.Saddhādeyyaṃ means a robe or almsfood given in faith (saddhādeyyaṃ) (mahāva. aṭṭha. 361). For it is said, "Monks, what is given in faith should not be wasted. Whoever wastes (it), there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (mahāva. 361). Because it is said, "I allow, monks, to give to mother and father" (mahāva. 361), it is said "attainable for fathers."
366.Vassaṃvuttho aññatrāti sambandho, aññasmiṃ vihāreti attho.Aññatoti aññavihārato. ‘‘Na bhikkhave aññatra vassaṃvutthena aññatra cīvarabhāgo sāditabbo. Yo sādiyeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 364) hi vuttaṃ.Tesanti tasmiṃ vihāre taṃ cīvaraṃ bhājetvā gaṇhituṃ yuttānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ dhuranikkhepato hoti bhaṇḍagghena kāriyoti attho.
366.The connection is vassaṃvuttho aññatra (having spent the rains, elsewhere); it means in another monastery. Aññato means from another monastery. For it is said, "Monks, except by one who has spent the rains, a share of robes should not be allocated elsewhere. Whoever allocates (it), there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (mahāva. 364). Tesa means to the bhikkhus in that monastery who are fit to take a share of that robe, it is to be done by the value of the goods by foregoing the responsibility.
367.Saha antarena uttarotisantaruttaro,gāmaṃ na paviseyyāti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave santaruttarena gāmo pavisitabbo. Yo paviseyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 362) hi vuttaṃ.Kallo vāti agilāno. Saupāhano gāmaṃ na paviseyyāti sambandho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave cāmaribījanī dhāretabbā. Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 269), ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tisso bījaniyo vākamayaṃ usīramayaṃ morapiñchamaya’’nti (cūḷava. 269) ca vuttattā‘‘na dhāreyya cāmarīmakasabījani’’nti vuttaṃ. Makasabījanī pana dantavisāṇadārudaṇḍakāpi vaṭṭati.
367.Santaruttaro means with an under-robe and an upper-robe joined together; one should not enter a village, is the meaning. For it is said, "Monks, a village should not be entered with the under-robe and upper-robe joined together. Whoever enters (a village), there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (mahāva. 362). Kallo vā means not sick. One should not enter a village wearing shoes, is the connection. Because it is said, "Monks, a yak-tail whisk should not be carried. Whoever carries (it), there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (cūḷava. 269), and "I allow, monks, three kinds of whisks: made of vāka fiber, made of usīra root, made of peacock feathers" (cūḷava. 269), it is said "one should not carry a yak-tail whisk or a makasa whisk." But the makasa whisk made of ivory, horn, or wood is also allowable.
368.Ārāmato bahīti sambandho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave chattaṃ dhāretabbaṃ. Yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti, ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānassa chatta’’nti ca vuttattā agilāno ārāmato bahi na labhati, cīvaraguttiyādiatthāya agilānopi labhatīti attho.
368.The connection is outside the monastery. Because it is said, "Monks, an umbrella should not be carried. Whoever carries (it), there is an offense of dukkaṭa," and "I allow, monks, an umbrella for the sick," it is not allowed outside the monastery for one who is not sick; the meaning is that even one who is not sick is allowed for the sake of protecting the robe, and so on.
369.Gāheyya nubhatokājanti na gāheyya ubhatokājaṃ.Ekantarikakājakanti ekatokājañca antarakājañca. Sīsabhāro ca khandhabhāro ca kaṭibhāro casīsakkhandhakaṭibhārā. ‘‘Na bhikkhave ubhatokājaṃ haritabbaṃ. Yo hareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 281), ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ekatokājaṃ antarakājaṃ sīsabhāraṃ khandhabhāraṃ kaṭibhāraṃ olambaka’’nti (cūḷava. 281) ca vuttattā ubhatokājameva na vaṭṭati, sesāni vaṭṭantīti veditabbā.
369.Gāheyya nubhatokāja means one should not take ubhatokājaṃ. Ekantarikakājaka means ekatokājañca antarakājañca. Sīsabhāro ca khandhabhāro ca kaṭibhāro ca means a load on the head, a load on the shoulder, and a load on the hip. Because it is said, "Monks, ubhatokājaṃ should not be carried. Whoever carries (it), there is an offense of dukkaṭa" (cūḷava. 281), and "I allow, monks, ekatokājaṃ, antarakājaṃ, a load on the head, a load on the shoulder, a load on the hip, and a hanging load" (cūḷava. 281), it should be understood that only ubhatokāja is not allowable; the rest are allowable.
370.Anokāsakatanti (mahāva. 153) yo paṭhamameva ‘‘karohi me āvuso okāsaṃ, ahaṃ taṃ vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ akatokāsaṃ āpattiyā codeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho.Tathāti dukkaṭamevāti attho.
370.Anokāsakata (mahāva. 153) means if one should accuse (another) of an offense without first saying, "Give me an opportunity, friend, I wish to speak to you," for him who has not made an opportunity, there is an offense of dukkaṭa. Tathā means just a dukkaṭa.
371.Pakataṅgulena,na sugataṅgulenāti attho.
371.Pakataṅgulena means not by the Sugata-aṅgula (the length of the Buddha's finger).
372.Mūgabbatādiṃ (mahāva. 209; mahāva. aṭṭha. 209) titthiyabbataṃ yadi gaṇheyya, dukkaṭanti attho.Ādi-saddena govatakukkuravatādayo saṅgahitā.Tathāti (mahāva. 303; mahāva. aṭṭha. 303) nhāpitapubbako khurabhaṇḍaṃ yadi parihareyya, dukkaṭamevāti attho.
372.The meaning is that if one should take up a heretical observance like the dumb-vow (mūgabbatādiṃ) (mahāva. 209; mahāva. aṭṭha. 209), there is an offense of dukkaṭa. By the word ādi (etc.), the observances of the cow-vow, dog-vow, and so on, are included. Tathā (mahāva. 303; mahāva. aṭṭha. 303) means if one who has been a barber before should carry around a barber's kit, there is just a dukkaṭa.
373.Yaṃ kiñcīti (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kuṭikārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) nhāpitatuṇṇakārakammādi yaṃ kiñci hatthakammanti attho.Tadanusāratoti hatthakammayācanānusāratoti attho. Sace evaṃ yācato hatthakammamūlameva deti, taṃ aññassa dāpetvā kāretuṃ vaṭṭatīti attho. Nikkammaṃ pana hatthakammavasena ayācitvāpi ‘‘ehi imaṃ karohī’’ti kāretuṃ kappatīti attho.Yaṃ kiñciparasantakanti yaṃ kiñci dārutiṇādikaṃ aparasantakaṃ apariggahitaṃ āharāpetuṃ kappatīti adhippāyo.
373.Yaṃ kiñcī (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. kuṭikārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) means any handicraft such as barber work or weaving. Tadanusārato means according to the request for the handicraft. The meaning is that if he gives the cost of the handicraft to one who asks in this way, it is allowable to have it done by causing it to be given to another. But it is allowable to have (something) done by saying "Come, do this," even without being asked in terms of handicraft, without asking for payment. Yaṃ kiñciparasantakaṃ means any wood, grass, and the like belonging to another that is unowned; it is allowable to have (it) brought.
374.Gihīnanti gihīnaṃ santakaṃ.Gopaketi rakkhake. Yattakaṃ deti, tattakaṃ gahetuṃ kappatīti attho.Yathāparicchedanti ‘‘divase divase ettakaṃ ucchunāḷikeraṃ ambapakkaṃ tumhe khādathā’’ti paricchinditvā dinnameva tesu dentesu labbhatīti attho.
374.Gihīna means belonging to laypeople. Gopake means protectors. It is allowable to take as much as they give. Yathāparicchedaṃ means that as much as they give, having allocated, "You may eat this much sugarcane, coconut, ripe mangoes every day," is obtainable among those who give.
375.Dvihāpajjeyyāti dvīhi āpajjeyya. Katamehi dvīhīti ce, te dassetuṃ‘‘kāyavācāhī’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘dvīhākārehi āpattiṃ āpajjati, kāyena āpajjati, vācāya āpajjatī’’ti (pari. 322) hi vuttaṃ. Kāyavācāhi āpattiṃ āpajjanto ca chahi ākārehi āpattiṃ āpajjati, tāni dassetuṃ‘‘alajjiñāṇakukkuccapakatattā’’tiādimāha. Ettha (pari. 295) pana akappiyabhāvaṃ jānanto eva vītikkamaṃ karontoalajjitāyaāpajjati nāma. Kappiyākappiyaṃ ajānitvā āpajjantoaññāṇatāya. Kappiyaṃ nu kho, no nu kho’’ti saṃsaye uppanne tamabhivitaritvā vītikkamaṃ karontokukkuccapakatattāāpajjati. Sahaseyyādiṃ āpajjantosatiplavā,satisammosāti attho. Acchamaṃsaṃ ‘‘sūkaramaṃsa’’nti vā sūkaramaṃsaṃ ‘‘acchamaṃsa’’nti vā khādantoakappiye kappiyasaññitāya ca kappiye akappiyasaññitāyaca āpajjatīti veditabbo.
375.Dvihāpajjeyyā means he would incur (an offense) in two ways. If (you ask), "In which two ways?", to show those, it is said "kāyavācāhī" (by body and speech). For it is said, "He incurs an offense in two ways: he incurs an offense by body, he incurs (an offense) by speech" (pari. 322). While incurring an offense by body and speech, he incurs an offense in six ways; to show those, he said "alajjiñāṇakukkuccapakatattā" and so on. Here, in this case (pari. 295), one incurs an offense through shamelessness (alajjitāya), indeed, when one commits a transgression knowing its unallowable nature. One incurs an offense through ignorance (aññāṇatāya) when committing (a transgression) without knowing what is allowable and unallowable. One incurs an offense through indulging in qualms (kukkuccapakatattā) when investigating what is allowable or not allowable, and then committing the transgression. Satiplavā means with a lapse of mindfulness when committing Sahaseyya and so on, (or) a confusion of mindfulness. It should be understood that one incurs an offense by considering what is unallowable to be allowable, and by considering what is allowable to be unallowable when eating raw meat thinking "it is pork" or (eating) pork thinking "it is raw meat."
376.Alajjitāya vā aññāṇatāya vā āpattiṃ kāyavācāhi chādayeti attho.Eke vāekasmiṃ vā.Liṅgeti liṅgaparivattanato. Evaṃ catudhā āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti attho. Tiṇavatthārakasamathaabbhānādīnaṃ vasenasaṅgheāpatti vuṭṭhātīti veditabbaṃ nissajjanādīsu gaṇe. Ekassa santike vuṭṭhānaṃ pākaṭameva. ‘‘Yā āpattiyo bhikkhūnaṃ bhikkhunīhi asādhāraṇā, tāhi āpattīhi anāpattī’’ti (pārā. 69) vacanato liṅgaparivattane āpattivuṭṭhānaṃ ñātabbaṃ.
376.The meaning is that one conceals an offense, whether by shamelessness or by ignorance, by body or speech. Eke vā means or in one. Liṅge means by change of gender. Thus, there are four ways in which an offense can be discharged. It should be understood that an offense is discharged in the Sangha by way of the Tiṇavatthāraka Samatha, Abbhāna, and so on, and in a group (gaṇe) with regard to Nissajjana and so on. The discharge in the presence of one person is obvious. Because of the statement, "Those offenses which are not common between bhikkhus and bhikkhunis, there is no offense through those offenses" (pārā. 69), the discharge of an offense by change of gender should be known.
377.Paccayadvayeti cīvare ca piṇḍapāte ca. Na kevalañca ime eva, nimittakammampi na labbhateva, gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ pana na vuttaṃ. Tatthanimittakammaṃnāma yaṃ kiñci paresaṃ paccayadānasaṃyojanakaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ. Khādanīyaṃ gahetvā gacchante disvā ‘‘kiṃ khādanīyaṃ labhitthā’’tiādinā nayena tassa pavatti veditabbā.Parikathānāma yathā yathā taṃ labhati, tathā tathā parivattetvā kathanaṃ. ‘‘Etarahi bhikkhū piṇḍapātena kilamantī’’tiādinā nayena tassa pavatti veditabbā.Obhāsonāma paccayappaṭisaṃyuttakathā.Viññattipana pākaṭā eva.Tatiyeti senāsane. Senāsane pana nimittobhāsaparikathā vaṭṭanti, viññatti eva ekā na vaṭṭati. Tatthanimittakammaṃnāma upāsake disvā senāsanatthaṃ bhūmiparikammakaraṇādi.Obhāsonāma ‘‘upāsakā, tumhe kuhiṃ vasathā’’ti ‘‘pāsāde, bhante’’ti vutte ‘‘kiṃ bhikkhūnaṃ pāsādo na vaṭṭatī’’tiādikaṃ vacanaṃ.Parikathānāma ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ senāsanaṃ sambādha’’nti vacanaṃ.Seseti gilānapaccaye.
377. Paccayadvaye means regarding robes and alms-food. And it is not only these two that are not obtained; even suggestive actions are not allowed, but this was not stated for the sake of metrical convenience. Here, nimittakammaṃ (suggestive action) means any bodily or verbal action that connects one to the giving of requisites by others. Its occurrence should be understood in the manner of seeing someone going with something edible and asking, "Did you get something edible?" Parikathā (preparatory talk) means speaking in a roundabout way about how one obtains something. Its occurrence should be understood in the manner of saying, "Nowadays, monks are tired from alms-food." Obhāso (hinting) means talk connected with requisites. Viññatti (soliciting) is, however, quite obvious. Tatiye means in regard to lodging. In regard to lodging, suggestive action, hinting, and preparatory talk are permissible, but only soliciting is not permissible. Here, nimittakammaṃ means doing ground preparation, etc., for lodging, upon seeing a lay follower. Obhāso means words such as, "Lay followers, where do you live?" and when they say, "In a mansion, venerable sir," asking, "Is a mansion not suitable for monks?" Parikathā means the statement, "The monks' lodging is crowded." Sese means in regard to medicine as a requisite for the sick.
378.Na ruhatīti na hoti.Accaye dānanti accayadānaṃ. Pañcasu sahadhammikesu yena kenaci kālaṃ karontena ‘‘mamaccayena mayhaṃ parikkhāro upajjhāyassa hotu, ācariyassa hotu, aññassa vā kassaci hotū’’ti vutte tesaṃ na hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘na ruhatī’’ti.Saṅghasseva ca taṃ hotīti yadi bhikkhusāmaṇerehi evaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ matepi bhikkhusaṅghasseva hoti, bhikkhunisikkhamānasāmaṇerīhi ce vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ mate bhikkhunisaṅghassa taṃ hotīti attho.Gihīnaṃ pana rūhatīti gihīnaṃ pana accayadānaṃ eva sabbesaṃ ruhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
378. Na ruhati means it does not take effect. Accaye dānaṃ means a donation made in anticipation of death. Among the five co-residents, if anyone says while dying, "At my death, let my belongings go to my preceptor, or to my teacher, or to someone else," it does not belong to them; therefore it is said, "Na ruhati." Saṅghasseva ca taṃ hotī means if it is said thus by monks or novices, even upon their death, it belongs to the Saṅgha of monks; if it is said by nuns, female trainees, or female novices, upon their death, it belongs to the Saṅgha of nuns; this is the meaning. Gihīnaṃ pana rūhatī means, however, the donation in anticipation of death to laypeople takes effect for all; this is what is stated.
379.Upassayeti bhikkhunivihāre.Dāyajjoti tassa parikkhārassa dāyajjo.Sesepīti sace bhikkhunisikkhamānasāmaṇeriyo bhikkhuvihāre kālaṃ karonti, tāsaṃ parikkhārānaṃ bhikkhusaṅghova dāyajjoti attho.
379. Upassaye means in a nun's monastery. Dāyajjo means the heir to those belongings. Sesepī means if nuns, female trainees, or female novices die in a monks' monastery, the Saṅgha of monks is the heir to their belongings; this is the meaning.
380.Purimassevāti ettha ‘‘imaṃ parikkhāraṃ netvā asukassa dehī’’ti dinnaṃ purimasseva hotīti attho. ‘‘Asukassa dammī’’ti dinnaṃ pana pacchimasseva hoti pariccajitvā dinnattā. Imaṃ vidhiṃ ñatvāva vissāsaggāhaṃ vā gaṇheyya, matakacīvaraṃ vā adhiṭṭheti sambandho.Matakacīvaraadhiṭṭhānaṃnāma ghaṇṭiṃ paharitvā kālaṃ ghosetvā thokaṃ āgametvā sace bhikkhū āgacchanti, tehi saddhiṃ bhājetabbāni, no ce āgacchanti, ‘‘mayhimāni cīvarāni pāpuṇantī’’ti adhiṭṭhātabbāni. Evaṃ adhiṭṭhite sabbāni tasseva honti, ṭhitikā pana na tiṭṭhati. Sace ekekaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamabhāgo mayhaṃ pāpuṇāti, ayaṃ dutiyabhāgo’’ti evaṃ gaṇhāti, gahitāni ca sugahitāni honti, ṭhitikā ca tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ pāpetvā gaṇhantenāpi adhiṭṭhitameva hoti.
380. Purimassevā means here that what is given by saying, "Take these belongings and give them to so-and-so," belongs to the former person. However, what is given by saying, "I will give it to so-and-so" belongs to the latter person, because it is given after relinquishment. Having known this procedure, one should either accept something on trust or determine the robe of a deceased person; this is the connection. Matakacīvaraadhiṭṭhānaṃ means, having struck a bell and announced the time of death, and waiting a little while, if monks come, it should be divided with them; if they do not come, one should determine, "May these robes accrue to me." When it is determined thus, all of it belongs to that person, but the fixed share does not stand. If one takes them, lifting each one and saying, "This first share accrues to me, this second share," what is taken is well-taken, and the fixed share stands. Even by causing it to accrue and then taking it, it is still considered determined.
381.Lohabhaṇḍe paharaṇiṃ ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ kappati, dārubhaṇḍe ca dārujaṃ pattañca pādukañca, pallaṅkañca āsandiñca ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ kappati, mattikāmaye katakañca kumbhakārikañca ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ kappatīti attho. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ṭhapetvā paharaṇiṃ sabbaṃ lohabhaṇḍaṃ, ṭhapetvā āsandiṃ pallaṅkaṃ dārupattaṃ dārupādukaṃ sabbaṃ dārubhaṇḍaṃ, ṭhapetvā katakañca kumbhakārikañca sabbaṃ mattikābhaṇḍa’’nti (cūḷava. 293) hi vuttaṃ. Etthakatakanti padumakaṇṇikākārena katamallakanti adhippetaṃ. Dhaniyasseva sabbamattikāmayā kuṭi kumbhakārikanti. Pakiṇṇakavinicchayo.
381. Having placed a cutting tool on an iron object, everything is allowable; and having placed a wooden bowl, a sandal, a couch, and a chair on a wooden object, everything is allowable; and having placed a potsherd and a potter's stand on a clay object, everything is allowable; this is the meaning. For it was said, "I allow, monks, all iron objects after setting aside the cutting tool, all wooden objects after setting aside a chair, a couch, a wooden bowl, and wooden sandals, all clay objects after setting aside a potsherd and a potter's stand" (cūḷava. 293). Here, kataka is intended to mean a water pot made in the shape of a lotus pericarp. Dhaniya's entire clay hut is a kumbhakārika. Miscellaneous judgements.
Pakiṇṇakaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the miscellaneous section is finished.
42. Desanāniddesavaṇṇanā
42. Explanation of the Section on Confession
382.Bhikkhubhāvassa (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.198) yo cāgo, sā pārājikadesanāti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘visuddhāpekkhoti gihi vā hotukāmo upāsako vā hotukāmo ārāmiko vā hotukāmo sāmaṇero vā hotukāmo’’ti (pārā. 198). Tasmā gihibhāvādikaṃyeva pārājikaṃ āpannassa visuddhi nāma, aññatarassa visuddhi eva natthi. ‘‘Chādeti jānamāpannaṃ, parivaseyya tāvatā’’tiādinā nayena heṭṭhā vuttavidhiṃ sandhāya‘‘yathāvuttena vuṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
382. The abandonment of the state of being a bhikkhu (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.198) is the confession of a pārājika offense; this is the meaning. For it was said, "‘Wishing for purification’ means wishing to be a householder, or wishing to be a lay follower, or wishing to be a monastery attendant, or wishing to be a novice" (pārā. 198). Therefore, purification for one who has committed a pārājika offense is only in the state of being a householder, etc.; purification in any other way does not exist. ‘‘yathāvuttena vuṭṭhāna’’ means, with reference to the procedure stated below in the manner of "He conceals it, knowing he has committed it, he lives under dependence for that long."
383.Idāni vattabbataṃ sandhāya‘‘eva’’nti vuttaṃ.
383. Now, ‘‘eva’’ is stated with reference to what is to be said.
384.Paṭidesemīti ārocemi. Etāni ahaṃetānāhaṃ.
384. Paṭidesemī means I declare. These things, I, etānāhaṃ.
386.(Ka) yaṃ saṅgho gilānassa ticīvarena vippavāsasammutiṃ deti, taṃ aññatrāti attho.
386. (Ka) That which the Saṅgha grants as a leave-taking agreement with three robes for a sick monk, that is elsewhere; this is the meaning.
akālacīvaraṃ(pārā. 500) nāma ‘‘anatthate kathine ekādasamāse uppannaṃ, atthate kathine sattamāse uppannaṃ, kālepi ādissa dinnaṃ, etaṃ akālacīvaraṃ nāmā’’ti.
akālacīvaraṃ (pārā. 500) means "a robe arising in the eleventh month when the kathina is not spread, or arising in the seventh month when the kathina is spread, or given in advance even in season; this is called an out-of-season robe."
purāṇacīvaraṃ(pārā. 505) nāma ‘‘sakiṃ nivatthampi sakiṃ pārutampī’’ti vuttaṃ.Aññātikānāma mātito vā pitito vā yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā asambandhā. Nisīdanapaccattharaṇadhovāpane dukkaṭaṃ.
purāṇacīvaraṃ (pārā. 505) means "even if it has been worn once or put on once," as was stated. Aññātikā means someone unrelated either maternally or paternally up to the seventh generation of family lineage. There is a dukkata offense for washing a sitting cloth or a spread.
aññatra pārivattakāti (pārā. 512) ettha harītakīkhaṇḍampi vaṭṭati.Cīvaraṃnāma idha vikappanūpagapacchimato paṭṭhāya adhippetaṃ.
aññatra pārivattakā (pārā. 512) means even a piece of myrobalan fruit is allowable here. Cīvaraṃ here is intended to mean from the last robe to be offered for assignment onwards.
aññatra samayāti (pārā. 519) ettha ‘‘acchinnacīvaro vā hoti bhikkhu naṭṭhacīvaro vā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ samayanti attho.
aññatra samayā (pārā. 519) means "either the bhikkhu has a torn robe or he has lost a robe," thus, the meaning is time.
‘‘tatuttarī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha pana ‘‘sace tīṇi naṭṭhāni honti, dve sāditabbāni. Dve naṭṭhāni, ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ, ekaṃ naṭṭhaṃ, na kiñci sāditabba’’nti (pārā. 524) vuttaṃ.
‘‘tatuttarī’’ is stated. However, here it is stated, "If three are lost, two should be sought. If two are lost, one should be sought; if one is lost, nothing should be sought" (pārā. 524).
Vikappanti visiṭṭhakappaṃ adhikavidhānaṃ āpannaṃ. Idha purimaṃ ekassa, dutiyaṃ bahūnaṃ vasena vuttaṃ, ettakaṃ nānattaṃ.
Vikappa means a superior arrangement, a condition entailing additional rules. Here, the former is stated in relation to one person, the latter in relation to many; this is the extent of the difference.
atirekatikkhattunti ettha kenaci yaṃ kiñci akappiyavatthuṃ ānetvā ‘‘idaṃ kho me, bhante, āyasmantaṃ uddissa cīvaracetāpannaṃ ābhataṃ, paṭiggaṇhatu āyasmā cīvaracetāpanna’’nti vutte ‘‘na kho mayaṃ, āvuso, cīvaracetāpannaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma, cīvarañca kho mayaṃ paṭiggaṇhāma kālena kappiya’’nti vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ vutte sace so ‘‘atthi koci kappiyakārako’’ti vadati, cīvaratthikena ṭhapetvā pañca sahadhammike yo koci uddisitabbo ‘‘eso kho, āvuso, bhikkhūnaṃ veyyāvaccakaro’’ti, ettakameva vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ vutte sace dāyako tassa hatthe akappiyavatthuṃ datvā ‘‘eso ayyassa cīvaraṃ cetāpetvā dassatī’’ti vatvā gacchati, taṃ upasaṅkamitvā dvattikkhattuṃ codetabbo sāretabbo ‘‘attho me, āvuso, cīvarenā’’ti, ettakameva vattabbaṃ, ‘‘dehi me cīvara’’ntiādinā na vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ tikkhattuṃ codanāya taṃ cīvaraṃ labhati, iccetaṃ kusalaṃ. No ce labhati, chakkhattuparamaṃ tuṇhībhūtena ṭhātabbaṃ, na āsane nisīditabbaṃ, na āmisaṃ paṭiggahetabbaṃ, na dhammo bhāsitabbo. ‘‘Kiṃ kāraṇā āgatosī’’ti vutte ‘‘jānāhi, āvuso’’ti ettakameva vattabbaṃ. Sace nisajjādīni karoti, ṭhānaṃ bhañjati. Vattabhedadukkaṭañca āpajjatīti vadanti. Evaṃ pana appaṭipajjitvā atirekatikkhattuṃ codanāya atirekachakkhattuṃ ṭhānena sace nipphādeti, nissaggiyanti attho.
atirekatikkhattu means here, if someone brings any unsuitable object and says, "Venerable sir, this has been brought to me for the purchase of a robe, intending it for the venerable one; may the venerable one accept this for the purchase of a robe," one should say, "Friend, we do not accept anything for the purchase of a robe; we accept a robe that is suitable and at the right time." If he then says, "Is there anyone who can make it suitable?", one desiring a robe, having set it aside, should indicate one of the five co-residents, "This friend is a helper of the bhikkhus," only this much should be said. If, having said this, the donor gives the unsuitable object into that person's hand and says, "Let this person have a robe made for the venerable one and give it," one should approach him and urge him two or three times, "I need a robe"; only this much should be said, one should not say "Give me a robe," etc. If he obtains that robe by urging him three times, that is skillful. If he does not obtain it, he should stand silently for a maximum of six times, he should not sit on a seat, he should not accept food, he should not teach the Dhamma. If he is asked, "Why have you come?", he should say, "Know it, friend"; only this much should be said. If he does sitting, etc., he breaks the standing (rule). They say he incurs an offense of varying what should be said. However, if he produces it by urging three times excessively and by standing excessively for six times without acting thus, it is an offense entailing forfeiture; this is the meaning.
santhataṃ(pārā. 544) nāma santharitvā kataṃ hoti avāyimaṃ. Ekakosiyaṃsunāpi ce missetvā karoti, nissaggiyaṃ.
santhataṃ (pārā. 544) means it has been made by spreading, unwoven. If one makes it by mixing even a single kosiya thread, it is an offense entailing forfeiture.
suddhakāḷakānanti (pārā. 547-549) aññehi amissitānanti attho. ‘‘Kāḷakaṃ nāma dve kāḷakāni jātikāḷakaṃ vā rajanakāḷakaṃ vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
suddhakāḷakānaṃ (pārā. 547-549) means unmixed with others. It was said, "‘Kāḷaka’ means two kāḷakas: naturally black or dyed black."
anādiyitvā…pe… tulanti (pārā. 554) ettha pana yattakehi eḷakalomehi kattukāmo hoti, tesu dve koṭṭhāsā kāḷakānaṃ, eko odātānaṃ, eko gocariyānaṃ ādātabboti vinicchayo. Ekassāpi kāḷakalomassa atirekabhāge sati nissaggiyameva.
anādiyitvā…pe… tulaṃ (pārā. 554) means here, in regard to as many sheep's wools as one intends to weave with, two parts of them should be black, one of undyed, and one of brownish-red should be taken; this is the judgment. If there is an excess even of a single black wool, it is an offense entailing forfeiture.
ūnakachabbassānīti (pārā. 562) chabbassato orabhāge.
ūnakachabbassānī (pārā. 562) means in the part inferior to six years.
(Ḍha) nisīdanasanthataṃ (pārā. 567) pana kārāpentena purāṇasanthatassa ekapassato vaṭṭaṃ vā caturassaṃ vā chinditvā gahitaṭṭhānaṃ yathā vidatthimattaṃ hoti, evaṃ gahetvā ekadesaṃ vā santharitabbaṃ, vijaṭetvā vā santharitabbaṃ.
(Ḍha) If one is having a sitting cloth (pārā. 567) made, one should cut off a round or square piece from one side of an old sitting cloth, and either spread a part of the area taken, or spread it after teasing it out, so that it is a span in size.
(Ta) na kevalaṃ dhovāpane (pārā. 578) eva nissaggiyaṃ, rajanepi nissaggiyameva.
(Ta) Not only in washing (pārā. 578) is there an offense entailing forfeiture, but also in dyeing there is an offense entailing forfeiture.
‘‘nānappakāraka’’nti vuttaṃ.
‘‘nānappakāraka’’ is stated.
387-9.Āpattiṃ desetvā pacchā kattabbaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘athā’’ti vuttaṃ.Gihiṃ vadeti sace tattha āgacchati ārāmiko vā upāsako vā, taṃ vadeyyāti attho. Evaṃ vuttoso‘‘iminā kiṃ āharāmī’’ti ce vadeyyāti attho.Avatvāmanti ‘‘imaṃ vā imaṃ vā āharā’’ti avatvāti attho.Vadeti ‘‘kappiyaṃ ācikkhitabba’’nti (pārā. 584, 589) vacanato ‘‘pabbajitānaṃ sappi vā telaṃ vā madhu vā phāṇitaṃ vā vaṭṭatī’’ti evaṃ ācikkhitabbaṃ, ‘‘imaṃ nāma āharā’’ti na vattabbameva.Dvepeteti dvepi ete rūpiyapaṭiggāhakañca rūpiyasabyohārikañcāti attho.Aññenāti antamaso ārāmikenāpi laddhabhāgo na kappati eva.
387-9. ‘‘athā’’ is stated to show what should be done after confessing the offense. Gihiṃ vade means if a monastery attendant or a lay follower comes there, one should speak to him; this is the meaning. So, having been spoken to thus, means if he should say, "What shall I bring with this?"; this is the meaning. Avatvāma means without saying "Bring this or that"; this is the meaning. Vade means, because of the statement "What is suitable should be told" (pārā. 584, 589), one should explain thus: "Ghee, oil, honey, or molasses are allowable for renunciants"; one should not say, "Bring such-and-such." Dvepete means both of these: one who accepts money and one who engages in monetary transactions; this is the meaning. Aññenā means even a share obtained through a monastery attendant is not allowable.
390.Antamaso (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-4) tannibbattā rukkhacchāyāpi na kappatīti.Nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭiladdhampīti ettha yathā rūpiyasaṃvohāraṃ katvā laddhavatthuto ābhataṃ na kappati, tathā kosiyamissakasanthatādittayampi na kappati. Na kevalaṃ tasseva, aññesampi na kappateva ‘‘aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 545, 550, 555) vuttattā.
390. Even the shadow of a tree (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.583-4) produced by that is not allowable. Nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭiladdhampī means just as something brought from an item obtained after engaging in monetary transactions is not allowable, similarly, the three things beginning with a sitting cloth mixed with kosiya silk are also not allowable. Not only that, but it is not allowable for others either, because of the statement, "He enjoys something obtained and made by another; there is an offense of dukkata" (pārā. 545, 550, 555).
391.Evaṃ no ce labhetha,soārāmikādiko ‘‘imaṃ chaḍḍehī’’tisaṃsiyovattabboti attho. Evampi no ce labheyya,sammatobhikkhu chaḍḍeyyāti attho.
391. If one does not obtain it thus, so, the monastery attendant, etc., saṃsiyo should be told, "Throw this away"; this is the meaning. If one does not obtain it even thus, a sammato monk should throw it away; this is the meaning.
392.Paṭiggahitarūpiyañca parivattitarūpiyañca sandhāya‘‘etānī’’ti vuttaṃ.Dutiyapattonāma ‘‘ūnapañcabandhanena pattena aññaṃ navaṃ pattaṃ cetāpeyya, nissaggiya’’nti (pārā. 612) vuttapatto. So ca etāni ca saṅghe nissaṭṭhuṃ labbhareti sambandho. ‘‘Saṅghamajjhe nissajjitabbaṃ, bhikkhuparisāya nissajjitabba’’nti (pārā. 584, 589) ca vuttattā na gaṇapuggalānaṃ nissajjituṃ vaṭṭati. Sesāni pana tīṇi cīvarādivatthūni ‘‘nissajjitabbaṃ saṅghassa vā gaṇassa vā puggalassa vā’’ti vuttattā (pārā. 463) saṅghādīnaṃ nissajjituṃ vaṭṭati.Bhāsantarenapīti pāḷiyā vattuṃ asakkontena damiḷabhāsādīsu aññatarāyapi nissajjituṃ vaṭṭatīti attho.
392. ‘‘etānī’’ is stated referring to money that has been accepted and money that has been exchanged. Dutiyapatto means the second bowl stated thus: "If one has a new bowl made with a bowl having less than five bindings, there is an offense entailing forfeiture" (pārā. 612). The connection is that he can relinquish that bowl and these things in the Saṅgha. Because it is stated, "It should be relinquished in the middle of the Saṅgha, it should be relinquished in the assembly of bhikkhus" (pārā. 584, 589), it is not allowable to relinquish to a group or an individual. However, the remaining three things beginning with robes, because it is stated, "It should be relinquished to the Saṅgha, or to a group, or to an individual" (pārā. 463), it is allowable to relinquish to the Saṅgha, etc. Bhāsantarenapī means if one is unable to speak in Pali, it is allowable to relinquish even in another language such as Tamil; this is the meaning.
393.(Ka-ga)nānappakārakaṃnāma ‘‘cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā, ‘‘antamaso cuṇṇapiṇḍopi dantakaṭṭhampi dasikasuttampī’’ti (pārā. 595)pāḷiyaṃvuttaṃ.Cetāpitoti (pārā. 613) yācitvā gahito.
393. (Ka-ga) nānappakārakaṃ means "robes, alms-food, lodging, medicine as a requisite for the sick, and medical supplies, even a ball of powder or a toothpick or a measuring cord" (pārā. 595), as stated pāḷiyaṃ. Cetāpito (pārā. 613) means obtained by asking.
394.Sammannitvāna pattagāhakaṃ saṅghassa pattantanti (pārā. 614; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. ūnapañcabaddhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ya antimaṃ pattaṃ, taṃ tassa dāpayeti attho.
394. Sammannitvāna pattagāhakaṃ saṅghassa pattanta (pārā. 614; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. ūnapañcabaddhanasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) means the Saṅgha appoints a bowl-taker and causes him to give away the last bowl; this is the meaning.
395.(Kha)paridahitaṃnissaggiyanti ettha (pārā. 626-628; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628) pana ṭhatvā vassikasāṭikāya pariyesanakkhettaṃ karaṇakkhettaṃ nivāsanakkhettaṃ adhiṭṭhānakkhettanti catubbidhaṃ khettañca kucchisamayo piṭṭhisamayoti duvidho samayo ca veditabbo. Kathaṃ? Gimhānamāsesu pacchimamāsassa purimo aḍḍhamāsopariyesanakkhettaṃ,pacchimokaraṇakkhettañcanivāsanakkhettañca, pariyesitumpi vaṭṭati, adhiṭṭhātuṃ pana na vaṭṭati. Vassikā pana cattāro māsā pariyesanādīnaṃ catunnampi khettaṃ. Ete eva pañca māsākucchisamayonāma. Itare satta māsāpiṭṭhisamayo,tattha satuppādakaraṇaṃ na vaṭṭati.
395.(Kha) In "paridahitaṃ nissaggiyaṃ," here (pārā. 626-628; pārā. aṭṭha. 2.628), one should understand the four kinds of khetta (field) regarding the vassikasāṭikā: the seeking field (pariyesanakkhetta), the making field (karaṇakkhetta), the wearing field (nivāsanakkhetta), and the determination field (adhiṭṭhānakkhetta); and the two kinds of time (samaya): the inside time (kucchisamaya) and the outside time (piṭṭhisamaya). How so? In the hot season months (gimhānaṃ māsesu), the first half-month of the last month is the seeking field, the last half is the making field and the wearing field; it is allowable to seek, but not allowable to determine. But the four months of the rains (vassikā) are the field for all four: seeking, etc. These very five months are called the inside time. The remaining seven months are the outside time, there it is not allowable to start making it.
acchinnanti ettha ‘‘yo pana mama pattacīvarādīni vahanto mayā saddhiṃ carissatī’’ti saññāya cīvaraṃ datvā puna sakasaññāya eva attano veyyāvaccaṃ akarontaṃ disvā acchindati, so imaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati. Kevalaṃ pariccajitvā dinnaṃ gahetumeva na labhati.
In "acchinnaṃ," if someone, having given a robe with the intention, "Whoever carries my bowl, robe, etc., will go with me," then, seeing that person not doing personal service for him with that same intention, takes it back, he incurs this offense. It is not allowable to take back something given only after relinquishing it.
suttaṃ viññāpetvāti ettha cīvarakārasamayādīsu cīvarasibbanādīnamatthāya suttaṃ viññāpetvāti attho. Aññathā suttaṃ viññāpetumeva na vaṭṭati. Viññattiyā eva laddhatantavāyehīti attho. Suttatantavāyānaṃ akappiyabhāve sati dīghato vidatthimatte, tiriyantato hatthamatte vīte nissaggiyaṃ, ekato akappiyapakkhe dukkaṭaṃ.
In "suttaṃ viññāpetvā," the meaning is requesting thread for the purpose of sewing robes, etc., at the time for robe-making, etc. Otherwise, it is not allowable to request thread at all. tantavāyehī means obtained by the requesting. When the thread and weaving materials are unallowable, if it exceeds a vidatthi in length and a hand-span in width, it is nissaggiya; if one side is unallowable, it is a dukkaṭa.
vikappaṃ āpannanti (pārā. 643) ‘‘idaṃ kho, āvuso, cīvaraṃ maṃ uddissa viyyati, āyatañca karotha vitthatañcā’’tiādinā adhikaṃ vidhānaṃ āpannanti attho.
vikappaṃ āpannaṃ (pārā. 643) means undertaking an additional arrangement, such as, "Friend, this robe is being woven for me, make it longer and wider."
accekacīvaraṃ(pārā. 649-650) nāma senāya gantukāmādīhi dinnaṃ.
accekacīvaraṃ (pārā. 649-650) means given by those intending to go to war, etc.
atirekachārattanti (pārā. 654-655) chadivasato atirekaṃ. ‘‘Atthatakathinānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, pañca kappissanti, anāmantacāro asamādānacāro gaṇabhojanaṃ yāvadatthacīvaraṃ yo ca tattha cīvaruppādo, so nesaṃ bhavissatī’’ti (mahāva. 306) vuttaānisaṃsesu cīvaramāse asamādānacāraṃ ṭhapetvā sesānisaṃsā labbhanti. Yadi asamādānacāro labbheyya, pāveyyakā bhikkhū vassaṃvutthā okapuṇṇehi cīvarehi na bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkameyyuṃ, yasmā taṃ na labhanti, tasmā cīvaramāsepi ticīvaraṃ ādāya eva bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamiṃsu. Tasmā veditabbaṃ asamādānacāraparihāraṃ atthatakathinā eva labhanti, na itareti vadanti.
atirekachārattaṃ (pārā. 654-655) means more than six days. Among the benefits stated, "Monks, these five will be allowable for you who have spread the kathina: wandering without invitation, wandering without taking leave, group meals, robes as many as needed, and whatever robe-material arises there, that will belong to them" (mahāva. 306), in the robe-month, leaving aside wandering without taking leave, the remaining benefits are obtainable. If wandering without taking leave were obtainable, monks who had spent the rains would not approach the Blessed One with robes filled with algae; since they do not obtain that, therefore even in the robe-month, having taken the three robes, they approached the Blessed One. Therefore, it should be understood that only those who have spread the kathina obtain exemption from wandering without taking leave, not others, some say.
397.(Kha) ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ pāṭidesanīyāpattiṃ, dve, sambahulā pāṭidesanīyāpattiyo āpajji’’nti imaṃ pana yesu potthakesu likhitaṃ, taṃ abhayagirivāsīnaṃ khuddasikkhāvasena dassitaṃ kira. Tattha ‘‘ahaṃ, āyasmā, sambahulā pāṭidesanīyā āpattiyo āpanno, tāyo paṭidesemi. Ahaṃ, āyasmā, ekaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ āpattiṃ āpanno, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Amhākaṃ pana evaṃ desanāvidhānaṃ natthi. ‘‘Gārayhaṃ, āvuso, dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemī’’ti (pāci. 553) vuttaṃ.Samantapāsādikāyaṃ(pāci. 553) ‘‘gārayhaṃ āvuso’tiādi paṭidesetabbākāradassana’’nti vuttaṃ.Kaṅkhāvitaraṇiyampi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘tassā desetabbākāro gārayhaṃ āvuso’tiādinā nayena sikkhāpade dassitoyevā’’ti vuttattā pāṭhe āgatanayeneva desanāvidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sace dve honti, ‘‘gārayhe, āvuso, dve dhamme āpajjiṃ asappāye pāṭidesanīye, te paṭidesemī’’ti, ‘‘passatha, bhante, te dhamme’’ti ca ‘‘gārayhe, āvuso, sambahule dhamme āpajjiṃ asappāye pāṭidesanīye, te paṭidesemī’’ti, ‘‘passatha, bhante, te dhamme’’ti ca evaṃ yathānurūpaṃ desanāvidhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sesaṃ vuttappakāramevāti.
397.(Kha) But in which books it is written "I, venerable sir, have committed one offense requiring confession; I have committed two, several offenses requiring confession," that is shown according to the Khuddasikkha of the Abhayagiri residents. There, it is said, "I, venerable sir, have committed several offenses requiring confession, I confess them. I, venerable sir, have committed one offense requiring confession, I confess that." But we do not have such a method of confession. "Gārayhaṃ, āvuso, dhammaṃ āpajjiṃ asappāyaṃ pāṭidesanīyaṃ, taṃ paṭidesemī" (pāci. 553) is said. In the Samantapāsādikā (pāci. 553) it is said, "‘Gārayhaṃ āvuso’ etc. is showing the manner of what should be confessed." And in the Kaṅkhāvitaraṇī (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapāṭidesanīyasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), "The way to confess it is shown in the sikkhāpada in the manner of ‘gārayhaṃ āvuso’ etc.," because it is said, the method of confession should be understood according to the way it comes in the text. If there are two, "I have committed two blameworthy, unsuitable offenses requiring confession, friend, I confess them," and "Do you see those offenses, venerable sir?" and "I have committed several blameworthy, unsuitable offenses requiring confession, friend, I confess them," and "Do you see those offenses, venerable sir?" and so the method of confession should be understood appropriately. The rest is as previously stated.
398.Adesanāgāminiyanti (pari. 424 ādayo; pari. aṭṭha. 425) pārājikañca saṅghādisesañca na desayeti attho.Anāpattiñcāti anāpattiṃ eva ‘‘āpatti’’nti na desaye. Lahukāpattimpi pubbe desitaṃ puna na desayeti sambandho, nānāsaṃvāsanissīmaṭṭhitānaṃ santike na desayeti attho.Catupañcahīti ettha samānavassikapavāraṇāyaṃ viya catūhi vā pañcahi vā ekato hutvā ekassa santike na desayeti attho. Dvinnaṃ vā tiṇṇaṃ vā vaṭṭati. Kathaṃ desetabbanti ce? Ekassa santike tīhipi ekato nisīditvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, ekaṃ pācittiyāpattiṃ āpajjiṃ, taṃ tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti evaṃ attanā āpannaāpattivasena vutte tena ‘‘passasi, āvuso, taṃ āpatti’’nti evaṃ tikkhattuṃ vutte ‘‘āma, bhante, passāmī’’ti vā ‘‘āmāvuso passāmī’’ti vā vutte puna tena ‘‘āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāthā’’ti vā ‘‘saṃvareyyāsī’’ti vā vutte ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhu saṃvarissāmī’’ti vattabbaṃ, evaṃ desetabbaṃ.Manasāti vacībhedaṃ akatvā kevalaṃ citteneva na desayeti attho.Apakatattānanti antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpannassa vā ukkhittakassa vā uposatho pavāraṇā vā ṭhapitā honti, tassa santike na desayeti attho.Nānekāti nānāpattiyo ‘‘ekā’’ti vatvā na desayeti attho. Ekā pana ‘‘sambahulā’’ti desitā hotīti. Desanāvinicchayo.
398.Adesanāgāminiyanti (pari. 424 ādayo; pari. aṭṭha. 425) means he does not confess a pārājika or a saṅghādisesa. Anāpattiñcāti he should not confess a non-offense as an "offense." The connection is that he does not confess a minor offense that was previously confessed, meaning he does not confess in the presence of those dwelling outside the same boundary of shared residence. Catupañcahīti here, like in the samānavassikapavāraṇā, he does not confess in the presence of four or five together to one person. It is allowable to two or three. How should he confess? Sitting together, even three, in the presence of one person, having said "I, venerable sir, have committed an offense of pācittiya, I confess it at your feet," according to the offense he has committed, when he is told three times "Do you see that offense, friend?" if he says "Yes, venerable sir, I see it," or "Yes, friend, I see it," then when he is told "Restrain yourself in the future" or "You should restrain yourself," he should say "Good, very well, I will restrain myself," thus he should confess. Manasāti means he does not confess merely with his mind, without making a verbal utterance. Apakatattānanti he does not confess in the presence of one who has undertaken the last matter (antimavatthu), or one who has been suspended, for whom the uposatha or pavāraṇā has been stopped. Nānekāti he does not confess several offenses by saying "one." But one offense confessed as "several" is valid. Conclusion to confession.
Desanāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the section on confession is finished.
43. Chandadānaniddesavaṇṇanā
43. Commentary on the Section on Giving Consent
399.Kammappatte saṅghe samāgateti sambandho. Etena saṅghe asamāgate chandadānaṃ na ruhatīti dīpitaṃ hotīti vadanti. Etthāyaṃ vicāraṇā – pañcabhikkhuke vihāre ekassa chandapārisuddhiṃ āharitvā sesānaṃ uposathādikaraṇaṃ anuññātaṃpāḷiyaṃ(pari. 496-497)aṭṭhakathāyañca(pari. aṭṭha. 487-488). Tesu eko chandadāyako, eko chandahārako, te muñcitvā na ettha sannipatito saṅgho tiṇṇaṃ samūhabhāvato, tasmā asamāgatepi dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Ārocentena pana samāgate eva ārocetabbaṃ. Idhāpi‘‘hareyyā’’ti vuttaṃ, na ‘‘deseyyā’’ti. Tattha chandahārakena saddhiṃ kammappattānaṃ sannipāto veditabbo.
399.The connection is with a Saṅgha that has assembled and is eligible to perform the act (kammappatte saṅghe samāgate). By this, it is shown that giving consent does not take effect in a Saṅgha that has not assembled, some say. Here is a consideration: in a monastery with five monks, it is allowed in the Pāḷi (pari. 496-497) and the Aṭṭhakathā (pari. aṭṭha. 487-488) to perform the uposatha, etc., for the remaining monks after bringing the pārisuddhi (declaration of purity) and consent of one. Of those, one is the giver of consent, one is the carrier of consent, and excluding them, this assembled Saṅgha is not a group of three, therefore it is allowable to give consent even when not assembled. But it should be announced only to one who has assembled. Here also "hareyyā" (should carry) is said, not "deseyyā" (should declare). There, the assembly of those eligible to perform the act should be understood along with the carrier of consent.
400.Idāni chandadānavidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ekaṃ bhikkhu’’ntiādimāha (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā).
400.Now, to show the method of giving consent, he said "ekaṃ bhikkhu" etc. (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā).
401.(Ka) ‘‘chandaṃ dammī’’ti ettakameva alaṃ, ‘‘hara, ārocehī’’ti imehi kiṃpayojananti ce? Vuccate – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tadahuposathe pārisuddhiṃ dentena chandampidātuṃ, santi saṅghassa karaṇīya’’nti (mahāva. 165) vuttattā bhagavato āṇaṃ karontena‘‘chandaṃ dammī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Chandahārako ce, bhikkhave, dinne chande antarāmagge pakkamati, anāhaṭova hoti chando’’ti (mahāva. 165) vuttattā chandahārakassa aññassa apakkamanatthāya pārisuddhiṃ dentena ‘‘idaṃ karohi evā’’ti āṇāpentena‘‘chandaṃ me harā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Chandahārako ce, bhikkhave, dinne chande saṅghappatto sañcicca nāroceti, āhaṭo hoti chando, chandahārakassa āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 165) vuttattā ‘‘yaditvaṃ sañcicca nārocessasi, āpattiṃ āpajjissasi, ārocehi evā’’ti tassa ācikkhanto‘‘ārocehī’’ti āhāti evamettha imesaṃ padānaṃ sappayojanatā veditabbā. Evaṃ pārisuddhidānepīti.
401.(Ka) If it is asked, "Only saying ‘I give consent’ is enough, what is the purpose of ‘carry, announce’?", it is said: Because it is said, "I allow, monks, giving consent by one giving a declaration of purity on the uposatha day, there are duties to be done by the Saṅgha" (mahāva. 165), by one doing the order of the Blessed One, "chandaṃ dammī" (I give consent) is said. Because it is said, "If, monks, the carrier of consent departs on the road after the consent has been given, the consent is un-brought" (mahāva. 165), by ordering "chandaṃ me harā" (carry my consent) to the one giving the pārisuddhi so that another carrier of consent does not leave. Because it is said, "If, monks, the carrier of consent, having arrived at the Saṅgha after the consent has been given, intentionally does not announce it, the consent is brought, the carrier of consent incurs an offense of wrong-doing" (mahāva. 165), by pointing out to him "ārocehī" (announce) saying "If you intentionally do not announce it, you will incur an offense, announce it," thus the purposefulness of these words should be understood here. Likewise in giving pārisuddhi.
402.Sesakammanti yadi saṅgho uposathagge aññaṃ apalokanādikammaṃ karoti, taṃ kammaṃ vibādhati, vikopetīti attho.
402.Sesakammanti if the Saṅgha performs another act such as granting leave in the uposatha hall, that act obstructs it, ruins it, is the meaning.
403.Dvayanti uposathañca sesakammañcāti attho.Nattanoti attano uposathaṃ na sampādeti.
403.Dvayanti means both the uposatha and the other act. Nattanoti he does not accomplish his own uposatha.
405.‘‘Ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīditvā’’tiādikaṃ (mahāva. 213)sabbūpacāraṃ katvānāti attho.
405.sabbūpacāraṃ katvānāti (mahāva. 213) means having done all the proper conduct such as "having arranged the upper robe over one shoulder and squatting."
406.‘‘Itthannāmena pavāraṇā dinnā’’tiārocetvā.
406.ārocetvā means "having announced" "the pavāraṇā has been given by so-and-so."
408.Paṭijāneyya nāhaṭāti (mahāva. 164-165, 213) pāṭhe na āhaṭātināhaṭā,āhaṭā na hotīti attho.Tathā heyyāti vibbhamanādīni kareyyāti attho.
408.Paṭijāneyya nāhaṭāti (mahāva. 164-165, 213) in the reading na āhaṭā is nāhaṭā, meaning it is not brought. Tathā heyyāti means he should make acts of confusion, etc.
409.Sutto vā nārocayeyya, āhaṭā hotīti sambandho.Anāpattivāti anāpatti eva. Chandadānavinicchayo.
409.If he is sleeping, he should not announce it; the connection is that it is brought. Anāpattivāti means it is only a non-offense. Conclusion to the giving of consent.
Chandadānaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the section on giving consent is finished.
44. Uposathaniddesavaṇṇanā
44. Commentary on the Section on the Uposatha
411.Suttuddesosaṅghasseva.Sesānanti dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā.
411.Suttuddeso means the recitation of the sutta is for the Saṅgha alone. Sesānanti for two or three.
412.Pubbakaraṇepubbakicce, pattakalle samāniteti sabbapaṭhamaṃ kattabbaṃpubbakaraṇaṃ. Tadanantaraṃ kattabbaṃpubbakiccaṃnāma. Ettha –
412.Pubbakaraṇe, pubbakicce, pattakalle samāniteti the first thing to be done is called pubbakaraṇaṃ (preliminary duties). After that, what should be done is called pubbakiccaṃ (prior business). Here -
‘‘Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;
"The broom, the lamp, and water with a seat;
These are called the preliminary duties of the uposatha.
‘‘Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;
"Declaration of purity, announcement of the season, counting the monks, and giving guidance;
These are called the prior business of the uposatha." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 168);
aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttanayena pubbakaraṇañca pubbakiccañca veditabbaṃ.
According to the method stated in the Aṭṭhakathā, the preliminary duties and prior business should be understood.
‘‘Uposatho yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā,
"The uposatha, as many monks as are eligible to perform the act,
And there are no shared offenses;
And there are no persons to be avoided in it,
It is called ready." (mahāva. aṭṭha. 168);
Vuttavasena pattakalle samānite, pajjiteti attho. ‘‘Pañcime, bhikkhave, pātimokkhuddesā. Nidānaṃ uddisitvā avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ, ayaṃ paṭhamo pātimokkhuddeso. Nidānaṃ uddisitvā cattāri pārājikāni uddisitvā avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ, ayaṃ dutiyo pātimokkhuddeso. Nidānaṃ uddisitvā cattāri pārājikāni uddisitvā terasa saṅghādisese uddisitvā avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ, ayaṃ tatiyo pātimokkhuddeso. Nidānaṃ uddisitvā cattāri pārājikāni uddisitvā terasa saṅghādisese uddisitvā dve aniyate uddisitvā avasesaṃ sutena sāvetabbaṃ, ayaṃ catuttho pātimokkhuddeso. Vitthāreneva pañcamo. Ime kho bhikkhave pañca pātimokkhuddesā’’ti (mahāva. 150) vuttattā so suttuddeso pañcadhā vibhāvitoti attho.
According to what is stated, when the ready time has arrived, having prepared it, is the meaning. Because it is said, "These five are the recitations of the Pātimokkha, monks. Having recited the introduction, the remainder should be recited by sutta, this is the first recitation of the Pātimokkha. Having recited the introduction, having recited the four pārājikās, the remainder should be recited by sutta, this is the second recitation of the Pātimokkha. Having recited the introduction, having recited the four pārājikās, having recited the thirteen saṅghādisesas, the remainder should be recited by sutta, this is the third recitation of the Pātimokkha. Having recited the introduction, having recited the four pārājikās, having recited the thirteen saṅghādisesas, having recited the two aniyatas, the remainder should be recited by sutta, this is the fourth recitation of the Pātimokkha. The fifth is in detail. These are the five recitations of the Pātimokkha, monks" (mahāva. 150), that suttuddesa is divided into five, is the meaning.
413.Vināntarāyanti (mahāva. 150) rājantarāyādidasavidhaṃ antarāyaṃ vinā saṅkhepenuddeso vinivārito paṭikkhittoti attho.Therovāti saṅghattherova.Etthāti pañcasu uddesesu. ‘‘Dvīsu vā tīsu vā visadesu therova issaro’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā avattantepi antarāye saṃkhittena uddisituṃ vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo. Kattha vuttanti ce? ‘‘Yo tattha bhikkhu byatto paṭibalo, tassādheyya’’nti (mahāva. 155) vuttapāḷiyāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘yo tattha bhikkhu byatto paṭibaloti ettha kiñcāpi daharassāpi byattassa pātimokkho anuññāto, atha kho ettha ayamadhippāyo – sace saṅghattherassa pañca vā cattāro vā tayo vā pātimokkhuddesā nāgacchanti, dve pana akhaṇḍā suvisadā vācuggatā honti, therāyattova pātimokkho. Sace pana ettakampi visadaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, byattassa bhikkhuno āyattova hotī’’ti attho vutto. Pāḷiyampi vuttameva ‘‘tehi, bhikkhave, bhikkhūhi eko bhikkhu sāmantā āvāsā sajjukaṃ pāhetabbo ‘gaccha, āvuso, saṃkhittena vā vitthārena vā pātimokkhaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā āgacchā’’’ti (mahāva. 163).
413.Vināntarāyanti (mahāva. 150) without ten kinds of obstructions such as royal obstruction, etc., the short recitation is prevented, rejected, is the meaning. Therovāti only the elder of the Saṅgha. Etthāti in these five recitations. Because it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā, "In two or three incomplete recitations, the elder is the authority," the intention is that even if there is no obstruction, it is allowable to recite in brief. If it is asked where it is said, in the Aṭṭhakathā of the Pāḷi passage, "Whoever is skilled and capable there, it depends on him" (mahāva. 155), "although the Pātimokkha is allowed to even a young skilled one, here the intention is this: if the elder of the Saṅgha does not remember five, four, or three recitations of the Pātimokkha, but two are unblemished, very clear, and memorized, the Pātimokkha depends on the elder. But if he is not able to make even that much clear, it depends on a skilled monk," is the meaning. In the Pāḷi too it is said, "By those monks, a monk should be sent quickly from the surrounding residences, ‘Go, friend, learn the Pātimokkha in brief or in detail and come back’" (mahāva. 163).
414.Uddisante vāti (mahāva. 172) pātimokkhe uddisiyamāne samā vā thokatarā vā yadi āgaccheyyuṃ, uddiṭṭhaṃ suuddiṭṭhaṃ, tehi saddhiṃ nisīditvā avasesakaṃ sotabbanti attho.
414.Uddisante vāti (mahāva. 172) if, while the Pātimokkha is being recited, those who are equal or fewer arrive, the recited part is well recited, having sat down with them, the remainder should be listened to, is the meaning.
415.Uddiṭṭhamatte(mahāva. 172)vā sakalāya vā ekaccāyavā parisāyavuṭṭhitāyasamā vā thokatarā vā yadi āgaccheyyunti sambandho.Pārisuddhinti pārisuddhiuposathaṃ.Kareyyesanti kareyya esaṃ, etesaṃ santiketi attho.Bahukātha ceti atha bahukā ce, puna āgatā bahukā ceti attho,. ‘‘Uddissamāne, uddiṭṭhamatte ekaccāya vuṭṭhitāya sakalāya vuṭṭhitāyā’’ti (mahāva. 172) āgatesu sabbavikappesu pubbakiccaṃ katvā puna ādito paṭṭhāya pātimokkhaṃ uddiseti attho.
415.Uddiṭṭhamatte (mahāva. 172) vā sakalāya vā ekaccāya vā parisāya vuṭṭhitāya the connection is, if those who are equal or fewer arrive after all or some of the assembly has left. Pārisuddhinti means the pārisuddhiuposatha. Kareyyesanti he should do it for them, in their presence, is the meaning. Bahukātha ceti if there are many, if many arrive again, is the meaning. "While it is being recited, after it has been recited, after some have left, after all have left" (mahāva. 172), in all the possible situations that have arrived, having done the prior business, he should recite the Pātimokkha again from the beginning, is the meaning.
416.Itarānanti āgantukānaṃ.Sacetaroti sace cātuddasikoti attho.Samānetarenuvattantūti samā vā ūnā vā itare āgantukā purimānaṃ āvāsikānaṃ anuvattantūti attho.Sacedhikāti āgantukā sace adhikā,purimāāvāsikāanuvattantūti attho.Sesepyayaṃ nayoti ‘‘āgantukānaṃ pannaraso hoti, āvāsikānaṃ cātuddaso’’ti itarepi samathokā āgantukā āvāsikānaṃ anuvattantūtiādinā nayena vinicchayo veditabboti attho.
416. Itarānanti, to those who are visitors. Sacetaroti, if it is the fourteenth, is the meaning. Samānetarenuvattantūti, equal or less, the other visitors should conform to the original residents, is the meaning. Sacedhikāti, if the visitors are more, purimā the original residents should anuvattantūti, conform, is the meaning. Sesepyayaṃ nayoti, moreover, "for the visitors it is the fifteenth, for the residents, the fourteenth," the remaining balanced opportunities should be understood as decided by the principle that the visitors should conform to the residents, and so on.
417.Mūlaṭṭhāti āvāsikā.Samathokānaṃāgantukānaṃ.Sāmaggiṃ dentu kāmatoti yadi icchanti, dentūti attho.
417. Mūlaṭṭhāti, the resident monks. Samathokānaṃ to the visiting monks. Sāmaggiṃ dentu kāmatoti, if they wish, they should give consent, is the meaning.
418.No ce denti, āgantukehi bahi gantvāna uposatho kātabboti attho. Anicchāya sāmaggī deyyāti sambandho.
418. If they do not give it, the uposatha should be observed by the visitors after going outside, is the meaning. Consent should be given against one's will; this is the connection.
419.‘‘Na bhikkhave pātimokkhuddesakena sañcicca na sāvetabbaṃ. Yo na sāveyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tivuttattā (mahāva. 154)‘‘sāveyya sutta’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pātimokkhuddesakena vāyamituṃ kathaṃ sāveyyanti, vāyamantassa anāpattī’’ti (mahāva. 154) vuttattā‘‘sañcicca assāventassa dukkaṭa’’nti vuttaṃ.
419. Because it was said, "Monks, the one reciting the Pāṭimokkha should not deliberately omit it. Whoever omits it, there is an offense of dukkaṭa," (mahāva. 154) ‘‘sāveyya sutta’’nti, it was said that it should be recited. Because it was said, "I allow, monks, the one reciting the Pāṭimokkha to make an effort to recite it, there is no offense for one making an effort," (mahāva. 154) ‘‘sañcicca assāventassa dukkaṭa’’nti, it was said that there is an offense of dukkaṭa for one who deliberately does not recite it.
420.Tathāti dukkaṭanti attho.Kalloti agilāno.Pesitoti āṇatto. ‘‘Na bhikkhave therena āṇattena agilānena na sammajjitabbaṃ. Yo na sammajjeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādi (mahāva. 159) vuttaṃ.
420. Tathāti, the meaning is dukkaṭa. Kalloti, not ill. Pesitoti, ordered. It was said, "Monks, a thera who is not ill should not fail to sweep when ordered. Whoever does not sweep incurs an offense of dukkaṭa," and so on (mahāva. 159).
421-3.Idāni pārisuddhiuposathaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sammajjitvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Añjaliṃ (mahāva. 168) paggayhāti sambandho.Teti avasesā dve evaṃ samudīriyā vattabbāti attho. Ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgādikaraṇavasena samattapubbārambhena te dve bhikkhū navena evamīriyā vattabbāti attho.
421-3. Now, to show the pārisuddhiuposatha, ‘‘sammajjitvā’’tiādi, "having swept," and so on, was said. Añjaliṃ (mahāva. 168) paggayhāti, he should hold up his joined palms. Teti, the remaining two should be spoken and stated thus, is the meaning. Having properly arranged the upper robe, etc., on one shoulder, those two monks should state the new thing in this way, is the meaning.
424-5.Idāni dvīhi kattabbaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘dvīsu therenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
424-5. Now, to show what should be done by two, ‘‘dvīsu therenā’’ti, "among two, by the thera," was said.
426.Ettāvatā ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, catunnaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisitu’’nti (mahāva. 168) ca ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tiṇṇaṃ pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kātu’’nti (mahāva. 168) ca ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, dvinnaṃ pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kātu’’nti (mahāva. 168) ca vuttaṃ saṅghuposathañca pārisuddhiuposathañca dassetvā idāni yattha eko bhikkhu viharati, tassa anuññātaṃ adhiṭṭhānuposathaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘pubbakicca’’ntiādimāha. Ettha capubbakiccaṃnāma sammajjanādikaṃyeva.
426. Thus far, having shown the saṅghuposatha and the pārisuddhiuposatha, as it was said, "I allow, monks, the reciting of the Pāṭimokkha for four," (mahāva. 168) and "I allow, monks, to perform the pārisuddhiuposatha for three," (mahāva. 168) and "I allow, monks, to perform the pārisuddhiuposatha for two," (mahāva. 168) now, to show the adhiṭṭhānuposatha allowed for the one monk who dwells there, ‘‘pubbakicca’’ntiādi, "preliminary duty," and so on, he said. Here, pubbakiccaṃnāma, the preliminary duty is just sweeping, and so on.
427.Saṅghuposathapārisuddhiuposathaadhiṭṭhānauposathānaṃ vasena taṃ taṃ uposathaṃ yadi kayirunti sambandho.
427. Depending on the saṅghuposatha, pārisuddhiuposatha, and adhiṭṭhānauposatha, if they would do that respective uposatha, is the connection.
428.Vagge (mahāva. 173) ca samagge ca ‘‘vaggo’’ti saññino ca ‘‘vaggo nu kho, samaggo nu kho’’ti evaṃvimatissaca dukkaṭaṃ, ‘‘nassantete vinassantete, ko tehi attho’’ti evaṃ anāgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ atthibhāvaṃ ñatvābhedādhippāyenauposathaṃ karotothullaccayaṃhotīti attho. Tadubhayepi ‘‘samaggo’’ti saññino anāpatti.
428. In a divided (mahāva. 173) or harmonious assembly, and for one who is aware that it is divided, and for one who is vimatissaca, in doubt, thinking, "Is it divided, or is it harmonious?" there is an offense of dukkaṭa, but for one who, knowing the existence of future monks, with bhedādhippāyena, the intention to cause division, performs the uposatha, there is an offense of thullaccayaṃ, is the meaning. In both of those cases, there is no offense for one who is aware that it is "harmonious."
429-430.Sesasahadhammikānāma bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā cattāro.Abhabbassāti ettha paṇḍakatheyyasaṃvāsaka titthiyapakkantaka tiracchānagata mātughātaka pitughātaka arahantaghātaka bhikkhunidūsaka saṅghabhedaka lohituppādakaubhatobyañjanakā abhabbā gahitā. Ettha pana nāgamāṇavakādayo tiracchānagatapakkhikāti veditabbā. Etesaṃ nisinnaparisāyañca pātimokkhaṃ na uddiseti sambandho.
429-430. Sesasahadhammikānāma, the remaining four, excluding a monk. Abhabbassāti, here the eunuch, the thief, one in dependence, one who has gone over to the heretics, one who is an animal, a matricide, a patricide, a murderer of an Arahant, one who has violated a bhikkhunī, one who causes schism in the Sangha, one who sheds blood, and a hermaphrodite are considered ineligible. Here, however, it should be understood that beings such as young nāga-men are included in the category of animals. The Pāṭimokkha should not be recited in an assembly where these are sitting, is the connection.
Tathāti yo pana saṅgho sabhāgāpattiko, sopi na uddise, parivutthena chandenapi na uddiseti attho. Ettha pana catubbidhaṃ pārivāsiyaṃ parisapārivāsiyaṃ rattipārivāsiyaṃ chandapārivāsiyaṃ ajjhāsayapārivāsiyanti.
Tathāti, moreover, the saṅgha that is subject to a shared offense, should also not recite it, even with the consent of one who is confined, is the meaning. Here, however, there are four kinds of being on probation: probation for the community, probation by night, probation by consent, and probation by intention.
parisapārivāsiyaṃ. Kiñcāpi parisapārivāsiyaṃ, chandassa pana avissaṭṭhattā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
parisapārivāsiyaṃ. Although there is probation for the community, it is permissible to perform the act because the consent has not been withdrawn.
rattipārivāsiyaṃnāma.
rattipārivāsiyaṃnāma, is probation by night.
chandapārivāsiyañceva ajjhāsayapārivāsiyañca. Tasmiṃ pārivāsiye puna chandapārisuddhiṃ anānetvā kammaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Idaṃ sandhāya‘‘chandena parivutthenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
chandapārivāsiyañceva ajjhāsayapārivāsiyañca, is probation by consent and probation by intention. In that probation, it is not permissible to perform the act without bringing back the consent and purity. With this in mind, ‘‘chandena parivutthenā’’ti, "with the consent of one who is confined," was said.
431.Āpannamāpattiṃ (mahāva. 169; mahāva. aṭṭha. 169)adesayitvānavā ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, itthannāmāya āpattiyā vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, taṃ āpattiṃ paṭikarissāmī’’ti vatvāvimatiṃ anāvikatvānavā ‘‘na ca bhikkhave anuposathe uposatho kātabbo aññatra saṅghasāmaggiyā’’ti (mahāva. 183) vuttattāanuposathepi vā kātuṃ na ca kappatīti attho.
431. Āpannamāpattiṃ (mahāva. 169; mahāva. aṭṭha. 169) adesayitvānavā, having incurred an offense and not declared it, or vimatiṃ anāvikatvānavā, saying, "Venerable sirs, I am uncertain about such and such offense; when I am free from doubt, I will deal with that offense," and not having revealed the doubt, also, because it was said, "Monks, an uposatha should not be performed on a non-uposatha day, except by agreement of the Sangha," (mahāva. 183) anuposathepi vā kātuṃ na ca kappatīti, it is not permissible to perform it even on a non-uposatha day, is the meaning.
432.‘‘Na ca bhikkhave tadahuposathe sabhikkhukā āvāsā abhikkhuko āvāso vā anāvāso vā gantabbo aññatra saṅghena aññatra antarāyā’’ti (mahāva. 181) vuttattā‘‘aṭṭhitoposathāvāsā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 181) vuttaṃ.Na vaje nagacche.Adhiṭṭhātuṃ sīmameva vātisace vihāre uposathaṃ karonti, uposathādhiṭṭhānatthaṃ sīmāpi nadīpi na gantabbā. Sace panettha koci bhikkhu hoti, tassa santikaṃ gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Vissaṭṭhauposathāpi āvāsā gantuṃ vaṭṭati, evaṃ gato adhiṭṭhātumpi labhatīti. Uposathavinicchayo.
432. Because it was said, "Monks, on the day of the uposatha, a residence with monks or a residence without monks or a non-residence should not be gone to, except by the saṅgha or except for danger," (mahāva. 181) ‘‘aṭṭhitoposathāvāsā’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 181), "to a residence where the uposatha is established," was said. Na vaje nagacche, one should not go. Adhiṭṭhātuṃ sīmameva vāti, if they are performing the uposatha in the monastery, the boundary or even the river should not be gone to for the purpose of establishing the uposatha. If there is any monk here, it is permissible to go to his presence. It is permissible to go to a residence where the uposatha has been dismissed, and having gone thus, it is possible to establish it. This is the decision on the uposatha.
Uposathaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Uposatha Discourse is Finished.
45. Pavāraṇāniddesavaṇṇanā
45. The Explanation of the Pavāraṇā Discourse
433.‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcannaṃ saṅghe pavāretu’’nti (mahāva. 215) vuttattā‘‘sesā saṅghappavāraṇā’’ti (mahāva. 215 ādayo) vuttā.
433. Because it was said, "I allow, monks, the pavāraṇā to be made to the saṅgha of five," (mahāva. 215) ‘‘sesā saṅghappavāraṇā’’ti (mahāva. 215 ādayo), "the rest is the saṅghappavāraṇā," and so on, was said.
434.Ajja pavāraṇāti ettha (mahāva. 215 ādayo) pana cātuddasikāya pavāraṇāya ‘‘ajja pavāraṇā cātuddasī’’ti pubbakiccaṃ kātabbaṃ, pannarasiyaṃ ‘‘ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī’’ti.
434. Ajja pavāraṇāti, here (mahāva. 215 ādayo), for the pavāraṇā on the fourteenth day, "today is the pavāraṇā of the fourteenth day" should be done as the preliminary duty; for the fifteenth day, "today is the pavāraṇā of the fifteenth day."
437.Theresu ukkuṭikaṃ nisajja pavārentesu sayaṃ pana navo yāva pavāreti, tāva ukkuṭikova acchatūti attho. ‘‘Na bhikkhave theresu ukkuṭikaṃ nisinnesu pavārayamānesu āsanesu acchitabbaṃ. Yo accheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tadamantarā ukkuṭikaṃ nisīdituṃ, yāva pavāreti, pavāretvā āsane nisīditu’’nti (mahāva. 211) hi vuttaṃ.
437. While the theras are squatting and making pavāraṇā, the new monk himself should remain squatting until the pavāraṇā is finished, is the meaning. For it was said, "Monks, one should not sit on seats while the theras are squatting and performing the pavāraṇā. Whoever sits incurs an offense of dukkaṭa. I allow, monks, to sit squatting in the meantime, until the pavāraṇā is finished, and after the pavāraṇā is finished, to sit on the seat," (mahāva. 211) indeed, it was said.
440-2.Evaṃ tevācikappavāraṇaṃ dassetvā idāni dvevācikaekavācikasamānavassikappavāraṇāsu kattabbaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘dānenā’’tiādimāha. Tatthadānenāti dānena vā.Dhammasākacchāti iminā dhammakathāsuttasaṅgāyanāvinayavinicchayādayo gahitā. Dānena vā dhammasākacchāya vā kalahena vā rattiyā khepitabhāvato tevācikāya okāse asati dasavidhe vā antarāye anurūpato uttiṃ ṭhapetvā pavāreyyāti sambandho.
440-2. Having shown the three-statement pavāraṇā in this way, now to show what should be done in the two-statement, one-statement, and equal-vassa pavāraṇās, ‘‘dānenā’’tiādi, "by giving," and so on, he said. There, dānenāti, by giving, or. Dhammasākacchāti, by this, discussions on the Dhamma, recitation of the suttas, decisions on the Vinaya, and so on are included. Because the night has to be spent by giving or by discussion on the Dhamma or by quarreling, when there is no opportunity for the three-statement pavāraṇā, or in the presence of the ten kinds of obstacles, after appropriately establishing the utterance, they should make pavāraṇā, is the connection.
‘‘suṇātu me’’tiādimāha.Yathāṭhapitañattiyāti ettha sabbasaṅgāhikāceñattiṭhapitā, tevācikadvevācikaekavācikānaṃ vasena pavāretabbaṃ, samānavassikappavāraṇāva ekā na vaṭṭati. Sace ‘‘saṅgho tevācikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti ṭhapitā, tevācikā eva vaṭṭati, dvevācikādayo na vaṭṭanti. ‘‘Dvevācikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti vutte dvevācikañca tevācikañca vaṭṭati, ekavācikasamānavassikā na vaṭṭanti. ‘‘Ekavācikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti vutte pana samānavassikaṃ ṭhapetvā sesā vaṭṭanti. ‘‘Samānavassika’’nti pana vutte sabbaṃ vaṭṭatīti.Ādike cettha āhareti ettha pavāraṇāyapi pubbe uposathe vutte ‘‘yadi samā āgaccheyyu’’ntiādikevāreāhareti attho.
‘‘suṇātu me’’tiādi, "let him listen to me," and so on, he said. Yathāṭhapitañattiyāti, here, the motion that includes everything has been established: pavāraṇā should be made according to the three-statement, two-statement, and one-statement procedures; only the equal-vassa pavāraṇā is not permissible. If it is established that "the saṅgha should make the three-statement pavāraṇā," only the three-statement pavāraṇā is permissible; the two-statement and others are not permissible. When it is said, "Let the two-statement pavāraṇā be made," the two-statement and three-statement pavāraṇā are permissible, but the one-statement and equal-vassa are not permissible. When it is said, "Let the one-statement pavāraṇā be made," the remaining ones are permissible, except for the equal-vassa. But when "equal-vassa" is said, everything is permissible. Ādike cettha āhareti, here in the beginning, in the uposatha previously stated in the uposatha, "if they come together equally," and so on, bring in the vāre, the turn, is the meaning.
443.Idāni vattabbaṃ sandhāya‘‘eva’’nti vuttaṃ. Tivaggo ca catuvaggo caticatuvaggo.
443. Now, with reference to what should be said, ‘‘eva’’nti, "thus," was said. Tivaggo ca catuvaggo ca, the group of three and the group of four, ticatuvaggo, is the group of three or four.
450.‘‘Na bhikkhave sāpattikena pavāretabbaṃ. Yo pavāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (mahāva. 235) vuttattā sāpattikenapi vematikenapi pavāriyamāne āpattiṃ sarantenapi uposathe vuttanayena paṭipajjitabbaṃ. ‘‘Vagge samagge vaggoti-saññino vimatissa vā’’tiādigāthāto paṭṭhāya yāva ‘‘antarāyaṃ va saṅghaṃ vā-dhiṭṭhātuṃ sīmameva vā’’ti avasānagāthā, tāva sesā uposathe vuttā gāthāyoti adhippetā.
450. Because it was said, "Monks, pavāraṇā should not be made by one who has committed an offense. Whoever makes it incurs an offense of dukkaṭa," (mahāva. 235) even when the pavāraṇā is made by one who has committed an offense or by one who is in doubt, one who remembers the offense should proceed in the manner stated for the uposatha. From the verse beginning "In a divided or harmonious assembly, or for one who is aware that it is divided or for one who is in doubt," up to the final verse "or an obstacle or the saṅgha or to establish the boundary," all the remaining verses are intended to be those stated in the uposatha.
451.Pavāritecāti (mahāva. 213 ādayo) paṭhamapavāraṇāya saṅghamhi pavāriteti adhippāyo. Etthaavutthoti pacchimikāya upagato apariniṭṭhitattā ‘‘avuttho’’ti vuccati.
451. Pavāritecāti (mahāva. 213 ādayo), "and having made pavāraṇā," the intention is that pavāraṇā is made in the saṅgha for the first pavāraṇā. Here, avutthoti, one who has entered the last one is called "avuttho," because it is not finished.
452.Cātumāsinīti kattikapuṇṇamī. Etthavutthavassānāma pacchimikāya upagatā. Pavāraṇāvinicchayo.
452. Cātumāsinīti, the full moon of Kattika. Here, vutthavassānāma, those who have entered into the last one. This is the decision on pavāraṇā.
Pavāraṇāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Pavāraṇā Discourse is Finished.
46. Saṃvaraniddesavaṇṇanā
46. The Explanation of the Saṃvara Discourse
453.Cakkhusotādibhedehīti (dī. ni. 1.213, 454; ma. ni. 1.411; a. ni. 4.198; dha. sa. 1352-1354; mahāni. 196) cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyamanasaṅkhātehi chahi indriyehīti attho.Rūpasaddādigocareti rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbadhammasaṅkhātesu chasu gocaresūti attho. Ettha pana hatthapādahasitakathitavilokitādibhedaṃ subhākāraṃ gahetvā ayoniso manasi karontassa abhijjhā uppajjati. ‘‘Anatthaṃ me acari, carati, carissatī’’tiādinā (pari. aṭṭha. 329) nayena paṭighanimittaṃ gahetvā ayoniso manasi karontassa byāpādo uppajjati. Ettha pana itthipurisanimittaṃ vā subhanimittādikaṃ kilesavatthubhūtaṃ nimittaṃ aggaṇhitvā diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattādinā paṭipajjitvā asubhanimitte yoniso manasikāraṃ bahulīkarontassa abhijjhāya pahānaṃ hoti. ‘‘Anatthaṃ me acari, taṃ kutettha labbhā’’tiādinā vā mettābhāvanādivasena vā yoniso manasi karontassa byāpādappahānaṃ hoti. Evamidaṃ saṅkhepato rūpādīsu kilesānubandhanimittādiggāhaparivajjanalakkhaṇaṃ indriyasaṃvarasīlanti veditabbaṃ.
453. Cakkhusotādibhedehīti (dī. ni. 1.213, 454; ma. ni. 1.411; a. ni. 4.198; dha. sa. 1352-1354; mahāni. 196), by the six senses consisting of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind, is the meaning. Rūpasaddādigocareti, in the six sense objects consisting of forms, sounds, odors, tastes, tactile objects, and mental objects, is the meaning. Here, however, when one takes up attractive features such as the movements of the hands and feet, laughing, speaking, looking, etc., and attends to them unwisely, greed arises. When one takes up an impression of aversion according to the method "He did me harm, is doing me harm, will do me harm," and attends to it unwisely, hatred arises (pari. aṭṭha. 329). Here, however, by not grasping a sign of a woman or a man, or an attractive sign, or a sign that is a basis for defilements, and by proceeding with merely what is seen in what is seen, and by frequently attending wisely to unattractive signs, the abandonment of greed occurs. Or, by attending wisely according to the method, "He did me harm, what could be obtained here?" or by cultivating loving-kindness, and so on, the abandonment of hatred occurs. Thus, this should be understood as the virtue of sense restraint, which in brief, is characterized by avoiding the grasping of signs that lead to defilements in forms, etc.
454.
454.
Niggaṇheyyāti nivāreyya;
Niggaṇheyyāti, he should restrain;
‘‘Whatever currents there are in the world,
(Ajita, said the Blessed One,)
Mindfulness is their prevention.
I call wisdom the restraint of the currents;
They are blocked by wisdom.’’ (su. ni. 1041);
‘‘satimā sampajāno vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha pana catubbidhaṃ sampajaññaṃ sātthakasappāyagocaraasammohavasena. Saṃvaravinicchayo.
‘‘satimā sampajāno vā’’ti, "mindful and with clear comprehension," was said. Here, however, there are four kinds of clear comprehension: with a purpose, suitable, the sphere, and non-delusion. This is the decision on saṃvara.
Saṃvaraniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Saṃvara Discourse is Finished.
47. Suddhiniddesavaṇṇanā
47. The Explanation of the Suddhi Discourse
455.Desanāsaṃvaro eṭṭhi, paccavekkhaṇa bhedatoti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.585; visuddhi. 1.19) desanāsuddhi saṃvarasuddhi pariyeṭṭhisuddhi paccavekkhaṇasuddhīti evaṃ catubbidhā suddhīti attho. Idāni tāhi suddhīhi visujjhanake dassetuṃ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasammata’’ntiādimāha.
455. Desanāsaṃvaro eṭṭhi, paccavekkhaṇa bhedatoti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.585; visuddhi. 1.19), thus, there are four kinds of purity: purity of declaration, purity of restraint, purity of seeking, and purity of reflection, is the meaning. Now, to show what is purified by those purities, ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvarasammata’’ntiādi, "approved of by pātimokkhasaṃvara," and so on, he said.
456.‘‘Puna evaṃ na karissa’’nti cittādhiṭṭhānasaṃvarā yasmā sujjhati indriyasaṃvaro, tasmā indriyasaṃvaro‘‘saṃvarasuddhī’’ti vuttoti sambandho.
456. Because the sense restraint is purified since restraint by determination of mind, thinking, "I will not do it again in this way," is purified, therefore sense restraint ‘‘saṃvarasuddhī’’ti, "is purity of restraint," was said, is the connection.
457.Pahāyānesananti anesanaṃ pahāya dhammena uppādentassa paccayeti pāṭhaseso.
457. Pahāyānesananti, having abandoned wrong livelihood, the rest of the passage is: the requisites of one who earns through rightful means.
458.‘‘Paṭisaṅkhā yoniso cīvaraṃ paṭisevāmi…pe… uppannānaṃ veyyābādhikānaṃ…pe… paramatāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58) ca evaṃ catūsupi paccayesu yathāvuttapaccavekkhaṇasujjhanāti attho. Ettha pana duvidhaṃ paccavekkhaṇaṃ paṭilābhakāle ca paribhogakāle ca. Paṭilābhakāle hi dhātuvasena vā paṭikkūlavasena vā paccavekkhitvā ṭhapitacīvarādīni tato uttari paribhuñjantassa anavajjova paribhogo, paribhogakālepi. Suddhivinicchayo.
458. "Reflecting properly, I use the robe...for the sake of warding off cold..." (ma. ni. 1.23; a. ni. 6.58), and thus in all four requisites, there is purification by reflection as stated. Here, however, there are two kinds of reflection: at the time of acquisition and at the time of use. For at the time of acquisition, after reflecting on the robes, etc., that have been set aside in terms of their elements or in terms of their repulsiveness, the use is blameless for one who further uses them; even at the time of use. This is the decision on purity.
Suddhiniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Suddhi Discourse is Finished.
48. Santosaniddesavaṇṇanā
48. The Explanation of the Santosa Discourse
459.‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, appāni ceva sulabhāni ca, tāni ca anavajjāni. Katamāni cattāri? Paṃsukūlaṃ, bhikkhave, cīvarānaṃ appañca sulabhañca, tañca anavajjaṃ. Piṇḍiyālopo, bhikkhave, bhojanānaṃ appañca sulabhañca, tañca anavajjaṃ. Rukkhamūlaṃ, bhikkhave, senāsanānaṃ appañca sulabhañca, tañca anavajjaṃ. Pūtimuttabhesajjaṃ, bhikkhave, bhesajjānaṃ appañca sulabhañca, tañca anavajjaṃ. Imāni kho, bhikkhave, cattāri appāni ceva sulabhāni ca, tāni ca anavajjānī’’ti (a. ni. 4.27; itivu. 101) vacanato‘‘appenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
459. Because of the statement, "These four things, monks, are few and easily available, and they are faultless. What four? Rag-robe (paṃsukūla), monks, is a robe that is few and easily available, and it is faultless. Alms-food (piṇḍiyālopo), monks, is food that is few and easily available, and it is faultless. The root of a tree, monks, is a dwelling that is few and easily available, and it is faultless. Fermented urine medicine (pūtimuttabhesajja), monks, is medicine that is few and easily available, and it is faultless. These, monks, are four things that are few and easily available, and they are faultless" (A.N. 4.27; Iti. 101), therefore, "with few" etc. was said.
Santuṭṭhoti ettha yathālābhayathābalayathāsāruppasantosānaṃ vasena ekekasmiṃ paccaye tayo tayo katvā catūsu paccayesu dvādasa santosā honti.Mattaññūti ettha (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.422; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.4.239; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.16; itivu. aṭṭha. 28; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 124-134) cattāro mattā pariyesanamattā paṭiggahaṇamattā paribhogamattā vissajjanamattāti. Itarītarena yāpentosubharonāma. Santosavinicchayo.
Contented (Santuṭṭho): Here, based on contentment according to what is obtained, according to one's strength, and according to suitability, making three in each of the four requisites, there are twelve kinds of contentment in the four requisites. Knowing moderation (Mattaññū): Here, there are four kinds of moderation (Ma.Ni.Aṭṭha. 1.422; Saṃ.Ni.Aṭṭha. 3.4.239; A.N. Aṭṭha. 2.3.16; Iti. Aṭṭha. 28; Dha.Sa. Aṭṭha. 124-134): moderation in seeking, moderation in receiving, moderation in using, and moderation in dispensing. One who lives by whatever comes along is called easy to support (subharo). This is the judgment of contentment.
Santosaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the section on contentment is finished.
49. Caturārakkhaniddesavaṇṇanā
49. Explanation of the Section on the Four Protections
461-2.Asubhanti asubhabhāvanā. Ime cattāro caturārakkhā nāmāti adhippāyo. Idāni te dassetuṃ‘‘ārakattādinā’’tiādimāha.Ārakattādināti ettha ārakattā, arīnaṃ arānañca hatattā, paccayādīnaṃ arahattā, pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvāti imehi tāva catūhi kāraṇehi so bhagavā arahanti anussaritabboti attho. Vuttañhetaṃ –
461-2. Unattractiveness (Asubha) means the contemplation of unattractiveness. The intention is that these four are called the Four Protections. Now, to show them, he said, "by being worthy of offering, etc." (ārakattādinā). In "by being worthy of offering, etc." (ārakattādinā), here, because of being worthy of offering (ārakattā), because of destroying (hatattā) enemies (arīnaṃ) and the spokes (arānañca), because of deserving (arahattā) the requisites (paccayādīnaṃ), and because of the absence of secrecy (rahābhāvāti) in doing evil, the Blessed One is to be recollected as an Arahant (worthy one) due to these four reasons. This was stated:
‘‘Ārakattā hatattā ca, kilesārīna so muni;
"Because the sage is far away (ārakattā) and has destroyed (hatattā) the enemy of defilements (kilesārīna);
He has destroyed the wheel of existence (Hatasaṃsāracakkāro), and he deserves the requisites (paccayādīna cāraho);
He does not secretly commit evil (Na raho karoti pāpāni), therefore he is called an Arahant (arahaṃ)." (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 1.1; Visuddhi. 1.130);
Bhagavā pana sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito maggena savāsanakilesānaṃ hatattā, tasmā ‘‘ārakattā araha’’nti vutto. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Furthermore, the Blessed One stands very far away (suvidūravidūre) from all defilements, and because he has destroyed the defilements along with their latent tendencies by the path, therefore he is called "Arahant because of being far away (ārakattā araha)". This was stated:
‘‘So tato ārakā nāma;
"He is called far away (ārakā nāma) from that;
With whom there is no association (yassa yenāsamaṅgitā);
Not associated with faults (Asamaṅgī ca dosehi),
Therefore, the Lord is considered an Arahant (arahaṃ mato)." (Visuddhi. 1.125);
Bhagavatā pana sabbakilesārayo hatā, tasmā ‘‘arīnaṃ hatattāpi araha’’nti vutto. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Moreover, the Blessed One has destroyed all the enemies of defilements, therefore he is called "Arahant because of destroying the enemies (arīnaṃ hatattā)". This was stated:
‘‘Yasmā rāgādisaṅkhātā, sabbepi arayo hatā;
"Since all the so-called enemies (rāgādisaṅkhātā), all the enemies (sabbepi arayo hatā);
Were destroyed by the Lord with the sword of wisdom (paññāsatthena nāthena), therefore, he is considered an Arahant (arahaṃ mato)." (Visuddhi. 1.126);
Yaṃ panetaṃ avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhipuññābhisaṅkhāraapuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhārāraṃ jarāmaraṇanemi ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) vacanato āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe yojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ, tassa bhagavato bodhirukkhamūle sammappadhānavīriyapādehi catupārisuddhisīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakarañāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbe arā hatā. Tasmā ‘‘arānaṃ hatattā araha’’nti vutto. Vuttañhetaṃ –
That wheel of existence (saṃsāracakkaṃ), which is affixed to the three realms of existence, propelled from beginningless time by the axle composed of ignorance, craving for existence, and formations of merit, demerit, and the imperturbable (avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhipuññābhisaṅkhāraapuññābhisaṅkhāraāneñjābhisaṅkhārāraṃ), with old age and death as its rim—"with the arising of the influxes, there is the arising of ignorance" (āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo)—all its spokes (arā) were destroyed by the Lord at the foot of the Bodhi tree, standing on the ground of the fourfold purity of morality (catupārisuddhisīlapathaviyaṃ), wielding the axe of knowledge (ñāṇapharasuṃ) that destroys karma with the hand of faith (saddhāhatthena). Therefore, he is called "Arahant because of destroying the spokes (arānaṃ hatattā)". This was stated:
‘‘Arā saṃsāracakkassa, hatā ñāṇāsinā yato;
"Since the spokes of the wheel of existence (Arā saṃsāracakkassa) were destroyed by the sword of knowledge (hatā ñāṇāsinā yato);
By the Lord of the world (Lokanāthena tenesa), therefore, he is called Arahant (arahanti pavuccatīti)." (Visuddhi. 1.128);
Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā cīvarādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ uttamapūjāya ca yutto bhagavā, tasmā ‘‘paccayādīnaṃ arahattā ca araha’’nti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Because the Blessed One is the foremost recipient (Aggadakkhiṇeyyattā) and is worthy of the highest veneration of the requisites such as robes, etc., therefore, he is called "Arahant because of deserving the requisites (paccayādīnaṃ arahattā ca)". This was stated:
‘‘Pūjāvisesaṃ saha paccayehi,
"Because the Lord of the world (Yasmā ayaṃ arahati lokanātho) deserves special offerings (Pūjāvisesaṃ) together with the requisites (saha paccayehi);
Therefore, the Victor (jino) deserves this name (nāmametaṃ) 'Arahant,' which is appropriate to the meaning (Atthānurūpaṃ arahanti loke)." (Visuddhi. 1.129);
Yathā loke keci paṇḍitamānino asilokabhayena raho pāpāni karonti, tathā bhagavā kadācipi na karoti, tasmā ‘‘pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvā ca araha’’nti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Just as some who consider themselves wise in the world commit evil deeds in secret out of fear of blame, the Blessed One never does so; therefore, he is called "Arahant because of the absence of secrecy (rahābhāvā ca) in doing evil." This was stated:
‘‘Yasmā natthi raho nāma, pāpakammesu tādino;
"Since there is no such thing as secrecy (Yasmā natthi raho nāma) for the steadfast one (tādino) in evil deeds;
Because of the absence of secrecy (Rahābhāvena tenesa), therefore, he is known as Arahant (arahaṃ iti vissuto)." (Visuddhi. 1.130) –
Evaṃ ārakattādinā arahanti bhāvetabbaṃ.
Thus, one should contemplate the Arahant by being worthy of offerings, etc.
Sammāti ñāyeneva, abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato evāti attho.Sāmañcāti attanāva. Vuttañhetaṃ –
Rightly (Sammā) means only by justice (ñāyeneva), knowing what should be known as what should be known, fully understanding what should be fully understood, abandoning what should be abandoned, realizing what should be realized, developing what should be developed. By oneself (Sāmañcā) means by oneself alone. This was stated:
‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ;
"What should be known has been known (Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ), and what should be developed has been developed (bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ);
What should be abandoned has been abandoned by me (Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me), therefore, O Brahmin, I am a Buddha (buddhosmi brāhmaṇā)." (Ma. Ni. 2.399; Su. Ni. 563);
navabhede bhagavato guṇe yā punappunaṃuppajjanato satiyevaanussati,pavattitabbaṭṭhānamhiyeva vā pavattattā saddhāpabbajitassa kulaputtassa anurūpā satīti anussati, buddhaṃ ārabbha uppannā anussatibuddhānussati,yā evaṃ navavidhena pavattā sati, sā buddhānussati nāmāti attho. Sabbākārena pana ācariyena buddhaghosena buddhānussativisuddhimagge(visuddhi. 1.123 ādayo) vuttā, atthikena pana tato paccāsīsitabbā.
Because mindfulness arises again and again (punappunaṃ uppajjanato) in the nine qualities of the Blessed One (navabhede bhagavato guṇe), or because it occurs only in a place where it should occur (pavattitabbaṭṭhānamhiyeva vā pavattattā), mindfulness (sati) is suitable for a clansman who has gone forth in faith (saddhāpabbajitassa kulaputtassa), the mindfulness that arises concerning the Buddha is called Buddhanussati (recollection of the Buddha), and that mindfulness which occurs in this ninefold way (yā evaṃ navavidhena pavattā sati), that is called Buddhanussati (buddhānussati nāmāti). However, the Buddhanussati (recollection of the Buddha) has been completely described by Ācariya Buddhaghosa in the Visuddhimagga (Visuddhi. 1.123 ff), and one who desires it should seek it from there.
463-4.Caturārakkhāya sāyaṃpātaṃ bhāvetabbattā mettābhāvanaṃ dassentena therena sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena dassitāti veditabbā. Itarathā ‘‘attānaṃ upamaṃ katvā, na haneyya na ghātaye’’ti (dha. pa. 129-130) vacanato sabbapaṭhamaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ sukhito homi, avero’’tiādinā nayena bhāvetvāva attani cittaṃ niparibandhamānaṃ katvā pacchā ācariyupajjhāyādīsu kamena bhāvetabbā. Attani pana appanā na hoti. Gocaragāmamhi issare janeti sambandho.Tatthāti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165) gocaragāme. Sīmaṭṭhasaṅghato paṭṭhāyaparicchijja paricchijjāti attho. Evaṃ mettaṃ bhāvento bhikkhusaṅghe mettāya sahavāsīnaṃ muducittaṃ janeti, athassa sukhasaṃvāsatā hoti. Sīmaṭṭhakadevatāsu mettāya mudukatacittāhi devatāhi dhammikāya rakkhāya susaṃvihitarakkho hoti. Gocaragāmamhi issarajane mettāya mudukatacittasantānehi issarehi dhammikāya rakkhāya surakkhitaparikkhāro hoti. Tattha manusse mettāya pasāditacittehi tehi aparibhūto hutvā vicarati. Sabbasattesu mettāya sabbattha appaṭihatacāro hoti.
463-4. Because the four protections are to be cultivated in the evening and morning (sāyaṃpātaṃ bhāvetabbattā), the Elder has shown the meditation on loving-kindness (mettābhāvanaṃ) by way of showing the meditation on all-encompassing meditation subjects (sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānabhāvanāvasena dassitāti). Otherwise, "having made oneself the example, one should not kill or cause to kill" (attānaṃ upamaṃ katvā, na haneyya na ghātaye) (Dha. Pa. 129-130), one should first cultivate with the method, "May I be happy, free from enmity (ahaṃ sukhito homi, avero)," and then, having made the mind unattached to oneself, one should cultivate it gradually towards teachers, preceptors, etc. But there is no application to oneself. Association with influential people in the village is the object (Gocaragāmamhi issare janeti sambandho). There (Tatthā) (Pārā. Aṭṭha. 2.165) means in the village. Starting from the boundary assembly (Sīmaṭṭhasaṅghato), separating and separating (paricchijja paricchijjā) is the meaning. Thus, while cultivating loving-kindness, one generates a soft mind (muducittaṃ janeti) in the community of monks (bhikkhusaṅghe) who live together in loving-kindness, then he has pleasant association (sukhasaṃvāsatā hoti). With loving-kindness towards the deities dwelling within the boundary (Sīmaṭṭhakadevatāsu), he is well-protected with a righteous protection (dhammikāya rakkhāya susaṃvihitarakkho hoti) by deities with softened minds. With loving-kindness towards the influential people in the village, he has well-protected equipment with righteous protection by influential people with softened minds. There, he wanders unmolested (aparibhūto hutvā vicarati) by those with minds pleased with loving-kindness towards humans. With loving-kindness towards all beings, he has unobstructed movement everywhere (sabbattha appaṭihatacāro hoti).
465-6.Vaṇṇato ca saṇṭhānato ca okāsato ca disato ca paricchedato ca kesādikoṭṭhāse vavatthapetvāti sambandho. Etthavaṇṇatoti (visuddhi. 1.110) kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇato.Saṇṭhānatoti tesaṃyeva saṇṭhānato.Okāsatoti ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imasmiṃ nāma okāse patiṭṭhito’’ti evaṃ tassa tassa okāsato.Disatoti imasmiṃ sarīre nābhito uddhaṃ uparimā disā, adho heṭṭhimā disā, tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso imissā nāma disāyā’’ti disā vavatthapetabbā.Paricchedatoti sabhāgaparicchedato visabhāgaparicchedatoti dve paricchedā. Tattha ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso heṭṭhā ca upari ca tiriyañca iminā nāma paricchedo’’ti evaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo veditabbo. ‘‘Kesā na lomā, lomā na kesā’’ti evaṃ amissakavasena visabhāgaparicchedo.
465-6. The connection is that one should determine the parts from hair onwards by way of color, shape, location, direction, and demarcation (Vaṇṇato ca saṇṭhānato ca okāsato ca disato ca paricchedato ca kesādikoṭṭhāse vavatthapetvāti sambandho). Here, by color (vaṇṇato) (Visuddhi. 1.110) means by the color of the hair, etc. By shape (Saṇṭhānato) means by the shape of those same things. By location (Okāsato) means "this part is located in this place," thus by the location of each. By direction (Disato) means in this body, upwards from the navel is the upper direction, and downwards is the lower direction; therefore, "this part is in this direction," the direction should be determined. By demarcation (Paricchedato) means two kinds of demarcation: demarcation by similarity and demarcation by dissimilarity (sabhāgaparicchedato visabhāgaparicchedatoti dve paricchedā). There, "this part is demarcated below, above, and across by this," thus, demarcation by similarity should be understood. "Hair is not body hair, body hair is not hair," thus, demarcation by dissimilarity is in a non-mixed manner.
‘‘anupubbato’’tiādimāha. Tatthaanupubbatoti sajjhāyakaraṇakālato paṭṭhāya ‘‘kesā nakhā’’ti evaṃ ekantarikāya vā ‘‘lomā kesā’’ti evaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā vā na manasi kātabbaṃ, atha kho ‘‘kesā lomā’’tiādinā nayena anupaṭipāṭiyā manasi kātabbaṃ, anupaṭipāṭiyā manasi karontenāpi nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cetaso vikkhepo paṭibāhitabbo. ‘‘Paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamma, muñcantassānupubbato’’ti pāṭho gahetabbo. Evañhi sati bhāvanākkamena attho suviññeyyo hoti. ‘‘Kesā lomā’’tiādipaññattiṃ amanasikatvā paṭikkūlabhāvena evaṃ cittaṃ ṭhapetabbaṃ.Muñcantassānupubbatoti yo yo koṭṭhāso āpāthaṃ nāgacchati, taṃ taṃ anupubbato muñcantassāti attho.
He said, "in sequence (anupubbato)," etc. There, in sequence (anupubbato) means from the time of recitation, one should not think, "hair, nails" in an alternating manner, or, "body hair, hair" in a reversed order; rather, one should think in a non-reversed order in the manner of "hair, body hair," etc. Even when thinking in a non-reversed order, one should not think too quickly or too slowly, and the distraction of the mind to external, diverse objects should be resisted. "One should take the reading, "paṇṇattiṃ samatikkamma, muñcantassānupubbato." For when this is the case, the meaning is easily understood by the order of cultivation. One should fix the mind in this way in terms of repulsiveness, not considering the concepts of "hair, body hair," etc. Releasing in sequence (Muñcantassānupubbato) means whatever part does not come into view, releasing that in sequence is the meaning.
467.Idāni yathā paṭikkūlamanasikāro kātabbo, taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘vaṇṇaāsayasaṇṭhānā’’tiādimāha. Etehi vaṇṇādīhi koṭṭhāsehi paṭikkūlāti bhāvanāti sambandho. Ettha (vibha. aṭṭha. 356; visuddhi. 1.178) kesā tāva vaṇṇatopi paṭikkūlā. Tathā hi yāgubhattādīsu kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā jigucchanti. Saṇṭhānatopi paṭikkūlā. Tathā hi rattiṃ bhuñjantā kesasaṇṭhānaṃ makacivākādikaṃ chupitvā jigucchanti. Telamakkhanādivirahitānañca aggimhi pakkhittānañca gandho ativiya paṭikkūloti gandhatopi paṭikkūlā. Asuciṭṭhāne jātasūpeyyapaṇṇaṃ viya pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā āsayatopi paṭikkūlā. Gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇikaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātattā okāsatopi paṭikkūlā. Uddhumātakaṃ vinīlakaṃ vipubbakaṃ vicchiddakaṃ vikkhāyitakaṃ vikkhittakaṃ hatavikkhittakaṃ lohitakaṃ puḷavakaṃ aṭṭhikanti imesu uddhumātakādīsu vatthūsu asubhākāraṃ gahetvā pavattā bhāvanā vā asubhaṃ nāmāti attho.
467. Now, to show how the contemplation of repulsiveness should be done, he said, "by way of color, source, shape (vaṇṇaāsayasaṇṭhānā)," etc. The connection is that the contemplation is repulsive through these parts with color, etc. Here (Vibha. Aṭṭha. 356; Visuddhi. 1.178), hair is repulsive even by way of color. For example, seeing something of the color of hair in rice gruel, etc., people feel disgusted. It is also repulsive by way of shape. For example, while eating at night, people feel disgusted if they touch something of the shape of hair, like a beetle larva. And the smell of those without oiling, etc., or thrown into a fire, is very repulsive; therefore, it is also repulsive by way of smell. Like edible leaves grown in an impure place, because it is born from the oozing of pus, blood, urine, feces, bile, and phlegm, it is also repulsive by way of source. Like a mushroom rising in a heap of excrement, because it is born in a heap of thirty-one parts, it is also repulsive by way of location. Among these things—bloated corpse, livid corpse, festering corpse, fissured corpse, gnawed corpse, scattered corpse, mutilated and scattered corpse, bloody corpse, worm-infested corpse, skeleton (uddhumātakaṃ vinīlakaṃ vipubbakaṃ vicchiddakaṃ vikkhāyitakaṃ vikkhittakaṃ hatavikkhittakaṃ lohitakaṃ puḷavakaṃ aṭṭhikanti)—the cultivation that proceeds by taking the aspect of unattractiveness in the objects such as bloated corpse, etc., is called unattractiveness (asubhaṃ nāmāti), is the meaning.
468.Yaṃ panetaṃ arahantānaṃ vaṭṭadukkhasamucchedasaṅkhātaṃ samucchedamaraṇaṃ (visuddhi. 1.167), saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ khaṇikamaraṇaṃ, ‘‘rukkho mato, lohaṃ mata’’ntiādi sammutimaraṇañca, na taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Idha panamaraṇanti ekabhavapariyāpannassa jīvitindriyassa upacchedo adhippeto. Tampi kālamaraṇaṃ akālamaraṇanti duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha kālamaraṇaṃ puññakkhayena vā āyukkhayena vā ubhayakkhayena vā hoti, akālamaraṇaṃ upapīḷakaupacchedakakammavasena. ‘‘Maraṇaṃ me bhavissatī’’ti vā ‘‘jīvitaṃ ucchijjissatī’’ti vā ‘‘maraṇaṃ maraṇa’’nti vā yoniso bhāvayitvānāti sambandho.
468. That cessation-death (samucchedamaraṇaṃ) of Arahants, which is the eradication of the round of suffering (vaṭṭadukkhasamucchedasaṅkhātaṃ), moment-death (khaṇikamaraṇaṃ), which is the breaking-up of formations (saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgasaṅkhātaṃ), and conventional-death (sammutimaraṇañca), such as "the tree is dead, the metal is dead," are not intended here. Here, death (maraṇa) means the cessation of the life faculty pertaining to one existence (ekabhavapariyāpannassa jīvitindriyassa upacchedo adhippeto). That too is of two kinds: timely death and untimely death (kālamaraṇaṃ akālamaraṇanti duvidhaṃ hoti). There, timely death occurs by the exhaustion of merit, or by the exhaustion of lifespan, or by the exhaustion of both; untimely death occurs due to the force of oppressive and destructive karma. The connection is that one should contemplate wisely, "Death will occur to me (maraṇaṃ me bhavissatī)," or "Life will be cut off (jīvitaṃ ucchijjissatī)," or "Death is death (maraṇaṃ maraṇaṃ).""
469-70.Yassa pana ettāvatā upacārajjhānaṃ na uppajjati, tena vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato sampattivipattito upasaṃharaṇato kāyabahusādhāraṇato āyudubbalato animittato addhānaparicchedato khaṇaparittatoti imehi aṭṭhahi ākārehi maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ, idāni te dassetuṃ‘‘vadhakassevupaṭṭhāna’’ntiādimāha. Asiṃ ukkhipitvā sīsaṃ chindituṃ ṭhitavadhako viya maraṇaṃ paccupaṭṭhitamevāti bhāvanā maraṇassati nāmāti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Sabbaṃ ārogyaṃ byādhipariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ yobbanaṃ jarāpariyosānaṃ, sabbaṃ jīvitaṃ maraṇapariyosānaṃ, tasmā ‘‘ayaṃ yobbanādikāyasampatti tāvadeva sobhati, yāva maraṇasaṅkhātā vipatti na bhavissatī’’ti evamādinā sampattivipattito ca, sattahākārehi upasaṃharaṇato maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ yasamahattato puññamahattato thāmamahattato iddhimahattato paññāmahattato paccekabuddhato sammāsambuddhatoti. Tattha ‘‘idaṃ maraṇaṃ nāma mahāyasānaṃ mahāparivārānaṃ mahāsammatamandhātādīnampi upari patati, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayhaṃ upari na patissatī’’ti evaṃ yasamahattato,
469-70. If the access jhāna (upacārajjhānaṃ) does not arise with just this much, then one should recollect death in these eight ways: by the presence of a murderer, by the attainment and loss, by drawing together, by the body's commonness to many, by the weakness of life, by the absence of signs, by the limitation of time, and by the brevity of moments (vadhakapaccupaṭṭhānato sampattivipattito upasaṃharaṇato kāyabahusādhāraṇato āyudubbalato animittato addhānaparicchedato khaṇaparittatoti imehi aṭṭhahi ākārehi maraṇaṃ anussaritabbaṃ). Now, to show them, he said, "the presence of a murderer (vadhakassevupaṭṭhāna)," etc. The connection is that the mindfulness of death (maraṇassati nāmāti) is the contemplation that death is present just like a murderer standing with a drawn sword to cut off the head (asiṃ ukkhipitvā sīsaṃ chindituṃ ṭhitavadhako viya maraṇaṃ paccupaṭṭhitamevāti bhāvanā). Thus, it is everywhere. All health ends in disease, all youth ends in old age, all life ends in death; therefore, one should recollect death by way of attainment and loss (sampattivipattito ca) with, "This attainment of youth, etc., is beautiful only as long as the loss called death does not occur (ayaṃ yobbanādikāyasampatti tāvadeva sobhati, yāva maraṇasaṅkhātā vipatti na bhavissatī)," and by way of drawing together (upasaṃharaṇato) in seven ways: by greatness of fame, by greatness of merit, by greatness of strength, by greatness of psychic power, by greatness of wisdom, by a Paccekabuddha, and by a Sammāsambuddha. There, by the greatness of fame, "This death falls upon even those of great fame and great retinues, such as Mahāsammata and Mandhātu; what need to say it will not fall upon me (idaṃ maraṇaṃ nāma mahāyasānaṃ mahāparivārānaṃ mahāsammatamandhātādīnampi upari patati, kimaṅgaṃ pana mayhaṃ upari na patissatī)?" Thus, by the greatness of fame,
‘‘Jotiko jaṭilo uggo,
"Jotika, Jatila, Ugga,
Mendaka and then Punnaka;
These and others who in the world,
Are known for great merit;
All have come upon death,
What to say of those like me?" –
Evaṃ puññamahattato,
Thus, by the greatness of merit,
‘‘Vāsudevo baladevo, bhīmasenādayo mahā;
"Vāsudeva, Baladeva, Bhīmasena and other great ones;
Strong, they have fallen under the power of death, what to say of those like me?" –
Evaṃ thāmamahattato,
Thus, by the greatness of strength,
upasaṃharaṇatoca, ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo bahusādhāraṇo ajjhattikānaṃyeva anekasatānaṃ rogānaṃ bāhirānaṃ ahivicchikādīnañcā’’tikāyabahusādhāraṇatoca, ‘‘assāsapassāsapaṭibaddhaṃ jīvita’’ntiādinā nayenaāyudubbalatoca,
and by way of drawing together (upasaṃharaṇato) ca, and by the body's commonness to many (kāyabahusādhāraṇato) ca, "This body is common to many, to hundreds of diseases within, and to external creatures such as snakes and scorpions (ayaṃ kāyo bahusādhāraṇo ajjhattikānaṃyeva anekasatānaṃ rogānaṃ bāhirānaṃ ahivicchikādīnañcā)," and by the weakness of life (āyudubbalato) ca in the manner of "life is bound by inhalation and exhalation (assāsapassāsapaṭibaddhaṃ jīvitaṃ),"
‘‘Jīvitaṃ byādhi kālo ca,
"Life, disease, time,
The laying down of the body, destination;
These five in the living world,
Have no signs, they are not led (Animittā na nāyare)." (Saṃ. Ni. Aṭṭha. 1.1.20; Jā. Aṭṭha. 2.2.34) –
kālavavatthānassa abhāvatoca, ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ jīvati appaṃ vā bhiyyo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.145) vuttattā evamādinā nayenaaddhānassa paricchedāca bhāvanā maraṇassati nāmāti attho. Khaṇaparittato ca maraṇassati bhāvetabbā.
Because of the absence of fixing a time limit, and because of the definition of a lifespan, such as, "Bhikkhus, whoever lives long, lives a hundred years or a little more" (SN 1.145), in this way, the limitation of the duration is the meaning of mindfulness of death. Mindfulness of death should be cultivated from moment to moment.
‘‘Jīvitaṃ attabhāvo ca,
"Life and individual existence,
Pleasure and pain completely;
Bound together in a single mind,
Swiftly that moment passes." (Vism. 1.176) –
Hi vuttaṃ. Caturārakkhavinicchayo.
Thus it is said. The Decision on the Four Protections.
Caturārakkhaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Discourse on the Four Protections is Finished.
50. Vipassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
50. Vipassanā Instruction Commentary
471-2.Nāmarūpaṃpariggayhāti ettha (visuddhi. 2.662 ādayo) nāmarūpapariggahaṃ kātukāmena tāva ṭhapetvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ avasesesu yaṃ kiñci jhānaṃ samāpajjitvā vuṭṭhāya vitakkādīni jhānaṅgāni ca taṃsampayutte ca phassādayo dhamme lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānavasena paricchinditvā ‘‘sabbametaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ namanato namanaṭṭhena nāma’’nti vavatthapetabbaṃ. Tato tassa paccayaṃ pariyesanto ‘‘hadayavatthuṃ nissāya vattatī’’ti passati, puna vatthussa paccayabhūtāni ca upādārūpāni ca passitvā ‘‘idaṃ sabbaṃ ruppanato vikārāpattito rūpa’’nti pariggaṇhāti. Puna tadubhayaṃ ‘‘namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ, ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpa’’nti evaṃ saṅkhepato nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapeti. Idaṃ sabbaṃ samathayānikavasena vuttaṃ. Vipassanāyāniko pana catudhātuvavatthānamukhena bhūtupādāyarūpāni paricchinditvā ‘‘sabbametaṃ ruppanato rūpa’’nti passati. Tato evaṃ paricchinnarūpassa cakkhādīni nissāya pavattamānā arūpadhammāpi āpāthamāgacchanti. Tato sabbepi te arūpadhamme namanalakkhaṇena ekato katvā ‘‘etaṃ nāma’’nti passati. So ‘‘idaṃ nāmaṃ, idaṃ rūpa’’nti dvedhā vavatthapeti. Evaṃ vavatthapetvā ‘‘nāmarūpato uddhaṃ añño satto vā puggalo vā poso vā devo vā brahmā vā natthī’’ti passati.
471-2. Having grasped name and form: Here (Vism. 2.662 ff.), one who wishes to undertake the grasping of name and form should first, having set aside the attainment of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, attain whatever jhāna is remaining, and upon arising from it, should determine the jhāna factors, such as initial application, etc., and the associated phenomena such as contact, etc., in terms of characteristic, function, manifestation, and proximate cause, and ascertain, "All of this is 'name' in the sense of bending towards the object." Then, seeking its cause, one sees that "it occurs dependent on the heart-base." Again, having seen the materiality derived from the four great elements that are the cause of the base, one grasps, "All of this is 'form' in the sense of changing or being subject to alteration." Again, one determines both of these in brief as "name is characterized by bending, form is characterized by changing." All this is said in terms of the samatha-yānika. However, the vipassanā-yānika determines the materiality derived from the four great elements through the method of defining the four elements, and sees, "All of this is 'form' in the sense of changing." Then, the immaterial phenomena occurring dependent on the eye, etc., of this form thus determined, also come into view. Then, having gathered all those immaterial phenomena together by their characteristic of bending, one sees, "This is 'name'." Thus, one determines in two ways: "This is name, this is form." Having thus determined, one sees, "Beyond name and form, there is no other being, person, individual, god, or brahmā."
Yathāhi aṅgasambhārā, hoti saddo ratho iti;
Just as with the collection of parts,
The word 'chariot' comes to be;
So too, where the aggregates are present,
There is the convention 'a being'. (SN 1.171)
Evameva pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu sati satto, puggaloti vā vohāramatto hotīti evamādinā nayena nāmarūpānaṃ yāthāvadassanasaṅkhātena diṭṭhivisuddhibhūtena ñāṇena nāmarūpaṃ pariggayhāti attho.
Just so, when there are the five aggregates of clinging, there is merely a term of designation, such as a being or a person. Thus, by means of the knowledge that constitutes purity of view, which has the characteristic of seeing name and form as they actually are, name and form are grasped. This is the meaning.
Tatotassa ca paccayanti puna tassa nāmarūpassa paccayaṃ pariggayhāti attho. Vuttanayena nāmarūpaṃ pariggaṇhitvā ‘‘ko nu kho imassa hetū’’ti pariyesanto ahetuvādavisamahetuvādesu dosaṃ disvā rogaṃ disvā tassa nidānasamuṭṭhānaṃ pariyesanto vejjo viya tassa hetuñca paccayañca pariyesanto avijjā taṇhā upādānaṃ kammanti ime cattāro dhamme nāmarūpassa uppādapaccayattā ‘‘hetū’’ti ca āhāraṃ upatthambhanassa paccayattā ‘‘paccayo’’ti ca passati. ‘‘Imassa kāyassa avijjādayo tayo dhammā mātā viya dārakassa upanissayā honti, kammaṃ pitā viya puttassa janakaṃ, āhāro dhāti viya dārakassa sandhārako’’ti evaṃ rūpakāyassa paccayapariggahaṃ katvā puna ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.43) nayena nāmakāyassapi hetupaccayaṃ pariggaṇhāti.
Then, its cause: Again, the meaning is that one grasps the cause of that name and form. Having grasped name and form in the manner stated, and seeking, "What now is the cause of this?", seeing the fault in the doctrines of causelessness and false cause, seeking the origin and arising of it as one would seek a disease, one sees these four phenomena—ignorance, craving, clinging, and kamma—as "causes" because they are the condition for the arising of name and form, and one sees nutriment as "condition" because it is the condition for support. "For this body, the three phenomena—ignorance, etc.—are a support like a mother for her child; kamma is generative like a father for his son; nutriment is sustaining like a nurse for her child." Having made a determination of the conditions for the material body, one again grasps the cause and condition for the mental body by the method beginning with "Dependent on the eye and forms, eye-consciousness arises" (SN 2.43).
Evaṃ pariggaṇhanto ‘‘atītānāgatāpi dhammā evameva pavattantī’’ti sanniṭṭhānaṃ karoti. Tassa yā sā pubbantaṃ ārabbha ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho ahosiṃ, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’nti pañcavidhā vicikicchā vuttā, yāpi aparantaṃ ārabbha ‘‘bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhānaṃ, na nu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho, kiṃ hutvā kiṃ bhavissāmi nu kho ahaṃ anāgatamaddhāna’’nti pañcavidhā vuttā, yāpi etarahi vā pana paccuppannaṃ addhānaṃ ārabbha ‘‘ajjhattaṃ kathaṃkathī hoti, ahaṃ nu khosmi, no nu khosmi, kiṃ nu khosmi, kathaṃ nu khosmi, ayaṃ nu kho satto kuto āgato, so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatī’’ti chabbidhā vicikicchā vuttā, tā sabbāpi pahīyanti. Evaṃ paccayapariggahaṇena tīsu addhāsu kaṅkhaṃ vitaritvā ṭhitaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘‘kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhī’’tipi ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’ntipi ‘‘sammādassana’’ntipi vuccati.
Grasping thus, one concludes that "phenomena also occurred in just this way in the past and will occur in the future." All of the five kinds of doubt that relate to the past, "Did I exist in the past? Did I not exist? What was I? How was I? Having been what, what did I become in the past?", and the five kinds of doubt that relate to the future, "Shall I exist in the future? Shall I not? What shall I be? How shall I be? Having been what, what shall I become in the future?", and the six kinds of doubt that relate to the present, "One is inwardly perplexed about the present: Am I? Am I not? What am I? How am I? Where has this being come from? Where will he go?", all of these are abandoned. The knowledge that stands having dispelled doubt in the three times by grasping conditions is called "purity of knowledge by overcoming doubt," "knowledge of the establishing of the Dhamma," and "right view."
ñātapariññānāma. ‘‘Rūpaṃ aniccaṃ, vedanā aniccā’’tiādinā tesaṃyeva dhammānaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāpaññātīraṇapariññānāma. Tesu evaṃ pana dhammesu niccasaññādipajahanavasena pavattā lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāpahānapariññānāma. Tattha saṅkhārapariggahato paṭṭhāya yāva paccayapariggahā ñātapariññāya bhūmi. Kalāpasammasanato paṭṭhāya yāva udayabbayānupassanā tīraṇapariññāya bhūmi. Bhaṅgānupassanato paṭṭhāya pahānapariññāya bhūmi. Tato paṭṭhāya hi ‘‘aniccato anupassanto niccasaññaṃ pajahati, dukkhato anupassanto sukhasaññaṃ, anattato anupassanto attasaññaṃ, nibbindanto nandiṃ, virajjanto rāgaṃ, nirodhento samudayaṃ, paṭinissajjanto ādānaṃ pajahatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.52) evaṃ pajahanto niccasaññādipahānasādhikānaṃ sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ ādhipaccaṃ hoti. Iti imāsu pariññāsu saṅkhāraparicchedassa ceva paccayapariggahassa ca sādhitattā iminā yoginā ñātapariññā adhigatā hoti.
Knowledge of understanding means the meditative knowledge of intuitive insight that applies the general characteristics to those very phenomena by way of "Form is impermanent, feeling is impermanent," etc. Knowledge of scrutiny means the meditative knowledge of intuitive insight that occurs by way of abandoning the perception of permanence, etc., in those very phenomena. Knowledge of abandonment means the meditative knowledge of intuitive insight that occurs in those very phenomena by way of abandoning the perception of permanence, etc. Here, from the delimitation of aggregates up to the grasping of conditions is the scope of knowledge of understanding. From the touching of groups of phenomena up to the contemplation of rise and fall is the scope of knowledge of scrutiny. From the contemplation of dissolution onwards is the scope of knowledge of abandonment. For from then on, "contemplating impermanence, one abandons the perception of permanence; contemplating suffering, one abandons the perception of happiness; contemplating non-self, one abandons the perception of self; growing disenchanted, one abandons delight; dispassioning, one abandons lust; ceasing, one abandons origination; relinquishing, one abandons grasping" (Pṭsm. 1.52). Thus, while abandoning, the seven contemplations that are effective in abandoning the perception of permanence, etc., are dominant. Thus, because the delimitation of aggregates and the grasping of conditions are accomplished in these kinds of understanding, knowledge of understanding has been attained by this yogi.
‘‘tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvāna saṅkhāre sammasanto’’ti.
"Having applied the three characteristics, one touches the aggregates."
Evaṃ saṅkhāresu aniccadukkhaanattavasena kalāpasammasanaṃ katvā puna saṅkhārānaṃ udayabbayameva passati. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Avijjāsamudayā (paṭi. ma. 1.50) rūpasamudayo, taṇhākammaāhārasamudayā rūpasamudayo’ti evaṃ rūpakkhandhassa paccayasamudayadassanaṭṭhena rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passati, nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passatī’’ti evaṃ pañcahākārehi rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passati. ‘‘Avijjānirodhā rūpanirodho, taṇhākammaāhāranirodhā rūpanirodho’ti evaṃ rūpakkhandhassa paccayanirodhadassanaṭṭhena rūpakkhandhassa vayaṃ passati, vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rūpakkhandhassa vayaṃ passatī’’ti evaṃ pañcahākārehi vayaṃ passati. Tathā ‘‘avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayo, taṇhākammaphassasamudayā vedanāsamudayo’’ti vedanākkhandhassa, nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati. ‘‘Avijjānirodhā vedanānirodho, taṇhākammaphassanirodhā vedanānirodho’’ti vedanākkhandhassa, vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ passantopi vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati. Evaṃ saññākkhandhādīsupi. Ayaṃ pana viseso – viññāṇakkhandhassa phassaṭṭhāne nāmarūpasamudayā, nāmarūpanirodhāti yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ ekekasmiṃ khandhe paccayasamudayavasena ca nibbattilakkhaṇavasena ca paccayanirodhavasena ca vipariṇāmalakkhaṇavasena ca udayabbayadassanena dasa dasa katvā paññāsa lakkhaṇāni vuttāni. Tesaṃ vasena evaṃ rūpassa udayo rūpassa vayoti paccayato ceva lakkhaṇato ca vitthārena manasikāraṃ karoti.
Having thus touched groups of phenomena in the aggregates in terms of impermanence, suffering, and non-self, one then sees only the rise and fall of the aggregates. How? "With the arising of ignorance (Pṭsm. 1.50), there is the arising of form; with the arising of craving, kamma, and nutriment, there is the arising of form." Thus, one sees the rise of the aggregate of form by way of seeing the arising of conditions of the aggregate of form; also, seeing the characteristic of production, one sees the rise of the aggregate of form. Thus, one sees the rise of the aggregate of form in five ways. "With the cessation of ignorance, there is the cessation of form; with the cessation of craving, kamma, and nutriment, there is the cessation of form." Thus, one sees the fall of the aggregate of form by way of seeing the cessation of conditions of the aggregate of form; also, seeing the characteristic of disintegration, one sees the fall of the aggregate of form. Thus, one sees the fall in five ways. Similarly, "With the arising of ignorance, there is the arising of feeling; with the arising of craving, kamma, and contact, there is the arising of feeling." Thus, of the aggregate of feeling, also, seeing the characteristic of production, one sees the rise of the aggregate of feeling. "With the cessation of ignorance, there is the cessation of feeling; with the cessation of craving, kamma, and contact, there is the cessation of feeling." Thus, of the aggregate of feeling, also, seeing the characteristic of disintegration, one sees the fall of the aggregate of feeling. Similarly with the aggregates of perception, etc. But this is the difference: In the case of the aggregate of consciousness, "dependent on name and form," "with the cessation of name and form" should be connected in place of contact. Thus, in each aggregate, by seeing rise and fall in terms of the arising of conditions, the characteristic of production, the cessation of conditions, and the characteristic of disintegration, ten characteristics each are stated, making fifty characteristics. On the basis of these, one attends mindfully in detail to the rise of form and the fall of form from the standpoint of both conditions and characteristics.
Tassevaṃ karoto ‘‘iti kira ime dhammā ahutvā sambhonti, hutvā paṭiventī’’ti ñāṇaṃ visadaṃ hoti. ‘‘Evaṃ kira ime dhammā anuppannā uppajjanti, uppannā nirujjhantī’’ti niccaṃ navāva hutvā saṅkhārā upaṭṭhahanti. Na kevalañca niccaṃ navā, sūriyuggamane ussāvabindu viya, udakabubbuḷo viya, udake daṇḍarāji viya, āragge sāsapo viya, vijjuppādo viya ca parittaṭṭhāyino. Māyāmarīcisupinaalātacakkagandhabbanagarapheṇapiṇḍakadaliādayo viya nissārā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Ettāvatā cānena vayadhammameva uppajjati, uppannañca vayaṃ upetīti iminā ākārena samapaññāsa lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhitvā ṭhitaṃ udayabbayānupassanaṃ nāma paṭhamaṃ taruṇavipassanāñāṇaṃ adhigataṃ hoti, yassādhigamā āraddhavipassakoti saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.
As one does so, the knowledge becomes clear that "it seems that these phenomena come into being without having been, and having been, they vanish." "It seems that these phenomena arise without having arisen, and having arisen, they cease." Thus, the aggregates appear always new. And not only are they always new, but they endure only briefly, like a drop of dew at sunrise, like a water bubble, like a line drawn on water, like a mustard seed on the tip of an awl, and like a flash of lightning. They appear empty like illusions, mirages, dreams, fire-wheels, gandhabba cities, foam, and plantain trunks. To this extent, one realizes that only that which is subject to falling arises, and that which has arisen is subject to falling. The first immature insight knowledge called contemplation of rise and fall is attained, having penetrated fifty-five characteristics in this manner. With the attainment of that, one goes by the designation "one who has started insight."
obhāsonāma vipassanākkhaṇe ñāṇassa balavattā lohitaṃ pasīdati, tena chavito obhāso nibbattati, taṃ disvā ayaṃ yogī ‘‘maggo mayā patto’’ti tameva obhāsaṃ assādeti.Ñāṇanti vipassanāñāṇamevetaṃ, saṅkhāre sammasantassa sūraṃ pasannaṃ hutvā pavattamānaṃ disvā pubbe viya ‘‘maggo’’ti assādeti.Pītīti vipassanāpīti eva. Tassa hi tasmiṃ khaṇe pañcavidhā pīti uppajjati.Passaddhīti vipassanāpassaddhi. Tasmiṃ samaye neva kāyacittānaṃ daratho gāravatā kakkhaḷatā akammaññatā gelaññatā vaṅkatā hoti.Sukhaṃvipassanāsukhameva. Tassa kira tasmiṃ samaye sakalasarīraṃ ṭhapitavaṭṭi viya abhisandayamānaṃ atipaṇītaṃ sukhaṃ uppajjati.
Illumination is the bright light that arises from the power of knowledge at the moment of insight, the blood becomes clear, and illumination arises from the skin. Seeing that, this yogi delights in that very illumination thinking that he has attained the path. Knowledge is just this insight knowledge itself, which, seeing the aggregates become clear and serene, delights in it as "the path" just as before. Joy is insight joy itself. For at that moment, five kinds of joy arise for him. Tranquility is insight tranquility. At that time, there is no agitation, heaviness, rigidity, unwieldiness, sickness, or crookedness of either body or mind. Happiness is insight happiness itself. It seems that at that time, exceedingly refined happiness arises for him, permeating his entire body like a lamp set in oil.
Adhimokkhonāma vipassanākkhaṇe pavattā saddhā. Tasmiṃ khaṇe cittacetasikānaṃ ativiya pasādabhūtā balavatī saddhā uppajjati.Paggahonāma vipassanāsampayuttaṃ vīriyaṃ. Tasmiñhi khaṇe asithilamanaccāraddhaṃ supaggahitaṃ vīriyaṃ uppajjati.Upaṭṭhānanti vipassanāsampayuttā sati. Tasmiñhi khaṇe supaṭṭhitā sati uppajjati.Upekkhāti duvidhā vipassanāvajjanavasena. Tasmiṃ khaṇe sabbasaṅkhāraggahaṇe majjhattabhūtavipassanupekkhāsaṅkhātaṃ ñāṇaṃ balavantaṃ hutvā uppajjati, manodvāre āvajjanupekkhā ca, sāva taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjentassa sūrā tikhiṇā hutvā vahati.Nikantivipassanānikanti. Obhāsādīsu ālayaṃ kurumānā sukhumā santākārā nikanti uppajjati. Ettha obhāsādayo kilesavatthubhūtatāya ‘‘upakkilesā’’ti vuttā, na akusalattā. Nikanti pana upakkileso ceva kilesavatthu ca. Paṇḍito pana bhikkhu obhāsādīsu uppannesu vikkhepaṃ agacchanto ‘‘obhāsādayo dhammā na maggo, upakkilesavinimuttaṃ pana vīthippaṭipannaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggo’’ti maggañca amaggañca vavatthapeti. Tassevaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ maggo, ayaṃ na maggo’’ti ñatvā ṭhitaṃ ñāṇaṃ‘‘maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhī’’ti vuccati.
Conviction is the confidence that occurs at the moment of insight. At that moment, exceedingly clear and strong confidence arises for the mind and mental factors. Exertion is the energy associated with insight. For at that moment, energy arises that is neither too lax nor too tense, but well-applied. Mindfulness is the mindfulness associated with insight. For at that moment, well-established mindfulness arises. Equanimity is of two kinds, in terms of insight directing. At that moment, knowledge reckoned as insight equanimity, which is neutral in the taking up of all aggregates, arises strongly, and also equanimity of directing at the mind-door. Since one who directs the mind again and again to each place experiences that equanimity as clear and sharp. Attachment is insight attachment. Subtle attachment, which is peaceful in nature, arises as one dwells in the illuminations, etc. Here, because the illuminations, etc., are objects of defilement, they are called "corruptions," not because they are unwholesome. But attachment is both a corruption and an object of defilement. However, a wise bhikkhu, when illuminations, etc., arise, without going to distraction, determines, "The phenomena of illuminations, etc., are not the path, but insight knowledge, freed from corruptions and proceeding in the process, is the path." The knowledge that stands having known "this is the path, this is not the path" is called "purity of knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path."
paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhināma hoti. Udayabbayānupassanāñāṇaṃ bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ ādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃ nibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇanti imāni aṭṭha ñāṇāni nāma. Etāni nibbattetukāmena yasmā upakkilesehi abhibhūtaṃ hutvā lakkhaṇappaṭivedhaṃ kātuṃ asamatthaṃ hoti cittaṃ, tasmā punapi udayabbayameva passitabbaṃ. Udayabbayaṃ passantassa aniccalakkhaṇaṃ yathābhūtaṃ upaṭṭhāti, udayabbayappaṭipīḷitattā dukkhalakkhaṇañca ‘‘dukkhameva ca sambhoti, dukkhaṃ tiṭṭhati veti cā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.171) passato anattalakkhaṇañca.
Purity of knowledge and vision of the course of practice exists. The knowledge of contemplation of rise and fall, the knowledge of contemplation of dissolution, the knowledge of appearance as terror, the knowledge of contemplation of misery, the knowledge of contemplation of disenchantment, the knowledge of desire for deliverance, the knowledge of contemplation of reflection, and the knowledge of equanimity about formations—these are the eight knowledges. Because the mind, when it wants to produce these, is overcome by corruptions and is unable to penetrate the characteristics, therefore rise and fall must be seen again. As one sees rise and fall, the characteristic of impermanence appears as it actually is, and, seeing the characteristic of suffering because of being oppressed by rise and fall and seeing "only suffering arises, suffering remains and ceases" (SN 1.171), the characteristic of non-self also appears.
aniccanti khandhapañcakaṃ. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvā hutvā abhāvato vā. Aññathattaṃ nāma jarā, uppādavayaññathattaṃ aniccalakkhaṇaṃ, hutvā abhāvasaṅkhāto vā eko ākāravikāro. ‘‘Yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.15) vacanato tadeva khandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ. Kasmā? Abhiṇhaṃ paṭipīḷitattā. Abhiṇhappaṭipīḷanākāro dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattā’’ti vacanato tadeva khandhapañcakaṃ anattā. Kasmā? Avasavattanato. Avasavattanākāro anattalakkhaṇaṃ. Imānipi tīṇi lakkhaṇāni udayabbayaṃ passantasseva ārammaṇāni honti.
Impermanent is the five aggregates. Why? Because of origination, dissolution, and change, or because of being and then non-being. Change is aging; origination, dissolution, and change are the characteristic of impermanence; or a single condition is a transformation reckoned as being and then non-being. Because of the statement, "Whatever is impermanent is suffering" (SN 3.15), that very five aggregates are suffering. Why? Because of being continually oppressed. The manner of continual oppression is the characteristic of suffering. Because of the statement, "Whatever is suffering is non-self," that very five aggregates are non-self. Why? Because of not being under one's control. The manner of not being under one's control is the characteristic of non-self. These three characteristics also are objects for one who is seeing rise and fall.
bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃnāma. Imassa uppādato paṭṭhāya assa yogino ‘‘yathā ime saṅkhārā pañcakkhandhā bhijjanti, evaṃ atītepi saṅkhārā bhijjiṃsu, anāgatepi bhijjissantī’’ti nirodhameva passato sati santiṭṭhati, tassa bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ āsevantassa bahulīkarontassa sabbabhavayonigatiṭṭhitisattāvāsesu sabbe saṅkhārā jalitaaṅgārakāsuādayo viya mahābhayaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Etaṃbhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃnāma. Tassa taṃ bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇaṃ āsevantassa sabbe bhavādayo ādittaaṅgārā viya, samussitakhaggā viya paccatthikā appaṭisaraṇā sādīnavā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Idaṃādīnavānupassanāñāṇaṃnāma. Tassa evaṃ saṅkhāre ādīnavato passantassa bhavādīsu saṅkhārānaṃ ādīnavattā sabbasaṅkhāresu ukkaṇṭhanā anabhirati uppajjati. Idaṃnibbidānupassanāñāṇaṃnāma. Sabbasaṅkhāresu nibbindantassa ukkaṇṭhantassa sabbasmā saṅkhāragatā muñcitukāmatā nissaritukāmatāva hoti. Idaṃmuñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃnāma. Puna tasmā saṅkhāragatā muñcituṃ puna te eva saṅkhāre paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā tīraṇaṃpaṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇaṃnāma, yo evaṃ tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā saṅkhāre pariggaṇhanto tesu anattalakkhaṇassa sudiṭṭhattā ‘‘attā’’ti vā ‘‘attaniya’’nti vā aggaṇhanto saṅkhāresu bhayañca nandiñca pahāya saṅkhāresu udāsino hoti majjhatto, ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā na gaṇhāti, sabbasaṅkhāresu udāsino majjhatto tīsu bhavesu upekkhako, tassa taṃ ñāṇaṃsaṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃnāma. Taṃ panetaṃ sabbasaṅkhārappavattaṃ vissajjetvā nibbānaninnaṃ nibbānapakkhandaṃ hoti, no ce nibbānaṃ santato passati, punappunaṃ ‘‘anicca’’nti vā ‘‘dukkha’’nti vā ‘‘anattā’’ti vā tividhānupassanāvasena saṅkhārārammaṇameva hutvā pavattati.
This is called bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇa. From the arising of this, mindfulness is established in the yogi who sees only the cessation, thinking, "Just as these conditioned phenomena, the five aggregates, disintegrate, so too did conditioned phenomena disintegrate in the past, and so they will disintegrate in the future." As they cultivate and repeatedly practice bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇa, all conditioned phenomena in all realms of existence, wombs, destinations, abodes of beings, appear as a great terror, like burning coals. This is called bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇa. As they cultivate this bhayatupaṭṭhānañāṇa, all forms of existence appear like burning coals, like upraised swords, like enemies, without refuge, full of danger. This is called ādīnavānupassanāñāṇa. For one who thus sees the danger in conditioned phenomena, weariness and dissatisfaction arise regarding all conditioned phenomena in connection with forms of existence. This is called nibbidānupassanāñāṇa. For one who is weary of and dissatisfied with all conditioned phenomena, there is only a desire to be freed and to escape from all conditioned existence. This is called muñcitukamyatāñāṇa. Again, desiring to be freed from that conditioned existence, they once more impose the three characteristics (tilakkhaṇa) by way of paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇa upon those very conditioned phenomena. This investigation is called paṭisaṅkhānupassanāñāṇa. Indeed, as one thus investigates conditioned phenomena by imposing the three characteristics, due to the clear perception of the characteristic of non-self (anattalakkhaṇa) in them, they do not grasp them as "self" or "belonging to self," and abandoning both fear and delight in conditioned phenomena, they are indifferent and neutral towards conditioned phenomena, not grasping "I" or "mine," indifferent and neutral towards all conditioned phenomena, equanimous towards the three realms of existence. That knowledge is called saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇa. But that entirely pervades all conditioned phenomena, inclines towards Nibbāna, and tends towards Nibbāna, unless they perceive Nibbāna as peace, it repeatedly functions only with conditioned phenomena as its object, in terms of the threefold contemplation (tividhānupassanā) of "impermanent," "suffering," or "not-self."
animittovimokkhoti animittākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto ariyamaggo. So hi animittāya dhātuyā uppannattā animitto, kilesehi ca vimuttattā vimokkho. Eteneva nayena appaṇihitākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto appaṇihito, suññatākārena nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavatto suññatoti veditabbo. Adhigatasaṅkhārupekkhassa kulaputtassa vipassanā sikhāppattā hoti. Vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāti etadeva. Etaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇaṃ āsevantassa bhāventassa tikkhatarā saṅkhārupekkhā uppajjati.
Animitta vimokkha means the noble path (ariyamagga) that arises by taking Nibbāna as its object in the aspect of the signless (animittākārena). Since it arises from the signless element, it is signless; and since it is liberated from defilements, it is liberation. In the same way, the path that arises by taking Nibbāna as its object in the aspect of the desireless (appaṇihitākārena) is to be understood as desireless, and the path that arises by taking Nibbāna as its object in the aspect of emptiness (suññatākārena) as emptiness. For a noble one who has attained saṅkhārupekkhā, insight reaches its peak. This is just the vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā. As they cultivate and develop this saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇa, an even more acute saṅkhārupekkhā arises.
Tassa idāni maggo uppajjissatīti saṅkhārupekkhā saṅkhāre ‘‘aniccā’’ti vā ‘‘dukkhā’’ti vā ‘‘anattā’’ti vā sammasitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Bhavaṅgā vuṭṭhāya saṅkhārupekkhāya āgatanayeneva aniccādiākārena manasi karitvā uppajjati manodvārāvajjanaṃ, tadeva manasi karoto paṭhamaṃ javanacittaṃ uppajjati, yaṃ ‘‘parikamma’’nti vuccati. Tadanantaraṃ tatheva dutiyaṃ javanacittaṃ uppajjati, yaṃ ‘‘upacāra’’nti vuccati. Tadanantarampi tatheva uppajjati javanacittaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘anuloma’’nti vuccati. Idaṃ tesaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ. Avisesena pana tividhametaṃ āsevanantipi parikammantipi upacārantipi anulomantipi vuccati. Idaṃ pana anulomañāṇaṃ saṅkhārārammaṇāya vuṭṭhānagāminiyā vipassanāya pariyosānaṃ hoti. Nippariyāyena pana gotrabhuñāṇameva vipassanāpariyosānanti vuccati. Tato paraṃ nirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ kurumānaṃ puthujjanagottaṃ atikkamamānaṃ nibbānārammaṇe paṭhamasamannāhārabhūtaṃ apunarāvaṭṭakaṃ gotrabhuñāṇaṃ uppajjati. Idaṃ pana ñāṇaṃ paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiñca ñāṇadassanavisuddhiñca na bhajati, antarā abbohārikameva hoti, vipassanāsote patitattā pana vipassanāti vā saṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā gotrabhuñāṇe niruddhe tena dinnasaññāya nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā diṭṭhisaṃyojanaṃ sīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojanaṃ vicikicchāsaṃyojananti tīṇi saṃyojanāni samucchedavasena viddhaṃsento sotāpattimaggo uppajjati. Tadanantaraṃ tasseva vipākabhūtāni dve tīṇi vā phalacittāni uppajjanti anantaravipākattā lokuttarānaṃ. Phalapariyosāne panassa cittaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ otarati.
Now, thinking that the path will arise for them, that saṅkhārupekkhā, after considering conditioned phenomena as "impermanent," "suffering," or "not-self," subsides into the life-continuum (bhavaṅga). Having arisen from the bhavaṅga, in the same manner as it came by way of saṅkhārupekkhā, after attending in the mind in terms of impermanence and so on, mind-door adverting (manodvārāvajjanaṃ) arises. As they attend in the mind to that very thing, the first javana citta arises, which is called "parikamma." Immediately after that, the second javana citta arises in the same way, which is called "upacāra." Immediately after that as well, the javana citta arises in the same way, which is called "anuloma." These are their individual names. But without distinction, all three are called āsevana, parikamma, upacāra, and anuloma. This anulomañāṇa is the culmination of insight (vipassanā) that leads to emergence (vuṭṭhānagāminiyā) with conditioned phenomena as its object. However, unequivocally, it is the gotrabhuñāṇa itself that is called the culmination of insight. After that, while taking Nibbāna, the cessation, as its object, transcending the lineage of ordinary beings (puthujjanagottaṃ), the gotrabhuñāṇa arises, which is the first coordination in Nibbāna as its object, unreturning. However, this ñāṇa does not participate in the knowledge of the path or purity of vision, but is merely in between, without conventional designation. However, since it has fallen into the stream of insight, it also goes by the name of insight. When the gotrabhuñāṇa, having taken Nibbāna as its object, ceases, then, with the cognition given by it, while destroying the three fetters—the personality belief (diṭṭhisaṃyojana), the attachment to rites and rituals (sīlabbataparāmāsasaṃyojana), and doubt (vicikicchāsaṃyojana)—by way of eradication, the stream-entry path (sotāpattimagga) arises. Immediately after that, two or three fruition cittas, which are the result of that, arise due to the immediate result of supramundane phenomena. At the end of fruition, their mind subsides into the life-continuum (bhavaṅga).
ñāṇadassanavisuddhināma.
This is called ñāṇadassanavisuddhi.
‘‘pāpuṇeyyānupubbena, sabbasaṃyojanakkhaya’’nti. Ettha sakkāyadiṭṭhi vicikicchā sīlabbataparāmāso kāmarāgo paṭigho rūparāgo aruparāgo māno uddhaccaṃ avijjāti ime dasa dhammāsabbasaṃyojanānāma. Etesu sakkāyadiṭṭhivicikicchāsīlabbataparāmāsā sotāpattimaggavajjhā, kāmarāgapaṭighā dutiyamaggena tanubhūtā hutvā tatiyena samugghātaṃ gacchanti, sesāni pañca catutthenāti. Evaṃ anupubbena sabbasaṃyojanakkhayasaṅkhātaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇātīti veditabbaṃ.
"One should attain, step by step, the destruction of all fetters." Here, personality belief (sakkāyadiṭṭhi), doubt (vicikicchā), attachment to rites and rituals (sīlabbataparāmāsa), sensual lust (kāmarāga), aversion (paṭigha), attachment to form (rūparāga), attachment to formless existence (arūparāga), conceit (māna), restlessness (uddhacca), and ignorance (avijjā): these ten things are called all the fetters (sabbasaṃyojanā). Among these, personality belief, doubt, and attachment to rites and rituals are eradicated by the stream-entry path; sensual lust and aversion become attenuated by the second path and are eradicated by the third; and the remaining five are eradicated by the fourth. Thus, it should be understood that one attains arahantship, which is reckoned as the destruction of all fetters, step by step.
Vipassanāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Exposition on Insight is Finished.
Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Concluding Discourse
473-5.Adhisīlaadhicittānaṃ adhipaññāya ca sikkhanā uttari bhikkhukiccaṃ nāma natthi yasmā, ato ayaṃ khuddasikkhā samudāhaṭā.
473-5.Since there is no further duty for a bhikkhu than training in higher morality, higher mind, and higher wisdom, therefore this Minor Training (khuddasikkhā) has been compiled.
Yassatherassalokavicārinoloke vicarantassa mahato kittisaddassa parissamona sambhotina hoti, kiṃ viya?Mālutasseva niccaso,yathā niccaṃ vicarantassa mālutassa parissamo natthi, evaṃ vicarantassa kittisaddassa parissamo natthi, tenadhammasirikenasamudāhaṭāti sambandho.
For which Elder who is a world-investigator (lokavicārino), effort does not arise in the world-wandering of a great sound of fame, like what? Just like the wind's constant (Mālutasseva niccaso), just as there is no effort for the wind (Māluta) that is constantly wandering, so too there is no effort for the wandering sound of fame; it is connected: by Dhammasiri it has been compiled.
Ettāvatā ca –
And with this much:
Niṭṭhito khuddasikkhāya, samāsena vinicchayo;
The analysis of the Minor Training is finished in brief;
But the detailed exposition of it is the entire Tipiṭaka.
Tasmā vitthārakāmena, sakale piṭakattaye;
Therefore, one desiring detail should,
In the entire Tipiṭaka,
Be zealous here, for the other is a specialty.
Khuddasikkhāvinicchayo.
The Analysis of the Minor Training.
Khuddasikkhā-purāṇaṭīkā niṭṭhitā.
The Old Commentary on the Minor Training is Finished.
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Homage to the Blessed One, the Worthy One, the Fully Enlightened One
Khuddasikkhā-abhinavaṭīkā
The New Commentary on the Minor Training
Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory Discourse
Tilokatilakaṃ vande, saddhammāmatanimmitaṃ;
I venerate the crest-jewel of the three worlds, fashioned from the Deathless Dhamma;
The Buddha, beautifully composed and delightful to the minds of beings.
Sāriputtaṃmahāsāmiṃ, nekasatthavisāradaṃ;
Sāriputta, the great lord, skilled in many scriptures;
Of great virtue, of great wisdom, I bow with my head to the teacher.
Khuddasikkhāya ṭīkāyā, purātanā samīritā;
The ancient commentary on the Minor Training (Khuddasikkhāya ṭīkā),
Is not by that able to fully know the meaning everywhere.
Tatonekaguṇānaṃ yo, mañjūsā ratanānava;
Therefore, may the one with unique qualities, a jewel-box of endless gems,
Known by the name Sumaṅgala, that wise and virtuous one,
Ajjhesito yatindena, sadāraññanivāsinā;
Having been requested by the ascetic, dwelling in the forest with reverence;
Let us make a meaning-explanation of this, with analysis.
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
Explanation of the Introductory Discourse
(Ka) etthāha – kimatthamāditovāyaṃ gāthā nikkhittā, nanu yathādhippetameva pakaraṇamārabhanīyanti? Vuccate – sappayojanattā. Sappayojanañhi taṃdassanaṃ tāya ratanattayappaṇāmābhidheyyakaraṇappakārappayojanābhidhānasandassanato. Tāni ca pana sappayojanāni anantarāyena ganthaparisamāpanādippayojanānamabhinipphādanato. Tathā hi sotūnamattano ca yathādhippetatthanipphādanaṃ ratanattayappaṇāmakaraṇappayojanaṃ. Viditābhidheyyassa ganthassa viññūnamādaraṇīyatā abhidheyyakathanappayojanaṃ. Sotujanasamussāhajananaṃ karaṇappakārappayojanakathanappayojanaṃ. Vohārasukhatā pana abhidhānakathanappayojanaṃ.
(Ka) Here it is said: Why is this verse placed at the beginning? Should one not begin with only the subject matter that is intended? It is said: Because it is purposeful. Indeed, the showing of that is purposeful, because of the showing of the reverence to the Triple Gem, the subject matter, the manner of doing, the purpose, and the designation. And those are purposeful because they accomplish purposes such as the completion of the text without obstacles. For example, the making of reverence to the Triple Gem is for the purpose of accomplishing the intended meaning for both the listeners and oneself. The statement of the subject matter is for the purpose of the wise having respect for the text whose subject matter is known. The generation of enthusiasm in the audience is for the purpose of stating the manner of doing. And ease of expression is for the purpose of stating the designation.
vanditvā ratanattayanti iminā ratanattayappaṇāmo dassito,khuddasikkhanti iminā khuddabhūtānaṃ sikkhānaṃ idha paṭipādetabbatādīpanena abhidheyyaṃ, abhidheyyo ca nāmesa samuditena satthena vacanīyatthoti. Abhidhānañca pana imināva dassitaṃ tena atthānugatasamaññāparidīpanato.Samātikanti iminā karaṇappakāro,khuddasikkhanti iminā ca, tena khuddabhūtānaṃ sikkhānaṃ idha dassetabbabhāvappakāsanato.Ādito upasampanna sikkhitabbanti iminā payojanapayojanaṃ pana imināva sāmatthiyato dassitameva, tāsaṃ sikkhitabbappakāsanena hi sikkhane sati tammūlikāya diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthanipphattiyā saṃsijjhanato. Pakaraṇappayojanānaṃ sādhanasādhiyalakkhaṇo sambandho tannissayadassaneneva dassitoyevāti ayamettha samudāyattho.
By vanditvā ratanattaya, reverence to the Triple Gem is shown; by khuddasikkha, the subject matter is shown by indicating that minor trainings are to be set forth here; and the subject matter is that which is to be stated in meaning by the entire collection. The designation is also shown by this, because it elucidates the name that accords with the meaning. By Samātika, the manner of doing, and also by khuddasikkha, because it reveals the manner of showing minor trainings here. But the purpose is shown here itself by implication, since the accomplishment of visible and future welfare which is rooted in that, is accomplished when there is training by revealing the manner of what should be trained in. The connection characterized by the means of accomplishment and the thing to be accomplished is already shown by the showing of its reliance. Thus, this is the total meaning here.
Ayaṃ panetthāvayavattho – ratanattayaṃ vanditvā khuddasikkhaṃ pavakkhāmīti sambandho. Ratijananaṭṭhena ratanāni, buddhadhammasaṅghānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Atha vā cittīkatādinā kāraṇena ratanāni, buddhādayova ratanāni. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
Now, this is the meaning of the parts: having venerated the Triple Gem, I will speak on the Minor Training, is the connection. Because of generating delight, they are jewels (ratanāni); this is a designation for the Buddha, Dhamma, and Saṅgha. Or else, for reasons such as being adorned, the Buddha and so on are jewels. Thus it was said:
‘‘Cittīkataṃ mahagghañca, atulaṃ dullabhadassanaṃ;
"Adorned, of great value, incomparable, rare to see;
Enjoyed by a noble being, therefore it is called a jewel." (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.33; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.223; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 3; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.226; udā. aṭṭha. 45; mahāni. aṭṭha. 50);
ratanattayaṃ. Vanditvāti tīhi dvārehi namassitvā. ‘‘Tisso imā, bhikkhave, vandanā kāyena vandati, vacasā vandati, manasā vandatī’’ti (a. ni. 3.155) hi vuttaṃ. Tattha viññattiṃ anuppādetvā kevalaṃ ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇavasena manodvāre bahulappavattā kusalacetanā manodvāravandanā. Taṃ taṃ viññattiṃ uppādetvā pana pavattā kāyavacīdvāravandanā. Sikkhitabbāti sikkhā, adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāvasena tisso sikkhā. Sikkhanañcettha yathākkamaṃ sīlādidhammānaṃ saṃvaraṇavasena, ekārammaṇe cittacetasikānaṃ samādhānavasena, ārammaṇajānanalakkhaṇappaṭivedhamaggapātubhāvapāpanavasena ca āsevanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññattha bahuvidhā sikkhā, idha tu saṅkhepanayattā appakādianekatthasambhavepi khudda-saddassa appakatthovettha yuttataroti khuddā appakā sikkhāti khuddasikkhā. Idha pana khuddasikkhāppakāsako gantho tabbohārūpacārato itthiliṅgavasena‘‘khuddasikkhā’’ti vuccati yathā ‘‘varuṇānagara’’nti. Taṃkhuddasikkhaṃ. Pavakkhāmīti kathessāmi.
ratanattayaṃ. Vanditvā: having paid homage through the three doors. For it was said, "There are these three homages, bhikkhus: one pays homage with the body, one pays homage with speech, one pays homage with the mind" (a. ni. 3.155). There, the wholesome volition (kusalacetanā) that arises abundantly at the mind-door merely through recollecting the virtues of the Triple Gem without producing any intimation, is mind-door homage. But those that arise producing that intimation are body- and speech-door homages. Sikkhitabbāti: Sikkhā, three trainings in terms of higher morality, higher mind, and higher wisdom. And here, the training should be seen as cultivating, in accordance, in terms of restraining the states of morality and so on; in terms of concentrating citta and mental factors on one object; and in terms of the arising of the path of penetrating the characteristic of knowing an object. Elsewhere, there is much training, but here, since the method is concise, even with the possibility of many meanings from few and so on, the meaning of 'minor' (khudda) is more appropriate here; thus, minor, few trainings, therefore minor training (khuddasikkhā). Here, however, the text that proclaims the minor training is called "khuddasikkhā" in the feminine gender, due to conventional usage, just like "Varuṇānagara." That khuddasikkhaṃ. Pavakkhāmī: I will tell.
‘‘ādito upasampannasikkhitabba’’ntiādi.Ādi-saddoyamatthi avayavavacano yathā ‘‘sabbādīni sabbanāmānī’’ti. Atthi apādānavacano yathā ‘‘pabbatādīni khettānī’’ti. Tatthāvayavavācī kammasādhano ‘‘ādiyatītyādī’’ti. Itaro apādānasādhano ‘‘ādiyati etasmātyādī’’ti. Tattha yo avayavavacano, tassedaṃ gahaṇaṃ, tasmā upasampannakkhaṇampi anto katvā ādibhūtā upasampannakkhaṇatoyeva paṭṭhāyāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Eva-saddo panettha sabbavākyānaṃ avadhāraṇaphalattā labbhati. To-paccayo avadhimhiyeva, na ādhāre. Tattha hi topaccaye ādhāre vattamāne ādimhiyeva majjhaantānaṃ avayavabhūte upasampannakkhaṇeyevāti attho bhaveyya, tathā sati avadhāraṇanicchayo niyamoti atthantarattā ādikkhaṇaniyamena majjhādayo nivattiyeyyuṃ. Apādānavacanassāpi gahaṇe avadhibhūto upasampannakkhaṇo nivattiyeyya ‘‘pabbatādīni khettānī’’ti ettha ādibhūtapabbatapariccāgena khettaggahaṇaṃ viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ṭīkāyaṃ pana ādhāratthopi vutto, so yathāvuttadosaṃ nātigacchati. Sabbattha ‘‘ṭīkāya’’nti ca vutte ettheva purāṇaṭīkāyanti gahetabbaṃ.Āditoti iminā idaṃ dīpeti – atidullabhaṃ khaṇasamavāyaṃ labhitvā ālasiyadosena appaṭipajjantehi ca aññāṇadosena aññathā paṭipajjantehi ca ahutvā ādito paṭṭhāya nirantarameva tīsu sikkhāsu sammāpaṭipajjanavasena ādaro janetabboti.
"Ādito upasampanna sikkhitabba"-ntiādi. This word Ādi- has the sense of a part, just like "sabbādīni sabbanāmānī." It has the sense of separation, just like "pabbatādīni khettānī." There, that which has the sense of a part, is instrumental compound: "ādiyatītyādī." The other, instrumental of separation: "ādiyati etasmātyādī." There, that which has the sense of a part, is its meaning, therefore the meaning here should be seen thus: even including the moment of full acceptance (upasampannakkhaṇampi), from the very beginning of the moment that is the origin of full acceptance. Here, the word Eva- is obtained because all sentences have the result of determination. The suffix -to is only in the limit, not in the location. For there, if the suffix -to were occurring in the location, the meaning would be "only in the moment of full acceptance which is the part of the origin itself, middle and end," in that case, since the determination is a certainty and another meaning, the middle and so on would be averted by the rule of the beginning moment. If the meaning of separation is taken, the moment of full acceptance that is the limit would be averted, just like the grasping of fields with the omission of the mountain that is the beginning in "pabbatādīni khettānī." In the commentary, however, the meaning of location is also stated, that does not go beyond the fault spoken as such. Everywhere, when it is said "in the commentary," it should be taken to mean in the old commentary here itself. By Ādito this indicates: having obtained the coincidence of moments that is very difficult to obtain, and not undertaking it due to the fault of laziness, and undertaking it wrongly due to the fault of ignorance, one should generate zeal from the very beginning itself, continuously, by way of properly undertaking the three trainings.
upasampannasikkhitabbaṃ,ekasesanayena upasampannatāsāmaññena vā upasampannāyapi etthevāvirodhoti upasampannena sikkhitabbanti samāso. Nanu adhisīlādayova sikkhitabbā, evaṃ sati kathaṃ pakaraṇaṃ sikkhitabbattena vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso, sikkhāya sikkhitabbatte sati taddīpakaganthassāpi āsevitabbatā āpajjatīti. Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ vattabbavinicchayaṃ sakalampi saṅgahetvā mātikāya ṭhapanato saha mātikāyātisamātikaṃ. Tagguṇasaṃviññāṇoyaṃ bahubbīhi tassa khuddasikkhāsaṅkhātassa aññapadatthassa yo guṇo mātikāsaṅkhātaṃ visesanaṃ, tassa idha viññāyamānattā. Sukheneva hi gahaṇaṃ siyā mātikānusārena taṃ taṃ vinicchayaṃ olokentānaṃ saṃsayāpagamato.
upasampannasikkhitabbaṃ, either generally, through the commonality of being fully ordained (upasampanna), or specifically, meaning that even for one who is fully ordained, there is no contradiction here; thus, the compound "upasampannena sikkhitabbanti" (to be learned by the fully ordained). But aren't the higher trainings (adhisīla), etc., what should be learned? If so, how is it said that this section (pakaraṇaṃ) is to be learned? This is not a fault, because if the training (sikkhā) is to be learned, then the text explaining it should also be cultivated. samātikaṃ means "together with the summary (mātikā)," placing the entire determination of what should be said into the summary for easy grasping. This is a bahubbīhi compound where the quality is known; that quality of the item signified by "minor training" (khuddasikkhā), the attribute of which is the summary (mātikā), is understood here. Indeed, grasping would be easy for those who, by following the summary, examine each determination and dispel doubt.
Mātikāvaṇṇanā
Description of the Summary
‘‘pārājikā ca cattāro’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Etthāha – tīsu sikkhāsu adhisīlasikkhāva kasmā paṭhamaṃ vuttāti? Sabbasikkhānaṃ mūlabhūtattā. ‘‘Sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño, cittaṃ paññañca bhāvaya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.1.9) hi vuttaṃ. Tatrāpi mahāsāvajjattā mūlacchejjavasena pavattanato sabbapaṭhamaṃ jānitabbāti pārājikāva paṭhamaṃ vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Mātikāpadānaṃ pana attho tassa tassa mātikāpadassa niddesavaseneva viññāyatīti na idha visuṃ dassayissāma. Aviññāyamānaṃ pana tattha tattheva pakāsayissāma.
‘‘pārājikā ca cattāro’’tiādi (the four pārājikas, etc.) is the beginning. Here, one might ask: Why is the higher training in morality (adhisīlasikkhā) mentioned first among the three trainings? Because it is the root of all the trainings. For it is said, "Established in morality, the wise person develops mind and wisdom" (saṃ. ni. 1.23; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 2.1.9). And even within that, because they are gravely blameworthy and lead to the cutting of the root (mūlacchejjavasena), the pārājikas should be known first. The giving of the summary verses (mātikāpadānaṃ), however, is understood through the indicative meaning of each summary verse itself, so we will not show it separately here. But what is not understood, we will explain there in each appropriate place.
‘‘pārājikā ca cattāro’’ti paṭhamaṃ mātikāpadaṃ uddhari. Evamuparipi. Idāni pārājikāyo uddisitvā uddiṭṭhapadānukkamena niddesaṃ ārabhanto‘‘garukā navā’’ti dutiyaṃ padaṃ uddharītiādinā yathāyogaṃ vattabbaṃ. Tattha sikkhāpadaṃ atikkamitvā āpattiṃ āpannā puggalā tāya parājayantīti parājiyā. Teyevapārājikāupasaggassa vuddhiṃ katvā ya-kārassa ka-kārakaraṇena. Te pana gaṇanaparicchedavasena cattāroti attho.
‘‘pārājikā ca cattāro’’ti (the four pārājikas) is the first summary verse extracted. Similarly, for the verses following. Now, having designated the pārājikas, beginning the exposition according to the sequence of the designated verses, he extracts the second verse, ‘‘garukā navā’’ti (the nine grave offenses). It should be stated appropriately. There, having transgressed the training rule (sikkhāpadaṃ), individuals are defeated (parājayantīti) by that. Those very ones are pārājikā, by increasing the prefix and changing the ya-kāra to ka-kāra. However, they are four in terms of numerical limitation; this is the meaning.
1. Pārājikaniddesavaṇṇanā
1. Description of the Pārājika Exposition
1-2.Idāni te dassetuṃ‘‘maggattaye’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Evamuparipi yathāyogaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tatthamaggattayeti ettha maggā ca nāma tiṃsa maggā. Manussāmanussatiracchānagatavasena hi tisso itthiyo. Tattha tiracchānagatāya ayaṃ paricchedo –
1-2. Now, to show them, ‘‘maggattaye’’tiādi (in the three paths, etc.) is begun. Similarly, above and below, it should be connected appropriately. There, in maggattaye (in the three paths), "maggā" are the thirty paths. For there are three kinds of women: human, non-human, and animal. There, the limitation for an animal is this:
‘‘Apadānaṃ ahī macchā, dvipadānañca kukkuṭī;
"Footless ones [are] snakes [and] fish, for two-footed ones, a hen;
For four-footed ones, a cat; the object is a pārājika here." (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.55);
‘‘santhatasanthate’’ti. Santhate asanthateti padacchedo. Na santhataṃ asanthataṃ. Tasmiṃasanthate. Na-kāro ettha ‘‘abrāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu viya payirudāse, taṃ kiriyāyuttassa tādisassa aññassa vatthuno vidhānena santhatassa vatthuno payirudāsanaṃ pariccajanaṃ payirudāsoti. Na pasajjappaṭisedhe, santhataṃ pasajja patvā tassa ‘‘brāhmaṇo na bhavissatī’’tiādīsu viya na nisedhoti. Vā-saddo panettha vacanayuttibaleneva labbhati, tassa paliveṭhetvā, anto vā pavesetvā vatthādinā kenaci paṭicchanne vā appaṭicchanne vāti attho. Tathābhūteallokāsepakativātena asamphuṭṭhe tintappadese.Nimittanti aṅgajātaṃ.Santiādi tabbisesanaṃ.Santi attaniyaṃ. Saṃ-saddo hi attani attaniye ca vattati.Santhataṃ asanthatanti yathāvuttanayena paṭicchannaṃ vā appaṭicchannaṃ vā.Upādiṇṇanti anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ. Kittakanti āha‘‘tilamattampī’’ti. Tilassa mattaṃ sākallaṃ yassa taṃtilamattaṃ. ‘‘Mattaṃ sākallaṃ nicchaye’’ti hi nighaṇḍu. Etthāpi avayavena viggaho samudāyo samāsattho, tilabījappamāṇampīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kiṃ taṃ? Nimittaṃ, pavesanaṃ vā.Api-saddo sambhāvane, ‘‘tilabījamattampī’’ti sambhāvīyati, adhike kā nāma kathāti idamettha sambhāvanaṃ, evaṃbhūtaṃsaṃaṅgajātaṃ yathāvutte maggattaye tilamattampi pavesanto bhikkhucutoparibhaṭṭho, pārājiko nāma hoti sāsanatoti viññāyati gammamānatthassa saddassa payogaṃ pati kāmācārattā. Kīdisoti āha‘‘anikkhittasikkho’’ti. Nikkhittasikkho pana abhikkhukattā pariccatto. Tattha nikkhittā ohitā pariccattā paccakkhātā sikkhā etenāti viggaho. Yathālakkhaṇaṃ na nikkhittasikkho anikkhittasikkho. Tattha cittakhettakālappayogapuggalavijānanavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ ñatvā tadabhāvena apaccakkhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
‘‘santhatasanthate’’ti (covered or uncovered). "Santhate asanthateti" is the word division. "Na santhataṃ" is asanthataṃ (uncovered). In that asanthate (uncovered), the "na" here is like in "abrāhmaṇo" (non-brahmin), meaning payirudāsa (excluding), because payirudāsa is the excluding of the covered object by prescribing another such object connected to the action. It is not "pasajjappaṭisedha" (absolute prohibition), like in "santhataṃ pasajja patvā tassa ‘‘brāhmaṇo na bhavissatī’’tiādīsu" (having approached the covered, "he will not become a Brahmin," etc.), so it is not a prohibition. The word "vā" (or) here is obtained by the strength of the expression itself; its meaning is: whether having wrapped around it or having inserted it inside, with the object covered or uncovered by some cloth, etc. In such an allokāse (unobstructed place), in a moist area untouched by the natural wind. Nimittanti (sign) means the genital organ. Santiādi (his own, etc.) is its attribute. Santi (his own) means belonging to oneself. For the word "saṃ" applies to oneself and what belongs to oneself. Santhataṃ asanthatanti (covered or uncovered) means covered or uncovered in the way stated above. Upādiṇṇanti (having touched) means non-obstructing lust. How much? He says, ‘‘tilamattampī’’ti (even the size of a sesame seed). Tilamattaṃ (the size of a sesame seed) is that of which the measure (mattaṃ) is entirety (sākallaṃ). For in the glossary it says, "Mattaṃ sākallaṃ nicchaye" (measure is entirety, certainty). Here too, the meaning of the compound is a whole with a part-by-part analysis; it is said to be even the amount of a sesame seed. What is that? The sign, or the insertion. The word Api (even) is for possibility; "even the size of a sesame seed" is considered possible; what need to speak of more? This is the consideration here. A monk who, in the three paths mentioned, inserts even such a saṃ (his own) genital organ is cuto (fallen), defeated, called a pārājika, it is understood, because of the freedom of usage of a word whose meaning is understood with reference to the word's application. What kind? He says, ‘‘anikkhittasikkho’’ti (one who has not renounced the training). But one who has renounced the training is abandoned because he is no longer a bhikkhu. There, the explanation is that the training is renounced, abandoned, rejected by him. Yathālakkhaṇaṃ na nikkhittasikkho anikkhittasikkho (one who has not renounced the training according to the characteristics is one who has not renounced the training). There, the renunciation of the training should be known by distinguishing in terms of mind, basis, time, effort, and person, and the non-renunciation by the absence of that.
cittaṃnāma. ‘‘Buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādīni ‘‘gihīti maṃ dhārehi, upāsako, ārāmiko, sāmaṇeroti maṃ dhārehī’’ti ‘‘alaṃ me buddhenā’’tiādīni cha khettapadānikhettaṃnāma. ‘‘Paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā vutto vattamānakāloyevakālonāma. Yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vasena vācasikappayogovapayogonāma. Anummattādiko paccakkhāto ca manussajātiko sovapuggalonāma. Paccakkhātakassa vacanasamanantarameva ‘‘ayaṃ ukkaṇṭhito’’ti vā ‘‘gihibhāvaṃ patthayatī’’ti vā sotuno jānanaṃvijānanaṃnāmāti veditabbaṃ.
cittaṃnāma (mind) is "I renounce the Buddha," etc., or "Hold me as a householder, as a lay follower, as a gardener, as a novice," or "Enough of the Buddha for me," etc. The six terms of basis are khettaṃnāma (basis). The present time expressed by "I renounce," etc. is kālonāma (time). The verbal effort by way of any language is payogonāma (effort). The person who renounces, such as an insane person, and who is of human birth, is puggalonāma (person). The hearer's knowing immediately upon the renouncer's statement, "This one is disgusted" or "He desires the state of a householder," is known as vijānanaṃnāmāti (cognizance).
Tattha naṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ pana piḷakaṃ vā cammakhilaṃ vā lomaṃ vā pavesantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Akkhināsakaṇṇacchiddavatthikosesu, satthakādīhi katavaṇe vā methunarāgena nimittaṃ pavesantassa thullaccayaṃ. Avasesasarīresu upakacchakādīsu dukkaṭaṃ. Tiracchānagatānaṃ hatthiassagogadrabhaoṭṭhamahiṃsādīnaṃ nāsāya thullaccayaṃ, vatthikose thullaccayameva. Sabbesampi tiracchānagatānaṃ akkhikaṇṇavaṇesu dukkaṭaṃ. Tathā avasesasarīre kāyasaṃsaggarāgena, methunarāgena vā jīvamānakapurisassa vatthikosaṃ appavesanto nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, dukkaṭaṃ. Bahi nikkhantadantesu vāyamantassa pana thullaccayanti ayamettha savinicchayo atthavaṇṇanakkamo.
There, for one inserting lustfully into a non-obstructing lust, such as a pimple, a wart, or a hair, the offense is dukkaṭa. For one inserting a sign with lustful desire for intercourse into the eye, nose, ear-hole, bladder, or a wound made by a knife, etc., the offense is thullaccaya. In the remaining bodies, such as the armpit, etc., the offense is dukkaṭa. For animals such as elephants, horses, cows, donkeys, camels, buffaloes, etc., the offense is thullaccaya in the nose, and only thullaccaya in the bladder. For all animals, the offense is dukkaṭa in the eye, ear, and wounds. Similarly, in the remaining body, touching a living man's bladder with a sign with lustful bodily contact or lustful desire for intercourse, without inserting it, the offense is dukkaṭa. But for one attempting to insert it into teeth that have come out, the offense is thullaccaya. This here is the order of the description of the meaning along with its determination.
‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthaatha vāti ayaṃ nipāto, nipātasamudāyo vā pakkhantarārambhe. Pavesanañca ṭhitañca uddhāro ca paviṭṭhañcapavesana…pe… paviṭṭhāni,itarītarayogadvando. Itarītarayogo nāma aññamaññatthopādānatāti pavesanādīni ṭhitādiatthānipi hontītipaviṭṭha-saddopi pavesanādiattho hoti, tatoyevettha tasmā bahuvacanasambhavo. Aññathā dvande avayavatthapadhānattā ekatthavācakāpi paviṭṭha-saddā kathaṃ bahuvacanappasaṅgo. Samāhāre vā dvando.Khaṇoti kālaviseso. So ca yogavantānaṃ khaṇantaravinimutto natthīti pavesana…pe…paviṭṭhāniyeva khaṇoti kammadhārayo, abhede bhedaparikappanāya vā pavesana…pe… paviṭṭhānaṃ khaṇoti chaṭṭhītappuriso. Tassa sādako, tasmiṃ vā sādakopavesana…pe… sādako. Khaṇa-saddo panettha paccekaṃ yojetabbo dvandasamāsattā, pavesanakālaṃ ṭhitakālaṃ uddhārakālaṃ paviṭṭhakālaṃ, tasmiṃ vā sādiyantoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Evaṃ sevanacittapaccupaṭṭhānena sādako bhikkhu cutoti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha yathāvuttappadesassa antokaraṇaṃpavesanaṃnāma. Yāva uddharaṇārambhā nivattaṃṭhitaṃnāma.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.58) pana mātugāmassa sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ patvā sabbathā vāyamato oramitvā ṭhitakālaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhisamaye’’ti vuttaṃ. Yāva aggā nīharaṇaṃuddhāronāma. Yāva pavesanārahaṭṭhānā antokataṃpaviṭṭhaṃnāma.
‘‘atha vā’’tiādi (or rather, etc.) is said. There, atha vā (or rather) is a particle, or a collection of particles, at the beginning of an alternative view. pavesana…pe… paviṭṭhāni (insertion… penetration… entered) means insertion, and so on, and entered. This is an "itarītarayogadvando" compound. "Itarītarayogo" means implying each other's meaning, so "pavesana" (insertion) etc. have the meanings of "ṭhita" (remaining) etc., therefore, the word paviṭṭha (entered) also has the meaning of "pavesana" (insertion) etc.; that is why there is the possibility of the plural here. Otherwise, in a dvanda compound, because the meaning of the constituent parts is primary, how could the word "paviṭṭha" (entered), even though it has a single meaning, have the possibility of being plural? Or it is a dvanda in the sense of a collective. Khaṇoti (a moment) means a specific time. And since there is no moment free from yogis, pavesana…pe…paviṭṭhāniyeva khaṇoti (insertion…penetration…entered is indeed a moment) is a karmadhāraya compound, or by imagining distinction in non-distinction, pavesana…pe… paviṭṭhānaṃ khaṇoti (a moment of insertion… penetration… entered) is a chaṭṭhī-tatpurisa compound. pavesana…pe… sādako (accomplishing insertion… penetration… entered) means accomplishing it, or accomplishing it in that. The word Khaṇa (moment) should be connected to each one individually, because it is a dvanda compound: the moment of insertion, the moment of remaining, the moment of withdrawal, the moment of penetration, or accomplishing it in that; thus, the meaning should be seen here. Thus, a monk accomplishing it through cultivating mind and attention is fallen, it should be connected. There, the action of bringing inside to the aforementioned area is called pavesanaṃnāma (insertion). Remaining unmoving until the beginning of withdrawal is called ṭhitaṃnāma (remaining). In the Aṭṭhakathā(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.58), however, with reference to the time of remaining after reaching the ejaculation of the mother-being, striving in every way and descending, it is said "at the time of ejaculation." Carrying out to the very end is called uddhāronāma (withdrawal). What has been brought inside from the place fit for insertion is called paviṭṭhaṃnāma (penetration).
Paṭhamaṃ.
First.
3-4.Idāni dutiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ādiyeyyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha adinnaṃ theyyacittena ādiyeyya…pe… saṅketaṃ vītināmaye, pārājiko bhaveti sambandho.Adinnanti manussasāmikehi kāyavācāhi na dinnaṃ.Theyyacittenāti thenoti coro, tassa bhāvo theyyaṃ na-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā dvittena. Bhavanti etasmā abhidhānabuddhīti bhāvo, saddappavattinimittaṃ jātiguṇādi. Idha pana avaharaṇacittasaṅkhātaṃ dabbaṃ theyyaṃ. Theyyañca taṃ cittañcāti theyyacittaṃ, tena.Ādiyeyyāti ārāmādiṃ abhiyuñjitvā gaṇheyya.Hareyyāti haranto gaṇheyya.Avahareyyāti upanikkhittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘dehi me bhaṇḍa’’nti vuccamāno ‘‘na mayā gahita’’ntiādīni vadanto gaṇheyya.Iriyāpathaṃ kopeyyāti bhaṇḍahārakassa gamanādiiriyāpathaṃ vicchinditvā gaṇheyya. Kopaṃ katvā gaṇhātīti hi etasmiṃ atthe ‘‘kopī’’ti nāmadhātu.Ṭhānā cāveyyāti ṭhapitaṭṭhānato cāveyya.Saṅketaṃ vītināmayeti parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ vā suṅkaghātaṃ vā atikkāmeyya.
3-4. Now, to show the second, he says ‘‘ādiyeyyā’’tiādi (if he should take, etc.). There, the connection is that if he should take what is not given with the thought of theft…penetration…if he should transgress the agreement, he is pārājika. Adinnanti (what is not given) means what is not given by human owners through body and speech. Theyyacittenāti (with the thought of theft) means thenoti (a thief), his state is theyyaṃ (theft), by changing the na-kāra to ya-kāra with duplication. "Bhavanti etasmā abhidhānabuddhīti bhāvo" (states arise from this that give rise to understanding), that is bhāvo (state), the cause for the application of a word, such as class, quality, etc. Here, however, the object consisting of the thought of misappropriation is theyyaṃ (theft). Theyyañca taṃ cittañcāti theyyacittaṃ (theft and that is thought), by that. Ādiyeyyāti (if he should take) means he should take after attacking a monastery, etc. Hareyyāti (if he should carry off) means he should take while carrying off. Avahareyyāti (if he should misappropriate) means when being told "give me the goods" regarding deposited goods, he should take while saying "I did not take them," etc. Iriyāpathaṃ kopeyyāti (if he should disturb the deportment) means he should take after interrupting the deportment, such as walking, etc., of the one carrying the goods. For in this meaning, "kopī" is a nominal verb. Ṭhānā cāveyyāti (if he should move from the place) means he should move from the place where it was placed. Saṅketaṃ vītināmayeti (if he should transgress the agreement) means he should go beyond the stipulated place or customs barrier.
Ettha ca ārāmādiabhiyuñjane, sāmikassa vimatuppādanadhuranikkhepe, bhaṇḍahārakassa sīsabhārāmasanaphandāpanakhandhoropane, upanikkhitte ‘‘dehi me bhaṇḍa’’nti codiyamānassa ‘‘nāhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti bhaṇanavimatuppādanadhuranikkhepe, thalaṭṭhassa theyyacittenāmasanaphandāpanaṭhānācāvane cāti catūsu paccekaṃ yathākkamaṃ dukkaṭathullaccayapārājikāyo veditabbā. ‘‘Sahabhaṇḍahārakaṃ nessāmī’’ti paṭhamadutiyapādasaṅkāmane, parikappitasuṅkaghātaṭṭhānato paṭhamadutiyapādātikkāme cāti dvīsu paccekaṃ kamena thullaccayapārājikāyo veditabbā. Ayamettha saviññāṇakāviññāṇakamissakattā nānābhaṇḍavasena yojanā. Ekabhaṇḍavasena pana sassāmikassa dāsassa vā tiracchānagatassa vā yathāvuttena abhiyogādinā nayena ādiyanaharaṇādivasena yojanā daṭṭhabbā.
And here, in each of the four cases—attacking a monastery, etc.; carelessly abandoning the responsibility of creating disagreement for the owner; dropping the head-load, shoulder-seat, or carrying-pole of the one carrying the goods; and carelessly abandoning the responsibility of creating disagreement for the one being asked "give me the goods" regarding deposited goods—the offenses of dukkaṭa, thullaccaya, and pārājika should be known respectively. In the two cases—intending to carry away along with the goods carrier at the first and second steps; and transgressing the stipulated customs barrier location at the first and second steps—the offenses of thullaccaya and pārājika should be known respectively, in order. Here, this is a combination of the conscious, the unconscious, and the mixed, due to the variety of goods. However, based on a single item, the connection should be seen in terms of taking, carrying off, etc., in the manner stated, with the method of attacking, etc., a slave or an animal belonging to an owner.
Apica imāni cha padāni vaṇṇayantena nānābhaṇḍaekabhaṇḍasāhatthikapubbappayogatheyyāvahārasaṅkhāte pañcapañcake samodhānetvā pañcavīsati avahārā dassetabbā chappadantogadhattā sabbesampi avahārānaṃ. Te pana avahārā yena kenaci abhiyogādiākāranānattamattena bhinnāti taṃvasena pañcapañcakaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇitañhi idaṃ adinnādānapārājikaṃ suvaṇṇitaṃ nāma hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha purimāni dve pañcakāni ‘‘ādiyeyyā’’tiādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ padānaṃ vasena labbhanti. Yaṃ panetaṃ ‘‘saṅketaṃ vītināmaye’’ti chaṭṭhaṃ padaṃ, taṃ tatiyapañcamesu pañcakesu nissaggiyaparikappāvahāravasena yojetabbaṃ.
Moreover, by describing these six verses, one should demonstrate twenty-five actions, combining them into the five-by-five groups known as the five forms of theft: direct action, prior arrangement, misappropriation, taking what is not given, due to all the actions being included within the six verses. However, those actions are distinguished only by the variety of the forms of attacking, etc., and because of that, the term "five-by-five" is used. Indeed, this pārājika of taking what is not given, when well described in this way, is considered to be well explained. The first two groups of five are obtained based on the five verses beginning with "ādiyeyyā" (if he should take), etc. But this sixth verse, "saṅketaṃ vītināmaye" (if he should transgress the agreement), should be connected to the third and fifth groups of five in terms of relinquishment and stipulated behavior.
sāhatthikapañcakaṃ. Evamuparipi. Taṃ pana sāhatthiko āṇattiko nissaggiyo atthasādhako dhuranikkhepo cāti. Tattha sako hattho sahattho, sahatthena nibbattosāhatthiko. Evaṃāṇattiko. Suṅkaghātaparikappitokāsānaṃ anto ṭhatvā bahi nissajjanaṃ nissaggo, so evanissaggiyo. Kālaṃ aniyametvā āṇattassa bhaṇḍaggahaṇato ca parassa telakumbhiyā pādagghanakaṃ telaṃ avassaṃ pivanakānaṃ upāhanādīnaṃ nikkhittānaṃ telapātanato ca puretarameva pārājikasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ sādhetītiatthasādhako. So pana āṇāpanappayogo, upāhanādīnaṃ nikkhepappayogo ca. Ārāmābhiyoge ca upanikkhittabhaṇḍe ca tāvakālikabhaṇḍadeyyānamadāne ca dhurassa nikkhepodhuranikkhepo.
sāhatthikapañcakaṃ (the group of five by direct action). Similarly, above and below. That is sāhatthiko (direct action), āṇattiko (commanded action), nissaggiyo (relinquished action), atthasādhako (accomplishing the purpose), and dhuranikkhepo (carelessly abandoning the responsibility). There, "sako hattho sahattho" (one's own hand is direct action), what is accomplished by direct action is sāhatthiko. Similarly, āṇattiko. The action of releasing outside from inside places stipulated as customs barriers is relinquishment (nissaggo), that very one is nissaggiyo. Because it accomplishes a matter consisting of a pārājika sooner than the taking of goods commanded without setting a time, and from the dripping of oil from deposited footwear, etc., for those who must drink oil from a pot of oil, it is atthasādhako. That is the effort of commanding, and the effort of depositing footwear, etc. And the carelessly abandoning of responsibility is dhuranikkhepo in attacking a monastery, in goods deposited, and in not giving goods that are to be given temporarily.
pubbappayogonāma. Ṭhānācāvanakhilasaṅkāmanappayogena saha vattamānosahappayogo. Saṃvidhāya sammantayitvā gatesu ekenāpi bhaṇḍe ṭhānā cāvite sabbesaṃ avahārosaṃvidhāvahāro. Saṅketakammanti pubbaṇhādikālaparicchedavasena sañjānanakaraṇaṃ.Nimittakammaṃnāma saññuppādanatthaṃ akkhinikhaṇanādikaraṇaṃ.
pubbappayogonāma (prior arrangement) means sahappayogo (simultaneous effort) occurring with the effort of moving from the place and shaking. After agreeing and consenting, the misappropriation for all when even one person moves the goods from the place is saṃvidhāvahāro. Saṅketakammaṃ (sign action) means making an agreement by means of setting a time, such as forenoon, etc. Nimittakammaṃnāma (omen action) means doing something like winking the eyes for the purpose of producing a sign.
‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Nanu ca chappadantogadhattā ‘‘sabbesampi avahārāna’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati ‘‘atha vā’’ti pakkhantaravasena visuṃ viya idaṃ pañcakaṃ kasmā vuttanti? Nanu avocumhā ‘‘yena kenaci abhiyogādiākāranānattamattena bhinnā’’ti, etādisassa bhedassa sambhavato pakkhantaravasenāpi yujjatīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Imassa pañcakassa visuṃ uddharitvā vacanaṃ pana pasiddhivasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, kusa-saddena kusasaṅkāmanamadhippetaṃ abhedopacārena. Theyyañca balañca kuso ca channañca parikappo catheyyā…pe… parikappaṃ,dīgho sandhivasena. Tena avahārako pārājiko bhaveti sambandho. Yo pana paṭicchannena avahārako, so atthato paṭicchannassa avahārako hotīti dvandasamāsantogadhattepicassa virodhābhāvobhāvasādhano cāyaṃ channa-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Tattha sandhicchedanādīni katvā vā tulākūṭamānakūṭakahāpaṇakūṭādīhi vañcetvā vā gaṇhantotheyyāvahārako. Balakkārena parasantakaṃ gaṇhantobalāvahārako. Kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā gaṇhantokusāvahārako. Tiṇapaṇṇādīhi yaṃ kiñci paṭicchādetvā pacchā kassa paṭicchannassa avahārakopaṭicchannāvahārako. Sāṭakādibhaṇḍavasena, gabbhadvārādiokāsavasena vā parikappetvā gaṇhantoparikappāvahārako. Ettha pana parikappitabhaṇḍaggahaṇe parikappitaparicchedātikkame ca pārājikaṃ veditabbaṃ.
"Atha vā" etc., he said beginning thus. But indeed, concerning the appropriation of six, it was said, "for all kinds of appropriation," so, that being the case, why is this group of five stated separately as if by an alternative method with “atha vā”? If you say that, we have said, "different merely by a variety of means of accusation, etc." Such a distinction being possible, it is fitting even by way of an alternative method, thus it was said. But the statement of this group of five, having extracted it separately, should be regarded as by way of common knowledge, with the word kusa implying kusasaṅkāmana (deceitful transaction), by way of treating it as non-different. Theyyañca balañca kuso ca channañca parikappo ca…pe… parikappaṃ (Theft, force, deceit, concealment, and pretense...etc...pretense), is lengthy by way of euphonic conjunction. Therefore, the connection is that the appropriator becomes pārājika. But whoever appropriates with concealment, he is, in effect, an appropriator of what is concealed. The word channa should be regarded as a means of existence, because there is no contradiction of the suffix inherent in the compound. There, either by making cuts in a boundary marker, etc., or by deceiving with false scales, false measures, counterfeit coins, etc., one who takes is a theyyāvahārako (stealthily appropriating person). One who takes the property of another by force is a balāvahārako (forcibly appropriating person). One who takes by switching merchandise is a kusāvahārako (deceitfully appropriating person). One who conceals something with grass, leaves, etc., and later appropriates what was concealed is a paṭicchannāvahārako (covertly appropriating person). One who appropriates by pretense with goods like robes, or by pretense through openings like a doorway into a storehouse is a parikappāvahārako (pretentiously appropriating person). Here, however, in the appropriation of prearranged goods and in exceeding the prearranged limit, the pārājika is to be understood.
‘‘bhaṇḍakālagghadesehī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettha adinnādāne bhaṇḍañca kālo ca aggho ca deso ca tehi ca paribhogena ca vinicchayo kātabboti attho. Tattha avahaṭabhaṇḍassa sassāmikassāmikabhāvaṃ sassāmikepi sāmikānaṃ sālayanirālayabhāvañca upaparikkhitvā sālayakāle ce avahaṭaṃ, bhaṇḍaṃ agghāpetvā kātabbo vinicchayobhaṇḍena vinicchayo. Nirālayakāle ce avahaṭaṃ, pārājikaṃ natthi, sāmikesu puna āharāpentesu dātabbaṃ. Tadeva hi bhaṇḍaṃ kadāci mahagghaṃ, kadāci appagghaṃ, tasmā yasmiṃ kāle bhaṇḍaṃ avahaṭaṃ, tasmiṃyeva kāle yo tassa aggho, tena kātabbo vinicchayokālena vinicchayo. Navabhaṇḍassa yo aggho, so pacchā parihāyati, tasmā sabbadā pakatiagghavasena akatvā kātabbo vinicchayoagghena vinicchayo. Bhaṇḍuṭṭhānadese bhaṇḍaṃ appagghaṃ hoti, aññattha mahagghaṃ, tasmā yasmiṃ dese bhaṇḍaṃ avahaṭaṃ, tasmiṃyeva dese agghena kātabbo vinicchayodesena vinicchayo. Paribhogena sāṭakādino bhaṇḍassa aggho parihāyati, tasmā tassa paribhogavasena parihīnāparihīnabhāvaṃ upaparikkhitvā kātabbo vinicchayoparibhogena vinicchayo.
"Bhaṇḍakālagghadesehī" etc. was said. Here, in taking what is not given, a decision should be made by means of the goods, the time, the value, the place, and also by means of the use. There, having examined the ownership of the appropriated goods, and the presence or absence of owners even if there are owners, if it was appropriated during a time when there are owners, a decision must be made by evaluating the goods, this is bhaṇḍena vinicchayo (decision by means of the goods). If it was appropriated during a time when there are no owners, there is no pārājika; if the owners make a claim again, it must be given back. That same item is sometimes of great value, sometimes of little value; therefore, at whatever time the item was appropriated, the value that it had at that time, a decision should be made by that, this is kālena vinicchayo (decision by means of the time). The value of a new item decreases later, therefore a decision should always be made without regard to the original value, this is agghena vinicchayo (decision by means of the value). In the place where the item originates, the item is of little value, elsewhere it is of great value; therefore, in whatever place the item was appropriated, a decision should be made by the value in that same place, this is desena vinicchayo (decision by means of the place). By use, the value of an item such as a robe decreases; therefore, having examined whether its value has decreased or not decreased by means of its use, a decision should be made, this is paribhogena vinicchayo (decision by means of the use).
Dutiyaṃ.
Second.
5-7.Idāni tatiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘manussaviggaha’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthamanussaviggahaṃkalalato paṭṭhāya jīvamānakamanussajātikānaṃ sarīraṃ.Ciccapāṇoti saññāya saddhiṃyeva ‘‘vadhāmi na’’nti vadhakacetanāya cetetvā pakappetvā.Jīvitā vā viyojayeti yo bhikkhu jātiuṇṇaṃsunā samuddhaṭatelabindumattaṃ kalalarūpakāle tāpanādīhi vā tato vā uddhamapi tadanurūpena upakkamena rūpajīvitindriyopakkame sati tadāyattavuttino arūpajīvitassāpi voropanasambhavato ubhayajīvitā voropeyya.Vā-saddo vikappe.Maraṇacetanoti maraṇe cetanā yassa so maraṇādhippāyo.Satthahārakanti jīvitaṃ haratīti hārakaṃ, satthañca taṃ hārakañcāti satthahārakaṃ, taṃ.Assamanussaviggahassa.Upanikkhipeti samīpe nikkhipeyya vā. Etena thāvarappayogaṃ dasseti.Gāheyya maraṇūpāyanti ‘‘satthaṃ vā āhara, visaṃ vā khādā’’tiādinā nayena maraṇatthāya upāyaṃ gāhāpeyya vā. Etena āṇattippayogo dassito.Vadeyya maraṇe guṇanti kāyavācādūtalekhāhi ‘‘yo evaṃ marati, so dhanaṃ vā labhatī’’tiādinā nayena maraṇe guṇaṃ pakāseyya vā. Ubhayattha adhikāravasena vā-saddo āharitabbo. So bhikkhu cutoti sambandho, sāsanatoti viññāyati.
5-7.Now, to show the third, he began with "manussaviggaha" etc. There, manussaviggahaṃ (human body) means the body of human beings living from the stage of the kalala (embryo) onwards. Cicca (having considered), means having thought about and decided with the intention, "Shall I kill or not?", along with perception. Jīvitā vā viyojaye (should deprive of life), means that the bhikkhu should deprive of both lives, since when there is an attempt to destroy the life faculty of form, even from the kalala stage, which is the size of a drop of oil lifted with a tip of wool, or even from later than that, by an action appropriate to it, the destruction of the life of the immaterial which depends on that is possible. The word vā (or) is for alternation. Maraṇacetano (with intention of death) means one whose intention is death, one who has death as his aim. Satthahārakaṃ (carrier of a weapon) means that which takes away life is hāraka, and a weapon and also a taker is satthahāraka, that. Assa (of this), of this human body. Upanikkhipe (should place nearby) means should place nearby. By this he shows a fixed effort. Gāheyya maraṇūpāyaṃ (should induce to use a means of death) means should induce to use a means for the purpose of death, by means of methods such as "Take a weapon or eat poison," etc. By this, he shows a command effort. Vadeyya maraṇe guṇaṃ (should speak in praise of death) means should declare the praise of death by bodily, verbal, or written messages, by methods such as "Whoever dies like this will obtain wealth," etc. In both places the word vā should be brought in according to what is appropriate. So bhikkhu cutoti sambandho (that bhikkhu is expelled), it is known from the Teaching.
‘‘payogā’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāhatthi…pe… iddhivijjāmayā payogāti ime cha payogāti sambandho. Ka-kāralopena panettha‘‘sāhatthī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā anekatthe anekataddhitasambhavena sahatthassāyaṃ payogo sāhatthīti padasiddhi veditabbā. Sāhatthi ca nissaggo ca āṇatti ca thāvaro cāti dvando. Iddhi ca vijjā ca, tāsamimetiiddhivijjāmayā,iddhimayo vijjāmayoti vuttaṃ hoti.Payogāti ime chappayogā nāma hontīti attho. Tattha sayaṃ mārentassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā paharaṇaṃsāhatthikopayogo. Dūre ṭhitaṃ māretukāmassa kāyādīhi ususattiādīnaṃ nissajjanaṃnissaggo. ‘‘Asukaṃ nāma mārehī’’tiādinā āṇāpentassa āṇāpanaṃāṇatti,opātakhaṇanaṃ apassenasaṃvidhānaṃ asiādīnaṃ upanikkhipanādithāvaro. Māraṇatthaṃ kammavipākajāya iddhiyā payojanaṃiddhimayo. Kammavipākajiddhi ca nāmesā rājādīnaṃ rājiddhiādayo. Tattha piturañño sīhaḷindassa dāṭhākoṭanena cūḷasumanakuṭumbiyamāraṇe rājiddhi daṭṭhabbā, tadatthameva athabbaṇādivijjāya parijappanaṃvijjāmayopayogo.
"Payogā" etc., he said. There, sāhatthi…pe… iddhivijjāmayā payogāti (efforts consisting of one's own action...etc...consisting of psychic power and knowledge) these six are efforts, this is the connection. Here, with the elision of the ka-sound, "sāhatthī" has been said. Or else, the accomplishment of the word sāhatthī should be understood as: this effort is of one's own hand (sahattha) by the possibility of the varied taddhita in the sense of variety. Sāhatthi ca nissaggo ca āṇatti ca thāvaro cāti (one's own action, emission, command, and fixed) is a dvanda compound. Iddhi ca vijjā ca, tāsamimeti (psychic power and knowledge, consisting of those), iddhivijjāmayā, means consisting of psychic power and consisting of knowledge. Payogā (efforts) means these six are called efforts. There, the striking by one who kills himself, either with his body or with something connected to the body, is a sāhatthiko (effort of one's own action). The emission of arrows, spears, etc., by means of the body, etc., by one who wants to kill someone standing far away is nissaggo (emission). The commanding by one who commands with "Kill so-and-so," etc. is āṇatti (command); digging a pitfall, arranging a concealed place, placing a sword nearby, etc., is thāvaro (fixed). The employment of psychic power born of the fruition of karma for the purpose of killing is iddhimayo (consisting of psychic power). And this psychic power born of the fruition of karma is the royal psychic power, etc., of kings, etc. There, the royal psychic power should be seen in the killing of Cūḷasumanakuṭumbiya by the breaking of a tusk by the king Sihaḷinda, the planning of the Atharvaṇa-knowledge, etc., for that purpose is vijjāmayo (consisting of knowledge) effort.
‘‘kālā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathāvuttaṃ āṇattiṃ niyamenti saṅketavisaṅketatāvasena paricchindantītiāṇattiniyāmakā. Te pana kālo ca vatthu ca āvudhañca iriyāpatho cāti cattāro, tathā kiriyāviseso okāsoti gaṇanaparicchedavasena cha hontīti attho. Tatthakālopubbaṇhādi yobbanādi ca.Vatthumāretabbo satto.Āvudhaṃasiādi.Iriyāpathomāretabbassa gamanādi.Kiriyāvisesovijjhanādi.Okāsogāmādi. Yo hi ‘‘ajja, sve’’ti aniyametvā ‘‘pubbaṇhe mārehī’’ti vutto yadā kadāci pubbaṇhe māreti, natthi visaṅketo. Yo pana ‘‘pubbaṇhe’’ti vutto majjhanhādīsu māreti, visaṅketo hoti, āṇāpakassa anāpatti. Evaṃ kālassa saṅketavisaṅketatāvasena niyāmakatā veditabbā. Imināva nayena vatthuādīsupi vinicchayo veditabboti.
"Kālā" etc. was said. There, āṇattiniyāmakā (determining the command) means those who determine a command that was stated as intended, by way of specification and non-specification. But those, namely, time, object, weapon, posture, these are four, and likewise special action and place, thus there are six by way of delimiting the enumeration. There, kālo (time) is forenoon, etc., and youth, etc. Vatthu (object) is the being to be killed. Āvudhaṃ (weapon) is a sword, etc. Iriyāpatho (posture) is the going, etc., of the one to be killed. Kiriyāviseso (special action) is piercing, etc. Okāso (place) is a village, etc. For if one, not specifying "today" or "tomorrow," is told, "Kill him in the forenoon," if he kills him in the forenoon at any time, there is no non-specification. But if, told "in the forenoon," he kills him in the afternoon, there is non-specification, and no offense for the commander. Thus, the determinative nature of time by way of specification and non-specification should be understood. In this same way, the decision should be understood in object, etc., also.
Tatiyaṃ.
Third.
8-9.Idāni catutthaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘jhānādibheda’’ntiādimāha. Tattha attani nosantaṃ attupanāyikañca paccuppannabhavassitañca aññāpadesarahitañca jhānādibhedaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā vā ekekaṃ katvā vā kāyena vā vācāya vā viññattipathe dīpento nādhimāniko ñāte cuto bhaveti sambandho. Tatthaattanisakasantānenosantaṃanuppannattāyeva avijjamānaṃ, ettha nosantoti atthe tappuriso.Jhānādibhedanti jhānaṃ ādi yassa ‘‘vimokkhasamādhi samāpatti ñāṇadassana maggabhāvanā phalasacchi kiriyākilesappahānavinīvaraṇatācittassa suññāgāre abhiratī’’ti (pārā. 198) vuttassa so jhānādi, sova bhedo visesoti samāso. Taṃ jhānādibhedaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ.Attupanāyikanti ‘‘ayaṃ mayi atthī’’ti ārocanavasena attani upanīyati, ‘‘ahaṃ vā ettha sandissāmī’’ti attā upanīyati ettha dhammeti vā attupanāyiko, jhānādibhedo, taṃ.Paccuppannabhavassitanti paccuppannabhavo nāma idāni vattamāno attabhāvo, tannissitoti samāso, so ca jhānādibhedoyeva, taṃ.
8-9.Now, to show the fourth, he began with "jhānādibheda" etc. There, attani nosantaṃ (not existing in oneself) means not existing in one's own being because it has not arisen; here, nosanta is a tatpurisa compound in the sense of "not existing." Jhānādibhedaṃ (distinction of jhāna etc.) means jhāna etc., of which it was said, "liberation, concentration, attainment, knowledge and vision, path, development, fruition, realization, action, abandonment of defilements, freedom from hindrances, delight of the mind in an empty dwelling" (pārā. 198), that is jhāna etc., that very one is a distinction, a specialty, this is the compound. That distinction of jhāna etc. is a superhuman state. Attupanāyikaṃ (leading to oneself) means that it is led to oneself by way of announcing, "This exists in me," or else oneself is led to this, "I will be seen in this," is attupanāyiko, the distinction of jhāna etc., that. Paccuppannabhavassitaṃ (depending on present existence) means that present existence is the present state of being, depending on that is the compound, and that is the distinction of jhāna etc. only, that.
Aññāpadesarahitanti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasi, so bhikkhu paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjī’’tiādinā (pārā. 220) nayena aññassa apadeso, tena rahito cattoti tappurisasamāso, so rahito tenāti vā bahubbīhi, jhānādibhedova, taṃ.Koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā vāti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjiṃ, paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji’’ntiādinā nayena koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā vā.Ekekaṃ katvā vāti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajjiṃ, dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ samāpajji’’ntiādinā nayena ekekaṃ katvā vā. Ettha ca ekanti ṭhite vicchāyaṃ dvittaṃ. Ettha pana katvāti karaṇakiriyāya ekekavasena bhinnassa jhānādino atthassa sambandhanicchā vicchāti veditabbā.Ṭīkāyaṃpana ‘‘koṭṭhāsaṃ vāti ettha ‘jhānalābhī, vimokkhalābhī, samādhilābhī, samāpattilābhīmhī’ti evamādinā nayena koṭṭhāsato vāti attho’’ti ca ‘‘ekekaṃ vāti ‘paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī, dutiyassa jhānassa lābhīmhī’ti evamādinā nayena ekekaṃ vāti attho’’ti ca vuttaṃ. So pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhakathāyañca avuttakkamoti veditabbo.Kāyena vāti hatthamuddādivasena kāyena vā.Vācāti ettha ya-kāro luttaniddiṭṭho ‘‘alajjitā’’tiādīsu viya.Viññattipatheti kāyavacīviññattīnaṃ gahaṇayogye padese ṭhatvāti ajjhāharitabbaṃ.Dīpentoti ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇena ayaṃ dhammo mayi atthī’’ti pakāsento.Nādhimānikoti appatte pattasaññitāsaṅkhāto adhiko māno, so natthi etassāti nādhimāniko, bhikkhu.Ñāteti viññunā manussajātikena sikkhāpaccakkhāne vuttanayena viññāte sati cuto bhave sāsanatoti viññāyati. Aññāpadesena dīpayato pana thullaccayaṃ. Ettha ca –
Aññāpadesarahitaṃ (devoid of reference to another) means devoid of reference to another in the manner "That bhikkhu who lived in your monastery attained the first jhāna," etc. (pārā. 220), this is a tatpurisa compound, that devoid of reference to another, or else bahubbīhi, that devoid of reference to another, the distinction of jhāna etc. only, that. Koṭṭhāsaṃ katvā vā (having made a division), means having made a division in the manner "I attained the first jhāna, I attained the second jhāna, I attained the first jhāna, I attained the third jhāna," etc. Ekekaṃ katvā vā (having made each one), means having made each one in the manner "I attained the first jhāna, I attained the second jhāna," etc. And here, in the case of "one," there is doubt when it stands as two. Here, however, it should be understood that "having made" implies doubt, namely, a desire for connection with a meaning of jhāna etc. that is distinct by way of being individual. In the Ṭīkā (Subcommentary), however, it was said, "In 'koṭṭhāsaṃ vā,' the meaning is 'by way of division,' in the manner 'I am an attainer of jhāna, I am an attainer of vimokkha, I am an attainer of samādhi, I am an attainer of samāpatti,' etc.," and "In 'ekekaṃ vā,' the meaning is 'by way of each one,' in the manner 'I am an attainer of the first jhāna, I am an attainer of the second jhāna,' etc." That should be understood as not stated in the Pāḷi and the commentary. Kāyena vā (by body), means by body, by way of hand gestures, etc. Vācā (by speech), here the ya-sound is understood as elided, as in "alajjitā," etc. Viññattipathe (in a place suitable for communication), means standing in a place suitable for receiving communications of body and speech; this should be supplied. Dīpento (declaring), means declaring "This and this dhamma exists in me for this and this reason." Nādhimāniko (not an over-estimator), means a bhikkhu who is not an over-estimator, namely, one who has an excessive estimation, reckoned as attaining what has not been attained. Ñāte (when known), means when it is known by an intelligent human being, in the manner stated in the disavowal of training, he is expelled and is known as being excluded from the Teaching. However, for one who declares by reference to another, there is a thullaccaya. And here:
Dukkaṭaṃ paṭhamasseva, sāmantamiti vaṇṇitaṃ;
A duukkaṭa for the first only,
It is described as bordering on it;
But for the remaining three,
A thullaccaya is declared.
Catutthaṃ.
Fourth.
10.Idāni catunnampi cetesamasaṃvāsataṃ abhabbatañca dīpetuṃ‘‘pārājikete’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Ete cattāropārājikāpuggalāyathā purepubbe gihikāle, anupasampannakāle ca viya asaṃvāsāti sambandho. Saha vasanti yasmā sabbepi lajjino etesu kammādīsu na ekopi tato bahiddhā sandissatīti ekakammaṃ ekuddeso samasikkhatāti ime tayo saṃvāsā nāma. Tattha apalokanādikaṃ catubbidhampi saṅghakammaṃ sīmāparicchinnehi pakatattehi bhikkhūhi ekato kattabbatāekakammaṃnāma. Tathā pañcavidhopi pātimokkhuddeso ekato uddisitabbattāekuddesonāma. Paññattaṃ pana sikkhāpadaṃ sabbehipi lajjīpuggalehi samaṃ sikkhitabbabhāvatosamasikkhatānāma. Natthi te saṃvāsā etesantiasaṃvāsā. ‘‘Abhabbā’’tiādīsubhikkhubhāvāyāti tumatthe sampadānavacanaṃ, tasmā yathā sīsacchinno jīvituṃ abhabbo, evaṃ cattārome puggalā bhikkhubhāvāya bhikkhū bhavituṃ abhabbāti attho.
10.Now, to show the non-communion and unsuitability for the four of them, he began with "pārājikete" etc. These four pārājikā (defeated) persons are yathā pure (just as before), namely, as in the former lay life, and at the time of not being fully ordained, are asaṃvāsāti sambandho (not in communion). Saha vasanti yasmā sabbepi lajjino etesu kammādīsu na ekopi tato bahiddhā sandissatīti ekakammaṃ ekuddeso samasikkhatāti (because all the virtuous live together, and not one of them is seen outside of these actions, etc., therefore having one action, one recitation, and common training), these three are called communion. There, the saṃgha action of four kinds, beginning with apalokana, must be done together by bhikkhus of established status within a boundary, this is called ekakammaṃ (having one action). Likewise, the recitation of the pātimokkha of five kinds must be recited together, therefore it is called ekuddeso (having one recitation). However, a training rule that has been laid down must be trained in equally by all virtuous persons, therefore it is called samasikkhatā (having common training). Natthi te saṃvāsā etesanti (they do not have communion), asaṃvāsā (not in communion). "Abhabbā" etc., in bhikkhubhāvāyā (for the state of being a bhikkhu), the dative case is in the sense of tum, therefore, just as one whose head has been cut off is unable to live, so these four persons are unsuitable for the state of being a bhikkhu, they are unable to be bhikkhus, this is the meaning.
11.Idāni pariyāyāṇattīhi sambhavante dassetuṃ‘‘pariyāyo cā’’tiādimāha. Pariyāyo ca āṇatti ca tatiye manussaviggahe labbhatīti sambandho. Tattha kāyādīhi yathāvuttehi ‘‘yo evaṃ marati, so dhanaṃ vā labhatī’’ti evamādiviññāpako byañjanabhūto kāyavacīpayogo pariyāyo. Iminā idaṃ dīpeti – yathā adinnādāne ‘‘ādiyeyyā’’ti (pārā. 92) vuttattā pāriyāyakathāya muccati, na idha evaṃ. ‘‘Saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti (pārā. 172) pariyāyakayāyapi na muccatīti.‘‘Dutiye panā’’tiādīsu attho pākaṭoyeva. Evamuparipi pākaṭamupekkhissāma.
11.Now, to show those that arise by means of a circumlocution and a command, he began with "pariyāyo cā" etc. Pariyāyo ca āṇatti ca (circumlocution and command) are obtainable in the third, the manussaviggaha (human body), this is the connection. There, a bodily or verbal effort, which is expressive and makes known by means of the body, etc., in the manner previously stated, "Whoever dies like this will obtain wealth," etc., is a circumlocution. By this he shows this: just as in taking what is not given, one is freed by speaking circumlocution, since it was said, "should take" (pārā. 92), but it is not like that here; one is not freed even by speaking a circumlocution, since it was said, "should praise" (pārā. 172). "Dutiye panā" etc., the meaning in those is clear. In this way, we will disregard what is clear even further on.
12.Idāni methunadhammādīnaṃ aṅgāni dassetuṃ‘‘sevetū’’tiādimāha.Sevetukāmatācittanti methunaṃ sevetuṃ kāmetīti sevetukāmo, tassa bhāvo nāma taṇhā, tāya sevetukāmatāya sampayuttaṃ cittanti tappuriso.Methunadhammassāti mithunānaṃ itthipurisānaṃ idanti methunaṃ, tameva dhammoti methunadhammo. Idha pana upacāravasena pārājikāpatti methunadhammo nāma. Atha vā methunena jāto dhammo pārājikāpatti methunadhammo, tassa methunadhammassa methunadhammapārājikāpattiyā.Aṅgadvayanti aṅgānaṃ kāraṇānaṃ dvayaṃ.Budhāti vinayadharā viññuno.
12.Now, to show the factors of the methunadhamma (sexual act), etc., he began with "sevetū" etc. Sevetukāmatācittaṃ (mind of desiring to engage) means one who desires to engage in sex is sevetukāmo, the state of that is desire, a mind associated with that desire, this is a tatpurisa compound. Methunadhammassā (of the sexual act) means methuna is that which is between a couple, male and female, that very thing is dhamma, this is methunadhamma. Here, however, by way of convention, the pārājika offense is called methunadhamma. Or else, the dhamma arising from the sexual act, the pārājika offense, is methunadhamma, of that methunadhamma, of the pārājika offense of sexual intercourse. Aṅgadvayaṃ (two factors) means two factors of the causes. Budhā (the wise) means the learned ones who are experts in the Vinaya.
13.Manussasanti manussānaṃ saṃ manussasaṃ, tadāyattavatthukā ca. Etena petatiracchānagatāyattaṃ nivatteti.Tathāsaññīti tathā tādisā saññā tathāsaññā, sā assa atthīti tathāsaññī. Parāyattasaññitā cāti attho. Bhāvappadhānā ime niddesā, bhāvapaccayalopo vā ‘‘buddhe ratana’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 6.3) viya. Evamuparipi īdisesu.Theyyacittanti thenabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ cittañca.Vatthuno garutāti bhaṇḍassa pādaatirekapādārahabhāvena garutā ca. Ūnapañcamāsake vā atirekamāsake vā thullaccayaṃ. Māsake vā ūnamāsake vā dukkaṭaṃ.Avahāroti pañcavīsatiyā avahārānaṃ aññatarena avaharaṇañcāti ime pañcaadinnādānahetuyoadinnādānapārājikāpattiyā aṅgāni.
13. Manussasanti means with a woman, with women, pertaining to humans, and something dependent on that. With this, he excludes what is dependent on a peta or animal. Tathāsaññīti means having such perception, a perception that is such; one who has that is tathāsaññī. It means having perception dependent on another. These are designations where the state is predominant, or there is elision of the state suffix, as in "buddhe ratana" etc. (khu. pā. 6.3). Similarly, understand above in such instances. Theyyacittanti means a mind characterized by thieving. Vatthuno garutāti means the heaviness of the article by being worth more than or equal to a pāda (quarter). Thullaccaya results from less than or an extra māsaka (monetary unit) above five. Dukkaṭa results from a māsaka or less than a māsaka. Avahāroti means taking away by one of the twenty-five ways of taking away. These five are adinnādānahetuyo, the factors for incurring a pārājika offense for stealing.
14.Pāṇo mānussakoti manussajātisambandho pāṇo ca, pāṇoti hi vohārato satto, paramatthato pana jīvitindriyaṃ vuccati.Pāṇasaññitāti pāṇoti saññitā ca, ghātanaṃ ghāto, so eva cetanāghātacetanā,‘‘vadhāmi na’’nti evaṃ pavattā sā ca, taṃsamuṭṭhito sāhatthikādīnaṃ channamaññataropayogoca,tenapayogena maraṇañcātieteyathāvuttāpañca vadhahetuyopāṇaghātāpajjitabbaāpattiyā aṅgānīti attho.
14. Pāṇo mānussakoti means a life connected with the human species, and pāṇa means a being in common parlance, but in the ultimate sense, it is called the life faculty (jīvitindriya). Pāṇasaññitāti means perceiving it as a being. Ghātanaṃ means killing, that very intention is ghātacetanā, the intention arising thus, "I will kill," and one of the six payogo (attempts) beginning with sāhatthika (by one's own hand) arising from that, and death tena (by that) payogena (attempt). These ete (these) five factors as described above are vadhahetuyo (factors for killing) meaning the factors for incurring the offense to be expiated by pāṇaghāta (killing a living being).
15.Attaniasantatāti uttarimanussadhammassa santāne avijjamānatā ca.Pāpamicchatāyārocanāti yā sā ‘‘idhekacco dussīlo samāno ‘sīlavāti maṃ jano jānātū’’tiādinā (vibha. 851) nayena vuttā pāpaicchatāya samannāgatā, tāya uttarimanussadhammassa ārocanā ca.Tassāti yassa āroceti, tassa.Manussajātitāti manussānaṃ jāti yassa, tassa bhāvo manussajātitā, sā ca,naññāpadesoti na aññāpadeso aññāpadesābhāvo ca,tadeva jānananti taṅkhaṇaṃyeva vijānanañcāti imānipañca ettha asantadīpaneasmiṃ santāne avijjamānauttarimanussadhammappakāsananimitte pārājikeaṅgānihetuyoti attho.
15. Attani asantatāti means the non-existence of an extraordinary human quality in one's continuum. Pāpamicchatāyārocanāti means that declaration of an extraordinary human quality, accompanied by a desire for evil, spoken in the manner "Here, someone being immoral, people should recognize me as immoral," etc. (vibha. 851). Tassāti means of the one to whom he declares. Manussajātitāti means the state of belonging to the human species, and naññāpadesoti means the absence of indirect speech, and tadeva jānananti means knowing that very moment. These pañca ettha asantadīpane (five factors here in declaring non-existence) are aṅgāni (factors), meaning the causes for the pārājika regarding the declaration of an extraordinary human quality that does not exist in this continuum.
16.Evaṃ tesamasaṃvāsatābhabbatādīni dassetvā idāni na te cattārova, atha kho santaññepīti te sabbepi samodhānetvā dassento‘‘asādhāraṇā’’tiādimāha. Tatthaasādhāraṇāti pārājikā dhammā adhippetā. Teneva cettha pulliṅganiddeso. Tasmā bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇā pārājikā dhammā cattāro cāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Upacāravasena tu ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikādikā pārājikāpannā pariggayhanti. Tāsu yā avassutā avassutassa manussapurisassa akkhakānaṃ adho jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ kapparānañca upari kāyasaṃsaggaṃ sādiyati, ayaṃubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā. Yā pana aññissā bhikkhuniyā pārājikaṃ paṭicchādeti, sāvajjappaṭicchādikā. Yā ukkhittakaṃ bhikkhuṃ tassā diṭṭhiyā gahaṇavasena anuvattati, sāukkhittānuvattikā. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena tintassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ kāyasaṃsaggatthāya purisassa hatthapāse ṭhānaṃ ṭhatvā sallapanaṃ saṅketagamanaṃ purisassāgamanasādiyanaṃ paṭicchannokāsavavisanaṃ hatthapāse ṭhatvā kāyopasaṃharaṇanti imāni aṭṭha vatthūni yassā avassutāya, sāaṭṭhavatthukānāma.
16. Having shown their incompatibility due to non-association, etc., now, showing that these are not just four, but that there are others as well, combining all of them, he says ‘‘asādhāraṇā’’tiādi (etc.). There, asādhāraṇāti (non-common) means the pārājika dhammas are intended. Therefore, here the designation is in the masculine gender. Thus, the meaning here should be understood as: for nuns, the pārājika dhammas that are non-common with monks are four. However, by way of convention, those who have incurred a pārājika such as ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā etc. are included. Among those, she who, being unrestrained, enjoys bodily contact above the knees and elbows with the genitals of a male human who is unrestrained, is called ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā. She who conceals another nun's pārājika is called vajjappaṭicchādikā. She who follows an expelled monk by accepting his view is called ukkhittānuvattikā. The touching of hands, the grasping of the edge of the outer robe, standing near a man with the intention of bodily contact, conversing while standing, going to a prearranged meeting, enjoying a man's arrival, entering a hidden place, drawing the body near while standing close – these eight factors belong to the unrestrained nun who is called aṭṭhavatthukā.
Abhabbakā ekādasa cāti ettha paṇḍako theyyasaṃvāsako titthiyapakkantako tiracchānagato mātughātako pitughātako arahantaghātako bhikkhunidūsako saṅghabhedako lohituppādako ubhatobyañjanakoti ime abhabbā ekādasa ca. Tesupaṇḍakoti opakkamikanapuṃsakapaṇḍakā ca paṇḍakabhāvapakkhe pakkhapaṇḍako ca idha adhippetā. Āsittausūyapaṇḍakānaṃ pana pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca na vāritā. Theyyasaṃvāsako pana liṅgatthenakādivasena tividho. Tattha sayaṃ pabbajitattā liṅgamattaṃ thenetītiliṅgatthenako. Bhikkhuvassagaṇanādikaṃ saṃvāsaṃ thenetītisaṃvāsatthenako. Sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya evaṃ paṭipajjantepi eseva nayo. Yathāvuttamubhayaṃ thenetītiubhayatthenako. Ṭhapetvā pana imaṃ tividhaṃ –
Abhabbakā ekādasa cāti (and eleven are incapable): here, paṇḍako (eunuch), theyyasaṃvāsako (thief-associate), titthiyapakkantako (gone to a sectarian), tiracchānagato (gone to an animal), mātughātako (mother-killer), pitughātako (father-killer), arahantaghātako (arahant-killer), bhikkhunidūsako (nun-defiler), saṅghabhedako (sangha-divider), lohituppādako (blood-shedder), ubhatobyañjanakoti (hermaphrodite) – these eleven are incapable. Among these, paṇḍakoti (eunuch) means both the opakkamikā-napuṃsaka-paṇḍaka (eunuch due to castration) and the pakkhapaṇḍako (eunuch from birth) are intended here. However, ordination and higher ordination are not prohibited for āsitta-ussūya-paṇḍakas. The theyyasaṃvāsako (thief-associate) is of three types: liṅgatthenakādivasena (in terms of stealing the outward sign). Among them, since he himself has gone forth, he only steals the outward sign, thus liṅgatthenako (outward-sign-thief). He steals the association, such as counting the years of a bhikkhu, thus saṃvāsatthenako (association-thief). Even for one who renounces the training and acts in this way, this is the same method. He steals both as described, thus ubhayatthenako (both-thief). However, setting aside these three types –
Rājadubbhikkhakantāra-rogaveribhayena vā;
Due to royal trouble, famine, wilderness, disease, or fear of enemies;
Or for the purpose of robes or food, whoever here takes up the outward sign.
Saṃvāsaṃ nādhivāseti, yāva so suddhamānaso;
He does not dwell in association, until his mind is pure;
He is not called a thief-associate, until then. (mahāva. aṭṭha. 110; kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā);
Vibbhantā bhikkhunīti gihinivāsananivatthā bhikkhunī ca. Sā hi ettāvatā pārājikā. Mudukā piṭṭhi yassa, so ca. So hi anabhiratiyā pīḷito yadā attano aṅgajātaṃ attano vaccamukhamaggesu paveseti, tadā pārājiko hoti.
Vibbhantā bhikkhunīti (distracted nun) means a nun who has dressed in the attire of a laywoman. Indeed, she is a pārājika to that extent. Mudukā piṭṭhi yassa (one with a soft back), and he too. Indeed, when he is afflicted by displeasure and inserts his organ into his own anus or mouth, then he incurs a pārājika.
17-18.Lambamānamaṅgajātametassātilambī. So yathāvuttesu pavesito pārājiko.Mukhena gaṇhanto aṅgajātaṃ parassa cāti yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa suttassa vā matassa vā aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhāti, so parassa aṅgajātaṃ mukhena gaṇhanto ca.Tatthevābhinisīdantoti yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito tattheva parassa aṅgajāte vaccamaggena abhinisīdati, so cāti ete dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiyā abhāvepi magge maggappavesanahetu methunassa anulomikā cattāro ca.Idhāgatā cattāroti idha khuddasikkhāyaṃ yathāvuttā methunadhammā pārājikādayo cattāro cātisamodhānāpiṇḍīkaraṇavasena catuvīsati pārājikā bhavantīti seso. Ettha ca gāthābandhavasena rassaṃ katvā‘‘parājikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etthāha – mātughātakādayo tatiyaṃ pārājikaṃ āpannā, bhikkhunidūsako, mudupiṭṭhikādayo cattāro ca paṭhamapārājikaṃ āpannā evāti kuto catuvīsatīti? Vuccate – mātughātakādayo hi cattāro idha anupasampannā eva adhippetā. Mudupiṭṭhikādayo cattāro kiñcāpi paṭhamapārājikena saṅgahitā, yasmā pana ekena pariyāyena methunadhammaṃ appaṭisevino honti, tasmā visuṃ vuttāti.
17-18.Lambamānamaṅgajātametassāti lambī (one who has a dangling organ). He, when inserted as described, incurs a pārājika. Mukhena gaṇhanto aṅgajātaṃ parassa cāti (and one who takes another's organ with his mouth) means he who, afflicted by displeasure, takes the organ of another who is sleeping or dead with his mouth. Tatthevābhinisīdantoti (and one who sits right there) means he who, afflicted by displeasure, sits right there on the other's organ with his anus. These two, even in the absence of a two-on-two encounter, and four others that are conducive to sexual intercourse due to the entry of the path into the path. Idhāgatā cattāroti (the four arrived here) means the four sexual dhammas, pārājika etc., as described here in the Khuddasikkhā. Samodhānā (altogether), by way of combination and compilation, there are twenty-four pārājikas, this is the remainder. Here, due to the verse form, it is shortened and said as ‘‘parājikā’’. Here someone might say: those beginning with the killer of one's mother have incurred the third pārājika, and the defiler of a nun, and those four beginning with mudupiṭṭhika (soft-backed one) have incurred the first pārājika, so how are there twenty-four? It is said: indeed, the four beginning with the killer of one's mother are intended here as not yet having higher ordination. Although the four beginning with mudupiṭṭhika are included by the first pārājika, because they do not engage in sexual dhamma in one way, therefore they are stated separately.
Pārājikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Pārājika Section is Concluded.
2. Saṅghādisesaniddesavaṇṇanā
2. Commentary on the Saṅghādisesa Section
19.Vuṭṭhānassa garukattāgarukāti saṅghādisesā vuccanti.Navāti tesaṃ gaṇanaparicchedo. Nanu ‘‘navā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, ‘‘terasā’’ti vattabbanti? Nāyaṃ doso, cirenāpajjitabbe cattāro yāvatatiyake ṭhapetvā vītikkamakkhaṇeyeva āpajjitabbā paṭhamāpattikā vuccantīti. Idāni te dassetuṃ‘‘mocetukāmatā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthasukkassāti āsayadhātunānattato nīlādivasena dasavidhe sukke yassa kassaci sukkassa.Mocetukāmatāti mocetukāmatāya, ya-kāro luttaniddiṭṭho. Iminā pana vacanena mocanassāda muccanassāda muttassādamethunassāda phassassāda kaṇḍuvanassāda dassanassāda nisajjanassāda vācassāda gehasitapema vanabhaṅgiya saṅkhātesu ekādasassādesu ekaṃyeva mocanassādaṃ dasseti.
19.Because of the heaviness of emergence (vuṭṭhāna), they are called garukā (heavy), the saṅghādisesas are called so. Navāti (nine) means the enumeration and limitation of them. Now, why is it said "nine," why not say "thirteen?" This is not a fault, because, setting aside the four that must be incurred for a long time up to the third, the first offenses that are to be incurred only at the moment of transgression are being stated. Now, to show them, ‘‘mocetukāmatā’’tiādi (etc.) is begun. There, sukkassāti (of semen) means of any semen, due to the variety of the seat-element, in ten ways as blue etc. Mocetukāmatāti (desiring to emit) means by the desire to emit, the ya-sound being stated by elision. However, by this statement, he shows only one pleasure of emission (mocanassāda) out of the eleven pleasures, namely, the pleasure of emitting, the pleasure of release, the pleasure of the emitted, the pleasure of sexual intercourse, the pleasure of touch, the pleasure of titillation, the pleasure of seeing, the pleasure of sitting, the pleasure of speech, the pleasure fixed on home, and the pleasure of breaking the forest.
mocanassādo. Muccane attano dhammatāya muccane assādomuccanassādo. Evaṃ sabbattha sattamītappurisena attho daṭṭhabbo. Imehi pana navahi padehi sampayuttaassādasīsena rāgo vutto. Gehanissitesu mātādīsu pemaṃ gehe sitaṃ pemantigehasitapemaṃ,iminā sarūpeneva rāgo vutto. Santhavakaraṇatthāya itthiyā pesitapupphādivanabhaṅgiyaṃ,iminā ca vatthuvasena rāgo vutto. Methunassādopi itthiyā gahaṇappayogena veditabbo. Sabbattheva ca pana cetanānimittupakkamamocane sati visaṅketābhāvo veditabbo.Upakkammahatthādinā nimitte upakkamitvā.Aññatra supinantenāti supinoyeva supinanto ‘‘kammameva kammanto’’tiādīsu viya anta-saddassa tabbhāvavuttittā. Taṃ supinantaṃ vināvimocayaṃsukkaṃ vimocentosamaṇoyo koci bhikkhugarukaṃgarukāpattisaṅkhātaṃ saṅghādisesaṃphusephuseyya, āpajjeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha ca ajjhattarūpabahiddhārūpaubhayarūpaākāsekaṭikampanasaṅkhātesu catūsu upāyesu sati rāgūpatthambhādīsu ca kālesu yena kenaci aṅgajāte kammaññataṃ patte ‘‘ārogyatthāyā’’tiādīsu yena kenaci adhippāyena adhippāyavatthubhūtaṃ yaṃ kiñci sukkaṃ mocanassādacetanāya eva nimitte upakkamma mocento saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjatīti sabbathā adhippāyo daṭṭhabbo.
mocanassādo (pleasure of emission). In emission, the pleasure in emission by its own nature is muccanassādo (pleasure of release). Thus, the meaning should be understood everywhere with the seventh-case-possessive compound. However, with these nine words, craving is stated at the head of the pleasures connected with. Pemaṃ (affection) fixed on those at home such as mother etc. is gehasitapemaṃ (affection fixed on home), by this, craving is stated in its own form. Flowers etc. sent to a woman for the purpose of making acquaintance is vanabhaṅgiyaṃ (breaking the forest), by this, craving is stated by way of the object. The pleasure of sexual intercourse should be understood with the taking and application of a woman. However, in all cases, when there is intention, occasion, and effort, the absence of uncertainty should be understood. Upakkamma (having made an effort), having made an effort at the occasion with the hand etc. Aññatra supinantenāti (except by way of a dream) a dream itself is supinanto, anta-sound having the meaning of identity, as in "kammameva kammanto" etc. Without that supinanta, vimocayaṃ (releasing), releasing semen, samaṇo (ascetic), whatever bhikkhu garukaṃ (heavy), a saṅghādisesa offense by name, phuse (touches), would incur, it is said. Here, if there are four means namely, internal form, external form, both forms, and sky-scratching, and at times of craving support etc., with whatever organ that has attained fitness for action, with whatever intention in mind, with the thought "for the sake of health" etc., by making an effort at the occasion for just any object that is the basis of intention, with the intention of the pleasure of emission alone, he incurs a saṅghādisesa offense, the intention should be understood in every way.
Paṭhamo.
The First.
20.Kāyasaṃsaggarāgavāti kāye saṃsaggo, tasmiṃ rāgo, so assa atthīti vantu, kāyasaṃsaggarāgasamaṅgīti attho. Samaṇo itthisaññīti sambandho.Upakkammāti kāyena vāyamitvā.Manussitthiṃ samphusantoti antamaso lomenapi parāmasanto garukaṃ phuseti yojanā. Manussabhūtā amatā itthīmanussitthī. Tattha ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgavā’’ti iminā mātupemādiṃ, itthiyā gahitamokkhādhippāyañca paṭikkhipati. Itthiyā vematikassa, paṇḍakapurisatiracchānagatasaññissa ca thullaccayaṃ. Itthiyā pana kāyena kāyappaṭibaddhāmasane, kāyappaṭibaddhena kāyāmasane ca yakkhīpetīpaṇḍakānaṃ kāyena kāyāmasane ca purisatiracchānagatitthīnaṃ kāyena kāyāmasanepi dukkaṭaṃ, tathāyakkhīādīnaṃ kāyena kāyappaṭibaddhādīsu ca. Matitthiyā pana thullaccayaṃ. Itthiyā pana phusiyamāno sevanādhippāyopi sace kāyena na vāyamati, anāpatti.
20. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgavāti (due to lust for bodily contact) means contact on the body, lust in that, one who has that is lustful, meaning one who is endowed with lust for bodily contact. Samaṇo itthisaññīti (an ascetic perceiving a woman) is the connection. Upakkammāti (having made an effort), having exerted with the body. Manussitthiṃ samphusantoti (touching a human woman), touching a human woman even with just a hair, is the connection, he touches a garuka offense. A woman who is a human being and not dead is manussitthī. There, "kāyasaṃsaggarāgavā"ti iminā (by this phrase, "due to lust for bodily contact") he rejects motherly affection etc., and the intention of a woman to grant release etc. For one who is doubtful about a woman, or for one who perceives a paṇḍaka-male-animal, the offense is thullaccaya. However, for a woman, when the body touches what is attached to the body, and when what is attached to the body touches the body, and when the body of a yakkha, petī, or paṇḍaka touches the body, and when the body of a male or animal touches the body of a woman, the offense is dukkaṭa. However, the offense is thullaccaya for a dead woman. But if he is being touched by a woman with the intention of service, if he does not exert with the body, there is no offense.
Dutiyo.
The Second.
21.Tathāti itthisaññī.Suṇantinti viññattipathe ṭhatvā attano vacanaṃ suṇantiñca.Viññuñcāti duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullasallakkhaṇasamatthañca manussitthiṃ.Maggaṃ vāti vaccamaggapassāvamaggānaṃ vasena maggaṃ vā methunaṃ vā ārabbhāti sambandho.Duṭṭhullavācārāgenāti duṭṭhā ca sā asaddhammappaṭisaṃyuttatāya thūlā ca lāmakajanasādhāraṇatāyāti duṭṭhullā. Sāva puna vācā duṭṭhullavācā. Tassaṃ assādasampayutto rāgoti samāso, tena.Obhāsitvāti vaṇṇāvaṇṇayācanādivasena asaddhammavacanaṃ vatvā. Asuṇantiyā pana dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocite anāpatti. Tattha dvinnaṃ maggānaṃ vasena vaṇṇāvaṇṇehi, methunayācanādīhi vā ‘‘sikharaṇīsi, sambhinnāsi, ubhatobyañjanakāsī’’ti imesu tīsu aññatarena akkosavacanena vā obhāsantassa saṅghādiseso, adhakkhakaubbhajāṇumaṇḍalaṃ ādissa vaṇṇādibhaṇane thullaccayaṃ, tathā yakkhīpetīpaṇḍakānaṃ vaccamaggapassāvamagge ādissa vaṇṇādibhaṇane methunayācanādīsupi. Tesaṃ pana adhakkhakādike dukkaṭaṃ, tathā manussitthīnaṃ ubbhakkhake adhojāṇumaṇḍale kāyappaṭibaddhe ca.
21.Tathāti (similarly) means perceiving a woman. Suṇantinti (who hear) means those who hear one's words while standing in the path of communication. Viññuñcāti (and intelligent) means an intelligent human woman who is capable of distinguishing between gross and non-gross. Maggaṃ vāti (or the path) the connection is, whether regarding the path in terms of the anus-path or the urine-path, or regarding sexual intercourse. Duṭṭhullavācārāgenāti (due to lust for gross speech) means that speech is both bad due to being connected with non-dhamma, and gross due to being common to base people, thus it is gross. That speech itself is gross speech. The compound is: lust associated with that. Obhāsitvāti (having addressed) means having spoken words of non-dhamma by way of praising, blaming, begging, etc. However, there is no offense if declared to one who does not hear through a messenger or letter. There, for one who addresses with praise or blame in terms of the two paths, or with entreaties for sexual intercourse, or with one of these three abusive words, "You are a sikharaṇī, you are sambhinnā, you are an ubhatobyañjanakāsī" the offense is saṅghādisesa; it is thullaccaya if he speaks praising etc. addressing the lower genitals or the area above the knees; likewise when yakkhas, petīs, or paṇḍakas address praise etc. addressing the anus-path or the urine-path, even in entreaties for sexual intercourse. However, for those, the offense is dukkaṭa regarding the lower genitals etc.; likewise for human women regarding the upper genitals, the area below the knees, and what is attached to the body.
Tatiyo.
The Third.
22.Attakāmupaṭṭhānanti methunadhammasaṅkhātena kāmena upaṭṭhānaṃ kāmupaṭṭhānaṃ. Attano atthāya kāmupaṭṭhānaṃ attakāmupaṭṭhānaṃ. Atha vā kāmīyatīti kāmaṃ, attano kāmaṃ attakāmaṃ, sayaṃ methunarāgavasena patthitanti attho. Attakāmañca taṃ upaṭṭhānañcāti attakāmupaṭṭhānaṃ. Tassa vaṇṇo guṇo, taṃ.Vatvāti ‘‘yadidaṃ kāmupaṭṭhānaṃ nāma, etadaggaṃ upaṭṭhānāna’’nti kāmupaṭṭhāne vaṇṇaṃ antamaso hatthamuddāyapi itthīti saññī pakāsetvāti attho.Vācāti vācāya yakāralopavasena.Methunayuttenāti methunayuttāya, liṅgavipallāsavasena tāya ‘‘arahasi tvaṃ mayhaṃ methunaṃ dhammaṃ dātu’’ntiādikāya methunadhammappaṭisaṃyuttāya vācāya methunayācane methunarāginoti sambandho. Methunerāgo, so assa atthītimethunarāgī,tassa.Garu hotīti garukāpatti hotīti attho.Ma-kāro padasandhikaro. Ettha pana paṇḍake paṇḍakasaññino thullaccayaṃ, tasmiṃyeva itthisaññino dukkaṭaṃ.
22.Attakāmupaṭṭhānanti (personal service for lust) means service for lust, lust by name is kāmupaṭṭhānaṃ (service for lust). Service for lust for one's own sake is attakāmupaṭṭhānaṃ (personal service for lust). Or, what is desired is kāmaṃ (lust), one's own lust is attakāmaṃ (personal lust), meaning desired by oneself through sexual lust. And that personal lust and that service is attakāmupaṭṭhānaṃ (personal service for lust). Its praise or quality, that Vatvāti (having said) means, having declared the praise of service for lust, even with a hand gesture, with the perception of a woman in sexual service, thinking "what is called service for lust, this is the foremost of services." Vācāti (by speech) by way of the elision of the ya-sound. Methunayuttenāti (connected with sexual intercourse), connected with sexual intercourse, by that, by way of the reversal of gender, by that connected with sexual dhamma, like "you are worthy to give me sexual dhamma," the connection is with one lusting for sexual intercourse in the entreaty for sexual dhamma. One who has lust for sexual intercourse is methunarāgī (lusting for sexual intercourse), of him. Garu hotīti (it is heavy) means the offense is a garuka offense. The Ma-sound is a connector of words. Here, the offense is thullaccaya for a paṇḍaka who perceives a paṇḍaka, the offense is dukkaṭa for one who perceives a woman in that same situation.
Catuttho.
The Fourth.
23.Itthiyā vā purisassa vā sandesaṃ paṭiggahetvāti sambandho.Itthiyā vāti ‘‘dasa itthiyo māturakkhitā piturakkhitā’’tiādinā (pārā. 303) ca ‘‘dasa bhariyāyo dhanakkītā chandavāsinī’’tiādinā (pārā. 303) ca vuttāya vīsatividhāya itthiyā vā purisassa vā taṃsambandhavasena tesaṃ mātādīnaṃ vā.Sandesanti itthiyā vā purisena vā ubhinnaṃ mātādīhi vā ‘‘ehi, bhante, itthannāmaṃ itthiṃ vā purisaṃ vā evaṃ bhaṇāhī’’ti vuttaṃ jāyampatibhāvasannissitaṃ sandesavacanaṃ.Paṭiggahetvāti ‘‘sādhū’’ti kāyena vā vācāya vā sampaṭicchitvā.Vīmaṃsitvāti yattha pesito, tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ upaparikkhitvā vā upaparikkhāpetvā vā.Haraṃ paccāti itthī vā puriso vā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchatu vā, mā vā, yehi pesito, tesaṃ paccāharanto vā harāpento vā, jāyampatibhāvo hotu vā, mā vā, akāraṇametaṃ. Imāya tivaṅgasampattiyā saṅghādiseso ca, dvīhi aṅgehi paṇḍake ca aṅgattayenāpi thullaccayaṃ, ekena dukkaṭaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘haraṃ pacchā’’ti vipāṭhaṃ parikappetvā ‘‘pacchā hara’’nti yojenti, taṃ na sundaraṃpaccāti upasaggattā. Padassa upari atthe sajjento pakāsento gacchatīti hiupasaggonāma, tasmā ‘‘pati ā’’ti upasaggānaṃ ‘‘hara’’ntimassa padassa upari bhavitabbanti.
23. "Having accepted a message from a woman or a man" is the connection.Itthiyā vā (from a woman): either from a woman of twenty types as described by "ten women protected by their mother, protected by their father," etc. (pārā. 303) and "ten kinds of wives: those bought with wealth, those living by choice," etc. (pārā. 303), or purisassa vā (from a man): or from a man, in connection with them, or with their mothers, etc.Sandesaṃ (message): a message consisting of words based on the relationship of husband and wife, spoken by a woman or a man, or by the mothers, etc., of both, saying, "Come, venerable sir, speak thus to such-and-such a woman or man."Paṭiggahetvā (having accepted): having agreed with "Very well," either by body or by speech.Vīmaṃsitvā (having investigated): having investigated or caused to be investigated the intention of those to whom he was sent.Haraṃ paccā (carrying back and forth): whether the woman or man agrees with "Very well" or not, carrying back or causing to be carried back to those by whom he was sent; whether there is a relationship of husband and wife or not, this is not a cause. With the completion of these three factors, it is a saṅghādisesa; with two factors, a thullaccaya for a paṇḍaka (eunuch); and with one factor, a dukkaṭa. Some, however, imagining a different reading as "haraṃ pacchā," interpret it as "pacchā hara" (carry later), but that is not correct, because paccā is a prefix. For upasaggo (prefix) is so called because it goes along, attaching and clarifying the meaning above the word; therefore, the prefixes "pati" and "ā" should come above the final word "hara."
Pañcamo.
Fifth.
24.Saṃyācitaparikkhāranti saṃ attanā yācito vāsiādiko parikkhāro yassā, taṃ.Adesitavatthukanti uttidutiyakammena adesitaṃ vatthu kuṭikaraṇappadeso yassāti viggaho, taṃ.Pamāṇātikkantanti idāni majjhimassa purisassa tisso vidatthiyo sugatavidatthi nāma, tāya ‘‘dīghaso dvādasa vidatthiyo sugatassa vidatthiyā tiriyaṃ sattantarā’’ti (pārā. 348) evaṃ vuttappamāṇaṃ ekatobhāgenāpi atikkantā pamāṇātikkantāti taṃ tiriyaṃ catuhatthasaṅkhātaheṭṭhimappamāṇe sati dīghato vuttappamāṇato kesaggamattampi vaḍḍhetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Tato ūnake, dīghato ca vaḍḍhite ayaṃ kuṭisaṅkhaṃ na gacchatīti. ‘‘Mayhaṃ vāsāgāraṃ eta’’nti evaṃ attā uddeso etissātiattuddesā. Kuṭinti ullittādikaṃ kuṭiṃ katvāti sambandho. Tatthaullittānāma anto uddhaṃmukhaṃ littā.Avalittānāma bahi adhomukhaṃ littā. Ubhayathāullittāvalittā. Katvāti antobhūtakāritatthavasena kārāpetvā vā.
24.Saṃyācitaparikkhāraṃ (having requested requisites): one for whom requisites such as a knife have been requested by himself.Adesitavatthukaṃ (without an allocated site): that for which a site for building a hut has not been allocated through the formal procedure.Pamāṇātikkantaṃ (exceeding the standard): now, for a man of medium size, three spans is called a Sugata-span; exceeding the stated measure, "in length, twelve spans of the Sugata-span, in breadth, seven internal spans" (pārā. 348), even by one part, is exceeding the standard; when the lower dimension, which is four hands in breadth, is present, it is not allowed to increase the length even by the size of a hair tip from the stated measure. Because when it is less than that, and increased in length, it does not fall under the category of a hut. Attuddesā kuṭi (a hut for one's own use): a hut, the aim of which is designated by oneself as "this is my dwelling." Kuṭiṃ katvā (having made a hut): having made a hut plastered, etc. Here, ullittā (plastered) means plastered inside with the face upwards. Avalittā (unplastered) means plastered outside with the face downwards. Ubayathā ullittāvalittā (plastered and unplastered in both ways). Katvā (having made): either having caused to be made with the intention of being the inner maker.
padabhājane(pārā. 349) vuttanayena saṅghaṃ tikkhattuṃ yācitvā sabbe vā saṅghapariyāpannā, saṅghena vā sammatā dve tayo bhikkhū tattha netabbā. Tehi ca kipillikādīhi soḷasahi upaddavehi virahitattā anārambhaṃ anupaddavaṃ dvīhi catūhi vā balibaddehi yuttena sakaṭena ekacakkaṃ nibbodakapatanaṭṭhāne ekaṃ bahi katvā āviñchituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘saparikkamana’’nti sallakkhetvā sacepi saṅghappahonakā honti, tattheva, no ce, saṅghamajjhaṃ gantvā tena bhikkhunā yācitehipadabhājane(pārā. 50, 51) vuttāya ñattidutiyakammavācāya vatthu desetabbanti. Adesitavatthukaṃ pamāṇātikkantaṃ kuṭiṃ karissāmīti sabbappayoge dukkaṭaṃ, idāni dvīhi piṇḍehi niṭṭhānaṃ gamissatīti paṭhamapiṇḍadāne thullaccayaṃ, dutiyadānena lepe saṅghaṭite sace adesitavatthukā eva vā hoti, pamāṇātikkantā eva vā, eko saṅghādiseso, sārambhaaparikkamanatāya dve ca dukkaṭānīti sace ubhayavipannā, dve ca saṅghādisesā dve ca dukkaṭānīti sabbaṃ ñeyyaṃ.
In accordance with the method stated in the padabhājane (pārā. 349), having requested the Saṅgha three times, all those included in the Saṅgha, or two or three bhikkhus approved by the Saṅgha, should be brought there. And having ascertained that it is free from the sixteen dangers beginning with ants, etc., that it is undisturbed and without calamities, and that "it has room for circumambulation," in that it is possible to pull with a cart fitted with two or four oxen, with one wheel outside the place where the axle emerges; even if they are sufficient for the Saṅgha, it should be done there itself; if not, having gone into the middle of the Saṅgha, the site should be allocated with the formal announcement and motion stated in the padabhājane (pārā. 50, 51) by the bhikkhu who requested. The undertaking of making a hut without an allocated site and exceeding the standard involves a dukkaṭa for all efforts; now, it will be completed with two applications of plaster, a thullaccaya with the first application of plaster, and when the plaster is joined with the second application, if it is still without an allocated site, or still exceeding the standard, it is one saṅghādisesa, and because of the undertaking and the room for circumambulation, two dukkaṭas; if it is defective in both ways, two saṅghādisesas and two dukkaṭas; all of this should be understood.
Chaṭṭho.
Sixth.
25.Mahallakanti sassāmikabhāvena saṃyācitakuṭito mahantabhāvena, vatthuṃ desāpetvā pamāṇātikkamenāpi kātabbabhāvena ca mahantatāya mahattaṃ lāti ādadātīti mahallako. Mahattalaka iti ṭhite ttassa lopo lassa ca dvittaṃ, taṃ. Vasanaṃ attho payojanaṃvasanattho,tāya. Ettha pana adesitavatthubhāve eko saṅghādiseso. Sesaṃ anantarasadisameva. Idha ca tattha ca leṇaguhātiṇakuṭipaṇṇacchadanagehesu aññataraṃ kārentassa ca kuṭimpi aññassa vāsatthāya vāsāgāraṃ vā ṭhapetvā uposathāgārādīsu aññataratthāya karontassa ca anāpatti.
25.Mahallakaṃ (large): because of being large in that it is larger than a requested hut with ownership, and in that it must be made even exceeding the standard after allocating a site; it is called "mahallaka" because it takes and gives greatness. When it is "mahattalaka," the "tt" is elided, and the "l" is doubled; that.Vasanattho (the purpose of dwelling): purpose is the meaning of dwelling; by that. Here, in the case of a site not allocated, there is one saṅghādisesa. The rest is just like the immediately preceding one. Here and there, there is no offense in one who is having a dwelling, cave, grass hut, or leaf hut made, or in one who, having established a hut or dwelling for the sake of someone else's dwelling, is having something made for the sake of a Uposatha hall, etc.
Sattamo.
Seventh.
26.Amūlakena antimena vatthunāti sambandho.Amūlakenāti dassanasaṅkhātassa, savanasaṅkhātassa, diṭṭhasutamutavasena pavattaparisaṅkāsaṅkhātassa ca mūlassa abhāvena natthi mūlametassāti amūlakaṃ, tena. Taṃ pana so āpanno vā hotu, no vā, etaṃ idha appamāṇaṃ. Tattha bhikkhuñca mātugāmañca tathārūpe ṭhāne disvā parisaṅkati, ayaṃdiṭṭhaparisaṅkā. Andhakāre vā paṭicchanne vā bhikkhussa ca mātugāmassa ca vacanaṃ sutvā aññassa atthibhāvaṃ ajānanto parisaṅkati, ayaṃsutaparisaṅkā. Dhuttānaṃ itthīhi saddhiṃ paccantavihāresu pupphagandhasurādīhi anubhavitvā gataṭṭhānaṃ disvā ‘‘kena nu kho idaṃ kata’’nti vīmaṃsanto tattha kenaci bhikkhunā gandhādīhi pūjā katā hoti, bhesajjatthāya ariṭṭhaṃ vā pītaṃ, so tassa gandhaṃ ghāyitvā ‘‘ayaṃ so bhavissatī’’ti parisaṅkati. Ayaṃmutaparisaṅkānāma.Antimena cāti tato paraṃ vajjābhāvena ante bhavattā antimeneva.Vatthunāti bhikkhuno anurūpesu ekūnavīsatiyā pārājikesu dhammesu aññatarena pārājikena dhammena.Ca-kāro panettha avadhāraṇe, tena saṅghādisesādiṃ nivatteti. Atha vāca-kāro aṭṭhānappayutto.
26.The connection is with "amūlakena antimena vatthunā" (by an unfounded final charge).Amūlakena (unfounded): because of the absence of a basis consisting of seeing, hearing, or suspicion arising based on what is seen and heard; because there is no basis for this, it is unfounded; by that. However, whether he has committed the offense or not is irrelevant here. Here, seeing a bhikkhu and a woman in such a place, one suspects; this is diṭṭhaparisaṅkā (suspicion based on seeing). Hearing the words of a bhikkhu and a woman in the dark or in a concealed place, not knowing of anyone else's existence, one suspects; this is sutaparisaṅkā (suspicion based on hearing). Seeing a place in border monasteries where rogues have gone after enjoying perfumes, flowers, liquor, etc., with women, and investigating, "Who on earth has done this?", it happens that a bhikkhu has performed a offering with perfumes, etc., or has drunk ariṭṭha (a type of medicinal drink) for medicinal purposes; smelling that fragrance, he suspects, "This must be him." This is called mutaparisaṅkā (suspicion based on sensing).Antimena ca (and final): because it occurs at the end, since there is no fault after that, it is final.Vatthunā (charge): with a pārājika offense among the nineteen pārājika offenses suitable for a bhikkhu.Ca (and): here the "ca" is for emphasis, thereby excluding saṅghādisesas, etc. Or, the "ca" is used inappropriately.
Cāvetunti brahmacariyā cāvanatthāya. Etena ekaṃ cāvanādhippāyaṃ gahetvā avasese akkosādhippāyavuṭṭhāpanādhippāyādike sattādhippāye paṭikkhipati.Suṇamānanti idaṃ ‘‘codento’’tiādīnaṃ kammapadaṃ, iminā parammukhā codanaṃ paṭikkhipati. Parammukhā pana sattahi āpattikkhandhehi vadantassa dukkaṭaṃ.Codentoti ‘‘vatthusandassanā āpattisandassanā saṃvāsappaṭikkhepo sāmīcippaṭikkhepo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.385-386) saṅkhepato vuttānaṃ catunnaṃ codanānaṃ vasena sayaṃ codento vā.Codāpento vāti parena yena kenaci codāpento vā. Tasmā yo bhikkhussa samīpe ṭhatvā ‘‘tvaṃ methunaṃ dhammaṃ sevi, assamaṇosī’’tiādinā vatthusandassanavasena vā ‘‘tvaṃ methunadhammāpattiṃ āpannosī’’tiādinā āpattisandassanavasena vā ‘‘assamaṇosi, natthi tayā saddhiṃ uposatho vā pavāraṇā vā saṅghakammaṃ vā, assamaṇosī’’tiādinā saṃvāsappaṭikkhepavasena vā abhivādanādisaṃvāse paṭikkhitte assamaṇoti kasmāti puṭṭhassa ‘‘assamaṇosī’’tiādivacanehi sāmīcippaṭikkhepavasena vā antamaso hatthamuddāya eva vāpi etamatthaṃ dīpayato ‘‘karotu me āyasmā okāsaṃ, ahaṃ taṃ vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ okāse akārite vācāya saṅghādiseso ceva dukkaṭañca, okāsaṃ kāretvā codentassa pana saṅghādisesova daṭṭhabbo.
Cāvetuṃ (to expel): for the purpose of expelling from the holy life. By this, he excludes the other seven intentions such as the intention to scold and the intention to raise up, taking only the one intention to expel.Suṇamānaṃ (while he is listening): this is the object of "codento" (accusing), etc.; by this, he excludes accusing behind someone's back. However, for one who speaks behind someone's back with the seven groups of offenses, there is a dukkaṭa.Codento (accusing): either accusing himself on the basis of the four accusations stated in brief as "showing the charge, showing the offense, rejecting association, rejecting proper conduct" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.385-386).Codāpento vā (or causing to be accused): or causing to be accused by someone else, whoever it may be. Therefore, for one standing near a bhikkhu and revealing the matter by saying, "You engaged in sexual intercourse, you are not a samaṇa," etc., by way of showing the charge; or by saying, "You have committed an offense involving sexual intercourse," etc., by way of showing the offense; or by rejecting association by saying, "You are not a samaṇa; there is no Uposatha, Pavāraṇā, or Saṅghakamma with you, you are not a samaṇa," etc.; or when proper conduct such as salutation is rejected, when asked, "Why are you not a samaṇa?", by words such as, "You are not a samaṇa," etc., or even by merely indicating this matter with a hand gesture; if permission is not given when saying, "May the venerable one grant me leave; I wish to speak about that," there is a saṅghādisesa and a dukkaṭa; however, for one who accuses after obtaining permission, only a saṅghādisesa should be seen.
Aṭṭhamo.
Eighth.
27.Aññassāti khattiyādijātikassa parassa.Kiriyanti methunavītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ kiriyaṃ.Tenāti aññassa vītikkamasaṅkhātassa methunavītikkamasandassanena karaṇabhūtena.Lesenāti yassa jātiādayo tato aññampi vatthuṃ lissati uddiṭṭhe vitthāraṃ silissati vohāramattenevāti jātiādayova ‘‘lesā’’ti vuccanti, tena jātilesanāmalesādinā lesena.Aññanti yo vītikkamanto diṭṭho, tato aparampi bhikkhuṃ cāvetuṃ antimena vatthunā codayanti sambandho. Kathaṃ? Koci khattiyajātiyo vītikkamanto diṭṭho, tato aññaṃ attano veriṃ khattiyajātikaṃ bhikkhuṃ passitvā taṃ khattiyaṃ jātilesaṃ gahetvā ‘‘khattiyo mayā diṭṭho vītikkamanto, tvaṃ khattiyo pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannosī’’ti codeti codāpeti vā. Evaṃ nāmalesādayopi veditabbā. Sesā vinicchayakathā aṭṭhame vuttasadisāyeva.
27.Aññassa (of another): of another person of Khattiya (warrior) etc. caste.Kiriyaṃ (act): an act consisting of transgression of sexual conduct.Tenā (by that): by that showing of another's transgression consisting of sexual misconduct as the instrumental cause.Lesenā (by a pretext): because whatever relates to his birth etc., illuminates and adheres to another matter when it is specifically mentioned, birth etc., are called "lesa" (pretexts); by that pretext of birth, the pretext of name, etc.Aññaṃ (another): the connection is that they accuse another bhikkhu of expulsion by a final charge from him who was seen transgressing. How? Someone of Khattiya caste is seen transgressing; then seeing another bhikkhu of Khattiya caste who is his enemy, taking that Khattiya's birth pretext, he accuses or causes to be accused, "A Khattiya was seen by me transgressing; you are a Khattiya, you have committed a pārājika offense." Thus, the pretext of name, etc., should also be understood. The remaining discussion of the judgment is just like what was stated in the eighth.
Navamo.
Ninth.
28.Ettāvatā ‘‘garukā navā’’ti uddiṭṭhe vitthārato dassetvā idāni tesu āpannesu paṭipajjitabbākāraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘chādeti jānamāpanna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo bhikkhu attanāāpannaṃsaṅghādisesāpattiṃ āpattivasena vā vatthuvasena vājānaṃjānantoyāvatāyattakāni ahānichādetipaṭicchādeti,tāvatātattakāni ahāni tassa parivāso hotīti evaṃ padasandhivasena attho veditabbo. Tattha paṭicchannaparivāso suddhantaparivāso samodhānaparivāsoti tividho parivāso. Tesaṃ pana atisaṅkhepanayena mukhamattepi dassite vitthāravinicchayapavesopāyasambhavo siyāti mukhamattaṃ dassayissāma.
28.Having shown in detail up to this point what was specified as "the nine grave offenses," now, in order to show the manner in which one should proceed with those who have committed them, "chādeti jānamāpanna" (conceals, knowing he has committed), etc., was stated. There, the meaning should be understood in terms of word combination as, "The bhikkhu who, jānaṃ (knowing), chādeti (conceals), āpannaṃ (having committed) a saṅghādisesa offense himself, yāvatā (for as many) days tāvatā (for that many) days his parivāsa (probation) will be." There are three types of parivāsa: paṭicchannaparivāsa (concealed probation), suddhantaparivāsa (pure-end probation), and samodhānaparivāsa (combined probation). However, even if only the outline of these is shown in a very condensed manner, there could be a possibility of entering into a detailed judgment; therefore, we will show only the outline.
paṭicchannaparivāsonāma yathāpaṭicchannāya āpattiyā dātabbo, tasmā paṭicchannadivase ca āpattiyo ca sallakkhetvā sace ekāhappaṭicchannā hoti, ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekāhappaṭicchannāyo’’tiādinākhandhake(cūḷava. 98-99) āgatanayena yācāpetvā ‘‘suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ itthannāmo bhikkhu sambahulā āpattiyo āpajji ekāhappaṭicchannāyo’’tiādinākhandhakeāgatanayeneva kammavācaṃ vatvā parivāso dātabbo. Ekaṃ āpajjitvā ‘‘sambahulā’’ti vinayakammaṃ karontassāpi vuṭṭhātīti ‘‘sambahulā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nānāvatthukāsupi eseva nayo. Atha dvīhādippaṭicchannā honti, pakkhaatirekapakkhamāsaatirekamāsasaṃvaccharaatirekasaṃvaccharappaṭicchannā vā, ‘‘dvīhappaṭicchannāyo vā’’tiādinā vatvā yo yo āpanno hoti, tassa tassa nāmañca gahetvā yojanā kātabbā.
Paṭicchannaparivāso (concealed probation) is to be given according to the way the offense was concealed; therefore, having noted the days of concealment and the offenses, if it was concealed for one day, having requested in accordance with the method that comes in the khandhaka(cūḷava. 98-99) with "I, venerable sirs, have committed several offenses concealed for one day," etc., having stated the kammavāca (formal statement) in the same way as it comes in the khandhaka, the parivāsa should be given. "Sambahulā" (several) was stated because even if one commits one offense, the Vinaya procedure is completed by saying "sambahulā". This same method applies even in cases with various charges. If, however, it was concealed for two or more days, or concealed for a fortnight, more than a fortnight, a month, more than a month, a year, or more than a year, the connection should be made by stating "or concealed for two days," etc., taking the name of each offense.
Kammavācāpariyosāne ca sace appabhikkhuko āvāso hoti, sakkā ratticchedaṃ anāpajjantena vasituṃ, tattheva ‘‘parivāsaṃ samādiyāmi, vattaṃ samādiyāmī’ti vattaṃ samādāya tattheva saṅghassa ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā saṅghādisesā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ ekāhappaṭicchannāyo’’tiādinā ārocetvā puna āgatāgatānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ārocentena pakatattena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne sahavāso, tena ca vināvāso, āgantukādīnaṃ upacāragatānaṃ anārocanāti etesu ekenāpi ratticchedañca vattabhedañca akatvā parivatthabbaṃ.
And at the end of the kammavāca, if the monastery has few bhikkhus, it is possible to dwell there without incurring a break of the night; there itself, having undertaken the observance by saying, "I undertake parivāsa, I undertake the practice," and announcing to the Saṅgha there itself, "I, venerable sirs, have committed several saṅghādisesa offenses concealed for one day," etc., the bhikkhu who is undergoing probation should dwell together under one roof with the bhikkhus who come again and again and are informed, and dwell without them; not announcing to those who have come as guests, etc.; one should undergo parivāsa without breaking the night or breaking the practice in even one of these ways.
paṭicchannaparivāso.
Paṭicchannaparivāso (concealed probation).
Suddhantoduvidho cūḷasuddhanto mahāsuddhantoti. Tattha yo ‘‘upasampadato paṭṭhāya yattakaṃ nāma kālaṃ ahaṃ suddho’’ti jānāti, tattakaṃ apanetvā tato avasese rattiparicchede ekato katvā dātabbaparivāsocūḷasuddhanto. Yo pana sabbaso rattipariyantaṃ na jānāti nassarati, tattha ca vematiko, tassa dātabbomahāsuddhanto. Āpattipariyantaṃ jānātu vā, mā vā, akāraṇametaṃ.
Suddhanto (pure-end) is of two kinds: cūḷasuddhanto (minor pure-end) and mahāsuddhanto (major pure-end). There, cūḷasuddhanto (minor pure-end) is the parivāsa to be given by deducting as much time as "From the time of my ordination, I have been pure for so long," and combining the remaining night periods. Mahāsuddhanto (major pure-end) is to be given to one who does not know or remember the end of the night period at all, and is doubtful about it. Whether one knows the end of the offense or not is irrelevant.
Samodhānaparivāsonāma tividho odhānasamodhāno agghasamodhāno missakasamodhānoti. Tattha yo niṭṭhitaparivāsopi vā niṭṭhitamānattopi vā anikkhittavatto aññaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjitvā purimāpattiyā samā vā ūnatarā vā rattiyo paṭicchādeti, tassa mūlāya paṭikassanena te parivutthadivase ca mānattaciṇṇadivase ca odhunitvā makkhetvā purimāya āpattiyā mūladivasaparicchede pacchā āpannaṃ āpattiṃ samodahitvā puna ādito paṭṭhāya dātabbaparivāsoodhānasamodhānonāma. Sace kassaci ekāpatti ekāhappaṭicchannā, dvīhappaṭicchannā, evaṃ yāva dasāhappaṭicchannā, tāsaṃ agghena samodhāya tāsaṃ dasāhappaṭicchannavasena avasesānaṃ ekāhappaṭicchannādīnampi dātabbaparivāsoagghasamodhānonāma. Yo pana nānāvatthukā āpattiyo ekato katvā dātabbaparivāsomissakasamodhānonāma. Dānavidhi pana sabbatthakhandhake(cūḷava. 134 ādayo) āgatanayeneva veditabbo.
Samodhānaparivāso (combined probation) is of three kinds: odhānasamodhāno (deduction combination), agghasamodhāno (value combination), and missakasamodhāno (mixed combination). There, for someone who, even after completing parivāsa or completing mānatta (penance), not having relinquished the practice, commits another offense and conceals the nights for as long as or less than the previous offense, the parivāsa to be given again from the beginning, after deducting those days of dwelling in parivāsa and the days of practicing mānatta by pulling back to the root and combining the offense committed later in the period of concealment from the root of the previous offense, is called odhānasamodhāno (deduction combination). If someone has one offense concealed for one day, concealed for two days, and so on up to concealed for ten days, the parivāsa to be given for the others beginning with concealed for one day, etc., by combining the value of those in terms of being concealed for ten days, is called agghasamodhāno (value combination). The parivāsa to be given by combining offenses with various charges into one is called missakasamodhāno (mixed combination). However, the method of giving should be understood everywhere in the way that comes in the khandhaka (cūḷava. 134 ff.).
mānattaṃbhikkhūnaṃ mānanabhāvaṃcha rattiyoakhaṇḍaṃ katvācareyyakareyya, sampādeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha saṅghena gaṇena puggalena kataṃ tena bhikkhunā saṅghamajjhe vattaṃ samādāpetvā ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā āpattiyo āpajji’’ntiādinākhandhakevuttanayena yācāpetvā tattheva vuttanayena mānattadānādayopi veditabbā. Imināpi vattaṃ nikkhipitukāmena ce vattaṃ nikkhipitvā catūhi pañcahi saddhiṃ parivāse vuttappakāraṃ padesaṃ gantvā purimanayeneva heṭṭhā vuttaṃ sahavāsādiṃ antamaso catūhi ūnattā ūne gaṇe caraṇadosañca vajjetvā paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Appaṭicchannāpattikassa pana parivāsaṃ adatvā mānattameva dātabbaṃ. Evaṃ ciṇṇaṃ kataṃ pariniṭṭhāpitaṃ mānattaṃ yena,taṃbhikkhuṃ. Vīsati saṅgho gaṇo assātivīsatīgaṇodīghaṃ katvā, sosaṅgho abbheyyasampaṭiccheyya, abbhānakammavasena osāreyyāti vuttaṃ hoti, avheyyāti vā attho. Etthāpi samādānaārocanayācanāni, kammavācā cakhandhakevuttanayena veditabbā.
Mānattaṃ: Mānatta means the state of honoring or disciplining; bhikkhūnaṃ mānanabhāvaṃ: it should be practiced by monks; cha rattiyo: for six nights; akhaṇḍaṃ katvā: making it unbroken; careyya: should conduct, perform, or fulfill—this is what is meant. Here, having had the monk request in the middle of the Saṅgha, following the manner described in the khandhaka, whether the offense was committed against a Saṅgha, a group, or an individual, by saying, "Bhante, I have committed many offenses," and then the giving of mānatta etc., should be understood in the manner described there. Even by one wanting to relinquish the practice, after relinquishing the practice, one should go with four or five others to a place described in the parivāsa section, and in the same manner as before, avoid cohabitation etc. mentioned below, and the fault of wandering in a group less than four, or at least four. However, for one whose offense is not concealed, only mānatta should be given, without giving parivāsa. Taṃ: That monk, by whom the mānatta has been completed, done, and finished; vīsatīgaṇo: a group of twenty monks, meaning a group of twenty; so saṅgho abbheyya: that Saṅgha should call back, accept, or absolve through the act of absolution—this is what is meant, or it means they should invite him. Here too, the undertaking, announcement, request, and Kammavācā should be understood in the manner described in the khandhaka.
29.Evaṃ tesu paṭipajjitabbākāraṃ dassetvā idāni chādanassa aṅgāni dassetuṃ‘‘āpattī’’tiādimāha. Tattha na ukkhittoanukkhitto,natthi antarāyo assātianantarāyo. Sakatthe ttapaccayavasena vā, pahuno bhāvo pahuttaṃ, taṃ assatthīti saddhādivasena vā pahutto. Anukkhitto ca anantarāyo ca pahutto cāti dvando, tesaṃ bhāvo anukkhittādiguṇo anukkhitta…pe… pahuttatā. Āpatti ca anukkhitta…pe… pahuttatā caāpatti…pe… pahuttatāyo. Ma-kāro padasandhijo. Tathā tena pakārena āpattiādīsu catūsu āpattādipakārena saññī tathasaññī rassavasena. Tassa bhāvotathasaññitā,yathāvuttaāpattādisaññitāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ca-kāro vuttasamuccayattho. Kamanaṃ patthanaṃ kāmo, chādetuṃ kāmochādetukāmo. Iti yathāvuttā nava,atha chādanācāti evaṃ dasa ca tāni aṅgāni cāti, tehi.Aruṇuggamamhiaruṇasaṅkhātassa paṭhamabālasūriyaraṃsino uggamane satichannāhoti, āpattīti seso.
29.Having thus shown the manner of practicing with regard to them, now to show the factors of concealment, he says ‘‘āpattī’’ etc. Here, anukkhitto: not suspended; anantarāyo: one who has no obstacles; pahutto: or, by way of having power due to faith etc., the state of being able, the condition of having power. Anukkhitto ca anantarāyo ca pahutto ca is a dvanda compound; the state of those, the qualities of being anukkhitta...pe...of having power; āpatti ca anukkhitta...pe... pahuttatā ca āpatti…pe… pahuttatāyo. The letter ma is a juncture of words. Similarly, in those four beginning with āpatti, being aware of the manner of the āpatti etc., tathasaññī, with shortening. The state of that is tathasaññitā, meaning being aware of the āpatti etc. as stated. The ca-conjunction is in the sense of accumulating what was said. Kamanaṃ patthanaṃ kāmo, chādetuṃ kāmo chādetukāmo. Thus, the nine as stated; atha chādanā ca: and thus ten factors, by those; aruṇuggamamhi: at the rising of the first tender sunlight called aruṇa; channā hoti: it is concealed, the offense, is the remainder.
Tatthāyamadhippāyo – yo bhikkhu rājacoraaggiudakamanussaamanussavāḷasarīsapajīvitabrahmacariyantarāyānaṃ dasannamekassāpi natthitāya anantarāyiko samāno anantarāyikasaññī hutvā bhikkhuno santikaṃ gantuñceva ārocetuñca sakkuṇeyyatāya pahu samāno pahusaññī hutvā tividhaukkhepanīyakammākaraṇena anukkhitto samāno anukkhittasaññī hutvā garukāpattīti saññī garukaṃyeva āpattiṃ chādetukāmo hutvā chādeti, tassāyaṃ āpatti ca channā hotīti. Sace panettha anāpattisaññī vā hoti aññāpattikkhandhasaññī vā vematiko vā, acchannā honti. Ārocentena pana ‘‘mama ekāpattiṃ āpannabhāvaṃ jānāhī’’tiādinā nayena ārocetabbaṃ. Sace pana vatthusabhāgāpattikassa āroceti, tāva tappaccayā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati.
Herein is the intention: the monk, who, due to the non-existence of even one of the ten dangers such as danger from a king, thief, fire, water, human, non-human, wild animals, reptiles, livelihood, or brahmacariya obstacles, being without obstacles, being aware of being without obstacles, and being able to go to a monk and to announce it, being aware of being able, and not being suspended by the performance of the three kinds of expulsion, being aware of being not suspended, being aware of a grave offense, wanting to conceal a grave offense, conceals it, that offense of his is concealed. But if he is aware of a non-offense, or is aware of another category of offense, or is doubtful, they are not concealed. But by one announcing, it should be announced in the manner of "know that I have committed an offense" etc. But if he announces to one who has committed an offense of the same kind, he incurs a dukkata due to that.
Saṅghādisesaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of the Saṅghādisesa section is finished.
3. Cīvaraniddesavaṇṇanā
3. Description of the Chapter on Robes
30.‘‘Khomañca koseyyañcā’’tiādinā napuṃsakaviggahena dvande katekhoma…pe… bhaṅgāni. Tatthakhomanti gacchajāti. Upacārato pana khomena khomasuttena vāyitanti taddhitena upacārena vā khomaṃ khomapaṭacīvaraṃ, tathā avasesāni.Sāṇaṃsāṇavākasuttehi vāyitaṃ cīvaraṃ.Bhaṅgaṃkhomasuttādīni sabbāni ekaccāni vā vomissetvā vāyitacīvaraṃ. Vākamayameva vāti keci.Kambalanti manussalomaṃ vāḷalomañca ṭhapetvā sesalomehi vāyitaṃ.Etānīti khomādīni yathāvuttāni. Saha anulomehītisānulomāni. Jātito kappiyānichacīvarāni bhavanti.
30.Having made a dvanda compound with the neuter gender separation, beginning with ‘‘Khomañca koseyyañcā’’ti, khoma…pe… bhaṅgāni: There, khomanti: a type of tree. But conventionally, khomaṃ, a khoma cloth robe, woven with khoma thread or by taddhita affix; similarly, the remaining ones. Sāṇaṃ: a robe woven with sāṇa vāka threads. Bhaṅgaṃ: a robe woven by mixing all the khoma threads etc., or some of them, or mixing them. Some say it is made of vāka alone. Kambalanti: woven with hairs other than human hairs and horse hairs. Etānīti: the khoma etc. as stated. Saha anulomehīti sānulomāni: with the permitted ones. Cha: six kinds of robes, which are allowable by origin, exist.
31.Idāni‘‘dukūla’’ntiādinā tesaṃ anulomāni dasseti. Tatthadukūlanti dukūlasaṅkhātena kenaci vākavisesena vāyitaṃ cīvaraṃ.Cevāti samuccaye, so upari ākaḍḍhitabbo.Paṭṭuṇṇanti paṭṭuṇṇesu jātaṃ paṭṭuṇṇaṃ. Desavācino bahuvacanantāti bahuvacanena viggaho. Tathā somārā ca cīnā ca, tesu jātaṃsomāracīnajaṃ. Imāni tīṇi pāṇakehi katasuttamayāni. Ehibhikkhūnaṃ puññiddhiyā jātaṃiddhijaṃ,taṃ pana khomādīnaṃ aññataraṃ.Devadinnanti devehi dinnaṃ kapparukkhe nibbattaṃ cīvaraṃ. Tadetaṃ dukūlādi tassa tassa yathāvuttassa khomādino anulomikaṃ hoti. Tattha lomāni anugataṃ anulomaṃ, yathā sesalomāni anugataṃ lomaṃ tadanukūlattā ‘‘anuloma’’nti vuccati, tathā taṃjātiyakaṃ yesaṃ kesañci anukūlaṃ sabbampi ruḷhīvasena ‘‘anuloma’’nti vuccati. Tamevaanulomikaṃ,anukūlanti attho. Kathaṃ? Dukūlaṃ sāṇassa anulomaṃ, paṭṭuṇṇādīni tīṇi koseyyassa anulomāni, iddhijaṃ devadinnañca khomādīnamanulomanti.
31.Now, beginning with ‘‘dukūla’’ etc., he shows their allowed types. There, dukūlanti: a robe woven with a particular kind of vāka called dukūla. Cevāti: in the sense of accumulation, that should be drawn upwards. Paṭṭuṇṇanti: paṭṭuṇṇa born in paṭṭuṇṇas. A bahuvacana of a place name—the separation is with a bahuvacana. Similarly, somārā ca cīnā ca, somāracīnajaṃ: born in those, somāra and cīna. These three are made of thread made by animals. Iddhijaṃ: born by the power of merit of those who come as "Ehi bhikkhu," that however is one of the khoma etc. Devadinnanti: given by devas, a robe produced from a wishing tree. That, dukūla etc., is allowable for each of the khoma etc. as stated. There, loma followed by anu is anuloma, just as loma followed by sesa-lomas is called "anuloma" due to being in accordance with it; similarly, whatever is in accordance with those of that kind is all conventionally called "anuloma." That same is anulomikaṃ: meaning in accordance. How? Dukūla is allowable for sāṇa, paṭṭuṇṇa etc., the three, are allowable for koseyya, iddhija and devadinna are allowable for khoma etc.
32-3.Evaṃ sānulomāni cīvarāni dassetvā idāni adhiṭṭhānādikaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ticīvara’’ntiādimāha. Tattha avuttepi avassaṃ vattabbatāya sabbattha ca-saddo ajjhāharitabbo, ticīvarañca…pe… kaṇḍucchādiñca adhiṭṭheyya na vikappeyyāti sambandho. Tattha tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ samāhāroticīvaraṃ. Parikkhārañca taṃ coḷañcātiparikkhāracoḷaṃ. Vassassa yoggā vassikā, sāva sāṭikāvassikasāṭikā. Puñchati anenāti puñchanaṃ, mukhassa puñchanaṃ mukhapuñchanaṃ. Nisīdanti etthāti nisīdanaṃ, mukhapuñchanañca nisīdanañcamukhapuñchananisīdanaṃ. Sayanasukhādiṃ paṭicca attharīyatīti paccattharaṇaṃ, tadevapaccattharaṇakaṃ. Kaṇḍuṃ chādetītikaṇḍucchādi. Adhiṭṭhaheti ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādinā navannaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā adhiṭṭheyya.Na vikappeyyāti tassa tassa nāmaṃ gahetvā na vikappeyya, tassa tassa pana nāmaṃ aggahetvā ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’ti vikappeyyāti adhippāyo.Etthāti imesu navasu cīvaresu.Ticīvaranti ticīvaranāmena adhiṭṭhitaṃ. Tathā hi adhiṭṭhānato pubbe visuṃ ticīvaraṃ nāma natthi saṅghāṭiādippahonakassa paccattharaṇādivasenāpi adhiṭṭhātuṃ anuññātattā. Taṃvinā ekāhaṃekadivasampi.Na vaseyyāti aladdhasammutiko bhikkhu avippavāsasīmato aññattha vāsaṃ na kareyyāti attho. Evaṃ sati ticīvarañca nissajjitabbaṃ hoti, pācittiyañca āpattiṃ āpajjatīti dīpeti. Nisīdanaṃ vinā cātumāsaṃ na vaseyyāti sambandho. Catunnaṃ māsānaṃ samāhāro catumāsaṃ, tamevacātumāsaṃ. Taṃ accantasaṃyogavasena.
32-3.Having thus shown the robes with their allowed types, now to show the resolving etc., he says ‘‘ticīvara’’ etc. There, even if not said, the ca-conjunction should be supplied everywhere, because it must be necessarily stated, and the connection is "ticīvarañca…pe… kaṇḍucchādiñca adhiṭṭheyya na vikappeyya." There, ticīvaraṃ: the collection of three robes. Parikkhārañca taṃ coḷañcāti parikkhāracoḷaṃ: the equipment cloth. Vassikā suitable for the rains, that sāṭikā is vassikasāṭikā. Puñchati anenāti puñchanaṃ, mukhassa puñchanaṃ mukhapuñchanaṃ: wiping is what one wipes with; wiping the face is face-wiping. Nisīdanti etthāti nisīdanaṃ, mukhapuñchanañca nisīdanañca mukhapuñchananisīdanaṃ: one sits on this; face-wiping and sitting-cloth. Paccattharaṇaṃ is spread out in relation to sleeping comfortably etc.; that same is paccattharaṇakaṃ. Kaṇḍuṃ chādetīti kaṇḍucchādi: covers the itch. Adhiṭṭhaheti: one should resolve, taking the names of the nine beginning with "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" (I resolve this saṅghāṭi). Na vikappeyyāti: one should not disallow taking that name, but one should disallow saying "I disallow this robe to you" without taking that name—this is the intention. Etthā: in these nine robes. Ticīvaranti: resolved with the name ticīvara. For indeed, before the resolving, there is no separate name ticīvara, because it is allowed to resolve the saṅghāṭi etc., as a paccattharaṇa etc., as appropriate. Taṃ vinā ekāhaṃ: even for one day; na vaseyyāti: a monk who has not obtained permission should not dwell elsewhere than an avippavāsa sīmā—this is the meaning. Thus, it is shown that the ticīvara must be forfeited and one incurs a pācittiya offense. The connection is that one should not dwell without a sitting cloth for four months. Cātumāsaṃ: the collection of four months; that same is cātumāsaṃ. That, in the sense of complete connection.
34.Idāni‘‘ima’’ntiādinā ‘‘adhiṭṭheyyā’’ti vuttamadhiṭṭhānaṃ dasseti. Saṅghāṭiṃ ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti adhiṭṭhaheti sambandho. Tatthaadhiṭṭhaheti hatthapāse ṭhitaṃ evaṃ adhiṭṭheyya.Ahatthapāsanti hatthassa pāso samīpo hatthapāso, aḍḍhateyyahatthabbhantaro. Dvādasahatthabbhantarotipi vadanti. Natthi hatthapāso etissāti ahatthapāsā, taṃetantiadhiṭṭhaheti sambandho. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Antogabbhe vā uparipāsāde vā tadaheva gantvā nivattanayogge padese vā ṭhitaṃ cīvaraṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti adhiṭṭheyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tato dūre ṭhitampi adhiṭṭhātabbantipi vadanti.Sesesupīti uttarāsaṅgādikaṇḍuppaṭicchādipariyantesupi avasesacīvaresu.Ayaṃ nayoti ayameva nayo. Yathā saṅghāṭiyā, evaṃ ‘‘imaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādi vuttanayovāti vuttaṃ hoti. Adhiṭṭhahantena pana hatthena gahetvā kāyavikāraṃ karontena ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti cittena ābhogaṃ katvā kāyena vā adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ, vacībhedamattaṃ katvā vācāya vā. Parikkhāracoḷaṃ nāma pāṭekkaṃ nidhānamukhanti ticīvaraṃ parikkhāracoḷampi adhiṭṭhātuṃ vaṭṭatīti.
34.Now, beginning with ‘‘ima’’nti, he shows the resolving said as "adhiṭṭheyyā." The connection is that he should resolve, saying "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" (I resolve this saṅghāṭi). There, adhiṭṭhaheti: he should resolve thus, with it standing within arm's reach. Ahatthapāsanti: hatthassa pāso samīpo hatthapāso: arm's reach means near the hand, within one and a half hatthas. Some say within twelve hatthas. Ahatthapāsā: that has no arm's reach; the connection is that etaṃti adhiṭṭhaheti: he should resolve that. What is said? Having considered a robe standing in the inner chamber or on the upper story of the palace or in a place suitable for returning on that same day, he should resolve, saying "etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī"—this is what is meant. Some say that even one standing far away can be resolved. Sesesupīti: in the remaining robes up to and including the uttarāsaṅga and the kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi. Ayaṃ nayoti: this same method; just as with the saṅghāṭi, so too, the method as stated, beginning with "imaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī"—this is what is meant. But one resolving should resolve by taking it with the hand, making a physical gesture, making an effort in the mind with "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī," or with the body, or by making a mere verbal distinction with speech. The parikkhāracoḷa is a place of individual depositing, so it is fitting to resolve the ticīvara and the parikkhāracoḷa too.
35.Idāni evaṃ adhiṭṭhahato aññaṃ laddhā adhiṭṭhātukāmena paccuddharitvā adhiṭṭhātabbanti dassetuṃ‘‘adhiṭṭhahanto’’tiādimāha. Tattha saṅghāṭi pabhuti ādi yassa taṃsaṅghāṭippabhuti. Etaṃ ‘‘adhiṭṭhahanto’’ti etthāpi ‘‘adhiṭṭheyyā’’ti etthāpi kammapadaṃ, ‘‘pubbacīvara’’nti ettha pana visesanaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati.Paccuddharitvāti pariccajitvā. Parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhahitvā ṭhapitavatthehi saṅghāṭiādīni karoti, niṭṭhite rajane ca kappe ca imaṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ paccuddharitvā puna adhiṭṭhātabbāni.Pattādhiṭṭhahaneti pattassa adhiṭṭhāne.Tathāti ca yathā cīvare, tathā pattepi adhiṭṭhānādikaṃ sabbanti attho. Ettha pana ‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ, etaṃ patta’’nti vā viseso.
35.Now, to show that one who has thus resolved, wanting to resolve another, should resolve after withdrawing the previous one, he says ‘‘adhiṭṭhahanto’’ti etc. There, saṅghāṭippabhuti: saṅghāṭi and the others beginning with it. This, "adhiṭṭhahanto," is a kammapada here in "adhiṭṭheyyā" too, but stands as a qualifier in "pubbacīvara." Paccuddharitvāti: abandoning. Having performed the saṅghāṭi etc. with cloths kept having been resolved with the name parikkhāracoḷa, and when the dyeing and kappa are finished, these parikkhāracoḷa should be withdrawn and resolved again. Pattādhiṭṭhahaneti: in resolving the bowl. Tathāti: just as with the robe, so too in the bowl, everything beginning with resolving—this is the meaning. But here, the distinction is "imaṃ pattaṃ, etaṃ patta" (this bowl, that bowl).
36.Idāni paccuddhāravidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘eta’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaimaṃ vaiti vā-saddo rassaṃ katvā niddiṭṭho, so iti-saddato paraṃ yojetabbo, tasmā ‘‘etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paccuddharāmī’’ti vā ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paccuddharāmī’’ti vā saṃseti sambandho veditabbo.Saṃseti vadeyya.Evanti yathā nāmena saṅghāṭi paccuddharitabbā, tathā uttarāsaṅgādīnīti attho.Vidūti paccuddharetimassa kattupadaṃ, paññavāti attho. Sabbatthāpi dūrāsannatādī vuttanayena veditabbā.
36.Now, to show the method of withdrawing, he says ‘‘eta’’nti etc. There, imaṃ vaiti: the vā-sound is specified having shortened, that should be connected after the iti-sound, therefore, the connection should be understood as saying "etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paccuddharāmī" (I withdraw this saṅghāṭi) or "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paccuddharāmī." Saṃseti: should say. Evanti: just as the saṅghāṭi should be withdrawn by name, so too the uttarāsaṅga etc.—this is the meaning. Vidūti: the agent in "paccuddhareti," meaning wise. Everywhere, the nearness and distance etc. should be understood in the manner stated.
37-8.Idāni saṅghāṭiādīnaṃ channaṃ pamāṇaparicchedaṃ dasseti‘‘saṅghāṭī’’tiādinā. Pacchimo antopacchimanto,tena, pacchimakoṭiyāti attho.Dīghasoti dīghato. Muṭṭhiyā sahitaṃ pañcakaṃ yassā sā muṭṭhipañcakā, liṅgavipallāsavasena panamuṭṭhipañcako. Muṭṭhi-saddenettha upacāravasena katamuṭṭhiko hatthova vutto. Sugatassa cīvarato ūnāti samāso.Apīti vuttasamuccaye, tena yathāvuttapacchimappamāṇā ca ayañca uttamappamāṇāti attho. ‘‘Pacchimantenā’’ti idaṃmuṭṭhittikañca tiriyanti etthāpi anuvattetvā attho veditabbo.Ca-saddo ‘‘uttamantena sugatacīvarūnāpi vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ samuccinoti. Tattha idāni majjhimassa purisassa tisso vidatthiyo ekā sugatavidatthi, tāya vidatthiyā nava vidatthiyo dīghato sugatacīvarappamāṇaṃ, tiriyaṃ cha vidatthiyo, taṃ pana vaḍḍhakihatthena dīghato terasa hatthā ekā ca vidatthi, tiriyato nava hatthā honti. Taṃvasena ubhayattha ūnatā viññātabbā.
37-8.Now, to show the determination of the measurements of the six, saṅghāṭi etc., with ‘‘saṅghāṭī’’ti etc. The last end is pacchimanto, with that; meaning the last edge. Dīghasoti: in length. That which has a fist together with five, that is muṭṭhipañcakā, but with gender inversion, muṭṭhipañcako. Here, the fist-sound means the hand with the fist made conventionally. Sugatassa cīvarato ūnāti samāso: shorter than the Sugata's robe is the compound. Apīti: in the accumulation of what was said, therefore, both the last measurement as stated and this, the best measurement, are meant. This "Pacchimantenā" should be followed in muṭṭhittikañca tiriyanti too, and the meaning should be understood. The ca-conjunction collects this: "it is fitting even if shorter than the Sugata's robe with the best edge." There, now, three spans of the middle man are one Sugata span; with that span, nine spans in length is the measure of the Sugata robe, six spans across; that, however, is thirteen hatthas and one span in length by a carpenter's hattha, and nine hatthas across. In that sense, the shortness in both respects should be understood.
‘‘tathā ekaṃsikassapī’’ti āha. Eko aṃso ekaṃso, tattha kātabbanti taddhiteekaṃsikaṃ. ‘‘Antaravāsako’’ccādinā nivāsanaṃ dasseti. Tattha antaraṃ majjhapadeso, antare majjhe kaṭippadese vāso vatthaṃ antaravāso, soyevaantaravāsako. Cāpīti samudāyo, eko vā samuccayo. Aḍḍhena tatiyo bhāgoaḍḍhateyyo. Ettha dvinnaṃ hatthakoṭṭhāsānaṃ sampuṇṇānaṃ tatiyakoṭṭhāsasaṃsijjhane karaṇabhūtā aḍḍha-saddaniddiṭṭhā yā vidatthi, sāva tatiyoti niddiṭṭhoti upaḍḍhahatthasaṅkhāto tatiyo bhāgo aḍḍhateyyo. So ca nānantarena dvihatthatatiyatā labbhatīti dve hatthā, ekā ca vidatthi aḍḍhateyyo. Taṃsanniyogena panettha antaravāsakova aḍḍhateyyoti veditabbo. Dve hatthā yassāti bāhiratthasamāso. Pārupanenāpi sakkā nābhiṃ paṭicchādetunti‘‘dvihattho’’ti vuttaṃ.Vā-saddo aḍḍhateyyaṃ vikappeti. Tiriyassa antoti chaṭṭhītappuriso, tiriyameva antoti vā kammadhārayo ‘‘gāmanto’’tiādīsu viya.
He says ‘‘tathā ekaṃsikassapī’’. Eko aṃso ekaṃso, kātabbanti tattha taddhite ekaṃsikaṃ: One part is ekaṃsa; made in that, therefore ekaṃsika. He shows the nivāsana with "Antaravāsako" etc. There, antaraṃ majjhapadeso, antare majjhe kaṭippadese vāso vatthaṃ antaravāso: the middle region, the cloth dwelling in the middle, in the hip region, is antaravāsa; that same is antaravāsako. Cāpīti: a community, or a collection. Aḍḍhena tatiyo bhāgo aḍḍhateyyo: a third part with a half. Here, the vidatthi indicated by the aḍḍha-sound, which is the instrumental cause in the combining of the complete two hattha-parts and the third part, that is specified as the third part, therefore a half hattha is the third part, aḍḍhateyya. And because the two hatthas and the third cannot be obtained without the immediately preceding one, two hatthas and one vidatthi is aḍḍhateyya. By that connection, antaravāsaka should be understood as aḍḍhateyya here. ‘‘dvihattho’’ti vuttaṃ: It is possible to cover the navel even with the covering; outer meaning compound. The vā-sound distinguishes aḍḍhateyya. Tiriyassa antoti chaṭṭhītappuriso, tiriyameva antoti vā kammadhārayo ‘‘gāmanto’’tiādīsu viya: the end of the width is a sixth-tatpurisa, or tiriyameva anta is a kammadhāraya, like in "gāmanto" etc.
39.‘‘Nisīdanassā’’tiādinā nisīdanacīvaraṃ dasseti. Etthanisīdanaṃnāma same bhūmibhāge eḷakalomāni uparūpari santharitvā kañjikādīhi siñcitvā kato dvīsu ṭhānesu phālitattā tīhi dasāhi yutto parikkhāraviseso.Vidatthī dveti dve vidatthī.Visālatoputhulato.
39. From "Nisīdanassā" onwards, it indicates the nisidana-cloth. Here, nisīdana means a special furnishing made by spreading goat hair densely on a level ground, sprinkling it with gruel, etc., and splitting it in two places, thus having three borders and ten appendages. Vidatthī dve means two spans. Visālato means in width.
40.‘‘Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādī’’tiādinā kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ dasseti. Tatthakaṇḍūti hi na atthato nānaṃ, taggahaṇena panettha piḷakassāvathullakacchābādhaṃ gayhati. Kaṇḍuṃ yathāvuttaṃ piḷakādiṃ paṭicchādetīti kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi. Paṭicchadanaṃ vā paṭicchādo, yathāvuttakaṇḍuyā paṭicchādo kaṇḍuppaṭicchādo, so assa atthīti kaṇḍuppaṭicchādī, tassa.Tiriyanti tiriyato.
40. From "Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādī" onwards, it indicates the kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi cloth. Here, kaṇḍū is not different in meaning, but by its mention, it includes boils, thick scabies, and afflictions of the armpits. Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi means that which covers kaṇḍū, the boils, etc., as mentioned. Or, paṭicchādanaṃ is paṭicchādo, the covering of the aforementioned kaṇḍū is kaṇḍuppaṭicchādo, which one has; for that. Tiriyaṃ means in breadth.
41.‘‘Vassikā’’tiādinā vassikasāṭikaṃ dasseti, taṃ suviññeyyaṃ.
41. From "Vassikā" onwards, it indicates the vassikasāṭika, which is easily understood.
42.Evaṃ pamāṇavantānaṃ pamāṇaṃ dassetvā vuttappamāṇātikkame dosaṃ, kesañci pamāṇābhāvagaṇanābhāvañca dassetuṃ‘‘etthā’’tiādimāha. Tatthaetthāti vuttappamāṇavantesu cīvaresu.Taduttaritato vuttappamāṇato uttari nipātena uttari-saddena tappuriso.Karontassasampādentassa.Chedanapācittīti chedanena sahitā pācitti, atirekaṃ chinditvā pācittiyaṃ desetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttappamāṇato pana atirekañca ūnakañca ‘‘parikkhāracoḷa’’nti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Yena mukhaṃ puñchanti, taṃ mukhasambandhīti mukhassa coḷanti samāse dvando. Ākaṅkhitaṃ icchitaṃ pamāṇanti kammadhārayo. Tametesamatthītiākaṅkhitappamāṇikā. Ettha ca ticīvarādīsu avuttepi gaṇanavibhāge paccattharaṇamukhapuñchanaparikkhāracoḷe ṭhapetvā ādito paṭṭhāya chakkamekekameva vaṭṭati. Mukhapuñchanacoḷāni paccattharaṇāni ca bahūnipīti viññātabbaṃ.
42. Thus, having shown the measure for those having a measure, and to show the fault in exceeding the stated measure, and the absence of calculation for some without a measure, he said "etthā" and so on. There, etthā means among the cloths with the stated measure. Taduttari means more than that stated measure; taduttari is a Tatpurisa compound using the nipāta uttari and the word uttari. Karontassa means making, producing. Chedanapācittī means a pācitti involving cutting; it is said that one must cut off the excess and confess the pācittiya. However, anything exceeding or falling short of the stated measure should be designated as "parikkhāracoḷa." That with which one wipes the face is related to the face, hence mukhassa coḷa in the compound, a Dvanda compound. Ākaṅkhitaṃ icchitaṃ pamāṇaṃ is a Karmadhāraya compound. Those who have this are ākaṅkhitappamāṇikā. Here, even though not stated for the ticīvara, etc., in the division of calculation, leaving aside the paccattharaṇa, mukhapuñchana, and parikkhāracoḷa, from the beginning onwards, only one of each kind is allowable. It should be understood that many mukhapuñchanacoḷas and paccattharaṇas are also allowable.
43.Gaṇanāti ettha napuṃsakassa itthivacanena yogābhāvā ‘‘na dīpitā’’ti liṅgaṃ vipariṇāmetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na pakāsitāti attho. Tiṇṇaṃ panetesaṃ ukkaṭṭhaparicchedavaseneva vuttaṃ, vikappanūpagapacchimena pacchimappamāṇaṃ atthiyeva. Idāni yasmā tattha taṃ sabbaṃ na dīpitaṃ, tasmā vikappanūpagathavikādi sabbaṃ ekaṃ ‘‘parikkhāracoḷa’’nti, bahūni ekato katvā ‘‘parikkhāracoḷānī’’tipi vatvā adhiṭṭhātabbanti dassento‘‘tathā’’tiādimāha. Iminā parikkhāracoḷaṃ nāma pāṭekkaṃ nidhānamukhanti dasseti.Thavikādiṃthavikā ādi yassa parissāvanādinoti samāso. Vikappassa upagaṃvikappiyaṃ,tañca upari vakkhati.
43. Gaṇanā: Here, because there is no connection with the neuter gender in the feminine word, the gender should be changed and related as "na dīpitā," meaning it is not shown in the commentary. However, these three are stated only in terms of the highest limit; with vikappanūpagapacchima, there is indeed a later measure. Now, because everything there is not shown there, therefore, to show that all vikappanūpagathavika, etc., should be designated as one "parikkhāracoḷa," or as "parikkhāracoḷāni" by combining many into one, he said "tathā" and so on. By this, he shows that parikkhāracoḷa is a separate treasure and a source. Thavikādiṃ: thavikā ādi yassa parissāvanādinoti is a compound. Vikappassa upagaṃ is vikappiyaṃ, which he will explain later.
44.Idāni tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ paṭibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ahatā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ahatena navena adhotena kappaṃ sadisaṃ ahatakappaṃ, ekavāradhotaṃ. Ahatañca ahatakappañcaahatāhatakappāni,vatthāni, tesaṃ. Dve guṇā paṭalāni yassa sāti duguṇā. ‘‘Guṇo paṭalarāsīsū’’ti hi abhidhānappadīpikā.Duguṇādupaṭṭā, uttarasmiṃ dehabhāge āsañjīyatītiukkarāsaṅgo. Ekaccaṃ ekapaṭṭaṃ assa atthītiekaccī,ekapaṭṭoti attho. Nipāto vā ekaccīti.Tathāti samuccaye, antaravāsako cāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upamāyaṃ vā, yathā uttarāsaṅgo ekacciyo, evaṃ antaravāsakoti attho.
44. Now, to show the division of the three robes, "ahatā" and so on are begun. There, ahatena means new, unwashed, similar to new, ahatakappaṃ, washed once. Ahatañca ahatakappañca are ahatāhatakappāni, cloths, of those. Dve guṇā paṭalāni yassa sāti duguṇā. "Guṇo paṭalarāsīsū" is indeed the Abhidhānappadīpikā. Duguṇā means dupaṭṭā, that which is worn on the upper part of the body is ukkarāsaṅgo. One which has one edge is ekaccī, meaning one edge. Or, ekaccī is a nipāta. Tathā means in aggregation, it is said to be antaravāsako. Or, in simile, just as uttarāsaṅgo is ekacciyo, so is antaravāsako.
45.‘‘Utū’’ti anekautu gahitāti ututo dīghakālato uddhaṭāutuddhaṭā,tesaṃ pilotikānanti attho.Sesāti uttarāsaṅgaantaravāsakā. Paṃsu viya kucchitaṃ ulati pavattatītipaṃsukūlaṃ,rathikāsusānasaṅkārakūṭādīnaṃ yattha katthaci ṭhitaṃ coḷakhaṇḍaṃ, tasmiṃ. Yā yā rucīti abyayībhāveyathāruci,yāvadatthaṃ satapaṭṭampi vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo.
45. Utū means taken from many seasons; ututo dīghakālato uddhaṭā are utuddhaṭā, meaning pilotikānanti. Sesā means uttarāsaṅga and antaravāsakā. Paṃsu viya kucchitaṃ ulati pavattatīti is paṃsukūlaṃ, a piece of cloth found anywhere, whether in a road, cemetery, or refuse heap; in that. Yā yā rucīti in the অব্যয়ীভাব সমাস, yathāruci, the intention is that even a hundred pieces are allowable according to one’s liking.
46.Idāni tīsu chinditvā kātuṃ appahontesu kātabbavidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘tīsū’’tiādimāha. Tattha ticīvarasamudāyato ekadesabhūtānaṃ dvinnamekassa ca saṅkhāguṇena niddhāriyamānattātīsūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Ekavacanassa bahvatthena yogābhāvato dvicīvarasaṅkhātabahvatthavasena vacanaṃ vipariṇāmetvā yāni pahonti, tāni dve vāpi chinditabbāni, yaṃ pahoti, taṃ ekaṃ vā chinditabbanti yojetabbaṃ.Pahontīti pacchimacīvarappamāṇachinnakāni pahonti.Apīti sambhāvane, tīsu kā kathāti attho.Anvādhinti āgantukapattaṃ. Anu pacchā ādhīyatīti anvādhi, yaṃ cīvarassopari saṅghāṭiākārena āropetabbaṃ.Anādiṇṇanti anāropitaṃ anvādhikaṃ.Na dhāreyyāti iminā yadi dhāreyya, dukkaṭanti dīpeti.
46. Now, to show the method to be followed when there is not enough to make from three, he said "tīsū" and so on. There, because of determining by the number and quality of two or one, which are part of the group of three robes, tīsū is bhumma in determination. Because the singular does not connect with the meaning of plural, changing the expression according to the plural meaning of two robes, those which are sufficient, two or one should be cut; that which is sufficient, that one should be cut; this should be connected. Pahontī means those which are cut to the size of the final robe are sufficient. Apī means in possibility, what to say about three. Anvādhi means a secondary bowl-cloth. Anu pacchā ādhīyatīti anvādhi, that which is placed on top of the robe in the manner of a saṅghāṭi. Anādiṇṇaṃ means an unadopted anvādhika. Na dhāreyyā means by this, he indicates that if one wears it, there is a dukkaṭa.
47-8.Idāni ‘‘ticīvaraṃ na vaseyya vinekāha’’nti vuttānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ avippavāsalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘gāme’’tiādināudositasikkhāpade(pārā. 471 ādayo) vuttaparihāramāha. Tattha gāme vā…pe… vihāre vā ticīvaraṃ nikkhipitvāti sambandho. Tattha ‘‘paṭo daḍḍho’’tiādīsu viya avayavepi samudāyavohāravasena tīsu ekampi‘‘ticīvara’’nti vuttaṃ.Bhikkhusammutiyaññatrāti saṅghena gilānassa bhikkhuno dīyamānaṃ cīvarena vippavāsasammutiṃ vinā.Vippavatthunti ekūpacāranānūpacāragāmādito bahi, atha vā nivesanādīnaṃ, tattha ca gabbhovarakānaṃ cīvarassa vā hatthapāsaṃ atikkamma cīvarena vippayutto hutvā vasituṃ. Ettha ca gāmādīnaṃ ekūpacāranānūpacāratā ekakulanānākulasantakassa gāmādino parikkhepassa, parikkhepokāsassa ca vasena satthaabbhokāsānaṃ sattabbhantaravasena ca veditabbā. Tattha eko abbhantaro aṭṭhavīsatihattho hoti. Ettha ca nivesanādīni gāmato bahi sanniviṭṭhānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ visuṃ gāmassa gahitattā, tathā udositādīhi aññaṃ nivesanaṃ.
47-8. Now, to show the characteristic of non-separation of the three mentioned as "ticīvaraṃ na vaseyya vinekāha," he said "gāme" and so on, stating the exemption mentioned in the udositasikkhāpada (pārā. 471 ff.). There, gāme vā…pe… vihāre vā ticīvaraṃ nikkhipitvāti is the connection. There, just as in "paṭo daḍḍho," the word "ticīvara" is used even for one of the three, due to the usage of the aggregate term for the part. Bhikkhusammutiyaññatrā means without the agreement for separation with the robe given by the Saṅgha to a sick bhikkhu. Vippavatthuṃ means outside the boundary of a village that is within or beyond the boundary, or of residences, etc., and there, having gone beyond the reach of the hand for the robe from the gabbhovaraka, or being separated from the robe, to live. Here, whether a village, etc., is within or beyond the boundary should be understood based on the boundary of the village belonging to one or different families, and based on the enclosed space, and based on whether it is with or without a roof. There, one interior is twenty-eight cubits. Here, residences, etc., should be seen as located outside the village, because the village is taken separately; similarly, a residence is different from udosita, etc.
udositonāma yānādīnaṃ bhaṇḍānaṃ sālā.Pāsādodīghapāsādo.Hammiyaṃmuṇḍacchadanapāsādo. Nāvā ca aṭṭo ca māḷo ca ārāmo canāvā…pe… ārāmaṃ,tasmiṃ.Aṭṭonāma paṭirājādīnaṃ paṭibāhanatthaṃ iṭṭhakāhi kato bahalabhittiko catupañcabhūmiko patissayaviseso.Māḷoekakūṭasaṅgahito caturassapāsādo.Ārāmopupphārāmo vā phalārāmo vā. Sattho ca khettañca khalañcāti dvando.Satthonāma jaṅghasattho vā sakaṭasattho vā.Khalaṃvuccati dhaññakaraṇaṃ.Dumonāma dumamūlaṃ chāyāya phuṭṭhokāso upacāravasena.Abbhokāsopana agāmake araññeva adhippeto.
udosito means a hall for goods of vehicles, etc. Pāsādo means a long building. Hammiyaṃ means a flat-roofed building. Nāvā ca aṭṭo ca māḷo ca ārāmo ca are nāvā…pe… ārāmaṃ, in that. Aṭṭo means a special type of shelter with thick walls made of bricks, with four or five stories, built to repel enemy kings, etc. Māḷo means a square building with a single peak. Ārāmo means a flower garden or a fruit garden. Sattho ca khettañca khalañcāti is a Dvanda compound. Sattho means a caravan of people or a caravan of carts. Khalaṃ is called a threshing floor. Dumo means the base of a tree, a shaded area due to the boundary. Abbhokāso, however, is intended to be a forest without a village.
49.Idāni ‘‘etaṃ…pe… saṅghāṭi’’ntiādinā navannameva paccuddhāro vutto, na pana tesaṃ kālaparicchedoti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘rogā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha devadatto dattoti nāmekadesenāpi nāmavohārato vassikasāṭikāva ‘‘sāṭikā’’ti pakaraṇavasena gammamānatthattā vuttā. Kaṇḍuppaṭicchādikā carogavassānapariyantā. Rogā ca vassānā ca māsā rogavassānā, te tadatikkamena paccuddharitabbatāya pariyantā yāsanti viggaho.
49. Now, in "etaṃ…pe… saṅghāṭi," only the renewal of the nine is mentioned, but not the time limit for them, so to show that, "rogā" and so on are begun. There, devadatto dattoti, from the usage of the name even by a part of the name, just like the vassikasāṭikā, it is said to be "sāṭikā" because the meaning is understood from the context. The kaṇḍuppaṭicchādikā and rogavassānapariyantā. Rogā ca vassānā ca māsā rogavassānā, te tadatikkamena paccuddharitabbatāya pariyantā yāsanti is the analysis.
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469) vuttaṃ. Ettha pana keci ācariyā ‘‘paccuddharitvāti vassikasāṭikabhāvato apanetvā’’ti vadiṃsu, taṃ na yujjati. Paccuddhāravinayakammavisayeyeva paccuddhāra-saddassa diṭṭhattā, ‘‘cātumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ tato paraṃ vikappetu’’nti (mahāva. 358)pāḷivacanato ca. ‘‘Cātumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātu’’nti ca catunnaṃ māsānaṃ adhiṭṭhānena saha accantasaṃyogo dassitoti na tena adhiṭṭhānabhedo viññāyati. Tenevakurundaṭṭhakathāyampi‘‘vassānaṃ cātumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ, tato paraṃ vikappetu’’nti (mahāva. 358) vacanato kattikapuṇṇamāya eva paccuddharitvā hemante vikappetabbāti vuttaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘vassikasāṭikā vassānamāsātikkamenāpi kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi ābādhavūpasamenāpi adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahatī’’ti (kaṅkā. aṭṭha. kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ.Mātikāṭṭhakathāyampi paccuddhāravasenāpi adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahatīti evamattho gahetabbo. Evañhi sati sabbaṭṭhakathāyo samenti, yutti ca aviruddhā hontīti.Tato paranti paccuddhārato upari.Vikappeyyāti kaṇḍuppaṭicchādiṃ paccuddharitvā vikappeyya. Vassikasāṭikaṃ kattikapuṇṇamāyaṃ paccuddharitvā hemantassa paṭhamadivase vikappeyya, evaṃ asati dukkaṭanti adhippāyo.Sesāti apare satta cīvarāni sesā. Natthi pariyantaṃ vuttasadiso kālaparicchedo etesantiapariyantikā.
It is said in the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.469). Here, however, some teachers said, "paccuddharitvā means having removed it from the state of being a vassikasāṭikā," but that is not appropriate. Because the word paccuddhāra- is seen only in the context of paccuddhāravinayakamma, and from the Pāḷi saying, "cātumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ tato paraṃ vikappetuṃ" (mahāva. 358). "Cātumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ" shows complete association with the undertaking of four months, so the difference in undertaking is not understood by that. Therefore, even in the Kurundaṭṭhakathā, "vassānaṃ cātumāsaṃ adhiṭṭhātuṃ, tato paraṃ vikappetuṃ" (mahāva. 358), it is said that having renewed it on the Kattika full moon day, it should be disjoined in the hemanta. Therefore, it is said that "vassikasāṭikā abandons the undertaking even by the passing of the rainy season months, and the kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi abandons it even by the cessation of the disease" (kaṅkā. aṭṭha. kathinasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā). In the Mātikāṭṭhakathā too, the meaning should be taken that the undertaking is abandoned even by way of renewal. Only when it is like this do all the Aṭṭhakathās agree, and the reasoning is also unopposed. Tato paraṃ means above the renewal. Vikappeyyā means having renewed the kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, he should disjoin it. Having renewed the vassikasāṭika on the Kattika full moon day, he should disjoin it on the first day of hemanta; the intention is that otherwise there is a dukkaṭa. Sesā means the remaining seven cloths are sesā. Natthi pariyantaṃ vuttasadiso kālaparicchedo etesanti apariyantikā.
50.Idāni paccattharaṇādikaṃ cīvaracatukkaṃ sadasādikaṃ vaṭṭati, nāparanti dassetuṃ‘‘paccattharaṇā’’tiādimāha. Tattha parikkhāro ca mukhapuñchanañcāti dvando. Parikkhāramukhapuñchanameva coḷakanti kammadhārayo. Dvandasamāsante suyyamānattā pana coḷaka-saddo parikkhāra-saddato ca paraṃ daṭṭhabbo ‘‘parikkhāracoḷaka’’nti. Taṃ pana sāmaññajotanāya visesepi avaṭṭhānato ṭhapetvā pañca cīvarāni parikkhāracoḷanāmenādhiṭṭhitāni avasesaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paccattharaṇañca parikkhāramukhapuñchanacoḷakañcapaccattharaṇa…pe… coḷakañcanisīdanañcāti etaṃ cīvaracatukkaṃ sadasampi arattampi anādiṇṇakappampi labbhanti sambandho.Sadasanti saha yāhi kāhici dasāhīti sadasaṃ. Sadasake labbhamāne adasampi labbhatevāti sadasampi adasampi pupphadasampīti ettha attho.Pi-saddo vuttāvuttasampiṇḍanattho.Arattanti nīlapītādirajanena arañjitampi.Pi-saddena rañjitanīlapītādikampi anādiṇṇakappampīti. Ādiṇṇo kappo yassa natthīti taṃanādiṇṇakappampi. Pi-saddena ādiṇṇakappampi.
50. Now, to show that the four kinds of cloth beginning with the paccattharaṇa are allowable with or without appendages, but not otherwise, he said "paccattharaṇā" and so on. There, parikkhāro ca mukhapuñchanañcāti is a Dvanda compound. Parikkhāramukhapuñchanameva coḷakanti is a Karmadhāraya compound. However, because the word coḷaka is heard at the end of the Dvanda compound, the word should be seen after the word parikkhāra as "parikkhāracoḷaka." However, setting aside that which remains, because it abides even in the specific to indicate the general, the five cloths are designated by the name parikkhāracoḷa. Paccattharaṇañca parikkhāramukhapuñchanacoḷakañca paccattharaṇa…pe… coḷakañca nisīdanañcāti, this group of four cloths is available even with appendages, even undyed, even without adopted marks; this is the connection. Sadasaṃ means saha yāhi kāhici dasāhīti sadasaṃ. When that with appendages is available, that without appendages is certainly available; therefore, the meaning here is that that with appendages, that without appendages, and that with flower appendages. The word Pi- is for combining what has been said and what has not been said. Arattaṃ means even that which is undyed with blue, yellow, etc., dyes. By the word Pi, even that which is dyed with dyed blue, yellow, etc., and even that without adopted marks. Ādiṇṇo kappo yassa natthīti taṃ is anādiṇṇakappampi. By the word Pi, even that with adopted marks.
uppannavatthūsu (mahāva. 371) ‘‘na bhikkhave kusacīraṃ…pe… titthiyaddhajo dhāretabbo. Yo dhāreyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 371) uppannavatthuvaseneva nivāsanapārupanasaṅkhātadhāraṇassa paṭikkhittattā ca tatthevaaṭṭhakathāyañca (mahāva. aṭṭha. 372) ‘‘sabbanīlakādīni rajanaṃ dhovitvā puna rajitvā dhāretabbāni, na sakkā ce honti dhovituṃ, paccattharaṇāni vā kātabbāni, dupaṭṭacīvarassa vā majjhe dātabbāni, acchinnadasadīghadasāni dasā chinditvā dhāretabbāni, kañcukaṃ labhitvā phāletvā rajitvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, veṭhanepi eseva nayo’’ti nivāsanapārupanavaseneva dhāraṇaparibhogānaṃ vuttattā cadubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpade(pāci. aṭṭha. 368) ‘‘yaṃ nivāsetuṃ vā pārupituṃ vā sakkā hoti, tadeva cīvaranti veditabba’’nti pañcannaṃyeva kappabinduno anuññātattā ca ticīvarakaṇḍuppaṭicchādivassikasāṭikasaṅkhātāni pañca cīvarāni kāyaparihāriyāneva adasāni asabbanīlakādīni kappiyarajanarajitāni ādiṇṇakappāniyeva honti, na niyamena nivattitāni parāni cattārīti cīvaracatukkameva sadasādikaṃ anādiṇṇakappampi vaṭṭatīti.
In the uppannavatthū (mahāva. 371), "na bhikkhave kusacīraṃ…pe… titthiyaddhajo dhāretabbo. Yo dhāreyya, āpatti thullaccayassā" (mahāva. 371) etc., because the wearing called nivāsanapārupana is prohibited only in the context of the uppannavatthu, and in the Aṭṭhakathā there (mahāva. aṭṭha. 372), "sabbanīlakādīni rajanaṃ dhovitvā puna rajitvā dhāretabbāni, na sakkā ce honti dhovituṃ, paccattharaṇāni vā kātabbāni, dupaṭṭacīvarassa vā majjhe dātabbāni, acchinnadasadīghadasāni dasā chinditvā dhāretabbāni, kañcukaṃ labhitvā phāletvā rajitvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, veṭhanepi eseva nayo," because the wearing and using is stated only in the context of nivāsanapārupana, and in the dubbaṇṇakaraṇasikkhāpada (pāci. aṭṭha. 368), "yaṃ nivāsetuṃ vā pārupituṃ vā sakkā hoti, tadeva cīvaranti veditabba," because only the five kappabindus are allowed, the five cloths called ticīvara, kaṇḍuppaṭicchādi, and vassikasāṭika are only those that can be carried on the body, are only those without appendages, are only those dyed with permissible dyes, are only those with adopted marks; the four others that are regularly prohibited, are not; therefore, only the four kinds of cloth are allowable with or without appendages, even without adopted marks.
51.Sesacīvarapañcakaṃ adasaṃyeva rajitaṃyeva ādiṇṇakappaṃva kappatīti yojanā.Rajitanti kappiyarajanena rajitaṃ. Nisīdanassa yathāvuttenatthena sabbattha adasatthaṃ nisedhetuṃ‘‘sadasaṃva nisīdana’’nti vuttaṃ. Sati hi sambhave byabhicāre ca visesanaṃ sātthakaṃ hoti.
51. The remaining five cloths are suitable only if without appendages, only if dyed, only if with adopted marks; this is the connection. Rajitaṃ means dyed with permissible dye. To prohibit that without appendages in all cases with the aforementioned meaning of the nisidana, "sadasaṃva nisīdanaṃ" is said. Indeed, in the event of possibility and deviation, the qualification is meaningful.
52.Idāni anadhiṭṭhite anissaṭṭhe ca kā pavattīti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘anadhiṭṭhita’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaanadhiṭṭhitanti ticīvarādivasena anadhiṭṭhitaṃ.Anissaṭṭhanti yassa kassaci dānalakkhaṇena adinnaṃ.Vikappetvā paribhuñjayeti vakkhamānanayena ekabahubhāvaṃ, sannihitāsannihitabhāvañca sallakkhetvā vikappetvā paccuddharitvā paribhuñjeyya. Vakkhamānanayena pana viññāyatīti ‘‘paccuddharitvā’’ti na vuttaṃ.
52. Now, to show what happens when something is neither authorized nor relinquished, he said, starting with "anadhiṭṭhita" (unanthorized). Here, anadhiṭṭhita means unauthorized in terms of the three robes, etc. Anissaṭṭha means not given to anyone with the intention of giving. Vikappetvā paribhuñjaye means having considered and distinguished between singularity and plurality, presence and absence, according to the manner to be described, he may use it after revoking the authorization. However, since it is understood in the manner to be described, "after revoking" is not stated.
‘‘hatthā’’tiādi. Tattha hattho dīghena yassa taṃhatthadīghaṃ. Tatoti tasmā hatthato. Upaḍḍho hatthassa dutiyo bhāgo vidatthisaṅkhāto vitthārena yassa taṃupaḍḍhavitthāraṃ.
"Hatthā" and so on. Here, hattho dīghaṃ yassa taṃ hatthadīghaṃ means that which has a hattha (cubit) for its length. Tato means from that hattha. Upaḍḍho hatthassa dutiyo bhāgo vidatthisaṅkhāto vitthārena yassa taṃ upaḍḍhavitthāraṃ means that which has half a hattha, known as a vidatthi (span), for its width.
53.Idāni yathāvuttavidhānaṃ tecīvarikasseva vasena, aparo pana aññathā paṭipajjatīti taṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ticīvarassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha nāmenādhiṭṭhitāni tīṇi cīvarāni etassātiticīvaro. Tassa vinayatecīvarikassāti attho, na parikkhāracoḷanāmena adhiṭṭhitacīvarassa. Vinayatecīvarikassa pana udositasikkhāpade vuttaparihāro natthi.Parikkhāracoḷiyoti parikkhāracoḷamassa atthīti ṇikena ya-kāro.Sabbanti sakalaṃ navavidhampi cīvaraṃ.Tathā vatvāti ekabahubhāvaṃ, sannihitāsannihitabhāvañca ñatvā ‘‘imaṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādinā vatvā.Adhiṭṭhatīti adhiṭṭhāti.
53. Now, to show that while the procedure described above applies specifically to one possessing three robes, another may conduct himself differently, he said, starting with "ticīvarassā" (of one having three robes). Here, ticīvaro means one who has three robes authorized by name. The meaning is, of one possessing three robes according to the Vinaya, not of one whose robe is authorized by the term parikkhāracoḷa. However, for one possessing three robes according to the Vinaya, there is no waiver as mentioned in the Udositasikkhāpada. Parikkhāracoḷiyo means one who possesses a parikkhāracoḷa, the ya-kāra comes from the affix ṇika. Sabbaṃ means all, even the nine kinds of robes. Tathā vatvā means having known the singularity and plurality, presence and absence, and having said, "I authorize this parikkhāracoḷa," etc. Adhiṭṭhatī means he authorizes.
54.Adhiṭṭhitacīvaraṃ pana paribhuñjato kathaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahatīti taṃ dassento‘‘acchedā’’tiādimāha. Tattha acchedo ca vissajjanañca gāho ca vibbhamo cāti dvando.Acchedonāma corādīhi acchinditvā gahaṇaṃ.Vissajjanaṃparesaṃ dānaṃ.Gāhovissāsena gahaṇaṃ.Vibbhamosikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya gihibhāvūpagamanaṃ. Tadāpi tassa aññassa dāne viya cīvarassa nirālayabhāvena pana pariccāgoti.Ṭīkāyaṃpana bhādiso bhikkhuyevāti adhiṭṭhānaṃ na vijahatīti atthaṃ vikappetvā bhikkhuniyā gihibhāvūpagamanaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ, kāraṇaṃ panettha amhākaṃ garūhiyevasāratthadīpaniyaṃ(sārattha. ṭī. 2.469) ‘‘bhikkhuniyā ‘hīnāyāvattanenā’ti visesetvā avuttattā bhikkhuniyā hi gihibhāvūpagamane adhiṭṭhānavijahanaṃ visuṃ vattabbaṃ natthi tassā vibbhamaneneva assamaṇībhāvato’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu ca bhikkhuno appaccakkhātasikkhassa gihibhāvūpagamanena adhiṭṭhānavijahanena nirālayabhāvo kāraṇabhāvena vutto, evaṃ sati parivattaliṅgassa natthi nirālayabhāvoti kathamassa adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahatīti? Saccametaṃ, tathāpi buddhamataññūhi aṭṭhakathācariyehiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.69) ‘‘yaṃ panassa bhikkhubhāve adhiṭṭhitaṃ ticīvarañca patto ca, taṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vijahati, puna adhiṭṭhātabba’’nti vuttattā natthettha dosoti.
54. Now, showing how the authorization ceases when one uses an authorized robe, he said, starting with "acchedā" (without cutting). Here, acchedo (not cutting), vissajjana (relinquishing), gāho (taking), and vibbhamo (wandering from the monastic life) are a dvanda compound. Acchedo means taking without being cut off by thieves, etc. Vissajjanaṃ means giving to others. Gāho means taking with confidence. Vibbhamo means going to the state of a householder without disavowing the training. Even then, there is relinquishment of the robe due to its being without attachment, like giving it to another. In the Ṭīkā, however, it is suggested that only a bhikkhu in a similar situation does not lose authorization by proposing the meaning and bhikkhuni going to the state of a householder, it should not be taken, because our teachers in Sāratthadīpanī (sārattha. ṭī. 2.469) have said in this regard, "Because it is not specified by 'returning to a lower state', there is no need to separately state the loss of authorization when a bhikkhuni goes to the state of a householder, as she becomes non-ascetic by the wandering from the monastic life itself." But surely, the state of being without attachment is stated as the reason for the loss of authorization by a bhikkhu who has not disavowed the training and goes to the state of a householder, in which case there is no state of being without attachment for one who has changed gender, so how does his authorization cease? This is true, nevertheless, because the learned elders of the commentary, knowing the Buddha's teachings, have said in the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.69), "Whatever three robes and bowl are authorized in his state of being a bhikkhu, that authorization ceases, and must be authorized again," so there is no fault here.
Māraṇaliṅgasikkhāti uttarapadalopena upacārena vā liṅgaparivattanaṃ sikkhāpaccakkhānañca ‘‘liṅgasikkhā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Iti ete aṭṭha sabbesu navasu cīvaresu adhiṭṭhānassa viyogo vippavāso, tassa kāraṇā hontīti pāṭhaseso. Ticīvarassa pana na kevalaṃ imeyeva aṭṭha, vinividdhachiddañca adhiṭṭhānaviyogakāraṇanti liṅgavacanañca parivattetvā yojetabbaṃ. Tattha abbhantare ekassapi tantuno abhāvena vinividdhaṃ vinivijjhitvā gatachiddaṃkaniṭṭhaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃvinividdhachiddaṃ. Tattha saṅghāṭiyā ca uttarāsaṅgassa ca dīghantato vidatthippamāṇassa, tiriyantato aṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇassa, antaravāsakassa pana dīghantato vidatthippamāṇasseva tiriyantato caturaṅgulappamāṇassa padesassa orato chiddaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ bhindati, sūcikammaṃ katvā puna adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Sūcikammaṃ karontena ca chinditvā dubbalaṭṭhānāpanayanena chiddaṃ adassetvā kātabbaṃ.
Māraṇaliṅgasikkhā means, by way of elision of the last word or conventionally, changing gender and disavowing the training are both called "liṅgasikkhā." Thus, these eight are the separation and departure of authorization in all nine robes, their causes, the remainder of the passage. However, for the three robes, not only these eight, but also a vinividdhachidda (a hole made by piercing) is a cause for the departure of authorization, and the gendered language should also be changed and applied. Here, vinividdhaṃ vinivijjhitvā gatachiddaṃkaniṭṭhaṅgulinakhapiṭṭhippamāṇaṃ vinividdhachiddaṃ means a hole made by piercing through, the size of the back of the little finger nail, due to the absence of even a single thread inside. Here, a hole within the lower limit of a span in length and eight fingerbreadths in width in the saṅghāṭi and uttarāsaṅga, and a hole within the lower limit of a span in length and four fingerbreadths in width in the antaravāsaka, breaks the authorization; it must be authorized again after needlework has been done. And when doing needlework, it should be done without showing the hole by cutting and removing the weak spot.
55.Idāni akappiyāni dassetuṃ‘‘kusā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha kusā ca vākā ca phalakāni ca, tesaṃ cīrānikusa…pe… cīrāni. Tattha kusena ganthetvā kataṃ kusacīraṃ. Tathā vākena ganthetvā kataṃ vākacīraṃ, tāpasānaṃ vakkalaṃ. Phalakasaṇṭhānāni phalakāni sibbitvā kataṃ phalakacīraṃ.Kesavālajanti kesehi ca vālehi ca jātaṃ vāyitaṃ kambalanti sambandho.Ulūkapakkhājinakkhipeti ulūkānaṃ kosiyasakuṇānaṃ pakkhaṃ pakkhena kataṃ nivāsanañca ajinakkhipaṃ salomaṃ sakhuraṃ ajinamigānaṃ cammañca dhārayato thullaccayanti sambandho.
55. Now, to show what is impermissible, "kusā" (kusa grass), etc., was said. Here, kusā (kusa grass), vākā (bark fiber), and phalakāni (strips of wood), their cīrāni (robes made of them) means kusa…pe…cīrāni. Here, kusacīraṃ means a robe made by tying with kusa grass. Similarly, vākacīraṃ means a robe made by tying with bark fiber, bark for ascetics. Phalakasaṇṭhānāni phalakāni sibbitvā kataṃ phalakacīraṃ means a robe made by sewing strips of wood in the shape of planks. Kesavālajaṃ means a blanket woven from hair and fur. Ulūkapakkhājinakkhipe means thick robes are to be worn when wearing robes made of owl's wings, and hides of animals with hair and hooves.
56.Kadalerakakkadussesūti kadaliyo ca erako ca akko ca, tesaṃ dussāni vatthāni, tesu ceva makacivākehi katepotthake cāpidukkaṭaṃ. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Kadalidussādisaddena taṃdhāraṇamadhippetaṃ, tasmā taṃdhāraṇanimittaṃ dukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho. Evaṃ sabbattha. ‘‘Nīlako cā’’tiādinā dvando. Sabbā nīlaka…pe… kaṇhakāti kammadhārayo. Nīlādivaṇṇayogena vatthaṃ nīlādi.Nīlakaṃumāpupphavaṇṇaṃ.Mañjeṭṭhaṃmañjeṭṭhikavaṇṇaṃ.Pītaṃkaṇikārapupphavaṇṇaṃ.Lohitaṃjayasumanapupphavaṇṇaṃ.Kaṇhakaṃaddāriṭṭhakavaṇṇaṃ. Sabba-saddo panettha paccekaṃ yojetabbo.
56.Kadalerakakkadussesū means dukkaṭa for robes made of kadali (banana), eraka (Eruca sativa), and akka (Calotropis gigantea), and also potthake cāpi (in a book) made of makacivāka. This is the locative case in the sense of a cause. By the word kadalidussādi, the wearing of it is intended, therefore, there is a dukkaṭa for the cause of wearing it, this is the meaning. Thus, everywhere. The dvanda compound is formed by "nīlako cā" and so on. Sabbā nīlaka…pe…kaṇhakā is a karmadhāraya compound. Cloth with the combination of blue etc. colors is nīlādi. Nīlakaṃ is the color of the uma flower. Mañjeṭṭhaṃ is the color of mañjeṭṭhika. Pītaṃ is the color of the kaṇikāra flower. Lohitaṃ is the color of the jayasumana flower. Kaṇhakaṃ is the color of the addāriṭṭhaka. The word sabba should be applied individually here.
57.Mahā…pe… ratteti mahāraṅgo ca mahānāmaraṅgo ca, tehi ratte. Etthāpi puna suyyamānaṃ sabbasaddamanuvattiyaṃ, ‘‘sabbamahāraṅgaratte’’tiādinā attho veditabbo. Iminā ca asabbanīlakādi kappiyarajanarajitaṃ paribhuñjantassa natthi dosoti dīpeti. Tattha mahāraṅgo satapadipiṭṭhivaṇṇo. Mahānāmaraṅgo sambhinnavaṇṇo, so pana paṇḍupalāsavaṇṇo hoti, padumavaṇṇotipi vadanti.Tirīṭaketi taṃ nāmaka rukkhatace.Acchinnadīghadasaketi sabbaso acchinnattā acchinnā ca majjhe chinnattā dīghā ca sā dasā ca vatthakoṭi yassāti aññapadatthasamāso.Phalapupphadaseti aññamaññaṃ saṃsibbitvā katā phalasadisā dasā ‘‘phalā’’ti vuccanti, ketakādi pupphasadisāni ‘‘pupphānī’’ti ca, phalā ca pupphā ca dasā yassa, phalasadise dase, pupphasadise dase cāti attho.Veṭhaneti sīsaveṭhane.Tathāti iminā sabbanīlakādīsu dukkaṭaṃ atidisati.Sabbanti kusacīrādikaṃ sakalaṃ. Acchinnaṃ cīvaraṃ yassa so labhatīti sambandho.
57.Mahā…pe…ratte means dyed with mahāraṅga and mahānāmaraṅga. Here too, the word sabba (all), which is heard again, should be followed, the meaning should be understood as "sabbamahāraṅgaratte" (dyed with all mahāraṅga), and so on. And by this, it shows that there is no fault for one who uses what is dyed with permissible dyes other than blue, etc. Here, mahāraṅga is the color of the back of a centipede. Mahānāmaraṅga is a mixed color, but it is said to be the color of a withered palāsa leaf, or the color of a lotus. Tirīṭake means the bark of a tree of that name. Acchinnadīghadasake is a aññapadatthasamāsa (possessive compound) meaning one whose edge of the cloth is completely uncut and therefore uncut, and long because it is cut in the middle. Phalapupphadase means dasā (fringes) that are made by interweaving each other and are similar to fruits are called phalā, and those that are similar to ketaka etc. flowers are called pupphā, and one who has phalā and pupphā, meaning fringes similar to fruits, and fringes similar to flowers. Veṭhane means a head covering. Tathā (similarly) extends the dukkaṭa to all the nīlādi. Sabbaṃ means all, including the kusacīra. He who has an uncut robe, he obtains, this is the connection.
Cīvaraniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Robes is Finished.
4. Rajananiddesavaṇṇanā
4. Explanation of the Section on Dyes
58.Mūlañca khandho ca taco ca pattañca phalañca pupphañca, tesaṃ pabhedoti chaṭṭhītappuriso. Atha vā pabheda-saddassa kammasādhanatte tāniyeva pabhedoti kammadhārayo, tato. Rajanti etehītirajanāni,mūlādīni. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, cha rajanāni mūlarajana’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 344) bhagavatā anuññātattā vuttaṃ‘‘rajanā chappakārāni, anuññātāni satthunā’’ti.
58. Mūlaṃ ca khandho ca taco ca pattañca phalañca pupphañca, tesaṃ pabhedo means a sixth-case tappurisa compound. Or, if the word pabheda has the sense of an instrumental passive compound, then those themselves are pabheda, karmadhāraya, therefore. Rajanāni (dyes) means by which they dye, the roots, etc. Because it was permitted by the Blessed One with "I allow, monks, six dyes, root dye," etc. (mahāva. 344), it was said "rajanā chappakārāni, anuññātāni satthunā" (dyes are of six kinds, permitted by the Teacher).
59.Mūleti mūlarajane haliddiṃ vivajjiya sabbaṃ labbhanti sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha. Mañjeṭṭhi ca tuṅgahārako cāti dvando. Alli-saddena nīli-saddena ca tesaṃ gacchajātīnaṃ pattāni gahitāni upacārena, tathā lodda-saddena kaṇḍula-saddena ca taco, kusumbha-saddena kiṃ suka-saddena ca pupphāni. Teneva ca tāni napuṃsakāni.Tuṅgahārakonāma eko kaṇṭakarukkho, tassa haritālavaṇṇaṃ khandharajanaṃ hoti. Allipattena ekavāraṃ gihiparibhuttaṃ rajituṃ vaṭṭati. Phalarajane sabbampi vaṭṭati.
59.Mūle (in root dyes) means everything except turmeric is allowed in root dye, this is the connection. Thus, everywhere. Mañjeṭṭhi ca tuṅgahārako ca is a dvanda compound. By the word alli, by the word nīli, the leaves of their species are taken figuratively, similarly by the word lodda, by the word kaṇḍula, the bark, by the word kusumbha, by the word kiṃsuka, the flowers. And therefore, those are neuter. Tuṅgahārako is the name of a thorny tree, its heartwood dye is the color of orpiment. A leaf suitable to be dyed once, one used by a householder is suitable for dyeing. All is suitable in fruit dyes.
Rajananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Dyes is Finished.
5. Pattaniddesavaṇṇanā
5. Explanation of the Section on Bowls
60.Ayopattonāma ayasā kāḷalohena nibbatto patto.Jātiyāukkaṭṭhādīnaṃ sāmaññavasena.Pamāṇatoti paricchedato. Tayo pattāti pāṭhaseso.
60. Ayopatto means a bowl made of iron, black iron. Jātiyā means according to the general characteristic of superior etc. Pamāṇato means according to the measure. Tayo pattāti pāṭhaseso (three bowls are the remainder of the text).
61.‘‘Magadhesū’’ti vattabbemagadheti vacanavipallāsena vā ‘‘paccāsā satī’’tiādīsu viya su-saddalopena vā vuttaṃ.Nāḷidvayataṇḍulasādhitanti ettha magadhāpekkhopi nāḷi-saddo dvaya-saddena samāso hoti gammakattāti nāḷiyā dvayaṃ nāḷidvayaṃ. Tattha magadhanāḷi nāma aḍḍhaterasapalā hoti. Ettha ca aḍḍhaterasapalāni māsānanti vadanti. Nāḷidvayena pamitā taṇḍulā sukoṭṭitaparisuddhā anupahatapurāṇasālitaṇḍulā nāḷidvayataṇḍulā, tehi sādhitaṃ pacitanti attho.Odananti sammā sampāditaṃ avassāvitodanaṃ.Sūpanti odanassa catutthabhāgappamāṇaṃ nātighanaṃ nātitanukaṃ hatthahāriyaṃ sabbasambhārasaṅkhataṃ muggasupaṃ.Byañjanañca tadūpiyanti tassa odanassa upiyaṃ anurūpaṃ yāva carimālopappahonakaṃ macchamaṃsādibyañjanañca ukkaṭṭho gaṇhātīti sambandho.
61. Instead of saying "Magadhesū," it was said magadhe by a permutation of letters, or by elision of the su-sound, as in "paccāsā satī," etc. Nāḷidvayataṇḍulasādhita means, even in relation to Magadha, the word nāḷi (a measure) is compounded with the word dvaya (two) because it is understood, thus nāḷiyā dvayaṃ nāḷidvayaṃ (two nāḷis is nāḷidvaya). Here, the Magadhan nāḷi is thirteen and a half palas. And here, they say thirteen and a half palas are a māsa. Nāḷidvayena pamitā taṇḍulā sukoṭṭitaparisuddhā anupahatapurāṇasālitaṇḍulā nāḷidvayataṇḍulā, those nāḷidvaya taṇḍulas mean rice measured by two nāḷis, well-husked, pure, unblemished, old sāli rice, by which it is made, it is cooked, this is the meaning. Odanaṃ means rice well-prepared, un-drained. Sūpaṃ means mung bean soup, about a quarter the amount of the rice, not too thick, not too thin, easy to take with the hand, complete with all ingredients. Byañjanañca tadūpiyaṃ means and appropriate relish for that rice, fish, meat, etc., relish sufficient until the last mouthful, the best one takes, this is the connection.
62.Tassāti yathāvuttaodanādino.Upaḍḍhoti upaḍḍhaṃ nāḷikodanādi assa atthīti upaḍḍho.Eva-kārena atirekaṃ nivatteti.Tatoti yathāvuttanāḷikodanādito. Ukkaṭṭhato ukkaṭṭho ca omakomako ca apattoti yojanā. Omakato omakoomakomako. Iminā puna pattadvayadassanena pamāṇato tayopi pattā vibhāgato nava hontīti dīpeti. Tattha yasmiṃ magadhanāḷidvayataṇḍulodanādikaṃ sabbampi vaḍḍhanapakkhe ṭhitaṃ pakkhittaṃ sace pattassa mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimarājisamaṃ tiṭṭhati, suttena vā hīrena vā chindantassa suttassa vā hīrassa vā heṭṭhimantaṃ phusati, ayaṃukkaṭṭhonāma patto. Sace taṃ rājiṃ atikkamma thūpīkataṃ tiṭṭhati, ayaṃukkaṭṭhomakonāma patto. Sace taṃ rājiṃ na sampāpuṇāti antogatameva, ayaṃukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhonāma patto. ‘‘Ekaṃ nāḷikodanādi sabbampi pakkhittaṃ vuttanayeneva heṭṭhimarājisamaṃ tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ majjhimo nāma patto’’tiādināmajjhimamajjhimomakamajjhimukkaṭṭhāca ‘‘yattha upaḍḍhanāḷikodanādi sabbampi pakkhittaṃ heṭṭhimarājisamaṃ tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ omako nāma patto’’tiādināomakaomakomakaomakukkaṭṭhāca pattā ukkaṭṭhe vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Tesu dve apattā bhājanaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbā, nādhiṭṭhānūpagā, na vikappanūpagā.
62.Tassā (of that) means of the aforementioned rice, etc. Upaḍḍho means one who has half a nāḷi of rice, etc., that person is upaḍḍho. The eva (only) particle excludes the excess. Tato means from the aforementioned nāḷi of rice, etc. Ukkaṭṭhato ukkaṭṭho ca omakomako ca apatto means a bowl that is superior and somewhat inferior. Omakato omako omakomako means inferior from inferior. By this, again, by showing the two bowls, it shows that all three bowls are nine in division by measure. Here, if the rice etc., of two Magadhan nāḷis of rice, etc., all placed standing on the rise, stands level with the lower rim of the mouth of the bowl, and when cutting with a thread or a hīra, it touches the lower end of the thread or the hīra, this is called an ukkaṭṭho bowl. If it stands heaped up exceeding that rim, this is called an ukkaṭṭhomako bowl. If it does not reach that rim, but is only inside, this is called an ukkaṭhukkaṭṭho bowl. "If one nāḷi of rice, etc., all placed, stands level with the lower rim in the manner described, this is called a majjhima (middle) bowl," in this manner the majjhimamajjhimomakamajjhimukkaṭṭhā (the middle-middle, middle-inferior, middle-superior) bowls, and "where half a nāḷi of rice, etc., all placed, stands level with the lower rim, this is called an omako (inferior) bowl," in this manner the omakaomakomakaomakukkaṭṭhā (the inferior-inferior, inferior-inferior-inferior, inferior-superior) bowls should be understood in the same manner as described for the ukkaṭṭha. Of these, two are not bowls, they should be used for the consumption of food, they are not subject to authorization, not subject to distinguishing.
63.Kappo sako atirekapatto dasāhaparamaṃ dhāreyyāti yojanā. Tatthakappoti kappiyo.Sakoti attano santako. Kappiyattā pana attasantakattā ca sattannampi adhiṭṭhānavikappanūpagatā veditabbā. Tattha ayopatto pañcahi pākehi, mattikāpatto dvīhi pākehi pakko adhiṭṭhānūpago ca vikappanūpago ca, tathā ubhopi kākaṇikamattassāpi mūlassa anavasesetvā dinne, sabbaso attasantakatte viññāte ca adhiṭṭhānavikappanūpagāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Atirekapattoti anadhiṭṭhitāvikappitatāya atirekapatto. Adhiṭṭhānapaccuddhārā panettha cīvare vuttāva. Vikappentena pana pattānaṃ ekabahubhāvaṃ, sannihitāsannihitabhāvañca ñatvā ‘‘imaṃ patta’’nti vā ‘‘ime patte’’ti vā ‘‘etaṃ patta’’nti vā ‘‘ete patte’’ti vā vatvā ‘‘tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Sammukhādibhedo panettha cīvare vakkhamānanayena veditabbo.Dasāhaparamanti dasa ahāni paramo paricchedo assāti dahāhaparamo, kālo, taṃ. Accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ.Dhāreyyoti paribhogavasena dhāretabbo. Tasmiṃkāle atināmite patto nissaggiyo hotīti yojanā.Atināmiteti atikkāmitenissaggiyohoti, ekādase aruṇuggamane saṅghassa vā gaṇassa vā puggalassa vāpadabhājanīye(pārā. 602) vuttanayena patto nissajjitabbo hoti, tathā sati pācittiyāpatti cassa hotīti adhippāyo.
63. A bowl that is permissible, one's own, an extra bowl, one should keep for a maximum of ten days, this is the connection. Here, kappo means permissible. Sako means belonging to oneself. But because it is permissible and because it belongs to oneself, all seven should be understood as subject to authorization and subject to distinguishing. Here, an iron bowl is cooked with five firings, a clay bowl is cooked with two firings and is subject to authorization and subject to distinguishing, and similarly, both are subject to authorization and subject to distinguishing when given the price of even a kākaṇika (small coin) without leaving any remainder, and when it is known to belong entirely to oneself. Atirekapatto means an extra bowl because it is unauthorized and undistinguished. Authorization and revocation here have already been stated in the section on robes. But when distinguishing, one should know the singularity and plurality, presence and absence of the bowls and say "imaṃ patta" (this bowl) or "ime patte" (these bowls) or "etaṃ patta" (this bowl) or "ete patte" (these bowls) and say "tuyhaṃ vikappemī" (I distinguish for you). The difference of face-to-face, etc., should be understood here in the manner to be described in the section on robes. Dasāhaparamaṃ means ten days is the highest limit, that time. The expression of usage is in the sense of continuous connection. Dhāreyyo means it should be kept for the sake of consumption. When that time has passed, the bowl becomes forfeitable, this is the connection. Atināmite means when it has passed. Nissaggiyo hoti means on the eleventh day, at dawn, the bowl must be forfeited to the Sangha or the group or the individual in the manner stated in the Padabhājanīya (pārā. 602), and in that case, he incurs a pācittiya offense, this is the intention.
64.‘‘Acchedā’’tiādi cīvare vuttanayattā uttānameva. Ayaṃ pana viseso –maraṇuddhaṭāti uddharaṇaṃ uddhaḷaṃ, paccuddhāro. Maraṇañca uddhaṭañca maraṇuddhaṭā, tasmā.Chiddenāti yena kaṅgusitthaṃ nikkhamati ceva pavisati ca, tena mukhavaṭṭito heṭṭhā dvaṅgulachiddena.Pattādhiṭṭhānamujjhatīti patto adhiṭṭhānaṃ ujjhati vissajjati.
65.Idāni‘‘patta’’ntiādinā aññathā pariharaṇe dukkaṭaṃ dasseti. Tattha sodakaṃ pattaṃ na paṭisāmeyyāti yojanā.Na paṭisāmeyyāti guttaṭṭhāne na nikkhipeyya, ‘‘sodakaṃ pattaṃ uṇhe na ca otape’’tiādinā ca yojanīyaṃ.Na ca otapeti neva īsakaṃ tāpeyya.Na nidaheti nirudakaṃ katvāpi bhusaṃ na nidaheyya, vodakaṃ katvā īsakaṃ tāpeyyātipi byatirekattho.Bhūmyā na ṭhapeti kharāya bhūmiyā na ṭhapeyya. Yattha pana vaṇṇo na dussati, evarūpāya mattikāya paribhaṇḍakatāya bhūmiyā vā tathārūpāya eva vālikāya vā nikkujjitvā ukkujjitvā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati.No ca laggayeti bhittikhilādīsu na olambeyya.
66.‘‘Miḍḍhante vā’’tiādinā vatvā pattaṃ ṭhapetuṃ na ca kappatīti yojetabbaṃ.Miḍḍhanteti āḷindakamiḍḍhikādīnaṃ miḍḍhīnaṃ ante. Sace pana parivattetvā tattheva patiṭṭhāti, evarūpāya vitthiṇṇāya miḍḍhiyā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati.Paribhaṇḍante vāti bāhirapasse katāya tanukāya miḍḍhikāya ante vā. Etthavā-saddo samuccaye, so ca paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Aṅke pana aṃsabaddhakena aṃsakūṭe laggetvā ṭhapetuñca vaṭṭati. Chattepi bhaṇḍakena saddhiṃ bandhitvā vā aṭṭaṃ katvā vā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Mañcepi aññena saddhiṃ bandhitvā ṭhapetuṃ, aṭaniyaṃ bandhitvā olambetuṃ vaṭṭati.
67.Pattena ucchiṭṭhodakañca calakaṭṭhikañca na nīhareyyāti sambandho.Ucchiṭṭhodakanti mukhavikkhālanodakaṃ. Calakāni ca cabbetvā apaviddhāmisāni aṭṭhikāni macchamaṃsaaṭṭhikāni cacalakaṭṭhikaṃ. Pattaṃ paṭiggahaṃ katvā hatthaṃ dhovitumpi hatthadhotādi udakampi patte ākiritvā nīharitumpi anucchiṭṭhaṃ suddhapattaṃ ucchiṭṭhahatthena gaṇhitumpi na vaṭṭati. Macchamaṃsaphalāphalādīni khādanto yaṃ tattha aṭṭhiṃ vā calakaṃ vā chaḍḍetukāmo hoti, taṃ patte ṭhapetuṃ na labhati. Mukhato nīhaṭaṃ pana yaṃ kiñci puna akhāditukāmo patte ṭhapetuṃ na labhati. Siṅgiverādīni ḍaṃsitvā puna ṭhapetuṃ labhati.Pattahatthoti patto hatthe yassāti viggaho. ‘‘Pattahattho, kavāṭa’’nti ca upalakkhaṇametaṃ. Yattha katthaci sarīrāvayave pana pattasmiṃ sati yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena kavāṭaṃ paṇāmetuṃ, ghaṭikaṃ vā ukkhipituṃ, sūciṃ vā kuñcikāya avāpurituṃ na labhati. Aṃsakūṭe pana pattaṃ laggetvā yathāsukhaṃ avāpurituṃ labhati.
68.Bhūmiyā bhūmisambandhī ādhārako, tasmiṃ dantavallivettādīhi kate valayādhārake ca ekadārunā katedāruādhārakeca bahūhi daṇḍehi katedaṇḍādhārakeca yattha ṭhapito patto yathā parivattitvā na paripatati, tathā suṭṭhu sajjite tasmiṃ pattassupari pattoti evarūpeduve patteṭhapeyyāti padatthayojanā. Bhamakoṭisadiso pana dāruādhārako tīhi daṇḍakehi baddho daṇḍādhārako ca ekassapi pattassa anokāso, tattha ṭhapetvāpi hatthena gahetvā nisīditabbaṃ.Bhūmiyanti kaṭasārakādinā atthatāya bhūmiyā pana nikkujjitvā vā paṭikujjitvā vāekaṃpattaṃ ṭhapeyyāti yojanā.
69.Idāni akappiyapatte dasseti‘‘dārū’’tiādinā. Tattha suvaṇṇameva sovaṇṇaṃ. Dāru ca rūpiyañca sovaṇṇañca maṇi ca veḷuriyañca dāru…pe… veḷuriyāni, tehi nibbattādāru…pe… mayā. Dīgho pana ‘‘veḷuriyāmayā’’ti gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ kato. Evamuparipi tādisaṃ viññeyyaṃ. Tattha indanīlādimaṇināma. Kaṃso ca kāco ca tipu ca sīsañca phalikā ca tambaloho cāti dvando, tehi jātākaṃsa…pe… jā. Tattha kaṃsa-saddena vaṭṭalohopi saṅgahito. Setaṃtipu,kaṇhaṃsīsaṃ.
70.Chavasīsamayoti chavassa matamanussassa sīsaṃ sīsakapālaṃ, tena nibbatto chavasīsamayo. Ghaṭi ca tumbañca, tesaṃ kaṭāho, tehi jātātighaṭitumbakaṭāhajā. Tatthaghaṭīti ghaṭoyeva.Tumbaṃalābu. Iti ime sabbe pattā akappiyā vuttā, dukkaṭavatthukā ca vuttāti yojanā. Tattha rūpiyādīsu catūsu sace gihī bhattaggesu suvaṇṇataṭṭakādīsu byañjanaṃ katvā upanāmenti, āmasituṃ na vaṭṭati. Kaṃsakācaphalikajāni pana taṭṭakādīni bhājanāni puggalikaparibhogeneva na vaṭṭanti, saṅghikaparibhogena vā gihivikaṭāni vā vaṭṭanti. Ghaṭitumbakaṭāhajā pana labhitvā pariharituṃ na vaṭṭanti, tāvakālikaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭanti.
Pattaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
6. Thālakaniddesavaṇṇanā
71-2.Dāru …pe… veḷuriyāmayā akappiyā, phalikākācakaṃsajā thālakā gihisantakā saṅghikā ca kappiyā, tumbaghaṭijā tāvakālikā kappiyāti sambandho. Kappanti parikappanti avirodhibhāvenevāti kappā, tathā kappiyā. Na kappāakappā. Saṅghassa imesaṅghikā. Tāva-saddo avadhimhi. Tāva bhojanāvadhibhūto kālo etāsantitāvakālikā, bhuñjitvā chaḍḍetabbā, na pariharitabbāti adhippāyo.
Thālakaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
7. Pavāraṇāniddesavaṇṇanā
73.Yena iriyāpathena upalakkhito pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ yaṃ kiñci bhojanaṃbhuñjamāno ayaṃbhikkhu kappiyānaṃ pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ hatthapāsopanītānaṃpavārito, tatoiriyāpathatoaññenairiyāpathenaanatirittakaṃyāvakālikaṃbhuñjeyyace, imassapācittihotīti padatthayojanā. Bhuñjanatthāya paṭiggahaṇe pana dukkaṭaṃ. Tattha iriyāya kāyikakiriyāya patho pavattanūpāyoiriyāpatho,ṭhānagamananisajjanasayanāni. Pavāreti paṭikkhipatītipavārito,atha vā pavāraṇaṃ paṭikkhipanaṃ pavāritaṃ, tamassa atthītipavārito,katappavāraṇo katappaṭikkhepoti attho, atha vā parivesakena vārīyatītipavāritopaṭikkhepito.Anatirittakanti yaṃ pavāretvā āsanā vuṭṭhahantassa ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti evaṃ atirittakaraṇādīhi sattahi vinayakammākārehi kappiyaṃ kataṃ, tañca ‘‘ajja vā yadā vā icchati, tadā khādissatī’’ti āhaṭaṃ, gilānātirittañca atirittaṃ adhikanti vuccati, tato aññaṃ anatirittakaṃ anadhikanti attho. Kusalaṃ cittaṃ pātetītipācitti,tasmā itthiyaṃ timhi ta-kārassa ca-kāre, dvitte ca pācitti. Yāmakālikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ āhāratthāya paṭiggaṇhato āpatti dukkaṭassa, ajjhohāre ajjhohāre āpatti dukkaṭassa.
74.Idāni yāya pavāritā, sā pañcaṅgasampannāyeva pavāraṇā nāma hotīti dassetuṃ‘‘asana’’ntiādimāha. Tatthaasananti bhuñjamānassa bhuñjanaṃ. Iminā yaṃ vippakataṃ bhojanaṃ, taṃ dasseti.Bhojanañcevāti pavāraṇappahonakaṃ bhojanañceva hotīti.Abhihāroti dāyakassa kāyena pavāraṇappahonakassa abhiharaṇaṃ, na vācāya.Samīpatāti aḍḍhateyyahatthappamāṇasaṅkhātā samīpatā ca. Ettha pana sace bhikkhu nisinno hoti, āsanassa pacchimantato paṭṭhāya, sace ṭhito, paṇhiantato paṭṭhāya, sace nipanno, yena passena nipanno, tassa pārimantato paṭṭhāya dāyakassa ṭhitassa vā nisinnassa vā nipannassa vā ṭhapetvā pasāritahatthaṃ yaṃ āsannataraṃ aṅgaṃ, tassa orimantena paricchinditvā aḍḍhateyyahatthapāso veditabbo.Kāyavācāpaṭikkhepoti tassa abhihaṭabhojanassa aṅgulicalanādikāyavikārena vā ‘‘ala’’ntiādinā vacīvikārena vā paṭikkhipanaṃ. Iti imehi pañcahaṅgehi pavāraṇā pakārayuttavāraṇā pañcaaṅgāti sambandho. Pañca aṅgāni yassā sāpañcaaṅgā.
75.Idāni etesu odanādipañcavidhaṃ bhojanaṃ dassetvā tāni ca puna vibhajitvā dassetuṃ‘‘odano’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthasālīti rattasāliādikā sabbāpi sālijāti.Vīhīti sabbāpi vīhināmikā vīhijāti.Kaṅgūti setarattakāḷabhedā sabbāpi kaṅgujāti.Kudrūsonāma kāḷakodravo.Varakonāma setavaṇṇo kodravo. Yavagodhumesu pana bhedo natthi. Evaṃ yathāvuttānaṃ sānulomānaṃ sattannaṃ dhaññānaṃ bhojjayāgu cāti sambandho.Bhojjayāgu cāti uṇhaṃ vā sītalaṃ vā bhuñjantānaṃ bhojanakāle gahitaṭṭhāne odhi paññāyati, sā bhojjayāgu.Ca-saddena odano cāti sambandho, odano nāmāti attho. Sace pana bhatte udakakañjikakhīrādīni ākiritvā ‘‘yāguṃ gaṇhathā’’ti denti, kiñcāpi tanukā hoti, pavāraṇaṃ janeti. Sace pana udakādīsu pakkhipitvā pacitvā denti, yāgusaṅgahameva gacchati. Sace pana tanukāyapi yāguyā sāsapamattampi macchamaṃsakhaṇḍaṃ vā nhāru vā pakkhittaṃ hoti, pavāraṇaṃ janeti.
76.Sāmākāditiṇaṃ kudrūsake saṅgahaṃ gataṃ, varakacorako varake saṅgahaṃ gato, nīvāro ceva sāliyaṃ saṅgahaṃ gatoti yojanā.Sāmākāditiṇanti sāmāko ādi yassa, tameva tiṇaṃ tiṇadhaññanti samāso.
77.Bhaṭṭhadhaññamayoti kharapākabhajjitehi sattavidhehi dhaññehi koṭṭetvā kato, antamaso cuṇṇampi kuṇḍakampi sattu nāmāti attho. Samapākabhajjitānaṃ pana ātapasukkhānaṃ vā taṇḍulānaṃ sattu vā kuṇḍakāni eva vā na pavārenti. Yavena sambhavo uppatti assātiyavasambhavo, kummāsokummāso nāma. Muggādīhi kato pana pavāraṇaṃ na janeti.Kappiyo cāti kappiyoyeva maṃso ‘‘maṃso’’ti vuttoti yojanā.Cāti avadhāraṇe. Akappiyo pana paṭikkhipitabbova. Paṭikkhittopi na pavāreti. Udake sambhavo yassa so maccho nāma. Dvīsu panetesu sace yāguṃ pivantassa yāgusitthamattesupi macchakhaṇḍesu vā maṃsakhaṇḍesu vā ekaṃ khāditaṃ ekaṃ hatthe vā patte vā hoti, so ce aññaṃ paṭikkhipati, pavāreti. Dvepi khāditāni honti, mukhe sāsapamattampi avasiṭṭhaṃ natthi, sacepi aññaṃ paṭikkhipati, na pavāreti.
78.Idāni ‘‘kīdisaṃ bhuñjanto kinti vatvā upanītaṃ kiṃ nāma nisedhento pavāreti nāmā’’ti codanaṃ manasi nidhāyāha‘‘bhuñjanto’’tiādi. Tattha kappaṃ vā akappaṃ vā pañcasu bhojanesu yaṃ kiñcibhojanaṃ bhuñjantobhikkhutannāmenatesaṃ pavāraṇājanakabhojanānaṃ nāmena vā‘‘ima’’ntisāmaññenavāvatvāabhihaṭaṃhatthapāsopanītaṃkappaṃkappiyaṃ yathāvuttabhojanaṃnisedhayaṃnisedhayanto pavāreyyāti padatthasambandho. Ayamettha adhippāyo – yena ce akappiyamaṃsañca kuladūsanavejjakammauttarimanussadhammārocanasāditarūpiyādīhi nibbattaṃ akappiyabhojanañca tathā aññañca kappiyaṃ vā akappiyaṃ vā ekasitthamattampi ajjhohaṭaṃ hoti, so sace pattamukhahatthesu yattha katthaci bhojane sati sāpekkhova aññaṃ hatthapāse ṭhitena ‘‘odanaṃ gaṇhathā’’tiādinā pavāraṇappahonakasseva nāmena vā ‘‘ima’’nti sāmaññavaseneva vā kāyeneva abhihaṭaṃ vuttalakkhaṇaṃ kappiyameva bhojanaṃ kevalaṃ vā missaṃ vā kāyena vā vācāya vā paṭikkhipati pavāretīti. ‘‘Ākira ākira, koṭṭetvā koṭṭetvā pūrehī’’ti pana vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
78. Now, keeping in mind the question, "While eating what, saying what, refusing what that is offered by hand, does one conclude the Pavāraṇā?," he says, "bhuñjanto" etc. Here, whether suitable (kappa) or unsuitable (akappa), whatever food a bhikkhu is eating out of the five kinds of foods, by the name of those foods that give rise to Pavāraṇā, or "ima" (this) in general, having said, what is brought near, brought within reach, suitable (kappa), allowable food as stated above, refusing, while refusing, one concludes the Pavāraṇā—this is the connection of the word meanings. The idea here is this: if even a single grain of unsuitable meat or unsuitable food arising from things like defiling a family, practicing medicine, boasting about superior human qualities, or accepting gold and silver, or any other suitable or unsuitable thing has been consumed, then, if there is food in the bowl or in hand, and being still desirous, refuses with the body alone the suitable food of the stated characteristics, whether pure or mixed, that is brought near with the name of something capable of Pavāraṇā, such as "Take the rice," etc., or with the general term "this," either with the body or with speech, then one is performing Pavāraṇā. But it is permissible to say, "Pour in, pour in; fill it up by crushing and crushing."
79-80.Idāni ye pavāraṇaṃ na janenti, te dassetuṃ‘‘lājā’’tiādimāha. Tattha lājā…pe… phalādīni pavāraṇaṃ na janentīti sambandho.Lājāti sāliādīhi katā lājā.Taṃsattubhattānīti tehi lājehi katā sattu ceva bhattāni ca.Gorasoti gunnaṃ raso khīrādi.Suddhakhajjakoti macchamaṃsehi asammissatāya suddhakhajjako. Sattuyo piṇḍetvā kato apakko sattuguḷo pana sattumodakasaṅkhāto pavāreti.Taṇḍulāti samapākabhajjitānaṃ sāliādīnaṃ taṇḍulā, bhajjitataṇḍulā eva vā.Bhaṭṭhapiṭṭhanti suddhaṃ yaṃ kiñci bhajjitaṃ piṭṭhaṃ.Puthukāti sāliādīnaṃ puthukā. Puthukā hi tantiāgamayuttiyā visumpi gayhati, ekatopi, tasmā vuttāvasesānaṃ puthukāveḷuādīnaṃ bhattanti ca sambandho.Veḷūti tesaṃ taṇḍulā vuccanti. Puthukā ca veḷu ca, te ādayo yesanti samāso.Ca-saddo panettha sabbatthāpi yojetabbo.Ādi-saddena kandamūlaphalānipi gayhanti.Vuttāvasesānanti vuttehi sattavidhehi dhaññehi avasesānaṃ.Rasayāgūti rasehi pakkamaṃsādīhi sammissā yāgu. Rasopi tādisova.Suddhayāgūti maṃsādīhi amissā suddhayāgu.Phalādīnītiādi-saddena kandādīnampi gahaṇaṃ.Api cāti nipāto, nipātasamudāyo vā samuccaye, so paccekaṃ yojetabbo.
79-80. Now, to show those that do not give rise to Pavāraṇā, he says "lājā" etc. Here, lājā...pe...phalādīni (fruits etc.) do not give rise to Pavāraṇā—this is the connection. Lājā means popped rice made from sāli etc. Taṃsattubhattānī means sattu and cooked rice made from that lājā. Goraso means the juice of cows, such as milk etc. Suddhakhajjako means pure hard food, because it is not mixed with fish or meat. But a ball of sattu that is rolled into a ball and uncooked, called sattumodaka, is permissible for Pavāraṇā. Taṇḍulā means grains of sāli etc. that are fried evenly, or simply fried grains. Bhaṭṭhapiṭṭha means any kind of flour that has been purely fried. Puthukā means flattened rice of sāli etc. Puthukā is taken separately by way of logic and tradition, and also as a whole, therefore, the remaining puthukā, veḷu etc. are connected to cooked rice. Veḷū means their grains. Puthukā and veḷu, these are the beginning, thus is the compound. Here, the word ca should be connected everywhere. The ādi-word includes root-tubers and fruits as well. Vuttāvasesāna means of what remains of the seven kinds of grains that have been mentioned. Rasayāgū means rice gruel mixed with flavoring agents such as cooked meat. Raso is of the same kind. Suddhayāgū means pure rice gruel that is unmixed with meat etc. Phalādīnī means the ādi-word also includes root-tubers etc. Api ca is a particle, or a group of particles, in the sense of conjunction, and it should be connected to each item.
81.Idāni yasmā sattahi vinayakammākārehi yaṃ atirittaṃ akataṃ, tattha pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ, byatirekato atirittakate natthi, tasmā atirittaṃ karontena evaṃ kātabbanti dassento‘‘pavāritenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha pavāritena vuṭṭhāya atirittaṃ na kātabbaṃ, bhojanaṃ abhuttena ca atirittaṃ na kātabbanti sambandho.Bhojananti pavāraṇappahonakabhojanaṃ.Abhuttenāti ekasitthamattampi abhuttāvinā.Yena yaṃvā pure katanti ettha caeva-saddo dīghaṃ katvā niddiṭṭho, so ca ajjhāhaṭena taṃ-saddena sambandhīyati, tasmā yena bhikkhunā yaṃ bhojanaṃ pure pubbe atirittaṃ kataṃ, teneva tameva atirittaṃ na kātabbanti yojetvā attho veditabbo. Tasmā kappiyaṃ kāretvā bhuñjantassa aññaṃ āmisaṃ ākiranti, taṃ so puna kātuṃ na labhati, tasmiṃ bhojane kariyamāne paṭhamakatena saddhiṃ kataṃ hotīti. Aññasmiṃ pana tena vā aññena vā kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
81. Now, since a Pācittiya offense was stated for what is extra and undone among the seven modes of Vinaya procedures, and there is no offense by way of exception for what is extra and done, therefore, showing how it should be done by one who does what is extra, he says "pavāritenā" etc. Here, having performed Pavāraṇā, extra should not be done, and extra should not be done by one who has not eaten the food—this is the connection. Bhojana means food that is capable of Pavāraṇā. Abhuttenā means by one who has not eaten even a single morsel. Here, the word eva in "yena yaṃvā pure kataṃ" is indicated by lengthening it, and it is connected with the implied word taṃ, therefore, the meaning should be understood by connecting it as, "The food that was previously done extra by whichever bhikkhu, the same extra should not be done by him." Therefore, if they pour other meat for one who is causing suitable food to be made and is eating, he is not allowed to do that again, because when that food is being prepared, it becomes something done together with the first action. But it is permissible to do it with other food, either by him or by another.
82.‘‘Kappiya’’ntiādīni ‘‘karonto’’ti etassa kammapadāni. Kappiyañceva gahitañceva uccāritañceva hatthapāsagañceva yāvakālikaṃ atirittaṃ karonto ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti evaṃ bhāsatūti yojanā. Tatthayaṃ phalaṃ vā kandamūlādi vā pañcahi samaṇakappehi kappiyaṃ kataṃ, yañca kappiyamaṃsaṃ vā kappiyabhojanaṃ vā, etaṃkappiyaṃnāma.Gahitanti bhikkhunā paṭiggahitaṃ.Uccāritanti kappiyaṃ kāretuṃ āgatena bhikkhunā īsakampi ukkhittaṃ vā apanāmitaṃ vā, taṃ pana atirittakārakena ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti vuttena kātabbaṃ.Hatthapāsaganti kappiyaṃ kāretuṃ āgatena hatthapāsaṃ gataṃ.Atirittaṃ karontoti īdisaṃ catubbidhākārasampannaṃ bhojanaṃ atirittaṃ karonto pavāretvā āsanā avuṭṭhito vā appavāretvāpi sabbathā bhutto vāti evaṃ duvidhavinayakammākārasampanno bhikkhu.Alametaṃ sabbanti evaṃ bhāsatūti alametaṃ sabbaṃ iti evaṃ bhāsatu. Evaṃ sattavidhaṃ vinayakammākāraṃ sampādento vacībhedaṃ katvā sakimpi evaṃ vadeyyāti attho.
82. "Kappiya" etc. are the objects of the verb "karonto." While making suitable (kappiya), accepting, announcing, within reach and yāvakālika to be extra, he should say, "This is enough, all of this"—this is the arrangement. Here, the result is this: whether a fruit or a root-tuber etc. has been made suitable with the five samaṇakappas, and whether it is suitable meat or suitable food, this is called kappiya. Gahita means accepted by the bhikkhu. Uccārita means even slightly raised or removed by the bhikkhu who has come to make it suitable, but it should be done by the one who is making extra after saying, "This is enough, all of this." Hatthapāsaga means come within reach by the one who has come to make it suitable. Atirittaṃ karonto means a bhikkhu who performs extra with food that has these four kinds of characteristics, either not having gotten up from his seat after performing Pavāraṇā or having eaten in every way even without performing Pavāraṇā, thus having these two kinds of Vinaya procedure characteristics. Alametaṃ sabbanti evaṃ bhāsatū means let him speak thus, "alametaṃ sabbaṃ" (this is enough, all of this). Thus, while accomplishing the seven kinds of Vinaya procedure, even once he should speak thus, having made a distinction in speech—this is the meaning.
83.Kappiyaṃ karontena pana anupasampannassa hatthe ṭhitaṃ na kātabbaṃ. Tenāha‘‘na kare…pe… hatthaga’’nti. Upasampannato añño anupasampanno, tassa hatthe gataṃanupasampannahatthagaṃ. Pesayitvāpīti sace tattha añño byatto bhikkhu natthi, yattha atthi, tattha pesayitvāpi.Taṃatirittakataṃakārakoatirittakārakato aññosabbopavāritopi appavāritopi bhuñjituṃ labbhateti sambandhanīyaṃ. Pavāritena pana mukhañca hatthañca sodhetvā bhuñjitabbaṃ.
83. But one who is making suitable food should not do it with something standing in the hand of one who is not fully ordained. Therefore, he says, "na kare...pe...hatthaga". One who is not fully ordained is different from one who is fully ordained; what has gone into his hand is anupasampannahatthagaṃ (in the hand of one not fully ordained). Pesayitvāpi means even having sent it, if there is no other competent bhikkhu there, to where there is. Taṃ (that) which is extra done akārako (non-maker), other than the one who made extra, sabbo (everyone), both having performed Pavāraṇā and not having performed Pavāraṇā, is allowed to eat—this should be connected. But having performed Pavāraṇā, the mouth and hands should be cleaned before eating.
Pavāraṇāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Pavāraṇā Niddesa is finished.
8. Kālikaniddesavaṇṇanā
8. Kālikaniddesavaṇṇanā
84.Kālikāti majjhanhikapacchimayāmasattāhayāvajīvappavattisaṅkhāto kālo etesamatthīti kālikā, sabbepi khajjabhojjaleyyapeyyasaṅkhātā atthā. Te pana gaṇanaparicchedato cattāro honti. Kiṃ te appaṭiggahitāpi sabhāveneva kālikavohāraṃ labhanti, udāhu aññathāpīti āha‘‘paṭiggahitā’’ti, paṭiggahitāyeva te yāvakālikādi kālikavohāralābhino, no aññathāti adhippāyo. Idāni te dasseti‘‘yāvakālika’’ntiādinā. Tattha aruṇuggamanato yāva ṭhitamajjhanhiko, tāva paribhuñjitabbattā yāva majjhanhikasaṅkhāto kālo assātiyāvakālikaṃ,piṭṭhakhādanīyādikaṃ vatthu, ṭhitamajjhanhikato paṭṭhāya taṃ paribhuñjituṃ na sakkā, kālaparicchedajānanatthaṃ kālatthambho vā yojetabbo, kālantare vā bhattakiccaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yāva rattiyā pacchimasaṅkhāto yāmo, tāva paribhuñjitabbato yāmo kālo assātiyāmakālikaṃ. Paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ nidhetabbato sattāho kālo assātisattāhakālikaṃ. Ṭhapetvā udakaṃ avasesaṃ sabbampi paṭiggahitaṃ yāvajīvaṃ pariharitvā sati paccaye paribhuñjitabbato jīvassa yattako paricchedo yāvajīvaṃ, taṃ assa atthītiyāvajīvikaṃ.
84. Kālikā means, because time exists for them, that is reckoned as forenoon, afternoon, the seven-day and lifetime periods, all the items reckoned as hard food (khajjaka), soft food (bhojja), delicacies (leyya) and drinks (peyya). But those are four in terms of numerical division. Do they obtain the designation of "kālika" by their own nature even without being accepted, or is it otherwise? He says "paṭiggahitā": only after being accepted do they gain the designation of yāvakālika etc., not otherwise—this is the idea. Now he shows them with "yāvakālika" etc. Here, because it is suitable to be consumed from sunrise until midday, therefore, the object yāvakālikaṃ, which has time that is reckoned up to midday, such as flour-based edibles, cannot be consumed starting from midday; either a time-pillar should be employed to know the time limit, or the meal duties should be done at another time. Because it is suitable to be consumed until the last watch of the night, therefore, yāmakālikaṃ has a yāma as its time. Because it is suitable to be stored for seven days after accepting, therefore, sattāhakālikaṃ has a week as its time. Because everything that has been accepted, except for water, should be maintained for a lifetime, and should be consumed when there is a reason, therefore, yāvajīvikaṃ has that which has the limit of life, for as long as life lasts.
Nanu ca aññattha viya ‘‘yāvajīvika’’nti ettha kālasutiyā abhāve kathaṃ ‘‘cattāro kālikā’’ti yujjatīti? Yujjati, sogatānaṃ khandhavinimuttasseva kālassābhāvato jīvasaṅkhātassa jīvitindriyassa khandhasaṅgahitattā sopi kāloyevāti. Nanu cettha ‘‘yāvakālika’’ntiādinā niddiṭṭhāneva ‘‘kālikā’’ti vuttāni, ‘‘kālikānī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyāti? Nedamevaṃ viññeyyaṃ, ‘‘kālika’’ntiādīni vatthusambandhena vuttāni, ‘‘kālikā’’ti pana sāmaññantaravasena atthasaddasambandhena vuttanti natthi virodhoti.
Now, how is it proper to say "four kālikas," since there is no indication of time in "yāvajīvika" as there is elsewhere? It is proper, because for the Sugatas, since there is no time apart from the aggregates, the life faculty, which is reckoned as life, is included in the aggregates, so that too is time. Now, should it be said "kālikānī" since only those indicated by "yāvakālika" etc. are called "kālikā"? It should not be understood thus; "kālika" etc. are said in relation to the object, but "kālikā" is said in relation to the meaning of the word atthā in terms of general distinction, therefore there is no contradiction.
85.Idāni tesu‘‘piṭṭha’’ntiādinā yāvakālikaṃ dasseti. Tatthapiṭṭhaṃ mūlaṃ phalanti piṭṭhakhādanīyaṃ mūlakhādanīyaṃ phalakhādanīyañca. Tattha sattannaṃ tāva dhaññānaṃ dhaññānulomānaṃ aparaṇṇānañca piṭṭhaṃ panasalabujaambāṭakadhotatālapiṭṭhādikañceti tesu tesu janapadesu pakatiāhāravasena 03 manussānaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyakiccasādhakaṃ piṭṭhaṃpiṭṭhakhādanīyaṃ. ‘‘Adhotaṃ tālapiṭṭhaṃ khīravallipiṭṭha’’ntiādinā gaṇiyamānānaṃ gaṇanāya anto natthi, khādanīyabhojanīyakiccasādhakabhāvoyeva panetesaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ, subahuṃ vatvāpi imasmiṃyeva lakkhaṇe ṭhātabbanti na vitthārayāma. Evaṃ sabbattha. Tambakataṇḍuleyyādimūlaṃmūlakhādanīyaṃ. Panasalabujanāḷikerādiphalaṃphalakhādanīyaṃ. Khajjanti sakkhalimodakādipubbaṇṇāparaṇṇamayaṃ khādanīyañca.Gorasoti khīradadhitakkasaṅkhāto gunnaṃ raso ca.Dhaññabhojananti sānulomānaṃ dhaññānaṃ odanasattukummāsasaṅkhātabhojanañca.Ṭīkāyaṃpana ‘‘sānulomāni sattadhaññāni ca pañcavidhabhojanañcā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ na yuttaṃ, dhaññānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇe payojanābhāvā, payojanasambhave ca phalaggahaṇeneva tesaṃ gahaṇasambhavato.
85. Now, among those, he shows yāvakālika with "piṭṭha" etc. Here, piṭṭhaṃ mūlaṃ phalaṃ means flour-based edibles, root-based edibles, and fruit-based edibles. Here, the flour of the seven grains, of things that conform with the grains, and of pulses, and flour-based edibles such as jackfruit, buja, mango, āṭaka, dhota, and palm flour—flour that accomplishes the duties of edible and consumable food for humans in those various countries in accordance with their natural diet is piṭṭhakhādanīyaṃ (flour-based edibles). There is no end to the count of those that are counted with "undressed palm flour, khīravalli flour" etc.; but their characteristic is simply accomplishing the duties of edible and consumable food; even after saying a lot, one should remain in this characteristic, so we do not elaborate. Thus it is in all cases. Roots such as tambakataṇḍuleyyā are mūlakhādanīyaṃ (root-based edibles). Fruits such as jackfruit, buja, coconut, etc. are phalakhādanīyaṃ (fruit-based edibles). Khajja means edible hard food made of पूर्वण्ण and अपरण्ण such as sugar candy and modaka. Goraso means the juice of cows reckoned as milk, curd, and buttermilk. Dhaññabhojana means cooked rice, sattu, kummāsa that are foods of grains with those conforming to them. But in the Ṭīkā, it says, "the seven grains and the five kinds of food that conform with them," that is not correct, because there is no purpose in taking the grains separately, and if there is a purpose, it is possible to take them by taking the fruits. Yāgusūpappabhutayo means rice gruel and soup, those which have that as the beginning are yāvakālika—this is the connection. Here, the pabhuti-word includes the food that remains from dhaññabhojana (grain food) reckoned as fish and meat, and also the root-tuber edibles that remain from piṭṭhamūlaphalakhādanīya (flour, root and fruit edibles), and also includes muḷālakhādanīya etc. Among those, long bhisakanda etc. and round uppalakaṇḍa etc. are kandakhādanīyaṃ (root-tuber edibles), and lotus root etc. and erakamūla etc. that are similar to that are muḷālakhādanīyaṃ (lotus-stalk edibles), the tops of palm etc. reckoned as kaḷīra are matthakakhādanīyaṃ (top edibles), the stem of sugarcane etc. and the stem of blue lotus etc. are khandhakhādanīyaṃ (stem edibles), the leaves of tambakataṇḍuleyya etc. are pattakhādanīyaṃ (leaf edibles), sugarcane skin, one that is juicy, is tacakhādanīyaṃ (skin edibles), tambaka siggu flowers etc. are pupphakhādanīyaṃ (flower edibles), labuja seeds, jackfruit seeds etc. are aṭṭhikhādanīyaṃ (seed edibles).
Yāgusūpappabhutayoti yāgu ca sūpañca, taṃ pabhuti yesaṃ teti ete yāvakālikā hontīti sambandho. Ettha ca pabhuti-saddena macchamaṃsasaṅkhātaṃ dhaññabhojanato avasiṭṭhaṃ bhojanañca piṭṭhamūlaphalakhādanīyato avasiṭṭhaṃ kandakhādanīyaṃ, muḷālakhādanīyādiñca saṅgaṇhāti. Tesu dīgho ca bhisakandādi vaṭṭo ca uppalakaṇḍādikandakhādanīyaṃ,padumamūlādi ca taṃsadisaṃ erakamūlādi camuḷālakhādanīyaṃ,tālādīnaṃ kaḷīrasaṅkhātā matthakāmatthakakhādanīyaṃ,ucchukkhandhādayo nīluppalādīnaṃ daṇḍakkhandhakādikhandhakhādanīyaṃ,tambakataṇḍuleyyādīnaṃ paṇṇaṃpattakhādanīyaṃ,ucchutacova eko sarasotacakhādanīyaṃ,tambakasiggupupphādipupphakhādanīyaṃ,labujaṭṭhipanasaṭṭhiādikaṃaṭṭhikhādanīyaṃ.
86.‘‘Madhū’’tiādinā yāmakālikaṃ dasseti. Madhu ca muddikā ca sālūkañca cocañca mocañca ambañca jambu cāti dvando. Muddikā phalepi itthiyaṃ, phale sesā napuṃsake, ‘‘jambu’’ iti phalavācī napuṃsakasaddantaraṃ, tato jātaṃ madhupānādimadhu…pe… jambujaṃ,tañca phārusañca pānakanti yojanā. Tatthamadhujaṃ pānaṃnāma muddikānaṃ jātirasaṃ udakasambhinnaṃ katvā katapānaṃ. Taṃ attanā kataṃ purebhattameva sāmisaṃ nirāmisampi vaṭṭati. Anupasampannehi kataṃ labhitvā pana purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ purebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭati, pacchābhattaṃ pana nirāmisameva vaṭṭati. Esa nayo sabbapānesu.Muddikajaṃ pānaṃnāma muddikānaṃ udake madditvā katapānaṃ. Tathā sesapānāni yathānurūpaṃ veditabbāni,sālūkaṃrattuppalādīnaṃ sālūkaṃ.Cocaṃaṭṭhikakadaliphalaṃ.Mocaṃanaṭṭhikaṃ. Imāni aṭṭha pānāni sītānipi ādiccapākānipi vaṭṭanti, aggipākāni pana na vaṭṭanti. Tenāha‘‘nāggisantatta’’nti.
86. He shows yāmakālika with "madhū" etc. Madhu (honey) and muddikā (grapes) and sālūka (lotus root) and coca (a type of fruit) and moca (banana) and amba (mango) and jambu (jambu fruit)—this is a dvanda compound. Muddikā (grapes) is feminine in the sense of fruit, and neuter in the remaining sense; "jambu" is another neuter word denoting fruit; madhu...pe...jambujaṃ (what is born of honey...pe...jambu), such as drinks made from those, is connected to phārusañca pānakanti (phārusa and drinks). Here, madhujaṃ pānaṃ means a drink made by mixing the juice of grapes with water. It is permissible if it is made by oneself, and it is before the meal, whether mixed with meat or not mixed with meat. But if it is obtained after being made by those who are not fully ordained, it is permissible before the meal, even mixed with meat, but after the meal it is permissible only if it is not mixed with meat. This is the method for all drinks. Muddikajaṃ pānaṃ means a drink made by crushing grapes in water. Likewise, the remaining drinks should be understood accordingly; sālūkaṃ means the lotus root of red lotus etc. Cocaṃ means the fruit of the seed banana. Mocaṃ means seedless. These eight drinks, whether cold or sun-cooked, are permissible, but fire-cooked ones are not permissible. Therefore, he says "nāggisantattaṃ."
87-8.Avasesāni pana vettatintiṇikamātuluṅgakapitthakaramandādikhuddakaphalapānāni aṭṭhapānagatikāneva. Tenāha‘‘sānulomāni dhaññāni, ṭhapetvā phalajo raso’’ti. Ekassa pana vakkhamānānañca ‘‘puppharaso’’tiādīnaṃ ‘‘sītodamadditādiccapāko vā yāmakāliko’’ti iminā sambandho veditabbo. Tālanāḷikerapanasalabujaalābukumbhaṇḍapussaphalatipusaeḷālukaphalānīti nava mahāphalāni, sabbañca aparaṇṇaṃ sattadhaññāni anulomentīti saha anulomehītisānulomāni. Sānulomadhaññānaṃ pana raso yāvakāliko. ‘‘Sānulomāni dhaññānī’’ti phalāni viññāyanti. Phalasutiyā ‘‘sesaphalajo’’ti vattabbe gamyamānattā na vuttaṃ.Madhukapupphamaññatrāti madhukapupphaṃ ṭhapetvā.Pakkaḍākajanti pakkehi yāvakālikehi ḍākehi jātaṃ rasaṃ. Sītamudakaṃsītodaṃ,khīrode viya sītode madditoti tappuriso.Ādicca-saddo ātape vattati upacāratoti ādicce pāko yassāti samāso.
87-8. But the remaining drinks of small fruits such as cane, tiṇi, citron, wood apple, karamanda are just like the eight drinks. Therefore, he says "sānulomāni dhaññāni, ṭhapetvā phalajo raso." But for one, the statement to be explained, and for "puppharaso" etc., the connection should be understood with this: "either cold-water-soaked or sun-cooked is yāmakālika." Tāla, coconut, jackfruit, buja, gourd, pumpkin, pussa fruit, tipusa, eḷāluka fruits are nine large fruits, and all the aparaṇṇa and the seven grains conform, therefore, with those that conform is sānulomāni. But the juice of sānulomadhaññānaṃ (grains that conform) is yāvakālika. "Sānulomāni dhaññānī" are known as fruits. Because it is understood, it is not said that "sesaphalajo" (remaining fruit-born) should be said following the fruit sentence. Madhukapupphamaññatrā (except for madhuka flowers). Pakkaḍākajaṃ means juice born from pakkaḍākas that are yāvakālika. Sītamudakaṃ is sītodaṃ (cold water), just like khīroda, sītode madditoti is a tappurisa compound. The word Ādicca exists in sunlight as a metaphor, therefore the compound is ādicce pāko yassāti (cooked in the sun).
89.Sattāhakālikaṃ dasseti‘‘sappī’’tiādinā. Tatthasattāhakālikāti yathāvuttāni sappiādīni sattāhakālikāni. Idāni sappiādīni vibhajati‘‘sappī’’tiādinā. Tattha yesaṃ gomahiṃ sādīnaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappi sappi nāmāti‘‘sappī’’tiādinā sappilakkhaṇamāha. Akappiyamaṃsasappinopi kappiyasambhave tattha sattāhātikkame dukkaṭassa vakkhamānattā nissaggiyavatthumeva cettha dassetuṃ‘‘yesaṃ maṃsamavārita’’nti vuttaṃ. Khīrādīsu hi tesamakappiyaṃ nāma natthi. Navanītassa sappisadisatāya navanītalakkhaṇaṃ visuṃ na vuttaṃ. Upari sappipiṇḍaṃ ṭhapetvā sītalapāyāsaṃ denti, yaṃ pāyāsena asaṃsaṭṭhaṃ, taṃ sattāhakālikaṃ, missitaṃ pana ādiccapākaṃ katvā parissāvitaṃ, tathā khīraṃ pakkhipitvā pakkatelampi, tesunavanītaṃnāma navuddhaṭaṃ. Tena kataṃ panasappi.
89. He shows the seven-day permissible (sattāhakālika) with "sappi" etc. There, sattāhakālika means the previously mentioned clarified butter (sappi) etc. are seven-day permissible. Now he distinguishes clarified butter etc. with "sappi" etc. There, he states the characteristics of clarified butter (sappi) with "yesaṃ gomahiṃsādīnaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappi sappi nāmā," meaning clarified butter (sappi) is the clarified butter of those cattle, buffalo etc. whose meat is allowable. Since a Dukkaṭa offense will be described later for exceeding seven days even when impermissible meat-clarified butter is mixed with permissible things, here, only items involving relinquishment are shown; therefore it is said "yesaṃ maṃsamavārita," meaning 'whose meat is not prohibited'. For milk etc., there is nothing that is impermissible for them. Since fresh butter (navanīta) is similar to clarified butter (sappi), the characteristic of fresh butter is not stated separately. Placing a lump of clarified butter on top, they give cool pāyāsa; that which is not mixed with the pāyāsa is seven-day permissible, but if mixed, having been cooked in the sun and strained, and also milk having been put in and oil having been cooked, among those, navanītaṃ means newly churned. But sappi means made with that.
90.Tilā ca vasā ca eraṇḍāni ca madhukāni ca sāsapā cāti dvando. Tehi sambhavo yassāti bāhirattho, taṃ telaṃ nāmāti attho. Khuddā khuddamadhumakkhikā ca bhamarā cakhuddabhamaraṃ,khuddajantukattā napuṃsakekavacanaṃ. Madhuṃ karontīti madhukariyo, tā eva makkhikāmadhukarimakkhikā,khuddabhamarameva madhukarimakkhikāti kammadhārayo. Tāhi kataṃmadhumadhu nāmāti attho.Ṭīkāyaṃpana visuṃ madhukarī-saddaṃ vikappetvā ‘‘daṇḍakesu madhukarā madhukarimakkhikā nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Madhupaṭalaṃ vā madhusitthakaṃ vā sace madhunā makkhitaṃ, madhugatikameva. Tumbalakānaṃ cīrikānañca niyyāsasadisaṃ madhu pana yāvajīvikaṃ. Raso nikkasaṭo ādi yassā sārasādi. Ādi-saddena phāṇitādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ, sā ucchuvikati.Pakkāti avatthukapakkā vā,phāṇitaṃphāṇitaṃ nāmāti attho. Sītūdakena katamadhukapupphaphāṇitaṃ pana phāṇitagatikameva. Ambaphāṇitādīni yāvakālikāni. Etāni yathāvuttāni sappiādīni purebhattaṃ sāmisaparibhogenāpi, pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya pana tāni ca pacchābhattaṃ paṭiggahitāni ca sattāhaṃ nidahitvā nirāmisaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbāni.
90. Tilā ca vasā ca eraṇḍāni ca madhukāni ca sāsapā cāti dvando: sesame, vassā, castor seeds, madhuka and mustard – a compound. "Tehi sambhavo yassāti" is the external meaning, meaning that is called oil. Khuddā khuddamadhumakkhikā ca bhamarā ca: small honeybees and bumblebees are khuddabhamaraṃ, being small creatures, it's in the neuter singular. "Madhuṃ karontīti madhukariyo, tā eva makkhikā": those that make honey are madhukari, those are the bees - madhukarimakkhikā, small bumblebees are the same as madhukarimakkhikā, a कर्मधारय compound (kammadharayo). Madhu made by those is called honey. In the commentary (ṭīkā), however, the word madhukarī is separately analyzed, saying, "In the thickets, madhukara are called madhukarimakkhikā." A honeycomb or a beeswax, if smeared with honey, is of the nature of honey. But honey similar to the sap of tumbalaka trees and cīrika is allowable for life. "Raso nikkasaṭo ādi yassā sā rasādi": that of which the juice and extract are the beginning is rasādi. With the word ādi, the taking of molasses (phāṇita) etc.; that is a sugarcane product. Pakkā means properly cooked or phāṇitaṃ means molasses (phāṇita). But molasses (phāṇita) from madhuka flowers made with cold water is of the same category as molasses (phāṇita). Mango molasses etc. are allowable for a period (yāvakālika). These previously mentioned clarified butter (sappi) etc. should be consumed, even with non-vegetarian intake, before the meal; but from after the meal onwards, they and what is received after the meal should be stored for seven days and consumed with non-vegetarian intake.
91.Idāni odissa anuññātavasāya pākato vibhāgaṃ dassetvā tato sappiādīnaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘savatthū’’tiādimāha. Tattha purebhattaṃsāmaṃ vāattanā eva.Vā-saddena parehi vā.Amānusāmanussavasārahitā.Vasāacchādīnaṃ akappiyānaṃ, sūkarādīnaṃ kappiyānañca sattānaṃ vasā. Savatthupakkā sattāhakālikā hotīti seso.Savatthupakkāti savatthukaṃ katvā pakkā. Ayamettha adhippāyo – sace pana vasaṃ purebhattaṃ paṭiggahetvā pacitvā telaṃ parissāvitaṃ sattāhāni nirāmisaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbaṃ. Atha parehi kataṃ purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ, purebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭati, pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya nirāmisameva, no ce, dukkaṭaṃ hotīti. Kāriye kāraṇopacārena panettha‘‘vasā’’ti telameva vuttaṃ, vasā pana yāvakālikāva.
91. Now, to show the obvious distinction based on the allowance considering the origin, and then to show clarified butter etc., he says "savatthū" etc. There, before the meal sāmaṃ vā means by oneself. Vā- indicates by others. Amānusā means without human control. Vasā means fat of impermissible animals such as bears and permissible animals such as pigs. "Savatthupakkā sattāhakālikā hotīti seso": the rest means, that which is cooked with ingredients is seven-day permissible. Savatthupakkā means having cooked by making with ingredients. The meaning here is this: if having received fat before the meal, having cooked and strained the oil, it should be consumed for seven days with non-vegetarian intake. But if received before the meal, having been made by others, even vegetarian is suitable before the meal; from after the meal onwards, only non-vegetarian; if not, there is a Dukkaṭa offense. Here, vasā means only oil, by the treatment of cause as effect; but fat (vasā) is allowable for a period (yāvakālika).
Ṭīkāyaṃpana vasāya ‘‘sattāhakālike āgataṭṭhānaṃ natthīti vadantī’’ti vatvā ‘‘taṃ upaparikkhitabba’’nti vasāya sattāhakālikattamāsaṃkiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Kimettha upaparikkhitabbaṃ? Bhesajjaṃ anujānatā bhagavatā ‘‘yāni kho pana tāni gilānānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṃ – sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ, tāni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbānī’’ti (pārā. 622) sappiādīnameva sattāhakālikattaṃ vuttaṃ.Bhesajjakkhandhakepi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tāni pañca bhesajjāni paṭiggahetvā kālepi vikālepi paribhuñjitu’’nti (mahāva. 260) tāni pañceva ‘‘bhesajjānī’’ti vatvā telaṃ niyamato ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sūkaravasaṃ gadrabhavasaṃ kāle paṭiggahitaṃ kāle nippakkaṃ kāle saṃsaṭṭhaṃ telaparibhogena paribhuñjitu’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttaṃ.Bhesajjasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyañca (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘ṭhapetvā manussavasaṃ aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci vasa’’ntiādinā vasātelassa vidhānaṃ dassetvā ‘‘aññesaṃ yāvakālikavatthūnaṃ vatthuṃ pacituṃ na vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vadatā aṭṭhakathācariyena yāvakālikesu vasaṃ ṭhapetvā aññesaṃ yāvakālikavatthūnaṃ vatthuṃ pacituṃ na vaṭṭatīti ayamettha attho dīpitoti vasā ‘‘yāvakālikāyevā’’ti viññāyatīti ko ettha sukhumo nayoti.
In the commentary (ṭīkā), however, it is said, "They say there is no established place for fat in the seven-day permissible," saying "that should be examined," the seven-day permissibility of fat is stated with doubt. What should be examined here? By the Blessed One allowing medicine, "yani kho pana tāni gilānānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭisāyanīyāni bhesajjāni, seyyathidaṃ – sappi navanītaṃ telaṃ madhu phāṇitaṃ, tāni paṭiggahetvā sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ paribhuñjitabbānīti" (pārā. 622) - clarified butter (sappi) etc. alone are stated as seven-day permissible. Also in the Bhesajja Khandhaka, "anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tāni pañca bhesajjāni paṭiggahetvā kālepi vikālepi paribhuñjitunti" (mahāva. 260) - having said those five alone are "medicines," oil is stated in a regulated way, "anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sūkaravasaṃ gadrabhavasaṃ kāle paṭiggahitaṃ kāle nippakkaṃ kāle saṃsaṭṭhaṃ telaparibhogena paribhuñjitunti" (mahāva. 262). And in the Bhesajja Sikkhāpada Aṭṭhakathā (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. bhesajjasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā), having shown the rule for fat-oil with "ṭhapetvā manussavasaṃ aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci vasa," the commentary ācariya, stating that "aññesaṃ yāvakālikavatthūnaṃ vatthuṃ pacituṃ na vaṭṭatiyevā," implies here that it is not suitable to cook the ingredients of other lifetime-permitted items, keeping fat in lifetime-permitted items, thus it is understood that fat is "allowable for life (yāvakālikāyevā)," so what is the subtle point here?
Aññesaṃvasātelato paresaṃyāvakālikavatthūnaṃyesaṃ tesaṃ yāvakālikavatthūnaṃ sappiādīnaṃvatthuṃyāvakālikasaṅkhātaṃ khīrādikaṃ na paceti sambandho. Ayamettha adhippāyo – yathā sattāhaparibhogatthāya vasaṃ kāle paṭiggahetvā kāle pacituṃ vaṭṭati, na evaṃ sappiādīnaṃ vatthubhūtaṃ khīrādiyāvakālikaṃ, taṃ pana sattāhaparibhogatthāya kālepi na vaṭṭati. Tāni hi yadi taṃ paṭiggahetvā sayaṃ katāni, pacchābhattato paṭṭhāya na vaṭṭanti savatthukappaṭiggahitattā, sāmisaṃ na vaṭṭanti sāmaṃpakkattā, purebhattampi na vaṭṭanti yāvakālikavatthuto vivecitattā. Parehi katāni pana purebhattaṃ sāmisampi vaṭṭanti attanā apakkattā. Yāvajīvikāni tu sāsapamadhukaeraṇḍaaṭṭhīni telakaraṇatthaṃ paṭiggahetvā tadaheva kataṃ telaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ, dutiyadivase kataṃ chāhaṃ vaṭṭati, evaṃ yāva sattamadivase kataṃ tadaheva vaṭṭati, uggate aruṇe nissaggiyaṃ, aṭṭhame divase anajjhoharaṇīyaṃ, uggahitena yena kenaci vatthunā katasadisaṃ hoti. Telatthāya paṭiggahitasāsapādīnaṃ sattāhātikkamena dukkaṭaṃ. Nibbattitaṃ sappi vā navanītaṃ vā kālepi vikālepi paṭiggahetvā pacituṃ vaṭṭati. Taṃ pana tadahu purebhattampi sāmisaṃ na vaṭṭati, saṃsaggato yāvakālikampi sāmaṃpakkaṃ siyāti nirāmisaṃ pana sattāhampi vaṭṭati.
Aññesaṃ means others than fat-oil; yāvakālikavatthūnaṃ means the lifetime permitted things of whomever; vatthuṃ means the lifetime designated milk etc. of clarified butter etc. do not cook. The meaning here is this: just as it is suitable to receive and cook fat at the right time for the purpose of seven-day consumption, the milk etc. which are the ingredients of clarified butter etc., which are allowable for a period (yāvakālika), that is not suitable even at the right time for seven-day consumption. For if those are made by oneself having received them, they are not suitable from after the meal onwards, because of receiving with ingredients; non-vegetarian is not suitable because of cooking oneself; and it is not suitable even before the meal, because of being separated from the lifetime-permitted item. But what is made by others is suitable even with non-vegetarian before the meal, because it is not cooked by oneself. But regarding items allowable for life (yāvajīvika) – having received mustard, madhuka, castor seed pits for making oil, the oil made on that very day is seven-day permissible, the one made on the second day is suitable for six days, likewise the one made up to the seventh day is suitable on that very day; when the sun rises, it is subject to relinquishment, on the eighth day, it is not suitable for consumption; it becomes similar to something made with any seized item. For mustard etc. received for oil, there is a Dukkaṭa offense by exceeding seven days. Clarified butter or fresh butter produced can be received and cooked at any time. But that very day, even with vegetarian intake, it is not suitable before the meal, it may become lifetime permitted (yāvakālika) because of mixture and being cooked by oneself, but non-vegetarian is suitable even for seven days.
92.Idāni‘‘haliddi’’ntiādinā yāvajīvikaṃ dasseti. Tattha‘‘haliddināma nisā’’tiādinā vuccamānepi pariyāyavacane sammoho siyāti na taṃvacanena bhusaṃ sammohayissāma, tasmā tāni upadesatova veditabbāni. Tattha‘‘haliddi’’nti binduāgamena vuttaṃ. Upacārena tu mūlādīni haliddādisaddena vuttāni. Tā haliddādayo keci itthiliṅgāyeva. Mūlaphale vacattañca…pe… bhaddamuttañca ativisāti padacchedo.Pañcamūla-saddena cūḷapañcamūlamahāpañcamūlāni gahitāni.Ādi-saddena vajakalimūle jaraṭṭhanti evamādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
92. Now, with "haliddi" etc., he shows what is allowable for life (yāvajīvika). There, even though "haliddi nāma nisā" etc. are being said, there may be confusion with the synonymous word, therefore we shall not confuse much with that word, therefore those should be known only from the instruction. There, "haliddi" is said with the addition of a dot. But figuratively, roots etc. are called by the word haliddādi. Those haliddādayo, some are only feminine. Mūlaphale vacattañca…pe… bhaddamuttañca ativisāti padacchedo: the separation of words is – mūlaphale vacattañca…pe… bhaddamuttañca ativisa. With the word pañcamūla, cūḷapañcamūla and mahāpañcamūla are taken. With the word ādi, the inclusion of roots of vajakali, jaraṭṭha and so on.
93-5.Goṭṭhaphalanti madanaphalanti vadantīti. Tīṇi phalāni yassaṃ saṅgahitaṃ sātiphalā. Eraṇḍakādīnantiādi-saddena jātirukkhādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Sulasādīnaṃ paṇṇanti sambandho.Ādi-saddena asokādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Sūpeyyapaṇṇanti tambakataṇḍuleyyādisūpayoggapaṇṇaṃ. Ucchuniyyāsaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbo niyyāso ca sarasaṃ ucchujaṃ tacañca ṭhapetvā sabbo taco cāti sambandho. Tattha hiṅgukaṇikāraniyyāsādi sabboniyyāsonāma. Nirasaucchutacādi sabbotaconāma.Loṇaṃsāmuddādi.Lohaṃayatambādi.Silākāḷasilādi.
93-5. Goṭṭhaphala means they say it is madanaphala. "Tīṇi phalāni yassaṃ saṅgahitaṃ sā tiphalā": that in which three fruits are included is tiphalā. Eraṇḍakādīnanti: with the word ādi, the taking of jātirukkha etc. "Sulasādīnaṃ paṇṇanti sambandho": the leaves of sulasādi etc. are related. With the word ādi, the taking of asoka etc. Sūpeyyapaṇṇa means leaves suitable for soup such as tambakataṇḍuleyya etc. "Ucchuniyyāsaṃ ṭhapetvā sabbo niyyāso ca sarasaṃ ucchujaṃ tacañca ṭhapetvā sabbo taco cāti sambandho": keeping the sugarcane extract, all extract, and keeping the fresh sugarcane bark, all bark are related. There, all niyyāso means hiṅgukaṇikāraniyyāsa etc. All taco means nirasaucchutaca etc. Loṇaṃ means sea salt etc. Lohaṃ means iron, copper etc. Silā means black stone etc.
96.Suddhasitthanti madhunā amakkhitaṃ. Madhumakkhitaṃ pana sattāhakālikaṃ.Yañca kiñci sujhāpitanti dujjhāpitaṃ akatvā sujjhāpitaṃ yaṃ kiñci ca.Vikaṭādippabhedanti vikaṭaṃ gūthamattikāmuttachārikāsaṅkhātaṃ ādi yassa, so pabhedo yassāti bāhirattho, taṃ. Yaṃ kiñci cāti sambandho. Ettha panaādi-saddena kandakhādanīye khīrakākolādayo, muḷālakhādanīye haliddisiṅgiveramūlādayo, matthakakhādanīye haliddisiṅgiverakaḷīrādayo, khandhakhādanīye uppalapaṇṇadaṇḍādayo, pupphakhādanīye campakapupphādayo, aṭṭhikhādanīye madhukaṭṭhieraṇḍasāsapādayo, piṭṭhakhādanīye adhotatālapiṭṭhādayo ca saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbā.
96. Suddhasittha means not smeared with honey. But what is smeared with honey is seven-day permissible. Yañca kiñci sujhāpita means whatever is well-burnt, without making it poorly burnt. Vikaṭādippabhedanti: of which vikaṭa designated as excrement, mud, urine, ashes, and conch shell is the beginning, that has varieties, that. Whatever, is related. Here, with the word ādi, kandakhādanīye khīrakākolādayo, edible roots such as milk kakola etc., muḷālakhādanīye haliddisiṅgiveramūlādayo, edible stalks such as turmeric, ginger roots etc., matthakakhādanīye haliddisiṅgiverakaḷīrādayo, edible tops such as turmeric, ginger buds etc., khandhakhādanīye uppalapaṇṇadaṇḍādayo, edible stems such as lotus leaf stalks etc., pupphakhādanīye campakapupphādayo, edible flowers such as campaka flowers etc., aṭṭhikhādanīye madhukaṭṭhieraṇḍasāsapādayo, edible pits such as madhuka pits, castor seeds, mustard seeds etc., and piṭṭhakhādanīye adhotatālapiṭṭhādayo, edible flour such as unwashed palmyra flour etc. should be regarded as included.
97.Idāni sabbaso yāvajīvikaṃ dassetuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā vuttāni ca avuttāni ca ekato sampiṇḍetvā tattha lakkhaṇaṃ ṭhapento‘‘mūla’’ntiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘sāro’’ti vattabbe‘‘sāra’’nti liṅgavipallāsenāha. ‘‘Sāro bale thiraṃse cā’’ti hi nighaṇḍu.Āhāraṭṭhanti āhārena jāto attho payojanaṃ āhārattho, sova āhāraṭṭho, taṃ āhārakiccanti vuttaṃ hoti.
97. Now, because it is not possible to show everything allowable for life (yāvajīvika) in every way, having combined what has been said and what has not been said into one, establishing the characteristics there, he says "mūla" etc. There, when "sāro" should be said, he says "sāra," with a change of gender. For in the dictionary, "sāro bale thiraṃse cā." Āhāraṭṭhanti: āhāraṭṭho means the meaning, purpose born of food, that is āhāraṭṭho, that means the function of food.
98.Idāni catūsu kappiyākappiyādivibhāgaṃ dasseti‘‘sabbā’’tiādinā. Tattha sabbe kālikā, tesaṃ sambhogo anubhavoti samāso.Kāleti pubbaṇhakāle.Sabbassāti gilānāgilānassa.Sati paccayeti tīsu yāmakālikaṃ pipāsādikāraṇe sati, sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikañca gelaññakāraṇe satīti attho, kālato vigatovikālo,tasmiṃ, yāmakālikaṃ vikāle āhāratthāya ajjhoharaṇe, sattāhakālikaṃ pana yāvajīvikañca tadatthāya paṭiggahaṇamattepi dukkaṭaṃ.
98. Now, to show the four divisions – permissible/impermissible etc., with "sabbā" etc. There, all the permissible times, their enjoyment is the compound. Kāle means in the forenoon. Sabbassāti means for the sick and non-sick. Sati paccayeti: when there is a cause like thirst etc. for the three-hour permissible, when there is a cause of illness for the seven-day permissible and lifetime permitted, is the meaning; vikālo means the time gone from the permissible time, in that, for the three-hour permissible, there is a Dukkaṭa offense even at the mere receiving of the seven-day permissible and lifetime permitted for that purpose, not to mention eating for the purpose of food.
99.Ubhoti yāvakālikaṃ yāmakālikañca. Tattha yāvakālikaṃ attano kālātikkantaṃ vikālabhojanabhikkhāpadena pācittiyaṃ janayati, yāmakālikaṃ yāmātikkantaṃ sannidhisikkhāpadena. Ete ubhopi antovutthañca sannidhiñca janayantīti sambandho.‘‘Antovutthaṃ sannidhi’’nti bhāvappadhānoyaṃ niddeso, antovutthattaṃ sannidhittañcāti attho.
99. Ubho means allowable for life (yāvakālika) and three-hour permissible (yāmakālika). There, the lifetime permitted, having exceeded its time, generates a Pācittiya offense by the meal at the wrong time (vikālabhojana) precept; the three-hour permissible, having exceeded its period, by the storing (sannidhi) precept. These both generate both remaining overnight and storing, is the connection. "Antovutthaṃ sannidhi" means this indication is prominence of the state, the meaning is remaining overnight and storing.
100.Atināmiteti atikkāmite.Pācittīti sattāhātikkantaṃ bhesajjasikkhāpadena nissaggiyapācittiyāpatti ca hotīti attho. Sace dvinnaṃ santakaṃ ekena paṭiggahitaṃ avibhattaṃ hoti, sattāhātikkame dvinnampi anāpatti, paribhuñjituṃ pana na vaṭṭati.Pāḷināruḷheti pāḷiyaṃ anāruḷhe sappiādimhi satta ahāni atināmiteti sambandho.Sappīti manussādīnaṃ sappi.Ādi-saddena tesaṃyeva navanītaṃ, nāḷikerāditelaṃ, sītodakena kataṃ madhukapupphaphāṇitañca saṅgahitaṃ.
100. Atināmite means having exceeded. Pācittīti means having exceeded seven days, there is also a Nissaggiya Pācittiya offense by the medicine precept, is the meaning. If something owned by two people is received by one person, if it is undivided, there is no offense for both of them if it exceeds seven days, but it is not suitable to consume. Pāḷināruḷheti: that in the Pali which is not established means the seven days exceeded regarding clarified butter etc. is related. Sappī means clarified butter of humans etc. With the word ādi, the fresh butter of those very ones, coconut oil, and molasses (phāṇita) from madhuka flowers made with cold water are included.
101.Nissaṭṭhaladdhanti nissaṭṭhaṃ vinayakammavasena nissajjitañca taṃ laddhañca puna tathevāti nissaṭṭhaladdhaṃ. Taṃ gahetvāti seso. Nissajjanavidhānaṃ pana vakkhamānanayena veditabbaṃ.‘‘Naṅga’’ntiādi upalakkhaṇamattaṃ. Tena makkhitāni kāsāvādīni ca pana aparibhogāniyeva. Aññassa pana kāyikaparibhogo vaṭṭati.Vikappentassa sattāhe sāmaṇerassāti etthaṭīkāyaṃ‘‘idaṃ sappiṃ tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’tiādinā tesaṃ tesaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā sammukhāparammukhāvikappanavasena atthaṃ dassetvā taṃ sādhayantehi avikappite vikappitasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’nti āpattivāre pāḷi āhaṭā. ‘‘Sace upasampannassa vikappeti, attano eva santakaṃ hoti, paṭiggahaṇampi na vijahatī’’ti dosaṃ vatvā anupasampannassa vikappane attasantakattābhāvo, paṭiggahaṇavijahanañca payojanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha vadāma – āpattivāre ‘‘avikappite’’tiādipāḷiyeva natthi, ‘‘anadhiṭṭhite adhiṭṭhitasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, avissajjite vissajjitasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya’’ntiādinā (pārā. 624) pāḷiyā āgatattā tadanurūpameva anāpattivāre ‘‘adhiṭṭheti, vissajjetī’’tiādināva pāḷi āgatā. Yadi bhaveyya, vaṇṇanīyaṭṭhānatāya aṭṭhakathāya bhavitabbaṃ, na cettha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vijjati. Anupasampannassa vikappane ca kathaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati sikkhāpaccakkhānādīsu chasu paṭiggahaṇavijahanakāraṇesu vikappanassa anantogadhattā, tasmā nāyamettha atthoti.
101. Nissaṭṭhaladdha: "Nissaṭṭhaladdha" means both nissaṭṭha, which is given away by means of a Vinaya procedure, and laddha, which is obtained again in the same manner. Taking that is the remainder. The method of giving away, however, should be understood according to the mode to be described. "Naṅga" etc., is merely illustrative. Therefore, things smeared with it, such as robes, are entirely unusable. However, physical use by another is allowable. Vikappentassa sattāhe sāmaṇerassa: Regarding this, in the ṭīkā it is said, "Declaring the meaning through the mode of sammukhā and parammukhā vikappana by taking the name of each, such as ‘I vikappa this ghee to you,’ those who establish it are liable to a nissaggiya pācittiya if they perceive it as vikappita when it is not vikappita," a passage is cited in the āpatti section. Saying that, "If he vikappas to one ordained, it becomes his own property, and the acceptance is not relinquished," a fault is stated, and the absence of ownership and the relinquishing of acceptance are stated as the purpose in vikappana to one not ordained. Here we say: In the āpatti section, there is no passage such as "avikappite" etc.; because it comes in the passage, "anadhiṭṭhite adhiṭṭhitasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ, avissajjite vissajjitasaññī nissaggiyaṃ pācittiya" (pārā. 624), in accordance with that, in the anāpatti section, the passage comes as "adhiṭṭheti, vissajjetī" etc. If it were to exist, it should be in the place to be explained by the commentary, but it is not found here in the commentary. And how does the acceptance relinquish in vikappana to one not ordained, since vikappana is not included in the six causes of relinquishing acceptance, such as renunciation of the training? Therefore, this is not the meaning here.
vikappentassāti etthavikappanaṃsaṃvidahanaṃ ‘‘cittasaṅkappo’’tiādīsu viya, ubhayattha pana upasaggehi nānattamattaṃ, tasmā antosattāhe sāmaṇerassa yassa kassaci vikappentassa saṃvidahantassa pariccāgasaññaṃ pariccāgacetanaṃ pariccāgādhippāyaṃ uppādentassa anāpattīti attho. Idañcamahāsumattheravādamolubbha vuttaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘tena cittenā’’tiādīsu pāḷivacanesu adhippāyaṃ dassentena, ‘‘idaṃ kasmā vuttaṃ. Evañhi antosattāhe datvā pacchā paṭilabhitvā paribhuñjantassa anāpattidassanattha’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.625).Mahāpadumattheropanāha ‘‘sattāhātikkantassa pana paribhoge anāpattidassanatthamidaṃ vutta’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.625). Ayameva vādo tesu sundarataro. Sattāhe makkhanādiṃ adhiṭṭhato ca aññassa dadatopi ca anāpattīti sambandho.Ādi-saddena abbhañjanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ayametthādhippāyo – sappiādiṃ abbhañjanādiṃ madhuṃ arumakkhanaṃ, phāṇitaṃ gharadhūpanaṃ adhiṭṭhato anāpattīti.Aññassāti upasampannassa vā anupasampannassa vā.
Vikappentassa: Here, vikappana means arrangement (saṃvidahana), as in "cittasaṅkappo" etc.; however, in both cases, there is only a difference due to the prefixes. Therefore, antosattāhe, to whomever the novice arranges for, generating the perception of relinquishing, the thought of relinquishing, the intention of relinquishing, there is no offense—this is the meaning. And this is stated following the view of Mahāsumatthera. For, showing the intention in the passage, "tena cittenā" etc., it was said, "Why is this stated? It is for showing that one is not liable if, having given it within the seven days, he later obtains and uses it" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.625). Mahāpadumatthera, however, said, "This is stated for showing that there is no offense in using it after the seven days have passed" (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.625). This view itself is more beautiful among those. There is no offense in determining the smearing etc., within the seven days, and also in giving it to another—this is the connection. The ādi-word includes anointing etc. This is the intention here: There is no offense in determining ghee etc., anointing etc., honey, yellow orpiment smearing, molasses, or house fumigation. Aññassa: to one ordained or not ordained.
102.Yāvakālikaādīni attanā saha saṃsaṭṭhāni sabbhāvaṃ gāhāpayantīti sambandho.Sabbhāvanti sassa attano bhāvo dvitte sabbhāvo, taṃ.Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ, tasmā.Evamudīritanti evaṃ ‘‘vikappentassa sattāhe’’tiādinā vuttaṃ. Ayamettha adhippāyo – yasmā attanā saṃsaṭṭhāni attano bhāvaṃ gāhāpayanti yāvakālikādīni, tasmā sattāhātikkāmitāni sattāhakālikāni pācittiyajanakāni saṃsaṭṭhāni attasaṃsaṭṭhānipi pācittiyajanakāni karontīti avikappanādimhi sati byatirekato pācittiyāpattiparidīpakaṃ ‘‘vikappentassā’’tiādikaṃ vākyattayaṃ vuttanti.Ṭīkāyaṃpana ‘‘idāni vakkhamānaṃ sandhāyaevanti vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Taṃ vakkhamānassa atītaudīritattāyogato kathaṃ yujjatīti.Evamudīritanti vā pāḷiyaṃ aṭṭhakathāyañca evameva vuttanti attho.Eva-saddo avadhāraṇe.
102. Connect yāvakālika etc., which are connected with oneself, causing to take on the entire state (sabbhāva). Sabbhāva: sassa attano bhāvo dvitte sabbhāvo, that. Tasmā: therefore, since it is thus. Evamudīrita: thus stated, by "vikappentassa sattāhe" etc. The intention here is: Since yāvakālika etc., which are connected with oneself, cause to take on one's own state, therefore, sattāhakālika things that have passed seven days, cause a pācittiya to arise, and connected things, things connected with oneself, also cause a pācittiya to arise. Thus, the three sentences beginning with "vikappentassa" etc., are stated as illustrative of the pācittiya offense by way of exclusion, in the absence of avikappanādi. In the ṭīkā, however, it is said, "evanti vutta is stated with reference to what is about to be said." How does that fit, since what is about to be said is impossible to be something already stated? Evamudīrita: or, it means it is said thus in the Pali and in the commentary. The word eva is for emphasis.
103-5.Idāni attasaṃsaṭṭhānaṃ yāvakālikādīnaṃ sabbhāvagāhāpanaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ‘‘pure’’tiādimāha. Tatthasattāhanti satta ahāni yassa taṃ sattāhaṃ, sattāhakālikaṃ.Ca-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto, so sattāhañca yāvajīvikañcāti yojetabbo.Sesakālikasammissanti sesehi tadahu paṭiggahitehi kālikehi yāvakālikayāmakālikasaṅkhātehi sammissaṃ.Pācittīti sannidhisikkhāpadena pācitti.Tadahu paṭiggahitanti tasmiṃyeva dine purebhattaṃ paṭiggahitaṃ.Tadahevāti tasmiṃyeva dine purebhattameva.Sesanti sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikañca.Evanti yāme eva paribhuñjayeti vijānīyanti sambandho.Itaranti sattāhakālikato aññaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ.
103-5. Now, to show in essence how yāvakālika etc., connected with oneself, cause to take on the entire state, he says "pure" etc. There, sattāha means that which has seven days, sattāhakālika. The word ca is used without purpose; it should be connected as so sattāhañca yāvajīvikañca. Sesakālikasammissa: mixed with the remaining kālika things, namely, yāvakālika and yāmakālika, that were accepted on that day. Pācittī: pācitti by the proximity training rule. Tadahu paṭiggahita: accepted in the forenoon on that very day. Tadahevā: on that very day, only in the forenoon. Sesa: sattāhakālika and yāvajīvika. Eva: it should be understood that he uses it only at that time—this is the connection. Itara: other than sattāhakālika, yāvajīvika.
Kālikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Kālikaniddesa is finished.
9. Paṭiggāhaniddesavaṇṇanā
9. Paṭiggāhaniddesavaṇṇanā
106.Dātuṃ kāmetīti dātukāmo, tassa abhihāro īsakampi oṇamanādinābhiharaṇanti tappuriso, hatthassa pāsohatthapāso. Ruḷhīvasena tu aḍḍhateyyahattho hatthapāso nāma. So ca sace bhikkhu nisinno hoti, āsanassa pacchimantato paṭṭhāya, sace ṭhito, paṇhiantato paṭṭhāya, sace nipanno, yena passena nipanno, tassa pārimantato paṭṭhāya dāyakassa nisinnassa ṭhitassa vā ṭhapetvā pasāritahatthaṃ yaṃ āsannataraṃ aṅgaṃ, tassa orimantena paricchinditvā veditabbo.Eraṇakkhamanti thāmamajjhimena purisena eraṇassa ukkhipanassa khamaṃ yoggaṃ. Vatthusaddāpekkhaṃ napuṃsakattaṃ.Tidhā denteti kāyakāyappaṭibaddhanissaggiyānaṃ vasena tīhi pakārehi dāyake dadamāne. Tattha yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena antamaso pādaṅguliyāpi dīyamānaṃ kāyena dinnaṃ nāma hoti, kaṭacchuādīsu yena kenaci dīyamānaṃ kāyappaṭibaddhena, kāyato pana kāyappaṭibaddhato vā mocetvā hatthapāse ṭhitassa kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā pātiyamānaṃ nissaggiyena payogena dinnaṃ nāma.Dvidhā gāhoti kāyakāyappaṭibaddhānaṃ vasena dvīhi pakārehi yehi kehici dīyamānassa gahaṇaṃ. Evaṃ paṭiggaho pañcaṅgoti yojanā.Pañcaṅgoti pañca aṅgāni yassāti bahubbīhi.
106. Dātuṃ kāmetīti dātukāmo, one who desires to give; tassa abhihāro īsakampi oṇamanādinābhiharaṇanti tappuriso, his offering, offering even slightly by bending down etc., is a Tatpurusha compound; hatthassa pāso hatthapāso. However, by convention, hatthapāso means one and a half hatthas. And that should be understood as being demarcated from the rear end of the seat, if the bhikkhu is sitting; from the heel end, if standing; from the far end of whichever side he is lying on, if lying down, after placing the giver sitting or standing, and with respect to whichever limb is closer with the hand extended, by the near side. Eraṇakkhama: capable, fit for lifting an eraṇa by a man of moderate strength. The neuter gender is in relation to the word thing. Tidhā dente: when the giver gives in three ways, by way of kāyakāya-paṭibaddha and nissaggiya. There, what is given by any bodily limb, even the toe, is called given by the body; what is given by any means, such as a ladle, is given by something connected to the body; however, what is being offered, after detaching it from the body or something connected to the body, and being within hatthapāsa, with the application of relinquishment, by the body or something connected to the body, is called given by way of relinquishment. Dvidhā gāho: the acceptance of what is given by any means, by way of kāyakāya-paṭibaddha, is in two ways. Thus, the acceptance is five-factored—this is the connection. Pañcaṅgo: five factors belonging to it, a Bahubbīhi compound.
107.Idāni aneraṇakkhame ca kismiñci kāyappaṭibaddhe ca paṭiggahaṇārohanaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘asaṃhāriye’’tiādimāha. Tatthaasaṃhāriyeti ānetumasakkuṇeyye phalakapāsāṇādimhi.Tatthajāteti tesuyeva rukkhādīsu jāte kiṃsukapaduminipaṇṇādike. Ciñcaādīnaṃ sukhume paṇṇeti sambandho. Tāni hi sandhāretuṃ na sakkonti. Tesaṃ pana sākhāsu vaṭṭati.Ādi-saddena ‘‘aṅga’’ntiādikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Vā-saddo samuccaye.Asayhabhāreti thāmamajjhimapurisena sahituṃ sandhāretuṃ asakkuṇeyye bhāre. Sabbesaṃ paṭiggaho ‘‘na rūhatī’’ti iminā sambandho.
107. Now, to show the dependence on acceptance in what is not liftable and in something connected to the body, he says "asaṃhāriye" etc. There, asaṃhāriye means on a board, stone, etc., that one is unable to bring. Tatthajāte: the kiṃsuka, paduminī, leaves etc., that have grown on those very trees etc. The delicate leaves of tamarind etc., is the connection. For they are unable to support it. However, it is allowable on their branches. The ādi-word includes "aṅga" etc. The word vā is in the sense of conjunction. Asayhabhāre: a load that one is unable to endure or support by a man of moderate strength. The acceptance of all is connected with this: "na rūhatī".
108.Idāni paṭiggahaṇavijahanaṃ dasseti‘‘sikkhā’’tiādinā. Tatthasikkhāmaraṇaliṅgehīti sikkhāpaccakkhānena ca maraṇena ca liṅgaparivattanena ca.Anapekkhavisaggatoti natthi apekkho etassāti anapekkho, sova visaggo, tato ca.Acchedāti corādīhi acchinditvā gahaṇena.Anupasampannadānāti anupasampannassa dānena.Ca-saddo sabbattha ānetabbo.Gāhoti paṭiggahaṇaṃ.Upasammatīti vijahati.
108. Now he shows the relinquishing of acceptance by "sikkhā" etc. There, sikkhāmaraṇaliṅgehī by the renunciation of the training, and by death, and by the change of gender. Anapekkhavisaggato: natthi apekkho etassāti anapekkho, one who has no dependence; that very relinquishment is from that. Acchedā: by acceptance without being cut off by thieves etc. Anupasampannadānā: by giving to one not ordained. The word ca should be brought in everywhere. Gāho: acceptance. Upasammatī: is relinquished.
109-10.Idāni appaṭiggahitaṃ paribhoge dosaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘appaṭiggahita’’ntiādimāha. Tatthasabbanti catukālikapariyāpannaṃ sakalampi. Idāni appaṭiggahetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘suddha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha suddhaṃ nātibahalaṃ udakañca tathā aṅgalaggaṃ avicchinnaṃ danta…pe… gūthakañca loṇa…pe… karīsakañca kappateti sambandho. Tatthasuddhanti rajareṇūhi aññarasena ca asammissatāya parisuddhaṃ.Nātibahalanti yaṃ kasitaṭṭhāne bahalamudakaṃ viya mukhe vā hatthe vā na laggaṃ, taṃ.Avicchinnanti aṅgato vicchinditvā na gataṃ. Dantāni ca akkhīni ca kaṇṇañca dantakkhikaṇṇaṃ pāṇyaṅgattā, tassa gūthakanti tappuriso.Loṇaṃsarīruṭṭhitaṃ.Siṅghāṇīti siṅghāṇikā. Vicchinnaṃ na paṭiggahetabbaṃ.
109-10. Now, to show the fault in using what is not accepted, he says "appaṭiggahita" etc. There, sabba: the entirety included in the four kinds of kālika. Now, to show what can be used without accepting, he says "suddha" etc. There, pure, not too thick water, and also what is attached to the body, uninterrupted tooth…pe… and excrement, salt…pe… and cow dung is allowable—this is the connection. There, suddha means pure due to being unmixed with dirt, dust, and other flavors. Nātibahala: that which is not sticky on the mouth or hand, like thick water in a cultivated place. Avicchinna: not separated, gone after being detached from the body. Teeth and eyes and ears are part of the body, hence dantakkhikaṇṇaṃ pāṇyaṅgattā, that excrement, a Tatpurusha compound. Loṇaṃ risen from the body. Siṅghāṇī: nasal mucus. What is separated should not be accepted.
111.Idāni‘‘gūthā’’tiādinā kālodissaṃ dasseti.Tathāvidheti sappadaṭṭhakkhaṇādike tathāvidhe kāle. Tathā tādiso vidho kālo etassāti bahubbīhi.Seveyyāti sevanaṃ kareyya, paribhuñjeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Asante kappakāraketi ettha dubbacopi asamatthopi kappiyakārako asantapakkheyeva tiṭṭhatīti veditabbo. Kālodissattā pana chārikāya asati alladāruṃ rukkhato chinditvā kātuṃ, mattikāya asati bhūmiṃ khaṇitvāpi mattikaṃ gahetuṃ vaṭṭati.
111. Now, by "gūthā" etc., he shows designation by time. Tathāvidhe: at such a time, like at the moment of being bitten by a snake. Tathā tādiso vidho kālo etassāti bahubbīhi, such is the way, time belongs to it, a Bahubbīhi compound. Seveyyā: he should attend to it, it is said that he should use it. Asante kappakārake: here, it should be understood that a kappiyakāraka who is difficult to speak to or incapable also stands in the category of being absent. However, because of designation by time, in the absence of ash, it is allowable to cut fresh wood from a tree to make it; in the absence of clay, it is allowable to dig up the ground and take clay.
112.Durūpaciṇṇeti duṭṭhuṃ upaciṇṇaṃ āmaṭṭhaṃ durūpaciṇṇaṃ. Sace bhikkhu appaṭiggahitaṃ sāmisaṃ bhājanaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānato apanetvā āmasati, pidhānaṃ āmasati, upari ṭhitakacavarādiṃ chaḍḍeti, tatthajātakaphaliniyā sākhāya vā valliyā vā gahetvā vā cāleti, durūpaciṇṇaṃ nāma hoti. Tasmiṃ dukkaṭanti sambandho. Phalarukkhaṃ pana apassayituṃ vā tattha kaṇṭakaṃ vā bandhituṃ vaṭṭati. Araññe patitaambaphalādiṃ ‘‘sāmaṇerassa dassāmī’’ti āharitvā dātuṃ vaṭṭati.Rajokiṇṇeti rajasā okiṇṇe, tasmiṃ pattādike yaṃ kiñci paṭiggaṇhato vinayadukkaṭaṃ hotīti attho. Sace piṇḍāya carantassa patte rajaṃ patati, paṭiggahetvā bhikkhā gaṇhitabbā. ‘‘Paṭiggahetvā dethā’’ti vuttepi ākiranti, hatthato amocenteneva paṭiggāhāpakassa santikaṃ netvā paṭiggahetabbaṃ. Sace mahāvāto tato tato rajaṃ pāteti, na sakkā hoti bhikkhaṃ gahetuṃ, ‘‘anupasampannassa dassāmī’’ti suddhacittena ābhogaṃ katvā gaṇhituṃ vaṭṭati. Taṃ pana tena dinnaṃ vā vissāsena vā paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati.
112. Durūpaciṇṇe: duṭṭhuṃ upaciṇṇaṃ āmaṭṭhaṃ durūpaciṇṇaṃ, improperly accumulated, touched, is improperly accumulated. If a bhikkhu, having moved an unaccepted dish with meat in it from its standing place, touches it, touches the lid, throws away the rubbish etc., placed on top, or moves it having taken hold of a branch or vine of a fruit-bearing plant growing there, it is called improperly accumulated. There is a dukkata in that—this is the connection. However, it is allowable to lean on a fruit tree or to tie a thorn on it. It is allowable to bring fallen mango fruits etc., in the forest, thinking, "I will give it to the novice" and to give it. Rajokiṇṇe: covered with dust; there is a Vinaya dukkata for accepting anything in that bowl etc.—this is the meaning. If dust falls into the bowl of one wandering for alms, alms should be taken after accepting it. Even if it is said, "Give after accepting," they sprinkle it; it should be taken after bringing it to the one causing to accept without removing it from the hand. If a great wind blows dust from here and there, it is not possible to take alms; it is allowable to take it after making an effort with a pure mind, thinking, "I will give it to one not ordained." However, it is allowable to use that after accepting it given by him or with confidence.
Athāti vakkhamānārambhe.Uggahappaṭiggaheti uggahitthāti uggaho, uggahitaṃ, tassa paṭiggaho, tasmiṃ. Appaṭiggahitabhāvaṃ jānato attanā eva uggahetvā gahaṇeti adhippāyo. Mātāpitūnaṃ atthāya pana appaṭiggahetvā telādīni, chāyatthāya sākhādīni vā gahetvā pacchato bhuñjitukāmatāya paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Ucchuādīsu phālitesu malaṃ na paññāyati, mūlabhesajjādīni pisantānaṃ vā koṭṭentānaṃ vā nisadanisadapotakaudukkhalamusalāni khīyanti, dantantare laggaṃ sukhumaāmisaṃ hoti, raso na paññāyati, abbohārikaṃ.Antovuttheti akappiyakuṭiyā chadanabbhantare vuttheti attho.Sayaṃpakketi attanā yattha katthaci pakke. Sace vāsiādiṃ tāpetvā takkādīsu pakkhipati, ettāvatāpi sāmapākato na muccati. Purimakālikadvaye punapākañhi ṭhapetvā yaṃ kiñci āmisaṃ bhikkhuno pacituṃ na vaṭṭati. Sacepissa uṇhayāguyā sulasipaṇṇādīni vā siṅgiveraṃ vā pakkhipanti, cāletuṃ na vaṭṭati. Uttaṇḍulaṃ bhattaṃ labhitvā pidahituṃ na vaṭṭati.Antopakketi akappiyakuṭiyā anto pakke. Sabbattha dukkaṭanti sambandho.
Athā: at the beginning of what is to be said. Uggahappaṭiggahe: uggahitthāti uggaho, that which is picked up; uggahitaṃ, that which is picked up, its acceptance, in that. The intention is accepting by oneself after picking it up, knowing the state of being unaccepted. However, it is allowable to take oil etc., for the sake of parents, or branches etc., for shade, without accepting, and to accept and use them later, wanting to use them. In split sugar cane etc., dirt is not evident; in the case of root medicines etc., when they are grinding or pounding, the seat, sitting cloth, mortar, and pestle are worn out, there is subtle meat stuck between the teeth, flavor is not evident, it is not व्यवहारिक. Antovutthe: residing inside a roof of an improper hut—this is the meaning. Sayaṃpakke: cooked by oneself anywhere. If, having heated an adze etc., he puts it into buttermilk etc., even to this extent he is not freed from being cooked with meat. Indeed, after setting aside the two kinds of forenoon food, it is not allowable for a bhikkhu to cook any kind of meat. If, however, they put fragrant leaves etc., or ginger into hot rice gruel, it is not allowable to stir it. Having obtained cooked rice, it is not allowable to cover it. Antopakke: cooked inside an improper hut. There is a dukkata in all cases—this is the connection.
Paṭiggāhaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Paṭiggāhaniddesa is finished.
10. Akappiyamaṃsaniddesavaṇṇanā
10. Akappiyamaṃsaniddesavaṇṇanā
113-4.Manussahatthiassānañca …pe… uragassa ca yaṃ maṃsañca, yaṃ uddissakatamaṃsañca, appaṭivekkhitaṃ yañca maṃsaṃ, tesu maṃsesūti evaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo. Tattha sīsagīvātaraṅgena carantā acchavisesāvataracchā. Uragassāti iminā sabbāpi dīghajāti saṅgahitā.Uddissakatamaṃsanti bhikkhuṃ uddisitvā kataṃ uddissakataṃ, tañca taṃ maṃsañca. Ettha camaṃsa-ggahaṇena macchānampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ upalakkhaṇavasena, ca-saddena vā. Pañcasupi sahadhammikesu yaṃ kiñci uddissakataṃ sabbesampi na kappati, tampi adiṭṭhaasutaaparisaṅkitatāya tikoṭiparisuddhaṃ vaṭṭati.Appaṭivekkhitanti anupaparikkhitaṃ, anāpucchitanti attho. Āpattibhīrukena hi rūpaṃ sallakkhentenāpi pucchitvā paṭiggahetabbaṃ paribhuñjitabbañca. Manussānaṃ maṃsesu thullaccayanti yojanā. Thūlo accayo etthāti rasse, dvitte cathullaccayaṃ. Pārājikasaṅghādisesehi ṭhapetvā ito adhikaṃ vajjaṃ natthi.Sesesūti avasesesu ekādasasu.
113-4. The meaning should be understood by connecting thus: "Manussahatthiassānañca …pe… uragassa ca yaṃ maṃsañca, yaṃ uddissakatamaṃsañca, appaṭivekkhitaṃ yañca maṃsaṃ, tesu maṃsesūti." Here, avataracchā are special types of bears that travel with their heads, necks, and bodies. Uragassa includes all long-bodied creatures. Uddissakatamaṃsa means meat that is prepared specifically for a bhikkhu; uddissakataṃ, and also that meat. Here, with the mention of maṃsa, the inclusion of fish should be understood by way of implication or by the ca-particle. Whatever is specifically prepared among the five co-religionists is not allowed for all of them; even that is suitable if it is tri-kotiparisuddha because it is unseen, unheard, and unsuspected. Appaṭivekkhitaṃ means unexamined, unasked about. One who fears offenses should receive and consume even visible forms after asking about them. Manussānaṃ maṃsesu thullaccayanti is to be connected. Thullaccayaṃ in the short and doubled form means a gross offense. Except for pārājika and saṅghādisesa offenses, there is no greater fault than this. Sesesu means in the remaining eleven.
115.Idāni manussādīnaṃ aṭṭhiādīnipi akappiyānīti dassetuṃ‘‘aṭṭhipī’’tiādimāha.Pi-saddo ‘‘lohita’’ntiādīsupi anuvattetabbo.Esanti manussādīnaṃ dasannaṃ. Vasāsu pana ekā manussavasā na vaṭṭati. Khīrādīsu akappiyaṃ nāma natthi. Uddissakataṃyeva sacittakanti yojanā.Sacittakanti uddissakatabhāvajānanacittena saha vattatīti sacittakaṃ. Vatthuvītikkamavijānanacittena hi sacittakattaṃ. Ettha ca sacittakattaṃ āpattiyā eva, na ca maṃsassa, tathāpi maṃsasīsena āpatti eva vuttāti viññātabbanti.
115. Now, to show that the bones, etc., of humans are also not allowable, he said ‘‘aṭṭhipī’’ etc. The pi-particle should be applied to "lohita" etc. Esa means of the ten, humans, etc. However, among the fats, only human fat is not allowable. Among milk etc., there is nothing that is unallowable. What is specifically prepared is sacittakaṃ; this should be connected. Sacittakaṃ means existing with a mind that is aware of being specifically prepared. Indeed, being sacittaka is through the awareness of transgression of the rule. And here, being sacittaka is only in relation to the offense, not to the meat; nevertheless, it should be understood that the offense is stated in terms of the head of the meat.
Akappiyamaṃsaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of unallowable meat is concluded.
11. Nissaggiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
11. Explanation of Nissaggiya
116-7.Rūpiyena arūpiyaṃ rūpiyañca itarena rūpiyañca parivatteyyāti sambandho. Tattharūpiyenāti rūpiyasaṅkhātena nissaggiyavatthunā.Arūpiyanti arūpiyasaṅkhātaṃ dukkaṭavatthuṃ kappiyavatthuñca.Itarenāti arūpiyena.Nissaggīti nissajjanaṃ nissaggo, pubbabhāge kattabbassa vinayakammassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Nissaggo assa atthīti nissaggi, kiṃ taṃ? Pācittiyaṃ. Rūpiyassa mūlaggahaṇe pana rūpiyappaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadena nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ.
116-7. The connection is that one might exchange arūpiya for rūpiya and rūpiya for rūpiya with the other. Here, rūpiyena means with an article subject to forfeiture designated as rūpiya. Arūpiyaṃ means an article of wrong-doing designated as arūpiya, and an allowable article. Itarena means with arūpiya. Nissaggī means relinquishment; nissaggo, is the name for the Vinaya procedure to be done in the initial part. Nissaggi means having relinquishment. What is that? Pācittiya. However, when taking money as the basis, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya by the training rule on accepting money.
‘‘idhā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kahā…pe… māsakaṃ idha rūpiyanti sambandho. Tatthakahāpaṇonāma suvaṇṇamayo vā rajatamayo vā etarahi pakatikahāpaṇo vā.Sajjhūti rajataṃ.Siṅgīti suvaṇṇabhedo, tathāpi cettha sāmaññena suvaṇṇamadhippetaṃ.Vohārūpagamāsakanti vohāraṃ kayavikkayaṃ upagacchatīti vohārūpagaṃ, tañca taṃ māsakañca. Taṃ pana samuṭṭhāpitarūpañca asamuṭṭhāpitarūpañca lohadāruādimayaṃ vuccati.Idha rūpiyanti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade rūpiyaṃ nāmāti attho. Vatthamuttādi kappaṃ dukkaṭavatthuñca itaranti yojanā. Tattha vatthañca muttā ca ādi yassāti samāso.Ādi-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo ‘‘vatthādi muttādī’’ti. Tattha paṭhamenaādi-saddena kappāsasuttāparaṇṇādikaṃ yaṃ kiñci kappiyavatthuṃ, dutiyena maṇi saṅkho silā pavāḷaṃ lohitaṅko masāragallaṃ sattadhaññāni dāsidāsakhettavatthupupphārāmaphalārāmādayoti idaṃ dukkaṭavatthuṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Vatthādikappiyavatthuṃ, muttādidukkaṭavatthuñca itaraṃ aññaṃ arūpiyaṃ nāmāti attho.
‘‘Idhā’’ etc. is begun. Here, the connection is that kahā…pe… māsakaṃ here is rūpiya. Here, kahāpaṇa means a gold or silver one, or a standard kahāpaṇa at the present time. Sajjhū means silver. Siṅgī means a type of gold, yet here gold in general is intended. Vohārūpagamāsaka means what goes into usage, buying and selling; vohārūpagaṃ, and that māsaka. That, however, is called a rūpa that is produced and a rūpa that is not produced, made of metal, wood, etc. Idha rūpiya means in this training rule, it is called rūpiya. Allowable articles such as cloth, pearls, etc., and articles of wrong-doing should be connected as "itaraṃ". Here, the compound is: cloth and pearls etc., ādi is what has at its beginning. The ādi-particle should be connected individually, "vatthādi muttādī". Here, by the first ādi-particle, any allowable article such as cotton thread, upper cloths, etc., are included; by the second, gems, conch shells, stones, coral, red arsenic, masāragalla, the seven grains, female slaves, male slaves, fields, building sites, flower gardens, fruit gardens, etc.; this includes articles of wrong-doing. An allowable article beginning with cloth, and an article of wrong-doing beginning with pearls, are called the other, other arūpiya.
118.Ettāvatā rūpiyasaṃvohāraṃ dassetvā idāni kappiyabhaṇḍe kayavikkayaṃ dassetumāha‘‘ima’’ntiādi. Tattha ‘‘imaṃ gahetvā imaṃ dehi, imaṃ kara, imaṃ ānayā’’ti vā ‘‘imaṃ bhutvā imaṃ dehi, imaṃ kara, imaṃ ānayā’’ti vā ‘‘imaṃ demi, imaṃ dehi, imaṃ kara, imaṃ ānayā’’ti vā kayavikkaye samāpanne nissaggīti yojanā. Tatthaimanti taṇḍulādiṃ.Bhutvāti odanādiṃ bhuñjitvā.Imaṃ dehīti etaṃ vatthādikaṃ dehi.Imaṃ karāti etaṃ rajanapacanādiṃ karohi.Imaṃ ānayāti etaṃ rajanakaṭṭhādiṃ ānehi.Imaṃ demīti etaṃ vatthādikaṃ tava demi.Samāpanneti kate. Tasmā kappiyaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ parivattentena aññātakehi saddhiṃ ‘‘imaṃ dehī’’ti vadato viññatti, ‘‘imaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vadato saddhādeyyavinipātanaṃ, ‘‘iminā imaṃ dehī’’ti vadato kayavikkayanti vuttā tisso āpattiyo. Mātāpitūhi pana saddhiṃ kayavikkayamattaṃ mocentena parivattetabbaṃ. Ayañhi kayavikkayo ṭhapetvā pañcasahadhammike avasesehi gihipabbajitehi na vaṭṭati. Sace pana navakammāni kāreti, aṭṭhakathāpamāṇena pācittiyamattaṃ desetabbaṃ.
118. Having shown the transaction of money to this extent, now he says ‘‘ima’’ etc. to show buying and selling with allowable goods. Here, upon the completion of buying and selling, whether it is "take this and give this, do this, bring this" or whether it is "having eaten this, give this, do this, bring this" or whether it is "I give this, give this, do this, bring this," there is a nissaggiya. Here, ima means rice, etc. Bhutvā means having eaten rice, etc. Imaṃ dehī means give that cloth, etc. Imaṃ karā means do that dyeing, cooking, etc. Imaṃ ānayā means bring that dye-wood, etc. Imaṃ demī means I give that cloth, etc., to you. Samāpanne means upon completion. Therefore, for one who is exchanging allowable goods, when saying "give this" to strangers, there is a violation; when saying "take this," there is a subversion of faith-based giving; when saying "give this with this," there is buying and selling; these three offenses are stated. However, buying and selling with one's parents should be exchanged while avoiding the offense. Indeed, this buying and selling is not allowable with householders and renunciants other than the five co-religionists. But if he causes new construction to be done, then an offense only of pācittiya should be confessed according to the commentaries.
119-120.Idāni pariṇāmanavasena āpattibhedaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘attano’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ piṇḍattho – saṅghassa nataṃ lābhaṃ attano pariṇāmeyya, nissaggi. Aññato puggalassa pariṇāmeyya, pācitti. Aññassa saṅghassa vā cetiyassa vā pariṇāmeyya, dukkaṭaṃ. Aññassa puggalassa vā cetiyassa vā nataṃ lābhaṃ attano vā saṅghassa vā aññapuggalassa vā aññacetiyassa vā pariṇāmeyya, dukkaṭanti yojanā. Tatthanatanti kāyena vā vacasā vā ninnaṃ kataṃ.Lābhanti labhitabbaṃ cīvarādi.Aññatoaññasmiṃ puggale vā cetiye vā, cetiye pana dukkaṭaṃ.Aññassāti cetiyādino antamaso sunakhassa.Aññato vāti cetiyādimhi vā.Saṅghassāti pana idaṃ kākakkhigoḷakañāyena ‘‘nataṃ pariṇāmeyyā’’ti ubhayattha parivattati. Nissaṭṭhaṃ sakasaññāya na dadeyya vā, dukkaṭanti sambandho.Aññathāaññena pakārena, theyyasaññāya na dadeyya ceti vuttaṃ hoti.Itaranti vatthuvasena aññaṃ pārājikaṃ thullaccayaṃ dukkaṭañca hotīti attho.
119-120. Now, to show the distinction in offenses by way of conversion, ‘‘attano’’ etc. is begun. Here, this is the gist: If he converts a gain belonging to the Saṅgha for himself, there is a nissaggiya. If he converts it for another individual, there is a pācittiya. If he converts it for another Saṅgha or a shrine, there is a dukkaṭa. If he converts a gain belonging to another individual or a shrine for himself or for the Saṅgha or for another individual or for another shrine, there is a dukkaṭa. Here, nataṃ means bent down by body or speech. Lābha means gains to be obtained, robes, etc. Aññato means to another individual or shrine; however, there is dukkaṭa for a shrine. Aññassa means of another, even to a dog. Aññato vā means to a shrine, etc. Saṅghassa however, this shifts in both places of "nataṃ pariṇāmeyyā" according to the logic of crow's eye and globule. He should not give away what has been relinquished with his own designation, there is dukkaṭa; this is the connection. Aññathā means in another way; it is said that he should not give it away with the designation of theft. Itaraṃ means it becomes another offense, based on the article, of pārājika, thullaccaya, and dukkaṭa.
Nissaggiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of Nissaggiya is concluded.
12. Pācittiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
12. Explanation of Pācittiya
121.Musā…pe… haraṇeti nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tassa ‘‘pācitti vuttā’’ti iminā sambandho. Evaṃ sabbattha.Musāvādeti nipātena saddhiṃ tappuriso. Pubbepi jānitvā vacanakkhaṇepi jānantassa musābhaṇananimittanti attho.Bhaṇanañca nāma idha abhūtassa vā bhūtataṃ, bhūtassa vā abhūtataṃ katvā kāyena vā vācāya vā viññāpanappayogo. Pārājikasaṅghādisesācāravipattiyo amūlikāya codentassa yathākkamaṃ saṅghādisesapācittiyadukkaṭāni. Anupadhāretvā sahasā bhaṇantassa, ‘‘aññaṃ bhaṇissāmī’’ti aññaṃ bhaṇantassa yassa bhaṇati, so na suṇāti, tassa ca anāpatti.
121. Musā…pe… haraṇe is an ablative of location in the sense of cause; its connection is with "pācitti vuttā". Thus, everywhere. Musāvāde is a tappurisa compound with the nipāta. The meaning is that it is the cause for speaking falsehoods for one who knows even during the moment of speaking, and even before knowing. Here, bhaṇana means making what is untrue true, or what is true untrue, and communicating it through body or speech. For one who accuses of pārājika, saṅghādisesa, and ācāravipatti without basis, there are saṅghādisesa, pācittiya, and dukkaṭa offenses respectively. There is no offense for one who speaks rashly without investigating, for one who speaks one thing intending to speak another, or if the one to whom he speaks does not hear.
omaso,so cāyaṃ vādoca, tasmiṃ. Dīgho pana gāthābandhavasena. Evaṃ sabbattha. Hīnukkaṭṭhesu ca jātināmagottavayakammasippaābādhaliṅgakilesaāpattiakkosasaṅkhātesu dasasu bhūtena vā abhūtena vā ‘‘khattiyosi, caṇḍālosī’’tiādinā kāyena vā vācāya vā anaññāpadesena bhikkhuno khuṃsetukāmatāya akkosavacaneti attho. ‘‘Santi idhekacce caṇḍālā’’tiādinā aññāpadesena vā ‘‘corosi, vikārīsi, mātughātakosī’’tiādīhi pāḷimuttapadehi vā bhikkhussa, yathā vā tathā vā anupasampannaṃ, parammukhā pana sabbampi akkosantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Kevalaṃ davakamyatāya vadato pana sabbattha dubbhāsitaṃ.
omaso, and that abuse in that. The length is based on the meter of the verse. Thus, everywhere. In regard to what is inferior or superior, whether true or untrue, in the ten categories of birth, name, clan, age, occupation, craft, illness, gender, defilement, offense, and abuse, the meaning is abusive speech by body or speech, without indirect reference, with the desire to humiliate a bhikkhu, saying "You are a noble, you are an outcast," etc. There is a dukkaṭa offense for one who abuses a bhikkhu with indirect reference, saying "There are some outcasts here," etc., or with words outside the Pāḷi, saying "You are a thief, you are corrupt, you are a matricide," etc., regardless of whether or not the person is fully ordained, or in the presence of others. However, there is dubbhāsitaṃ in all cases for one who speaks only out of spite.
Pesuññaharaṇeti pisuṇassa bhāvo pesuññaṃ. Attano piyakamyatāya vā parassa paresu bhedādhippāyena vā jātiādīhi omasantassa bhikkhuno vacanaṃ sutvā bhikkhussa tassa pesuññassa haraṇe. Anupasampannassa haraṇe dukkaṭaṃ. Padaṃ padaṃpadaso,vicchāyaṃ so, koṭṭhāsena koṭṭhāsenāti attho. Saṅgītittayāruḷho tipiṭakadhammo, anāruḷho ca rājovādādikodhammonāma, tena saha padasoti nipātassa tatiyātappuriso.Padasodhammeti ekakkharādinā koṭṭhāsena koṭṭhāsena anupasampannena saddhiṃ yathāvuttadhammabhaṇaneti attho. Padasodhammabhaṇanañhi padasodhamma-saddena upacārena vuttaṃ. Anupasampannena saddhiṃ ekato uddesaggahaṇe sajjhāyakaraṇe, taṃsantike uddesaggahaṇādike ca tena saddhiṃ ekato yebhuyyena paguṇaṃ ganthaṃ bhaṇantassa osārentassa khalitaṭṭhāne ‘‘evaṃ bhaṇāhī’’ti ekato bhaṇantassapi anāpatti.
Pesuññaharaṇe means tale-bearing, pesuññaṃ. When a bhikkhu hears words of tale-bearing spoken by one who abuses with regard to birth etc., out of fondness for himself or with the intention of creating dissension towards others. There is a dukkaṭa offense for repeating the tale to one not fully ordained. Padaso, each word, with the ablative so. Dhammo means the Tipiṭaka-dhamma established in the three councils, and what is not established, such as royal advice; the tatiyātappurisa compound of the nipāta is with that word. Padasodhamme means speaking the aforementioned dhamma, portion by portion, syllable by syllable, with one not fully ordained. Indeed, speaking the dhamma portion by portion is stated metaphorically by the word padasodhamma. There is no offense for one who recites and studies together with one not fully ordained, if he recites together with him in his presence, or for one who says "speak thus" when he falters while reciting and finishing a text that he is mostly familiar with.
sāgāro,bhikkhu. Upacāreneva ca pana anupasampannena, mātugāmena ca saha seyyakappanaṃ sāgārabhāvo nāmāti gahetabbaṃ. Saṅghasammataṃ senāsanapaññāpakādibhedaṃ upasampannaṃ ayasakāmā hutvā bhikkhūhi yena ca ujjhāpenti avajānāpenti avaññāya olokāpenti, lāmakato vā cintāpenti, taṃ vacanaṃujjhāpanakaṃ. Yena khīyanti sabbattha tassa avaṇṇaṃ pakāsenti, taṃkhīyanaṃ.
sāgāro, a bhikkhu. It should be understood that making a bed in the same room with one not fully ordained and with a woman is called sāgārabhāvo metaphorically. Ujjhāpanakaṃ is the word by which those bhikkhus, who are approved by the Saṅgha, who are arrangers of lodging, etc., who are fully ordained, being desirous of dishonor, cause others to be displeased, despised, looked at with contempt, or think of them as base. Khīyanaṃ is the word that everywhere reveals the faults of one by whom they are displeased.
122.Talanti hatthatalamadhippetaṃ. Taggahaṇena pana kāyova talaṃ.Sattīti kāyappaṭibaddhā satti āvudhaviseso, upalakkhaṇattā pana sabbampi kāyappaṭibaddhaṃ satti. Talañca satti catalasatti. Idha pana kopena bhikkhussa talasattiuggiraṇaṃ talasatti. Sace pana viraddho pahāraṃ deti, na paharitukāmatāya dinnattā dukkaṭaṃ, paharitukāmatāya pācittiyaṃ, anupasampanne dukkaṭaṃ, mokkhādhippāyassa anāpatti.
122. Tala refers to the palm of the hand. However, by including that, the body itself is the tala. Sattī is a weapon attached to the body, a special kind of weapon; however, by way of implication, all things attached to the body are satti. Here, the striking of a bhikkhu with the palm of the hand out of anger is talasatti. But if he strikes back in retaliation, there is a dukkaṭa offense because it is given without the intention to strike; if with the intention to strike, there is a pācittiya offense; there is a dukkaṭa offense towards one not fully ordained; there is no offense for one who intends release.
anādaro. Anupasampannassa tena vuccamānassa vā upasampannena, parena vā apaññattena vā vuccamānassa anādare dukkaṭaṃ.
anādaro. There is a dukkaṭa offense for one who is fully ordained who disregards what is being said to one not fully ordained, or to one who is being addressed by another, or by one who is not appointed.
‘‘Ūnavasso tvaṃ maññe’’tiādinā bhikkhuno kukkuccassa uppādanaṃ anupasampannassa dukkaṭaṃ.
Creating anxiety for a bhikkhu by saying "I think you are less than twenty years old," etc., is a dukkaṭa offense towards one not fully ordained.
Anāpucchā gāmappavesaneti pakativacanena pucchitumanurūpaṃ antoupacārasīmāya dassanūpacāre bhikkhuṃ disvā ‘‘vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmī’’ti anāpucchitvā vikāle gāmappavesane. Dīgho pana sandhivasena. Āpadāsu anāpatti.
Anāpucchā gāmappavesane means entering a village at the wrong time without asking in a way that is appropriate for asking, seeing a bhikkhu in the boundary of the inner ward and visible range, saying "I will ask about entering the village at the wrong time." The length is based on sandhi. There is no offense in emergencies.
Paramparabhojaneti paro ca paro ca paramparā ma-kāro sandhivasena, tasmā paramparā uppattavisayaapādānavacanaṃ, parato parato laddhā bhuñjaneti attho. Ayamettha adhippāyo – pañcahi bhojanehi nāmaṃ gahetvā nimantitassa yena yena paṭhamaṃ nimantito, tassa tassa bhojanato uppaṭipāṭiyā, ‘‘mayhaṃ bhattapaccāsaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’ti vā ‘‘vikappemī’’ti vā ādinā sammukhā vā parammukhā vā avikappetvā vā aññato aññato pañcabhojanādīni laddhā bhuñjamāneti. Gilānacīvaradānacīvarakārasamaye anāpatti.
Paramparabhojane means one after another, paramparā, the ma-kāro is based on sandhi; therefore, paramparā is an expression of origin, subject matter, and source; it means eating what is received from one to another. The meaning here is this: Having been invited, naming the five meals, one who eats meals beginning with the one from whom he was first invited, without formally relinquishing or reassigning in person or behind his back, saying "I give my expectancy of food to you," or "I reassign it," etc., he obtains the five meals from one to another. There is no offense at the time of giving robes to the sick, or making robes.
123.Seyyaṃ senāsanāni vā anuddharitvā gamaneti sambandho.Vā-saddo samuccaye. Tattha ‘‘bhisi cimilikā uttarattharaṇaṃ bhūmattharaṇaṃ taṭṭikā cammakkhaṇḍo nisīdanaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāro’’ti (pāci. 116) vuttāsu dasasu seyyāsu ekampi attano vassaggane gahetvā saṅghike sabbappaṭicchanne gutte senāsane santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā yathā ṭhapitaṃ upacikādīhi na khajjati, tathā ṭhapanavasena anuddharitvā parikkhittassa ārāmassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa upacāraṃ atikkamitvā gamane ca, tathā mañcapīṭhatisikocchasaṅkhātāni senāsanāni vassakāle ajjhokāse santharitvā vā santharāpetvā vā anupasampannena anuddharitvā thāmamajjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupātaṃ atikkamitvā gamane cāti attho. Yathāvuttato pana aññattha dukkaṭaṃ.
123. The connection is that he goes without removing the bed or lodgings. The vā-particle is in the sense of collection. Here, having taken even one of the ten beds stated as "bhisi cimilikā uttarattharaṇaṃ bhūmattharaṇaṃ taṭṭikā cammakkhaṇḍo nisīdanaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāro" (pāci. 116) in his own rainy season reckoning, having spread it out in a lodging belonging to the Saṅgha, or having it spread out, in all the covered and protected lodgings, without removing it in such a way that it is not eaten by rodents, etc., based on the way it was placed, and going beyond the surrounding wall of an enclosed monastery, or the vicinity of one that is not enclosed; and similarly, it means going beyond the distance a moderately strong man can throw a clod of dirt without removing couches, chairs, and the three types of mats, which were spread out or had spread out in an open space during the rainy season by one not fully ordained. However, there is a dukkaṭa offense elsewhere than what was stated.
Itthiyā addhānagamaneti ‘‘gacchāma bhagini, gacchāma ayyā’’ti aññamaññaṃ saṃvidahitvā ‘‘ajja vā sve vā’’tiādinā niyamitakālavisaṅketaṃ akatvāpi dvāravisaṅketaṃ maggavisaṅketaṃ katvāpi itthiyā saddhiṃ addhānamaggagamaneti attho.
Itthiyā addhānagamane means walking along a road for a long distance with a woman, having agreed with each other, saying "Let's go, sister, let's go, lady," even without making a fixed time intention such as "today or tomorrow," etc., and having made an intention for a village gate and a road.
Ekekāya nisīdaneti ekena ekāti ekekā, tassā nisajjāyāti attho. Ekena saha ekissā nisajjaṃ vinā ekāya saha ekassa nisajjaṃ nāma natthīti ekāya saha ekassa nisajjāyaṃ sati nisinnassa bhikkhuno pācittiyanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ekāyekanisīdane’’ti vā pāṭho.
Ekekāya nisīdane means one by one, ekekā, that is, for sitting. The meaning is that there is no sitting of one with one without the sitting of one with one; thus, there is a pācittiya offense for a bhikkhu who sits when there is sitting of one with one. Alternatively, the reading is "Ekāyekanisīdane."
124.Rūpādīnaṃ upasaṃhārena, bhayānakakathākathanena vā upasampannassabhiṃsāpane. Anupasampannassa dukkaṭaṃ.
124.Frightening a bhikkhu who has received upasampadā by alluding to forms, etc., or by speaking frighteningly. There is a dukkaṭa for one who has not received upasampadā.
Ākoṭaneupasampannassa antamaso uppalapattenāpi pahāradāne. Anupasampannassa antamaso tiracchānagatassapi dukkaṭaṃ. Mokkhādhippāyassa anāpatti.
Striking: For a bhikkhu who has received upasampadā, giving a blow with even a lotus leaf. For one who has not received upasampadā, even to an animal, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for the intention of release.
aññavādo. Tatheva pucchiyamānassa akathetukāmatāya vihesanaṃ tuṇhībhāvovihesā. Aññavādakassa vihesakassa ca ñattidutiyakammena aññavādakavihesakakamme kate puna aññavāde vihesāya pācittiyaṃ. Anāropite pana kamme dukkaṭaṃ. Kiñci vītikkamaṃ disvā ‘‘āvuso, idaṃ nāma tayā kata’’nti vutte taṃ na kathetukāmo tuṇhībhūto saṅghaṃ vihesetītivihesako. Anācāraṃ ācaritvā saṅghamajjhe āpattiyā, vatthunā vā anuyuñjiyamāne taṃ akathetukāmo ‘‘ko āpanno, kismiṃ āpanno’’tiādinā nayena aññehi vacanehi taṃ vacanaṃ paṭicchādento yo aññaṃ vadati, ayaṃaññavādakonāma.
Distorting the statement: Likewise, if being questioned, one is unwilling to speak and harasses (another) by remaining silent, (this is) harassment. If, after a ñattidutiyakamma is performed against a distorting and harassing bhikkhu for distorting the statement and harassment, he again distorts the statement and harasses, there is a pācittiya. But if the kamma is not brought up, there is a dukkaṭa. If, seeing some transgression and being told, "Friend, you did such and such," he is unwilling to speak, remains silent, and harasses the Sangha, he is a harasser. One who, having committed improper conduct, when being pressed in the midst of the Sangha about the offense or the matter, is unwilling to speak about it and, concealing that statement with other words in the manner of "Who is at fault? In what is he at fault?" speaks otherwise, this is called a distorter.
Duṭṭhullaṃnāma pārājikasaṅghādisesā, idha pana saṅghādisesova. Pakāso ca chādo capakāsachādo,duṭṭhullassa pakāsachādoti tappuriso. Abhiṇhāpattikassa bhikkhuno āyatiṃ saṃvaratthāya āpattipariyantaṃ kulapariyantañca katvā vā akatvā vā tikkhattuṃ apaloketvā kātabbaṃ. Bhikkhusammutiṃ ṭhapetvā anupasampannassa ‘‘ayaṃ asuciṃ mocetvā saṅghādisesaṃ āpanno’’tiādinā nayena vatthunā saddhiṃ āpattiṃ ghaṭetvā tassa duṭṭhullassa pakāsane ārocane ca, tasseva yena kenaci upāyena ñatvā chādane ca, aduṭṭhullārocane chādane ca, anupasampannassa pana purimapañcamasikkhāpade itarā duṭṭhullepi dukkaṭaṃ.
Offense means a pārājika or saṅghādisesa; here, however, it is only a saṅghādisesa. Disclosure and concealment (are) disclosure and concealment; disclosure and concealment of an offense (is) a tappurisa compound. For a bhikkhu who is frequently committing offenses, for the sake of future restraint, having or not having made an end to the offense and an end to the family, after requesting three times, it should be done. Except for a bhikkhu who is authorized, to one who has not received upasampadā, "This one, having discharged impurity, has committed a saṅghādisesa," in this manner, connecting the offense with the matter and in the disclosure and announcement of that offense, and in the concealment of that same offense by any means whatsoever, and in the announcement and concealment of a non-offense, for one who has not received upasampadā, in the first and fifth training rules, in the others, even in an offense, there is a dukkaṭa.
Hāsodaketi ettha hāse udaketi padavibhāgo veditabbo. Yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena hasādhippāyassa upakacchakādīsu hāse phusane. Hāsanimittañhi phusanaṃ hāso. Anupasampanne dukkaṭaṃ.Udake hāseti uparigopphake udake hasādhippāyassa ummujjananimujjanena kīḷāya. Kīḷā hi idha hāsoti vutto. Nāvāya kīḷato, hatthādinā kaṭṭhādinā vā udakaṃ hanato antamaso bhājanagatakañjikādīnipi khipanakīḷāya kīḷato dukkaṭaṃ. Ahasādhippāyassa anāpatti.
In amusement, in water: Here, the word division should be understood as, "in amusement, in water." By any bodily part whatsoever, with the intention of amusement, touching or rubbing on the armpits, etc., in amusement. For touching is a sign of amusement; amusement (is) laughter. For one who has not received upasampadā, there is a dukkaṭa. In water, in amusement: In water up to the ankles, with the intention of amusement, in play by diving and emerging. For here, play is called amusement. There is a dukkaṭa for one playing in a boat, striking the water with a hand, etc., or with wood, etc., or playing by throwing even gruel, etc., contained in a vessel, in a playful manner. There is no offense if there is no intention of amusement.
Nicchubhane vihārāti saṅghikavihārato bhikkhuno nikkaḍḍhananikkaḍḍhāpane. Ettha ca ekappayoge ekā, nānāpayoge dvāragaṇanāya āpattiyo. Puggalikanikkaḍḍhane, tassa parikkhāranikkaḍḍhane, anupasampannassa pana tassa parikkhārassa vā nikkaḍḍhane dukkaṭaṃ. Na sammāvattantānaṃ antevāsikasaddhivihārikānaṃ vā nikkaḍḍhane, attano vissāsikassa vihārā nikkaḍḍhane, bhaṇḍanakārakassa pana sakalasaṅghārāmato nikkaḍḍhane anāpatti.
Expelling from the monastery: Expelling or having (someone) expelled a bhikkhu from a Sangha monastery. Here, for a single attempt, there is one offense; for multiple attempts, there are offenses according to the number of doors. For expelling an individual, for expelling his requisites, for one who has not received upasampadā, even for expelling his requisites, there is a dukkaṭa. There is no offense for expelling those residents or co-residents who do not behave properly, or for expelling one's own confidant from the monastery, but for expelling a quarrelsome person from the entire Sangha monastery.
Anupakhajja sayaneti ‘‘vuḍḍho, gilāno, saṅghena dinno’’ti jānitvā mañcapīṭhānaṃ vā tassa bhikkhuno pavisantassa vā nikkhamantassa vā upacāraṃ anupakhajja anupavisitvā saṅghike vihāre ‘‘yassa sambādho bhavissati, so pakkamissatī’’ti adhippāyena nisīdananisajjanavasena sayane. Puggalike dukkaṭaṃ.
Without approaching, a sleeping place: Knowing that he is "old, sick, given (permission) by the Sangha," without approaching, without sitting near the bed or seat, in a Sangha monastery, (lying down) in the manner of sitting, with the intention that "whoever will be crowded will leave." There is a dukkaṭa in a personal (residence).
pācittīti uddisitvā kānici pasiddhāni dassitāni. Avuttāni pana tādisāni imināva sāmaññavacanena saṅgahetvā veditabbāni. Kathaṃ? Acelakādiaññatitthiyānaṃ yassa kassaci āmisassa sahatthā dāne ca, sappinavanītatelamadhuphāṇitamacchamaṃsakhīradadhisaṅkhātānaṃ paṇītabhojanānaṃ attano atthāya viññāpetvā bhuñjane, rāgapariyuṭṭhitaitthipurisassa yogge kule anupavisitvā nisajjanakappane, pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññatarena nimantito tasmiṃ bhutte vā abhutte vā santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchitvā purebhattaṃ pacchābhattaṃ vā yasmiṃ kule nimantito, tato gilānacīvaradānakārasamayaṃ ṭhapetvā aññasmiṃ aññakulappavesane, ṭhapetvā ekadivasaṃ aññasmiṃ dine āvasathapiṇḍassa agilānena hutvā bhuñjane, rattiparicchedaṃ vā bhesajjaparicchedaṃ vā katvā pavāritato uttari aññatra puna pavāraṇāya aññatra niccappavāraṇāya viññāpane, aññatra tathārūpapaccayā gāmato nikkhantasenādassanāya gamane, paccayenapi gantvā tirattato uttari senāya vāse, tassa ca vasantassa yuddhaṭṭhānabalagaṇaṭṭhānasenānivesaanīkadassanatthaṃ gamane, piṭṭhādīhi katamajjasaṅkhātasurāya, pupphādīhi kataāsavasaṅkhātamerayassa ca pāne, padīpujjalapattapacanādikāraṇaṃ vinā visibbitukāmatāya agilānassa aggino jālanajālāpane, kappabinduṃ anādāya navacīvaraparibhoge, sāmaṃ cīvaraṃ vikappetvā apaccuddhāya paribhoge, bhikkhusantakapattādino antamaso hasādhippāyenapi apanidhāne apanidhāpane, sañcicca tiracchānagatassa jīvitavoropane, sañcicca yathādhammaṃ nihatādhikaraṇassa punakammāya ukkoṭane, sañcicca theyyasatthena saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya ekaddhānagamane, bhikkhūhi sikkhāpadehi vuccamānassa aññaṃ avicāretvā ‘‘na tattha sikkhissāmī’’ti bhaṇane, sikkhāpadavivaṇṇane, imesaṃ ‘‘sutvā oramissāmī’’ti adhippāyaṃ vinā vivādāpannānaṃ upassutiṭṭhāne, dhammikānaṃ kammānaṃ chandaṃ datvā pacchā khīyanadhammāpajjane, saṅghe vinicchaye vattamāne chandaṃ adatvā pakkamane, samaggena saṅghena cīvaraṃ datvā pacchā khīyanadhammāpajjane, aññatra ajjhārāmā ajjhāvasathā vā ratanassa vā ratanasammatassa vā uggaṇhanauggahāpane pācittiyanti.
Pācittiya: Having specified (the category), some well-known (examples) are shown. However, those unmentioned but similar should be included and understood by this general statement itself. How? For giving with one's own hand any offering whatsoever to ascetics, etc., of other sects, for eating choice foods, namely, ghee, butter, oil, honey, molasses, fish, meat, milk, and curds, having requested them for oneself; for a man or woman with lustful thoughts, sitting down in a suitable family and arranging a seat; having been invited for one of the five foods, without informing a bhikkhu present in that family where one is invited, whether he has eaten or not, either before or after the meal, except for the time of giving robes to the sick; for entering another family on another occasion other than the time of giving robes to the sick; except for one day, for eating alms from the rest house on another day without being sick; having made a limit of the night or a limit of medicine, after invitation, for requesting again elsewhere except for a regular invitation; except for such a reason, for going to see an army that has come out of the village; even having gone for a reason, for staying with the army for more than three nights; and for him, while staying, for going to see a battlefield, a troop gathering place, an army camp, or a military parade; for drinking liquor made from flour, called surā, and intoxicants made from flowers, called meraya; for anointing a fire for the sake of dissipating vexation without a reason for lighting a lamp or cooking, without being sick; for using a new robe without taking a kappabindu; for using a robe after independently making it allowable and without returning it; for concealing or having (someone) conceal a bhikkhu's belonging, such as a bowl, even with the intention of amusement; for intentionally depriving an animal of life; for intentionally stirring up again a case that has been lawfully settled; for intentionally planning with a thief to travel on the same road; being told the training rules by bhikkhus, without investigating otherwise, for saying, "I will not train there"; for disparaging the training rules; for those who are engaged in dispute, without the intention of "having heard, I will abstain," for standing to overhear; for incurring a fault of resentment after giving consent to lawful acts; when a decision is being made in the Sangha, for leaving without giving consent; after giving a robe by the unanimous Sangha, for incurring a fault of resentment; except for a monastery or dwelling that has been assigned, for taking up or having (someone) take up a gem or something considered a gem, there is a pācittiya.
Pācittiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Pācittiya Instructions is Finished.
13. Samaṇakappaniddesavaṇṇanā
13. The Explanation of the Instructions on Allowable Items for Ascetics
125.Samaṇakappāti samaṇavohārā. Bhavanti, ahesunti vā bhūtā, vattamāne, bhūte vā tappaccayo. Viruḷhamūlādibhāvaṃ āpajjitvā vaḍḍhamānakānaṃ, vaḍḍhitvā mahantabhāvaṃ pattānañca rukkhalatādisaṅkhātānaṃ bhūtānaṃ gāmo, bhūtā eva vā gāmo samūhobhūtagāmo. Tassa samārambho chedanaphālanādi, tasmiṃ. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ, taṃhetu pācittiyaṃ hotīti attho. Katakappiyaṃ samaṇakappiyaṃ bhaveti sambandho. Tattha kataṃ kappiyaṃ yassāti bahubbīhi. Kenāti āha‘‘nakhenā’’tiādi.
125.Allowable items for ascetics means allowable usages for ascetics. They are, they were, or having been; the tappaccaya (suffix) is used in the past or present tense. Plant life (bhūtagāmo) (is) a village of beings, namely, trees, vines, etc., that have attained a state of flourishing roots, etc., and are growing, or that have grown and attained a state of great size; or, plant life itself (is) a village, a group. Disturbance (samārambho) of that (is) cutting, splitting, etc.; in that. This bhumma (suffix) is in the sense of an instrumental case; therefore, there is a pācittiya because of that, is the meaning. "Having made (something) allowable, he should make (it) allowable for an ascetic," is the connection. There, that for which the allowable is made (is a bahubbīhi compound). By what? He says, "By nail," etc.
126.Idāni yassa samārambho, taṃ bhūtagāmaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ‘‘sa mūlā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ.Soti bhūtagāmo. Bhavituṃ uppajjituṃ payojetīti kāritantā tappaccayo, pabhāvito uppāditoti attho. Atha vā pabhavanaṃ pabhavo, uppatti, sova pabhavo, pabhāvaṃ karotīti nāmadhātuto kattari tappaccayo, pabhāvito uppannoti attho. Mūlañca khandho ca bījañca aggañca phaḷu ca mūla…pe… phaḷūni.Phaḷunāma pabbaṃ. Tāniyeva bījāni, tehi pabhāvito uppādito, atha vā tehi avadhibhūtehi, kāraṇabhūtehi vā pabhāvito uppannoti kamena vikappadvaye samāsadvayaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tatthamūlabījaṃnāma haliddisiṅgiverādi.
126.Now, in order to show by dividing that plant life whose disturbance (is in question), the "That with roots," etc., is begun. That means plant life. "He causes (something) to come into being, to arise"; the tappaccaya (suffix) is used in the causative; pabhāvito means caused to arise. Or rather, pabhavanaṃ (is) pabhavo (source), arising; that itself (is) pabhavo; "he makes (something) a pabhāva," the tappaccaya (suffix) is used in the agent from the nominal root; pabhāvito means arisen. Roots, trunk, seeds, shoots, and nodes (are) roots...nodes. Node means a joint. Those seeds themselves, caused to arise by them, or rather, caused to arise by them as limits or as causes, two samāsas (compound) should be understood in two alternatives, in order. There, root-seed means turmeric, ginger, etc.
Khandhabījaṃnāma assatthanigrodhādi.Bījabījaṃnāma pubbaṇṇāparaṇṇādi.Aggabījaṃnāma hiriverādi.Phaḷubījaṃnāma ucchunaḷādi. Tattha mūlabījādīni pañca bījagāmo. Tannibbatto rukkhalatādi bhūtagāmo.
Trunk-seed means banyan trees, etc. Seed-seed means grains, etc. Shoot-seed means hrivera grass, etc. Node-seed means sugar cane, reeds, etc. There, the five, root-seed, etc., (are) seed-life. Trees, vines, etc., born from that (are) plant life.
Bījanti bhūmiyaṃ ropitamaropitampi niggatavidatthimattapattavaṭṭipi mūlabījāni. ‘‘Ārambhe’’ti kitakapaccayassa yoge avutte kammani chaṭṭhuppattiyaṃ vikappena ubhayattha dutiyā.Ārambheti samārambhe. Tasmā ‘‘imaṃ pupphaṃ phalaṃ vā jāna, imaṃ kappiyaṃ karohī’’tiādinā kappiyavacanena bhūtagāmato viyojitaṃ bījajātaṃ bījagāmaparimocanatthaṃ puna kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā paribhuñjibhabbaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañcahi samaṇakappehi phalaṃ paribhuñjituṃ aggiparijitaṃ satthaparijitaṃ nakhaparijitaṃ abījaṃ nibbattabījaññeva pañcama’’nti (cūḷava. 250) vuttesu pañcasu nakhaparijitādīni tīṇi dassitāni.
Seed means root-seeds that are planted or not planted in the ground, and that have emerged, are a span in size, or have leaves attached. In the connection of the kitaka (gerundive) suffix, with an unexpressed object, in the sixth (case), in the arising, there is an alternative duality in both places. In disturbance means in disturbance. Therefore, a seed kind that has been separated from plant life by allowable words such as "Know this flower or fruit, make this allowable," having made (it) allowable again for the purpose of releasing it from seed-life, is fit to be used. "I allow, bhikkhus, the use of fruit with five allowable ascetic practices: that which is pared with a knife, pared with a weapon, pared with a nail, seedless, and that which has had the seed removed, as the fifth" (cūḷava. 250). Among the five mentioned, the three, nail-pared, etc., are shown.
127.Idāni avasiṭṭhāni dve dassetuṃ‘‘nibbattabīja’’ntiādikaṃ paṭhamaddhaṃ āha. Tatthanibbattabījanti nibbattaniyanti nibbattaṃ, nipubba vatu vattanetimasmā tappaccayo, nibbattaṃ bījaṃ yassa taṃ nibbattabījaṃ, bījaṃ nibbattetvā visuṃ katvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ ambapanasādi.Nobījaṃnāma taruṇambaphalādi. Idāni bījagāmabhūtagāmesu kappiyakaraṇappakārādivisesaṃ dassento‘‘kaṭāhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kaṭāhena baddhaṃ bījaṃ yesanti bāhirattho.
127.Now, in order to show the two remaining, he says the "Having removed the seed," etc., as the first half. There, having removed the seed means nibbattanīyaṃ (removable) (is) nibbattaṃ; the tappaccaya (suffix) is used from ni + vatu, vattaneti; nibbattaṃ (removed) means that from which the seed has been removed, is to be used, having removed the seed and made (it) separate, such as mangoes, jackfruit, etc. No-seed means young mango fruit, etc. Now, showing the distinction of the method of making (something) allowable, etc., in seed-life and plant life, he says, "With a husk," etc. There, the outer meaning (is): that for which the seed is bound with a husk.
128.Bhājane bhūmiyampi vā ekābaddhesu bījesu ekasmiñca kappiye kateti yojanā.Bījesūti bījagāmabhūtagāmesu. Bhūtagāmopi hi idha ‘‘bīja’’nti ruḷhīvasena vuccati.
128.The connection (is): with one allowable made on one of the seeds bound in a vessel or in the ground. In seeds means in seed-life or plant life. For even plant life here is called "seed" in the conventional sense.
129.Nikkhitteti ṭhapite.Kappiyaṃ puna kareyyāti jātamūlapaṇṇabhāvato bhūtagāmattā bhūtagāmato parimocitaṃ bījagāmaparimocanatthaṃ puna kappiyaṃ kāreyyāti attho. Tenāha‘‘bhūtagāmo hi so tadā’’ti.Hi-saddo hetumhi.Tadāti mūle ca paṇṇe ca jātakāle sace mūlamattaṃ sañjāyati, uparibhāge sace aṅkuro jāyati, heṭṭhābhāge chindituṃ vaṭṭati. Mūlamattesu vā pana paṇṇamattesu vā niggatesu sacepi ratanappamāṇāpi sākhā nikkhamanti, bījagāmasaṅgahitā honti.
129.Having placed means having set down. He should make (it) allowable again means that which has been freed from plant life because of having arisen as root or leaf, for the purpose of releasing it from seed-life, he should cause (it) to be made allowable again, is the meaning. Therefore, he says, "For that is plant life then." The word hi (for) is in the sense of a reason. Then means when the root or the leaf has arisen. If only a root arises, in the upper part, if a sprout arises, it is proper to cut (it) in the lower part. But even if branches as small as jewels emerge when only roots or leaves have emerged, they are included in seed-life.
130.Udakasambhavo sevālo ca cetiyādīsu sevālo ca bhūtagāmovāti sambandho.Ādi-saddena pākārādiggahaṇaṃ. Yadi dve tīṇi paṇṇāni na jāyanti, aggabījasaṅgahaṃ gacchati. Sukkho pana sammajjitabbo. Mūlapaṇṇe viniggate bījopi bhūtagāmovāti sambandho.Paṇṇeti iminā aṅkuramattaṃ paṭikkhipati.
130.A water-born alga, and an alga on a cetiya, etc., are also plant life, is the connection. The ādi (etc.) includes walls, etc. If two or three leaves do not arise, it goes to the inclusion of shoot-seed. But the dried (alga) should be swept away. When the root and leaf have come out, even the seed is plant life, is the connection. By leaf, he rejects only the sprout.
131.Ghaṭādipiṭṭhe sevālo ca ahichattakamakuḷañca dukkaṭasseva vatthūnīti sambandho.Piṭṭheti iminā anto abbohārikoti dasseti.Phullanti phullitaṃ ahichattakaṃ.Abyavahārikanti āpattivohārayoggaṃ na hotīti attho.
131.An alga on a pot, etc., a mushroom, and a mushroom bud are only objects for a dukkaṭa, is the connection. By surface, he shows that the interior is not व्यवहार. Blooming means a blooming mushroom. Not व्यवहार means not suitable for an offense usage, is the meaning.
132.Allarukkhe lākhāniyyāsachattāni vikopiya gaṇhato tattha akkharaṃ chindato vāpi pācittīti sambandho.Tatthāti allarukkhe. ‘‘Vikopaya’’nti potthakesu pāṭho dissati, so apāṭho paṭhamantatāya kāraṇābhāvato. ‘‘Vikopiyā’’ti pana pāṭho gahetabbo.Vikopiyāti iminā avikopetvā gahaṇe anāpattīti dīpeti.
132.Having uprooted lacquer, sap, and mushrooms on a fresh tree, and taking (them), or cutting a letter there, there is a pācittiya, is the connection. There means on a fresh tree. A reading appears in books as "Vikopaya (uproot)," that (is) an incorrect reading, because there is no reason for the past tense. But the reading "Vikopiyā (having uprooted)" should be taken. By having uprooted, he indicates that there is no offense in taking without uprooting.
133.Dārumakkaṭakādināti āṇiṃ koṭṭetvā dāruyantaṃ katvā tattha kaṇṭakaṃ olambenti, etaṃ dārumakkaṭakaṃ nāma.Ādi-saddena kaṇṭakabandhanādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tiṇādiṃ chindituṃ, gaṇṭhikaṃ kātuñca na kappatīti yojanā.Chinditunti chindanaṃ.
133.With a wooden monkey, etc.: Having hammered in a nail and made a wooden device, they hang a thorn there; this is called a wooden monkey. The ādi (etc.) includes fastening with thorns, etc. It is not proper to cut grass, etc., or to make a knot, is the connection. To cut means cutting.
134.Bhūtagāmaṃ vāti bhūtagāmaṃ vā.Bījaṃ vāti bījagāmaṃ vā. ‘‘Chinda vā’’tiādinā sabbatthavā-saddo yojetabbo.Paca vāti pacanaṃ karohīti vā. ‘‘Paṭa’’ iti vā pāṭho, tassa uppādehīti attho. ‘‘Imaṃ rukkhaṃ chindāhī’’tiādinā pana avatvā ‘‘rukkhaṃ chindā’’tiādinā aniyametvā vattuṃ vaṭṭati.
134.Plant life or: Plant life or. Seed or: Seed-life or. The word or should be connected everywhere with "Cut or," etc. Cook or: Or, "Make cooking." Or, there is the reading "Paṭa (cloth)," its meaning (is), "Produce." But it is proper to say "Cut a tree," etc., without specifying in the manner of "Cut this tree," etc.
135.Imanti etaṃ rukkhādiṃ.Imaṃ sodhehīti ettha iti-saddaṃ katvā attho vattabboti.
135.This means this tree, etc. In Clean this, after making the word "iti (thus)," the meaning should be stated.
Samaṇakappaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Instructions on Allowable Items for Ascetics is Finished.
14. Bhūminiddesavaṇṇanā
14. The Explanation of the Instructions on Land
136.Yāsu vutthaṃ pakkañca kappati, tā kappiyā bhūmiyo sammuti ca sammutikuṭi ca…pe… gahapati ca gahapatikuṭi cāti imā catasso hontīti yojetvā attho veditabbo. Tatthabhesajjakkhandhake(mahāva. 295) vuttāya uttidutiyakammavācāya, apalokanakammavasena vā sāvetvā sammā uttisampannaṃ karīyatītisammuti,thambhānaṃ bhittipādānaṃ vā uggamanaṃ uddhaṃ katvā ṭhapanaṃ, ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti vācāya sāvanañca antaṃ yassā sāussāvanantā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘thambhappatiṭṭhānañca vacanapariyosānañca samakālaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 295). Nisādanaṃ pavisanaṃ sannivesanaṃ nisādo, gunnaṃ viya nisādo etissātigonisādi. Bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā sesasahadhammikā sabbe ca devamanussā idhagahapatīti sāmaññena adhippetā. Ettha pana gahapatisambandhinī kuṭi dīghena gahapatī.
136. The meaning should be understood by connecting thus: those places in which dwelling and cooking are allowable are the permissible grounds, namely, the sammuti, the sammuti-kuṭi…pe… the householder, and the householder's kuṭi. Here, sammuti means properly endowing it by announcing with the second statement of the utti according to what is stated in the section on medicines (Bhesajjakkhandhaka) (Mahāva. 295), or by means of an announcement (apalokanakamma). Ussāvanantā is that which has the end in raising up or erecting pillars or wall footings, or in the announcement with the statement, "Let us make a permissible kuṭi." And so it is said, "The establishing of the pillars and the conclusion of the statement occur simultaneously" (Mahāva. aṭṭha. 295). Nisāda means settling down, entering, or lodging. Gonisādi is that in which there is settling down, like that of cattle. Here, gahapati generally refers to all co-religionists except a bhikkhu, and to all gods and humans. But here, the kuṭi connected with a gahapati is called gahapati in the long form.
aṭṭhakathāvacanato yaṃ saṅgho ākaṅkhati vihāraṃ vā aḍḍhayogaṃ vā pāsādaṃ vā hammiyaṃ vā guhaṃ vā leṇādiṃ vā, tesampi sāmaññavacanaṃ viññāyatīti taṃtaṃlakkhaṇappattā sahaseyyappahonakā leṇādayo catūsveva kuṭīsu antogadhāti veditabbaṃ. Imāsu catūsu sahaseyyappahonake padese yaṃ saṅghikaṃ puggalikaṃ vā bhikkhusantakaṃ ekarattampi antovutthaṃ anupasampannena pakkañca yāvakālikaṃ yāmakālikañca antovutthaantopakkasaṅkhaṃ na gacchati, ko pana vādo itaradvaye. Taṃ pana akappiyabhūmiyampi vutthaṃ pakkañca vaṭṭati. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘yāsu vutthaṃ pakkañca kappatī’’ti.
According to the commentary, the saṅgha may desire a vihāra, an aḍḍhayoga, a mansion, a storied building, a cave, or a dwelling, etc.; a general term can be understood for these as well, thus dwellings, etc., that fulfill their respective characteristics and are suitable for shared occupancy, are to be understood as included within the four kinds of kuṭis. In these four, whatever belonging to the saṅgha or belonging to an individual, or owned by a bhikkhu, that is dwelt in even for one night in a place suitable for shared occupancy, and cooking by one who is not fully ordained, and yāvakālika and yāmakālika things, do not come under the term "dwelt in and cooked within." What then to say of the other two? But dwelling and cooking in an impermissible place are allowable. Therefore, it was said, "those in which dwelling and cooking are allowable."
137.Vāsatthāya kate saṅghike vā ekasantake vā sahaseyyappahonake gehe kappiyākuṭi laddhabbāti sambandho. Tatthavāsatthāyāti iminā avāsatthāya kataṃ nivatteti.Ekasantaketi ekassa bhikkhuno santake.Kappiyākuṭīti bhāvappadhānoyaṃ niddeso, na hi gehe gehaṃ laddhuṃ yujjatīti kappiyakuṭitāti attho. Dīgho pana gāthāvasena, kappiyā kuṭitāti vā visesanavasena daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sahaseyyappahonaketi ettha sahaseyyappahonakaṃ vāsāgāralakkhaṇe vuttalakkhaṇaṃ senāsanaṃ.
137. The connection is that a permissible kuṭi should be obtained in a building built for dwelling, belonging to the saṅgha or belonging to an individual, which is suitable for shared occupancy. Here, by "for dwelling" (vāsatthāya), he excludes one built not for dwelling. "Ekasantake" means belonging to one bhikkhu. "Kappiyākuṭī" this is a designation with the state as primary, for it is not fitting to obtain a building in a building; thus, it means a permissible place. But "permissible kuṭi" should be seen as long due to the verse, or as a specification. "Suitable for shared occupancy" here means a dwelling place with the characteristics stated in the description of a dwelling place suitable for shared occupancy.
138.Idāni tā kuṭiyo kamena dassetvā tattha paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ, tāsaṃ sabbathāpagamañca dassetuṃ‘‘gehe’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘kappiyakuṭiṃ karoma, kappiyakuṭiṃ karomā’’ti evamīrayanti sambandho. Iṭṭhakā ca thambhā ca ‘‘iṭṭhakāthambhā’’ti vattabbe rasso. Iṭṭhakathambhā ādi yassa bhittipāsādassāti bahubbīhi. Pacchā paṭhamasaddena kammadhārayo. ‘‘Ṭhapeyya ce, sā ussāvanantikā’’ti evaṃ ce-sā-sadde yojetvā attho veditabbo.
138. Now, in order to show those kuṭis in order, the procedure to be followed there, and their complete removal in every way, he said "in a building," etc. Here, the connection is that they utter, "Let us make a permissible kuṭi, let us make a permissible kuṭi." "Bricks and pillars" should be said as "brick pillars," but it is shortened. A compound of many members, where brick pillars are the beginning of which is a wall-building. Afterwards, a કર્મધારય compound with the first word. The meaning should be understood by connecting the words ce and sā thus: "If he establishes, then it is ussāvanantikā."
139.Sakalo aparikkhitto ārāmopi vāti sambandho. Senāsanaṃ parikkhittaṃ vā hotu, aparikkhittaṃ vā, na taṃ pamāṇaṃ.
139. The connection is that even an entire monastery that is not enclosed is valid. Whether the dwelling is enclosed or not enclosed, that is not the measure.
140.Aññehi kappiyakuṭiyā atthāya dinno vā tesaṃ santako vāti yojanā.
140. The connection is that it is given by others for the purpose of a permissible kuṭi, or it belongs to them.
141.Avirodhabhāvena kappanīyā kappā, kappa sāmatthiyamiccetasmā itthiyaṃ āpaccaye rūpaṃ, na kappā akappā, akappā ca sā kuṭi cetiakappakuṭi,tāya.Sappiādīti iminā sattāhakālikaṃ yāvajīvikañca gahitaṃ.
141. Akappakuṭi is thus: kappa is what is suitable due to non-opposition, the ability to be allowable; therefore the form is with the āpaccaya suffix in the feminine gender; it is not kappa, it is akappa, and that kuṭi is akappa, thus akappakuṭi; by that. By "ghee, etc." (sappiādī), the things allowable for a week and for life are taken.
142.Tehevāti akappakuṭiyaṃ vutthasappiādīhi eva saddhiṃ sattāhakālikasaṃsaṭṭhatāya‘‘sattāhaṃ kappate’’ti vuttaṃ.Sāmiseti āmisasaṅkhātena purimadvayena sahite.Sāmapākatāti sāmaṃ attanā pāko etassāti sāmapākaṃ, sattāhakālikena saha pakkaṃ sāmisaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ, tassa bhāvo sāmapākatā. Sayaṃ pakkaṃ taṃ attanā saṃsaṭṭhatāya tampi āmisaṃ sāmapākagatikaṃ karotīti tassa sāmapākatā hotīti adhippāyo.
142.Teheva means along with those ghee etc. dwelt in an impermissible kuṭi. "Allowable for a week" is said because of being mixed with what is allowable for a week. Sāmisa means together with the former two, which are designated as meat (āmisa). Sāmapākatā is thus: sāmapāka means cooking by oneself; sāmisa means cooked with what is allowable for a week, or with what is allowable for life; the state of that is sāmapākatā. The idea is that because what is cooked by oneself is mixed with it by oneself, that too makes the meat have the characteristic of being self-cooked, thus there is sāmapākatā of that.
143.Adhiṭṭhitāti patiṭṭhitā. Eva-saddo tiṭṭhatisaddassa ante daṭṭhabbo.
143.Adhiṭṭhitā means established. The word eva should be seen at the end of the word tiṭṭhati.
144.Sabbesūti thambhādīsu sakalesu. Jahitaṃ vatthu kuṭibhūmi yassājahitavatthukā. Parikkhitte jahitavatthukāti sambandho.Sesāti itarā dve kuṭiyo.Chadanavibbhamāti chadanassa vināsā. Etthāpi ‘‘jahitavatthukā’’ti ānetabbanti.
144.Sabbesū means in all the pillars, etc. Jahitavatthukā is that of which the place for the building is abandoned. The connection is that it has an abandoned site when it is enclosed. Sesā means the other two kuṭis. Chadanavibbhamā means the destruction of the roof. Here too, "jahitavatthukā" should be brought in.
Bhūminiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of the designation of the place is finished.
15. Upajjhācariyavattaniddesavaṇṇanā
15. Description of the Exposition of the Observances Regarding the Preceptor and Teacher
145.‘‘Idaṃ tayā dukkataṃ, dubbhāsita’’ntiādīni vatvā codanato, attano vajjaṃ assarantassa satuppādavasena sāraṇato, sammā paṭipattiyaṃ sāraṇato pavattāpanato vā vajjāvajjaṃ upanijjhāyati bhusaṃ cintetīti upajjhā. Upajjhā eva upajjhāyo. ‘‘Evaṃ tayā buddhavacanaṃ sajjhāyitabbaṃ, evaṃ atikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādinā ācārasikkhāpane ācarati pavattatīti ācariyo. So ca nissayapabbajjāupasampadādhammācariyavasena catubbidho. Upajjhā ca ācariyo caupajjhācariyā,te.Nissāya vasamānoti iminā nissayapabbajjāupasampadādhammantevāsikesu yo nissāya vasati, taṃ dasseti. Catūsu hi tesu nissayantevāsikena yāva ācariyaṃ nissāya vasati, tāvasabbaṃ ācariyavattaṃ kātabbaṃ, netarehi. Itarehi, nissayamuttakehipi yāva cīvararajanaṃ, tāva ca arativinodanādikañca vattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Anāpucchitvā pattacīvaradānādimhi pana etesaṃ anāpatti. Saddhivihārikassa pana upajjhāyānaṃ yāva cīvararajanaṃ, tāva ca arativinodanādikañca akarontassa nissayamuttakassāpi amuttakassāpi āpattiyeva. Ekaccassa pattadānādito paṭṭhāya amuttanissayasseva āpatti. Tesu majjhe dve ācariyassa yāvajīvaṃ bhārā. Itare pana yāva samīpe vasanti, tāvadeva, tasmā ācariyenāpi tesu sammā vattitabbaṃ, upajjhāyena saddhivihārikesu vattabbameva natthi.Supesaloti piyaṃ sīlamassāti pesalo, vuddhi, ya-lopena ī-kārassa attakaraṇena, suṭṭhu pesalo supesalo, sikkhākāmoti attho.‘‘Dantakaṭṭha’’ntiādi ‘‘dade’’timassa kammaṃ.Dadeti sammā ādarena yathādhippāyaṃ dadeyyāti attho.Kāleti tadanurūpe kāle.
145. Because he censures by saying things such as, "This was badly done by you, badly spoken," because he reminds one who does not remember his own fault by way of the arising of mindfulness, or because he causes one to engage in proper conduct, an upajjhā intensely thinks over the fault or non-fault. An upajjhā is just an upajjhāyo. Because he practices teaching conduct with things such as, "The Buddha's words should be recited by you in this way, it should be transgressed in this way, it should be desisted from in this way," he is called ācariya (teacher). And he is fourfold by way of the teacher who gives dependence, the teacher who ordains, the teacher who gives the higher ordination, and the teacher of the Dhamma. Upajjhā and ācariya are upajjhācariyā; them. By "dwelling in dependence" (nissāya vasamāno), he shows him who dwells in dependence among those who are dependent disciples, those ordained, those with higher ordination, and the Dhamma students. For among those four, the dependent disciple should do all the teacher's observances as long as he dwells in dependence on the teacher, but not the others. By the others, even those freed from dependence, the observances should be done up to the dyeing of the robe, and also the dispelling of discontent, etc. But for them there is no offense in giving a bowl and robe, etc., without asking permission. But for the pupil, there is certainly an offense for the preceptors, even if freed from dependence or not freed, if he does not do up to the dyeing of the robe, and also the dispelling of discontent, etc. For some, the offense is only for one who is not freed from dependence, beginning from the giving of a bowl, etc. Among them, two are a burden to the teacher for life. But the others are only for as long as they dwell nearby; therefore, the teacher should also behave properly towards them; there is no need to speak of the preceptor towards his pupils. "Supesalo" means lovable is his virtue, thus pesalo, growth; by elision of the ya, by making the ī into a; suṭṭhu pesalo is supesalo, it means desiring training. "Tooth-stick" etc. is the object of "should give" (dade). "Dade" means should properly give with respect, according to his intention. "Kāle" means at a time appropriate to that.
146.Patte ca…pe… cīvare ca vattaṃ careti sambandho.Careti kareyya. Tattha nīcaṃ katvā sādhukaṃ aparighaṃsantena dhovanaṃ, muhuttaṃ uṇhe otāpanaṃ, ṭhapanaṭṭhānaṃ upaparikkhitvā cammādinā kenaci antarahitāya nikkhipanaṃpatte vattaṃ. Gāmaṃ pavisantānaṃ nivāsanakāyabandhanasaṅghāṭidānaṃ, dhovitvā sodakapattassa dānaṃgāmappavese vattaṃ. Yadi ākaṅkhanti, parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetvā ca pārupitvā ca nātidūranaccāsanne gamanaṃ, pattapariyāpannaggahaṇañcagamane vattaṃ. Nivattente pana paṭhamataraṃ āgantvā āsanapaññāpanaṃ, pādodakādiupanikkhipanaṃ, pattacīvarappaṭiggahaṇaṃāgameāgamanevattaṃ. Bhaṇantānaṃ antarā kathāanopātanaṃ sabbattha vattaṃ. Āsanapaññāpanaṃ, uṭṭhitesu āsanauddharaṇaṃ, pādapīṭhakathalānaṃ upanikkhipanaṃ, paṭisāmanañcaāsane pādapīṭhe pādakathale ca vattaṃ. Dhotapādaṭṭhapanakaṃ pādapīṭhaṃ. Aññaṃ kathalaṃ. Upāhanā ca cīvarañcāti dvando, tasmiṃ. Sukkhaallacoḷehi puñchanaṃupāhanāya vattaṃ. Sinnacīvarassa muhuttaṃ otāpanaṃ, caturaṅgulaṃ kaṇṇaṃ ussāretvā cīvarasaṃharaṇañcacīvare vattaṃ.
146. The connection is that he should practice the observances regarding the bowl…pe… and regarding the robe. Care means he should do. There, observance regarding the bowl means washing by making it low, carefully, without scratching it, heating it slightly in warm water, examining the place for keeping it, and putting it down with some kind of covering by leather, etc. Observance upon entering the village means giving the lower robe for entering the village, the waistband, and the outer robe, and giving the bowl with rinsed water. Observance in going means, if they wish, going neither too far nor too near, after wearing and wrapping it properly, and taking the bowl in a proper manner. Observance on returning means arranging a seat first, putting down foot-washing water, etc., and receiving the bowl and robe. Observance in all means not interrupting when they are speaking. Observance regarding the seat, footstool, and foot-rest means arranging a seat, removing the seat when they have gotten up, putting down a footstool and foot-rest, and tidying up. A footstool is for putting the washed feet. Another is a foot-rest. In the pair of shoes and robe. Observance regarding the shoes means wiping with dry and clean cloths. Observance regarding the robe means slightly heating a wet robe, and folding the robe after raising the edge by four fingerbreadths.
147.Paribhojanīya…pe… passāvaṭṭhānisu ca vihārasodhane ca puna paññāpane ca vattaṃ tathāti sambandho. Vaccañca passāvo ca vaccapassāvā. Tiṭṭhati etthāti ṭhānī, kuṭi. Vaccapassāvānaṃ ṭhānīti tappuriso. Atha vā tiṭṭhati etthāti ṭhānaṃ, soyeva samāso, vaccapassāvassa ca patanaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti iṭṭhagehādi. Paribhojanīyañca pānīyañca vaccapassāvaṭṭhānī capari…pe… ṭṭhānī. Tāsu tesu vā. Pādodakauṇhasītanahānodakappaṭiyādāpanaṃparibhojanīye vattaṃ. Pātabbapānīyena pucchanaṃ upaṭṭhāpanañcapānīye vattaṃ. Sammajjanapānīyaupaṭṭhāpanaṃvaccapassāvaṭṭhānīsu vattaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ pattacīvarādīni harāpetvā ekamante nikkhipanādi, ullokato paṭṭhāya makkaṭasantānaṃ ohāretvā sammajjanañcavihārasodhane vattaṃ. Otāpetvā sodhetvā papphoṭetvā atiharitvā yathāṭhāne bhūmattharaṇādipaññāpanaṃpuna paññāpane vattaṃ. Tathāti iminā ‘‘care’’ti idaṃ atidisati.
147. The connection is that there is observance regarding things to be used…pe…and regarding the urinals and lavatories, and regarding cleaning the vihāra, and regarding rearranging. Excrement and urine are vaccapassāvā. Thānī means a place to stand, a kuṭi. Vaccapassāvānaṃ ṭhānī is a tappuriso. Or ṭhānaṃ is a place to stand, it is the same compound; and a place for the falling of excrement and urine; that exists for him, thus a brick house, etc. Pari…pe…ṭṭhānī means things to be used, and drinking water, and urinals and lavatories. In them or regarding them. Observance regarding things to be used means providing foot-washing water, warm water, cold water, and bathing water. Observance regarding drinking water means asking with drinkable water and providing it. Observance regarding urinals and lavatories means sweeping and providing water. Observance regarding cleaning the vihāra means first having the bowl and robe, etc., carried away and put aside in one place, and sweeping after removing spiderwebs starting from the top. Observance regarding rearranging means spreading out again the ground covering, etc., in the proper place after heating, cleaning, shaking, and removing it. By "Tathā," he extends this word "should practice."
148.Vihāraṃ sodhento bhikkhu paṭivāte vā saṅgaṇe vā pānīyasāmantā vā sayanāsanaṃ na papphoṭeyyāti sambandho.Pānīya-saddena paribhojanīyañca saṅgahitaṃ.Paṭivāteti uparivāte.Saṅgaṇeti bahūnaṃ samosaraṇe vivaṭappadese.Sayanāsanaṃnāma bhūmattharaṇamañcādi.
148. The connection is that a bhikkhu cleaning the vihāra should not shake out the bedding in the wind or in a gathering or near drinking water. By the word "Pānīya" (drinking water), what is to be used is included. "Paṭivāte" means in the upper wind. "Saṅgaṇe" means in an open place where many gather. Bedding is ground covering, a cot, etc.
149.Nhāne vattaṃ care, nhātassa kātabbe careti sambandhassa purisādhīnatāya sambandho veditabbo. Cīvarappaṭiggahaṇagattaparikammakaraṇaṃnahāne vattaṃ. Kātabbe careti gattato udakasammajjananivāsanadānādikicce pavatteyyāti attho. ‘‘Vanappagumbe’’tiādīsu viya sissa e-kārādesaṃ rūpaṃ, tasmā kātabbaṃ vattaṃ careyyāti yojetvā veditabbaṃ. Budhā pana ‘‘nhāne nhātassa kātabbe vattaṃ care’’ti yojetvā atthaṃ vadanti. Evaṃ sati kātabba-saddassa kammasādhanattā vattameva kātabbaṃ nāmāti ‘‘vatte vattaṃ care’’ti vuttaṃ viya hotīti virujjhati.‘‘Nahātena nahātassā’’ti vā pāṭho, udake gattaparikammena theraṃ paṭhamaṃ nahāpetvā sayampi nahātenāti attho.Pāḷiyampi ‘‘nahātena paṭhamataraṃ uttaritvā’’ti (mahāva. 67) atthi. Atha raṅgapāke dhovane sibbane ca vattaṃ careti sambandho, rajanapāke cīvaradhovane cīvarasibbane cāti attho. Rajanto cīvare theve ṭhite na vajeti sambandho.Rajantoti cīvaraṃ rajanto.Theveti rajanabindumhi.
149. The connection should be understood as dependent on the person that he should practice the observance regarding bathing and practice regarding what should be done for one who has bathed. Observance regarding bathing means receiving the robe and doing the preliminaries for the body. Kātabbe care means he should engage in the activity of wiping the water from the body, giving a lower robe, etc. The form is with the e-sound as a substitute for the issa, like in "Vanappagumbe," etc.; therefore it should be understood by connecting "he should practice the observance that should be done." But the wise say the meaning by connecting thus: "he should practice the observance that should be done for one who has bathed in bathing." In this case, because the word kātabba is a कर्म साधन, it is contradictory, as it would be like saying "he should practice observance in observance," because observance itself is what should be done. Or the reading is "Nahātena nahātassā," meaning after first having the elder bathed by preliminaries for the body in water, he himself should bathe. In the Pāḷi too, there is "after first coming out by one who has bathed" (Mahāva. 67). Then, the connection is that he should practice the observance in dyeing, washing, and sewing, meaning in the dyeing solution, washing the robe, and sewing the robe. When he is dyeing, he should not flick when the dye is in drops and settled.Rajanto means while dyeing the robe. Theve means in a drop of dye.
150.Ekaccassāti ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ verino puggalassa pattaṃ vā cīvarāni vā kiñcanaṃ parikkhāraṃ vā na dadeyya na gaṇheyya vāti sambandho. Tatthana dadeyya na gaṇheyyāti paṭisāmanatthāyapi na dadeyya, na gaṇheyya vāti attho. ‘‘Ākiñcana’’ntiādīsu viyakiñcana-saddo daṭṭhabbo, tassa kiñcīti attho.Kiñcinanti vā pāṭho, kiñci naṃ parikkhāranti yojanā. Padasiddhivasenettha nanti ta-saddappayogo kato.
150. The connection is that Ekaccassā (to a certain one), he should not give a bowl or robes or any requisite to a person who is an enemy of the teacher or preceptor, nor should he take it. There, "na dadeyya na gaṇheyyā" means that he should not give or take even for the sake of tidying up. The word kiñcana should be seen as in "Ākiñcana," etc.; its meaning is "something." Or the reading is "Kiñcina," the connection being "any requisite." Here, the use of the ta suffix instead of na has been made due to the establishment of the word.
151-2.Pacchato kātunti pacchāsamaṇaṃ kātuṃ.Tassāti ekaccassa.Pacchatoti pacchāsamaṇo hutvā.Ninnetunti ekaccassa nīharituṃ. Sabbattha anāpucchā na vaṭṭatīti yojetabbaṃ.Kiccayaṃ vāti veyyāvaccādi yaṃ kiñci kiccaṃ vā. Kiccameva kiccayaṃ, kassa yo ‘‘seniyo’’tiādīsu viya.Parikammaṃ vāti piṭṭhiparikammādiparikammaṃ.Attano kārāpetuṃ vāti ekaccena attano kārāpetuṃ vā.Kātuṃ vāti tassa attanā kātuṃ vā.
151-2.Pacchato kātu means to make a follower. Tassā means of a certain one. Pacchato means after becoming a follower. Ninnetu means to lead out a certain one. Everywhere, it should be connected that it is not allowable without asking permission. Kiccayaṃ vā means whatever task, such as service, etc. Kiccameva kiccayaṃ, like kassa yo in "seniyo," etc. Parikammaṃ vā means a service such as back massage, etc. Attano kārāpetuṃ vā means or to have a certain one do it for himself. Kātuṃ vā means or to do it himself.
153.Sīmato niggatā bahibhūtānissīmā,taṃ. Ācariyupajjhāyesu avatvā dūraṃ bhikkhācāraṃ gatesupi apassantena gāmo pavisitabbo. Diṭṭhaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya pana āpucchituṃyeva vaṭṭati.Attano kiccayaṃ vāpīti attano sīmāyapi pattapacanacīvararajanādikaṃ sakaṃ karaṇīyaṃ vāpi kātuṃ.
153.Nissīmā means gone out of the boundary, external to it, that. Even when they have gone far away on alms rounds without telling the teachers or preceptors, the village should not be entered without seeing them. But from the place where they are seen, it is only allowable to ask permission. Attano kiccayaṃ vāpī means or to do one's own task, such as cooking rice in a bowl or dyeing robes, even within one's own boundary.
154.Aratinti sāsane anabhiratiṃ.Saṅghāyattesu kammesūti parivāsāditajjanīyādīsu saṅghappaṭibaddhesu kammesu.Ussukkaṃ vāpīti ācariyupajjhāyesu garudhammaṃ ajjhāpannesu, kammārahesu ca ‘‘kinti nu kho saṅgho parivāsaṃ dadeyyā’’tiādinā ussāhaṃ vāpi.
154. Arati means displeasure in the Dispensation. Saṅghāyattesu kammesū means in actions dependent on the saṅgha, such as penance, censure, etc. Ussukkaṃ vāpī means or enthusiasm in the teachers and preceptors who are learning a serious matter, and in those worthy of action, with things such as, "How will the saṅgha give penance?" etc.
155.Gilānesu upaṭṭheyyāti ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgato gilānupaṭṭhāko alaṃ gilānaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ, paṭibalo hoti bhesajjaṃ saṃvidhātuṃ, sappāyāsappāyaṃ jānāti, asappāyaṃ apanāmeti, sappāyaṃ upanāmeti, mettacitto gilānaṃ upaṭṭhāti no āmisantaro, ajegucchī hoti uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā kheḷaṃ vā vantaṃ vā nīhātuṃ, paṭibalo hoti gilānaṃ kālena kālaṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassetuṃ samādapetuṃ samuttejetuṃ sampahaṃsetu’’nti (mahāva. 366) evaṃ vuttapañcaṅgasamannāgatena hutvā gilānesu upaṭṭhaheyyāti attho. Iminā sabbehipi ācaritabbaṃ gilānavattaṃ upadisati.Vuṭṭhānanti gelaññā vuṭṭhitaṃ.Āgameti āgameyya, olokeyyāti attho. Upajjhācariyehi ca saddhivihārikaantevāsikesu yadi te gilānā honti, ādito paṭṭhāya cīvare rajanapariyosānañca arativinodanādikañca vattaṃ, agilānesu pana uddesaparipucchā ovādānusāsaniyā anuggahopattacīvarādidānañcāti sabbaṃ kātabbaṃ. Teneva heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmā ācariyenāpi tesu sammā vattitabbaṃ, upajjhāyena saddhivihārikesu vattabbameva natthī’’ti.
155. Gilānesu upaṭṭheyyā means: "Monks, a sick-attendant endowed with five qualities is fit to attend to the sick. He is capable of providing medicine; he knows what is beneficial and what is not; he removes what is not beneficial and provides what is beneficial; he attends to the sick with a mind of loving-kindness, not for material gain; he is not disgusted by the evacuation of excrement, urine, saliva, or vomit; and he is capable of instructing, encouraging, inspiring, and gladdening the sick from time to time with religious talk" (Mahāva. 366). The meaning is that one should attend to the sick, possessing these five qualities. With this, the duties towards the sick that should be practiced by all are taught. Vuṭṭhāna means rising up from sickness. Āgame means should come, should visit. Teachers and preceptors should perform all duties towards their saddhivihārika and antevāsika disciples when they are sick, from the beginning to the end of dyeing robes, and the removal of discontent. But towards those who are not sick, there should be the asking for information, giving advice and instructions, and giving robes and other requisites. Therefore, it was said below, "Therefore, the teacher should also behave properly towards them; there is no need to mention about the preceptor towards the saddhivihārika disciples."
Upajjhācariyavattaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Discourse on the Duties to Preceptors and Teachers is Concluded.
16. Vaccapassāvaṭṭhānikaniddesavaṇṇanā
16. Explanation of the Discourse on the Place for Excrement and Urine
156.Vaccapassāvaṭṭhānikanti ṭhānamhi ṭhāne vā bhavaṃ vaccapassāvaṭṭhānikaṃ. Yathāvuḍḍhaṃ vaccaṃ na kareyyāti sambandho. Ye ye vuḍḍhāyathāvuḍḍhaṃ,āgatappaṭipāṭiṃ hitvā vuḍḍhappaṭipāṭiyāti attho.Vaccanti upalakkhaṇamattaṃ, passāvañca nahānañca na kareyyāti adhippāyo. Tadeva samattheti‘‘yātānupubbiyā’’tiādinā.Yātānupubbiyāti yātānaṃ gatānaṃ anupubbi anukkamo yātānupubbi, tāya.Vacca…pe… titthañcāti etaṃ tayaṃ labbhatīti attho, bhikkhunāti viññāyati.
156. Vaccapassāvaṭṭhānika means: vaccapassāvaṭṭhānika which occurs at a place or in a place. The connection is that one should not excrete according to seniority. Those who are senior, yathāvuḍḍhaṃ, means having abandoned the order in which they came, according to the order of seniority. Vacca is just an example; the intention is that one should not excrete urine or bathe there either. That itself is substantiated by ‘‘yātānupubbiyā’’ etc. Yātānupubbiyā means the sequence of those who have gone, the order is yātānupubbi, by that. Vacca…pe… titthañcā means these three are obtained, are recognized, by the monk.
157.Ubbhajitvā ca sahasā ca no paviseyyāti sambandho.Ubbhajitvāti cīvaraṃ dūratova ukkhipitvā.Sahasāti sīghaṃ. Ukkāsitvā paviseyyāti yojanā.
157. The connection is that one should not enter after lifting up or suddenly. Ubbhajitvā means having lifted up the robe from afar. Sahasā means quickly. The construction is that one should enter after clearing the throat.
158.Vaccapassāvadoṇīnaṃ bahīti sambandho.Ubhayanti vaccampi passāvampi.
158. The connection is outside the urine and excrement receptacles. Ubhaya means both urine and excrement.
159.Kūpeti vaccāvāṭe.Kaṭṭhanti avalekhanakaṭṭhaṃ.Pharusenāti kharena avalekhanakaṭṭhena.Uhatañcāpīti attanā vā parena vā uhatañcāpi vaccamakkhitañcāpīti attho.Dhovayeti sati udake, udake asati kaṭṭhenapi sodheyya.
159. Kūpe means in the excrement pit. Kaṭṭha means the scraping stick. Pharusenā means with a rough scraping stick. Uhatañcāpī means even if smeared with excrement, whether removed by oneself or by another. Dhovaye means if there is water, one should wash it; if there is no water, one should clean it even with a stick.
160.Na nikkhameti na nikkhameyya.Capu capūti anukaraṇaṃ, vicchāyaṃ dvitte capu capu katvāti kiriyāvisesanaṃ.Nācameyyāti na dhoveyya. Sati pana udake ācamitabbaṃ, asati yena kenaci puñchitvā gantabbaṃ, sabbasādhāraṇaṭṭhāne ca ācamanakumbhiyā udakaṃ na sesetabbaṃ.Uklāpanti kacavaraṃ.Visodhayeti vihārasodhane viya vaccapassāvakuṭiyo, pariveṇakoṭṭhake ca sammajjeyya. Sabbattheva ca pana vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ.
160. Na nikkhame means one should not leave. Capu capū is an imitation, a reduplication in the sense of scattering, making capu capu is an adverb of action. Nācameyyā means one should not wash. But if there is water, one should rinse; if there is none, one should wipe with whatever is available and leave; and in a public place, the water in the rinsing pot should not be emptied. Uklāpa means rubbish. Visodhaye means one should sweep the excrement and urine huts and surrounding areas, just like cleaning the monastery. But in all the different duties, there is a dukkata offence.
Vaccapassāvaṭṭhānikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Discourse on the Place for Excrement and Urine is Concluded.
17. Āpucchakaraṇaniddesavaṇṇanā
17. Explanation of the Discourse on Asking Permission
161.Āpucchakaraṇanti āpucchāya karaṇaṃ.Anajjhiṭṭhovāti anāṇattova, ayācito eva vā.Na ca vissajeti pucchitapañhaṃ na vissajjeyya ca, āpucchitvā vā yācito vā yathāvuttametaṃ kātuṃ labhatīti adhippāyo.
161. Āpucchakaraṇa means doing after asking permission. Anajjhiṭṭhovā means without being ordered, or even without being asked. Na ca vissaje means one should not answer a question that has been asked. The implication is that one can do what has been said after asking permission or being asked.
162.Āpucchitvākathentassāti attano vuḍḍhaṃ āpucchitvā dhammādikaṃ bhāsantassa.Puna vuḍḍhatarāgameti puna aññassa vuḍḍhatarassa āgamane satīti attho.Punaāpucchanaṃ natthīti bhāsitabbaṃ ṭhapetvā puna āpucchanakiccaṃ natthīti attho. Saṅghatthere asati āraddhampi aṭṭhapetvā kathentassāpi eseva nayo. Bhattagge anumodato ca āpucchanaṃ natthīti sambandho.Anumodatoti dāyakehi yācitassa taṃtaṃpuññānumodanavasena dhammakathaṃ karoto ca. Anumodanañca therādheyyaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave therena bhikkhunā bhattagge anumoditu’’nti (cūḷava. 362) hi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sace manussā attano abhirucikena ekena anumodanaṃ kārenti, neva tassa anumodato āpatti, na mahātherassa bhāro hoti. Upanisinnakathāyameva hi manussesu kathāpentesu mahāthero āpucchitabbo’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(cuḷava. aṭṭha. 362) vuttaṃ.
162. Āpucchitvā kathentassā means while speaking about the Dhamma, etc., after asking permission from one's senior. Puna vuḍḍhatarāgame means when another, more senior person arrives. Punaāpucchanaṃ natthī means there is no need to ask permission again, having set aside what is to be spoken. This same method applies even to one speaking without stopping, when the Sangha thera is not present. The connection is that there is no need to ask permission when giving thanks in the refectory. Anumodato means when giving a Dhamma talk in the manner of giving thanks for the merit of those who have requested it. And giving thanks is dependent on the thera. For it was said, "I allow, monks, a monk who is a thera to give thanks in the refectory" (Cūḷava. 362). "If people cause thanks to be given by one according to their own liking, there is no offence for that giver of thanks, and there is no burden on the Mahāthera. The Mahāthera should be asked permission only when speaking among people on topics being discussed," it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā (cuḷava. aṭṭha. 362).
163.Vuḍḍhena ekavihārake vasanto cāti sambandho.Vuḍḍhenāti vuḍḍhena saddhiṃ.Ekavihāraketi savanūpacāre khuddakavihāre, na mahāvihāre. Kucchitatthe hi kappaccayo.Na sajjhāyeyyāti sajjhāyanaṃ na kareyya.
163. The connection is: living in the same dwelling with a senior. Vuḍḍhenā means with a senior. Ekavihārake means in a small dwelling within the boundary of a monastery, not in a large monastery. For the kappa suffix is in the sense of something contemptible. Na sajjhāyeyyā means one should not recite.
164.‘‘Dhammaṃ na bhāsaye’’tiādīsu anāpucchāti sambandhitabbaṃ.Na ca vijjhapeti na ca nibbāyeyya. Vātapānañca ālokasandhiphalakaṃ kavāṭañca dvāraphalakaṃvātapānakavāṭaṃvā na vivareyya na thakeyya cātina-kāro sabbattha yojetabbo.
164. In ‘‘Dhammaṃ na bhāsaye’’ etc., "without asking permission" should be connected. Na ca vijjhape means one should not extinguish. And the na- should be connected everywhere, meaning one should not open or close the window, the door panel, or the door plank; vātapānakavāṭaṃ.
165.Ekacaṅkame vuḍḍhena caṅkamantopi yena vuḍḍho, tena parivattayeti yojanā.Yena tenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, yattha vuḍḍho, tatthāti attho, vuḍḍhaṃ ohāya aññato na gantabbanti adhippāyo.Soti navako.Enanti vuḍḍhaṃ. Sabbattha dukkaṭaṃ. Ayañhi khandhakadhammatā yattha na-kārena paṭisedho, tattha dukkaṭanti.
165. Even when walking on the same walkway with a senior, the junior should turn around where the senior is. Yena tenā is an instrumental case in the sense of place, meaning where the senior is; the implication is that one should not go elsewhere leaving the senior behind. So means the novice. Ena means the senior. Everywhere there is a dukkata offence. This indeed is the nature of the Khandhaka rule: wherever there is a prohibition with "na-," there is a dukkata offence.
Āpucchakaraṇaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Asking Permission is Concluded.
18. Nagganiddesavaṇṇanā
18. Discourse on Nakedness
166.‘‘Vaje’’tiādīsu na-saddo sambandhitabbo. Tattha pana yathānurūpabhojanādikaṃ kammavacanaṃ ajjhāharitvā ‘‘bhojanaṃ na bhuñje’’tiādinā attho veditabbo.
166. In ‘‘Vaje’’ etc., the word "na-" should be connected. Here, one should understand the meaning by supplying a word denoting action, such as appropriate food, and saying "one should not eat food," etc.
167.Nakareti hatthakammādikaṃ parikammaṃ sayampi na kareyyāti attho.Paṭicchādīsūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ, jantāgharudakavatthappaṭicchādīnaṃ majjheti attho. Parikamme duve kappiyāti sambandho.Parikammeti jantāghare udakepi upajjhāyādīnaṃ kattabbaparikammavisaye, na abhivādanādīsu.Duveti jantāgharaudakappaṭicchādayo. Chādenti etāyāti chādi, vatthassa chādivatthacchādi. Sabbatthāti sabbakammesūti.
167. Na kare means one should not do even the preliminary work oneself, such as handiwork. Paṭicchādīsū is a locative in the sense of determining, meaning among the cover for the water vessel in the bathhouse, etc. In the preliminary work, two are allowable. Parikamme means in the bathhouse, even regarding water, in the matter of preliminary work to be done for the preceptor, etc., not in greetings, etc. Duve means the cover for the bathhouse water, etc. That by which they cover is chādi, the cover for the cloth is vatthacchādi. Sabbatthā means in all activities.
Nagganiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Discourse on Nakedness is Concluded.
19. Nhānakappaniddesavaṇṇanā
19. Discourse on the Allowance for Bathing
168.Kappanaṃ kappiyatā kappo, nhāne kapponhānakappo. Navako therānaṃ purato upari vā na ca nhāyeyyāti sambandho.Na cāti nayeva.Puratoti abhimukhe.Uparīti nadiyā upari.
168. The allowance is allowability, the allowance, the allowance for bathing is nhānakappo. The connection is that the novice should not bathe in front of or above the theras. Na cā means not at all. Purato means in front. Uparī means above the river.
169-171.Kuṭṭatthambhataruṭṭāne kāyaṃ na ghaṃsayeti sambandho. Tatthakuṭṭaṃnāma iṭṭhakadārusilābhitti.Thambhonāma nahānatitthe nikhanitvā ṭhapito.Tarūti rukkho.Aṭṭānaṃnāma tacchetvā aṭṭhapadākārena rājiyo chinditvā nahānatitthe nikhātaphalakaṃ. Gandhabbahatthena vā…pe… mallakena vā kāyaṃ sarīrena vā aññamaññaṃ na ghaṃsayeti sambandho.Gandhabbahatthenāti dārumayahatthena.Kuruvindakasuttiyāti kuruvindakapāsāṇacuṇṇāni lākhāya bandhitvā kataguḷikāvaliyā suttena āvuṇitasuttiyā.Mallakenāti makaradantake chinditvā padumakaṇṇikasaṇṭhānena katamallakena.Sarīrenāti attano kāyena. Aññamaññassa aññamaññaṃ kiriyākaraṇasaṅkhāte kiriyābyabhihāre dvittaṃ. Kapāla…pe… puthupāṇi ca sabbesaṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Kapālañca iṭṭhakā ca, tāsaṃ khaṇḍāni.Puthupāṇīti puthu nānā pāṇi puthupāṇi, hatthaparikammaṃ ruḷhīvasena.Sabbesanti gilānāgilānānaṃ. Gilānassa akatamallakaṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Akatamallakaṃnāma katamallakaviparītaṃ.Pheṇaṃnāma samuddapheṇanti.
169-171. The connection is that one should not rub the body against a wall, pillar, tree, or frame. Here, kuṭṭaṃ means a wall of brick, wood, or stone. Thambho means a pillar erected and placed at the bathing place. Tarū means a tree. Aṭṭānaṃ means a plank carved in the shape of eight feet, with lines cut into it, and erected at the bathing place. The connection is that one should not rub the body with a gandhabbahatthena …pe… mallaka, or with each other. Gandhabbahatthena means with a hand made of wood. Kuruvindakasuttiyā means with a string wound with a string of beads made by binding kuruvindaka stone powder with lac. Mallakenā means with a mallaka made in the shape of a lotus pericarp, having cut the teeth of a shark. Sarīrenā means with one's own body. Aññamaññassa aññamaññaṃ is a dual number in the sense of reciprocal action, in the act of doing for each other. The connection is that potsherds…pe… and flat hands are suitable for everyone. Potsherds and bricks, and pieces of them. Puthupāṇī means puthu diverse pāṇi hands, handiwork in the conventional sense. Sabbesa means for everyone, sick and healthy. The connection is that an unmade mallaka is suitable for the sick. Akatamallakaṃ means the opposite of a made mallaka. Pheṇaṃ means sea foam.
Nhānakappaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Discourse on the Allowance for Bathing is Concluded.
20. Avandiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
20. Discourse on Not Paying Homage
172.Ukkhittoti āpattiyā adassane appaṭikamme ca ukkhittako pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittakoti tividho ukkhittako.Nānāsaṃvāsakonāma laddhinānāsaṃvāsakopi kammanānāsaṃvāsakopi.Garukaṭṭho cāti pārivāsiko mūlāyapaṭikassanāraho mānattāraho mānattacārī abbhānāraho ca idha garukaṭṭhoti adhippeto. Imehi pana aññamaññaṃ vandituṃ vaṭṭatīti.
172. Ukkhitto means one who has been suspended for not seeing an offence and not making amends, and one who has been suspended for not relinquishing a wrong view; the suspended one is of three kinds. Nānāsaṃvāsako means one who is in communion with a different doctrine and one who is in communion with a different act. Garukaṭṭho cā means one who is undergoing parivāsa, one who is worthy of reinstatement from the root offence, one who is worthy of mānatta, one who is practicing mānatta, and one who is not worthy of absolution, is meant here by garukaṭṭho. But it is allowable for these to pay homage to each other.
Avandiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Not Paying Homage is Concluded.
21. Cammaniddesavaṇṇanā
21. Discourse on Hides
173.Migā ca ajā ca eḷakā ca, tesaṃ cammānīti samāso.Ajochagalako.Eḷakomeṇḍako. Mige dasseti‘‘rohite’’tiādinā.Rohitā-diggahaṇaṃ upalakkhaṇamattaṃ, vātamigamigamātukādīpi ettheva saṅgayhanti.
173. Migā ca ajā ca eḷakā ca, tesaṃ cammānīti samāso. It is a compound: "The hides of deer, goats, and sheep." Ajo means a he-goat. Eḷako means a ram. He shows the deer with ‘‘rohite’’ etc. The taking of Rohitā is just an example; deer, such as vātamiga and migamātuka, are also included here.
174.Anuññātattayāti anuññātā yathāvuttacammattayato. Amānusaṃva sabbaṃ cammaṃ thavikopāhane kappatīti sambandho.Thavikāsatthakakosakādīti.
174. Anuññātattayā means from the three kinds of hides that have been allowed, as mentioned. The connection is that any hide, even non-human, is allowable for bags and shoes. Thavikā means a knife sheath, etc.
Cammaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Discourse on Hides is Concluded.
22. Upāhananiddesavaṇṇanā
22. Discourse on Shoes
175.Navā guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā majjhadese na kappantīti sambandho.Navāti ekavārampi appaṭimukkā. Tatthaguṇaṅguṇūpāhanācatupaṭalato paṭṭhāya vuccanti. Sambhave byabhicāre ca visesanaṃ sātthakaṃ bhavatīti‘‘majjhadese’’ti visesanaṃ amajjhadesaṃ byabhicaratīti amajjhadese guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā kappantīti veditabbaṃ. Tathānavāti iminā anavā majjhadesepi. Iminā pana vākyena majjhadesepi ekavārampi paṭimukkā, aññattha tu sabbāpi guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā vaṭṭanti, na sesāti āpannaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ekapalāsikaṃ upāhana’’nti (mahāva. 245) vuttattā ekapaṭalikāpi vaṭṭatīti veditabbaṃ.Sabbassāti majjhadese paccantimepi gilānāgilānassa sabbassa. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ajjhārāme upāhanaṃ dhāretu’’nti (mahāva. 249) hi sāmaññena anuññātaṃ.Sabbatthāti gāme vā araññe vā ārāmato aññatra.Akallakassa cāti gilānasseva.
175. The connection is that new shoes with many layers are not allowable in the Middle Country. Navā means even if not worn even once. Here, guṇaṅguṇūpāhanā is said starting from four layers. The qualification is meaningful both when there is a possibility and when there is an exception, and the qualification ‘‘majjhadese’’ excludes the outlying regions, thus it should be understood that shoes with many layers are allowable in the outlying regions. Likewise, by navā, it means not new even in the Middle Country. But by this sentence, it is implied that in the Middle Country even shoes worn once are not allowed, but elsewhere all shoes with many layers are suitable, and no others. Nevertheless, because it was said, "I allow, monks, shoes with one layer" (Mahāva. 245), it should be understood that shoes with one layer are also suitable. Sabbassā means for everyone, sick or healthy, in the Middle Country and in the outlying regions. For it was generally allowed, "I allow, monks, wearing shoes in the monastery" (Mahāva. 249). Sabbatthā means anywhere other than the monastery, whether in the village or in the forest. Akallakassa cā means only for the sick.
176-9.Sabba…pe… rattā ca upāhanā sabba…pe… vicchikāḷikā ca…pe… dīpīnaṃ cammehi ca majjāra…pe… cammehi ca parikkhaṭā ca upāhanā saṅkamanīyā pādukā ca koci dhāreyya, dukkaṭanti yojanā. Odātāya pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca abhāvepi anulomavasenettha vuttaṃ viya dissati. Nīlako ca odāto cātiādinā dvando. Sabbeva nīlaka…pe… kaṇhakā yāsanti samāso.‘‘Mahāraṅgā’’tiādīsu appayuttepi sabba-sadde pakaraṇavasena yojetvā attho veditabbo.
176-9. The connection is that no one should wear shoes which are all…pe… red, shoes which are all…pe… like scorpion tails…pe… shoes made of panther skins…pe… shoes adorned with marrow…pe… and shoes to be walked upon during an interlude, there is a dukkata offence. Even though there is no statement in the white pāḷi and commentary, it appears as if it was said here in accordance with the implication. A compound is formed with nīlako ca odāto cātiādinā (blue and white, etc.). All nīlaka…pe… kaṇhakā are to be construed in the same way. In ‘‘Mahāraṅgā’’ etc., even if the word "sabba-" is not used, the meaning should be understood by connecting it according to the context.
‘‘Atthā pakaraṇā liṅgā, ocityā kāladesato;
"Meanings of words are to be distinguished by consideration of sense, context, indication,
fitness, time and place; not merely by the words alone."
Citrāti vicitrā. Nīlapītādī vaddhāyeva yāsanti samāso.Ādi-saddena odātādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tittirapattasadiso vicitto vaṇṇo tittirapatta-saddena gahito. Tametesamatthītitittirapattikā. Meṇḍassa ca ajassa ca visāṇasadisā vaddhā yāsanti bāhirattho. Tā pana kaṇṇikaṭṭhāne meṇḍakaajavisāṇasaṇṭhāne vaddhe yojetvā katā. Esa nayovicchikāḷikādīsu. Paṇhipidhānatthaṃ tale khallaṃ baddhaṃ yāsanti viggaho. Jaṅghato sabbapādappaṭicchādanakaṃ puṭaṃ baddhaṃ yāsanti bahubbīhi. Tūlaṃ picu puṇṇaṃ yāsanti aññapadattho. Paliguṇṭhetīti paliguṇṭho, uparipādatalamattappaṭicchādakabandho, tena yojetvā katāpāliguṇṭhimā,vicitrā hi taddhitavutti. Vicchikānaṃ aḷasadisaṃ naṅguṭṭhasadisaṃ baddhametāsantivicchikāḷikā. Sīhabyagghuddājinadīpīnaṃ cammehi cāti pakaraṇatoajinānāma migā.Ulūkāpakkhibiḷārā. Saṅkamanti gacchanti etāhītisaṅkamanīyā. Tā pana tālapaṇṇādīhi katā saṃhāriyā.
Citrā: Varied, diverse. Blue, yellow, and other colors attached and woven together; this is the compound. The word ādi (etc.) includes white and other colors. A diverse pattern resembling the wing of a partridge is taken to mean tittirapatta. Having that is tittirapattikā. External meaning: resembling the horns of a ram and a goat, attached and woven together. However, these are made by attaching and weaving together protrusions in the shape of ram's and goat's horns in place of the kaṇṇikā. This method applies to vicchikāḷikā and others. "Attached and woven together, bound to a khallaṃ on the sole to cover the heel," this is the derivation. "A layer attached and woven together, covering the entire foot from the shin," this is a bahubbīhi compound. "Filled with cotton or floss," this is a different-word meaning. "It covers around," thus paliguṇṭho, a binding covering just the upper sole of the foot; made by attaching and weaving together with that is pāliguṇṭhimā; indeed, diverse, hence a taddhita derivative. "Having something attached and woven together resembling the scorpion's or lizard's tail," this is vicchikāḷikā. Because of the context "with the hides of lions, tigers, otters, leopards, etc.," ajinā means animals. Ulūkā: Owl-cats (referring to a type of animal). "They go or travel with these," thus saṅkamanīyā. These, however, are transportable mats made of palm leaves, etc.
180.Sakalaṃ ekadesaṃ vā puñchitvāvāti yojanā.Khallakādikantiādi-saddena meṇḍavisāṇavaddhikādikaṃ sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhātīti.
180. The phrase means: having wiped either the whole or a part. Khallakādikaṃ: The word ādi includes all such things as the ram's horn protrusions, etc.
Upāhananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the specification of footwear is complete.
23. Anolokiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
23. Explanation of the Specification of Undue Looking
181.Sārattoti saṃratto, sañjātarāgacittoti attho.Itthiyāti tadahujātāyapi paṭasatanivatthāya anokāsupanijjhāyane antamaso tiracchānagatānampi dukkaṭameva.Bhikkhādāyiyāti upalakkhaṇamattaṃ, itthī vā hotu puriso vā, bhikkhādānasamaye asārattenāpi mukhaṃ na ulloketabbaṃ. Ujjhānaṃ lāmakato saṃcintanaṃ, kopo, tattha saññā assātiujjhānasaññī. Idha pana gilānopi na muccati.Ādāse udakapatteti iminā sesesu kaṃsapattādīsu kañjiyādīsu ca mukhanimittaṃ paññāyati, tesaṃ saṅgaho. ‘‘Sañchavi nu kho me vaṇṇo, no, jiṇṇo nu khomhi, no’’ti pana oloketuṃ vaṭṭati.Assāti bhikkhuno.
181. Sāratto: Infatuated, with a mind filled with lust. Itthiyā: Even looking with lust at a woman who has just been born or is covered with a hundred cloths, or even an animal, incurs at least a dukkaṭa offense. Bhikkhādāyiyā: This is merely indicative; whether it is a woman or a man, one should not look up at the face with infatuation while giving alms. Ujjhānaṃ means thinking something is inferior, resentment; one who has awareness of that is ujjhānasaññī. Here, even a sick person is not exempt. Ādāse udakapatte: With this, a reflection of the face is recognized in remaining metal bowls and in fermented rice gruel etc.; this is their inclusion. However, it is permissible to look to see "Is my skin complexion good or not? Am I old or not?" Assā: Of the bhikkhu.
Anolokiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the specification of undue looking is complete.
24. Añjanīniddesavaṇṇanā
24. Explanation of the Specification of an Eye-Salve Container
182.Vaṭṭā vā aṭṭhasoḷasaṃsā vā maṭṭhā añjanī vaṭṭatīti yojanā. Aṭṭha ca soḷasa ca aṃsā koṇā yassā sāti viggaho. Soḷasaṃsapadesavibhattāya aṭṭhaṃsāsutiyā aṭṭhaṃsapadesavibhattā caturaṃsāpi sāmatthiyā gayhatīti ñātabbaṃ. ‘‘Ujukameva pana caturaṃsāvā’’ti hiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85) vuttaṃ.Añjanīti añjananāḷi. Mūle tissopi lekhā vaṭṭantīti yojanā.Mūleti bunde, heṭṭhatoti vuttaṃ hoti.Lekhāti vaṭṭalekhā. Bandhituṃ gīvāyaṃ ekā eva lekhā vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Bandhitunti pidhānabandhanatthaṃ.
182. The phrase means: "A round or eight- or sixteen-sided smooth eye-salve container is suitable." The derivation is: "That which has eight and sixteen sides or angles." Because when dividing a sixteen-sided area, an eight-sided area is understood, then by implication, a four-sided area divided into eight parts is also included; this should be understood. For in the Aṭṭhakathā it is said, "But it should be straight and four-sided" (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.85). Añjanī: Eye-salve tube. The phrase means: "At the base, even three lines are suitable." Mūle: At the base, that is, at the bottom. Lekhā: Lines circling around. The connection is: "A single line is suitable to bind around the neck." Bandhituṃ: To bind the lid.
183.Yaṃ kiñci rūpanti itthirūpādi yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ.Mālādikammanti mālākammaṃ latākammaṃ.Aḍḍhacandādīti etthaādi-saddena agghiyādikaṃ gahitaṃ.Etthāti añjaniyaṃ.
183. Yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ: Any shape whatsoever, such as a woman's form. Mālādikammaṃ: Making garlands, making trellises. Aḍḍhacandādī: Here, the word ādi includes items for sale, etc. Ettha: In this eye-salve container.
184.Thavikāti añjanithavikā.Sipāṭīti khurasipāṭikā. Salākāpi acittakā labbhāti sambandho.Salākāti añjanisalākā. Natthi cittametissātiacittakā. Tādisaṃ pana labhitvā upāhanāyo viya nāsetvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.
184. Thavikā: Eye-salve bag. Sipāṭī: Razor-strap. The connection is: "Even an unmarked applicator is obtainable." Salākā: Eye-salve applicator. Acittakā: Without any marking. But having obtained such a one, it should be used without destroying it, like footwear.
185.Aṭṭhi-saddena manussaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetvā yaṃ kiñci aṭṭhi gahitaṃ.
185. With the word aṭṭhi (bone), any bone is included, except for human bone.
186.Dhūmanettāti dhūmanāḷikā, nissa ā-kārādesavasena vuttaṃ.Satthakadaṇḍānīti satthadaṇḍā. Natthuṃ denti etāyātinatthudānā. Aniyamena hi nadādito vā ī. Tehi saṅkhanābhiādīhi nibbattātammayā.
186. Dhūmanettā: Smoke-tube, said with the change of ā to a. Satthakadaṇḍānī: Knife handles. "One administers snuff with this," thus natthudānā. Indeed, irregularly, either nadā or ī. Tammayā: Made from those, i.e., conch, ivory, etc.
Añjanīniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the specification of an eye-salve container is complete.
25. Akappiyasayananiddesavaṇṇanā
25. Explanation of the Specification of Unsuitable Seats and Beds
187-9.Akappiyāni sayanānīti uccāsayanamahāsayanāni. Padhānavasena pana ‘‘sayanānī’’ti vuttaṃ, pīṭhādayopi ettheva saṅgayhanti añjanī-saddena avasesāni viya. Āsandi ca…pe… ubhatorattūpadhānakañceti etāni akappiyānīti sambandho. Tatthaāsandīti sugataṅgulena atirekaṭṭhaṅgulapādakāni mañcapīṭhāni. Tatthapīṭhaṃnāma mañco viya nātidīghaṃ vuccati. Tividhaṃ tūlametissā atthītitūlī,pakatitūlikā.‘‘Pallaṅkoti pādesu vāḷarūpāni ṭhapetvā kato’’ti ṭhapanassaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(mahāva. aṭṭha. 254) vuttattā ṭhapanañca yathākathañci hoti, yutti ca hotīti, ‘‘tattheva sīharūpādiṃ dassetvā kato pana vaṭṭatīti vadantī’’ti yaṃṭīkāyaṃvuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘kimiti evaṃ vadantī’’ti vatvā paṭikkhipitabbaṃ. ‘‘Akappiyarūpakato akappiyamañco pallaṅko nāmā’’ti hisārasamāsepi. Āsandī pallaṅko uccāsayanaṃ, sesā mahāsayanaṃ.Paṭikāuṇṇāmayo setattharaṇo.Gonocaturaṅgulādhikalomo mahākojavo.Cittakaṃvānavicitro uṇṇāmayattharaṇo.Uṇṇāeḷakalomaṃ.Paṭalikāghanapupphikā.Vikatīti sīhabyagghādirūpavicitto.Uddalomīti ekato uggatalomo.Ekantalomikāti ubhato uggatalomo.
187-9. Akappiyāni sayanāni: Unsuitable seats and beds, i.e., high seats and luxurious beds. Primarily, however, "sayanāni" (beds) is said; seats and the like are included here, like the remaining items with the word añjanī. The connection is: "A chair…and…a double-sided embroidered cushion—these are unsuitable." There, āsandī: chair, refers to couches and seats with legs exceeding the Sugata-span by eight fingerbreadths. There, pīṭhaṃ: seat, is said to be not very long, like a couch. "Having three kinds of cotton," thus tūlī, natural cotton-filled cushion. Because it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā concerning "Pallaṅko: couch, made by placing images of wild animals on the legs" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 254), the placement is somehow done, and it fits; therefore, what is said in the Ṭīkā, "However, some say that one made by showing images of lions, etc., on that is permissible," should be rejected, saying, "Why do they say this?" For in the Sārasamāsa too: "An unsuitable couch, made with an unsuitable design, is called a pallaṅko." Āsandī, pallaṅko, and uccāsayanaṃ are high seats; the rest are luxurious beds. Paṭikā: A woollen spread. Gono: A large shaggy rug with hair exceeding four fingerbreadths. Cittakaṃ: A woollen spread with diverse patterns. Uṇṇā: Sheep's wool. Paṭalikā: A thick flower-patterned rug. Vikatī: A rug with diverse patterns of lions, tigers, etc. Uddalomī: A rug with the hair raised on one side. Ekantalomikā: A rug with the hair raised on both sides.
Kuttaṃsoḷasannaṃ nāṭakitthīnaṃ ṭhatvā naccanayoggo.Koseyyaṃratanaparisibbitaṃ koseyyasuttamayaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ,kaṭṭissaṃratanaparisibbitaṃ koseyyakaṭṭissamayaṃ. Hatthino ca assā ca rathā cāti senaṅgānaṃ bahutte samāhāradvando, hatthiassarathe tesaṃ piṭṭhīsu attharāti tappuriso.Ajinappaveṇīti ajinānaṃ ajinamigacammānaṃ mañcappamāṇena dupaṭṭatipaṭṭāni katvā sibbitā paveṇī. Kadalimigānaṃ idaṃkadalimigaṃ,kiṃ taṃ? Cammaṃ, pavaro ca so paccattharo cātipavarapaccattharo,so ca taṃ setavatthassa upari atthatañca, kadalimigañca taṃ pavarapaccattharañcāti samāso, pavarapaccattharaṇasaṅkhātaṃ setavatthassa upari pattharitaṃ kadalimigappavarapaccattharaṇanti attho. Taṃ kira evaṃ karonti.Ṭīkāyaṃpana yathāvuttadvayena atthataṃ aññameva kiñci vuttaṃ, taṃ na yuttaṃ ‘‘ajinappaveṇī dhāretabbā’’tiādinā (mahāva. 254) visuṃ attharaṇānameva vuttattā. Tesu hi vuttesu tadatthataṃ vuttameva siyā, tathā ca vuttaṃ heṭṭhā visuṃ paṭikādikanti.
Kuttaṃ: A rug suitable for sixteen dancing women to stand and dance on. Koseyyaṃ: A spread made of silk thread, embroidered with jewels. Kaṭṭissaṃ: A coverlet made of wool and silk, embroidered with jewels. The phrase hatthino ca assā ca rathā cāti ("elephants, horses, and chariots") is a collective-number dvando compound of the divisions of an army; the phrase hatthiassarathe tesaṃ piṭṭhīsu attharāti is a tappuriso compound ("elephants, horses and chariots, one spreads on their backs"). Ajinappaveṇī: A long rug made by sewing together hides of ajina deer cut to the size of a couch in two or three layers. Kadalimigānaṃ idaṃ: "This belongs to the kadalimiga animals." What is that? The hide. "And that which is both excellent and a spread," thus pavarapaccattharo; and the compound is so ca taṃ setavatthassa upari atthatañca, kadalimigañca taṃ pavarapaccattharañca, meaning the excellent kadalimiga spread spread over the white cloth. It is said that they do it that way. In the Ṭīkā, however, something else is said to be spread with the two meanings given above, but that is not right, because the names of different spreads are mentioned separately with "ajinappaveṇī dhāretabbā" (mahāva. 254) etc. For if those were mentioned, it would be as if that which is spread on them was mentioned; and thus it is said below, "paṭikādikanti" separately.
Salohitavitānanti etaṃ ‘‘ubhatorattūpadhānaka’’ntimassa visesanaṃ. Lohitavitānena saha vattamānanti samāso. Setavitānampi heṭṭhā akappiyapaccattharaṇe sati na vaṭṭati. Rattaṃ upadhānaṃ sīsūpadhānaṃ pādūpadhānañcarattūpadhānakaṃ,ubhato mañcassa sīsapādanikkhepanaṭṭhāne rattūpadhānakanti alopasamāso. Yaṃ pana ekameva upadhānaṃ ubhayapassesu rattādivaṇṇaṃ vicitraṃ, taṃ pamāṇayuttameva vaṭṭati. Tatridaṃ pamāṇaṃ – vitthārato tīsu kaṇṇesu dvinnaṃ kaṇṇānaṃ antaraṃ vidatthicaturaṅgulaṃ, majjhe muṭṭhiratanaṃ, dīghato pana diyaḍḍharatanaṃ vā dviratanaṃ vā.Paribhuñjatoti iminā karontassa kārāpentassa katthaci chedanakaṃ pācittiyanti dīpeti.
Salohitavitānanti: This is a specification of the last item "ubhatorattūpadhānaka." The compound is "vattamānanti" (existing) with a red canopy. A white canopy too is not suitable when there is an unsuitable underlay beneath. A red cushion, a head cushion, and a foot cushion is rattūpadhānakaṃ, a alopasamāso compound meaning "a red cushion at both places where the head and feet are placed on the couch." But if a single cushion has diverse colors like red on both sides and is of proper size, that is suitable. Here, this is the measurement: in width, the distance between two corners on three corners is a span and four fingerbreadths, with a fist's-jewel in the middle; in length, either one and a half cubits or two cubits. Paribhuñjato: With this, it indicates that when one uses, or has someone else use, there is a cutting pācittiya offense somewhere.
190.Dhammāsane ca bhattagge ca ghare cāpi āsandādittayā sesegihisantakegihivikaṭe sati nisīdituṃ labbhatīti ajjhāhāro padasambandho veditabbo.Gihisantaketi iminā saṅghikampi upalakkheti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, ṭhapetvā tīṇi āsandiṃ pallaṅkaṃ tūlikaṃ gihivikaṭa’’nti (cūḷava. 314) sāmaññena vuttaṃ. Sāmaññajotanāya pana visesepi avaṭṭhānato āsandādittayāti ettha dhammāsane āsandādittayā seseti yojetvā attho gahetabbo.Aṭṭhakathāyañhi ‘‘āsandī pallaṅko gonako’’tiādipāḷikkame āsandādidvayamādito hitvā ‘‘gonakādīni saṅghikavihāre vā puggalikavihāre vā mañcapīṭhakesu attharitvā paribhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭanti, dhammāsane pana gihivikaṭanīhārena labbhanti, tatrāpi nipajjituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320) vuttaṃ.Bhattaggaṃnāma vihāre dānaṭṭhānaṃ.Dhammāsanaṃpana yattha katthaci.Ghareti antaraghare.Nisīdituṃ labbhateti iminā nipajjituṃ na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Saṃkhipanaṃ antokaraṇaṃ saṅkhepo, bhūmattharaṇe saṅkhepo assa sayanassāti samāso. Tasmiṃ bhūmattharaṇe antokaraṇabhūmattharato bhūmattharaṇamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.Sayituñcāti attano kappiyapaccattharaṇaṃ attharitvā sayituñca nisīdituñca. ‘‘Paribhaṇḍakataṃ bhūmiṃ vā bhūmattharaṇasenāsanaṃ vā saṅghikamañcapīṭhaṃ vā attano santakena paccattharaṇena paccattharitvāva nipajjitabba’’nti hiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(cūḷava. aṭṭha. 324) vuttaṃ. Idañca āsandādīnampi aññathattakaraṇe paribhoge lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Vuttañhi bhagavatā ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave, āsandiyā pāde chinditvā paribhuñjituṃ, pallaṅkassa vāḷe bhinditvā paribhuñjituṃ, tūlikaṃ vijaṭetvā bibbohanaṃ kātuṃ, avasesaṃ bhūmattharaṇaṃ kātu’’nti (cūḷava. 320).
190. The word connection should be understood by supplying the phrase "it is permissible to sit" to mean that it is permissible to sit on the remaining three kinds of chairs etc.—other than a chair, a couch, or a cotton-filled cushion—in the gihisantake, places that are spoiled by laypeople, in the refectory, in a dwelling, and in the Dhamma seat. Gihisantake: With this, it also indicates what belongs to the Sangha. It is said generally, "I allow, monks, what is spoiled by laypeople, excluding three things: a chair, a couch, and a cotton-filled cushion" (cūḷava. 314). However, because of the general indication and the restriction in the specification as well, the meaning should be taken by connecting "āsandādittayā seseti" here, i.e., other than the three kinds of chairs etc. in the Dhamma seat. For in the Aṭṭhakathā, following the Pali order of āsandī pallaṅko gonako, it is said, "Having excluded the first two, chair etc., it is not permissible to spread gonaka etc. on couches and seats in a monastery belonging to the Sangha or to an individual and use them; however, they are obtainable in a Dhamma seat as something spoiled by laypeople; even there, it is not permissible to lie down" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 320). Bhattaggaṃ: Refectory, means a giving-place in a monastery. Dhammāsanaṃ: Dhamma seat, however, is anywhere at all. Ghare: In a dwelling. Nisīdituṃ labbhate: It is permissible to sit; with this, it indicates that it is not permissible to lie down. Saṃkhipanaṃ antokaraṇaṃ saṅkhepo: folding is arranging inside, folding is this. Bhūmattharaṇe saṅkhepo assa sayanassāti samāso: "The folding of his bed is folding on the ground spread," this is the compound. In that ground-spread, it should be seen that it is only a ground spread, a ground spread arranged inside. Sayituñcā: And to lie down and sit having spread out his own allowable underlay. For in the Aṭṭhakathā it is said, "One should only lie down having spread out a prepared ground, or a monastery ground spread, or a Sangha couch or seat, with his own belonging underlay" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 324). And this is a characteristic statement concerning using chairs and the like after making them different. For it was said by the Blessed One: "I allow, monks, to use a chair having cut off its legs, to use a couch having broken its images of wild animals, to unravel a cotton-filled cushion and make a face-wiper, to make the remainder a ground spread" (cūḷava. 320).
191.Caturaṃsapīṭhā ca…pe… pañcaṅgā ca uccapādakā kappantīti atthato vacanaṃ vipallāsetvā sambandhitabbaṃ, ‘‘kappiyā’’ti iminā vā sambandho veditabbo. Tattha cattāro aṃsā koṇā yesaṃ, te ca te pīṭhā cāti samāso. Tiṇṇaṃ apassayānaṃ, catunnañca pādānaṃ vasena satta aṅgāni yesanti samāso. Ekāpassayassa vasena pañcaṅgā. Caturaṃsapīṭhānaṃ visuṃ kappiyabhāvassa vuttattā sattaṅgādayo pana dīghāti viññāyanti.Pāḷiyaṃbhattaggassa ekayoganiddiṭṭhattā ekayoganiddiṭṭhānaṃ saha vā pavatti, saha vā nivattītighareti iminā bhattaggassapi gahaṇaṃ.Eva-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto, tasmā tūlonaddhā mañcapīṭhā ghare vā bhattagge vā nisīditumeva kappantīti sambandho. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi ‘‘tena kho pana samayena manussā bhattagge antaraghare tūlonaddhaṃ mañcampi pīṭhampi paññapenti. Bhikkhū kukkuccāyantā nābhinisīdanti. Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gihivikaṭaṃ abhinisīdituṃ, na tveva abhinipajjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 314). Te pana karontassa vā kārāpentassa vā uddālanakaṃ pācittiyaṃ.
191. The phrase "Caturaṃsapīṭhā ca…pe… pañcaṅgā ca uccapādakā kappantīti" (square seats…and…five-part and high-legged [seats] are allowable) should be connected by reversing the word order according to the meaning, or the connection should be understood with the phrase "kappiyā" (allowable). There, cattāro aṃsā koṇā yesaṃ, te ca te pīṭhā cāti samāso: "those which have four sides or corners; and those are seats," this is the compound. Tiṇṇaṃ apassayānaṃ, catunnañca pādānaṃ vasena satta aṅgāni yesanti samāso: "Because of three backrests and four legs, that which has seven parts," this is the compound. With one backrest, there are five parts. Since the allowability of square seats is stated separately, it is understood that the seven-part ones and so on are long. In the Pāḷi, because there is a single statement regarding the refectory, since there is either concurrent occurrence or concurrent non-occurrence of things stated in a single statement, the word ghare (in a dwelling) also includes the refectory. The word eva is used without purpose; therefore, the connection is that cotton-filled couches and seats are allowable only for sitting in a dwelling or in a refectory. Here is the Pali passage: "At that time, people were setting up cotton-filled couches and seats in the refectory and in private dwellings. The monks, feeling scrupulous, did not sit on them. They told this matter to the Blessed One. I allow, monks, to sit on what is spoiled by laypeople, but certainly not to lie down" (cūḷava. 314). However, for those who use, or have others use, that, there is an expiable pācittiya offense.
192.Sānulomānaṃ channaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ chavi etāsanti viggaho.Pañca bhisīti coḷāditūlagaṇanāya pañcakā vuttā.Sabbatthāti vihāramañcapīṭhādīsu sabbattha.
192. Sānulomānaṃ channaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ chavi etāsanti viggaho: "The skin is one of the six allowable robes," this is the derivation. Pañca bhisī: The five types of cushions are mentioned when counting coḷā etc. Sabbattha: Everywhere, in monastery couches, seats, etc.
193.Tūlattayanti simbalirukkhādīnaṃ khīravalliādīnaṃ erakādīnaṃ tiṇānaṃ tūlattayaṃ.Bhisigabbhocoḷādiko pañcavidho bhisigabbho.Migapakkhinaṃ lomānīti etaṃ sabbanti seso.Miga-saddeneva sabbepi sīhādayo catuppadā,pakkhi-saddena sabbepi haṃsamorādayo gahitā. Nanu ca bhisigabbhasaddantogadhāya uṇṇāya migapakkhilomānampi gahaṇasabbhāvepi tesaṃ visuṃ gahaṇe sati punaruttidoso āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati manussalomapariccāgavibhāvanappayojanasabbhāvato. Nanu ca evampi dosoyeva, ‘‘manussalomamuṇṇāya’’ntiādinā bhisigabbhānaṃ upari nīyamānattā gamyate bibbohanepi ayameva bhisigabbhoti? Saccaṃ, tathāpi na doso, gamyamānatthassa saddassa payogaṃ pati kāmacāroti. Masūrake tūlavajjā anuññātāti vipariṇāmetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.Masūrakaṃnāma cammachavikā bhisīti vadanti.
193. Tūlattayaṃ: Three kinds of cotton are: cotton from silk-cotton trees etc., cotton from milk-vines etc., cotton from eraka grass etc. Bhisigabbho: The fillings for cushions are the five kinds of cushion fillings, beginning with coḷā. Migapakkhinaṃ lomānī: Animal and bird hair; this is all that remains. With the word miga (animal), all quadrupeds such as lions etc. are included, and with the word pakkhi (bird), all birds such as swans, peacocks, etc. are included. But if, even though the inclusion of animal and bird hair is implied in the word "cushion filling," there is a fault of repetition when they are mentioned separately, [the answer is:] there is no fault, because there is a purpose of distinguishing the exclusion of human hair. But even so, isn't there a fault in that, since by saying "manussalomamuṇṇāya" etc., [the word] "cushion filling" is being brought above them, it is understood that this very thing is a cushion filling even in the face-wiper? It is true, but still there is no fault, because there is freedom to use the word whose meaning is implied. The connection should be transformed and made: except for cotton, masūraka is allowed. Masūrakaṃ: Masūraka is said to be a leather-skin cushion.
194.Uṇṇāyaṃ manussalomañca paṇṇe suddhaṃ tamālakañca pupphañca appaṭivekkhitaṃ āsanañceva na labbhanti sambandho.Manussalomanti iminā na kevalaṃ idha eḷakalomameva uṇṇā, atha kho kappiyākappiyamaṃsajātīnaṃ pakkhicatuppadānaṃ lomampīti dasseti.Pupphanti piyaṅgubakulapupphādi.Tamālakasaddeneva upacārato pattaṃ gahetvā‘‘tamālaka’’nti vuttaṃ.Appaṭivekkhitanti anupaparikkhitaṃ. Kīdisaṃ pana paṭivekkhitabbaṃ, kīdisaṃ na paṭivekkhitabbanti? Yaṃ vinicchayato viññātaṃ, taṃ na paṭivekkhitabbaṃ, itaraṃ hatthena parāmasantena paṭivekkhitabbaṃ.
194. Wool, human hair, and pure tamālaka leaves and flowers, and unexamined seats are not allowed. Manussaloma: With this, it shows that not only sheep's wool is meant here, but also the hair of birds and quadrupeds of acceptable and unacceptable meats. Puppha: such as piyaṅgu and bakula flowers. By the word Tamālaka, taking the leaf by way of convention, it is called "tamālaka". Appaṭivekkhita: unexamined. But what kind should be examined, and what kind should not be examined? That which is known by decision should not be examined; the other should be examined by touching it with the hand.
Akappiyasayananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of unacceptable bedding is finished.
26. Samānāsanikaniddesavaṇṇanā
26. Description of Sharing Seats
195.Tivassantaramekamāsanaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anuññātanti sambandho. Tattha ekasmiṃ āsane mañcādike dvinnaṃ āsanaṃ nisīdanaṃekamāsanaṃ. Ma-kāro sandhijo. Kīdisanti āha‘‘tivassantara’’nti. Tiṇṇaṃ vassānamantarametassāti tivassantaro, dvīhi vassehi mahantataro vā daharataro vā bhikkhu, so assa atthītitivassantaraṃ,tivassantaravantanti attho. Yo pana ekena vassena mahantataro vā daharataro vā ekavassoyeva vā, tabbantatāya vattabbameva natthi. Atha vātivassantaranti karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tivassantarena saddhinti attho. Tameva samattheti‘‘sattavasse’’ccādinā.
195.It is connected that one seat is allowed for monks with an interval of three years. Here, in one seat, such as a cot, the act of two sitting on one seat is ekamāsana. The ma- is conjunct. What kind is it? He says "tivassantara". One who has an interval of three years, that is, a monk who is older or younger by two years, he has that, therefore tivassantara, meaning having a three-year interval. But for one who is older or younger by one year, or even one year old, there is no need to mention being within that interval. Or, tivassantara is a word used in the sense of instrumentality, meaning together with a three-year interval. He confirms that itself with "sattavasse" etc.
196.Muni anuññāsīti sambandho.Sabbehevāti samānāsanikaasamānāsanikehi sabbeheva saddhiṃ.
196.The Sage allowed, is the connection. Sabbeheva: with all, both those who share seats and those who do not share seats.
197.Dīghāsanaṃ dasseti‘‘anta’’ntiādinā. Yaṃ tiṇṇaṃ nisīdituṃ pahoti, taṃ antaṃ dīghāsananti sambandho.Antanti pacchimaṃ. Adīghāsane pana samānāsanikā nisīdituṃ labbhantīti dassento‘‘mañcake’’tiādimāha. Sabbattha ayathākaraṇato dukkaṭanti.
197.He shows the long seat with "anta" etc. That which is sufficient for three to sit on, that is called a long seat, is the connection. Anta: the end. But showing that those who share seats are allowed to sit on a short seat, he said "mañcake" etc. Everywhere there is a dukkaṭa due to improper action.
Samānāsanikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of sharing seats is finished.
27. Asaṃvāsaniddesavaṇṇanā
27. Description of Non-Association
198.Ukkhittoti kammanānāsaṃvāsakasaṅkhāto āpattiyā adassane, appaṭikamme, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittako.Anupasampannoti sikkhamānasāmaṇerasāmaṇerisikkhāpaccakkhātasaṅkhāto anupasampanno.Chinnamūlakoti antimavatthuajjhāpanno. Ukkhittakesu ‘‘dhammavādino ete’’ti uppannāya laddhiyā nānābhūto saṃvāso etassātinānāsaṃvāso,ukkhittānuvattakasaṅkhāto laddhinānāsaṃvāsako. Sīmato niggatā nissīmā, sīmantarikā bahisīmā ca, tattha hatthapāse cepi ṭhito, sīmānānāsaṃvāsakonissīmaṭṭhito. Vehāyase ākāse ṭhitovehāyasaṇṭhitobindāgamena. Tattha ‘‘nānāsaṃvāso cā’’tiādinā samāhāradvandepi kvaci napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ byabhicaratīti napuṃsakattābhāvo yathā ‘‘maggāmaggo’’ti. Ekakammaṃ ekuddeso samasikkhatāti ayaṃ tividhopi saṃvāso nāma. So yesaṃ natthi, teasaṃvāsā. Ete hatthapāsato bahikaraṇavasena vajjetabbā. Etesu hi tividhe ukkhittake sati uposathādikaṃ kammaṃ karontassa pācittiyaṃ, itaresu dukkaṭanti.
198.Ukkhitto: one who is expelled, known as causing non-association, for not seeing an offense, for not making amends, for not relinquishing a bad view. Anupasampanno: one who is not fully ordained, known as a sikkhamāna, sāmaṇera, sāmaṇerī, or one who has renounced the training. Chinnamūlako: one who has committed an ultimate offense. Among those who are expelled, one whose association is different due to a doctrine that has arisen, thinking, "These are speakers of the Dhamma," is a nānāsaṃvāso, known as one who follows the expelled one and causes doctrinal non-association. Those who have gone outside the boundary are nissīmā, those who are on the edge of the boundary are outside the boundary, even if standing within arm's reach there, he causes non-association due to the boundary; he nissīmaṭṭhito stands outside the boundary. Standing in the sky, in space, is vehāyasaṇṭhito by way of separation. There, even in a collective compound with "nānāsaṃvāso ca," the neuter gender deviates somewhere, hence the absence of the neuter gender, as in "maggāmaggo." Having one action, one recitation, and equal training, this threefold association is called saṃvāsa. Those who do not have that are asaṃvāsā. These should be avoided in terms of being kept outside arm's reach. Indeed, when these three types of expelled persons are present, there is a pācittiya for one who performs an action such as the uposatha, and a dukkaṭa for the others.
Asaṃvāsaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of non-association is finished.
28. Kammaniddesavaṇṇanā
28. Description of Acts
199.Vaggena adhammakammañca samaggena adhammakammañca vaggena dhammakammañca samaggena dhammakammañcāti cattāri kammāni hontīti seso. Tatthavaggena adhammakammanti vaggena saṅghena karaṇīyaṃ adhammakammaṃ. Esa nayo sabbattha.Vaggoti ca samūho vuccati, so ca catuvaggādikaraṇīyādīsu yāvatikānaṃ kammappattānaṃ asammukhībhāvena, chandārahānaṃ chandānāharaṇena, sammukhībhūtānañca paṭikkosanena, tesu ekenāpi vā idha adhippeto.Adhammakammanti ettha panadhammonāma ‘‘uttidutiye ce, bhikkhave, kamme ekāya uttiyā kammaṃ karoti, na ca kammavācaṃ anussāveti, adhammakamma’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 387) ekāyeva ñattiyā, tathā dvīhi ñattīhi ekāyeva vā kammavācāya, tathā dvīhi kammavācāhīti āgatāya ca tathā hāpanaaññathākaraṇabhāvena ñattikammaṃ ṭhapetvā ñatticatutthe ca kamme āgatāya ca akammārahassa tajjanīyapabbājanīyapaṭisāraṇīyaniyassatividhaukkhepanīyānaṃ sattannaṃ kammānaṃ karaṇavasena, kammārahassa ca virādhetvā karaṇavasena āgatāya ca pāḷiyā viparītā ca pāḷi, upasampadādikammavasena āgatā ca pāḷi, sammukhāvinayasativinayaamūḷhavinayapaṭiññākaraṇayebhuyyasikātassapāpi- yasikātiṇavatthārakasaṅkhātānaṃ sattannaṃ kammānaṃ yathālābhakaraṇavasena āgatā ca pāḷi, tena karaṇīyaṃ apalokanañattiñattidutiyañatticatutthasaṅkhātaṃ catubbidhaṃ kammaṃdhammakammaṃ,tappaṭipakkhaṃadhammakammaṃ. Tabbipariyāyena samaggo dhammakammañca veditabbaṃ. Dhammo yathāvuttā pāḷi assa atthi, dhammena kataṃ vātidhammikaṃ. Tabbiparītaṃadhammikaṃ. Catutthaṃyevāti tesu catūsu kammesu catunnaṃ pūraṇaṃ samaggena dhammikaṃ. Sesakammānaṃ bhāvena bhikkhunā dukkaṭassa bhavanaṃ lakkhīyatītisesakammesūtibhāvalakkhaṇe sattamī.Dukkaṭanti kuppānaṃ adhammakammavaggakammānaṃ katattā dukkaṭaṃ.
199. An unlawful act by a faction, and an unlawful act by the entire Sangha, and a lawful act by a faction, and a lawful act by the entire Sangha, these are the four kinds of acts, is the remainder. There, vaggena adhammakamma means an unlawful act to be done by a faction. This is the method everywhere. Vaggo is called a group, and that, in matters to be done by a group of four or more, is intended here even by one of them, due to the non-presence of those qualified for the act, the non-bringing of the approval of those who should give approval, and the rejection by those who are present. But here, adhammakamma, dhamma means "If, monks, in an act that should have an announcement and a second announcement, he performs the act with one announcement, and does not make the motion heard, that is an unlawful act," etc. (mahāva. 387). Thus, with only one motion, or with two motions, or with only one recital of the act, or with two recitals of the act, and also by way of diminishing or changing what has come, setting aside the motion, and in an act with a motion and fourth announcement, and in the case of the seven acts of censure, banishment, restoration, dependence, and expulsion for one who is not qualified for the act, and by way of doing them despite disqualification, and a passage that has come that is contrary to the pāḷi, and a pāḷi that has come in terms of acts such as ordination, and a pāḷi that has come in terms of doing the seven acts as they are obtained: face-to-face judgment, judgment of mindfulness, judgment of sanity, acknowledgment, majority vote, remembrance of past evil deeds, and covering over with grass. The four kinds of acts to be done by that are called an inquiry, a motion, a motion and second announcement, and a motion and fourth announcement, is dhammakamma, and the opposite of that is adhammakamma. By the opposite of that, a lawful act by the entire Sangha should be understood. Dhamma exists in it, in the form of the pāḷi as stated, or it is done with Dhamma, therefore dhammika. The opposite of that is adhammika. Catutthaṃyevā: among those four acts, the fulfillment of the four is with the entire Sangha and is lawful. In the sense of the existence of the remaining acts, the arising of a dukkaṭa for the monk is observed, therefore sesakammesūti is the seventh case in the sense of condition. Dukkaṭa: because of having done the inferior, unlawful act, factional acts, it is a dukkaṭa.
200.Idāni yadidaṃ samaggena dhammikaṃ nāma, taṃ yehi saṅghehi kātabbaṃ, tesaṃ pabhedaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘catuvaggo’’tiādimāha. Catvādīnaṃ saṅkhyeyavuttittā catunnaṃ vaggotiādinā viggaho.Dasavīsativaggikoti dasannaṃ vīsatiyā ca vaggabhedavasena dasavīsatīnaṃ vaggoti viggaho, ṇiko sakatthe. Vīsatiyā vaggo, atirekena sahito vīsativaggoti viggaho.
200.Now, in order to show the distinction of those groups by which this lawful act by the entire Sangha is to be done, he said "catuvaggo" etc. Since the number four etc. has a defining nature, the explanation is with "catunnaṃ vaggoti" etc. Dasavīsativaggiko: the explanation is "dasannaṃ vīsatiyā ca vaggabhedavasena dasavīsatīnaṃ vaggoti", the suffix -ṇika is in its own sense. A group of twenty, a group with an excess, is the explanation of "vīsativaggo".
201-2.Pañcannaṃ kammānaṃ niyameti‘‘catū’’tiādinā. Abbhānaṃ upasampadaṃ pavāraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā catuvaggo cātiādinā yojetvā sabbakammesu kammappattoti dīpitoti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha tatthaca-saddo catuvaggādayo kammapattikiriyāyaṃ samuccinoti. Idha panasabba-saddo abbhānādīnaṃ kesañci ṭhapitattā padesasabbe gayhati.Kammapattoti kammassa patto yutto anurūpo.Itaroti vīsativaggo atirekavīsativaggo.Sabbakammesūti ettha panasabba-saddo sabbasabbe. Nanu ca vīsativaggassa kammappattabhāvesati atirekavīsativaggassa pagevāti viññāyati. Tathā sati so kasmā vuttoti? Saccaṃ, tathāpi so catuvaggādinā saṅghena kattabbakammaṃ ūnakatarena na vaṭṭati, atirekena pana vaṭṭatīti ñāpanatthaṃ vutto.
201-2.He determines the five acts with "catū" etc. Having set aside the abbhāna, ordination, and pavāraṇa, and having connected it with "catuvaggo cātiādinā", it should be connected with "kammappattoti dīpito" in all acts. There, the word ca connects the fourfold group etc. to the action of being qualified for the act. But here, the word sabba is taken as a partial whole, since some of the abbhāna etc. have been set aside. Kammapatto: one who has attained the act, who is suitable and fitting. Itaro: the group of twenty and the group of more than twenty. But here, in sabbakammesū, the word sabba is a complete whole. But indeed, when it is clear that the group of twenty is qualified for the act, it is even more so for the group of more than twenty. If that is so, why was that said? It is true, nevertheless, it was said to make it known that an act to be done by a group of four etc. is not proper with a deficient group, but is proper with an excessive one.
203.Idāni catuvaggādikena chandāharaṇena pūretabboti dasseti‘‘catū’’tiādinā. Pārājikādibhāvamanāpannattā pakatiyā sabhāveneva ṭhito attā yesaṃ, pakato vā tatoyeva kammesu avigato attā yesaṃ tetipakatattakā,pārājikaukkhittakaladdhinānāsaṃvāsakehi aññe.Pareti ekasīmaṭṭhā tādisāyeva aññe.Sesepīti avasese pañcavaggādikaraṇīyepi.
203.Now, he shows that it should be completed by bringing the approval from the group of four etc., with "catū" etc. Those whose self is naturally established because they have not fallen into the state of pārājika etc., or whose self is not separated from the acts since then, are pakatattakā, other than those who have committed a pārājika, have been expelled, or cause doctrinal non-association. Pare: others of the same kind standing within the same boundary. Sesepī: even in the remaining act to be done by a group of five etc.
204.Idāni vatthuñattianussāvanasīmādivipattito, kammavipattīsu parisato ca paṭikkosato ca kammassa kuppākuppabhāvaṃ tattha ca āpattiādiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘catū’’tiādi māha. Catuvaggādikattabbaṃ asaṃvāsagaṇapūraṃ vā kammārahagaṇapūraṃ vā kammañca garukaṭṭhagaṇapūraṃ vā parivāsādikammañcāti yojanā. Ettha ca kammāraho garukaṭṭhato añño, nikkhittavatto pana garukaṭṭho gaṇapūrako hotiyeva.Katanti catuvaggādinā kataṃ.
204.Now, to show the state of being valid or invalid of the act due to defects in the object, motion, announcement, boundary etc., and from the assembly, and from the rejection, and to show the offense etc. there, he said "catū" etc. The connection is: an act to be done by a group of four etc., or completing the group with those who do not associate, or completing the group with those who are qualified for the act, and an act that is a serious matter, or an act of parivāsa etc. And here, one who is qualified for the act is different from a serious matter, but one who has laid aside the practice is indeed a serious matter and completes the group. Kata: done by a group of four etc.
205.Vāreyyāti antarāye asati antamaso ekopi vāreyyāti attho.Antarāyeti pāpehi kariyamāne jīvitabrahmacariyantarāye sati. Anantarāyikā ce na vārenti, dukkaṭaṃ.Diṭṭhāvinti attano attano diṭṭhiṃ laddhiṃ ‘‘adhammakammaṃ idaṃ, na metaṃ khamatī’’ti aññamaññaṃ āvi kareyyunti seso.Ekodhiṭṭhānanti eko bhikkhu ‘‘na metaṃ khamatī’’ti adhiṭṭhānaṃ kareyyāti seso.Tatodhikāti tīhi adhikā. Te pana saṅghattā pahonti attano kammaṃ nittharituṃ.
205.Vāreyyā: even if there is no obstacle, at least one should prevent it, is the meaning. Antarāye: when there is an obstacle to life or the holy life being done by evil ones. If they do not prevent it when there is no obstacle, there is a dukkaṭa. Diṭṭhāvi: they should declare their own view and belief to one another, saying, "This is an unlawful act; this is not pleasing to me," is the remainder. Ekodhiṭṭhāna: one monk should make a determination, saying, "This is not pleasing to me," is the remainder. Tatodhikā: more than three. But those are able to complete their act due to the Sangha.
206.Khittacittonāma ummattako.Dukhaṭṭitoti vedanaṭṭo.Na rūhatīti gayhattaṃ na rohatīti attho.
206.Khittacitto means one who is insane. Dukhaṭṭito: afflicted with pain. Na rūhatī: the meaning is that what is taken does not grow.
207.Antamaso anantarassāpi ārocentassa pakata…pe… bhikkhunoti sambandho. Ekasīmāyaṃ tiṭṭhatītiekasīmaṭṭho. Samo saṃvāso assātisamasaṃvāso. Ekasīmaṭṭho ca so samasaṃvāso ca, pakatatto ca so ekasīmaṭṭhasamasaṃvāso ca, so cāyaṃ bhikkhu cāti sabbattha kammadhārayo, tassa. Ettha pana avipannasīlopakatattoti adhippeto.Ārocentassāti attano laddhiṃ pakāsentassa.Rūhatīti paṭikkhepo ruhati.
207.The connection is that even if the nearest one declares it, it is a pakata…pe… monk. One who stands within the same boundary is ekasīmaṭṭho. One who has equal association is samasaṃvāso. He is one who stands within the same boundary and has equal association, and he is naturally of that kind and stands within the same boundary and has equal association, and this is that monk, everywhere it is a karmadhāraya, of that one. But here, one whose virtue is not corrupted is intended as pakatatto. Ārocentassā: for one who declares his own belief. Rūhatī: rejection grows.
208.Dhammikaṃ kammanti dhammena kattabbaṃ apalokanādikammaṃ.Paṭikkoseyyāti nivāreyya. Tirokkhā kāyasāmaggiṃ vā chandaṃ vāti vā-saddaṃ netvā attho netabbo.Tirokkhāti parammukhā. So sammukhā-saddo viya nipāto, atha vā akkhā indriyavisayato tiro bahīti atthoti.
208.Dhammikaṃ kamma: a lawful act to be done, an act such as an inquiry. Paṭikkoseyyā: he should prevent it. Having brought in the word vā to "covertly bodily harmony or approval," the meaning should be drawn out. Tirokkhā: behind the back. That is an indeclinable like the word sammukhā, or else, tiro means outside the range of the senses, is the meaning.
Kammaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of acts is finished.
29. Micchājīvavivajjanāniddesavaṇṇanā
29. Description of Avoiding Wrong Livelihood
209.Āgamma jīvanti etenāti ājīvo, ko so? Paccayapariyesanavāyāmo. Micchāya ājīvo, tassa vivajjanāmicchājīvavivajjanā. Sā panāyaṃ atthato ‘‘idha bhikkhu pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṃvuto viharati ācāragocarasampanno’’ti (vibha. 508) evaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasampattiyā paṭipattidassanavasena āgato ācāro ceva yathākkamena pārājikasaṅghādisesathullaccayapācittiyapāṭidesanīyadubbhāsitadukkaṭānaṃ kāraṇabhūtassa ājīvahetupaññattānaṃ abhūtārocanasañcarittaaññāpadesabhūtārocanapaṇītabhojanaviññatti bhikkhunibhojanaviññattisūpodanaviññattisikkhāpadānaṃ vītikkamassa ca kuhanalapananemittikatā nippesikatā lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatāti evamādīnañca pāpadhammānaṃ vasena pavattaṃ micchājīvaviratisaṅkhātaṃ ājīvapārisuddhisīlañca. Tassā pana kassaci idha dassanaṃ yathā dassetumāraddhaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasaṅkhātāya adhisīlasikkhāya, caturārakkhavipassanāvasena āgatānaṃ adhicittaadhipaññāsaṅkhātānaṃ dvinnaṃ sikkhānañca upakārakadhammaparidīpanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, evamīdisaṃ viññeyyaṃ, taṃ dasseti‘‘dāru’’ntiādinā. Tattha‘‘dāru’’ntiādīni ‘‘dade’’ti etassa pattikammaṃ.Cuṇṇaṃsirīsacuṇṇādinahāniyacuṇṇaṃ.Nhānamukhodakanti nhānañca mukhañca, tassa udakanti samāso.Ādi-saddena paṇṇādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Kulasaṅgahāti kulasaṅgahakaraṇena.
209. One lives by relying on this, therefore it is ājīvo. What is that? The effort of seeking requisites. Wrongly ājīvo, the avoidance of that is micchājīvavivajjanā. But that, in terms of meaning, is the conduct that has come in terms of possessing restraint by the pātimokkhasaṃvara, "Here, a monk dwells restrained by the pātimokkhasaṃvara, endowed with conduct and resort," etc. (vibha. 508), and the ājīvapārisuddhisīla known as abstaining from wrong livelihood, which occurs by way of evil qualities such as deceitfulness, talkativeness, hinting, belittling, seeking gain with gain, and so on, and also the transgression of the training rules which are the cause of pārājika, saṅghādisesa, thullaccaya, pācittiya, pāṭidesanīya, dubbhāsita, and dukkaṭa: untrue declaration, conveying messages, hinting, declaration of merits, requesting fine foods, requesting food from nuns, requesting soup and rice. But seeing that for someone here, as it has begun to be shown, it should be regarded as for the purpose of illuminating the qualities that are helpful to the adhicitta and adhipaññā trainings, known as the higher mind and higher wisdom, which have come by way of the four protections of insight, as well as the adhicīlasikkhā known as the pātimokkhasaṃvara. Such a thing should be understood; that is shown with "dāru" etc. There, "dāru" etc. are the objects of the verb "dade." Cuṇṇaṃ: powdered medicine, such as sirīsa powder and hāniya powder. Nhānamukhodaka: bath and face, the water for that is the compound. With the word ādi, he includes leaves etc. Kulasaṅgahā: by doing association with families.
210.Paribhaṭati paresaṃ dārake pariharatīti paribhaṭo, paribhaṭassa kammaṃ pāribhaṭako, sakatthe tameva pāribhaṭakatā. Alaṅkaraṇādinā kuladārakapariharaṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Muggassa sūpo muggasūpo, soyeva muggasuppo. Yathā muggasūpe paccamāne kocideva muggo na paccati, avasesā paccanti, evaṃ yassa puggalassa vacane kiñcideva saccaṃ hoti, sesaṃ alikaṃ, ayaṃ puggalo muggasūpasadisatāya upacārena ‘‘muggasuppo’’ti vuccati, tassa bhāvo muggasuppatā. Saccālikena jīvitakappanassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Gharavatthuādisambandhinī vijjā vatthuvijjā. Pāribhaṭakatā cātiādinā dvando napuṃsakattābhāvepāri…pe… vijjā,tāya. Rasso pana gāthābandhavasena, tathā dīgho. Pahiṇānaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kamme tesaṃ tesaṃ niyuñjanaṃpaheṇaṃ. Ādarena dūtena kāretabbaṃ yaṃ kiñci kammaṃdūtakammaṃ. Pisanaṃ pesanaṃ, jaṅghāya pādena pesanaṃ jaṅghapesanaṃ, tamassa atthītijaṅghapesaniyaṃ. Tesaṃ tesaṃ gihīnaṃ gāmantaradesantarādīsu sāsanapaṭisāsanaharaṇassetamadhivacanaṃ.
210.He tends to and cares for the children of others, therefore he is paribhaṭo, the action of paribhaṭo is pāribhaṭako, the state of being pāribhaṭaka is just that. This is a name for tending to the children of families with adornment etc. Mung bean soup is muggasūpo, that is muggasuppo. Just as when mung bean soup is being cooked, some mung beans do not cook, but the rest do, so too, for a person whose words contain some truth, but the rest is false, this person is called "muggasuppo" by way of convention, due to being similar to mung bean soup, the state of that is muggasuppatā. This is a designation for maintaining life with truth and falsehood. Knowledge related to house sites etc. is vatthuvijjā. In the absence of the neuter gender in the compound "pāribhaṭakatā cātiādinā" pāri…pe… vijjā, by that. The short vowel is due to the meter of the verse, likewise the long vowel. Employing those who are sent in this or that task is paheṇaṃ. Any task to be done by an esteemed messenger is dūtakammaṃ. Sending, dispatching, dispatching on foot with the leg is jaṅghapesanaṃ, one who has that is jaṅghapesaniyaṃ. This is a designation for the carrying of messages to and from various lay people in other villages and countries.
211.Lābhāsāya lañjadānaṃanuppadānaṃ. Sambuddhappaṭikuṭṭhenabuddhagarahitena aṅgavijjānakkhattavijjāsupinavijjābhūtavijjādināaññena vā.
211.Giving bribes in hope of gain is anuppadānaṃ. Sambuddhappaṭikuṭṭhena: condemned by the Fully Enlightened One, by astrology, astronomy, dream interpretation, spirit lore etc. aññena vā: or by something else.
212.Aññātakānaṃ appavāritānaṃ viññāpanaṃviññatti,yācanavasena pavatto kāyavacīpayogo. Buddhappaṭikuṭṭhena micchājīvena paccayapariyesanāanesanā. Abhūtassa attani avijjamānassa uttarimanussadhammassa ullapanaṃ kathanaṃabhūtullapanā. Kuhanādīhīti kuhanālapanādīhi. Tattha lābhasakkārasilokasannissitassa paccayappaṭisevanasāmantajappanairiyāpathasaṇṭhāpanavasena janavimhāpanākuhanā. Vihāraṃ āgate manusse disvā ‘‘kimatthāya bhonto āgatā, kiṃ bhikkhū nimantetu’’nti vā ‘‘mayi rājā pasanno, asuko ca asuko ca rājamahāmatto pasanno’’ti vā ādinā nayena ālapanālapanā. Khādanīyaṃ gahetvā gacchante disvā ‘‘kiṃ khādanīyaṃ labhitthā’’tiādinā nayena nimittakaraṇādinemittakatā. ‘‘Assaddho appasanno’’tiādinā nayena garahaṇāni ca ‘‘etaṃ ettha kathethā’’tiādinā nayena vācāya ukkhipanādi canippesikatā. Appena lābhena bahukaṃ vañcetvā gahetuṃ icchanaṃlābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatā. Kuladūsādīti etthaādi-saddena rūpiyappaṭiggahaṇarūpiyasaṃvohārā saṅgayhantīti.
212.Informing those unknown and uninvited is viññatti, a physical and verbal effort made in the manner of begging. Seeking requisites through wrong livelihood, by means of the Buddha's disapproval, is anesanā. Claiming non-existent superior human qualities in oneself is abhūtullapanā, speaking untruths. Kuhanādīhī means by deceptive talk and so on. Here, kuhanā is astonishing people through pretension in conduct and demeanor relating to gaining benefits, honor, and fame. Lapanā is addressing people who come to the monastery, saying, "Why have you come, sirs? Should I invite the monks?" or "The king is pleased with me, and so-and-so and so-and-so royal ministers are pleased." Nemittakatā is hinting, such as seeing someone going with food and saying, "Did you get some food?" Nippesikatā is disparaging, such as saying, "He is faithless and displeased," and inciting speech, such as saying, "Say this here." Lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatā is desiring to deceive and take much with a little gain. In kuladūsādī, the term ādi includes receiving silver and engaging in silver transactions.
Micchājīvavivajjanāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of Avoiding Wrong Livelihood is Concluded.
30. Vattaniddesavaṇṇanā
30. Explanation of the Directives on Observances
213.Saupāhano…pe… cīvaraṃ sīse karitvā vā āgantuko ārāmaṃ na paviseti sambandho.Sachattoti sīse katachattena sachatto.Oguṇṭhitoti sasīsaṃ pārupito. ‘‘Parikkhittassa vihārassa parikkhepo, aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ upacārasīmāsamīpaṃ patvā upāhanāomuñcanādisabbaṃ katvā ārāmo pavisitabboti ayamettha byatirekaladdho attho.
213.The connection is that a newcomer should not enter the monastery with shoes on…pe…or with a robe on his head. Sachatto means with a parasol held over the head. Oguṇṭhito means completely covered, head and all. It has been said, "For a monastery with boundaries defined, within the boundary; for one without, in a place suitable for defining boundaries," meaning that having reached the vicinity of the boundary of the monastery (upacārasīmā), one should remove one's shoes and do everything else appropriate before entering. This is the meaning implied by exclusion here.
214.Pānīyena pāde na dhoveyyāti sambandho. Paṭikkamanaṃ patvā ekamante pattacīvaraṃ nikkhipitvā patirūpe nisajja pucchitvā pānīyaṃ pātabbaṃ, paribhojanīyena yathāvuttaṃ pādā dhovitabbāti adhippāyo.Vuḍḍhatare āvāsikepi ca abhivādeyyāti iminā vassaṃ pucchitvā navakena āvāsikena abhivādāpetabbanti dīpeti.Puccheyya sayanāsananti ‘‘katamaṃ senāsanaṃ pāpuṇāti, ajjhāvutthaṃ anajjhāvutthaṃ vā’’ti senāsanaṃ puccheyya. Idañca pucchāya lakkhaṇavacanaṃ. Tasmā āvāsikavatte vuttamajjhāvutthādikañca pucchitabbaṃ. Sace ‘‘anajjhāvuttha’’nti vadanti, kavāṭaṃ ākoṭetvā muhuttaṃ āgametvā ghaṭikaṃ ugghāṭetvā kavāṭaṃ paṇāmetvā bahi ṭhitena ulloketvā pavisitvā sabbaṃ senāsanavattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Āgantukavattaṃ.
214.The connection is that one should not wash one's feet with drinking water. Having arrived at the retiring place (paṭikkamanaṃ), one should put down one's bowl and robes to one side, sit in a suitable place, ask, and then drink water; feet should be washed with water for washing, as previously described. The implication of Vuḍḍhatare āvāsikepi ca abhivādeyyā is that the resident monk, after inquiring about seniority (vassa), should be greeted by the new monk. Puccheyya sayanāsananti one should ask about lodging, "Which lodging is available, occupied or unoccupied?" This is a characteristic statement about asking. Therefore, one should also ask about matters such as whether the lodging is occupied, as stated in the Resident's Observances. If they say "unoccupied," one should knock on the door, wait a moment, open the latch, push the door open, look inside from outside, enter, and perform all the lodging observances. This is the Newcomer's Observance.
215-6.Gamiko pakkameyyāti sambandho.‘‘Paṭisāmetvā’’tiādīnimassa pubbakiriyāpadāni.Dārumattikabhaṇḍakanti ettha mañcapīṭhādidārubhaṇḍaṃ rajanabhājanādimattikābhaṇḍaṃ.Paṭisāmetvāti atthi ce anovassake saṇṭhapetvā.Thaketvānāti dvāravātapānehi pidhāya.Sādhukaṃ saṅgopetvānāti catūsu pāsāṇesu mañcaṃ paññapetvā mañce mañcassa, pīṭhe pīṭhassa āropanena senāsanassa uparūpari puñjakaraṇena sādhukaṃ saṅgopanaṃ katvā.Na cāti neva. Gamikavattaṃ.
215-6.The connection is that the departing monk should leave. ‘‘Paṭisāmetvā’’ and so on are the preceding verbs in this context. Dārumattikabhaṇḍakanti here, dārubhaṇḍaṃ refers to wooden items such as beds and chairs, and mattikābhaṇḍaṃ refers to earthenware items such as dye pots. Paṭisāmetvā means if there are any, to store them in a place not exposed to rain. Thaketvānā means closing the doors and windows. Sādhukaṃ saṅgopetvānā means arranging the lodging carefully by placing the bed on four stones, and stacking the beds on top of each other, and the chairs on top of each other, thus carefully concealing the lodging. Na cā means not even. This is the Departing Monk's Observance.
217-8.Āvāsikoti idaṃ ‘‘paññapeyyā’’tiādīnaṃ kattupadaṃ. Navakammakaraṇādibhāranittharaṇatāya āvāso vihāro assa atthītiāvāsiko. Yassa pana kevalaṃ vihāre nivāsanamattaṃ atthi, sonevāsiko. Ubhopi te idha āvāsika-saddena saṅgahitā.Pādodappabhutinti etthapabhuti-saddena pādapīṭhapādakathalikānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Paccuggantvāna pattacīvaraṃ gaṇheyyāti yojanā.Paññape sayanāsananti ‘‘etaṃ tumhākaṃ senāsanaṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti evaṃ sayanāsanaṃ paññapeyya, pakāseyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
217-8.Āvāsiko is the subject of ‘‘paññapeyyā’’ and so on. Āvāsiko means one who has a dwelling (āvāsa), a monastery (vihāra), for the purpose of accomplishing the duties of new construction and so on. But one who merely resides in the monastery is a nevāsiko. Both are included here under the term āvāsika. Pādodappabhutinti here, pabhuti includes footstools and foot supports. The connection is that one should go to meet the newcomer and take his bowl and robes. Paññape sayanāsananti this means he should assign the lodging, saying, "This lodging is available for you."
219.Ajjhāvutthanti pubbe bhikkhūhi nivutthaṃ.Gocarāgocaraṃ vadeti ‘‘bhikkhācāragāmo dūro, āsanno’’ti vā, ‘‘kālasseva piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ, divā vā’’ti evaṃ gocarañca, ‘‘micchādiṭṭhikānaṃ vā gāmo, paricchinnabhikkho vā’’tiādinā agocarañca vadeyyāti attho.Vaccapassāvaṭṭhānānītiādīnipi ‘‘vade’’ti imasseva kammavacanāni.Sekhasammutinti yassa saddhassa kulassa saṅgho sekhasammutiṃ deti, taṃ kulañca.
219.Ajjhāvutthanti means previously occupied by monks. Gocarāgocaraṃ vadeti means one should say whether the alms village is far or near, whether one should go for alms early or at midday; and one should also say about what is not the proper alms range (agocara), such as "It is a village of wrong view holders, or it is a village with limited alms." Vaccapassāvaṭṭhānānīti and so on are also objects of the verb "vade." Sekhasammutinti refers to that faithful family to whom the Sangha gives the Sekha Agreement.
220.Pavesanikkhame kālanti ‘‘kesuci ṭhānesu vāḷamigā vā amanussā vā honti, imaṃ kālaṃ pavisitabbaṃ nikkhamitabbañcā’’ti evaṃ pavesanikkhame ca kālaṃ. Etaṃ pana āsanapaññapanādikaṃ sabbaṃ vattaṃ vuḍḍhatare āgate cīvarakammādiṃ vā nātigilānassa bhesajjaṃ vā ṭhapetvāpi kātabbaṃ. Mahāgilānassa pana bhesajjameva kātabbaṃ. Cetiyaṅgaṇavattaṃ karontenāpi tassa vattaṃ kātuṃ ārabhitabbaṃ. Paṇḍito hi āgantuko ‘‘karohi tāva bhesajjaṃ, cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjāhī’’ti ca vadeyya. Apica bījanena bījitabbo, pādāpissa dhovitabbā, telena makkhitabbā. Piṭṭhi ce āgilāyati, sambādhetabbā. Navakassa pana āgantukassa ‘‘idamāsanaṃ, ettha nisīdā’’tiādinā ācikkhitabbanti dassento‘‘nisinnoyevā’’tiādimāha.Nisinnoyevāti iminā ‘‘ṭhitoyevā’’tiādiṃ upalakkheti.Samuddiseti ādarena vadeyya. Āvāsikavattaṃ.
220.Pavesanikkhame kālanti means the time for entering and leaving, saying, "In some places there are wild animals or non-human beings; one should enter and leave at this time." However, all these observances, such as preparing a seat, should be done even if an elder has arrived, after putting aside work such as robe-making, or medicine for one who is not very ill. But for one who is very ill, only medicine should be prepared. Even when doing the Cetiya Courtyard Observance, one should begin by doing his observance. For a wise newcomer might say, "First prepare the medicine, then sweep the Cetiya courtyard." Moreover, he should be fanned with a fan, his feet should be washed, and they should be anointed with oil. If his back aches, it should be massaged. But for a new newcomer, one should indicate by saying, "This is your seat, sit here," and so on, thus he says ‘‘nisinnoyevā’’tiādi. Nisinnoyevāti indicates "ṭhitoyevā" and so on. Samuddiseti means he should speak with respect. This is the Resident's Observance.
bhattaggavattañca sādhukaṃ ataramānena gāmo pavisitabbo, ‘‘iminā pavisissāmi, iminā nikkhamissāmī’’ti nivesanaṃ pavisantena sallakkhetabbaṃ, nātisahasā pavisitabbaṃ, nātisahasā nikkhamitabbaṃ, nātidūre naccāsanne ṭhātabbaṃ, nāticiraṃ ṭhātabbaṃ, nātilahukaṃ nivattitabbaṃ, dātukāmatākāraṃ ñatvā ṭhātabbaṃ, yo paṭhamaṃ gāmato paṭikkamati, tena āsanapaññapanādi sabbaṃ kātabbaṃ, yo pacchā, tena āsanuddharaṇādi sabbaṃ kātabbanti evamādikañca tadanurūpaṃ sekhiyavattañca sampādetabbanti idaṃpiṇḍacārikavattañca kātabbaṃ.
bhattaggavattañca the alms-gathering observance should be carefully observed by entering the village without haste, noting the location as one enters, thinking, "I will enter by this way, I will exit by this way," not entering too hastily, not exiting too hastily, not standing too far away nor too close, not standing too long, not turning away too quickly, standing knowing the intention to give; whoever returns from the village first should do all the preparations like setting out seats, and whoever returns last should do all the clearing up like removing seats, and so on, and the related Sekhiya observances should be fulfilled. This is the piṇḍacārikavatta.
piṇḍacārikavattaṃkātabbaṃ. Pānīyaparibhojanīyaaggiaraṇisahitakattaradaṇḍā upaṭṭhapetabbā, nakkhattapadāni sakalāni vā ekadesāni vā uggahetabbāni, disākusalena bhavitabbanti idaṃāraññikavattañca uddiṭṭhaṃyeva hotīti avagantabbanti.
piṇḍacārikavattaṃkātabbaṃ. The alms-gathering observance should be observed. Drinking water, water for washing, fire, and a knife with a handle should be provided; the asterism verses should be learned in full or in part, and one should be skilled in directions. This is the āraññikavatta, and this has already been addressed, so it should be understood.
Vattaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Directives on Observances is Concluded.
31. Vikappanāniddesavaṇṇanā
31. Explanation of the Directives on Renunciation
221.Sammukhā parammukhāti sassa mukhaṃ, parassa mukhanti viggaho, sammukhena parammukhenāti attho. Sammukhāvikappanā parammukhāvikappanāti bhedā duve vikappanā vuttāti yojanā.Bhedāti visesato. Atha vā sassa mukhaṃ mukhasambandhivacanaṃ assā vikappanāyāti samāso. Tathā parammukhā. Sammukhā ca parammukhā ca, tassā bhedo, tato.Sammukhāyasammukhavikappanāya.Byattassāti vikappanavidhānaṃ paccuddhāravidhānañca jānantassa.
221.Sammukhā parammukhāti the dissolution is sassa mukhaṃ, parassa mukhaṃ, meaning for one's own face, for another's face; the meaning is sammukhena parammukhena. The connection is that two types of renunciation, sammukhāvikappanā and parammukhāvikappanā, have been described. Bhedāti means distinctly. Alternatively, sassa mukhaṃ mukhasambandhivacanaṃ assā vikappanāya is the compound, meaning the renunciation whose statement is related to one's own face. Similarly, parammukhā. Sammukhā ca parammukhā ca, tassā bhedo, tato. Sammukhāya means for sammukhavikappanā. Byattassāti for one who knows the method of renunciation and the method of revocation.
222.Tenāti yassa santike vikappeti, tena bhikkhunā.Paribhogādikanti paribhogaṃ vissajjanaṃ adhiṭṭhānañca.
222.Tenāti means by that monk to whom it is renounced. Paribhogādikanti means use, relinquishment, and determination.
224-5.Aparāsammukhāvekāti etthavā-saddo pakkhantare, atha vāti attho, api-saddattho vāvā-saddo, so aparā-saddato paraṃ daṭṭhabbo, aparāpi ekā sammukhāvikappanā atthīti attho. Kathanti āha‘‘bhikkhussā’’tiādi. ‘‘Pañcannaṃ sahadhammīna’’nti vuttattā‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno’’tiādīsu tissāya bhikkhuniyā tissāya sikkhamānāya tissāya sāmaṇeriyā tissassa sāmaṇerassātipi viññātabbaṃ.
224-5.Aparā sammukhāvekāti here, the word vā is an alternative, meaning or perhaps; the word vā has the meaning of api, it should be seen after the word aparā, meaning there is another type of sammukhāvikappanā. How? He says ‘‘bhikkhussā’’tiādi. Because it is said "to the five co-religionists," it should also be understood as "to Tissā the nun, to Tissā the female trainee, to Tissā the female novice, to Tissa the novice monk" in ‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno’’tiādi.
226.Parammukhāvikappanāti parammukhena vikappanena, parammukhāvikappanāti vā gahetabbaṃ, parammukhāvikappanā kathanti attho.
226.Parammukhāvikappanāti should be taken as parammukhena vikappanena, parammukhāvikappanā, meaning what is parammukhāvikappanā?
227.Mittoti daḷhamitto.Sandiṭṭhoti diṭṭhamattamitto. Ettha pana dvinnaṃ vikappanānaṃ kiṃ nānākaraṇanti? Sammukhāvikappanāya tāva sayaṃ vikappetvā parena paccuddharāpeti, teneva sāsammukhāvikappanānāma jātā. Parammukhāvikappanāya pareneva vikappāpetvā pareneva paccuddharāpeti, teneva sāparammukhāvikappanānāma jātāti idamettha nānākaraṇanti.
227.Mittoti means a firm friend. Sandiṭṭhoti means a friend who has merely been seen. Now, what is the distinction between these two renunciations? In sammukhāvikappanā, one renounces oneself and has it revoked by another; therefore, it is called sammukhāvikappanā. In parammukhāvikappanā, one has it renounced and revoked by another; therefore, it is called parammukhāvikappanā. This is the distinction here.
228.Dūrasantikattekattanti ettha āsannadūrabhāvo adhiṭṭhāne vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
228.Dūrasantikattekattanti here, the state of being near or far should be understood in the same way as described for determination.
229.Dasāhaṃ…pe… paccāsāya sati māsakaṃ nādhiṭṭhitavikappitaṃ nissaggiṃ nuppādayatīti sambandho. Dasa ahāni samāhaṭānidasāhaṃ. Sabbattha accantasaṃyoge dutiyā. Tattha yaṃ divasaṃ cīvaraṃ uppannaṃ, tassa yo aruṇo, so uppannadivasanissito, tasmā cīvaruppādadivasena saddhiṃ ekādase aruṇuggamane nissaggiyaṃ hotīti āha‘‘dasāha’’nti.Māsamekaṃ vāti ‘‘anatthate kathine ekaṃ pacchimakattikamāsa’’nti (pārā. 649 atthato samānaṃ) vuttattā kathinatthate pañca māseti labbhati. Kathinaṃ atthataṃ yasmiṃ vihāreti samāso.Pāripūratthanti pāripūri attho yassāti viggaho. Kiriyāvisesanaṃ, pāripūrippayojanaṃ katvāti attho.Ūnassāti yattakena kayiramānaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ cīvaraṃ pahoti, tattakatābhāvato ūnassa ekādasamāsasattamāsasaṅkhāte piṭṭhisamaye uppannassa mūlacīvarassa.Paccāsā satīti ‘‘saṅghādito yato kutoci lacchāmī’’ti evaṃ satiyā paccāsāyāti attho. Ubhayampi ya-kāralopena niddiṭṭhaṃ.Satīti vā nipāto, liṅgavipallāsena vāha. Ettha pana byatirekavasena dasāhātikkamanādīsu nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ veditabbanti.
229.The connection is that if there is expectation, one does not produce something that causes forfeiture by determining and renouncing it for a month after ten days…pe… dasāhaṃ means ten days collected together. In all cases, the accusative is used for continuous connection. There, the dawn of the day on which the robe arose is dependent on the day it arose; therefore, it becomes forfeitable at the eleventh sunrise from the day of the robe's arising, thus he says ‘‘dasāha’’nti. Māsamekaṃ vāti because it is said, "In the absence of the Kathina, one month, the final Kattika month" (similar in meaning to pārā. 649), it is understood that in the presence of the Kathina, it is five months. Kathinaṃ atthataṃ yasmiṃ vihāreti is the compound, meaning the monastery in which the Kathina has been withdrawn. Pāripūratthanti the dissolution is pāripūri attho yassa, meaning whose purpose is fulfillment. It is an adverb of manner, meaning having made the purpose fulfillment. Ūnassāti means of the original robe that arose at the time of the rear period, numbered as eleven months or seven months, of one that is deficient because it lacks the amount needed to make a robe that is being made with determination. Paccāsā satīti means with expectation, thinking, "I will get it from the Sangha or from somewhere." Both are indicated by elision of the ya-sound. Satīti is also a particle, or it is due to gender inversion. Here, it should be understood that by way of exclusion, there is forfeiture and expiation for exceeding ten days and so on.
Vikappanāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Directives on Renunciation is Concluded.
32. Nissayaniddesavaṇṇanā
32. Explanation of the Directives on Dependence
230.Byattassāti ‘‘kāriya’’nti kitakayoge kattari chaṭṭhī.Byattoca nāma ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā anissitena vatthabbaṃ, āpattiṃ jānāti, anāpattiṃ jānāti, lahukaṃ āpattiṃ jānāti, garukaṃ āpattiṃ jānāti, ubhayāni kho panassa pātimokkhāni vitthārena svāgatāni honti suvibhattāni suppavattīni suvinicchitāni suttaso anubyañjanaso. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahi aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā anissitena vatthabba’’nti (mahāva. 103) evaṃ vuttabyatto ca bahussutabyatto ca veditabbo.
230.Byattassāti means in the yoga of the gerund "kāriya," the sixth case is in the agent. Byatto should be understood as the one who is described as "A monk endowed with five qualities, monks, should live without dependence. He knows what is an offense, he knows what is not an offense, he knows a light offense, he knows a heavy offense, and both of his Pātimokkhas are well-learned, well-divided, well-recited, and well-decided, both by the letter and in detail. A monk endowed with these five qualities, monks, should live without dependence" (mahāva. 103), and as the one who is learned in the scriptures (bahussuta).
suvibhattānīti suṭṭhu vibhattāni padapaccābhaṭṭhasaṅkaradosavirahitāni.Suppavattīnīti paguṇāni vācuggatāni.Suvinicchitānisuttasoti khandhakaparivārato āharitabbasuttavasena suṭṭhu vinicchitāni.Anubyañjanasoti akkharapadapāripūriyā suvinicchitāni akkhaṇḍāni aviparītakkharāni. Etena aṭṭhakathā dīpitā. Aṭṭhakathāto hi esa vinicchayo hotīti. Bahussutabyatto pana yena sabbantimena paricchedena dve mātikā paguṇā vācuggatā, pakkhadivasesu dhammasavanatthāya suttantato cattāro bhāṇavārā, sampattānaṃ parisānaṃ parikathanatthāya andhakavindamahārāhulovādaambaṭṭhasadiso eko kathāmaggo, saṅghabhattamaṅgalāmaṅgalesu anumodanatthāya tisso anumodanā, uposathappavāraṇādijānanatthaṃ kammākammavinicchayo, samaṇadhammakaraṇatthaṃ samādhivasena vipassanāvasena vā arahattamaggapariyosānamekaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ ettakaṃ uggahitaṃ, svāyaṃ vuccati.Natthi nissāya kāriyanti ācariyādiṃ nissāya vāsena kattabbaṃ natthi.‘‘Nissayakāriya’’nti vā pāṭho, nissayena kāriyanti samāso. Jīvassa yattako paricchedoyāvajīvaṃ.
suvibhattānīti means well-divided, free from the faults of mixing up words and syllables. Suppavattīnīti means fluent, committed to memory. Suvinicchitāni suttasoti means well-decided according to the suttas to be brought from the Khandhaka and Parivāra. Anubyañjanasoti means well-decided in detail, with complete words and syllables, uncorrupted, with correct syllables. This indicates the Commentary (Aṭṭhakathā), for this decision comes from the Commentary. But the one who is learned in the scriptures (bahussuta) is defined as one who has memorized two mātikā (lists of terms) with the final limit, four recitations (bhāṇavāra) from the Suttanta for the purpose of hearing the Dhamma on fortnight days, one kathāmagga (way of speaking) like the Andhakavinda Mahārāhulovāda Ambaṭṭha for the purpose of speaking to assembled gatherings, three anumodanā (words of appreciation) for the purpose of appreciation at Sangha meals and auspicious occasions, a decision on what is allowable and unallowable actions for knowing the Uposatha and Pavāraṇā, and one meditation subject (kammaṭṭhāna) ending in the path of Arahatship, either in terms of concentration or in terms of insight, for the purpose of practicing the ascetic life. This is what is called bahussuta. Natthi nissāya kāriyanti means there is nothing to be done by living in dependence on a teacher and so on. Or the reading is ‘‘Nissayakāriya’’, a compound meaning doing through dependence. Yāvajīvaṃ means as much as the limit of life.
231.Tena nissāya vasantena evaṃ nissayo gahetabboti dassetuṃ‘‘ekaṃsa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.Ekaṃsanti eko aṃso assa cīvarassāti viggaho. Kiriyāvisesanaṃ vā bhummatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ, ekasmiṃ aṃseti attho.Añjalikarapuṭo.Yāvatatiyakaṃ vadeti upasampadāya saṭṭhivassena sattativassena vāpi byattassa navakassa santike yāvatatiyakaṃ vacanaṃ kareyya. Yāvatatiyo vāro assāti kiriyāvisesanasamāso.Āyasmatoti āyasmantaṃ.Vacchāmīti vasāmi. Upajjhaṃ gaṇhantenāpi ‘‘upajjhāyo me, bhante, hohī’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Taṃ pana ‘‘ācariyo’’ti ettha ‘‘upajjhāyo’’ti vacanaṃ visesoti ettha vācābhedato na visuṃ vuttaṃ. Na kevalamettha nissayupajjhāyagahaṇe, gāmappavesanādīsupi evameva katvā ‘‘ahaṃ āvuso’’ti vā ‘‘bhante’’ti vā vatvā ‘‘gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmī’’tiādinā vattabbaṃ.
231. To show that one living in dependence should take dependence in this way, the passage beginning with "ekaṃsa" etc., was stated. Ekaṃsa means one portion (aṃso) of his robe; this is the derivation. Or it is an adverb, or a locative of use in the sense of abundance, meaning in one portion. Añjali means with cupped hands. Yāvatatiyakaṃ vade means that even for an ordination candidate who is wise and new, even at sixty or seventy years old, one should make a statement up to the third time in the presence of a knowledgeable person. Or, it is an adverbial compound, meaning up to the third time. Āyasmato means to the venerable one. Vacchāmī means I will live. One taking a preceptor should also take him saying, "Bhante, be my preceptor." But that, since the word "upajjhāyo" is a distinction from the word "ācariyo" here, was not stated separately due to the difference in wording. Not only in taking dependence and a preceptor here, but also in entering the village and so on, having done so in this way, one should say, "Ahaṃ āvuso" or "Bhante," and then speak, beginning with "gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmī" etc.
232.Nissayapaṭippassaddhiṃ dasseti‘‘pakkante’’tiādinā.Pakkanteti upajjhāye ācariye saddhivihārike antevāsike ca gāmādīsu yattha katthaci āpucchitvā vā anāpucchitvā vā gate. Tesu yena kenaci ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ gacchāmī’’ti vutte tesuyeva yena kenaci ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitepi taṃ taṃ niyamaṃ atikkamitvā pakkantepi anāpucchā pana upacārasīmātikkamena pakkantepi nissayosammatipaṭippassambhati.Pakkhasaṅkanteti titthiyapakkhasaṅkante cāpi vibbhante cāpi maraṇena ca taṅkhaṇaññeva paṭippassambhati.Āṇattināma ‘‘paṇāmemi ta’’nti vā ‘‘mā idha pavisā’’tiādikā nissayappaṇāmanā. Tāya paṇāmitena ācariyupajjhāyā khamāpetabbā. Akhamantesu daṇḍakammaṃ katvā tasmiṃ vihāre mahāthere gahetvāpi sāmantavihāre bhikkhū gahetvāpi khamāpetabbā. Na khamanti ce, ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ sabhāgānaṃ santike vasitabbaṃ. Yena kenaci kāraṇena na sakkā hoti tatra ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ sabhāgānaṃ santike vasituṃ, taṃyeva vihāraṃ āgantvā aññassa santike nissayaṃ gahetvā vasitabbaṃ. Tattha ‘‘pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgataṃ saddhivihārikaṃ appaṇāmento upajjhāyo sātisāro hoti, paṇāmento anatisāro hoti. Upajjhāyamhi nādhimattaṃ pemaṃ hoti, nādhimatto pasādo hoti, nādhimattā hirī hoti, nādhimatto gāravo hoti, nādhimattā bhāvanā hoti. Imehi kho, bhikkhave, pañcahaṅgehi…pe… hoti (mahāva. 68). Pañcahi, bhikkhave, aṅgehi samannāgataṃ antevāsikaṃ appaṇāmento ācariyo…pe… hotī’’ti (mahāva. 81) vuttattā pana asammāvattante antevāsikasaddhivihārike appaṇāmentā ācariyupajjhāyā dukkaṭaṃ āpajjantīti veditabbaṃ.Bhāvanāti mettābhāvanā. Upajjhāyasamodhānaṃ pana tassa dassanasavanavasena veditabbaṃ.
232. He shows the cessation of dependence with the passage beginning "pakkante". Pakkante means when the preceptor or teacher, or a co-resident or pupil, has departed to any village etc., whether having asked permission or without asking. Even if one of them says, "I am going to such and such a village," and one of them agrees with "sādhu," dependence is understood to cease upon departing beyond that particular rule. Pakkhasaṅkante means that dependence ceases immediately upon conversion to the side of the sectarians, or upon becoming disturbed, or by death. Āṇatti means the formal renunciation of dependence, such as "I renounce you," or "Do not enter here," etc. Having been renounced by that, the teacher and preceptor should be asked for forgiveness. If they do not forgive, having performed a punitive action, even having taken senior monks in that monastery, even having taken monks in a neighboring monastery, they should be asked for forgiveness. If they do not forgive, one should live in the presence of those of the same rank as the teacher and preceptor. If it is not possible for any reason to live there in the presence of those of the same rank as the teacher and preceptor, one should come to that very monastery and live taking dependence with another. Here, it should be understood that teachers and preceptors incur a duukkaṭa offense by not dismissing a pupil or co-resident who does not behave properly, because it was said, "Monks, a preceptor who does not dismiss a co-resident endowed with five qualities is blameworthy, but is blameless when dismissing him: there is not excessive affection, not excessive faith, not excessive shame, not excessive respect, not excessive cultivation of the preceptor. Monks, endowed with these five qualities…pe… (mahāva. 68). Monks, a teacher who does not dismiss a pupil endowed with five qualities…pe…is blameworthy" (mahāva. 81). Bhāvanā means mettābhāvanā. The reconciliation with the preceptor, however, should be understood in terms of seeing and hearing him.
233.Alajjinti –
233. Alajji means –
‘‘Sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati;
"He intentionally commits an offense;
He conceals an offense;
And he goes to wrong destinations;
Such a person is called shameless." (pari. 359) –
Apubbanti ettha sambandhisaddattā pubba-saddena pubbavāso gahito, natthi pubbo assāti apubbaṃ, navanti vuttaṃ hoti. Cattāri pañca vā parimāṇametesanti viggaho. Ettha pana parimāṇa-saddasannidhānena saṅkhyeyyavācinopite saṅkhyāmattavācino hontīti catupañcasaṅkhyāparimāṇameva saṅkhyeyyamāha, tasmā viggahapadatthehi bhinno aññapadattho sambhavatīti samāso. Vā-saddassa yo vikappattho, tattha cāyaṃ samāso, cattāri vā pañca vā, catupañca ahāni, tesaṃ ahānaṃ samāhārocatupañcāhaṃ. Bhikkhusabhāgatanti samāno bhāgo lajjitāsaṅkhāto koṭṭhāso yesaṃ, bhikkhūhi sabhāgā, tesaṃ bhāvobhikkhusabhāgatā,taṃ, pesalabhāvanti attho. ‘‘Thero lajjī’’ti jānantena pana pakatiyā nissayadānaṭṭhānaṃ gatena ca tadaheva gahetabbo, ekadivasampi parihāro natthi. Sace ‘‘okāse alabhante paccūsasamaye gahessāmī’’ti sayati, aruṇaṃ uggatampi na jānāti, anāpatti. Laddhaparihārenāpi vasituṃ vaṭṭatīti.
Apubba here, since it is a relational word, the previous dwelling is taken with the word pubba; apubbaṃ means there is no previous one, it is said to be new. Cattāri pañca vā parimāṇametesanti is the derivation. Here, however, due to the proximity of the word parimāṇa (measure), even though they are words denoting numerable things, they become words denoting merely number, therefore the numerical measure of four or five only states the numerable thing, therefore, since a meaning of another word different from the meanings of the derivative terms is possible, it is a compound. Where the word vā has the sense of option, this compound is there: cattāri vā pañca vā, catupañca ahāni, the aggregate of those days is catupañcāhaṃ. Bhikkhusabhāgata means the state of those who have an equal share, counted as shamefulness, a portion, shared by the monks, bhikkhusabhāgatā, that, means pesalabhāva (amiability). However, one knowing "the elder is shameful" and having gone to the place of giving dependence by nature, should take it on that very day; there is no dispensation for even one day. If he thinks, "Not obtaining an opportunity, I will take it at dawn," he does not even realize that the dawn has broken, there is no offense. Even having obtained a dispensation, it is allowable to live.
234.‘‘Labbhatī’’ti kammani nipphannattā avuttakattāti‘‘addhikassā’’tiādīsu kattari sāmivacanaṃ, ‘‘addhikenā’’ tiādi vuttaṃ hoti.‘‘Sallakkhentenā’’ti pana sarūpeneva niddiṭṭhaṃ.Vasitunti vuttakammaṃ. Bhāve hi tuṃ-paccayo, vāsoti attho.Yācitassāti ‘‘gilānupaṭṭhākassa cā’’ti ettha visesanaṃ. Sace pana ‘‘yācāhi ma’’nti vuccamānopi gilāno mānena na yācati, gantabbaṃ.Araññe vā sallakkhentena phāsukanti yattha vasantassa paṭiladdhataruṇasamathavipassanāvisesabhāgitāvasena phāsu hoti, tasmiṃ araññe tādisaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ sallakkhentena āraññakena. Dāyake asanteti padacchedo.Tāvāti avadhimhi, addhikādīhi yāva nissayadāyako labbhati, tāva, āraññakena pana ‘‘paṭirūpe nissayadāyake sati nissāya vasissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā yāva āsāḷhipuṇṇamā, tāvāti attho. ‘‘Sace pana āsāḷhimāse ācariyo nāgacchati, yattha nissayo labbhati, tattha gantabbaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 121). Antovasse pana nibaddhavāsaṃ vasitabbaṃ, nissayo ca gahetabbo’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 121) hiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ.
234. Because it is derived in the passive voice, the agent is unexpressed, therefore in "addhikassā" etc., the possessive case is in the agent, it is said as "addhikenā" etc. "Sallakkhentena" however, is indicated by its own form. Vasituṃ is the object to be stated. For, the suffix -tuṃ is in the sense of state, meaning vāsa (dwelling). Yācitassā is a specification in "gilānupaṭṭhākassa ca." If, however, even when being told "ask me," the sick person does not ask due to pride, one should go. Araññe vā sallakkhentena phāsukaṃ means an ascetic, considering a comfortable dwelling in that forest where comfort is obtained in terms of sharing in the attainment of renewed samatha and vipassanā. Padacchedo: dāyake asante ti. Tāva means within a limit: until a giver of dependence is obtained by the traveler etc., that long; but for an ascetic, having made an intention, "when a suitable giver of dependence is available, I will live in dependence," until the full moon of Āsāḷhi, that long is the meaning. For it is said in the commentary, "If in the month of Āsāḷhi the teacher does not come, one should go where dependence is available (mahāva. aṭṭha. 121). One should live the established dwelling during the rains, and dependence should be taken" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 121).
Amhākaṃ pana keci antevāsikattherā ‘‘na bhikkhave vassaṃ na upagantabbaṃ. Yo na upagaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’ti (mahāva. 186) ca ‘na bhikkhave tadahu vassūpanāyikāya vassaṃ anupagantukāmena sañcicca āvāso atikkamitabbo. Yo atikkameyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’ti (mahāva. 186) pāḷivacanato kenaci kāraṇena nissayaṃ alabhamānenapi na sakkā antovasse vassaṃ anupagantuṃ. ‘Antovasse panā’tiādīsu pana ca-saddo anvācayattho, tasmā tenāpi vassaṃ upagantabbamevā’’ti vadiṃsu.
But some of our co-resident elders said, "Monks, the rains should not be entered without dependence. Whoever does not enter, there is an offense of duukkaṭa (mahāva. 186), and ‘Monks, on the day for entering the rains, the dwelling should not be intentionally transgressed by one not intending to enter the rains. Whoever transgresses, there is an offense of duukkaṭa’ (mahāva. 186). Therefore, even if one does not obtain dependence for some reason, it is not possible to not enter the rains during the rainy season. But in ‘Antovasse panā’tiādi (But during the rains) etc., the word ca has the meaning of addition, therefore even by that, the rains should be entered."
aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(mahāva. aṭṭha. 185) vuttaṃ. Antarāyo ca nāma antarā vemajjhe etīti antarāyo, yo koci bādhakappaccayatāya adhippeto vuccati ‘na labhanti patirūpaṃ upaṭṭhākaṃ, eseva antarāyoti pakkamitabba’ntiādīsu (mahāva. 201) viya, tasmā bādhakappaccayatā adhippetā. Nissayālābhopi antarāyotveva viññāyati. Sakkā hi vattuṃ ‘antarāyo vassūpagamo sannissayattā taruṇasamathavipassanālābhīnaṃ katokāso viyā’ti. Taruṇasamathavipassanālābhīnampi hi katokāsepi ‘sace pana āsāḷhimāse ācariyo nāgacchati, yattha nissayo labbhati, tattha gantabba’nti daḷhaṃ katvāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(mahāva. aṭṭha. 121) vuttaṃ. Amhākaṃ garūhi casāratthadīpaniyaṃ(sārattha. ṭī. mahāvagga 3.121) ‘ācariyaṃ āgamentasseva ce vassūpanāyikadivaso hoti, hotu, gantabbaṃ tattha, yattha nissayadāyakaṃ labhatī’ti vassūpanāyikadivasepi nissayatthāya gamanameva vuttaṃ. Atha ca pana mahākāruṇikopi bhagavā ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, gilānupaṭṭhākena bhikkhunā nissayaṃ alabhamānena yāciyamānena anissitakena vatthu’nti (mahāva. 121) gilānavisayepi nissayaṃ garukaṃ katvā paṭṭhapesi. Yaṃ pana anissayaṃ, taṃ anantarāyaṃ nissayamuttakassa vassūpagamanaṃ viya. Apica nāvāya gacchantassa pana vassāne āgatepi nissayaṃ alabhantassa anāpattīti nāvāya gacchatoyeva āveṇikā anāpattikatā vuttā. Tasmā nissayālābho bādhakappaccayo vassūpagamanassa, na vassūpagamanaṃ nissayassāti antarāyoyeva nissayālābho. Tatoyevaṭīkāyaṃ‘antovasse pana anissitena vatthuṃ na vaṭṭatī’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmāyeva ca ‘antovasse panā’tiādīsu nissayadāyake sati nibaddhavāsaṃ vasitabbañca nissayo gahetabbo ca hotīti gamanakiriyāya khīyamānatāvasena ca-saddo samuccayo gahetabbo’’ti.
It is stated in the commentary (mahāva. aṭṭha. 185). And antarāyo means antarā vemajjhe etīti antarāyo, whatever is intended as a hindering condition is called "antarāyo," as in "if they do not obtain a suitable attendant, this itself is an obstacle, so they should depart" (mahāva. 201), therefore hindering condition is intended. Non-obtainment of dependence is also understood as an obstacle. For it is possible to say, "entering the rains without dependence is an obstacle, like having an opportunity for those who have attained new samatha and vipassanā due to being without dependence." For even when those who have attained new samatha and vipassanā have an opportunity, it is firmly stated in the commentary, "If in the month of Āsāḷhi the teacher does not come, one should go where dependence is available" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 121). And it is said in the Sāratthadīpanī by our teachers, "If the day for entering the rains comes while waiting for the teacher, let it be, one should go there where one obtains a giver of dependence," even on the day for entering the rains, going for the sake of dependence is stated. Moreover, even the compassionate Blessed One established dependence as important, "Monks, I allow a sick monk, not obtaining dependence, being asked, to dwell without dependence" (mahāva. 121) even in the case of the sick. That which is without dependence is without obstacle, like entering the rains without dependence. Moreover, even if one is going by boat and the rainy season comes, there is no offense for one not obtaining dependence, therefore unique non-offenses are stated only for one going by boat. Therefore, non-obtainment of dependence is a hindering condition for entering the rains, not entering the rains for dependence, thus the non-obtainment of dependence is itself an obstacle. Therefore in the sub-commentary it is said, "but during the rains it is not proper to dwell without dependence." Therefore, "antovasse panā" etc., when there is a giver of dependence, one should live the established dwelling and dependence should be taken, and the word ca should be understood as an accumulation due to the exhaustion of the action of going.
Nissayaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Dependence is Finished.
33. Kāyabandhananiddesavaṇṇanā
33. The Explanation of the Section on the Body-Band
235.Bandhīyati anenāti bandhanaṃ, kāyassa bandhanaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ, natthi kāyabandhanametassātiakāyabandhano. Dukkaṭanti sañcicca vā asañcicca vā paviseyya ce, dukkaṭaṃ. Asatiyā gato yattha sarati, tattheva bandheyyāti sambandho.Gatoti antogāmaṃ gato. Saritvā yāva na bandhati, na tāva piṇḍāya caritabbaṃ.
235. Bandhīyati anenāti bandhanaṃ, kāyassa bandhanaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ, natthi kāyabandhanametassāti akāyabandhano. Dukkaṭa means if he enters intentionally or unintentionally, there is a duukkaṭa offense. Asatiyā gato, the connection is that he should bind it where he remembers having gone without mindfulness. Gato means having gone into the village. Having remembered, one should not go for alms until one binds it.
236.‘‘Paṭṭikā’’tiādinā sabbasaṅgāhakaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ niddisati.Paṭṭikāti pakativītā vā macchakaṇṭakakhajjūripattavāyimā vā. Sūkarānaṃ antaṃsūkarantaṃ. Idha pana taṃsadisaṃ vuccati. Caturassaṃ akatvā sajjitaṃ muddikakāyabandhanampi saṅgahetvā‘‘ekā rajjū’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana rajjukaṃ bandhantena ekaguṇameva katvā bandhituṃ vaṭṭati, majjhe bhinditvā diguṇaṃ katvā bandhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Diguṇaṃ pana akatvā satavārampi punappunaṃ āvijjhitvā bandhituṃ vaṭṭati, pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ pana ekampi na vaṭṭati. Bahurajjuke ekato katvā ekena nirantaraṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ ‘‘bahurajjuka’’nti na vattabbaṃ, taṃ vaṭṭati.Tadanulomikāti tesaṃ paṭṭikāsūkarantānaṃ dvinnaṃ dve ime yathākkamamanulomikā.
236. With "Paṭṭikā" etc., he indicates the body-band that includes everything. Paṭṭikā means either a natural one or one woven in a fish-bone, date-palm leaf pattern. The intestine of pigs is sūkarantaṃ. Here, however, that which is similar to it is called that. Having included even a sewn body-band decorated without making it square, it is said "ekā rajjū." However, when binding that rope, it is allowable to bind it having made it only single-stranded; it is not allowable to bind it having split it in the middle and made it double-stranded. However, without making it double-stranded, it is allowable to wind it again and again even a hundred times, but even one in the shape of coarse cloth is not allowable. One made by continuously wrapping many ropes put together with one is not to be called "bahurajjuka," that is allowable. Tadanulomikā means these two, according to their order, are suitable for those two, paṭṭikā and sūkarantānaṃ.
237-8.Paṭṭikā kīdisī vaṭṭatīti āha‘‘macchā’’tiādi. Paṭṭikā macchakaṇṭakakhajjūripattā vā maṭṭhā vā labbhāti sambandho.Kaṇṭaka-saddenapatta-saddena ca tadākāro vuccati, upacārato hi macchānaṃ kaṇṭakākāro ca khajjūrīnaṃ pattākāro ca etissāti samāso.Maṭṭhāti pakativītā.Ṭīkāyaṃpana ‘‘ete macchakaṇṭakādayo maṭṭhā vikārarahitā paṭṭikā ca tadantogadhāti adhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ tesamantogadhatā? Yato tāniyeva paṭṭikā nāmāti. Tathā ca vuttaṃaṭṭhakathāyaṃ‘‘pakativītā vā macchakaṇṭakavāyimā vā paṭṭikā vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278). Ettha pana macchakaṇṭakeyeva khajjūripattaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ. Catassopi dasā labbhāti sambandho.Catassoti ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena vuttaṃ, tasmā tato ūnāpi vaṭṭanti.Anteti kāyabandhanassa ubhayante diguṇasuttakaṃ labbhanti sambandho. Guṇo bandhanabhūtaṃ suttakaṃ guṇasuttakaṃ. ‘‘Guṇo paṭalarāsīsu, ānisaṃse ca bandhane’’ti hi abhidhānappadīpikā. Dvinnaṃ guṇasuttakānaṃ samāhārodiguṇasuttakaṃ. Taṃ dasāmukhassa thirabhāvāya koṭṭetuṃ vaṭṭati, na sobhanatthaṃ. Tenāha‘‘mālādi’’ntiādi.
237-8. He says what kind of paṭṭikā is allowable with "macchā" etc. The connection is that a paṭṭikā woven in a fish-bone, date-palm leaf pattern or a smooth one is obtainable. By the words "Kaṇṭaka-" and "patta-", the shape of that is called, for the compound is that the shape of the thorns of fish and the shape of the leaves of dates belong to it by convention. Maṭṭhā means natural. However, in the sub-commentary it is said, "These fish-bone etc., are smooth, without modification, and the intention is that the paṭṭikā is included in that." How is it included in that? Because those themselves are called paṭṭikā. And so it is said in the commentary, "A paṭṭikā either natural or woven in a fish-bone pattern is allowable" (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 278). Here, however, the fish-bone itself has entered the date-palm leaf. The connection is that even four or ten corners are obtainable. Catasso is said with the highest limit, therefore even less than that is allowable. Ante means a double-stranded thread is obtainable at both ends of the body-band, is the connection. Guṇo means the thread that is the binding, guṇasuttakaṃ. For, the Abhidhānappadīpikā says, "Guṇo means a collection of creepers, benefits, and a binding." The aggregate of two guṇasuttakānaṃ is diguṇasuttakaṃ. It is allowable to fasten that to strengthen the opening, not for the sake of beauty. Therefore he says "mālādi" etc.
‘‘Mālādi’’ntiādīsuādi-saddena tādisaṃ yaṃ kiñci vikārarūpaṃ gayhati. Kakkaṭānaṃ viya acchīni, tāni ādīni yassāti samāso. Tathākuñjaracchādinti.
In "mālādi" etc., by the word ādi, whatever kind of modification is included. The eyes are like those of crabs, that is the compound for yassāti tāni ādīni. Likewise kuñjaracchādi etc.
239.Ghaṭakanti ghaṭakākāravaṭṭalekhārūpaṃ.Makaramukhādinti etthamakaramukhaṃnāma makaramukhasaṇṭhānaṃ. Bindu pana āgamavasena vutto.Ādi-saddena deḍḍubhasīsādivikārarūpaṃ yaṃ kiñci saṅgayhati.Dasāmukheti dasānaṃ mukhabhūte ante etāni na kappantīti sambandho. Vidhe ubhante ghaṭakā lekhā aññaṃ cittakañca na kappantīti sambandho.Ghaṭakāti ghaṭakato.Lekhāti lekhāya. Pañcamiyā lopo.Vidheti kāyabandhanassa pāsante dasāmūle tassa thirabhāvatthaṃ kattabbe dantavisāṇādimaye vidhe.
239. Ghaṭaka means having the shape of a pot, the round line shape. In Makaramukhādi, makaramukhaṃ means having the shape of a makara's mouth. Bindu is said according to the Agama. By the word ādi, whatever kind of modification, such as a deḍḍubha's head etc., is included. Dasāmukhe means these are not suitable at the ends that are like openings of ten, is the connection. The connection is that lines resembling pots and other paintings are not suitable on both sides of the hem. Ghaṭakā means from ghaṭakato. Lekhā means by a line. Loss of the fifth case ending. Vidhe means a fastening made of ivory etc., should be made on the side of the body-band at the opening for the sake of its firmness.
240.Deḍḍubhakanti udakasappasīsasadisaṃ.Murajanti nānāvaṇṇehi suttehi murajavaṭṭisaṇṭhānaṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ.Ṭīkāyaṃpana‘‘murajanti bahurajjuke ekato saṅkaḍḍhitvā ekāya rajjuyā paliveṭhetvā katarajjū’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘bahurajjuke ekato katvā’’tiādinā heṭṭhā vuttaaṭṭhakathāvacanena virujjhati.Maddavīṇanti pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ.Kalābukanti bahurajjukaṃ. Tesaṃ ‘‘na kappatī’’ti iminā sambandho.Dve majjhimāti majjhe bhavā murajamaddavīṇasaṅkhātā dve.
240. Deḍḍubhaka means similar to the head of a water-snake. Muraja means made by wrapping with threads of various colors in the shape of a muraja drum. However, in the sub-commentary it is said, "Muraja means ropes made by gathering many ropes together and wrapping them with one rope," that contradicts the commentary statement said below with "bahurajjuke ekato katvā." Maddavīṇa means in the shape of coarse cloth. Kalābuka means many ropes. The connection of those with this is "na kappatī." Dve majjhimā means the two that are in the middle, counted as muraja and maddavīṇa.
241.Gaṇṭhiyo cāpīti cīvarassa gaṇṭhiyo cāpi.Tammayāti tehi veḷuādīhi nibbattā. Pasaṅgena panetaṃ vuttanti.
241. Gaṇṭhiyo cāpī: Gaṇṭhiyo cāpi means also knots on the robe. Tammayā: Tammayā means made from bamboo, etc. But this is said incidentally.
Kāyabandhananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Description of the Waistband is Finished.
Sumaṅgalappasādaniyā nāma ṭīkāya
The First Recitation Section is Finished
Paṭhamabhāṇavāravaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
In the Ṭīkā called Sumaṅgalappasādanī.
34. Pathavīniddesavaṇṇanā
34. Explanation of the Section on Earth
242.Jātājātātiduvidhāti jātā pathavī ajātā pathavīti pathavī duvidhāti attho. Iminā jātapathaviñca ajātapathaviñca dasseti. Tāsaṃ vibhāgaṃ dasseti‘‘suddhā’’tiādinā. Suddhamattikapaṃsukā ca adaḍḍhā ca bahumattikapaṃsukā ca cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhapaṃsumattikarāsi ca jātā pathavīti sambandho. Mattikā ca paṃsu cāti dvando. Suddhā appasakkharāditāya mattikā paṃsavo yassāti bāhirattho.Adaḍḍhāti uddhanapacanādivasena tathā tathā adaḍḍhā. Sā pana visuṃ natthi, suddhamattikādīsu aññatarāva veditabbā. Cattāro māsā, tehi sahito atireko kālo, tasmiṃ ovaṭṭhoti samāso.Ovaṭṭhoti yena kenaci udakena ovaṭṭho. Budhā pana ‘‘ākāsato vuṭṭhaudakeneva, na aññattha paharitvā patitabindunā’’ti vadanti, ‘‘ovaṭṭho’’ti sāmaññena vuttattā ca ‘‘pokkharaṇiyā ṭhitatanukaddamo vaṭṭati, bahalo tu na vaṭṭatī’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 86) vuttattā ca ‘‘vinayavinicchaye sampatte garuke ṭhātabba’’nti vinayalakkhaṇato ca na taṃ yujjatīti amhākaṃ khanti. Paṃsumattikānaṃ rāsi paṃsumattikarāsi. Catu…pe… vaṭṭho paṃsumattikarāsi yassāti aññapadattho, kammadhārayo vā.
242.Jātājātāti duvidhā: Jātā pathavī ajātā pathavīti means that earth is of two kinds: existing earth and non-existing earth. This shows existing earth and non-existing earth. He shows their distinction with "suddhā" etc. Suddhamattikapaṃsukā ca adaḍḍhā ca bahumattikapaṃsukā ca cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhapaṃsumattikarāsi ca means that pure clay-dust, unfirm earth, earth with much clay-dust, and a pile of clay-dust soaked for more than four months are related as existing earth. Mattikā ca paṃsu ca is a dvanda compound. Suddhā means pure clay-dust that has little gravel, etc., this is the external meaning. Adaḍḍhā: Adaḍḍhā means not firm in such ways as due to digging or cooking. But that does not exist separately; it should be understood as one of the pure clay, etc. Cattāro māsā, tehi sahito atireko kālo, tasmiṃ ovaṭṭhoti is a samāsa compound. Ovaṭṭho means soaked by some water. But the wise say, "only by water rained from the sky, not by a drop that has struck and fallen elsewhere." And because "ovaṭṭho" is stated generally, and because it is said (pāci. aṭṭha. 86) that "thin mud standing in a pond soaks, but thick mud does not soak," and because of the characteristic of the Vinaya that "in a serious Vinaya decision, one should stand firm," we do not agree with that. A pile of clay-dust is paṃsumattikarāsi. Catu…pe… vaṭṭho paṃsumattikarāsi yassāti is an aññapada compound, or it could be a karmadhāraya compound.
243.Vālukā ca daḍḍhā ca yebhuyyasakkharādimahīpi ca cātumāsomavaṭṭhako vuttarāsi ca dutiyā bhūmīti sambandho sakkharā ca pāsāṇā ca marumbā ca kathalā ca vālukā cāti dvando. Suddhā sakkhara…pe… vālukā yassāti viggaho. Hatthamuṭṭhinā gahetabbappamāṇāsakkharā,tato uparipāsāṇā,kaṭasakkharāmarumbā,kapālakhaṇḍānikathalāti veditabbā.Dutiyāti ajātā.Vuttarāsīti vutto mattikapaṃsusirā.
243.Vālukā ca daḍḍhā ca yebhuyyasakkharādimahīpi ca cātumāsomavaṭṭhako vuttarāsi ca means that sand, burnt earth, ground with mostly gravel, etc., and the previously mentioned pile soaked for four months are related as the second type of earth. Sakkharā ca pāsāṇā ca marumbā ca kathalā ca vālukā cāti is a dvanda compound. Suddhā sakkhara…pe… vālukā yassāti is a viggaha. Sakkharā means gravel of a size that can be taken in the fist, pāsāṇā are larger than that, marumbā are rough gravel, kathalā are pieces of potsherd. Dutiyā means non-existing. Vuttarāsī means the mentioned pile of clay-dust.
244.Kīdisī yebhuyumattikādīti āha‘‘dve bhāgā’’tiādi.Yassa bhūmiyāti yassā bhūmiyā.Sesesupīti yebhuyyapaṃsuyebhuyyasakkharayebhuyyapāsāṇādīsu.
244.Kīdisī yebhuyumattikādīti? He says, "dve bhāgā" etc. Yassa bhūmiyā: Yassa bhūmiyā means of whatever earth. Sesesupī: Sesesupī means in earth with mostly dust, mostly gravel, mostly stones, etc.
245.‘‘Pācittī’’tiādinā tattha vinicchayaṃ dasseti. Jāte jātasaññissa khaṇane pācittīti sambandho.Jāteti jāte bhūmibhāge, liṅgavipallāso vā, jātāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Jāte dveḷhassa vimatissa dukkaṭanti sambandho. Jāte ajātasaññissa anāpatti. Tathā āṇāpane anāpattīti yojanā.Ajātasaññissāti ajātāti saññā ajātasaññā, sā assa atthīti ajātasaññī, tassa.
245.He shows the decision there with "pācittī" etc. Jāte jātasaññissa khaṇane pācittīti means that if one knows it is existing earth and digs it, there is a pācittiya. Jāte means in an existing area of earth, or it is a change of gender, meaning "in existing earth." Jāte dveḷhassa vimatissa dukkaṭanti means if one is doubtful about existing earth or uncertain, there is a dukkata. Jāte ajātasaññissa anāpatti means if one perceives existing earth as non-existing, there is no offense. Similarly, one should connect that there is no offense when ordering. Ajātasaññissā: Ajātāti saññā ajātasaññā, sā assa atthīti ajātasaññī means perception that it is non-existing is ajātasaññā, he who has that is ajātasaññī, for him.
246.Ekāyāṇattiyā ekāti sace sakiṃ āṇatto divasampi khaṇati, āṇāpakassa ekā eva āpattīti attho. Vācaso āpattīti sambandho.Vācasoti vicchāyaṃ so, vācāya vācāyāti attho.
246.Ekāyāṇattiyā ekā means if, once ordered, he digs even for a day, there is only one offense for the one who gave the order. Vācaso āpattīti is connected. Vācasoti is vicchāyaṃ so, vācāya vācāyāti means by each utterance.
247.‘‘Imaṃ ṭhānaṃ khaṇa vā’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Ettha aggiṃ jālehi vā’’ti yojanā.‘‘Vattu’’nti idaṃ ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti imassa kattupadavacananti attho. Atha vā ‘‘imaṃ ṭhānaṃ khaṇā’’tiādippakāro vacanāya na vaṭṭatīti attho.Niyametvāti iminā ‘‘āvāṭaṃ khaṇa, kandaṃ khaṇā’’tiādinā aniyametvā vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.
247.It should be connected with "imaṃ ṭhānaṃ khaṇa vā" etc. "Ettha aggiṃ jālehi vā" is the connection. "Vattu" means this is a subject term for "na vaṭṭatī." Or, "imaṃ ṭhānaṃ khaṇā" etc., this kind of utterance is not suitable. Niyametvā means that by this, he indicates that it is suitable to say without specifying, such as "dig a hole, dig a pit."
248.‘‘Imassa thambhassa āvāṭaṃ jāna vā, kappiyaṃ karohi vā’’ti ca ‘‘mattikaṃ jāna vā, mattikaṃ āhara vā, mattikaṃ kappiyaṃ karohi vā’’ti ca edisaṃ vacanaṃ vaṭṭatīti sambandho. Etaṃ viya dissatītiedisaṃ,kiṃ taṃ? ‘‘Mattikaṃ dehī’’tiādikaṃ upameyyaṃ. ‘‘Mattikaṃ jānā’’tiādikaṃ pana upamānaṃ, tesaṃ upamānopameyyānaṃ yā kappiyasaṅkhātā samānadhammatā, sā upamā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ amhehisubodhālaṅkāre‘‘upamānopameyyānaṃ, sadhammattaṃ siyopamā’’ti. Aññathā upamānabhūtaakkharāvaḷisadisīyeva, akkharāvaḷi upameyyaṃ siyā. Vākye viya-saddoyeva pana upamānaṃ jotetīti veditabbaṃ.
248.‘‘Imassa thambhassa āvāṭaṃ jāna vā, kappiyaṃ karohi vā’’ti ca ‘‘mattikaṃ jāna vā, mattikaṃ āhara vā, mattikaṃ kappiyaṃ karohi vā’’ti ca edisaṃ vacanaṃ vaṭṭatīti means that such a statement as "know the hole for this post, or make it allowable," and "know the clay, or bring the clay, or make the clay allowable" is suitable. Etaṃ viya dissatīti edisaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Edisaṃ means "something that appears like this," what is that? ‘‘Mattikaṃ dehī’’tiādikaṃ upameyyaṃ means "give the clay," etc., is the upameyya (object of comparison). ‘‘Mattikaṃ jānā’’tiādikaṃ pana upamānaṃ means "know the clay," etc., is the upamāna (standard of comparison), tesaṃ upamānopameyyānaṃ yā kappiyasaṅkhātā samānadhammatā, sā upamā means the similarity of qualities known as allowable in those standards and objects of comparison is simile. Tathā ca vuttaṃ amhehi subodhālaṅkāre ‘‘upamānopameyyānaṃ, sadhammattaṃ siyopamā’’ti. We have said thus in the Subodhālaṅkāra: "Similarity of qualities between the standard and object of comparison is simile." Aññathā upamānabhūtaakkharāvaḷisadisīyeva, akkharāvaḷi upameyyaṃ siyā. Otherwise, it would only be similar to a string of letters that is the standard of comparison; the string of letters would be the object of comparison. Vākye viya-saddoyeva pana upamānaṃ jotetīti veditabbaṃ. But it should be known that in a sentence, only the word "viya" illuminates the standard of comparison.
249.Pathaviyā asambaddhaṃ sukkhakaddamaādikañca tanukaṃ ussiñcanīyakaddamañca kopetuṃ labbhanti sambandho.Kaddamaādikanti etthaādi-saddena udakena gataṭṭhāne udakapappaṭako nāma hoti, yaṃ vātappahārena calati, taṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Ussiñcanīyakaddamanti ghaṭehi ussiñcituṃ sakkuṇeyyakaddamaṃ.
249.Pathaviyā asambaddhaṃ sukkhakaddamaādikañca tanukaṃ ussiñcanīyakaddamañca kopetuṃ labbhanti means that dry mud, etc., not connected to the earth, and thin mud that can be bailed out, it is permissible to agitate. Kaddamaādikanti ettha ādi-saddena means that here, with the ādi-word, udakena gataṭṭhāne udakapappaṭako nāma hoti, yaṃ vātappahārena calati, taṃ saṅgaṇhāti he includes what is called a film of water in a place where water has gone, which moves with the stroke of the wind. Ussiñcanīyakaddamanti means mud that one can bail out with pots.
250.‘‘Cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍuppāda’’ntiādinā sambandhitabbaṃ. Gaṇḍaṃ pathaviyā gaṇḍasadisaṃ mattikarāsiṃ uppādentītigaṇḍuppādā. Idha pana tehi uṭṭhāpito gūtho ‘‘gaṇḍuppāda’’nti niddiṭṭho. Potthakesu pana ‘‘gaṇḍuppādo’’ti pāṭho dissati. Taṃ ‘‘na kopaye’’ti ettha kammena bhavitabbanti na yujjati.Mūsikukkiranti mūsikānaṃ ukkiro khaṇitvā bahi kataṃ paṃsurāsi mūsikukkiroti.Leḍḍādinti etthaleḍḍunti kasitaṭṭhāne naṅgalacchinnamattikāpiṇḍaṃ.Ādi-saddena gāvīnaṃ khuracchinnaṃ kaddamaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
250.‘‘Cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhaṃ gaṇḍuppāda’’ntiādinā sambandhitabbaṃ means it should be connected with "gaṇḍuppāda soaked for more than four months" etc. Gaṇḍaṃ pathaviyā gaṇḍasadisaṃ mattikarāsiṃ uppādentīti gaṇḍuppādā means "gaṇḍuppādā" are those that produce a pile of clay like a lump of earth. Idha pana tehi uṭṭhāpito gūtho ‘‘gaṇḍuppāda’’nti niddiṭṭho means here, however, the excrement raised by them is indicated as "gaṇḍuppāda." Potthakesu pana ‘‘gaṇḍuppādo’’ti pāṭho dissati means however, in books, a reading "gaṇḍuppādo" is seen. Taṃ ‘‘na kopaye’’ti ettha kammena bhavitabbanti na yujjati means it is not suitable for that to be the object in "na kopaye." Mūsikukkiranti mūsikānaṃ ukkiro khaṇitvā bahi kataṃ paṃsurāsi mūsikukkiroti means "mūsikukkira" is a pile of dust dug out and made outside by mice. Leḍḍādinti ettha leḍḍunti kasitaṭṭhāne naṅgalacchinnamattikāpiṇḍaṃ means that here, leḍḍu means a clod of clay broken by a plow in a cultivated place. Ādi-saddena gāvīnaṃ khuracchinnaṃ kaddamaṃ saṅgaṇhāti means that with the ādi-word, he includes mud cut by the hooves of cows.
251-2.Udakasantike patite vāpiādīnaṃ kūle ca pāsāṇe lagge raje ca navasoṇḍiyā patite raje ca abbhokāsuṭṭhite vammike ca mattikākuṭṭe ca tathāti sambandho.Tathāti iminā kūlādike cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhaṃ vā sabbaṃ na kopayeti idaṃ atidisati. Iṭṭhakakuṭṭako vaṭṭatīti āha‘‘yebhuyyā’’tiādi. Yebhuyyena kathalā etthātiyebhuyyakathalā,bhūmi, tiṭṭhati etthātiṭhānaṃ, yebhuyyakathalāya ṭhānaṃ, tasmiṃ. Iṭṭhakakuṭṭako yebhuyyakathalā viya hotīti adhippāyo. Kuṭṭakaṃ kopentassa anāpattīti adhippāyo. Iṭṭhakāya kato kuṭṭakoti samāso.
251-2.Udakasantike patite vāpiādīnaṃ kūle ca pāsāṇe lagge raje ca navasoṇḍiyā patite raje ca abbhokāsuṭṭhite vammike ca mattikākuṭṭe ca tathāti means that similarly, it is the same for a bank of a well, etc., fallen near water, and for dust attached to a stone, and for dust fallen in a new ditch, and for a termite mound risen in the open air, and for a clay wall. Tathāti iminā kūlādike cātumāsādhikovaṭṭhaṃ vā sabbaṃ na kopayeti idaṃ atidisati means by this "tathā," he further indicates that one should not agitate all of the bank, etc., or that soaked for more than four months. Iṭṭhakakuṭṭako vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘yebhuyyā’’tiādi means he says "yebhuyyā" etc., regarding whether a brick wall is suitable. Yebhuyyena kathalā etthāti yebhuyyakathalā, bhūmi, tiṭṭhati etthāti ṭhānaṃ, yebhuyyakathalāya ṭhānaṃ, tasmiṃ means "yebhuyyakathalā" is where there are mostly potsherds, ṭhānaṃ is a place, yebhuyyakathalāya ṭhānaṃ means a place of mostly potsherds, in that. Iṭṭhakakuṭṭako yebhuyyakathalā viya hotīti adhippāyo means the meaning is that a brick wall is like mostly potsherds. Kuṭṭakaṃ kopentassa anāpattīti adhippāyo means the meaning is that there is no offense for one who agitates a wall. Iṭṭhakāya kato kuṭṭakoti is a samāsa compound.
253-5.Sañcāletvā bhūmiṃ vikopayaṃ thambhādiṃ gaṇhituṃ vāti sambandho. Tatthavikopayanti karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ, vikopayatāti attho. Aññathā kathamettha paṭhamāpasaṅgo. Paṭhamā hi ‘‘bhava’’nti vutte siyā, na ca ‘‘gaṇhitu’’ntiādīsu tuṃ-paccayehi vutto koci atthi, yadā bhāve tuṃ-paccayo, tadā na kiñci vuttaṃ hotīti, ‘‘na kappatī’’ti padhānakiriyāyapi heṭṭhā vuttanayena kattā aññoyevāti evaṃ sabbattha. Tatiyatthe tu sati ito cito sañcāletvā bhūmiṃ vikopayatā thambhādiṃ gaṇhituṃ na kappatīti atīva yujjati.Dhārāyāti passāvadhārāya. Visamaṃ samaṃ kātuṃ sammuñjanīhi ghaṃsituṃ vāti yojanā.Visamanti visamaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Padaṃ dassessāmī’’ti bhūmiṃ bhindanto caṅkamituṃ vāti sambandho.Bhindantoti bhindatā. Kaṇḍurogī vā taṭādīsu aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ ghaṃsitunti yojanā.Kaṇḍurogīti kaṇḍuroginā.Ca-saddo avadhāraṇe.
253-5.Sañcāletvā bhūmiṃ vikopayaṃ thambhādiṃ gaṇhituṃ vāti means that it is not allowed to take a post, etc., by moving and agitating the earth. Tattha vikopayanti karaṇatthe paccattavacanaṃ, vikopayatāti attho means here, vikopayaṃ is a singular form in the instrumental sense, meaning vikopayatā. Aññathā kathamettha paṭhamāpasaṅgo. Otherwise, how is there a connection to the nominative here? Paṭhamā hi ‘‘bhava’’nti vutte siyā, na ca ‘‘gaṇhitu’’ntiādīsu tuṃ-paccayehi vutto koci atthi, yadā bhāve tuṃ-paccayo, tadā na kiñci vuttaṃ hotīti, ‘‘na kappatī’’ti padhānakiriyāyapi heṭṭhā vuttanayena kattā aññoyevāti evaṃ sabbattha. The nominative would be when "bhava" is said, but there is nothing stated with the tuṃ-suffix in "gaṇhituṃ" etc. When the tuṃ-suffix is in the sense of abstract noun, then nothing is said, and even for the main verb "na kappatī," the agent is someone else in the way stated below, thus it is everywhere. Tatiyatthe tu sati ito cito sañcāletvā bhūmiṃ vikopayatā thambhādiṃ gaṇhituṃ na kappatīti atīva yujjati. But if it is in the third case, then it is very suitable that it is not allowed to take a post, etc., by moving it from here and there and agitating the earth. Dhārāyāti passāvadhārāya means dhārāyā means with a stream of urine. Visamaṃ samaṃ kātuṃ sammuñjanīhi ghaṃsituṃ vāti means that it is not allowed to level an uneven place or to scrub it with brooms. Visamanti visamaṭṭhānaṃ means visamaṃ means an uneven place. ‘‘Padaṃ dassessāmī’’ti bhūmiṃ bhindanto caṅkamituṃ vāti means that it is not allowed to walk around breaking the ground, thinking, "I will show a footprint." Bhindantoti bhindatā means bhindanto means breaking. Kaṇḍurogī vā taṭādīsu aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ ghaṃsitunti means that it is not allowed for one with itch to scrub limbs, etc., on a bank, etc. Kaṇḍurogīti kaṇḍuroginā means kaṇḍurogī means by one with itch. Ca-saddo avadhāraṇe means the ca-word is for emphasis.
256-7.Suddhacittassāti pathavibhedādhippāyavirahena parisuddhacittassa.
256-7.Suddhacittassāti pathavibhedādhippāyavirahena parisuddhacittassa means suddhacittassa means for one whose mind is pure, without intention of damaging the earth.
258.Aggissa anupādāne kapāle vā anupādānāya iṭṭhakāya vā aggiṃ pātetuṃ vā avase sati bhūmiyaṃ pātetuṃ vā labbhateti sambandho.Upādānaṃindhanaṃ, na upādānaṃanupādānaṃ,tasmiṃ. Vaso pabhuttaṃ. ‘‘Vaso pabhutte āyatte’’ti hi nighaṇḍu. Na vasoavaso,tasmiṃ apabhutteti attho. Patitaṭṭhāneyeva upādānaṃ datvā aggiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Sukkhakhāṇukasukkharukkhādīsu ca aggiṃ dātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sace pana ‘‘pathaviṃ appattameva nibbāpetvā gamissāmī’’ti deti, vaṭṭati, pacchā nibbāpetuṃ na sakkoti, avisayattā anāpatti. ‘‘Bhūmiyaṃ pātehī’’ti evampi vattuṃ na vaṭṭatīti.
258.Aggissa anupādāne kapāle vā anupādānāya iṭṭhakāya vā aggiṃ pātetuṃ vā avase sati bhūmiyaṃ pātetuṃ vā labbhateti means that it is allowable to let a fire fall on the ground when there is no fuel for the fire, or for potsherds, or for bricks, or when one is unable to stop it. Upādānaṃ indhanaṃ, na upādānaṃ anupādānaṃ, tasmiṃ means upādānaṃ is fuel, na upādānaṃ anupādānaṃ means without fuel. Vaso pabhuttaṃ. ‘‘Vaso pabhutte āyatte’’ti hi nighaṇḍu. Na vaso avaso, tasmiṃ apabhutteti attho. Vaso means mastery. Indeed, the Nighaṇḍu says, "Vaso means mastery, control." Na vaso avaso, tasmiṃ means not mastery is avaso, meaning without control. Patitaṭṭhāneyeva upādānaṃ datvā aggiṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati means it is suitable to make a fire by placing fuel only in the place it has fallen. Sukkhakhāṇukasukkharukkhādīsu ca aggiṃ dātuṃ na vaṭṭati means it is not suitable to set a fire to dry stumps, dry trees, etc. Sace pana ‘‘pathaviṃ appattameva nibbāpetvā gamissāmī’’ti deti, vaṭṭati, pacchā nibbāpetuṃ na sakkoti, avisayattā anāpatti means but if he gives it thinking, "I will extinguish it before it reaches the earth and leave," it is suitable; if he is later unable to extinguish it, there is no offense because it is beyond his control. ‘‘Bhūmiyaṃ pātehī’’ti evampi vattuṃ na vaṭṭatīti means that it is not even suitable to say, "Let it fall on the ground."
Pathavīniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Earth is Finished.
35. Parikkhāraniddesavaṇṇanā
35. Explanation of the Section on Parikkhāra
259-60.Chatte anto bahi ca pañcavaṇṇehi suttehi sibbituñca paṇṇe girikūṭaaḍḍhacandādiṃ chindituñca na vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Chatteti tālapaṇṇe chatte.Girikūṭaṃnāma makaradantakaṃ,ādi-saddena tādisaṃ aññaṃ vikārarūpaṃ saṅgahitaṃ.Ghaṭakanti gehatthambhesu viya kayiramānaṃ ghaṭakaṃ.Daṇḍeti chattadaṇḍe.Lekhāti tahiṃ tahiṃ dinnā lekhā.Sādisanti dīghena niddiṭṭhaṃ.Bundamhimūle.
259-60.Chatte anto bahi ca pañcavaṇṇehi suttehi sibbituñca paṇṇe girikūṭaaḍḍhacandādiṃ chindituñca na vaṭṭatīti means that it is not suitable to sew a leaf umbrella inside and outside with threads of five colors, or to cut designs like mountain peaks, half-moons, etc. Chatteti tālapaṇṇe chatte means chatte means in a palm leaf umbrella. Girikūṭaṃ nāma makaradantakaṃ, ādi-saddena tādisaṃ aññaṃ vikārarūpaṃ saṅgahitaṃ means girikūṭaṃ is a makaradantaka design, and with the ādi-word, another such varied form is included. Ghaṭakanti gehatthambhesu viya kayiramānaṃ ghaṭakaṃ means ghaṭakaṃ is a ghaṭaka design made like pillars in a house. Daṇḍeti chattadaṇḍe means daṇḍe means on the umbrella handle. Lekhāti tahiṃ tahiṃ dinnā lekhā means lekhā means lines given here and there. Sādisanti dīghena niddiṭṭhaṃ means sādisaṃ means indicated by length. Bundamhi mūle means bundamhi means at the root.
261.Thiratthaṃ chatte ekavaṇṇena sibbituṃ vā pañjaraṃ vinandhituṃ vā vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Sibbitunti anto bahi ca sibbituṃ.Ekavaṇṇenāti nīlādinā ekavaṇṇena.Pañjaranti chattadaṇḍagāhakasalākapañjaraṃ.Thiratthanti iminā na vaṇṇamaṭṭhatthāyāti dasseti. Bandhituṃ daṇḍe lekhā vaṭṭatīti sambandho.Bandhitunti vātappahārena acalanatthaṃ chattamaṇḍalikaṃ rajjukehi gahetvā bandhanatthāya.Lekhāvāti valayamiva ukkiritvā katā lekhā eva.Vaṭṭatīti yadipi na bandhati, rajjukehi bandhituṃ yuttaṭṭhānattā vaṭṭati.
261.Thiratthaṃ chatte ekavaṇṇena sibbituṃ vā pañjaraṃ vinandhituṃ vā vaṭṭatīti means that it is suitable to sew an umbrella with one color or to fasten a pañjara design for stability. Sibbitunti anto bahi ca sibbituṃ means sibbituṃ means to sew inside and outside. Ekavaṇṇenāti nīlādinā ekavaṇṇena means ekavaṇṇena means with one color such as blue, etc. Pañjaranti chattadaṇḍagāhakasalākapañjaraṃ means pañjaraṃ means a pañjara design of slats holding the umbrella handle. Thiratthanti iminā na vaṇṇamaṭṭhatthāyāti dasseti means by thiratthaṃ, he shows that it is not for beautification. Bandhituṃ daṇḍe lekhā vaṭṭatīti means that it is suitable to have lines on the handle for tying. Bandhitunti vātappahārena acalanatthaṃ chattamaṇḍalikaṃ rajjukehi gahetvā bandhanatthaāya means bandhituṃ means for the purpose of holding the umbrella canopy with ropes so it does not move by the stroke of the wind, and for the purpose of tying. Lekhāvāti valayamiva ukkiritvā katā lekhā eva means lekhāvā means just lines made by carving out like a ring. Vaṭṭatīti yadipi na bandhati, rajjukehi bandhituṃ yuttaṭṭhānattā vaṭṭati means even if it does not tie, it is suitable because it is a suitable place to tie with ropes.
262.Cīvare ante vāpi paṭṭamukhe vāpi veṇipi vā saṅkhalikāpi vā aññaṃ sūcivikāraṃ vā pāḷikaṇṇikaādikaṃ kappabinduvikārampi vā na ca kappatīti sambandho.Anteti cīvarapariyante, anuvāteti vuttaṃ hoti.Paṭṭamukheti paṭṭakoṭiyaṃ, dvinnaṃ paṭṭānaṃ saṅghaṭitaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ.Veṇīti varakasīsākārena sibbanaṃ.Saṅkhalikāti biḷālabandhanākārena sibbanaṃ.Aññaṃ sūcivikāraṃ vāti cīvaramaṇḍanatthāya kayiramānaṃ aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci sūcikammavikāraṃ vā.Ṭīkāyaṃpana ‘‘satapadisadisaṃ aññaṃ vā sūcivikāraṃ na kappatī’’ti sāmaññena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Cīvaramaṇḍanatthāya nānāsuttakehi satapadisadisaṃ sibbantā āgantukapaṭṭaṃ ṭhapenti, aññampi yaṃ kiñci sūcikammavikāraṃ karonti, sabbaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’tiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā pana nānāvaṇṇehi vā hotu, ekavaṇṇena vā hotu, cīvaramaṇḍanatthāya saṃsibbantānaṃ sūcikammavikāraṃ sandhāya vuttanti cīvaresu phālitaṭṭhānassa thirabhāvatthaṃ satapadisadisampi sibbituṃ vaṭṭatīti amhākaṃ khanti.Pāḷi-saddena,kaṇṇika-saddena ca kappa-saddalopena vā upacārena vā pāḷikappādayova gahitā. Pāḷi ca kaṇṇikā ca pāḷikaṇṇikāyo, tā ādi yassa aññassa tādisassāti viggaho. Tattha nīlāvaḷiādisaṇṭhānāya bindupantiyā yathā sobhati, tathā kayiramāno pāḷikappo. Tatheva bindusamūhe katthaci dassetvā kayiramāno kaṇṇikakappo.
262.Cīvare ante vāpi paṭṭamukhe vāpi veṇipi vā saṅkhalikāpi vā aññaṃ sūcivikāraṃ vā pāḷikaṇṇikaādikaṃ kappabinduvikārampi vā na ca kappatīti means that it is not suitable to have veṇī or saṅkhalikā designs or any other needlework design or pāḷikaṇṇika, etc., or designs with auspicious dots on the edge of a robe or at the opening of a border. Anteti cīvarapariyante, anuvāteti vuttaṃ hoti means ante means at the edge of the robe, it is said as the hem. Paṭṭamukheti paṭṭakoṭiyaṃ, dvinnaṃ paṭṭānaṃ saṅghaṭitaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ means paṭṭamukhe means at the end of the border, this is said regarding the place where two borders meet. Veṇīti varakasīsākārena sibbanaṃ means veṇī means sewing in the shape of a braided hairstyle. Saṅkhalikāti biḷālabandhanākārena sibbanaṃ means saṅkhalikā means sewing in the shape of a cat's tie. Aññaṃ sūcivikāraṃ vāti cīvaramaṇḍanatthāya kayiramānaṃ aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci sūcikammavikāraṃ vā means aññaṃ sūcivikāraṃ vā means or any other needlework design that is made to adorn the robe. Ṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘satapadisadisaṃ aññaṃ vā sūcivikāraṃ na kappatī’’ti sāmaññena vuttaṃ means however, in the Ṭīkā, it is said generally, "it is not suitable to have any other needlework design similar to a centipede." ‘‘Cīvaramaṇḍanatthāya nānāsuttakehi satapadisadisaṃ sibbantā āgantukapaṭṭaṃ ṭhapenti, aññampi yaṃ kiñci sūcikammavikāraṃ karonti, sabbaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā pana nānāvaṇṇehi vā hotu, ekavaṇṇena vā hotu, cīvaramaṇḍanatthāya saṃsibbantānaṃ sūcikammavikāraṃ sandhāya vuttanti cīvaresu phālitaṭṭhānassa thirabhāvatthaṃ satapadisadisampi sibbituṃ vaṭṭatīti amhākaṃ khanti means however, because it is said in the Commentary, "when they sew something similar to a centipede with various threads to adorn the robe, they put on an extra border, and they do any other needlework design, all of it is not suitable," it is said regarding needlework designs that they sew together to adorn the robe, whether it is with various colors or with one color, so we agree that it is suitable to sew something similar to a centipede to make the split places in robes stable. Pāḷi-saddena, kaṇṇika-saddena ca kappa-saddalopena vā upacārena vā pāḷikappādayova gahitā means with the words pāḷi and kaṇṇika, only the designs on the edge are taken, either by omitting the word kappa or by convention. Pāḷi ca kaṇṇikā ca pāḷikaṇṇikāyo, tā ādi yassa aññassa tādisassāti viggaho means pāḷi and kaṇṇikā are pāḷikaṇṇikāyo, the viggaha is "that of which those are the beginning and other similar things." Tattha nīlāvaḷiādisaṇṭhānāya bindupantiyā yathā sobhati, tathā kayiramāno pāḷikappo means there, a pāḷikappo is made so that it is attractive like a line of dots with a blue border, etc. Tatheva bindusamūhe katthaci dassetvā kayiramāno kaṇṇikakappo means similarly, a kaṇṇikakappo is made by showing a group of dots somewhere.
263.Gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭāti gaṇṭhino ca pāsakassa ca patiṭṭhānaṭṭhāne ṭhapetabbā paṭṭā.Vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘gaṇṭhipāsakā’’ti katvā ‘‘catukoṇāva vaṭṭantī’’ti atthato vacanaṃ vipallāsetvā yojetabbaṃ.Agghiyanti cetiyasaṇṭhānena sibbanaṃ. Mūle ca agge ca ekasadisaṃ katvā muggarākārena sibbanaṃmuggaro. Vikāranti vikāro, liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ.Etthāti gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭesu.
263.Gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭāti gaṇṭhino ca pāsakassa ca patiṭṭhānaṭṭhāne ṭhapetabbā paṭṭā means gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭā are the borders that should be placed in the places of the knot and the fastening. Vaṭṭatīti ettha ‘‘gaṇṭhipāsakā’’ti katvā ‘‘catukoṇāva vaṭṭantī’’ti atthato vacanaṃ vipallāsetvā yojetabbaṃ means here, taking it as "gaṇṭhipāsakā," one should connect it by reversing the statement from the meaning "only four-cornered ones are suitable." Agghiyanti cetiyasaṇṭhānena sibbanaṃ means agghiyaṃ means sewing in the shape of a cetiya. Mūle ca agge ca ekasadisaṃ katvā muggarākārena sibbanaṃ muggaro. Vikāranti vikāro, liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ means vikāraṃ means a design, stated by changing the gender. Etthāti gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭesu means etthā means in the gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭas.
264.Koṇasuttāti napuṃsakaniddeso, gaṇṭhipāsakapaṭṭānaṃ koṇehi nīhaṭasuttakoṭiyo.Pīḷakāti tāniyeva nivattetvā pīḷakākārena katāni.Duviññeyyāvāti tesaṃ antesu ekavāraṃ gaṇṭhikaraṇena vā puna nivattetvā sibbanena vā duviññeyyā eva.Gandhaṃ telaṃ vāti gandhaṃ vā telaṃ vā. Kañcikapiṭṭhakhalikaādīnipi vaṭṭanti.
264. Koṇasuttā: The designation is neuter, referring to the ends of threads drawn out at the corners of knotted loops and bands. Pīḷakā: These are the same threads, rolled back and made into the shape of knobs. Duviññeyyāvā: They are indeed difficult to discern, whether by making a knot once inside them or by sewing them again after turning them back. Gandhaṃ telaṃ vā: Either perfume or oil. Items like kañcikapiṭṭha and khalika, etc., are also permissible.
265.Maṇināti masāragallādipāsāṇena.Na ca ghaṭṭeyyāti neva ghaṭṭeyya.Aññena vāti muggaramusalādinā. Aṃsabaddhakakāyabandhanāni pana tathā kātuṃ vaṭṭati.Doṇiyaṃ katvā na ca ghaṃseyyāti pakkarajanākiraṇadoṇiyaṃ ṭhapetvā bhūmiyaṃ jaṇṇukāni nihantvā ito cito ca āvijjhitvā neva ghaṃseyyāti attho.
265. Maṇinā: With a gem, such as masāragalla stone. Na ca ghaṭṭeyyā: One should not rub it. Aññena vā: With a mallet, pestle, or the like. However, shoulder straps and body bands may be made in that way. Doṇiyaṃ katvā na ca ghaṃseyyā: Having placed it in a trough filled with dye solution, one should not rub it by pressing one's knees into the ground and moving it back and forth.
266-7.Kaṇṇakoṇakasuttānīti cīvararajanakāle lagganatthāya anuvāte catūsu koṇesu ca pāsakaṃ katvā bandhitāni suttāni, yāni ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, kaṇṇasuttaka’’nti (mahāva. 344) evaṃ anuññātāni. Kaṇṇasaṅkhātā koṇā kaṇṇakoṇakā, tesu suttāni. Gaṇṭhikapāsakapaṭṭesu pana kaṇṇakoṇakasuttānaṃ duviññeyyānameva kappiyatā heṭṭhā vuttāti cīvare ratteyeva tesaṃ chinditabbatā natthi, kaṇṇakoṇakasuttānaṃ chinditabbatāya vuttattā anuvātehi nikkhamitasuttānipi chinditabbānīti veditabbaṃ. Dhammakaraṇe chattavaṭṭiyaṃ lekhaṃ ṭhapetvā lekhā na vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Chattavaṭṭiyanti chattassa mukhavaṭṭiyaṃ.Lekhāti upari vā heṭṭhā vā kucchiyaṃ vā aññā lekhā. Kuñcikāya ca pipphale ca maṇikā ca pīḷakā ca na vaṭṭantīti sambandho.Maṇikāti ekā vaṭṭamaṇi.Pīḷakāti sāsapamattikā muttarājisadisā bahuvaṭṭalekhā.Daṇḍamhīti pipphaladaṇḍake.
266-7. Kaṇṇakoṇakasuttānī: Threads tied by making loops at the four corners in the anuvāta for attachment during the dyeing of robes, which are thus permitted, as in "I allow, monks, corner threads" (mahāva. 344). Kaṇṇasaṅkhātā koṇā kaṇṇakoṇakā, threads in those corners. It has been said that only indistinct corner threads are allowable for knotted loops and bands, so there is no need to cut them off at night on the robe, since it is stated that corner threads should be cut off, thus it should be understood that even threads coming out of the anuvāta should be cut off. Having placed a writing in the handle of an umbrella for the purpose of Dhamma learning, the writing is not allowed. Chattavaṭṭiyaṃ: At the mouth rim of the umbrella. Lekhā: Any writing, either above or below or on the handle. The connection is that neither a key, nor long pepper, nor a gem, nor knobs are allowed. Maṇikā: A single round gem. Pīḷakā: Many round markings like mustard seeds or resembling a streak of urine. Daṇḍamhī: On the long pepper stalk.
268-9.Araṇiyaṃ mālādi ca pattamaṇḍale bhittikammañca na vaṭṭatīti sambandhitabbaṃ.Araṇiyanti uttarāraṇi adharāraṇi araṇidhanukañca sāmaññena gahitaṃ.Pattamaṇḍaleti tipusīsādimaye pattamaṇḍale. Ettha pana makaradaṇḍakaṃ vaṭṭati.Heṭṭhāti kattarayaṭṭhiyā heṭṭhā.Uddhanti tassāyeva upari.
268-9. It should be connected that neither a grindstone nor garlands, etc., nor a bowl stand, nor wall work are allowed. Araṇiyaṃ: Generally taken to mean the upper fire-stick, the lower fire-stick, and the fire-stick bow. Pattamaṇḍale: On a bowl stand made of tin, lead, etc. Here, however, a makaradaṇḍakaṃ is allowed. Heṭṭhā: Below the cutter stick. Uddha: Above that same one.
270-3.Sammuñjanimhīti sammuñjaniyā liṅgavipallāso.Avāritanti itthirūpaṃ pana vāritaṃ.Sovaṇṇamayampīti suvaṇṇamayampi.Visāṇanāḷināma visāṇamayā nāḷi. Ettha pana avuttānipi yāni kānici ārakaṇḍakadantakaṭṭhachedanapānīyaghaṭapānīyauḷuṅkacuṇṇabhājanādīni vuttānaṃ anulomānīti veditabbāni. Yo panettha vinayaññū tādisaṃ parikkhāraṃ disvā chindeyya vā chindāpeyya vā, anupavajjo soti veditabbanti.
270-3. Sammuñjanimhī: In the broom; there is a gender change. Avārita: But a female form is prohibited. Sovaṇṇamayampī: Even one made of gold. Visāṇanāḷi is a pipe made of horn. Here, even those unmentioned items that are analogous to the ones mentioned, such as an ārakaṇḍaka, a toothpick, a cutting instrument, a water pot, a water scoop, or a flour container, should be understood as permissible. One who is knowledgeable in the Vinaya, upon seeing such equipment, whether he cuts it or has it cut, is known as being blameless.
Parikkhāraniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Description of Requisites is Finished.
36. Bhesajjaniddesavaṇṇanā
36. The Explanation of the Description of Medicines
274-5.Janassa bhesajjaṃ kātuṃ dātuṃ vattuñca na labbhatīti sambandhiyaṃ.Labbhatīti ettha ‘‘bhikkhunā’’ti kattā‘‘bhesajja’’nti vuttakammaṃ. Nanu cakātunti bhāvasādhanattā tassa avuttakammenāpi bhavitabbaṃ bhāve vihitakitakappaccayānaṃ payoge kammakārakassāpi icchitabbattāti? Saccaṃ, tathāpi padhānabhūtakammasattiyā abhidhāne sati appadhānakitakakiriyābhisambandhena guṇībhūtā kammasatti abhihitā viya viññāyati. Tathā ca vuttaṃ amhehiyogavinicchaye‘‘padhānānuyāyitāya janavohārāya padhānasatyābhidhāne guṇasatti abhihitā viya pakāsatī’’ti.Janassāti āgatāgatajanassa. Sahadhammīnañca pitūnañca tadupaṭṭhākabhikkhunissitabhaṇḍūnañca veyyāvaccakarassa ca bhikkhācariyaviññattisakehi bhesajjakaraṇaṃ labbhanti sambandho. Tatthasahadhamminanti saha caritabbo dhammo sīlasaddhāpaññāsaṅkhāto sahadhammo, so etesamatthīti sahadhammino, bhikkhu bhikkhunī sikkhamānā sāmaṇero sāmaṇerīti pañca, tesaṃ. Pitā ca mātā capitaroekasesanayena, ubhinnaṃ sāmaññaniddeso vā, tesaṃ.Bhikkhunissitonāma yo vihāre sabbakammāni karonto bhikkhuṃ nissāya vasati.Bhaṇḍunāma yo pabbajjāpekkho yāva pattacīvaraṃ paṭiyādiyati, tāva vihāre vasati, so paṇḍupalāso.Veyyāvaccakarassāti attano upaṭṭhākassa. Etesu pana mātāpitaro sace rajjepi ṭhitā paccāsīsanti, akātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Mātaraṃ anāmasantena sabbaṃ parikammaṃ kātabbaṃ. Pitā pana sahatthena nahāpanasambāhanādīni katvā upaṭṭhātabbo.
274-5. It should be connected that it is not permissible to make, give, or speak medicine for a person. Labbhatī: Here, "by a monk" is the agent, and "bhesajja" is the object. But surely "kātuṃ" being a gerundive, must also have an unexpressed object, since in the usage of kitaka suffixes prescribed in the gerundive sense, the object is also desirable; True, yet even so, when the power of the principal object is expressed, the object power, becoming secondary due to its connection with the kitaka verbal action, is understood as if it were expressed. Thus it has been said by us in the Yogavinicchaya: "When the principal truth is expressed, following the principal, the secondary power shines forth as if it were expressed, according to common usage." Janassā: To a person who comes and goes. The connection is that making medicine is permissible for co-religionists and for parents, and for a bhikkhu-nissita who attends to them, and for a bhaṇḍu, and for one who does service, and by those who are clever at requesting alms. Therein, sahadhammina: Saha caritabbo dhammo sīlasaddhāpaññāsaṅkhāto sahadhammo, so etesamatthīti sahadhammino, the five, namely, a bhikkhu, bhikkhuni, sikkhamana, samanera, and samaneri, for them. Father and mother are pitaro by the ekasesa method, or a general designation for both of them, for them. Bhikkhunissito is one who, doing all the work in the monastery, lives dependent on a bhikkhu. Bhaṇḍu is one who, expecting ordination, lives in the monastery until he prepares a bowl and robes; he is like a withered leaf. Veyyāvaccakarassā: For one who does service to oneself. However, if the parents, even if they are established in the kingdom, hope for it, it is not permissible not to do it. All service should be done for the mother without touching her. But the father should be attended to by bathing, massaging, and the like with one's own hands.
276.Pitā ca mātā ca bhātā ca bhaginī cāti dvando pitā…pe… bhaginiyo. Mahanto ca cūḷo ca, mahācūḷā ca te pitā…pe… bhaginiyo cāti kammadhārayo. Tā ādi yesanteti aññapadattho. Mahācūḷa-saddā pitādi-saddehi paccekaṃ yojetabbā ‘‘mahāpituno cūḷapituno’’tiādinā.Ādi-saddena panettha pitucchā mātulo, tesaṃ dasannampi yāva sattamā kulaparivaṭṭā puttaparamparañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tesaṃ sake bhesajjakaraṇaṃ labbhanti yojanā. Tesaṃ mahāpitādīnaṃ santake sati tena bhesajjakaraṇaṃ labbhatīti attho.Nāti natthi ce.Attaniyeti bhikkhuno attano santake satīti attho.Dātabbaṃ tāvakālikanti tāvakālikaṃ katvā dātabbanti attho. Te pana sace paṭidenti, gahetabbaṃ, no ce denti, na codetabbā. Yāva tassa dānaṃ, tāva kālo assātitāvakālikaṃ. Ṇiko samāsante.
276. Pitā ca mātā ca bhātā ca bhaginī cāti dvando pitā…pe… bhaginiyo. Mahanto ca cūḷo ca, mahācūḷā ca te pitā…pe… bhaginiyo cāti kammadhārayo. Those to whom they are foremost are of the aññapadattha type. The words mahācūḷa should be connected individually with the words beginning with pitā, as in mahāpituno cūḷapituno, etc. By the word "ādi" here, one includes the paternal aunt and maternal uncle; it encompasses even their line of descendants up to the seventh generation. The connection is that making medicine is permissible for them. It means that if those great-grandparents, etc., have possessions, making medicine is permissible with that. Nā: If there is not. Attaniye: It means if there is something in the monk's own possession. Dātabbaṃ tāvakālikaṃ: It means it should be made temporary and given. However, if they return it, it should be taken; if they do not give it, they should not be urged. As long as that gift lasts, that is tāvakālikaṃ. The suffix ṇika is at the end of the compound.
277.Bhesajjakaraṇādītiādi-saddena anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍadānādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ,hi-saddo hetumhi, hi yasmā etesu kuladūsanādayo na ruhanti, tasmā tesaṃ bhesajjakaraṇaṃ labbhaṃ, attaniye ca sati dātabbanti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.Na rūhatīti na rohati nappavattati na hoti, āpattiṃ na janetīti adhippāyo. Tesaṃ atthāya ñātisāmaṇerehi vā bhesajjaṃ āharāpetabbaṃ, attano atthāya vā āharāpetvā dātabbaṃ. Tehipi ‘‘upajjhāyādīnaṃ āharissāmā’’ti vattasīsena āharitabbaṃ. Sace aññepi ye gilānā hutvā vihāraṃ pavisanti, tesaṃ sabbesampi apaccāsīsantena bhesajjaṃ kātabbaṃ. Saddhaṃ kulaṃ hoti bhikkhusaṅghassa mātāpituṭṭhānīyaṃ, tatra ce koci gilāno hoti, tassatthāya ‘‘bhante, itthannāmassa rogassa kiṃ bhesajjaṃ karontī’’ti kappiyaṃ katvā pucchanti, idañcidañca gahetvā karontīti vaṭṭati, bhikkhūhi aññamaññaṃ vā kathā kātabbā.
277. Bhesajjakaraṇādī: By the word "ādi" one takes unrequested alms, etc. The word "hi" is in the sense of a reason; because defilements of the family, etc., do not arise in these cases, therefore making medicine is permissible for them, and if there is something in one's own possession, it should be given; thus, the meaning should be understood here. Na rūhatī: It does not grow, does not proceed, does not happen; the meaning is that it does not generate an offense. Medicine should be brought by relatives or novices for their sake, or it should be brought for one's own sake and given. They should also bring it with the attitude of "we will bring it for the preceptor, etc." If others who are sick enter the monastery, medicine should be made for all of them without expecting anything in return. A faithful family is like parents to the community of monks; if someone there is sick, they ask, making it allowable, "Venerable sir, what medicine are they making for such-and-such a disease?", and it is permissible to say, "They are taking this and that and making it." Monks should converse with each other.
278.Channaṃ mātādīnañca dāmarikacorassa issariyassa anāmaṭṭho piṇḍapāto dātuṃ avāritoti yojetabbaṃ.Channanti mātādīnaṃ channaṃ majjhe.Mātādīnanti bhikkhunissitaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesānaṃ pañcannaṃ mātādīnaṃ. ‘‘Channa’’nti pana yojanāya aṭṭhakathāya virujjhati. Tattha hi ‘‘mātāpitūna’’ntiādinā bhikkhunissitaṃ ohāya satteva vuttā.Ācariyabuddhadattattherenaca tatheva vuttaṃ –
278. It should be connected that giving unrequested alms to the six, among whom are the mother, etc., and to a dāmarika thief, and to a ruler, is not prohibited. Channaṃ: Among the six, namely, the mother, etc. Mātādīnaṃ: To the five, among whom are the mother, etc., excluding the bhikkhunissita. However, the connection "to the six" contradicts the commentary. There, indeed, only seven have been mentioned, excluding the bhikkhunissita, beginning with "mātāpitūnaṃ." Ācariyabuddhadattatthera also said likewise:
‘‘Anāmaṭṭhopi dātabbo, piṇḍapāto vijānatā;
"Even unrequested alms should be given, by one who knows,
Even to two, the mother and father, and to one who attends to them.
‘‘Issarassāpi dātabbo, coradāmarikassa ca;
"It should be given even to a ruler, and to a coradāmarika,
And to a bhaṇḍuka, and also to one who does service for oneself." (vinaya vi. 493-495);
Dāmarikacorassāti rajjaṃ patthayamānassa pākaṭacorassa.Anāmaṭṭhoti apabbajitassa hatthato laddhā attanā aññena vā pabbajitena aggahitaaggo, ayaṃ anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapāto. Paṭisanthāro ‘‘vihārappattaṃ āgantukaṃ vā daliddādiṃ vā disvā ‘pānīyaṃ pivā’ti dātabbaṃ, pādamakkhanatelaṃ dātabbaṃ, kāle āgatassa yāgubhattaṃ, vikāle āgatassa sace taṇḍulā atthi, taṇḍulā dātabbā, sayanaṭṭhānaṃ dātabbaṃ, corānaṃ pana saṅghikampidātabba’’nti vutto. Avasesapaṭisanthāro pana apaccāsīsantena kātabbo. Tathā dhammapaṭisanthāropi yassa kassaci dātabbova.
Dāmarikacorassā: To a notorious thief desiring kingship. Anāmaṭṭho: Alms received from the hand of a non-ordained person, the tip of which has not been taken by oneself or by another ordained person; this is unrequested alms. Paṭisanthāro: "Having seen a visitor who has arrived at the monastery or a poor person, etc., it should be given, 'Drink water'; oil for anointing the feet should be given; rice gruel for one who has come at the right time; if there is rice for one who has come at the wrong time, rice should be given; a sleeping place should be given; even property belonging to the Sangha should be given to thieves," has been said. But the remaining hospitality should be done without expecting anything in return. Likewise, even the hospitality of the Dhamma should be given to anyone.
279.Tesanti aññātakādīnaṃ gihīnaṃ.Kayirāti ‘‘bhaṇathā’’ti vutte kareyya. ‘‘Na karomā’’ti vutte sace vippaṭisārino bhavissanti, kātabbaṃ.Nattanoti attano suttodakehi na kayirāti yojanīyaṃ. Evaṃ sāmaññena paritte paṭipajjanavidhiṃ dassetvā idāni āṭānāṭiyaparitte paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘bhaṇitabba’’ntiādimāha.Bhaṇāpenteti ‘‘bhaṇathā’’ti ajjhesanapubbakaṃ payojente.Parittaṃ sāsanogadhanti paṭhamameva āṭānāṭiyasuttaṃ abhaṇitvā sāsanapariyāpannaṃ mettasuttaṃ dhajaggasuttaṃ ratanasuttanti imāni suttāni sattāhaṃ bhaṇitvā yathāparikammaṃ parittaṃ āṭānāṭiyaparittaṃ bhaṇitabbanti yojanā.
279. Tesaṃ: To laypersons, such as strangers. Kayirā: If they say "recite," one should do it. If they say "we will not do it," if they will be remorseful, it should be done. Nattano: One should connect that one should not do it with one's own thread-water. Thus, having shown the method of proceeding with protection generally, now, in order to show the method of proceeding with the Āṭānāṭiya protection, he said "bhaṇitabbaṃ," etc. Bhaṇāpente: When causing to recite with a request beforehand. Parittaṃ sāsanogadhaṃ: Without reciting the Āṭānāṭiya Sutta first, having recited these suttas included in the Dispensation—the Metta Sutta, the Dhajagga Sutta, and the Ratana Sutta—for a week, one should recite the Āṭānāṭiya Sutta as appropriate to the occasion.
280.‘‘Āgantvā sīlaṃ detu, dhammaṃ parittañca bhāsatū’’ti kenaci pesito gantvā sīlaṃ vā dātuṃ dhammaṃ parittaṃ vā vattuṃ labbhatīti sambandho.
280. It should be connected that if someone is sent, having come, "give the precepts, speak the Dhamma and the protective verses," it is permissible to go to give the precepts or to speak the Dhamma or the protective verses.
Bhesajjaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Description of Medicines is Finished.
37. Uggahaniddesavaṇṇanā
37. The Explanation of the Description of Taking
281.Puggala-saddamatte payutte attanopi gahaṇasambhavo siyāti byabhicāratthaṃañña-saddappayogo. Sati sambhave byabhicāre visesanaṃ sātthakaṃ hotīti.Dasabhedampi ratananti ‘‘muttā maṇi veḷuriyo saṅkho silā pavāḷaṃ rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ lohitaṅko masāragalla’’nti (pāci. 506) evaṃ vuttaṃ dasabhedampi ratanaṃ.Uggaṇhantassāti gaṇhantassa sampaṭicchantassa.
281. The application of the word puggala alone might lead to the possibility of taking for oneself, therefore, the application of the word añña is for the sake of preventing deviation. A qualifier is meaningful when deviation is possible. Dasabhedampi ratanaṃ: Even the ten kinds of gems, as stated, "pearl, gem, beryl, conch, stone, coral, silver, gold, ruby, and agate" (pāci. 506). Uggaṇhantassa: For one who is taking, accepting.
282-3.Tesu attatthaṃ uggaṇhantassa dvīsu nissaggīti sambandho.Tesūti tesu dasasu majjhe.Dvīsūti rajatajātarūpasaṅkhātesu dvīsu nissaggiyavatthūsu.Attatthanti iminā navakammādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ atthāya dukkaṭanti dīpeti.Sesesu dukkaṭanti avasesesu aṭṭhasu sabbesampi atthāya uggaṇhantassa dukkaṭanti attho. Gaṇañca saṅghañca puggalañca anāmasitvā ‘‘cetyassa navakammassa dammī’’ti vutte ca na paṭikkhipeti sambandhanīyaṃ.Na paṭikkhipeti iminā saṅghādiṃ āmasitvā vutte paṭikkhipanaṃ dīpeti. Paṭikkhitte ‘‘kappiyakārakānaṃ vā hatthe bhavissati, mama purisānaṃ mayhameva vā hatthe bhavissati, kevalaṃ tumhe paccaye paribhuñjathā’’ti vadati, vaṭṭati. Catupaccayatthāya ca dinnaṃ yena yena attho hoti, tadatthaṃ upanetabbaṃ. Tesaṃ cīvaratthāya dinnaṃ cīvareyeva upanetabbaṃ. Sace cīvarena tādiso attho natthi, piṇḍapātādīhi saṅgho kilamati, saṅghasuṭṭhutāya apaloketvā tadatthāyapi upanetabbaṃ. Esa nayo piṇḍapātagilānapaccayatthāya dinnepi. Senāsanatthāya dinnaṃ pana garubhaṇḍattā tattheva upanetabbaṃ, senāsanesu nassantesu jagganatthaṃ mūlacchejjaṃ akatvā avissajjetvā yāpanamattaṃ paribhuñjitabbaṃ.
282-3. The connection is that for one who is taking for his own sake among those, there is forfeiture in two. Tesū: Among those ten. Dvīsu: In the two things involving forfeiture, namely, silver and gold. Attatthaṃ: By this, he indicates a dukkata for the sake of the five, namely, new construction, etc. Sesesu dukkaṭaṃ: It means that for one who is taking for all purposes in the remaining eight, there is a dukkata. It should be connected that one should not refuse if it is said, without specifying the group, the Sangha, or the individual, "I am giving it for the new construction of a shrine." Na paṭikkhipe: By this, he indicates refusal when it is said specifying the Sangha, etc. If it is refused, one says, "It will be in the hands of those who do what is allowable, or it will be in the hands of my men or in my own hands; only you should use the requisites," it is permissible. What is given for the sake of the four requisites should be applied for whatever purpose is needed. What is given for the sake of robes should be applied only for robes. If there is no such need for robes, and the Sangha is suffering from lack of alms, etc., having sought approval, it should be applied even for that purpose for the well-being of the Sangha. This method applies even to what is given for the sake of alms and medicines. But what is given for the sake of lodging, because it is heavy property, should be applied there itself; when the lodgings are being destroyed, without making a radical cut to the root, without destroying it, it should be used only to maintain it.
284.Khettādīnaṃ kesañci dukkaṭavatthūnaṃ sampaṭicchanūpāyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘khetta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthakhettanti pubbaṇṇaviruhanaṭṭhānaṃ.Vatthunti aparaṇṇaucchuphalādīnaṃ viruhanaṭṭhānaṃ.Dāsapasvādikanti dāsapasupupphārāmaphalārāmādikaṃ. Paṭikkhipitvā kappiyena kamena ca gaṇheyyāti sambandho.Kappiyena kamena cāti etthakama-saddo vohārappaṭipāṭivacano, tasmā paresaṃ attano ca kappiyavohārakkamenevāti attho.
284. In order to show the means of accepting some things involving a dukkata, such as fields, etc., "khettaṃ," etc., has been said. Therein, khettaṃ: A place for growing grains. Vatthu: A place for growing other grains, sugarcane, fruits, etc. Dāsapasvādikaṃ: Including slaves, animals, flowers, parks, and fruit gardens. The connection is that having refused, one should take it with an allowable procedure. Kappiyena kamena cā: Here, the word "kama" is a term for the order of usage; therefore, it means only with the allowable order of usage for oneself and for others.
khettavatthūsu tāva ‘‘cattāro paccaye paribhuñjathā’’ti vā ‘‘kappiyakārakānaṃ hatthe bhavissatī’’ti vā ‘‘saṅgho kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ bhuñjatū’’ti vā ‘‘sīmaṃ demā’’ti vā parehi vutto, ‘‘sādhu, upāsaka migapakkhino ettha nibbhayā sukhena jīvissantī’’ti attanā vā taḷāke yathāvutteneva ‘‘udakaṃ paribhuñjissanti, bhaṇḍakaṃ dhovissanti, migapakkhino pivissantī’’ti parehi vā ‘‘sādhu, upāsaka, saṅgho pānīyaṃ pivissatī’’tiādinā attanā vādāse‘‘ārāmikaṃ dammi, veyyāvaccakaraṃ dammi, kappiyakārakaṃ dammī’’ti vāpasūsu‘‘pañcagorasaparibhogatthāya dammī’’tiārāme‘‘vanaṃ dammī’’ti evamādinā vutto veditabbo. Sace pana koci abyatto akappiyavohārena khettādiṃ paṭiggaṇhāti vā kāreti vā, taṃ bhikkhūhi na paribhuñjitabbaṃ, taṃ nissāya laddhaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍampi akappiyameva. Abyattena pana lajjībhikkhunā kārāpitesu kiñcāpi paṭiggahaṇaṃ kappiyaṃ, bhikkhussa payogapaccayā uppannena missattā visagatapiṇḍapāto viya, akappiyamaṃsabhojanaṃ viya ca dubbinibbhogaṃ hoti, sabbesaṃ akappiyameva.
Regarding fields and grounds, if someone says, "Partake of the four requisites," or "It will be in the hands of those who do what is allowable," or "Let the Saṅgha partake of allowable goods," or "Let us give a boundary," and one either says oneself, "Good, lay follower, may the animals and birds live here safely and happily," or in regard to a pond, as stated above, either others say, "They will partake of the water, wash their goods, and the animals and birds will drink," or one says oneself, "Good, lay follower, may the Saṅgha drink the water," etc.; or regarding slaves, "I give an ārāmika (monastery attendant), I give one who does service, I give one who does what is allowable;" or regarding cattle, "I give it for the purpose of partaking of the five products of the cow;" or regarding a monastery, "I give a forest" — one should understand it as stated in this way. But if some ignorant person accepts or causes to be accepted a field, etc., with unallowable language, that should not be partaken of by the monks; even allowable goods obtained in dependence on that are unallowable. However, even if an intelligent, conscientious monk has something caused to be accepted, although the acceptance is allowable, due to its being mixed with what arises from the monk’s effort, like alms food mixed with poison, and like the eating of unallowable meat, it is difficult to be disposed of and is unallowable for all.
285-6.Nava…pe… kiriyā ca anave mattikuddhāraṇañca bandho ca āḷiyā thirakāro ca anave kedāre atirekabhāgaggahaṇañca nave ca aparicchinnabhāge sasse ‘‘ettake dethā’’ti kahāpaṇuṭṭhāpanañcāti sabbesampi akappiyanti sambandho. Mātikā ca kedāro ca taḷāko cāti dvando mātika…pe… taḷākā. Tesaṃ kiriyāti samāso.Anaveti catupaccayavasena paṭiggahite purāṇataḷāke. Udakavasena paṭiggahite pana suddhacittānaṃ vaṭṭati.Bandhoti pāḷiyā bandho. Porāṇakedāre niyamitapakatibhāgattā āha‘‘anave’’ti.Aparicchinnabhāgeti ‘‘ettake bhūmibhāge ettako bhāgo dātabbo’’ti evaṃ aparicchinnabhāge.
285-6. "Anave…pe… kiriyā ca anave mattikuddhāraṇañca bandho ca āḷiyā thirakāro ca anave kedāre atirekabhāgaggahaṇañca nave ca aparicchinnabhāge sasse ‘‘ettake dethā’’ti kahāpaṇuṭṭhāpanañca"— all of these are unallowable. Mātikā (seedbed), kedāro (field), and taḷāko (pond) form a dvanda compound: mātika…pe… taḷākā. Tesaṃ kiriyā is a samāsa. Anave means an old pond accepted through the force of the four conditions. However, it is suitable for those with pure intentions if accepted based on water. Bandho is bandho in the Pali. Because of the fixed natural portion in an old field, he says, "anave". Aparicchinnabhāge means in an unapportioned part, "So much of a portion must be given from so much of a land area," in this way.
287-9.‘‘Kasa vappa’’ iccādiṃ avatvā ca ‘‘ettakāya bhūmiyā ettako bhāgo deyyo’’ti bhūmiṃ vā patiṭṭhāpeti, tassevetamakappiyanti sambandho.Ca-saddo avadhāraṇe.Patiṭṭhāpetīti yo bhikkhu patiṭṭhāpeti.Tassevāti tassa patiṭṭhāpakabhikkhusseva.Etanti patiṭṭhāpitabhūmito laddhadhaññaṃ ‘‘ettake bhūmibhāge sassaṃ kataṃ, ettakaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti evaṃ vadante pamāṇagaṇhanatthaṃ daṇḍarajjubhi minane vā khale ṭhatvā rakkhaṇe vā taṃ nīharāpane vā koṭṭhāgārādipaṭisāmane vā etaṃ tasseva akappiyanti sambandhanīyaṃ.Patiṭṭhāpeti cāti so bhikkhu patiṭṭhāpeti ca.Katanti amhehi kataṃ.Vadantevanti evaṃ kassake vadante.Pamāṇanti bhūmippamāṇaṃ.Nīharāpaneti khalato gehassa nīharāpane.Etanti mitaladdharakkhitādikaṃ.Tassevāti mānakarakkhakādino eva. Apubbassa anuppāditattā aññesaṃ kappatīti āha‘‘tassevetamakappiya’’nti.
287-9. Even without saying "Kasa vappa," etc., if he establishes a field, saying, "So much of a portion should be given from so much of the land," that itself is unallowable. The ca emphasizes. Patiṭṭhāpetī means the monk who establishes. Tassevā means only to that establishing monk. Etaṃ means the grain obtained from the established field. "The crop was made in so much of a land area; take so much," while saying this, measuring with rods and ropes for the purpose of taking the measure, or standing and guarding at the threshing floor, or carrying that away, or attending to the storehouse, etc.—this is related to being unallowable only to him. Patiṭṭhāpeti cā means that monk also establishes. Kataṃ means done by us. Vadanteva means while saying thus to the farmer. Pamāṇaṃ means the land measure. Nīharāpane means carrying away from the threshing floor to the house. Etaṃ means what is measured, obtained, guarded, etc. Tassevā means only to the measurer, guarder, etc. Because the new has not been produced, it is allowable for others; thus, he says, "tassevetamakappiya".
290.Paṭisāmanappasaṅgenāha‘‘paṭisāmeyyā’’tiādi. Pitusantakampi gihisantakaṃ yaṃ kiñcīti sambandho.Pitusantakanti pitā ca mātā ca pitaro, tesaṃ santakaṃ.Gihisantakanti iminā pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ santakaṃ yaṃ kiñci parikkhāraṃ paṭisāmetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti.Yaṃ kiñcīti kappiyaṃ akappiyaṃ vā antamaso mātukaṇṇapiḷandhanatālapaṇṇampi.Bhaṇḍāgārikasīsenāti sīsaṅgamiva padhānaṃ yaṃ kiñci ‘‘sīsa’’nti idha upacāravasena vuccati, tathā bhaṇḍāgārikasaddopi bhāvappadhāno, bhaṇḍāgāriko bhaṇḍāgārikattaṃ sīsaṃ padhānanti visesanaparapade kammadhārayo, tena, bhaṇḍāgārikattassa padhānakaraṇenāti attho.
290. In connection with attending to, he says, "paṭisāmeyyā" etc. Whatever belongs to the parents is also lay property—this is the connection. Pitusantakaṃ means what belongs to the father and mother, their property. Gihisantakaṃ means by this, it indicates that it is suitable to return any belonging of the five co-religionists. Yaṃ kiñcī means allowable or unallowable, even as little as a mother-of-pearl ear ornament or a palm leaf. Bhaṇḍāgārikasīsenā means whatever is chief, like a head. Here, "sīsa" (head) is used in a figurative sense. Likewise, the word bhaṇḍāgārika is also prominent in meaning. Bhaṇḍāgāriko bhaṇḍāgārikattaṃ sīsaṃ padhānaṃ is a kammadharaya compound with the latter word qualifying, meaning by making the function of storekeeper prominent.
291-2.Avassaṃ paṭisāmiyanti avassaṃ saṅgopetabbaṃ.Vuttepīti mātāpitūhi vuttepi.
291-2. Avassaṃ paṭisāmiya means it must be collected. Vuttepī means even if said by the parents.
293-4.Vaḍḍhakiādayo vā rājavallabhā vā ‘‘sakaṃ parikkhāraṃ vā sayanabhaṇḍaṃ vā paṭisāmetvā dehī’’ti yadi vadanti, chandatopi bhayāpi na kareyyāti yojanā.Parikkhāranti vāsipharasuādiupakaraṇabhaṇḍaṃ.Chandatopi bhayāpīti vaḍḍhakiādīsu chandena, rājavallabhesu bhayena.
293-4. If carpenters, etc., or royal favorites say, "Return your belongings or bedding and give it," even from desire or fear, one should not do it—this is the connection. Parikkhāraṃ means equipment such as axes and adzes. Chandatopi bhayāpī means from desire in the case of carpenters, etc., and from fear in the case of royal favorites.
295-6.Paṭisāmituṃ vaṭṭatīti yojetabbaṃ.Saṅkantīti yādise padese ‘‘bhikkhūhi vā sāmaṇerehi vā gahitaṃ bhavissatī’’ti saṅkaṃ uppādenti, tādise vihārāvasathassantoti yojanīyaṃ.Vihārāvasathassāti vihārassa ca āvasathassa ca.Ratananti dasavidhaṃ ratanaṃ.Ratnasammatanti vatthādikaṃ.Nikkhipeyyāti sāmike diṭṭhe niyametvā dātuṃ ‘‘ettakā kahāpaṇā’’tiādinānurūpena mattikalañchanādinimittena vā saññāṇaṃ katvā nikkhipeyya.Gahetvānāti tādise asati attanāva gahetvā.Tādiseti ratane vā ratanasammate vā sati.Sāmikānāgamaṃ ñatvāti yadi attani āsaṅkanti, maggā okkamma nisīdiya pacchā sāmikānaṃ anāgamanaṃ viññāya.Patirūpanti ratanasammate paṃsukūlaggahaṇaṃ ratane nirussukkagamananti evarūpaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ anurūpanti.
295-6. It should be connected as "it is suitable to return." Saṅkantī means in whatever place they produce doubt, "It will be taken by monks or novices," that should be connected as within the monastery dwelling. Vihārāvasathassā means of the monastery and the dwelling. Ratanaṃ means the ten kinds of gems. Ratnasammataṃ means cloth, etc. Nikkhipeyyā means when the owner is seen, having determined to give it by setting a limit, having made a sign with a mark of clay, etc., according to what is suitable, such as, "So many kahāpaṇas," one should deposit it. Gahetvānā means having taken it oneself when there is no such owner. Tādise means when there are gems or what is considered a gem. Sāmikānāgamaṃ ñatvā means if there is suspicion in oneself, having left the road and sat down, afterwards knowing that the owners are not coming. Patirūpaṃ means picking up rags in regard to what is considered a gem, and going without being asked in regard to gems—this is suitable for monks.
Uggahaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Uggahaniddesa is finished.
38. Dūsananiddesavaṇṇanā
38. Dūsananiddesavaṇṇanā
297.Dadatoti sasantakaṃ parasantakañca dentassa.Kuladūsanadukkaṭanti attano duppaṭipattiyā kulānaṃ dūsanaṃ pasādavināsanaṃ kuladūsanaṃ, tena dukkaṭaṃ kuladūsanadukkaṭaṃ.
297. Dadato means giving what belongs to oneself and what belongs to others. Kuladūsanadukkaṭaṃ means defiling of families by one's own misconduct, destroying their faith; kuladūsanaṃ. By that, dukkataṃ is kuladūsanadukkaṭaṃ.
298.Ettha saṅghikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ issarena dentassa thullaccayanti sambandho.Etthāti etesaṃ pupphādīnaṃ majjhe.Issarenāti taddhitalopena vuttaṃ, issariyena issaravatāyāti attho.Dentassāti kulasaṅgahatthāya issaravatāya dadato.Thullaccayanti kulasaṅgahatthāya dadato ‘‘kuladūsanadukkaṭa’’nti sāmaññavihitadukkaṭena saddhiṃ ‘‘pañcimāni, bhikkhave, avissajjiyāni, na vissajjetabbāni saṅghena vā gaṇena vā puggalena vā, vissajjitānipi avissajjitāni honti. Yo vissajjeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (cūḷava. 321) evaṃ vuttathullaccayanti attho. Aññattha thullaccayameva. Senāsanatthāya niyamitepi eseva nayo. Saṅghassa santakaṃ theyyā dentassa dukkaṭādīnīti sambandhitabbaṃ.Dentassāti vuttanayameva.Dukkaṭādīnīti kulasaṅgahatthāya dadato kuladūsanadukkaṭena saddhiṃ māsake vā ūnamāsake vā dukkaṭaṃ, atirekamāsake vā ūnapañcamāsake vā thullaccayaṃ, pañcamāsake vā atirekapañcamāsake vā pārājikanti evaṃ dukkaṭādīni hontīti attho. Aññattha dukkaṭādīneva.
298. Here, for one giving heavy Saṅghika goods at will, there is a thullaccaya—this is the connection. Etthā means among these flowers, etc. Issarenā means it is stated by deletion of the taddhita, meaning with authority or possessing power. Dentassā means giving with authority for the purpose of benefitting families. Thullaccayaṃ means giving for the purpose of benefitting families, along with the dukkata generally prescribed as "kuladūsanadukkaṭa," "Monks, these five are not to be distributed; they should not be distributed by the Saṅgha, a group, or an individual. Even if distributed, they are still undistributed. Whoever should distribute them incurs an offense of thullaccaya," (cūḷava. 321) meaning the thullaccaya stated in this way. Elsewhere, it is just a thullaccaya. This same method applies even when specified for the sake of lodging. It should be connected that for one giving what belongs to the Saṅgha as stolen, there are dukkaṭas, etc. Dentassā means in the way stated above. Dukkaṭādīnī means giving for the purpose of benefitting families, along with the kuladūsanadukkaṭa, a dukkaṭa for a māsaka or less than a māsaka, a thullaccaya for more than a māsaka or less than five māsakas, and a pārājika for five māsakas or more than five māsakas—thus, there are dukkaṭas, etc., meaning this. Elsewhere, there are just dukkaṭas, etc.
299-300.Kulasaṅgahatthaṃ phalapupphūpagaṃ rukkhaṃ sabbathā ropetuñca ropāpetuñca jaggituñca na vaṭṭatīti sambandhanīyaṃ.Ca-saddo ocinituṃ ocināpetuṃ, ganthituṃ ganthāpetunti ca avuttāni ca samuccinoti. Phalapupphāni sampādanavasena upagacchatītiphalapupphūpagaṃ. Sabbathāti kappiyavohāraakappiyavohārapariyāyaobhāsanimittakammavasena sabbappakāreneva. Tatthakappiyavohāronāma ‘‘imaṃ rukkhaṃ jāna, imaṃ āvāṭaṃ jāna, imaṃ mālāvacchaṃ jāna, ettha udakaṃ jānā’’ti vacanaṃ, sukkhamātikāya ujukaraṇañca. Tabbipariyāyenaakappiyavohāronāma.Pariyāyonāma ‘‘paṇḍitena mālāvacchādayo ropāpetabbā, na cirasseva upakārāya saṃvattantī’’tiādivacanaṃ.Obhāsonāma kuddālakhaṇittādīni ca mālāvacche ca gahetvā ṭhānaṃ.Nimittakammaṃnāma kuddālaudakabhājanādīnaṃ āharitvā samīpe ṭhapanaṃ.Jaggitunti vadanti udakasecanādīni katvā. Ganthanaganthāpanesu pana sabbāpi cha pupphavikatiyo veditabbā ganthimaṃ gopphimaṃ vedhimaṃ veṭhimaṃ pūrimaṃ vāyimanti. Nāmavaseneva panetesaṃ viseso veditabbo. Taṃ pana kulasaṅgahato aññatrāpi bhikkhussa kātumpi akappiyavacanena kārāpetumpi na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Evaṃ jāna, evaṃ kate sobheyya, yathā etāni pupphāni na vikiriyanti, tathā karohī’’tiādinā pana kappiyavacanena kārāpetuṃ vinā kulasaṅgahaṃ vaṭṭati.Ropanādīnīti akappiyapathaviyaṃ ropāpanasiñcāpanādīni, aññattha ropanādīni.
299-300. For the purpose of benefitting families, it should be connected that it is not suitable to plant, cause to be planted, or tend a tree that bears fruit and flowers in any way. The ca includes picking and causing to be picked, tying and causing to be tied, and what is unstated. Phalapupphūpagaṃ means approaching in terms of producing fruits and flowers. Sabbathā means in every way by way of allowable language, unallowable language, intimation, sign, and action. Here, allowable language means, "Know this tree, know this pit, know this flower garden, know the water here," and straightening dry clay. Unallowable language is the opposite of that. Pariyāyo means a statement such as, "Wise people should have flower gardens, etc., planted; they will soon lead to benefit." Obhāso means taking a hoe, spade, etc., and flower gardens to the place. Nimittakammaṃ means bringing hoes, water pots, etc., and placing them nearby. Jaggituṃ they say means doing watering, etc. In tying and causing to be tied, all six flower variations should be understood: ganthimaṃ, gopphimaṃ, vedhimaṃ, veṭhimaṃ, pūrimaṃ, vāyimaṃ. But the distinction among these should be understood just by their names. However, it is not suitable for a monk to do that for purposes other than benefitting families, or to have it done with unallowable language. However, it is suitable to have it done with allowable language, without benefitting families, such as, "Know thus, it would be beautiful if done thus, do it so that these flowers are not scattered." Ropanādīnī means planting, causing to be planted, and irrigating in unallowable ground; elsewhere, just planting, etc.
301-2.Idāni pupphadānādīsu aṭṭhasu kulasaṅgahavatthūsu avasesāni dve dassetuṃ‘‘vuttāvā’’tiādimāha.Vuttāva micchājīvavivajjanāyaṃ vuttā eva. Jaṅghapesane vinicchayo vuccatīti pāṭhaseso. Pitaro bhaṇḍuṃ sakaṃ veyyāvaccakaraṃ ṭhapetvā gihikammesu dūtasāsanaṃ haraṇe padavārena dukkaṭanti sambandho. Sahadhammikesu vattabbameva natthīti pitādayova vuttā.Gihikammasūti visayasattamī.Padavārenāti padakkamena, pade padeti adhippāyo. Paṭhamaṃ sāsanaṃ aggahetvāpi puna vadato dukkaṭanti yojetabbaṃ.Punāti pacchā. ‘‘Ayaṃ dāni so gāmo, handa naṃ sāsanaṃ ārocemī’’ti maggā okkamantassa ca pade pade vadato ca dukkaṭanti adhippāyo. Tassa pana sāsanaṃ paṭikkhipitvā sayameva kāruññe ṭhitena gantvā attano patirūpaṃ sāsanaṃ ārocetuṃ, ‘‘mama vacanena bhagavato pāde vandathā’’tiādikaṃ gihīnaṃ kappiyasāsanaṃ harituñca vaṭṭati.
301-2. Now, to show the remaining two of the eight ways of benefitting families in giving flowers, etc., he says "vuttāvā" etc. Vuttāva micchājīvavivajjanā is just stated. The decision in sending a messenger is being stated—this is the remainder of the passage. If parents, having placed their own attendant to handle their goods, send a message in lay affairs, there is a dukkata at each step—this is the connection. Only the parents are stated, because there is nothing to say about co-religionists. Gihikammasū is a locative of subject. Padavārenā means step by step, the intention being at each step. It should be connected that there is a dukkata for one speaking again even without taking the message the first time. Punā means afterwards. "Now this is that village, come, let me announce the message to them"—for one leaving the road and for one speaking at each step, there is a dukkata—this is the meaning. However, after rejecting that message, for one standing in compassion and going oneself to announce a suitable message, and for one carrying allowable messages of lay people such as, "Venerate the Blessed One's feet with my words," it is suitable.
303.Abhūtārocanarūpiyasaṃvohāruggahādisāti abhūtārocanāya rūpiyasaṃvohāre ca uggahe uppannapaccaye ādisanti kathenti pakāsentīti abhūtā…pe… hādisā, taṃsadisāti vuttaṃ hoti.
303. Abhūtārocanarūpiyasaṃvohāruggahādisā means like falsely declaring, engaging in monetary transactions, receiving, and saying and making known the conditions that have arisen in receiving; abhūtā…pe… hādisā, that is said to be similar to that.
304.Pitūnaṃ harāpetvā haritvāpi pupphāni vatthupūjatthaṃ dātuṃ, sesañātīnaṃ pattānaṃ vatthupūjatthaṃ dātunti yojanīyaṃ. ‘‘Harāpetvā haritvā’’ti vutte ‘‘pakkositvā pakkosāpetvā vā’’ti vuttameva siyāti na vuttaṃ.Pattānanti pakkosakena pattāpi gahitā.Vatthupūjatthanti ratanattayapūjanatthaṃ. Upāsakānampi pana sampattānaṃ vatthupūjatthaṃ dātuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva.Liṅgādipūjatthanti sivaliṅgagiṇḍubimbādipūjanatthaṃ.
304. One should connect it as, having had flowers brought and bringing them oneself, one may give them for the purpose of honoring objects; one may give remaining relatives bowls for the purpose of honoring objects. Since it is stated "harāpetvā haritvā," it is already stated as "pakkositvā pakkosāpetvā vā," so it is not stated. Pattānaṃ means even bowls are taken by the messenger. Vatthupūjatthaṃ means for the purpose of honoring the Triple Gem. However, it is certainly suitable to give to lay followers who have arrived for the purpose of honoring objects. Liṅgādipūjatthaṃ means for the purpose of honoring the sivaliṅga, ball images, etc.
305.Tathā phalanti iminā pupphe vuttaṃ sabbaṃ apadisati.Paribbayavihīnānanti paribbayaṃ pātheyyaṃ vihīnaṃ naṭṭhaṃ yesaṃ āgantukānanti samāso.Saparanti attano vissāsikā.Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437) pana ‘‘attano santakaṃyevā’’ti vacanaṃ thullaccayādivibhāgato mocetvā vuttaṃ.
305. Tathā phalaṃ means by this, he indicates everything stated about flowers. Paribbayavihīnānaṃ is a compound meaning for the visitors whose travel expenses are gone, destroyed, or lost. Sapara means one's own trusted people. However, in the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437), the statement "attano santakaṃyeva" is said excluding the divisions of thullaccaya, etc.
306.Sammatena deyyanti yojanā.Deyyanti catutthabhāgaṃ dātabbaṃ. Itarena tu apaloketvā dātabbanti sambandhitabbaṃ.Itarena tuasammatena pana.
306. One should connect it as "with consent, it may be given." Deyyaṃ means one-fourth should be given. On the other hand, it should be connected that it should be given after informing it to the others. Itarena tu means however, without consent.
307.Paricchijjāti ‘‘ettakāni phalāni dātabbānī’’ti evaṃ phalaparicchedena vā ‘‘imehi rukkhehi dātabbānī’’ti evaṃ rukkhaparicchedena vā paricchinditvā.Tatoti paricchinnaphalato rukkhato vā. Yācamānassa gilānassetarassa vāti sambandhanīyaṃ.Rukkhāva dassiyāti ‘‘idha phalāni sundarāni, ito gaṇhathā’’ti avatvā ‘‘ito gahetuṃ labbhatī’’ti rukkhā vā dassetabbā.
307. Paricchijjā means having apportioned, either by apportionment of fruits, "So many fruits should be given," or by apportionment of trees, "They should be given from these trees." Tato means from those apportioned fruits or trees. It should be connected as, "to one asking, to the sick one, or to another." Rukkhāva dassiyā means without saying, "Here the fruits are beautiful; take them from here," rather the trees themselves should be shown, "It is permissible to take them from here."
308.Idāni aṭṭhasu pupphādīnaṃ catunnaṃ vinicchayaṃ dassetvā yathāvuttaphalapupphavinicchayaṃ avasesesu catūsu apadisanto‘‘sirīsā’’tiādimāha.Sirīsacuṇṇakasavādicuṇṇeti kasāvaṃ yaṃ kiñci ādi yassa, tameva cuṇṇaṃ, sirīsacuṇṇañca kasāvādicuṇṇañcāti samāso. ‘‘Sirīsacuṇṇaṃ vā aññaṃ vā kasāva’’nti hiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kasāvādī’’ti vattabbe rassena vuttaṃ.Sesesūti veḷuādīsu tīsu. Pāḷiyā avuttassāpiaṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttattā āha‘‘paṇṇampettha pavesaye’’ti.Etthāti pupphādīsūti.
308. Now, after showing the decision for four of the eight flowers, etc., in regard to the remaining four, indicating the decision about fruits and flowers as stated above, he says "sirīsā" etc. Sirīsacuṇṇakasavādicuṇṇe means whatever astringent is the beginning of it, that itself is powder; sirīsa powder and astringent powder—this is a compound. "Sirīsa powder or other astringent" is said in the Aṭṭhakathā (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.436-437). It is said with a short vowel when "Kasāvādī" should be said. Sesesū means in the three, bamboo, etc. Because it is said in the Aṭṭhakathā even though unstated in the Pali, he says, "paṇṇampettha pavesaye". Etthā means in flowers, etc.
Dūsananiddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
Explanation of the Dūsananiddesa is finished.
39. Vassūpanāyikaniddesavaṇṇanā
39. Vassūpanāyikaniddesavaṇṇanā
309-310.Purimikā pacchimikā iti vassūpanāyikā duveti sambandho. Āsāḷhipuṇṇamāya anantare pāṭipadadivase upagantabbā pacchimikāya pure bhavāti purimā, sā evapurimikā. Tato pacchā bhavā aparāya puṇṇamāya anantare pāṭipadadivase upagantabbāpacchimikā. Upanayanaṃ pāpuṇanaṃ upagamanaṃ upanāyikā,vassanti vuṭṭhi, idha pana vassakālaṃ ‘‘vassa’’nti upacārena gahetvā tattha vāso upacāreneva ‘‘vassa’’nti vuccati, vassassa vassāvāsassa upanāyikā vacībhedavasena vā ālayakaraṇavasena vā upagamanaṃvassūpanāyikā. Tattha ālayapariggāho ca vacībhedo cāti purimikā vassūpanāyikā duve, ālayapariggāho ca vacībhedo cāti pacchimikā vassūpanāyikā duvebhi sambandhitabbaṃ.Tatthāti tāsu dvīsu. Tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘ediso’’tiādi vuttaṃ. So ālayapariggāho ca vacībhedo ca ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemi, idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti ediso, etādisoti attho. Ettha ca kamuppattianādarā vacībhedo paṭhamaṃ vutto. Ubhayathā vassaṃ upagantuṃ vaṭṭati. Tenevaaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. 179; mahāva. aṭṭha. 207) ‘‘sacepi ‘idha vassaṃ vasissāmī’ti ālayo atthi, asatiyā pana vassaṃ na upeti, gahitasenāsanaṃ suggahitaṃ, chinnavasso na hoti, pavāretuṃ labhatiyeva, vināpi hi vacībhedaṃ ālayakaraṇamattenapi vassaṃ upagatameva hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Nāvāsatthavajesu pana pariyesitvā senāsanaṃ alabhantena ālayakaraṇamatteneva upagantabbaṃ. Upagacchantena ca vihāraṃ paṭijaggitvā pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetvā sabbaṃ cetiyavandanādisāmīcikammaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā upagantabbaṃ. Ālayapariggahe ālayaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘cittuppādettha ālayo’’ti āha.Etthāti dvīsu.
309-310. Purimikā pacchimikā—the earlier and later—thus there are two vassūpanāyikā. The earlier (purimā) is so called because it is before (pure) the later one and is to be undertaken on the day after the Āsāḷhī full-moon day; that is, it is the ** purimikā. The later (pacchimikā) is so called because it occurs after that, to be undertaken on the day after the other full-moon day. Upanāyanam means reaching, approaching, and upanāyikā means that which leads to. ** Vassa means rain, but here the rainy season is figuratively called "vassa," and the dwelling there is figuratively called "vassa." Thus, vassūpanāyikā means the approach to the rains residence, or the undertaking of the rains residence, according to the difference in declaration, or according to the act of intending to stay. Here, there are two earlier rains residences: the taking hold of intention and the difference in declaration. Two later rains residences: the taking hold of intention and the difference in declaration should be related. ** Tattha means in those two. To show both of them, “ ediso” etc., was said. That taking hold of intention and the difference in declaration is "In this monastery, I will undertake the rains for these three months; I will undertake the rains here," that is the meaning of ediso and etādiso. Here, the difference in declaration is mentioned first, without regard to the order of origination. It is allowable to undertake the rains in either way. Therefore, in the Aṭṭhakathā(vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. 179; mahāva. aṭṭha. 207) it was said: "Even if there is the intention 'I will dwell here during the rains,' but he does not undertake the rains, the lodging obtained is well-obtained, he is not one whose rains residence is broken, and he is allowed to invite. For even without a difference in declaration, merely by the act of intending to stay, he has undertaken the rains." However, in ships and caravans, one who cannot obtain a lodging after searching should undertake it merely by the act of intending to stay. And when undertaking it, one should sweep the monastery, prepare drinking water and water for use, complete all the duties such as worshipping the cetiya, and then undertake it. In regard to the taking hold of intention, to show the intention, he said, “ cittuppādettha ālayo”. ** Ettha means in the two.
311.Tadahūti tasmiṃ vassūpanāyikadivase.Jānanti ‘‘ajja vassūpanāyikā’’ti jānanto,anupagacchatotimassa visesanaṃ.
311. ** Tadahū means on that vassūpanāyikā day. ** Jāna means knowing "today is vassūpanāyikā"; ** anupagacchato** is a specification of him.
312.Dutiyanti pacchimikaṃ.Anupagatoti kenaci antarāyena purimikaṃ anupagato.Temāsanti purimaṃ vā temāsaṃ pacchimaṃ vā temāsaṃ. Vassaṃ upagantvā pana aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvāpi tadaheva sattāhakaraṇīyena pakkamantassāpi antosattāhe nivattentassāpi anāpatti.
312. ** Dutiya means the later one. ** Anupagato means one who did not undertake the earlier one due to some impediment. ** Temāsa** means either the earlier three months or the later three months. But after undertaking the rains residence, even if one departs on the same day with a seven-day allowable reason without establishing the dawn, or even if one returns within seven days, there is no offense.
313-5.Mātāpitūnaṃ pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānañca atthāya gilānatadupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ osadhañca esissaṃ vā pucchissāmi vā upaṭṭhissaṃ vā gantvā ahaṃ nābhirataṃ vūpakāsessaṃ vā kukkuccaṃ vinodanañca diṭṭhiṃ vivecanañca garukādikaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ vāpi ussukkaṃ vāpi karissaṃ vāpi kāressaṃ vāpīti evamādinā sattāhakiccena pahitepi vā apahitepi vā gantuṃ labbhanti yojanā.
313-5. "For the sake of mother and father, the five co-religionists, and for the sake of the sick person, the one attending to him, and for food and medicine, I will seek, or I will ask, or I will attend, or having gone, I will dispel lack of delight, or I will dispel worry, and discernment of view, or a serious matter, or rising up, or eagerness, I will do or I will have done"—even when sent or not sent with such a seven-day duty, it is allowable to go, is the connection.
Osadhanti tesaṃyeva gilānānaṃ bhesajjaṃ.Esissanti pariyesissāmi.Pucchissāmīti teyeva sattajane gilāne pucchissaṃ.Upaṭṭhissanti teyeva gilāne upaṭṭhahissāmi. Abhiramatīti abhirato, visabhāgarūpādidassanena sāsane na abhiratonābhirato. Abhiramaṇaṃ vā abhirataṃ, natthi abhiratamassātinābhirato,taṃ. Sahadhammikesu yo nābhirato, taṃvūpakāsessaṃvikkhepaharaṇatthaṃ aññattha nayissāmi.Kukkuccanti pañcannaṃyeva uppannaṃ vinayakukkuccaṃ. Kitakayoge vikappena dutiyā.Diṭṭhinti tesaṃyeva micchādiṭṭhiyā.Garukamādikanti garukaṃ ādi yassāti viggaho.Ādi-saddena sāmaṇerānaṃ vassapucchanaṃ, sikkhāsamādayitukāmatā, tajjanīyādikammakaraṇaṃ saṅgahitaṃ.Vuṭṭhānanti bhikkhuno garukāpattiyā parivāsamānattadānādīhi vuṭṭhānaṃ.Ussukkanti vassapucchanādiussukkaṃ.Evamādināti etthaādi-saddena diṭṭhigatādīnaṃ dhammakathākaraṇādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Gantuṃ labbhanti ettha gacchantena antoupacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhiteneva ‘‘antosattāhe āgacchissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ katvā gantabbaṃ. Sace ābhogaṃ akatvā upacārasīmaṃ atikkamati, chinnavasso hotīti vadanti.Sattāhakiccenāti sattāhassa labbhamānakaṃ vuttaṃ vakkhamānañca saṅghakammādi kiccaṃ sattāhakiccaṃ. Sattamaaruṇamattasseva vihāre uṭṭhāpanīyattā sattāhassa sākallena gahaṇaṃ.
** Osadha means medicine for those sick people. ** Esissa means I will seek. ** Pucchissāmī means I will ask those seven sick people. ** Upaṭṭhissa means I will attend to those sick people. One who does not delight is nabhirato; one who does not delight in the Teaching by seeing dissimilar forms, etc., is ** nābhirato. Or, delighting is abhirataṃ; there is no delighting for him, thus he is ** nābhirato, that one. Among the co-religionists, one who does not delight, I will lead that ** vūpakāsessaṃ elsewhere for the purpose of dispelling distraction. ** Kukkucca means worry regarding the Discipline that has arisen in those five people. In the style of the kitaka (interrogative), the accusative case is used alternatively. ** Diṭṭhi means for those same people, with wrong view etc. ** Garukamādika means garukaṃ ādi yassa, that of which the serious is the beginning. With the word ** ādi, asking about the rains residence of novices, the desire to undertake training, and doing actions such as censure, are included. ** Vuṭṭhāna means rising up from a serious offense of a monk by means of parivāsa, granting mānatta, etc. ** Ussukka means eagerness for asking about the rains residence, etc. ** Evamādinā—here, with the word ** ādi, he includes things such as giving a Dhamma talk about views, etc. ** Gantuṃ labbha—here, when going, one should go having made a determination "I will return within seven days," while standing within the boundary of the vicinity. They say that if one crosses the boundary of the vicinity without making a determination, his rains residence is broken. ** Sattāhakiccenā means the duty pertaining to seven days, the duty pertaining to Saṅgha actions, etc., that has been said and will be said, is sattāhakiccaṃ. Since it is only at the seventh dawn that he has to rise in the monastery, the taking of the entirety of the seven days.
316.Saṅghakamme vajeti saṅghassa kicce uposathāgārādīsu senāsanesu vā cetiyachattavedikādīsu vā antamaso puggalikasenāsanesu vāpi kattabbanimitte vajeyyāti attho. Dhammasavanatthaṃ nimantito vāpi vaje, garūhi pesito vāpi vaje, garūnaṃ passituṃ vāpi vajeti yojetabbaṃ.Nimantitoti ettha sace paṭhamaṃyeva katikā katā hoti, ‘‘asukadivasaṃ nāma sannipatitabba’’nti nimantitoyeva nāma hoti.Garūhīti ācariyupajjhāyehi.Pahitoti bhaṇḍadhovanādiatthāya pesito.Passitunti agilānepi.
316. ** Saṅghakamme vaje means he should strive for a duty of the Saṅgha, in the uposatha hall, etc., or in lodgings, or in connection with cetiya umbrellas and vedikās, or even at least in individual lodgings. Or he should strive when invited for the sake of hearing the Dhamma, or he should strive when sent by superiors, or he should strive to see superiors; it should be connected. ** Nimantito—here, if an agreement has already been made, "on such and such a day, it should be assembled," he is indeed called one who is invited. ** Garūhī—by preceptors and teachers. ** Pahito—sent for the sake of washing robes, etc. ** Passitu**—even if not sick.
317.Bhaṇḍa…pe… dassane na vajeti yojanīyaṃ. Etthāpi nimittatthe sattamī.Bhaṇḍaṃnāma cīvaraṃ.Ñātīmātāpitūhi aññe.Upaṭṭhākāupāsakā. ‘‘Ajjeva āgamissa’’nti adūrago na pāpuṇeyya, labbhanti sambandho.Labbhanti imassa apāpuṇanaṃ vuttakammaṃ.Ajjevāgamissanti sāmantavihāraṃ gantvā puna āgacchantassa antarāmagge sace aruṇuggamanaṃ hoti, vassacchedopi na hoti, ratticchedadukkaṭañca natthīti vadanti.
317. Bhaṇḍa…pe… dassane na vajeti should be connected. Here also, the seventh case is in the sense of cause. ** Bhaṇḍaṃ means robe. ** Ñātī means relatives other than mother and father. ** Upaṭṭhākā means lay supporters. "He should not reach [there] if he is one who is near, thinking, 'I will come today itself'"; the connection is that it is allowable. ** Labbha is the object of the verb said, apāpuṇanaṃ (not reaching). ** Ajjevāgamissa**—if, when going to a neighboring monastery and returning again, dawn breaks on the way, there is no breaking of the rains residence, and they say that there is no offense of a broken night.
318.Sesañātīhīti mātāpitūhi avasesañātīhi.Niddisitvāvāti dānadhammasavanādīni. ‘‘Pahite pesite’’ti cettha ‘‘labbha’’nti anuvattanīyaṃ.
318. ** Sesañātīhī—by relatives other than mother and father. ** Niddisitvāvā—dāna, Dhamma hearing, etc. "Pahite pesite"ti—here, "labbha" should be carried forward.
319.Attano antarāye satīti corasarīsapavāḷajīvitabrahmacariyantarāye, antamaso bhesajjālābhapatirūpaupaṭṭhākālābhepi. ‘‘Vassacchedakāraṇampi sattāhakaraṇīyaṃ siyā’’ti keci porāṇā vadanti, taṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati, sabbathā vassacchedena bahi vāsāya anuññātakāraṇaṃ sattāhamattaṃ bahi vītināmetvā antovihāreyeva vāsena vassacchedākāraṇaṃ kathaṃ nāma na siyāti. Chinnavasso no pavārayeti sambandho.
319. ** Attano antarāye satī—when there is an obstacle to oneself: robbers, snakes, etc., danger to life and the brahmacariya, or at least, lack of medicine and a suitable attendant. Some elders say, "The reason for breaking the rains residence could be a seven-day allowable reason," that seems fitting, for in every way, how could a reason for breaking the rains residence not be a reason when he is allowed to spend up to seven days outside for a reason for breaking the rains residence, and then spend time in the monastery itself without breaking the rains residence? Chinnavasso no pavārayeti is the connection.
320.‘‘Asenāsanikenā’’ti imināva viññāyamānatthattepi‘‘ajjhokāse cā’’ti vacanaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ abbhokāsiko, kiṃ me senāsanenā’’ti vāsānivattanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.Rukkhassa susireti suddhe rukkhasusire. Mahantassa pana susirassa anto padaracchadanakuṭikaṃ katvā pavisanadvāraṃ yojetvā upagantuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Viṭapepi aṭṭakaṃ bandhitvā’’tiādi vuttanayameva. Tathā chattacāṭīsupi tadanurūpena veditabbaṃ.Chavakuṭināma ṭaṅkitamañcādibhedā kuṭi. Tatthaṭaṅkitamañconāma dīghe mañcapāde majjhe vijjhitvā aṭaniyo pavesetvā kato, catunnaṃ pāsāṇānaṃ upari pāsāṇaṃ attharitvā katampi ṭaṅkitamañco.
320. Even though the meaning is understood by “ asenāsanikenā, the statement “ ajjhokāse cā” was said to prevent the thought, "I am an open-air dweller; what need have I of a lodging?" ** Rukkhassa susire means in a clean tree hollow. But it is allowable to enter a large hollow after making a padaracchadana hut and attaching an entrance door. "Viṭapepi aṭṭakaṃ bandhitvā"tiādi [should be understood] in the manner said. Likewise, it should be understood in regard to umbrella huts, etc., according to that. ** Chavakuṭi means a hut of the type of a mortuary cot, etc. There, ** ṭaṅkitamañco means a cot whose long legs have holes drilled in the middle and pegs inserted; a ṭaṅkitamañco is also one that is made by spreading stones over four stones.
321.Asenāsanikenāti yassa tiṇapaṇṇaiṭṭhakasilāsudhāsaṅkhātānaṃ pañcannaṃ chadanānaṃ aññatarena channaṃ yojitadvārabandhanaṃ senāsanaṃ natthi, tena. Idaṃ pana vacībhedaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttanti vadanti, tadayuttaṃ, tathā ca sati nāvādīsu viya visuṃ vidhānena bhavitabbanti.Nāvāsatthavajūpagoti iminā asenāsanikena nāvādīsu vassaṃ upagantuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. Tattha ca kuṭikaṃ pariyesitvā labhantena tattha pavisitvā vihārābhāvato ‘‘vihāre’’ti avatvā ‘‘idha vassaṃ upemī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ, alabhantena ālayo kātabbo.Pavāretuñcātica-saddena vassacchedanimittāya āpattiyā abhāvaṃ sampiṇḍeti. ‘‘Vaje satthe nāvāyanti tīsu ṭhānesu natthi vassacchede āpatti, pavāretuñca labbhatī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 203)aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttaṃ. Vassacchedeti ca ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, yena vajo tena gantu’’nti (mahāva. 203) vuttattā, satthassa nāvāya ca gamanasabhāveneva ṭhitattā ca vassūpagataṭṭhāne avasitvā aññattha gamanamattaṃ sandhāya vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
321. ** Asenāsanikenā—by one for whom there is no lodging with a roof made of one of the five: grass, leaves, bricks, stones, or plaster, and with an attached doorframe. They say that this was said in reference to the determination after making a declaration, but that is not right, for if that were so, it should be a separate rule, as in the case of ships, etc. By ** nāvāsatthavajūpago, he shows that it is allowable for one without a lodging to undertake the rains residence in ships, etc. And there, if one obtains a hut after searching for it, he should enter there and say three times, "I will undertake the rains here," not saying "in the monastery," because there is no monastery; if he does not obtain one, he should make an intention. ** Pavāretuñcā—the ** ca includes the absence of an offense due to breaking the rains residence. In the Aṭṭhakathā it was said, "In three places—'he should strive in a caravan, in a ship'—there is no offense of breaking the rains residence, and it is allowable to invite" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 203). And "vassaccheda" (breaking the rains residence) should be understood as referring to merely going elsewhere after staying in the place where the rains residence was undertaken, because it was said, "I allow, monks, to go by whatever means one strives" (mahāva. 203), and because the nature of caravans and ships is to be traveling.
Vassūpanāyikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Rains Residence Undertaking is Finished.
40. Avebhaṅgiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
40. Explanation of the Non-Divisible Items
322-5.Ārāmā…pe… mattikabhaṇḍānīti ete pañca avibhājiyāti sambandhitabbaṃ.Pañcāti ‘‘ārāmārāmavatthūni eka’’ntiādinā rāsivasena pañca, sarūpavasena panetāni paṇṇaṃ tiṇe pakkhipitvā pañcavīsatividhāni honti. Tathā cāha –
322-5. Ārāmā…pe… mattikabhaṇḍānīti—these five should be connected as being non-divisible. ** Pañcā**—five by way of aggregates, as in "ārāmārāmavatthūni eka" (monastery and monastery grounds are one), etc., but in terms of their own form, these become twenty-five-fold, having placed a leaf into the grass. And thus he said—
‘‘Dvisaṅgahāni dve honti, tatiyaṃ catusaṅgahaṃ;
"Two are two-fold in inclusion, the third is four-fold in inclusion;
The fourth has nine sections, the fifth has eight divisions.
‘‘Iti pañcahi rāsīhi, pañcanimmalalocano;
"Thus, with five aggregates, the five-eyed one without stain;
The Lord proclaimed the twenty-five-fold, weighty property." (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 321);
ārāmonāma pupphārāmo vā phalārāmo vā.Ārāmavatthunāma tesaṃyeva patiṭṭhānokāso, vinaṭṭhesu vā tesu porāṇakabhūmibhāgo.Vihāronāma pāsādādi yaṃ kiñci senāsanaṃ.Lohakumbhīnāma kāḷalohena vā tambalohena vā katakumbhī.Kaṭāhādīsupi eseva nayo. Etthabhāṇakanti arañjaro vuccati.Vārakoti ghaṭo. Rāsiṃ apekkhitvāeteti pulliṅganiddeso.Avibhājiyāti mūlacchejjavasena avebhaṅgiyā. Parivattanavasena pana paribhuñjantassa vissajjentassa ca anāpatti.Avissajjiyāni cātica-saddena avebhaṅgiyāni cāti avuttaṃ sampiṇḍeti.
** ārāmo means either a flower garden or a fruit garden. ** Ārāmavatthu means the location where those same things are established, or the old ground area when those things are destroyed. ** Vihāro means any lodging whatsoever, such as a palace. ** Lohakumbhī means a metal pot made of black iron or copper. The same method applies to ** kaṭāhādī (cauldrons, etc.). Here, ** bhāṇaka means one who lives in the forest. ** Vārako means a water pot. The masculine gender of ** ete is in relation to the aggregate. ** Avibhājiyā means non-divisible in the sense of not being able to be cut at the root. However, there is no offense for one who uses, gives away, in terms of change. ** Avissajjiyāni cā—the ** ca includes what was not said: avebhaṅgiyāni (non-surrendered)..
326-8.Ekantagarubhaṇḍattā ādito tayo rāsī ṭhapetvā catuttharāsito paṭṭhāya garubhaṇḍāgarubhaṇḍe vibhajituṃ‘‘vallī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Aḍḍhabāhumattāpi valli ca aṭṭhaṅgulāyato veḷu ca muṭṭhimattampi tiṇādi ca ekampi paṇṇañca pākatā vā pañcavaṇṇā vā tālapakkappamāṇāpi mattikā ca tālapakkappamāṇāpi sudhā ca tālapakkappamāṇāpi kaṅguṭṭhaādikā ca dinnā vā tatthajātakā vā saṅghikā rakkhitā abhājiyā, rajjuyottādi ca dinnā saṅghikā abhājiyāti yojanā.Veḷupariṇāhato paṇṇasūcidaṇḍamatto gahetabbo.Tiṇaṃmuñjaṃ pabbajañca ādisaddasaṅgahitaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ yaṃ kiñci tiṇaṃ.Paṇṇoaṭṭhaṅgulappamāṇo rittapotthako garubhaṇḍameva.Pākatāti pakatiyā jātā.Pañcavaṇṇāti rattasetādipañcavaṇṇā. Sudhākaṅguṭṭhādayo mattikaggahaṇena gahitā.Kaṅguṭṭhaādikātiādi-saddena sajjurasajātihiṅgulakādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ.Dinnāti saṅghassa dinnā.Tatthajātāti saṅghikabhūmiyaṃ jātā.Rajjuyottādīti suttamakacivākanāḷikerahīracammamayā rajju ca yottādi ca.Ādi-saddena makacivākādike vaṭṭetvā katā ekavaṭṭā gahitā. Byatirekavasena panettha catuttharāsimhi itare bhājiyāti veditabbā. Saṅghike kamme, cetiyassa vā kamme niṭṭhite bhājiyāti yojanīyaṃ.
326-8. Having set aside the first three aggregates because they are entirely weighty property, starting from the fourth aggregate, to divide what is weighty property and not weighty property, “ vallī” etc., was begun. A creeper even half a cubit in length, a bamboo even eight fingerbreadths long, grass, etc., even the size of a fist, even one leaf, naturally produced or five-colored, clay even the size of a palm-leaf, plaster even the size of a palm-leaf, kaṅguṭṭha, etc., given or born there, belonging to the Saṅgha, kept, are not to be divided; and rope, etc., given, belonging to the Saṅgha, are not to be divided, is the connection. ** Veḷu—a bamboo the size of a needle for sewing leaves should be taken. ** Tiṇaṃ—excluding muñja grass and pabbaja grass, which are included by the word "ādi," any grass whatsoever. ** Paṇṇo—a leaf about eight fingerbreadths in size, an empty book, is weighty property itself. ** Pākatā—naturally produced. ** Pañcavaṇṇā—five colors such as red and white. Plaster, kaṅguṭṭha, etc., are included by the mention of clay. ** Kaṅguṭṭhaādikā—with the word ** ādi, the taking of sajjura resin, sajāti resin, hiṅgulaka, etc. ** Dinnā—given to the Saṅgha. ** Tatthajātā—born in Saṅgha land. ** Rajjuyottādī—rope made of thread, fiber, cīvaka, coconut husk, leather, and yoke, etc. With the word ** ādi, a single-strand rope that is made by twisting makaci, vākā, etc., is taken. Here, in the fourth aggregate, others should be understood as divisible by way of exception. It should be connected as, "They are divisible when the duty of the Saṅgha or the duty of the cetiya is completed."
329.Lohabhaṇḍesu bhikkhusāruppaṃ pattādi vā tathā vippakatākataṃ lohabhaṇḍaṃ tathā pādagaṇhakaṃ vārakaṃ bhājiyanti yojanā.Pattādīti ayopatto ayathālakaṃ tambalohathālakaṃ añjanisalākā kaṇṇamalaharaṇī sūci paṇṇasūci khuddako pipphalako khuddakaṃ ārakaṇḍakaṃ kuñcikā tāḷādi.Vippakatanti apariniṭṭhitaṃ.Akatanti sabbaso akataṃ.Pādagaṇhakanti sīhaḷadīpe pādagaṇhanakaṃ.Pādonāma catutthaṃso, magadhanāḷiyā pañcanāḷimattā.Magadhanāḷica nāmesā ūnapañcapasatā veditabbā. Tathā ghaṭako telabhājanañca. Yāya vāsiyā ṭhapetvā dantakaṭṭhacchedanaṃ vā ucchutacchanaṃ vā aññaṃ mahākammaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, ayaṃ bhājiyā. Sammuñjanidaṇḍakhaṇanakaṃ pana adaṇḍakaṃ phalamattameva, yaṃ sakkā sipāṭikāya pakkhipitvā pariharituṃ, ayaṃ bhājanīyā. Tipukoṭṭakaupakaraṇesu tipucchedanakasatthakaṃ suvaṇṇakārūpakaraṇesu suvaṇṇacchedanakasatthakaṃ cammakāraupakaraṇesu cammachindanakaṃ khuddakasatthaṃ nahāpitatuṇṇakāraupakaraṇesu ṭhapetvā mahākattariṃ mahāsaṇḍāsañca mahāpipphalakañca sabbāni bhājanīyabhaṇḍāni. Tathā kuñcikā. Vuttavipallāsena pana lohabhaṇḍe abhājiyāti veditabbā.
329. As for metal objects, the proper form for a bhikkhu is a bowl etc., or unfinished or completely unmade metal objects, as well as a foot-wiper and a water pot; the meaning is to be understood. Pattādī: means an iron bowl that is not smooth, a copper bowl, an ointment stick, an earwax remover, a needle, a leaf needle, a small tube, a small awl, a key, a lock, etc. Vippakata: means unfinished. Akata: means completely unmade. Pādagaṇhaka: means a foot-wiper in Sri Lanka. Pādo means a fourth part, five Magadhan nāḷis in measure. And this Magadhan nāḷi should be understood as just under five pasatas. Likewise, a pot and an oil container. An axe with which, having placed [wood], cutting toothpicks or scraping sugarcane or another major task cannot be done, this is bhājiya (allowed to be kept). But a broom handle for digging, or just the blade without a handle, which can be put into a bag and carried around, this is bhājanīya (not allowed to be kept). Among tools with three points, a knife for cutting three points; among goldsmith's tools, a knife for cutting gold; among leatherworker's tools, a small knife for cutting leather; having excluded barbers' and surgeons' tools, a large pair of scissors, large tongs, and a large tube are all items that are bhājanīya. Likewise, a key. But with the statement reversed, it should be understood that metal objects are abhājiya (not allowed to be kept).
330.‘‘Veḷumhī’’tiādinā dārubhaṇḍāni dasseti. Dārubhaṇḍena pana saṅgahetvā sabbāpi dāruveḷucammupāhanādivikati veditabbā. Chattadaṇḍo ca salākā cāti dvando. Upāhanāya daṇḍakoupāhanadaṇḍako.
330.‘‘Veḷumhī’’ etc., indicates wooden items. By including wooden items, all transformations made of wood, bamboo, leather shoes, etc., should be understood. Chattadaṇḍo ca salākā cāti is a dvanda compound. A stick for shoes is upāhanadaṇḍako.
331.Anuññātavāsidaṇḍoti anuññātavāsiyā daṇḍo.Araṇañjanisiṅgādītiādi-saddena añjanisalākā chattaṃ muṭṭhipaṇṇaṃ upāhanā dhammakaraṇo pādagaṇhanakato anatirittaṃ āmalakatumbaṃ āmalakaghaṭo lābukatumbaṃ lābukaghaṭo visāṇatumbanti idaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
331.Anuññātavāsidaṇḍo: means a stick for an allowed walking stick. Araṇañjanisiṅgādī: The ādi (etc.) includes an ointment stick, an umbrella, a palm-leaf fan, shoes, a water filter, a foot-wiper, a not-too-large Emblic myrobalan gourd, an Emblic myrobalan pot, a bottle gourd, a bottle gourd pot, and a horn gourd.
332.Yathāvuttato aññaṃ dārubhaṇḍesu garubhaṇḍaṃ. Mattikāmayo pādaghaṭako bhājiyoti yojanā.Pādaghaṭakoti pādassa pahonako ghaṭako. Iminā mattikābhaṇḍaṃ upalakkheti, tasmā patto thālakaṃ kuṇḍikāti imāni bhājanīyāni, vuttāvasesā abhājiyā.
332.Other than what has been said, among wooden items, a heavy item. A clay foot-pot is bhājiyo; the meaning is to be understood. Pādaghaṭako: means a pot suitable for the foot. With this, clay items are indicated; therefore, a bowl, a plate, and a water pot are bhājanīya; the remaining ones that have been mentioned are abhājiya.
333-4.Garunā garubhaṇḍañca thāvarañca parivatteyya, thāvarena ca thāvarampi parivatteyyāti yojetabbaṃ.Garunāmañcapīṭhādinā.Thāvaranti ārāmādi paṭhamarāsidvayaṃ.Tathā katvā ca bhuñjitunti evañca parivattetvā tato ābhataṃ kappiyabhaṇḍaṃ paribhuñjeyyāti attho, vidhimhi ayaṃ tuṃpaccayo. Phātikammena vallādiṃ gaṇheti sambandhanīyaṃ.Phātikammaṃnāma samakaṃ vā atirekaṃ vā tadagghanakaṃ vā vaḍḍhikammaṃ.Sesanti paṭhamarāsittikanti.
333-4.One should exchange a garu item with a garu item, and a thāvara item with a thāvara item; it should be connected. Garunā: with a chair, a table, etc. Thāvara: means the first two categories, such as a monastery etc. Tathā katvā ca bhuñjituṃ: And having exchanged in this way, one should then use the kappiya items that have been brought; this is the meaning. Here, the tuṃ suffix is in the sense of a rule. With phātikamma, one should include creepers etc., that are suitable for tying. Phātikammaṃ: means an increase in value, whether equal, exceeding, or of that worth. Sesaṃ: means the first three categories.
Avebhaṅgiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The commentary on the Avebhaṅgiya Niddesa is finished.
41. Pakiṇṇakaniddesavaṇṇanā
41. Pakiṇṇaka Niddesa Commentary
335.Sadvārabandhane sodukkhalakapāsake ṭhāne divā sayantena parivattakaṃ dvāraṃ bandheyyāti sambandho. Dvārañca dvārabandhanañca dvārabandhanāni majjhepadalopavasena, bandhana-saddeneva vā dvārabāhā vuccanti, saha dvārabandhanehītisadvārabandhanaṃ,ṭhānaṃ. Heṭṭhā udukkhalakañca upari pāsako ca, saha udukkhalapāsakehīti samāso. Tādise ṭhāne pākārādiparikkhepena bhavitabbanti parikkhitteti viññāyati. So ca uccato sahaseyyappahonake vuttanayoti vadanti.Sayantenāti pāde bhūmito mocetvā nipajjantena.Parivattakanti saṃvaraṇavivaraṇavasena ito cito ca parivattanayoggaṃ.Dvāranti antamaso dussasāṇidvārampi.Bandheyyāti sabbantimena vidhinā yāvatā sīsaṃ na pavisati, tāvatāpi bandheyya, saṃvareyyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
335.Having a door frame, with a lower and upper bolt, one should close the door that turns when lying down during the day in a dwelling; this is the connection. Dvārañca dvārabandhanañca dvārabandhanāni [is used] by way of the elision of a middle term, or the word bandhana refers to the doorposts themselves; sadvārabandhanaṃ means a place together with door frames. Heṭṭhā udukkhalakañca upari pāsako ca, saha udukkhalapāsakehīti is a compound. In such a place, it should be in a confined area with a surrounding wall etc.; parikkhitteti is understood. And that should be high enough to be suitable for sleeping, according to the method that has been stated; some say. Sayantenā: means by lying down, having lifted the feet from the ground. Parivattakaṃ: means suitable for turning this way and that, in terms of closing and opening. Dvāraṃ: means even a door with a rough cloth screen as a minimum. Bandheyyā: means one should close with the very last method, as far as the head cannot enter; it is said that one should close.
336.Ābhogo cāpīti ‘‘esa jaggissatī’’ti ābhogo cāpi.Ca-saddena ‘‘dvāraṃ jaggāhī’’ti vacanampi samuccinoti.Savase taṃ ākāraṃ vināti sassa attano vase āyatte ṭhāne, yattha pana bahūnaṃ sañcaraṇattā dvāraṃ saṃvutampi saṃvutaṭṭhāne na tiṭṭhati, dvāraṃ alabhantā pākāraṃ abhiruhitvāpi vicaranti, tādise pariveṇe saṃvaraṇakiccaṃ natthi. Atha vā sassa vaso āyatto, na yakkhādīnaṃ tehi gahitakattassa, bandhitvā nipajjāpitattassa ca abhāvenātisavaso. Tasmiṃ sati pubbe vuttadvāraṃ saṃvaraṇaābhogakaraṇavacanasaṅkhātaṃ ākāranti attho.
336.Ābhogo cāpī: means also an approach, thinking "he will be vigilant." The ca-particle also includes the statement "guard the door." Savase taṃ ākāraṃ vinā: means in one's own control, in one's own place; but where many people travel around, even if the door is closed, it does not stay in a closed state; not finding a door, they climb over the wall and wander around; in such an enclosure, there is no need for closing. Alternatively, sassa vaso means under one's own control, not under the control of spirits etc., because of the absence of being seized by them and being made to lie down after tying up; therefore savaso. In that case, ākāraṃ means the previously stated method of closing the door and making an approach.
337.Ratanānīti muttādīni dasavidhāni. Tattha pana jātiphalikaṃ upādāya sabbopi maṇi veḷuriyopi lohitaṅko masāragallo ca dhotāpi adhotaviddhāpi anāmāsā, kācamaṇi ca pānīyasaṅkho dhoto adhotopi āmāsā, silā dhotaviddhā suvaṇṇena saddhiṃ pacitā muggavaṇṇā ca anāmāsā. Cetiyagharagopakānaṃ suvaṇṇacetiye kacavarameva harituṃ vaṭṭati. Ārakūṭalohampi jātarūpagatikameva.Itthirūpānīti antamaso piṭṭhamayaitthirūpānipi.Dhaññanti antamaso tatthajātakampi magge pasāritampi sattavidhaṃ dhaññaṃ. Kīḷāvasena aparaṇṇāni tālaphalādīnipi anāmāsāni, pasāritampi na maddantena gantabbaṃ, asati magge maggaṃ adhiṭṭhāya gantabbaṃ.Itthipasādhananti antamaso piḷandhanatthāya ṭhapitaṃ nivāsanatālapaṇṇamuddikampi.
337.Ratanānī: means the ten kinds of gems, such as pearls etc. Among them, starting with nutmeg, all jewels, including beryl, ruby, and agate, whether washed, unwashed, or pierced, are anāmāsā (not to be touched); glass gems and water shells, whether washed or unwashed, are āmāsā (to be touched); stones that have been washed and pierced, cooked with gold, and those that are the color of green grams are anāmāsā. For those who guard stupa buildings, only glass items are suitable to take in a golden stupa. Brass is of the same nature as refined gold. Itthirūpānī: means even female forms made of flour as a minimum. Dhaññaṃ: means the seven kinds of grains as a minimum, even those that have grown there or that have been spread on the road. By way of amusement, other grains and palm fruits etc. are anāmāsā; even if spread out, one should not walk without being mindful; if there is no path, one should walk having determined a path. Itthipasādhanaṃ: means even a nivāsana palm leaf ring placed for adornment as a minimum.
338.Sitthatelodatelehīti madhusitthakaniyyāsādīsu yena kenaci telamissakasilesena ca udakamissakatelena ca.Phaṇahatthaphaṇehīti phaṇamiva phaṇaṃ, aṅgulīhi phaṇakiccakaraṇena hatthoyeva phaṇaṃ hatthaphaṇaṃ, dantamayādi yaṃ kiñci phaṇañceva hatthaphaṇañcāti dvando.Osaṇṭheyyāti olikhitvā sannisīdāpeyya.
338.Sitthatelodatelehī: means with any oil mixed with wax, resin, etc., and with water mixed with oil. Phaṇahatthaphaṇehī: phaṇaṃ iva phaṇaṃ, doing the work of a phaṇa with the fingers, the hand itself is phaṇaṃ, hatthaphaṇaṃ; phaṇaṃ means anything made of ivory etc., and hatthaphaṇaṃ; this is a dvanda compound. Osaṇṭheyyā: means one should cause to sit having rubbed them.
339.Ekapāvuraṇā vā ekattharaṇā vā na tuvaṭṭayuṃ, ekamañce na tuvaṭṭayunti yojanā. Ekaṃ pāvuraṇaṃ ekaṃ attharaṇaṃ etesanti viggaho.Na tuvaṭṭayunti na nipajjeyyuṃ. Ekasmiṃ bhājane vāpi na bhuñjeyyunti yojetabbaṃ.
339.They should not lie down having one outer robe or one spread; they should not lie down on one bed; the meaning is to be understood. Ekaṃ pāvuraṇaṃ ekaṃ attharaṇaṃ etesaṃ iti is the analysis. Na tuvaṭṭayuṃ: means they should not lie down. They should not eat in one bowl; the meaning is to be understood.
340.Manussānaṃ pamāṇaṅgulena aṭṭha aṅgulāni yassa, adhikena sahitaṃ aṭṭhaṅgulanti samāso.Lasuṇaṃmagadhesu jātaṃ āmalakabhaṇḍikaṃ lasuṇaṃ na khādeyyāti sambandho.Na akallakoti agilāno.
340.Eight aṅgulas according to the measurement of human aṅgulas; sahādhikena aṭṭhaṅgulanti is a samāsa compound. Lasuṇaṃ: one should not eat garlic that has grown in Magadha or that has been put in an Emblic myrobalan container; this is the connection. Na akallako: means one who is not ill.
341.Hīnukkaṭṭhehi jātiādīhi ukkaṭṭhaṃ vā hīnaṃ vā ujuṃ vā aññāpadesena vā davā vade, dubbhāsitanti sambandho.Jātiādīhīti jātināmagottakammasippaābādhaliṅgakilesaāpattiakkosehi.Ukkaṭṭhanti jātyādīhiyeva ukkaṭṭhaṃ upasampannaṃ anupasampannaṃ vā.Davāti keḷihasādhippāyatāya.Ujuṃ vāti ‘‘caṇḍālosī’’tiādinā nayena.Aññāpadesena vāti ‘‘santi idhekacce caṇḍālā’’tiādinā nayena.
341.If, due to jāti etc., one disparages or praises one who is higher or lower, or speaks directly or indirectly, it is dubbhāsita; this is the connection. Jātiādīhī: means by jāti (birth), nāma (name), gotta (clan), kamma (action), sippa (craft), ābādha (illness), liṅga (gender), kilesa (defilement), āpatti (offense), and akkosa (abuse). Ukkaṭṭhaṃ: means one who is high by way of jāti etc., whether upasampanna or anupasampanna. Davā: means with the intention of joking or laughing. Ujuṃ vā: means in the way "you are a caṇḍāla" etc. Aññāpadesena vā: means in the way "there are some caṇḍālas here" etc.
342.Dīghe nakheti maṃsappamāṇato.Dīghe keseti dvaṅgulato. Sacepi na dīghā, dumāsato ekadivasampi atikkāmetuṃ na labhati.Dīghe nāsalometi nāsato bahi nikkhante.Vīsatimaṭṭhanti vīsatiyā nakhānaṃ maṭṭhañca.Sambādheti ubhosu upakacchakesu, muttakaraṇe ca lomahāraṇañca na labbhāti sambandhanīyaṃ.Na labbhāti ete maṭṭhādayo na labbhantīti attho, nipāto vālabbhāti. Ābādhappaccayā pana sambādhe lomaṃ saṃharituṃ vaṭṭati.
342.Dīghe nakhe: means longer than the flesh. Dīghe kese: means longer than two aṅgulas. Even if they are not long, one is not allowed to let two months and one day pass. Dīghe nāsalome: means hairs that have come out beyond the nose. Vīsatimaṭṭha: means the shaving of the twenty nails. Sambādhe: means the removal of hair is not allowed in both armpits and in the making of muttaka; this should be connected. Na labbhā: means these shaven areas etc. are not allowed; or the nipāta is labbhā. However, due to illness, it is suitable to remove hair from a crowded area.
343.Saṅghuddiṭṭhaṃ vā saṅghikaṃ vā sayanāsanaṃ yathāvuḍḍhaṃ na bādheyyāti yojanā. Saṅghassa uddiṭṭhaṃsaṅghuddiṭṭhaṃ,saṅghaṃ uddissa katanti adhippāyo. Yo yo vuḍḍhoyathāvuḍḍhaṃ,vuḍḍhappaṭipāṭiyāti attho.Na bādheyyāti na paṭibāheyya.Allapādānāma yehi akkantaṭṭhāne udakaṃ paññāyati.Sayanāsananti mañcapīṭhādi, iminā paribhaṇḍakatā bhūmītipi upalakkhitā. Sudhotapādakaṃ vāpi saupāhano tathevāti sambandho.Sudhotapādakanti dhotapādeheva akkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Dhotā pādā yassa akkamanassāti kiriyāvisesanasamāso. Yadi pana tattha nevāsikā adhotapādehipi vaḷañjenti, tatheva vaḷañjetuṃ vaṭṭati.Tathevāti paribhaṇḍakataṃ bhūmiṃ senāsanaṃ vā nakkameti attho.
343.One should not obstruct a dwelling or seat that has been assigned to the Sangha or that belongs to the Sangha, according to seniority; the meaning is to be understood. Saṅghassa uddiṭṭhaṃ is saṅghuddiṭṭhaṃ, the intention is that it has been made for the Sangha. Yo yo vuḍḍho is yathāvuḍḍhaṃ, it means according to seniority. Na bādheyyā: means one should not reject. Allapādā: means where water is evident in the stepped area. Sayanāsana: means a chair, a table, etc.; by this, the cleaned ground is also indicated. Also, one with washed feet or with shoes is the same; this is the connection. Sudhotapādaka: means a place that should be stepped on with washed feet. Dhotā pādā yassa akkamanassāti is a kiriyāvisesanasamāsa compound. But if the inhabitants there walk with unwashed feet, it is suitable to walk in the same way. Tathevā: means one does not step on ground or a dwelling that has been cleaned.
344.Saṅghāṭiyāti adhiṭṭhitasaṅghāṭiyā. Pāde pariggahetvā āsanaṃ pallattho, pallatthaṃ karotīti pallatthātidhātussa pallattheti rūpaṃ. Vihārepi antaragharepi pallatthikāya na nisīdeyyāti adhippāyo, parikammakataṃ bhittādinti yojanā.Parikammakatanti setavaṇṇena vā cittakammena vā kataparikammaṃ.Ādi-saddo dvāravātapānādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Na apassayeti cīvarādinā appaṭicchādetvā apassayanaṃ na kareyya.No na ācameti neva na ācame, ācameyyāti attho. Dve paṭisedhā pakatiyatthaṃ gamentīti.Santeti iminā udake asante anāpattīti dīpeti.
344.Saṅghāṭiyā: means with an adhiṭṭhita (determined) saṅghāṭi. Having grasped the feet, pallattho is a seat, the form pallattheti is from the dhātu pallatthaṃ karotīti pallatthā. The intention is that one should not sit in a pallatthika posture even in a monastery or in an inner room; parikammakataṃ bhittādinti is to be connected. Parikammakata: means adorned with white color or painted images. The ādi-word includes doors, windows, etc. Na apassaye: means one should not lean without covering with a robe etc. No na ācame: means one should not not ācame, one should ācame. Two negations convey an affirmative meaning. Sante: with this, it indicates that there is no offense when there is no water.
345.Akappiyasamādāneti bhikkhūnaṃ sāmaṇerānaṃ akappiye samādāne.Davāti nipāto, kīḷādhippāyenāti attho.Silāpavijjhaneti antamaso hatthayantenapi sakkharikāyapi khipane. Sabhāgāya desanāya āvikamme ca dukkaṭanti yojetabbaṃ.Sabhāgāyāti vatthuvasena samāno bhāgo etissā āpattiyāti viggaho.Ca-saddo tādisiyā paṭiggahaṇamattaṃ samuccinoti.
345.Akappiyasamādāne: means in the acceptance of what is not allowable for bhikkhus and sāmaṇeras. Davā: is a nipāta, it means with the intention of joking. Silāpavijjhane: means throwing stones, even with a hand-operated device or with gravel. One should connect dukkaṭa for a desanā with the same object and for āvikamma. Sabhāgāyā: means an offense which has the same object; this is the analysis. The ca-particle includes merely accepting something similar to that.
346.Paṭissavonāma ‘‘ubhopi mayaṃ idha vassaṃ vasissāma, ekato uddisāpemā’’tiādipaṭijānanaṃ, tassa visaṃvādo pacchā akaraṇaṃpaṭissavavisaṃvādo,tasmiṃ, nimittatthe bhummaṃ.Suddhacittassāti kathanasamaye ‘‘karissāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattacittassa.Itarassāti aññassa asuddhacittassa.
346.Paṭissavonāma means a promise, such as "we will both stay here for the rains, we will recite together," etc.; failure to do that later is paṭissavavisaṃvādo, in that case, bhummaṃ is in the sense of a cause. Suddhacittassā: means for one whose mind is inclined at the time of speaking, saying "I will do it." Itarassā: means for another, for one whose mind is not pure.
347.Kicceti sukkhakaṭṭhādiggahaṇakicce sati eva porisaṃ purisappamāṇaṃ abhiruheyyāti sambandho.Āpadāsūti vāḷamigadassanādīsu.
347.Kicce: means if there is a need for taking dry wood etc., then one should climb up a porisa, the measurement of a man; this is the connection. Āpadāsū: means in cases of danger, such as seeing wild animals etc.
348.Parissāvanaṃ vināti sambandho.Addhānanti heṭṭhimantena addhayojanasaṅkhātaṃ addhānaṃ. Sace na hoti parissāvanaṃ vā dhammakaraṇo vā, saṅghāṭikaṇṇopi adhiṭṭhātabbo.Yācamānassāti parissāvanaṃ yācantassa.
348.Without a strainer; this is the connection. Addhānaṃ: means a journey of half a yojana, counted by the lower measure. If there is no strainer or water filter, even the corner of the saṅghāṭi should be determined. Yācamānassā: means to one who is asking for a strainer.
349.Ābādhappaccayā aññatra sesaṅge ca attaghātane ca dukkaṭanti yojanā.Sesaṅgeti aṅgajātato kaṇṇanāsādiavasese avayavacchedane.Attaghātaneti āhārupacchedādinā attano māraṇe.
349.Except due to illness, there is dukkaṭa for cutting off the remaining limbs and for suicide; the meaning is to be understood. Sesaṅge: means in cutting off the remaining limbs, such as the ears and nose, from the reproductive organ. Attaghātane: means in killing oneself by cutting off food etc.
350.Tūlikāya kayiramānaṃ itthipurisādikaṃ cittañca potthakañca kaṭṭhādīsu kayiramānaṃ cittapotthakāni, tāniyeva rūpānīti samāso. Jātakādīni pana parehi kārāpetuṃ labbhanti. Mālākammādīni sayampi kātuṃ labbhanti. Ārāmāraññagehesu bhuñjantaṃ na uṭṭhāpeyyāti yojetabbaṃ. Vihārasaṅkhāto ārāmo ca araññañca antaragharasaṅkhātaṃ gehañcāti dvando. ‘‘Ārāma…pe… gehesū’’ti vattabbe e-kārassa a-kārakaraṇena gāthābandhavasena vuttaṃ. Okāse kate pana ‘‘pavisathā’’ti vutte ca pavisitabbaṃ upanisīditabbañca.
350.Images of women and men being made with paint, and painted books, and painted books being made on wood etc., are all rūpāni; this is a samāsa compound. However, it is allowed to have Jātakas etc. made by others. It is also allowed to make garlands etc. oneself. One should not make someone get up who is eating in a monastery, a forest, or a dwelling; this is to be connected. A monastery, which is counted as a vihāra, and a forest, and a dwelling, which is counted as an inner room; this is a dvanda compound. When it should have been said "Ārāma…pe… gehesū," it is said due to the meter of the verse by changing the e-kāra to a a-kāra. However, if there is space made and it is said "enter," then one should enter and sit down.
351.Pumayuttāni yānāni ca sivikañca hatthavaṭṭakañca pāṭaṅkiñca abhiruhituṃ gilānassa kappateti sambandho.Pumayuttānīti assagavādipurisayuttāni, na dhenuyuttāni, sārathi pana itthī vā hotu puriso vā, vaṭṭati. Hatthavaṭṭakepi eseva nayo,yānānīti rathasakaṭādīni,sivikanti pīṭhakasivikaṃ, pīṭhakayānanti attho.Pāṭaṅkīti andolikā.Gilānassāti etthagilānonāma na appakenapi sīsābādhādimattena veditabbo, yo pana na sakkoti vinā yānena gantuṃ, evarūpo veditabbo. Tathā hi yānaṃ anujānantena bhagavatā kosalesu janapadesu bhagavantaṃ dassanāya sāvatthiṃ gacchantaṃ aññataraṃ gilānaṃ bhikkhuṃ gantumasakkuṇeyyatāya aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle nisinnaṃ disvā manussehi taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā ‘‘ehi, bhante, gamissāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘nāhaṃ, āvuso, gamissāmi, gilānomhī’’tivuttavatthusmiṃ(mahāva. 253) anuññātaṃ, tathā vadanto ca so bhikkhu gamanupacchedasādhakameva gelaññaṃ sandhāyāhāti viññāyati adhippetatthanipphattiyā upacchinnattā, apica yānena ekaparicchedāya upāhanāya paricchedaṃ ṭhapentena aṭṭhakathācariyena ‘‘gilānena bhikkhunā saupāhanenāti ettha gilāno nāma yo na sakkoti anupāhanena gāmaṃ pavisitu’’ntiaṭṭhakathāyaṃ(mahāva. aṭṭha. 256) vuttaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttagilānova gilānoti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
351. The connection is that it is permissible for a sick person to ascend vehicles yoked to males, a palanquin, a hand-carried seat, and a litter. Pumayuttāni means yoked to horses, elephants, or men, but not yoked to cows. However, the driver may be a woman or a man; it is permissible. The same principle applies to hatthavaṭṭaka. Yānāni means carts, wagons, etc. Sivika means a seat-palanquin, that is, a seat-vehicle. Pāṭaṅkī means a litter. Gilānassa: here, gilāna should not be understood as merely having a slight headache or similar ailment, but rather as someone who cannot go without a vehicle. For example, the Blessed One, in allowing vehicles, saw a certain sick bhikkhu in the Kosala country, who was going to Sāvatthi to see the Blessed One, sitting at the foot of a certain tree because he was unable to go; after learning of this situation, people said, "Come, Bhante, let us go." He replied, "I cannot go, friends, I am sick." This was allowed in the case mentioned (mahāva. 253). It is understood that the bhikkhu, in speaking thus, referred to an illness that would prevent him from traveling, due to the cessation of the intended accomplishment. Moreover, the Aṭṭhakathācariya, in establishing the limit of shoes by means of a vehicle as a single exception, said in the Aṭṭhakathā (mahāva. aṭṭha. 256): "Here, 'a sick bhikkhu with shoes' means one who cannot enter a village without shoes." Therefore, it must be concluded here that a gilāna is only the kind of gilāna that has been described.
352.Davaṃkaraṇeti keḷiyā karaṇe.Aññassāti antamaso dussīlassāpi.Upalāḷaneti ‘‘pattaṃ dassāmi, cīvaraṃ dassāmī’’tiādinā.
352.Davaṃ karaṇe means in doing playfulness. Aññassa means even to an immoral person. Upalāḷane means by saying, "I will give you a bowl, I will give you a robe," etc.
353.Vivaritvā na dassayeti sambandhanīyaṃ.Tābhikkhuniyo.
353.It should be connected as "he should not uncover and show." Tā means those bhikkhunis.
354.Ovādanti bhikkhunīhi terasiyaṃ vā cātuddasiyaṃ vā āgantvā uposathaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘cātuddaso’’tiādinā bhikkhunā ācikkhite puna tāhi uposathadivase samāgantvā ovādūpasaṅkamanayācanaṃ, taṃ pātimokkhuddesakassa ārocetvā tena katasanniṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā pāṭipade paccāharitabbanti ajānanakaṃbālañca tathā kātuṃ asamatthaṃgilānañca pāṭipade gantukāmaṃgamiyañca vajjetvā aññassa gahaṇapaccāharaṇāni akātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘na gaṇhato’’tiādi.
354.Ovāda means that the bhikkhunis, having come on the thirteenth or fourteenth, ask about the Uposatha, and when the bhikkhu has announced, "It is the fourteenth," etc., they again come together on the Uposatha day and request the ovādūpasaṅkamana; having announced it to the one who recites the Pāṭimokkha and having taken the katasanniṭṭhāna from him, it should be delivered on the following day. It is not permissible to have the taking and delivering done by another, except for one who is bāla ignorant and does not know, or one who is gilāna unable to do so, or one who is gamiya wanting to go on the following day. Therefore, it was said, "Na gaṇhato," etc.
355.Lokāyatanti niratthakakāraṇappaṭisaṃyuttaṃ titthiyasatthaṃ. Tiracchānavijjā ca imināva upalakkhitā.Na vāceyyāti paresaṃ na vāceyya. Imināva attano pariyāpuṇanampi paṭikkhittaṃ lokāyatatiracchānavijjāti ca rāgadosamohavaḍḍhāni buddhādigarahitā saggamokkhānaṃ tiro tiriyato añcitā gatā pavattā kabbanāṭakādikā sabbāpi vijjā anulomavasena vā vinayapariyāyaṃ patvā garuke ṭhātabbanti vinayayuttitopi saṅgahitāti veditabbā. Evañca no garūnamupadeso.Peḷāyapīti yattha pātiṃ ṭhapetvā sukhino bhuñjanti, tambalohena rajatena vā katāya tāya āsittakūpadhānasaṅkhātāya peḷāya ṭhapetvā.
355.Lokāyata means the Titthiya's teaching, which is connected with useless causes. Tiracchānavijjā is also indicated by this. Na vāceyyā means he should not recite it to others. By this, his own learning is also rejected. And it should be understood that lokāyata and tiracchānavijjā, which increase greed, hatred, and delusion, and all sciences that are censured by the Buddha, etc., and which are bent and gone awry from heaven and liberation, such as fabricated plays, etc., having come to the Vinaya by way of adaptation, should be regarded as heavy and included in the Vinaya's reasoning. Thus, there is no instruction from superiors. Peḷāyapī: having placed the bowl in that peḷā, made of copper or silver, where the happy ones eat, which is called a cushion for pouring.
356.Pārutañca nivāsanañca, gihīnaṃ hatthisoṇḍādivasena pārutanivāsanaṃ yassa pārupanassa nivāsanassāti kiriyāvisesanasamāso. Gihipārutanivāsanaṃ na pārupe na nivāseyyāti sambandho.Saṃvelliyaṃ na nivāseyyāti mallakammakarādayo viya kacchaṃ katvā na nivāseyya. Evaṃ nivāsetuṃ gilānassāpi maggappaṭipannassāpi na vaṭṭati. Yampi maggaṃ gacchantā ekaṃ vā dve vā koṇe ukkhipitvā antaravāsakassa upari lagganti, na vaṭṭati. Evaṃ apārupitvā anivāsetvā ca nibbikāraṃ parimaṇḍalaṃ pārupitabbaṃ timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādentena parimaṇḍalaṃ nivāsetabbañca, tathā apārupitvā anivāsetvā ca ārāme vā antaraghare vā anādarena yaṃ kiñci vikāraṃ karontassa dukkaṭaṃ.Dāyanti vanaṃ.Nālimpayeyyāti ‘‘sabbūpakārāni vinassantū’’ti vā khiḍḍādhippāyena vā nālimpayeyya.
356.The connection is that one should not wear or put on as an outer or lower robe what is worn or put on by laypeople in the manner of an elephant's trunk; it is a kriyāvisesanasamāso compound of pārupana and nivāsana. One should not wear or put on what is worn or put on by laypeople. Saṃvelliyaṃ na nivāseyyā means one should not wear it having made a tuck at the waist like wrestlers. It is not permissible to wear it in this way even for one who is sick or on a journey. It is also not permissible to hang one or two corners above the inner robe when going on a journey. Having neither worn it nor put it on in this way, it should be worn round without any change, covering the timaṇḍala, and it should be put on round. And having neither worn it nor put it on in this way, there is a duukkaṭa for one who makes any change carelessly in the monastery or in the inner chamber. Dāya means forest. Nālimpayeyyā means he should not smear it, either with the intention that "all the requisites will be destroyed," or playfully.
357.Vaḍḍhiṃ no payojaye aññātakappavārite no yāceti yojanā.Aññassāti sahadhammikassāpi. Katipāhaṃ bhutvā vāti yojanīyaṃ.Punoti nipāto.
357.The construction is that he should not invest money for profit, and he should not ask those who are prohibited by unknown agreement. Aññassa means even for a co-religionist. It should be construed as "having eaten for a few days." Puno is a particle.
358.Daṇḍinaṃ ñatvā vā añatvā vā uddissa rakkhaṃ yācane daṇḍite daṇḍo assa gīvāti yojanā. Daṇḍaṃ gaṇhatīti paccayantassa daṇḍinaṃ daṇḍaggahaṇanti attho.Uddissāti ‘‘amhākaṃ vihāre asukena ca asukena ca idaṃ nāma kata’’nti, ‘‘karissa’’nti vā evaṃ atītaṃ vā anāgataṃ vā ārabbha.Yācaneti vohārikesu yācane sati.Daṇḍiteti tehi daṇḍe gahite so daṇḍo assa yācakassa bhikkhuno gīvā, iṇaṃ hotīti attho. Vohārikehi pana ‘‘kenā’’ti vutte ‘‘asukenāti vattuṃ amhākaṃ na vaṭṭati, tumheyeva jānissatha, kevalañhi mayaṃ rakkhaṃ yācāma, taṃ no detha, avahaṭabhaṇḍañca maṃ āharāpethā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evaṃ anodissa ācikkhaṇā hoti, sā vaṭṭati.Pārājikādikāti pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭāni.
358.The construction is that if a fine is imposed on someone known or unknown to be a daṇḍina for asking for protection with reference to someone, that fine is for his neck. The meaning of daṇḍina is one who takes a stick, with the suffix expressing possession. Uddissa means "so-and-so and so-and-so have done this in our monastery," or "they will do it," thus referring to the past or future. Yācane means when asking among ordinary people. Daṇḍite means when a fine is imposed by them, that fine is for the neck of the begging bhikkhu, that is, it becomes a debt. But if the ordinary people ask, "By whom?", one should say, "It is not permissible for us to say by so-and-so; you yourselves will know; we only ask for protection, give it to us, and bring back the lost goods for me." Thus, there is no pointing out without reference, and that is permissible. Pārājikādikā means pārājika, thullaccaya, and duukkaṭa.
359.
359.
‘‘Harantesu parikkhāraṃ,
"When requisites are being stolen,
If it is said, 'Thief, thief!'
While they are seizing it for harm."
Harantesūti coresu gahetvā gacchantesu.Esanti corānaṃ.Gaṇhanteti vohārikajane gaṇhante. Yattakaṃ gahitaṃ, tattakaṃ assa bhikkhuno gīvā, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hotīti attho.
Harantesū means when thieves are taking and going. Esa means of the thieves. Gaṇhante means when ordinary people are seizing it. As much as is seized, so much is for the bhikkhu's neck; that is, it becomes a debt for the goods.
360.Pākārakuṭṭānaṃ bahi vaḷañje vāpi vīhādināḷikerādiropime harite vāpi vighāsuccārasaṅkāramuttaṃ nāvalokiya chaḍḍeyya, dukkaṭanti sambandho.Vaḷañje nāvalokiyāti ca iminā oloketvā vā avaḷañje vā vighāsādīni chaḍḍentassa anāpattīti dīpeti. Vīhi ādi yesaṃ sāliādīnaṃ te vīhādayo, nāḷikero ādi yesaṃ ambapanasādīnaṃ te nāḷikerādayo, vīhādayo ca nāḷikerādayo cāti dvando, tesaṃ ropo, tena nibbattaṃvīhādi…pe… ropimaṃ. Hariteti haritaṭṭhāne.Vighāsonāma ucchiṭṭhodakacalakādi.
360.One should not look and throw out waste, etc., outside the wall or enclosure, or in a green place where rice or coconut, etc., have been planted; it is a duukkaṭa. Vaḷañje nāvalokiyā also indicates that there is no offense for one who throws out waste, etc., looking or not looking in a non-enclosed area. Vīhi ādi yesaṃ sāliādīnaṃ te vīhādayo, nāḷikero ādi yesaṃ ambapanasādīnaṃ te nāḷikerādayo, vīhādayo ca nāḷikerādayo cāti dvando, tesaṃ ropo, tena nibbattaṃ vīhādi…pe… ropimaṃ. Harite means in a green place. Vighāso means leftover water, gruel, etc.
361.Dhammayuttampi naccañca gītañca vāditañca yojāpetuñca payojetuñca payuttāni passituñca ‘‘upahāraṃ karomā’’ti vutte sampaṭicchituṃ vā na labbhanti sambandho.Dhammayuttampīti ratanattayaguṇūpasaṃhitatāya antamaso dhammena puññena saṃyuttampi.Naccanti antamaso morasukamakkaṭādīnaṃ naccampi.Gītanti antamaso gītassa pubbabhāge kayiramānaṃ dantagītampi.Vāditanti antamaso udakabherivāditampi.Yojāpetunti aññehi kārāpetuṃ.Payojetunti attanā kātuṃ. Āyatakena gītassarena dhammampi bhāsituṃ na vaṭṭati.Payuttānīti parehi yehi kehici katāni.Passitunti iminā anolocanadassanampi gahitanti sotuntipi attho viññāyati. Antarārāme ṭhitassa passato anāpatti. Vīthiyaṃ ṭhatvā gīvaṃ parivattetvā passatopi āpattiyeva. Yena kenaci karaṇīyena gataṭṭhāne passati, suṇāti vā, anāpatti.Sampaṭicchitunti ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchituṃ. ‘‘Upahārakaraṇaṃ nāma sundara’’nti vattuṃ vaṭṭati.Vā-saddo samuccaye.
361.Neither the Dhamma, nor dancing, singing, and instrumental music, nor having them arranged, nor performing them, nor seeing them being performed, nor, if it is said, "Let us make an offering," is it permissible to accept; this is the connection. Dhammayuttampī means even that which is connected with the qualities of the Triple Gem, even that which is connected with the Dhamma and merit. Nacca means even the dancing of peacocks or monkeys. Gīta means even the tooth-singing done in the preliminary part of a song. Vādita means even the playing of a water drum. Yojāpetu means to have others do it. Payojetu means to do it oneself. It is not permissible to speak the Dhamma in a drawn-out singing tone. Payuttānī means those done by others, whoever they may be. Passitu indicates that even unintentional seeing is included, and the meaning "to hear" is also understood. There is no offense for one standing inside the monastery and seeing. There is an offense even for one standing on the street and twisting his neck to look. If one sees or hears at a place one has gone to for some reason, there is no offense. Sampaṭicchitu means to accept with "Sādhu." It is permissible to say, "Making an offering is beautiful." The word vā is for inclusion.
362.‘‘Kīḷatthaṃ kataṃ rājāgāra’’ntiādinā sambandhitabbaṃ. Cittena vicittakaṃ āgāraṃcittāgārakaṃ.
362.It should be connected with "the king's house was made for sport," etc. Cittāgārakaṃ means a house decorated with paintings.
363.Āsanena nave na paṭibāheyyāti yojanā.Āsanenāti āsanato.Na paṭibāheyyāti na uṭṭhāpeyya. Uṇhe cīvaraṃ na nidaheyyāti yojanīyaṃ.Na nidaheyyāti adhikaṃ na nidaheyya.Garunāti ācariyupajjhāyena.Paṇāmitoti ‘‘mā idha pavisā’’tiādinā nikkaḍḍhito.
363.The construction is that one should not push away a newcomer with a seat. Āsanenā means with a seat. Na paṭibāheyyā means he should not make him get up. It should be construed that he should not put a robe down in the heat. Na nidaheyyā means he should not put down too much. Garunā means by a preceptor or teacher. Paṇāmito means driven away with "Do not enter here," etc.
364.Sattahi āpattīhi ca bhikkhuṃ vāpi aññeneva ca upāsakaṃ vāpi parammukhā akkosane dukkaṭanti yojetabbaṃ.Āpattīhi cātica-saddo avadhāraṇe.Aññeneva cāti etthaeva cāti nipātasamudāyo, eko eva vā avadhāraṇe, vuttato aññeneva ‘‘asaddho’’tiādināti attho.Parammukhāti nipāto, tassa asammukheti attho. Sammukhā vadantassa pācittiyaṃ. Pāpagarahaṇavasena pana vadato anāpatti.
364.It should be connected that there is a duukkaṭa for reviling a bhikkhu or even a lay follower with seven offenses or even with something else behind his back. Āpattīhi cā: the word ca is for emphasis. Aññeneva cā: here, eva cā is a group of particles, or only one for emphasis; the meaning is, other than what was said, such as "unbelieving," etc. Parammukhā is a particle, its meaning is "not in front." There is a pācittiya for one who speaks in front of him. However, there is no offense for one who speaks in terms of criticizing evil.
365.Saddhādeyyaṃsaddhāya dātabbaṃ cīvarañca ca-saddena avasesampivinipātetuṃnāsetuṃ na labbhaṃ, pitūnaṃ labbhanti sambandho.Ñātīnampītipi-saddo sambhāvane.
365.It is not permissible vinipātetuṃ to destroy the saddhādeyya, what should be given with faith, the robe, and also the rest with the word ca; it is permissible for his relatives; this is the connection. Ñātīnampī: the word pi is for possibility.
366.Aññatra vassaṃvuttho aññato bhāgaṃ gaṇheyya, dukkaṭanti sambandho.Aññatrāti aññasmiṃ vihāre.Aññatoti aññavihārato.Paṭideyyāti gahitaṭṭhāne dadeyya. Gahite tasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ naṭṭhe vā jiṇṇe vā tassa gīvāho tīti sambandho. Codito no dadeyya, tesaṃ dhuranikkhepato bhaṇḍagghakāriyo hotīti yojanā.Coditoti vatthusāmikehi ‘‘dehī’’ti vutto.Tesanti tasmiṃ vihāre lābhīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ.
366.The connection is that one who has spent the rains in one place should take a share from another place; it is a duukkaṭa. Aññatrā means in another monastery. Aññato means from another monastery. Paṭideyyā means he should give it back at the place it was taken. The connection is that if that thing that was taken is lost or worn out, it is for his neck. The construction is that if, when urged, he does not give it back, he becomes responsible for the value of the goods in place of their liability. Codito means when told "Give (it) back" by the owners of the thing. Tesa means of the bhikkhus who receive gains in that monastery.
367.Santaruttaro vā kallo saupāhano vā gāmaṃ na paviseyya, cāmarīmakasabījaniṃ na dhāreyyāti yojanīyaṃ. Antarañca uttarañca, saha antaruttarenasantaruttaro. Aggaḷagutte vihāre saṅghāṭiṃ nikkhipitvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati. Āraññakena pana bhaṇḍukkhalikāya pakkhipitvā pāsāṇarukkhasusirādīsu paṭicchannesu ṭhapetvā gantabbaṃ. Antaruttarānaṃ nikkhepe ayameva nayo.Kalloti agilāno. Makasānaṃ bījanī makasabījanī, camarīnaṃ vāḷehi katā makasabījanīti samāso.
367.The construction is that one should not enter a village with the inner and outer robes disarranged or with shoes on, and one should not carry a fan made of yak tails or palm leaves. Antarañca uttarañca, saha antaruttarena santaruttaro. It is permissible to put down the saṅghāṭi in a monastery with a locked bolt and go. But an Araññaka should put it in a basket and hide it in a crevice in a stone or tree, etc., and go. The same method applies to putting down the inner and outer robes. Kallo means not sick. Makasānaṃ bījanī makasabījanī, camarīnaṃ vāḷehi katā makasabījanīti samāso.
368.Ārāmato bahīti sambandhanīyaṃ.Ārāmatoti ārāmūpacārato.Na dhāreyyāti agilāno na dhāreyya. Yassa pana kāyadāho vā pittakopo vā hoti, cakkhu vā dubbalaṃ, añño vā koci ābādho vinā chattena uppajjati, tassa gāme vā araññe vā chattaṃ vaṭṭati.Guttiyā labbhatīti vasse cīvaraguttatthaṃ, vāḷamigacorabhayesu attaguttatthampi labbhatīti attho. Ekapaṇṇachattaṃ pana sabbattheva vaṭṭati.
368.It should be connected with "outside the monastery." Ārāmato means from the boundary of the monastery. Na dhāreyyā means one who is not sick should not carry it. But for one who has body heat or bile disorder, or whose eyes are weak, or who has some other illness that arises without an umbrella, an umbrella is permissible in a village or forest. Guttiyā labbhatī means it can be obtained for the purpose of protecting robes during the rains, or for the purpose of protecting oneself from wild animals or thieves. However, a single-leaf umbrella is permissible everywhere.
369.Ubhatokājaṃ na gāheyyāti sambandho. Ubhato daṇḍassa ubhayakoṭiyaṃ bhārabandhakājaṃubhatokājaṃ,alopatappuriso.Ekantarikakājakanti antarameva antarikaṃ, ekañca antarikañcāti dvando, ekantarike bhārabandhakājanti tappuriso ekatokājakaṃ, antarikakājakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Hatthe olambo assa bhārassāti samāso.
369.The connection is that he should not take hold of a double carrying-pole. Ubhato daṇḍassa ubhayakoṭiyaṃ bhārabandhakājaṃ ubhatokājaṃ, alopatappuriso. Ekantarikakājakaṃ: antarameva antarikaṃ, ekañca antarikañcāti dvando, ekantarike bhārabandhakājanti tappuriso ekatokājakaṃ, antarikakājakanti vuttaṃ hoti. Hatthe olambo assa bhārassāti samāso.
370.Anokāsakatanti ‘‘karotu me āyasmā okāsaṃ, ahaṃ taṃ vattukāmo’’ti evaṃ codakena okāse kārāpite natthi okāso kato anena cuditakenāti bahubbīhi.Codeyyāti cāvanaakkosakammavuṭṭhānādhippāyena codeyya. Uposathappavāraṇaṭṭhapanaanuvijjadhammakathādhippāyesu okāsakammaṃ natthi.Suddhassāti anāpattikatāya suddhassa.Avatthusminti akāraṇe.Tathāti dukkaṭaṃ atidisati. Karontenāpi ‘‘bhūtameva nu kho āpattiṃ vadati, abhūta’’nti evaṃ upaparikkhitvā kātabbā. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, puggalaṃ tulayitvā okāsaṃ kātu’’nti (mahāva. 153) hi vuttaṃ.
370.Anokāsakata means in the absence of permission, "May the venerable one give me permission, I want to say something to you," thus, because permission was caused to be made by the accuser, permission has not been given by this accused one; it is a bahubbīhi. Codeyyā means he should accuse with the intention of expulsion, abuse, or kammavuṭṭhāna. There is no permission-making in the Uposatha, Pavāraṇā, establishing, investigating, or Dhamma talk. Suddhassā means of one who is pure by being without offense. Avatthusmi means without cause. Tathā transfers the duukkaṭa. Even when doing it, it should be done having investigated whether he speaks of an actual offense or an unreal one. For it was said, "I allow, bhikkhus, to make permission after weighing the person" (mahāva. 153).
371.Sattānaṃ pakataṅgulena aṭṭhaṅgulādhikaṃ mañcappaṭipādaṃ vā uccapādakaṃ mañcaṃ vā na dhārayeti yojanā. Pakatiyā aṅgulaṃpakataṅgulaṃ. Tañca vaḍḍhakiaṅgulaṃ veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭha ca tāni aṅgulāni ca, tehi tamadhikaṃ yassāti samāso. Mañcānaṃ paṭipādo, yattha mañcapāde nikkhipanti. Aṭṭhaṅgulato uccā pādā yassāti bahubbīhi.
371.The construction is that he should not keep a bed-leg or a bed with high legs more than eight aṅgulas beyond the normal aṅgula of living beings. Pakatiyā aṅgulaṃ pakataṅgulaṃ. And that should be understood as the carpenter's aṅgula. Aṭṭha ca tāni aṅgulāni ca, tehi tamadhikaṃ yassāti samāso. Mañcānaṃ paṭipādo, yattha mañcapāde nikkhipanti. Aṭṭhaṅgulato uccā pādā yassāti bahubbīhi.
372.Mūgabbatādinti mūgānamiva tuṇhībhāvasaṅkhātaṃ vataṃ ādi yassa govatādino titthiyavatassāti samāso. Khurameva bhaṇḍaṃkhurabhaṇḍaṃ. Pubbe nhāpitonhāpitapubbako,visesanassa paranipāto.
372.Mūgabbatādi means the vow consisting of silence like that of the mute, which is the beginning of the Titthiya vows such as the cow vow; it is a compound. Khurameva bhaṇḍaṃ khurabhaṇḍaṃ. Pubbe nhāpito nhāpitapubbako, visesanassa paranipāto.
373.Hatthakammanti hatthena kātabbaṃ vaḍḍhakiādīnaṃ kammaṃ. Anussaraṇaṃ ‘‘kappiyattaṃ me yena yācitaṃ, amhehi imassa dātabba’’nti evaṃ cittappavattianusāro, tassā yācanāya anusārotadanusāro,tato laddhaṃ yaṃ kiñci gahetunti yojanā. Kammato niggatonikkammo,vighāsādādi. Taṃ ayācitvāpi kāretunti sambandho.Āharāpetunti araññato ānetuṃ.Aparasantakanti dārutiṇapalālādikaṃ aparapariggahitaṃ.
373. Hatthakamma means work to be done by hand, such as the work of carpenters, etc. Anussaranaṃ means 'the recollection' or 'the following of the thought', thinking "By whom was the appropriateness requested from me; it should be given by us to him," that is, following the request, whatever is obtained from that. Kammato niggato, nikkammo, means 'gone out from work', such as leftovers after a meal (vighāsāda). Even without requesting that, it can be done, is the connection. Āharāpetu means 'to cause to bring' from the forest. Aparasantaka means 'belonging to another', such as wood, grass, straw, etc., possessed by another.
374.Gihīnaṃ yattakaṃ deti, gopake dente gahetuṃ labbhaṃ, saṅghacetiyasantake yathāparicchedaṃ gahetuṃ labbhanti yojanā.Detīti gopako bhikkhūnaṃ deti.Gahetunti tattakaṃ gahetuṃ.Saṅghacetiyasantaketi vetanagopakehi dīyamāne saṅghassa cetiyassa ca santake.Yathāparicchedanti yaṃ tesaṃ saṅghena anuññātaṃ hoti ‘‘divase divase ettakaṃ nāma khādathā’’ti, taṃ paricchedaṃ anatikkamma. Saṅghike ca cetiyasantake ca keṇiyā gahetvā ārakkhantasseva hi dāne paricchedo natthi.
374. As much as he gives to the laypeople, it is permissible to take when giving to the cowherds; it is permissible to take from property belonging to the Sangha or a Cetiya, according to the limit. Deti means the cowherd gives to the monks. Gahetu means 'to take' that much. Saṅghacetiyasantake means 'property belonging to the Sangha and the Cetiya' when being given by wage-earning cowherds. Yathāpariccheda means 'according to the limit' that has been permitted by the Sangha, "Eat this much each day," without exceeding that limit. For one who, as a keṇiya, takes and protects property belonging to the Sangha or a Cetiya, there is no limit in giving.
375.‘‘Kāyavācāhi dvīhi āpattiṃ āpajjeyyā’’ti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ, methunadhamme parūpakkame sati sādiyantassa akiriyasamuṭṭhānabhāvasambhavato.Chahi vāti āpattuppattikāraṇasaṅkhātehi chahi samuṭṭhānehi vā āpattiṃ āpajjeyyāti sambandho. Sabbāpattīnañhi kāyo vācā kāyavācā kāyacittaṃ vācācittaṃ kāyavācācittanti cha samuṭṭhānāni. Tattha purimāni tīṇi acittakāni, pacchimāni sacittakāni.
375. ‘‘Kāyavācāhi dvīhi āpattiṃ āpajjeyyā’’ is said predominantly, because when approving of another's offense in sexual intercourse or assault, there is the possibility of it arising from non-action (akiriyasamuṭṭhāna). Chahi vā is connected as: one may incur an offense by six origins (samuṭṭhāna), which are counted as the causes of the arising of offenses. For all offenses, there are six origins: body, speech, body and speech, body and mind, speech and mind, and body, speech, and mind. Among these, the first three are without intention (acittaka), and the last three are with intention (sacittaka).
Tidhā ekasamuṭṭhānā, pañcadhā dvisamuṭṭhitā;
Three are of single origin, five are of double origin;
Two are of triple and quadruple origins, one is of sixfold origin.
ekasamuṭṭhānā tidhā. Paṭhamacatutthehi ca dutiyapañcamehi ca tatiyachaṭṭhehi ca catutthachaṭṭhehi ca pañcamachaṭṭhehi ca samuṭṭhānatodvisamuṭṭhitā pañcadhā. Paṭhamehi ca tīhi pacchimehi ca tīhi samuṭṭhānatotisamuṭṭhānā dvidhā. Paṭhamatatiyacatutthachaṭṭhehi ca dutiyatatiyapañcamachaṭṭhehi ca samuṭṭhānatocatusamuṭṭhānā dvidhā. Chahipi samuṭṭhitochasamuṭṭhānā ekadhā. Alajji…pe… saññitāya cāti imehi chahi vā āpattiṃ āpajjeyyāti sambandho. Yo sañcicca āpattiṃ āpajjati, āpattiṃ parigūhati, agatigamanañca gacchati, ediso vuccati alajjī puggalo. Alajjī ca aññāṇo ca kukkuccapakato ca kukkuccena abhibhūtoti dvando. Bhāve ttappaccayo.
ekasamuṭṭhānā tidhā means 'of single origin in three ways'. dvisamuṭṭhitā pañcadhā means 'of double origin in five ways' because of arising from the first and fourth, second and fifth, third and sixth, fourth and sixth, and fifth and sixth origins. tisamuṭṭhānā dvidhā means 'of triple origin in two ways' because of arising from the first three and the last three origins. catusamuṭṭhānā dvidhā means 'of quadruple origin in two ways' because of arising from the first, third, fourth, and sixth, and the second, third, fifth, and sixth origins. chasamuṭṭhānā ekadhā means 'of sixfold origin in one way' because of arising from all six origins. Alajji…pe… saññitāya cāti is connected as: one may incur an offense by these six. One who intentionally commits an offense, conceals an offense, and goes to wrong destinations is called an unashamed (alajjī) person. Alajjī ca aññāṇo ca kukkuccapakato ca, meaning alajjī, aññāṇo and kukkuccapakato, and kukkuccena abhibhūto, meaning 'overcome by worry', is a dvando compound. The suffix -tta is in the sense of abstract noun (bhāva).
alajjitā āpajjati. Mando momūho kattabbākattabbaṃ ajānanto akattabbaṃ karoti, kattabbaṃ virādheti, ayaṃaññāṇattā āpajjati. Kappiyākappiyaṃ nissāya kukkucce uppanne vinayadharaṃ apucchitvā madditvā vītikkamati, ayaṃkukkuccapakatattā āpajjati. Satiyā plavo sammohosatiplavo,sahaseyyaticīvaravippavāsādīni satiplavā āpajjati. Kappañca akappiyañca kappākappiyaṃ, kappākappiye saññā, sā assa atthīti kappā…pe… saññī, tassa bhāvoti tā-paccayo. Ya-lopena pana‘‘saññitā’’ti vuttaṃ, karaṇatthe vā paccattavacanaṃ. Te ca ‘‘akappiye’’tiādīnaṃ yathākkamena yujjanti. Tattha yo acchamaṃsaṃ ‘‘sūkaramaṃsa’’nti khādati, vikāle kālasaññitāya bhuñjati, ayaṃakappiye kappiyasaññitāya āpajjati. Yo pana sūkaramaṃsaṃ ‘‘acchamaṃsa’’nti khādati, kāle vikālasaññāya bhuñjati, ayaṃkappiye akappiyasaññitāya āpajjati.
alajjitā āpajjati means 'one is unashamed and incurs an offense'. A fool (mando), deluded (momūho), not knowing what should and should not be done, does what should not be done and neglects what should be done; this one aññāṇattā āpajjati means 'incurs an offense due to ignorance'. Having worry (kukkucca) arise regarding what is allowable and unallowable, without asking a Vinaya expert, one suppresses it and transgresses; this one kukkuccapakatattā āpajjati means 'incurs an offense due to being overcome by worry'. Satiyā plavo sammoho, satiplavo, means 'a flood of mindfulness is delusion', one incurs an offense by having a flood of mindfulness such as sleeping together without permission (sahaseyya) or wandering away from one's robes (ticīvaravippavāsa). Kappañca akappiyañca kappākappiyaṃ, meaning 'allowable and unallowable are allowable-unallowable', kappākappiye saññā, meaning 'perception of allowable-unallowable', sā assa atthīti kappā…pe… saññī, meaning 'one who has that is called allowable...perceiver', tassa bhāvoti tā-paccayo, meaning 'the suffix -tā is in the sense of abstract noun'. ‘‘saññitā’’ is said with the elision of the ya, or the suffix is in the sense of instrument. And those apply in order to "akappiye" etc. There, one who eats flesh that is not allowable (acchamaṃsa) thinking it is "pork" (sūkaramaṃsa), and eats at the wrong time (vikāla) with the perception of it being the right time (kālasaññitāya), this one akappiye kappiyasaññitāya āpajjati means 'incurs an offense in what is unallowable with the perception of it being allowable'. But one who eats pork thinking it is "allowable flesh," and eats at the right time with the perception of it being the wrong time, this one kappiye akappiyasaññitāya āpajjati means 'incurs an offense in what is allowable with the perception of it being unallowable'.
376.Alajjiaññāṇatāya kāyavācāhi āpattiṃ chādayeti yojanā.Liṅgeti liṅgaparivattananimittaṃ. Liṅge saṅghe ca gaṇe ca ekasmiṃ cāti āpattivuṭṭhiti catudhā hotīti seso.
376. By unashamedness and ignorance, one conceals an offense by body and speech, is the connection. Liṅge means 'in regard to gender', with regard to gender, the Sangha, a group, or an individual, the arising of offenses is fourfold, is the remainder.
377.Paccayadvayeti cīvare piṇḍapāte ca.Parikathobhāsaviññattīti abhilāpamattametaṃ. Sahacaritassa pana nimittakammassāpi ettheva saṅgaho veditabbo. Tattha pariyāyena kathanaṃparikathā. Ujukameva avatvā yathā adhippāyo vibhūto hoti, evaṃ obhāsanaṃobhāso. Paccaye uddissa yathā adhippāyo ñāyati, evaṃ viññāpanaṃviññatti. Nimittakaraṇaṃnimittakammaṃ. Tatiyeti senāsane.Seseti gilānapaccaye.
377. Paccayadvaye means 'in the two requisites' of robes and alms food. Parikathobhāsaviññattī is just a matter of expression. However, even the instrumental action of an associate should be included here. There, describing in a roundabout way is parikathā. Expressing in such a way that the intention is clearly revealed without speaking directly is obhāso. Making known the intention by referring to the requisite is viññatti. Performing an instrumental action is nimittakammaṃ. Tatiye means 'in the third' requisite, lodging. Sese means 'in the remaining' requisite, medicine for the sick.
378.Pañcannaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ accaye dānaṃ na rūhatīti sambandho.Accaye dānanti ‘‘mamaccayena mayhaṃ santakaṃ upajjhāyassa hotū’’tiādinā evaṃ attano apagame dānaṃ.Tanti accayena dinnaṃ cīvarādikaṃ saṅghasseva ca hoti, na bhikkhunoti adhippāyo.Gihīnaṃ panāti gihīnaṃ accaye dānaṃ pana. Idamettha dānaggahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ – ‘‘idaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’tiādinā sammukhā vā ‘‘itthannāmassa demī’’tiādinā parammukhāpi dinnaṃyeva hoti. ‘‘Tuyhaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti vutte ‘‘mayhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti vadati, sudinnaṃ suggahitañca. ‘‘Tava santakaṃ karohi, tava santakaṃ hotu, tava santakaṃ kārāpehī’’ti vutte ‘‘mama santakaṃ karomi, mama santakaṃ hotu, mama santakaṃ karissāmī’’ti vadati. Duddinnaṃ duggahitañca. Sace pana ‘‘tava santakaṃ karohī’’ti vutte ‘‘sādhu, bhante, mayhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti gaṇhāti, suggahitanti.
378. The giving does not grow upon the death of the five co-religionists, is the connection. Accaye dāna means 'giving upon death', such as, "Upon my death, may what belongs to me go to the preceptor," giving in this way at one's own passing away. Ta means 'that', the robes etc., given upon death, belong to the Sangha alone, not to the monk, is the intention. Gihīnaṃ panā means 'but the giving upon the death of laypeople'. Here, the characteristic of accepting a gift is this: when saying "I give this to you" directly, or "I give to so-and-so" indirectly, it is indeed given. When saying "Take to yourself" and the other says "I take to myself," it is well given and well taken. When saying "Make it yours, may it be yours, may you have it made yours," and the other says "I make it mine, may it be mine, I will make it mine," it is poorly given and poorly taken. But if, when saying "Make it yours," one takes it saying "Good, venerable sir, I take it to myself," it is well taken.
379.Bhikkhu vā sāmaṇero vāupassayebhikkhunīnaṃ vihārekālaṃ kayirāthayadi kālaṅkareyya,tatthatasmiṃ ubhinnaṃ santake bhikkhusaṅgho evadāyajjosāmī hotīti seso.Sesepīti avasese bhikkhunisikkhamānasāmaṇerisantakepi.Ayaṃ nayoti yadi te bhikkhūnaṃ vihāre kālaṃ kareyyuṃ, tesaṃ santake bhikkhunisaṅgho eva dāyajjoti ayameva nayoti attho.
379. Whether a monk or novice were to upassaye, in the nun's monastery, kālaṃ kayirātha means 'were to pass away', tattha means 'there', in that property belonging to both, the Sangha of monks alone is the dāyajjo, owner, is the remainder. Sesepī means 'also in the remaining' property belonging to a nun, probationer, or novice. Ayaṃ nayo means 'if they were to pass away in the monks' monastery, the Sangha of nuns alone is the owner of their property; this is the same principle', is the meaning.
380.‘‘Imaṃ netvā asukassa dehī’’tidinnaṃyāva parassa hatthaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāvapurimasseva,yo pahiṇati, tassevāti attho.Dammīti ‘‘itthannāmassa demī’’tidinnaṃpanapacchimasseva,yassa pahiṇati, tasseva santakanti attho.Imaṃ vidhiṃ‘‘vuttanayena ime sāmino hontī’’ti etaṃ pakāraṃñatvāvissāsaggāhaṃ vā gaṇhe, matakacīvaraṃ vā adhiṭṭheti yojanā.Vissāsagāhanti sāmīsu jīvantesu vissāsena gāhaṃ gahetvā.Matakacīvaraṃ adhiṭṭheti tesu matesu aññe ce bhikkhū na santi, ‘‘mayhaṃ taṃ pāpuṇātī’’ti matakacīvaraṃ adhiṭṭheyya. Aññesaṃ adatvā dūre ṭhapitamatakaparikkhārā pana tattha tattha saṅghasseva honti. Bhikkhumhi kālakate saṅgho sāmī pattacīvare, apica gilānupaṭṭhākā bahūpakārā, saṅghena ticīvarañca pattañca gilānupaṭṭhākānaṃ dātabbaṃ. Yaṃ tattha lahubhaṇḍaṃ lahuparikkhāraṃ, taṃ sammukhībhūtena saṅghena bhājetabbaṃ. Yaṃ tattha garubhaṇḍaṃ garuparikkhāraṃ, taṃ āgatānāgatassa cātuddisassa saṅghassa avissajjiyaṃ avebhaṅgiyaṃ.Gilānupaṭṭhākonāma gihī vā hotu pabbajito vā, antamaso mātugāmopi, sabbe bhāgaṃ labhanti. Bahū ce sabbe samaggā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, sabbesaṃ samabhāgo dātabbo. Yo panettha visesena upaṭṭhahati, tassa viseso kātabbo.
380. Dinnaṃ means 'given', saying "Taking this, give it to so-and-so," until it reaches the hand of the other, it belongs purimasseva, to the former one alone, the one who sends it, is the meaning. Dammī means 'I give', but dinnaṃ saying "I give to so-and-so" belongs pacchimasseva, to the latter one alone, the one to whom it is sent. Imaṃ vidhiṃ means 'this method', ñatvā means 'having known' this way, "These owners will be in the manner stated," one should take a trusting pledge (vissāsaggāha) or resolve upon a robe of a deceased monk (matakacīvara). Vissāsagāha means 'taking a pledge with trust' while the owners are still alive. Matakacīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhe means 'resolve upon the robe of a deceased monk': if there are no other monks when those have died, one should resolve upon the robe of the deceased thinking "That will come to me." But unclaimed requisites of deceased monks that are kept far away belong to the Sangha in those places. When a monk has passed away, the Sangha is the owner of the bowl and robes, and also the attendant of the sick who is very helpful, the Sangha should give the triple robe and bowl to the attendant of the sick. Whatever light goods or light requisites are there, that should be divided by the Sangha in the presence of everyone. Whatever heavy goods or heavy requisites are there, that is unrenounceable (avissajjiyaṃ) and indivisible (avebhaṅgiyaṃ) to the Sangha of the four directions, both present and future. Gilānupaṭṭhāko means 'attendant of the sick', whether they be a layperson or a monastic, even a woman, all receive a share. If many, all being in harmony, attend, an equal share should be given to all. But one who attends with special care should be given a special portion.
381.‘‘Lohabhaṇḍe paharaṇiṃ ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ kappatī’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ.Paharaṇinti āvudhaṃ. Pādukā ca saṅkamanīyo pallaṅko cāti dvando. Mattikāmaye katakaṃ kumbhakārikañca ṭhapetvā sabbaṃ kappatīti yojanīyaṃ, dhaniyasseva sabbamattikāmayakuṭikumbhakārikāti.
381. It should be connected as "Having placed a cutting tool (paharaṇi) in an iron vessel, everything is allowable." Paharaṇi means 'a weapon'. Pādukā ca saṅkamanīyo pallaṅko cāti is a dvando compound, meaning 'shoes, a walkway and a couch'. Having placed a clay-made stand (katakaṃ) and a potter's workshop, everything is allowable, should be connected; the entire clay hut of the potter is kumbhakārikā.
Pakiṇṇakaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Miscellaneous Section is Finished.
42. Desanāniddesavaṇṇanā
42. Commentary on the Section on Exposition
382.Idāni desanānidassanabyāsena heṭṭhā avuttāni kānici sikkhāpadāni upadisituṃ‘‘cāgo’’tiādimāha. Bhikkhubhāvassa yo cāgo, sā pārājikadesanāti sambandho. Bhavati anenāti bhāvo, saddappavattinimittaṃ, bhikkhuno bhāvo bhikkhu-saddassa pavattinimittaṃ bhikkhukiccaṃbhikkhubhāvo,tassa. Disī uccāraṇe, uccāraṇā pakāsanā desanā. ‘‘Channamativassati, vivaṭṭaṃ nātivassatī’’ti (udā. 45) hi vuttaṃ. Idha pana bhikkhubhāvapariccāgoyeva pārājikāya pakāsanā nāma pārājikāya desanā. ‘‘Yo’’ti vuttattā ‘‘so’’ti vattuṃ yuttaṃ, tathāpi sabbādīhi vuttassa vā liṅgamādiyyate vakkhamānassa vāti vakkhamānadesanāpekkhāya‘‘so’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā yena pakārena ‘‘chādeti jānamāpanna’’ntiādinā vuttaṃyathāvuttaṃ,tena. Vuttamanatikkammāti abyayībhāvavasena vā attho veditabbo. Idhāpi garukāpattiyā vuṭṭhānānatikkameneva pakāsanā desanā siyāti‘‘vuṭṭhānaṃ garukāpattidesanā’’ti vuccati.
382. Now, in order to teach some precepts that were not mentioned below by way of illustration of exposition, he says ‘‘cāgo’’ etc. Bhikkhubhāvassa yo cāgo, sā pārājikadesanāti is connected as 'the renunciation of monkhood is the exposition of a Pārājika offense'. Bhavati anenāti bhāvo, meaning 'that by which it becomes is becoming', saddappavattinimittaṃ, meaning 'the cause of the arising of a word', bhikkhuno bhāvo, meaning 'the becoming of a monk', bhikkhu-saddassa pavattinimittaṃ bhikkhukiccaṃ, bhikkhubhāvo, tassa, meaning 'the actions of a monk are the monkhood'. Disī uccāraṇe means 'to utter', uccāraṇā pakāsanā desanā means 'uttering is expression is exposition'. For it was said, "It rains on the uncovered, it does not rain on the covered" (udā. 45). But here, the abandonment of monkhood itself is called the expression of a Pārājika offense, that is, the exposition of a Pārājika offense. Because "yo" (who) was said, it is fitting to say "so" (that), yet the gender of what is said by all etc., is taken up, or it refers to the exposition to be spoken of, therefore ‘‘so’’ (that) is said with regard to the exposition to be spoken of. Yathāvuttaṃ means 'as said', yathā yena pakārena ‘‘chādeti jānamāpanna’’ntiādinā vuttaṃ, meaning 'in whatever way it was said, as it was said "knowing, he conceals an offense" etc.' Abyayībhāvavasena vā attho veditabbo means 'or the meaning should be understood as an indeclinable'. Here also, the expression is only with non-transgression of the rising from a serious offense, therefore it is called ‘‘vuṭṭhānaṃ garukāpattidesanā’’, 'rising is the exposition of a serious offense'.
383.Idāni vattabbaṃ sandhāya‘‘eva’’nti vuttaṃ.Ekassāti ekassa bhikkhuno.
383. Now, with reference to what should be said, ‘‘eva’’ (only) is said. Ekassā means 'to one monk'.
384.Tumhamūleti tumhākaṃ mūle samīpe.Paṭidesemīti pakāsemi.Saṃvareyyāsīti saṃyameyyāsi, saṃvare patiṭṭheyyāsīti attho.
384. Tumhamūle means 'at your root', near you. Paṭidesemī means 'I declare'. Saṃvareyyāsī means 'you should restrain yourself', the meaning is 'you should establish yourself in restraint'.
385.Nissajjitvānāti ekabahubhāvaṃ sannihitāsannihitabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘idaṃ me, bhante, cīvara’’ntiādinā nissajjitvā.Tenāti yassa cīvaraṃ nissaṭṭhaṃ, tena. ‘‘Imaṃ…pe… dammī’’ti nissaṭṭhacīvaraṃ deyyanti sambandhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Imaṃ cīvaraṃ dasāhātikkanta’’ntiādinā yojetabbaṃ.
385. Nissajjitvānā means 'having relinquished', having known the state of being one or many, of being present or absent, having relinquished saying "This is my robe, venerable sir" etc. Tenā means 'by him', by whom the robe was relinquished. ‘‘Imaṃ…pe… dammī’’ti is to be connected as 'the relinquished robe should be given' saying "This...etc., I give". ‘‘Imaṃ cīvaraṃ dasāhātikkanta’’nti should be connected as "This robe is beyond ten days" etc.
386.(Ka)cīvaranti ticīvarādhiṭṭhānanayena adhiṭṭhitesu saṅghāṭiādīsu yaṃ kiñci cīvaraṃ.Vippavutthanti vippayuttena vutthaṃ.
386. (Ka) cīvara means 'robe', any robe among the Sanghati etc. that has been resolved upon according to the method of resolving upon the triple robe. Vippavuttha means 'lived apart from'.
akālacīvaranti anatthate kathine vassānassa pacchimamāsaṃ ṭhapetvā sese ekādasamāse, atthate kathine tañca māsaṃ hemantike cattāro māse ca ṭhapetvā sese sattamāse uppannaṃ, kālepi saṅghassa vā ‘‘idaṃ akālacīvara’’nti ekapuggalassa vā ‘‘idaṃ tuyhaṃ dammī’’ti uddisitvā dinnaṃ. Itaraṃ pana kālacīvaraṃ.Māsātikkantanti akālacīvare uppanne ūnassa pāripūriyā saṅghagaṇādito satiyā paccāsāya māsamekaṃ parihāro labbhati, taṃ māsaṃ atikkantaṃ.
akālacīvara means 'untimely robe', when the Kathina is not spread, arising in the eleven months remaining after setting aside the last month of the rainy season; when the Kathina is spread, arising in the seven months remaining after setting aside that month and the four months of the cold season; even in season, when designating to the Sangha saying "This is an untimely robe," or designating to an individual saying "I give this to you." But the other is a timely robe. Māsātikkanta means 'beyond a month', when an untimely robe has arisen, a dispensation of one month is obtained from the Sangha group etc., in expectation of the satisfaction of what is deficient; that which has exceeded that month.
purāṇacīvaranti yaṃ antamaso ussīsakaṃ katvā nipanno.Cīvaraṃnāma channaṃ aññataraṃ vikappanūpagaṃ. Eseva nayo sabbesu vakkhamānacīvarappaṭisaṃyuttasikkhāpadesu.
purāṇacīvara means 'old robe', that which one has lain down using at least as a headrest. Cīvaraṃ nāma channaṃ aññataraṃ vikappanūpagaṃ means 'robe is any one of the six that is subject to disposal'. This same principle applies to all the precepts connected with robes to be spoken of.
aññatra pārivattakāti antamaso harītakīkhaṇḍenapi pārivattakaṃ vinā.
aññatra pārivattakā means 'except for exchange', without exchange even for a piece of myrobalan fruit.
gahapatikanti bhikkhūsu apabbajitakaṃ.Aññatra samayāti acchinnacīvaranaṭṭhacīvarasamayaṃ vinā, acchinnacīvarehi pana sākhāpalāsaṃ attanā bhañjitvāpi vākādīni gaṇhitvāpi nivāsetuṃ vaṭṭati, pageva viññatti. Cīvaraṃ viññāpitanti sambandho. Kanti āha‘‘aññātaka’’ntiādi.
gahapatika means 'householder', one who has not gone forth among the monks. Aññatra samayā means 'except for a time' of a cut-off robe or a lost robe; but in the case of a cut-off robe, it is proper to wear it even having broken off branches and leaves oneself, or having taken bark etc., how much more so by requesting. Cīvaraṃ viññāpitanti is the connection, meaning 'a robe should be requested'. Kanti āha, who said ‘‘aññātaka’’ etc., means 'unknown' etc.
taduttarīti tato vuttappamāṇato uttari, acchinnacīvarena bhikkhunā kāyena vā vācāya vā abhiharitvā pavāritacīvarato tīsu naṭṭhesu dve sāditabbāni, dvīsu naṭṭhesu ekaṃ sāditabbaṃ. Pakatiyā santaruttarena carantena dvīsu naṭṭhesu dveyeva sāditabbāni, ekasmiṃ naṭṭhe ekaṃyeva sāditabbaṃ. Yassa ekaṃyeva hoti, tasmiṃ naṭṭhe dve sāditabbāni.
taduttarī means 'more than that', more than the amount stated; when a robe has been cut off, when three are lost from the robe that has been offered, two should be obtained by urging with body or speech by a monk. When two are lost, one should be obtained. For one who usually goes about with an under-robe, two should be obtained when two are lost; when one is lost, only one should be obtained. When he only has one, two should be obtained when that is lost.
appavāritoti gahapatinā vā gahapatāniyā vā.Vikappanti paṭhamaadhippetato mūlaṃ vaḍḍhāpento sundarakāmatāya ‘‘āyataṃ vā’’tiādinā visiṭṭhakappaṃ adhikavidhānaṃ.
appavārito means 'uninvited' by a householder or a householder's wife. Vikappa means 'disposal', increasing the root from the original intention, an additional prescription in order to be beautiful, "long" etc., meaning 'a special designation'.
aññātake gahapatiketi bahūnaṃ vasena vuttamattameva purimato viseso.
aññātake gahapatike means 'to an unknown householder', the only difference from the former is that it is said in terms of many.
codanāyāti ‘‘attho me, āvuso, cīvarenā’’ti codanāya.Ṭhānenāti kāyacodanamāha. Rājādīhi pesitena hi dūtena veyyāvaccakarassa hatthe cīvaracetāpanne nikkhitte tisso codanā anuññātā, codanāya diguṇaṃ ṭhānaṃ, tasmā sace codetiyeva,natiṭṭhati, cha codanā labbhanti. Sace tiṭṭhatiyeva, na codeti, dvādasa ṭhānāni labbhanti. Sace ubhayaṃ karoti, ekāya codanāya dve ṭhānāni hāpetabbāni.
codanāyā means 'by urging', by the urging "I need a robe, friend." Ṭhānenā means 'by insistence', he speaks of bodily urging. For when a robe-value is placed in the hand of a messenger sent by kings etc., for one who does service, three urgings are allowed. Insistence is double the urging, therefore, if he only urges and does not persist (tiṭṭhati), six urgings are obtained. If he only persists and does not urge, twelve instances of insistence are obtained. If he does both, two instances of insistence should be deducted for one urging.
(Ṭa) suddhāni ca tāni kāḷakāni ca jātiyā rajanena vā.
(Ṭa) And those that are pure are black either by birth or by dyeing.
tulanti catūhi tulāhi kāretukāmataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atthato pana yattakehi eḷakalomehi kātukāmo hoti, tesu dve koṭṭhāsā kāḷakānaṃ, eko odātānaṃ, eko gocariyānaṃ gahetabbo.Tulānāma palasataṃ.Gocariyānāma kapilavaṇṇā. Idaṃ me santhataṃ kārāpitanti yojanā.
Tulānti is said intending to have it done with four tulās. But in reality, two parts of black goat's wool, one of white, and one of gocariya should be taken from as many goat's wools as he wants to make it with. Tulā means one hundred palas. Gocariyā means the color of reddish-brown. The meaning is: 'Let this be made for me as a spread'.
tiyojanaparamanti gahitaṭṭhānato tīṇi yojanāni paramo assa atikkamanassāti bhāvanapuṃsakavasena attho veditabbo.Atikkāmitānīti antamaso suttakenapi bhaṇḍakatabhaṇḍaharaṇaṃ vinā antamaso vātābādhappaṭikāratthaṃ kaṇṇacchidde pakkhittāni atikkāmitāni.
Tiyojanaparamanti The meaning should be understood in the neuter gender as 'three yojanas is the limit of its exceeding from the place where it was taken.' Atikkāmitānīti Those that have been exceeded, even if they were put in the ear-hole for protection from wind and diseases, without taking a bundle-carrying bundle, even with a thread.
387-9.Nissajjitvānāti vuttanayena vatthūni nissajjitvā.Athāti desitānantaraṃ. ‘‘Imaṃ jānāhī’’ti gihiṃ vadeti yojanā.Soti ārāmikādiko gihī. ‘‘Iminā kiṃ āharāmī’’ti vadeyyāti sambandho.Vadeyyāti yadi vadati.Imanti avatvāti ‘‘imaṃ āharā’’ti avatvā bhikkhūnaṃ kappiyaṃ telādinti vadeti sambandho.Ādinti sandhivasena niggahitaṃ. Tena parivattetvāna so yaṃ kappiyaṃ āharatīti yojanā.Tenāti nissaggiyavatthunā.Dvepete ṭhapetvāti ete rūpiyappaṭiggāhakarūpiyasaṃvohārake dve ṭhapetvā sesehi paribhuñjituṃ labbhanti sambandho.Paribhuñjitunti taṃ bhuñjituṃ.Tatoti parivattitakappiyato.Aññenāti antamaso ārāmikenāpi.Tesanti vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ.
387-9.Nissajjitvānāti Having given up the objects in the manner stated. Athāti immediately after teaching. The construction is, "Tell the householder, 'Know this.'" Soti That householder, such as the gardener. The connection is, "He should say, 'What shall I bring with this?'" Vadeyyāti If he speaks. Imanti avatvāti The connection is, without saying "Bring this," he says, "Oil etc., allowable for the monks." Ādinti Included by way of abbreviation. Therefore, the construction is: having exchanged it, whatever allowable thing he brings. Tenāti With that object to be forfeited. Dvepete ṭhapetvāti The connection is: having set aside these two, the receiver of money and the one who deals with money, it is allowable to use the rest. Paribhuñjitunti To use that. Tatoti From the allowable thing that has been exchanged. Aññenāti Even by another, even the gardener. Tesanti Of the two stated.
390.Antamaso tannibbattā rukkhacchāyāpīti sambandho.Tannibbattāti nissaṭṭhavatthunā kiṇitvā gahitaārāme rukkhacchāyā tannibbattā hotīti tato nibbattāti samāso.Ādito santhatattayanti ādimhi kosiyasuddhakāḷakadvebhāgasanthatattayaṃ.
390.The connection is, "Even the shadow of the tree that arises from it." Tannibbattāti The compound is: the shadow of the tree in the monastery bought with the thing given up is tannibbattā, because it arises from that. Ādito santhatattayanti The three kinds of spreads: the kosiyā, the pure one, and the two parts of black at the beginning.
391.Evaṃ ce no labhethāti evaṃ parivattetvā kappiyakārako no ce labheyya,sogihī ‘‘imaṃ chaḍḍehī’’tisaṃsiyovattabbo, evaṃ rūpiyachaḍḍako gihī no ce labheyya, sammato bhikkhu chaḍḍeyyāti sambandho.Sammatoti ‘‘yo chandāgatiṃ na gaccheyyā’’tiādinā (pārā. 584) vuttapañcaṅgasamannāgato rūpiyachaḍḍakasammutiyā sammato bhikkhu.
391.Evaṃ ce no labhethāti If he does not get a person to exchange it for an allowable item in this way, so that householder should be told saṃsiyo "Throw this away." The connection is: if a householder who throws away money is not available, a monk approved (by the Sangha) should throw it away. Sammatoti A monk approved by the approval for throwing away money, endowed with the five qualities stated (pārā. 584) beginning with "who would not go to bias due to desire."
392.Etānīti paṭiggahitarūpiyāni.Dutiyaṃ pattanti ūnapañcabandhane sati viññāpitapattaṃ saṅghe vattuṃ labbhareti padasambandho.Vattunti ‘‘ahaṃ bhante rūpiyaṃ paṭiggahesi’’ntiādinā vattuṃ. Sesāni avasesanissaggiyavatthūni saṅghe ekasmiṃ gaṇe ca vattuṃ labbhareti yojanā.Bhāsantarenapi vattuṃ labbhanti na kevalaṃ pāḷibhāsāyameva, sīhaḷādibhāsāyapi nissajjituṃ labbhatīti attho.
392.Etānīti These pieces of money that have been received. Dutiyaṃ pattanti If there are less than five bindings, it is allowable to tell the Sangha about the bowl that has been requested. Vattunti To say, "Venerable Sir, I accepted money," etc. The construction is: it is allowable to tell the Sangha or a group about the remaining objects to be forfeited. Bhāsantarenapi vattuṃ labbhanti It is allowable to give up not only in the Pali language, but also in the Sinhala language, etc. This is the meaning.
393.(Ka)nānappakāranti cīvarādīnaṃ kappiyabhaṇḍānaṃ vasena anekavidhaṃ. Kayo gahaṇaṃ, vikkayo dānaṃ. Kayo ca vikkayo cakayavikkayaṃ.
393.(Ka)nānappakāranti Various kinds, depending on allowable goods such as robes, etc. Kayo is buying, vikkayo is giving. Kayo ca vikkayo ca kayavikkayaṃ Buying and selling.
ūnapañcabandhanenāti ūnāni pañca bandhanāni yassa, tena, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ. Yathākathañci pana pañcabandhano patto, pañcabandhanokāso vā, so apatto, aññaṃ viññāpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
Ūnapañcabandhanenāti By that which has less than five bindings; this is a karana-vacana in the sense of "having such a characteristic." However, a bowl with five bindings in any way, or a place for five bindings, is not a bowl, and it is allowable to request another.
394.Sammannitvānāti padabhājanīye vuttañattidutiyakammena sammannitvā.Saṅghassa pattantantianta-saddena pattānaṃ ante bhavo lāmako pattoyeva gahito, nissaṭṭhapattassa vijjamānaguṇaṃ vatvā theraṃ, therassa pattaṃ dutiyattheraṃ gāhāpetvā eteneva upāyena yāvasaṅghanavakaṃ gāhāpetvā yo tattha sannipatitasaṅghassa pattesu pariyanto patto, taṃ pattanti.Tassāti katanissajjanassa bhikkhuno.Dāpayeti sammatena pattagāhāpakena dāpeyya.
394.Sammannitvānāti Having approved with a ñattidutiyakamma as stated in the Padabhājaniya. Saṅghassa pattantanti By the word anta- here, the last bowl is taken, the inferior bowl that exists at the end of the bowls, and after telling the Elder the existing qualities of the bowl to be forfeited, and having the Elder's bowl taken by a second Elder, and having it taken up to the newest member of the Sangha by this same method, that bowl is the last bowl among the bowls of the Sangha gathered there. Tassāti To that monk who has done the giving up. Dāpayeti The approved bowl-taker should give it.
395.(Ka)bhesajjanti bhesajjakiccaṃ karotu vā, mā vā, evaṃ laddhavohāraṃ sappiādikaṃ sattāhakālikaṃ.
395.(Ka)bhesajjanti Let him do the business of medicine or not, the ghee etc., which has obtained usage in this way, is allowable for seven days.
‘‘atirekamāse sese’’ti.
‘‘atirekamāse sese’’ti.
sāmaṃ datvāti veyyāvaccādīni paccāsīsamāno sayameva datvā.Acchinnanti taṃ akarontaṃ disvā sakasaññāya acchinnaṃ. Bhikkhunopi cīvaraṃ ṭhapetvā aññaṃ parikkhāraṃ, anupasampannassa ca yaṃ kiñci parikkhāraṃ acchindato dukkaṭaṃ. Pariccajitvā dinnaṃ sakasaññaṃ vinā acchindanto bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo.
Sāmaṃ datvāti Having given it himself, expecting services etc. Acchinnanti Having seen him not doing that, it is 'taken away' by his own recognition. There is a dukkaṭa for a monk also who takes away another's requisites, leaving the robe, and for taking away any requisites whatsoever from one who is not yet fully ordained. If he takes away something given after abandoning it, without his own recognition, he should be made to pay the price of the goods.
vikappanti ‘‘āyatañca karohi vitthatañcā’’tiādikaṃ adhikavidhānaṃ.
vikappanti Additional arrangement, such as "Make it longer and wider."
accekacīvaranti gamikagilānagabbhiniabhinavuppannasaddhānaṃ aññatarena pavāraṇamāsassa juṇhapakkhapañcamito paṭṭhāya ‘‘vassāvāsikaṃ dassāmī’’ti dinnaṃ accāyikacīvaraṃ. Accekacīvarassa anatthate kathine ekādasadivasādhiko māso, atthate kathine ekādasadivasādhikā pañca māsā cīvarakālasamayo, taṃ atikkāmentassa nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmita’’nti. Kālo ca so samayo ca cīvarassa kālasamayo, taṃ.
Accekacīvaranti An emergency robe given, starting from the fifth day of the waxing fortnight of the month of invitation, to one of these: a traveler, a sick person, a pregnant woman, or a newly ordained faithful person, saying "I will give a rains-residence robe". For an emergency robe, if the kathina is not laid out, the robe-time is one month with eleven days extra; if the kathina is laid out, it is five months with eleven days extra; if he exceeds that, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya. Therefore it was said, ‘‘cīvarakālasamayaṃ atikkāmita’’nti. Kālo ca so samayo ca cīvarassa kālasamayo, taṃ.
‘‘atirekachāratta’’ntiādi.
‘‘atirekachāratta’’ntiādi.
jānanti jānanto.
Jānanti Knowing.
396.Ādimhi viyāti paṭhamanissaggiye viya.
396.Ādimhi viyāti As in the first nissaggiya.
397.(Kha) antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato khādanīyādippaṭiggahaṇe ca bhikkhūsu kulesu bhuñjantesu ‘‘idha pūvaṃ, sūpaṃ dethā’’tiādinā nayena vosāsamānāya bhikkhuniyā anapasādanena ca sekhasammatesu kulesu pubbe animantitassa khādanīyādīnaṃ paṭiggahaṇe ca sappaṭibhaye āraññakasenāsane viharantassa pubbe appaṭisaṃviditakhādanīyādippaṭiggahaṇe ca pāṭidesanīyaṃ nāma āpattinikāyo vutto. Tena vuttaṃ‘‘gārayha’’ntiādi.
397.(Kha) When a nun receives food etc. from the hand of a householder who has entered a house; when nuns are eating in families of monks and are urging "Give pudding here, soup here," etc. in this way; and when one dwells in an intimidating forest dwelling, and one receives food etc. that has not been prepared beforehand in families approved by the trainees, without invitation, a chapter of offenses called pāṭidesanīya is stated. Therefore it was said, ‘‘gārayha’’ntiādi.
398.‘‘Adesanāgāminiya’’ntiādi ‘‘na desaye’’ti ettha kammaṃ. Pārājikā saṅghādisesā caadesanāgāminiyonāma. Na āpattianāpatti,taṃ. Katadesanaṃdesitaṃ. Nānāsaṃvāsanissīmaṭṭhitānaṃ na desayeti sambandho. Evaṃ catupañcahi na desaye, manasā na desaye, apakatattānaṃ na desaye, nānā ‘‘ekā’’ti na desayeti.Manasāti kevalaṃ citteneva.Nānāti sambahulā āpattiyo ‘‘ekā’’ti vatvā. Ekaṃ pana āpattiṃ ‘‘sambahulā’’ti desetuṃ vaṭṭatīti.
398.‘‘Adesanāgāminiya’’ntiādi is the object in "Na desaye". Pārājikās and saṅghādisesas are called adesanāgāminiyo. Na āpatti is anāpatti, that is. Katadesanaṃ is desitaṃ. The connection is: he does not declare to those dwelling in separate communions and boundaries. Similarly, he does not declare with four or five, he does not declare in his mind, he does not declare to those who have concealed their offenses, he does not declare "one" as "different". Manasāti Only with the mind. Nānāti Having said that many offenses are "one". But it is allowable to declare one offense as "many."
Desanāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The description of declaration is finished.
43. Chandadānaniddesavaṇṇanā
43. The Description of the Directives on Giving Consent
399.Kammappatteti uposathādino kammassa patte yutte anurūpe.Saṅghe samāgateti catuvaggādike saṅghe ekattha sannipatite. Ettha ca chandahārakenāpi saddhiṃ catuvaggādiko veditabbo.
399.Kammappatteti Appropriate, suitable for the act of Uposatha, etc. Saṅghe samāgateti In a Sangha of four or more, gathered in one place. Here, a Sangha of four or more should be understood, together with the one who brings the consent.
400.Chandadānādividhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘eka’’ntiādimāha.Upāgammāti santiṃ āpattiṃ pakāsetvā tato pacchā upagantvā.Chandaṃ dadeti vakkhamānesu tīsu ekenapi bahi uposathaṃ katvā āgato chandaṃ dadeyya, kenaci karaṇīyena sannipātaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā kāyasāmaggiṃ adento pana pārisuddhiṃ dento chandaṃ dadeyya.
400.In order to show the method of giving consent, etc., he said ‘‘eka’’ntiādi. Upāgammāti Having revealed an existing offense, and then after that, having approached. Chandaṃ dadeti One who has gone outside for the Uposatha and returned, having performed the Uposatha outside with one of the three to be said, should give consent; but if he goes to the place of assembly for some business, and does not give bodily association, he should give consent while giving purity.
402.Ubhinnaṃ dāne kiṃpayojananti āha‘‘pārisuddhī’’tiādi. Pārisuddhippadānena saṅghassa attano cāpi uposathaṃ sampādetīti sambandho. Parisuddhi eva pārisuddhi, tassa padānaṃ, tena. Nanu ca pārisuddhitāpadānamattameva uposathakammaṃ nāmāti pārisuddhippadānaṃ attano uposathaṃ sampādetu, kathaṃ saṅghassāti? Vuccate – pārisuddhidānassa dhammakammatāsampādanena saṅghassāpi uposathaṃ sampādetīti.
402.He says, "What is the purpose of giving both?" ‘‘pārisuddhī’’tiādi. The connection is: by giving purity, he accomplishes the Uposatha both for the Sangha and for himself. Parisuddhi eva pārisuddhi, tassa padānaṃ, tena. But indeed, if the Uposatha-kamma is merely the giving of purity, how does the giving of purity accomplish the Uposatha for himself, how for the Sangha? It is said: By accomplishing the nature of a Dhamma-kamma of the giving of purity, it accomplishes the Uposatha also for the Sangha.
adhammena vaggaṃuposathakammaṃ. Cattāro pārisuddhiuposathaṃ karonti, tayo vā dve vā pātimokkhaṃ uddisanti,adhammena samaggaṃ. Catūsu ekassa āharitvā tayo pātimokkhaṃ uddisanti, tīsu vā ekassa āharitvā dve pārisuddhiuposathaṃ karonti,dhammena vaggaṃ. Sace pana cattāro sannipatitvā pātimokkhaṃ uddisanti, tayo pārisuddhiuposathaṃ, dve aññamaññaṃ pārisuddhiuposathaṃ karonti,dhammena samaggaṃ. Pavāraṇakammesupi pañcasu ekassa pavāraṇaṃ āharitvā cattāro gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvā pavārenti, catūsu tīsu vā ekassa āharitvā tayo dve vā saṅghañattiṃ ṭhapetvā pavārenti, adhammena vaggaṃ pavāraṇakammantiādi vuttanayameva.Sesakammaṃ vibādhatīti avasesasaṅghakiccaṃ vibādheti aladdhādhippāyattāti adhippāyo.
adhammena vaggaṃ Uposatha-kamma. Four do the purity-Uposatha, three or two recite the Pātimokkha, adhammena samaggaṃ. Having brought one from among four, three recite the Pātimokkha; or having brought one from among three, two do the purity-Uposatha, dhammena vaggaṃ. But if four gather and recite the Pātimokkha, three do the purity-Uposatha, two do the purity-Uposatha to each other, dhammena samaggaṃ. In the Pavāraṇā-kammas also, having brought the Pavāraṇā of one from among five, four declare the group-motion and perform Pavāraṇā; having brought one from among four or three, three or two declare the Sangha-motion and perform Pavāraṇā; adhammena vaggaṃ Pavāraṇā-kammantiādi is as stated above. Sesakammaṃ vibādhatīti It obstructs the remaining business of the Sangha, the meaning is because there is no obtaining of intention.
403.Dvayanti uposathakaraṇañceva avasesakiccañca. Attano na sādhetīti sambandhanīyaṃ.
403.Dvayanti The Uposatha performance and the remaining business. It should be connected that he does not accomplish for himself.
404.Hareyyāti pubbe vuttaṃ suddhikachandaṃ vā imaṃ vā chandapārisuddhiṃ hareyya.Paramparā na hārayeti paramparā na āhareyya. Kasmāti āha‘‘paramparāhaṭā’’tiādi.Tenāti paṭhamato gahitachandapārisuddhikena.Paramparāhaṭāti yathā biḷālasaṅkhalikāya paṭhamaṃ valayaṃ dutiyaṃ pāpuṇāti, tatiyaṃ na pāpuṇāti, evaṃ dutiyassa āgacchati, tatiyassa na āgacchati. ‘‘Parimparāhaṭā chanda-pārisuddhi na gacchatī’’ti vā pāṭho.
404.Hareyyāti He should bring either the purity or the consent previously stated, or this consent-purity. Paramparā na hārayeti He should not bring it in succession. Why? He says ‘‘paramparāhaṭā’’tiādi. Tenāti By the purity-consent that was first taken. Paramparāhaṭāti Just as on a cat's chain the first ring reaches the second, but the third does not reach, so it comes to the second, but does not come to the third. Or the reading is, "The purity-consent brought in succession does not reach."
405.Sabbūpacāranti ‘‘ekaṃsaṃ cīvaraṃ katvā’’ tiādi sabbaṃ upacāraṃ.
405.Sabbūpacāranti All the attention, beginning with "Having put the robe on one shoulder."
406.So āgato ārocetvā saṅghaṃ pavāreyyāti yojanā.Athāti anantaratthe.Āgatoti pavāraṇaṃ gahetvā āgato bhikkhu.Ārocetvāti bhikkhusaṅghassa ārocetvā.Evanti vakkhamānakkamena.
406.The construction is: having come, having informed, he should invite the Sangha. Athāti In the sense of immediately after. Āgatoti A monk who has come having taken the Pavāraṇā. Ārocetvāti Having informed the Sangha of monks. Evanti In the manner to be stated.
407-8.Gahetvā hārakoti sambandho.Nāhaṭāti āhaṭāva na hotīti attho. Hārako saṅghaṃ patvā tathā heyya, āhaṭā hotīti yojanā. Tathāheyyāti vibbhantādiko bhaveyya.
407-8.The connection is: one who has taken, is a bringer. Nāhaṭāti The meaning is that it is simply not brought. Having reached the Sangha, let the bringer be such; it is brought. The construction is: it is brought. Tathā heyyāti He would become deranged, etc.
409.Saṅghaṃ patto pamatto vā sutto vā nārocayeyya anāpatti cāti sambandho.Ca-saddo chandapārisuddhiharaṇaṃ sampiṇḍetīti.
409.The connection is: having reached the Sangha, if he does not inform due to negligence or sleep, there is no offense. Ca-saddo The word "ca" combines the bringing of consent and purity.
Chandadānaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Description of the Directives on Giving Consent is finished.
44. Uposathaniddesavaṇṇanā
44. The Description of the Directives on the Uposatha
410.Duve uposathāti sulabhappavattivasena vuttaṃ. Tayo pana divasavaseneva uposathā cātuddasiko pannarasiko sāmaggikoti. Tattha hemantagimhavassānānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ utūnaṃ tatiyasattamapakkhesu dve dve katvā chacātuddasikā,sesāpannarasikāti evaṃ ekasaṃvacchare catuvīsatiuposathā. Idaṃ tāva lokassa pakaticārittaṃ. ‘‘Āgantukehi āvāsikānaṃ anuvattitabba’’ntiādivacanato (mahāva. 178) pana tathārūpapaccaye sati aññasmimpi cātuddase uposathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
410.Duve uposathāti It is said from the point of view of easy occurrence. But there are three Uposathas in terms of days: the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the harmonious. There, having made two each in the third and seventh fortnights of the three seasons of winter, summer, and rains, there are six cātuddasikā, the rest are pannarasikā, thus there are twenty-four Uposathas in one year. This, to be sure, is the natural practice of the world. However, from the saying "Newcomers should follow the residents," etc. (mahāva. 178), it is allowable to perform the Uposatha even on another fourteenth, when there is such a reason.
411.Suttuddeso saṅghassevāti yojanā. Adhiṭṭhānañca taṃ uposatho cāti kammadhārayo.Sesānanti dvinnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā. ‘‘Duve’’tiādinā ca cātuddaso pannaraso sāmaggīti divasavasena, suttuddeso adhiṭṭhānaṃ pārisuddhīti karaṇappakārena, saṅghuposatho gaṇuposatho puggaluposathoti puggalavasena cāti nava uposathā dīpitā honti.
411.The construction is: the recital of the suttas is only for the Sangha. Adhiṭṭhānañca taṃ uposatho cāti kammadhārayo. And that is determination-Uposatha. Sesānanti Of two or three. And by "Duve" etc., nine Uposathas are shown: the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the harmonious in terms of days; the recital of the suttas, the determination, and the purity in terms of performance; the Sangha-Uposatha, the group-Uposatha, and the individual-Uposatha in terms of individuals.
412.Pubbakicceti –
412.Pubbakicceti –
‘‘Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;
‘‘Consent, purity, stating the season, counting the monks, and the exhortation;
These are called the preliminary duties of the Uposatha.’’ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 168) –
Evaṃ aṭṭhakathācariyehi vutte pubbakaraṇānantaraṃ kattabbe pubbakicce.
Thus, in the preliminary duty to be done after doing the preliminary preparation, as stated by the teachers of the commentary.
Pubbakaraṇeti –
Pubbakaraṇeti –
‘‘Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;
‘‘The broom, the lamp, the water, and the seat;
These are called the preliminary preparations for the Uposatha.’’ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 168) –
Pattakalleti uposathādīnaṃ catunnaṃ aṅgānaṃ sambhavena patto kālo imassāti pattakālaṃ, pattakālameva pattakallaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Uposathādikammaṃ. Taṃ pana catūhi aṅgehi saṅgahitaṃ. Yathāhu aṭṭhakathācariyā –
Pattakalleti Because the time has come, with the occurrence of the four factors of Uposatha, etc., that time has come to this one, it is pattakālaṃ, pattakālameva pattakallaṃ. What is that? The Uposatha-kamma, etc. But that is included by four factors. As the teachers of the commentary said –
‘‘Uposatho yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā,
‘‘The Uposatha, and as many monks as are fit for the act,
And there are no shared offenses;
And there are no individuals to be avoided in that,
It is called ‘time has come.’" (mahāva. aṭṭha. 168);
Samāniteti sammā ānīte pavattiteti attho.Soti suttuddeso.Pañcadhāti nidānuddeso pārājikuddeso saṅghādisesuddeso aniyatuddeso vitthāruddesoti evaṃ pañcadhā.
Samāniteti Having brought it well, the meaning is having started it. Soti That recital of the suttas. Pañcadhāti In five ways: the recital of the Nidāna, the recital of the Pārājikas, the recital of the Sanghādisesas, the recital of the Aniyatas, and the recital in detail, thus in five ways.
413.Vināntarāyanti rājantarāyo corantarāyo agyantarāyo udakantarāyo manussantarāyo amanussantarāyo vāḷantarāyo sarīsapantarāyo jīvitantarāyo brahmacariyantarāyoti (mahāva. 150) vuttesu dasasu yaṃ kiñci antarāyaṃ vinā.Saṅkhepenāti vinā vitthāraṃ. ‘‘Ettha dvīsu tīsu vā uddesesu visadesu therova issaro’’ti vuttattā avattantepi vaṭṭatīti yojanā.Etthāti pañcasu uddesesu.Avattanteti therassa vitthārena avattamāne appaguṇe.Vaṭṭatīti saṃkhittena uddisitumpi vaṭṭati. Imināva yassa kassaci uddesakassa avattantepi vaṭṭatīti viññāyati. Dvīsu vattamānesu issaratte adhike vattabbameva natthīti dassanatthaṃ‘‘tīsū’’ti vuttaṃ.‘‘Therova issaro’’tiādinā idaṃ paridīpeti – dve akhaṇḍā suvisadā vācuggatā, therādheyyaṃ pātimokkhaṃ, sace pana ettakampi visadaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, byattassa bhikkhuno āyattaṃ hoti, tasmā sayaṃ uddisitabbaṃ, aññā vā ajjhesitabboti.
413. Vināntarāya: Without obstacles, meaning without any of the ten obstacles mentioned (mahāva. 150): obstacles from kings, thieves, fire, water, humans, non-humans, wild animals, reptiles, threats to life, or impediments to the holy life (brahmacariya). Saṅkhepena: Briefly, meaning without elaborating. The phrase "Here, in two or three sections with differences, the Elder is the master" indicates that even if one doesn't repeat everything, it is acceptable. Ettha: Here, in these five sections. Avattante: If the Elder does not explain in detail, being less skilled. Vaṭṭati: It is acceptable, meaning it is also acceptable to recite in brief. This implies that it is understood that it is also acceptable even if any other reciter does not repeat everything. The word "tīsu" (three) is stated to show that when repeating in two sections, there is no need to mention the authority because it is already greater. ‘‘Therova issaro’’tiādi clarifies this: two unbroken, very clear recitations are dependent on the Elder. However, if one cannot make even this much clear, it depends on a competent bhikkhu; therefore, one should recite it oneself or request another to do so.
414.Uddisante samā vā atha thokikā vā yadi āgaccheyyunti sambandhanīyaṃ.Uddisanteāvāsikehi pātimokkhe uddissamāne.Samā vā thokikā vāti āvāsikehi samā vā thokikā vā āgantukā bhikkhū.Avasesakaṃ sotabbanti iminā ettāvatāpi uposatho katoyeva nāmāti dīpeti.
414. "Samā vā atha thokikā vā yadi āgaccheyyuṃ" should be connected as: Uddisante—while the Pātimokkha is being recited by the residents; Samā vā thokikā vā—bhikkhus who are equal to or fewer than the resident bhikkhus arrive as guests. Avasesakaṃ sotabbaṃ: This indicates that even with this much, the Uposatha is considered done.
415.Uddiṭṭhamatteti uddiṭṭhaṃyeva uddiṭṭhamattaṃ.Matta-saddo avadhāraṇe. Sakalāya ekaccāya vā uṭṭhitāya samā vā thokikā vā yadi āgaccheyyunti yojanā.Sakalāyāti sabbāya parisāya.Esaṃ santike pārisuddhiṃ kareyyunti esaṃ āvāsikānaṃ samīpe te āgantukā bhikkhū pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyyunti attho. Atha bahukā ce, sabbavikappesu pubbakiccaṃ katvāti yojanīyaṃ. Vikappīyanti parikappīyantīti vikappā, avasesasavanapārisuddhiuposathavidhānā sabbe ca te vikappā cetisabbavikappā. Tesu.Punuddiseti puna pātimokkhaṃ uddiseyya.
415. Uddiṭṭhamatte: Just recited, meaning merely the recitation itself. The word Matta is for emphasis. Sakalāya ekaccāya vā uṭṭhitāya samā vā thokikā vā yadi āgaccheyyuṃ should be connected as: Sakalāya—to the entire assembly. Esaṃ santike pārisuddhiṃ kareyyuṃ: These guest bhikkhus should perform the Pārisuddhi Uposatha near these resident bhikkhus. If there are many, it should be connected as "after performing the preliminary duties in all the alternatives." Vikappīyanti parikappīyantīti vikappā—alternatives mean things that are considered or imagined. Sabbavikappā: all the alternatives, meaning the remaining procedures of confession, purification, and Uposatha. Punuddise: one should recite the Pātimokkha again.
416.Itarānanti āgantukānaṃ.Itaroti cātuddaso. Ettha pana yesaṃ pannaraso, te atītaṃ uposathaṃ cātuddasikaṃ akaṃsūti veditabbā. Ayametthādhippāyo – tādise paccaye sati cātuddasikassa katattā tesaṃ yathāvuttatatiyasattamapakkhasaṅkhātacātuddasike sampatte terasīcātuddasīkattabbattā anuposathattā pana tattha uposatho na katoti cātuddasoyeva pannaraso jāto.Samānetareti samā ūnā itareti padacchedo.Itareti āgantukā.Purimānaṃ anuvattantūti āvāsikehi ‘‘ajjuposatho pannaraso’’ti pubbakicce kayiramāne purimānaṃ āvāsikānaṃ anuvattantūti attho.Sacedhikāti yadi āgantukā bahukā honti.Purimāti āvāsikā.Tesaṃ anuvattantūti tesaṃ āgantukānaṃ ‘‘ajjuposatho cātuddaso’’ti pubbakicce kayiramāne anuvattantu.Sesepīti āgantukānaṃ pannarasavārepi.Ayaṃ nayoti ‘‘āgantukānaṃ pannaraso itarānaṃ sacetaro’’tiādiko ayameva nayo. Ettha pana yesaṃ pannaraso, te tiroraṭṭhato vā āgatā atītaṃ vā uposathaṃ cātuddasikaṃ akaṃsūti veditabbo.
416. Itarānaṃ: Of the guests. Itaro: The fourteenth. Here, it should be understood that those who have the fifteenth did the Uposatha in the past as the fourteenth. The idea here is this: if such a condition exists, because the fourteenth has been done, when the fourteenth reckoned as the third, seventh, or fourteenth of the kind as stated is reached, because the thirteenth is to be made the fourteenth, and because it is not Uposatha, the Uposatha is not done there, and thus the fourteenth becomes the fifteenth. Samānetare: Samā ūnā itareti is the word division. Itare: The guests. Purimānaṃ anuvattantu: When the residents are doing the preliminary duties, saying "today is the fifteenth Uposatha," they should follow the original residents. Sacedhikā: If there are many guests. Purimā: The residents. Tesaṃ anuvattantu: When they, the guests, are doing the preliminary duties, saying "today is the fourteenth Uposatha," they should follow. Sesepī: Even in the fifteenth turn of the guests. Ayaṃ nayo: This is the same method as "the fifteenth for the guests, and if it is different for the others." Here, it should be understood that those who have the fifteenth either came from a remote country or did the Uposatha in the past as the fourteenth.
417.Atītuposathassa cātuddasiyaṃ katattā cātuddasiyaṃ pannarasuposatho katoti pannarasī āvāsikānaṃ pāṭipado jātoti āha‘‘āvāsikānaṃ pāṭipado’’ti.Itarānanti āgantukānaṃ.Uposathoti pannaraso uposatho.Samathokānanti attanā samānaṃ vā thokānaṃ vā āgantukānaṃ.Mūlaṭṭhāti āvāsikā.Kāmato dentūti attano icchāya dentu.
417. Because the Uposatha of the past was done on the fourteenth, the fifteenth Uposatha was done on the fourteenth, so the first day (pāṭipado) has dawned for the resident bhikkhus, thus he says ‘‘āvāsikānaṃ pāṭipado’’. Itarānaṃ: Of the guests. Uposatho: The fifteenth Uposatha. Samathokānaṃ: Of the guests who are equal to or fewer than themselves. Mūlaṭṭhā: The residents. Kāmato dentu: Let them give according to their own wish.
418.No ce dentīti yadi āvāsikā kāyasāmaggiṃ na denti, tesaṃ pana āvāsikānaṃ hiyyo uposathassa katattā ajja uposathakaraṇaṃ natthi. Bahūsu anicchāya kāyasāmaggiṃ dadeyyāti yojanā.Bahūsūti āgantukesu bahukesu.Bahi vā vajeti āvāsikabhikkhuparisā nissīmaṃ vā vajeyyāti attho.
418. No ce dentī: If the residents do not give consent (kāyasāmaggi), then for those residents there is no doing of the Uposatha today, because the Uposatha was done yesterday. Bahūsu anicchāya kāyasāmaggiṃ dadeyyāti should be connected as: Bahūsu: When there are many guests. Bahi vā vaje: The assembly of resident bhikkhus should go outside the boundary.
419.Sāveyya suttanti pātimokkhasaṅkhātaṃ suttaṃ vāyamitvā sāveyya.
419. Sāveyya suttaṃ: He should recite the sutta, meaning the Pātimokkha, striving for accuracy.
420.Sammajjituṃ …pe… udakāsanaṃ paññapetuñca mahātherena pesito kallo na kareyya tathāti sambandho.Kalloti agilāno.Tathāti dukkaṭaṃ atidisati. Āsanesu asati antamaso sākhābhaṅgampi kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā paññapetabbaṃ. Tele asati kapalle aggipi jāletabbo.
420. Sammajjituṃ …pe… udakāsanaṃ paññapetuñca mahātherena pesito kallo na kareyya tathāti is connected as: Kallo: A healthy (agilāno) bhikkhu. Tathā: This refers to a dukkaṭa offense. If there are no seats, at least a permissible branch should be made and set up. If there is no oil, a fire should be lit in a potsherd.
421-3.Paṭṭhapetvā dakāsananti paribhojanīyapānīyodakañca āsanañca sannihitaṃ katvā.Gaṇañattinti idāni vakkhamānaṃ gaṇena ṭhapetabbaṃ ñattiṃ.Teti aññe duve bhikkhū.Samattapubbārambhenāti samatto niṭṭhito pubbesu uttarāsaṅgaekaṃsakaraṇādīsu ārambho yassāti tipadabahubbīhi. Navena te evamīriyāti sambandho.Teti itare dve.
421-3. Paṭṭhapetvā dakāsanaṃ: Having prepared drinking water and a seat, meaning having made them available. Gaṇañatti: The formal announcement (ñatti) to be established by the group, which will now be spoken. Te: The other two bhikkhus. Samattapubbārambhenā: Samatto niṭṭhito pubbesu uttarāsaṅgaekaṃsakaraṇādīsu ārambho yassāti is a compound word (tipadabahubbīhi) meaning "whose beginning is completed in prior activities such as arranging the upper robe and the single robe." Navena te evamīriyāti is connected as: Te: The other two.
424.Kattabbaṃ katvāpubbakiccādikaṃ sampādetvā navo evaṃ īriyoti yojanā.
424. Kattabbaṃ katvā: Having accomplished the preliminary duties etc., the new one should conduct himself in this way.
427.Yatthāti yasmiṃ vihāre ekekassa pārisuddhiṃ haritvānāti sambandho.Ekekassāti ettha vicchāyaṃ dvittaṃ. Kiriyāya guṇena dabbena vā bhinne atthe byāpituṃ icchā vicchā. Ettha pana chandapārisuddhiharaṇasaṅkhātāya kiriyāya catūsu ca tīsu ca dvīsu ca bhinnamekekaṃ byāpituṃ sambandhituṃ icchāti vicchā.Itarītareti etthāpi karaṇakiriyāvasena veditabbaṃ. Tayo dve eko vā taṃ taṃ saṅghuposathaṃ gaṇuposathaṃ puggaluposathaṃ vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayametthādhippāyo – catūsu ekassa āharitvā tayo pārisuddhiuposathaṃ karonti, tīsu vā ekassa āharitvā dve saṅghuposathaṃ karonti,adhammena vaggaṃuposathakammaṃ. Atha pana ekassa āharitvā tayo saṅghuposathaṃ karonti, ekassa āharitvā dve pārisuddhiuposathaṃ karonti,adhammena vaggaṃnāma hoti. Yadi pana cattāropi sannipatitvā pārisuddhiuposathaṃ karonti, tayo vā dve vā saṅghuposathaṃ karonti,adhammena samaggaṃnāma hotīti. Tabbipariyāyenadhammena samaggaṃveditabbaṃ.
427. Yattha: In whichever monastery, after bringing the purification of each, it should be connected as. Ekekassā: Here, vicchā implies duality. Vicchā is the desire to pervade different meanings through the quality, substance, or action. Here, it is the desire to pervade and connect each different one among the four, three, or two actions involving the obtaining of the chanda and pārisuddhi. Itarītare: Here also, it should be understood in terms of the act of doing. It is said that three, two, or one performs that respective Sangha Uposatha, Gana Uposatha, or Puggala Uposatha. The meaning here is this: after bringing from one among the four, three perform the Pārisuddhi Uposatha; or after bringing from one among the three, two perform the Sangha Uposatha—this is adhammena vaggaṃ—an Uposatha performance that is divided and against the Dhamma. But if, after bringing from one, three perform the Sangha Uposatha, or after bringing from one, two perform the Pārisuddhi Uposatha, that is called adhammena vaggaṃ. If, however, all four assemble and perform the Pārisuddhi Uposatha, or three or two perform the Sangha Uposatha, that is called adhammena samaggaṃ—harmonious but against the Dhamma. dhammena samaggaṃ should be understood in the opposite way.
428.Vagge samagge vā ‘‘vaggo’’ti saññino vimatissa vā karoto dukkaṭanti sambandho.Vaggeti vaggasaṅghe.Vimatissāti ‘‘vaggo nu kho, samaggo’’ti evaṃ vematikassa. Imināva kukkuccapakatavāropi upalakkhito.Karototi uposathaṃ karontassa. Bhedādhippāyena karototi yojanā. Ettha pana pāpassa balavatāya thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ.Saññinoti saññāsīsena cittaṃ vuttaṃ, cittavatoti attho.
428. Vagge samagge vā ‘‘vaggo’’ti saññino vimatissa vā karoto dukkaṭanti should be connected as: Vagge: In a divided Sangha. Vimatissā: To one who is doubtful, thinking "is it divided or harmonious?". This implies also one who has made a preoccupation with worry evident. Karoto: While doing the Uposatha. Karoto is connected with the intention of division. Here, because the evil is strong, a thullaccaya offense is stated. Saññino: Saññāsīsena cittaṃ vuttaṃ, cittavatoti, meaning the mind is stated with consciousness, meaning having awareness.
429-30.‘‘Ukkhittassā’’tiādinā vajjanīyapuggale dasseti.Ukkhittassāti kattuatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Nisinnasaddassa kammasādhanattā ukkhittādīhi kattūhi bhavitabbanti.‘‘Sesāna’’nti visesanassa bhikkhūnaṃ byabhicārena sātthakatā.Abhabbassapaṇḍakādiekādasavidhassa abhabbassa. Nisinnaparisāyañca pātimokkhaṃ na uddiseti sambandho. Sabhāgāpattiko tathā na uddiseti yojetabbaṃ. Vikālabhojanādivatthuto samāno bhāgo koṭṭhāso etissāti sabhāgā, sā āpatti assāti bahubbīhi.
429-30. ‘‘Ukkhittassā’’tiādi shows the individuals who should be avoided. Ukkhittassā: The possessive case is used in the sense of the agent (kattu). Because the word "nisinna" is the object of the action (kammasādhana), it should be qualified by agents such as "ukkhitta" (suspended). ‘‘Sesāna’’nti: The specification "sesānaṃ" (remaining) is meaningful due to its distinction with the bhikkhus. Abhabbassa: To one who is incapable (abhabbassa), such as a eunuch (paṇḍaka) or any of the eleven types of incapable persons. He does not recite the Pātimokkha to the assembled company. One who shares an offense (sabhāgāpattiko) should also not recite; this should be connected. Sabhāgāpattiko is a compound word (bahubbīhi), meaning "one who has an offense of the same class," where "sabhāga" means "a shared portion or category" which originates from things like eating at the wrong time (vikālabhojana).
Chandena parivutthenāti ettha catubbidhaṃ pārivāsiyaṃ parisapārivāsiyaṃ rattipārivāsiyaṃ chandapārivāsiyaṃ ajjhāsayapārivāsiyanti. Tattha bhikkhū kenacideva karaṇīyena sannipatitā honti, atha meghuṭṭhānādinā kenacideva karaṇīyena anokāso, atha ‘‘aññattha gacchāmā’’ti chandaṃ avissajjitvāva uṭṭhahanti, idaṃparisapārivāsiyaṃnāma kiñcāpi parisapārivāsiyaṃ, chandassa pana avissaṭṭhattā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
Chandena parivutthenā: Here, there are four kinds of residing apart: residing apart by the assembly (parisapārivāsiyaṃ), residing apart by the night (rattipārivāsiyaṃ), residing apart by consent (chandapārivāsiyaṃ), and residing apart by intention (ajjhāsayapārivāsiyaṃ). Among these, bhikkhus have assembled for some purpose, but due to some reason such as the rising of clouds, there is no space, so they rise without dismissing their consent, thinking "let us go elsewhere." This is called parisapārivāsiyaṃ. Although it is parisapārivāsiyaṃ, because the consent has not been dismissed, it is acceptable to perform the act.
rattipārivāsiyaṃnāma.
rattipārivāsiyaṃ means residing apart by the night.
chandapārivāsiyañceva ajjhāsayapārivāsiyañca. Ekasmiṃ pārivāsiye puna chandapārisuddhiṃ ānetvā kammaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
chandapārivāsiyañceva ajjhāsayapārivāsiyañca mean residing apart by consent and residing apart by intention. In one kind of residing apart, it is acceptable to bring back the purification of consent (chandapārisuddhiṃ) and perform the act.
431.Āpannañca vematikañca adesayitvā vā nāvikatvā vā uposathaṃ kātuṃ na ca kappatīti sambandho.Nāvikatvāti garukāpattiṃ anāvikatvā.Na cāti neva.
431. Āpannañca vematikañca adesayitvā vā nāvikatvā vā uposathaṃ kātuṃ na ca kappatīti should be connected as: Nāvikatvā: Without revealing a serious offense (garukāpattiṃ anāvikatvā). Na cā: And not.
432.Aṭṭhitoposathāti aṭṭhito avissaṭṭho uposatho yasminti bahubbīhi.Tadahūti tasmiṃ uposathadivase. Antarāyaṃ vā saṅghaṃ vā vinā adhiṭṭhātuṃ sīmameva vā na vajeti yojanā.Adhiṭṭhātunti iminā gaṇuposathampi upalakkheti.Sīmanti iminā nadimpi.
432. Aṭṭhitoposathā: Aṭṭhito avissaṭṭho uposatho yasminti is a compound word (bahubbīhi) meaning "one for whom the Uposatha is not established and not dismissed". Tadahū: On that Uposatha day. Antarāyaṃ vā saṅghaṃ vā vinā adhiṭṭhātuṃ sīmameva vā na vajeti should be connected as: Adhiṭṭhātuṃ: This implies also the Gana Uposatha. Sīmaṃ: This implies also a river.
Uposathaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Uposatha Discourse is finished.
45. Pavāraṇāniddesavaṇṇanā
45. Commentary on the Pavāraṇā Discourse
433.‘‘Aññamaññappavāraṇā’’tyādīnaṃ aññamaññehi kātabbā pavāraṇā. Tattha tiṇṇaṃ catunnañca gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvā aññamaññappavāraṇā, dvinnaṃ pana aṭṭhapetvāva.Adhiṭṭhānanti adhiṭṭhānappavāraṇā, yupaccayantānaṃ bhāve niyatanapuṃsakattā ‘‘adhiṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.Sesāpañcādīhi kātabbā avasesāsaṅghappavāraṇāsaṅghavasena ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā kātabbā. Etena navasu saṅghappavāraṇādayo tisso dassitā. Nava hi pavāraṇā cātuddasī pannarasī sāmaggīti divasavasena, tevācī dvevācī ekavācīti kattabbākāravasena, saṅghe pavāraṇā, gaṇe pavāraṇā, puggale pavāraṇāti kārakavasena ca. Tattha purimavassaṃvutthānaṃ pubbakattikapuṇṇamā vā tesaṃyeva sace bhaṇḍanakārakehi upaddutā pavāraṇaṃ paccukkaḍḍhanti, atha kattikamāsassa kāḷapakkhacātuddaso vā pacchimakattikapuṇṇamā vā pacchimavassaṃvutthānañca pacchimakattikapuṇṇamā eva vā pavāraṇādivasā honti. Idaṃ pana pakaticārittaṃ. Tathārūpappaccaye sati dvinnaṃ kattikapuṇṇamānaṃ purimesu cātuddasesupi pavāraṇaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Bhinnassa pana saṅghassa sāmaggiyaṃ yo koci divaso pavāraṇādivaso hoti. Imā divasavasena tisso pavāraṇā. Kattabbākāravasena pana vakkhamānanayena viññātabbā.
433. ‘‘Aññamaññappavāraṇā’’tiādīnaṃ: Pavāraṇā to be done with each other. There, for a group of three or four, after establishing the formal announcement (gaṇañatti), it is a mutual Pavāraṇā (aññamaññappavāraṇā); but for two, it is done without establishing the formal announcement. Adhiṭṭhānaṃ: Adhiṭṭhānappavāraṇā, since words ending in "yu" always have the neuter gender in the sense of state, "adhiṭṭhānaṃ" is stated. Sesā: The remaining ones, to be done by five or more, are the remaining saṅghappavāraṇā, which are to be done by establishing the formal announcement according to the Sangha. This shows the three beginning with the Sangha Pavāraṇā among the nine. There are nine Pavāraṇās, based on the days—the fourteenth, the fifteenth, and the harmonious; based on the manner of doing—three utterances, two utterances, and one utterance; and based on the agent—Pavāraṇā in the Sangha, Pavāraṇā in a group, and Pavāraṇā by an individual. There, for those who have resided in the early rains, either the full moon of Pubbakattika, or if they postpone the Pavāraṇā disturbed by quarrelsome persons, either the fourteenth of the dark fortnight of Kattika month, or the full moon of Pacchimakattika; and for those who have resided in the later rains, the full moon of Pacchimakattika is the Pavāraṇā day. This is the natural custom. When such a condition arises, it is acceptable to do the Pavāraṇā on the fourteenths before either of the two full moons of Kattika. However, for a Sangha that has been divided but is now in harmony, any day is a Pavāraṇā day. These are the three Pavāraṇās based on the days. However, they should be understood based on the manner of doing, according to the method that will be explained.
434.‘‘Pubbakicce’’tiādīsu –
434. ‘‘Pubbakicce’’tiādīsu –
‘‘Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;
‘‘The broom and the lamp,
Water and a seat;
These are called,
The preliminary duties for Pavāraṇā.’’
‘‘Chandappavāraṇā utukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;
‘‘Consent, Pavāraṇā, announcement of the season,
Counting the bhikkhus, and giving advice;
These are called,
The preliminary duties for Pavāraṇā.’’
‘‘Pavāraṇā yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā,
‘‘The Pavāraṇā and however many bhikkhus are eligible for the act,
And there are no shared offenses;
And there are no individuals to be avoided therein,
It is called ‘fit for the act.’’’ –
aṭṭhakathāyaṃvuttā pubbakiccādayo veditabbā.Ñattinti idāni vakkhamānaṃ sāmaññaṃ saṅghañattiṃ. Evaṃ pana ñattiyā ṭhapitāya kāraṇe sati tevācikadvevācikaekavācikasamānavassikavasenapi pavāretuṃ vaṭṭati. Ayameva pana ñatti ‘‘saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti ettha ‘‘saṅgho tevācikaṃ pavāreyya, saṅgho dvevācikaṃ pavāreyya, saṅgho ekavācikaṃ pavāreyya, saṅgho samānavassikaṃ pavāreyyā’’tipi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Cātuddasiyaṃ pana sāmaggiyañca ‘‘cātuddasī sāmaggī’’ti vattabbaṃ.
The preliminary duties etc. stated in the Aṭṭhakathā should be understood. Ñatti: The general Sangha announcement (saṅghañatti) that will now be spoken. However, when the announcement has been established in this way, it is also acceptable to perform the Pavāraṇā based on three utterances, two utterances, one utterance, or equal vassa. This very announcement can also be established as "the Sangha should perform the Pavāraṇā" or "the Sangha should perform the Pavāraṇā with three utterances, the Sangha should perform the Pavāraṇā with two utterances, the Sangha should perform the Pavāraṇā with one utterance, the Sangha should perform the Pavāraṇā with equal vassa." On the fourteenth or the day of harmony, it should be said "the fourteenth is the day of harmony."
437.Theresu ukkuṭikaṃ nisajja pavārentesu navo yāva sayaṃ pavāreti, tāva ukkuṭiko eva acchatūti yojanā.Acchatūti nisīdeyya.
437. Among the Elders, when those who are squatting perform the Pavāraṇā, the new bhikkhu should remain squatting until he himself performs the Pavāraṇā. Acchatū: He should sit.
440-2.Dhammasākacchā ca kalaho cāti dvando. Rattiyā khepitabhāvato tevācikāya okāse asati dasavidhe vā antarāye sati ‘‘suṇātu me…pe… samānavassikaṃ pavāreyyā’’ti anurūpato ñattiṃ vatvā yathāṭhapitañattiyā anurūpena pavāreyyāti sambandho veditabbo.Anurūpatoti ‘‘suṇātu me…pe… dānaṃ dentehi ratti khepitā, sace…pe… ratti vibhāyissati, yadi saṅghassa pattakalla’’ntiādinā tena khepitarattiyā anurūpena. ‘‘Suṇātu me bhante saṅgho, ayaṃ rājantarāyo, sace saṅgho tevācikaṃ…pe… saṅgho bhavissati, athāyaṃ rājantarāyo bhavissati, yadi saṅghassa pattakalla’’ntiādinā rājantarāyādīnaṃ anurūpena vāti attho. ‘‘Athāyaṃ brahmacariyantarāyo bhavissatī’’ti pana peyyālavasena ante vuttaṃ brahmacariyantarāyaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dvevācika’’ntiādikaṃ pana visuṃ visuṃ vattabbampi laṅghanakkamena sampiṇḍetvā vuttaṃ. Vacanasamaye pana ‘‘dvevācikaṃ pavāreyya’’iccādinā vattabbaṃ.Āgaccheyyuṃ yadi samāādikā cāti ‘‘āgaccheyyuṃ yadi samā’’iccādayo uposathe vuttā gāthāyo ca.Etthāti etissaṃ pavāraṇāyaṃ. Ayameva ca āharaṇakkamo –
440-2.The term dhammasākacchā ca kalaho ca is a dvanda compound. Because the night has to be spent, and there is no opportunity for a three-statement act, or if there are ten kinds of hindrances, the procedure is: "Let the Sangha hear me...pe...one should invite a samānavassika (one of equal standing in seniority)," saying a motion (ñatti) according to the situation, one should perform pavāraṇā in accordance with the motion that has been established. Anurūpato (according to the situation) means: "Let the Sangha hear me...pe...the night was spent giving alms; if...pe...the night will dawn, if it seems fit to the Sangha," and so on, in accordance with the spent night. Or, "Let the Sangha hear me, venerable sirs; this is a danger from the king; if the Sangha [approves] a three-statement act...pe...the Sangha will be; then this danger from the king will be; if it seems fit to the Sangha," and so on, in accordance with dangers from the king, etc. "Then this will be a danger to the holy life" is mentioned at the end in the manner of abbreviation (peyyāla) by taking up the danger to the holy life that has been mentioned. However, "a two-statement act," and so on, though they should be stated separately, are stated by combining them, skipping over the order. But at the time of speaking, one should say, "one should perform pavāraṇā with a two-statement act," and so on. Āgaccheyyuṃ yadi samāādikā cā means also the verses beginning "If they come together, being equal," etc., stated in the Uposatha section. Etthā means in this pavāraṇā. And this is the order of bringing:
Āgaccheyyuṃ yadi samā, pavārenteva thokikā;
If they come together, being equal, only a few perform pavāraṇā;
Those who have performed pavāraṇā have performed it well, and others invite [them] to perform pavāraṇā;
Among those who have performed pavāraṇā, all or some have stood up.
Pavāreyyuñca te tesaṃ, santike bahukā sace;
And they should perform pavāraṇā to them, if there are many nearby;
Having made all the proposals, he repeats the preliminary duties.
‘‘Āvāsikānaṃ pannaraso’’tiādikā gāthāyo pana etthāpi samānā.
The verses beginning "The fifteenth of the residents," etc., are the same here as well.
443.Ñattiṃ vatvāti vakkhamānagaṇañattiṃ vatvā.
443.Ñattiṃ vatvā means having stated the motion concerning a group, which will be explained.
444.Samudīriyāti aññe dve tayo vā vakkhamānakkamena vattabbā.
444.Samudīriyā means two or three others should be stated according to the order to be explained.
446-8.Kattabbaṃ katvāti yojetabbaṃ.Kattabbanti pubbakiccādikaṃ. Navenapi ‘‘ahaṃ bhante…pe… paṭikarissāmī’’ti thero īriyoti yojetabbaṃ.Evanti idāni vakkhamānaṃ parāmasati.
446-8.Kattabbaṃ katvā should be connected. Kattabbaṃ means the preliminary duties, etc. Even by a new one, "I, venerable sir...pe...will make amends," thus the Elder should be made to act. Evaṃ (thus) refers to what will now be spoken of.
449.‘‘Yasmi’’ntiādi vuttanayattā uttānameva.
449.‘‘Yasmi’’ntiādi (in which) etc., is simply a summary, since the meaning has been stated.
450.Gāthāyoti ‘‘vagge samagge vaggoti, saññino’’tiādikā heṭṭhā vuttagāthāyo vā. Ayaṃ panettha viseso –karototi ettha pavāraṇaṃ karototi attho gahetabbo. Tatiya gāthāya ‘‘pātimokkhaṃ na uddise’’ti apanetvā ‘‘no kareyya pavāraṇa’’nti padaṃ pakkhipitabbaṃ. Catutthagāthāya ‘‘anuposathe’’tiādigāthābandhaṃ apanetvā ‘‘neva pavāraṇe kātuṃ, sā kappati pavāraṇā’’ti pakkhipitabbaṃ. Pañcamagāthāya ‘‘aṭṭhitoposathāvāsā’’ti apanetvā ‘‘pavāraṇāṭhitāvāsā’’ti pakkhipitabbaṃ.
450.Gāthāyo means the verses stated earlier, such as "In a group, united, as a group, sentient beings," etc. Here, however, is the distinction: karoto here should be understood to mean doing pavāraṇā. In the third verse, having removed "does not recite the Pāṭimokkha," the phrase "should not do pavāraṇā" should be inserted. In the fourth verse, having removed the verse structure beginning with "on a non-Uposatha day," the following should be inserted: "it is not proper to do even pavāraṇā; that pavāraṇā is proper." In the fifth verse, having removed "residents of a non-Uposatha area," the following should be inserted: "pavāraṇā residents of an area."
451.Saṅghamhi pavāritevāti purimavassūpagate saṅghamhi pavārite eva.Pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyyāti na ekasmiṃ uposathagge dve ñattiyo ṭhapetabbāti adhippāyo. Pacchimikāya upagantvā apariniṭṭhitavassoavuttho. Anupāgatoti vassaṃ anupāgato. Ayametthādhippāyo – purimikāya vassaṃ upagatā pañca vā atirekā vā pacchimikāya upagatā tehi samā vā ūnatarā vā purimikāya vā upagatehi pacchimikāya upagatā thokatarā ceva honti, saṅghappavāraṇāya gaṇaṃ pūrenti saṅghappavāraṇāvasena ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā, atha ca ubhopi ekato hutvā saṅghaṃ na pūrenti, gaṇaṃ pana pūrenti, gaṇañattiṃ ṭhapetvā pavāretabbaṃ, pacchā tesaṃ santike pārisuddhiuposatho kātabbo. Yadi pana purimikāya eko, pacchimikāya eko, ekena ekassa santike pavāretabbaṃ, ekena pārisuddhiuposatho kātabbo. Sace purimehi vassūpagatehi pacchā vassūpagatā ekenapi adhikā saṅghaṃ pūrenti, paṭhamaṃ pātimokkhaṃ uddisitvā pacchā tesaṃ santike pavāretabbanti. Gaṇepi eseva nayo. Evamuparipi yathāyogaṃ cintanīyaṃ.
451.Saṅghamhi pavāritevā means having performed pavāraṇā in the Sangha that has entered the earlier rains retreat. Pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyyā means the intention is that two motions should not be established at one Uposatha site. Having approached the later one, the rains retreat is avuttho (not completed). Anupāgato means not having entered the rains retreat. The idea here is this: those who entered the rains retreat in the earlier [period], five or more, or those who entered the later [period], equal to or less than them; or those who entered in the later [period] being fewer than those who entered in the earlier [period], complete the quorum for the Sangha's pavāraṇā, having established the motion in the manner of the Sangha's pavāraṇā. And yet, even though both come together, they do not complete the Sangha, but they do complete the quorum; having established the motion for the quorum, pavāraṇā should be performed; afterwards, the Pārisuddhi Uposatha should be done in their presence. But if there is one in the earlier [period] and one in the later [period], pavāraṇā should be performed by one in the presence of the other, and the Pārisuddhi Uposatha should be done by one. If those who have entered the later rains retreat are more than those who have entered the earlier rains retreat by even one, they complete the Sangha, first the Pāṭimokkha should be recited, and then pavāraṇā should be performed in their presence. This same method applies to a group as well. In this way, the above should be considered appropriately.
452.Cātumāsiniyāti aparakattikapuṇṇamāyaṃ.Saṅghenāti paṭhamaṃ vassūpagatena saṅghena. Vutthā vassā yehi tevutthavassā,pacchimavassūpagatā.Sace appatarā siyunti iminā yadi adhikatarā vā samasamā vā honti, pavāraṇāñattiṃ ṭhapetvā pacchimavassūpagatehi paṭhamaṃ pavārite pacchā itarehi pārisuddhiuposatho kātabboti dīpetīti.
452.Cātumāsiniyā means on the full-moon day of the later Kattika. Saṅghenā means by the Sangha that has entered the rains retreat first. Those by whom the rains retreat has been completed are vutthavassā, those who entered the rains retreat later. Sace appatarā siyunti (if they are fewer) indicates that if they are more or equal, having established the pavāraṇā motion, after pavāraṇā has been performed first by those who entered the later rains retreat, then the Pārisuddhi Uposatha should be done by the others.
Pavāraṇāniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Pavāraṇā is Finished.
46. Saṃvaraniddesavaṇṇanā
46. Explanation of the Section on Restraint (Saṃvara)
453.Saṃvaraṇaṃ cakkhudvārādīnaṃ satikavāṭena pidahanaṃsaṃvaro. Tattha kiñcāpi cakkhundriye saṃvaro natthi, na hi cakkhupasādaṃ nissāya sati uppajjati, neva bhavaṅgasamaye āvajjanādīnaṃ aññatarasamaye, javanakkhaṇe pana uppajjatīti tadā saṃvaro hoti, evaṃ honte pana so cakkhudvārādīnaṃ saṃvaroti vuccati.Cakkhusotādibhedehīti cakkhu ca sotañca, tāni ādi yesaṃ, teva bhedā cāti samāso, tehi dvārehi. Abhijjhādippavattiyā accantopakārakattā karaṇatthe cettha tatiyā. Etena cakkhusotaghānajivhākāyamanasaṅkhātāni dvārāni vuttāni.Rūpasaddādigocareti rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbadhammasaṅkhāte visaye.Abhijjhādomanassādippavattinti ettha parasampattiṃ abhimukhaṃ jhāyatīti abhijjhā, balavataṇhā.Ādi-saddena micchādiṭṭhiādayo aneke akusalā dhammā saṅgahitā.
453.Saṃvaraṇa (restraint) is saṃvaro (restraint), the closing of the doors of the eye, etc., with the gate of mindfulness. Here, although there is no restraint in the eye sense-organ, since mindfulness does not arise dependent on the eye-sensitivity, nor at the time of the subconscious, nor at the time of any of the initial advertings, etc., but it arises at the moment of javana (impulsion), restraint exists at that time; however, even while it exists thus, it is called restraint of the doors of the eye, etc. Cakkhusotādibhedehī means by the doors that are the distinctions that are the eye and the ear, etc., that are the beginning of those. Because it is extremely helpful in the arising of covetousness (abhijjhā), etc., the instrumental case is used here in the sense of agency. By this, the doors consisting of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind are stated. Rūpasaddādigocare means in the sphere consisting of forms, sounds, smells, tastes, tangible objects, and mental objects. Abhijjhādomanassādippavatti means here, abhijjhā is intensely contemplating the wealth of others; it is strong craving. By the word ādi (etc.), many unwholesome states such as wrong view (micchādiṭṭhi) are included.
454.Sakaṃ cittaṃ kiṭṭhādiṃ duppasuṃ viya niggaṇheyyāti sambandho.Kiṭṭhanti kiṭṭhaṭṭhāne uppannaṃ sassaṃ gahitaṃ. Kiṭṭhaṃ adatītikiṭṭhādi,taṃ.Sampajānoti sātthakasappāyagocaraasammohasaṅkhātena catusampajaññena sammā pajāno. Iminā indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ kathitaṃ.
454.Sakaṃ cittaṃ kiṭṭhādiṃ duppasuṃ viya niggaṇheyyāti sambandho—one should restrain one's own mind like a difficult-to-manage crop in a cultivated field. Kiṭṭhaṃ means a crop that has arisen in a cultivated place, that is taken. Kiṭṭhaṃ adatīti kiṭṭhādi (that which eats the cultivated field is a kiṭṭhādi), that [crop]. Sampajāno means truly knowing with the four kinds of clear comprehension (sampajañña) consisting of purpose, suitability, sphere, and non-delusion. By this, morality consisting of sense-restraint (indriyasaṃvarasīla) has been spoken of.
Saṃvaraniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Restraint is Finished.
47. Suddhiniddesavaṇṇanā
47. Explanation of the Section on Purity
455.Desanā saṃvaro eṭṭhi paccavekkhaṇanti bhedato suddhi catubbidhāti sambandho. ‘‘Paccavekkhaṇaṃ bhedato’’ti vattabbe niggahitalopo daṭṭhabbo, desanāsuddhi saṃvarasuddhi pariyeṭṭhisuddhi paccavekkhaṇasuddhīti catubbidhāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha sujjhatīti suddhi, yathādhammaṃ desanāya suddhidesanāsuddhi. Vuṭṭhānassāpi cettha desanāya eva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Mūlāpattīnaṃ pana abhikkhutāpaṭiññāva desanāti heṭṭhā vuttā, sāvassa pārājikāpannassa visuddhi nāma hoti. Ayañhi yasmā pārājikaṃ āpanno, tasmā bhikkhubhāve ṭhatvā abhabbo jhānādīni adhigantuṃ. Bhikkhubhāvo hissa saggantarāyo ceva hoti, maggantarāyo ca. Vuttañhetaṃ –
455.The connection is that purity (suddhi) is fourfold in terms of declaration (desanā), restraint (saṃvara), seeking (eṭṭhi), and reflection (paccavekkhaṇa). "Paccavekkhaṇaṃ bhedato" (reflection in terms of distinctions) should be said, but a contraction (niggahitalopa) should be seen; it is stated that there are four kinds: purity of declaration, purity of restraint, purity of seeking, and purity of reflection. There, suddhi means purifying; purity by means of declaring according to the Dhamma is desanāsuddhi (purity of declaration). Here, the inclusion of rising (vuṭṭhāna) should also be seen as being by means of declaration. But for root offenses (mūlāpatti), only non-confession (abhikkhutāpaṭiññā) is declaration, as stated earlier; for one who has fallen into the sāvasesa Pārājika, there is no such thing as purification (visuddhi). For since this one has fallen into a Pārājika offense, while remaining a monk, he is incapable of attaining the jhānas, etc. For his state as a monk is an obstacle to heaven, and an obstacle to the path. This has been stated:
‘‘Sāmaññaṃ dupparāmaṭṭhaṃ, nirayāyūpakaḍḍhatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 311);
"A poorly grasped religious life drags [one] down to hell." (Dhp. 311);
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
And another has been stated:
‘‘Sithilo hi paribbajo, bhiyyo ākirate raja’’nti. (dha. pa. 313);
"A loose ascetic scatters all the more dust." (Dhp. 313);
saṃvaravisuddhi. Dhammena samena paccayānaṃ eṭṭhiyā suddhieṭṭhisuddhi. Catūsu paccayesu paccavekkhaṇena suddhipaccavekkhaṇasuddhi. ‘‘Catubbidhā pātī’’tiādīsupātimokkhasaṃvarasammatanti ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvaro’’ti sammataṃ sīlaṃ.
saṃvaravisuddhi (purity of restraint). Purity by seeking requisites by means of Dhamma and equanimity is eṭṭhisuddhi (purity of seeking). Purity by reflection on the four requisites is paccavekkhaṇasuddhi (purity of reflection). Among the statements "Fourfold is the Pāṭi...", pātimokkhasaṃvarasammata means morality recognized as "restraint of the Pāṭimokkha."
456.Cittādhiṭṭhānasaṃvarā sujjhatīti indriyasaṃvaro saṃvarasuddhīti vuttoti yojanā.
456.The connection is that by purity, restraint is purified by means of the mind's resolution; thus it is stated that sense-restraint is purity of restraint.
457.Anesanaṃ pahāya dhammena uppādentassa eṭṭhiyā suddhattā ājīvanissitaṃ eṭṭhisuddhīti vuttanti sambandho.Uppādentassāti paccaye uppādentassa.
457.The connection is that because the purity of seeking of one who abandons wrong livelihood and produces [requisites] by means of Dhamma, it is stated that seeking based on livelihood is purity of seeking. Uppādentassā means of one who is producing requisites.
458.Paccavekkhaṇasujjhanāti hetumhi pañcamīti.
458.Paccavekkhaṇasujjhanā means the fifth case is used in the sense of the cause.
Suddhiniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Purity is Finished.
48. Santosaniddesavaṇṇanā
48. Explanation of the Section on Contentment
459.Paṃsukūlaṃ piṇḍiyālopo rukkhamūlaṃ pūtimuttabhesajjanti ime cattāro paccayā appagghanakatāya appā ceva kassacipi ālayābhāvena anavajjā ca gatagataṭṭhāne labbhamānatāya sulabhā cāti vuccanti, tenāha‘‘appenā’’tiādi.Mattaññūti pariyesanappaṭiggahaṇaparibhogavissajjanesu catūsu mattaññutāvasena pamāṇaññū.
459.Robe made of rags (paṃsukūla), food obtained by alms-round (piṇḍiyālopa), dwelling at the foot of a tree (rukkhamūla), medicine of fermented urine (pūtimuttabhesajja)—these four requisites are said to be few because of being of little value, and blameless because of the absence of attachment in anyone, and easy to obtain because of being obtainable in whatever place one goes; therefore, he says, ‘‘appenā’’tiādi ("with little," etc.). Mattaññū means knowing measure in terms of the four kinds of knowing measure in seeking, receiving, using, and discarding.
460.Kathaṃ santuṭṭhoti āha‘‘atīta’’ntiādi.Paccuppannena yāpentoti yathālābhayathābalayathāsāruppavasena paccuppannena yathāvuttacatubbidhapaccayena yāpentoti.
460.How is he content? He says, ‘‘atīta’’ntiādi ("past," etc.). Paccuppannena yāpento means living with the present four kinds of requisites mentioned above in accordance with what is obtained, in accordance with one's strength, in accordance with suitability.
Santosaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Section on Contentment is Finished.
49. Caturārakkhaniddesavaṇṇanā
49. Explanation of the Section on the Four Protections
461-2.Buddhānussati …pe… maraṇassatīti imā caturārakkhā nāmāti seso.Ārakattādināti ārakabhāvo ārakattaṃ, taṃ ādi yassa ‘‘arīnaṃ hatattā’’tiādikassa taṃārakattādi. Tena tena maggena savāsanānaṃ arānaṃ hatattā ārakā sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhitoti ā-kārassa rassattaṃ, ka-kārassa ha-kāraṃ sānunāsikaṃ katvā ‘‘araha’’nti padasiddhi veditabbā. ‘‘Ārakā’’ti ca vutte sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa anuppayojitabbattā ‘‘kilesehī’’ti labbhati.
461-2.Mindfulness of the Buddha …pe… mindfulness of death—these are called the four protections, is the remainder. Ārakattādinā means ārakabhāvo ārakattaṃ (the state of being a protection is ārakattaṃ), that ārakattādi (protection, etc.), which is the beginning of "because of destroying enemies." Because of destroying the enemies along with their latent tendencies by that path, ārakā means standing very far away from all defilements, and the word-formation should be understood as shortening the ā, making the ka into an aspirated ha with the nasal, and [thus] the word "arahaṃ" is accomplished. And when "Ārakā" is said, because the particular does not stand in the general notification, and because a particular should not be used where a particular meaning exists, "from defilements" is obtained.
Sammāti aviparītaṃ.Sāmanti sayameva, aparaneyyo hutvāti attho. ‘‘Sambuddho’’ti hi ettha saṃ-saddo ‘‘saya’’nti etassa atthassa bodhako daṭṭhabbo.Buddhatoti bhāvappadhānoyaṃ niddeso, buddhattāti attho. ‘‘Arahaṃ’’ iti vā ‘‘sammāsambuddho’’ iti vā bhagavato navabhede guṇe yā punappunaṃ anussati, sā buddhānussatīti yojanā. ‘‘Sammāsambuddho itī’’ti vattabbe a-kāro sandhivasena āgato.Iti-saddo panettha ādiattho, iccādīti attho.Navabhedeti ‘‘anuttaro purisadammasārathī’’ti ekato gahetvā. Ettha pana upacāro uppajjati, na appanā, tathā maraṇassatiyaṃ. Itaresu pana ubhayampi uppajjatīti veditabbaṃ. Buddhānussati.
Sammā means not perverted. Sāmaṃ means by oneself, meaning without another's guidance. For here, in "Sambuddho," the prefix saṃ- should be seen as indicating the meaning of "sayaṃ" (oneself). Buddhato means this indication is prominence of the state, meaning Buddhahood. Or, the repeated mindfulness of the Blessed One's qualities in nine aspects, as "unsurpassed trainer of persons to be tamed," either as "Arahaṃ" or as "Sammāsambuddho," that is mindfulness of the Buddha, is the connection. The a in "Sammāsambuddho itī" which should be said, comes due to the rules of sandhi. Here, the word iti- is in the sense of beginning, meaning etc. Navabhede means having taken "unsurpassed trainer of persons to be tamed" as one. Here, however, only access (upacāra) arises, not absorption (appanā), similarly in mindfulness of death. But in the others, both arise, it should be understood. Mindfulness of the Buddha.
463-4.‘‘Sīmaṭṭhā’’tiādinā mettābhāvanaṃ dasseti.Sīmaṭṭhasaṅgheti sīmāyaṃ tiṭṭhatīti sīmaṭṭho, sova saṅgho. Gocaragāmamhi issare janeti sambandho. Tattha mānuse upādāya sabbasattesūti yojetabbaṃ.Tatthāti tasmiṃ gāme. Sukhitā hontu averāti padacchedo.Ādināti ‘‘abyāpajjā hontu, anīghā hontu, sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū’’ti iminā.Paricchijja paricchijjāti ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre sabbe bhikkhū’’tiādinā evampi paricchinditvā paricchinditvā. Mettābhāvanā.
463-4.With ‘‘Sīmaṭṭhā’’tiādi ("those who dwell within the boundary"), he shows the development of loving-kindness (mettābhāvana). Sīmaṭṭhasaṅghe means one who stands within the boundary is sīmaṭṭho; that is the Sangha. The connection is to generate [loving-kindness] in sentient beings in the village that is the range. There, it should be connected as: in all beings beginning with humans. Tatthā means in that village. Sukhitā hontu averā (may they be happy, free from animosity) is the word division. Ādinā means with this: "abyāpajjā hontu, anīghā hontu, sukhī attānaṃ pariharantū" (may they be free from affliction, may they be free from distress, may they maintain themselves happily). Paricchijja paricchijjā means having distinguished, having distinguished thus: "all the monks in this monastery," and so on. Development of loving-kindness.
465-6.Idāni asubhaṃ niddisanto sabbapaṭhamaṃ sādhetabbaṃ sattavidhamuggahakosallaṃ‘‘vaṇṇe’’ccādinā dasseti. Sattavidhañhi taṃ nayato āgataṃ vācāsajjhāyamanasāsajjhāyehi saddhiṃ. Tattha paṭhamaṃ vācāya sajjhāyantena cattāri tacapañcakādīni paricchinditvā anulomappaṭilomavasena kātabbaṃ. Yathā pana vacasā, tatheva manasāpi sajjhāyo kātabbo. Vacasā sajjhāyo hi manasā sajjhāyassa paccayo. So pana lakkhaṇappaṭivedhassa paccayo. Tatthavaṇṇonāma kesādīnaṃ vaṇṇo.Saṇṭhānaṃtesaṃyeva saṇṭhānaṃ.Okāsotesaṃyeva patiṭṭhokāso.Disānābhito uddhaṃ uparimadisā, adho heṭṭhimā.Paricchedonāma ‘‘ayaṃ koṭṭhāso heṭṭhā ca upari ca tiriyañca iminā nāma paricchinno’’ti evaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo ceva ‘‘kesā na lomā, lomā na kesā’’ti evaṃ amissakatāvasena visabhāgaparicchedo ca. Kesādikoṭṭhāse vavatthapetvāti sambandho.Vavatthapetvāti vuttanayena vavatthapetvā.
465-6.Now, indicating the unattractive, he shows with ‘‘vaṇṇe’’ccādi ("color," etc.) the sevenfold skill in learning which should be accomplished first. For that is sevenfold along with recitation by speech and recitation by mind, according to the method. There, first, one reciting with speech should make the four distinctions beginning with the five kinds of skin, in direct and reverse order. However, just as by speech, so too should recitation be done by mind. For recitation by speech is a condition for recitation by mind. That, however, is a condition for penetration of the characteristics. There, vaṇṇo means the color of hair, etc. Saṇṭhānaṃ means the shape of those very things. Okāso means the place of support of those very things. Disā means above from the navel is the upper direction, below is the lower [direction]. Paricchedo means both the separation into similar parts, such as "this part is separated below and above and across by this name," and the separation into dissimilar parts, in terms of non-mixture, such as "hair is not body hair, body hair is not head hair." The connection is having distinguished the sections of hair, etc. Vavatthapetvā means having distinguished in the manner stated.
‘‘anupubbato’’tiādimāha. Tattha appanāto tayo ca suttantāti ime cattāropi nayatovāgate nātisīghādīsu pakkhipitvā dasavidhatā veditabbā.Anupubbatoti sajjhāyakaraṇato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭiyā.Nātisīghaṃ nātisaṇikaṃ katvāti kiriyāvisesanaṃ.Vikkhepaṃpaṭibāhayanti kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe cetaso vikkhepaṃ paṭibāhanto.Paṇṇattiṃ samatikkammāti yāyaṃ ‘‘kesā lomā’’ti paṇṇatti, taṃ atikkamitvā, ‘‘paṭikkūla’’nti cittaṃ ṭhapetvāti adhippāyo.Anupubbato muñcantassāti yo yo koṭṭhāso na upaṭṭhāti, taṃ taṃ anukkamena muñcato, tassa ‘‘bhāvanā’’ti iminā sambandho veditabbo.
He stated "anupubbato" and so forth. Here, the four—three from appanā and the Suttanta—should be understood as the ten kinds by including them in the suitable categories such as not too fast. Anupubbato means in due order, starting from recitation. Having made it not too fast, not too slow is an adverb of the verb. Rejecting distraction means rejecting distraction of the mind to external, diverse objects by dismissing the meditation subject. Transcending the concept means transcending the concept that is "head hairs, body hairs," meaning fixing the mind on "repulsive." For one releasing in due order means for one who releases each part that does not appear in sequence; its relation should be understood with "development (bhāvanā)."
467.Evaṃ ubhayakosallaṃ sampādetvā sabbakoṭṭhāse vaṇṇādivasena vavatthapetvā vaṇṇādivaseneva pañcadhā paṭikkūlatā vavatthapetabbāti dassetuṃ‘‘vaṇṇā’’tiādimāha. Vaṇṇa…pe… okāsehi koṭṭhāse paṭikkūlāti bhāvanā asubhanti yojanā. Tatra kesā tāva pakativaṇṇena kāḷakā addāriṭṭhakavaṇṇā, saṇṭhānato dīghavaṭṭatulādaṇḍasaṇṭhānā, disato uparimadisāya jātā, okāsato ubhosu passesu kaṇṇacūḷikāhi, purato naḷāṭantena, pacchato gaḷavāṭakena paricchinnā, sīsakaṭāhaveṭhanaallacammaṃ kesānaṃ okāso. Paricchedato kesā sīsaveṭhanacamme vīhaggamattaṃ pavisitvā patiṭṭhitena heṭṭhā attano mūlatalena, upari ākāsena, tiriyaṃ aññamaññena paricchinnā. Dve kesā ekato natthīti ayaṃ sabhāgaparicchedo. ‘‘Kesā na lomā, lomā na kesā’’ti evaṃ avasesaekatiṃ sakoṭṭhāsehi amissīkatā kesā nāma pāṭiyekko eko koṭṭhāsoti ayaṃ visabhāgaparicchedo. Idaṃ kesānaṃ vaṇṇādito nicchayanaṃ. Idaṃ pana nesaṃ vaṇṇādivasena pañcadhā paṭikkūlato nicchayanaṃ – kesā nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikkūlā āsayatopi saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi okāsatopi paṭikkūlāti evaṃ sesakoṭṭhāsānampi yathāyogaṃ veditabbaṃ.
467.Having thus accomplished skill in both aspects, and having determined all the parts in terms of color and so on, he stated "vaṇṇā" and so forth to show that repulsiveness should be determined in five ways in terms of color and so on. The connection is that the parts are repulsive because of color...and so on...and space; therefore, the development is repulsive. Here, head hairs are black in their natural color or the color of Añjan Stone, in shape they are long or round like a stick, in direction they grow upwards, in terms of space they are bounded on both sides by the ear conch, in front by the forehead's end, and behind by the nape of the neck; the leather wrapping around the head skull is the space for the head hairs. In terms of delimitation, head hairs are delimited by their root base firmly established, having penetrated a sesame seed's worth into the head-wrapping skin, above by the sky, and horizontally by each other. This is delimitation by sharing, as two head hairs are not together. This is delimitation by difference, as head hairs are not mixed with the remaining thirty-one parts, "head hairs are not body hairs, body hairs are not head hairs," thus head hairs are named as a distinct part, each a unique component. This is the determination of head hairs in terms of color and so on. This, however, is the determination of their repulsiveness in five ways in terms of color and so on: head hairs are repulsive in terms of color, source, shape, smell, and space; thus, it should be understood appropriately for the remaining parts as well.
Uddhumātādivatthūsūti uddhumātakavinīlakavipubbakavicchiddakavikkhāyitakavikkhittakahatavi- kkhittakalohitakapuḷavakaaṭṭhikasaṅkhātesu dasesu aviññāṇakaasubhavatthūsu asubhākāraṃ gahetvā pavattā bhāvanā vā asubhanti sambandho. Asubhabhāvanā.
In objects such as the bloated refers to the development that occurs by taking the repulsive aspect in the ten non-sentient repulsive objects, namely, the bloated corpse, the livid corpse, the festering corpse, the split corpse, the gnawed corpse, the scattered corpse, the mutilated and scattered corpse, the bloody corpse, the worm-infested corpse, and the skeleton; or the connection is that it is repulsiveness. Repulsiveness development.
468.‘‘Maraṇaṃ me bhavissatī’’ti vā ‘‘jīvitaṃ me uparujjhatī’’ti vā ‘‘maraṇaṃ maraṇa’’nti vā yoniso bhāvayitvānāti yojanā.Jīvitanti rūpajīvitindriyañca arūpajīvitindriyañca.Yonisoti upāyena. Evaṃ pavattayatoyeva hi ekaccassa nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanti, maraṇārammaṇā sati saṇṭhāti, upacārappattameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ hoti.
468.The connection is having wisely contemplated, "Death will occur to me," or "My life is being cut off," or "Death, death." Life means both the life faculty of form and the life faculty of the formless. Wisely means skillfully. Indeed, by engaging in it thus, the hindrances of some are suppressed, mindfulness regarding death is established, and the meditation subject reaches the level of access concentration.
469-470.Yassa pana ettāvatā na hoti, tena vadhakapaccūpaṭṭhānādīhi aṭṭhahākārehi maraṇaṃ anussaritabbanti dassetuṃ‘‘vadhakassevā’’tiādimāha.Vadhakassa iva upaṭṭhānāti ‘‘imassa sīsaṃ chindissāmī’’ti asiṃ gahetvā gīvāya sañcārayamānassa vadhakassa viya maraṇassa upaṭṭhānato.Sampattīnaṃ vipattitoti bhogasampattiyā jīvitasampattiyā ca vināsamaraṇasaṅkhātavipattito.Upasaṃharatoti yasamahattato puññamahattato thāmamahattato iddhimahattato paññāmahattato paccekabuddhato sammāsambuddhatoti imehi sattahākārehi attano upasaṃharaṇato.Kāyabahusādhāraṇāti asītiyā kimikulānaṃ, anekasatānaṃ rogānaṃ, bāhirānañca ahivicchikādīnaṃ maraṇassa paccayānaṃ sādhāraṇato.Āyudubbalatoti assāsapassāsūpanibaddhattairiyāpathūpanibaddhattādinā āyuno dubbalato.Kālavavatthānassa abhāvatoti ‘‘imasmiṃyeva kāle maritabbaṃ, na aññasmi’’nti evaṃ kālavavatthānassa abhāvato.Addhānassa paricchedāti ‘‘manussānaṃ jīvitassa paricchedo nāma etarahi paritto, addhā yo ciraṃ jīvati, so vassasataṃ jīvatī’’ti evaṃ addhānassa kālassa paricchedato.
469-470.To show that one for whom it does not occur to that extent should recollect death in eight ways, beginning with the presence of an executioner, he said "vadhakassevā" and so forth. Like the presence of an executioner means from the presence of death like that of an executioner who, having taken a sword, moves it on the neck thinking, "I will cut off his head." From the calamity of possessions means from the calamity called destruction, which is the ruin of wealth possessions and life possessions. Approaching means approaching oneself with these seven aspects: greatness of fame, greatness of merit, greatness of strength, greatness of psychic power, greatness of wisdom, Paccekabuddha, and Sammāsambuddha. Common to many causes means common to eighty kinds of worms, hundreds of diseases, and external causes of death such as snakes and scorpions. From the weakness of life means from the weakness of life due to being dependent on inhalation and exhalation, dependent on the postures, and so on. From the absence of time determination means from the absence of time determination, thinking, "One must die at this time, not at another time." From the limitation of duration means from the limitation of duration, thinking, "The limit of human life is now short; indeed, one who lives long lives for a hundred years."
Ettha pana kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā vipassanāya saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pattukāmena buddhaputtena yaṃ kātabbaṃ, taṃ ādikammikassa kulaputtassa vasena ādito paṭṭhāya saṅkhepenopadissāma. Catubbidhaṃ tāva sīlaṃ sodhetabbaṃ. Tattha tividhā visujjhanā anāpajjanaṃ, āpannavuṭṭhānaṃ, kilesehi ca appaṭipīḷanaṃ. Evaṃ visuddhasīlassa hi bhāvanā sampajjati. Yampidaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇavattādīnaṃ vasena ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ vuccati, tampi sādhukaṃ paripūretabbaṃ. Tato –
Here, we will briefly explain from the beginning, in terms of a new aspirant, what should be done by a son of the Buddha who, having developed the meditation subject, intends to attain Arahatship together with the discriminations. First, the fourfold morality should be purified. There, the threefold purification is non-offense, emerging from offense, and non-affliction by defilements. Indeed, development succeeds for one with pure morality. That which is called conduct morality (ācara-sīla) in terms of duties such as those related to the cetiya courtyard should also be thoroughly fulfilled. Then –
‘‘Āvāso ca kulaṃ lābho, gaṇo kammañca pañcamaṃ;
‘‘Dwelling, family, gain, group, and work as the fifth;
Journey, relatives, sickness, books, and psychic power are the ten.’’ (Visuddhi. 1.41) –
Evaṃ vuttesu dasasu palibodhesu yo palibodho, yo upacchinditabbo. Evaṃ upacchinnapalibodhena –
Among the ten impediments mentioned thus, that impediment which should be cut off. By one with impediments thus cut off –
‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, vattā ca vacanakkhamo;
‘‘Dear, venerable, worthy of cultivation, one who speaks and is patient with speech;
One who makes profound talk, and does not employ in an improper place.’’ (A. Ni. 7.37) –
sabbatthakakammaṭṭhānaṃnāma bhikkhusaṅghādīsu mettā, maraṇassati ca, ‘‘asubhasaññā’’tipi eke. Etaṃ pana tayaṃ sabbattha atthayitabbaṃ icchitabbanti katvā, adhippetassa ca yogānuyogakammassa padaṭṭhānattā ‘‘sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesu pana yaṃ yassa caritānukūlaṃ, taṃ tassa niccaṃ pariharitabbattā yathāvutteneva nayena‘‘pārihāriyakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati, tato –
everywhere-applicable meditation subject (sabbatthakakammaṭṭhāna) is loving-kindness towards the Saṅgha and so forth, and mindfulness of death, and some say the perception of repulsiveness. But since this triad should be desired and sought everywhere, it is called "everywhere-applicable meditation subject" because it is the basis for the desired engagement and practice. Among the thirty-eight objects, that which is suitable to one's temperament should always be attended to; thus, it is called "suitable meditation subject (pārihāriyakakammaṭṭhāna)" in the manner described above, then –
‘‘Mahāvāsaṃ navāvāsaṃ, jarāvāsañca panthaniṃ;
‘‘A large dwelling, a new dwelling, and an old dwelling, also a lodging along the road;
A tavern, foliage, and flowers, also fruits and what is sought after.
‘‘Nagaraṃ dārunā khettaṃ, visabhāgena paṭṭanaṃ;
‘‘A city, dangerous places, a field, a market town in a separate place;
A border area that is unsuitable, where a friend is not found.
‘‘Aṭṭhārasetāni ṭhānāni, iti viññāya paṇḍito;
‘‘Having understood these eighteen places,
A wise man should avoid them from afar, like a path full of danger.’’ (Visuddhi. 1.52) –
Vuttaaṭṭhārasasenāsanadosavajjitaṃ ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ nātidūraṃ hoti naccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampannaṃ divā appākiṇṇaṃ rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosaṃ appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassaṃ. Tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa appakasireneva uppajjanti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā. Tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammavinayadharā mātikādharā. Te kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paripucchati paripañhati ‘idaṃ bhante kathaṃ, imassa ko attho’ti. Tassa te āyasmanto avivaṭañceva vivaranti, anuttānīkatañca uttāniṃ karonti, anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhānīyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodenti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ hotī’’ti (a. ni. 10.11) vuttapañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ senāsanaṃ upagamma tattha vasantena ‘‘dīghāni kesalomanakhāni chinditabbāni, jiṇṇacīvaresu aggaḷaanuvātaparibhaṇḍadānādinā daḷhīkammaṃ vā tantacchedādīsu tunnakammaṃ vā kātabbaṃ, kiliṭṭhāni rajitabbāni, sace patte malaṃ hoti, patto pacitabbo, mañcapīṭhādīni sodhetabbānī’’ti evaṃ vuttaupacchinnakhuddakapalibodhena katabhattakiccena bhattasammadaṃ vinodetvā ratanattayaguṇānussaraṇena cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā ācariyuggahato ekapadampi asammuyhantena manasi kātabbanti.
Having approached a dwelling place endowed with the five qualities stated: "Here, monks, the dwelling is not too far, not too near, accessible for going and coming, uncrowded by day, quiet at night, without noise or clamor, free from contact with gadflies, mosquitoes, wind, heat, and creeping things. And while dwelling in that dwelling place, the requisites of robes, alms food, lodging, and medicine for the sick arise without difficulty. And in that dwelling place, elder monks dwell who are learned, versed in the scriptures, upholders of the Dhamma and Vinaya, upholders of the matrices. From time to time, one approaches and questions them, asking, 'Venerable Sir, what is the meaning of this? What is the explanation of this?' Those venerable ones reveal what is unrevealed, make plain what is unclarified, and dispel doubt in the many doubtful matters. Thus, monks, a dwelling place is endowed with five qualities" (A. Ni. 10.11), and while dwelling there, having cut long head hairs, body hairs, and nails, having strengthened old robes by giving edging, wind protection, or additional patches, or having done sewing work where threads are cut, having dyed stained robes, if there is dirt in the bowl, the bowl should be fired, bed and chairs should be cleaned—thus, with the minor impediments cut off as stated, having finished the meal duties, having dispelled the intoxication of the meal, having gladdened the mind by recollecting the virtues of the Triple Gem, without confusing even a single word from the teacher's instruction, it should be done in the mind.
Caturārakkhaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Four Protections Discourse is concluded.
50. Vipassanāniddesavaṇṇanā
50. The Commentary on the Insight Discourse
471-2.Nāmarūpanti cittacetasikasaṅkhātaṃ nāmañca aṭṭhavīsatividhaṃ rūpañca. ‘‘Namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ, ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ, nāmarūpato na añño attādiko koci atthī’’ti evaṃ jhānalābhī ce, jhānato vuṭṭhāya jhānagataṃ vā vipassanāyāniko ce, pakiṇṇakabhūtaṃ nāmarūpaṃ pariggahetvā. Pātimokkhasaṃvarādi sīlavisuddhi, caturārakkhavasena dīpitā sopacārasamādhisaṅkhātā cittavisuddhi ca vuttāva nāmāti iminā diṭṭhivisuddhi kathitā. Tato tassa paccayañca pariggahetvāti sambandho.Tassa paccayanti ‘‘paṭisandhikkhaṇe nāmarūpadvayameva avijjātaṇhāupādānakammehi uppajjati, na issarādikāraṇenā’’tiādinā tassa kāraṇaṃ, iminā kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi dassitā.
471-2.Name-and-form means name, which is the aggregate of mind and mental factors, and form, which is of twenty-eight kinds. If he is a jhana attainer, "Name is characterized by bending, form is characterized by decaying, there is no other self or the like apart from name-and-form," having risen from jhāna or if he is one who has insight as his vehicle, having apprehended name-and-form in a scattered manner. Morality purification, such as restraint according to the Pātimokkha, and concentration purification, called access concentration described in terms of the four protections, have already been stated; with this, purity of view is spoken of. Then its relation is having apprehended its cause as well. Its cause means its cause thus, "In the moment of rebirth, only the pair of name-and-form arise due to ignorance, craving, grasping, and karma, not due to a creator such as Īśvara," with this, purity of overcoming doubt is shown.
Hutvā abhāvato aniccāti sabbepi nāmarūpasaṅkhārā uppajjitvā abhāvāpajjanato aniccā.Udayabbayapīḷanā dukkhāti uppādanirodhavasena pīḷanato dukkhā.Avasavattittā anattāti attano vase avattanato anattāti evaṃ saṅkhārehi saddhiṃ tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā.Punappunaṃ sammasantoti yathāvuttanayena sammasanto samathayāniko vipassanāyāniko ca yogāvacaro. Iminā maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi, paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi ca dassitā. Saṅkhārānameva hi udayabbayādinānupassanato udayabbayabhaṅgabhayaādīnavanibbidāmuñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhānupassanāsa- ṅkhārupekkhāñāṇasaṅkhātassa aṭṭhavidhassa ñāṇassa vasena sikhāppattaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi nāma.Anupubbena sabbasaṃyojanakkhayaṃ pāpuṇeyyāti iminā ñāṇadassanavisuddhi dassitā.Sabbasaṃyojanakkhayanti orambhāgiyānaṃ pañcannaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ heṭṭhā maggattayena khepitattā, itaresaṃ uddhambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ khepitattā ca sabbesaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ khayante jātaṃ arahattamaggaṃ.
Impermanent due to becoming and non-becoming means all aggregates of name-and-form are impermanent due to arising and falling into non-being. Painful due to the oppression of arising and passing away means painful due to oppression by way of arising and ceasing. Not-self due to not occurring at one's own will means not-self due to not operating at one's own will; thus, having applied the three characteristics together with the aggregates. Repeatedly contemplating means contemplating in the manner stated, a practitioner who has serenity as his vehicle and a practitioner who has insight as his vehicle. With this, purity of knowledge and vision of what is the path and what is not the path, and purity of knowledge and vision of the course, are shown. Indeed, insight knowledge that has reached its peak in terms of the eight kinds of knowledge—knowledge of rise and fall, knowledge of dissolution, knowledge of terror, knowledge of misery, knowledge of disenchantment, desire to be freed, knowledge of reflection, and knowledge of equanimity about formations—is called purity of knowledge and vision of the course, from seeing the rise and fall and so forth of formations. He would attain the destruction of all fetters in due order with this, purity of knowledge and vision is shown. Destruction of all fetters means the Arahatship Path that has arisen at the end of the destruction of all the fetters, since the five lower fetters have been destroyed by the three lower paths, and the remaining higher fetters have been destroyed.
Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā
The Commentary on the Concluding Talk
473.Yasmā kāraṇā yā sikkhanā, ayaṃ bhikkhukiccaṃ,atotasmā kāraṇāti attho.
473.Since that reason, that training, this is the duty of a monk, therefore means for that reason.
474.Niccaso lokavicārinoti niccaṃ loke vicarato. Mālutasseva parissamo na sambhotīti yojanā.Mālutassevāti vātassa iva.Na sambhotīti na hoti.
474.Always wandering in the world means always wandering in the world. The connection is that effort does not arise, just like the wind. Just like the wind means like the wind. Does not arise means it does not happen.
475-6.Tambapaṇṇi eva tambapaṇṇiyo, ketu viya ketu, tambapaṇṇiye ketūti tappuriso. Tena racitā dhammavinayaññupasaṃsitā ayaṃ khuddasikkhā parimāṇato gāthānaṃ pañcamattehi satehi ettāvatā niṭṭhānamupāgatāti sambandho.
475-6.Tambapaṇṇi is indeed Tambapaṇṇi, like a flag is a flag, Tambapaṇṇiye Ketūti is a Tatpurusha compound. The connection is that this Minor Training, composed by him and praised by those who know the Dhamma and Vinaya, has reached completion with about five hundred verses in measure.
Nigamanakathāvaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Concluding Talk is concluded.
Nigamanakathā
The Concluding Talk
Kārāpitetirucire pavare vihāre;
In the beautiful and excellent monastery caused to be built;
By the revered one, full of virtues, in charge of honor;
Residing during the rains, I, a Tamil, skillfully made it;
Desiring a commentary for the excellent growth of the Jina’s Dispensation.
Puññena sattharacanājanitena tena;
By the merit generated by the composition of the treatise;
Due to the excellent rising cause of the Buddha’s Dispensation;
May my attachment not be to worldly allurements;
May I practice the excellent rising of the Buddha’s Dispensation.
Atthesu akkharapadesu vinicchayesu;
In the meanings, lettered words, in discriminations;
In what is written before and after, whatever fault there is;
Having forgiven, may the virtuous ones be patient and speak;
Or what is the use of coaxing when the offense is seen?
Yenantatantaratanākaramanthanena;
By whom, through churning the ocean of inner jewels;
Obtained by the excellent knowledge agitated like Mount Mandara;
Those who delight in the essence and are exceedingly happy also delight others;
May my teachers be victorious, teachers, heavy with virtues.
Paratthasampādanato, puññenādhigatenahaṃ;
Through the merit acquired from accomplishing the benefit of others, may I
Be one who accomplishes the benefit of others in birth after birth.
Sisso āha –
The student said –
Paramappicchatānekasantosopasamesinaṃ;
Of him who has few desires, much contentment, and peacefulness;
Whose conduct is pure and frugal, who lives constantly in the forest.
Sāsanujjotakārīnaṃ, ācerattamupāgataṃ;
For those who are the illuminators of the Dispensation, who have reached integrity;
The eminent ascetic known as Udumbaragiri.
Medhaṅkara iti khyātanāmadheyyaṃ tapodhanaṃ;
The ascetic named Medhaṅkara, known as such;
The Elder, the treasure of steadfast compassion and wisdom, well-venerated.
Sissaṃ sahāyamāgamma, kalyāṇamittamattano;
Having come with a student as a friend, his own good friend,
He made an effort to purify the Dispensation of the Teacher.
Susaddasiddhiṃ yo yoganicchayaṃ sabbhi vaṇṇitaṃ;
He who desired success in grammar, which is praised by the wise, composed the Subodhālaṅkāra, and the Vuttodaya without confusion.
Saṅgharakkhitanāmena, mahātherena dhīmatā;
By the great elder Saṅgharakkhita, the wise one, whose dwelling place is endowed with numerous virtues such as desiring little.
Teneva racitā sādhu, sāsanodayakārinā;
By him, the promoter of the Teaching, was also well-composed the commentary on the Khuddasikkhā, which is the Sumaṅgalappasādanī.
Nigamanakathā niṭṭhitā.
Conclusion of the introductory narrative.
Iti sumaṅgalappasādanī nāma
Thus ends the Khuddasikkhā-abhinavaṭīkā,
Khuddasikkhā-abhinavaṭīkā samattā.
named Sumaṅgalappasādanī.
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
Homage to the Blessed One, the Arahant, the Perfectly Enlightened One.
Mūlasikkhā
Mūlasikkhā
Ganthārambhakathā
Introductory Account of the Text
Natvā nāthaṃ pavakkhāmi, mūlasikkhaṃ samāsato;
Having paid homage to the master, I will explain the Mūlasikkhā concisely, to be learned first in the root language by a new bhikkhu.
1. Pārājikaniddeso
1. Pārājika Description
1.
1.
Saṃ nimittaṃ pavesanto, bhikkhu maggattaye cuto;
A bhikkhu who, with intention, inserts (his organ), is fallen from the threefold path; even if he enjoys the insertion, the state of being inserted, the withdrawal, or being entered.
2.
2.
Adinnaṃ mānusaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, theyyāyekena ādiyaṃ;
A bhikkhu who takes, with the idea of theft, unclaimed human goods; if it is worth five māsakas or more, he is fallen.
3.
3.
Ādiyanto harantova-harantopiriyāpathaṃ;
One who takes, who moves away, or even while moving, changes posture, likewise from its place, even causing to be removed, is defeated (pārājiko).
4.
4.
Tattha nānekabhaṇḍānaṃ, pañcakānaṃ vasā pana;
Here, regarding various goods, based on the five, the removals, when they reach ten, should be understood by the discerning one.
5.
5.
Sāhatthāṇattiko ceva, nissaggo cātthasādhako;
By one's own hand, by command, and the abandonment achieving the purpose; and placing down the burden, this is the fivefold by one's own hand.
6.
6.
Pubbasahappayogo ca, saṃvidhāharaṇampi ca;
Prior agreement, and jointly taking; agreed-upon action, a sign, the fivefold prior agreement.
7.
7.
Theyyāpasayhaparikappa-ppaṭicchannakusādikā;
Taking by theft, by force, by contrivance, concealment, grass, etc.; these five removals should be understood by the discerning one.
8.
8.
Manussapāṇaṃ pāṇoti, jānaṃ vadhakacetasā;
One knowingingly deprives a human being of life, with the intention to kill; he who separates from life is defeated (pārājito) from the Teaching.
9.
9.
Jhānādibhedaṃ hadaye asantaṃ,
A bhikkhu, not having jhāna, etc., in his heart, but speaking of superior attainments, without the state of conceit, to a human being, at the moment of knowing, by that, he is defeated (parājiko).
2. Garukāpattiniddeso
2. Garukāpatti Description
10.
10.
Mocetukāmacittena, upakkamma vimocayaṃ;
With the intention of freeing, attempting to free, semen other than in a dream, a samaṇa incurs a grave offense.
11.
11.
Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena, manussitthiṃ parāmasaṃ;
Touching a woman with lustful bodily contact; perceiving (her as) a woman, attempting (to touch), a samaṇa incurs a grave offense.
12.
12.
Duṭṭhullavācassādena, maggaṃ vārabbha methunaṃ;
Because of the pleasure of vulgar speech, concerning the path, the sexual act; speaking obscenely to a woman, upon hearing, (he) incurs a grave offense.
13.
13.
Vaṇṇaṃ vatvāttanokāma-pāricariyāya methunaṃ;
Having spoken of one's own qualities for the sake of sexual intercourse, asking a woman for sexual intercourse with lust, (he) incurs a grave offense.
14.
14.
Sandesaṃ paṭiggaṇhitvā, purisassitthiyāpi vā;
Having accepted a message, either for a man or a woman; having considered it, carrying it back, a samaṇa incurs a grave offense.
15.
15.
Cāvetukāmo codento, amūlantimavatthunā;
Desiring to expel, accusing with a groundless final charge; or causing (another) samaṇa to accuse, upon hearing, (he) incurs a grave offense.
16.
16.
Lesamattaṃ upādāya, amūlantimavatthunā;
Taking up a mere pretext, with a groundless final charge; desiring to expel, accusing, upon hearing, (he) incurs a grave offense.
3. Nissaggiyaniddeso
3. Nissaggiya Description
17.
17.
Vikappanamadhiṭṭhāna-makatvā kālacīvaraṃ;
Without making a vikappana or an adhiṭṭhāna, (regarding) timely robes; if he lets ten days pass, that becomes a nissaggiya.
18.
18.
Bhikkhusammutiyāññatra, ticīvaramadhiṭṭhitaṃ;
Except by the bhikkhu's agreement, the three robes having been kept; if he lets one night pass, (it is) a nissaggiya, without (valid) reason.
19.
19.
Aññātikā bhikkhuniyā, purāṇacīvaraṃ pana;
An unrelated bhikkhunī, an old robe; having (it) washed, dyed, or beaten, that becomes (an offense).
20.
20.
Aññātikā bhikkhuniyā, hatthato kiñci mūlakaṃ;
From the hand of an unrelated bhikkhunī, any kind of price; without giving (it), for the taking of a robe, is declared a nissaggiya.
21.
21.
Appavāritamaññātiṃ, viññāpentassa cīvaraṃ;
Asking an unrelated (person) who has not been authorized, for a robe; except for a valid reason, that becomes a nissaggiya.
22.
22.
Rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ vā, māsakaṃ vā kahāpaṇaṃ;
Silver or gold, a māsaka or a kahāpaṇa; if he accepts or causes to accept, or approves (of it), (it is) a nissaggiya.
23.
23.
Parivatteyya nissaggi, rajatādi catubbidhaṃ;
A nissaggiya (offense) if he exchanges silver, etc., of four kinds; permissible (things) with permissible (things), having placed (them) with a co-religionist.
24.
24.
Vikappanamadhiṭṭhāna-makatvāna pamāṇikaṃ;
Without making a vikappana or an adhiṭṭhāna, (regarding) a bowl of standard size; if he lets ten days pass, that bowl becomes a nissaggiya.
25.
25.
Pañcabandhanato ūna-patte sati paraṃ pana;
When there is a bowl with less than five patches, then he asks for a new bowl, that becomes a nissaggiya.
26.
26.
Paṭiggahetvā bhuñjanto, sappitelādikaṃ pana;
Having received and enjoyed, ghee, oil, etc.; if he lets seven days pass, that becomes a nissaggiya.
27.
27.
Bhikkhussa cīvaraṃ datvā, acchindantassa taṃ puna;
Having given a robe to a bhikkhu, taking that back again; knowingly, a nissaggiya, or causing (another) to take (it) back.
28.
28.
Appavāritamaññātiṃ, suttaṃ yāciya cīvaraṃ;
Asking an unrelated (person) who has not been authorized, for thread for a robe; if he has (it) woven, (it is) a nissaggiya, without authorization from relatives.
29.
29.
Jānanto bhikkhu saṅghassa, lābhaṃ pariṇataṃ pana;
Knowingly, a bhikkhu turns the Sangha's gain; if he directs it to himself, that becomes a nissaggiya.
4. Pācittiyaniddeso
4. Pācittiya Description
30.
30.
Sampajānamusāvāde, pācittiyamudīritaṃ;
Deliberately telling a lie is declared a pācittiya; and for reviling a bhikkhu, and in tale-bearing.
31.
31.
Ṭhapetvā bhikkhuniṃ bhikkhuṃ, aññena piṭakattayaṃ;
Excluding a bhikkhunī and a bhikkhu, with another, the three baskets; reciting the text of the Dhamma, is declared a pācittiya.
32.
32.
Anupasampanneneva, sayitvāna tirattiyaṃ;
Sleeping for three nights with one who is not fully ordained; a pācitti for co-sleeping, when (it is) the fourth that passes.
33.
33.
Itthiyā ekarattampi, seyyaṃ kappayatopi vā;
Or even causing (another) to prepare a sleeping place for one night with a woman; teaching the Dhamma, without a wise person, more than six words.
34.
34.
Duṭṭhullaṃ bhikkhuno vajjaṃ, bhikkhusammutiyā vinā;
A bhikkhu's offense that is serious, without the agreement of the bhikkhus; speaking (of it) to one who is not a bhikkhu, is declared a pācittiya.
35.
35.
Khaṇeyya vā khaṇāpeyya, pathaviñca akappiyaṃ;
Digging or causing (another) to dig, unpermitted earth; harming plant life, that becomes a pācittiya for him.
36.
36.
Ajjhokāse tu mañcādiṃ, katvā santharaṇādikaṃ;
In an open space, making a couch, etc., or a spread; Sangha property, he goes away (with a) pācitti, without asking permission, etc.
37.
37.
Saṅghikāvasathe seyyaṃ, katvā santharaṇādikaṃ;
In a Sangha dwelling, having prepared a bed, etc., or a spread; without asking permission, etc., he who goes away, for him also (it is) a pācitti.
38.
38.
Jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ toyaṃ, pācitti paribhuñjato;
Knowingly drinking water with living beings, (it is) a pācitti; from an unrelated bhikkhunī, except for exchange.
39.
39.
Cīvaraṃ deti pācitti, cīvaraṃ sibbatopi ca;
Giving a robe, (it is) a pācitti, and sewing a robe; without making (it) extra, and having invited, enjoying (food).
40.
40.
Bhikkhuṃ āsādanāpekkho, pavāreti pavāritaṃ;
Expecting to displease a bhikkhu, he invites (him), having invited; when (food) is eaten without extra, (it is) declared a pācittiya.
41.
41.
Sannidhibhojanaṃ bhuñje, vikāle yāvakālikaṃ;
He eats stored-up food, at the wrong time, food allowed for a limited time; and eating choice food when not sick, (it is) a pācitti.
42.
42.
Viññāpetvāna bhuñjeyya, sappibhattādikampi ca;
Having requested, he eats, ghee-rice, etc.; he eats unaccepted (food), except for a tooth-stick and water.
43.
43.
Titthiyassa dade kiñci, bhuñjitabbaṃ sahatthato;
He gives something to a titthiya, that should be eaten from (his own) hand; sitting as a go-between in sexual matters with a woman.
44.
44.
Surāmerayapānepi, pācittiyamudīritaṃ;
Drinking intoxicants is declared a pācittiya; and pointing with the finger, joking, and in censuring the Dhamma.
45.
45.
Anādarepi pācitti, bhikkhuṃ bhīsayatopi vā;
Through disrespect, (it is) a pācitti, and frightening a bhikkhu; having made frightening talk, or showing something frightening.
46.
46.
Ṭhapetvā paccayaṃ kiñci, agilāno jaleyya vā;
Except for some reason, when not sick, he burns or causes (another) to burn a fire; that becomes a pācittiya for him.
47.
47.
Kappabindumanādāya, navacīvarabhogino;
Without taking a kappabindu, for a bhikkhu enjoying a new robe; expecting laughter, a bhikkhu's robe, etc.
48.
48.
Apanetvā nidhentassa, nidhāpentassa vā pana;
Having removed and concealed, or causing to conceal; knowingly killing a being, even one gone to the animal realm.
49.
49.
Chādetukāmo chādeti, duṭṭhullaṃ bhikkhunopi ca;
Desiring to cover up, he covers up a bhikkhu's serious (offense); even for one gone to another village, conspiring with a woman.
50.
50.
Bhikkhuṃ paharato vāpi, talasattikamuggire;
Striking a bhikkhu, with the palm, with a stick, or with a club; or accusing, or causing (another) to accuse, with a serious, groundless (charge).
51.
51.
Kukkuccuppādane cāpi, bhaṇḍanatthāyupassutiṃ;
And in causing worry, for the sake of quarrel, eavesdropping; going to listen to those who are quarreling, that becomes a pācittiya.
52.
52.
Saṅghassa lābhaṃ pariṇāmitaṃ tu,
The Sangha's gain, directed (to the Sangha); he who directs that to another person; without asking a good bhikkhu, (it is a) pācitti, having gone to the village at the wrong time.
5. Pakiṇṇakaniddeso
5. Pakiṇṇaka Description
53.
53.
Saṅghikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ yo, deti aññassa issaro;
The Sangha's heavy property, he who gives to another, being in control; thullaccaya, according to the actual thing, theft, pārājika, etc.
54.
54.
Kusādimayacīrāni, kambalaṃ kesavālajaṃ;
Cīras made of grass, etc., a blanket made of hair; wearing (them) without a valid reason, a fan of peacock feathers, a hide to be thrown away.
55.
55.
Satthakamme vatthikamme, saṃ nimittañca chindato;
In surgery, in applying medicine, cutting a Saṃ Nimitta; thullaccaya, and eating human flesh, etc.
56.
56.
Kadalerakakkadussāni, potthakaṃ sabbanīlakaṃ;
Cloth made of banana or eraka, a book, all blue; and all yellow, etc., wearing (them), (it is) a dukkaṭa.
57.
57.
Hatthissuragasoṇānaṃ, sīhabyagghacchadīpinaṃ;
Meat of elephants, horses, dogs, lions, tigers, bears, leopards; jackals, and meat made for a specific purpose.
58.
58.
Anāpucchitamaṃsañca, bhuñjato dukkaṭaṃ siyā;
Eating unasked-for meat, that becomes a dukkaṭa; having left the sequential lodgings, he goes to a watering place, etc.
59.
59.
Sahasā vubbhajitvāna, pavise nikkhameyya vā;
Suddenly, having rushed in, he enters or exits; to a toilet or privy, without clearing one's throat, he enters.
60.
60.
Nitthunanto kare vaccaṃ, dantakaṭṭhañca khādayaṃ;
While defecating, he makes a noise, and chews a tooth-stick; he defecates, etc., outside the toilet or urinal.
61.
61.
Kharena cāvalekheyya, kaṭṭhaṃ pāteyya kūpake;
62.
62.
While doing water duties, having made ‘‘capu capu’’; without being authorized by a senior, he recites the Pātimokkha.
Dakakiccaṃ karontassa, katvā ‘‘capucapū’’ti ca;
63.
63.
Anāpucchāya pañhassa, kathane vissajjanepi ca;
Without asking permission, in speaking a question, and in answering; in reciting, lighting a lamp, and in extinguishing.
64.
64.
Vātapānakavāṭāni, vivareyya thakeyya vā;
He opens or closes the window shutters; he does reverence, etc., naked, going, eating, etc.
65.
65.
Parikammaṃ kare kāre, tipaṭicchannakaṃ vinā;
He does massage, in doing (it), without covering (himself) in three places; bathing the body, he rubs (it) on a wall, a pillar, or a tree.
66.
66.
Kuruvindakasuttena, aññamaññassa kāyato;
With Kuruvinda thread, from another's body; when not sick, in the outer monastery, he walks with sandals.
67.
67.
Upāhanaṃ yo dhāreti, sabbanīlādikampi ca;
He who wears sandals, all blue, etc.; the Saṃ Nimitta for a woman, he is fond of, or the face of one giving alms.
68.
68.
Ujjhānasaññī aññassa, pattaṃ vā attano mukhaṃ;
With the perception of disdain, another's bowl, or his own face; he looks in a mirror, etc., on a high seat or a great seat.
69.
69.
Nisajjādiṃ karontassa, dukkaṭaṃ vandanepi ca;
A dukkaṭa offense is incurred by one who sits down, and also in salutation; with one who is expelled, not yet fully ordained, or living in various associations.
70.
70.
Ekato paṇḍakitthīhi, ubhatobyañjanena vā;
If one sits on a long seat with a eunuch or a woman; or sits on a seat that is not long.
71.
71.
Asamānāsanikena, mañcapīṭhe sayeyya vā;
If one sleeps on a couch or chair with someone who is not an equal; if one gives fruits, flowers, etc. to gain favor with a family.
72.
72.
Ganthimādiṃ kare kāre, jinavāritapaccaye;
If one makes knots, etc., for reasons prohibited by the Conqueror; if one partakes being unskilled, or dwells without reliance.
73.
73.
Anuññātehi aññassa, bhesajjaṃ vā kare vade;
If one speaks of medicine or makes medicine unauthorized by another; a bhikkhu incurs an offense by the uposatha and pavāraṇa.
74.
74.
Dvārabandhādike ṭhāne, parivattakavāṭakaṃ;
If one closes a revolving door in a place such as a doorway; or sleeps during the day without exertion, or by imposition.
75.
75.
Dhaññitthirūparatanaṃ, āvudhitthipasādhanaṃ;
If one touches grain, women, silver, gold, weapons, female adornments;
76.
76.
Sasitthodakatelehi, phaṇahatthaphaṇehi vā;
Musical instruments, fruits on trees, or early-morning dye.
77.
77.
Ekattharaṇapāvuraṇā, sayeyyuṃ dvekamañcake;
With or without water mixed with rice, with oil, or with phaṇa grass in hand; in a single vessel for hair-cutting, and also for food.
78.
78.
Yojeti vā yojāpeti, naccaṃ gītañca vāditaṃ;
If two sleep on one bed with a single spread or covering; if one chews a toothpick that is too long or too short in measure.
79.
79.
Vīhādiropime cāpi, bahipākārakuṭṭake;
Or arranges or has arranged dancing, singing, and instrumental music; a dukkaṭa is incurred by one who watches or listens to them.
80.
80.
Nakhamaṭṭhakaraṇādimhi, sambādhe lomahāraṇe;
Also, in planting seeds, etc., outside the enclosure wall; in throwing out waste, etc., and in keeping long hair.
81.
81.
Adhotaallapādehi, saṅghikaṃ mañcapīṭhakaṃ;
In cutting nails, etc., in a crowded place, in removing body hair; if one treads on prepared ground with sandals on.
82.
82.
Saṅghāṭiyāpi pallatthe, dupparibhuñjeyya cīvaraṃ;
A dukkaṭa is incurred by one who touches a monastic couch or chair with unwashed muddy feet; or a prepared wall.
83.
83.
Nācameyya dake sante, samādeyya akappiye;
If one wears the outer robe as a pallattha; if one improperly uses a robe; if one goes to a village without a waistband, having made a privy.
84.
84.
Na vase vassaṃ visaṃvāde, suddhacitte paṭissavaṃ;
If one does not bathe in clear water, if one accepts what is improper; also in teaching, announcing, etc., with a shared offense.
85.
85.
Vināpadaṃ tarussuddhaṃ, porisamhābhirūhaṇe;
If one does not dwell during the rains in disagreement, with pure intention for the promise; if one leaves after dwelling for the rains, due to unauthorized business.
86.
86.
Attano ghātane itthi-rūpādiṃ kārayeyya vā;
If one climbs a tree without a stand for the feet, from a man; if one does not give water that has not been strained, when asked for it.
87.
87.
Bhuñjantamuṭṭhape tassa, sālādīsu nisīdato;
If one has a woman's form or similar things made for one's own destruction; if one makes drawings himself, abandoning garlands, etc.
88.
88.
Yānādimabhirūheyya, kallako ratanattayaṃ;
If one rouses him while he is eating, while he is sitting in the hall, etc.; also, a dukkaṭa is incurred by not giving an opportunity to elders.
89.
89.
Kāyādiṃ vivaritvāna, bhikkhunīnaṃ na dassaye;
If one mounts a vehicle, etc., having evil intentions towards the Triple Gem; if one speaks disparagingly in an assembly of those who know the Dhamma.
90.
90.
Yattha katthaci peḷāyaṃ, bhuñjato pattahatthako;
If one does not show the body, etc., to nuns; if one recites worldly talk, if one learns or teaches what is false.
91.
91.
Uṇheyya paṭisāmeyya, atiuṇheyya vodakaṃ;
If, when eating, the bowl is in the hand, in any container; if one bends a window or door, or a water vessel.
92.
92.
Miḍḍhante paribhaṇḍante, pāde chatte ṭhapeti vā;
If one heats, reheats, or overheats water; if one places the bowl on the ground, or on the lap or on a chair.
93.
93.
Pattena nīharantassa, ucchiṭṭhamudakampi ca;
If one places the feet on a footstool or under an umbrella, while yawning or murmuring; if one places the bowl on a stand, etc., or washes the hands in the bowl.
94.
94.
Vade ‘‘jīvā’’ti khipite, na sikkhati anādaro;
A dukkaṭa is incurred by one who takes out even leftover water with a bowl; if one uses an improper bowl.
95.
95.
Yo bhaṇḍagāre payutova bhaṇḍakaṃ,
If one says "Live!" when throwing away, if one is not respectful or does not train; a dukkaṭa would be in the sekhiya, beginning with the round one.
6. Vattādikaṇḍaniddeso
6. Explanation of the Chapter on Observances, etc.
96.
96.
Upajjhācariyavattañca, gamikāgantukampi ca;
The observances for preceptors and teachers, for those who travel and for guests; the observances for lodgings, etc., should be done by one who is dear and virtuous.
97.
97.
Hatthapāse ṭhito kiñci, gahitabbaṃ dade tidhā;
If something is within arm's reach, it should be taken when given in three ways; one who desires to take, should take; acceptance is twofold here.
98.
98.
Saṅghāṭimuttarāsaṅgaṃ, tathā antaravāsakaṃ;
"I determine this saṅghāṭi", the upper robe, and likewise the lower robe; likewise, "I relinquish this."
99.
99.
‘‘Imaṃ imāni etāni, etampi cīvara’’nti vā;
"This, these, these, and also this robe"; or "cloths for requisites," likewise, "I relinquish this."
100.
100.
‘‘Etaṃ imaṃ adhiṭṭhāmi, pattaṃ paccuddharāmi’’ti;
"I determine this bowl, I relinquish this"; thus one should relinquish and determine robes, etc., according to the rule.
101.
101.
Sañcarittaṃ vinā sesā, sacittā garukantimā;
Except for intentional movement, the rest are heavy with intention; leaving aside what is uncut, what is digested, the unintentional is expiable.
102.
102.
Padasodhammaṃ duve seyyā, itthiyā dhammadesanā;
Two verses of Dhamma, teaching Dhamma to a woman; two lodgings also, sewing of a robe.
103.
103.
Pavāritaṃ surāpānaṃ, pañcasannidhiādikaṃ;
Being invited, drinking intoxicants, the five kinds of hoarding, lighting a fire, and the first drop of dye; entering a village — these are unintentional in the pācittiyas.
104.
104.
Pakiṇṇakesu uddissa-kataṃ hitvāññamaṃsakaṃ;
Leaving aside meat that is killed to order in miscellaneous matters; a single spread or covering, wrapping up in a single bed;
105.
105.
Akāyabandhanañcāpi, pattahatthakavāṭakaṃ;
Eating together also, and the seven kinds of dancing, singing, etc.
106.
106.
Vītikkamanacittena, sacittakamacittakaṃ;
Also not wearing a waistband, holding the bowl in hand and the door; all this is unintentional; the rest here is intentional.
107.
107.
Pubbakaraṇādikaṃ katvā, uposathappavāraṇaṃ;
The teachers say that the intentional and the unintentional are through the thought of transgression; and also through knowing the rule.
108.
108.
Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;
Having done the preliminary duties, etc., the uposatha and pavāraṇa; all this, shown in nine ways, should be done by one who is dear and virtuous.
109.
109.
Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;
Sweeping, a lamp, and water, and with a seat; these are called the preliminary duties of the uposatha.
110.
110.
Uposatho yāvatikā ca bhikkhū kammappattā,
Giving consent, purity, reciting the ukkhepaka, counting the bhikkhus, and the exhortation; these are called the preliminary business of the uposatha.
111.Pubbakaraṇapubbakiccāni samāpetvā desitāpattikassa samaggassa bhikkhusaṅghassa anumatiyā pātimokkhaṃ uddisituṃ ārādhanaṃ karoma.
111.
112.
The uposatha is suitable when there are as many bhikkhus as are fit for the act, there are no shared offenses, and there are no persons to be excluded.
Pārisuddhiadhiṭṭhāna-suttuddesavasā tidhā;
112.
113.
Having completed the preliminary duties and preliminary business, we ask for the recitation of the Pātimokkha with the agreement of the united Saṅgha of bhikkhus who have confessed their offenses.
Cātuddaso pannaraso, sāmaggī dinato tidhā;
113.
114.
Purity, determination, the basis of reciting the sutta, threefold;
Tayo tayoti katvāna, dinapuggalabhedato;
114.
115.
A group, an individual, and the Saṅgha, should do that in due order.
Kattikantimapakkhamhā, hemaṃ phaggunapuṇṇamā;
115.
116.
The fourteenth, the fifteenth, and unanimity, threefold from the day; those nine are spoken of according to the manner of day, person, and action.
Cātuddasā cha etesu, pakkhā tatiyasattamā;
116.
117.‘‘Chandaṃ dammi, chandaṃ me hara, chandaṃ me ārocehī’’ti chandaṃ dātabbaṃ.
Having made three threes, according to the distinction of day and person; three recitations, two recitations, and one recitation — the pavāraṇās are said to be nine.
118.‘‘Pārisuddhiṃ dammi, pārisuddhiṃ me hara, pārisuddhiṃ me ārocehī’’ti pārisuddhi dātabbā.
117.
119.‘‘Pavāraṇaṃ dammi, pavāraṇaṃ me hara, pavāraṇaṃ me ārocehi, mamatthāya pavārehī’’ti pavāraṇā dātabbā.
From the last fortnight of Kattika, winter; the full-moon of Phagguna;
120.Āpattidesakena ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulā nānāvatthukā āpattiyo āpajjiṃ, tā tumhamūle paṭidesemī’’ti vatvā paṭiggaṇhantena ‘‘passasi, āvuso, tā āpattiyo’’ti vutte ‘‘āma, bhante, passāmī’’ti vatvā puna paṭiggaṇhantena ‘‘āyatiṃ, āvuso, saṃvareyyāsī’’ti vutte ‘‘sādhu, suṭṭhu, bhante saṃvarissāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā desetabbaṃ.
118.
121.Vematiṃ ārocentena ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, sambahulāsu nānāvatthukāsu āpattīsu vematiko, yadā nibbematiko bhavissāmi, tadā tā āpattiyo paṭikarissāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā ārocetabbaṃ.
From the last fortnight of that, summer; the full-moon of Āsāḷhi;
122.‘‘Ajja me uposatho ‘pannaraso, cātuddaso’ti vā adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā puggalena adhiṭṭhānuposatho kātabbo.
119.
123.Dvīsu pana therena ‘‘parisuddho ahaṃ āvuso, ‘parisuddho’ti maṃ dhārehī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vattabbaṃ. Navakenapi tatheva vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhante, dhārethā’’ti vacanaṃ viseso.
After that the rains, the remaining twenty-four uposathas.
124.Tīsu pana ‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā, ajjuposatho pannaraso, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, mayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyyāmā’’ti ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā paṭipāṭiyā vuttanayena pārisuddhiuposatho kātabbo.
120.
125.‘‘Ajja me pavāraṇā ‘cātuddasī, pannarasī’ti vā adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā ekena pavāretabbaṃ.
Among these, the fourteenths are six, the third and seventh fortnights;
126.Dvīsu pana therena ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmantaṃ pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadatu maṃ āyasmā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā pavāretabbaṃ. Navakenāpi tatheva vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhante’’ti vacanaṃ viseso.
121.
127.Tīsu vā catūsu vā pana ‘‘suṇantu me āyasmantā, ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī, yadāyasmantānaṃ pattakallaṃ, mayaṃ aññamaññaṃ pavāreyyāmā’’ti ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā therena ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso, āyasmante pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmantā anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā pavāretabbaṃ. Navakehipi tatheva paṭipāṭiyā pavāretabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhante’’tivacanaṃ viseso.
The fifteenths should be known as the remaining ones; there are eighteen uposathas.
128.Catūhi adhikesu pana ‘‘suṇātu me āvuso saṅgho, ajja pavāraṇā pannarasī, yadi saṅghassa pattakallaṃ, saṅgho pavāreyyā’’ti ñattiṃ ṭhapetvā vuḍḍhatarena ‘‘saṅghaṃ, āvuso, pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā pavāretabbaṃ. Navakehipi tatheva paṭipāṭiyā ‘‘saṅghaṃ, bhante, pavāremi diṭṭhena vā sutena vā parisaṅkāya vā, vadantu maṃ āyasmanto anukampaṃ upādāya, passanto paṭikarissāmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ vatvā pavāretabbaṃ.
122.“I give consent, bring my consent, announce my consent” — consent should be given.
Mūlasikkhā niṭṭhitā.
123.“I give purity, bring my purity, announce my purity” — purity should be given.
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa
124.“I give pavāraṇa, bring my pavāraṇa, announce my pavāraṇa, make pavāraṇa on my behalf” — pavāraṇa should be given.
Mūlasikkhā-ṭīkā
125.The one confessing an offense should say, "Venerable Sir, I have committed many offenses of various kinds, I confess them at your feet." When he has spoken, the one accepting should say, "Do you see those offenses, friend?" When he has said, "Yes, Venerable Sir, I see them," the one accepting should say again, "In the future, friend, may you restrain yourself." When he has said, "Good, very good, Venerable Sir, I will restrain myself," he should confess, saying it three times.
Ganthārambhakathā
126.The one announcing doubt should say, "Venerable Sir, I am doubtful about many offenses of various kinds; when I become free from doubt, then I will make amends for those offenses," saying it three times he should announce it.
Sabbakāmadadaṃ sabbaratane ratanattayaṃ;
127.The uposatha of determination should be done by an individual, saying three times, "Today I determine that it is the 'fifteenth' or 'fourteenth' uposatha."
Caraṇe brahmacārīnaṃ, ācariyānaṃ siraṃ mama;
128.But in the case of two, the elder should say three times, "I am pure, friend, remember me as 'pure'." Even a novice should say the same. The difference is the word "Venerable Sir, remember."
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
Ganthārambhakathāvaṇṇanā
‘‘natvā nātha’’ntyādi.Nāthaṃcatūhi nāthaṅgehi samannāgataṃ bhagavantaṃnatvāvanditvāādoādimhi upasampannato paṭṭhāyanavakena bhikkhunāadhunā pabbajitena upasampannenamūlabhāsāyamāgadhabhāsāya sikkhituṃsamāsatosaṅkhepena mūlasikkhaṃ ahaṃ pavakkhāmīti piṇḍattho.
"natvā nātha" etc. Nāthaṃ, the Blessed One who is endowed with the four qualities of a protector (nāthaṅga), natvā, having paid homage, ādo, in the beginning, from the time of ordination (upasampadā), navakena bhikkhunā, by a newly ordained bhikkhu, mūlabhāsāya, in the Magadha language, samāsato, briefly, the essence of the fundamental training (mūlasikkhaṃ) I will declare—this is the gist.
natvāti tanninnatappoṇatappabbhāro hutvā kāyavacīmanodvārehi vanditvāti attho. Nāthatīti nātho, veneyyānaṃ hitasukhaṃ mettāyanavasena āsīsati patthetīti attho, atha vā nāthati veneyyagate kilese upatāpetīti attho, nāthati vā yācatīti attho. Bhagavā hi ‘‘sādhu, bhikkhave, bhikkhu kālena kālaṃ attasampattiṃ paccavekkheyyā’’tiādinā (a. ni. 8.7) sattānaṃ taṃ taṃ hitappaṭipattiṃ yācitvāpi karuṇāya samussāhito te tattha niyojeti. Paramena vā cittissariyena samannāgato sabbasatte īsati abhibhavatīti paramissaro bhagavā ‘‘nātho’’ti vuccati. Sabbo cāyamattho saddasatthānusārato veditabbo.Pavakkhāmīti pakārena kathessāmi.Mūlasikkhāti adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāvasena tissopi sikkhā, upasampannassa suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanaṭṭhena mūlā ca sā sikkhitabbato sikkhā cāti mūlasikkhā. Ganthavasenettha saṅkhipitvā vuttattā taddīpano gantho ‘‘mūlasikkhā’’ti vuccati.
Natvā, having become one with a lowered and inclined posture, paying homage through the doors of body, speech, and mind, this is the meaning. Nāthati—he protects, therefore nātho; he cherishes or desires the welfare and happiness of those to be trained, through the way of loving-kindness; or, he harasses the defilements in those to be trained; or, he requests. Indeed, the Blessed One, having requested from beings that specific beneficial conduct with "Bhikkhus, it is good if a bhikkhu would review his own attainments from time to time" (A.N. 8.7) and so on, instigates them to that by compassion. Or, the Blessed One, endowed with the supreme sovereignty of mind, surpasses all beings, therefore, the supreme lord is called "Nātha". And all this meaning should be understood according to the science of words (saddasattha). Pavakkhāmi, I will declare in a distinct manner. Mūlasikkhā, the threefold training in terms of higher morality (adhisīla), higher mind (adhicitta), and higher wisdom (adhipaññā); and because it is fundamental in establishing a bhikkhu firmly in his state of being, it is called mūlasikkhā, the training that should be undertaken. Because it is stated here concisely in terms of the book (gantha), the book that illuminates it is called "Mūlasikkhā".
Tattha katamaṃ sīlaṃ, katamaṃ adhisīlaṃ, katamaṃ cittaṃ, katamaṃ adhicittaṃ, katamā paññā, katamā adhipaññāti? Vuccate – pañcaṅgaaṭṭhaṅgadasaṅgasīlaṃ tāva sīlameva. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ pana ‘‘adhisīla’’nti vuccati. Tañhi sūriyo viya pajjotānaṃ, sineru viya pabbatānaṃ sabbalokiyasīlānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca. Pātimokkhasaṃvaratopi ca maggaphalasampayuttameva sīlaṃ adhisīlaṃ, taṃ pana idha nādhippetaṃ. Na hi taṃ sikkhanto methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati. Kāmāvacarāni pana aṭṭha kusalacittāni, lokiyaaṭṭhasamāpatticittāni ca ekajjhaṃ katvā cittameva. Vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ pana ‘‘adhicitta’’nti vuccati. Tañhi sabbalokiyacittānaṃ adhikañceva uttamañca. Tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicittaṃ, taṃ pana idha nādhippetaṃ. Na hi taṃ sikkhanto methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati. ‘‘Atthi dinnaṃ, atthi yiṭṭha’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ kammassakatāñāṇaṃ paññā, tilakkhaṇākāraparicchedakaṃ pana vipassanāñāṇaṃ ‘‘adhipaññā’’ti vuccati. Sā hi sabbalokiyapaññānaṃ adhikā ceva uttamā ca. Tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā, sā pana idha nādhippetā. Na hi taṃ sikkhanto methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevati.
Herein, what is morality (sīla), what is higher morality (adhisīla), what is mind (citta), what is higher mind (adhicitta), what is wisdom (paññā), what is higher wisdom (adhipaññā)? It is said: morality consisting of the five, eight or ten precepts is merely morality. But the morality of restraint according to the Pātimokkha is called "higher morality" (adhisīla). Indeed, it is more excellent and supreme than all mundane morality, just as the sun is to lights and Mount Sineru to mountains. Moreover, morality associated with the paths and fruits is also higher morality than restraint according to the Pātimokkha, but that is not intended here. Indeed, one who is training in that does not engage in sexual intercourse. But the eight wholesome kāmāvacara cittas and the eight mundane samāpatti cittas, when combined, are merely mind (citta). But the eight samāpatti cittas that are the basis of insight (vipassanā) are called "higher mind" (adhicitta). Indeed, it is more excellent and supreme than all mundane cittas. Moreover, the path and fruit cittas are also higher mind, but that is not intended here. Indeed, one who is training in that does not engage in sexual intercourse. The knowledge of ownership of actions (kammassakatāñāṇa) that proceeds in the manner of "there is giving, there is sacrifice," etc., is wisdom (paññā); but insight knowledge (vipassanāñāṇa), which discerns the characteristics of the three marks (tilakkhaṇa), is called "higher wisdom" (adhipaññā). Indeed, it is more excellent and supreme than all mundane wisdoms. Moreover, the path and fruit wisdoms are also higher wisdom, but that is not intended here. Indeed, one who is training in that does not engage in sexual intercourse.
Tāsu tīsu adhisīlasikkhā cārittavārittavasena duvidhampi sīlaṃ yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjamānena, tappaṭipakkhe kilese tadaṅgappahānavasena pajahantena sikkhitabbā. Adhicittasikkhā yathāvuttesu ārammaṇesu abhiyogavasena jhānappaṭipakkhānaṃ nīvaraṇagaṇānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ kurumānena sikkhitabbā. Adhipaññāsikkhā pana yathānurūpaṃ tadaṅgappahānasamucchedavasena sānusaye kilese samucchindantena sikkhitabbā. Tasmā suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanaṭṭhena mūlā ca sā sikkhitabbato sikkhā cāti mūlasikkhā, kammavacanicchāyaṃ ‘‘mūlasikkha’’nti vuttaṃ.
Among those three, higher morality (adhisīlasikkhā), which is of two kinds—morality of practice (cāritta) and morality of avoidance (vāritta)—should be trained in by one who practices according to the instruction and abandons the opposing defilements by means of temporary abandonment (tadaṅgappahāna). Higher mind (adhicittasikkhā) should be trained in by one who, with diligence in the stated objects of meditation, makes a suppression-abandonment (vikkhambhanappahāna) of the groups of hindrances that oppose jhāna. Higher wisdom (adhipaññāsikkhā), however, should be trained in by one who uproots the latent defilements by means of appropriate temporary and eradicative abandonment (samucchedappahāna). Therefore, because it is fundamental in establishing one firmly and because it is a training that should be undertaken, it is called fundamental training (mūlasikkhā). In the language of the act of ordination (kammavācanā), it is called "mūlasikkha".
samāsato. Samaggena saṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampannoti bhikkhu. Tattha sabbantimena pariyāyena pañcavaggakaraṇīye kamme yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, tesaṃ āgatattā, chandārahānaṃ chandassa āhaṭattā, sammukhībhūtānañca appaṭikkosanato ekasmiṃ kamme samaggabhāvaṃ upagatena saṅghena tīhi anussāvanāhi ekāya ñattiyā kātabbakammasaṅkhātena ñatticatutthena dhammikena vinayakammena vatthuñattianussāvanasīmāparisāsampattisampannattā akopetabbataṃ, appaṭikkositabbataṃ upagatena ṭhānārahena kāraṇārahena satthusāsanārahena upasampanno nāma, uparibhāvaṃ samāpanno pattoti attho. Bhikkhubhāvo hi uparibhāvo. Tañcesa yathāvuttena kammena samāpannattā ‘‘upasampanno’’ti vuccati, tenabhikkhunā. Ūnapañcavassatāya navako, tenanavakenaadhunā pabbajitena, acirapabbajitenāti vuttaṃ hoti.Ādoti ādimhiyevāti attho, ādito paṭṭhāyāti vā. Api ca thero ‘‘ādo’’ti vacanena saddhāpabbajitānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ ālasiyadosena, appaṭipajjantānaṃ aññāṇadosena ca aññathā paṭipajjantānaṃ saṃvegaṃ janeti. Kathaṃ? Atidullabhaṃ khaṇaṃ samavāyaṃ paṭilabhitvā taṅkhaṇaṃ na kusītena vā niratthakakathāpasutena vā vītināmetabbaṃ, kiṃ kātabbaṃ? Ādito paṭṭhāya nirantarameva tīsu sikkhāsu ādaro janetabboti.
Samāsato. Upasampanno (bhikkhu) means one who is ordained by the Sangha that is in agreement, through a motion and fourfold declaration (ñatticatuttha), and is worthy of the status and not subject to invalidation. Here, by the very last method, in the act that should be performed by a group of five, as many bhikkhus as are qualified for the act, because they have come, because the consent of those who deserve consent has been brought, and because those who are present do not object, the Sangha having attained a state of agreement in one act, through the motion and fourfold declaration—that is, by a legitimate act of the Vinaya that is regarded as a formal act—because the constituents of the valid object, motion, declaration, boundary, and assembly are complete, he is called "upasampanno", having attained the higher state, because he is worthy of not being invalidated, worthy of not being objected to, worthy of the teaching of the Teacher. The state of being a bhikkhu is indeed a higher state. And because he is endowed with that through the act stated, he is called "upasampanno"; by that bhikkhunā. He is new because he is less than five years ordained; by that navakena, it is said that he is newly gone forth, recently ordained. Ādo, in the very beginning, this is the meaning; or from the beginning onwards. Moreover, the Elder, with the word "ādo", generates a sense of urgency in sons of good families who have gone forth through faith, due to the fault of laziness, due to the fault of ignorance in those who do not practice, and in those who practice wrongly. How? Having obtained the very rare opportunity and coincidence, that moment should not be spent lazily or indulging in meaningless talk; what should be done? From the beginning onwards, diligence should be generated continuously in the three trainings.
‘‘Sā māgadhī mūlabhāsā, narā yāyādikappikā;
"That Magadhi is the root language, spoken by people in the earliest epoch;
Brahmās and those free from distorted speech, and the Buddhas, too, proclaim (in it)."
mūlabhāsāyāti māgadhamūlāya bhāsāya, sabhāvaniruttiyā bhāsāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Sikkhitunti uggaṇhituṃ.
Mūlabhāsāya, by the Magadhi root language, it is said, by the language of natural expression (sabhāvanirutti). Sikkhituṃ, to learn.
1. Pārājikaniddesavaṇṇanā
1. Pārājikaniddesavaṇṇanā
1.Idāni sabbasikkhānaṃ pana mūlabhūtattā adhisīlasikkhāva paṭhamaṃ vuttā, tatrāpi mahāsāvajjattā, mūlacchejjavasena pavattanato ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ pārājikaṃ jānitabbanti dassento‘‘saṃ nimitta’’ntyādimāha. Tattha maggattaye saṃ nimittaṃ pavesanto bhikkhu cutoti attho.Saṃ nimittanti attano aṅgajātaṃ, sabbantimena paricchedena ekatilabījamattampi attano aṅgajātanti vuttaṃ hoti.Bhikkhūti anikkhittasikkho.Maggattayeti ettha manussāmanussatiracchānagatānaṃ vasena tisso itthiyo, tayo ubhatobyañjanakā, tayo paṇḍakā, tayo purisāti pārājikavatthubhūtānaṃ nimittānaṃ nissayā dvādasa sattā honti. Tesaṃ vaccapassāvamukhamaggavasena tayo maggā. Tattha manussitthiyā tayo, amanussitthiyā tayo, tiracchānagatitthiyā tayoti nava, tathā manussubhatobyañjanakādīnaṃ. Manussapaṇḍakādīnaṃ pana vaccamukhamaggavasena dve dveti cha, tathā manussapurisādīnanti sabbesaṃ vasena tiṃsa maggā honti. Te sabbe pariggahetvā idha ‘‘maggattaye’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ maggattaye, dvādasannaṃ sattānaṃ tīsu maggesu yattha katthaci maggeti attho.Cutoti sakkattā vā brahmattā vā cutasatto viya sāsanato cuto hoti, pārājiko hotīti attho.
1.Now, because the training in higher morality (adhisīlasikkhā) is the root of all trainings, it is stated first; and even within that, showing that the pārājika should be known first of all because of being the heaviest offense and because of its operation as a root-severing offense, he says "saṃ nimitta", etc. Therein, saṃ nimittaṃ means that a bhikkhu is cut off when he inserts into the three paths. Saṃ nimittaṃ, his sexual organ, even a sesame seed’s worth of his sexual organ, by the very last reckoning, this is said as his own sexual organ. Bhikkhū, one who has not renounced the training. Maggattaye, here, in terms of human, non-human, and animal states, there are three females, three hermaphrodites, three eunuchs, three males—thus, depending on the signs (nimitta), the beings that constitute the object of a pārājika offense are twelve. Their three paths are in terms of the path of feces, urine, and mouth. Therein, three of the human female, three of the non-human female, three of the animal female, thus nine; likewise of the human hermaphrodite, etc. But of the human eunuch, etc., two each in terms of the paths of feces and mouth, thus six; likewise of the human male, etc.—thus, in terms of all, there are thirty paths. Having included all those, "maggattaye" is said here; in that three paths, in the three paths of the twelve beings, in whichever path, this is the meaning. Cuto, like a being fallen from Sakka-hood or Brahma-hood, he is fallen from the Dispensation, meaning he has committed a pārājika offense.
‘‘pavesanā’’tyādi vuttaṃ. Tassattho – yo bhikkhu pavesanaṭṭhitauddharaṇapaviṭṭhakkhaṇesu aññataraṃ khaṇaṃcepi sādiyaṃsādiyanto sacepi tasmiṃ khaṇe sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpento,cutopārājiko hoti. Yo pana sabbaso asādiyanto āsīvisamukhaṃ aṅgārakāsuṃ paviṭṭhaṃ viya ca maññati, so nipparādho hoti. Ettha panaṭhitaṃnāma sukkavissaṭṭhisamayappattaṃ. Paṭhamapārājikaṃ.
"pavesanā" etc. is said. Its meaning is: whichever bhikkhu, in the moments of insertion, dwelling, extraction, or entering, cepi sādiyaṃ, even if he approves, even if in that moment he establishes a mind of enjoyment, cuto, he has committed a pārājika offense. But whoever does not approve at all, and thinks of it as if the mouth of a venomous snake or having entered a pit of coals, he is without offense. Here, ṭhitaṃ means having reached the time of ejaculation. The first pārājika offense.
2-7.Idāni dutiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘adinnaṃ mānusaṃ bhaṇḍa’’ntyādimāha. Tattha yo bhikkhu adinnaṃ mānusaṃ garukaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pañcavīsāvahāresu yena kenaci avahārena ādiyanto cuto bhaveti sambandho.Adinnanti yaṃ kiñci parapariggahitaṃ sassāmikaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, taṃ tehi sāmikehi kāyena vā vācāya vā na dinnanti adinnaṃ, anissaṭṭhaṃ apariccattaṃ rakkhitaṃ gopitaṃ mamāyitaṃ parapariggahitaṃ. Manussassa idantimānusaṃ,manussasantakaṃ, ‘‘bhaṇḍa’’ntiminā tulyādhikaraṇaṃ.Theyyāyekenāti theyyāya ekena, ekena avahārenāti attho. Liṅgabhedaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Theyyā kenacī’’ti vā pāṭho. Tatthathenoti coro, thenassa bhāvotheyyā,karaṇatthe cetaṃ paccattavacanaṃ, tasmā kenaci theyyena avahārenāti attho.Ādiyanti ādiyanto gaṇhanto.Pañcavīsāvahāresūti pañcapañcake samodhānetvā pañcavīsati avahārā. Tatthapañcapañcakānināma nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ ekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃ sāhatthikapañcakaṃ pubbappayogapañcakaṃ theyyāvahārapañcakanti.
2-7.Now, to show the second, he says "adinnaṃ mānusaṃ bhaṇḍa", etc. Therein, the connection is that whichever bhikkhu is appropriating ungiven human property of significant value by any means of appropriation, he is cut off. Adinnaṃ, whatever property that is possessed by another, that belongs to an owner, that is not given by those owners through body or speech, is ungiven—not released, not relinquished, guarded, protected, clung to as "mine", possessed by another. Mānusaṃ, belonging to a human; "bhaṇḍa" is in apposition to it. Theyyāyekenā, by one means of theft (theyya), by one means of appropriation, this is the meaning. It is said with a difference in gender. Or, "Theyyā kenacī" is also a reading. Therein, theno means thief; the state of a thief is theyyā; this is a neuter noun in the sense of instrument; therefore, by any means of theft, this is the meaning. Ādiyaṃ, appropriating, taking. Pañcavīsāvahāresu, twenty-five means of appropriation by combining five sets of five. Therein, pañcapañcakāni means the fivefold division of various items, the fivefold division of single items, the fivefold division of personal appropriation, the fivefold division of prior instigation, and the fivefold division of theft.
Tattha saviññāṇakāviññāṇakamissakabhaṇḍavasena nānābhaṇḍapañcakaṃ, saviññāṇakabhaṇḍavasena ekabhaṇḍapañcakaṃ. Tattha nānābhaṇḍavasena tāva evaṃ veditabbo – yo ārāmaṃ abhiyuñjati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Sāmikassa vimatiṃ uppādeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Sāmiko ‘‘na mayhaṃ bhavissatī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, āpatti pārājikassa. Aññassa bhaṇḍaṃ haranto sīse bhāraṃ theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Khandhaṃ oropeti, āpatti pārājikassa. Upanikkhittaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘dehi me bhaṇḍa’’nti vuccamāno ‘‘nāhaṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti bhaṇati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Sāmikassa vimatiṃ uppādeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Sāmiko ‘‘na mayhaṃ dassatī’’ti dhuraṃ nikkhipati, āpatti pārājikassa. ‘‘Sahabhaṇḍahārakaṃ nessāmī’’ti paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ saṅkāmeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Dutiyaṃ pādaṃ saṅkāmeti, āpatti pārājikassa. Thalaṭṭhaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ theyyacitto āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassa. Ayamettha nānābhaṇḍavasena yojanā. Ekabhaṇḍavasena pana sassāmikaṃ dāsaṃ vā tiracchānaṃ vā yathāvuttena abhiyogādinā nayena ādiyati vā harati vā avaharati vā iriyāpathaṃ kopeti vā ṭhānā cāveti vāti. Ayamettha ekabhaṇḍavasena yojanā.
Therein, the fivefold division of various items in terms of animate, inanimate, and mixed items; the fivefold division of single items in terms of animate items. Therein, the fivefold division of various items should be understood thus: whoever assaults a park, he incurs an offense of wrong-doing (dukkata). He causes doubt in the owner, he incurs an offense of serious misconduct (thullaccaya). The owner relinquishes the responsibility, thinking "it will not be mine", he incurs an offense of expulsion (pārājika). While stealing another’s property, he touches a load on his head with a mind of theft, he incurs an offense of wrong-doing. He shakes it, he incurs an offense of serious misconduct. He removes the burden from his shoulder, he incurs an offense of expulsion. Being told "give me the property" regarding property deposited in his care, he says "I do not take it", he incurs an offense of wrong-doing. He causes doubt in the owner, he incurs an offense of serious misconduct. The owner relinquishes the responsibility, thinking "he will not give it to me", he incurs an offense of expulsion. Thinking "I will carry away the property along with its container", he moves one foot first, he incurs an offense of serious misconduct. He moves the second foot, he incurs an offense of expulsion. While on land, he touches property with a mind of theft, he incurs an offense of wrong-doing. He shakes it, he incurs an offense of serious misconduct. He moves it from its place, he incurs an offense of expulsion. Here, this is the application in terms of various items. But in terms of a single item, he appropriates, steals, carries away, disturbs the posture, or moves from its place a slave or an animal belonging to an owner, by the method of assault, etc., as stated above. Here, this is the application in terms of a single item.
sāhatthikonāma parassa bhaṇḍaṃ sahatthā avaharati.Āṇattikonāma ‘‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpeti.Nissaggiyonāma antosuṅkaghāte ṭhito bahisuṅkaghātaṃ pāteti, āpatti pārājikassa.Atthasādhakonāma ‘‘asukaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ yadā sakkosi, tadā avaharā’’ti āṇāpeti. Tattha sace paro anantarāyiko hutvā taṃ avaharati, āṇāpako āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājiko hoti, avahārako pana avahaṭakāle, ayaṃ atthasādhako.Dhuranikkhepopana upanikkhittabhaṇḍavasena veditabboti idaṃ sāhatthikapañcakaṃ.
Sāhatthiko means one who appropriates another’s property with his own hand. Āṇattiko means one who orders another, saying "appropriate the property of so-and-so". Nissaggiyo means one who, standing inside the customs barrier, lets it fall outside the customs barrier, he incurs an offense of expulsion. Atthasādhako means one who orders, saying "when you are able, appropriate such-and-such property". Therein, if the other, without interruption, appropriates it, the one who ordered incurs an offense of expulsion at the very moment of the order; but the one who appropriates does so at the time of the appropriation; this is the means of accomplishing a goal (atthasādhako). Dhuranikkhepo, however, should be understood in terms of deposited property; this is the fivefold division of personal appropriation.
pubbappayogoveditabbo, ṭhānācāvanavasenasahappayogo. Saṃvidhāvahāronāma sambahulā bhikkhū ‘‘amukaṃ nāma gehaṃ gantvā, chadanaṃ vā bhinditvā, sandhiṃ vā chinditvā bhaṇḍaṃ harissāmā’’ti saṃvidahitvā gacchanti, tesu eko bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, tassuddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājikaṃ.Saṅketakammaṃnāma sañjānanakammaṃ kālaparicchedavasena saññākaraṇaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘purebhattaṃ avaharā’’ti vutte ajja vā purebhattaṃ avaharatu, sve vā anāgate saṃvacchare vā, natthi visaṅketo, saṅketakārakassa āṇattikkhaṇe, itarassa ṭhānā cāvaneti evaṃ āpatti ubhinnaṃ pārājikassa.Nimittakammaṃnāma saññuppādanatthaṃ kassaci nimittassa karaṇaṃ akkhinikhaṇanahatthālaṅghanapāṇippahāraaṅguliphoṭanagīvunnāmanaukkāsanādinā anekappakāraṃ. Avahārako āṇāpakena yaṃ nimittasaññaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘eta’’nti maññamāno tameva avaharati, ubhinnaṃ pārājikaṃ. Yaṃ ‘‘avaharā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ ‘‘eta’’nti maññamāno aññaṃ tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhapitaṃ avaharati, mūlaṭṭhassa anāpatti. Idaṃ pubbappayogapañcakaṃ.
Pubbappayogo should be understood; sahappayogo in terms of moving from its place. Saṃvidhāvahāro means several bhikkhus conspire, saying "having gone to such-and-such house, having broken the roof or cut through the wall, we will steal property"; among them, one appropriates the property; all incur an offense of expulsion upon the removal of that property. Saṅketakammaṃ means an act of pre-arrangement, making an agreement with a time limit. Here, when it is said "appropriate before the meal", whether he appropriates it today before the meal, or tomorrow, or in a future year, there is no uncertainty; for the one who makes the agreement, at the moment of the order; for the other, upon moving it from its place—thus both incur an offense of expulsion. Nimittakammaṃ means making a sign for the purpose of conveying a meaning, in many ways, by winking, touching the hand, striking the palm, snapping the fingers, raising the neck, coughing, etc. The one who appropriates appropriates that very thing that the one who ordered meant as "this", thinking "this is it"; both incur an offense of expulsion. Thinking "this is it" about what was said as "appropriate", he appropriates something else placed in that very place; the original person incurs no offense. This is the fivefold division of prior instigation.
theyyāvahāro. Yo santajjetvā sayaṃ dassetvā tesaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhāti, yo vā attano pattabalito ca adhikaṃ balakkārena gaṇhāti rājarājamahāmattādayo viya, tassevaṃ gaṇhato avahāropasayhāvahāro. Parikappetvā gaṇhato panāvahāroparikappāvahāro. So duvidho bhaṇḍokāsaparikappavasena. Tatra yo ‘‘sāṭako ce, gaṇhissāmi, suttaṃ ce, na gaṇhissāmī’’ti parikappetvā andhakāre pasibbakaṃ gaṇhāti, tatra sāṭako ce, uddhāreyeva pārājikaṃ, suttaṃ ce hoti, rakkhati. Ayaṃbhaṇḍaparikapponāma. Yo ṭhānaṃ parikappetvā bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhāti, tassa taṃ parikappitaparicchedaṃ atikkantamatte pārājikaṃ. Ayaṃokāsaparikapponāma. Evamimesaṃ dvinnaṃ parikappānaṃ vasena parikappetvā gaṇhato avahāro parikappāvahāro. Paṭicchādetvā parassa bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhato avahāropaṭicchannāvahāronāma. Kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā avaharaṇaṃkusāvahāro. Yo kusaṃ pātetvā cīvare bhājiyamāne attano koṭṭhāsassa samīpe ṭhitaṃ appagghataraṃ vā mahagghataraṃ vā samasamaṃ vā parassa koṭṭhāsaṃ disvā sace paṭhamataraṃ parakoṭṭhāsato kusadaṇḍakaṃ uddharati, attano koṭṭhāse pātetukāmatāya uddhāre rakkhati, pātanepi rakkhati, attano koṭṭhāsato pana kusadaṇḍaṃ uddharati, uddhāre rakkhati, taṃ uddharitvā parakoṭṭhāse pātentassa hatthato muttamatte pārājikaṃ. Ayaṃ kusāvahāro nāmāti imesu pañcavīsāvahāresu yena kenaci avahārena gaṇhanto pārājiko bhaveti attho.
Garukanti pañcamāsakaṃ. Vīsatimāsako hi kahāpaṇo, kahāpaṇassa catuttho bhāgo pādo nāma, tasmā pañcamāsakaṃ vā pādaṃ vā garukanti veditabbaṃ. Tattha ‘‘cattāro vīhayo guñjā, dve guñjā māsako bhave’’ti vacanato vīhivasena cattālīsa vīhayo dasa guñjā pañcamāsakoti veditabbo. Yaṃ pana sāmaṇerasikkhāyaṃ ‘‘vīsativīhī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ neva pāḷiyaṃ, na aṭṭhakathāyaṃ atthi, vīmaṃsitabbametaṃ. Dutiyapārājikaṃ.
8.Idāni tatiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘manussapāṇaṃ pāṇo’’tyādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo bhikkhu ‘‘manussapāṇo’’ iti jānanto vadhakacittena manussapāṇaṃ jīvitā viyojeti, so bhikkhu sāsanā pārājiko hotīti samudāyattho.
Manussapāṇanti mātukucchismiṃ paṭisandhicittena sahuppannaṃ atiparittaṃ kalalarūpaṃ ādiṃ katvā pakatiyā vīsavassasatāyukassa sattassa yāva maraṇakālā etthantare anupubbena vuddhippatto attabhāvo, eso manussapāṇo nāma, evarūpaṃ manussapāṇanti attho.Pāṇoti jānanti ‘‘pāṇo’’ iti jānanto ‘‘taṃ jīvitā voropemī’’ti jānanto.Vadhakacetasāti vadhakacittena, itthambhūte karaṇavacanaṃ, vadhakacitto hutvā maraṇādhippāyo hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti.Jīvitāti jīvitindriyato.Yoti aniyamavacanaṃ.Soti etena niyamanaṃ veditabbaṃ.Viyojetīti vuttappakāraṃ manussaviggahaṃ kalalakālepi tāpanamaddanehi vā bhesajjasampadānena vā tato vā uddhampi tadanurūpena upakkamena jīvitā viyojetīti attho.Sāsanāti parāpubbajidhātuppayoge nissakkavacanaṃ, tena satthusāsanatoti attho.Parājitoti parājayamāpanno. Hotīti pāṭhaseso. Tatiyapārājikaṃ.
9.Idāni catutthaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘jhānādibheda’’ntyādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo bhikkhu aññāpadesañca adhimānañca vajjetvā hadaye asantaṃ jhānādibhedaṃ dhammaṃ manussajātikassa sattassa vadeyya, tasmiṃ khaṇe ñāte so tato sāsanā pārājiko eva hotīti attho.
Jhānādibhedanti ‘‘jhānaṃ vimokkho samādhi samāpatti ñāṇadassanaṃ maggabhāvanā phalasacchikiriyā kilesappahānaṃ vinīvaraṇatā cittassa suññāgāre abhiratī’’ti (pārā. 198) evaṃ vuttaṃ jhānādibhedaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ.Hadayeti citte.Asantanti asaṃvijjamānaṃ.Aññāpadesanti ‘‘yo te vihāre vasi, so bhikkhu paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī’’tiādinā nayena aññāpadesaṃ vajjetvāti attho.Vināti vajjanatthe nipāto, tassa vajjetvāti attho.Adhimānanti ‘‘adhigatā mayā’’ti evaṃ uppannaṃ mānanti attho. Adhigato mānoti viggaho, taṃ adhimānaṃ vajjetvāti attho.Manussajātissāti manussajātikassa, na devabrahmādīsu aññatarassāti attho.Vadeyyāti āroceyya.Ñātakkhaṇeti ñāte khaṇeti chedo, tasmiṃ tenārocitakkhaṇe manussajātikena ñāteti attho.Tenāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ, tato sāsanato pārājikoti attho. Catutthapārājikaṃ.
Pārājikaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
2. Garukāpattiniddesavaṇṇanā
10.Idāni saṅghādisesaṃ pakāsetuṃ‘‘mocetukāmacittenā’’tiādimāraddhaṃ. Tattha mocetuṃ kāmetīti mocetukāmaṃ, mocetukāmañca taṃ cittañcātimocetukāmacittaṃ, tena, mocanassādacittenāti attho. Ekādasannañhi rāgānaṃ ekena mocanassādena āpatti hotīti vuttaṃ hoti.
mocanassādacetanāya cetento ceva assādento ca upakkamati, muccati, saṅghādiseso, na muccati ce, thullaccayaṃ. Sace pana sayanakāle rāgapariyuṭṭhito hutvā ūrunā vā muṭṭhinā vā aṅgajātaṃ gāḷhaṃ pīḷetvā mocanatthāya saussāho supati, supantassa cassa asuci muccati, saṅghādiseso.Muccanassādeattano dhammatāya muccamānaṃ assādeti, na upakkamati, muccati, anāpatti.Muttassādeattano dhammatāya mutte ṭhānā cute asucimhi pacchā assādentassa vinā upakkamena muccati, anāpatti.Methunassādemethunarāgena mātugāmaṃ gaṇhāti, tena asuci muccati, anāpatti, dukkaṭaṃ pana āpajjati.Phassassādoduvidho ajjhattiko bāhiro cāti. Tattha attano nimittaṃ ‘‘thaddhaṃ, mudukanti jānissāmī’’ti vā lolabhāvena vā kīḷāpayato asuci muccati, anāpatti. Bāhiraphassassāde pana kāyasaṃsaggarāgena itthiṃ phusato, āliṅgato ca asuci muccati, anāpatti, kāyasaṃsaggasaṅghādisesaṃ pana āpajjati.
Kaṇḍūvanassādedaddukacchupiḷakapāṇakādīnaṃ aññatarena khajjamānaṃ nimittaṃ kaṇḍūvanassādena kaṇḍūvato asuci muccati, anāpatti.Dassanassādeitthiyā anokāsaṃ upanijjhāyato asuci muccati, anāpatti, dukkaṭaṃ pana hoti.Nisajjassādemātugāmena saddhiṃ raho nisinnassa muttepi anāpatti, rahonisajjāpatti pana hoti.Vācassādemātugāmaṃ methunappaṭisaṃyuttāhi vācāhi obhāsantassa muttepi anāpatti, duṭṭhullavācāsaṅghādisesaṃ pana āpajjati.Gehasitapememātādīnaṃ mātādipemena āliṅganādiṃ karontassa muttepi anāpatti.Vanabhaṅgaṃsanthavakaraṇatthāya itthiyā pesitapupphādivanabhaṅgasaññitaṃ paṇṇākāraṃ ‘‘itthannāmāya imaṃ pesita’’nti assādena āmasantassa muttepi anāpattīti. Evametesu mocanassādena āpatti hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘mocetu…pe… nā’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā mocetukāmaṃ cittaṃ yassa soyaṃmocetukāmacitto,tena, itthambhūte karaṇavacanaṃ, mocetukāmacitto hutvāti attho.
Upakkammāti hatthādīsu yena kenaci nimitte upakkamitvāti attho.Vimocayanti yaṃ antamaso ekā khuddakamakkhikā piveyya, tattakampi vimocentoti attho.Sukkanti nīlapītalohitodātatakkateladakakhīradadhisappivaṇṇasaṅkhātesu dasavidhesu sukkesu yaṃ kiñci sukkaṃ.Aññatra supināti yā supinante sukkavissaṭṭhi hoti, taṃ ṭhapetvāti attho.Samaṇoti yo koci upasampanno.Garukanti saṅghādisesaṃ.Phuseti āpajjeyyāti attho. Cetanā upakkamo muccananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgānīti. Sukkavissaṭṭhisikkhāpadaṃ.
11.Idāni kāyasaṃsaggaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggarāgenā’’tiādimāraddhaṃ. Bhikkhu manussitthiyā manussitthisaññī hutvā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena upakkamitvā manussitthiṃ parāmasanto saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjeyyāti yojanā. Tatthakāyasaṃsaggarāgenāti hatthaggahaṇādikāyasamphassena rāgena kāyamissarāgena.Manussitthinti tadahujātampi jīvamānakamanussitthiṃ.Parāmasanti parāmasanto, itthīti saññā itthisaññā, sā assa atthītiitthisaññī,itthisaññī hutvāti attho. Manussitthī, itthisaññitā, kāyasaṃsaggarāgo, tena rāgena vāyāmo, hatthaggāhādisamāpajjananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadaṃ.
12.Idāni duṭṭhullaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘duṭṭhullavācassādenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthaduṭṭhullavācassādenāti vaccamaggapassāvamaggamethunadhammappaṭisaṃyuttavācassādarāgena.Maggaṃ vārabbha methunanti vaccamaggapassāvamaggānaṃ aññataraṃ maggaṃ vā methunaṃ vā ārabbhāti attho.Obhāsantoti avabhāsanto.Manussitthinti viññuṃ paṭibalaṃ subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ duṭṭhullāduṭṭhullaṃ sallakkhaṇasamatthaṃ manussitthiṃ.Suṇamānanti suṇantiṃ. Iminā paṭibalāyapi itthiyā aviññattipathe ṭhitāya dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocentassa duṭṭhullavācāpatti na hotīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Manussitthī, itthisaññitā, duṭṭhullavācassādarāgo, tena rāgena obhāsanaṃ, taṅkhaṇavijānananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Duṭṭhullavācassādasikkhāpadaṃ.
13.Idāni attakāmapāricariyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘vaṇṇa’’ntyādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yo bhikkhu attano kāmapāricariyāya vaṇṇaṃ vatvā methunarāgena itthiṃ methunaṃ yācamāno garuṃ phuseti sambandho.Vaṇṇaṃ vatvāti guṇaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsetvā.Attanokāmapāricariyāyāti methunadhammasaṅkhātena kāmena pāricariyā kāmapāricariyā, attano atthāya kāmapāricariyā attanokāmapāricariyā, aluttasamāsoyaṃ. Atha vā attanoti katvatthe sāmivacanaṃ, attano kāmitā icchitāti attanokāmā, sayaṃ methunarāgavasena patthitāti attho, attanokāmā ca sā pāricariyā cāti attanokāmapāricariyā, tāyaattanokāmapāricariyāya,‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhagini, pāricariyānaṃ, yā mādisaṃ sīlavantaṃ kalyāṇadhammaṃ brahmacāriṃ etena dhammena paricareyyā’’ti evaṃ vaṇṇaṃ vatvāti attho. Yācadhātuno dvikammikattā‘‘itthiṃ methunaṃ yācamāno’’ti vuttaṃ. Tatthaitthinti duṭṭhullobhāsane vuttappakāraṃ itthiṃ. Manussitthī, itthisaññitā, attakāmapāricariyāya rāgo, tena rāgena vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ, taṅkhaṇavijānananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Attakāmapāricariyasikkhāpadaṃ.
14.Idāni sañcarittaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sandesa’’ntyādimāraddhaṃ. Tattha bhikkhu purisassa vā sandesaṃ, itthiyā vā sandesaṃ paṭiggahetvā vīmaṃsitvā paccāharanto garukaṃ phuseti sambandho. Tatthasandesanti ‘‘gaccha, bhante, itthannāmaṃ māturakkhitaṃ brūhi ‘hohi kira itthannāmassa bhariyā dhanakkītā’’ti (pārā. 305) evaṃ vuttaṃ purisassa sāsanaṃ, ‘‘gaccha, bhante, itthannāmaṃ purisaṃ brūhi ‘ahaṃ tassa bhariyā bhavissāmī’’ti (pārā. 326-327 thokaṃ visadisaṃ) evaṃ vuttaṃ itthiyā sāsanaṃ.Paṭiggaṇhitvāti ‘‘sādhu upāsakā’’ti vā ‘‘hotū’’ti vā ‘‘ārocessāmī’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena vacībhedaṃ katvā vā sīsakampanādīhi vā paṭiggaṇhitvā sampaṭicchitvāti attho.Vīmaṃsitvāti vuttappakārena sāsanaṃ gahetvā purisassa vā itthiyā vā tesaṃ avassārocanakānaṃ mātāpitābhātābhaginiādīnaṃ vā ārocetvāti attho.Haraṃpaccāti ettha ‘‘paccāhara’’nti vattabbe chandahānibhayā hara-saddaṃ pubbanipātaṃ katvā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yattha pahitena tattha gantvā tena ārocitā sā itthī ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchatu vā paṭikkhipatu vā lajjāya vā tuṇhī hotu, puna āgantvā tassa purisassa haranto ettāvatā imāya paṭiggahaṇārocanappaccāharaṇasaṅkhātāya tivaṅgasampattiyā so bhikkhu saṅghādisesaṃ āpajjeyyāti attho. Tesaṃ manussajātikatā, alaṃvacanīyatā, paṭiggaṇhanavīmaṃsanappaccāharaṇānīti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Sañcarittasikkhāpadaṃ.
14. Now, to show "carrying messages," the passage beginning with "sandesa" is introduced. Here, the connection is that a bhikkhu, having received a message for a man or a woman, investigates it and then delivers it, touching upon a serious offense. In this context, sandesa means the instruction given to a man, such as, "Go, venerable sir, tell so-and-so, who is protected by her mother, 'become the wife, bought with wealth, of so-and-so'" (pārā. 305); or the instruction given to a woman, such as, "Go, venerable sir, tell so-and-so man, 'I will become his wife'" (pārā. 326-327, slightly different). Paṭiggaṇhitvā means having accepted, either by making a verbal agreement such as "Very well, laymen," or "Let it be," or "I will inform them," or by some other expression, or by nodding the head, etc., it means having agreed, having consented. Vīmaṃsitvā means having taken the message in the manner described, having informed either the man or the woman, or their mothers, fathers, brothers, sisters, etc., who must necessarily be informed. Haraṃpaccā—here, it should have been "paccāhara," but to avoid loss of meter, the word "hara" is placed first. It should be understood that having gone to the place where the message was sent, whether the woman informed by him agrees with "sādhu" and consents, or refuses, or remains silent out of shyness, and then returning and delivering it to that man, to this extent, through the accomplishment of the three factors consisting of acceptance, informing, and delivering, that bhikkhu incurs a saṅghādisesa offense. Their being human beings, being capable of understanding speech, accepting, investigating, and delivering—these are the five factors here. This is the sañcaritta-sikkhāpada.
15.Idāni amūlakaṃ pakāsetuṃ‘‘cāvetukāmo’’tiādimāraddhaṃ. Cāvetukāmo bhikkhu amūlantimavatthunā aññaṃ suṇamānaṃ bhikkhuṃ codento vā codāpento vā garuṃ phuseti sambandho. Tatthacāvetukāmoti brahmacariyā cāvetukāmo.Codentoti ‘‘tvaṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannosi, assamaṇosi, asakyaputtiyosī’’tiādīhi vacanehi sayaṃ codentoti attho. Evaṃ codentassa vācāya vācāya saṅghādiseso.Amūlantimavatthunāti yaṃ codakena cuditakamhi puggale adiṭṭhaṃ asutaṃ aparisaṅkitaṃ, idaṃ etesaṃ dassanasavanaparisaṅkitasaṅkhātānaṃ mūlānaṃ abhāvato nāssa mūlanti amūlaṃ, antimaṃ vatthu yassa pārājikassa tadidaṃ antimavatthu, amūlañca taṃ antimavatthu ceti amūlantimavatthu, tena amūlantimavatthunā, bhikkhuno anurūpesu ekūnavīsatiyā pārājikesu aññatarenāti attho.Codāpayanti codāpayanto, tassa samīpe ṭhatvā aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ āṇāpetvā codāpento tassa āṇattassa vācāya vācāya garuṃ phuseti attho.Suṇamānanti iminā parammukhā dūtena vā paṇṇena vā codentassa na ruhatīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Parammukhā pana sattahi āpattikkhandhehi vadantassa dukkaṭaṃ. Yaṃ codeti, tassa upasampannoti saṅkhyūpagamanaṃ, tasmiṃ suddhasaññitā, yena pārājikena codeti, tassa diṭṭhādivasena amūlakatā, cāvanādhippāyena sammukhā codanā, tassa taṅkhaṇavijānananti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Amūlakasikkhāpadaṃ.
15. Now, to explain the groundless charge, the passage beginning with "cāvetukāmo" is introduced. The connection is that a bhikkhu, intending to cause another bhikkhu to fall away, accuses or causes another to accuse a bhikkhu who is listening, with a groundless charge relating to a final matter, touching upon a serious offense. Here, cāvetukāmo means desiring to make (him) fall away from the holy life. Codento means accusing oneself with words such as, "You have committed a pārājika offense, you are not a Samaṇa, you are not a Sakyaputtiya." For each utterance of such accusation, there is a saṅghādisesa. Amūlantimavatthunā—that which the accuser has not seen, heard, or suspected in the accused person; because of the absence of these roots consisting of seeing, hearing, and suspecting, it has no root (mūla), hence it is "amūla"; the final matter of which is a pārājika, therefore it is "antimavatthu"; amūlaṃ ca taṃ antimavatthu ca iti amūlantimavatthu—with that groundless charge relating to a final matter, meaning with one of the nineteen pārājikas appropriate to a bhikkhu. Codāpayanti means causing to accuse, standing near him and ordering another bhikkhu to accuse; for each utterance of the one who is ordered, there is a serious offense. Suṇamānanti—by this, it is indicated that if he accuses through a messenger or a letter sent behind his back, it does not take effect. However, for one who speaks behind another's back with seven groups of offenses, there is a dukkata. The one whom he accuses must be ordained, the recognition of him, the perception of him as pure, the groundlessness of the pārājika with which he accuses him based on seeing, etc., the accusation made face to face with the intention of causing him to fall away, the immediate understanding of it—these are the five factors here. This is the amūlaka-sikkhāpada.
16.Idāni aññabhāgiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘lesamatta’’ntiādimāha. Tatthalesamattamupādāyāti jātināmagottaliṅgāpattipattacīvarūpajjhāyācariyasenāsanalesasaṅkhātesu dasasu lesesu yo tasmiṃ puggale dissati, taṃ lesamattaṃ upādāya nissāya bhikkhuṃ brahmacariyā cāvetukāmo amūlantimavatthunā suṇamānaṃ bhikkhuṃ codento garuṃ phuseti attho. Kathaṃ? Añño khattiyajātiko iminā codakena pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpajjanto diṭṭho hoti, so aññaṃ attano veriṃ khattiyajātikaṃ bhikkhuṃ passitvā taṃ khattiyajātilesaṃ gahetvā evaṃ ‘‘khattiyo mayā diṭṭho pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpajjanto, tvaṃ khattiyo pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ āpannosī’’ti vā ‘‘tvaṃ so khattiyo, nāñño, pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpannosī’’ti vā codeti, evaṃ nāmalesādayopi veditabbā. Aṅgāni panettha anantarasadisāni. Aññabhāgiyasikkhāpadaṃ.
16. Now, to show the "semblance of truth," he says the passage beginning with "lesamatta." Here, lesamattamupādāya means having seized upon, having relied on, a mere trace (lesamatta) among the ten traces—birth, name, clan, gender, offense, attainment, robe, preceptor, teacher, lodging—that is seen in that person, a bhikkhu, intending to make (him) fall away from the holy life, accuses a bhikkhu who is listening with a groundless charge relating to a final matter, he incurs a serious offense. How? Another person of the Khattiya caste is seen by this accuser committing a pārājika offense; seeing another bhikkhu of the Khattiya caste who is his enemy, seizing upon that trace of being of the Khattiya caste, he accuses him thus: "A Khattiya was seen by me committing a pārājika offense; you are a Khattiya, you have committed a pārājika offense," or "You are that Khattiya, not another, you have committed a pārājika offense." In this way, the traces of name, etc., should also be understood. The factors here are similar to the preceding ones. This is the aññabhāgiya-sikkhāpada.
Garukāpattiniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The explanation of the Garukāpatti Niddesa is complete.
3. Nissaggiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
3. Nissaggiya Niddesa Description
17.Idāni cīvaravidhiṃ dassetuṃ‘‘vikappana’’ntyādimuddhaṭaṃ. Yo bhikkhu akālacīvaraṃ vikappanañca adhiṭṭhānañca akatvā dasāhaṃ atikkāmeti, tassa bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ siyāti piṇḍattho. Tatthaakālacīvaranti akāle cīvaraṃ, khomaṃ kappāsikaṃ koseyyaṃ kambalaṃ sāṇaṃ bhaṅganti jātito cha cīvarāni, dukūlaṃ paṭṭuṇṇaṃ somārapaṭṭaṃ cīnapaṭṭaṃ iddhijaṃ devadinnanti imāni pana cha anulomacīvarāni. Tesu dukūlaṃ sāṇassa anulomaṃ vākamayattā. Paṭṭuṇṇādīni tīṇi koseyyassa anulomāni pāṇakehi katasuttamayattā. Iddhijādīni dvayāni khomādīnaṃ anulomāni tesamaññatarabhāvato. Imesaṃ channaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ akālacīvaraṃ.
17. Now, to explain the rule about robes, the passage beginning with "vikappana" is extracted. The condensed meaning is: whichever bhikkhu, without making a vikappana and without making an adhiṭṭhāna for an akālacīvara, keeps it for more than ten days, that bhikkhu has a nissaggiya offense. Here, akālacīvara means a robe at the wrong time. The six types of robes by origin are khoma (linen), kappāsika (cotton), koseyya (silk), kambala (wool), sāṇa (hemp), and bhaṅga (mixed fibers). However, these six anuloma robes are dukūla (fine cloth), paṭṭuṇṇa (wool cloth), somārapaṭṭa (Somāra silk), cīnapaṭṭa (Chinese silk), iddhija (made by psychic power), and devadinnā (divinely given). Among these, dukūla is the anuloma of sāṇa because it is made of bark fibers. Paṭṭuṇṇa and the following three are the anuloma of koseyya because they are made of thread made by insects. Iddhija and the other two are the anuloma of khoma and the others because they are one of those. Any one of these six robes is an akālacīvara.
Vikappanamadhiṭṭhānanti ettha pana vikappanūpagaṃ adhiṭṭhānūpagañca evaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āyāmena aṭṭhaṅgulaṃ sugataṅgulena caturaṅgulavitthataṃ pacchimacīvaraṃ vikappetu’’nti (mahāva. 358). Majjhimassa purisassa dīghaso dve vidatthiyo, tiriyaṃ vidatthi. Dve vikappanā sammukhāvikappanā ca parammukhāvikappanā ca. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Imaṃ cīvaraṃ tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’ti vattabbaṃ, ayaṃsammukhāvikappanā. ‘‘Mayhaṃ santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti, ekassa santike ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ tissassa bhikkhuno vikappemī’’ti vattabbaṃ, ayaṃ aparāpisammukhāvikappanā. Tena bhikkhunā ‘‘tissassa bhikkhuno santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti, ‘‘imaṃ cīvaraṃ tuyhaṃ vikappanatthāya dammī’’ti vattabbaṃ, tena vattabbo ‘‘ko te mitto vā sandiṭṭho vā sambhatto vā’’ti, tato itarena ‘‘tisso bhikkhū’’ti vattabbaṃ, puna tena ‘‘ahaṃ tissassa bhikkhuno dammī’’ti vattabbaṃ, ayaṃparammukhāvikappanā. ‘‘Tissassa bhikkhuno santakaṃ paribhuñja vā vissajjehi vā yathāpaccayaṃ vā karohī’’ti vutte paccuddhāro nāma hoti. Bahuke ‘‘imānī’’ti, ahatthapāse ‘‘etaṃ, etānī’’ti vā. Evaṃ vikappanañca akatvāti attho.
Vikappanamadhiṭṭhāna—here, vikappana-related and adhiṭṭhāna-related should be understood as follows. Here is the Pāḷi: "I allow, monks, the back-robe to be vikappita, eight fingers long by the Sugata's finger, four fingers wide" (mahāva. 358). For a man of medium size, two spans in length and a span across. There are two types of vikappanā: sammukhāvikappanā (vikappana in the presence) and parammukhāvikappanā (vikappana in the absence). How? One should say, "I vikappemi this robe to you"; this is sammukhāvikappanā. "Use, give away, or do with what you need what belongs to me," to someone in proximity, one should say, "I vikappemi this robe to Tissa bhikkhu"; this is also sammukhāvikappanā. That bhikkhu should say, "Use, give away, or do with what you need what belongs to Tissa bhikkhu." One should say, "I give this robe to you for the purpose of vikappana"; he should be asked, "Who is your friend, acquaintance, or associate?" Then the other should say, "Tissa bhikkhu." Again, he should say, "I give to Tissa bhikkhu"; this is parammukhāvikappanā. When it is said, "Use, give away, or do with what you need what belongs to Tissa bhikkhu," it is called paccuddhāra (revocation). "Imānī" for many, or "etaṃ, etānī" when within arm's reach. Thus, akatvā means without having made a vikappana.
Ticīvarassa pana pamāṇaṃ ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena sugatacīvarato ūnakaṃ vaṭṭati, lāmakaparicchedena saṅghāṭiyā, uttarāsaṅgassa ca dīghato muṭṭhipañcakaṃ, tiriyaṃ muṭṭhittikaṃ, antaravāsako dīghato muṭṭhipañcako, tiriyaṃ dvihatthopi aḍḍhateyyo vā vaṭṭati. Vuttappamāṇato adhikañca ūnakañca ‘‘parikkhāracoḷa’’nti adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ. Dve cīvarassa adhiṭṭhānā kāyena vā adhiṭṭheti, vācāya vā adhiṭṭheti. Ticīvaraṃ adhiṭṭhahantena rajitvā kappabinduṃ datvā purāṇasaṅghāṭiṃ ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paccuddharāmī’’ti paccuddharitvā navaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ hatthena gahetvā ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti cittena ābhogaṃ katvā kāyavikāraṃ karontena kāyena adhiṭṭhātabbā, idaṃ kāyena adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Taṃ yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena aphusantassa na vaṭṭati. Vācāya adhiṭṭhānaṃ pana vacībhedaṃ katvā vācāya adhiṭṭhātabbaṃ, sace hatthapāse ‘‘imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti, sace ahatthapāse ṭhapitaṭṭhānaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti vācā bhinditabbā. Esa nayo uttarāsaṅge, antaravāsake ca. Ticīvarādīni sabbāni ekato katvā ‘‘imāni cīvarāni parikkhāracoḷāni adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti adhiṭṭhātumpi vaṭṭatīti. Evaṃ adhiṭṭhānañca akatvāti attho.
As for the measurements of the three robes, with the highest limit, it is suitable if it is less than the Sugata's robe, and with the lowest limit, for the saṅghāṭi and the uttarāsaṅga, five fists in length and three fists across, the antaravāsaka is suitable at five fists in length and two or two and a half hands across. Whatever is more or less than the stated measurement should be designated "parikkhāracoḷa" (equipment cloth). There are two ways to make adhiṭṭhāna for two robes: one makes adhiṭṭhāna with the body or with speech. When making adhiṭṭhāna for the three robes, having dyed them, having applied the kappabindu, having revoked the old saṅghāṭi, "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ paccuddharāmi," and having taken the new saṅghāṭi in hand, "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī," making an effort with the mind, making a physical gesture, it must be made adhiṭṭhāna with the body; this is adhiṭṭhāna with the body. It is not suitable for one who does not touch it with any part of the body. As for adhiṭṭhāna with speech, it must be made adhiṭṭhāna with speech by making a verbal statement; if it is within arm's reach, "imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī"; if it is not within arm's reach, having noted the place where it is placed, the statement "etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī" must be uttered. This method applies to the uttarāsaṅga and the antaravāsaka as well. It is also suitable to gather all the three robes, etc., together and make adhiṭṭhāna, "imāni cīvarāni parikkhāracoḷāni adhiṭṭhāmī." Thus, akatvā means without having made an adhiṭṭhāna.
dasāhaṃ. Atimāpetīti atikkāmeti.Tassāti tassa bhikkhuno.Nissaggiyanti nissajjanaṃ nissaggiyaṃ, pubbabhāge kattabbassa vinayakammassetaṃ nāmaṃ, nissaggiyamassa atthīti nissaggiyaṃ, kiṃ taṃ? Pācittiyaṃ, taṃ atikkāmayato sahanissaggiyavinayakammaṃ pācittiyaṃ siyā, ayamettha attho. Taṃ panetaṃ cīvaraṃ yaṃ divasaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa yo aruṇo, so uppannadivasanissito, tasmā cīvaruppādadivasena saddhiṃ ekādase aruṇuggamane dasāhātikkamitaṃ hotīti. Cīvarassa attano santakatā, jātippamāṇayuttatā, chinnapalibodhabhāvo, atirekacīvaratā, dasāhātikkamoti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Paṭhamakathinasikkhāpadaṃ.
dasāhaṃ. Atimāpetī means exceeds. Tassā means of that bhikkhu. Nissaggiyanti—nissajjanaṃ nissaggiyaṃ; this is the name for the Vinaya procedure to be done in the preliminary stage. Nissaggiyamassa atthīti nissaggiyaṃ; what is that? A pācittiya. For one who exceeds it, there would be a pācittiya offense along with a sahanissaggiya Vinaya procedure; this is the meaning here. Moreover, that robe, on the day it arises, whatever dawn (aruṇa) there is, that dawn is dependent on the day of arising. Therefore, along with the arising of the robe, with the eleventh sunrise, the ten days are exceeded. The robe's belonging to oneself, being suitable in type and measurement, being free from impediments, being an extra robe, exceeding ten days—these are the five factors here. This is the first kathina-sikkhāpada.
18.Idāni dutiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘bhikkhusammutiyā’’tyādimāraddhaṃ. Yo bhikkhusammutiṃ vajjetvā kālañca vinā adhiṭṭhitaṃ ticīvaraṃ ekāhaṃ atikkamāpeti, tassa nissaggiyaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthabhikkhusammutiyāññatrāti yaṃ saṅgho gilānassa bhikkhuno ticīvarena vippavāsasammutiṃ deti, taṃ ṭhapetvā.Ticīvaramadhiṭṭhitanti karaṇatthe upayogavacanaṃ, tena ticīvarādhiṭṭhānanayena adhiṭṭhitesu saṅghāṭiādīsu yena kenaci cīvarena.Ekāhanti ekarattaṃ.Atimāpetīti vippavasati, viyutto vasatīti attho. Tassa aladdhasammutikassa bhikkhuno ekarattampi cīvarena vippavāsato nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ siyāti attho.Samayaṃ vināti cīvarakālaṃ vajjetvā. Adhiṭṭhitacīvaratā, anatthatakathinatā, aladdhasammutitā, rattivippavāsoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Dutiyakathinasikkhāpadaṃ.
18. Now, to explain the second, the passage beginning with "bhikkhusammutiyā" is introduced. The connection is that whichever bhikkhu, without a bhikkhusammuti and without the proper time, keeps an adhiṭṭhita ticīvara for one day, that bhikkhu incurs a nissaggiya offense. Here, bhikkhusammutiyāññatrā means except for the permission that the Sangha gives to a sick bhikkhu to be separated from the ticīvara. Ticīvaramadhiṭṭhitanti—the instrumental case is used in the sense of the instrument, thus, with whichever robe among the saṅghāṭi, etc., that has been made adhiṭṭhāna according to the method of ticīvara-adhiṭṭhāna. Ekāhanti—one night. Atimāpetīti—vipravasati, dwells separated, is the meaning. For that bhikkhu who has not obtained permission, by being separated from the robe even for one night, there is a nissaggiya pācittiya offense, is the meaning. Samayaṃ vinā means excluding the robe season. Having an adhiṭṭhita robe, not having the kathina spread, not having obtained permission, being separated overnight—these are the four factors here. This is the second kathina-sikkhāpada.
19.Idāni purāṇacīvaraṃ dassetuṃ‘‘aññātikā’’tyādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthaaññātikāti aññātikāya ‘‘paṭisaṅkhā yoniso’’tiādīsu viya, aññātikāya neva mātusambandhena na pitusambandhena sambaddhāyāti vuttaṃ hoti.Bhikkhuniyāti aṭṭhavācikakammena upasampannāya.Ākoṭāpetīti paharāpeti. Tanti nissaggiyaṃ pācittiyaṃ bhaveyyāti attho. Purāṇacīvaratā, upacāre ṭhatvā aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā āṇāpanaṃ, tassā dhovanādīni cāti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Purāṇacīvarasikkhāpadaṃ.
19. Now, to explain about the old robe, the passage beginning with "aññātikā" is introduced. Here, aññātikā—as in "paṭisaṅkhā yoniso," aññātikāya means not connected by maternal relationship, not connected by paternal relationship. Bhikkhuniyāti—by a bhikkhuni ordained with the eight vācika-kamma. Ākoṭāpetīti—causes to strike. The meaning is that there would be a nissaggiya pācittiya. Being an old robe, being within reach, ordering a non-relative bhikkhuni, and her washing, etc.—these are the three factors here. This is the purāṇacīvara-sikkhāpada.
20.Kiñci mūlakanti kiñci pābhataṃ.Cīvarādāneti cīvarassa ādāne cīvarappaṭiggahaṇe. Vikappanūpagacīvaratā, pārivattakābhāvo, aññātikāya hatthato gahaṇanti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Cīvarappaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ.
20. Kiñci mūlakanti—some small item. Cīvarādāneti—in the giving of a robe, in the accepting of a robe. Being a vikappanūpaga robe, absence of exchange, receiving from the hand of a non-relative—these are the three factors here. This is the cīvarappaṭiggahaṇa-sikkhāpada.
21.Appavāritanti ‘‘vadeyyātha, bhante, yena attho’’ti icchāpitaṃ icchaṃ ruciṃ uppāditaṃ, na pavāritanti appavāritaṃ.Viññāpentassāti yācantassa.Aññatra samayāti naṭṭhacīvarakālaṃ ṭhapetvā. Vikappanūpagacīvaratā, samayābhāvo, aññātakaviññatti, tāya ca paṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ.
21. Appavāritanti—"vadeyyātha, bhante, yena attho," wanting to be told what one wants, having produced desire or inclination, not invited is appavārita. Viññāpentassāti—of one who asks. Aññatra samayāti—except for the time of lost robes. Being a vikappanūpaga robe, absence of the proper time, asking a non-relative, and gaining that by it—these are the four factors here. This is the aññātakaviññatti-sikkhāpada.
22.Rajatanti rūpiyaṃ.Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ.Māsakanti tayo māsakā lohamāsako dārumāsako jatumāsakoti. Tatthalohamāsakoti tambalohādīhi katamāsako.Dārumāsakoti sāradārunā vā veḷupesikāya vā antamaso tālapaṇṇenapi rūpaṃ chinditvā katamāsako.Jatumāsakoti lākhāya vā niyyāsena vā rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā katamāsako.Kahāpaṇanti suvaṇṇamayaṃ vā rūpiyamayaṃ vā pākatikaṃ vā.Gaṇheyyāti attano atthāya dīyamānaṃ vā katthaci ṭhitaṃ vā nippariggahaṃ disvā sayaṃ gaṇheyya.Gaṇhāpeyyāti tadeva aññena gāhāpeyya.Nissaggīti gahaṇādīsu yaṃ kiñci karontassa aghanabaddhesu vatthugaṇanāya nissaggi siyāti attho.Sādiyeyya vāti kāyavācāhi appaṭikkhipitvā cittena adhivāseyya. Jātarūparajatabhāvo, attuddesikatā, gahaṇādīsu aññatarabhāvoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Rūpiyappaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpadaṃ.
22. Rajata means silver. Jātarūpa means gold. Māsaka means three māsakas: a metal māsaka, a wooden māsaka, and a lac māsaka. Among these, lohamāsaka means a māsaka made of copper, etc. Dārumāsaka means a māsaka made by carving a shape from hardwood, bamboo strips, or even palm leaves. Jatumāsaka means a māsaka made by forming a shape from lac or resin. Kahāpaṇa means one made of gold or silver, or a natural one. Gaṇheyyā means he himself takes it for his own use, seeing it being given, or situated somewhere, or without an owner. Gaṇhāpeyyā means he causes another to take that same thing. Nissaggī means, while doing anything such as taking, it becomes nissaggiya in the reckoning of objects, of which the possession is not firmly established. Sādiyeyya vā means he approves with his mind, without rejecting it by body or speech. The condition of being gold or silver, the intention for oneself, and one of the actions such as taking, etc., these are the three factors in this case. The training rule on accepting silver.
23.Rajatādicatubbidhaṃ akappiyaṃ kappiyenāpi parivatteyya sahadhammike ṭhapetvā, nissaggiyaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthaakappiyanti akappiyavatthuṃ.Kappiyenāti kappiyavatthunā.Sahadhammiketi bhikkhubhikkhunisāmaṇerasāmaṇerisikkhamānasaṅkhāte pañca sahadhammike. Rūpiyabhāvo, parivattanañcāti imānettha dve aṅgāni. Rūpiyaparivattanasikkhāpadaṃ.
23. Silver, etc., the four kinds of unallowable things, he should exchange even with an allowable thing, having placed it with a co-religionist, it becomes nissaggiya, is the connection. Among these, akappiya means an unallowable object. Kappiyena means with an allowable object. Sahadhammike means the five co-religionists consisting of monks, nuns, male novices, female novices, and female trainees. The condition of being silver, and exchanging, these are the two factors in this case. The training rule on exchanging silver.
24.‘‘Imaṃ pattaṃ tuyhaṃ vikappemī’’tiādināvikappanañca‘‘imaṃ pattaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’tiādināadhiṭṭhānañcaakatvāti attho.Pamāṇikanti etthāyaṃ vinicchayo – anupahatapurāṇasālitaṇḍulānaṃ sukoṭṭitaparisuddhānaṃ dve magadhanāḷiyo gahetvā tehi taṇḍulehi anuttaṇḍulamakilinnamapiṇḍitaṃ suvisadaṃ kundamakuḷarāsisadisaṃ avassāvitodanaṃ pacitvā niravasesaṃ patte pakkhipitvā tassa odanassa catutthabhāgappamāṇo nātighano nātitanuko hatthahāriyo sabbasambhārasaṅkhato muggasūpo pakkhipitabbo, tato ālopassa anurūpaṃ yāvacarimālopappahonakaṃ macchamaṃsādibyañjanaṃ pakkhipitabbaṃ. Sappitelatakkarasakañjikādīni pana agaṇanūpagāni honti. Tāni hi odanagatikāni neva hāpetuṃ, na vaḍḍhetuṃ sakkonti. Evametaṃ sabbampi pakkhittaṃ sace pana pattassa mukhavaṭṭiyā heṭṭhimarājisamaṃ tiṭṭhati, suttena vā hīrena vā chindantassa suttassa vā hīrassa vā heṭṭhimantaṃ phusati, ayaṃukkaṭṭhonāma patto. Sace taṃ rājiṃ atikkamma thūpīkataṃ tiṭṭhati, ayaṃukkaṭṭhomakonāma patto. Sace taṃ rājiṃ na sampāpuṇāti, antogatameva hoti, ayaṃukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭhonāma. Ukkaṭṭhato upaḍḍhappamāṇomajjhimo. Majjhimato upaḍḍhappamāṇoomako. Tesampi vuttanayeneva pabhedo veditabbo. Iccetesu ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho ca omakomako cāti dve apattā, sesā satta pattā pamāṇayuttā nāmāti evaṃ pamāṇena yutto pamāṇiko, taṃ pamāṇikaṃ.Pattanti sattasu pattesu aññataraṃ pattaṃ. Pattassa attano santakatā, pamāṇayuttatā, adhiṭṭhānūpagatā, atirekapattatā, dasāhātikkamoti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Paṭhamapattasikkhāpadaṃ.
24. Vikappanā ca by "I declare this bowl as shareable to you," etc., and adhiṭṭhānañca by "I determine this bowl," etc., means without doing. Pamāṇika here is the judgment: Having taken two magadhanāḷi measures of unbruised, old, husked, well-winnowed, and clean rice grains, and having cooked very clear, undiluted, well-condensed, and similar to a heap of kunda buds rice with those grains, and having put that rice without any remainder into the bowl, then a mung bean soup, not too thick, not too thin, easy to take with the hand, complete with all ingredients, about a quarter of the amount of that rice, should be put in; then relish consisting of fish, meat, etc., suitable for a mouthful should be put in, enough for as long as the last mouthful lasts. But ghee, oil, salt, sour gruel, etc., are not counted. For those things which partake of the nature of rice, cannot decrease or increase the rice. Thus, if all of this that has been put in stands level with the lower line of the mouth rim of the bowl, and touches the lower edge of the thread or gold being used to cut it, this bowl is called ukkaṭṭho (superior). If it stands piled up exceeding that line, this bowl is called ukkaṭṭhomako (somewhat superior). If it does not reach that line, but is contained within, this is called ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho (very superior). A bowl that is half the measure of the ukkaṭṭha is majjhimo (middling). A bowl that is half the measure of the majjhima is omako (inferior). The distinctions of those also should be understood in the manner stated. Thus among these, the ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭha and the omakomaka are two bowls that are not bowls, the remaining seven bowls are called "having the correct measure." Thus, a patta with the correct measure, that pamāṇika patta, means one of the seven bowls. The bowl being one's own possession, being of the correct measure, not being determined, being an extra bowl, and exceeding ten days, these are the five factors in this case. The first bowl training rule.
25.Yo bhikkhu pañcabandhanato ūnapatte sati paraṃ pana navaṃ pattaṃ viññāpeti, tassapi bhikkhuno nissaggiyaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthaparanti aññaṃ, ‘‘navaṃ patta’’ntiminā tulyādhikaraṇaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānūpagapattassa ūnapañcabandhanatā, attuddesikatā, kataviññatti, tāya ca paṭilābhoti imānettha cattāri aṅgāni. Ūnapañcabandhanasikkhāpadaṃ.
25. The connection is: Whichever monk, when there is a bowl with less than five patches, requests a new bowl, for that monk it becomes nissaggiya. Among these, para means another, and is in apposition to "navaṃ patta" (new bowl). The state of a bowl that has not been determined and has less than five patches, the intention for oneself, making a request, and obtaining it by that, these are the four factors in this case. The training rule on a bowl with less than five patches.
26.Yo sappitelādikaṃ pana bhesajjaṃ paṭiggahetvā sattāhaparamaṃ sannidhikārakaṃ bhuñjanto sattāhaṃ atikkāmeti, tassa nissaggiyaṃ siyāti attho. Tatthasappitelādikanti etthaādi-saddo navanītamadhuphāṇitaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tatthasappināma gavādīnaṃ sappi, yesaṃ maṃsaṃ kappati, tesaṃ sappi, tathānavanītaṃ. Telaṃnāma tilasāsapamadhukaeraṇḍavasādīhi nibbattaṃ.Madhunāma makkhikāmadhumeva. Ucchurasaṃ upādāya pana apakkā vā avatthukapakkā vā sabbāpi ucchuvikatiphāṇitanti veditabbaṃ. Bhesajjavidhānasikkhāpadaṃ.
26. Whichever monk, having accepted medicine consisting of ghee, etc., that can be kept for at most seven days, exceeds seven days while consuming it, it becomes nissaggiya. Among these, sappitelādika here, the word ādi includes fresh butter, honey, and molasses. Among these, sappi means ghee from cows, etc., ghee from those whose meat is allowable; similarly, navanītaṃ (fresh butter). Telaṃ (oil) means that which is produced from sesame, mustard, madhuka, castor bean, etc. Madhu (honey) means honey from bees. But all products of sugarcane, starting with sugarcane juice, whether uncooked or cooked without solid ingredients, should be understood as phāṇita (molasses).
27.Bhikkhussa cīvaraṃ datvā puna taṃ cīvaraṃ sakasaññāya acchindantassa vā acchindāpayatopi vā nissaggiyaṃ siyāti yojanā. Tatthadatvāti veyyāvaccādīni paccāsīsamāno datvā.Acchindantassāti veyyāvaccādīni akarontaṃ disvā balakkārena gaṇhantassa, tathāacchindāpayatoti. Vikappanūpagacīvaratā, sāmaṃdinnatā, sakasaññitā, upasampannatā, kodhavasena acchindanaṃ vā acchindāpanaṃ vāti imānettha pañca aṅgāni. Acchindanasikkhāpadaṃ.
27. If a monk, having given a robe to someone, then takes back that robe with his own accord, or causes it to be taken back, it becomes nissaggiya, is the connection. Among these, datvā means having given, expecting services, etc. Acchindantassā means taking back forcibly, seeing that they are not doing services, etc.; similarly acchindāpayato. The state of a robe that is fit for declaration as shareable, being given by oneself, being with one's own consent, being a bhikkhu, taking back or causing to take back due to anger, these are the five factors in this case. The training rule on taking back.
28.Appavāritaṃ aññātiṃ gahapatiṃ suttaṃ yācitvā ñātippavārite vajjetvā tantavāyehi cīvaraṃ vāyāpentassa nissaggiyaṃ siyāti piṇḍattho. Tatthasuttanti chabbidhaṃ khomasuttādikaṃ vā tesaṃ anulomaṃ vā.Yāciyāti cīvaratthāya yācitvā. Cīvaratthāya viññāpitasuttaṃ, attuddesikatā, akappiyatantavāyena akappiyaviññattiyā vāyāpananti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Suttaviññattisikkhāpadaṃ.
28. If a monk, without invitation, having requested thread from an unrelated householder, having avoided those invited by relatives, has a robe woven by weavers, it becomes nissaggiya, is the condensed meaning. Among these, sutta means six kinds of thread, such as linen thread, etc., or that which is suitable for those. Yāciyā means having requested for the sake of a robe. Thread requested for the sake of a robe, the intention for oneself, having it woven by an unallowable weaver with an unallowable request, these are the three factors in this case. The training rule on requesting thread.
29.Yo bhikkhu saṅghassa pariṇataṃ lābhaṃ jānanto attano pariṇāmeti, tassa nissaggiyaṃ siyāti attho. Tatthajānanti jānanto.Lābhanti labhitabbaṃ cīvarādivatthuṃ.Pariṇatanti saṅghassa ninnaṃ saṅghassa poṇaṃ saṅghassa pabbhāraṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ.Attano pariṇāmetīti ‘‘mayhaṃ dethā’’tiādīni vadanto attani ninnaṃ karoti. Saṅghe pariṇatabhāvo, taṃ ñatvā attano pariṇāmanaṃ, paṭilābhoti imānettha tīṇi aṅgāni. Pariṇāmanasikkhāpadaṃ.
29. Whichever monk, knowing a gain dedicated to the Sangha, redirects it to himself, for that monk it becomes nissaggiya. Among these, jāna means knowing. Lābha means an object to be obtained, such as a robe, etc. Pariṇata means having become inclined towards the Sangha, leaning towards the Sangha, tending towards the Sangha. Attano pariṇāmetī means he makes it incline towards himself, saying "Give it to me," etc. Being dedicated to the Sangha, knowing that, redirecting it to oneself, and obtaining it, these are the three factors in this case. The training rule on redirecting.
Nissaggiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Explanation of the Nissaggiya Section is Finished.
4. Pācittiyaniddesavaṇṇanā
4. Pācittiya Section
30.Idāni pācittiyaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘sampajānamusāvāde’’tyādi āraddhaṃ. Tatthasampajānamusāvādeti nimittatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tasmā yo bhikkhu sampajānanto musā vadati, tassa tannimittaṃ taṃhetu tappaccayā pācittiyaṃ udīritanti attho.Bhikkhuñca omasantassāti jātināmagottakammasippavayaābādhaliṅgakilesāpattiakkosesu bhūtena vā abhūtena vā yena kenaci mukhasattinā bhikkhuṃ ovijjhantassa bhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ udīritanti attho.Pesuññaharaṇepi cāti bhikkhussa pesuññaharaṇe, jātiādīhi akkosavatthūhi bhikkhuṃ akkosantassa bhikkhuno sutvā bhikkhuno piyakamyatāya vā bhedādhippāyena vā yo akkuddho, tassa bhikkhussa kāyena vā vācāya vā pesuññaharaṇavacane pācittiyaṃ udīritanti attho.
30. Now, to show the pācittiya, "sampajānamusāvāde" (deliberately speaking falsehood), etc., is begun. Among these, sampajānamusāvāde is an adverbial locative expressing the reason; therefore, whichever monk deliberately speaks falsehood, for that reason, for that cause, for that condition, a pācittiya is declared, is the meaning. Bhikkhuñca omasantassā means for a monk who reviles another monk with any verbal force, whether true or untrue, regarding birth, name, clan, occupation, skill, age, sickness, gender, defilements, offense, or abuse, a pācittiya is declared for that monk. Pesuññaharaṇepi cā also means for a monk who engages in tale-bearing against a monk, for a monk who abuses a monk with abusive subjects such as birth, etc., a pācittiya is declared for that monk who, having heard, conveys tale-bearing words by body or speech to that monk who is not angry, either for the sake of pleasing him or with the intention of causing dissension.
31.Saṅgītittayamāruḷhaṃ piṭakattayaṃ dhammaṃ bhikkhuñca bhikkhuniñca ṭhapetvā aññena puggalena saddhiṃ ekato padaṃ padaṃ bhaṇantassa bhikkhuno padagaṇanāya pācittiyaṃ udīritanti samudāyattho.
31. The combined meaning is: For a monk reciting the Dharma that is established in the three recitations, the three baskets, together with another individual, excluding a monk and a nun, a pācittiya is declared by the count of syllables for that monk.
32.Anupasampannenevāti bhikkhuṃ ṭhapetvā antamaso pārājikavatthubhūtena tiracchānagatenāpi saha tirattiyaṃ sayitvā catutthadivase atthaṅgate sūriye puna sahaseyyāya pācitti siyāti sambandho. Tatthasahaseyyāyāti sabbacchannaparicchinne, yebhuyyenacchannaparicchinne vā senāsane pubbāpariyena vā ekakkhaṇe vā ekato nisajjanāya. Tattha chadanaṃ anāhacca diyaḍḍhahatthubbedhena pākārādinā paricchinnampi sabbaparicchinnamicceva veditabbaṃ.
32. Anupasampanneneva means, having excluded a monk, and having slept together for three nights with even a subhuman being who is the subject of a pārājika offense, on the fourth day, when the sun has set, again a pācittiya arises by sharing the same lodging. Among these, sahaseyyāyā means for sharing the same lodging, either in a lodging that is entirely covered and enclosed, or mostly covered and enclosed, whether sitting together from beginning to end or just for a moment. Here, a covering that is not touching, and an enclosure with a height of two and a half hatthas (cubits) such as a wall, etc., should be understood as entirely enclosed.
33.Ekarattampi itthiyā saddhiṃ seyyaṃ kappayato tassa bhikkhunopi pācitti siyāti attho. Tatthaitthiyāti antamaso tadahujātāyapi manussitthiyā.Desentassa vinā viññuṃ, dhammañca chappaduttarinti viññuṃ purisaṃ vinā itthiyā chappadato uttariṃ dhammaṃ desentassa bhikkhuno pācitti siyāti attho. Tattha ‘‘chappaduttari’’nti ettha eko gāthāpādo ekaṃ padanti evaṃ sabbattha padappamāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Cha padāni chappadaṃ, chappadato uttariṃ chappaduttariṃ.
33. If that monk makes a lodging with a woman even for one night, for that monk also, a pācittiya arises. Among these, itthiyā means even with a human female who was born on that very day. Desentassa vinā viññuṃ, dhammañca chappaduttari means for a monk teaching the Dharma of more than six words to a woman without an intelligent man, a pācittiya arises. Among these, in "chappaduttari" (more than six words), one line of a gāthā is one word, thus the measure of words should be understood everywhere. Six words is chappada, more than six words is chappaduttari.
34.Bhikkhusammutiṃ ṭhapetvā bhikkhuno duṭṭhullaṃ vajjaṃ abhikkhuno vadantassa pācittiyaṃ udīritanti attho. Tatthaduṭṭhullanti idha saṅghādisesaṃ adhippetaṃ.Bhikkhusammutiyāti yaṃ saṅgho abhiṇhāpattikassa bhikkhuno āyatiṃ saṃvaratthāya āpattīnañca kulānañca pariyantaṃ katvā vā akatvā vā tikkhattuṃ apaloketvā katikaṃ karoti, taṃ ṭhapetvā.Abhikkhunoti anupasampannassa.Vadantassāti ārocentassa.
34. Excluding the consent of the monks, for a monk telling a grave fault of a monk to a non-monk, a pācittiya is declared. Among these, duṭṭhulla here means saṅghādisesa. Bhikkhusammutiyā means excluding that which the Sangha does by making a limit to offenses and families, whether having made a boundary or not, having announced three times for a monk who is frequently offending, for the sake of restraint in the future. Abhikkhuno means to one who is not fully ordained. Vadantassā means for one who is announcing.
35.Yo akappiyaṃ pathaviṃ khaṇeyya vā khaṇāpeyya vā, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyā. Tatthaakappiyanti uddhanapacanādivasena vā tathā tathā adaḍḍhā vā jātapathavī vuccati. Sā tividhā suddhamissapuñjavasena. Tatthasuddhapathavīnāma pakatiyā suddhapaṃsu vā suddhamattikā vā.Missapathavīnāma yattha paṃsuto vā mattikato vā pāsāṇasakkharakathalamarumbavālukāsu aññatarassa tatiyabhāgo hoti.Puñjapathavīnāma atirekacātumāsaṃ ovaṭṭho paṃsupuñjo vā mattikāpuñjo vā hoti. Vuttalakkhaṇena pana missakapuñjopi piṭṭhipāsāṇe ṭhitasukhumarajampi ca deve phusayante sakiṃ ce tintaṃ, cātumāsaccayena tintokāso puñjapathavīsaṅkhameva gacchati. Yo bhikkhu bhūtagāmaṃ vikopeyya, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthabhūtagāmanti bhavanti, abhavuṃ cāti bhūtā, jāyanti vaḍḍhanti jātā vaḍḍhitā cāti attho, gāmoti rāsi, bhūtānaṃ gāmo, bhūtā eva vā gāmoti bhūtagāmo, patiṭṭhitaharitatiṇarukkhādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ bhūtagāmaṃ.Vikopeyyāti chedanabhedanādīni kareyya.
35. Whichever monk digs or causes to dig unallowable earth, for him a pācittiya arises. Among these, akappiya means earth that has been tilled for purposes such as plowing and planting, or that is unstable. That is of three kinds, by way of pure, mixed, and mass. Among these, suddhapathavī means naturally pure dust or pure clay. Missapathavī means where one of stone, gravel, potsherd, dry clay, sand, is one third of dust or clay. Puñjapathavī means a heap of dust or a heap of clay that has been piled up for more than four months. But even a mixed heap with the characteristics stated, and fine dust standing on a flat stone, when touched by moisture from the sky, even once moist, after four months have passed, the occasion for moisture goes to the reckoning of a heap of earth. Whichever monk harms a community of beings, for him a pācittiya arises. Among these, bhūtagāma means beings that exist and have existed are bhūta, those that are born and grow, those that are born and have grown; gāma means a group, a community of beings, or bhūta itself is gāma, thus bhūtagāma; this is a term for plants, grass, trees, etc. that are established. That bhūtagāma, vikopeyyā means he does cutting, breaking, etc.
36.Yo bhikkhu saṅghikaṃ mañcādiṃ ajjhokāse santharaṇādikaṃ katvā āpucchanādikaṃ akatvā yāti, tassa pācitti siyāti attho. Tatthasaṅghikanti saṅghassa santakaṃ.Mañcādinti etthaādi-saddena pīṭhabhisikocchādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Santharaṇādikanti santharaṇādiṃ katvā vā kārāpetvā vā.Āpucchanādikanti āpucchanaṃ vā uddharaṇaṃ vā uddharāpanaṃ vāti attho.Yātīti gacchati.
36. Whichever monk, having made bedding, etc., on a Sangha's couch, etc., in the open air, departs without asking permission, for him a pācitti arises. Among these, saṅghika means belonging to the Sangha. Mañcādi here, the word ādi includes a chair, cushion, etc. Santharaṇādika means having made or caused to be made bedding, etc. Āpucchanādika means asking permission, or lifting it up, or causing it to be lifted up. Yātī means he goes.
37.Yo bhikkhu saṅghikāvasathe seyyaṃ santharaṇādikaṃ katvā āpucchanādikaṃ akatvā yāti, tassa bhikkhuno pācitti siyāti attho. Tatthasaṅghikāvasatheti saṅghassa santake āvasathe vihāre gabbhe vā aññasmiṃ vā sabbaparicchinne guttasenāsane.Seyyanti bhisi cimilikā pāvuraṇaṃ uttarattharaṇaṃ bhūmattharaṇaṃ taṭṭikā cammakkhaṇḍaṃ nisīdanaṃ paccattharaṇaṃ tiṇasanthāro paṇṇasanthāroti evamādikaṃ.Santharaṇādikanti tesu yena kenaci attharaṇādikaṃ katvā vā kārāpetvā vā.
37. Whichever monk, having made bedding, etc., in a Sangha's dwelling, departs without asking permission, for that monk a pācitti arises. Among these, saṅghikāvasathe means in a dwelling belonging to the Sangha, in a vihāra, a room, or any completely enclosed, protected lodging. Seyya means cushion, blanket, outer cloth, upper spread, ground spread, mat, leather mat, seat, under-spread, grass spread, leaf spread, and so forth. Santharaṇādika means having made or caused to be made a spread, etc., with any of those.
38-9.Yo pana bhikkhu jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ toyaṃ paribhuñjaye, tassa bhikkhuno pācitti siyāti yojanā. Tatthajānaṃsappāṇakanti ‘‘sappāṇakamida’’nti disvā vā sutvā vā yena kenaci ākārena jānanto.Toyanti udakaṃ.Paribhuñjayeti paribhuñjeyya. Yo bhikkhu pārivattakaṃ ṭhapetvā aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ deti, tassa bhikkhuno pācitti siyā. Cīvarappaṭiggahaṇasikkhāpade bhikkhu paṭiggāhako idha bhikkhunī, ayaṃ viseso. Aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā cīvaraṃ sibbatopi tassa bhikkhuno pācitti siyāti attho.Cīvaranti nivāsanapārupanūpagaṃ.Sibbatoti sayaṃ sibbantassa sūciṃ pavesetvā nīharaṇe payogagaṇanāya pācitti. Sibbāpentassa pana ‘‘sibbā’’ti vutto sacepi sabbaṃ sūcikammaṃ niṭṭhāpesi, ekameva pācitti, āṇattassa payogagaṇanāya pācitti hoti. Pavāretvāna atirittaṃ akāretvā bhuñjato pācitti siyāti attho. Tatrāyaṃ vinicchayo – odano sattu kummāso maccho maṃsanti pañcannaṃ bhojanānaṃ aññataraṃ sāsapamattampi ajjhoharitvā bhojanaṃ paṭikkhepaṃ katvā aññena iriyāpathena ‘‘alametaṃ sabba’’nti atirittaṃ akāretvā paribhuñjato pācitti hotīti.
38-9.The explanation is: "If a bhikkhu knowingly uses water containing living beings, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya." Here, jānaṃ sappāṇakaṃ means knowing in any way, having seen or heard that "this contains living beings." Toyaṃ means water. Paribhuñjaye means should use. If a bhikkhu, setting aside an exchange, gives a robe to a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. In the training rule regarding the acceptance of robes, the recipient is a bhikkhuni here; this is the difference. Even if a bhikkhu sews a robe for a bhikkhuni who is not a relative, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Cīvaraṃ means something used for wearing or covering. Sibbato means that for oneself, while sewing, with each application and removal of the needle, a pācittiya is incurred. But for one who is having it sewn, even if the person instructed completes all the needlework, there is only one pācittiya; a pācittiya is incurred for each application of the instruction. The meaning is that a pācittiya is incurred for eating, having declined and without making additional food. Here is the judgment in this matter: If one eats even a mustard seed's worth of any of the five foods—cooked rice, barley flour, kummāsa, fish, or meat—and having declined the food, without making additional food by any other posture, saying, "Enough of all this," a pācittiya is incurred.
40.Yo bhikkhu āsādanāpekkho bhuttāviṃ pavāritaṃ bhikkhuṃ ‘‘handa, bhikkhu, khāda vā bhuñja vā’’ti anatirittena pavāreti, bhojane bhutte tassa pācittiyaṃ udīritanti attho. Tatthaāsādanāpekkhoti āsādanaṃ codanaṃ maṅkukaraṇabhāvaṃ apekkhamāno.
40.The meaning is that if a bhikkhu, intending offense, invites a bhikkhu who has finished eating and has declined, saying, "Come, bhikkhu, eat or consume," without providing extra, a pācittiya is declared for the food eaten. Here, āsādanāpekkho means expecting offense, accusation, or causing displeasure.
41-2.Yo bhikkhu sannidhibhojanaṃ bhuñjeyya, tassa bhikkhuno pācitti siyāti attho. Tatthasannidhibhojananti paṭiggahetvā ekarattaṃ vītināmitabhojanaṃ. Vikāle yāvakālikaṃ bhuñjato vāpi pācitti siyāti yojanā. Tatthavikāleti vigatakāle, majjhanhikātikkamato paṭṭhāya yāva aruṇuggamanāti attho.Yāvakālikanti vanamūlaphalādikaṃ āmisabhojanaṃ. Agilāno bhikkhu paṇītakaṃ sappibhattādikampi viññāpetvāna bhuñjeyya, tassa bhikkhuno pācitti siyāti yojanā. Tatthaagilānoti kallako.Paṇītakanti sappitelamadhuphāṇitamacchamaṃsakhīradadhisaṅkhātehi saṃsaṭṭhaṃ sattadhaññanibbattaṃ paṇītabhojanaṃ. Yo bhikkhu dantakaṭṭhodakaṃ vajjetvā appaṭiggahitakaṃ bhuñjeyya, pācitti siyāti attho. Tatthaappaṭiggahitanti kāyena vā kāyappaṭibaddhena vā gaṇhantassa hatthapāse ṭhatvā kāyakāyappaṭibaddhanissaggiyānaṃ aññatarena na dinnaṃ appaṭiggahitaṃ nāma.
41-2.The meaning is that if a bhikkhu consumes hoarded food, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Here, sannidhibhojanaṃ means food that has been received and has spent a night. The explanation is that a pācittiya is also incurred for consuming yāvakālika food at the wrong time. Here, vikāle means the inappropriate time, from after midday until the rising of dawn. Yāvakālikaṃ means impermanent food like roots and fruits from the forest. The explanation is that if a healthy bhikkhu requests and consumes fine food like rice cooked with ghee, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Here, agilāno means healthy. Paṇītakaṃ means fine food made from the seven grains mixed with things like ghee, oil, honey, molasses, fish, meat, milk, and curds. The meaning is that if a bhikkhu consumes food that has not been received, having avoided a toothpick and water, a pācittiya is incurred. Here, appaṭiggahitaṃ means something not given with one of the acts of giving up associated with the body or connected to the body while standing within arm's reach of one who is taking it with the body or something connected to the body, is called unaccepted.
43.Yo bhikkhu titthiyassa sahatthato kiñci bhuñjitabbaṃ dadeyya, tassa pācitti siyāti sambandho. Tatthatitthiyassāti aññatitthiyassa.Kiñci bhuñjitabbanti yaṃ kiñci bhojanīyaṃ.Sahatthatoti sahatthā. Yo bhikkhu mātugāmena ekato raho nisajjaṃ kappeyya, tassa pācitti siyāti sambandho. Tattharahoti paṭicchanne.Kappeti kappeyya.Ekatoti saddhiṃ.
43.The connection is that if a bhikkhu gives anything that should be eaten from his own hand to a titthiya, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Here, titthiyassā means to a member of another sect. Kiñci bhuñjitabbaṃ means anything edible. Sahatthato means from one's own hand. The connection is that if a bhikkhu engages in secluded sitting with a woman, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Here, raho means in a hidden place. Kappe means should engage. Ekato means together.
44.Surāmerayapānepīti ettha piṭṭhādīhi kataṃ majjaṃsurā. Pupphādīhi kato āsavomerayaṃ. Yo bhikkhu tadubhayampi bījato paṭṭhāya kusaggenāpi pivati, tassa tappānapaccayā pācittiyaṃ udīritanti attho.Aṅgulipatodake cāpīti aṅgulīhi upakacchakādīnaṃ ghaṭṭanapaccayā pācitti siyāti attho.Hasadhammepi codaketi uparigopphake udake hasadhamme kīḷānimittaṃ tassa pācitti siyāti attho.
44.In surāmerayapāne, surā means intoxicant made from flour, etc. Merayaṃ means liquor made from flowers, etc. The meaning is that if a bhikkhu drinks either of these, even with a blade of grass from the very beginning of the seed, a pācittiya is declared due to that act of drinking. Aṅgulipatodake cāpī means a pācittiya is incurred due to the touching of the armpits, etc., with the fingers. Hasadhammepi codake means a pācittiya is incurred for the purpose of playing and laughing in the water above the ankles.
45.Anādarepi pācittīti puggalassa vā dhammassa vā anādarakaraṇepi pācitti siyāti attho. Yo bhikkhu upasampannena paññattena vuccamāno tassa vā vacanaṃ akattukāmatāya, taṃ vā dhammaṃ asikkhitukāmatāya anādariyaṃ karoti, tassa tasmiṃ anādariye pācitti siyāti attho. Bhayānakaṃ kathaṃ katvā vā bhayānakaṃ rūpaṃ dassetvā vā bhikkhuṃ bhīsayatopi pācitti siyāti attho.
45.Anādarepi pācittī means a pācittiya is incurred even for showing disrespect to a person or a Dhamma. The meaning is that if a bhikkhu, being addressed by an ordained bhikkhu who has been designated, shows disrespect by not wanting to do what is said or not wanting to learn that Dhamma, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya for that disrespect. The meaning is that a pācittiya is also incurred for frightening a bhikkhu by speaking frightening words or showing a frightening form.
46.Yo bhikkhu agilāno kiñci paccayaṃ ṭhapetvā jotiṃ jaleyya vā jalāpeyya vā, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthakiñci paccayanti padīpujjalanaṃ vā pattapacanādīsu jotikaraṇaṃ vāti evarūpaṃ paccayaṃ ṭhapetvā.Jotinti aggiṃ.
46.The connection is that if a bhikkhu, not being ill, kindles or has kindled a light without a valid reason, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Here, kiñci paccayaṃ means setting aside a reason such as lighting a lamp or using a light for cooking in a pot, etc. Jotiṃ means fire.
47-8.Kappabinduṃ anādāyanavacīvarabhoginonavaṃ cīvaraṃ bhuñjantassa pācitti siyāti attho.Kappabindunti morakkhimaṇḍalamaṅgulapiṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarappamāṇaṃ kappabinduṃ.Anādāyāti anādiyitvā. Bhikkhuno cīvarādikaṃ parikkhāraṃ apanetvā nidhentassa vā nidhāpentassa vā hasāpekkhassa bhikkhuno pācitti siyāti attho.Cīvarādikantiādi-saddena pattanisīdanasūcigharakāyabandhanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.Nidhentassāti nidahantassa.Hasāpekkhassāti hasādhippāyassa.Jānaṃ pāṇaṃ hane bhikkhu, tiracchānagatampi cāti yo bhikkhu ‘‘pāṇo’’ti jānanto tiracchānagataṃ pāṇaṃ khuddakampi mahantampi haneyya, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti attho.
47-8.The meaning is that a pācittiya is incurred for navacīvarabhogino, using a new robe, anādāya kappabinduṃ, without taking a kappabindu. Kappabindu means a kappabindu of the size of one of the marks of a peacock's eye, a nail mark, or a small spot. Anādāyā means without taking. The meaning is that a pācittiya is incurred for a bhikkhu who removes and hides or has hidden another bhikkhu's robe or other requisites, with the intention of joking. Cīvarādikaṃ: the word ādi includes items such as a bowl, sitting cloth, needle case, and waistband. Nidhentassā means for one who is hiding. Hasāpekkhassā means with the intention of joking. Jānaṃ pāṇaṃ hane bhikkhu, tiracchānagatampi cā means if a bhikkhu, knowing it to be a living being, kills a living being that is an animal, whether small or large, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya.
49.Chādetukāmo chādeti, duṭṭhullaṃ bhikkhunopi cāti yo bhikkhu bhikkhuno duṭṭhullasaṅkhātaṃ saṅghādisesaṃ chādetukāmo hutvā chādeti, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti attho. Itthiyā saha saṃvidhāya gāmantaragatassa bhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.
49.Chādetukāmo chādeti, duṭṭhullaṃ bhikkhunopi cā means if a bhikkhu, intending to conceal a saṅghādisesa offense, known as a duṭṭhulla, of another bhikkhu, conceals it, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. The explanation is that a pācittiya is incurred for a bhikkhu who goes to another village after making an agreement with a woman.
50.Bhikkhuṃvā pahareyyāthāti yo bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ pahareyya, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti yojanā.Talasattikamuggireti yo bhikkhu paharaṇākāraṃ dassento kāyaṃ vā kāyappaṭibaddhaṃ vā uggireyya, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti attho.Codeyya vā codāpeyya, bhikkhuṃ amūlakena cāti yo bhikkhu bhikkhuṃ amūlakena saṅghādisesena codeyya vā codāpeyya vā, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti attho. Tatthaamūlakenāti diṭṭhādimūlavirahitena.
50.Bhikkhuṃ vā pahareyyāthā means if a bhikkhu strikes another bhikkhu, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Talasattikamuggire means if a bhikkhu, showing a gesture of striking, raises his body or something connected to his body, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Codeyya vā codāpeyya, bhikkhuṃ amūlakena cā means if a bhikkhu accuses or has another accuse a bhikkhu of a groundless saṅghādisesa, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Here, amūlakena means without a basis of seeing, etc.
51.Kukkuccuppādane cāpīti ‘‘ūnavīsativasso tvaṃ maññe’’tiādīni bhaṇanto kukkuccaṃ uppādeyya, tassa kukkuccuppādanapaccayā pācittiyaṃ hoti. Yo bhikkhu bhaṇḍanatthāya bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ vacanaṃ sotuṃ upassutiṃ yāti, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthabhaṇḍanatthāyāti kalahatthāya.Bhaṇḍanajātānanti kalahajātānaṃ.Upassutinti sutisamīpaṃ.
51.Kukkuccuppādane cāpī means if one creates remorse by saying things like, "I think you are less than twenty years old," a pācittiya is incurred due to creating remorse. The connection is that if a bhikkhu goes to eavesdrop in order to hear words of those who are quarreling, for the purpose of quarreling, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Here, bhaṇḍanatthāyā means for the sake of conflict. Bhaṇḍanajātānaṃ means of those who are engaged in conflict. Upassutiṃ means near to hearing.
52.Yo bhikkhu saṅghassa pariṇāmitaṃ yaṃ lābhaṃ, taṃ parapuggalassa nāmeti, tassa pācittiyaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthanāmetīti pariṇāmeti.Pucchaṃ akatvāti ‘‘vikāle gāmappavesanaṃ āpucchāmī’’ti vā ‘‘gāmaṃ pavisissāmī’’ti vā anāpucchitvā.Santabhikkhunti antoupacārasīmāya dassanūpacāre bhikkhuṃ disvā yaṃ sakkā hoti pakativacanena āpucchituṃ, tādisaṃ vijjamānaṃ bhikkhuṃ.Gāmassāti gāmaṃ, kammatthe sāmivacanaṃ.Gatetisampadānatthe bhummavacanaṃ, gatassāti attho. Santaṃ bhikkhuṃ anāpucchitvā vikāle gāmaṃ gatassa bhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ siyāti attho. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti.
52.The connection is that if a bhikkhu redirects a gain that has been allocated to the Saṅgha to another individual, that bhikkhu incurs a pācittiya. Here, nāmeti means transfers. Pucchaṃ akatvā means without asking, whether saying, "I will ask about entering the village at the wrong time," or "I will enter the village," without asking. Santabhikkhuṃ means a bhikkhu who is within the boundary of the residence, within sight, and whom it is possible to ask with ordinary words, a bhikkhu who is present. Gāmassā means to the village, the genitive case in the sense of the object. Gateti the locative case in the sense of the dative, meaning to one who has gone. The meaning is that a pācittiya is incurred for a bhikkhu who goes to a village at the wrong time without asking a bhikkhu who is present. The rest is self-explanatory.
Pācittiyaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Pācittiya is complete.
5. Pakiṇṇakaniddesavaṇṇanā
5. Commentary on the Pakiṇṇaka
53.Idāni pakiṇṇakaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘saṅghika’’ntyādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yo bhikkhu issaro hutvā saṅghikaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ aññassa deti, tassa thullaccayaṃ siyā. Theyyāya aññassa deti, yathāvatthu pārājikādi siyā, dukkaṭavatthu dukkaṭaṃ, thullaccayavatthu thullaccayaṃ, pārājikavatthu pārājikaṃ siyāti vuttaṃ hoti.
53.Now, to show the miscellaneous matters, the passage beginning with "saṅghika" etc., is introduced. Here, if a bhikkhu, being in charge, gives heavy property belonging to the Saṅgha to another, he incurs a thullaccaya. If he gives it to another for theft, it can be a pārājika, etc., according to the item. A dukkata item results in a dukkata, a thullaccaya item results in a thullaccaya, and a pārājika item results in a pārājika, it is said.
54.Kusādimayacīrānīti etthaādi-saddo vākaphalakaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, kusamayacīraṃ vākamayacīraṃ phalakamayacīranti. Tattha kuse ganthetvā katacīraṃ kusamayacīraṃ. Vākamayacīraṃ nāma tāpasānaṃ vakkalaṃ. Phalakamayacīraṃ nāma phalakasaṇṭhānāni phalakāni sibbetvā katacīraṃ.Kambalaṃ kesavālajanti kesajaṃ kambalaṃ vālajaṃ kambalaṃ, kesakambalaṃ vālakambalanti attho. Kesehi tante vāyitvā katakambalaṃ kesakambalaṃ. Camarivālehi vāyitvā katakambalaṃ vālakambalaṃ.Samayaṃ vināti naṭṭhacīvarakālaṃ ṭhapetvā.Dhārayatodhārayantassa.Lūkapakkhājinakkhipanti ulūkapakkhiajinakkhipaṃ. Tatthaulūkapakkhītiulūkasakuṇapakkhehi katanivāsanaṃ.Ajinakkhipanti salomaṃ sakhuraṃ ajinamigacammaṃ. Naṭṭhacīvarakālaṃ ṭhapetvā imesu sattasu vatthūsu yaṃ kiñci dhārayato thullaccayaṃ siyāti attho.
54.In kusādimayacīrānī, the word ādi includes vāka cloths. Kusamayacīraṃ, vākamayacīraṃ, phalakamayacīraṃ. Here, kusamayacīraṃ is a robe made by weaving kusa grass. Vākamayacīraṃ is bark cloth of ascetics. Phalakamayacīraṃ is a robe made by sewing together planks in the shape of planks. Kambalaṃ kesavālajaṃ means hair-made blanket, tail-hair-made blanket, hair blanket or tail-hair blanket. A hair blanket is a blanket woven with hair threads. A tail-hair blanket is a blanket woven with the tail hairs of a yak. Samayaṃ vinā means except for the time when a robe is lost. Dhārayato means for one who is wearing. Lūkapakkhājinakkhipaṃ means ulūka bird wing, skin, and nail clippings. Here, ulūkapakkhīti means a covering made of the wings of an owl. Ajinakkhipaṃ means animal hide with hair and hooves. The meaning is that a thullaccaya is incurred for wearing any of these seven items, except for the time when a robe is lost.
55.Satthakena kattabbaṃ kammaṃ satthakammaṃ, tasmiṃsatthakamme. Vatthimhi kattabbaṃ kammaṃ vatthikammaṃ, tasmiṃvatthikamme. Saṃ nimittanti attano aṅgajātaṃ. Taṃ chindato thullaccayaṃ siyāti sambandho.Maṃsādibhojaneti etthaādi-saddo aṭṭhilohitacammalomāni saṅgaṇhāti. Tasmā manussānaṃ maṃsaaṭṭhilohitacammalomabhojanapaccayā thullaccayaṃ siyāti attho.
55.Work to be done with a knife is knife work, in that satthakamme. Work to be done on the urethra is urethra work, in that vatthikamme. Saṃ nimittaṃ means one's own genitals. The connection is that a thullaccaya is incurred for cutting that off. In maṃsādibhojane, the word ādi includes bones, blood, skin, and hair. Therefore, the meaning is that a thullaccaya is incurred due to eating the flesh, bones, blood, skin, and hair of humans.
56.Kadalerakakkadussānīti ettha kadalierakaakkavākehi katāni vatthāni dhārayantassa dukkaṭaṃ.Potthakanti makacivākehi kataṃ potthakadussaṃ.Sabbapītādikanti etthaādi-saddena sabbalohitakasabbakaṇhakasabbamañjeṭṭhikaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha sabbameva nīlakaṃsabbanīlakaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi.Nīlaṃummārapupphavaṇṇaṃ.Pītaṃkaṇikārapupphavaṇṇaṃ.Lohitaṃjayasumanapupphavaṇṇaṃ.Kaṇhakaṃaddāriṭṭhakavaṇṇaṃ.Mañjeṭṭhikaṃlākhārasavaṇṇaṃ. Imesu aṭṭhasu vatthūsu yaṃ kiñci dhārayantassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.
56.Kadalerakakkadussānī: here, a dukkata is incurred for wearing cloths made of banana fiber, eraka grass, or akkha grass. Potthakaṃ means potthaka cloth made from makaci bark. In sabbapītādikaṃ, the word ādi includes all blue, all red, all black, and all madder-dyed. Here, all blue is simply sabbanīlakaṃ. And so on for the rest. Nīlaṃ means the color of the ummāra flower. Pītaṃ means the color of the kaṇikāra flower. Lohitaṃ means the color of the jayasumana flower. Kaṇhakaṃ means the color of the addāriṭṭhaka fruit. Mañjeṭṭhikaṃ means the color of lac dye. The meaning is that a dukkata is incurred for wearing any of these eight items.
57-8.Hatthissuragasoṇānanti hatthiassauragasoṇānaṃ maṃsaṃ aṭṭhirudhiracammalomāni.Sīhabyagghacchadīpinanti sīhabyagghaacchadīpīnaṃ maṃsādīni. Taracchassa ca maṃsādiṃ uddissakatamaṃsañca anāpucchitamaṃsañca bhuñjato dukkaṭaṃ siyā.Dakatitthādikanti etthaādi-saddo vaccapassāvakuṭiyo saṅgaṇhāti. Tenayātānupubbaṃāgatappaṭipāṭiṃhitvānavajjetvā nahānatitthañca vaccakuṭiñca passāvakuṭiñcavajevajeyya gaccheyya, dukkaṭaṃ tassa siyāti attho.
57-8.Hatthissuragasoṇānaṃ means the flesh, bones, blood, skin, and hair of elephants, horses, uraga animals and dogs. Sīhabyagghacchadīpinaṃ means the flesh, etc., of lions, tigers, bears and leopards. A dukkata is incurred for eating the flesh, etc., of a hyena, flesh prepared for a specific purpose, and flesh not asked about. In dakatitthādikaṃ, the word ādi includes toilets and urinals. Therefore, yātānupubbaṃ hitvāna means having abandoned the order in which one arrived, abandoning and going to a bathing place, a toilet, or a urinal, a dukkata is incurred for that. It means.
59.Sahasāti vegasā vegena.Vubbhajitvānāti antaravāsakaṃ dūratova ukkhipitvā, va-kāro sandhivasenāgato.Paviseti paviseyya.Vaccapassāvakuṭikanti vaccakuṭikaṃ passāvakuṭikaṃ.Viseti paviseyya. Yo bhikkhu vaccapassāvakuṭikaṃ sahasā paviseyya vā nikkhameyya vā, ubbhajitvā vā paviseyya vā nikkhameyya vā, ukkāsikaṃ vajjetvā taṃ paviseyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā.
59.Sahasā means quickly, with force. Vubbhajitvānā means having lifted the lower garment from afar, the "va" is present due to the rules of euphony. Pavise means should enter. Vaccapassāvakuṭikaṃ means a toilet and a urinal. Vise means should enter. The explanation is that a dukkata is incurred for a bhikkhu who quickly enters or exits a toilet or urinal, or enters or exits having lifted (the robe), or enters it avoiding clearing his throat.
60.Nitthunanto vaccaṃ kareyya dantakaṭṭhañca khādanto, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Vaccapassāvadoṇīnaṃ bahi vaccādikaṃ vaccapassāvaṃ kareyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā.
60.A dukkata is incurred for defecating while making noise and chewing a toothpick. A dukkata is incurred for defecating or urinating outside the toilet or urinal receptacle.
61.Kharenacāvalekheyyāti phālitakaṭṭhena vā pharusena vā gaṇṭhikena vā pūtikaṭṭhena vā susirena vā avalekheyyāti attho.Kaṭṭhanti avalekhanakaṭṭhaṃ.Kūpaketi vaccakūpake.Ūhatañcāti gūthamakkhitañca.Na dhoveyyāti attanā vā na dhoveyya parena vā na dhovāpeyya.Uklāpañcāti kacavarañca.Na sodhayena sammajjeyya.
61.Kharena cāvalekheyyā means one should scrape with split wood, or rough wood, or knotted wood, or rotten wood, or hollow wood. Kaṭṭhaṃ means scraping wood. Kūpake means in the toilet pit. Ūhatañcā means also smeared with excrement. Na dhoveyyā means one should not wash it oneself or have another wash it. Uklāpañcā means also the rubbish. Na sodhaye means one should not sweep.
62.Capucapūti saddaṃ katvā udakakiccaṃ karontassa ācamantassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.Anajjhiṭṭhovāti anāṇattoyeva.Therenāti saṅghattherena.Pātimokkhanti pātimokkhuddesaṃ.Uddiseuddiseyya, dukkaṭaṃ siyā.
62.A dukkata is incurred for making a noise, capucapū, while doing one's water duties, rinsing one's mouth. Anajjhiṭṭhovā means without being instructed. Therenā means by a senior monk of the Saṅgha. Pātimokkhaṃ uddise means should recite the Pātimokkha, a dukkata is incurred.
63.Anāpucchāya pañhassa kathane, anāpucchāya pañhassa vissajjane, anāpucchāya sajjhāyakaraṇe, anāpucchāya padīpajālane, anāpucchāya padīpavijjhāpaneti imesu catūsu paccayesu tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā.
63. If one asks a question without permission, answers a question without permission, recites without permission, lights a lamp without permission, or extinguishes a lamp without permission, he incurs a dukkaṭa for each of these four instances.
64.Anāpucchā vātapānakavāṭāni vivareyya vā thakeyya vā, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.Vandanādinti etthaādi-saddo vandāpanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yo bhikkhu naggo vandanaṃ kareyya, vandāpanaṃ kareyya, gamanaṃ kareyya, bhojanaṃ kareyya, pivanaṃ kareyya, khādanaṃ kareyya, gahaṇaṃ kareyya, dānaṃ kareyya, tassa sabbattha dukkaṭanti sambandho.
64.The connection is that if one opens or closes the windows without permission, he incurs a dukkaṭa. In Vandanādi, the word ādi includes causing to pay homage. If a bhikkhu pays homage naked, causes to pay homage, walks, eats, drinks, chews, takes, or gives, he incurs a dukkaṭa in all instances.
65.Tipaṭicchannakaṃ vināti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, tisso paṭicchādiyo jantāgharappaṭicchādiṃ udakappaṭicchādiṃ vatthappaṭicchādi’’nti (cūḷava. 261) evaṃ vuttā tisso paṭicchādiyo samāhaṭāti ‘‘tipaṭicchādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tipaṭicchannakaṃ ṭhapetvā parikammaṃ sayaṃ kareyya, paraṃ kārāpeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Yo bhikkhunahāyaṃnahāyanto kuṭṭe vā thambhe vā tarumhi vā kāyaṃ upaghaṃseyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā.
65.Tipaṭicchannakaṃ vinā: "I allow, O bhikkhus, three coverings: a covering for the hot room, a covering for water, and a covering for robes" (cūḷava. 261). Thus, the three coverings mentioned are collectively referred to as "tipaṭicchādī". Except for these three coverings, if he does the preliminary work himself or has it done by another, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu, while bathing, rubs his body against a wall, pillar, or tree, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
66.Yo bhikkhu nahāyanto kuruvindakasuttena kāyaṃ ghaṃseyya,kāyatokāyena aññamaññaṃ ghaṃseyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho. Yo agilāno saupāhanobahārāmebahiārāme careyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.
66.If a bhikkhu, while bathing, rubs his body with kuruvindaka powder, or rubs body with body against another, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu, not being ill, walks in the outer garden wearing shoes, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
67.Sabbanīlādikampi cāti etthaādi-saddo lohitodātapītakaṇhamañjeṭṭhamahāraṅgamahānāmaraṅgarattādayo upāhanāyo saṅgaṇhāti. Yo bhikkhu sabbanīlasabbalohitādikaṃ upāhanaṃ dhāreti, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho. Yo bhikkhurattorattacitto tadahujātāyapiitthiyānimittaṃ passeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Yo bhikkhubhikkhadāyiyābhikkhadāyikāya itthiyā mukhaṃ passeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā.
67.Sabbanīlādikampi ca: Here, the word ādi includes shoes that are entirely blue, entirely red, entirely dark blue, entirely yellow, entirely black, entirely madder-red, entirely mahāraṅga, entirely mahānāma color, and entirely red. If a bhikkhu wears shoes that are entirely blue, entirely red, etc., he incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu, with a lustful mind, looks at the female organ, even in a newly born baby, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu looks at the face of a woman who is a giver of alms, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
68-9.Yo bhikkhu ujjhānasaññī hutvāaññassabhikkhuno pattaṃ vā passeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Ādāsādimhi udakapatte attano mukhaṃ passeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Uccāsanamahāsanenisajjādiṃnisīdanasayanādiṃ karontassa bhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Ukkhittānupasampannanānāsaṃvāsakādīnaṃ vandanepi dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthaukkhittoti āpattiyā adassane ukkhittako, āpattiyā appaṭikamme ukkhittako, pāpikāya diṭṭhiyā appaṭinissagge ukkhittakoti tividhopi idhādhippeto.Anupasampannoti iminā bhikkhunisāmaṇerasāmaṇerisikkhamānapaṇḍakaitthisikkhāpaccakkhātakā gahitā.Nānāsaṃvāsakāti laddhinānāsaṃvāsakā gahitā.Ādi-saddena chinnamūlakā gahitā.
68-9.If a bhikkhu, being intent on disparaging, looks at another bhikkhu's bowl, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If he looks at his own face in a mirror or water pot, he incurs a dukkaṭa. A bhikkhu incurs a dukkaṭa for sitting etc. on a high seat or a large seat, or making a bed. He also incurs a dukkaṭa for paying homage to those who are suspended (ukkhitta), not yet fully ordained (anupasampanna), of different saṃvāsa (association) and so on. Here, ukkhitto refers to one who is suspended for not seeing an offense, one who is suspended for not atoning for an offense, and one who is suspended for not relinquishing a wrong view; all three are intended here. Anupasampanno includes bhikkhunis, sāmaṇeras, sāmaṇeris, sikkhamānas, paṇḍakas, women, those who have renounced the training, and those who have rejected the precepts. Nānāsaṃvāsakā includes those of different saṃvāsa due to different doctrines. The word ādi includes those whose roots are cut off (chinnamūlakā).
70-71.Yo dīghāsanepaṇḍakitthīhipaṇḍakena vā itthiyā vā ubhatobyañjanena vā ekato nisīdeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā.Adīghe āsaneti rasse āsane. Yo bhikkhu rassāsane mañce vā pīṭhe vā asamānāsanikena ekato sayeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.Phalapupphādikanti etthaādi-saddena veḷucuṇṇadantakaṭṭhamattikādayo saṅgahitā. Kulasaṅgahatthāya phalapupphādikaṃ dadato dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.
70-71.If one sits together with a paṇḍaka or a woman or one with both sets of organs on a long seat, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Adīghe āsane: on a short seat. If a bhikkhu lies down together with someone who is not an equal on a short seat, a couch, or a stool, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Phalapupphādika: Here, the word ādi includes bamboo powder, tooth sticks, clay, and so on. He incurs a dukkaṭa for giving fruits, flowers, etc., for the sake of family support.
72-3.Yo bhikkhu ganthimādiṃ sayaṃ kareyya, paraṃ kārāpeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Yo bhikkhu jinena vāritapaccaye paribhuñjeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā.Abyattobālo yo bhikkhu ācariyupajjhāyeanissāyanissayaṃ aggahetvā vaseyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Yo bhikkhuanuññātehimātāpituādīhi puggalehiaññassapuggalassa bhesajjaṃ kareyya vā vadeyya vā, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Sāpattiko yo bhikkhu uposathappavāraṇaṃ kareyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tattha jinena bhagavatā vāritā jinavāritā, jinavāritā ca te paccayā ceti jinavāritapaccayā, tejinavāritapaccaye. Dvemātikāappaguṇatāyaabyatto.
72-3.If a bhikkhu makes or has made a knot himself, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu uses a condition prohibited by the Buddha, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Abyatto: An ignorant, foolish bhikkhu who lives without depending on a preceptor or teacher, without taking dependence, incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu, with permission from people such as mother and father, makes or prescribes medicine for another person, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu who has committed an offense performs the uposatha or pavāraṇa, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Here, jinena vāritā means prohibited by the Buddha, the Blessed One; and those jinavāritā and those conditions are jinavāritapaccayā; those jinavāritapaccaye. Abyatto because of the lack of two qualities.
74.Yo bhikkhu ābhogaṃ vā niyogaṃ vā vajjetvā dvārabandhādike ṭhāne parivattakavāṭakaṃ apidhāya divā sayeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.Dvārabandhādiketi yena kenaci parikkhitte abbhokāsepi rukkhamūlepi antamaso iminā lakkhaṇena yuttaākāsaṅgaṇepi.Apidhāyāti apidahitvā.Vinābhoganti ‘‘esa dvāraṃ jaggissatī’’ti ābhogaṃ ṭhapetvāti attho.Niyoganti avasaṭṭhānaṃ, attano avasaṃ bahusādhāraṇaṭṭhānaṃ ṭhapetvā. ‘‘Savaso’’ti vā pāṭho, savaso hutvāti attho.Divāti divākāle.
74.If a bhikkhu, avoiding a summons or an order, closes the revolving door in places such as door frames and sleeps during the day, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Dvārabandhādike: even in an open space enclosed by anything, even at the foot of a tree, at least in the open air possessing this characteristic. Apidhāyā: having closed it. Vinābhoga: Except for a summons, meaning, "This person will guard the door." Niyoga: an unattended place, except for one's own unattended, largely public place. Alternatively, there is the reading "Savaso," meaning, having become one's own. Divā: during the daytime.
75.Dhaññanti sāli vīhi yavo godhumo kaṅgu varako kudrūsakoti sattavidhaṃ dhaññaṃ.Itthirūpanti dārulohamayādiitthirūpaṃ.Ratananti muttādidasavidhaṃ ratanaṃ.Āvudhanti sattitomarādisabbāvudhabhaṇḍaṃ.Itthipasādhananti itthiyā sīsādialaṅkāraṃ.Tūriyabhaṇḍanti dhamanasaṅkhādisabbaṃ tūriyabhaṇḍaṃ.Phalarukkheti phalitarukkhe.Pubbaṇṇādikanti muggamāsādikaṃ.Ādi-saddena vākurakuminādayo gahitā. Etesu yaṃ kiñci āmaseyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.
75.Dhañña: rice, paddy, barley, wheat, millet, kaṅgu, and kudrūsa, these are the seven kinds of grains. Itthirūpa: a female form made of wood, metal, etc. Ratana: pearls and the other nine kinds of gems. Āvudha: all kinds of weapons, such as spears and javelins. Itthipasādhana: ornaments for a woman's head, etc. Tūriyabhaṇḍa: all kinds of musical instruments, such as drums and conches. Phalarukkhe: on fruit-bearing trees. Pubbaṇṇādika: green grams, black grams, etc. The word ādi includes vākurakuminā, etc. If he touches any of these, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
76.Sasitthodakatelehīti yo pana madhusitthakatelena vā udakamissakatelena vā yena kenaci cikkhallena vā.Phaṇahatthaphaṇehi vāti dantamayādiphaṇena vā phaṇakiccasādhakehi hatthaṅgulīhi vā kocchena vā kesamosaṇṭhane dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Ekasmiṃ bhājane bhojananimitte dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.
76.Sasitthodakatelehī: If with honey, wax, oil, water-mixed oil, or any kind of greasy substance. Phaṇahatthaphaṇehi vā: with ivory combs or with fingers that perform the function of a comb, or with a brush, he incurs a dukkaṭa for arranging the hair. He incurs a dukkaṭa for a food offering in one vessel.
77.Dve bhikkhū ekattharaṇā sayeyyūṃ, dve bhikkhū ekapāvuraṇā sayeyyuṃ, dve bhikkhū ekamañcake sayeyyuṃ, tesaṃ dukkaṭāni hontīti sambandho. Pamāṇato adhikaṃ vā ūnaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhaṃ khādeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā. Tatthaadhikanti aṭṭhaṅgulato adhikaṃ.Ūnanti caturaṅgulato ūnaṃ.
77.If two bhikkhus sleep on one mat, two bhikkhus sleep under one covering, two bhikkhus sleep on one bed, they incur dukkaṭas. If he chews a tooth stick that is longer or shorter than the prescribed size, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Here, adhika means longer than eight finger-breadths. Ūna means shorter than four finger-breadths.
78.Yo bhikkhu naccañca gītañca vāditañca yojeti vā yojāpeti vā, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Tesaṃ naccānaṃ dassanaṃ, tesaṃ gītānaṃ savanaṃ, tesaṃ vāditānaṃ savanañca karontassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.
78.If a bhikkhu arranges or has arranged dancing, singing, or instrumental music, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If he watches those dances, hears those songs, or hears that instrumental music, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
79.Vīhādiropimeti vīhiādīnaṃ ruhanaṭṭhāne.Bahipākārakuṭṭaketi pākārakuṭṭānaṃ bahi.Vaccādichaḍḍanādimhīti vaccapassāvasaṅkāracalakādīnaṃ chaḍḍanavissajjanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.Dīghakesādidhāraṇeti dīghakesadhāraṇe dīghanakhadhāraṇe dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.
79.Vīhādiropime: at the place of planting rice etc. Bahipākārakuṭṭake: outside the enclosure wall. Vaccādichaḍḍanādimhī: He incurs a dukkaṭa due to the act of throwing or disposing of excrement, urine, refuse, dust, etc. Dīghakesādidhāraṇe: He incurs a dukkaṭa for wearing long hair or long nails.
80.Nakhamaṭṭhakaraṇādimhīti etthaādi-saddena rajanakaraṇaṃ gahitaṃ.Sambādhe lomahāraṇeti sambādhe upakacchakamuttakaraṇaṭṭhāne lomuddharaṇe. Saupāhano bhikkhu parikammakataṃ bhūmiṃ akkameyyāti sambandho.
80.Nakhamaṭṭhakaraṇādimhī: Here, the word ādi includes hair cutting. Sambādhe lomahāraṇe: removing hair in crowded places, under the armpits, or in the pubic area. A bhikkhu wearing shoes should not step on prepared ground.
81.Adhotaallapādehīti yo bhikkhu adhotapādehi vā allapādehi vā saṅghikaṃ mañcaṃ vā pīṭhaṃ vā akkameyya, parikammakataṃ bhittiṃ vā kāyato āmasantassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.
81.Adhotaallapādehī: If a bhikkhu steps on a saṅgha's couch or stool with unwashed or wet feet, or touches a prepared wall with his body, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
82-3.Saṅghāṭiyāpipallattheti adhiṭṭhitacīvarena vihāre vā antaraghare vā pallatthikaṃ kareyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ.Dupparibhuñjeyya cīvaranti tiṇṇaṃ cīvarānaṃ aññataraṃ cīvaraṃ dupparibhogena paribhuñjeyya.Akāyabandhanoti kāyabandhanavirahito bhikkhu gāmaṃ vajeyya gaccheyya. Yo bhikkhuvaccakaṃuccāraṃ katvāna udake santenācameyyaudakasuddhiṃ na kareyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.Samādeyya akappiyeti bhikkhuṃ vā sāmaṇerādike sesasahadhammike vā akappiye niyojeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Sabhāgāpattiyā desanārocanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.Sabhāgāti ettha vatthusabhāgatāva idhādhippetā, na āpattisabhāgatā.
82-3.Saṅghāṭiyāpi pallatthe: If he sits cross-legged in the vihāra or in a house with the robe put aside, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Dupparibhuñjeyya cīvara: He should use any one of the three robes with careful usage. Akāyabandhano: A bhikkhu without a waistband should go to the village. If a bhikkhu, having defecated, does not wash with water when there is water, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Samādeyya akappiye: If he employs a bhikkhu or other co-religionists such as a sāmaṇera in what is unlawful, he incurs a dukkaṭa. He incurs a dukkaṭa due to the confession and reporting of an offense of the same kind. Here, sabhāgā refers to similarity in the object (vatthu), not similarity in the offense.
84.Na vase vassanti yo bhikkhu vassaṃ na vaseyya na upagaccheyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā.Visaṃvāde suddhacitteti ettha sampadānatthe bhummavacanaṃ, paṭissavaṃ visaṃvādentassa suddhacittassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Vassaṃ vasitvāananuññātakiccatoananuññātakiccena bhikkhuno gamane dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā.
84.Na vase vassa: If a bhikkhu does not spend the rains residence, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Visaṃvāde suddhacitte: Here, the locative case is used in the sense of instrumentality; a pure-minded person incurs a dukkaṭa for breaking a promise. Having spent the rains residence, a bhikkhu incurs a dukkaṭa for going without being authorized to do so.
85.Āpadaṃ vajjetvā tarussa uddhaṃ porisamhā abhiruhaṇe dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.Āpadanti antarāyaṃ.Tarussāti rukkhassa.Porisamhāti ekaporisappamāṇā majjhimassa purisassa pañcahatthā. Aparissāvano yo bhikkhu addhānaṃ gaccheyya, yo ca bhikkhu taṃ parissāvanaṃ yācato na dadeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā.Addhānanti addhayojanameva antimamaddhānaṃ.
85.Except in times of danger, climbing a tree more than a man's height incurs a dukkaṭa. Āpada: danger. Tarussā: of the tree. Porisamhā: from the height of a man, which is five cubits for a man of average height. A bhikkhu who does not have a water strainer and travels on a journey, and a bhikkhu who does not give that water strainer when asked, incur a dukkaṭa. Addhāna: a half-yojana is the final limit of a journey.
86.Attano ghātane dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho. Yo bhikkhu itthirūpādirūpaṃ kareyya vā kārāpeyya vā, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Mālādikaṃ vicittaṃ ṭhapetvā jātakādivatthuṃ sayaṃ kareyya, dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.
86.He incurs a dukkaṭa for killing himself. If a bhikkhu makes or has made a female form or other form, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Except for elaborate garlands, he incurs a dukkaṭa for making a jātaka story himself.
87.Bhuñjantamuṭṭhapeti yo bhikkhu bhuñjantaṃ uṭṭhāpeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Bhattasālādīsu vuḍḍhānaṃ okāsaṃ adatvā nisīdato dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā.
87.Bhuñjantamuṭṭhape: If a bhikkhu makes one who is eating get up, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If he sits in the refectory etc. without giving space to the elders, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
88.Yānānīti vayhaṃ ratho sakaṭaṃ sandamānikādīni.Kallakoti agilāno. Agilāno yo bhikkhu yānāni abhiruheyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho.Vade davanti keḷiṃ vadeyya, ratanattayaṃ ārabbha keḷiṃ vadeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Aññaparisāya upalālane dukkaṭaṃ hoti.
88.Yānānī: vehicles such as palanquins, chariots, carts, and litters. Kallako: one who is not ill. If a bhikkhu who is not ill gets into vehicles, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Vade dava: If he speaks playful words, if he speaks playful words concerning the Triple Gem, he incurs a dukkaṭa. He incurs a dukkaṭa for inciting another assembly.
89.Kāyādinti etthaādi-saddo ūrunimittaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Kāyaṃ vā ūruṃ vā nimittaṃ vā vivaritvā bhikkhunīnaṃna dassayena dasseyyāti attho. Lokāyataṃ tiracchānādivijjaṃ na ca sayaṃ vāceyya, parañca na vācāpeyya. Palitaṃ gaṇheyya vā gaṇhāpeyya vā, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti yojanā.
89.Kāyādi: Here, the word ādi includes the thigh. If he uncovers and shows not his body or thigh or sexual organ to bhikkhunis. He should neither recite worldly talk or animal lore himself, nor have another recite it. If he picks or has picked gray hair, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
90-92.Yattha katthaci peḷāyaṃ pakkhipitvā bhattaṃ bhuñjantassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho. Pattahatthako yo bhikkhu vātapānaṃ vā kavāṭaṃ vāpaṇāmepaṇāmeyya,sodakaṃpattaṃuṇheyyauṇhe otāpeyya vā paṭisāmeyya vā,vodakaṃpattaṃatiuṇheyyaatiṭhapeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Yo bhikkhu pattaṃ bhūmiyaṃ vā aṅke vā mañce vā pīṭhe vā miḍḍhante vā paribhaṇḍante vā pāde vā chatte vā ṭhapeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.Bhūmiyanti yena kenaci anatthatāya paṃsusakkharamissāya.Aṅketi dvinnaṃ ūrūnaṃ majjhe.Miḍḍhanteti miḍḍhapariyante.Paribhaṇḍanteti bāhirapasse katāya tanukamiḍḍhiyā ante. Yo bhikkhu calakādiṃ vā patte ṭhapeyya, patte vāhatthadhovanehatthassa dhovanappaccayā tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.
90-92.He incurs a dukkaṭa for eating food after putting it in a container anywhere. If a bhikkhu holding a bowl in his hand moves a window or door, if he heats a bowl with water by warming it in hot water or returns it, if he keeps a bowl without water too hot, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu places a bowl on the ground, in his lap, on a couch, on a stool, at the edge of the platform, on the outer edge, at his feet, or on an umbrella, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Bhūmiya: on the ground mixed with dust and gravel, for any unwanted reason. Aṅke: in the middle of the two thighs. Miḍḍhante: at the end of the platform. Paribhaṇḍante: on the edge of the thin platform made on the outer side. If a bhikkhu places a dust cloth etc. in the bowl, he incurs a dukkaṭa for washing hands in the bowl, as a means of washing his hands.
93.Ucchiṭṭhaṃ mukhadhovanaṃudakampipattenanīharantassabhikkhuno dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Yo bhikkhu akappiyaṃ pattaṃ paribhuñjeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Tatthaakappiyaṃ pattanti dārumayapattādiṃ.
93.A bhikkhu incurs a dukkaṭa for taking out leftovers or face-washing water with the bowl. If a bhikkhu uses an unsuitable bowl, he incurs a dukkaṭa. Here, akappiyaṃ patta means a bowl made of wood, etc.
94.Yo bhikkhu khipite ‘‘jīvā’’tivadevadeyya, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti attho. Yo bhikkhu parimaṇḍalakādimhi pañcasattatisekhiyeanādaro hutvā na sikkhati, tassa dukkaṭaṃ siyāti sambandho.
94.If a bhikkhu says "Live!" to one who is thrown, he incurs a dukkaṭa. If a bhikkhu, with regard to the seventy-five trainings, such as those concerning the proper way to wear the robe in a circle, is not heedful and does not train, he incurs a dukkaṭa.
95.Yo bhikkhu bhaṇḍāgāre payuto mātuyā pituno ca bhaṇḍakaṃ gopeyya,assabhikkhuno pācittiyaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tatthapayutoti bhaṇḍāgāre byāpāravasena yuttappayutto.Gopayeti gopeyya.Yobhikkhu davāya hīnena jātiādinā uttamampi vadeyya, dubbhāsitaṃ siyāti sambandho. Tattha hīnehi vā ukkaṭṭhehi vā jātiādīhi evaṃ ukkaṭṭhaṃ vā hīnaṃ vā ‘‘caṇḍālosī’’tiādinā nayena ujuṃ vā ‘‘santi idhekacce caṇḍālavenanesādā’’tiādinā nayena aññāpadesena vā upasampannaṃ vā anupasampannaṃ vā akkosādhippāyaṃ vinā kevalaṃ kīḷādhippāyena vadeyya, dubbhāsitaṃ siyāti.
95. The connection is that a bhikkhu appointed to the storehouse should protect the goods of mother and father, that bhikkhu commits a pācittiya. Here, appointed means duly engaged in the business of the storehouse. Should protect means should guard. The connection is that if a bhikkhu were to speak disparagingly of even a superior person with low birth etc., it would be a dubbhāsita. Here, whether with inferior or superior qualities such as birth etc., if one were to speak directly or indirectly of a superior or inferior person, such as saying "you are a caṇḍāla" or "there are some caṇḍālas or hunters here," or alluding to an ordained or unordained person without the intention to insult, but merely with the intention to jest, it would be a dubbhāsita.
Pakiṇṇakaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Miscellaneous Section is concluded.
6. Vattādikaṇḍaniddesavaṇṇanā
6. Commentary on the Section on Observances and the Like
96.Idāni vattaṃ dassetuṃ‘‘upajjhācariyavatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha upajjhāyavattañca ācariyavattañca gamikavattañca āgantukavattañca senāsanādivattañcapiyasīlenabhikkhunā kātabbanti sambandho.Gamikāgantukanti gamikaṃ āgantukanti chedo, gamikavattaṃ āgantukavattañcāti attho.
96. Now, to show the observances, it is said, "Upajjhaya Observances, Acariya Observances". The connection is that the observances for the upajjhaya, the observances for the ācariya, the observances for the going bhikkhu, the observances for the visiting bhikkhu, and the observances for the lodging and the like should be done by a bhikkhu who is dear in virtue. Going and visiting means "going and visiting" is the separation; the meaning is the observances for the going bhikkhu and the observances for the visiting bhikkhu.
97.Dātukāmo hatthapāse ṭhitokiñci gahitabbaṃekena purisena gahitabbaṃ ukkhipanakkhamaṃ vatthuṃtidhātīsu pakāresu ekenākārena dadeyya,gahetukāmobhikkhudvidhādvīsu ekena gaṇheyya,ayaṃpañcaṅgo paṭiggahoti attho.
97. Desiring to give, standing within arm's reach, something to be taken, an object capable of being lifted that should be taken by one person, he should give in three ways, in one of three modes; desiring to take, a bhikkhu should take in two ways, in one of two ways; this means this is the acceptance with five factors.
98-100.Dūre ṭhitaṃ cīvaraṃ ṭhapitokāsaṃ sallakkhetvā ‘‘eta’’nti vattabbaṃ. Hatthapāse ṭhitaṃ hatthena āmasitvā ‘‘ima’’nti vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Etaṃ adhiṭṭhāmi, imaṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti imesaṃ padānaṃ majjhe saṅghāṭiādīsu paccekaṃ yojetvā ticīvaraṃ adhiṭṭheyya. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmi, imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmī’’ti adhiṭṭheyya. Evaṃ sesesu ca cīvaresu. Yathā cīvarādiṃ vidhānaṃ evaṃ pattepi adhiṭṭheyya paccuddhareyyāti attho.
98-100. A robe that is far away should be noted, marking the place where it is kept, and it should be said, "etaṃ". A robe that is within arm's reach should be touched with the hand and it should be said, "imaṃ". The three robes should be determined, joining each of the terms saṅghāṭi etc. in the middle of these words, "etaṃ I determine, imaṃ I determine." How? He should determine, "etaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmi, imaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ adhiṭṭhāmi." Thus, with the remaining robes as well. Just as is the procedure for robes etc., so too should the bowl be determined and revoked.
101.Sañcarittaṃ ṭhapetvā sesā garukā ca pārājikā ca sacittakāti sambandho.Antimāti pārājikā. Acchinnasikkhāpadaṃ, pariṇatasikkhāpadañcāti imaṃ dvayaṃ ṭhapetvā sesaṃ nissaggiyaṃ acittakanti attho.
101. Leaving aside what is intentionally used, the remaining weighty offences and pārājikas are with consciousness, is the connection. The last means the pārājikas. Leaving aside these two, namely, the unbroken training rule and the complete training rule, the remaining nissaggiya is without consciousness, is the meaning.
102-3.Gāmappavesananteteti gāmappavesanaṃ iti ete. Pācittīsuetepadasodhammādayo gāmappavesanantā sattarasa sikkhāpadā acittakā.
102-3. Gāmappavesanaṃ are these means gāmappavesanaṃ (entering a village) are these. Among the pācittiyas, these seventeen training rules, beginning with padasodhammādayo (training in proper conduct) and ending with gāmappavesanaṃ, are without consciousness.
104-5.Pakiṇṇakesu uddissakataṃ ṭhapetvāaññamaṃsakaṃsesamaṃsaṃ acittakanti attho. Ettha pakiṇṇakesu aññamaṃsādikaṃ pattahattho kavāṭakantaṃ terasavidhaṃ idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ acittakaṃ, sesaṃ sabbaṃ sacittakanti attho.
104-5. Leaving aside what is deliberately done in the miscellaneous sections, the other meat, the remaining meat, is without consciousness, is the meaning. Here, in the miscellaneous sections, the thirteen training rules from the other meat onwards up to pattahattho kavāṭakantaṃ (bowl in hand at the doorpost) are without consciousness; the remaining is all with consciousness, is the meaning.
106.Ācariyā vītikkamanacittena sacittakaṃ acittakanti vadanti, paññattijānanena cittena tathā sacittakaṃ acittakanti ācariyā vadantīti attho.Tathā-saddena ‘‘sacittakaṃ acittaka’’nti idaṃ gahitaṃ.
106. Teachers say that what is with consciousness is without consciousness with a mind of transgression; similarly, teachers say that what is with consciousness is without consciousness with a mind of knowing the enactment. The meaning is that teachers say that what is with consciousness is without consciousness. The word "similarly" includes this, "what is with consciousness is without consciousness."
107-9.Pubbakaraṇādikanti etthaādi-saddo pubbakiccaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha –
107-9. Pubbakaraṇādika here, the word ādi includes pubbakiccaṃ (preliminary duties). Therein –
‘‘Sammajjanī padīpo ca, udakaṃ āsanena ca;
‘‘Broom and lamp, and water with a seat;
These are called the preliminaries for the Uposatha.
‘‘Chandapārisuddhiutukkhānaṃ, bhikkhugaṇanā ca ovādo;
‘‘Desire, purity, revealing the excess, counting the bhikkhus, and the exhortation;
These are called the preliminary duties for the Uposatha.’’ –
Evaṃ pubbakaraṇādikaṃ navadhā dīpitaṃ sabbaṃ uposathappavāraṇaṃ piyasīlinā kātabbanti attho.
Thus, all the preliminaries and the like, shown in nine ways, should be done by one who is dear in virtue for the Uposatha and Pavāraṇā, is the meaning.
112.Yathākkamanti etthāyamadhippāyo – gaṇo pārisuddhiuposathaṃ kareyya, puggalo adhiṭṭhānauposathaṃ kareyya, saṅgho suttuddesauposathaṃ kareyyāti.
112. According to the order here, the meaning is this – the group should do the pārisuddhiuposatha; the individual should do the adhiṭṭhānauposatha; the Saṅgha should do the suttuddesauposatha.
113.Cātuddaso pannaraso, sāmaggī dinato tidhāti cātuddaso uposatho, pannaraso uposatho, sāmaggīuposathoti dinato tidhā honti. Dinato puggalato kattabbākārato te uposathā nava iti īritāti attho.
113. Cātuddaso, pannaraso, sāmaggī, threefold from the day means cātuddaso uposatha, pannaraso uposatha, and sāmaggīuposatha are threefold from the day. It is said that those Uposathas are nine in number, threefold from the day, from the individual, and from the way they are to be done, is the meaning.
114.Tevācī dvekavācīti tevācikā pavāraṇā, dvevācikā pavāraṇā, ekavācikā pavāraṇā iti nava pavāraṇā vuttā.
114. Tevācī, dvekavācī means tevācikā pavāraṇā, dvevācikā pavāraṇā, and ekavācikā pavāraṇā: thus nine Pavāraṇās have been stated.
115.Tassātiphaggunamāsassa.Tato sesanti āsāḷhiantimapakkhamhā yāva kattikapuṇṇamā vassakālanti attho. Ettha hi ekasmiṃ saṃvacchare catuvīsatiuposathā honti.
115. Of that means of the month of Phagguna. After that remainder means from the last fortnight of Āsāḷha until the full-moon day of Kattika is the rainy season. Here, there are twenty-four Uposathas in one year.
116.Etesūti etesu tīsu catūsu ekekasmiṃ utumhi tatiyapakkhā sattamapakkhā.Cātuddasāti cha cātuddasāti attho. Sesāni uttānatthānevāti.
116. In these means in these three or four, in each season the third fortnight and the seventh fortnight. Cātuddasā means six cātuddasā. The rest are meanings that are plain.
Vattādikaṇḍaniddesavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
The Commentary on the Section on Observances and the Like is concluded.
Nigamanakathā
Concluding Talk
Ettāvatā samāraddhā, mūlasikkhatthavaṇṇanā;
To this extent, the explanation of the meaning of the Basic Training Rules,
Which was begun, is finished concisely, after half a month.
Adhunūpasampannānaṃ, hitatthāya samāsato;
For the benefit of those newly ordained, in brief,
Whatever merit I have gained by explaining this meaning.
Tena puññenayaṃ loko, sukhāya paṭipattiyā;
By that merit, may this world,
Attain to the unageing state of Nibbāna, pure in practice, for happiness.
Nānātarugaṇākiṇṇe, nānākusalakāmino;
Dwelling mindfully in the delightful monastery
Of Yuddhānapati, thronged with various trees and desiring various wholesome things.
Sāsane siddhipattassa, siddhinā ñāṇasiddhinā;
This explanation of the meaning of the Basic Training Rules
Has been made by a wise man, Siddhi by name, who has attained success in the Dispensation through knowledge.
Mūlasikkhā-ṭīkā samattā.
The Mūlasikkhā-ṭīkā is complete.